Intergraph Smart Electrical

User's Guide
Version 2018 (8.0)
June 2018
Copyright
Copyright © 2002-2018 Hexagon AB and/or its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved.
This computer program, including software, icons, graphic symbols, documentation, file formats, and audio-visual displays; may be
used only as pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Hexagon AB
and/or third parties which is protected by patent, trademark, copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be
provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Hexagon AB and/or its subsidiaries and affiliates.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the
United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Hexagon PPM
305 Intergraph Way
Madison, AL 35758

Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.

Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support,
SharePoint, or box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph
as guidance for using a software product.

Terms of Use
a. Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the Software License Agreement ("SLA") delivered with the software
product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the Licensee has
a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and
govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license
agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the Documentation as
defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal, non-commercial
use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b. For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a SLA or does not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensee’s internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensee’s internal, non-commercial use. The Other Documentation
may not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and
for any reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.

Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the SLA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed
a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 2

Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF
REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT
INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS
MADE. EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2)
YEARS AFTER THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS
LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.

Export Controls
Intergraph Corporation’s commercial-off-the-shelf software products, customized software and/or third-party software, including any
technical data related thereto (“Technical Data”), obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors, is subject to
the export control laws and regulations of the United States of America. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. To the extent
prohibited by United States or other applicable laws, Intergraph Corporation software products, customized software, Technical Data,
and/or third-party software, or any derivatives thereof, obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors must not
be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access) under the following circumstances:
a. To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, the Crimean region of Ukraine, or Syria, or any national of these countries or territories.
b. To any person or entity listed on any United States government denial list, including, but not limited to, the United States
Department of Commerce Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, the United States Department of Treasury Specially
Designated Nationals List, and the United States Department of State Debarred List
(https://build.export.gov/main/ecr/eg_main_023148).
c. To any entity when Customer knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the software product, customized software,
Technical Data and/or third-party software obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors is related to the
design, development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or
sensitive nuclear uses.
d. To any entity when Customer knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export/re-export of relevant Intergraph Corporation software product, customized software, Technical Data
and/or third-party software obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors, should be addressed to PPM’s
Export Compliance Department, 305 Intergraph Way, Madison, Alabama 35758 USA or at [email protected].
Customer shall hold harmless and indemnify PPM and Hexagon Group Company for any causes of action, claims, costs, expenses
and/or damages resulting to PPM or Hexagon Group Company from a breach by Customer.

Trademarks
Intergraph®, the Intergraph logo®, Intergraph Smart®, SmartPlant®, SmartMarine, SmartSketch®, SmartPlant Cloud®, PDS®,
FrameWorks®, I-Route, I-Export, ISOGEN®, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager®, SupportModeler®, SAPPHIRE®, TANK, PV Elite®,
CADWorx®, CADWorx DraftPro®, GTSTRUDL®, and CAESAR II® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation
or its affiliates, parents, subsidiaries. Hexagon and the Hexagon logo are registered trademarks of Hexagon AB or its subsidiaries.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley
Systems, Inc. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 3

Contents
Welcome to Intergraph Smart® Electrical .............................................................................................. 27

Multi-User Environment ............................................................................................................................ 29

Working in a Multi-User Environment ................................................................................................... 29
Create a Plant Using Reference Data from an Existing Plant .............................................................. 29
Connecting to a Plant Group ................................................................................................................. 31
Changing Plant Group Hierarchy Names ....................................................................................... 31
Apply Plant Group Hierarchy Name Changes ................................................................................ 31

Customizing Preferences ......................................................................................................................... 33

Customize General Preferences ........................................................................................................... 33
Customize Preferences for SLD Generation ........................................................................................ 34
Customize All Feeder / Multi-Sheet Load Summary Report Preferences ............................................ 35
Customize Delete Loads Preferences .................................................................................................. 36
Customize Delete Load Preferences for a Specific Item ...................................................................... 37

Getting Started with Smart Electrical ...................................................................................................... 38

Electrical Index ...................................................................................................................................... 38
Customizing Folders ....................................................................................................................... 40
Select a Set of Item Tags in the Electrical Index ............................................................................ 42
Customize the Sort Sequence of Items in Tree Folders ................................................................ 42
Show Related Items in a New Electrical Index Window ................................................................. 43
Move an Item to Another Plant Group ............................................................................................ 44
Properties Window ................................................................................................................................ 45
Turn the Display of the Properties Window On or Off .................................................................... 45
Use Select Set Mode in the Properties Window ............................................................................ 46
Review and Edit Item Properties .................................................................................................... 46
Properties Window Toolbar ............................................................................................................ 47
Copy Bulk Properties ...................................................................................................................... 48
Paste Bulk Properties ..................................................................................................................... 48
Customizing Data Display in the Properties Window ..................................................................... 48
Customize Data Display in the Properties Window ........................................................................ 49
Show Brief Properties ..................................................................................................................... 49
Display Null Values in the Properties Window ............................................................................... 50
Add a Text Box for UDFs in the Properties Window ...................................................................... 50
Reference Data Explorer ...................................................................................................................... 50
Select a Set of Item Tags in the Reference Data Explorer ............................................................ 52
Electrical Engineer ................................................................................................................................ 52
Find Other Parent Items in the Electrical Engineer ........................................................................ 54
Show Related Items in a New Electrical Engineer Window ........................................................... 55

Creating and Using Reference Data ........................................................................................................ 56

Create a Reference Item ....................................................................................................................... 56

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 4

 Contents

Create a Reference Item Based on a Plant Item .................................................................................. 57

Copy a Reference Item to the Electrical Index ..................................................................................... 58
Create a Typical Electrical Motor .......................................................................................................... 59
Create Typical I/O Signals .................................................................................................................... 59
Creating Typical Panels ........................................................................................................................ 60
Create a Typical Cabinet ................................................................................................................ 60
Create a Typical Control Station .................................................................................................... 61
Edit Typical Control Station Common Properties ........................................................................... 61
Create a Typical Local Panel ......................................................................................................... 62
Create a Typical Junction Box ........................................................................................................ 62
Create a Typical Circuit ......................................................................................................................... 62
Copy Components to a Typical Circuit ........................................................................................... 63
Copy from Typical Circuit Components .......................................................................................... 63
Create a Profile ..................................................................................................................................... 64
Edit Profile Common Properties ..................................................................................................... 64
Typical Cable Block Diagrams .............................................................................................................. 65
Create a Typical Cable Block Diagram .......................................................................................... 66
Using Reference Control Stations, Typical Circuits, and Reference Instruments in
Typical CBDs .................................................................................................................................. 67
Using Reference Motors with Space Heaters in Typical CBDs...................................................... 68
Using Reference Junction Boxes and Local Panels in Typical CBDs ............................................ 68
Make Non-Power Flow Associations in a Typical CBD .................................................................. 69
Hide Association Connectors ......................................................................................................... 69
Create Typical Schematic Blocks ......................................................................................................... 70
Edit Typical Schematic Block Common Properties ........................................................................ 70
Create a Typical Schematic .................................................................................................................. 71
Edit Typical Schematic Common Properties .................................................................................. 72
Create a Multi-Sheet Typical Schematic ........................................................................................ 73
Working with Lookup Tables ................................................................................................................. 74
Create Lookup Tables .................................................................................................................... 74
Edit Lookup Tables ......................................................................................................................... 75
Lookup Table Structure Example ................................................................................................... 76
Lookup Table Data Example .......................................................................................................... 77
Enable Additional Regional Standard Lookup Tables .................................................................... 77
Associate and Apply a Lookup Table to a Circuit Internal Component .......................................... 78
Automate the Sizing of Circuit Internal Components Based on Load Data ................................... 79
Reference Electrical Engineer .............................................................................................................. 80
Copy Power Network Structures from Another Plant ..................................................................... 81
Rules Governing the Copying of Power Network Structures to the Electrical
Engineer ......................................................................................................................................... 82
Rules for Copying Branches with Auxiliary Contacts ..................................................................... 83
Rules Governing the Copying of Branches with Data that Includes Operating
Cases.............................................................................................................................................. 84

Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items ....................................................................................... 85

Using Naming Conventions .................................................................................................................. 85
Create a New Item in the Electrical Index ............................................................................................. 86
Create a Single Plant Item Based on a Reference Item ....................................................................... 86
Create Multiple New Items .................................................................................................................... 87
Multiple New Items - List of Supported Items ................................................................................. 88

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 5

 Contents

Edit Item Properties .............................................................................................................................. 89

Duplicate an Item .................................................................................................................................. 90
Rename an Item.................................................................................................................................... 90
Delete an Item ....................................................................................................................................... 91
Creating and Managing Loads .............................................................................................................. 93
Create Load Items in Batch Mode .................................................................................................. 93
Electrical Motors ............................................................................................................................. 94
Create Static Electrical Equipment ................................................................................................. 97
Create Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment ................................................................................... 99
Managing Space Heaters and Their Power Supplies ......................................................................... 101
Suggested Workflows for Space Heaters and Auxiliary Contacts ............................................... 102
Create a Space Heater ................................................................................................................. 109
Show Space Heaters Next to the Associated Plant Items in SLDs .............................................. 110
Use Compound Symbols for Space Heaters in SLDs .................................................................. 111
Show Auxiliary Contacts Next to Disconnect Equipment in SLDs ............................................... 111
Use Compound Symbols for Disconnect Equipment with Auxiliary Contacts in
SLDs ............................................................................................................................................. 112
Create a Generator ............................................................................................................................. 112
Define a Neutral Earthing Connection for Generators ................................................................. 113
Create an Offsite Power Supply.......................................................................................................... 114
Create a Battery Bank ......................................................................................................................... 114
Converting Equipment ........................................................................................................................ 115
Create Converting Equipment ...................................................................................................... 115
Create a Transformer ................................................................................................................... 116
Define Transformer Connections ................................................................................................. 117
Define Transformer Tapping ........................................................................................................ 118
Define Converting Equipment as Consumers .............................................................................. 118
Power Distribution Equipment ............................................................................................................. 118
Power Distribution Boards and Buses .......................................................................................... 119
Create Disconnect Electrical Equipment ...................................................................................... 122
Metering Equipment ..................................................................................................................... 123
Designing Power Distribution Boards ........................................................................................... 129
Using Dual Source Power Supplies ............................................................................................. 133
Using Transfer Switches............................................................................................................... 136
Working with Circuits .................................................................................................................... 137

Managing Plant Operating Cases .......................................................................................................... 142

Add a Plant Operating Case ............................................................................................................... 143
Edit a Plant Operating Case ............................................................................................................... 143
Delete a Plant Operating Case ........................................................................................................... 144
Switch to Another Active Operating Case ........................................................................................... 144
Manage Operating Case Data for Plant Items .................................................................................... 145
Showing the Name of the Active Operating Case in Reports and Title Blocks .................................. 146
Publishing and Retrieving of Operating Case Data ............................................................................ 147

Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment ................................................................................. 148

Panel Management ............................................................................................................................. 148
Create a Cabinet .......................................................................................................................... 149
Create a Control Station ............................................................................................................... 149

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 6

 Contents

Edit Control Station Properties ..................................................................................................... 150

Create a Local Panel .................................................................................................................... 150
Create a Junction Box .................................................................................................................. 151
Define a Junction Box as a Consumer ......................................................................................... 151
Define a Local Panel as a Consumer ........................................................................................... 151
Create a Panel Circuit .................................................................................................................. 152
Cable Management ............................................................................................................................. 152
Create a Reference Cable ............................................................................................................ 152
Create a Plant Cable .................................................................................................................... 154
Delete a Cable .............................................................................................................................. 157
Deletion Rules for Cables ............................................................................................................. 157
Define Manual Cable Cuts ........................................................................................................... 158
Cable Glands ................................................................................................................................ 159
Insert a Power Cable Between Equipment Items ......................................................................... 163
Create Parallel Cables.................................................................................................................. 164
Replace the Associated Reference Cable of Plant Cables .......................................................... 165
Replace a Cable with a Single-Core Cable Assembly ................................................................. 166
Batch Replace Cable Side Associations ...................................................................................... 168
Account for the Installed Length of a Cable ................................................................................. 169
Single-Core Cable Assemblies ..................................................................................................... 170
Sizing Cables ................................................................................................................................ 177
Thermal Sizing .............................................................................................................................. 178
Voltage Drop Calculations ............................................................................................................ 179
Short Circuit Sizing ....................................................................................................................... 180
Create a Busway ................................................................................................................................. 188
Cable Drums ....................................................................................................................................... 189
Create a Cable Drum .................................................................................................................... 190
Edit Cable Drum Properties .......................................................................................................... 191
Assign Multiple Cables to a Cable Drum ...................................................................................... 191
Assign a Single Cable to a Cable Drum ....................................................................................... 193
Batch Assignment of Cables to Cable Drums .............................................................................. 193
Optimization of Cable Drum Assignment ..................................................................................... 195
Batch Cable Dissociation from Drums.......................................................................................... 198
Rules Governing Cable Drum Calculations .................................................................................. 198
Cancel Cable Assignment to a Cable Drum ................................................................................. 198
Cable Routing ..................................................................................................................................... 199
Create a Cableway and Segments ............................................................................................... 199
Assign Cableway Components to Segments ............................................................................... 200
Define the Routing for a Cable or a Single-Core Cable Assembly .............................................. 200
Define the Routing for a Set of Parallel Cables ............................................................................ 201
Allow Different Cable Routes for Parallel Cables ......................................................................... 202
Batch Route Cables...................................................................................................................... 203
Clear Cable Routing ..................................................................................................................... 204
Routing of Parallel Cables Updated Externally ............................................................................ 204
Create a Predefined Cable Route ................................................................................................ 205
Select a Predefined Route for a Cable ......................................................................................... 206
Copy Cable Routing Definitions from Another Cable ................................................................... 206
Edit Cableway Properties ............................................................................................................. 207
Segment Fill Validation ................................................................................................................. 207
Set the Method for Segment Fill Validation .................................................................................. 210
Set the Segment Fill Calculation Criterion.................................................................................... 210

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 7

 Contents

Populating Plant Items with Data ........................................................................................................... 211

Apply Options to a Set of Tags ........................................................................................................... 212
Apply Lookup Table Data to Equipment ............................................................................................. 212
Apply a Typical Circuit to an Item ....................................................................................................... 213
Apply a Typical Control Station to an Item .......................................................................................... 215
Apply a Typical Schematic to an Item ................................................................................................. 216
Apply a Profile to a Plant Item ............................................................................................................. 217
Apply a Set of Signals to an Item ........................................................................................................ 219
Apply a Typical Cable Block Diagram to an Electrical Item ................................................................ 220
Apply a Typical Schematic to an Instrument ....................................................................................... 221

Making Electrical Associations .............................................................................................................. 223

Create an Electrical Association ......................................................................................................... 223
Rules for Associating Electrical Equipment .................................................................................. 224
Change an Existing Electrical Association .......................................................................................... 228
Rules for Changing Electrical Associations .................................................................................. 229
Associate Electrical Equipment with Feeders ..................................................................................... 231
Dissociate an Item from Its Feeding Item ........................................................................................... 232
Automatic Creation of Feeder Circuits ................................................................................................ 233
Associate Bus Riser Circuits with Coupler Circuits ............................................................................. 234
Associate a Control Station with an Electrical Item ............................................................................ 234
Associate a Control Station with Cables ............................................................................................. 235
Associate Cables of Control Stations with Equipment Circuits ........................................................... 235
Associate Cables of Instruments with Equipment Circuits ................................................................. 236
Associate a Power Cable with Electrical Equipment .......................................................................... 236
Associate Additional Power Cables with Electrical Equipment ........................................................... 237
Associate a Non-Power Cable with Electrical Equipment .................................................................. 238
Define Parallel Equipment .................................................................................................................. 238
Rules Governing Parallel Relations .............................................................................................. 239
Connect Equipment Items in Parallel ........................................................................................... 241
Create a Daisy-Chain Connection Pattern .......................................................................................... 241
Move Disconnect Equipment into Circuit ............................................................................................ 242
Move Disconnect Equipment out of Circuit ......................................................................................... 242

Load Associations ................................................................................................................................... 243

Associate Loads with a PDB in Batch Mode ....................................................................................... 243
Associate a Single Load with a PDB................................................................................................... 247
Display Bus Load Data ....................................................................................................................... 250
Balancing Loads.................................................................................................................................. 250
Validate Bus Loads ....................................................................................................................... 250
Balance Bus Loads ....................................................................................................................... 251

Calculating Bus Load Summaries ......................................................................................................... 253

Connectivity Between Buses .............................................................................................................. 258
Calculating Bus Loading ..................................................................................................................... 264
Calculate Bus Loading According to the Largest Non-Continuous Load............................................ 270
Bus Load Configuration Examples...................................................................................................... 282
Configurations A and B: a single load connected to a bus........................................................... 282

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 8

 Contents

Load Power Parameters ............................................................................................................... 283

Configuration C: bus totals with or without converting equipment losses .................................... 285
Configuration D: bus totals accounting for load or bus coincidence factors ................................ 289
Configuration E: a bus with mixed loads ...................................................................................... 289
Configuration F: coupled buses .................................................................................................... 292
Configuration G: loads powered by an alternative power source ................................................ 294
Configuration H: loads connected in parallel ................................................................................ 296
Configuration I: multiple loads connected by a junction box ........................................................ 298
Configuration J: loads connected in a daisy-chain pattern........................................................... 299
Configuration K: a space heater connected to an auxiliary contact ............................................. 302
Correcting Bus Power Factors Using Capacitor Banks ...................................................................... 303
Handling Special Cases of Bus Load Calculations ............................................................................. 305
Bus Load Calculation Preferences...................................................................................................... 305
Calculating Electrical Consumption After Batch Load Association ..................................................... 306
Flow of Activities for Bus Load Calculations ....................................................................................... 306
Bus, Circuit, and Converting Equipment Properties ........................................................................... 307
Bus Properties .............................................................................................................................. 307
Circuit Properties .......................................................................................................................... 310
Converting Equipment Properties ................................................................................................ 310
Calculate Bus Loads for Selected Buses or PDBs ............................................................................. 311
Calculate Bus Loads for All the Buses in the Plant............................................................................. 311
Generate an All Feeder Load Summary Report ................................................................................. 312

Drawings in Smart Electrical .................................................................................................................. 313

Drawing Templates ............................................................................................................................. 313
Create a Drawing Template ......................................................................................................... 313
Open a Drawing Template ........................................................................................................... 315
Title Block Properties for Composite Drawings ............................................................................ 315
Default (General Properties) ........................................................................................................ 315
Document Data (Document Data Properties) .............................................................................. 316
Focal Item ..................................................................................................................................... 316
Revision ........................................................................................................................................ 317
General ......................................................................................................................................... 317
Title Block Info (Title Block Information) ....................................................................................... 318
Title Block Macros for Conventional Drawings ............................................................................. 318
Plant Group Macros...................................................................................................................... 318
Document Property Macros .......................................................................................................... 318
Document Revision Macros ......................................................................................................... 319
Macros for Multi-Sheet Schematics.............................................................................................. 320
Enable the Renaming of Sheet Tabs in a Drawing ...................................................................... 320
Working With Drawings ....................................................................................................................... 321
Find a Selected Plant Item in the Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer .................................... 322
Plant Item Representation in Drawings ........................................................................................ 322
View Associated Drawings of an Item .......................................................................................... 322
Show Related Items ..................................................................................................................... 323
Viewing Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 323
Background Printing of Drawings ................................................................................................. 324
Save Drawings as External Files .................................................................................................. 325
Associate Custom Symbols with Plant Items ............................................................................... 326
Dissociate a Custom Symbol from Item Tags .............................................................................. 327

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 9

 Contents

Drawing Basic Elements............................................................................................................... 329

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements ................................................................................... 388
Adding Text to Documents ........................................................................................................... 418
Placing Elements in Precise Locations ........................................................................................ 451
Gapping Lines .............................................................................................................................. 455
Aligning Drawing Objects ............................................................................................................. 455
Manipulating Drawing Items ......................................................................................................... 458
Manipulating Smart Labels ........................................................................................................... 462

Schematics ............................................................................................................................................... 464

Recommended Workflow for Generating Schematic Drawings .......................................................... 465
Working with the Elements of a Schematic Drawing .......................................................................... 466
Rename the Sheet Tabs in a Schematic Drawing .............................................................................. 467
Macro Definition Guidelines ................................................................................................................ 467
Macros Defined in Catalog Manager ............................................................................................ 468
Macro Syntax ................................................................................................................................ 468
Supported Electrical Items ........................................................................................................... 469
Sequencing Items in Block Macros ..................................................................................................... 470
Handling Load Feeders with Parallel Branches ........................................................................... 471
Handling Incomer and Feeder Circuit Internals ............................................................................ 471
Handling Converting Equipment Items ......................................................................................... 471
Handling Non-Power Related Items of Schematic Drawings ....................................................... 472
Macro Sequencing Example C ..................................................................................................... 474
Macro Sequencing Example D ..................................................................................................... 475
Macro Sequencing Example E ..................................................................................................... 476
Macro Sequencing Example F ..................................................................................................... 477
Generate a Schematic ........................................................................................................................ 477
Generate a Schematic for an Instrument ..................................................................................... 478
Generate a Multi-Item Schematic ................................................................................................. 479
Generate a Multi-Item Schematic for a Bus ................................................................................. 481
Generate Schematics in Batch Mode ........................................................................................... 482
Set Units of Measure for Generated Schematic Drawings ................................................................. 483
Including Enhanced SmartLoop Reports with Schematics ................................................................. 483
Include Enhanced SmartLoop Reports with Schematics ............................................................. 483
Open a Schematic Drawing ................................................................................................................ 484
Save a Schematic as an External File ................................................................................................ 484
Create Schematic Blocks in Catalog Manager ................................................................................... 485
Use a Complete Symbol File to Create Schematic Blocks in Catalog Manager ................................ 485
Create Schematic Blocks in SmartSketch .......................................................................................... 486
Guidelines for Creating Schematic Blocks in AutoCAD and MicroStation.......................................... 487

Single Line Diagrams .............................................................................................................................. 488

Single Line Diagram Types and Symbols ........................................................................................... 488
Working with SLD Elements ............................................................................................................... 490
Generating New Single Line Diagrams ............................................................................................... 493
Generate an SLD from the Electrical Engineer ............................................................................ 493
Generate a Single Line Diagram for a PDB ................................................................................. 494
Break Bus Symbols into Sections ................................................................................................ 496
Generate a Manual SLD ............................................................................................................... 497

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 10

 Contents

Generate Multiple Single Line Diagrams for PDBs in Batch Mode .............................................. 497
Generate an SLD with a Bus Tie and Internal Components ........................................................ 498
Scaling the Content of an SLD Drawing ....................................................................................... 499
Abort SLD Generation Process .................................................................................................... 500
Opening Existing Single Line Diagrams ............................................................................................. 501
Open an SLD Based on an Electrical Engineer Item ................................................................... 501
Open an SLD for a Power Distribution Board............................................................................... 502
Reset and Retain Custom Styles and Item Positions ................................................................... 502
Open an SLD from the Documents Folder ................................................................................... 503
Save a Single Line Diagram as an External File ................................................................................ 504
Show Control Stations in an SLD........................................................................................................ 504
Show Metering and Relaying Equipment in an SLD ........................................................................... 504
Displaying Equipment Connected in Parallel ...................................................................................... 505
Set Parallel Equipment Display Options ....................................................................................... 510
Hide PDB Sub-Items in an SLD .......................................................................................................... 511
Set the Extent of Downstream Branches ............................................................................................ 511
Placement of Circuits on Bus Sections ............................................................................................... 512
Hide Bus Feeders in an SLD .............................................................................................................. 513
Hide Feeder Circuits in SLDs .............................................................................................................. 513
Find an Electrical Item in an SLD........................................................................................................ 514
Customize a PDB Border (Frame) on an SLD .................................................................................... 514
PDB Frames Examples in SLDs .................................................................................................. 514
Remove an Item from an SLD ............................................................................................................ 516
Creating and Using Compound Symbols for SLD Diagrams .............................................................. 517
Create and Use a Compound Symbol .......................................................................................... 518
Guidelines for Creating SLD Symbols in Catalog Manager ................................................................ 519
General Guidelines ....................................................................................................................... 519
Connect Points ............................................................................................................................. 519
Origin Point ................................................................................................................................... 520
Special Symbols ........................................................................................................................... 520
Place Symbol Connect Points............................................................................................................. 523
Manipulating Smart Labels ................................................................................................................. 523
Create a Mirror Image of a Smart Label ....................................................................................... 524
Rotate a Smart Label.................................................................................................................... 524
Align Smart Labels ....................................................................................................................... 524
Insert a Legend in an Existing SLD..................................................................................................... 525
Rename the Sheet Tabs in an SLD Drawing ...................................................................................... 525

Cable Block Diagrams............................................................................................................................. 526

Creating Cable Block Diagrams .......................................................................................................... 526
Create a Blank Plant CBD ............................................................................................................ 527
Create a CBD Based on a Typical Cable Block Diagram ............................................................ 527
Open an Existing Cable Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 528
Rename the Sheet Tabs in a CBD Drawing ....................................................................................... 529
Working with Smart Data and Auxiliary Graphics in a CBD ............................................................... 529
Place and Connect Items in a Cable Block Diagram .......................................................................... 534
Rules for Connecting to Circuit Symbols ...................................................................................... 537
Use Reference Items in a Cable Block Diagram ................................................................................ 537
Filter Out Cables from a Cable Block Diagram ................................................................................... 538
Use a Reference Circuit in a Cable Block Diagram ............................................................................ 538

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 11

 Contents

Connect a Circuit to a Cable Connected to PDB ................................................................................ 539

Mark Auxiliary Graphics on a Cable Block Diagram ........................................................................... 539
Remove Items from a Cable Block Diagram ....................................................................................... 540
Use Custom Symbols in Cable Block Diagrams ................................................................................. 540
Resolve Symbol Inconsistencies ........................................................................................................ 541
Hide Cable Types................................................................................................................................ 542
Define a Focal Item for a Cable Block Diagram .................................................................................. 542
Display a Filter Settings Notation in a CBD ........................................................................................ 543

Wiring in Smart Electrical ....................................................................................................................... 544

Create a Terminal Strip in the Electrical Index ................................................................................... 545
Create a Terminal in the Electrical Index ............................................................................................ 545
Define a Reference Terminal Strip Configuration ............................................................................... 546
Apply a Reference Terminal Strip Configuration to a Terminal Strip .................................................. 546
Define a Terminal Strip Configuration for a Single Terminal Strip ...................................................... 547
Customizing a Reference Symbol....................................................................................................... 548
Termination of Plant Cables................................................................................................................ 548
Define a Connection Type ............................................................................................................ 549
Terminate Plant Cables Using the Custom Connection Method .................................................. 550
Terminate Plant Cables Using the Continuous Connection Method ............................................ 552
Terminate Plant Cables in Batch Mode ........................................................................................ 554
Terminate a Cable Set.................................................................................................................. 555
Terminate a Single Conductor ...................................................................................................... 556
Connect a Jumper ........................................................................................................................ 557
Disconnect a Cable, Cable Set, or Conductor in a Wiring Diagram ............................................. 557
Disconnect Plant Cables in Batch Mode ...................................................................................... 558
Remove Items from a Wiring Diagram ......................................................................................... 558
Customize a Jumper Symbol ....................................................................................................... 558
Open an Existing Wiring Diagram ................................................................................................ 558

Composite Drawings ............................................................................................................................... 560

Create a Composite Drawing .............................................................................................................. 561
Open a Composite Drawing ................................................................................................................ 562
Select a Template for a Composite Drawing ...................................................................................... 562
Working with Composite Drawings ..................................................................................................... 563
Undo and Redo Actions in Composite Drawings ................................................................................ 567
Grouping Graphical Elements in a Composite Drawing ..................................................................... 568
Group or Ungroup Graphical Elements in a Composite Drawing ................................................ 569
Select a Graphical Element Using Smart Selection ..................................................................... 570
Select a Graphical Element with QuickPick ................................................................................. 571
Associate a Plant Item with a Group or a Nested Element in a Group ........................................ 572
Dissociate a Group from a Plant Item .......................................................................................... 573
Remove a Group from a Composite Drawing .............................................................................. 574
Place a Plant Item on a Composite Drawing ...................................................................................... 574
Transformer Behavior in SLD Composite Drawings .................................................................... 575
Find a Plant Item in an Active Composite Drawing ............................................................................. 576
Associate an Auxiliary Graphic with a Plant Item ............................................................................... 576
Dissociate Graphical Elements from a Plant Item .............................................................................. 577
Remove Graphical Elements from a Composite Drawing .................................................................. 578

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 12

 Contents

Association Assistant .......................................................................................................................... 578

Copy and Paste Graphical Elements in a Composite Drawing .......................................................... 580
Copy the Formatting of a Graphical Element ...................................................................................... 581
Retain Plant Item Associations of Graphical Elements while Pasting ................................................ 581
Show the Flow Direction on a Bus or Connector ................................................................................ 582
Mark Unassociated Graphical Elements ............................................................................................. 582
Opening External Drawings ................................................................................................................ 583
Save Drawings as External Files ........................................................................................................ 584
Using Layers to Arrange Elements ..................................................................................................... 585
Control the Display of Elements in a Window .............................................................................. 587
Create a Color for Displaying Sheets or Layers ........................................................................... 590
Create a Layer .............................................................................................................................. 591
Display or Hide Layers ................................................................................................................. 591
Change the Layer of an Element.................................................................................................. 593
Change the Active Layer .............................................................................................................. 593
Create a Layer Group ................................................................................................................... 594
Modify Layers in a Layer Group ................................................................................................... 594
Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group .............................................................................. 595
Delete a Layer Group ................................................................................................................... 596
Object Linking and Embedding in Composite Drawings ..................................................................... 596
How Embedding Works ................................................................................................................ 599
Printing Composite Drawings.............................................................................................................. 602
Automatic Saving of Composite Drawings .......................................................................................... 603
Resolving Out-of-Date Issues in Composite Drawings ....................................................................... 603
Generate an Out-of-Date Summary Report ................................................................................. 604
Converting Conventional SLDs to Composite SLDs ........................................................................... 605
Convert a Conventional SLD to a Composite SLD ...................................................................... 606
Associating Compound Symbols with Plant Items.............................................................................. 606
Associate a Symbol with a Plant Item .......................................................................................... 609
Associate a Nested Symbol with a Plant Item .............................................................................. 610
Dissociate a Symbol from a Plant Item ........................................................................................ 611

Using Smart Catalog Explorer ............................................................................................................... 613

Navigating in Smart Catalog Explorer ................................................................................................. 613
Smart Catalog Explorer Command (View >Toolbars) .................................................................. 615
Working with Smart Catalog Explorer Items................................................................................. 616
Using the Quick Catalog Feature ................................................................................................. 616
Using the Favorites Feature ......................................................................................................... 617
Using the Search Features ........................................................................................................... 618
Attach a Label to a Graphical Element (a Graphic or Symbol) .................................................... 620
Find and View Associated Drawings for a Symbol ....................................................................... 622
Clone and Attach a Label ............................................................................................................. 622
Remove a Symbol from a Drawing ............................................................................................... 623

Annotations and Redlining ..................................................................................................................... 624

Insert Annotation Text ......................................................................................................................... 625
Insert Annotation Symbols .................................................................................................................. 626
Edit Annotation Text ............................................................................................................................ 626
Delete Annotations .............................................................................................................................. 627

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 13

 Contents

Insert Redlining Text ........................................................................................................................... 627

Insert Redlining Graphical Elements................................................................................................... 628
Edit Redlining Text .............................................................................................................................. 628
Delete Redlining .................................................................................................................................. 629

Working with Documents ....................................................................................................................... 630

Open Last Saved Document ............................................................................................................... 630
Internal Documents in Smart Electrical ............................................................................................... 630
Add a Document Revision ............................................................................................................ 631
Manage Global Revisions ............................................................................................................ 632
Compare an Archived Document with a Current Document ........................................................ 632
Batch Compare Documents ......................................................................................................... 634
External Documents ............................................................................................................................ 635
Define an External Document Reference ..................................................................................... 635
Associate External Documents with Electrical Items ................................................................... 636
Dissociate an External Document ................................................................................................ 636
Dissociate an External Document from Multiple Electrical Items in Batch Mode ......................... 637
Open an External Document ........................................................................................................ 637
Inserting External Graphics Files into Smart Electrical Templates ..................................................... 637
Insert an External Graphics File into a Smart Electrical Template ............................................... 638

Engineering Data Editor.......................................................................................................................... 639

Start the EDE ...................................................................................................................................... 640
EDE Toolbar and Shortcut Menu ........................................................................................................ 641
Define a New EDE View ..................................................................................................................... 643
Define a Filter for an EDE View .......................................................................................................... 643
Define a New EDE View Layout ......................................................................................................... 644
Shipped Default Layouts .............................................................................................................. 645
Modify the Table Properties of an Existing EDE View ........................................................................ 645
Delete an EDE Layout ........................................................................................................................ 646
Update EDE Data................................................................................................................................ 646
Search for Tags from the EDE ............................................................................................................ 646
Working with EDE Views .................................................................................................................... 647
Copy Data from the EDE to an External File ...................................................................................... 650
Print EDE Content ............................................................................................................................... 651
Print Documents from an EDE View ................................................................................................... 651
Save a Document from an EDE in Another Format ............................................................................ 651

Reports in Smart Electrical .................................................................................................................... 652

Create a New Customized Report ...................................................................................................... 652
Create a Composite Drawing Index Report ........................................................................................ 653
Generate a Report for Selected Items ................................................................................................ 654
Shipped Reports ................................................................................................................................. 655
All Feeder Load Summary Report ................................................................................................ 663
Multi-Sheet Switchboard Summary Report .................................................................................. 667
Customizing the All Feeder Load Summary Report ..................................................................... 676
Registering Reports ............................................................................................................................ 676
Register a Report ......................................................................................................................... 677
Compare a Registered Report with an Archived Version ............................................................. 677

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 14

 Contents

Include Revision Data in Customized Registered Reports .......................................................... 679

Manage Single Plant Item Revisions in Registered Reports ........................................................ 680
Save Free Text in Registered Reports ......................................................................................... 684
Associate an Electrical Item with a Registered Report ................................................................ 686
Creating and Editing Report Templates .............................................................................................. 686
Display the Properties of a Report Template ............................................................................... 687
Create a New Blank Report Template .......................................................................................... 687
Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template ......................................................... 688
Edit a Report Template................................................................................................................. 688
Define Report Headers ................................................................................................................. 689
Define the Contents of Your Report Template ............................................................................. 690
Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template ............................................................. 692
Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template ................................................................ 694
Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template........................................................ 694
Delete a Report Template ............................................................................................................ 695

Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical .......................................................................... 696

Configuring Smart Electrical to Work in KKS Mode ............................................................................ 698
Create a KKS Plant Using a Default DDT File .................................................................................... 699
Creating a KKS Plant Using a Supplied DDT File .............................................................................. 701
Configure Smart Electrical for KKS Mode Using Hard-Coded Tag Propagation ................................ 702
Configure Smart Electrical for KKS Using Rules ................................................................................ 706
Propagation of KKS Names in Smart Electrical .................................................................................. 708
Examples of KKS Naming Propagation .............................................................................................. 709
Scope of KKS Issues for the Current Smart Electrical Version .......................................................... 713

Project Management in Smart Electrical ............................................................................................... 716

Scoping the Project ............................................................................................................................. 717
Understanding Statuses ...................................................................................................................... 717
Rules for Changing Statuses .............................................................................................................. 718
Modify Project Status .......................................................................................................................... 719
Managing Revisions in an As-Built and Project Environment ............................................................. 720
Scoping Items ..................................................................................................................................... 721
Select a Project ............................................................................................................................ 721
Rules for Scoping Items ............................................................................................................... 722
Add Items to the Project Management Table in As-Built.............................................................. 724
Scope Items .................................................................................................................................. 724
Use the Buffer to Scope Items ..................................................................................................... 725
Claiming Items .................................................................................................................................... 726
Add Items to the Project Management Table in a Project ............................................................ 726
Claim Items ................................................................................................................................... 726
Set Claim Mode ............................................................................................................................ 727
Release Claim .............................................................................................................................. 728
Mark Selected Items as Completed ............................................................................................. 728
Clear Mark as Completed ............................................................................................................. 729
Change the Status of All Completed Items to Claimed ................................................................ 729
Complete a Project ....................................................................................................................... 730
Return a Project to the Active Status ........................................................................................... 730
Release from Merge ..................................................................................................................... 730

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 15

 Contents

Merging Items into As-Built ................................................................................................................. 731

Compare a Document in a Project with a Document in As-Built .................................................. 732
Rules Governing Revisions for Documents Merged Back into As-Built ....................................... 733
Run a Test Merge ......................................................................................................................... 733
Merge All Project Items into As-Built (Full Merge) ....................................................................... 734
Merge Selected Project Items into As-Built (Partial Merge) ......................................................... 734
Plant Operating Cases in As-Built and Projects ................................................................................. 735
Synchronize Plant Operating Cases ............................................................................................ 737
Miscellaneous Options for Project Management ................................................................................ 738
Filter the Project Management Table Display .............................................................................. 738
Select a Display Option ................................................................................................................ 739
Generate an Excel Report ............................................................................................................ 739

Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical .............................................................................. 740

Types of Information Handled by Off-Site Projects............................................................................. 740
Scope of Allowed Activities ................................................................................................................. 742
Out of Scope Items ....................................................................................................................... 742
Flowchart for Smart Electrical Off-Site Projects .................................................................................. 743
Smart Electrical Off-Site Projects Workflow ........................................................................................ 743
Scope Host Data and Transfer to Off-Site Plant .......................................................................... 745
Transfer Data from the Off-Site Plant to the Host ........................................................................ 756
Rescope and Synchronize Updated As-Built Data ....................................................................... 763
Smart Electrical EPC Greenfield Plant Workflow................................................................................ 768
Save a Plant Structure.................................................................................................................. 769
Create a Reference Data Package .............................................................................................. 770
Update Reference Data from a Package ..................................................................................... 771
Load a Plant as a Project ............................................................................................................. 772
Smart Electrical Off-Site Projects Reference ...................................................................................... 773
Save Project as Offsite Command (File Menu) ............................................................................ 773
Save Project as Offsite Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 774
Save Project for Reload Command (File Menu) .......................................................................... 775
Save Project for Reload Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 775
Save Plant for Merge in Host Command (File Menu) .................................................................. 775
Save Plant for Merge in Host Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 776
Load Offsite Plant Structure Command (File Menu) .................................................................... 777
Load Offsite Plant Structure Wizard ............................................................................................. 777
Load Plant as Project Command (File Menu) .............................................................................. 789
Load Plant as Project Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 789
Load Standalone Project Command (File Menu) ......................................................................... 791
Load Standalone Project Wizard .................................................................................................. 791

Publishing Data for Interfaces................................................................................................................ 793

Publish Data from Smart Electrical (2018) .......................................................................................... 793
Publish Equipment from Smart Electrical ........................................................................................... 795

Working with Integration ........................................................................................................................ 798

Tool Requirements for Integrating Smart Electrical ............................................................................ 799
Integration with Smart Instrumentation ......................................................................................... 799
Integration with Smart 3D ............................................................................................................. 800

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 16

 Contents

Integration with Smart P&ID ......................................................................................................... 801

Using Projects in an Integrated Environment ............................................................................... 801
Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client .................................................................................. 801
Schema Mapping ................................................................................................................................ 802
General Information About Schema Mapping .............................................................................. 803
Mapping Rules and Limitations .................................................................................................... 803
Objects and Relationships ............................................................................................................ 804
Tool Schema Data Model Diagram .............................................................................................. 809
Smart Electrical Mapping Examples ............................................................................................. 811
Publish Operation Description ...................................................................................................... 823
Retrieve Operation Description .................................................................................................... 824
Revising Documents ........................................................................................................................... 825
Revise a Document ...................................................................................................................... 826
Publishing Documents ........................................................................................................................ 828
Publishing from Smart Electrical - Work Process ......................................................................... 830
Prerequisites for Publishing .......................................................................................................... 830
Publish Documents from Smart Electrical .................................................................................... 830
Publish Workflows ........................................................................................................................ 832
Find Documents to Publish from Smart Electrical ........................................................................ 833
Publishing from a Project in an Integrated Environment .............................................................. 834
Retrieving Documents ......................................................................................................................... 835
Retrieving to Smart Electrical - Work Process ............................................................................. 838
Retrieve Documents to Smart Electrical....................................................................................... 838
Using the To Do List ........................................................................................................................... 839
Open the To Do List ..................................................................................................................... 841
Modify To Do List Task Properties ............................................................................................... 841
Run Tasks from the To Do List ..................................................................................................... 841
Filter To Do List Tasks.................................................................................................................. 841
Sort To Do List Tasks ................................................................................................................... 842
Defer Tasks from the To Do List .................................................................................................. 842
Remove Tasks from the To Do List .............................................................................................. 842
Display Deleted To Do List Tasks ................................................................................................ 842
Ignore To Do List Tasks ............................................................................................................... 843
Ignore Task Properties ................................................................................................................. 843
Display Ignored To Do List Tasks ................................................................................................ 843
Update the To Do List Display ...................................................................................................... 844
Correlating and Uncorrelating Smart Electrical Items ......................................................................... 844
Uncorrelate Smart Electrical Items ............................................................................................... 845
Windows and Dialog Boxes ................................................................................................................ 846
To Do List Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 846
Task Properties Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 848
Compare a Document with a Published Version ................................................................................ 850
Menu Commands ................................................................................................................................ 852
Publish Plant Groups Command (SmartPlant Menu) ................................................................... 852
Publish Command (SmartPlant Menu) ......................................................................................... 852
Find Documents to Publish Command (SmartPlant Menu) ......................................................... 852
Retrieve Command (SmartPlant Menu) ....................................................................................... 852
Compare with Published Version Command (SmartPlant Menu) ................................................ 852
Publish to External Analyzing Tool Command (SmartPlant Menu) .............................................. 853
To Do List Command (SmartPlant Menu) .................................................................................... 853
Browser Command (SmartPlant Menu) ....................................................................................... 853

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 17

 Contents

Upgrade Schema Command (SmartPlant Menu) ........................................................................ 853

Smart Application Interfaces .................................................................................................................. 854

Smart Instrumentation Interface.......................................................................................................... 854
Prerequisites for Working with the Smart Instrumentation Interface ............................................ 855
Mapping Plant Groups to Smart Instrumentation ......................................................................... 856
Map Plant Groups to Smart Instrumentation ................................................................................ 856
Retrieve Data from the Smart Instrumentation Interface .............................................................. 857
Importing Cables from Smart Instrumentation .................................................................................... 858
Synchronizing Smart Instrumentation and Smart Electrical Reference Cables ........................... 858
Exporting Smart Instrumentation Cables ...................................................................................... 861
Importing Cables to Smart Electrical ............................................................................................ 862
Importing the To and From Objects .............................................................................................. 862
Workflow for Importing Smart Instrumentation Cables ................................................................. 863

ETAP - Smart Electrical Bidirectional Interface ................................................................................... 864

Publishing Data to an External Analyzing Tool ................................................................................... 864
ETAP - Smart Electrical Mapped Items .............................................................................................. 865
Preliminary Settings for ETAP ............................................................................................................ 870
Define the ETAP Project Name .................................................................................................... 870
Map ETAP File Location ............................................................................................................... 871
Import ETAP Mapping Data ......................................................................................................... 871
Set the ETAP-Smart Electrical Reference Cable Exchange File Location .................................. 871
Export Smart Electrical Reference Cables (Power Cables) ......................................................... 872
Export Smart Electrical Reference Cables (Cable Specifications) ............................................... 873
Import ETAP Library Cables ......................................................................................................... 875
Publish a Single SLD Drawing to ETAP (Partial Publishing) .............................................................. 876
Publish All Plant SLDs to ETAP (Full Publishing) ............................................................................... 877
Retrieve ETAP Project Data ............................................................................................................... 877

Troubleshooting Errors and Rule Inconsistencies .............................................................................. 879

Generating Error Log Files .................................................................................................................. 879
Activate Log File Generation ............................................................................................................... 879
Generate Error Log Files .................................................................................................................... 880
Troubleshooting Rule Inconsistencies ................................................................................................ 880
Fix Inconsistencies .............................................................................................................................. 881
Troubleshoot Rule Inconsistencies ..................................................................................................... 881
Operator Descriptions and Rule Examples ......................................................................................... 882

Appendix .................................................................................................................................................. 884

Smart Electrical Data Model ............................................................................................................... 884
Customizing Your Data ....................................................................................................................... 884
API Programming for Smart Electrical ................................................................................................ 886
Electrical Calculations ......................................................................................................................... 886
Calculations for Motors ................................................................................................................. 886
Calculations for Static Loads ........................................................................................................ 888
Earth Loop Impedance Calculation .............................................................................................. 890
Custom Validations and Calculations ................................................................................................. 891

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 18

 Contents

Implement Validation .................................................................................................................... 891

Implement Calculation .................................................................................................................. 892
Validation Code Example ............................................................................................................. 893
Item Type Validation Example ...................................................................................................... 894
Switching the Plant Operational Mode ................................................................................................ 895
Custom Common Properties Forms ................................................................................................... 896
Create a Custom Common Properties Form ................................................................................ 896
Define Custom Forms in Smart Electrical .................................................................................... 898
Select Common Properties Form Dialog Box .............................................................................. 900
Typical Cable Block Diagram Utility Dialog Box ................................................................................. 900

Configuration File Settings for MicroStation Translation ................................................................... 901

Configuration File Settings for AutoCAD Translation ......................................................................... 907

Windows and Dialog Boxes.................................................................................................................... 916

General ............................................................................................................................................... 916
Customize Dialog Box .................................................................................................................. 916
Description Dialog Box ................................................................................................................. 917
File Properties Dialog Box (File > Properties) .............................................................................. 917
Find Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................ 918
Move Items to Plant Group Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 919
New Item Dialog Box .................................................................................................................... 919
Create Multiple New Items Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 919
Open Plant Group Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 920
Open Plant Structure Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 920
Preferences Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 920
Select Filter Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 925
Print Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................ 925
Save as PDF Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 926
Switch Active Operating Case Dialog Box ................................................................................... 927
Switch Mode (Rule-Driven) Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 927
Toolbars Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 928
Update Select Lists Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 928
Associations ........................................................................................................................................ 929
Associated Drawings for a Plant Item Dialog Box ........................................................................ 929
Associated Drawings for a Symbol Dialog Box ............................................................................ 930
Cables ................................................................................................................................................. 930
Apply Reference Data to Plant Cables Dialog Box ...................................................................... 930
Assign Drums to Cables Wizard ................................................................................................... 931
Batch Cable Side and Gland Associations Dialog Box ................................................................ 933
Batch Size Cables Window .......................................................................................................... 934
Cable Common Properties Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 935
Cable Cut Definitions Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 954
Cable Routing ............................................................................................................................... 955
Cable Drum Common Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................... 968
Cable Set Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 971
Cable Sizing Matrix Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 971
Synchronize Plant and Reference Cable Data Dialog Box .......................................................... 972
Define Color Pattern Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 972

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 19

 Contents

Insert Power Cable Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 973

Reference Gland Common Properties Dialog Box ....................................................................... 974
Reference Cable Library Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 976
Replace Cable Structure Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 976
Select Reference Cable Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 980
Drum Sizes Dialog Box................................................................................................................. 981
Synchronize Gland Associations Dialog Box ............................................................................... 982
Single-Core Cable Assembly Common Properties Dialog Box .................................................... 983
Reference Single-Core Cable Assembly Common Properties..................................................... 985
Cable Block Diagrams ........................................................................................................................ 987
Create New Plant Circuits Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 987
Resolve Symbol Inconsistencies Dialog Box ............................................................................... 988
Custom Folders ................................................................................................................................... 989
Custom Folder Properties Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 989
Filter Properties Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 990
New Custom Folder Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 991
Select Filter Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 991
Documents and Drawings ................................................................................................................... 991
Associate Documents Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 991
Define Document Reference Dialog Box...................................................................................... 992
PDF Settings Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 993
Save As Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................... 993
Explore Elsewhere Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 994
Behavior Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................. 994
Format Tab (Connectors) ............................................................................................................. 996
Format Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box) .............................................................................. 996
Info Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box) .................................................................................... 996
Info Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box) ..................................................................................... 1001
Info Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................................... 1001
User Tab (Properties Dialog Box) .............................................................................................. 1002
User Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................................. 1002
User Tab (Properties Dialog Box) .............................................................................................. 1003
Toolbars Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 1003
Electrical Equipment ......................................................................................................................... 1004
Apply Options Dialog Box ........................................................................................................... 1004
Batch Load Association Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 1009
Battery Bank Common Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................... 1020
Converting Equipment Common Properties Dialog Box ............................................................ 1023
Copy Driver Power Absorbed Dialog Box .................................................................................. 1031
Description Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 1032
Disconnect Electrical Equipment Common Properties Dialog Box ............................................ 1032
Electrical Motor Common Properties Dialog Box ....................................................................... 1033
Generator Common Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................ 1043
Instrument Common Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................... 1047
Item Tag Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 1054
Manage Operating Cases Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 1054
Metering Equipment Common Properties Dialog Box ................................................................ 1055
Other Electrical Equipment Common Properties Dialog Box ..................................................... 1059
Parallel Equipment Assistant Dialog Box ................................................................................... 1067
Static Load Common Properties Dialog Box .............................................................................. 1068
Transformer Connections and Tapping Dialog Box ................................................................... 1077

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 20

 Contents

Interfaces .......................................................................................................................................... 1079

Retrieve Document Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 1079
Internal Documents and Revisions ................................................................................................... 1080
Batch Compare Documents Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 1080
Compare Documents Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 1080
Document Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 1081
File Properties Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 1090
Global Revisions Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 1093
New Miscellaneous Drawing Dialog Box .................................................................................... 1094
Registered Report Common Properties Dialog Box ................................................................... 1094
Panels ............................................................................................................................................... 1095
Cabinet Common Properties Dialog Box.................................................................................... 1095
Local Panel Common Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................. 1099
Junction Box Common Properties .............................................................................................. 1101
Control Station Common Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................ 1103
Project Management ......................................................................................................................... 1104
Project Management Table (As-Built) ........................................................................................ 1104
Project Management Table (Project) .......................................................................................... 1108
Project Status Dialog Box ........................................................................................................... 1112
Select Project Dialog Box ........................................................................................................... 1113
Power Distribution Boards ................................................................................................................ 1113
Add New Internal Item Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 1113
Circuit Common Properties Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 1113
Circuit Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 1117
Set Circuit Sequence Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 1117
Cell Size Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 1118
Power Distribution Board Structure Dialog Box ......................................................................... 1118
Select Alternative Power Source Dialog Box ............................................................................. 1120
Total Bus Load Validation Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 1120
Zoom Options Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 1121
Redlining and Annotations ................................................................................................................ 1121
Text Properties Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 1121
Reference Items ................................................................................................................................ 1123
Associate Reference Cable Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 1123
Equipment Profile Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................... 1124
Lookup Table Properties Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 1126
Reference Cable Common Properties Dialog Box ..................................................................... 1129
Reference Control Station Common Properties Dialog Box ...................................................... 1134
Schematic Sheet Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................... 1135
Select Reference Cable Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 1135
Typical Circuit Common Properties Dialog Box ......................................................................... 1136
Typical Cable Block Diagram Properties .................................................................................... 1137
Typical Schematic Blocks Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 1138
Typical Schematic Common Properties Dialog Box ................................................................... 1138
Reports and Report Templates ......................................................................................................... 1139
Define Report Contents Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 1139
Define Report Items Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 1140
Delete Report Template Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 1142
Edit Report Template Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 1142
My Reports Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 1142
New Items Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 1143

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 21

 Contents

New Report Template Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 1144

Plant Reports Dialog Box ........................................................................................................... 1144
Report Options Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 1145
Report Properties Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 1145
Select Operating Cases Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 1146
Schematics........................................................................................................................................ 1147
Batch Generate Schematics Dialog Box .................................................................................... 1147
Generate Schematic Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 1147
Multi-Tag Schematic Options Dialog Box ................................................................................... 1149
Options Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 1149
Sheet Setup Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 1162
Single Line Diagrams ........................................................................................................................ 1164
Single Line Diagram Options Dialog Box ................................................................................... 1164
Batch Generate SLDs Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 1180
Open Single Line Diagram Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 1180
SLD Legend Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 1180
Change Branch Orientation Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 1180
Symbols ............................................................................................................................................ 1181
Associate/Dissociate Custom Symbols Dialog Box ................................................................... 1181
Format Line Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 1182
Format Text Box Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 1182
SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 1187
EDE ................................................................................................................................................... 1188
Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 1188
Edit View ..................................................................................................................................... 1190
Troubleshooting Errors and Rule Inconsistencies ............................................................................ 1191
Log Files Dialog Box................................................................................................................... 1191
Fix Inconsistencies Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 1191
Rule Inconsistencies Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 1192
Rule Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 1193
Wiring ................................................................................................................................................ 1196
Batch Cable Connection Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 1196
Cable Connection Type Selection Dialog Box ........................................................................... 1198
Connection Type Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 1198
Terminal Strip Configuration Dialog Box .................................................................................... 1199
Terminal Strip Common Properties Dialog Box ......................................................................... 1200
Terminal Common Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................. 1201

Toolbars and Ribbons ........................................................................................................................... 1202

Actions Toolbar ................................................................................................................................. 1202
Align Ribbon ...................................................................................................................................... 1203
Change Toolbar ................................................................................................................................ 1203
Draw Toolbar ..................................................................................................................................... 1205
Edit Drawing Toolbar ........................................................................................................................ 1206
Group Toolbar ................................................................................................................................... 1207
Label Toolbar .................................................................................................................................... 1207
Main Toolbar ..................................................................................................................................... 1208
Modify Connector Ribbon ................................................................................................................. 1209

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 22

 Contents

Menu Commands................................................................................................................................... 1211

New > Item Command (File Menu) ................................................................................................... 1211
New > Multiple Items (File Menu) ..................................................................................................... 1211
New > SLD Command (File Menu) ................................................................................................... 1211
New > Template Command (File Menu) ........................................................................................... 1211
New > Custom Folder (File Menu) .................................................................................................... 1212
Open > Plant Group Command (File Menu) ..................................................................................... 1212
Open > Drawing Command (File Menu) ........................................................................................... 1212
Open > Last Saved Document (File Menu) ...................................................................................... 1212
Open > PDB Layout Command (File Menu) ..................................................................................... 1212
Open > SLD Command (File Menu) ................................................................................................. 1212
Open > External Drawing Command (File Menu) ............................................................................. 1213
Open > Template Command (File Menu) ......................................................................................... 1213
Open > Log Files Command (File Menu) .......................................................................................... 1213
Close Command (File Menu) ............................................................................................................ 1213
Save Command (File Menu) ............................................................................................................. 1213
Save As Command (File Menu) ........................................................................................................ 1213
Preferences Command (File Menu) .................................................................................................. 1213
Print Command (File Menu) .............................................................................................................. 1214
Sheet Setup Command (File Menu) ................................................................................................. 1214
Properties Command (File Menu) ..................................................................................................... 1214
Exit Command (File Menu) ............................................................................................................... 1214
Undo Command (Edit Menu) ............................................................................................................ 1214
Redo Command (Edit Menu) ............................................................................................................ 1214
Cut Command (Edit Menu) ............................................................................................................... 1215
Copy Command (Edit Menu) ............................................................................................................ 1215
Paste Command (Edit Menu) ............................................................................................................ 1215
Delete Command (Edit Menu) .......................................................................................................... 1215
Select All Command (Edit Menu) ...................................................................................................... 1215
Duplicate Command (Edit Menu) ...................................................................................................... 1215
Rename Command (Edit Menu) ....................................................................................................... 1216
Align Command (Edit Menu) ............................................................................................................. 1216
Nudge Command (Edit Menu) .......................................................................................................... 1216
Move Command (Edit Menu) ............................................................................................................ 1216
Find in Active Composite Drawing Command (Edit Menu) .............................................................. 1216
Rotate Command (Edit Menu) .......................................................................................................... 1216
Mirror Command (Edit Menu) ........................................................................................................... 1217
Fit to Page Command (Edit Menu) ................................................................................................... 1217
Place New Command (Edit Menu).................................................................................................... 1217
Activate Connection Mode Command (Edit Menu) ........................................................................... 1217
Activate Association Mode Command (Edit Menu) .......................................................................... 1217
Show/Hide Association Connectors Command (Edit Menu) ............................................................ 1217
Show Plant Item in Association Assistant Command (Actions Menu) .............................................. 1218
Activate Jumper Mode Command (Edit Menu) ................................................................................. 1218
Disconnect (Edit Menu) ..................................................................................................................... 1218
Change Branch Orientation Command (Edit Menu) ......................................................................... 1218
Remove (Edit Menu) ......................................................................................................................... 1218
Redlining Command (Edit Menu) ...................................................................................................... 1219
Move Cell Command (Edit Menu) ..................................................................................................... 1219
Remove Cell Command (Edit Menu) ................................................................................................ 1219

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 23

 Contents

Insert > New Sheet Command (Insert Menu) ................................................................................... 1219

Insert > Image Command (Edit Menu) .............................................................................................. 1219
Insert > Symbol Command (Edit Menu) ............................................................................................ 1219
Insert > Object Command (Insert Menu) .......................................................................................... 1219
Insert > Text Command (Edit Menu) ................................................................................................. 1220
Insert > Legend Command (Edit Menu) ............................................................................................ 1220
Insert > Line Command (Edit Menu) ................................................................................................. 1220
Insert > Circle Command (Edit Menu) .............................................................................................. 1220
Insert > Rectangle Command (Edit Menu) ....................................................................................... 1220
Insert > Curve Command (Edit Menu) .............................................................................................. 1221
Text Command (Edit Menu) .............................................................................................................. 1221
Convert to Composite Drawing Command (Actions Menu) .............................................................. 1221
Format > Line Command (Format Menu) ......................................................................................... 1221
Format > Text Box Command (Format Menu) .................................................................................. 1221
Character Map Command ................................................................................................................. 1221
Adjust Frame Position and Size Command (Edit Menu) .................................................................. 1222
Document Properties Command (Edit Menu) ................................................................................... 1222
Common Properties Command (Edit Menu) ..................................................................................... 1222
Table Properties Command (Edit Menu) .......................................................................................... 1223
Transformer Connections and Tapping Command (Edit Menu) ....................................................... 1223
Previous Zoom Level Command (View Menu) ................................................................................. 1223
Refresh Command (View Menu)....................................................................................................... 1223
Show Selected Electrical Branches Only Command (View Menu) ................................................... 1223
Show in New Window Command (View Menu) ................................................................................ 1224
Show Items of All Plant Groups Command (View Menu) ................................................................. 1224
Show Related Items (View Menu) ..................................................................................................... 1224
Add Filter Command (View Menu) .................................................................................................... 1224
Save Settings Command (View Menu) ............................................................................................. 1224
Zoom Area Command (View Menu) ................................................................................................. 1225
Zoom In Command (View Menu) ...................................................................................................... 1225
Zoom Out Command (View Menu) ................................................................................................... 1225
Fit Command (View Menu) ............................................................................................................... 1225
Pan Command (View Menu) ............................................................................................................. 1225
Show Grid Command (View Menu) .................................................................................................. 1225
Snap to Grid Command (View Menu) ............................................................................................... 1225
Show Auxiliary Graphics Symbology ................................................................................................ 1225
Display > Properties Window Command (View Menu) ..................................................................... 1226
Display > Working Area Command (View Menu) ............................................................................. 1226
Display > Item Status in Project Command (View Menu) ................................................................. 1226
Toolbars Command (View Menu) ..................................................................................................... 1226
Design PDB Layout Command (Actions Menu) ................................................................................ 1226
Batch Load Association Command (Actions Menu) ......................................................................... 1226
Total Bus Load Validation Command (Actions Menu) ...................................................................... 1227
Calculate Bus Loads > Selected PDBs or Buses Command (Actions Menu) .................................. 1227
Calculate Bus Loads > All Plant Buses Command (Actions Menu).................................................. 1227
Associate Bus with PDB Command (Actions Menu) ........................................................................ 1227
Dissociate Bus from PDB Command (Actions Menu)....................................................................... 1227
Generate SLD for PDB Command (Actions Menu) .......................................................................... 1227
Associate with Electrical Item Command (Actions Menu) ................................................................ 1228
Dissociate from Electrical Item Command (Actions Menu)............................................................... 1228
Generate Schematic Command (Actions Menu) .............................................................................. 1228

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 24

 Contents

Define Document Reference Command (Actions Menu) ................................................................. 1228

Associate Documents Command (Actions Menu) ............................................................................ 1228
Global Revisions Command (Actions Menu) .................................................................................... 1229
Compare Documents Command (Actions Menu) ............................................................................. 1229
Resolve Symbol Inconsistencies Command (Actions Menu) ........................................................... 1229
Associate Custom Symbols Command ............................................................................................ 1229
Dissociate Command (Actions Menu) .............................................................................................. 1229
Move Items Command (Actions Menu) ............................................................................................ 1229
Switch Mode (Rule-Driven) Command (Actions Menu) .................................................................... 1230
Switch Active Operating Case Command (Actions Menu) ............................................................... 1230
Cables > Batch Size Cables Command (Actions Menu) .................................................................. 1230
Replace Cable Structure Command (Actions > Cables Menu) ........................................................ 1230
Cables > Apply Reference Data to Cables Command (Actions Menu) ............................................ 1230
Cables > Assign Drums to Cables Command (Actions Menu) ......................................................... 1231
Cables > Predefined Routes Command (Actions Menu) .................................................................. 1231
Cables > Batch Cable Routing Command (Actions Menu) ............................................................... 1231
Cables > Define Color Pattern Command (Actions Menu) ............................................................... 1231
Cables > Refresh Load Data for Power Cables Command (Actions Menu) ..................................... 1231
Cables > Associate Cables with Equipment Circuits Command (Actions Menu) ............................. 1232
Cables > Batch Cable Side and Gland Associations Command (Actions Menu) ............................. 1232
Cables > Synchronize Gland Associations (Actions Menu) .............................................................. 1232
Cables > Batch Cable Connection Command (Actions Menu) ......................................................... 1232
Cables > Batch Cable Dissociation from Drums Command (Actions Menu) .................................... 1232
Cables > Insert Power Cable (Actions Menu) ................................................................................... 1233
Parallel Equipment Assistant Command (Actions Menu) ................................................................. 1233
Fix Inconsistencies Command (Actions Menu) ................................................................................. 1233
Copy Driver Power Absorbed (Actions Menu) .................................................................................. 1233
Set Circuit Sequence Command (Actions Menu) ............................................................................. 1233
Register Report Command (Actions Menu) ...................................................................................... 1233
Gap Now Command (Tools Menu) ................................................................................................... 1234
Optimize Overlapping Connectors .................................................................................................... 1234
Apply Options Command (Tools Menu) ............................................................................................ 1234
Drawing Options Command (Tools Menu) ....................................................................................... 1234
Update Select Lists (Tools Menu) ..................................................................................................... 1234
Apply Naming Conventions (Tools Menu) ........................................................................................ 1234
ETAP Interface > Publish All (Tools Menu) ...................................................................................... 1235
ETAP Interface > Retrieve (Tools Menu) .......................................................................................... 1235
New Command (Reports Menu) ....................................................................................................... 1235
Edit Command (Reports Menu) ........................................................................................................ 1235
Delete Command (Reports Menu) .................................................................................................... 1235
Options Command ............................................................................................................................ 1235
Plant Reports Command (Reports Menu) ........................................................................................ 1236
My Reports Command (Reports Menu) ............................................................................................ 1236
New > Table Command (Window Menu) .......................................................................................... 1236
New > Electrical Index Command (Window Menu) .......................................................................... 1236
New > Electrical Engineer Command (Window Menu) ..................................................................... 1236
New > Reference Data Explorer Command (Window Menu) ........................................................... 1236
New > Reference Electrical Engineer Command (Window Menu) ................................................... 1237
New > Project Management Command (Window Menu) ................................................................. 1237
Smart Electrical Help Command (Help Menu) .................................................................................. 1237
Printable Guides Command (Help Menu) ......................................................................................... 1237

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 25

 Contents

Smart Electrical on the Web Command (Help Menu) ....................................................................... 1237

Smart Electrical Web Forum Command (Help Menu) ...................................................................... 1237
About Smart Electrical Command (Help Menu) ................................................................................ 1238
Copy Command (Edit Menu - EDE) .................................................................................................. 1238
Paste Command (Edit Menu - EDE) ................................................................................................. 1238
Uncorrelate Command (SmartPlant Menu) ...................................................................................... 1238
Customize Command ....................................................................................................................... 1238
Catalog Explorer Window Command (View > Display Menu) .......................................................... 1238
Select All Command (Edit Menu - EDE) ........................................................................................... 1239

Using Help .............................................................................................................................................. 1240

Glossary ................................................................................................................................................. 1241

Index ....................................................................................................................................................... 1251

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 26

SECTION 1

Welcome to Intergraph Smart® Electrical

Intergraph Smart® Electrical enables electrical engineers, designers, maintenance personnel in
EPCs, and plant owners to design and maintain the electrical equipment and documentation for
process plants, refineries, and so forth. Smart Electrical is designed to meet specific needs of
electrical engineers by automating work processes, complying with corporate or project
standards and manipulating electrical data throughout the plant and project life cycle.
The software allows you to create electrical equipment and components and then dynamically
associate among them. You can determine the load requirements in your plant, keep track of
your electrical inventory, size your plant cables, and establish the electrical relationships among
the different electrical components.
You can use Smart Electrical to generate single line diagrams, schematic drawings, wiring
drawings, and cable block diagrams without an external CAD engine and thus generate these
deliverables automatically, creating graphical reports based on the engineering work itself.
Electrical engineering deliverables include electrical equipment list reports, consumer list and
load summaries, power distribution board design, single-line diagrams, cable block diagrams,
and schematic drawings, as well as cable lists and wiring reports.
Smart Electrical supports the major commercial databases and outputs drawings in common
CAD formats, including SmartSketch, and generates reports in Microsoft Excel format.
Smart Electrical incorporates the latest Microsoft technologies, such as OLE automation, to
provide integration with existing data and other systems. Smart Electrical does not require a
traditional, expensive CAD engine for the creation of single line diagrams, cable block diagrams,
or schematics. The open architecture of Smart Electrical permits integration with other
systems, such as Intergraph Smart Instrumentation and ETAP, which allow users to share data
with third-party software.
In the Smart Electrical main window, the following windows are available:

Electrical Index
Enables you to quickly create, modify, view, and select items in your plant inventory. For more
information, see Electrical Index (on page 38).

Reference Data Explorer

Enables you to create your default electrical equipment and data, loads, panels, and cables,
which you can then use to create and populate the plant database in an efficient and consistent
manner. The Reference Data Explorer enables you to define equipment profiles, a powerful
means of creating standard data. You can apply this data in batch mode to a large number of
items of the same type, such as motors, resulting in the creation of plant items and populating
them with default data. For more information, see Reference Data Explorer (on page 50).

Electrical Engineer
Enables you to create, modify, and display the electrical relations between various electrical
items. In this way, you establish the electrical infrastructure. For more information, see
Electrical Engineer (on page 52).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 27

 Welcome to Intergraph Smart® Electrical

Reference Electrical Engineer

Allows you to copy existing partial or complete power network structures by dragging items from
one or more specified plants to the Electrical Engineer in the current plant. For more
information, see Reference Electrical Engineer (on page 80).

Properties Window
Displays the data fields of the currently selected item in tabular style where you can edit the
property values as needed. For more information, see Properties Window.

Engineering Data Editor

Enables viewing and editing of items of the same type, and batch assignment of properties to a
selected group of items. You can also use the EDE to select items for including in reports. For
more information, see Engineering Data Editor (on page 639).

Status Bar
Displays summary information about selected menu items, processes, and tips when performing
particular actions. For more detailed information, refer to the appropriate Smart Electrical
Online Help topic.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 28

SECTION 2

Multi-User Environment
This section introduces the concepts and considerations when working in a multi-user
environment. You will learn how to connect to a plant group, create a plant using a reference
plant, and so on.

In This Section
Working in a Multi-User Environment ............................................ 29
Create a Plant Using Reference Data from an Existing Plant ....... 29
Connecting to a Plant Group ......................................................... 31

Working in a Multi-User Environment

Special considerations apply when several users work on the same item.
The software allows several users to concurrently access and edit the same item. In this case,
the software accepts the changes for the first user to commit those changes. The software
then saves the data committed by the second user overwriting the previously committed data.
Also, if a user deletes an item and commits the deletion, the software rejects changes made by
other users and those users cannot subsequently update the item because the deletion takes
priority. If you get a message that another user has modified or deleted an item that you are
working on, click Refresh or select another item and then reselect the item you were editing
(if it has not been deleted).

Create a Plant Using Reference Data from an Existing

Plant
In Smart Engineering Manager, when you associate a new plant hierarchy with Smart Electrical,
if you already have existing plant data, you can specify an option to copy the reference data
from an existing plant to the new plant. To do so, you first copy an existing plant structure, and
then you load the reference data from the source plant. The copied data includes items from
the Reference Data Explorer and some Options Manager settings.
At least one plant that is already associated with Smart Electrical for use as
your source must exist in the Plant hierarchy tree.
1. In Smart Electrical, open the source plant and create all the reference data that you want to
copy (profiles, lookup tables, reference items, and so forth).
2. In the Options Manager, make the following definitions for the source plant: Formats, Item
Type Definitions, Naming Conventions, General Settings, Plant Default Preferences, and
Plant-Wide Parameters.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 29

 Multi-User Environment

The software sets the defaults for the locations in the target plant according to the
reference data path that you specify when copy the data (see step 12).
3. In the Options Manager, click Options > Naming Conventions > Copy to Reference Data.
You must perform this step if you want to the naming conventions to be
available for copying when you associate the target plant with Smart Electrical.
4. Open Smart Engineering Manager.
5. In the left pane (tree view), select the plant that you want to use as the source plant.
6. In the right pane, select the application, right-click, and click New Data Dictionary
Template.
7. Navigate to the path where you want to create a template (.ddt) file containing the source
reference data and type a name for the file.
8. In the left pane, create a new plant or select an existing plant that is not associated with an
application. This will be your target plant.
9. Right-click the Applications sub- folder for the target plant and click Associate
Applications.

▪ If necessary, expand the plant folder to display the Applications sub-folder.

▪ For details of the Associate Applications wizard parameters, refer to Smart
Engineering Manager Online Help.
10. Under Data dictionary source, click Use custom template.

11. Beside Template path, click the ellipsis button to navigate to the .ddt file that you
created.
12. To copy values to Options Manager Locations, on the wizard page with the title Enter the
database server and user connection information for Smart Electrical schema, enter a
path in the Smart Electrical reference data path box.
13. On the wizard page with the title Enter the database server and user connection
information for Smart Electrical reference schema, select the check box Load reference
data from <plant name>.
14. Complete the remaining pages of the wizard with the information that you require.
15. In Options Manager, copy the naming conventions from the seed plant. For full details
about copying naming conventions, see Options Manager User's Guide > Copy Naming
Conventions for Plant Group.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 30

 Multi-User Environment

Connecting to a Plant Group

Before you can work with Smart Electrical, you need to connect to a plant group. A plant group
is a specific group available within a plant hierarchy, for example, Plant1, Area1, Unit1. Plant,
area and unit are examples of plant group types. The available plant group types depend on the
plant hierarchy you define in Engineering Manager.
You can open a plant structure and then connect to a plant group. Also, if you have appropriate
access rights, you can connect to a plant group located on a different site server. You can only
connect to one plant group at a time.
1. Click File > Open Plant Group.
If the Open Plant Group command is not accessible, close all Options Manager
windows.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Expand the plant hierarchy and then select the required plant group located on the
lowest hierarchy level.
▪ Click Select Plant and then, under Available plant structures, select a plant to
connect.
If you want to connect to a plant in a different database, on the Open Plant
Structure dialog box, click Site Server and from the Files of type list, select the required
.ini file.

Changing Plant Group Hierarchy Names

You change the hierarchy group names of the areas and units in your plant using Smart
Engineering Manager. A message is displayed at the start of Smart Electrical and Smart
Electrical Options Manager informing you that changes have been made to the hierarchy names
and that you should run the Apply Naming Conventions command in Smart Electrical to
complete these changes. Using the Apply Naming Conventions command the changes made
in the hierarchy names are propagated to the item type names through the entire plant
according to the definitions created in the Options Manager.

Apply Plant Group Hierarchy Name Changes

1. Change the Plant Group Hierarchy names in Smart Engineering Manager. For more
details, see Change Plant Group Hierarchy Names in the Smart Engineering Manager
User's Guide, under Plant Structure Root, Plant Group Node, Change Plant Group
Hierarchy Names.
2. Click Tools > Apply Naming Conventions.
3. At the prompt, do one of the following:
▪ Click Close to continue to work in Smart Electrical.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 31

 Multi-User Environment

▪ Click View Log to open a log of the changes made to the hierarchy of the plant item
tags. (If no changes have been made, this button is unavailable.)

▪ A message is displayed at the start of Smart Electrical informing you that changes have
been made to the naming conventions.
▪ Due to the possibility that the naming convention and inter item tag dependency can be very
complex the software runs the Apply Naming Conventions twice. After running the
update there may still be items that have not been updated. You can run the Apply
Naming Conventions again.
▪ The changes are made to all the item types in the Item Types window in Options Manager.
The changes are made in alphabetical order as the item types appear in the Item Types
window. For more details, see Options Manager User's Guide > Setting Item Type
Properties.
▪ The Apply Naming Conventions command is available only if your administrator has
granted you appropriate access rights.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 32

SECTION 3

Customizing Preferences
You can set various preferences for Smart Electrical. The software allows you to set general
preferences as well as preferences for SLDs, load summary reports, and load deletions.
The general preferences let you specify whether to open a dialog box after creating or
duplicating an item, activating the use of log files for reporting errors after performing some
batch operations, displaying in the Electrical Engineer buses, incomers, and bus risers
together with the associated PDB item tags.
SLD preferences allow you to customize various generation settings such as displaying NULL in
the generated drawing when there is no data, setting various margin settings, setting a distance
for SLD internal elements, and so forth.
The report settings let you specify the data that the software will use to generate your load
summary reports.
The delete load settings allows you to customize which related (sub) items of a main item are
deleted when deleting a main item from the Electrical Index.
Your preferences customization does not affect the preferences set by other users in the
plant. However, a user with Administrator rights can set new defaults and override your
user-defined preferences.

Customize General Preferences

General settings allow you to customize default preferences for creating and duplicating new
items, displaying PDB item tags in the Electrical Engineer, and activating log file generation.
1. Click File > Preferences.
2. On the General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an item, do one of the
following:
▪ Click None to display a created or duplicated item in the Electrical Index or the
Reference Data Explorer without opening either the Item Tag or Common Properties
dialog box, with a default property value and naming convention defined in Options
Manager.
▪ Click Item Tag dialog box to be able to type text for the item tag right after creating or
duplicating an item.
▪ Click Common Properties dialog box to be able to enter the required electrical
properties right after creating or duplicating an item.
3. Under Electrical Engineer display options for buses, incomers and bus risers, do one
of the following:
▪ Select the Include associated PDB item tags check box to display in the Electrical
Engineer item tags of buses, bus risers, and incomers together with the item tags of the
associated power distribution boards. For example, MCC \ Bus A.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 33

 Customizing Preferences

▪ Clear the Include associated PDB item tags check box to display in the Electrical
Engineer item tags of buses, bus risers, and incomers without the associated PDB item
tags. For example, Bus A.
4. Under Log file options, select Activate log file generation to enable generation of various
error log files.
5. Click OK or another tab.

Customize Preferences for SLD Generation

SLD preferences allow you to customize default preferences for single line (SLD) generation.
1. Click File > Preferences.
2. Click the SLD Generation tab.
3. Under SLD drawings, do one of the following:
▪ Select the Save settings of last generated drawing check box to apply settings
defined for the last generated drawing to all subsequent generations.
▪ Clear the Save settings of the last generated drawing check box to save only the
SLD margin preferences and return all the other SLD options to the application defaults.
Selecting the Save settings of the last generated drawing check box instructs the
software to apply all the settings defined on the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box
apart from the settings defined on the Preferences dialog box (SLD margins and Distance
for SLD internals). This preference option takes effect after generating an SLD and
applies to all subsequent SLD generations.
4. Do one of the following:
▪ Select Use bus tie symbols to show a horizontal representation between two buses
using the BusTie.sym file. In this case, the software shows the connection between the
two buses as a straight bus-tie connection without showing the items connected
between and within the circuits. Note that the BusTie symbol is a "circuit" type symbol
and has its first connection point on the rightmost side and the second connection point
at the leftmost side. Also, the item property in the SLD displays only the coupler
information. Furthermore, if you use the Find in SLD command, the software finds the
pertinent coupler and not the bus riser.
▪ Clear the Use bus tie symbols check box to use a vertical representation of a
connection between two buses. This is the standard bus coupler-riser circuit
connection representation that includes both coupler and the riser circuits and displays
them as vertical objects, connected to each other. The software displays both circuits
as standard arrows.
5. Under SLD margins, select the required unit of measure (mm or inches) and define the
margin settings.
6. Under Distance for SLD internals, enter values and select a unit of measure for
representation of buses, circuits and circuit components in a generated SLD:
▪ In Distance between circuits, set the horizontal distance between the circuits above
and below the buses.
▪ In Distance between buses, set the horizontal distance between the buses.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 34

 Customizing Preferences

▪ In Distance between circuit internals, set the vertical distance between the circuit
internal components (fuses, starters, and so forth).
7. Click OK or another tab.
After moving electrical items in a generated drawing, moving and resizing the
frames that the software draws around items belonging to PDBs and around circuits in each cell,
the software always retains the position of all electrical items in saved drawings without the need
to instruct the software to do so.

Customize All Feeder / Multi-Sheet Load Summary

Report Preferences
Allows you to specify various preference settings for the generation All Feeder/Multi-Sheet Load
Summary reports.

Displaying Plant Item Values for Plant Operating Cases

Just before the software starts generating your report, it automatically opens a dialog box which
allows you to select the plant operating cases for which you want to run the report. As a result,
the generated report will contain sets of load data, each set for a different operating case that
you select. This way you can compare the various bus loadings at different operating cases and
use them as a basis for equipment sizing. If only one operating case exists in the plant, the
software generates the report without opening this dialog box.
Prior to generating your report, select an appropriate template that
enables case data. The following templates are available with the shipped reports:
▪ Multi-Sheet Switchboard Summary.xlsm
▪ All Feeder Load Summary.xlsm

1. Click File > Preferences.

2. Click the Load Summaries and Reports tab.
3. Under Calculation method for All Feeder Load Summary Report, select one of the
following:
▪ Use Bus PDB coincidence factor — Select to use the coincidence factors of the PDB
bus to calculate the total connected loads on the bus. When calculating the
compensated load values, the software multiplies the raw uncompensated load kW and
kVAR values by the coincidence factors as defined in the properties of the buses that
these loads are connected to. Make sure that you specify these coincidence factors for
each bus.
▪ Use each load coincidence factor — Select to use the coincidence factor of each
individual load to calculate the total connected loads on the bus. When calculating the
compensated load values, the software multiplies the raw uncompensated load kW and
kVAR values by the load coincidence factors.
4. Under Inclusion of coupled buses in All Feeder Load Summary Report, select one of
the following:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 35

 Customizing Preferences

▪ Do not include coupled buses — Select to include in the calculation only those loads
that are connected to the current bus and do not include the loads that are connected
on the redundant buses.
▪ Include coupled buses connected by couplers only — Select to include in the
calculation the loads connected on the current bus as well as loads connected on all the
redundant buses that are connected to the current bus by a coupler circuit.
▪ Include coupled buses connected by couplers and bus risers — Select to include in
the calculation the loads of the current bus as well as the loads on all the redundant
buses that are connected to the current bus by coupler and riser circuits.
5. Under Report value types, select Rated or Consumed to instruct the software to display
rated power or consumed power values in a generated All Feeder/Multi-Sheet Load
Summary report.
6. Under Compensated/Uncompensated values, select Compensated or Uncompensated
to instruct the software to display compensated or uncompensated values in a generated All
Feeder/Multi-Sheet Load Summary report.
7. Select the Account for converting equipment power losses check box to instruct the
software to take into account the power losses when using converting equipment.
The software adds these power losses to the upstream feeding bus and accounts
for them as continuous loads. The same losses are also taken into account in the All
Feeder Load Summary and PDB Load Summary reports.
8. Click OK or another tab.

Customize Delete Loads Preferences

This procedure allows you to customize the Delete Loads default preferences that were set in
the Options Manager.
1. Click File > Preferences.
2. On the Delete Loads tab, under Delete Options select the options you want to apply when
deleting a main item.
3. Click OK or another tab.
Customizing the Delete Loads Preferences in Smart Electrical, overrides the Delete
Loads Preferences set in Options Manager for the specific user. It does not change Option
Manager's settings for other users.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 36

 Customizing Preferences

Customize Delete Load Preferences for a Specific

Item
1. In the Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by
clicking the + icons or by double-clicking the folders.
2. Select the item you want to delete and do one of the following:
▪ Right-click and on the shortcut menu select, Delete.

▪ Click .
▪ Click Edit > Delete
3. On the Confirm Item Delete prompt, click Delete Options.
4. Select or clear the options you want to apply when deleting the selected item.
5. Click Yes.
This procedure overrides the Delete Load Preferences for this specific item only. It
does not change the Delete Load Preferences in the software.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 37

SECTION 4

Getting Started with Smart Electrical

This section contains topics that will help get familiar with the Smart Electrical user interface.
You will get acquainted with the Electrical Index, Electrical Engineer, Reference Data
Explorer, and the Properties window, which are used for almost all basic operations in Smart
Electrical.

In This Section
Electrical Index .............................................................................. 38
Properties Window ......................................................................... 45
Reference Data Explorer ............................................................... 50
Electrical Engineer ......................................................................... 52

Electrical Index
The Electrical Index is the repository of all your plant electrical items. You create and manage
the electrical inventory of your plant using edit, duplicate, and delete operations. The electrical
items in the Electrical Index are organized by item type categories in a parent-child
relationship. This parent-child relationship is illustrated in the following example for a current
transformer. To see an existing current transformer, expand the following hierarchy in the
Electrical Index:
Electrical Equipment > Converting Equipment > Transformers >a transformer item >Metering
Equipment > a current transformer item.
For more details about the creation and management of electrical items, see Creating and
Modifying Equipment (see "Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items" on page 85).
You can create electrical associations by dragging an electrical item from the Electrical Index
to the Electrical Index. For details, see Electrical Engineer (on page 52).
The Electrical Index window contains the following sections:
▪ Toolbar
▪ Tree view pane
▪ List view pane
These sections are described below:

Toolbar

The toolbar contains the following options:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 38

 Getting Started with Smart Electrical

Find — Click Find to open the Find dialog box to search for a specific item based on the
search parameters that you define. The items that are available depend on the object from
which you invoke the Find command.

Refresh — Click Refresh to update the display of the current window. This feature is
useful where multiple users are working on the same set of data.

Views — Click Views to toggle through different views of the items in the list view pane.
The arrow beside the icon allows you to select a specific view.
Buttons — A button provides a useful shortcut to an item or a group of items. Click Buttons
to show or hide existing buttons. To create a button for the currently selected item or
folder, click the arrow and then click Add Button. To remove a button, select the button to
remove, then click the arrow, and then click Remove Button. Note that if you do not select any
button to remove, the software removes the uppermost button in the list.

Tree View Pane

The tree view pane of the Electrical Index shows the equipment in your inventory organized by
folders. Smart Electrical defines standard folders in the database. You cannot move, delete or
rename these folders, nor can you add new folders. However, you can create a custom folder
inside a specific item type folder. Each folder contains a particular item type, and the options
available on the menus depend on the currently selected item type.
Expand or collapse the hierarchy by clicking the + and - icons respectively or by double-clicking
a folder.
For equipment items that are connected in parallel, the software uses a special indicator
next to the equipment items that are connected in parallel.
The indicator is . For example, .
After fully expanding a hierarchy, double-click an item to open its Common Properties dialog
box. In the Documents folder, double-clicking a drawing or any other document also opens the
document Common Properties dialog box.
When you select a folder, the number of items in the folder appears in the status bar. You can
customize the sort sequence of items in the folders.

List View Pane

The list view pane of the Electrical Index displays items, other than folders, that are contained
in the currently selected folder or item in the tree view pane.

▪ You can open several instances of the Electrical Index by clicking Window > New >
Electrical Index.
▪ You can right-click any item in the Electrical Index to find it in the Electrical Engineer or
click an item in the Electrical Engineer to find it in the Electrical Index. Both the
Electrical Engineer and the Electrical Index have to be open if you want to use this
feature.
▪ After exiting Smart Electrical, and starting a new session, the software retains the size and
position of all the windows that were open in the previous session.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 39

 Getting Started with Smart Electrical

Customizing Folders
As your database in Smart Electrical expands, the need to organize the various item types into
sub-categories becomes apparent. Using custom folders, you can create sub-folders for each
item type folder. You can use these folders to divide item types into smaller more manageable
sections, for example within Wiring Equipment > Cables > Power Cables you could divide the
cables by manufacturer, cable specification, or insulation material. Using filters, you can place
power cables into more than one folder, for example you could create a folder for all power
cables manufactured by a specific company, and another folder for all power cables that meet
NEC specifications, a power cable manufactured by the specific company and that has an NEC
specification appears in the folder created for the manufacturer, and appears in the folder
created for NEC specification power cables, along with all other power cables that have NEC
specifications. The software creates the duplicate items without moving the original item from
the Electrical Index or the Reference Data Explorer.
Creating custom folders also improves the performance of Smart Electrical when you are
looking for items in the Electrical Index. Due to the large number of items that folders in the
Electrical Index may contain, opening a folder can take some time. Creating a custom folder,
for the first time, also creates a second sub-folder that contains all the items of the parent
folder. This is the All Items folder. Storing all the parent folder items in the All Items folder
and creating custom folders reduces the time the software takes to open the parent folder and
the custom folders. Also, when Smart Electrical searches the Electrical Index for an item, the
software first searches the custom folders and only searches the All Items folder if the item
cannot be found in a custom folder.

▪ In the Electrical Index, the definition of custom folders is set per user. In the Reference
Data Explorer, it's per plant.

Create a Custom Folder

This procedure allows you to create custom folders inside item type folders. Custom folders are
used when you want to divide an item type into smaller specific groups according to parameters
set by you. For example, you could divide power cables into groups according to their power
rating, divide the generators folder into groups according to their output, and so forth.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer or Electrical Index, expand the hierarchy and highlight the
item type folder to which you want to add a custom folder.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click File > New > Custom Folder.
▪ Right-click the item type folder, and on the shortcut menu, click New Custom Folder.
3. In the Name field, type the name of the new folder.
4. Next to the Filter field, click Browse to open the Select Filter dialog box, and do one of the
following:
▪ Select a filter and click OK.
▪ Create a new filter.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 40

 Getting Started with Smart Electrical

For more information on creating a filter, see Using Filters in the Filter Manager User's Guide.

▪ The first time you create a custom folder, a second folder called All Items is also created in
the parent folder. All the items in the parent folder are moved to this folder.
▪ Items that match the filter criteria are automatically duplicated in the custom folder, without
moving them from the All Items folder.
▪ Some standard folders already have a hard-coded filter, for example the power cables folder
has a hard-coded filter CableCategory = <Property>. When a hard-coded filter already
exists, the filter definition has to be set correctly or this could result in incorrect items
appearing in your custom folder. The filter definition for the custom folder should be Match
all, or the criteria of the existing hard-coded filter should be included in the filter for the
custom folder. For example; CableCategory = Power Cable and Conductor Arrangement =
3 core cable.

Apply a Filter to a Custom Folder

1. To apply a filter to a custom folder, do one of the following:
▪ Create a new custom folder and open the Select Filter dialog box. For details, see
Create a Custom Folder (on page 40).
▪ Right-click an existing custom folder and on the shortcut menu, click Properties. On the
Custom Folder Properties dialog box, click Browse.
2. On the Select Filter dialog box, open the folder that contains the required filter.
3. Select the required filter and click OK.
4. On the open dialog box, click OK.

▪ You create filters using Filter Manager, for more information, see Using Filters in the Filter
Manager User's Guide, under Using Filters.
▪ Some standard folders already have a hard-coded filter, for example the power cables folder
has a hard-coded filter CableCategory = <Property>. When a hard-coded filter already
exists, the filter definition has to be set correctly or this could result in incorrect items
appearing in your custom folder. The filter definition for the custom folder should be Match
all, or the criteria of the existing hard-coded filter should be included in the filter for the
custom folder. For example; CableCategory = Power Cable and Conductor Arrangement =
3 core cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 41

 Getting Started with Smart Electrical

Delete a Custom Folder

1. In the Reference Data Explorer or Electrical Index expand the hierarchy and find the
custom folder you want to delete.
2. Right-click the folder you want to delete and on the shortcut menu, click Delete Custom
Folder.
3. At the prompt, click Yes.
Deleting a custom folder does not remove the custom folder contents from the
database. These items can still be found in the All Items folder. The All Items folder is also
deleted, but not its contents, if the deleted custom folder is the only custom folder in the parent
folder.

Select a Set of Item Tags in the Electrical Index

You can make a multiple selection of item tags for performing editing operations in the
Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by
clicking the + icons or by double-clicking the folders.
2. Right-click a folder and adjust the size of the panes to view the items in the list view pane.

3. If required, change the view in the list view pane by clicking View Settings to toggle
through each view of the items in the list view pane, or click the arrow beside the icon and
select the required view.
4. Select one or more items in the list view pane. Hold CTRL to select several items or hold
SHIFT to select a range of items.
When you select a set of data, the list at the top of the Properties window displays
Select set and you can type properties that apply to all the items. Also, you can select a
specific item from the list to view or edit its individual properties.

Customize the Sort Sequence of Items in Tree Folders

This procedure explains how to customize the sort sequence of items within the main folders of
the Electrical Index and Reference Data Explorer.
1. Create a new .XML file and call it SpelItem.xml.
2. Place the file in your plant data location on the server.
3. Add the following content to the new .XML file:
<Root> <ItemType name="Item type">
<OrderBy>
<Attribute name="Attribute\Attribution" order="A"/>
</OrderBy>
</ItemType>

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 42

 Getting Started with Smart Electrical

</Root>

▪ You can add as many attribute name rows in the XML file as you need. We do not
recommend having more than three attributes so that not to affect the software
performance.
▪ ItemType name can be any item type that you need. "Motor" is given as an example.
▪ The order can be either ascending (A) or descending (D).
▪ The customization applies to folders in the Electrical Index and Reference Data Explorer.
▪ This customization applies to main folders and does not apply to sub-folders.
▪ This customization cannot be set according to select list properties or properties with
attached units of measure.
Example: <Root>
<ItemType name="Motor">
<OrderBy>
<Attribute name="PlantGroup.Name" order="A"/>
<Attribute name="TSN" order="A"/>
</OrderBy>
</ItemType>
</Root>

Show Related Items in a New Electrical Index Window

Smart Electrical allows you to select an item in the Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer and
show all the items that are related to the selected item in a new window. For example, if you
select a motor, the software displays the associated control station and feeder circuits grouped
together in a new window. This way you do not need to search for associated items and save
time when wiring your project items.
1. In the Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer right-click an item.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Show Related Items in a New Window.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 43

 Getting Started with Smart Electrical

Move an Item to Another Plant Group

This feature allows you to move multiple or single items to another plant group regardless of the
hierarchy level definitions made in Options Manager. The plant group definitions made in
Options Manager serve only as default settings and do not prevent you from moving items to
other hierarchy levels. Also, you can move items to a plant group that is different from the one in
which these items were created.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by clicking the + icons or by double-
clicking the folders.
2. Select one or more items of the same item type.
3. Click Actions > Move Items to open the Move Items to Plant Group dialog box.
4. Expand the plant hierarchy and then select the plant group that you require.
5. At the prompt, click Yes to confirm the move.

▪ You must have appropriate access rights for the target plant group to which you want to
move items.
▪ You can move any item type in any folder that is under the Electrical Equipment
folder. The software does not move any control stations, circuits, and so forth that are
associated with a moved item.
▪ If you move an item that has an I/O signal that is in the same plant group as that item, the
software moves the signal with the item to the target plant group. If the signal is in a plant
group that is different from the item's plant group, when you move the item the signal
remains in its original plant group.
▪ If you move a motor with a space heater, the software moves the space heater with the
motor. You cannot move space heaters independently.
▪ If you move a cable, the software also moves its conductors or cable sets. You cannot
move these cable components independently. Also, if you move one cable that is part of a
parallel cable assembly, the software moves all the cables in the assembly.
▪ If you move a junction box or a local panel, the software moves any circuits associated with
the moved item.
▪ You can move a PDB with its associated components, such as buses, cells, and circuits;
however, you cannot move those components independently.
▪ You can only move disconnect electrical equipment items that are not associated with any
circuits.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 44

 Getting Started with Smart Electrical

Properties Window
The Properties window display is a two-column table that provides the common properties of
the current item tag in the active window of the Electrical Index, Electrical Engineer,
Reference Data Explorer, or Engineering Data Editor. The active items always determine
the content of the Properties window. There can only be one Properties window open. If only
one tag is selected in the active window or in the EDE, or all tags are of the same type, all the
properties of that tag type are displayed. If the selected items have different values for their
common properties, the value field is blank. For select lists, there is a separating line below
which all the available values appear. You can modify the values for these properties in the
Properties window.
At the top of the Properties window is the Properties box, listing all of the selected items. You
can display properties alphabetically or by categories by clicking the corresponding display
mode button.
Item properties can be displayed by locating the appropriate item in the Properties box, as well
as by selecting in the Reference Data Explorer, Electrical Index, Electrical Engineer, EDE,
or open a single line diagram. If more than one item is selected in the active window, then the
list at the top of the Properties window contains the choice Select Set, and individual items in
the set can be selected from the list.
You can use the Copy Bulk Properties and Paste Bulk Properties buttons to copy properties
from one item to another. This action can be particularly useful when, for instance, changes
need to apply to more than one item.

▪ When you pause your pointer over the buttons on the Properties window toolbar, a ToolTip
appears, giving the name of the button.
▪ After exiting Smart Electrical, and starting a new session, the software retains the size and
position of all the windows that were open in the previous session.

Turn the Display of the Properties Window On or Off

1. Display the Properties window by doing one of the following:
▪ Click View > Display > Properties Window on the main menu bar.
▪ Right-click in an empty area of the main toolbar and then click Properties on the
shortcut menu.
2. Use the Properties window to view and edit item properties.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 45

 Getting Started with Smart Electrical

Use Select Set Mode in the Properties Window

You can use the Select Set feature in the Properties window to modify multiple items in bulk
mode. After activating the Select Set feature and selecting several items, the Properties
window displays all the properties that have common values. The changes that you make will
take effect for all the items in the select set.

1. On the Properties window toolbar, click Show Select Set.

2. In the Electrical Index, select a number of items in the Item Tag pane.
The list right above the toolbar in the Properties window displays Select Set.
3. Modify the properties as you require.
4. To modify the properties of a particular item belonging to the select set, select this item from
the list.
5. To switch back to the common values, from the list, click Select Set.

To switch to single item mode, click Show Single Item on the toolbar.

Review and Edit Item Properties

1. Select the item or items for which you want to review the properties.
2. Display the Properties window by doing one of the following:
▪ Click View > Display > Properties Window on the main menu bar.
▪ Right-click the empty area of the main toolbar and then click Properties on the shortcut
menu.
3. Enter or edit information in the cell next to the appropriate property.
If you have selected more than one item, you can perform global replacement of
property values by choosing Select Set from the list at the top of the Properties window
and typing data for the property you want to edit. The data value is then populated in all the
items of the select set.
4. Enter or edit information in the cell next to the appropriate property.

▪ You can review and edit item properties in the EDE too. You can edit the contents of some
cells directly in the table if the corresponding property is not read-only or generated strictly
by a calculation. Or you can click any cell or on the empty cell to the left of the table to
select an item and edit its properties in the Properties window.
▪ In place of values that include automatically assigned units of measure, you can type any
string preceded by a single quote. This is useful if you do not initially know a specific value
and want to insert a comment instead.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 46

 Getting Started with Smart Electrical

Properties Window Toolbar

You can customize the display of the Properties window by using the following Properties
window toolbar buttons:

Alphabetic — Lists properties in alphabetical order.

Categorized — Displays properties grouped by specific categories. Categories are defined

and properties are assigned to those categories in Data Dictionary Manager.

Show Brief Properties — Displays those properties that have been previously specified as
brief on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box.

Copy Bulk Properties — Copies the bulk properties of a selected item. The properties are
then available to paste onto other items. For more information, see Copy Bulk Properties.

Paste Bulk Properties — Pastes copied bulk properties onto the newly selected item or
items. You must have previously selected an item or items and copied bulk properties. For
more information, see Paste Bulk Properties.
Display Null — Displays a null value in blank properties that currently contain no
value. This option helps avoid confusion between empty cells and cells containing a zero. For
more information, see Display Null Values in the Properties Window (on page 50).

Show Case Data — Displays a list of case conditions, for example, temperatures,
pressures, and so forth. Case data includes both process cases and control cases, which are
displayed for equipment, pipe runs or instruments, according to relevance. To see the case
data that appears for corresponding items, look in Data Dictionary Manager.

Show Select Set — Allows you to modify the properties of multiple items (a select set of
items) that you selected in the Electrical Index or a drawing. When working in a drawing, using
a fence to select a set of items, displays the common properties of the selected items. This
option improves display performance.

Show Single Item — Allows you to modify the properties of single item that you select in
the Electrical Index or a drawing. When working in a drawing, using a fence to select a set of
items, displays the properties of one item only. If you select multiple items by holding down the
SHIFT key, the software displays the select set properties.

▪ The software includes a default set of bulk and brief properties, but you can change those
properties in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box.
▪ When a URL such as: http://www.google.com?hl=en&q=Intergraph is entered in a
Description field, the software will not recognize it as a URL because it contains special
characters (?, & and =). The user has to manually replace special characters with encoded
characters as shown.

Special Character Replace With

? ▪ 3F

= ▪ 3D

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 47

 Getting Started with Smart Electrical

Special Character Replace With

& ▪ 26

In this example, you would change:

http://www.google.com?hl=en&q=Intergraph
to:
http://www.google.com%3Fhl%3Den%26q%3DIntergraph

Copy Bulk Properties

1. In the Electrical Index or EDE window, select the item for which you want to copy the bulk
properties.

2. In the Properties window, click Copy Bulk Properties .

3. These properties are now available to paste onto another item. For more details, see Paste
Bulk Properties.
You must have a bulk layout defined for the item type of the selected item.

Paste Bulk Properties

1. In the Electrical Index or EDE window, select the item or items that you want to paste bulk
properties onto.
You must first have copied the bulk properties of a different item in order to paste
them onto your current selection. For more details, see Copy Bulk Properties.
2. If you have selected to paste onto more than one item, from the tag list at the top of the
Properties window, choose Select Set.

3. Click Paste Bulk Properties on the Properties window toolbar to paste properties
onto your current selection.

Customizing Data Display in the Properties Window

You can customize the display of the Properties window by using the following Properties
window toolbar buttons:

▪ Alphabetic — Lists properties in alphabetical order.

▪ Categorized — Displays properties grouped by specific categories.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 48

 Getting Started with Smart Electrical

▪ Copy Bulk Properties — Copies the bulk properties of a selected item. The
properties are then available on the Paste Bulk Items button.

▪ Display Null — Displays a null value in blank properties that currently contain no
value. This option help avoid confusion between empty cells and those containing a zero.

▪ Paste Bulk Properties — Pastes copied bulk properties onto the newly selected item
or items. You must have previously selected an item or items and copied bulk properties.

▪ Show Brief Properties — Displays those properties that have been previously
specified as Brief.

Customize Data Display in the Properties Window

1. If the Properties window is not already displayed, do one of the following:
▪ Click View > Display > Properties Window on the main menu bar.
▪ Right-click in an empty area of the main toolbar and then click Properties on the
shortcut menu.
2. You can display properties alphabetically or by categories by clicking the corresponding
display mode button. Click to display alphabetically. Click to display by
categories.

3. You can display only brief properties by clicking Show Brief Properties .

4. You can display a null character in empty properties cells by clicking Display Null .

▪ When you point to a button on the Properties window toolbar and pause over it, a ToolTip
displays the corresponding command.
▪ You create categories and assign properties to them in the Data Dictionary Manager.

Show Brief Properties

▪ Click the Show Brief Properties button in the Properties window.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 49

 Getting Started with Smart Electrical

Display Null Values in the Properties Window

1. Select an item in your drawing.
2. Right-click and select Properties.

3. Click the Display Null button to display a null value in blank properties.

Add a Text Box for UDFs in the Properties Window

In the Properties window, for long descriptions of user-defined properties, you can add a text
box where you can type a long text value.
This functionality is available only for user-defined properties that have the
String data type.
1. In Data Dictionary Manager, add or modify a property.
2. For the Data Type property, select String.
3. For the Calculation ID property, type the following value:
SPELForeignCalc.ForeignCalc
4. Click OK and close Data Dictionary Manager.

5. In the Properties window, scroll to the appropriate user-defined property and click to
open the text box where you can type your text as needed. Note that the length of the text is
determined by the value that you enter for the Maximum Length property when defining the
user-defined property in Data Dictionary Manager.

Reference Data Explorer

You use the Reference Data Explorer for creating and managing reference (typical) items that
you use as templates for your plant items that are maintained in the Electrical Index. For
details about creating reference items, see Create a Reference Item (on page 56).
The Reference Date Explorer window contains the following sections:
▪ Toolbar
▪ Tree view pane
▪ List view pane
These sections are described below:

Toolbar

The toolbar contains the following options:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 50

 Getting Started with Smart Electrical

Find — Click Find to open the Find dialog box to search for a specific item based on the
search parameters that you define. The items that are available depend on the object from
which you invoke the Find command.

Refresh — Click Refresh to update the display of the current window. This feature is
useful where multiple users are working on the same set of data.

Views — Click Views to toggle through different views of the items in the list view pane.
The arrow beside the icon allows you to select a specific view.
Buttons — A button provides a useful shortcut to an item or a group of items. Click Buttons
to show or hide existing buttons. To create a button for the currently selected item or
folder, click the arrow and then click Add Button. To remove a button, select the button to
remove, then click the arrow, and then click Remove Button. Note that if you do not select any
button to remove, the software removes the uppermost button in the list.

Tree View Pane

The tree view pane of the Reference Data Explorer shows typical items organized by
folders. Smart Electrical defines standard folders in the database. You cannot move or delete
these folders, nor can you add new folders. However, you can rename folders if required or
create a custom folder inside a specific item type folder. Each folder contains a particular item
type, and the options available on the menus depend on the currently selected item type.
You can create custom folders in the Reference Data Explorer. For details, see
Customizing Folders (on page 40).
When you select a folder, the number of items in the folder appears in the status bar. You can
customize the sort sequence of items in the folders. For details, see Customize the Sort
Sequence of Items in Tree Folders (on page 42).
Expand or collapse the hierarchy by clicking the + and - icons respectively or by double-clicking
a folder.
After fully expanding a hierarchy, double-click an item to open its Common Properties dialog
box. In the Documents folder, double-clicking a drawing or any other document also opens the
document Common Properties dialog box.

List View Pane

The list view pane of the Reference Data Explorer displays items, other than folders, that are
contained in the currently selected folder or item in the tree view pane.

▪ You can create several instances of the Reference Data Explorer by clicking Window >
New > Reference Data Explorer.
▪ After exiting Smart Electrical, and starting a new session, the software retains the size and
position of all the windows that were open in the previous session.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 51

 Getting Started with Smart Electrical

Select a Set of Item Tags in the Reference Data Explorer

You can make a multiple selection of item tags for performing editing operations in the
Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by
clicking the + icons or by double-clicking the folders.
2. Right-click a folder and adjust the size of the panes to view the items in the list view pane.

3. If required, change the view in the list view pane by clicking View Settings to toggle
through each view of the items in the list view pane, or click the arrow beside the icon and
select the required view.
4. Select one or more items in the list view pane. Hold CTRL to select several items or hold
SHIFT to select a range of items.
When you select a set of data, the list at the top of the Properties window displays
Select set and you can type properties that apply to all the items. Also, you can select a
specific item from the list to view or edit its individual properties.

Electrical Engineer
You use the Electrical Engineer to create and manage electrical associations among
equipment in your plant. You can make new electrical associations or change the existing
ones. You can create electrical associations by dragging items from the Electrical Index to an
appropriate place in the electrical tree of the Electrical Engineer window. For the rules that
govern electrical associations, see Rules for Associating Electrical Equipment (on page 224).
To change an electrical association, drag an item in the Electrical Engineer to another place in
the electrical tree. For more details, see Change an Existing Electrical Association (on page
228) and Rules for Changing Electrical Associations (on page 229).
The software synchronizes any new electrical relationships that you create in the Electrical
Engineer with the Electrical Index. When creating a new item in the Electrical Index, the
software also adds this item in the Electrical Engineer if appropriate (some items do not appear
the Electrical Engineer).
The Electrical Engineer allows you to generate and display single line
diagrams (SLDs) that show the electrical network distribution powered from an item selected in
the Electrical Engineer.

Display Rules
The Electrical Engineer displays electrical items based on their electrical
relationship. Therefore, a power source, for example, is always on a higher hierarchical level
than a load. The Electrical Engineer also shows every item that has an electrical connection
with a selected item. The following rules define which electrical items appear in the Electrical
Engineer:
▪ The Electrical Engineer displays all electrical items that have at least one electrical
association.
▪ Certain items appear automatically in the Electrical Engineer after you create them in the
Electrical Index. These items appear in the Electrical Engineer even if they do not have

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 52

 Getting Started with Smart Electrical

any electrical association. These items are generators, buses, circuits, battery banks,
battery chargers, UPSs, and transformers.
▪ The Electrical Engineer automatically displays power cables that the software creates
when you create a load or when you activate the Apply Option command to automatically
associate that load with a feeder.
▪ For a multiple cable assembly, you can hide or display the individual cables by right- clicking
the icon , and on the shortcut menu, clicking Show Multiple Cables. The software
indicates the display toggle state by a check mark.
▪ Items that have no hierarchical parents appear at the root of the Electrical Engineer
provided that they feed other items.
▪ For equipment items that are connected in parallel, the software uses a special indicator
next to the equipment items that are connected in parallel.
The indicator is . For example, .
▪ Certain items do not appear in the Electrical Engineer. These items are power distribution
boards, cells, control stations, and their cables. Only the items that are included in single
line diagrams or power distribution networks appear in the Electrical Engineer except for
circuit components that do not appear in the Electrical Engineer at all.
▪ You can display item tags of buses, bus risers, and incomers together with the item tags of
the associated power distribution boards if you set your general preferences accordingly.
The Electrical Engineer window contains the following sections:
▪ Toolbar
▪ Tree view pane
These sections are described below:

Toolbar
The toolbar contains the following options:

Find — Click Find to open the Find dialog box where you can look for a specific item in
the Electrical Engineer. Click the arrow to display a menu with the following options:
▪ Find — Opens the Find dialog box where you can look for a specific item in the Electrical
Engineer.
▪ Find in Electrical Index — Searches the Electrical Index for the item that is currently
selected in the Electrical Engineer. Note that both the Electrical Engineer and the
Electrical Index have to be open if you want to use this feature.
▪ Close — Closes the active Electrical Engineer window.

Refresh — Click Refresh to update the Electrical Engineer display. This feature is useful
where multiple users are working on the same set of data.
Buttons — Buttons provide a useful shortcut to an item or a group of items. Click Buttons
to toggle show / hide for existing buttons. To create a button for the currently selected
item or folder, click the arrow and click Add Button. To remove a button, select the button to
remove, then click the arrow, and click Remove Button. Note that if you do not select any
button to remove, the software removes the uppermost button in the list.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 53

 Getting Started with Smart Electrical

Tree View Pane

The tree view pane of the Electrical Engineer shows electrical items organized in the Plant
folder. You cannot move, delete, or rename this folder, nor can you add new folders. Each
item contained in the Plant folder contains other items that are associated with it
electrically. The options available on the menus depend on the currently selected item type.
Expand or collapse the hierarchy by clicking the + and - icons respectively or by clicking an item
in the Plant folder hierarchy.
After fully expanding a hierarchy, double-click an item to open its Common Properties dialog
box.

▪ You can open several instances of the Electrical Engineer by clicking Window > New >
Electrical Engineer.
▪ You can right-click any item in the Electrical Index to find it in the Electrical Engineer or
click an item in the Electrical Engineer to find it in the Electrical Index. Both the
Electrical Engineer and Electrical Index have to be open if you want to use this feature.
▪ You can right-click any item in the Electrical Engineer and then click Expand All
Sub-Items on the shortcut menu to display all the existing child items of the selected
items. After clicking this option a second time, click Refresh to expand the items in the
Electrical Engineer tree view.
▪ You can filter the display of the Electrical Engineer and show only the selected branches of
the network structure by clicking Show Only on the View menu.
▪ To display all the existing data in the Electrical Engineer, close the Electrical Engineer
and open a new session by clicking on the main toolbar.
Also, you can display the selected branches of the network structure in a new Electrical
Engineer window by clicking Show in New Window on the View menu.
▪ After exiting Smart Electrical, and starting a new session, the software retains the size and
position of all the windows that were open in the previous session.

Find Other Parent Items in the Electrical Engineer

This option allows you to find all other parent items that are associated with a selected item on a
higher hierarchy level in the Electrical Engineer. For example, you can select a bus and find
all other incomers that are associated with this bus.
1. In the Electrical Engineer, navigate to the required item.
2. Right-click the item and click Find Other Parent Items.
3. On the Find dialog box, in the Results data window, select an item and then click Apply.

▪ The software highlights the parent item in the Electrical Engineer. You can repeat the
procedure to find another parent item.
▪ To select a single item and close the Find dialog box, click OK.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 54

 Getting Started with Smart Electrical

Show Related Items in a New Electrical Engineer Window

Smart Electrical allows you to select an item in the Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer and
show all the items that are related to the selected item in a new window. For example, if you
select a motor, the software displays the associated control station and feeder circuits grouped
together in a new window. This way you do not need to search for associated items and save
time when wiring your project items.
1. In the Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer right-click an item.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Show Related Items in a New Window.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 55

SECTION 5

Creating and Using Reference Data

Reference items are predefined typical items that you can use to create plant items for your
plant in the Electrical Index with the minimum amount of manual data entry.
You create reference items in the Reference Data Explorer. You can create various types of
electrical item, for example motors, cables, panels, junction boxes, control stations, and so on.
Also, you can create typical cable block diagrams, typical schematic blocks, typical schematic
drawings, I/O signals, profiles, and lookup tables. You can then create a plant item based on a
reference item by simply dragging a reference item to an appropriate folder in the Electrical
Index.

Create a Reference Item

This procedure explains how to create typical items in the Reference Data Explorer and use
these typical items as templates for new items or for profiles. For information on how to create a
reference item based on a plant item, see Create a Reference Item Based on a Plant Item (on
page 57).
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the folder hierarchy by clicking the + icons or by
double-clicking the folders.
2. Right-click the folder or parent item where you are going to add the new item, and then click
New.
3. Accept the default item tag or type a name of up to 80 characters for the item.
4. Edit the item properties in the Properties window according to the catalog information.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create the item.
▪ Some items have a Common Properties dialog box from which you can edit the most
common properties for the item. You access this dialog box by clicking the Common
Properties command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open
the dialog box directly when you create the item. For full details of the properties, see the
appropriate dialog box topic.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 56

 Creating and Using Reference Data

Create a Reference Item Based on a Plant Item

You can create a reference item in the Reference Data Explorer based on a plant item that
exists in the Electrical Index. This way, the software creates reference items by duplicating all
the appropriate definitions of the selected plant item.
1. In the Electrical Index, select a plant item that you want to use a basis for the new
reference item.
2. Drag the plant item to the corresponding folder in the Reference Data Explorer. For
example, drag a plant motor to the Electrical Equipment > Loads > Motors folder in the
Reference Data Explorer.
Note the following:
▪ The following item types can be used to create reference items in the manner described
above:
▪ All load types.
▪ All converting equipment types.
▪ All power sources.
▪ All types of circuits (these will be created as typical circuits)
▪ All types of disconnect electrical equipment.
▪ All types of protection relays and their relay functions.
▪ All types of panels including cabinets, local panels, control stations, and junction boxes.
▪ The following item types cannot be used to create reference items in the manner described
above:
▪ Power distribution boards.
▪ Cables,
▪ Cable glands.
▪ Cableway components.
▪ I/O sets.
▪ Cable drums.
▪ Documents (drawings and reports)
▪ Related items such as associated control stations, I/Os, or control cables are not created in
the Reference Data Explorer.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 57

 Creating and Using Reference Data

Creation of Child Items in the Reference Data Explorer

When dragging a main plant item, such as a motor, to the Reference Data Explorer, the
software automatically creates reference child items in accordance to the existing plant items.
For example, if a plant motor has a child space heater, the software automatically creates a
child space heater for the new reference motor.

▪ If more than one space heater exists under a plant motor, the software will create only
one reference child space heater for that motor by duplicating the definitions of the plant
space heater that has the highest item tag sequence.
▪ Child items of plant items cannot be used as a basis for the creation of reference items.

Copy a Reference Item to the Electrical Index

When you copy a reference item containing typical data that you use frequently, you save time
by using the reference item as a template. This way, you do not have to type common values
every time that you create a new item in the Electrical Index.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the folder hierarchy by clicking the + icons or by
double-clicking the folders until you can see the item that you want to copy.
2. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by clicking the + icons or by double-
clicking the folders and navigate to the folder of the item type corresponding to the item that
you want to copy. For example, to copy a motor, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical
Equipment > Loads > Motors and select the Motors folder.
3. Drag the item from the Reference Data Explorer to the appropriate folder in the Electrical
Index.
You can copy an item from the Reference Data Explorer only to a folder in the
Electrical Index that can contain items of the same type.
4. Accept the default item tag that is based on the naming convention for the item type or type
your own item tag according to the naming convention.
For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming Conventions (on
page 85).
5. For the item that you copied to the Electrical Index, edit the item properties in the
Properties window.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create the item.
▪ Some items have a Common Properties dialog box from which you can edit the most
common properties for the item. You access this dialog box by clicking the Common
Properties command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open
the dialog box directly when you create the item. For full details of the properties, see the
appropriate dialog box topic.
▪ When you copy a reference item, the software copies the item properties, except for the
Item tag property, which follows the item naming convention.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 58

 Creating and Using Reference Data

For an item that includes sub- items, such as a typical circuit with internal components, the
software copies the sub-items as well. In this case, the sub-items are the circuit components.

Create a Typical Electrical Motor

Most loads in your plant are likely to be electrical motors, many with similar properties. For
convenience of creating motors in the Electrical Index, you can create typical motors to use as
templates for creating each group of plant motors with common properties. Also, when you
create an electrical motor, you can specify a space heater used to heat the motor windings
during the non-operating state of the motor.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment >
Loads > Motors.
2. Right-click the Motors folder, and then click New Motor or New Motor with Heater.
3. Accept the default item tag or type a name of up to 80 characters for the motor.
4. Right-click the motor and click Common Properties to open the Electrical Motor Common
Properties dialog box.
5. On the Electrical Motor Common Properties dialog box, edit the motor properties as
required. For more details, see Edit Electrical Motor Common Properties.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create a new
electrical motor.
▪ The Electrical Motor Common Properties dialog box shows the most commonly used
properties. You access this dialog box by clicking the Common Properties command on
the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open the dialog box directly when
you create a new electrical motor.
▪ You can also edit the most commonly used properties and additional properties in the
Properties window or in the EDE.
▪ When you add a motor with a space heater, the heater appears as a sub-item of the
motor. If you subsequently delete the motor, the software also deletes the heater.

Create Typical I/O Signals

You can create typical I/O signals grouped together in typical I/O sets. You can then include a
typical I/O set in a profile that can be used with a plant item or apply a typical I/O set to a plant
control station or a circuit.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, right-click the Typical I/O sets folder, and then click New
Typical I/O Set.
2. Right-click the new typical I/O set and select New Signal on the shortcut menu.
3. Accept the default item tag or type a name of up to 80 characters for the I/O signal.
4. Enter values for the I/O signal in the Properties window as you require.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 59

 Creating and Using Reference Data

Creating Typical Panels

You can create the following types of typical panels in the Reference Data Explorer:
▪ Cabinets — Multi-purpose electrical enclosures for various types of equipment. For more
information, see Create a Typical Cabinet (on page 60).
▪ Control Stations — Small cabinets containing low voltage start-stop circuitry used to
control a load at a remote location. For more information, see Create a Typical Control
Station (on page 61).
▪ Local Panels — Cabinets containing circuit, equipment, and wiring items, used for example,
to provide switching or isolation close to a motor. For more information, see Create a
Typical Local Panel (on page 62).
▪ Junction Boxes — Containers for electrical connections. For more information, see
Create a Typical Junction Box (on page 62).
In contrast to power distribution boards (PDBs), panels are much smaller in size and
do not contain busbars.

Create a Typical Cabinet

1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Panels.
2. Right-click the Cabinets folder, and then click New.
3. Accept the default item tag or type a name of up to 80 characters for the cabinet.
If you are creating a number of typical cabinets at one time, you may want to stop at
this point and edit the typical cabinet properties at a later stage.
4. On the Cabinet Common Properties dialog box, edit the typical cabinet properties as
required.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create a new
typical cabinet.
▪ You access the Cabinet Common Properties dialog box by clicking the Common
Properties command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open
the dialog box directly when you create a new typical cabinet.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 60

 Creating and Using Reference Data

Create a Typical Control Station

1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Panels.
2. Right-click the Control Stations folder, and then click New.
3. Accept the default item tag or type a name of up to 80 characters for the control station.
If you are creating a number of typical control stations at one time, you may want to
stop at this point and edit the typical control station properties at a later stage.
4. On the Reference Control Station Common Properties dialog box, edit the typical control
station properties as required. For more details, see Edit Typical Control Station Common
Properties (on page 61).

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create a new
typical control station.
▪ You access the Reference Control Station Common Properties dialog box by clicking the
Common Properties command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences
to open the dialog box directly when you create a new typical control station.

Edit Typical Control Station Common Properties

1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Panels
> Control Stations.
2. Right-click the required control station and on the shortcut menu, click Common
Properties.
3. On the Reference Control Station Common Properties dialog box, add a cable to the
control station by clicking Add and performing the following steps.
4. On the Select Reference Cable dialog box, select the required cable specification.
5. Click Find to open the Reference Cable Library dialog box and select the cable you
require.
6. Repeat the preceding steps if you require additional cables.
7. To remove a cable from the control station, select the required cable under Associated
cables and click Remove.
You can define as many reference control stations as required for assigning to loads
by applying equipment profiles.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 61

 Creating and Using Reference Data

Create a Typical Local Panel

1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Panels.
2. Right-click the Local Panels folder and then click New Local Panel.
3. Accept the default item tag or type a name of up to 80 characters for the local panel.

Create a Typical Junction Box

1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Panels.
2. Right-click the Junction Boxes folder and then click New Junction Box.
3. Accept the default item tag or type a name of up to 80 characters for the junction box.

Create a Typical Circuit

This feature allows you to create a typical circuit in the Reference Data Explorer. You can use
a typical circuit as a template for creating new plant circuits that appear in the Electrical
Index. While editing the common properties of a typical circuit, you can associate the circuit
internal components with appropriate lookup tables.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, right-click the Typical Circuits folder and then click an
option to create a new typical circuit of one of the following standard types:
▪ New Feeder Circuit
▪ New Incomer Circuit
▪ New Coupler Circuit
▪ New Bus Riser Circuit
▪ New Panel Circuit
2. Accept the default item tag or type a name of up to 80 characters for the circuit.
3. Right-click the circuit and on the shortcut menu, click an option to create a new internal
component.
You can also create a circuit component by dragging an item from a folder under
Disconnect Electrical Equipment. For more information, see Copy Components to a
Typical Circuit (on page 63).
4. Right-click the new typical circuit and open its common properties.
5. In the Details of circuit internals data window, click under Lookup Table and select an
appropriate lookup table that you want to associate with the corresponding circuit internal
component.
You must first create an appropriate lookup table that is associated with the current
circuit internal component. For details, see Associate and Apply a Lookup Table to a Circuit
Internal Component (on page 78).
6. Repeat the previous steps as often as needed to create additional items for the circuit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 62

 Creating and Using Reference Data

Copy Components to a Typical Circuit

1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the Typical Circuits folder and locate the
required typical circuit.
Before dragging items between folders in the Reference Data Explorer, for
convenience, you can create another Reference Data Explorer window. To do this, click
Window > New > Reference Data Explorer.
2. Expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Power Distribution Equipment >
Disconnect Electrical Equipment.
3. In one of the following folders, expand the folder and select an existing item, or create a new
item in the folder:
▪ Contractors
▪ Overload Relays
▪ Disconnect Switches
▪ Circuit Breakers
▪ Fuses
▪ Starters
▪ Other Disconnect Equipment
▪ Metering Equipment (select a sub-folder)
4. Drag the required item to the typical circuit.
5. Repeat the above steps as often as needed to create additional components for the circuit.

Copy from Typical Circuit Components

1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment >
Power Distribution Equipment > Disconnect Electrical Equipment.
Before dragging items between folders in the Reference Data Explorer, for
convenience, you can create another Reference Data Explorer window. To do this, click
Window > New > Reference Data Explorer.
2. In the Typical Circuits folder, expand a typical circuit.
3. Drag the required circuit component in the typical circuit to the Disconnect Electrical
Equipment sub-folder appropriate for the item type from among the following:
▪ Contractors
▪ Overload Relays
▪ Disconnect Switches
▪ Circuit Breakers
▪ Fuses
▪ Starters
▪ Other Disconnect Equipment

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 63

 Creating and Using Reference Data

▪ Metering Equipment (select a sub-folder)

After copying an item by dragging it from a typical circuit to a Disconnect Electrical
Equipment sub-folder, you can drag the item to copy it to another typical circuit.

Create a Profile
You can create a profile for an item in the Reference Data Explorer and use it to create
associated items as well as to define default values for the main item and associated items in
the Electrical Index.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the Profiles folder hierarchy by clicking the + icon
and select the item type folder for the profile that you want to create.
2. Right-click the folder and then click New Profile.
3. Accept the default item tag or type a name of up to 80 characters for the profile.
If you are creating a number of profiles at one time, you may want to stop at this
point and edit the profile properties at a later stage.
4. On the Equipment Profile Properties dialog box, edit the profile properties as
required. For more details, see Edit Profile Common Properties (on page 64).

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create a new
profile.
▪ You access the Equipment Profile Properties dialog box (on page 1124) by clicking the
Common Properties command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences
to open the dialog box directly when you create a new profile.
Now you can do one of the following:
▪ To continue with the next step in the recommended workflow for generating a schematic
drawing, see Apply a Profile to an Item.
▪ Return to the Recommended Workflow for Generating Schematic Drawings (on page 465).

Edit Profile Common Properties

1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the Profiles folder hierarchy by clicking the + icon
and select the item type folder for the profile that you want to edit.
2. Right-click the required profile and on the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
3. On the Equipment Profile Properties dialog box, click the General tab.
4. To change the profile name, click in the Profile tag box and type the profile name or click
the ellipsis button beside the box.
If you want to use this profile as the default whenever you apply a profile to an item,
select Set as default.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 64

 Creating and Using Reference Data

5. Under Default reference item, select a reference item for copying the property values when
you apply the profile.
If you choose a motor that includes an internal heater, the Space Heater tab
becomes enabled.
6. To associate cables with the item referenced in the profile, under Associated cables, click
Add to open the Select Reference Cable dialog box, where you can select the required
cable.
You can add more than one cable to a profile.
7. Under Typical control station, click Add.
8. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now to display the available control stations.
9. In the list of control stations, highlight each control station that you want to associate with
the profile.
10. Click OK to add the selected control stations to the profile and return to the Equipment
Profile Properties dialog box.
11. Click the Protection Devices tab.
12. Under Typical circuit, click Find to find and select a typical circuit.
After selecting a typical circuit, the software displays the circuit function and the
existing internal components.
13. For a motor that includes an internal heater, click the Space Heater tab and define cables
and a typical circuit as required for the heater.
14. Click the Miscellaneous tab to specify a typical schematic and lookup table for the profile.
15. Under Typical schematic, click Find to find and select a typical schematic.
16. Under Lookup table, click Find to find and select a lookup table.
For more details of how to find items, see the Find dialog box.
Now you can do one of the following:
▪ To continue with the next step in the recommended workflow for generating a schematic
drawing, see Apply a Profile to an Item.
▪ Return to the Recommended Workflow for Generating Schematic Drawings (on page 465).

Typical Cable Block Diagrams

You can create typical cable block diagrams in the Reference Data Explorer. You can use
typical CBDs as a basis for your graphical design. Creating typical CBDs that contain a number
of typical electrical items that have predefined associations and definitions can be very helpful
when creating new CBDs in your plant. You can create a number of different typical CBDs that
cover the most frequently used scenarios in your plant. You can then drag a predefined typical
CBD to the Cable Block Diagrams folder in the Electrical Index or create a new plant CBD
based on an existing typical CBD. The software will then create a new plant CBD, create all the
plant electrical items based on the selected typical CBD, and make all the associations among
these items as they have been designed in the typical cable block diagram. The new plant CBD
and all the newly created electrical items will then appear in the Electrical Index.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 65

 Creating and Using Reference Data

When opening an existing typical cable block diagram,

▪ The software synchronizes the content of the typical CBD with the data in the Reference
Data Explorer. That is, if for some reason, a reference item used in the typical CBD has
been deleted from the Reference Data Explorer, this change is reflected in the typical
cable block diagrams that contain that reference item.
▪ The software synchronizes the properties of the typical items placed on the drawing with the
properties of the reference items in the Reference Data Explorer. That is, if you change the
properties of a reference item that has already been placed on a typical CBD, this change
will also be reflected in all the typical CBDs where this item has been used.
▪ The software synchronizes the typical local panels and junction boxes with the data in the
Reference Data Explorer. That is, if for some reason, a circuit associated with a local panel
or junction box used in the typical CBD has been deleted or a new circuit has been added,
this change is reflected in the typical cable block diagrams that contain these reference
items.
You design a typical CBD by dragging appropriate reference items to an open drawing. You can
drag almost any reference item (cables, loads, circuits, and so forth) from the Reference Data
Explore and create associations among them just like in a plant CBD. For details, see Create a
Typical Cable Block Diagram (on page 66).
The presentation of items in typical block diagrams is the same as in plant CBDs. To symbolize
the placed items on the drawing, the software uses either a shipped symbol taken from the
reference data (specified by you on the Locations page in Options Manager) or a custom
symbol that you have associated with a specific item. If these images are not available in the
specified folder, the software uses a default image taken from the shipped reference data. For
more information, see Customizing Symbols and Defining File Locations in the Smart Electrical
Option Manager Users Guide.
The rules for placing items, making connections, removing items from a typical CBD, and so
forth are the same as the ones for plant cable block diagrams. For details, see Working with
Smart Data and Auxiliary Graphics in a CBD (on page 529).

Create a Typical Cable Block Diagram

This topic describes how to create a typical cable block diagram in the Reference Data
Explorer.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, right-click the Typical Cable Block Diagrams folder.
2. On the shortcut menu, click, New Typical Cable Block Diagram.
3. Right-click the new typical cable block diagram and then click Document Properties.
4. On the Typical Cable Block Diagram Options dialog box, do the following:
a. Under Document number, type a name of up to 80 characters for the new typical CBD.
b. Click in the Description box and type a brief description if needed.
c. From the Template name, select an appropriate drawing template.
d. To filter the display of cables in the CBD, select the appropriate check boxes under
Display cable types in cable block diagrams.
5. Click OK.
6. Do one of the following to open the drawing:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 66

 Creating and Using Reference Data

▪ Double-click the name of the new typical block diagram.

▪ Right-click the typical block diagram and then on the shortcut menu, click Open.
7. Drag the appropriate reference items from the Reference Data Explorer to the open
drawing.
You can drag the following reference items to an open cable block diagram:
▪ All electrical equipment items apart from power distribution boards, buses, and relay
functions.
▪ You can drag disconnect electrical equipment items if they are stand-alone items,
that is, if they do not belong to any circuits.
▪ Metering equipment items can be dragged only if they are current transformers or
potential transformers.
▪ All wiring equipment items (panels, cables, and so forth) apart from busways, glands
and cableway components.

8. When done, click on the main toolbar before closing the drawing.

▪ If you place typical circuits, reference control stations, or reference instruments that are
associated with typical cables, the software places these reference cables on the drawing
and retains the associations.
▪ If you delete any of the reference items that have been placed on a typical drawing, this item
will no longer appear on the drawings.
▪ In addition to smart graphics, you can also add auxiliary graphics, redlining, and annotations
to your CBD. For details, see Working with Smart Data and Auxiliary Graphics in a CBD (on
page 529). Once you save the drawing, the software retains all your additions and
modifications.
▪ You can create a plant CBD based on a predefined typical CBD. For details, see Creating
Cable Block Diagrams (on page 526).

Using Reference Control Stations, Typical Circuits, and

Reference Instruments in Typical CBDs
You can drag reference control stations, typical circuits, and reference instruments to a typical
cable block diagram. This enables you to place on your typical CBD drawing a typical set that
includes the selected reference control station, typical circuit, or instrument with all the
associated reference cables. Furthermore, after placing such a reference set on the drawing, the
software no longer retains the association with the related reference cable. That is, if for
example, you dissociate the reference cable from the reference control station, the typical CBD
will still retain the related cable on the drawing. Likewise, you can add or remove cables from
the reference items that you have placed on the drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 67

 Creating and Using Reference Data

Using Reference Motors with Space Heaters in Typical CBDs

You can place reference motors with space heaters on typical cable block diagrams. Once you
drag such a reference motor to a typical CBD drawing, the software places both the motor and
its associated space heater on the drawing. The software places an association connector
between the reference motor and its associated space heater. You can use an appropriate
compound symbol to represent a reference motor with a space heater on a typical CBD.
Note the following:
▪ If you remove a reference motor from a drawing, the software also removes the associated
space heater.
▪ You cannot remove a space heater and keep its motor on a drawing. To remove a reference
space heater, you must remove its associated reference motor. The software will then
remove both items from the drawing.
▪ Association connectors between reference motors and their space heaters cannot be
removed from a CBD drawing. However, you can instruct the software to hide the
association connectors on the current CBD drawing. For details, see Hide Association
Connectors (on page 69).

Using Reference Junction Boxes and Local Panels in

Typical CBDs
When placing on typical cable block diagrams reference junction boxes and local panels that
have associated circuits, remember the following:
▪ If the reference junction box or local panel has associated circuits, the associated circuits
can be placed on a typical CBD only with their associated junction box or local panel. When
dragging such a junction box or local panel to a typical CBD, the software places the
associated circuit automatically.
▪ You can use a custom compound symbol to represent a junction box or a local panel with
associated circuits in the drawing. Make sure that you use an appropriate compound symbol
for such a junction box or local panel. That is, the number of circuits in the compound
symbol has to match the number of circuits associated with the reference junction box or
local panel that that you want to place on a typical CBD. If the number of circuits does not
match, the typical CBD will display the associated circuits as they appear in the compound
symbol that you used for that reference junction box or local panel.
▪ If you choose not to use a custom compound symbol for a reference junction box or local
panel, the software will place associated circuits on the drawing automatically and it will also
display the non -power flow association connectors between the junction box and the local
panel. You can hide these connectors if you like. For details, see Hide Association
Connectors (on page 69).
Note that the rules stated above apply only to typical circuits that have been
created under reference junction boxes and local panels and not to typical circuits that have
been created in the Typical Circuits folder of the Reference Data Explorer.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 68

 Creating and Using Reference Data

Make Non-Power Flow Associations in a Typical CBD

The following procedure explains how to create an association between a reference control
station or reference instrument and a reference equipment item. For example, you can create an
association between a reference motor and a reference control station or create an association
between a reference instrument and a reference heater.
Once an association has been established, the software places a logical connector between the
two associated items. By default, the software shows logical connectors as black dashed lines.
You can change the style of the line by using the Define Item Type Symbology feature in
Options Manager (in Options Manager, click .Options > Item Type Symbology > Define).
The association created by the software is only kept in the typical CBD
drawing that you are currently working on. After creating a plant CBD based on the current
typical CBD, logical associations will become real associations between plant items.
1. Open an existing typical CBD or create a new one.
2. Place the required reference equipment items on the drawing.
3. Place an appropriate reference control station, reference instrument or both on the drawing.

4. On the Edit Drawing toolbar, click or click Edit > Activate Association Mode.

▪ The software indicates that connection mode is active by changing mouse pointer to a
vertical line.
▪ The software stays in the connection mode until you press the ESC key.
5. Click one of the required items and then the other item to associate them with each other.
The software places a logical connector between the associated items. The logical
connector is shown as a black dashed line.
To dissociate two items from each other, do one of the following:

▪ Click the required logical connector and then press the Delete key or click (Remove) on
the Edit drawing toolbar.
▪ Remove one of the associated items from the drawing.

Hide Association Connectors

You can instruct the software to show or hide non-power flow association connectors on a
typical cable block diagram.
Do one of the following:

▪ On the Edit drawing toolbar, click .

▪ On the Edit menu, click Show/Hide Association Connectors.
By hiding the association connectors, you are not dissociating the items from each
other. To cancel an association, do one of the following:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 69

 Creating and Using Reference Data

▪ Click the required logical connector and then press the DELETE key or click (Remove)
on the Edit drawing toolbar.
▪ Remove one of the associated items from the drawing.

Create Typical Schematic Blocks

Blocks are the basic graphical components of schematics. You create your library of blocks in
the Reference Data Explorer. The definition of each block comprises the block name, the
block type, and the drawing file associated with the block. You can create the drawing files for
use with blocks in the Catalog Manager, or in an external CAD application such as SmartSketch,
AutoCAD, or MicroStation.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, right-click the Typical Blocks folder, and then click New.
2. Accept the default item tag or type a name of up to 50 characters for the typical block.
If you are creating a number of schematic blocks at one time, you may want to stop
at this point and edit the schematic block properties at a later stage.
3. On the Typical Schematic Block Common Properties dialog box, edit the schematic
block properties as required. For more details, see Edit Typical Schematic Block Common
Properties (on page 70).

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create a new
typical schematic block.
▪ You access the Typical Schematic Block Common Properties dialog box by clicking the
Common Properties command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences
to open the dialog box directly when you create a new typical schematic block.
Now you can do one of the following:
▪ To continue with the next step in the recommended workflow for generating a schematic
drawing, see Create a Typical Schematic (on page 71).
▪ Return to the Recommended Workflow for Generating Schematic Drawings (on page 465).

Edit Typical Schematic Block Common Properties

1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the Typical Blocks folder by clicking the + icon
beside the folder.
2. Right-click the required block and on the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
3. On the Typical Schematic Block Common Properties dialog box, under Block details,
select the required block type in the Block type list.

4. Beside File name, click the ellipsis button to navigate to the drawing file that contains
the graphical representation of the block.
You can only select drawing files from the default folder specified in the Options
Manager; you can navigate to other folders, but you will not be able to select any files in
those folders.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 70

 Creating and Using Reference Data

5. Click Add to add the block to the library without having to close the dialog box.
6. To delete from the database a block that is not used in any typical schematic, select the
required block and click Delete.
7. When done, click Apply.

▪ Each block can have one or more associated macros. You can define and edit macros
using the Catalog Manager or an external CAD application such as SmartSketch, AutoCAD,
or MicroStation.
Now you can do one of the following:
▪ To continue with the next step in the recommended workflow for generating a schematic
drawing, see Create a Typical Schematic (on page 71).
▪ Return to the Recommended Workflow for Generating Schematic Drawings (on page 465).

Create a Typical Schematic

Many electrical items have a common circuit layout, where the graphical components are
identical, but the data is different. In order to generate a schematic for a particular load, you
must create a typical schematic. A typical schematic includes drawing blocks and macros to
represent the graphical components and data types respectively. Note that you can create
schematic drawings that include several sheets. Multi-sheet schematics are mostly used when
you need to display complex electrical equipment for which a single sheet is not enough to show
all the relevant wiring details of the equipment. The software uses the typical schematic as a
template for generating the schematic drawing that contains the actual load data.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, right-click the Typical Schematics folder, and then click
New.
2. Accept the default item tag or type a name of up to 80 characters for the typical schematic.
If you are creating a number of typical schematics at one time, you may want to stop
at this point and edit the typical schematic properties at a later stage.
3. On the Typical Schematic Common Properties dialog box, edit the typical schematic
properties as required. For more details, see Edit Typical Schematic Common Properties
(on page 72).

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create a new
typical schematic.
▪ You access the Typical Schematic Common Properties (see "Typical Schematic Common
Properties Dialog Box" on page 1138) dialog box by clicking the Common Properties
command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open the dialog box
directly when you create a new typical schematic.
▪ You can add various macros to the title block that will appear in the schematic drawing. For
more details, see Title Block Macros (see "Title Block Macros for Conventional Drawings" on
page 318).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 71

 Creating and Using Reference Data

Now you can do one of the following:

▪ To continue with the next step in the recommended workflow for generating a schematic
drawing, see Create a Profile (on page 64).
▪ Return to the Recommended Workflow for Generating Schematic Drawings (on page 465).

Edit Typical Schematic Common Properties

Many electrical items have a common circuit layout, where the graphical components are
identical, but the data is different. In order to generate a schematic for a particular load, you
must create a typical schematic. A typical schematic includes drawing blocks and macros to
represent the graphical components and data types respectively. Note that you can create
schematic drawings that include several sheets. Multi-sheet schematics are mostly used when
you need to display complex electrical equipment for which a single sheet is not enough to show
all the relevant wiring details of the equipment. The software uses the typical schematic as a
template for generating the schematic drawing that contains the actual load data.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the Typical Schematics folder by clicking the +
icon beside the folder.
2. Right-click a schematic and on the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
3. On the Typical Schematic Common Properties dialog box, add a block to the schematic
by clicking Add to add a new line to the list under Schematic blocks.
When adding blocks that comprise the typical schematic, make sure that
all the blocks belong to the same CAD format. Generating a schematic drawing based on a
typical schematic that uses different CAD formats (for example, .sym and .dgn files) may
result in generation errors.
4. Under Block details, select the required block in the Block name list.
You can click View to preview the currently selected block before adding it to the
typical schematic.
5. Select the starting point for the bottom left corner of the block relative to the bottom left
corner of the schematic by specifying the values in the X and Y boxes. These are usually
the same as the coordinates that were originally defined for the block while it was a part of
the complete schematic. The default values for the coordinates are 0,0.
6. For the Sequence property, if needed, type a positive integer to represent the sequence in
which the software associates the blocks with matching plant items.
The software uses these sequence numbers if there are multiple plant items
belonging to the same item type, for example, a schematic that contains two control station
blocks that have to be associated with plant items. The software associates the block that
has lowest sequence number with the plant item that has the lowest Sequence in group
attribute among the plant items belonging to same item type. Example: A typical schematic
contains two blocks A and B whose sequence numbers are 5 and 8 respectively. If used
with a motor that has two control stations CS-1 and CS-2 for which the Sequence in group
properties are 3 and 8 respectively, the software matches Block A with Control Station CS-1
and Block B with Control Station CS-2.
7. Set the number of sheets in the typical schematic and define the sheet properties. For
details, see Create a Multi-Sheet Typical Schematic (on page 73).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 72

 Creating and Using Reference Data

8. Under Sheet number, select a sheet that you want to assign to the selected block.

▪ You can assign the same block to several different sheets if you want the block to
appear more than once on different sheets of the same schematic.
▪ Note that the software does not retain in the database the sheets that have not been
assigned to blocks.
9. To remove a block from the schematic, select the required block under Schematic blocks
and click Remove.
10. When done, click Apply.
Now you can do one of the following:
▪ To continue with the next step in the recommended workflow for generating a schematic
drawing, see Create a Profile (on page 64).
▪ Return to the Recommended Workflow for Generating Schematic Drawings (on page 465).

Create a Multi-Sheet Typical Schematic

Many electrical items have a common circuit layout, where the graphical components are
identical, but the data is different. In order to generate a schematic for a particular load, you
must create a typical schematic. A typical schematic includes drawing blocks and macros to
represent the graphical components and data types respectively. Note that you can create
schematic drawings that include several sheets. Multi-sheet schematics are mostly used when
you need to display complex electrical equipment for which a single sheet is not enough to show
all the relevant wiring details of the equipment. The software uses the typical schematic as a
template for generating the schematic drawing that contains the actual load data.
1. On the Typical Schematic Common Properties dialog box, click Sheets. For more
details on how to open the Typical Schematic Common Properties dialog box, see Edit
Typical Schematic Common Properties (on page 72).
2. On the Schematic Sheet Properties dialog box, click Add.
3. Under Sheet number in the Sheet details group box, type the sheet sequence number.
4. Under Description in the Sheet details group box, type the sheet description.
5. Click Add again to add another sheet to the same typical schematic and repeat steps 3 and
4.
6. Click OK to return to the Typical Schematic Common Properties dialog box and assign a
sheet number to each block in the typical schematic.

▪ You can assign the same block to several different sheets if you want the block to appear
more than once on different sheets of the same schematic.
▪ You should assign a sheet to each block in the typical schematic. Unassigned sheets are
not kept in the database by the software.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 73

 Creating and Using Reference Data

Now you can do one of the following:

▪ To continue with the next step in the recommended workflow for generating a schematic
drawing, see Create a Profile (on page 64).
▪ Return to the Recommended Workflow for Generating Schematic Drawings (on page 465).

Working with Lookup Tables

Lookup tables enable you to define a set of default property values that you can apply to a plant
item. Each set of these default values consist of one or more key properties and their related
common properties.
You can use lookup tables to populate item properties with a large number of values supplied by
vendors.

Create Lookup Tables

The following procedure explains how to create a new lookup table.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the Lookup Tables folder by clicking the + icon
beside the folder.
2. Right-click the folder for the item that you require and then click New.
3. Accept the default item tag or type a name of up to 80 characters for the item lookup table.
If you are creating a number of lookup tables at one time, you may want to stop at
this point and edit the lookup table properties at a later stage.
4. On the Lookup Table Properties dialog box, edit the lookup table properties as
required. For more details, see Edit Lookup Tables (on page 75).

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create a new
lookup table.
▪ You access the Lookup Table Properties dialog box (on page 1126) by clicking the
Common Properties command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences
to open the dialog box directly when you create a new lookup table.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 74

 Creating and Using Reference Data

Edit Lookup Tables

The following procedure explains how to modify an existing lookup table.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the Lookup Tables folder by clicking the + icon
beside the folder.
2. Expand the lookup table folder for the required item type.
3. Right-click the required lookup table and on the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
4. On the Lookup Table Properties dialog box, click the Structure tab to determine the item
properties that you want to use for applying data.
To define the lookup table as the default for the current item type, select Set as
default.
5. Click Add to add a new property line to the lookup table definition.
6. Under Edit, select in the Property list the required property to use for the lookup table.
It is good practice not to include calculated properties in lookup tables. For
example, if the Supply AC/DC Flag property for a motor is set to DC, and you try to select a
value for the Frequency property, you cannot apply this value and the software rejects the
operation. You must first set Supply AC/DC Flag to AC, and only then you can apply the
lookup table value for the Frequency property to the motor.
7. If required, modify the caption text for the header that appears on the Data tab. The default
is the property name.
8. From Input-output value, select Input if you want to define the property as a key field -
otherwise, select Output.

▪ The software uses key field values to identify the data to update using the appropriate
values for the output fields.
▪ The software treats read- only data as input only, and the Input-output value property
is disabled for such data.
9. From Overwrite option, select True if you want to overwrite existing data when you apply
the lookup table values, or select False to insert the values only where no data exists
previously.
10. Repeat the preceding steps for as many other properties as you require.
11. If required, change the order of the properties under Definition by selecting an individual
property and clicking Up or Down.
The order of the properties affects how they are arranged on the Data tab. It is
usually convenient to arrange the input properties at the beginning, followed by the output
properties. For more details, see Lookup Table Structure Example (on page 76).
12. Click the Data tab and enter data values for the required properties.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 75

 Creating and Using Reference Data

13. Enter data values for the properties that you require on the blank line.

▪ You can right-click individual cells to copy and paste data. To copy and paste entire
rows of data, select the source row and click Copy Row. Next, select the target row
and click Paste Row.
▪ Ensure that each combination of data in the key fields is unique. If you enter duplicate
key fields in two rows, the software displays a warning message and highlights the
duplicate row so that you can modify he input data. For more details, see Lookup Table
Data Example (on page 77).
▪ You can sort the rows of data according to a particular column by clicking the column
header. Repeatedly clicking a column header displays the data in alternating
ascending and descending order.
14. Repeat the previous step for each set of data required.

▪ You can define as many lookup tables as you require for a particular item type.
▪ There are three specific lookup tables for conductors that cannot be deleted: Conductor
Material Coefficients, Conductor Insulation Temperatures, and Conductor Area
cmils. These tables contain typical values for some of the most common conductor
materials and conductor insulation materials. You should check these typical values and
make sure they comply with and match the values used or specified by local codes or cable
manufacturers. The software uses the data in these lookup tables for short circuit cable
sizing and you should add appropriate data for any additional conductor material or
insulation if needed.
Do not change any of the values on the Structure tab for the conductor
lookup tables.

Lookup Table Structure Example

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 76

 Creating and Using Reference Data

Lookup Table Data Example

Enable Additional Regional Standard Lookup Tables

Smart Electrical allows you to enable regional standard lookup tables in addition to the NEC
standards. You can define IEC and CEC standards in the Data Dictionary and then create
lookup tables in the Reference Data Explorer based on these regional standards. You can
then apply the new lookup tables to the appropriate equipment items that conform to these
regional settings.
1. In the Data Dictionary, add a new regional standard entry in the Conformity to standard
select list.
2. Switch to Smart Electrical and in the Reference Data Explorer, create a new lookup table
for the regional standard entry that you just created in the Data Dictionary.
3. Apply the new lookup table to all the equipment items in your plant that conform to the new
regional standard.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 77

 Creating and Using Reference Data

Associate and Apply a Lookup Table to a Circuit Internal

Component
The software allows you to associate lookup tables with circuit internal components. You can
make this association on the Typical Circuit Common Properties dialog box in the Reference
Data Explorer and then apply that typical circuit to a number of plant circuits. Alternatively, you
can make this association on the Circuit Common Properties dialog box for a circuit that you
select in the Electrical Index and then run the Apply Lookup Tables feature on the Apply
Options dialog box to propagate the lookup table data to the circuit internal components.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the Lookup Tables folder by clicking the + icon
beside the folder.
2. Right-click the folder for a circuit internal component (for example, Circuit Breakers, Fuses,
and so on) and then click New.
3. Accept the default item tag or type a name of up to 80 characters for the item lookup table.
If you are creating a number of lookup tables at one time, you may want to stop at
this point and edit the lookup table properties at a later stage.
4. On the Lookup Table Properties dialog box, edit the lookup table properties as
required. For more details, see Edit Lookup Tables (on page 75).
5. Create or edit the properties of a typical circuit in the Reference Data Explorer. For
details, see Create a Typical Circuit (on page 62).
6. On the Typical Circuit Common Properties dialog box, under Details of circuit internals,
select an appropriate lookup table from Lookup Table list.
7. In the Electrical Index, select a plant circuit to which you want to apply a lookup table.
8. Click Tools > Apply Options.
9. On the Apply Options dialog box, click the Lookup Tables tab.
10. Select the Enable associated lookup tables of circuit internals check box.
11. Click Apply.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create a new
lookup table.
▪ You access the Lookup Table Properties dialog box by clicking the Common Properties
command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open the dialog box
directly when you create a new lookup table.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 78

 Creating and Using Reference Data

Automate the Sizing of Circuit Internal Components Based

on Load Data
Smart Electrical enables you to create lookup tables that include load properties as key
fields. You can associate these lookup tables with circuits or circuit internal components and
apply these lookup tables to plant circuits or circuit internals to populate the lookup table
data. This feature is especially useful when creating protection equipment, fuses, circuit
breakers, and so forth whose properties correlate with load lookup tables.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the Lookup Tables folder by clicking the + icon
beside the folder.
2. Right-click the folder for a circuit internal component (for example, Circuit Breakers, Fuses,
and so on) and then click New.
3. Accept the default item tag or type a name of up to 80 characters for the item lookup table.
If you are creating a number of lookup tables at one time, you may want to stop at
this point and edit the lookup table properties at a later stage.
4. On the Lookup Table Properties dialog box, edit the lookup table properties as
required. For more details, see Edit Lookup Tables (on page 75).
5. Create or edit the properties of a typical circuit in the Reference Data Explorer. For
details, see Create a Typical Circuit (on page 62).
6. On the Typical Circuit Common Properties dialog box, under Details of circuit internals,
select an appropriate lookup table from Lookup Table list.
7. In the Electrical Index, select a plant circuit to which you want to apply a lookup table.
8. Click Tools > Apply Options.
9. On the Apply Options dialog box, click the Lookup Tables tab.
10. Select the Enable associated lookup tables of circuit internals check box.
11. Click Apply.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create a new
lookup table.
▪ You access the Lookup Table Properties dialog box by clicking the Common Properties
command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open the dialog box
directly when you create a new lookup table.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 79

 Creating and Using Reference Data

Reference Electrical Engineer

You use the Reference Electrical Engineer to copy existing partial or complete power network
structures by dragging items from one or more specified plants to the Electrical Engineer in the
current plant.
While working in your plant, Smart Electrical allows you to connect to another plant and open
the Electrical Engineer from which you can drag a power network structure to the Electrical
Engineer in your plant. This way, any external plant can serve as a reference for your
plant. Such an external plant can hold numerous assemblies in its Electrical Engineer, from
which you can drag an assembly to the Electrical Engineer in your plant. As you copy an
assembly to the Electrical Engineer in your plant, the software automatically copies to the
Electrical Index all the electrical items contained in the assembly as well as the items directly
associated with the items displayed in the Electrical Engineer (for example, a control
station). Furthermore, the software copies the reference power cables and typical schematics
to the Reference Data Explorer.
When copying a branch that contains electrical equipment items, the software
also copies the equipment item data that belongs to plant operating cases. For details on how
this data is copied, see Rules Governing the Copying of Branches with Data that Includes
Operating Cases (on page 84).
The rules that determine where you can drag certain items in the target Electrical Engineer are
similar to the drag-and- drop rules for items that you drag from the Electrical Index and within
the Electrical Engineer.
Before connecting to a reference plant and opening its Electrical Engineer,
make sure that you have been granted full access rights to that plant.
The Reference Electrical Engineer window contains the following sections:
▪ Toolbar
▪ Tree view pane
▪ List view pane
These sections are described below:

Toolbar
The toolbar contains the following options:

Find — Click Find to open the Find dialog box where you can look for a specific item in
the Electrical Engineer. Click the arrow to display a menu with the following options:
▪ Find — Opens the Find dialog box where you can look for a specific item in the Reference
Electrical Engineer.
▪ Close — Closes the active Reference Electrical Engineer window.

Refresh — Click Refresh to update the Reference Electrical Engineer display. This
feature is useful where multiple users are working on the same set of data.
Buttons — Buttons provide a useful shortcut to an item or a group of items. Click Buttons
to toggle show / hide for existing buttons. To create a button for the currently selected
item or folder, click the arrow and click Add Button. To remove a button, select the button to

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 80

 Creating and Using Reference Data

remove, then click the arrow, and click Remove Button. Note that if you do not select any
button to remove, the software removes the uppermost button in the list.

Tree View Pane

The tree view pane of the Reference Electrical Engineer shows electrical items organized in
the Reference Plant folder. All items that appear under this folder have read-only status.
Expand or collapse the hierarchy by clicking the + and - icons respectively or by clicking an item
in the Reference Plant folder hierarchy.
After fully expanding a hierarchy, double-click an item to open its Common Properties dialog
box.

▪ You can open several instances of the Reference Electrical Engineer by clicking Window
> New > Reference Electrical Engineer.
▪ After exiting Smart Electrical, and starting a new session, the software retains the size and
position of all the windows that were open in the previous session.

Copy Power Network Structures from Another Plant

You use this feature to copy power network structures from the Reference Electrical Engineer.
Before connecting to a reference plant and opening its Electrical Engineer,
make sure that you have been granted full access rights to that plant.
1. Click Window > New > Reference Electrical Engineer.
2. On the Open Plant Structure dialog box, select a plant from which you are going to copy
the data structure. If the plant that you want does not appear, click Site Server to navigate
to another location. (For details, see Open Plant Structure Dialog Box (on page 920).)
3. Click Open to display the plant in the Reference Electrical Engineer.
4. Expand the folder hierarchy by clicking the + icon beside the folder that you require, or by
double-clicking the folder.
5. In the Electrical Engineer for the current plant, expand the item hierarchy to display the
item to which you want to copy the network structure.
6. Drag the parent (node) item of the network structure from the Reference Electrical
Engineer to an item in the Electrical Engineer.

▪ You can open more than one Reference Electrical Engineer and copy data from different
plants to your current plant.
▪ You can drag a parent item from the Reference Electrical Engineer to the root of your
current plant.
▪ You can open an instance of the Reference Electrical Engineer for your current plant to
duplicate your current plant data. In this case, the results you obtain are not the same as if
you move items within the Electrical Engineer. For details of how the software copies data
from the Reference Electrical Engineer to the Electrical Engineer, see Rules Governing
the Copying of Power Network Structures to the Electrical Engineer (on page 82).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 81

 Creating and Using Reference Data

▪ When you copy items from the Reference Electrical Engineer to the Electrical Engineer,
the item does not appear in the Electrical Index. To update the item in the Electrical
Index, click Refresh .

Rules Governing the Copying of Power Network Structures

to the Electrical Engineer
When you create new power network structures in your current plant by dragging items from the
Reference Electrical Engineer to the Electrical Engineer, there are specific rules that
determine how the software creates new items and the electrical associations with the items that
already exist in the target plant. When you drag an item to the Electrical Engineer, the
software includes that item and all items that are below it in the hierarchy, which together
constitute the scope of copied items.
The following rules apply to dragged items:
▪ The software assigns names to the items created in the target plant according to the target
plant naming conventions.
▪ Items that the software creates in the target plant inherit the properties of their source items.
▪ If you drag a load to the root (Plant) of the target plant, the software copies the load, but
does not associate it with any item in the Electrical Engineer -instead the load appears in
the appropriate folder of the Electrical Index.
▪ The software copies the electrical relationships that existed among the items in the scope to
the target plant. The software creates a new relationship between the dragged item at the
top of the hierarchy and the target item. This new relationship follows the rules that apply
when dragging items within the Electrical Engineer. For more information, see Rules for
Changing Electrical Associations (on page 229).
▪ When copying a network that includes cables, the software uses the source reference
cable's SP_ID to identify the reference cable in the target plant. If the software cannot find
the reference cable, it uses the cable category, the cable specification, and the cable
formation properties to identify the reference cable. If none of these properties can be found,
the software creates a new reference cable in the target plant based on the properties of the
source cable.
▪ Cables that are created in the target plant include the conductor arrangement of the source
and all the sizing data. The software copies the reference cables to the Reference Data
Explorer in the target plant and associates them with the plant power cables.
▪ When the scope includes buses, the software copies their PDBs and PDB-bus associations
to the target plant.
▪ When the scope includes circuits that have cells, the software copies these cells and their
circuit associations to the target plant.
▪ When the scope includes circuits that contain internal components, the software copies the
circuits and their internal components to the target plant.
▪ When the scope includes an auxiliary contact, special rules apply depending on the
electrical branch that you want to copy. For details, see Rules for Copying Branches with
Auxiliary Contacts (on page 83).
▪ When copying loads or circuits, the software also copies all the signal data associated with
these items to the target plant.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 82

 Creating and Using Reference Data

▪ When copying an item that is associated with a control station, the software copies the
pertinent control stations and control station cables to the Electrical Index in the target
plant.
▪ When copying a load that is associated with a typical schematic, the software copies the
relevant typical schematics and typical blocks to the Reference Data Explorer in the target
plant.
▪ The software does not support the copying of equipment connected in parallel. Therefore, if
you copy an electrical branch that is connected in parallel in the Reference Electrical
Engineer, these items will not be copied to the Electrical Engineer.

Rules for Copying Branches with Auxiliary Contacts

When copying a branch that includes an auxiliary contact, the software behaves according to
the rules described below. The rules apply to a situation illustrated in the following example:

When dragging a branch that includes an auxiliary contact to the Electrical Engineer in your
plant, the rules are as follows:
▪ If the auxiliary contact belongs to a standalone disconnect equipment item (for example, a
disconnect switch), the software creates the new branch in the Electrical Engineer in your
plant only up to and not including the auxiliary contact. The parent disconnect electrical
equipment item of the auxiliary contact is not copied.
▪ If the auxiliary contact belongs to disconnect electrical equipment and this disconnect
electrical equipment item is an internal component of a circuit, the software creates the new
branch in the Electrical Engineer in your plant only up to and not including the auxiliary
contact. The parent disconnect electrical equipment item of the auxiliary contact is not
copied.
▪ If you drag to the Electrical Engineer in your plant a branch that contains a disconnect
electrical equipment item that has an auxiliary contact, the software creates the following in
the Electrical Engineer in your plant:
▪ The full disconnect equipment branch.
▪ The auxiliary contact.
▪ All the electrical items belonging to the downstream branch of the auxiliary contact.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 83

 Creating and Using Reference Data

Rules Governing the Copying of Branches with Data that

Includes Operating Cases
When copying a Reference Electrical Engineer branch that includes electrical equipment data
with plant operating cases, the software behaves according to the rules described below.
The following rules apply when the plant in the Reference Electrical Engineer (the source) and
the Electrical Engineer in the current plant (the target) are the same:
▪ The software will copy all the electrical equipment items and all their operating case data to
the appropriate operating cases that the data belongs to.
▪ If you connect to the Reference Electrical Engineer in an As-Built project and copy a
branch to the Electrical Engineer in As-Built, the software will copy the electrical equipment
data to the appropriate operating cases if all the operating cases in the project and As-Built
are exactly the same. If at least one of the operating cases is different, the software will copy
only the electrical equipment data belonging to the governing case of the project. The data
will be copied to the governing case of As-Built.
▪ If you connect to the Reference Electrical Engineer in an As-Built and copy a branch to the
Electrical Engineer in a project, the software will copy the electrical equipment data to the
appropriate operating cases if all the operating cases in the project and As-Built are exactly
the same. If at least one of the operating cases is different, the software will copy only the
electrical equipment data belonging to the governing case of As-Built. The data will be
copied to the governing case of the target project.
The following rules apply when the plants in Reference Electrical Engineer (the source) and
Electrical Engineer (the target) are the different:
▪ The software will only copy the electrical equipment data belonging to the governing case of
the source plant. The data will be copied to the governing case of the target plant.
▪ If the governing case of the target plant is not set as the active case, the software will
display a message informing you that you will be able to see the copied data only after
setting the governing case as the active case of your plant or if you open the Case
Management dialog box.
For more information about plant operating cases, see Managing Plant Operating Cases.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 84

SECTION 6

Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical

Items
This section deals with the creation and management of the electrical equipment in your plant.
You carry out these tasks in the Electrical Index. The items that you can create are loads,
generators, battery banks, offsite power supplies, converting equipment, power distribution
boards, buses, disconnect electrical equipment, and so forth.

Using Naming Conventions

You define naming conventions per item type, such as motors, cables, static loads, and so forth,
in Options Manager.
For full details of how to define naming conventions, see the Options Manager User's Guide:
Naming Conventions.
You set whether to use naming conventions by default for all item types in the Data Dictionary
by setting the Comply with Naming Convention flag to True or False.
When set to True, each time you create a new plant item in the Electrical Index, the software
requires you to use an item tag that complies with the defined naming convention for the item
type. The software prompts you with a new item tag based on the naming convention whenever
you create a new item by a New command, a Duplicate command, by dragging items from the
Reference Data Explorer, or by applying profiles.
When set to False, the software prompts you with a new item tag based on the naming
convention, but you can overwrite it with any characters that you want.

▪ You can override the default naming convention mode for one or more individual tags by
selecting the required tags, and in the Properties window, changing the value of the
Comply with Naming Convention property.
▪ If you change the value of the Comply with Naming Convention property for an item tag
from False to True, the software designates a new item tag for the item based on the
naming convention.
▪ Whether or not you use the naming convention, the software always prompts you with a new
item tag that is unique.
▪ Naming conventions are used for plant items only and not for items created in the
Reference Data Explorer. Therefore, the Comply with naming conventions property is
not applicable for reference items.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 85

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Create a New Item in the Electrical Index

This procedure explains how to create a new plant item in the Electrical Index. You can create
electrical loads, cables, junction boxes, power distribution boards, buses, and so forth.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by clicking the + icons or by double-
clicking the folders.
2. Navigate to the folder or parent item where you are going to add the new item, right- click,
and then click New.
3. Accept the default item tag that is based on the naming convention for the item type or type
your own item tag according to the naming convention.
For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming Conventions (on
page 85).
4. Edit the item properties in the Properties window as required.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create the item.
▪ Some items have a Common Properties dialog box from which you can edit the most
common properties for the item. You access this dialog box by clicking the Common
Properties command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open
the dialog box directly when you create the item. For full details of the properties, see the
appropriate dialog box topic.
▪ If the parent folder contains custom folders, the created item is placed in the root folder. If
the items properties match the filter properties of a custom folder a copy of the item is also
placed in the custom folder. Refreshing or closing and re- opening Smart Electrical moves
the item from the root folder to the All Items folder.

Create a Single Plant Item Based on a Reference Item

When you copy a reference item containing typical data that you use frequently, you save time
by using the reference item as a template. This way, you do not have to type common values
every time that you create a new item in the Electrical Index.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the folder hierarchy by clicking the + icons or by
double-clicking the folders until you can see the item that you want to copy.
2. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by clicking the + icons or by double-
clicking the folders and navigate to the folder of the item type corresponding to the item that
you want to copy. For example, to copy a motor, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical
Equipment > Loads > Motors and select the Motors folder.
3. Drag the item from the Reference Data Explorer to the appropriate folder in the Electrical
Index.
You can copy an item from the Reference Data Explorer only to a folder in the
Electrical Index that can contain items of the same type.
4. Accept the default item tag that is based on the naming convention for the item type or type
your own item tag according to the naming convention.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 86

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming Conventions (on
page 85).
5. For the item that you copied to the Electrical Index, edit the item properties in the
Properties window.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create the item.
▪ Some items have a Common Properties dialog box from which you can edit the most
common properties for the item. You access this dialog box by clicking the Common
Properties command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open
the dialog box directly when you create the item. For full details of the properties, see the
appropriate dialog box topic.
▪ When you copy a reference item, the software copies the item properties, except for the
Item tag property, which follows the item naming convention.
▪ For an item that includes sub- items, such as a typical circuit with internal components, the
software copies the sub-items as well. In this case, the sub-items are the circuit
components.

Create Multiple New Items

This procedure describes how to create multiple new items in the Electrical Index. You can do
the following:
▪ Create multiple items that contain no electrical property values.
▪ Create multiple items based on an existing reference item in the Reference Data Explorer.
In this case all the new items will inherit the property values from the selected reference
item.
1. In the Electrical Index, select an item type folder that can contain electrical items. For
example, you can select Motors but not Loads. You can select Power Cables but not
Cables, and so on. For a complete list of supported items, see Multiple New Items - List of
Supported Items (on page 88).
2. Do one of the following:
▪ On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click File > New > Multiple Items.
▪ Right-click the selected folder and then on the shortcut menu, click Multiple New [item
type name].
3. On the Create Multiple New Items dialog box, do one of the following:
▪ To create multiple items without property values, enter the number of new items to
create and click Apply.
▪ To create multiple new items based on a reference item, do the following:

i. Click .
ii. On the Find dialog box find and select an appropriate reference item that will serve
as a basis for the new items.
iii. Enter the number of new items that you want Smart Electrical to create.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 87

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

iv. Click Apply and then Close.

▪ The Item type field displays the name of the folder that you selected.
▪ If you want to create multiple items for another item type, close the Create Multiple New
Items dialog box and select another item type folder in the Electrical Index.
▪ If for some reason the software fails to create some of the items, a message is displayed
that refers you to the Create Multiple Items log file.

Multiple New Items - List of Supported Items

The following list contains all the item types for which you can create multiple items.
▪ Motors
▪ Motors + Heaters (only based on a reference item)
▪ Heaters (as a stand-alone heater only; space heaters are not supported)
▪ Heat traces
▪ Capacitors
▪ Harmonic filters
▪ Resistors
▪ Lighting fixtures
▪ Socket outlets
▪ Welding outlets
▪ Transfer switches
▪ Other electrical equipment
▪ Offsite power supplies
▪ Generators
▪ Battery banks
▪ Battery chargers
▪ Other converting equipment
▪ Transformers (only 2-winding transformers; 3-winding transformers can only be created
based on a reference 3-winding transformer)
▪ Uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs)
▪ Variable frequency drives
▪ Current limiting reactors
▪ Power distribution boards
▪ Contactors
▪ Overload relays

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 88

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

▪ Disconnect switches
▪ Circuit breakers
▪ Fuses
▪ Starters
▪ Other disconnect equipment
▪ Metering equipment (current transformers and potential transformers only)
▪ Instruments
▪ Cabinets
▪ Control stations
▪ Local panels
▪ Junction boxes
▪ Power cables
▪ Control cables
▪ Instrumentation cables
▪ Single-core cable assemblies
▪ Busways
▪ Cable drums
▪ Free-Standing buses
Note that you cannot create multiple items in custom folders.

Edit Item Properties

When an item is selected in the Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index, you can edit
the item properties in the Properties window. For some of the items, you can edit the most
commonly used properties more conveniently on a dialog box.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by
clicking the + icons or by double-clicking the folders.
2. Edit the item properties as required in the Properties window. Note that an asterisk beside
a property name indicates required data.

▪ For some items, you can edit properties in either the Properties window or on a Common
Properties dialog box. You can click the Common Properties command on the shortcut
menu for an item to open a dialog box on which you can edit the most commonly used
properties for the item. For full details of the properties, see the appropriate dialog box
topic.
▪ If you edit a profile, a typical circuit, or a control station in the Reference Data Explorer, the
software uses the latest update when you next apply options to a plant item. For example,
if you modify the components of a typical circuit that already has a reference from a motor,
the software does not automatically update the change in the typical circuit connected to the

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 89

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

motor. The software updates the change only when you next apply a typical circuit or a
profile to the motor.

Duplicate an Item
You can duplicate an item in the Reference Data Explorer or Electrical Index. This method is
advantageous when you have items that include a hierarchy of sub-items, in which case the
software duplicates the sub-items including the parent items.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by
clicking the + icons or by double-clicking the folders.
2. Right-click an item, and on the shortcut menu, click Duplicate.
3. Accept the default item tag that is based on the naming convention for the item type or type
your own item tag according to the naming convention.
For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming Conventions (on
page 85).
4. For the item that you duplicated, edit the item properties in the Properties window.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you duplicate the item.
▪ Some items have a Common Properties dialog box from which you can edit the most
common properties for the item. You access this dialog box by clicking the Common
Properties command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open
the dialog box directly when you create the item. For full details of the properties, see the
appropriate dialog box topic.
▪ When you duplicate an item, the software copies only the item properties, except for the
Item tag property, which follows the item naming convention. The software does not copy
associated items such as cables, typical circuits, or control stations, nor does it duplicate
associations to feeder circuits.
▪ For an item that includes sub- items, such as a circuit with internal components, the
software duplicates the sub-items as well. In this case, the sub-items are the circuit
components.

Rename an Item
This procedure explains how to rename an existing item in the Electrical Index, Electrical
Engineer, or Reference Data Explorer.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, the Electrical Index, or the Electrical Engineer, expand
the folder hierarchy by clicking the + icons or double-clicking the folders.
2. Select an item and open the Item Tag dialog box by doing one of the following:
▪ Right-click the item, and on the shortcut menu, click Rename.
▪ Press F2.
3. Type a new item tag according to the naming convention.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 90

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming Conventions (on
page 85).
If you rename a profile, a typical circuit, or a control station in the Reference Data
Explorer, the software uses the new name if there is a reference to one of these items from a
plant item. For example, if you change the name of a typical circuit that already has a reference
from a motor, the software automatically updates the name of the typical circuit associated with
the motor.

Delete an Item
You can delete items in the Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index. When you
delete items, the software deletes them from the database.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by
clicking the + icons or by double-clicking the folders.
2. Right-click the item that you want to delete, and on the shortcut menu, click Delete.
3. At the prompt, click Yes to confirm the deletion.

▪ You can delete only items that do not have associations to other items. For example, you
cannot delete a power distribution board associated with loads unless you first dissociate
the loads.
▪ If you select more than one item for deletion, any failures to delete items are recorded in the
Batch Deletion log file. For the procedure for creating and viewing the log file, see
Generate Error Log Files (on page 880).

Rules for Deleting Reference Items

The following rules apply when you delete an item in the Reference Data Explorer:

Item Precondition Result

Profile The profile is not the most The software deletes the profile only.
recent one that you applied to
any motor.

Typical circuit You have dissociated the The software deletes the typical
typical circuit from all profiles circuit and all the circuit components.
to which it previously belonged
and the typical circuit is not the
most recent one that you
applied to any electrical
equipment.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 91

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Item Precondition Result

Typical control You have dissociated the The software deletes the typical
station typical control station from all control station and dissociates any
profiles to which it previously control station cables.
belonged and the typical
control station does not have a
link with any electrical
equipment.

Typical You have dissociated the The software deletes the typical
schematic schematic from all profiles and schematic only.
plant loads to which it
previously belonged.

Typical block You have dissociated the The software deletes the typical block
block from all schematics to only.
which it previously belonged.

Typical motor You have dissociated the The software deletes the motor and
motor from all profiles to which any space heater associated with the
it previously belonged. motor.

Rules for Deleting Plant Items

The following rules apply when you delete an item in the Electrical Index:

Item Precondition Result

Motor None. The software deletes any space

heater associated with the motor and
clears any To side cable
association. The software also clears
any relationships to control stations.

Static load None. The software clears any To side cable

association. The software also clears
any relationships to control stations.

Converting None. The software moves any items in the

equipment electrical hierarchy below the deleted
converting equipment to the root of
the Electrical Engineer. The
software also clears any From or To
side cable association.

Panel You have dissociated all the The software deletes all the internal
circuits in the panel from panel circuits and moves any items in
external items, such as cables, the electrical hierarchy below the
loads, and so forth. deleted panel to the root of the
Electrical Engineer.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 92

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Item Precondition Result

Panel circuit None. The software moves any items in the

electrical hierarchy below the deleted
panel circuit to the root of the
Electrical Engineer.

Creating and Managing Loads

The following section contains topics related to the creation and management of loads.
Loads in Smart Electrical are arranged in the following sub-folders:
▪ Motors (for details, see Electrical Motors (on page 94).)
▪ Static Electrical Equipment (for details, see Create Static Electrical Equipment):
▪ heaters
▪ heat traces
▪ capacitors
▪ harmonic filters
▪ resistors
▪ Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment (for details, see Create Miscellaneous Electrical
Equipment):
▪ lighting fixtures
▪ socket outlets
▪ welding outlets
▪ other electrical equipment
Also, you can create load items in batch mode. For details, see Create Load Items in Batch
Mode (on page 93).

Create Load Items in Batch Mode

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Loads.
2. In the Electrical Index, expand the Electrical Equipment folder hierarchy by clicking the +
icons or by double-clicking the folders.
3. With the required folder selected, right-click, and then click Tools > Apply Options.
4. On the Apply Options dialog box, click the Equipment Profile tab.
5. Select Enable equipment profile.
6. In the Number of items to create box, enter the number of new electrical items that you
want to create.
7. Beside Create item based on profile, click Find.
8. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now to display the available profiles.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 93

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

9. From the list of profiles, highlight the profile that you want to apply to the newly created
items and click OK.
10. Click Apply.

▪ If the Create item based on profile box contains the text No default profile exists, the
software does not create any items when you click Apply. You must select a profile first.
▪ If the profile contains a reference item, the software populates new items that you create by
this method with values copied from the reference item.

Electrical Motors
The following sub-section contains topics related to the creation and management of electrical
motors.

Create an Electrical Motor

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Loads >
Motors.
2. Right-click the Motors folder, and then click New Motor or New Motor with Heater.
If you create a motor without a heater, you can add a heater later by right-clicking
the motor, and on the shortcut menu, clicking New Space Heater.
3. Accept the default item tag that is based on the naming convention for the motor or type
your own item tag according to the naming convention.
For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming Conventions (on
page 85).
4. On the Electrical Motor Common Properties dialog box, edit the motor properties as
required. For more details, see Edit Electrical Motor Common Properties.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create a new
electrical motor.
▪ The Electrical Motor Common Properties dialog box shows the most commonly used
properties. You access this dialog box by clicking the Common Properties command on
the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open the dialog box directly when
you create a new electrical motor.
▪ You can also edit the most commonly used properties and additional properties in the
Properties window or in the EDE.
▪ When you add a motor with a space heater, the heater appears as a sub-item of the
motor. The motor symbol includes an indication that it has a space heater . If you
subsequently delete the motor, the software deletes the heater also.
▪ If the parent folder contains custom folders, the created item is placed in the root folder. If
the items properties match the filter properties of a custom folder a copy of the item is also
placed in the custom folder. Refreshing or closing and re- opening Smart Electrical moves
the item from the root folder to the All Items folder.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 94

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Duplicate an Electrical Motor

1. In the Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index, expand the Electrical Equipment
> Load > Motors folder hierarchy.
2. Right-click a motor and click Duplicate to make a copy of the motor at the lowest position in
the folder.
3. Accept the default item tag that is based on the naming convention for the motor or type
your own item tag according to the naming convention.
For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming Conventions (on
page 85).
4. If required, on the Electrical Motor Common Properties dialog box, edit the motor
properties as required. For more details, see Edit Electrical Motor Common Properties.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you duplicate an
electrical motor.
▪ The Electrical Motor Common Properties dialog box shows the most commonly used
properties. You access this dialog box by clicking the Common Properties command on
the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open the dialog box directly when
you duplicate an electrical motor.
▪ When you duplicate a motor, the software copies only the item properties, except for the
Item tag property, which follows the motor naming convention. The software does not copy
associated items such as cables, typical circuits, or control stations, nor does it duplicate
associations to feeder circuits.
▪ When the motor has a space heater, the software duplicates the space heater as well.

Edit Electrical Motor Common Properties

1. In the Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy
Electrical Equipment > Load > Motors.

▪ For a motor without a heater, you can add a heater by right-clicking the motor, and on
the shortcut menu, clicking New Heater.
▪ You can delete a heater from a motor by selecting the heater, and on the shortcut
menu, clicking Delete.
2. Right-click the required motor and click Common Properties to open the Electrical Motor
Common Properties dialog box.
3. Edit the data as needed on each tab. Note that an asterisk beside a property name
indicates required data.
For full details of the most commonly used properties, see the Electrical Motor
Common Properties dialog box (on page 1033). You can also edit the most commonly used
properties and additional properties in the Properties window or in the EDE.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 95

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Calculate Power Requirements for an Electrical Motor

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Loads >
Motors.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Expand the Motors folder and select an existing motor from the list.
▪ Right-click the Motors folder, then create a new motor.
3. Right-click the motor and click Common Properties to open the Electrical Motor Common
Properties dialog box.
4. Click the Load Data tab and enter the appropriate load data properties.
5. Click the Electrical Data tab to view the calculated power requirements for the motor.

▪ For full details of the properties that the software uses in power calculations and the
formulas the software uses to calculate power requirements, see Electrical Calculations (on
page 886).
▪ For full details of the most commonly used properties, see the Electrical Motor Common
Properties dialog box (on page 1033). You can also edit the most commonly used
properties and additional properties in the Properties window or in the EDE.

Brake Power / Demand Factor Calculation

The software enables you to calculate the required brake power or demand factor values for an
electrical motor in your plant. The standard (default mode) for load data calculation is to enter an
appropriate rated power value and let the software calculate the demand factor. Alternatively,
you can also enter an appropriate demand factor value and select a motor rated power value. In
this case, Smart Electrical will calculate the brake power.
If you want to be able to enter a demand factor value so that the software can
calculate the brake power, prior to making your calculations, you must set the Demand factor
property in the Data Dictionary Manager to Write. For details about setting permissions for
Smart Electrical properties, see the Data Dictionary Manager Guide > Defining Item Type
Properties > Modify Item Type Properties.
Therefore, the software does the following depending on your input on the Load Data tab of the
Electrical Motor Common Properties dialog box:
1. No values have been entered for the motor rated power, brake power, or demand factor.
▪ Enter the motor rated power and brake power values to calculate the demand factor.
▪ Enter the motor rated power and demand factor values to calculate the brake power.
2. The three values (the motor rated power, brake power, and demand factor) have already
been entered or calculated.
▪ Changing the motor rated power recalculates the demand factor.
▪ Changing the brake power recalculates the demand factor.
▪ Changing the demand factor calculates the brake power.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 96

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

To calculate the demand factor or brake power, do the following:

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Loads >
Motors.
2. Do one of the following:
a. Expand the Motors folder and select an existing motor from the list.
b. Right-click the Motors folder, then create a new motor.
3. Right-click the motor and click Common Properties to open the Electrical Motor Common
Properties dialog box.
4. Click the Load Data tab.
5. Enter an appropriate motor rated power value.
In order for the software to make the required calculation, you must select
an appropriate motor rated power value either before or after you enter the demand factor or
brake power value. The software will make the required calculation once the motor rated
power and the second value have been entered.
6. Do one of the following:
▪ To calculate the Demand factor, type an appropriate Brake power value.
▪ To calculate the Brake power, type an appropriate Demand factor value.
7. Click in another property or press the Tab key.
The Demand factor value affects the following properties of electrical motors:
▪ Brake power.
▪ Power factor and efficiency at demand.

Create Static Electrical Equipment

You can create the following types of static electrical equipment in your plant:
▪ Heaters — You can create electrical process heaters for heating fluids in the plant.
▪ Heat Traces — An electrical heat trace is a kind of cable that is used to heat equipment and
pipes, to ensure that the temperature for the process does not fall below the required level.
▪ Capacitors — You can include power factor correction capacitors in your plant.
▪ Harmonic Filters — A harmonic filter enables you to select and filter out a particular
frequency in a power distribution network.
▪ Resistors — You can include power dissipation resistors in your plant.

1. In the Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy
Electrical Equipment > Loads > Static Electrical Equipment.
2. Right-click the folder for the required item type - for example, Heaters - and then click New.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 97

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

3. Accept the default item tag or type your own item tag for the item.

▪ In the Reference Data Explorer, you can type a string up to 80 characters long.
▪ In the Electrical Index, the name must be in accordance with the naming convention for
the item type. For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming
Conventions (on page 85).
4. On the Static Load Common Properties dialog box, edit the item properties as
required. Note that an asterisk beside a property name indicates required data.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create a new item.
▪ The Static Load Common Properties dialog box shows the most commonly used
properties. You access this dialog box by clicking the Common Properties command on
the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open the dialog box directly when
you create a new item.
▪ You can also edit the most commonly used properties and additional properties in the
Properties window or in the EDE.
▪ If the parent folder contains custom folders, the created item is placed in the root folder. If
the items properties match the filter properties of a custom folder a copy of the item is also
placed in the custom folder. Refreshing or closing and re- opening Smart Electrical moves
the item from the root folder to the All Items folder.

Absorbed Power / Demand Factor Calculation for Static Loads

The software enables you to calculate the required absorbed power or demand factor values for
a static and miscellaneous electrical equipment item in your plant. The standard (default mode)
for load data calculation is to enter an appropriate rated power and demand factor values and let
the software calculate the absorbed power. Alternatively, you can also enter an appropriate
demand factor and rated power values. In this case, Smart Electrical will calculate the absorbed
power.
Therefore, the software does the following depending on your input on the Load Data tab of the
Common Properties dialog box:
1. No values have been entered for the rated power, absorbed power, or demand factor.
▪ Enter the rated power and absorbed power values to calculate the demand factor.
▪ Enter the rated power and demand factor values to calculate the absorbed power.
2. The three values (the rated power, absorbed power, and demand factor) have already been
entered or calculated.
▪ Changing the rated power recalculates the demand factor.
▪ Changing the absorbed power recalculates the demand factor.
▪ Changing the demand factor calculates the absorbed power.

To calculate the demand factor or absorbed power, do the following:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 98

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

1. Open the Common Properties dialog box by right-click the load in the Electrical Index.
2. Click the Load Data tab.
3. Enter an appropriate rated power value.
In order for the software to make the required calculation, you must select
an appropriate rated power value either before or after you enter the demand factor or
absorbed power value. The software will make the required calculation once the rated power
and the second value have been entered.
4. Do one of the following:
▪ To calculate the Demand factor, type an appropriate Absorbed power value.
▪ To calculate the Absorbed power, type an appropriate Demand factor value.
Click in another property or press the Tab key.

Create Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment

Miscellaneous electrical equipment includes the following items that you can create in your
plant:
▪ Lighting Fixtures — You can add and define each lighting fixture in your plant, whether the
fixture consists of single or multiple lighting units.
▪ Socket Outlets — You can add and define each socket outlet in your plant, whether the
outlet consists of single or multiple sockets.
▪ Welding Outlets — You can add and define welding outlets in your plant.
▪ Other Electrical Equipment — You can add and define any other general type of electrical
equipment in your plant.

1. In the Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy
Electrical Equipment > Loads > Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment.
2. Right-click the folder for the required item type - for example, Lighting Fixtures - and then
click New.
3. Accept the default item tag or type your own item tag for the item.

▪ In the Reference Data Explorer, you can type a string up to 80 characters long.
▪ In the Electrical Index, the name must be in accordance with the naming convention for
the item type. For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming
Conventions (on page 85).
4. On the Other Electrical Equipment Common Properties dialog box, edit the item
properties as required. Note that an asterisk beside a property name indicates required
data.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create a new item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 99

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

▪ The Other Electrical Equipment Common Properties dialog box shows the most
commonly used properties. You access this dialog box by clicking the Common
Properties command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open
the dialog box directly when you create a new item.
▪ You can also edit the most commonly used properties and additional properties in the
Properties window or in the EDE.
▪ If the parent folder contains custom folders, the created item is placed in the root folder. If
the items properties match the filter properties of a custom folder a copy of the item is also
placed in the custom folder. Refreshing or closing and re- opening Smart Electrical moves
the item from the root folder to the All Items folder.

Absorbed Power / Demand Factor Calculation for Miscellaneous

Electrical Equipment
The software enables you to calculate the required absorbed power or demand factor values for
a static and miscellaneous electrical equipment item in your plant. The standard (default mode)
for load data calculation is to enter an appropriate rated power and demand factor values and let
the software calculate the absorbed power. Alternatively, you can also enter an appropriate
demand factor and rated power values. In this case, Smart Electrical will calculate the absorbed
power.
Therefore, the software does the following depending on your input on the Load Data tab of the
Common Properties dialog box:
1. No values have been entered for the rated power, absorbed power, or demand factor.
▪ Enter the rated power and absorbed power values to calculate the demand factor.
▪ Enter the rated power and demand factor values to calculate the absorbed power.
2. The three values (the rated power, absorbed power, and demand factor) have already been
entered or calculated.
▪ Changing the rated power recalculates the demand factor.
▪ Changing the absorbed power recalculates the demand factor.
▪ Changing the demand factor calculates the absorbed power.

To calculate the demand factor or absorbed power, do the following:

1. Open the Common Properties dialog box by right-click the load in the Electrical Index.
2. Click the Load Data tab.
3. Enter an appropriate rated power value.
In order for the software to make the required calculation, you must select
an appropriate rated power value either before or after you enter the demand factor or
absorbed power value. The software will make the required calculation once the rated power
and the second value have been entered.
4. Do one of the following:
▪ To calculate the Demand factor, type an appropriate Absorbed power value.
▪ To calculate the Absorbed power, type an appropriate Demand factor value.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 100

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

5. Click in another property or press the Tab key.

Managing Space Heaters and Their Power Supplies

The software provides for the creation and management of space heaters and their power
supplies. It is possible to design space heaters that are powered from either the main bus circuit
or another bus which does not feed the main equipment that is associated with the space
heater. To illustrate the possible design scenarios, let's consider an electrical motor with an
associated space heater. While the motor is fed by the main bus circuit (for example, 400V,
3.3Kv), the space heater can be fed from different buses:
▪ A separate PDB with a dedicated direct feeder.
▪ A separate PDB with a dedicated feeder circuit that powers the auxiliary contact of the main
motor feeder circuit breaker (contactor or starter) and from there feeds the space heater.
▪ An internal auxiliary bus and feeder circuit that powers the auxiliary contacts of the circuit
breaker or contactor and from there feeds the space heater.

Associating Space Heaters and Auxiliary Contacts with Main Equipment

You can associate space heaters and auxiliary contacts with the relevant electrical equipment
either in the Electrical Engineer or a cable block diagram.

Presentation of Space Heaters and Auxiliary Contacts in Single Line Diagrams

After creating and the required plant items and associating them with the relevant equipment,
you select whether to show the space heaters and auxiliary contacts next to their main
equipment or under their feeding equipment.

Accounting for Space Heaters and Auxiliary Contacts in Load Summaries

All load summary reports include all loads with their space heaters connected to respective
buses.

Accounting for Space Heaters and Auxiliary Contacts in Batch Load Associations
Space heaters connected through the main equipment circuit auxiliary contacts are shown and
taken into account in the batch load association of the bus that feeds the auxiliary contact and
not the main equipment bus.
On the Batch Load Association dialog box, you can now select space heaters as regular loads
even if they are connected through auxiliary contacts.

▪ Cables that have already been terminated cannot be connected to different wiring
equipment. You need to disconnect them first and then connect them as needed.
▪ When designing electrical terminations of space heaters, to terminate the auxiliary contact
with a space heater or any other electrical equipment item, terminate the cable conductors
to the terminal strip of the circuit where the auxiliary contact is located.
▪ To see various recommended scenarios for working with space heaters and auxiliary
contacts, see Suggested Workflows for Space Heaters and Auxiliary Contacts (on page
102).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 101

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

▪ If you are generating a cable schedule report for a cable that is connected to an auxiliary
contact, the cable schedule report will display the full connection path:
PDB > Bus > Cell > Circuit > Circuit internal disconnect electrical equipment > Auxiliary
contact
Or
Stand-alone disconnect electrical equipment > Auxiliary contact
▪ When performing bus load association and assigning a load to another bus on the Cached
Loads tab of the Bus Load Association dialog box, the software checks if the selected
load is associated with a heater that is connected through an auxiliary contact that is fed
from the same circuit as the selected load. If the software detects such a heater, it will
prompt you to move the associated circuit together with the load. If you click Yes, the
software will move the load and its heater together with the associated circuit to another
bus. If you click No, the software will only move the selected load without moving the heater
or the circuit. In this case, you will have to move the associated heater manually.

Suggested Workflows for Space Heaters and Auxiliary

Contacts
The following scenarios are suggested workflows for the design of space heaters in your plant.
Prior to generating your single line diagrams, you have to decide if you want to
represent your plant space heaters and auxiliary contacts as independent symbols or make
them part of compound symbols (for example, a compound symbol that contains a circuit, circuit
breaker, and an auxiliary contact). For details about using symbol assemblies, see Use
Compound Symbols for Space Heaters in SLDs (on page 111) and Use Compound Symbols for
Disconnect Equipment with Auxiliary Contacts in SLDs (on page 112).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 102

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Scenario 1:
Auxiliary contact and space heater are powered from an external power supply provided by a
PDB or bus that does not feed the main equipment. In this scenario, we want to create the
design shown in the following single line diagram:

To create the design shown above, do the following:

1. In the Electrical Index or cable block diagram, create two separate electrical branches:
▪ A branch for the main motor.
▪ A branch for the feeder to supply the power to the auxiliary contact.
2. Associate the space heater and its power cable with the output of the auxiliary contact.
3. Associate the input of the auxiliary contact with its power cable and feeder.
You can make the associations either in the Electrical Engineer or cable block
diagram.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 103

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

a. In the Electrical Engineer, the electrical tree should look like so:

b. In a cable block diagram, the associations should look like so:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 104

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Scenario 2:
Auxiliary contact and space heater powered from a bus that does not feed the main equipment.
Both the space heater and auxiliary contact are located in the same PDB. In this scenario, we
want to create the design shown in the following single line diagram:

The design can include a cable between the input of the auxiliary contact and its
feeding circuit as shown above. Alternatively, you can design it without a cable. In this case, all
the connections are made internally in the PDB.
To create the design shown above, do the following:
1. In the Electrical Index or cable block diagram, create two separate electrical branches in
the same PDB:
▪ A branch for the main motor.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 105

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

▪ A branch for the feeder to supply the power to the auxiliary contact.
There is no cable connecting the auxiliary contact and its feeder circuit
because both the auxiliary contact and its feeder circuit are in the same PDB.
2. Associate the space heater with the output of the auxiliary contact.
3. Associate the input of the auxiliary contact with its feeder.
You can make the associations either in the Electrical Engineer or cable block
diagram.
a. In the Electrical Engineer, the electrical tree should look like so:

b. In a cable block diagram, the associations should look like so:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 106

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Scenario 3:
Auxiliary contact and space heater powered from the same circuit as the main equipment feeder
circuit. In this scenario, we want to create the design shown in the following single line diagram:

In this design, the power for the space heater is provided by either an internal
connection taken from one of the phases or by using an internal transformer that converts the
three-phase 400v of the main bus to lower, single-phase voltages. The software shows these
internal items as auxiliary graphics that are contained in the symbol of the auxiliary contact.
To create the design shown above, do the following:
1. In the Electrical Index or cable block diagram, create one electrical branch for the main
motor.
2. Associate the space heater with the output of the auxiliary contact by dragging the auxiliary
contact under the main circuit to supply the power to the auxiliary contact and space heater
(through the auxiliary contact).
▪ A branch for the feeder to supply the power to the auxiliary contact.
There is no cable connecting the auxiliary contact and its feeder circuit
because both the auxiliary contact and its feeder circuit are in the same PDB.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 107

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

a. In the Electrical Engineer, the electrical tree should look like so:

b. In a cable block diagram, the associations should look like so:

For detailed information about the creation and association of electrical items, see the topics in
the Managing Space Heaters and Their Power Supplies section in the table of contents as
well as the topics listed below:
▪ Create a Space Heater
▪ Create an Auxiliary Contact (on page 123)
▪ Working with Smart Data and Auxiliary Graphics in a CBD (on page 529)
▪ Create an Electrical Association (on page 223)
▪ Rules for Associating Electrical Equipment (on page 224)
▪ Change an Existing Electrical Association (on page 228)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 108

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Create a Space Heater

This procedure explains how to add space heaters to an electrical equipment item.
You can create space heaters under the following item types:
▪ Motors
When creating a motor, you can choose to create it with or without a space heater.
The procedure below deals with adding space heaters to a motor that was created without a
space heater.
▪ Capacitors
▪ Harmonic filters
▪ Heaters
▪ All converting equipment (apart from transformer components)
▪ Generators
▪ Power distribution boards
▪ Cells (for plant items only as there are no reference cells)
▪ Cabinets
▪ Local panels
▪ Junction boxes

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the Electrical Equipment folder hierarchy and then the
relevant item type folder.
2. Right-click an existing electrical equipment item and then click New Space Heater.
3. Accept the default item tag that is based on the naming convention for space heaters or type
your own item tag according to the naming convention.
For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming Conventions (on
page 85).
4. On the Static Load Common Properties dialog box, edit the space heater properties as
required. For more details, see Static Load Common Properties Dialog Box (on page
1068).

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open a dialog box after creating or
duplicating an item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you
create a new plant item.
▪ The Static Load Common Properties dialog box shows the most commonly used
properties. You access this dialog box by clicking the Common Properties command on
the shortcut menu for the required item. Alternatively, you can specify in the preferences to
open the Common Properties dialog box directly when you create a new plant item.
▪ You can also edit the most commonly used properties and additional properties in the
Properties window or in the EDE.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 109

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

▪ After adding a space heater to an electrical equipment item, the space heater appears as a
child-item of that electrical equipment item.
▪ The Electrical Index displays a special indicator next to the icon of each electrical
equipment item to which a space heater was added. For example, adding a space heater to
a motor changes the motor icon to .
▪ If you delete an electrical equipment item which has a space heater the software also
deletes the heater.

Show Space Heaters Next to the Associated Plant Items in

SLDs
In single line diagrams, you can show space heaters adjacent to their associated plant items.
This procedure applies only to those space heaters that are represented by
independent space heater symbols. For space heaters represented by nested symbols, see Use
Nested Symbols for Space Heaters in SLDs (see "Use Compound Symbols for Space Heaters
in SLDs" on page 111).
1. Do one of the following:
▪ Generate a new single line diagram. For more information, see Generating New Single
Line Diagrams (on page 493).
▪ Open an existing single line diagram. For more information, see Opening Existing
Single Line Diagrams. (see "Opening Existing Single Line Diagrams" on page 501)
2. Click Tools > Drawing Options.
3. On the Single Line Drawing Options dialog box, click the Related Equipment tab.
4. Under Space heater options, select the Show space heaters next to associated plant
items check box. (For details, see under step 5 below.)
If you clear the Show space heaters next to associated plant items
check box, the software does the following:
▪ Space heaters connected to feeding equipment are placed under their feeding
equipment.
▪ Space heaters that are not connected are not displayed in the generated SLD drawing.
5. Under Space heater symbol displacement, type the values for the X: and Y: coordinates,
and select the units required from the Units list.
After selecting the Show space heaters next to associated plant items
check box, the software will place the connected space heaters according to the following
rules:
▪ All the connected space heaters will appear next to their associated plant items.
▪ The distance between the associated plant items and their space heaters is determined
by the Space heater symbol displacement values that you enter.
▪ In case of multiple space heaters associated with the same equipment, the
displacement value refers to the distance to the adjacent space heater.
▪ In case of multiple space heaters associated with the same equipment and the space
heater is represented by a nested symbol, the nested symbol will show the space

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 110

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

heaters included in the nested symbol and the rest of space heaters are shown using
the associated symbol for space heaters.
▪ In case of space heaters located within a PDB or cell, the space heaters will be shown
regardless of whether the frames around the PDBs or cells are shown or not. For space
heaters located within a PDB, the software will place the space heaters adjacent to the
bus that has the lowest sequence in group value. For space heaters located within a
cell, the software will place the space heaters adjacent to the circuit that has the lowest
sequence in group value. The exact placement of the space heaters in the PDB or cell
depends on the defined displacement values.
▪ The software will not show any space heaters associated with a cell that contains no
circuits.
6. Click Generate.

Use Compound Symbols for Space Heaters in SLDs

In single line diagrams, you can use a compound symbol to show a space heater next to its
associated plant item.
1. Create a compound symbol that suits your needs, for example an electrical motor and a
space heater. For details, see Creating and Using Compound Symbols for SLD Diagrams
(on page 517).
2. Associate the new compound symbol with the relevant item type in Options Manager. For
details, see Create and Use a Compound Symbol (on page 518).
You can associate just one specific electrical item with a custom symbol and select
a compound symbol if you want to use this compound symbol or that particular electrical
item. For details, see Use Custom Symbols in SLDs.
3. Generate your single line diagram.
The Space heater options on the Related Equipment tab of the Single Line
Diagram Options do not apply for electrical items associated with a symbol assembly.

Show Auxiliary Contacts Next to Disconnect Equipment in

SLDs
In single line diagrams, you can show auxiliary contacts next to their associated disconnect
equipment.
This procedure applies only to those auxiliary contacts that are represented by
independent auxiliary contact symbols. If the auxiliary contact symbol is represented by a
compound symbol, see Use Compound Symbols for Disconnect Equipment with Auxiliary
Contacts in SLDs (on page 112).
1. Do one of the following:
▪ Generate a new single line diagram. For more information, see Generating New Single
Line Diagrams (on page 493).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 111

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

▪ Open an existing single line diagram. For more information, see Opening Existing
Single Line Diagrams. (see "Opening Existing Single Line Diagrams" on page 501)
2. Click Tools > Drawing Options.
3. On the Single Line Drawing Options dialog box, click the Related Equipment tab.
4. Under Auxiliary contact options, select the Show auxiliary contacts next to disconnect
equipment check box.
5. Under Auxiliary contact symbol displacement, type the values for the X: and Y:
coordinates, and select the units required from the Units list.
6. Click Generate.
If you do not select the Show auxiliary contacts next to disconnect
equipment check box, the auxiliary contacts will be shown under their feeding equipment or
they will not be shown at all if their feeding equipment is not part of the current SLD.

Use Compound Symbols for Disconnect Equipment with

Auxiliary Contacts in SLDs
In single line diagrams, you can use a compound symbol to show an auxiliary contact next to its
associated disconnect equipment item.
1. Create a compound symbol that suits your needs, for example a circuit breaker and an
auxiliary contact. For details, see Creating and Using Compound Symbols for SLD
Diagrams (on page 517).
2. Associate the new compound symbol with the relevant item type in Options Manager. For
details, see Create and Use a Compound Symbol (on page 518).
You can associate just a specific electrical item with a custom symbol and select a
compound symbol if you want to use this compound symbol just for that particular electrical
item. For details, see Use Custom Symbols in SLDs.
3. Generate your single line diagram.
The Space heater options on the Related Equipment tab of the Single Line
Diagram Options do not apply for electrical items associated with a compound symbol.

Create a Generator
You can include generators to provide power supply for your utility.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy
Electrical Equipment > Generators.
2. Right-click the Generators folder, and then click New.
3. Accept the default item tag or type your own item tag for the generator.

▪ In the Reference Data Explorer, you can type a string up to 80 characters long.
▪ In the Electrical Index, the name must be in accordance with the naming convention for
generator. For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming
Conventions (on page 85).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 112

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

4. Edit the generator properties in the Properties window as required.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create the
generator.
▪ If the parent folder contains custom folders, the created item is placed in the root folder. If
the items properties match the filter properties of a custom folder a copy of the item is also
placed in the custom folder. Refreshing or closing and re- opening Smart Electrical moves
the item from the root folder to the All Items folder.

Define a Neutral Earthing Connection for Generators

The following procedure explains how to define a neutral earthing connection for a generator by
creating a neutral earthing connection branch under a particular generator in the Electrical
Engineer.
1. In the Electrical Engineer, under a generator, create an independent branch that starts with
a power cable or busway.
2. Right-click an appropriate generator and then click Common Properties on the shortcut
menu.
3. Click the Electrical Data tab.
4. Under the Neutral Earthing box, click Find.
5. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now and then select an appropriate child power cable or
busway that will be connected to the non-power connection point of the generator symbol in
an SLD.
6. Click OK to return to the Electrical Data tab of the Generator Common Properties dialog
box.
7. Generate an SLD for that generator.

▪ After generating an SLD, the diagram will display the neutral earthing branch connected to a
non-power connection point of the generator.
▪ If you are using custom symbols for your generators in SLDs, make sure that they have an
additional non-power connection point. Alternatively, you can use one of the symbol
provided in the shipped data.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 113

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Create an Offsite Power Supply

You can include offsite power supplies to provide power supply for your utility.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy
Electrical Equipment > Offsite Power Supplies.
2. Right-click the Offsite Power Supply folder, and then click New.
3. Accept the default item tag or type your own item tag for the offsite power supply.

▪ In the Reference Data Explorer, you can type a string up to 80 characters long.
▪ In the Electrical Index, the name must be in accordance with the naming convention for
offsite power supplies. For more details of naming convention settings, see Using
Naming Conventions (on page 85).
4. Edit the generator properties in the Properties window as required.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create an offsite
power supply.
▪ If the parent folder contains custom folders, the created item is placed in the root folder. If
the items properties match the filter properties of a custom folder a copy of the item is also
placed in the custom folder. Refreshing or closing and re- opening Smart Electrical moves
the item from the root folder to the All Items folder.

Create a Battery Bank

You can include battery banks to provide a power supply backup for your utility.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy
Electrical Equipment > Battery Banks.
2. Right-click the Battery Banks folder, and then click New.
3. Accept the default item tag or type your own item tag for the battery bank.

▪ In the Reference Data Explorer, you can type a string up to 80 characters long.
▪ In the Electrical Index, the name must be in accordance with the naming convention for
the battery bank. For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming
Conventions (on page 85).
4. Edit the battery bank properties in the Properties window as required.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create the battery
bank.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 114

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

▪ If the parent folder contains custom folders, the created item is placed in the root folder. If
the items properties match the filter properties of a custom folder a copy of the item is also
placed in the custom folder. Refreshing or closing and re- opening Smart Electrical moves
the item from the root folder to the All Items folder.

Converting Equipment
The following section contains topics related to the management of various types of converting
electrical equipment.
▪ Battery Chargers
▪ Other Converting Equipment — these includes devices such as rectifiers.
▪ Transformers — You can include various transformers in your plant wherever you need to
step-down or step-up the voltage. You can create transformers with two or three sets of
windings. For more information, see Create a Transformer.
▪ Uninterrupted Power Supplies (UPSs)
▪ Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs)
▪ Current Limiting Reactors
For information on how to define a converting equipment item as a consumer, see Define
Converting Equipment as Consumers (on page 118).

Create Converting Equipment

The following procedure applies to the creation of battery chargers, other electrical equipment,
UPSs, VFDs, and current limiting reactors. For information about transformers, see Create a
Transformer.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy
Electrical Equipment > Converting Equipment.
2. Right-click the folder for the required item type —for example, Battery Chargers —and then
click New.
3. Accept the default item tag or type your own item tag for the item.

▪ In the Reference Data Explorer, you can type a string up to 80 characters long.
▪ In the Electrical Index, the name must be in accordance with the naming convention for
the item type. For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming
Conventions (on page 85).
4. On the Converting Equipment Common Properties dialog box, edit the item properties as
required. Note that an asterisk beside a property name indicates required data.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create a new item.
▪ The Converting Equipment Common Properties dialog box shows the most commonly
used properties. You access this dialog box by clicking the Common Properties command

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 115

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open the dialog box directly
when you create a new item.
▪ You can define converting equipment items as consumers. This allows you to include these
items in the calculations of load summaries, load associations, and when generating all
feeder load summary reports. For details, see Define Converting Equipment as Consumers
(on page 118).
▪ If you do not define a converting equipment item as a consumer, you can still enter electrical
power values on the Electrical Data tab of the Converting Equipment Common
Properties dialog box. Electrical power values will be taken into account when calculating
load summaries only if the converting equipment item is defined as a consumer.
▪ You can also edit the most commonly used properties and additional properties in the
Properties window or in the EDE.
▪ If the parent folder contains custom folders, the created item is placed in the root folder. If
the items properties match the filter properties of a custom folder a copy of the item is also
placed in the custom folder. Refreshing or closing and re- opening Smart Electrical moves
the item from the root folder to the All Items folder.

Create a Transformer
1. In the Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy
Electrical Equipment > Converting Equipment > Transformers.
2. Right-click the Transformers folder, and then click New 2-winding Transformer or New
3-winding Transformer.
3. Accept the default item tag or type your own item tag for the transformer.

▪ In the Reference Data Explorer, you can type a string up to 80 characters long.
▪ In the Electrical Index, the name must be in accordance with the naming convention for
the transformer. For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming
Conventions (on page 85).
4. On the Converting Equipment Common Properties dialog box, edit the transformer
properties as required. Note that an asterisk beside a property name indicates required
data.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create a new
transformer.
▪ The Converting Equipment Common Properties dialog box shows the most commonly
used properties. You access this dialog box by clicking the Common Properties command
on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open the dialog box directly
when you create a new transformer.
▪ You can also edit the most commonly used properties and additional properties in the
Properties window or in the EDE.
▪ The secondary windings of a transformer are sub-items of the transformer. The properties
of the secondary windings appear separately in the Properties window. To view these

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 116

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

properties, expand the icon that represents the transformer and select the icon
representing the required secondary winding .
▪ If the parent folder contains custom folders, the created item is placed in the root folder. If
the items properties match the filter properties of a custom folder a copy of the item is also
placed in the custom folder. Refreshing or closing and re- opening Smart Electrical moves
the item from the root folder to the All Items folder.

Define Transformer Connections

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Converting
Equipment > Transformers.
2. Right-click a transformer primary winding, and on the shortcut menu, click Connections
and Tapping.
3. On the Transformer Connections and Tapping dialog box, click the tab for the winding
where you want to make the definitions: Primary, Secondary 1, or Secondary 2.
4. Specify the connection, for example, Wye, Delta, Star.
5. Specify the type of neutral grounding that you require.
The software does not validate the type of connection that you selected and allows
you to specify neutral grounding for all connection types.
6. Where the neutral grounding value is Solid Grounding or Impedance click the ellipsis
button beside Grounding cable to open the Find dialog box, where you can select a
grounding cable.
If necessary, define a new grounding cable, ensuring that you select the Use for
neutral grounding check box - only those grounding cables for which this check box is
selected are available for selection.

7. Where the neutral grounding value is Impedance click the ellipsis button beside
Grounding resistor.

▪ On the Find dialog box, the software retrieves all the existing resistors regardless of
whether they have or have not been associated with transformers. Make sure that you
select an appropriate resistor that has not been associated yet.
▪ If necessary, define a new resistor.
8. Click Apply to accept the values.
9. For a Secondary tab, enter values for the connection group, feeder winding, and phase
shifts as you require.

▪ You must specify a separate grounding cable and resistor for each winding, if needed.
▪ To enable the display of grounding cable and resistor data in an SLD, you must use a
transformer symbol that includes macros for these items. To do this, right-click on the
transformer, and on the shortcut menu click Associate custom symbols. On the
Associate Custom Symbols dialog box, under Document Type, select Single Line
Diagrams, then navigate to the symbol folder and select the appropriate file.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 117

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Define Transformer Tapping

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Converting
Equipment > Transformers.
2. Right-click a transformer primary winding and on the shortcut menu, click Connections and
Tapping.
3. On the Transformer Connections and Tapping dialog box, click the tab for the winding
where you want to make the definitions: Primary, Secondary 1, or Secondary 2.
4. Select Tapping required and enter values for the tapping, percentage per step, and
number of steps as you require.
5. Enter values for other transformer windings as you require by clicking the appropriate tabs.

Define Converting Equipment as Consumers

You can define converting equipment items as consumers. This allows you to include these
items in the calculations of load summaries, load associations, and when generating all feeder
load summary reports.
1. Select a converting equipment item in the Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ On the General tab of the Common Properties dialog box, select the Consumer
check box.
▪ In the Properties window, set the Is Load property to True.
3. On the Common Properties dialog box, click the Electrical Data tab.
4. Enter appropriate values in the Electrical power group box.
When performing a drill-down calculation for a PDB that has a branch connected to a
bus through a converting equipment item, junction box, or local panel that is defined as a
consumer, the software takes into account the total of this branch using the electrical power
values of this converting equipment item.

Power Distribution Equipment

Smart Electrical provides for the creation and management of the following:
▪ Power distribution boards (PDBs) and their child items, such as buses, circuits, and so on.
▪ Disconnect electrical equipment:
▪ Contactors
▪ Overload relays
▪ Disconnect switches
▪ Circuit breakers
▪ Fuses
▪ Starters

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 118

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

▪ Other disconnect equipment

▪ Metering equipment
▪ Freestanding buses
For information on the design of power distribution board structures, see Designing Power
Distribution Boards (on page 129).

Power Distribution Boards and Buses

This section deals with the creation and management of power distribution boards (PDBs) and
buses. You can do the following:
▪ Create a Power Distribution Board (PDB) (on page 119)
▪ Create a Bus (on page 120)
▪ Create a Freestanding Bus (on page 120)
▪ Delete a Power Distribution Board or a PDB Internal Item (on page 120)

Create a Power Distribution Board (PDB)

This procedure explains how to create a power distribution board (PDB).
In the Reference Data Explorer, you can create PDBs with buses only.
1. In the Electrical Index or the Reference Data Explorer, expand the folder hierarchy
Electrical Equipment > Power Distribution Equipment.
2. Right-click the Power Distribution Board folder and click New.
3. Accept the default item tag or type your own item tag for the PDB.

▪ In the Reference Data Explorer, you can type a string of up to 80 characters in length.
▪ In the Electrical Index, the name must be in accordance with the naming convention for
the PDB. For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming
Conventions (on page 85).
4. Design the PDB structure if you need to do it at this stage. For details, see Design a Power
Distribution Board Structure (on page 129).

▪ You can also create a power distribution board by dragging a typical PDB from the
Reference Data Explorer to the Electrical Index.
▪ You can customize the appearance of how the PDB appears on your SLD drawings. The
options available include line style, width, and color, position of SmartText and so forth. For
more details, see Creating Symbols in the Catalog Manager User's Guide, under Catalog
Manager, Working with Symbols, Creating Symbols.
▪ If the parent folder contains custom folders, the created item is placed in the root folder. If
the items properties match the filter properties of a custom folder a copy of the item is also
placed in the custom folder. Refreshing or closing and re- opening Smart Electrical moves
the item from the root folder to the All Items folder.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 119

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Create a Bus
This procedure explains how to add a new bus to a power distribution board.
1. In the Electrical Index or the Reference Data Explorer, expand the folder hierarchy
Electrical Equipment > Power Distribution Equipment > Power Distribution Boards.
2. Click a PDB to expand its folder hierarchy.
3. Right-click the Buses folder and click New.
4. Accept the default item tag or type your own item tag for the bus.

▪ In the Reference Data Explorer, you can type a string up to 80 characters long.
▪ In the Electrical Index, the name must be in accordance with the naming convention for
the bus. For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming
Conventions (on page 85).
5. Edit the bus properties as required in the Properties window.
You can also create a dual bus. Create buses and then connect them using a bus
tie. For information about bus tie creation, see Associate Bus Riser Circuits with Coupler
Circuits (on page 234).

Create a Freestanding Bus

Smart Electrical allows you to create freestanding buses that are not associated with power
distribution boards. You create these buses in the Freestanding Buses folder of the Electrical
Index. Freestanding buses can be parent items of circuits and circuit internals, but not cells.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Power
Distribution Equipment > Freestanding Buses.
2. Right-click the Freestanding Buses folder and click New Bus.
The software creates a new freestanding bus and names it automatically. In the
Electrical Engineer, freestanding buses appear at the top level.

Delete a Power Distribution Board or a PDB Internal Item

This procedure shows how to delete a power distribution board or any PDB internal item. The
topic also states the deletion preconditions and lists the other items that the software deletes
with the selected item.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Power
Distribution Equipment > Power Distribution Boards.
2. Select a PDB or one of its internal items.
3. Click Edit > Delete.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 120

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

You can also delete a PDB or any PDB internal item by right-clicking an item and
selecting Delete on the shortcut menu.

▪ You can delete only items that do not have associations to other items. For example, you
cannot delete a power distribution board associated with loads unless you first dissociate
the loads.
▪ If you select more than one item for deletion, the software records any deletion failures in
the Batch Deletion log file. For the procedure for creating and viewing the log file, see
Generate Error Log Files (on page 880).

Deletion Rules for PDBs and PDB Internal Items

The following rules apply when you delete a PDB or a PDB internal item in the Electrical Index:

PDB Item Precondition Result

Power distribution You have dissociated all The software also deletes all the
board the circuits in the PDB internal buses, cells, circuits, and
from external items, such circuit components.
as cables, loads, and so
forth.

Bus You have dissociated all The software also deletes all the
the bus circuits from cells, circuits, and circuit
external items, such as components.
cables, loads, and so forth.

Cell You have dissociated all The software also deletes all the
the circuits in the cell from circuits in the cell and the circuit
external items, such as components.
cables, loads, and so forth.

Circuit You have dissociated all The software also deletes all the
the external items, such as circuit components.
cables, loads from the
circuit.

Circuit internal The software deletes the circuit

internal and clears any existing
association with a typical circuit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 121

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Create Disconnect Electrical Equipment

You can create the following types of disconnect electrical equipment in your plant:
▪ Contactors
▪ Overload relays
▪ Disconnect switches
▪ Circuit breakers
▪ Fuses
▪ Starters
▪ Other disconnect equipment
Note that you can create auxiliary contacts under all disconnect
equipment types except for metering equipment.
1. In the Electrical Index or Reference Data Explorer, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical
Equipment > Power Distribution Equipment > Disconnect Electrical Equipment.
2. Expand the hierarchy of the folder for the required item type.
3. Right-click the folder and then click New.
4. Accept the default item tag or type your own item tag for the item.

▪ In the Reference Data Explorer, you can type a string up to 80 characters long.
▪ In the Electrical Index, the name must be in accordance with the naming convention for
the item type. For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming
Conventions (on page 85).
5. On the Disconnect Electrical Equipment Common Properties dialog box, edit the item
properties as required. Note that an asterisk beside a property name indicates required
data.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create a new item.
▪ The Disconnect Electrical Equipment Common Properties dialog box shows the most
commonly used properties. You access this dialog box by clicking the Common
Properties command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open
the dialog box directly when you create a new item.
▪ You can also edit the most commonly used properties and additional properties in the
Properties window or in the EDE.
▪ If the parent folder contains custom folders, the created item is placed in the root folder. If
the items properties match the filter properties of a custom folder a copy of the item is also
placed in the custom folder. Refreshing or closing and re- opening Smart Electrical moves
the item from the root folder to the All Items folder.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 122

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Create an Auxiliary Contact

Auxiliary contacts are child items of disconnect electrical equipment.

▪ You can create only one auxiliary contact under a given type of disconnect electrical
equipment.
▪ You cannot create auxiliary contacts under metering equipment.
1. In the Electrical Index or Reference Data Explorer, expand the following hierarchy:
Power Distribution Equipment > Disconnect Electrical Equipment.
Also, you can create an auxiliary contact under any circuit in the Electrical Index.
However, the software does not allow you to create more than one auxiliary contact under a
specific circuit. That is, if you try to create an auxiliary contact under a circuit which already
has an auxiliary contact, the software displays a message informing you that this operation
is not allowed.
2. Expand the hierarchy further until you see the individual child items of disconnect electrical
equipment.
3. Right-click an appropriate child item of the required disconnect electrical equipment (for
example, a contactor) and then click New.

▪ In the Reference Data Explorer, you can type a string up to 80 characters long.
▪ In the Electrical Index, the name must be in accordance with the naming convention for
the item type. For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming
Conventions (on page 85).
4. In the Properties window, enter the item properties as required.
On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or
duplicating an item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create
a new item.

Metering Equipment
Smart Electrical allows you to create equipment for measuring electrical parameters such as
voltages and currents. The software allows you to create voltmeters, ammeters, and
multimeters. For measuring large voltages and currents, you can also create measuring
transformers for these parameters. You create standard meters and measuring transformers in
the Reference Data Explorer as standalone items or as part of reference circuits.
In addition, you can create protection relays with various functions for protecting the circuit.
In the Electrical Index, you can create metering equipment at any level under a PDB. You can
display metering equipment in single line diagrams.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 123

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Create Measuring Transformers

This procedure explains how to create current and potential transformers. These items are
'in-line' items which you can pace at specific points in a circuit to measure currents and voltages.
1. Do one of the following:
▪ In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the hierarchy Power Distribution Equipment
> Disconnect Electrical Equipment > Metering Equipment.
▪ In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by clicking the + icons or by
double-clicking the folders, and then select an item according to the following step.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Under the Electrical Equipment folder, navigate to a load, an item of converting
equipment, or another electrical item, and display the Metering Equipment folder for
that item.
▪ Expand the hierarchy Power Distribution Equipment > Power Distribution Boards
and select a Metering Equipment folder under a power distribution board, a bus, a cell,
or a transfer switch.
▪ Expand the hierarchy Power Distribution Equipment > Power Distribution Boards
and select a circuit.
3. Right-click the selected item, and then click one of the following:
▪ New Current Transformer.
▪ New Potential Transformer.
4. Select the new item that you have created, and in the Properties window, type a numeric
value for the Tag Sequence No property.
The Tag Sequence No property determines the positioning of the measuring
transformer on the SLD.
5. With the item selected, do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Common Properties.
▪ Right-click the item and on the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
▪ Press CTRL + F2.
6. On the Metering Equipment Common Properties dialog box, enter the required values for
the item.
If the parent folder contains custom folders, the created item is placed in the root
folder. If the items properties match the filter properties of a custom folder a copy of the item is
also placed in the custom folder. Refreshing or closing and re- opening Smart Electrical moves
the item from the root folder to the All Items folder.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 124

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Create Meters
This procedure explains how to create ammeters, voltmeters, or multimeters. You can use
these meters to measure the outputs of measuring transformers.
1. Do one of the following:
▪ In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the hierarchy Power Distribution Equipment
> Disconnect Electrical Equipment > Metering Equipment.
▪ In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by clicking the + icons or by
double-clicking the folders, and then select an item according to the following step.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Under the Electrical Equipment folder, navigate to a load, an item of converting
equipment, or another electrical item, and display the Metering Equipment folder for
that item.
▪ Expand the hierarchy Power Distribution Equipment > Power Distribution Boards
and select a Metering Equipment folder under a power distribution board, a bus, a cell,
or a transfer switch.
▪ Expand the hierarchy Power Distribution Equipment > Power Distribution Boards
and select a circuit.
▪ Right-click the selected item, and then click one of the following:
▪ New Ammeter.
▪ New Voltmeter.
▪ New Multimeter.
3. Select the new item that you have created, and in the Properties window, type a numeric
value for the Tag Sequence No property.

▪ The Tag Sequence No property determines the positioning of the meter on the SLD.
▪ To display a meter on an SLD, you need to drag it to the SLD after generation.
4. With the item selected, do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Common Properties.
▪ Right-click the item and on the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
▪ Press CTRL + F2.
5. On the Metering Equipment Common Properties dialog box, enter the required values for
the item.
6. For a multimeter, click the Ranges tab to specify the meter functions and required range of
values for each function.
If the parent folder contains custom folders, the created item is placed in the root
folder. If the items properties match the filter properties of a custom folder a copy of the item is
also placed in the custom folder. Refreshing or closing and re- opening Smart Electrical moves
the item from the root folder to the All Items folder.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 125

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Create Protection Relays

This procedure explains how to create protection relays. You can assign one or more functions
to a protection relay.
1. Do one of the following:
▪ In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the hierarchy Power Distribution Equipment
> Disconnect Electrical Equipment > Metering Equipment.
▪ In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by clicking the + icons or by
double-clicking the folders, and then select an item according to the following step.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Under the Electrical Equipment folder, navigate to a load, an item of converting
equipment, or another electrical item, and display the Metering Equipment folder for
that item.
▪ Expand the hierarchy Power Distribution Equipment > Power Distribution Boards
and select a Metering Equipment folder under a power distribution board, a bus, a cell,
or a transfer switch.
▪ Expand the hierarchy Power Distribution Equipment > Power Distribution Boards
and select a circuit.
▪ Expand the hierarchy Power Distribution Equipment > Disconnect Electrical
Equipment > Protection Relays.
3. Right-click the selected item, and then click New Protection Relay.
4. Select the new protection relay that you have created, and in the Properties window, type a
numeric value for the Tag Sequence No property.

▪ The Tag Sequence No property determines the positioning of the measuring

transformer on the SLD.
▪ To display a protection relay on an SLD, you need to drag it to the SLD after generation.
5. With the protection relay selected, do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Common Properties.
▪ Right-click the protection relay and on the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
▪ Press CTRL + F2.
6. On the Metering Equipment Common Properties dialog box, enter appropriate values for
the protection relay.
7. Click the Functions tab to specify the relay functions that you want to include.
8. Click Add for each new function that you want to add to the protection relay and from the
Find dialog box, select the required relay function.
9. Modify the function properties if required.

▪ In Data Dictionary, you can add user-defined properties for your protection relay functions.
For details, see the Data Dictionary documentation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 126

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

▪ Modifying the function properties does not affect the default values for that function.
If the parent folder contains custom folders, the created item is placed in the root
folder. If the items properties match the filter properties of a custom folder a copy of the item is
also placed in the custom folder. Refreshing or closing and re- opening Smart Electrical moves
the item from the root folder to the All Items folder.

Create a Relay Function and Add It to a Protection Relay

You create relay functions in the Reference Data Explorer. Once a relay function exists in the
Reference Data Explorer, you can add it to a protection relay in your plant. Each relay function
represents a default action in response to a standard setting. After adding a relay functions to
protection relays in the Electrical Index, you can modify the function parameters. Also, it is
possible to associate a relay function with a custom symbol, place a relay function on a
composite drawing, and associate an auxiliary graphic with a relay function.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, select the Electrical Equipment folder and select Relay
Functions.
2. Right-click the folder, and then click New Relay Function.
3. In the Properties window, enter values for the following relay function properties:
▪ Relay Action.
▪ Relay Function Code.
▪ Relay Function Type.
▪ Relay Percent Setting.
▪ Relay Setting.
The software uses the values that you enter for the relay functions as defaults when
you add those relay functions to a protection relay. Any subsequent modifications you
make to those values in the protection relay do not change the default relay function values.
4. In the Electrical Index, right-click a protection relay and then on the shortcut menu, click
Common Properties.
5. On the Metering Equipment Common Properties dialog box, click the Functions tab.
6. Click Add.
7. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now.
8. In the Results box, select the required relay function and click OK.

▪ The new relay function appears on the Functions tab of the Metering Equipment
Common Properties dialog box and in the Electrical Index under the pertinent
protection relay.
▪ You can place the relay function on a composite drawing by dragging it from the
Electrical Index to an open drawing.
▪ To associate an auxiliary graphic with a relay function in a composite drawing, do the
following:
i. Right-click an auxiliary graphic in an open drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 127

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

ii. On the shortcut menu, click Associate with Electrical Item.

iii. On the Find dialog box, from the Equipment type list, select Relay Function and
click Find Now.
iv. In the Results box, select the required relay function and click OK.
▪ To associate a relay function with a custom symbol, right-click the relay function in the
Electrical index and then, on the shortcut menu, click Associate/Dissociate Custom
Symbols.

Copy Metering Equipment

This procedure explains how to copy metering equipment by dragging default items from the
Reference Data Explorer to an appropriate target folder in the Electrical Index.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment >
Power Distribution Equipment > Disconnect Electrical Equipment > Metering
Equipment.
2. Select an item in one of the sub- folders.
3. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy and display the Metering Equipment
folder for one of the following item types:
▪ Loads
▪ Converting equipment
▪ Converting equipment components
▪ Battery banks
▪ Generators
▪ Off-site power
▪ PDBs
▪ Buses
▪ Cells
▪ Circuits
▪ Disconnect electrical equipment
▪ Transfer switches
4. Drag the required metering equipment item from the Reference Data Explorer to the
appropriate target folder.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 128

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Designing Power Distribution Boards

After creating a power distribution board (PDB) and the required cells, you have to design the
physical structure of the PDB and assign the cells to specific places in the PDB.
You design your PDBs in a PDB layout drawing which takes the form of a grid that represents
the physical structure of the current PDB. We recommend the following flow of activities when
designing your power distribution boards:
1. Create the physical structure of the PDB.
2. Create a PDB layout drawing and associate it with a particular PDB.
3. Create the required cells for the PDB and define their size. Note that you can automate the
cell size definition so that the size of the cells will be based on particular electrical properties
of the equipment associated with the cells.
4. Place the cells in the appropriate places in the drawing and thus assign the cells to specific
locations in the drawing grid.
5. Save the drawing.
Also, we recommend that you make a number of preliminary setting prior to the actual PDB
design. These settings are optional.
In Options Manager, you can define the following:
▪ Define which characters you want to exclude from the PDB row names.
▪ Define the location of the default PDB layout drawing template.
▪ Define the location of the PDB layout symbols.
▪ Define the naming conventions for PDB and cells.
▪ Define the item type symbology for cells. That is, define a particular symbol for cells that
have specific properties such as width, height, etc.
▪ In Catalog Manager, you can customize the symbols for PDBs and cells. This
customization allows you to show the cell properties in drawing in the manner that you need.
For information on how to carry out the specific tasks to make these preliminary settings, see
the appropriate topics in the documentation of each manager.

Design a Power Distribution Board Structure

This procedure explains how to design the physical structure of a power distribution board. This
is the first step in the PDB design and you have to perform this procedure before you open a
PDB layout drawing and associate it with the current PDB.
You design the PDB structure on the Power Distribution Board Structure dialog box. Since
PDB structure takes the form of a layout grid which is made up of grid units, you need to set the
required unit height and width.
Then, you define the number of vertical sections that the PDB will contain. You set the section
names and determine the section width (in grid units). The number of sections and their width
will determine the width of the PDB. Also, you can define the PDB as double-sided. This
allows you to set each section on the front or back of the PDB.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 129

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

To determine the height of the PDB, you have to define the number of grid rows and set the row
names. Note that the height of each row is determined by the setting of the grid unit
height. The software allows you to determine the row naming type and exclude any unwanted
characters from the row names.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Power
Distribution Equipment.
2. Right-click the Power Distribution Board folder and click Design PDB Structure.
3. On the Power Distribution Board Structure dialog box, enter the values in the following
group boxes:
▪ General definitions —These settings allow you to define the height and width of the
grid units that make up the PDB layout drawing. The width of the vertical sections and
the height of the grid rows are measured in these units. Also, you can define the
current PDB as double- sided.
▪ Section definitions —These settings allow you to define the vertical sections of the
current PDB.
▪ Grid rows —These settings allow you to define the vertical structure of the current
PDB. That is, you define the number of rows that will make up the height of the current
PDB.

▪ For more details about the values needed for PDB structures, see Power Distribution Board
Structure Dialog Box (on page 1118).
▪ If you need to change the physical structure of a PDB that is already associated with a PDB
layout, the software does not allow you to make any changes to those parts of the structure
that are assigned to cells. For example, if you want to delete a section or a row where you
have already placed a cell, you have to open the pertinent PDB layout drawing and remove
the cell. Only then can you reopen the Power Distribution Board Structure dialog box
and delete that section or row.

Design a Power Distribution Board Layout

This procedure explains how to design a layout for a power distribution board. This design
consists of several stages and it is based on the physical structure that has been defined for the
selected PDB.
The first step in the design is to create a PDB layout drawing and associate it with the structure
of the current PDB. Next, you place the appropriate cells in the layout grid by dragging a cell to
the drawing.
Before you start this procedure, make sure that the physical structure of the
current PDB has been defined. For details on how to define a PDB physical structure, see
Design a Power Distribution Board Structure (on page 129).
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Documents > PDB Layout Drawings.
2. Right-click the PDB Layout Drawings folder and then on the shortcut menu click New PDB
Layout Drawing.
3. Right-click the new drawing and then on the shortcut menu click Document Properties.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 130

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

4. On the Document Properties dialog box, select an appropriate template and set the scale
factor, which determines how the PDB is actually displayed in the drawing.
5. Right-click the drawing name in the Electrical Index and then on the shortcut menu click
Open.
6. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Power
Distribution Equipment > Power Distribution Boards and select an appropriate PDB.
7. Drag the PDB from the Electrical Index to the open drawing.
Once you drag the PDB to the drawing, the software draws the PDB structure based
on the definitions you entered on the Power Distribution Board Structure dialog
box. Also, the software associates the drawing with the current PDB. The software allows
only one drawing to be associated with a PDB.
8. In the Electrical Index, expand the hierarchy of the current PDB to display the existing
cells.
Now you are ready to start placing the cells in the PDB layout. Prior to doing that,
make sure that the size of all the cells has been defined. The cell size can be automated or
defined manually. For more information, see Create a Cell (on page 132).
9. Drag each cell from the Electrical Index to the appropriate place in the layout grid.
The software places the cell in the drawing and associates the cell with its location in the
drawing grid.

▪ The software represents the cells using a default symbol and a macro that specifies the
cell name.
▪ You can customize your own PDB and cell symbols or use the default symbols provided
by the software.
▪ The software determines the symbol size automatically based on the cell size.
▪ You can specify the cell names based on the physical location of the cells within the
PDB. The cells inherit and store in their properties all the spatial coordinates related to
their locations. You can use these coordinates when defining the cell naming
conventions.
▪ When placing a cell in the drawing grid, the origin point of the placed symbol is always
the upper left corner of the upper grid row taken by the symbol.
▪ Make sure that you synchronize the size of your cell symbols with the size of the
cells. When creating cell symbols, the symbol size has to be defined according to the
original physical size of the cell. The software scales the macro fonts and x and y
coordinates according to the scale factor defined on the Document Properties dialog
box. This way you will avoid a situation in which the software places the macro
incorrectly or the macro size exceeds the size of the cell units.
10. Save the drawing.

▪ A PDB can have only one structure and be associated only with one PDB layout drawing.
▪ Once you placed a cell in the grid, moving a cell to another place in the drawing grid is
possible if that part of the grid is vacant, that is there are no other cells assigned to that part

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 131

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

of the grid. To move a cell, click Edit > Move Cell and then drag the cell to another place in
the grid.
▪ To remove a cell from the layout drawing, select a cell in the layout drawing and then click
Edit > Remove Cell. Removing a cell from a PDB layout drawing does not delete the cell
from your plant. Once you remove a cell from a PDB layout, the software dissociates the
cell from the drawing and the place that used to occupy in the grid becomes available for
other cells. If no other cells exist, you can delete the vacant rows from the PDB
structure. For details, see Design a Power Distribution Board Structure (on page 129).
▪ Save the PDB layout drawing in the file format that you require.
▪ Deleting a PDB layout drawing, does not dissociate the PDB from its layout. Furthermore,
the software still retains the association of the cells with their locations in the PDB
layout. The PDB layout drawing serves only as a means to show the PDB layout in a
graphical way. Therefore, if you want to redesign the structure of a PDB, open the
associated PDB layout drawing and remove all the cells.
▪ You can open an existing PDB layout drawing for a specific power distribution board by
right-clicking a PDB in the Electrical Index and then clicking Associated Drawings.
▪ The scale of PDB layout drawings is limited to 1:100.

Open a PDB Layout Design for a Selected PDB

Follow this procedure when opening a PDB layout design for a particular PDB.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Power
Distribution Equipment > Power Distribution Boards.
2. Right-click the required PDB and click Open PDB Layout.

Create a Cell
This procedure shows how to create a cell and manually define its size. Note that you must
define the cell size prior to assigning it to a specific location in a PDB layout.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Power
Distribution Equipment > Power Distribution Boards > Buses.
2. Right-click a bus and click New Cell.
3. Accept the default item tag that is based on the naming convention for the cell or type your
own item tag according to the naming convention.
For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming Conventions (on
page 85).
4. Edit the other cell properties in the Properties window as required.

▪ It is essential that you define the cell size. This definition is required for PDB layout
design. You can define the cell size manually or perform a procedure that will automate the
cells sizing every time you create a cell. To define the cell size manually, in the Properties
window, under Identification, type an appropriate value for Cell Height in Units and Cell
Width in Units. Alternatively, you can type a Space Factor. The Cell Height in Units
value equals double of the Space Factor value. The Space Factor value that you can type
can only be incremented by 0.5, for example 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2,5, and so forth.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 132

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

▪ For information on how to perform the procedure that automates cell size definition, see
Automate Cell Size Definition (on page 133).

▪ Now you can place this cell in a PDB layout drawing by dragging it from the Electrical Index
to an appropriate place in the layout grid. For details, see Design a PDB Layout (see
"Design a Power Distribution Board Layout" on page 130).
▪ We recommend that you redefine the cell naming conventions and use the available spatial
properties of cells so that you can fully take advantage of the PDB layout functionality. Also
note that the Row Name and Section Name cell properties are no longer in use.

Automate Cell Size Definition

This procedure explains how to automate the definition of cell sizes. Defining a cell size is
essential for PDB layout design. Automating your cell size definition is very useful if you want
cell size values to be based on particular electrical properties of the equipment associated with
the cells.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, create a lookup table that sets a relation between load
data (rated power, voltage, and so on) and cell size values (cell height and cell width). For
information on how to create a lookup table, see Create Lookup Tables (on page 74).
2. In Rule Manager, define a set of rules that will instruct the software to copy the load data to
the cell properties that they are assigned to. As a result, whenever a load-cell relationship
is created, the software will copy the load property values to the cell. For information on
how to define rules, see the Rule Properties topic in the Rule Manager documentation.
3. Apply the cell lookup tables to the appropriate cells in your plant. This will automatically set
the cell size according to their definitions in the lookup tables. For details on how to apply
lookup tables, see Apply Lookup Table Data to Equipment.
You can define a number of different rules and lookup tables for various cell sizes
and load data values.

Using Dual Source Power Supplies

Smart Electrical allows you to specify two power sources for equipment: a primary source and
an alternative source.
The following item types can have a dual source power supply:
▪ All loads (for example, a motor fed by supplies on two separate buses).
▪ All converting equipment items (for example, a variable-frequency drive fed by the two
secondaries of a 3-winding transformer or an uninterruptible power supply fed by a main
input with battery back-up).
▪ All instruments and cabinets.
You can drag one of these items in the Electrical Engineer to any item that can have a
single-source power supply.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 133

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

To set up a dual power supply, you first create each of the feeder branches and associate the
main supply with the item. Next, you specify the second feeder branch as the alternative power
supply. The software can display dual power supplies in single line diagrams.

▪ Loads that are connected to circuits for which the circuit mode value is Disconnected
appear in bus load summaries, but the software does not take those loads into account in
the total load calculation.
▪ If a load is connected to a dual power source that originates from the same feeding
upstream bus, the software does not count such a load twice and accounts for it correctly in
load summaries and other load calculations.
▪ For batch load association calculations, a load connected to a circuit in Disconnected mode
is only displayed in the Associated loads data window of the Bus Load Association
dialog box. Such a load does not appear in the Calculation results group box. There is no
need to set the circuit mode as Connected or Disconnected for loads that have an
alternative power source. The software automatically sets the circuit mode of these loads to
Disconnected.

Associate a Dual Power Supply with an Equipment Item

Smart Electrical allows you to specify two power sources for equipment: a primary source and
an alternative source.
The following item types can have a dual source power supply:
▪ All loads (for example, a motor fed by supplies on two separate buses).
▪ All converting equipment items (for example, a variable-frequency drive fed by the two
secondaries of a 3-winding transformer or an uninterruptible power supply fed by a main
input with battery back-up).
▪ All instruments and cabinets.
You can drag one of these items in the Electrical Engineer to any item that can have a
single-source power supply.
1. In the Electrical Index, create the load to which you want to associate the power supplies.
2. Create two power cables to associate with the item.
3. Create two feeder branches: one for each supply, for example a generator and an off-site
power supply, each attached to a bus.
4. In the Electrical Engineer, associate the load with the main supply. For details, see
Associate Electrical Equipment with Feeders (on page 231).
5. Select the load and right-click.
6. On the shortcut menu, click Select Alternative Power Source.
7. On the dialog box that opens, navigate to the item that you want to designate as the
alternative supply.
If the item is not visible in the window, select a branch and click
Expand. Alternatively, click Find to locate the item using the Find dialog box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 134

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

8. Click OK to select the item as the alternative power supply.

The OK button is only enabled when you select an item that is valid for use as an
alternative power supply.
9. To view the load power supplies, select the load, and on the shortcut menu, click Common
Properties.
10. On the Common Properties dialog box for the load, click the Feeder Data tab to view
details of the main power supply and click the Alternative Feeder tab to view the name of
the feeder equipment used as the secondary power supply.

▪ In the Electrical Engineer, the software places a visual indication '(#)' beside the names of
the load and the feeder cable where they appear in the alternative power supply branch.
▪ You can change the alternative power source by right-clicking the feeder cable in the
alternative power supply branch and clicking Change Alternative Power Source.
▪ If the load is only connected to an alternative power source, any drag-and-drop operations
that you perform in the Electrical Engineer affect the primary power source only.

Change an Alternative Power Supply of an Equipment Item

1. In the Electrical Engineer, select the load for which you want to change the alternative
supply.
You can only change the alternative supply if you select the item at the lowest level
of the branch.
2. Right-click the load.
3. On the shortcut menu, click Change Alternative Power Source.
4. On the dialog box that opens, navigate to the item that you want to designate as the
alternative supply.
If the item is not visible in the window, select a branch and click
Expand. Alternatively, click Find to locate the item using the Find dialog box.
5. Click OK to select the item as the alternative power supply.

Dissociate an Alternative Power Supply from an Equipment

Item
1. In the Electrical Engineer, select the load for which you want to dissociate the alternative
supply.
You can only dissociate the alternative supply if you select the item at the lowest
level of the branch.
2. Click Actions > Dissociate.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 135

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Using Transfer Switches

Transfer switches are two-way manual or automatic switches that are used to switch or transfer
an essential load from the main power source to a backup power source.
In the Electrical Engineer, the software displays a transfer switch as a normal bus with two
incomers. You drag each incomer separately to its parent power source. The software shows
the two paths separately, with the items downstream of the transfer switch repeated on each
path. The software can display transfer switches and their electrical paths in single line
diagrams.

▪ You cannot select transfer switches as designated PDBs on the Feeder tabs of the
Common Properties dialog boxes for loads, converting equipment, and so forth.
▪ The software includes the name of a transfer switch on the Feeder tab for a connected load
as part of the feeder path.
▪ After you create a transfer switch, you can add cells and circuit internals to it.

Create a Transfer Switch

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Power
Distribution Equipment > Power Distribution Boards > Transfer Switches folder.
2. Right-click the Transfer Switches folder, and on the shortcut menu, click New Transfer
Switch.
The software creates a PDB, a bus, two incomers, and a feeder. The Equipment
Type property for the PDB is set as Transfer Switch.
3. Select one of the incomers.
4. Right-click the incomer and on the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
5. On the Circuit Common Properties dialog box, select a value for the Circuit Mode
property: Connected or Disconnected.
When you select a circuit mode value Connected for a transfer switch incomer, the
value for the second incomer circuit mode automatically changes to Disconnected. You
can set either both incomers or just one incomer to be disconnected.
6. Specify values for the other incomer properties as you require.
7. Close the dialog box and in the Electrical Engineer, connect items to the feeder and
incomer branches as you require.
If the parent folder contains custom folders, the created item is placed in the root
folder. If the items properties match the filter properties of a custom folder a copy of the item is
also placed in the custom folder. Refreshing or closing and re- opening Smart Electrical moves
the item from the root folder to the All Items folder.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 136

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Generate an SLD for a Transfer Switch

1. In the Electrical Engineer, while holding down the CTRL key, select the top-level items in
both of the branches associated with the transfer switch.
2. Right-click one of the selected items and on the shortcut menu, click New SLD.

Working with Circuits

This section deals with the creation and management of circuits. The following tasks are used
frequently when you add feeder circuits to buses on power distribution boards (PDBs). Usually,
you define your circuits and then assign them to loads. You can do the following:
▪ Create a Circuit (on page 137)
▪ Copy Circuit Components (on page 138)
▪ Apply Typical Circuit Data to a Plant Circuit (on page 139)
▪ Create Circuit Components (on page 139)
▪ Change the Location of a Circuit on a Bus (see "Move a Circuit to Another Place on a Bus"
on page 140)

Create a Circuit
This procedure shows how to create a new circuit in the Electrical Index. You can create a
circuit under a bus or cell.
1. In the Electrical Index, do one of the following:
▪ Expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Power Distribution Equipment >
Power Distribution Boards > Buses.
▪ Expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Power Distribution Equipment >
Power Distribution Boards > Buses >Cell.
You can also create a circuit by dragging a typical circuit from the Reference Data
Explorer to the Electrical Index.
2. Right-click a bus or cell and then on the shortcut menu, select one of the following:
▪ New Feeder Circuit
▪ New Incomer Circuit
▪ New Coupler Circuit
▪ New Bus Riser Circuit
3. Accept the default item tag that is based on the naming convention for the circuit or type
your own item tag according to the naming convention.
For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming Conventions (on
page 85).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 137

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

4. Edit the circuit properties as required on the Circuit Common Properties dialog box.

▪ When creating a circuit under the same cell, you can create circuits that have different circuit
functions. If a cell contains circuits with mixed functions (for example, incomer and feeder
circuits), the cell type is undefined.
▪ You cannot change the circuit function in the Properties window. If you want to change the
function of an existing circuit, create a new one that has a different circuit function and then
delete the redundant circuit. The software does not restrict the circuit function of the circuits
under a cell to a single circuit function.
▪ You can associate the internal components of a circuit with relevant lookup tables that
contain appropriate data. On the Circuit Common Properties dialog box, click the
Associate Items tab. Then, in the Circuit internals data window, under Lookup Table,
click and select the lookup table that you require. You will then be able to apply this
associated lookup table to a plant circuit when you run the Apply Lookup Tables feature on
the Apply Options dialog box to propagate the lookup table data to the circuit internal
components.
▪ After retrieving data from ETAP, you may want to change the type of the circuit that was
retrieved. For details, see Retrieve ETAP Project Data (on page 877).

Copy Circuit Components

This procedure shows how to copy circuit components, such as protection devices, disconnect
devices, electrical distribution equipment, and so forth, from the Reference Data Explorer.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Power
Distribution Equipment > Power Distribution Boards > Buses.
2. Double-click a bus to expand its folder hierarchy.
3. Select the required circuit.
4. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment >
Power Distribution Equipment > Disconnect Electrical Equipment.
5. Select the appropriate sub-folder and drag the required item to the circuit in the Electrical
Index.

▪ If the circuit was previously populated with typical circuit data, the software clears the
reference to the typical circuit.
▪ If the circuit is already associated with a load, the software clears the reference to the typical
circuit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 138

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

Apply Typical Circuit Data to a Plant Circuit

This procedure shows how to apply circuit components using a typical circuit from the
Reference Data Explorer to an existing plant circuit. This method is recommended for bulk
replacement of circuits with internal components.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Power
Distribution Equipment > Power Distribution Boards > Buses.
2. Expand the Buses folder and in the lower pane, select one or more circuits to which you
want to assign the typical circuit.
You can assign a typical circuit to a bus, in which case the software adds to the bus
a new circuit containing components that are derived from the typical circuit.
3. Click Tools > Apply Options.
4. On the Apply Options dialog box, click the Typical Circuit tab.
5. Select Enable typical circuit.
6. Beside the Typical circuit box, click Find.
7. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now to display the available typical circuits that match
the type of circuit you have selected to assign the data to, such as feeder or incomer.
8. From the list of typical circuits, highlight the typical circuit that you want to assign.
9. Click OK.

▪ If you apply a typical circuit to more than one circuit in the Electrical Index, the software
applies the typical circuit only to those circuits of the same type as the typical circuit.
▪ If you apply a typical circuit to a circuit that already has associated components, the
software prompts you as to whether you want to replace the existing components with
components belonging to the typical circuit.
▪ If you apply a typical circuit that includes associated reference cables, the software creates
plant cables from them and adds the plant cables to the circuit with the To sides of the
cables associated with the circuit.
▪ You cannot apply a typical circuit to a circuit that is already associated with a load.

Create Circuit Components

This procedure shows how to add individual circuit components, such as protection devices,
disconnect devices, electrical distribution equipment, and so forth, to a circuit.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Power
Distribution Equipment > Power Distribution Boards > Buses.
2. Double-click a bus to expand its folder hierarchy.
3. Right-click the required circuit and on the shortcut menu, click an option to create new
disconnect, protection, converting or control equipment.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 139

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

As an alternative method, you can create a circuit component by dragging from the
Reference Data Explorer an item under Disconnect Electrical Equipment. For more
information, see Copy Circuit Components (on page 138).
4. Accept the default item tag that is based on the naming convention for the component or
type your own item tag according to the naming convention.
For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming Conventions (on
page 85).
5. Edit the component properties as required in the Properties window.
You cannot change the electrical equipment class and sub-class values in the
Properties window. If you need to change these values, create a new component and then
delete the component that is not needed.

Move a Circuit to Another Place on a Bus

This procedure shows how to move a circuit between cells on a bus or between a cell on a bus
and the bus itself.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Power
Distribution Equipment > Power Distribution Boards > Buses.
2. Expand the required bus and locate the circuit you want to move.
3. Do one of the following:
▪ Drag a circuit on a bus to a cell under the bus.
▪ Drag a circuit in a cell to the bus on which the cell is located.

▪ You can move a circuit within a specific bus only; you cannot move a circuit to a different
bus.
▪ You can move a circuit under a cell that already contains circuits. The software does not
have a restriction of the circuit function of the circuits under the same cell. If a cell contains
circuits with mixed functions (for example, incomer and feeder circuits), the cell type is
undefined.

Set Circuit Sequence for a Bus

This feature enables you to set the sequence of circuits for a selected bus. By reordering circuits
sequence you can avoid a situation where connectors in an SLD intersect each other.
1. In the Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer, select a bus and do one of the following:
▪ On the main menu, click Actions > Set Circuit Sequence.
▪ Right-click the selected bus and then on the shortcut menu, click Set Circuit
Sequence.
2. On the Set Circuit Sequence dialog box, reset the sequence as required.
You can do the following:
▪ Select a row and click the Up and Down arrows.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 140

 Creating and Modifying Plant Electrical Items

▪ Drag a row up or down the list. You can see a tooltip that indicates the selected row and
the row before or after which the dragged row will be placed.
▪ Change the sequence by changing the Starting sequence and Increment by values.
Note that you cannot enter 0 (zero) in either field.
3. Click Apply.

▪ Setting the sequence of circuits within cells not in a consecutive manner can cause a
haphazard or incorrect placement of these circuits in generated SLDs. Some of the circuits
in these SLDs may be drawn within cell frames to which they do not belong. Furthermore,
there may be an overlap of cell frames. If the software detects that some of the circuits are
not ordered consecutively, a warning message is displayed that prompts you to change the
circuit sequence in a consecutive manner.
▪ Also note that couplers are always placed in the rightmost position of the bus and their
respective bus risers are placed in the leftmost position regardless of their sequence
numbers.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 141

SECTION 7

Managing Plant Operating Cases

Smart Electrical allows you to perform bus and PDB load summaries based on various sets of
load values. These various sets of load data (referred here to as plant operating cases)
provide the ability to analyze the total electrical load consumption of your plant based on
different load properties and values. Typically, such operating cases are called Winter,
Summer, and so on. You can create and define any number of such operating cases to cover
your plant requirements.
Plant operating case management allows you to do the following:
▪ Create and define any number of plant operating cases. (Performed in Options Manager)
▪ Set one of the existing operating cases as the active case. This is the operating case that
the plant is currently switched to. The active case can be any one of the existing operating
cases in the plant. After switching to a specific operating case, you can then calculate
various load summaries for that operating case (performed in Smart Electrical).
▪ Set one of the existing operating cases as the governing case. This is the main operating
case that the plant works at most of the time during the design and engineering stage and
later during the operational and maintenance stages of the plant.
▪ For each operating case, define and store in the database the values of the electrical
equipment and buses. in your plant (Performed in Smart Electrical)
▪ Generate various load summary reports for the active operating case (performed in Smart
Electrical).
Smart Electrical is shipped with a single (base) operating case, which you can
rename if needed. All the values and definitions are stored for this case until you switch to
another operating case that you create for your plant. Once you add another operating case and
define it as the active case, you can delete the base operating case if you no longer need it.

For information about plant operating cases when working with As-Built and projects, see Plant
Operating Cases in As-Built and Projects (on page 735).
For information about plant operating cases when working with the Reference Electrical
Engineer, see Rules Governing the Copying of Branches with Data that Includes Operating
Cases (on page 84).

▪ When creating a plant item in the Electrical Index, and if the plant item properties that are
included in the Manage Operating Cases dialog box have default values, these values are
set in all the existing operating cases of the current plant. Note that default values are set in
the Data Dictionary Manager or the Project Wide Parameters in Options Manager.
▪ When creating a plant item in the Electrical Index by dragging an item from the Reference
Data Explorer and if the reference item has properties that are included in the Manage
Operating Cases dialog box, the values that appear in those properties are copied only to
the active case of the current plant. All other cases in the plant will contain default values if

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 142

 Managing Plant Operating Cases

they exist. If no default values have been set for those properties, all the other operating
cases will not contain any values for those properties.
▪ When calculating load totals for buses and circuits, the software stores the name of the plant
operating case that was used during the latest calculation. The name of this operating case
is displayed at the top of the Properties window just above the toolbar and on the Batch
Load Association dialog box. Note that the Last Calculated Case Name and Last
Calculated Case Description properties are available when defining EDE layouts and
relevant reports.

Add a Plant Operating Case

The following procedure explains how to add a new operating case for your plant.
1. In Options Manager, click Tools > Manage Plant Operating Cases.
2. On the Manage Plant Operating Cases dialog box, click Add.
3. On the Add Plant Operating Case dialog box, type a name and description for the new
operating case.
Select the Governing case check box only if you want the new operating
case to function as the governing operating case for the current plant. There can be only
one governing operating case in a plant. Therefore, if you select this check box, the
governing case function will be applied to the new operating case that you are adding. For
more information about governing cases, see Plant Operating Case Management.
4. Click OK.

Edit a Plant Operating Case

The following procedure explains how to edit an operating case in your plant.
1. In Options Manager, click Tools > Manage Plant Operating Cases.
2. On the Manage Plant Operating Cases dialog box, click Edit.
3. On the Edit Plant Operating Case dialog box, type a name and description of the new
operating case.
Select the Governing case check box only if you want the new operating
case to function as the governing operating case for the current plant. There can be only
one governing operating case in a plant. Therefore, if you select this check box, the
governing case function will be applied to the new operating case that you are adding. For
more information about governing cases, see Plant Operating Case Management.
4. Click OK.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 143

 Managing Plant Operating Cases

Delete a Plant Operating Case

The following procedure explains how to delete an operational case in your plant.
1. In Options Manager, click Tools > Manage Plant Operating Cases.
2. On the Manage Plant Operating Cases dialog box, select an operating case that you want
to delete.
3. Click Delete.
The software does not allow the deletion of the governing or active cases. If you
want to delete an operating case that functions as the active case or the governing case, you
must first assign this function to a different case. Do the following to change the assignment of
the governing and active cases:
▪ To set another operating case as the governing case, do the following:
1. On the Manage Plant Operating Cases dialog box, select the operating case that you
want to set as the governing case.
2. Click Edit.
3. On the Edit Plant Operating Case dialog box, select the Governing case check box
and click OK.

▪ To set another operating case as the active case, do the following:

1. Run Smart Electrical.
2. Click Actions > Switch Plant Operating Case > Switch Active Operating Case.

Switch to Another Active Operating Case

You can switch to another active operating case whenever necessary. In order to switch to
another active case, you must have Full Control access rights given to you in Smart
Engineering Manager. If the Switch Active Operating Case command is disabled, your access
rights are not set to Full Control.
Before switching to another active operating case ensure the following:
▪ If the software detects that other users have open drawings on their computers, we strongly
recommend that you contact these users and ask them to close all their drawings before you
start making the switch. Smart Electrical does not prevent you from switching to another
operating case if other users have not closed their drawings. However, this may cause data
inconsistency.
▪ Once the switch has been made, other users working with the same plant will not be able to
save the changes that they have made to load data until they close and reopen Smart
Electrical.

Switch to another active operating case in your plant

You define the required operating cases in Options Manager. For details, see Plant
Operating Case Management in the Options Manager Guide.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 144

 Managing Plant Operating Cases

To switch to another active case, do the following:

1. On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Actions > Switch Plant Operating Case > Switch
Active Operating Case.
Smart Electrical still retains the old functionality — the Switch Mode
(Rule-Driven) command.
2. On the Switch Active Operating Case dialog box, select the operating case that you want
to switch to.
3. Click OK.
Rules defined in Rule Manager do not apply to non-active cases. Therefore, to
ensure that no such rules have been violated, run the Fix Inconsistencies command on the
File menu after switching to a case for which Rule Manager rules have been defined.
For details on how to define and store the values of electrical equipment and buses for a specific
operating case, see Manage Operating Case Data for Plant Items.

Manage Operating Case Data for Plant Items

You can define and store the values of electrical equipment and buses for each operating case.
For example, an electrical motor in your plant can have different brake power, demand factor, or
coincidence factor values for different operating cases. After switching to another active
operating case, you can generate various reports and calculate load summaries based on the
values in the active operating case.

▪ In addition to the following procedure, you can manage operating case data for plant items
using the EDE. The software is shipped with predefined layouts (one layout for each item
type) and filters designed specifically for this purpose. This way you can create various
tables containing operating case data that can be edited and copied as required.
▪ You can use Import Manager to import plant item values from an external source and insert
these values into a specific operating case in your plant. This way, you can quickly populate
plant item values for various cases that exist in your plant. For details, see Import Manager
User's Guide > Miscellaneous Import Options >Importing Operating Case Data.
Do the following to manage the data of individual electrical equipment items and buses in your
plant:
1. In Smart Electrical, do one of the following:
▪ Right-click a required plant in the Electrical Index and then on the shortcut menu, click
Manage Plant Operating Cases.
▪ Select a required plant in the Electrical Index and then click Actions > Manage Plant
Operating Cases.
▪ Open the Common Properties dialog box for the required electrical equipment item
and click the Manage Operating Cases command button.
For a bus, open the Bus Load Association dialog box and select the required
bus.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 145

 Managing Plant Operating Cases

2. On the Manage Operating Cases dialog box, click in the appropriate cell to edit and type a
new value.
You can copy and paste entire rows, selected cells, or individual cells by selecting
the row or cells, clicking Copy and then Paste.
3. Click Apply to store the new values in the database.

▪ When creating a plant item in the Electrical Index, and if the plant item properties that are
included in the Manage Operating Cases dialog box have default values, these values are
set in all the existing operating cases of the current plant. Note that default values are set in
the Data Dictionary Manager or the Project Wide Parameters in Options Manager.
▪ When creating a plant item in the Electrical Index by dragging an item from the Reference
Data Explorer and if the reference item has properties that are included in the Manage
Operating Cases dialog box, the values that appear in those properties are copied only to
the active case of the current plant. All other cases in the plant will contain default values if
they exist. If no default values have been set for those properties, all the other operating
cases will not contain any values for those properties.
▪ When calculating load totals for buses and circuits, the software stores the name of the plant
operating case that was used during the latest calculation. The name of this operating case
is displayed at the top of the Properties window just above the toolbar and on the Batch
Load Association dialog box. Note that the Last Calculated Case Name and Last
Calculated Case Description properties are available when defining EDE layouts and
relevant reports.

Showing the Name of the Active Operating Case in

Reports and Title Blocks
You can display the name of the active operating case in your reports and drawing title blocks.

Show the Name of the Active Operating Case in Reports

1. Edit the template of the required report. For details, see Edit a Report Template.
2. Select a cell in the template where you want the active case name to appear.
We recommend that you select a cell in the header section of the template.
3. In the Excel Namespace, type the following:
ActiveCaseName
4. Save your changes in the template.

Show the Name of the Active Operating Case in the Title Blocks of Conventional Drawings
1. In Catalog Manager, edit the required title block symbol.
2. Select an area in the title block symbol and type the following macro:
&Document.ActiveCaseName

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 146

 Managing Plant Operating Cases

3. Save the changes.

Publishing and Retrieving of Operating Case Data

When working in an integrated environment with SmartPlant Foundation, you can publish and
retrieve data for any of the existing operating cases in your plant. However, the following rules
apply:
▪ Publishing — The software allows you to publish and retrieve load data only for the
governing case. Also, the governing case must be set as the active case in your plant.
However, if you want to publish the data of another operating case, you must define it as the
governing case and set it to be the active case in your plant. Later, after publishing, you can
switch back to your previous definitions of governing and active cases.
▪ Retrieving — When retrieving data, the software always inserts the retrieved data into the
operating case defined as governing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 147

SECTION 8

Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring

Equipment
This section deals with the creation and management of the wiring equipment in your plant. You
carry out these tasks in the Electrical Index.
Wiring equipment in Smart Electrical contains the following categories of items:
▪ Panels
▪ Cables (power cables, control cables, grounding cable, instrumentation cables, and
single-core cable assemblies)
▪ Busways
▪ Cable drums
▪ Cableways
For more information, see the topics in the subsections below:
▪ Panel Management (on page 148)
▪ Cable Management (on page 152)
▪ Cable Drums (on page 189)
▪ Cable Routing (on page 199)

Panel Management
You can create the following types of panel in the Electrical Index:
▪ Cabinets — Multi-purpose electrical enclosures for various types of equipment. You can
create a cabinet as a stand-alone item, or it can be retrieved from Smart Electrical. You can
define a cabinet as a load and, like any other load, connect it to a feeder circuit. For more
information, see Create a Cabinet (on page 149).
▪ Control Stations — Small cabinets containing low voltage start-stop circuitry used to
control a load at a remote location. You can create control stations with or without
associated cables. A control station can be associated with one or more cables (control,
grounding, or instrumentation cable). Once a cable is associated with a control station, the
control station becomes the To side of that cable. A control station can be associated with a
load. When the creation of the control station is the result of an automated process, the
association is made automatically, both with the cable and with the load. In case the control
station is created manually, the user is responsible for these associations. For more
information, see Create a Control Station (on page 149).
▪ Local Panels — Cabinets containing circuit, equipment, and wiring items, used for example,
to provide switching or isolation close to a motor. For more information, see Create a Local
Panel (on page 150).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 148

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

▪ Junction Boxes — Cabinets used to connect wires that run between various items of
electrical equipment. In other words, junction boxes are containers for electrical
connections. For more information, see Create a Junction Box (on page 151).
In contrast to PDBs (power distribution boards), panels are much smaller in size and
do not contain busbars.

Create a Cabinet
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Panels.
2. Right-click the Cabinets folder, and then click New.
3. Accept the default item tag that is based on the naming convention for the panel or type
your own item tag according to the naming convention.
For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming Conventions (on
page 85).
4. On the Cabinet Common Properties dialog box, edit the typical cabinet properties as
required.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create a new
cabinet.
▪ You access the Cabinet Common Properties dialog box by clicking the Common
Properties command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open
the dialog box directly when you create a new cabinet.

Create a Control Station

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Panels.
2. Right-click the Control Stations folder, and then click New.
3. Accept the default item tag that is based on the naming convention for the control station or
type your own item tag according to the naming convention.
For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming Conventions (on
page 85).
4. On the Control Station Common Properties dialog box, edit the control station properties
as required. For more details, see Edit Control Station Properties (on page 150).

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you create a new
control station.
▪ You access the Control Station Common Properties dialog box by clicking the Common
Properties command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open
the dialog box directly when you create a new control station.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 149

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

▪ If the parent folder contains custom folders, the created item is placed in the root folder. If
the items properties match the filter properties of a custom folder a copy of the item is also
placed in the custom folder. Refreshing or closing and re- opening Smart Electrical moves
the item from the root folder to the All Items folder.

Edit Control Station Properties

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Panels > Control
Stations.
2. Right-click the required control station and on the shortcut menu, click Common
Properties.
3. On the Control Station Common Properties dialog box, beside Associated load, click
Find to open the Find dialog box.
4. From the Equipment type list, select the required load type.
5. Click Find Now.
6. From the data window, highlight an item tag.
7. Click OK to associate the item tag with the current control station.
8. To add one or more control, grounding, or instrumentation cables to the control station, do
the following:
a. Click Add.
b. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now to display the available control and grounding
cables that have at least one unassociated side.
c. For each cable that you want to associate with the control station, select the cable and
then click Apply.
9. To add an I/O signal to the control station that is going to be associated with a load, in the
Electrical Index, right-click the control station, and on the shortcut menu, click New Signal.

Create a Local Panel

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Panels.
2. Right-click the Local Panels folder and then click New Local Panel.
3. Accept the default item tag that is based on the naming convention for the panel or type
your own item tag according to the naming convention.
For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming Conventions (on
page 85).
4. If required, right-click the local panel and click New Circuit to add a panel circuit.
Also, you can add a panel circuit by expanding the Typical Circuits folder in the
Reference Data Explorer and dragging an existing typical panel circuit to the panel.
5. Right-click the required circuit and on the shortcut menu, click an option to create new
disconnect, protection, converting or control equipment.
6. Repeat the previous step as often as needed to create additional items for the circuit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 150

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Create a Junction Box

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Panels.
2. Right-click the Junction Boxes folder and then click New Junction Box.
3. Accept the default item tag that is based on the naming convention for the junction box or
type your own item tag according to the naming convention.
For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming Conventions (on
page 85).
4. If required, right-click the junction box and click New Circuit to add a panel circuit.
Also, you can add a panel circuit by expanding the Typical Circuits folder in the
Reference Data Explorer and dragging an existing typical panel circuit to the junction
box.
5. Right-click the circuit and on the shortcut menu, click an option to create new disconnect,
protection, converting or control equipment.
6. Repeat the previous step as often as needed to create additional items for the circuit.

Define a Junction Box as a Consumer

You can define a junction box as a consumer. This allows you to include junction boxes in the
calculations of load summaries, load associations, and when generating all feeder load
summary reports.
1. Select a junction box in the Electrical Index.
2. In the Properties window, set the Is Load property to True.
3. In the Properties window, enter appropriate Load and Electrical values.
When performing a drill-down calculation for a PDB that has a branch connected to a
bus through a converting equipment item, junction box, or local panel that is defined as a
consumer, the software takes into account the total of this branch using the electrical power
values of this converting equipment item.

Define a Local Panel as a Consumer

You can define a local panel as a consumer. This allows you to include local panels in the
calculations of load summaries, load associations, and when generating enhanced feeder load
summary reports.
1. Select a local panel in the Electrical Index.
2. In the Properties window, set the Is Load property to True.
3. In the Properties window, enter appropriate Load and Electrical values.
When performing a drill-down calculation for a PDB that has a branch connected to a
bus through a converting equipment item, junction box, or local panel that is defined as a
consumer, the software takes into account the total of this branch using the electrical power
values of this converting equipment item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 151

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Create a Panel Circuit

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Panels.
2. Right-click the Local Panels folder or the Junction Boxes folder and select an item.
3. Right-click the local panel or the junction box where you want to add the circuit and click
New Circuit.
Also, you can add a panel circuit by expanding the Typical Circuits folder in the
Reference Data Explorer and dragging an existing typical panel circuit to the local
panel or the junction box.
4. Accept the default item tag that is based on the naming convention for the circuit or type
your own item tag according to the naming convention.
For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming Conventions (on
page 85).
5. Right-click the required circuit and on the shortcut menu, click an option to create new
disconnect, protection, converting or control equipment.
6. Repeat the previous step as often as needed to create additional items for the circuit.

Cable Management
You can create cables in your plant for several purposes. Smart Electrical specifies the
following cable categories according to the purpose of the cable: power, control, grounding,
and instrumentation. The software supports compliance with the strict regulations governing
cable definitions by using standard reference cables as a basis for all the cables that you create
in your plant. Reference cables contain technical cable data such as voltage rating, ampacity,
resistivity, cable material, and data relating to the construction of the cable. For this reason, you
must initially create all your reference cables in the Reference Data Explorer.
The software allows you to organize your reference cables in families known as cable
specifications. When you select a reference cable to use as a basis for your plant cable, you
must select the appropriate cable category and cable specification for the reference cable.
Also, when you size plant cables, the software looks for the appropriate reference cable based
on a particular cable specification and conductor arrangement.

Create a Reference Cable

You use reference cables as a basis for creating new cables in your plant. Unlike other items,
which you can create directly in the Electrical Index or copy from the Reference Data
Explorer, you must create reference cables with manufacturer specifications prior to creating
new cables in the Electrical Index.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cables.
2. Right-click the Power, Control, Grounding, or Instrumentation folder according to the
type of cable required, and then click New.
3. Accept the default item tag or type a name of up to 80 characters for the cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 152

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

4. Enter values for the cable properties on the Reference Cable Common Properties dialog
box according to the available catalog information. You must enter values for those
properties marked with an asterisk.
To enable sizing of a power cable in the plant, you should enter values for all the
properties on the General tab.

▪ You access the Reference Cable Common Properties dialog box by clicking the Common
Properties command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences to open
the dialog box directly when you create the cable.
▪ Short circuit sizing calculations for plant power cables use data in the Conductors lookup
tables, and this data is then used to select the appropriate reference cable. For this reason,
when you create a new reference cable, it is recommended that you open the Data tab of
each lookup table to ensure that appropriate data related to the reference cable is available,
and if it is not, to add the data on the lookup table.
Do not change any of the values on the Structure tab for the conductor
lookup tables.

Edit Reference Cable Common Properties

1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cables.
2. Expand the required cable folder: Power Cables, Control Cables, or Grounding Cables.
3. Right-click the required cable and on the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
4. Enter values for the cable properties on the Reference Cable Common Properties dialog
box according to the available catalog information. You must enter values for those
properties marked with an asterisk.
To enable sizing of a power cable in the plant, you should enter values for all the
properties on the General tab.

▪ You can edit the properties of a reference cable as long as it has not been used in the
Electrical Index with any plant item or if the reference cable is not part of any existing
profile or control station in the Reference Data Explorer.
▪ Short circuit sizing calculations for plant power cables use data in the Conductors lookup
tables, and this data is then used to select the appropriate reference cable. For this reason,
if you change the values of reference cable properties, it is recommended that you open the
Data tab of each lookup table to ensure that appropriate data related to the reference cable
is available, and if it is not, to add the data on the lookup table.
Do not change any of the values on the Structure tab for the conductor
lookup tables.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 153

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Create a Plant Cable

This procedure explains how to create a new cable in the Electrical Index based on existing
reference cable data.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cables.
2. Right-click the required cable folder: Power Cables, Control Cables, Grounding Cables,
or Instrumentation Cables, and then click New.
3. Accept the default item tag that is based on the naming convention for the cable or type your
own item tag according to the naming convention.

▪ For more details of naming convention settings, see Using Naming Conventions (on
page 85).
▪ If the cable naming convention includes the tag of an associated item and you rename
the associated item tag, you must click Refresh on the toolbar of the Electrical
Index or the Electrical Engineer to update the cable tag.
▪ If you are creating a number of cables at one time, you may want to stop at this point
and edit the cable properties at a later stage.
4. On the Cable Common Properties dialog box, General tab, select a cable specification.
5. For the selected specification, do one of the following:
▪ If you know the reference cable that you want to use to define your plant cable, select
that reference cable from the Reference cable list. The software populates the
properties with data from the reference cable.
▪ If you want to calculate the cross-section size for a power cable by determining the most
suitable reference cable, select an option from the Conductor arrangement list.
In addition to sizing a non- sized power cable, you can perform cable sizing when
you select a specific reference cable also.
6. Enter other values for the cable properties as required. You must enter values for those
properties marked with an asterisk.
7. Click the Design Data tab and enter routing and cable length data as required.

▪ You must associate each power cable in the Electrical Index with a reference (catalog)
cable. You must therefore first define appropriate reference cables in the Reference Data
Explorer.
▪ You access the Cable Common Properties dialog box (on page 935) by clicking the
Common Properties command on the shortcut menu or you can specify in the preferences
to open the dialog box directly when you create the cable.
▪ You cannot delete a cable that has been assigned to a cable drum.
▪ You cannot assign a plant cable to a different cable drum if this cable has been locked to a
drum.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 154

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Edit Plant Cable Properties

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cables.
2. Expand the required cable folder: Power Cables, Control Cables, Grounding Cables, or
Instrumentation Cables.
3. Right-click the required cable and on the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
4. On the Cable Common Properties dialog box, General tab, select a cable specification.
5. For the selected specification, do one of the following:
▪ If you know the reference cable that you want to use to define your plant cable, select
that reference cable from the Reference cable list. The software populates the
properties with data from the reference cable (for further details, see Notes at the end of
this procedure).
▪ If you want to select a reference cable by performing and applying sizing for a power
cable, enter the necessary data (for details of the properties that are mandatory, see
Required Data for Cable Sizing).
In addition to sizing a non- sized power cable, you can perform cable sizing when
you select a specific reference cable also.
6. Enter other values for the cable properties as required. You must enter values for those
properties marked with an asterisk.
If the cable naming convention includes the tag of an associated item and you
rename the associated item tag, you must click Refresh on the toolbar of the Electrical
Index or the Electrical Engineer to update the cable tag.
7. Click the Design Data tab and enter routing and cable length data as required.

▪ When applying sizing for a power cable, suitable reference cables that the software can
select from must be defined in the Reference Data Explorer.
▪ When changing the reference cable manually or by applying cable sizing, the software
copies all properties relating to cable construction and electrical properties such as ampacity
and resistance. The software does not copy plant cable data such as cable tag and
description, nor data used for sizing such as estimated and design lengths. The software
copies other data such as manufacturer and model only if the value for the plant cable is
initially empty.
▪ Whenever the data of the reference cable that a plant cable is associated with is changed,
the Synchronize With Reference command button becomes enabled. This button opens
the Synchronize Plant and Reference Cable Data dialog box, where you can see all the
differences between selected plant cable data and the associated reference cable data. You
can then copy the reference data to the plant cable so that the plant and reference cable
data is fully synchronized.
▪ For full details of the most commonly used properties, see the Cable Common Properties
dialog box (on page 935). You can also edit the most commonly used properties and
additional properties in the Properties window or in the EDE.
▪ You cannot delete a cable that has been assigned to a cable drum.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 155

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

▪ You cannot assign a plant cable to a different cable drum if this cable has been locked to a
drum.
▪ When defining naming conventions for parallel cables, you can determine where in the cable
tag name you want to include the parallel cable suffix. In Options Manager, on the Define
Naming Conventions dialog box (Options > Naming Conventions > Define), define the
parallel cable suffix in the Segment definitions section. You can move the parallel cable
suffix property up or down the list to set the position of this property in the segment
definition. If you do not select this check box, the suffix for the parallel cables will appear at
the end of the cable tag name.

Synchronize Plant Cables with Reference Cables

This feature allows you to synchronize changed reference cable properties with the properties of
plant cables that have based on the changed reference cables. This synchronization takes place
after:
▪ Comparing a plant and reference cable data for a single cable (this option becomes
available if at least one of the properties of the associated reference cable has changed).
▪ Applying reference data to plant cables in batch mode.
▪ Changing the associated reference cable of a particular plant cable.
Before you start synchronizing your plant cables with their reference cables,
you have to set the properties that you want to synchronize. You do this in Options Manager.
For details, see the Options Manager Guide, Defining Plant-Wide Parameters > Set Cable
Properties for Synchronization.)

Synchronize the Properties of Multiple Plant Cables in Batch Mode

1. In the Electrical Index, select the plant cables that you want to synchronize with their
reference cables.
2. On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Cables > Apply Reference Data to Cables.
If all the selected plant cables have been synchronized, that is there are no
differences in the properties of the plant cables and their reference cables, an appropriate
message is displayed.
3. On the Apply Reference Data to Plant Cables dialog box, do one of the following:
▪ Click Compare to open the Compare Plant and Reference Cable Data dialog box that
lists all the plant cables that have at least one property value that is inconsistent with its
reference.
▪ Select the plant cables that you want to synchronize and click Apply.

Synchronize the Properties of a Single Plant Cable

1. In the Electrical Index, right-click the plant cable that you want to synchronize with its
reference cable.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
3. On the Cable Common Properties dialog box, click the Synchronize With Reference
command button to opens the Synchronize Plant and Reference Cable Data dialog box,

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 156

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

which enables you to see if there are any differences between the values in the properties of
the current plant cable and the values of the associated reference cable.
If the Synchronize With Reference command button is disabled, all the properties
of the current plant cable are synchronized with its reference cable.
4. On the Synchronize Plant and Reference Cable Data dialog box, click Copy Reference
Data to complete the synchronization process.

Delete a Cable
1. In the Reference Data Explorer or the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy
Wiring Equipment > Cables.
2. Expand one of the cable folders: Power Cables, Control Cables, Grounding Cables, or
Instrumentation Cables.
3. Right-click the cable that you want to delete, and on the shortcut menu, click Delete.
4. At the prompt, click Yes to confirm the deletion.
If you select more than one cable for deletion, the software records any deletion
failures in the Batch Deletion log file. For the procedure for creating and viewing the log file,
see Generate Error Log Files (on page 880).

Deletion Rules for Cables

The following rules apply when you delete a cable in the Reference Data Explorer or the
Electrical Index:

Item Precondition Result

Reference cable There is no plant cable that The software deletes the cable.
uses the properties of the
reference cable.

Plant cable The plant cable is not assigned The software deletes the cable and
to a cable drum. moves any items in the electrical
hierarchy below the deleted cable
to the root of the Electrical
Engineer.

Control station cable None. The software deletes the cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 157

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Define Manual Cable Cuts

You can manually define cable cuts for a specific cable. This way you can assign predefined
cable cuts to a cable drum in the Assign Drums to Cables Wizard or in the Cable Drum
Common Properties. Also, on the Design Data tab of the Cable Common Properties, the
software indicates the number of splices in accordance with the number of cable cuts that exist
for the given cable.
This feature is not available for cables that have already been assigned to
drums.
1. In the Electrical Index, open the Common Properties of a required cable.
2. Click the Design Data tab.
3. In the Drum assignment group box, click the Cable Cuts button.
4. On the Cable Cut Definitions dialog box, click Add.
5. Define the values for the new cable cut:
▪ Click in the Cut Item Tag box and type a new cable cut name if you want to rename the
default name.
▪ In the Cut Length box, type the length of the new cable cut.
The total length of the cable cuts must be identical to the cable actual
length.
6. Select the Retain manual cable cuts for drum wizard assignment check box to make the
cable cuts available for selection on the Select Cables page of the Assign Drums to
Cables Wizard.

If you clear this check box after defining cable cuts, the existing cable cuts will not be
included in the list of cables on the Select Cable page of the Assign Drums to Cables
wizard. Instead of the cable cuts, the entire uncut cable will appear marked by an asterisk.
The software will recalculate the cable cuts and if needed automatically delete or recalculate
them once the assignment process is completed by the wizard.
To retain these cable cuts, click the Common Properties button on the Select Cables page
of the wizard and return to the Cable Cut Definitions dialog box where you select the
Retain manual cable cuts for drum wizard assignment check box. When you return to
the wizard, the information on the Select Cables page will be refreshed and the cables
marked with asterisks will be automatically replaced with their cable cuts. Any change made
in the Cable Common Properties automatically refreshes the data on the Select Cable
page of the wizard.
7. Click OK.

▪ If you increase the cable actual length and select the Retain manual cable cuts for drum
wizard assignment check box, the software automatically adds a cable cut to account for
the added length.
▪ If you decrease the cable actual length and select the Retain manual cable cuts for drum
wizard assignment check box, the software automatically deletes a cable cut to account for
the extra length. The deletion starts from the bottom of the cable cut list upward.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 158

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

▪ To delete a cable cut, select a row and then click Delete. This action is not possible if the
cable cut is assigned to a drum. Unassign the cable cut from its drum and then delete it if
needed.
▪ You cannot change the cable cut length if the cable has been assigned to a drum.
▪ You can unassign a cable cut from a drum by selecting a cable cut and clicking Unassign
From Drum.
▪ All the values in this dialog box are read-only for a cable that has been locked to a drum or
installed and you cannot add, delete, or change a cable cut length for such a cable.
▪ The following is an example of a typical workflow when working with cable cuts:
a. Create a cable.
b. Define the cable design and routing length or get its length from Smart 3D, which
establishes its actual length.
c. Once the cable actual length has been established, determine whether there is a need
for splicing and define the required length of the cable cuts.
d. If the cable is longer than the normal drum maximum capacity, you can decide whether
you need to define the exact length of each cable cut or whether to use the Assign
Drums to Cables Wizard to cut the cables automatically.
e. If the cable is shorter or longer than the maximum drum capacity and you need to have
splices at specific lengths, then you will manually define the cable cuts so that cable
spicing can take place in appropriate places.
f. Create the first cable cut, name it, and define its length.
g. Create the rest of the required cable cuts until the total length of all the cable cuts is
identical to the cable actual length.
h. Once all the required cable cuts have been created, you can assign them to a cable
drum using the Assign Drums to Cables wizard or the Cable Drum Common
Properties dialog box.
▪ For information about automatic creation of cable cuts, see Batch Assignment of Cables to
Cable Drums (on page 193) and Optimization of Cable Drum Assignment (on page 195).

Cable Glands
The topics in this section deal with the management of cable glands.

Topics
Create Reference Glands .............................................................. 160
Associate Cable Sides with Glands ............................................... 160
Batch Associate Cable Sides with Glands ..................................... 160
Batch Dissociate Cable Sides and Glands .................................... 161
Synchronize Cable Glands with Reference Cables in Batch Mode
....................................................................................................... 161
Synchronize Cable Gland Associations with a Specific Reference Cable
....................................................................................................... 162
Dissociate Multiple Power Cables in Batch Mode ......................... 163

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 159

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Create Reference Glands

1. In the Reference Data Explorer, under Wiring Equipment, right-click the Glands folder.
2. Click New Gland.
3. On the Reference Gland Common Properties dialog box, General tab, type values for
each property as required.
4. Click the Details tab.
5. Enter values for the properties as required. You must enter values for those properties
marked with an asterisk.

Associate Cable Sides with Glands

This procedure deals with associating glands with plant or reference cables. You can specify
different gland types for each cable end.
1. In the Electrical Index, select a cable and open its Cable Common Properties dialog box.
You can associate glands with a reference cable if you want to create plant cables
from it with glands already assigned.
2. Click the Connections tab.
3. On the From or To cable side, beside the appropriate Gland property, click Find.
After you have associated glands with a number for cables, you can view the bill of
materials for the glands by generating a Gland Material Take-Off report.

Batch Associate Cable Sides with Glands

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cables.
2. Select the required cable folder: Power Cables, Control Cables, Grounding Cables, or
Instrumentation Cables.
3. In the lower pane, select the required cables for which you want to associate glands.
You can also perform the cable selection in the EDE.
4. Click Actions > Cables > Batch Cable Side and Gland Association.
5. On the From or To cable side, clear the Clear existing gland check box to allow
replacement of existing cable glands for the cables that you select.
6. Beside the check box, click Find to open the Find dialog box.
7. Click Find Now.
8. In the Results data window, select the gland that you want to associate with the cable
sides, and click OK.
9. From the cable list in the Batch Cable Side and Gland Association dialog box, select the
check boxes beside the cables for which you want to make gland associations
You can select the Speed up association check box to make the process work
faster. However, if the software encounters a problem with one of the cables, the entire
association process is canceled.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 160

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

10. Click OK.

Batch Dissociate Cable Sides and Glands

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cables.
2. Select the required cable folder: Power Cables, Control Cables, Grounding Cables, or
Instrumentation Cables.
For power cables, you can dissociate glands only.
3. In the lower pane, select the required cables.
4. Click Actions > Cables > Batch Cable Side and Gland Association.
5. On the From or To cable side, select the Clear existing connection check box to
dissociate cable side associations for the cables that you select.
6. On the From or To cable side, select the Clear existing gland check box to dissociate
cable glands for the cables that you select.
7. From the cable list, select the check boxes beside the cables for which you want to
dissociate the items and click OK.

Synchronize Cable Glands with Reference Cables in Batch

Mode
This option allows you synchronize the glands on selected plant cables with the glands on the
reference cables associated with each of the selected plant cables.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the Wiring Equipment > Cables hierarchy and then click
one of the cable type folders.
2. In the List View pane of the Electrical Index, select the cables that you require (use the
CTRL or SHIFT key to select multiple cables).
3. On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Actions > Cables >Synchronize Gland
Associations.
4. On the Synchronize Gland Associations dialog box, under Synchronize, select one of
the following options that determines the side of the cables on which you want to
synchronize the glands with the glands on the associated reference cables:
▪ Glands on both cable sides — Synchronizes the glands on both sides of the selected
cables.
▪ Glands on the "To" cable sides — Synchronizes the glands on the "To" side of the
selected cables.
▪ Glands on the "From" cable sides — Synchronizes the glands on the "From" side of
the selected cables.
5. In the Cable data section, select the cables that you want to be included in the
synchronization process.
Make your cable selection as follows:
▪ To select a single cable, select the check box beside the required cable in the data
window.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 161

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

▪ To select all the cables in the data window, click the Select cables check box below the
data window.
▪ To clear the selection of all the cables, click the Select cables arrow and select None.
▪ To select all the cables that do not have any glands, click All cables without glands.
▪ To select all the cables whose glands are different from the glands on their associated
reference cables, click All cables with different glands.
6. Click OK to start the synchronization process.

▪ The software synchronizes the glands with the glands of each reference cable that is
associated with the selected plant cables.
▪ The Filter cable criteria options are disabled since you have selected the required cables
in the Electrical Index.
▪ The Show Cable Data button is also disabled as the software populates the Cable data
grid automatically.

Synchronize Cable Gland Associations with a Specific

Reference Cable
This procedure explains how to synchronize glands on a number of plant cables with the glands
on a specific reference cable.
1. On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Actions > Cables >Synchronize Gland
Associations.
2. On the Synchronize Gland Associations dialog box, set filter criteria that determine which
cables are displayed in the Cable data section.
You must select an appropriate reference cable whose glands will be
synchronized with all the selected plant cables. The Show Cable Data button remains
unavailable until you select a reference cable.
3. Under Synchronize, select one of the following options that determines the side of the
cables on which you want to synchronize the glands with the glands on the associated
reference cables:
▪ Glands on both cable sides — Synchronizes the glands on both sides of the selected
cables.
▪ Glands on the "To" cable sides — Synchronizes the glands on the "To" side of the
selected cables.
▪ Glands on the "From" cable sides — Synchronizes the glands on the "From" side of
the selected cables.
4. Click the Show Cable Data button to populate the Cable data section with all the plant
cables that comply with filter condition that you have set and whose glands are different
from the glands on the associated reference cables.
This button becomes available only after selecting a reference cable in the
Filter criteria group box and the glands on that reference cable is inconsistent with glands
on the selected plant cables.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 162

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

5. In the Cable data section, select the cables that you want to be included in the
synchronization process.
Make your cable selection as follows:
▪ To select a single cable, select the check box beside the required cable in the data
window.
▪ To select all the cables in the data window, click the Select cables check box below the
data window.
▪ To clear the selection of all the cables, click the Select cables arrow and select None.
▪ To select all the cables that do not have any glands, click All cables without glands.
▪ To select all the cables whose glands are different from the glands on their associated
reference cables, click All cables with different glands.
6. Click OK to start the synchronization process.

Dissociate Multiple Power Cables in Batch Mode

1. In the EDE or Electrical Index, under Cables, click the Power Cables folder.
2. In the List View pane, select several power cables that you want to dissociate in batch
mode.
3. On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Actions > Cables > Batch Cable Side and Gland
Associations.
4. On the Batch Cable Side and Gland Associations dialog box, do one or both of the
following:
▪ In the From group box, select the Dissociate existing connections check box to
dissociate all the From side connections of the selected power cables.
▪ In the To group box, select the Dissociate existing connections check box to
dissociate all the To side connections of the selected power cables.
5. Click OK.

Insert a Power Cable Between Equipment Items

Use this procedure to insert a power cable between two equipment items in the Electrical
Engineer. This procedure is useful when two pieces of electrical equipment are logically
connected in the Electrical Engineer. For example, you can insert a cable between a
transformer and a generator.
1. In the Electrical Engineer, select an equipment item and do one of the following:
▪ On the menu bar, click Actions > Cables > Insert Power Cable.
▪ Right-click the selected item, a, and then, on the shortcut menu, click Insert Power
Cable.
2. On the Insert Power Cable dialog box, do one of the following:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 163

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

▪ Choose Select from cable library and then, click to open a dialog box where you
can select a cable from a library of reference power cables.
▪ Choose Specify construction and define power cable parameters for later sizing.
3. Click OK to create and insert the power cable under the equipment item you selected in the
Electrical Engineer.

Create Parallel Cables

This procedure explains how to add a number of parallel cables to an existing parallel cable.
1. In the Electrical Index, select a required power cable and open its common properties.
2. On the General tab of the Cable Common Properties dialog box, select a value from the
Total number list in the Parallel cables group box.
3. Click OK.

▪ You can determine the tag sequencing method for your parallel cables:
a. In Options Manager, click Options > General Settings.
b. In the Parallel cable tag sequencing method list, select Identical or Consecutive.
▪ Identical — Sets the tag sequencing of the parallel cables to be identical in the
group and the cable uniqueness identifier is the parallel suffix. Examples:
Cable - 174/0A; Cable - 174/0B; Cable - 174/0C
▪ Consecutive — Sets the tag sequencing of the parallel cables to be consecutive
and the cable uniqueness identifier is the cable tag number. Examples:
Cable - 181/0A; Cable - 182/0B; Cable - 183/0C
If you rename a parallel cable that uses the consecutive method
and you manually change the tag sequence number of that cable, the software
applies this change only to that parallel cable. The other parallel cables in the set
are not affected. This also applies parallel cables in a single-core cable assembly.
▪ The new parallel cables then appear in the Electrical Index under the power cable to which
you have added the parallel cables. The software indicates parallel cables in the Electrical
Index and Electrical Engineer using the same icon.
▪ Opening the common properties of a parallel cable shows you the number of existing
parallel cables and the parallel cable list.
▪ If you have defined methods and settings for parallel cables in Options Manager, we do not
recommend that you change these parameters in the middle of a plant life-cycle in case
there are no naming conventions for parallel cables.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 164

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Replace the Associated Reference Cable of Plant Cables

You can make changes in the properties of a cable that has already been used in your plant.
This change is made by replacing the reference cable associated with the plant cable. The
procedure below explains how to carry out such a replacement. You can make this change for
one or more plant cables that will use the same reference cable provided that the selected
cables belong to the same cable category.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cables.
2. Expand one of the cable folders: Power Cables, Control Cables, Grounding Cables, or
Instrumentation Cables.
3. Click the folder and adjust the size of the panes to view the individual cables in the list view
pane.

4. If required, change the view in the list view pane by clicking View Settings to toggle
through each view of the items in the list view pane, or click the arrow beside the icon and
select the required view.
5. Hold CTRL while clicking the cables that you want to replace.
6. Click Actions > Cables > Replace Cable Structure.
7. On the Replace Cable Structure dialog box, do one of the following in the Selected cables
grid:
▪ For each cable that you want to replace, select the check box beside the cable name.
▪ Select the Select all check box if you intend to replace all the cables in the list.
You cannot replace the reference cable of a plant cable if:
▪ the plant cable is wired
▪ the plant cable is installed
▪ the plant cable is locked to a cable drum
8. Under Change, select the Reference cable option.
9. Under Select replacement structure, select a reference cable that will replace the
associated reference cable in the selected plant cables.
If required, select properties under Filter criteria to filter the list of available
reference cables.

▪ The software only allows the replacement of cables belonging the same category. For
example, you can only replace a power cable with another power cable.
▪ The software does not allow you to replace a reference cable associated with a terminated
plant cable unless the new reference cable has the same conductor arrangement as the
replaced reference cable.
▪ The software does not allow you to replace cables that have already been installed or
locked to a drum.
▪ After replacing the associated reference cable, the software removes the plant cable from
the associated cable drum.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 165

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

▪ The software replaces the values of the selected plant power cables with the property
values in the reference cable that you select in the Select replacement structure grid.
▪ Note that the properties that will be updated are set in Options Manager. You can make
these settings if you have appropriate access rights. In Options Manager, click Options >
Set Cable Properties for Synchronization. (For more details, see the Options Manager
Guide > Defining Plant-Wide Parameters > Set Cable Properties for Synchronization.)
▪ When the selected cables for replacing include parallel cables, only one tag per parallel
cable appears in the display; however the software performs the operation for all the parallel
cables in each set. If descriptions exist for the individual parallel cables, the software
retains those descriptions.
▪ When replacing a group of parallel cables generated by the sizing procedure with cables
that have a different formation, make sure that for the Reference cable property, you select
Non-sized power cable. Otherwise, you can only replace parallel cables with another
group of cables that have the same formation. For example, you can only replace three
parallel cables of 300 mm2 (3*300 m m2) with another configuration of 3 parallel cables, such
as 3*90 mm2, 3*(3*25 mm2+1*10 mm2), and so forth.
▪ The software retains any existing connections with electrical equipment when replacing the
reference cable with another reference cable.
▪ The software retains any existing cable routing.

Replace a Cable with a Single-Core Cable Assembly

This procedure explains how to change the structure of plant power cables so that they become
single-core cable assemblies. This change happens after you replace the associated reference
cable with a reference single-core cable assembly.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cables.
2. Expand one of the Power Cables cable folder
3. Click the folder and adjust the size of the panes to view the individual cables in the list view
pane.

If required, change the view in the list view pane by clicking View Settings to
toggle through each view of the items in the list view pane, or click the arrow beside the icon
and select the required view.
4. Hold CTRL while clicking the cables that you want to replace.
5. Click Actions > Cables > Replace Cable Structure.
6. On the Replace Cable Structure dialog box, do one of the following in the Selected cables
grid:
▪ For each cable that you want to replace, select the check box beside the cable name.
▪ Select the Select all check box if you intend to replace all the cables in the list.
You cannot replace the reference cable of a plant cable if:
▪ the plant cable is wired.
▪ the plant cable is installed.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 166

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

▪ the plant cable is locked to a cable drum.

7. Under Change, select the Replace with single-core cable assembly option.
8. Under Select replacement structure, select a reference single-core cable assembly that
will replace the associated reference cable in the selected plant cables.
If required, select properties under Filter criteria to filter the list of available
reference cables.

▪ In the new assembly, the software creates the constituent phase, grounding, and neutral
single-core cables based on the definitions of the selected reference single-core cable
assembly. If the constituent grounding and neutral cables belong to the Power category,
they will retain the equipment connections of the original cable. If the constituent grounding
and neutral cables belong to the Grounding category, they will not retain the equipment
connections of the original cable.
▪ The constituent cables preserve the values of the native cable tag, such as tag sequence,
tag prefix, design length, estimated length, tail 1 and tail 2 lengths, and spare length. The
only additions are the phase labels, for example L1, L2, L3, etc.
▪ If there are no cable naming conventions, two cases are possible:
▪ Case 1: No cable naming conventions and the native cable has not been renamed:
▪ The assembly container tag gets the name of the native cable.
▪ The constituent cables get the default cable alias as defined in Options Manager
and the cable sequence number of the native cable preceded by the single core
cable assembly suffix.
▪ Case 2: No cable naming conventions but the native cable has been renamed:
▪ The assembly container tag gets the name of the native cable.
▪ The constituent cables get the default cable alias as defined in Options Manager
and the cable sequence number of the native cable preceded by the single core
cable assembly suffix.
▪ Example: If you rename CABLE-32 to MyCable (note that 32 is the cable sequence
number). After replacing MyCable with a single core cable assembly, the assembly
container name becomes MyCable and the constituent cables are named
CABLE-32/L1, CABLE-32/L2, etc. and CABLE-32/G1, CABLE-32/N1
▪ If there are cable naming conventions and you rename a cable before replacing it with a
single core cable assembly:
▪ The assembly container tag gets the name of the native cable.
▪ The constituent cables get their tags based on the naming conventions.
▪ Example: If you rename CNC-001 to CABLE-30, the assembly container becomes
CABLE-30 while the constituent cables are named CNC-001/L1, CNC-001/L2,
CNC-001/L3 and CNC-001/G1, CNC-001/G1.
▪ The software does not allow you to replace a parallel cable with a single-core cable
assembly. Parallel cables do not appear in the Selected cables grid if the Replace with a
single-core cable assembly option is active.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 167

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

▪ The software does not allow you to replace the reference cable of those cables that have
already been wired, installed, or locked to a drum.
▪ The software does not replace power cables with single-core assemblies if the power cables
are assigned to cable drums. If you selected such cables for replacement, the software
displays a message at the end of the process informing you of the problem and asking you
to open the log file where you can see the exact description of the problem. (Note that drum
assignment can be seen on the Design Data tab of the Cable Common Properties dialog
box, in the Drum box under Drum assignment. If there is no indication in the Drum box,
this means that the cable is not assigned to any cable drum.)
▪ Note that any existing cable routing is not retained after replacing the cable structure with
single-core cable assembly.

Batch Replace Cable Side Associations

This procedure explains how to replace the cable end connections for a group of non-power
cables. It is useful where a large number of cables are connected to the same marshaling rack
or cabinet.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cables.
2. Select the required cable folder: Control Cables, Grounding Cables, or Instrumentation
Cables.
You cannot perform this operation for power cables.
3. In the lower pane, select the required cables whose end connections you want to replace.
4. Click Actions > Cables > Batch Cable Side and Gland Association.
5. On the From or To cable side, clear the Clear existing connection check box to allow
replacement of existing cable associations for the cables that you select.
6. Beside the check box, click Find to open the Find dialog box.
7. From the Equipment type list, select the required equipment type.
8. Click Find Now.
9. In the Results data window, select the item that you want to associate with the cable sides,
and click OK.
10. From the cable list in the Batch Cable Side and Gland Association dialog box, select the
check boxes beside the cables for which you want to make cable side associations.
11. Click OK.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 168

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Account for the Installed Length of a Cable

This feature allows you to take into account the actual length of a cable that has been installed
in the field. You can enter appropriate values for marked length on side one and side 2 of the
cable and the software calculates the actual installed length of the cable. Alternatively, if you
know the actual installed length of a cable, you can type in the installed length value yourself.
Once the actual installed length has been entered or calculated, you set the cable definition as
installed. This action instructs the software to copy the actual installed cable length to the Actual
design/installed length on the Design Data tab of the Cable Common Properties dialog box.
If you change the installed length of a cable and increase the previous value of an installed
cable, the software makes sure that the new installed length does not exceed the capacity of the
drum to which the cable is assigned.
1. On the Cable Common Properties, dialog box, click the Design Data tab.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ In the Installed data group box, enter the required Marked length values for one or
both sides.
The software will automatically calculate the Installed length value if you enter values for
both sides.
▪ Under Installed length, enter the required value.
3. Select the Cable installed check box to instruct the software to define the cable as installed
in the field and to overwrite the Actual design/installed length value with the value in the
Installed length field.

▪ The software uses the Actual design/installed length value to calculate the cable sizing
and to optimize the cable drum.
▪ The software overwrites the Actual design/installed length value with the Installed length
value after selecting the Cable installed check box. If the new Actual design/installed
length value exceeds the capacity of the drum to which the cable is assigned, the software
displays an appropriate message and prompts you to free some space on the drum by
dissociating some of the cables from the drum.
▪ The installed length is the absolute delta between the Marked length — side 1 and Marked
length — side 2 values. You do not have to enter Marked length — side 1 and Marked
length — side 2 values consistently. The software keeps the installed length as a positive
value at all times.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 169

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Single-Core Cable Assemblies

A single-core cable assembly is a grouping of single-core cables that Smart Electrical manages
as a whole entity and not as individual cables, thus reducing repetitive work, mistakes, and
inconsistencies. For example, sometimes there is a need to connect three-phase (3 wire, 4 or 5
wire) equipment using individual single-core cables, one core per phase, often needed when
dealing with high voltage or high current cables.
Note that it is possible to change the formation of an existing single-core cable assembly
by adding or deleting the constituent neutral and grounding cables in the Single-Core Cable
Assembly Common Properties Dialog Box (on page 983). However, this is not possible if the
single-core cable assembly has the DC phase arrangement. For details, see Change the
Formation of a Single-Core Cable Assembly (on page 174).

Create a Single-Core Cable Assembly in the Electrical Index

This procedure shows you how to create a single-core cable assembly in the Electrical Index.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the following:
Wiring Equipment > Cables > Single-Core Cable Assemblies.
2. Right-click the Single-Core Cable Assemblies folder and then click New Single-Core
Cable Assembly on the shortcut menu.
3. In the Electrical Index tree view, do one of the following:
▪ Right-click the new cable assembly and then on the shortcut menu, click Common
Properties.
▪ Double-click the new cable assembly.
4. On the Single-Core Cable Assembly Common Properties dialog box, In the Cable
arrangement field, select the required cable arrangement (optional).
5. In the Phase arrangement field, select the required phase arrangement.

▪ To create a single-core cable assembly for a DC connection, select the DC option from
the Phase arrangement list.
▪ To create a single-core cable assembly for an AC single-phase circuit, select either the
1 PH or 1 PH +G option.
▪ If you set your cables in the single-core cable assembly to have phase labels, you can
define the phase separator for single-core cable names in the General Settings window
of Options Manager.
6. Type in a description, height, and width in their respective fields (optional).

7. At the side of the Reference cable field, click the ellipsis button to open the Select
Reference Cable dialog box.
8. On the Select Reference Cable dialog box, select the required reference power cable and
click OK.
9. In the Current carrying cores group box, in the Phase label fields, select the label for each
power cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 170

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

The software does not allow you to select the same label for two different power
cables in the cable assembly.
10. In the Neutral cables group box, click Add to open the Select Reference Cable dialog box.
11. On the Select Reference Cable dialog box, select the required cable and click OK.
The values for the selected neutral cable are added automatically to the fields in the
Neutral cables group box.
12. In the Grounding cables group box, click Add to open the Select Reference Cable dialog
box.
13. On the Select Reference Cable dialog box, select the required cable and click OK.
The values for the selected grounding cable are added automatically to the fields in
the Neutral cables group box.
14. Click OK.

▪ When defining a neutral or grounding cable, on the Select Reference Cable dialog box, you
can select a power or grounding cable from the Cable category list. Power cables used as
grounding or neutral cables are automatically connected as phase cables and they appear
in the Electrical Engineer. In cable block diagrams and SLDs, the software displays them
as phase power cables belonging to single-core cable assemblies.
▪ After clicking OK on the Common Properties dialog box, the software automatically
displays an expanded view of the cable assembly and adds the assembly's cables to their
relevant folders in the Electrical Index.
▪ When connecting the power connectors (S, T, R) of a single-core cable assembly to an
electrical equipment item, the software automatically completes the connection of the power
connectors after the first connection has been made to that item. For example, after
connecting the S cable to a motor the software automatically connects the remaining two
power cables (T and R) to the motor. The grounding and neutral cables are not connected
automatically and are connected by the user.
▪ Changing the tag sequence of one of the cables in an assembly affects the tag sequence of
all of the other cables in that assembly.
▪ Making any other change (for example, changing the sizing, routing, and so forth) in the
properties of one of the cables in an assembly that is connected to bus phases affects only
those cables in the assembly that are connected to the phases of the cable assembly.
▪ Changing the properties of a grounding or neutral cable in an assembly affects only that
particular cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 171

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Create a Single-Core Assembly Based on a Predefined Cable

Assembly
This procedure shows you how to create a single-core cable assembly in the Electrical Index
using a predefined reference cable assembly.
1. In the Electrical Index expand the following:
Wiring Equipment > Cables > Single-Core Cable Assemblies.
2. Right-click on the Single-Core Cable Assemblies folder and then click New Single-Core
Cable Assembly on the shortcut menu.
3. Do one of the following to open the common properties of the new single-core cable
assembly:
▪ Right-click and from the shortcut menu select Common Properties.
▪ Double-click.
4. On the Single-Core Cable Assembly Common Properties dialog box, click Select
Predefined Cable Assembly.
5. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now.
6. In the Results pane select the reference single-core cable assembly required.
7. Click OK, the reference single-core cable assembly values are added to the Common
Properties.
8. Click OK.

▪ After clicking OK on the Common Properties dialog box, the software automatically
displays an expanded view of the cable assembly and adds the assembly's cables to their
relevant folders in the Electrical Index.
▪ When connecting the power connectors (S, T, R) of a single-core cable assembly to an
electrical equipment item, the software automatically completes the connection of the power
connectors after the first connection has been made to that item. For example, after
connecting the S cable to a motor the software automatically connects the remaining two
power cables (T and R) to the motor. The grounding and neutral cables are not connected
automatically and are connected by the user.
▪ Changing the tag sequence of one of the cables in an assembly affects the tag sequence of
all of the other cables in that assembly.
▪ Making any other change (for example, changing the sizing, routing, and so forth) in the
properties of one of the cables in an assembly that is connected to bus phases affects only
those cables in the assembly that are connected to the phases of the cable assembly.
▪ Changing the properties of a grounding or neutral cable in an assembly affects only that
particular cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 172

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Create a Reference Single-Core Cable Assembly

This procedure shows you how to create a reference single-core cable assembly in the
Reference Data Explorer.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer expand the following:
Wiring Equipment > Cables > Single-Core Cable Assemblies.
2. Right-click on the Single-Core Cable Assemblies folder and click New Single-Core Cable
Assembly.
3. Do one of the following to open the common properties of the new reference single-core
cable assembly:
a. Right-click and from the shortcut menu select Common Properties.
b. Double-click.
4. On the Single-Core Cable Assembly Common Properties, in the Cable arrangement
field, select the required cable arrangement (optional).
5. In the Phase arrangement field, select the required phase arrangement.

▪ To create a single-core cable assembly for a DC connection, select the DC option from
the Phase arrangement list.
▪ To create a single-core cable assembly for an AC single-phase circuit, select either the
1 PH or 1 PH + G option.
▪ If you set your cables in the single-core cable assembly to have phase labels, you can
define the phase separator for single-core cable names in the General Settings window
of Options Manager.
6. If you set your cables in the single-core cable assembly to have phase labels, you can
define the phase separator for single-core cable names in the General Settings window of
Options Manager. Type in a description, height, and width in their respective fields
(optional).

7. At the side of the Reference cable field, click the ellipsis button to open the Select
Reference Cable dialog box.
8. On the Select Reference Cable dialog box, select the required reference power cable and
click OK.
9. In the Current carrying cores group box, in the Phase label fields, select the label for each
power cable.
The software does not allow you to select the same label for two different power
cables in the cable assembly.
10. In the Neutral cables group box, click Add to open the Select Reference Cable dialog box.
11. On the Select Reference Cable dialog box, select the required reference grounding cable
and click OK.
The values for the selected neutral cable are added automatically to the fields in the
Neutral cables group box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 173

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

12. In the Grounding cables group box, click Add to open the Select Reference Cable dialog
box.
13. On the Select Reference Cable dialog box, select the required reference grounding cable
and click OK.
The values for the selected neutral cable are added automatically to the fields in the
Grounding cables group box.
14. Click OK.

▪ When connecting the power connectors (S, T, R) of a single-core cable assembly to an

electrical equipment item, the software automatically completes the connection of the power
connectors after the first connection has been made to that item. For example, after
connecting the S cable to a motor the software automatically connects the remaining two
power cables (T and R) to the motor. The grounding and neutral cables are not connected
automatically and are connected by the user.
▪ When defining a neutral or grounding cable, on the Select Reference Cable dialog box, you
can select a power or grounding cable from the Cable category list. Power cables used as
grounding or neutral cables are automatically connected as phase cables and they appear
in the Electrical Engineer. In cable block diagrams and SLDs, the software displays them
as phase power cables belonging to single-core cable assemblies.
▪ Changing the tag sequence of one of the cables in an assembly affects the tag sequence of
all of the other cables in that assembly.
▪ Making any other change (for example, changing the sizing, routing, and so forth) in the
properties of one of the cables in an assembly that is connected to bus phases affects only
those cables in the assembly that are connected to the phases of the cable assembly.
▪ Changing the properties of a grounding or neutral cable in an assembly affects only that
particular cable.

Change the Formation of a Single-Core Cable Assembly

You can add and/or delete grounding and neutral cables in existing single-core cable
assemblies. This is possible for all phase arrangements of single-core cable assemblies apart
from the DC phase arrangement.
Once you add or delete grounding or neutral cables, the software automatically changes the
phase arrangement accordingly.
The following table illustrates how the phase arrangement changes once you add or delete a
grounding or neutral cable.

Current Phase Arrangement Additions / Deletions Result

1 PH Add one or more grounding 1 PH + G

cable

1 PH + G Delete all the grounding cables 1 PH

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 174

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Current Phase Arrangement Additions / Deletions Result

1 PH + G Add one or more grounding No change

cables with or without neutral
cables

3 PH Add one or more grounding 3 PH + G

cable

3 PH Add one or more neutral cable 3 PH + N

3 PH Add one or more grounding 3 PH + N + G

cable with a neutral cable

3 PH + G Add a neutral cable 3 PH + N + G

3 PH + G Delete all the grounding cables 3 PH

3 PH + N Add one or more grounding 3 PH + N + G

cable

3 PH + N Delete all the neutral cables 3 PH

3 PH + N + G Delete all the neutral cables 3 PH + G

3 PH + N + G Delete all the grounding cables 3 PH + N

3 PH + N + G Delete all the grounding and 3 PH

neutral cables

▪ You cannot add or delete grounding and or neutral cables if the current phase
arrangement is DC.
▪ When adding a grounding and or neutral cable to a single-core cable assembly that has
already been associated with equipment items, the software automatically associates
the added cables with those equipment items if the cables that you added belong to the
Power cable category.
▪ Deleting a grounding and or neutral cable from an assembly does not affect the existing
associations in that assembly.
▪ Dissociating a grounding and or neutral cable from an equipment item automatically
dissociates all the constituent cables in that assembly, including the current-carrying
cores. This happens only if the grounding or neutral cable that you want to dissociate
belongs to the Power cable category. Dissociating a grounding or neutral cable that
does not belong to the Power cable category does not affect the other cables in the
assembly.
To change the formation of an existing single-core cable assembly, do the following:
1. In the Electrical Index, right-click an existing single-core cable assembly.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 175

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

2. On the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.

3. On the Single-Core Cable Assembly Common Properties dialog box, click Add or Delete
in the Neutral cables and/or the Grounding cables sections.
4. Click Apply.
The software creates or deletes the cables in the Electrical Index and changes the
phase arrangement accordingly. (See the table above.)

Copy a Single-Core Cable Assembly from the Reference Data

Explorer
This procedure shows you how to copy a reference single-core cable assembly from the
Reference Data Explorer to the Electrical Index.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, open the Wiring > Cables > Single-Core Cable
Assemblies folder.
2. Select the required reference single-core cable assembly.
3. Drag the single-core cable assembly to the Electrical Index and drop it into the Wiring >
Cables > Single-Core Cable Assemblies folder.

▪ After dragging a reference single-core cable assembly to the Electrical Index, the software
automatically displays an expanded view of the cable assembly and adds the assembly's
cables to their relevant folders in the Electrical Index. The common properties are also
changed automatically to reflect that the assembly is no longer a reference item.
▪ When connecting the power connectors (S, T, R) of a single-core cable assembly to an
electrical equipment item, the software automatically completes the connection of the power
connectors after the first connection has been made to that item. For example, after
connecting the S cable to a motor the software automatically connects the remaining two
power cables (T and R) to the motor. The grounding and neutral cables are not connected
automatically and are connected by the user.
▪ Changing the tag sequence of one of the cables in an assembly affects the tag sequence of
all of the other cables in that assembly.
▪ Making any other change (for example, changing the sizing, routing, and so forth) in the
properties of one of the cables in an assembly that is connected to bus phases affects only
those cables in the assembly that are connected to the phases of the cable assembly.
▪ Changing the properties of a grounding or neutral cable in an assembly affects only that
particular cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 176

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Add a Single-Core Cable Assembly to a Profile

This procedure explains how to include a single-core cable assembly in a profile.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the Profiles folder and select an appropriate
reference load.
2. Right-click the reference load and then click Common Properties.
3. On the General tab of the Equipment Profile Properties dialog box, under Associated
cables, click Find below the Cable assembly box.
4. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now.
5. In the Results box, select an appropriate cable assembly and then click OK.
The software displays the cable assembly you selected in the Cable assembly box
and it will add it to the current profile after clicking OK on the Equipment Profile Properties
dialog box.

Sizing Cables
This section provides information about sizing of low voltage plant power cables.
After associating a cable with a load, the cable inherits the data required for sizing from the
associated load.
You can instruct the software to inherit load data from associated instruments and
cabinets if you define them as loads. (On their common properties, make sure that the
Consumer check box is selected.)
Cables that have not yet been associated with loads can also be sized by typing in data
manually.
Smart Electrical uses algorithms that give a good estimate for cable sizing; however,
we recommend that you use specialized cable sizing software for more accurate results.

Required Data for Cable Sizing

The software performs cable sizing via a number of stages: thermal sizing, voltage drop
calculation at normal running, and for a motor, voltage drop calculation at starting.
You must enter all the data required for the thermal sizing and voltage drop stages in order for
the software to calculate the cable cross-section size. In addition, you can specify optionally for
the software to perform short circuit sizing. For further details of the data properties, see the
Cable Common Properties dialog box (on page 935) and refer to the appropriate dialog box tab.
You can find this information in the Cable Algorithms.xlsm file, which resides in Smart
Electrical program folder:
\Program Files (x86)\SmartPlant\Electrical\bin\resdlls\0009\

▪ The software calculates cable sizing by selecting a matching reference cable from the
Reference Data Explorer, so only those reference cables that you created are available for

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 177

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

selection. You should therefore ensure that you create in the Reference Data Explorer all
possible cable types and sizes that you may want to use.
▪ If you have changed the sizing data of a cable to such an extent that the current cable
becomes unsuitable for its function, you need to perform manual resizing of this cable (click
the Calculate Sizing button on the Sizing Data tab of the Cable Common Properties
dialog box). The software informs you about this by displaying an appropriate message in
the Calculation information box on the Sizing Data tab of the Cable Common Properties
dialog box and by turning on the Sizing required flag (the software automatically selects the
Sizing required check box on the General tab of the Cable Common Properties dialog
box). For details about the properties that require manual resizing of cables, see Automatic
Switch-On of the Sizing Required Flag (on page 183).
▪ The software does not size a cable for which it cannot find a reference cable with the
specified cable specification that matches the value of the minimum conductor
cross-section for parallel cables defined in Options Manager. You should either change
the value in Options Manager or create a new reference cable with the appropriate
cross-section in the Reference Data Explorer.
▪ The software filters out from the Cable-Sizing Matrix all the reference cables whose
insulation voltage rating is smaller than the rated voltage of the current cable. Also, the
software does not allow a situation where the insulation voltage rating is smaller than
the rated voltage of a given cable. This situation is prevented when:
▪ Sizing a single cable or several cables in batch mode.
▪ Refreshing load data in batch mode or by clicking the Refresh Data button on the
Sizing Data tab.
▪ Replacing the associated reference cable of one or more plant cables.
▪ Manually modifying cable data on the Common Properties dialog box or the
Properties window.

Thermal Sizing
In the thermal sizing step, the software attempts to locate from the Reference Data Explorer
the smallest size reference cable of the specified type and construction, with a de-rated
ampacity equal to or greater than the full load current of the connected load. If the software
cannot find a single cable that meets this requirement, it continues with groups of identical
cables in parallel, from the minimum conductor size, up to the maximum permitted number of
parallel cables. You can specify the minimum conductor size, the maximum permitted number
of parallel cables, and the default suffix naming method in the Options Manager.
The software requires the following data for this stage of the calculation:
Cable specification (General tab) — Specifies the family of cables within which the software
looks for a suitable reference cable.
Conductor arrangement (General tab) — Specifies the required conductor arrangement of the
reference cable.
Full load current [FLA] (Sizing Data tab) — Specifies the nominal current for a load
associated with the cable, or a value that you type manually.
Routing (Sizing Data tab) — Indicates the appropriate routing type for the current cable: InAir,
UnderGround, or some other custom routing type that you define. The option that you select
affects whether the software uses the ampacity value in air, in the ground, or custom basic
ampacity when sizing a cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 178

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Conformity to standard — This property (set in the Properties window) determines the
electrical standard, IEC or NEC that the software uses. If you select the NEC standard, the
software sets the Code Factor flag to Yes . Enter a value for Code Factor and then click the
Calculate Sizing button. If you do not enter any Code Factor value, the software cannot make
the sizing calculation and it will display an appropriate message in the System Notes box.
De-rating factor / Utilization factor / Ambient temp. factor (Sizing Data tab) — Specifies
properties that the software divides the nominal current by to obtain the de-rated cable
ampacity.

Voltage Drop Calculations

The software calculates the voltage drop across the cable under full load conditions, based on
the cable length and other factors and compares it with the maximum allowable voltage drop
that you specify. The software attempts to locate a cable with a sufficiently large conductor
size, based on the thermal sizing, which gives a voltage drop lower than the allowed maximum
value. In addition, the software calculates the maximum cable length for which the voltage drop
does not exceed the maximum allowable value. For a motor, the software also calculates the
percentage voltage drop under starting conditions following the same methodology.
The software requires the following data for this stage of the calculation:

Cable Common Properties - General Tab

Reference cable — The reference cable you select provides, in addition to the basic ampacity
values, the values of the Resistance per unit length and Reactance per unit length
properties that the software requires for the voltage drop calculation.

Cable Common Properties - Design Data Tab

Estimated length / Design length — Indicates the length of the cable that the software uses to
calculate the voltage drop. The software uses the design length if available. Otherwise, it uses
the estimated length.

Cable Common Properties - Sizing Data Tab

Supply — Allows you to select the type of supply: alternating current (AC) or direct current
(DC). If the cable is connected to a load for which you select the Consumer check box on the
General tab of the appropriate load Common Properties dialog box, the software copies the
value from the load to this box. Note that the value of this property is automatically inherited
from the load, converting equipment, or any other electrical equipment that this power cable is
connected to.
The software calculates the cable cross-section size using different
voltage drop formulas for AC and DC supplies.
Number of phases — Select the number of phases in the power supply to the load: 1, 2, or
3. If the cable is connected to a load for which you select the Consumer check box, the
software uses the value from the load. This property applies for an AC supply only. Note that
the value of this property is automatically inherited from the load, converting equipment, or any
other electrical equipment that this power cable is connected to.
▪ When selecting Protection Setting in the Cable Sizing tab the system
expects the user to enter the current rating of the protection device. The calculation
algorithm is programmed so that when sizing the cable the system compares the load of
the Full Load current (multiplied by the code factor if Use Code Factor is enabled) with

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 179

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

the protection device setting and uses the larger amperage (Full Load Amp X Code
Factor or Protection Setting) as the required ampacity.
Rated voltage — Allows you to select an appropriate operating voltage for a load associated
with the cable. If the cable is connected to a load for which you select the Consumer check
box, the software uses the value from the load.
Starting current — (This is a required property for motors and some other loads) If a motor is
connected to the cable, the software enters the value of the locked rotor current (LRC). For a
motor, the starting current value can typically be 400 - 600% larger than the full load current and
is therefore important when evaluating the current requirements used to perform sizing. Note
that this option is available for all power cables whether they are connected to motors or not.
Power factor at full load — Allows you to enter the power factor of the equipment that the
cable feeds under normal full load running conditions. The power factor is the ratio of active
power to apparent power and can have a value between 0 and 1. If the cable is connected to a
load for which you select the Consumer check box, the software uses the value from the load.
Note that if the power supply is DC, the power factor at full load and at starting is always 1 (one)
and it cannot be changed.
Power factor at starting — Allows you to enter the power factor of the equipment that the cable
feeds under starting conditions. If the cable is connected to a motor for which you select the
Consumer check box, the software uses the value from the motor. This property is not
available for loads other than motors. Note that if the power supply is DC, the power factor at full
load and at starting is always 1 (one) and it cannot be changed.
Allowable at full load — Allows you to enter the maximum allowable voltage drop percentage
when the connected load is running under normal full load conditions. The allowable voltage
drop must have a value greater than zero. To ignore the voltage drop in the sizing calculation,
type a value of 100.
Allowable at starting — Allows you to enter the maximum allowable percentage voltage drop
when starting the equipment. The allowable voltage drop must have a value greater than
zero. To ignore the voltage drop in the sizing calculation, type a value of 100.

Short Circuit Sizing

You can specify that you want the software to perform short circuit sizing by selecting the Use
short circuit cable sizing check box on the Sizing Data tab. The software examines each
reference cable that already meets the sizing requirements for the thermal and voltage drop
criteria. Based on the short circuit parameters and conductor short circuit coefficients, the
software calculates the minimum required conductor cross-section area for the cable in cmils
and displays the value in the Required area (cmils) box. The algorithm compares the results
of this calculation with the value in the Conductor Area cmils lookup table for the reference
cable in question to determine whether the reference cable meets the short circuit sizing
criteria. The software checks each reference cable in turn until it finds the smallest size cable
that meets the short circuit sizing criteria. It is important that the lookup tables contain suitable
values to enable the software to perform the calculation successfully.
Note that after changing the short circuit fault values, the software does not
re-calculate the voltage drop automatically. This is a manual process that you have to start
yourself.
The software requires the following data for this stage of the calculation:
Material (General tab) — Select the required material for the current-carrying conductors.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 180

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Insulation (General tab) — Select the required material used for insulating the current-carrying
conductors.
Use short circuit cable sizing (Sizing Data tab) — You must select this check box to enable
the software to perform the short circuit sizing calculation.
Duration (Sizing Data tab) — Type the maximum time for which the cable is expected to
withstand a fault short circuit.
Fault current (Sizing Data tab) — Type the maximum current that the cable is expected to
withstand in the event of a short circuit fault current.
The software displays in the Calculation information box the message 'Not found'
under the following conditions: when no reference cable exists corresponding to the cable
specification or arrangement, when there are missing values for ampacity, resistance, or
reactance, or when the number of parallel cables exceeds the specified limit in the Options
Manager.

Size a Cable
This procedure explains how to size low voltage plant power cables.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cables > Power
Cables.
You can also select a cable in the Electrical Engineer.
2. Select the required cable and do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Common Properties.
▪ Right-click the cable and on the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
▪ Press CTRL + F2.
3. On the General tab of the Cable Common Properties dialog box, select the Sizing
required check box.
4. Select a cable specification.

▪ When sizing the cable, the software selects the appropriate reference cable from the
family of cables that you specify under Cable specification and with the value that you
select under Conductor arrangement.
5. Click the Design Data tab and enter cable length data.
In the absence of a value for the Design length property, the software uses the
value in the Estimated length box.
6. Click the Sizing Data tab and enter data. For full details of the properties for which you
must enter values for sizing, see Required Data for Cable Sizing.
7. If the cable has an associated load, you can copy load data to the cable by clicking Refresh
Data.
The software updates the values of the following properties for all item
types if these properties have been defined:
▪ Full load current (FLA)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 181

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

▪ Starting current
▪ Rated voltage
▪ Supply (AC/DC)
▪ Number of passes
▪ Power factor at full load
▪ Power factor at starting
8. Click Calculate Sizing to calculate the recommended cable cross-section size.
9. Click Apply Sizing to select the recommended reference cable or cables for use as the
basis for this cable. The software replaces the currently selected reference cable and
updates the cable properties.
If you replace the associated reference cable of a terminated cable, the
software does not allow you to resize this cable unless the new reference cable has the
same conductor arrangement as the replaced reference cable.
If you want to use the shipped reference data provided with the application, validate
that these values are appropriate for cable sizing. Note that shipped reference data is
provided to you as uncertified samples only.
10. Click Apply to create the sized cable or set of cables in your plant.

▪ For full details about the properties that you need to enter and the ones that are calculated
by the software, see the Cable Common Properties dialog box (on page 935). You can also
edit the most commonly used properties and additional properties in the Properties window
or in the EDE.
▪ After associating a cable with a load, the cable inherits the data required for sizing from the
associated load. Note that instruments and cabinets can also function as loads if the
Consumer check box is selected on their common properties.
▪ If you have changed the sizing data of a cable to such an extent that the current cable
becomes unsuitable for its function, you need to perform manual resizing of this cable (click
the Calculate Sizing button on the Sizing Data tab of the Cable Common Properties
dialog box). The software informs you about this by displaying an appropriate message in
the Calculation information box on the Sizing Data tab of the Cable Common Properties
dialog box and by turning on the Sizing required flag (the software automatically selects the
Sizing required check box on the General tab of the Cable Common Properties dialog
box). For details about the properties that require manual resizing of cables, see Automatic
Switch-On of the Sizing Required Flag (on page 183).
▪ The software does not size a cable for which it cannot find a reference cable with the
specified cable specification that matches the value of the minimum conductor
cross-section for parallel cables defined in Options Manager. You should either change
the value in Options Manager or create a new reference cable with the appropriate
cross-section in the Reference Data Explorer.
▪ The software filters out from the Cable-Sizing Matrix all the reference cables whose
insulation voltage rating is smaller than the rated voltage of the current cable. Also, the
software does not allow a situation where the insulation voltage rating is smaller than
the rated voltage of a given cable. This situation is prevented when:
▪ Sizing a single cable or several cables in batch mode.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 182

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

▪ Refreshing load data in batch mode or by clicking the Refresh Data button on the
Sizing Data tab.
▪ Replacing the associated reference cable of one or more plant cables.
▪ Manually modifying cable data on the Common Properties dialog box or the
Properties window.
▪ If the software cannot find a single reference cable that is suitable for the needed cable size,
it selects as many parallel cables as required, up to the maximum allowed, which you can
determine in Options Manager. Also in Options Manager, you can select the minimum
conductor size that the software looks for when sizing cables.
▪ You have to resize a power cable if you reassign it to another load or modify the cable
properties. Also, we recommend that you generate a report or use the EDE to view which
power cables have their Cable Sizing Flag property set to True (same as the Sizing
required check box on the Cable Common Properties dialog box. This enables you to
see the power cables that need resizing.

Automatic Switch-On of the Sizing Required Flag

Changing one of the following properties automatically switches on (selects) the Sizing
required check box on the General tab of the Cable Common Properties dialog box.

Plant Cable Properties

(The properties of the power cable itself that needs to be resized)
The software automatically recalculates the voltage drop after you change one
of the cable property values for a cable that has already been sized. If the value you enter
exceeds the sizing parameters of the current cable, you will need to resize the cable by clicking
the Calculate Sizing button on this tab. The software displays an appropriate message to this
effect in the Calculation information box on this tab and turns on the Sizing required flag on
the General tab of the Cable Common Properties dialog box.
▪ Actual / design / installed length
▪ Number of phases
▪ Rated voltage
▪ Full load current (FLA)
▪ Starting current
▪ Power factor at full load
▪ Power factor at starting
▪ Allowable voltage drop at full load
▪ Allowable voltage drop at starting
▪ Include protection device
▪ De-rating factor
▪ Utilization factor
▪ Code factor
▪ Ambient temperature factor

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 183

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Reference Cable Properties

(The properties of the reference cable associated with the plant power cable that needs to be
resized)
▪ Basic ampacity in air
▪ Basic ampacity in ground
▪ Custom basic ampacity
▪ Reactance per unit length
▪ Resistance per unit length

Load Properties
(The properties of the load connected to the plant power cable that needs to be resized)
▪ Conformity to standard
▪ Rated voltage
▪ Number of phases
▪ Supply (AC/DC)
▪ Full load current (FLA)
▪ Locked rotor current (for motors only)

Batch Size Cables

This procedure explains how to size a group of power cables in batch mode.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cables > Power
Cables.
2. Click the Power Cables folder and adjust the size of the panes to view the individual cables
in the list view pane.

3. If required, change the view in the list view pane by clicking View Settings to toggle
through each view of the items in the list view pane, or click the arrow beside the icon and
select the required view.
4. Hold CTRL while clicking the cables that you want to size.
5. Click Actions > Cables > Batch Size Cables.
6. In the Batch Size Cables window, do one of the following:
▪ For each cable that you want to size, select the Select check box.
▪ Select the Select all check box if you intend to size all the cables in the list.
7. Click Excel Report to display the information in this window in an Excel file, from where you
can format the layout and print the data as required.
If data required for sizing is missing from a cable, the software cannot size the
cable. We therefore recommend that you print the contents of the window or view the
Comments column to ascertain whether data is missing for any of the cables that you

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 184

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

intend to size. You should open the Cable Common Properties dialog box for each of
those cables and complete the data, and then you can size the cables in batch mode.
8. Click Apply Sizing to perform the sizing for the selected cables.

▪ When the selected set of cables for batch sizing includes parallel cables, only one tag per
parallel cable assembly appears in the display; however the software performs the operation
for all the parallel cables in each assembly.
▪ The software does not size a cable for which it cannot find a reference cable with the
specified cable specification that matches the value of the minimum conductor
cross-section for parallel cables defined in Options Manager. You should either change
the value in Options Manager or create a new reference cable with the appropriate
cross-section in the Reference Data Explorer.
▪ The software filters out from the Cable-Sizing Matrix all the reference cables whose
insulation voltage rating is smaller than the rated voltage of the current cable. Also, the
software does not allow a situation where the insulation voltage rating is smaller than
the rated voltage of a given cable. This situation is prevented when:
▪ Sizing a single cable or several cables in batch mode.
▪ Refreshing load data in batch mode or by clicking the Refresh Data button on the
Sizing Data tab.
▪ Replacing the associated reference cable of one or more plant cables.
▪ Manually modifying cable data on the Common Properties dialog box or the
Properties window.
▪ The cable data in the Batch Size Cables window is read-only. Updating property values,
can only be done for each cable individually.

Define Custom Basic Ampacity for Cable Sizing

Smart Electrical allows you to calculate cable sizing using a custom basic ampacity values that
you define in lookup tables. You can select a custom routing method from the Routing list on
the Sizing Data tab of the Cable Common Properties dialog box. Once you select a custom
routing method, the software calculates the custom basic ampacity value based on the data that
exists in the custom basic ampacity lookup table. The software displays the calculated custom
basic ampacity value on the General tab of the Cable Common Properties dialog box.
Prior to sizing a cable using this method, do the following to preliminary steps to customize basic
ampacity:
1. Update the Routing select list on the Sizing Data tab of the Cable Common Properties
dialog box and add new custom installation method values:
a. On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Tools > Update Select Lists.
b. On the Update Select List dialog box, select Routing from the Selected list.
c. Add the new routing method select list values as needed and click OK.
Do not modify or overwrite the existing InAir or UnderGround select list
items.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 185

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

2. In Options Manager, open the General Settings and define the name of the new custom
basic ampacity lookup table.
You can add as many new custom basic ampacity lookup tables as you need.
3. In Smart Electrical, create a new lookup table with the same name.

a. In the Reference Data Explorer, expand the Lookup Tables folder.

b. Right-click the Cables folder and select New Lookup Table.
c. Make sure that the name the new lookup table is exactly the same as it appears on the
General Settings in Options Manager.
4. Populate the new lookup table with your data.

▪ For more information on how to define your lookup table, see Example of a Custom
Basic Ampacity Lookup Table (on page 187).
▪ The software does not validate the changes made to custom basic ampacity lookup
tables.
▪ The software does not provide the means to synchronize the lookup tables with the
associated cables.
▪ When copying an electrical network from the Reference Electrical Engineer, the
software does not copy custom installation methods that are defined in the Routing
select list.
You can now use your custom basic ampacity to size cables. For details, see Use Custom Basic
Ampacity to Size Cables (on page 186).

Use Custom Basic Ampacity to Size Cables

The following procedure explains how to size a cable that uses a custom basic ampacity. For
details about defining a custom basic ampacity, see Define Custom Basic Ampacity for Cable
Sizing (on page 185).
1. Right-click a required cable and then on the shortcut menu, click Cable Common
Properties.
2. On the Cable Common Properties dialog box, click the Sizing Data tab.
3. From the Routing list, select an appropriate custom routing definition.
Make sure that you select one of your custom routes and not InAir or
UnderGround. If you select InAir or In Ground, the software will not use the custom
ampacity value to size the cable.
4. In the Sizing results group box, click the Calculate Sizing button.
The basic ampacity value that was used to size the cable appears on the
General tab of the Cable Common Properties dialog box, under Custom basic ampacity.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 186

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Example of a Custom Basic Ampacity Lookup Table

The following images provide an example of how to define a custom ampacity lookup table.

The Structure Tab

This example provides only those properties that we recommend including in
the Definition table. You can define the lookup table according to your needs. However, the
lookup table definition must contain the Custom Basic Ampacity property and its output must
be Out.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 187

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

The Data Tab

Create a Busway
This procedure explains how to create a new busway in the Electrical Index. A busway can be
used in a similar manner to power cable, other than the ability to perform sizing. You can define
the properties of a busway in the Properties window. Also, you can connect a power cable to a
busway if needed.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Busways.
2. Right-click the folder and click New Busway.
3. Rename the busway if you require.
4. In the Properties window, enter values for the required busway properties.
If the parent folder contains custom folders, the created item is placed in the root
folder. If the items properties match the filter properties of a custom folder a copy of the item is
also placed in the custom folder. Refreshing or closing and re-opening Smart Electrical moves
the item from the root folder to the All Items folder.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 188

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Cable Drums
Smart Electrical provides for the management of cable drums. You can create cable drums and
assign one or more cables to a cable drum. The cable drum assignment feature helps you plan
cabling tasks and optimize cable drum use. It also allows you to determine cable lengths so
that you can purchase cables while minimizing a shortage or surplus of cable at the end of the
plant.
Before you begin, make sure that you have defined cable pulling areas in the Data
Dictionary Manager. For more information, see Data Dictionary Manager Online Help.
You can assign cables to drums manually or automatically.

Manual Assignment
When assigning cables to drums manually, you associate a drum with a specific reference
cable. You can define multiple drum sizes for each reference cable. These drum sizes are
based on various cable lengths that a drum can hold. Once you associate a drum with a
reference cable that has multiple drum sizes, you can select the most appropriate drum size for
a particular drum. For details, see Create a Cable Drum (on page 190).

Automatic Assignment
When assigning plant cables to drums automatically, the software optimizes the cable
assignment. Smart Electrical optimizes this assignment based on the drum sizes, the maximum
percentage of free cable length on the drums and the scrap cable length that you have defined
for each reference cable that you select for drum assignment. For more details, see
Optimization of Cable Drum Assignment. For information about manual definition of cable cuts,
see Define Manual Cable Cuts (on page 158).
You perform automatic cable assignment by using the Assign Drums to Cables wizard. When
using the wizard, you define the assignment parameters by selecting the following:
▪ All the available reference cables or just one specific reference cable.
▪ One or more pulling area.
The wizard will then assign all the plant cables that comply with these parameters. Furthermore,
the software will optimize cable assignment to the drums based on the drum sizes, the
maximum percentage of free cable lengths on the drums, and the scrap cable length that you
have defined for each reference cable that you selected in the wizard. For details, see Batch
Assign Cables to Cable Drums (see "Batch Assignment of Cables to Cable Drums" on page
193).
Although the order may vary, the following activities are essential elements in cable drum
assignment for a given pulling area:
▪ Create reference cables and define sets of cable lengths so that you can optimize cable
assignment to drums.
▪ Create plant cables based on the reference cables.
▪ Create cable drums for all of the reference cables used in the pulling area.
▪ Assign all of the plant cables in the pulling area to cable drums.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 189

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

For detailed information about the logic used by Smart Electrical to optimize cable drum
assignment, see Optimization of Cable Drum Assignment.

Create a Cable Drum

This procedure explains how to create a new cable drum in the Electrical Index. In order to
assign cables to cable drums in your plant, you must first create cable drums and associate
them with a reference cable in your plant.
Prior to creating new drums, it is crucial that you define appropriate reference
cables that contain drumming data. You need to define the drum types that you require. These
drum types are based on various sets of minimum and maximum cable lengths. When
associating a drum with a reference cable, these sets of cable lengths become available for
drum optimization. For details, see Design Data Tab (Reference Cable Common Properties
Dialog Box) (on page 1132).
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Drums.
2. Right-click the Drums folder, and on the shortcut menu click New Drum.
3. Right-click the drum that you created, and on the shortcut menu click Common Properties.
4. On the Cable Drum Common Properties dialog box, under Drum Tag, edit the tag name
as necessary.

5. To set the required drum reference cable, beside Reference cable click to open the
Select Reference Cable dialog box.
6. On the Select Reference Cable dialog box, select an appropriate reference cable.
Make sure that there are appropriate plant cables based on the selected reference
cable and that each of these cables has been assigned to at least one pulling area.
7. In the Drum sizes group box click Select to open the Drum types per cable length dialog
box.
8. Select an appropriate set of cable lengths and click OK.

▪ The sets of cable lengths that are available on the Drum Sizes dialog box are taken
from the Design Data tab of the reference cable that has been set for the current drum.
The Minimum and Maximum values pertain to the Minimum cable length to order
and Maximum drum capacity values that are on the Cable Drum Common
Properties dialog box.
▪ You can add new Minimum and Maximum values and change the existing Minimum
and Maximum values even after assigning plant cables to a drum.
▪ Note that the drums that have the procurement status set to Ordered or Delivered are
not affected by the change that you make.
▪ When changing the Minimum and Maximum values, the software validates that the
new values that you enter are within the range of the cable length definitions according
to the following:
▪ If the Total cable length to order/delivered has been set, the Minimum cable
length to order cannot be greater than the Total cable length to order/delivered
value.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 190

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

▪ If the Total cable length to order/delivered has not been set, the Minimum cable
length to order can be greater than the Total cable length on the drum value.
9. Enter values for the other cable drum properties. For details, see Cable Drum Common
Properties Dialog Box (on page 968).
For calculation details, see Rules Governing Cable Drum Calculations (on page 198).

Edit Cable Drum Properties

After you create a cable drum, use this procedure to select a drum reference cable, and to
define and edit other cable drum properties.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Drums.
2. Right-click the Drums folder, and on the shortcut menu click New Drum.
3. Right-click the drum that you created, and on the shortcut menu click Common Properties.
4. On the Cable Drum Common Properties dialog box, under Drum Tag, edit the tag name
as necessary.

5. To set the required drum reference cable, beside Reference cable click .
6. On the Select Reference Cable dialog box, select the required reference cable.
7. In the Drum types per cable length group box click Select to open the Drum types per
cable length dialog box.
8. Select an appropriate set of cable lengths and click OK.
The sets of cable lengths that are available on the Drum types per cable length
dialog box are taken from the Design Data tab of the reference cable that has been set for
the current drum.
9. Enter values for the other cable drum properties. For details, see Cable Drum Common
Properties Dialog Box (on page 968).

▪ You cannot change the drum reference cable when cables are assigned to the drum.
▪ You cannot delete a drum if a cable has been assigned to that drum.
▪ For calculation details, see Rules Governing Cable Drum Calculations (on page 198).

Assign Multiple Cables to a Cable Drum

This procedure explains how to assign one or more cables to a cable drum that you created in
the Electrical Index, and for which you set a reference cable.
1. Open the Cable Drum Common Properties dialog box for the cable drum to which you
want to assign cables, and edit the values as needed. For details, see Edit Cable Drum
Properties (on page 191).

2. To set the required drum reference cable, beside Reference cable click to open the
Select Reference Cable dialog box.
3. On the Select Reference Cable dialog box, select an appropriate reference cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 191

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Make sure that there are appropriate plant cables based on the selected reference
cable and that each of these cables has been assigned to at least one pulling area.
4. In the Drum sizes group box click Select to open the Drum types per cable length dialog
box.
5. Select an appropriate set of cable lengths and click OK.

▪ The sets of cable lengths that are available on the Drum Sizes dialog box are taken
from the Design Data tab of the reference cable that has been set for the current drum.
The Minimum and Maximum values pertain to the Minimum cable length to order
and Maximum drum capacity values that are on the Cable Drum Common
Properties dialog box.
▪ You can add new Minimum and Maximum values and change the existing Minimum
and Maximum values even after assigning plant cables to a drum.
▪ Note that the drums that have the procurement status set to Ordered or Delivered are
not affected by the change that you make.
▪ When changing the Minimum and Maximum values, the software validates that the
new values that you enter are within the range of the cable length definitions according
to the following:
▪ If the Total cable length to order/delivered has been set, the Minimum cable
length to order cannot be greater than the Total cable length to order/delivered
value.
▪ If the Total cable length to order/delivered has not been set, the Minimum cable
length to order can be greater than the Total cable length on the drum value.
6. Define at least one pulling area by doing one of the following:
a. To set a single pulling area, select a value from the Pulling area list.

▪ When clicking Add in the Assigned cables group box, the software will look only for
those cables that are associated with the pulling area that you select from this list.
▪ Make sure that the Allow multiple pulling areas check box is not selected.
a. To set multiple pulling area, select the Allow multiple pulling areas check box.
When clicking Add in the Assigned cables group box, this option instructs the
software to look for all the cables and cable cuts that are associated with the current
reference cable.
7. Click Add in the Assigned cables data window.
8. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now.
9. In the Results data window, select the cables and/or cable cuts that you want to assign to
the current drum, and click OK.

▪ You can assign to a particular drum only those cables that are associated with a designated
reference cable and only those cables that belong to one or more pulling areas assigned to
the drum.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 192

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

▪ For calculation details, see Rules Governing Cable Drum Calculations (on page 198).

Assign a Single Cable to a Cable Drum

This procedure explains how to assign a cable that you are editing to a given cable drum.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cables.
2. Expand the required folder among the following: Power Cables, Control Cables,
Grounding Cables, or Instrumentation Cables.
3. Right-click the cable that you want to assign, and on the shortcut menu click Common
Properties.
4. On the Cable Common Properties dialog box, click the Design Data tab.
5. In the Drum Assignment group box, click Find.
The software finds only those cable drums that have been associated with
the same reference cable and pulling area as the current cable.
6. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now.
7. In the Results data window, select the cable drum to which you want to assign the cable,
and click OK.

▪ If a cable exceeds the maximum cable drum capacity, the software automatically defines the
required cable cuts for that cable. You can view the specified lengths of the cable cuts on
the Cable Cut Definitions dialog box by clicking Cable Cuts the Design Data tab of the
Cable Common Properties dialog box. Click View in the Drum assignment group box.
For more information, see Define Manual Cable Cuts (on page 158).
▪ For calculation details, see Rules Governing Cable Drum Calculations (on page 198).

Batch Assignment of Cables to Cable Drums

This procedure explains how to assign cables to multiple cable drums automatically using the
Assign Drums to Cables Wizard. When assigning plant cables to drums automatically, the
software optimizes the cable assignment. Smart Electrical optimizes this assignment based on
the drum sizes, the maximum percentage of free cable length on the drums and the scrap cable
length that you have defined for each reference cable that you select for drum assignment. For
more details, see Optimization of Cable Drum Assignment. For information about manual
definition of cable cuts, see Define Manual Cable Cuts (on page 158).
You perform automatic cable assignment by using the Assign Drums to Cables wizard. When
using the wizard, you define the assignment parameters by selecting the following:
▪ All the available reference cables or just one specific reference cable.
▪ One or more pulling area.
The wizard will then assign all the plant cables that comply with these parameters. Furthermore,
the software will optimize cable assignment to the drums based on the drum sizes, the
maximum percentage of free cable lengths on the drums, and the scrap cable length that you
have defined for each reference cable that you selected in the wizard.
1. Click Actions > Cables > Assign Drums to Cables to open the Assign Drums to Cables
Wizard.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 193

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

2. On the Welcome page, click Next.

3. On the Drum and Cable Options page, select the check boxes as you require for the
following options:
▪ Include cables already assigned to drums.
▪ Create new drums if needed.
▪ Delete empty drums.
4. Do one of the following:

▪ Select a single reference cable - beside Reference cable, click , to open the Select
Reference Cable dialog box (on page 980).
▪ Select the Select all reference cables check box.
5. Do one of the following:
▪ From the Pulling area list, select a single pulling area.
▪ Select the Select all pulling areas check box.
6. To exclude specific cable drums from the assignment, do the following:
a. In the Drum exclusion filter group box, click Browse.
b. Select a filter that has been defined to contain drum properties of cable drums that you
want to exclude from the assignment.
c. If you do not want to exclude any cable drums from the assignment, click Clear Filter.
7. Click Next.
8. On the Select Cables page, do one of the following:
▪ For each available cable or cable cut that you want to assign to a drum, select the
Select check box beside the cable tag.
▪ To select all of the cables and cable cuts that are available for assignment, select the
Select all check box.

▪ You can specify the order of the cables that have not been assigned yet and organize
these cables either in a descending or alternate order. You set the sorting method on
the General page in Options Manager. If you select the Descending method, the
software sorts the cables starting with the longest cable and then goes down to the
shortest one. If you select the Alternate method, the software starts with the longest
cable, then with the shortest, then with the second longest and then back to the shortest
again, and so on.
▪ You cannot select cables or cable cuts for which pulling area or cable length values are
missing. To update the cable data, highlight the cable and click Common Properties.
▪ If you select any cables that have restricted access rights, the software does not assign
them to drums, and the names of those cables appear in the error log.
9. Click Next.
10. On the Drum - Cable Assignment Summary page, view the details of the cables you have
selected to assign to cable drums.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 194

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

11. Click Next.

12. On the Completing the Assign Drums to Cables Wizard page, view summary data for the
cable - drum assignment and click Finish to close the wizard.
If a cable exceeds the maximum cable drum capacity, the software automatically
defines the required cable cuts for that cable. The Assign Drums to Cables Wizard specifies
the lengths of the cable cuts on the Completing the Assign Drums to Cables Wizard page.

Optimization of Cable Drum Assignment

This topic describes how the software optimizes the assignment of cables to drums. When using
the Assign Drums to Cables wizard, Smart Electrical optimizes the cable assignment to drums.
The optimization process of the software determines the composition of the selected cables on a
given drum in such a way so that the drum capacity is utilized to the maximum. The software
looks for the best composition of cables according to the following:
▪ The various drum sizes available for each reference cable.
▪ The maximum free total length defined in the reference cable.
▪ The list of cables sorted by length.
During the optimization process, the software also takes into account the options that you select
in the Assign Drums to Cables wizard, such as the selected pulling areas, reassigning of
assigned cables, using existing cable drums, creating new cable drums if required, and deleting
unused drums.
The optimization mechanism consists of three main stages which are totally transparent to
Smart Electrical users.

Collecting the Cable Drum and Cable Data for Drum Assignment
During this stage, the software collects all the available drums and the cables for the assignment
process. The software considers all the existing drums in the current plant and the cables that
you select in the Assign Drums to Cables wizard.
Drums Included in the Optimization Process
The software checks all the available drums and looks for those drums that comply with the
following requirements:
▪ All the drums that have been associated with the pulling areas that you select in the Assign
Drums to Cables wizard.
▪ Drums for which the procurement status is set to Ordered or Delivered. If the procurement
status is not defined, the software uses the Maximum drum capacity values of such drums
in the optimization process.
▪ Drums for which the Total cable length to order/delivered value is defined. If this value is
not defined, the software uses the Maximum drum capacity values of such drums in the
optimization process.
As Smart Electrical collects the cable drum data, it lists all the suitable drums in a virtual list
which is sorted according to the total free space that is available on the drums, starting with
those drums that have the most available free space to the least available free space.
Cable drums that are defined as spare and cable drums that are associated with
multiple pulling areas are not included in the optimization process by Smart Electrical.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 195

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Cables Included in the Optimization Process

Smart Electrical includes the following cables in the optimization process:
▪ All the cables that you select in the Assign Drums to Cables wizard and which have not
yet been assigned to any drums.
▪ If you select the Include assigned cables option in the Assign Drums to Cables wizard,
the software includes all the cables that already have been assigned to cable drums and
which you select in the Assign Drums to Cables wizard.
Cables that have been defined as installed or locked, remain assigned to their
original drums and are not re-assigned to other drums during the optimization process.
As Smart Electrical collects the cable data, it lists all cables in a virtual list which is sorted in
descending or alternate order. The optimization process is based on the sorting order that you
define in Options Manager.

Assigning the Cables to the Drums

At this stage, Smart Electrical tries to assign the cables from the virtual cable list to the collected
drums that already exist in the current plant. The assignment process is based on the following:
▪ The software starts with the first cable on the virtual cable list which is sorted in ascending
or descending order and tries to fit this cable to a drum.
▪ The software checks the free space of the existing drums that have been collected for the
drum assignment.
▪ The software first considers the drum that has the greatest amount of free space and then
moves on to the next drum.
▪ The software assigns the cables to the existing drums by filling the drums to the maximum
of their capacity or up to the total cable length of a cable that has been defined as ordered
(from a supplier).
▪ Once a cable is assigned to a drum, the software removes this cable from the virtual
assignment list.
▪ If a particular cable cannot be assigned to a drum at this stage, the software puts it aside
and this cable will be assigned at a later stage.
▪ The software tries to reduce the maximum capacity of the existing drums that have not been
defined as ordered or delivered and those drums whose Total cable length to
order/delivered value is not defined.
▪ At this stage no new drums are created yet. This will be done during the next stage if you
select the Create new drums option in the Assign Drums to Cables wizard.
▪ If a cable is longer than the Maximum free length on drum value that was set for that
drum, the software tries to increase the maximum capacity of that drum according to the
available drum sizes defined for the associated reference cable.
▪ If the software still cannot assign another cable to a drum even after increasing the
maximum capacity of the drum, that cable remains unassigned.
▪ If a cable is longer than the drum maximum capacity and if you selected the Create new
drums option in the Assign Drums to Cables wizard, the software automatically creates
the cable cuts that are required for that cable. The software specifies the length of each
cable cut and assigns it to a different drum as needed. Note that these cable cuts are virtual

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 196

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

cuts. The entire cable will be shown in all the pertinent reports and cable schedules and not
the individual cable cuts.

Optimizing the Drum Assignment

During the optimization stage, the software continues to assign the remaining cables to the
existing drums and to the new drums that it creates. If you select the Create new drums option
in the Assign Drums to Cables wizard, the software creates new drums for the cables that
have not been assigned yet. Also, the software uses the existing drums that have been emptied
from the cables that have been re-assigned to other drums during the assignment stage. If you
do not select the Create new drums option, the cables that do not fit on the existing drums will
remain unassigned.
The software will try to use all the drums for the assignment until a drum becomes "optimized".
A drum is considered "optimized" if:
▪ It has been filled to its maximum capacity.
▪ Its free length is less than or equal to the Maximum free length on drum (%) value that
has been set for the associated reference cable.
The assignment process continues as follows:
▪ The software picks the first cable from the top of the cable list and looks for a drum that has
the largest remaining available capacity on that drum. If the software cannot find a suitable
drum for this cable, it will create a new drum.
▪ When creating new drums, the software uses the values from the Drum sizes list and the
Maximum free length on drum (%) values that are defined for the associated reference
cable.
▪ If a particular drum has not been filled to its optimum, the software retains the assigned
cable composition on that drum and then starts checking if a smaller drum based on the
Drum sizes list can be created and a suitable cable composition can be found for this drum.
▪ If the software finds a suitable cable composition for the new drum that will deem this drum
as "optimized", the software creates this drum and assigns this cable composition to this
new drum.
▪ If the software cannot optimize a particular drum, the best suited cable composition is
assigned to this drum in such a way that the Maximum free length on drum (%) value for
that drum is kept as low as possible.
▪ The software continues assigning the remaining cables to the new drums according to the
same method.
▪ The software stops looking for the best cable composition for drums when:
▪ A particular cable composition fills the drum to the optimum.
▪ There are no more available drum sizes left in the Drum sizes list of the associated
reference cable.
▪ The next available drum size is shorter than the longest cable in the current cable
composition.
▪ If the Maximum free length on drum (%) value has not been defined for the associated
reference cable, the software tries to find the most suitable cable composition during every
cycle of the cable assignment.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 197

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

▪ At the end of the process, the software deletes the empty drums if you select the Delete
empty drums option in the Assign Drums to Cables wizard.
For additional information, you can also refer to the Drum Optimization Workflow
Diagram. To open this diagram, on the main Smart Electrical menu bar, click Help > Printable
Guides > Drum Optimization Workflow Diagram (the link is at the bottom of the page).

Batch Cable Dissociation from Drums

This option allows you to select a number of cable drums and dissociate them from the assigned
cables. This can be useful, for example, when after assigning all cables to drums, you need to
change the length of a cableway or segment.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Drums.
2. Select the drums that you require in the Item Tag pane.
3. Do one of the following:
a. On the main toolbar, click Action > Cables > Batch Cable Dissociation from Drums.
b. Right-click the selected drums and then on the shortcut menu, click Batch Cable
Dissociation from Drums.
4. In the dissociation prompt, click Yes to confirm the dissociation.

Rules Governing Cable Drum Calculations

When you assign cables to cable drums, there are specific rules that govern how the software
determines whether it is possible for you to assign a given cable to a drum. These rules apply
whether you make the assignment from the Cable Drum Common Properties dialog box or
from the Cable Common Properties dialog box.
The following rules apply:
▪ For each cable, Smart Electrical uses the Actual length value.
▪ The value under Total actual length assigned is the sum of the actual lengths of all the
assigned cables.
▪ If assigning a given cable would cause the Total actual length assigned value to be
greater than the value that you set under Maximum cable length, the software does not
allow the cable assignment.
▪ You can make allowance for cable cutting error by entering a value under Drum spare
percent. The software includes this percentage in the Total actual length assigned value.

Cancel Cable Assignment to a Cable Drum

This procedure explains how to remove cables that are assigned to a drum.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Drums.
2. Right-click the cable drum from which you want to remove cables, and on the shortcut menu
click Common Properties.
3. In the Assigned cables data window, select the required cable and click Remove.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 198

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

You can also cancel the assignment of a cable to a cable drum on the Design Data
tab of the Cable Common Properties dialog box.

Cable Routing
The cable routing feature allows you to set up a model of the cable routing in your plant. First,
you need to create reference cableway components. These are catalog components for which
you can specify manufacturer's data. The software allows you to specify one of three possible
categories of reference cableway components: trays, conduits, or miscellaneous. You can
make space reservations by defining cableways and segments (the physical conduits) in your
plant, and later associate the segments with reference components. Alternatively, you can
specify the reference components for the segments at the time when you create them. After
you define the cableways and segments in your plant, you can assign cables to specific routing
paths, singly or in batch mode.
The software allows you to create predefined routing paths as a way of specifying physical
relationships between cableways. Predefined cable routing contains cableway segments that
you select and whose order you specify.
You must define a segregation level for the cables you intend to route, as well as for the
cableway segments. Assignment of segregation levels allows you to specify separate groups of
cables that you would not normally route together along the same path, for example, high and
low voltage cables.
A number of reports that come shipped with the software are available to assist you in managing
your cable routing efficiently. These include:
▪ Segment Width Estimate
▪ Cableway Component Material Take-Off
▪ Cableway Segment Schedule
▪ Segment Fill
For more information, see Shipped Reports.

Create a Cableway and Segments

This procedure explains how to create a cableway and its segments in the Electrical Index. In
order to define a routing path to which you can assign cables, you must first create cableways
and their segments. Initially, these cableways and segments can specify space reservations.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cableways.
2. Right-click the Cableways folder, and on the shortcut menu click New Cableway.
3. For each routing segment that you need to create in the cableway, right-click the cableway,
and on the shortcut menu click New Cableway Segment.
4. For each routing segment that you created, select the segment, and in the Properties
window, define the segment length and other properties.
You can select a segregation level only if you have not assigned any cables to the
segment.
5. Right-click the cableway, and on the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 199

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

6. On the Cableway Common Properties dialog box, sort the segments in the required
sequence by selecting segments and clicking Up or Down.

Assign Cableway Components to Segments

After you create a cableway, use this procedure to define and edit essential cableway
properties.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cableways.
2. Expand the required cableway and select the required segment.
3. Right-click the segment, and on the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
4. On the Cableway Segment Common Properties dialog box, under Reference
component, click Find.
To filter the selection for a particular reference component category, under
Category, select Tray, Conduit, or Miscellaneous before you click Find.
5. On the Find dialog box, select the required reference component.
The software fills values for certain properties from the reference component, if
available.

Define the Routing for a Cable or a Single-Core Cable

Assembly
This procedure explains how to define a routing path for a single cable or a single-core cable
assembly.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cables, and the
required folder among the following: Power Cables, Control Cables, Grounding Cables,
or Instrumentation Cables.
2. Right-click the cable for which you want to define routing, and on the shortcut menu click
Common Properties.
3. Click the Design Data tab.
4. In the Cable routing group box, click Define.
5. On the Cable Routing Definition dialog box, select an appropriate segregation level.
It is also possible to select a segregation level on the Design Data tab of the Cable
Common Properties dialog box.
6. Enter all the appropriate design data values. You can also enter these values on the Design
Data tab of the Cable Common Properties dialog box.
7. Enter all the appropriate installed data values on the Design Data tab of the Cable
Common Properties dialog box.
8. In the Routing definition group box, do one of the following:
▪ To define a new route, click Add and then select the appropriate cableway and segment
from the lists in the grid.
▪ To use an existing route, under Find route, select one of the following:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 200

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

▪ Predefined Route — to search for and use an existing route that has been saved in
this plant.
▪ From Cable — to search for a cable whose routing can be used for the current
cable.
▪ Cable Tag — to use the routing definition of one of the parallel cables in the current
set. (This option is available only if you selected the Allow different routes for all
cables routing method for parallel cables.)

▪ When defining the routing for a single-core cable assembly, make sure that the total
length values of all constituent cables is identical. The software will not allow you to
complete the routing definition if one of the cables in the set has a different length.
▪ You can account for the point at which the cable exits the cableway segment so that
Smart Electrical can calculate the actual cable length more accurately. To do this, on
the Cable Routing Definition dialog box, you must enter a Drop-off Length value in
the Routing definition grid. This value specifies the length of the cable on the assigned
segment. This way the distance between the end of the segment and the drop-off point
of the cable is not included in the Actual length of the cable.
9. Click Apply or OK as needed,
You can save the current routing definition by clicking the Save as New Route button.
Once you do that, you will be able to use this routing definition for other cables after selecting
From Cable in the Find route list.

Define the Routing for a Set of Parallel Cables

This procedure explains how to define a routing path for a set of parallel cables.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cables, and the
required folder among the following: Power Cables, Control Cables, Grounding Cables,
or Instrumentation Cables.
2. Right-click the cable for which you want to define routing, and on the shortcut menu click
Common Properties.
3. Click the Design Data tab.
4. In the Cable routing group box, click Define.
5. Select one of the following routing methods for the constituent cables in the set:
▪ Set same route for all cables — to define an identical route for all the cables in the set.
▪ Allow different routes for all cables — to instruct the software to allow you to define
different routes for all the cables in the set.
For this option to work, you must first enable it in Options Manager. For
details, see Allow Different Cable Routes for Parallel Cables (on page 202).
6. On the Cable Routing Definition dialog box, select an appropriate segregation level.
It is also possible to select a segregation level on the Design Data tab of the Cable
Common Properties dialog box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 201

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

7. Enter all the appropriate design data values on the Design Data tab of the Cable Common
Properties dialog box.
8. Enter all the appropriate installed data. You can also enter these values on the Design Data
tab of the Cable Common Properties dialog box.
9. In the Routing definition group box, do one of the following:
▪ To define a new route, click Add and then select the appropriate cableway and segment
from the lists in the grid.
▪ To use an existing route, under Find route, select one of the following:
▪ Predefined Route — to search for and use an existing route that has been saved in
this plant.
▪ From Cable — to search for a cable whose routing can be used for the current
cable.
▪ Cable Tag — to use the routing definition of one of the parallel cables in the current
set. (This option is available only if you selected the Allow different routes for all
cables routing method for parallel cables.)

▪ When defining the routing for a set of parallel cables, make sure that the total length
values of all constituent cables is identical. The software will not allow you to complete
the routing definition if one of the cables in the set has a different length.
▪ You can account for the point at which the cable exits the cableway segment so that
Smart Electrical can calculate the actual cable length more accurately. To do this, on
the Cable Routing Definition dialog box, you must enter a Drop-off Length value in
the Routing definition grid. This value specifies the length of the cable on the assigned
segment. This way the distance between the end of the segment and the drop-off point
of the cable is not included in the Actual length of the cable.
10. Click Apply or OK as needed,
You can save the current routing definition by clicking the Save as New Route button.
Once you do that, you will be able to use this routing definition for other cables after selecting
From Cable in the Find route list.

Allow Different Cable Routes for Parallel Cables

The following procedure describes how to set different cable routing for parallel cables.
1. In Options Manager, click General Settings > Allow the routing of parallel cables via
different routes.
2. Set this option to Yes and close Options Manager.
3. In Smart Electrical, open the Common Properties of each cable in the set and define their
routing as needed.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 202

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Batch Route Cables

This procedure explains how to define routing paths for cables in batch mode. Batch cable
routing is useful when you want to assign multiple cables belonging to the same segregation
level to a routing path.
The software does not verify routing compatibility of cables with varying
voltage levels; therefore you must make sure that your practices permit the cable combinations
that you define for a given routing path. If required, you can use the Rule Manager to define
criteria for the type of cables that you allow to belong to the same segregation level.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cables, and
select the required folder (Power Cables, Control Cables, Grounding Cables, or
Instrumentation Cables).
2. In the list view pane, press CTRL while selecting the cables that you want to route.

▪ All the cables that you select must have the same segregation level and you must
define the actual cable length (estimated length, design length, or routing length) for
each cable that you add to the routing.
▪ When routing cables of more than one category, create a EDE view for the required
cables and select from the view the cables that you want to route.
3. Click Actions > Cables > Batch Route Cables.
4. On the Batch Route Cables dialog box, make sure that the Clear routing from selected
cables check box is cleared.
5. In the Cable routing group box, for the first segment, select the cableway and segment
from the relevant lists.
6. For each succeeding segment, click Add, and then select the cableway and segment from
the relevant lists.
7. In the lower data window, do one of the following:
▪ For each cable that you want to assign to the routing path, select the check box beside
the cable tag.
▪ To assign all of the displayed cables, select the Select all check box.
The new cable routing overwrites any existing values under Routing Path.
For a parallel cable assembly, when you define a cable routing for one of the cables,
the software automatically copies the routing to all of the cables in the assembly.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 203

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Clear Cable Routing

This procedure explains how to clear routing from selected cables.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cables, and
select the required folder (Power Cables, Control Cables, Grounding Cables, or
Instrumentation Cables).
2. In the list view pane, press CTRL while selecting the cables from which you want to clear
routing.
All the cables that you select must have the same segregation level.
3. Click Actions > Cables > Batch Route Cables.
4. On the Batch Route Cables dialog box, select Clear routing from selected cables.
5. In the lower data window, do one of the following:
▪ For each cable from which you want to clear routing, select the check box beside the
cable tag.
▪ To clear routing for all of the displayed cables, select the Select all check box.

Routing of Parallel Cables Updated Externally

This topic provides explanation about the software behavior for parallel cables whose External
Routing Length and External Routing Path properties were updated by retrieving data from
SmartPlant Foundation.

Changes After Running the To Do List

After retrieving data from SmartPlant Foundation and running the To Do List for the External
Routing Length and External Routing Path properties, the software sets the Use External
Routing Length flag to FALSE (clears the Use External Routing Length check box on the
Design Data tab of the Cable Common Properties dialog box) and recalculates the Actual
Length property value.

Changes That Can Be Made by Users

Once the values of the External routing length, External routing path, or both have been
changed after running the To Do List, the software allows you to make the following changes:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 204

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Allow the Use External Routing Length Actual Length Actual Routing Path in
Routing of Check box Properties Window
Parallel Cables
via Different
Routes (Options
Manager -
General Settings)

Yes Allows you to select the check The software sets this For each parallel cable in
box. Possible if the External value to be the same as the set, the software sets
routing length values are the the External Routing this value to be the same
same for all the parallel cables in Length for each parallel as the External Routing
the set. cable in the set. Path value of that parallel
cable.

No Allows you to select the check The software sets this For each parallel cable in
box. Possible if the External value to be the same as the set, the software sets
routing length and External the External Routing this value to be the same
routing path values are the same Length for each parallel as the External Routing
for all the parallel cables in the cable in the set. Path value of that parallel
set. cable.

Create a Predefined Cable Route

The following procedure explains how to create a predefined cable route. You need to make
these definitions if you want to use predefined routes for your cables.
1. On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Actions > Cables > Predefined Routes.
2. On the Predefined Routes dialog box, click New.
3. On the Route Properties dialog box, define the new route as follows:
a. Under Route, type the name of the new route or accept the displayed name.
b. From the Segregation level list select an appropriate segregation level. Remember that
the segregation level of the route must match the one of the cable.
c. Type a description if needed.
d. In the Cable routing grid, click under Cableway and select an appropriate cableway.
e. Click under Segment and select an appropriate segment or segments.
f. Click OK.
4. Click Close on the Predefined Routes dialog box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 205

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Select a Predefined Route for a Cable

The following procedure explains how to set the routing of a cable based on a predefined route.
1. In Electrical Index, expand the Wiring Equipment > Cables hierarchy.
2. Right-click the required cable and then click Common Properties.
3. On the Cable Common Properties dialog box, click the Design Data tab.
4. From the Segregation level list, select an appropriate segregation level that fits the
segregation level of the predefined route.
5. In the Cable routing group box, click Define.
6. On the Cable Routing Definition dialog box, under Find route, select Predefined Route
to search for and use an existing route that has been saved in this plant.
7. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now.
8. Select an appropriate predefined route from the Results box and click OK.
If the application does not show any predefined routes in the Results box
or if the predefined routs are not suitable, define new routes using the Predefined Routes
command. For details, see Create a Predefined Cable Route (on page 205).

Copy Cable Routing Definitions from Another Cable

The following procedure explains how to copy the routing of a cable from another cable.
1. In Electrical Index, expand the Wiring Equipment > Cables hierarchy.
2. Right-click the required cable and then click Common Properties.
3. On the Cable Common Properties dialog box, click the Design Data tab.
4. From the Segregation level list, select an appropriate segregation level that fits the
segregation level of the predefined route.
5. In the Cable routing group box, click Define.
6. On the Cable Routing Definition dialog box, under Find route, select From Cable to
search for a cable whose routing can be used for the current cable.
7. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now.
8. Select an appropriate cable from the Results box and click OK.
If the software cannot find an appropriate cable, it means that there are no
cables that have the same segregation level as the one that you selected in the Cable
routing box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 206

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Edit Cableway Properties

This procedure explains how to modify cableway properties, including inserting, deleting, and
moving segments.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cableways.
2. Right-click the required cableway, and on the shortcut menu click Common Properties.
3. If required, modify the cableway tag and description.
4. Under the Segments section, modify the segments by doing any of the following:
▪ Click Add to insert a new segment at the end of the list.
▪ Click Insert to insert a new segment above the currently selected segment.
▪ Click Remove to remove the currently selected segment from the cableway.
5. Sort the segments in the required sequence by selecting segments and clicking Up or
Down.
If you have assigned cables to the segment, you cannot remove or change the
sequence of the existing segments; you can only insert new segments by clicking Add or
Insert. When you insert a new segment and define its properties, the software automatically
updates the routing for the assigned cables.

Segment Fill Validation

You can perform segment fill validation using one of the two methods, the Conventional or the
National Electric Code (NEC) method. Note that the software can calculate the fill percentage
only if the segment is associated with a reference raceway component.

Conventional Method
The Conventional method is based on the physical properties of raceway components. This
method is commonly used and it has a less restrictive approach than the NEC method. For
details on how to set the required method (Conventional or NEC), see Set the Method for
Segment Fill Validation (on page 210).

Tray Fill Calculation

The software calculates tray segment fill according to the following criteria:
▪ When using the Conventional method, the segment fill calculation is based on the type of
reference tray that you select on the Reference Cableway Component Common
Properties dialog box. The following types of reference trays are available:
▪ Covered tray segment - Applies to trays and miscellaneous cableway components. The
software calculates the total area occupied by the cables assigned to the segment. The
software validates this value by ensuring that it does not exceed the allowed area (the
product of tray width, tray depth and Fill factor), Smart Electrical validates the covered tray
fill segment calculation by area. Furthermore, the software ensures that the outer cable
diameter of any cable does not exceed the tray depth. Note that for covered trays the fill
factor value cannot exceed the value of 1.
▪ Uncovered tray segment - Applies to trays and miscellaneous cableway components. The
software calculates the sum of the outer diameters of the cables assigned to the segment.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 207

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Smart Electrical validates this value by ensuring that it does not exceed the product of the
segment width, the fill factor, and the number of layers. The software validates the
uncovered tray fill segment calculation by diameter.
▪ The segment fill calculation is based on tray width or tray area. You select the required
criterion from the Calculation criteria list on the Cableway Segment Common Properties
dialog box. When selecting the Auto option from the Calculation criteria list, Smart
Electrical calculates the segment fill automatically. The software performs the calculation
according to the type of reference tray that you selected on the Reference Cableway
Component Common Properties dialog box. Selecting the Covered check box instructs
the software to calculate the segment fill according to the Area criterion. If you do not select
this check box, Smart Electrical performs the calculation according to Width.
For details on how to set the segment fill calculation criterion, see Set the Segment
Fill Calculation Criterion (on page 210).

Conduit Fill Calculation

The Conduit fill calculation applies to conduits. The software calculates the total area occupied
by the cables assigned to the segment. Smart Electrical validates this value by ensuring that it
does not exceed a quarter of the allowed area of the conduits. The software calculates the
allowed area of the conduit starting from the conduit diameter and the fill factor. The minimum
allowed conduit diameter is based on the following formula:
D= 2*F*SQRT(SIGMA d**2)
Where:
▪ D = Minimum inner conduit diameter
▪ di = Individual cable outer diameter
▪ f = Fill factor (between 0 and 1)

▪ For conduits, the fill factor value cannot exceed the value of 1.
▪ You need to define cable diameter and weight per unit length for each associated reference
cable by entering the required values in the Reference Cableway Component Common
Properties dialog box.
▪ When performing validations based on cable diameter, the software assumes that the
cables are laid side-by-side. Therefore the software does not allow for cables that can pass
along the interstices between larger cables.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 208

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

NEC Validation Method

Smart Electrical validates segment fill based on the NEC 2011 Handbook. The NEC method is
based on given space factors in lookup tables. Unlike the Conventional tray segment
validations, the NEC method does not allow flexibility like the Conventional method regarding
tray segment fill validation. NEC dictates the fill requirements for various cases of installations,
such as cable formations, cable sizes, insulation voltages and tray widths. Smart Electrical
supports routing of single-core and multi-core cables through the same segment as allowed in
NEC 2011 Handbook. The software takes into account the fill factor that you specify and the
maximum weight per length unit allowed on tray. If any of the actual fill values exceed the
allowed values, the software rejects them from being routed and displays a warning message on
the Cableway Segment Common Properties box.

▪ The tray fill calculation flowchart is available in the Smart Electrical installation folder in the
following path:
Program Files\SmartPlant\Electrical\Program\resdlls\0009\NEC_TrayFill_Flowchart.pdf
▪ The Flexible tray type check box is not available when NEC validation is set to Yes.

Conduit Fill Factor

When using the NEC validation method in a conduit, the software sets the fill factor according to
the number of cables in the conduit:
▪ If the number of cables in a conduit = 1, the fill factor = 0.53
▪ If the number of cables in a conduit = 2, the fill factor = 0.31
▪ If the number of cables in a conduit > 2, the fill factor = 0.4
You cannot modify these additional fill factors.
The NEC rules for tray segment fill validation are based on the following primary parameters and
their various combinations:
▪ The insulation voltage rating of the cable that it is carrying. The NEC method divides the
voltage into two groups, above 2000v and 2000v, and below.
▪ A combination of power and non-power carrying cables (instrumentation, control,
grounding).
▪ Type of tray on which cables are laid; whether it is Ladder, Ventilated trough, Solid
bottom tray, Ventilated channel, Solid channel.
▪ Conductor sizes
▪ Tray dimensions
For each of the possible combinations of the above-mentioned parameters, NEC method
specifies (NEC 2011 handbook) one or more of the following criteria:
▪ The allowable number of layers
▪ The allowable fill area
▪ The allowable tray width percentage
All the limiting numbers of the allowable width and cross-sectional areas are automatically set in
Smart Electrical and cannot be changed.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 209

 Creating and Modifying Plant Wiring Equipment

Smart Electrical generates a NEC tray fill validation log file that documents tray validations. For
details on how to generate a log file, see Generate Error Log Files (on page 880). In the
generated log file you can view the properties of the specific tray fill validation, such as - Item
type, date of validation, Layout ID, and more. The NEC tray fill validation log file is based on
Smart Electrical Tray Fill Calculation Logic, which is based on: NFPA 70 National Electrical
Code 2011 Edition.
For more details see, NEC tables, refer to article 392, section 9 and 10 in the NEC 2011 Edition.

Set the Method for Segment Fill Validation

This procedure describes how to set a method for segment fill validation. You can select one of
the two methods, the Conventional or the NEC (National Electric Code) method.
1. Open the Option Manager.
2. Click Options > General Settings.
3. On the General Settings dialog box, in the Cable fill validation to follow NEC
regulations pane, select from the list one of the following:
▪ Select No (default) if you want to apply the Conventional method.
▪ Select Yes if you want to apply the NEC (National Electric Code) method.

4. Click to save.

Set the Segment Fill Calculation Criterion

This procedure explains how to set the segment fill calculation criterion for segment fill
validation. Note that when using the NEC validation method, the Calculation criteria list is not
available.
1. In the Option Manager, set the segment fill validation to Conventional, for more details see
Set the Method for Segment Fill Validation (on page 210).
2. In Smart Electrical, on the Electrical Index tree-view, expand the Wiring Equipment folder.
3. Expand the Cableways folder and select the required cableway or create a new cableway
and segments, for details see Create a Cableway and Segments (on page 199).
4. Right click a required segment, on the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
5. On the Cableway Segment Common Properties dialog box, from the Calculation criteria
list, select the required calculation criterion (Auto, Area, or Width).
▪ Auto —When selecting the Auto option, the calculation is preformed automatically
according to the type of reference tray that you selected on the Reference Cableway
Component Common Properties dialog box.
▪ Area —The software calculates the segment fill by area.
▪ Width —The software calculates the segment fill by width.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 210

SECTION 9

Populating Plant Items with Data

This section describes how to create plant items and populate them with data in a batch
operation, thus keeping to a minimum the editing that you need to perform for individual plant
items. You can perform batch plant item creation using the following methods:

Apply a Typical Item to a Plant Item

Typical items in the Reference Data Explorer enable you to create plant items based on the
selected typical items. The software simply clones the typical item in the Electrical Index after
dragging a typical item to an appropriate folder in the Electrical Index. For more information,
see Copy a Reference Item to the Electrical Index (see "Create a Single Plant Item Based on a
Reference Item" on page 86).

Apply Options Using Typical Items

You can use the Apply Options feature to create and associate plant items with electrical
equipment in the Electrical Index where the associated items are based on typical items
defined in the Reference Data Explorer. This option is very useful for populating data in batch
mode. For example, you can select a number of motors in the Electrical Index and associate
them with a control station, a typical circuit, or both. You can also associate these motors with a
typical schematic. For more information, see Apply Options to a Set of Tags.

Apply a Profile to an Electrical Item

You can define specific profiles for various item types. A profile is an assembly of various
typical items that you can use as a template for creating plant items. For example, you can
create a motor profile that consists of the following reference items: a motor, one or more
cables, a control station, a circuit with protection devices, and schematic. Applying a profile to
an electrical item in the Electrical Index enables you to specify various properties for that item
as they were defined in that profile. This way you can create an electrical item with all its
related equipment and with all the properties as you require. For more information, see Apply a
Profile to an Item.

Apply a Lookup Table to an Electrical Item

Lookup tables are data tables used to populate plant items singly or in batch with data values
based on one or more key fields. Where the key fields exactly match the data for a particular
item, the software copies the data from the matching row in the lookup table to the plant
item. For example, you can select a number of motors in the Electrical Index and apply a
selected lookup table for a motor with a particular motor rated power and rated voltage. The
software will then populate the properties of the selected tables with appropriate values. For
more information, see Apply Lookup Table Data to Equipment.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 211

 Populating Plant Items with Data

Apply Options to a Set of Tags

You can use the Apply Options feature to create and associate plant items with electrical
equipment in the Electrical Index where the associated items are based on typical items
defined in the Reference Data Explorer. This option is very useful for populating data in batch
mode. For example, you can select a number of motors in the Electrical Index and associate
them with a control station, a typical circuit, or both. You can also associate these motors with a
typical schematic.
1. Do one of the following:
▪ In the Electrical Index, select a set of tags. For more information, see Select a Set of
Tags (see "Select a Set of Item Tags in the Electrical Index" on page 42).
▪ Select multiple tags in the EDE.
2. Click Tools > Apply Options.
3. On the Apply Options dialog box, select the values that you require on the appropriate
tabs.
4. After you have selected the values on a tab, click Apply.
If several users try to apply options to the same item type at the same time, the
software may create duplicate item tags.

Apply Lookup Table Data to Equipment

Lookup tables are data tables used to populate plant items singly or in batch with data values
based on one or more key fields. Where the key fields exactly match the data for a particular
item, the software copies the data from the matching row in the lookup table to the plant
item. For example, you can select a number of motors in the Electrical Index and apply a
selected lookup table for a motor with a particular motor rated power and rated voltage. The
software will then populate the properties of the selected tables with appropriate values.
You can apply data from a lookup table to any type of equipment for which you have created a
lookup table. Each lookup table is specific for an item type, such as transformers, and by
selecting a key value for a lookup table, the software automatically populates the item with other
properties that you defined in the lookup table.

▪ When you apply data using a lookup table, the software can overwrite existing data. Since
this process is not reversible, you should proceed with great care.
▪ It is good practice not to include calculated properties in lookup tables. For example, if the
Supply AC/DC Flag property for a motor is set to DC, and you try to select a value for the
Frequency property, you cannot apply this value and the software rejects the
operation. You must first set Supply AC/DC Flag to AC, and only then you can apply the
lookup table value for the Frequency property to the motor.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by clicking the + icons or by double-
clicking the folders.
2. Navigate to the folder for the required equipment type and do one of the following:
▪ Expand the folder and select an item from the list.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 212

 Populating Plant Items with Data

▪ Click the folder, and in the list view pane, hold CTRL while you select more than one
item.
You can also select more than one item by selecting a subset of item tags in the
EDE.
3. Click Tools > Apply Options.
4. On the Apply Options dialog box, click the Lookup Table tab.
5. Select Enable lookup table.
The default lookup table for the equipment type appears in the Lookup table
box. You can select a different profile by performing the following steps.
6. Beside the Lookup table box, click Find.
7. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now to display the available lookup tables.
8. From the list of lookup tables, highlight the lookup table that you want to apply.
For each item property, the software overwrites existing values if the value of the
Overwrite Option property in the lookup table is set to True. It is recommended that you
view the lookup table before applying the data to verify which properties the software
overwrites.
9. Click OK.

Apply a Typical Circuit to an Item

Applying a typical circuit to an electrical item in your plant allows you to create a new circuit with
predefined properties. The software automatically associates the new circuit with the selected
plant item. You can apply a typical circuit to all loads, all converting equipment items, and
circuits.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by clicking the + icons or by double-
clicking the folders.
2. Navigate to the folder for the equipment type that you require and do one of the following:
▪ Expand the folder and select an item from the list.
▪ Click the folder, and in the list view pane, hold CTRL while you select more than one
item.

▪ You can apply a typical circuit to all loads, all converting equipment items, and circuits.
▪ You can also select more than one item by selecting a subset of item tags in the EDE.
3. Click Tools > Apply Options.
4. On the Apply Options dialog box, click the Typical Circuit tab.
5. Select Enable typical circuit.
6. Beside the Typical circuit box, click Find.
7. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now to display the available typical circuits.
8. From the list of typical circuits, highlight the typical circuit that you want to assign to the
equipment.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 213

 Populating Plant Items with Data

9. Click OK.
10. Under Apply to, select one of the following options according to the rule the software uses
to apply the typical circuit:
▪ All items - Applies the typical circuit to all the selected items.
▪ Items with no typical circuit - Applies the typical circuit only to items without an
existing typical circuit. Use this option to add a typical circuit only to new items among
the items that you selected.
▪ Items with a different typical circuit from the selection - Changes the typical circuit
of the selected items to the current typical circuit. Use this option to add a typical circuit
to items with a modified typical circuit definition.
▪ Items with the same typical circuit as the selection - Updates an existing typical
circuit for the selected items.
11. Click Apply.

▪ If you apply a typical circuit to an item that is already associated with a circuit, the software
adjusts the components of the circuit to match the typical circuit specified by the item.
▪ If you apply a typical circuit that includes associated cables to a circuit, the software creates
cables in the plant and associates their 'To' sides with the circuit.
▪ If you modify the components of a typical circuit that already has a reference from an item,
the software does not update the change in the reference until you next apply a typical
circuit or a profile to the item.
▪ If the item that you are applying the typical circuit to is connected to a feeder circuit, the
system replaces the circuit so that it matches the applied typical circuit as specified in the
profile.
▪ If the item is connected to feeder equipment other than a circuit (such as a variable
frequency drive, a transformer, or a battery bank), the software does not apply the typical
circuit.
▪ If more than one item is connected to the same circuit, the software changes the last applied
typical circuit for all the items.
▪ You can clear the typical circuit of an item that is not connected to any circuit by selecting
Clear the last applied typical circuit.
▪ You can apply a typical circuit on a circuit, provided that no load is connected to the circuit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 214

 Populating Plant Items with Data

Apply a Typical Control Station to an Item

Applying a typical control station to a plant item allows you to create a predefined control station
and associate it with a selected plant item. The software allows you to apply a typical control
station to all loads, all converting equipment items, disconnect equipment, generators, and
battery banks.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by clicking the + icons or by double-
clicking the folders.
2. Navigate to the folder for the required equipment type and do one of the following:
▪ Expand the folder and select an item from the list.
▪ Click the folder, and in the list view pane, hold CTRL while you select more than one
item.
You can also select more than one item by selecting a subset of item tags in the
EDE.
3. Click Tools > Apply Options.
4. On the Apply Options dialog box, click the Control Station tab.
5. Select Enable control station.
6. Click Add.
7. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now to display the available control stations.
8. From the list of control stations, while holding CTRL, highlight each control station that you
want to associate with the item.
9. Click OK.
10. Under Apply to, click All items.
If required, you can click Items with no control station to add control stations only
to items that do not have any existing control stations.
11. Under Action, click Add or Replace to determine how the software deals with control
stations that have the same name as existing control stations. This option applies only if
you click All items.
12. Click Apply.

▪ You can apply a typical control station to a load, converting equipment item, disconnect
electrical equipment item, a generator, and a battery bank.
▪ You can view the control stations associated with an item of electrical equipment by
selecting Common Properties on the shortcut menu for the item, and on the dialog box that
opens, selecting the Controls & Signals tab.
▪ If you select a reference control station that has one or more associated control cables, the
software creates these cables in the control station that you add to the plant item.
▪ If you apply control stations to one or more items that are connected to circuits, the software
associates the control station cables (instrumentation and control) with the circuits
automatically when you select the appropriate Options Manager setting. If you do not use

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 215

 Populating Plant Items with Data

the setting, you need to make the association manually. For details, see Associate Control
Station Cables with Equipment Circuits (see "Associate Cables of Control Stations with
Equipment Circuits" on page 235).
▪ If you modify the components of a reference control station that already has a reference
from an item, the software does not update the change in the reference until you next apply
a profile to the item.

Apply a Typical Schematic to an Item

Applying a typical schematic to a plant electrical item allows you to add a definition of a
schematic to the selected plant item. You can then generate a schematic without the need to
define the schematic drawing properties, such as schematic blocks, templates, and so forth.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Loads by
clicking the + icons or by double-clicking the folders.
2. Select the Motors, Static Electrical Equipment, or Other Electrical Equipment folder and
do one of the following:
▪ Expand the folder and select an item from the list.
▪ Click the folder, and in the list view pane, hold CTRL while you select more than one
item.
3. Click Tools > Apply Options.
4. On the Apply Options dialog box, click the Typical Schematic tab.
5. Select Enable typical schematic.
6. Beside the Typical schematic box, click Find.
7. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now to display the available typical schematics.
8. From the list of typical schematics, highlight the typical schematic that you want to assign to
the item.
9. Click OK.
10. Under Apply to, select one of the following options according to the rule the software uses
to apply the typical schematic:
▪ All items — Applies the typical schematic to all the selected items.
▪ Items with no typical schematic — Applies the typical schematic only to items without
an existing typical schematic. Use this option to add a typical schematic only to new
items among the items that you selected.
▪ Items with a different typical schematic from the selection — Changes the typical
schematic of the selected items to the current typical schematic. Use this option to add
a typical schematic to items with a modified typical schematic definition.
11. Click Apply.

▪ If you modify the components of a typical schematic that already has a reference from an
item, the software does not update the change in the reference until you next apply a typical
schematic or a profile to the item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 216

 Populating Plant Items with Data

▪ You can assign a new typical schematic or change an assigned typical schematic for an
item at any time.

Apply a Profile to a Plant Item

A profile is an assembly of various typical items that you can use as a template for creating plant
items.
You can apply a profile to any item or group of items, and the software creates and associates
all the referenced items in the Electrical Index with the default data. In this way, you can
quickly define common properties for a group of items of the same type, and you can associate
the same type of typical circuit, control stations, cables, and typical schematic with each item in
the group.

▪ When you apply a profile to an item, the software can overwrite existing data. Since this
process is not reversible, you should proceed with great care.
▪ You should exercise even more caution when reapplying a profile to a plant item to which a
profile has already been applied before. Reapplying a profile results in deleting, replacing, or
overwriting of data. Also, if the reapplied profile and the previous profile do not have the
same related items, unnecessary changes in item associations may occur which can lead to
the loss of important correlations that can result in producing of wrong information.

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by clicking the + icons or by
double-clicking the folders.
2. Navigate to the folder for the required equipment type and do one of the following:
▪ Expand the folder and select an item from the list.
▪ Click the folder, and in the list view pane, hold CTRL while you select more than one
item.
You can also select more than one item by selecting a subset of item tags in the
EDE.
3. Click Tools > Apply Options.
4. On the Apply Options dialog box, click the Equipment Profile tab.
5. Select Enable equipment profile.
The default profile appears in the Create item based on profile box. You can
select a different profile by performing the following steps.
6. Beside Create item based on profile, click Find.
7. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now to display the available profiles.
8. From the list of profiles, highlight the profile that you want to apply.
9. Click OK.
10. Under Apply to, select one of the following options according to the rule the software uses
to apply the profile:
▪ All items — Applies the profile to all the selected items.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 217

 Populating Plant Items with Data

▪ Items with no profile — Applies the profile only to items without an existing
profile. Use this option to add a profile only to new items among the items that you
selected.
▪ Items with a different profile from the selection — Changes the profile of the
selected items to the current profile. Use this option to add a profile to items with a
modified profile definition.
▪ Items with the same profile as the selection — Updates an existing profile for the
selected items.
11. Select the Populate empty item properties check box to update only those item properties
that contain null data. When you select this option, the software does not overwrite the data
that is not null.
Clear the check box to leave existing values of the item properties as they are, regardless of
whether they contain null or not null values.
12. Click Apply.

▪ Applying a profile is a useful way of creating new items and populating large amounts of
data in your plant. When you apply the profile, the software automatically applies any
definitions for typical circuits, control stations, typical I/O sets, and lookup tables that you
define on the other tabs of the Apply Options dialog box.
▪ After you apply a profile for which the software creates new items and relations successfully,
the operation may still partially fail, for example if certain values of updated data conflict with
a rule. In such cases, the software displays an error message and records the problem in
the log file.
▪ When you apply a profile, the software replaces all formerly associated items with the items
specified in the current profile including any values that you have modified. The software
assigns new item tags according to the naming convention.
▪ If you apply a profile that contains a reference item to one or more plant items, the software
populates the properties of those plant items with values copied from the reference item.
▪ If you modify the components of a typical circuit that already has a reference from an item,
the software does not update the change in the reference until you next apply a typical
circuit or a profile to the item.
▪ When an item has associated cables, and you connect the item to a circuit by applying a
profile with a typical circuit, if there is more than one cable, the software associates the free
ends of all the cables to the circuit.
▪ If you apply a profile for a reference motor with a heater to a plant motor without a heater,
the software adds a heater to the plant motor.
▪ If you apply a profile for a transformer, the software applies the profile only if the reference
and plant transformers have the same number of windings and where the Number of
Secondaries property for the plant transformer has a value of 1 or 2. If no value appears
for this property, you must type one manually in accordance with the number of secondary
windings in the transformer.
▪ If the item that you are applying a profile to is connected to a feeder circuit, the system
replaces the circuit so that it matches the applied typical circuit as specified in the profile.
▪ If the item is connected to feeder equipment other than a circuit (such as a variable
frequency drive, a transformer, or a battery bank), the software does not apply the profile.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 218

 Populating Plant Items with Data

Now you can do one of the following:

▪ To continue with the next step in the recommended workflow for generating a schematic
drawing, see Generate a Schematic (on page 477) or Generate a Multi-Item Schematic (on
page 479).
▪ Return to the Recommended Workflow for Generating Schematic Drawings (on page 465).

Apply a Set of Signals to an Item

Applying a typical I/O set to a plant control station or a circuit creates predefined I/O signals and
associates them with a selected item. You can then publish the signal data to Smart
Instrumentation.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by clicking the + icons or by double-
clicking the folders.
2. Navigate to the folder for the required equipment type and do one of the following:
▪ Expand the folder and select an item from the list.
▪ Click the folder, and in the list view pane, hold CTRL while you select more than one
item.
You can also select more than one item by selecting a subset of item tags in the
EDE.
3. Click Tools > Apply Options.
4. On the Apply Options dialog box, click the Typical I/O Sets tab.
5. Select Enable typical I/O sets.
6. Beside the Typical I/O sets box, click Find.
7. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now to display the available set of signals.
8. From the list of signal sets, highlight the set of signals that you want to assign to the item.
9. Click OK.
10. Under Apply to, select one of the following options according to the rule the software uses
to apply the set of signals:
▪ All items - Applies the set of signals to all the selected items.
▪ Items with no typical I/O sets - Applies the set of signals only to items without an
existing set of signals. Use this option to add a set of signals only to new items among
the items that you selected.
▪ Items with a different typical I/O set from the selection - Changes the set of signals
of the selected items to the current set of signals. Use this option to add a set of
signals to items with a modified typical I/O set definition.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 219

 Populating Plant Items with Data

11. Click Apply.

▪ If you modify the components of a set of signals that already has a reference from an item,
the software does not update the change in the reference until you next apply a set of
signals or a profile to the item.
▪ You can assign a new set of signals or change an assigned set of signals for an item at any
time.

Apply a Typical Cable Block Diagram to an Electrical

Item
This feature allows you to apply a typical cable block diagram to plant loads. You can apply a
selected typical CBD to a single load or to several loads that you select in the Electrical Index.
As a result of this operation, the software will do the following for each plant load based on the
reference items that are contained in the selected typical CBD:
▪ Create all the plant equipment based on the reference items contained in the typical CBD.
▪ Make all the associations among the new plant equipment as defined in the typical CBD.
▪ Create a plant cable block diagram in which the selected plant load serves as a focal item.
The name of the new CBD will be the same as the name of the plant load to which you
apply the selected typical CBD.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Loads by
clicking the + icons or by double-clicking the folders.
2. Expand the Motors, Static Electrical Equipment, or Other Electrical Equipment folder.
3. Select one or more loads.
To select several loads, click the folder, and then in the list view pane, hold CTRL
while you select more than one item.
4. Click Tools > Apply Options.
5. On the Apply Options dialog box, click the Typical CBD tab.
6. Select Enable typical CBD.
7. Beside the Typical cable block diagram box, click Find.
8. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now to display the available typical cable block
diagrams.
9. From the list of the available typical cable block diagrams, select an appropriate typical
cable block diagram that you want to apply to the electrical loads that you selected in the
Electrical Index.
10. Click OK to return to the Typical CBD tab of the Apply Options dialog box.
11. Select the Populate empty item properties check box to update only those item properties
that contain null data. When you select this option, the software does not overwrite the data
that is not null.
Clear the check box to leave existing values of the item properties as they are, regardless of
whether they contain null or not null values.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 220

 Populating Plant Items with Data

12. Click OK.

The software does not apply a typical CBD to plant loads in the following
cases and logs the rejection reason in the Apply Typical CBD log file:
▪ If the typical CBD does not contain any typical item that belongs to the same item type as
the electrical item to which you are applying the typical CBD.
▪ If the typical CBD contains more than one typical item that belongs to the same item type as
the electrical item to which you are applying the typical CBD.
▪ If the electrical item is not associated with a bus but the selected typical CBD contains a
reference bus circuit.
▪ If the selected electrical item is already associated with other plant items.
When applying a typical CBD to motors with space heaters:
▪ The software deletes the space heater from the plant and applies the typical CBD to the
motor.
▪ If the typical CBD contains a reference motor with a space heater, the software creates a
new plant space heater under the plant motor after applying the typical CBD.
▪ If the plant space heater is associated with other items (for example, cables, control
stations, signals, terminal strips, and so on), the software does not apply the selected typical
CBD to the motor of the space heater and logs the rejection reason in the Apply Typical
CBD log file.
When applying a typical CBD to loads that are associated with buses:
▪ After applying a typical CBD, the software validates that the association has been retained.
▪ If the association has been broken, the software searches for the root item in the electrical
branch where the load is connected. If the root item is not a circuit, the software attempts to
associate the root item with the bus in that electrical branch.
▪ If the association of the root item with a bus is not possible, the software does not stop or
cancel the process of applying the selected typical CBD.

Apply a Typical Schematic to an Instrument

Applying a typical schematic to an instrument allows you to add a definition of a schematic to the
selected instrument. You can then generate a schematic without the need to define the
schematic drawing properties, such as schematic blocks, templates, and so forth.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Instruments
by clicking the + icons or by double-clicking the folders.
2. Select the instruments that you require.
3. Click Tools > Apply Options.
4. On the Apply Options dialog box, click the Typical Schematic tab.
5. Select Enable typical schematic.
6. Beside the Typical schematic box, click Find.
7. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now to display the available typical schematics.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 221

 Populating Plant Items with Data

8. From the list of typical schematics, highlight the typical schematic that you want to apply to
the selected instruments.
9. Click OK.
10. Under Apply to, select one of the following options according to the rule the software uses
to apply the typical schematic:
▪ All items - Applies the typical schematic to all the selected items.
▪ Items with no typical schematic - Applies the typical schematic only to items without
an existing typical schematic. Use this option to add a typical schematic only to new
items among the items that you selected.
▪ Items with a different typical schematic from the selection - Changes the typical
schematic of the selected items to the current typical schematic. Use this option to add
a typical schematic to items with a modified typical schematic definition.
11. Click Apply.

▪ If you modify the components of a typical schematic that already has a reference from an
item, the software does not update the change in the reference until you next apply a typical
schematic or a profile to the item.
▪ You can assign a new typical schematic or change an assigned typical schematic for an
item at any time.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 222

SECTION 10

Making Electrical Associations

This section deals with the association of electrical equipment. There are several ways that you
can make electrical associations. The particular method that you choose depends on your
workflow and specific requirements.

Create an Electrical Association

You can make an electrical association by doing one of the following:
▪ Drag an item from the Electrical Index to an appropriate place in the electrical tree of the
Electrical Engineer.
▪ In a cable block diagram, connect two items using a cable or a connector. For details, see
Working with Smart Data and Auxiliary Graphics in a CBD (on page 529).
Note that electrical associations are governed by a strict set of rules. For details, see Rules for
Associating Electrical Equipment (on page 224).
The following procedure explains how to make electrical associations among equipment by
dragging items from the Electrical Index to the Electrical Engineer.
The software does not allow you to make parallel connections or change
existing parallel connections of cables in the Electrical Engineer. Parallel cable connections or
changes of parallel associations can be carried out only in cable block diagrams.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy by clicking the + icon or by double-
clicking the parent folder.
2. Highlight the item that you want to associate.
3. In the Electrical Engineer, expand the item hierarchy where you want to make the new
association. Click the + icon or click the relevant item.
4. Drag the highlighted item from Electrical Index to the Electrical Engineer and drop it onto
the required target item.

▪ There are specific rules that govern electrical associations. These rules determine electrical
associations of items in the Electrical Engineer. For more information, see Rules for
Associating Electrical Equipment (on page 224).
▪ You also can make electrical associations in a cable block diagram. For details, see Place
and Connect Items in a Cable Block Diagram (on page 534).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 223

 Making Electrical Associations

Rules for Associating Electrical Equipment

You can make an electrical association by doing one of the following:
▪ Drag an item from the Electrical Index to an appropriate place in the electrical tree of the
Electrical Engineer.
▪ In a cable block diagram, connect two items using a cable or a connector. For details, see
Working with Smart Data and Auxiliary Graphics in a CBD (on page 529).
Note that electrical associations are governed by a strict set of rules. You can associate
electrical items according to the rules that are specified in the following table:

Source Item in Target Item in Result Preconditions

Electrical Index Electrical Engineer

Cables Generators The source item The source item has no

becomes the child item parent item in the
of the target generator in Electrical Engineer.
the Electrical Engineer.

Cables Battery banks The source item The source item becomes
becomes the child item the child item of the target
of the target battery battery bank in the
bank in the Electrical Electrical Engineer.
Engineer.

Cables UPSs The source item The source item has no

becomes the child item parent item in the
of the target UPS in the Electrical Engineer.
Electrical Engineer.

Cables Capacitors The source item The source item has no

becomes the child item parent item in the
of the target capacitor in Electrical Engineer.
the Electrical Engineer.

Cables Secondary The source item The source item has no

transformer becomes the child item parent item in the
windings of the target secondary Electrical Engineer.
transformer winding in
the Electrical
Engineer. The dragged
item inherits all the
target transformer
relations.

Cables Battery chargers The source item The source item has no
becomes the child item parent item in the
of the target battery Electrical Engineer.
charger in the Electrical
Engineer.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 224

 Making Electrical Associations

Source Item in Target Item in Result Preconditions

Electrical Index Electrical Engineer

Cables Variable frequency The source item The source item does not
drives (VFDs) becomes the child item have a parent cable in the
of the target VFD in the Electrical Engineer.
Electrical
Engineer. The dragged
item inherits all the
target VFD relations.

Cables Panel-circuits The source item The source cable has no

becomes the child item parent items.
of the target panel-circuit
in the Electrical
Engineer. The dragged
item inherits all the
target panel-circuit
relations.

Cables Junction boxes, The source cable The source item has no
local panels becomes the child item parent items. The target
of the target item in the item has no child items in
Electrical the Electrical Engineer.
Engineer. The dragged
cable inherits all the
target junction box or
local panel relations.

Cables (non- parallel Miscellaneous The source cable

power cables) electrical equipment becomes the child item
of the target
miscellaneous electrical
equipment item in the
Electrical
Engineer. The dragged
cable inherits all the
target miscellaneous
electrical equipment item
relations.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 225

 Making Electrical Associations

Source Item in Target Item in Result Preconditions

Electrical Index Electrical Engineer

Motors, heaters, Generators The source item The source item has a
resistors, capacitors, becomes the child item parent cable in the
harmonic filters, of the target generator in Electrical Engineer and
battery banks, heat the Electrical Engineer. that cable has no
traces, UPSs, primary electrical parent item.
transformer windings,
battery chargers,
miscellaneous
electrical equipment,
other converting
equipment, disconnect
electrical equipment,
auxiliary contacts

Motors, heaters, Battery banks The source parent cable The source item has a
resistors, harmonic becomes the child item parent cable in the
filters, heat trace, of the target battery Electrical Engineer and
UPSs, miscellaneous bank in the Electrical that cable has no
electrical equipment, Engineer. electrical parent item.
disconnect electrical
equipment, auxiliary
contacts

Motors, heaters, UPSs The source parent cable The source item has a
resistors, harmonic becomes the child item parent cable in the
filters, battery banks, of the target UPS in the Electrical Engineer and
heat traces, variable Electrical Engineer. that cable has no
frequency drives electrical parent item.
(VFDs), miscellaneous
electrical equipment,
disconnect electrical
equipment, auxiliary
contacts

Resistors, capacitors, Secondary The source item The source item has a
harmonic filters, heat transformer becomes the child item parent cable in the
traces, UPSs, battery windings of the target secondary Electrical Engineer and
charger, VFDs, transformer winding in the target transformer is
miscellaneous the Electrical associated with a circuit.
electrical equipment, Engineer. The dragged
disconnect electrical item inherits all the
equipment, auxiliary target transformer
contacts relations.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 226

 Making Electrical Associations

Source Item in Target Item in Result Preconditions

Electrical Index Electrical Engineer

Capacitors, harmonic Battery chargers The source parent cable The source item has a
filters, battery banks, becomes the child item parent cable and the
disconnect electrical of the target battery parent cable has no
equipment charger in the Electrical parent item in the
Engineer. Electrical Engineer.

Motors, heaters, VFDs The source parent cable The source item has a
capacitors, harmonic becomes the child item parent cable and the
filters, transformer of the target VFD in the parent cable has no
windings, Electrical parent item in the
miscellaneous Engineer. The dragged Electrical Engineer.
electrical equipment, item inherits all the
other converting target VFD relations.
equipment, disconnect
electrical equipment,
auxiliary contacts

Motors, heaters, Circuits The source item The source item is not
resistors, capacitors, becomes the child item associated with the target
harmonic filters, of the target circuit in the circuit. The circuit must
battery banks, heat Electrical be a feeder.
traces, UPS, primary Engineer. The software
transformer windings, assigns the dragged
battery chargers, item to the parent item of
VFDs, cables, other the target circuit: bus,
converting equipment, cell, or PDB.
disconnect electrical
equipment, auxiliary
contacts

Motors, heaters, Cables The source item The source item has no
resistors, capacitors, becomes the child item parent item and the target
harmonic filters, of the target cable in the cable has no child items
battery banks, battery Electrical in the Electrical
chargers, heat traces, Engineer. The dragged Engineer.
UPSs, primary item inherits all the
transformer windings, target cable relations.
VFDs, cables,
miscellaneous
electrical equipment,
other converting
equipment, disconnect
electrical equipment,
auxiliary contacts

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 227

 Making Electrical Associations

Source Item in Target Item in Result Preconditions

Electrical Index Electrical Engineer

Panel-circuits Cables The source item The source panel circuit

becomes the child item has no parent item. The
of the target cable in the target cable has no child
Electrical items.
Engineer. The dragged
item inherits all the
target cable relations.

Junction boxes, local Cables The source item The source item has no
panels becomes the child item child items and the target
of the target cable in the cable has no child items
Electrical in the Electrical
Engineer. The dragged Engineer.
item inherits all the
target cable relations.

Special Conditions
The software creates the following electrical items automatically in the Electrical Engineer
when you create them in the Electrical Index. These items appear at the root of the Electrical
Engineer tree view after you create them in the Electrical Index even if they do not have an
existing electrical relation.
▪ Buses
▪ Generators
▪ Battery banks
▪ UPSs
▪ Battery chargers
▪ Transformers
You can connect electrical items in a daisy-chain pattern. For more information, see Create a
Daisy-Chain Connection Pattern (on page 241).
▪ You cannot dissociate the following items, that is, you cannot drag them to the root of the
Electrical Engineer:
▪ Buses
▪ Feeder circuits
▪ Coupler circuits
▪ Transformer secondary winding

Change an Existing Electrical Association

You can change an existing electrical association by doing one of the following:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 228

 Making Electrical Associations

▪ Drag an item in the Electrical Engineer to another item in the electrical tree of the
Electrical Engineer.
▪ In a cable block diagram, connect two items using a cable or a connector. For details, see
Working with Smart Data and Auxiliary Graphics in a CBD (on page 529).
Note that such changes are governed by a strict set of rules. For more details, see Rules for
Changing Electrical Associations (on page 229).
The software does not allow you to make parallel connections or change
existing parallel connections of cables in the Electrical Engineer. Parallel cable connections or
changes of parallel associations can be carried out only in cable block diagrams.
To change an electrical association in the Electrical Engineer, do the following:
1. In the Electrical Engineer, navigate to the item whose association you want to change.
2. Expand the item hierarchy to the location of the new association. Click the + icon or click
the items.
To facilitate the drag-and- drop operation and to eliminate the need to scroll up or
down in the Electrical Engineer, open another Electrical Engineer window and navigate to
the required location in the tree view before you start dragging an item.
3. Drag the required item to the new location in the Electrical Engineer and drop it on the item
with which you want to associate it.
The following notes apply to making electrical associations either in the Electrical
Engineer or cable block diagram.
▪ Whenever you drag a load or any equipment item from one bus to another, the software
automatically creates a new feeder circuit. The old feeder circuit from which you
dissociated the dragged item remains in its original place. For more information, see
Automatic Creation of Feeder Circuits (on page 233).
▪ If you choose to automatically create a feeder circuit with a cell, make sure that in the
Properties window for the new cell, you select the In Use setting for the Cell Usage
property.
▪ If you want to dissociate a load from a circuit and this is the last associated load, make sure
that in the Properties window for the appropriate cell, you select the Installed Spare setting
for the Cell Usage property.
▪ For details on how to create a new electrical association, see Create an Electrical
Association (on page 223).

Rules for Changing Electrical Associations

You can change an existing electrical association by doing one of the following:
▪ Drag an item in the Electrical Engineer to another item in the electrical tree of the
Electrical Engineer.
▪ In a cable block diagram, connect two items using a cable or a connector. For details, see
Working with Smart Data and Auxiliary Graphics in a CBD (on page 529).
Note that such changes are governed by a strict set of rules.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 229

 Making Electrical Associations

There are specific rules that govern the change of electrical associations. Note that the
software allows you to connect electrical items even if there is no interconnecting power cable
between these items. In a way, this is similar to the way loads are assigned to circuits.
The software does not allow you to make parallel connections or change
existing parallel connections of cables in the Electrical Engineer. Parallel cable connections or
changes of parallel associations can be carried out only in cable block diagrams.
The following rules apply when dragging an item within the Electrical Engineer:

Source Item Target Item Result

Loads, converting electrical Feeder circuits, cables The source item becomes the
equipment, primary transformer child of the target item in the
windings, cables, incomer circuits, Electrical Engineer.
junction boxes, local panels,
miscellaneous electrical
equipment

Bus riser circuits Coupler circuits The source item becomes the
child of the target item in the
Electrical Engineer.

Panel - Circuits Cables The source item becomes the

child of the target item in the
Electrical Engineer.

Cables Panel - Circuits The source item becomes the

child of the target item in the
Electrical Engineer.

Cables, incomer circuits Generators, battery banks, The source item becomes the
UPSs, battery chargers, child of the target item in the
converting electrical Electrical Engineer.
equipment, secondary
transformer windings

Cables associated with loads Loads The software creates a daisy-

chain connection pattern
between the loads.

Any item that has an electrical The root of the Electrical The software dissociates the
parent item (except for buses) Engineer tree view source item from its parent
item.

Special Conditions
Changing the association of a terminated power cable by dragging it to another equipment item
in the Electrical Engineer, disconnects this cable from the terminal strip of that
equipment. The software disconnects the cable without displaying a warning message.
If the dragged item has no hierarchical parent item:
The system creates a new relation with the parent item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 230

 Making Electrical Associations

▪ The system copies all the existing associations from the target item to the dragged
item. The copied associations include the highest item in the hierarchy, such as a load or
an incomer circuit.
If the dragged item has a hierarchical parent item:
▪ Dragging it to another item that is not its parent item dissociates the dragged item from its
current parent item.
▪ The dragged item acquires a new electrical relation with the item to which it is
dragged. The copied associations include the highest item in the hierarchy, such as a load
or an incomer circuit.
▪ The system copies all the existing associations from the target item to the dragged
item. The copied associations include the highest item in the hierarchy, such as a load or
an incomer circuit.
▪ You can connect electrical items in a daisy-chain pattern. For more information, see Create
a Daisy-Chain Connection Pattern (on page 241).

Associate Electrical Equipment with Feeders

This procedure shows how to associate an electrical item with a feeder using the Electrical
Motor Common Properties, Static Load Common Properties, or Converting Equipment
Common Properties, dialog box. On the appropriate dialog box, the Feeder Data tab options
allow you to associate the selected electrical item with a power distribution board, bus, cell, and
circuit as required.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Loads >
Motors or Static Electrical Equipment or Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment and
select an electrical equipment item.

▪ You can only associate equipment that is not already assigned to an existing circuit. To
verify whether an association exists, right- click the item and click Find in Electrical
Engineer.
▪ You can also associate a load with a feeder by dragging the load to the appropriate
feeder circuit in the Electrical Engineer. For details of this procedure, see .Create an
Electrical Association (on page 223).
2. Right-click the selected electrical item and click Common Properties to open the
appropriate dialog box.
3. Click the Feeder Data tab.
4. In the Location group box, under Power distribution board, select a power distribution
board.
If you select a PDB without specifying a bus, on clicking Apply or OK, the software
creates the new electrical item without a circuit.
5. Under Bus, select a bus with which you want to associate the current electrical item.
If required, you can select a cell in the Cell list to filter the circuits located in that cell.
6. Do one of the following to associate the new item with a feeder circuit:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 231

 Making Electrical Associations

▪ Under Circuit, select an existing circuit with which you want to associate the current
electrical item.
▪ Select the Create circuit check box to automatically create a new feeder circuit based
on the last applied typical circuit. The software creates an empty circuit without any
circuit components if the current electrical item is not associated with a typical circuit. If
you do not select this check box, the software only associates the selected bus with the
loads without creating any circuits. Where a last applied typical circuit is indicated, the
software creates the new circuit based on the typical circuit. Also, you can select the
Create cell check box to automatically create a cell when the software creates the new
feeder circuit.
If you select a cell without selecting an existing circuit, the software automatically
creates a new circuit when you click Apply or OK.
7. Continue defining the feeder data as required and click OK when done.

▪ If you choose to automatically create a feeder circuit with a cell, make sure that in the
Properties window for the new cell, you select the In Use setting for the Cell Usage
property.
▪ After specifying a circuit, applying the change, and exiting the dialog box, you can no longer
change the feeder data values from the dialog box.
▪ A circuit can feed more than one electrical item.
▪ It is possible to connect a number of heat tracers and Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment
items in a daisy-chain pattern.

Dissociate an Item from Its Feeding Item

This procedure shows you how to dissociate an item from its feeding item in the Electrical
Engineer.
1. In the Electrical Engineer, navigate to the item that you want to dissociate.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Right-click an item, and on the shortcut menu, click Dissociate.
▪ Select the item you want to dissociate and drag it to the root of the tree view of the
Electrical Engineer.
3. At the prompt, click Yes to confirm the dissociation.

▪ The dissociated item moves to the root of the tree view of the Electrical Engineer provided
that it is associated with at least one other electrical item. If the dissociated item has no
other electrical associations, it disappears from the Electrical Engineer. Note that the
software also dissociates from the feeding item all the items that are associated with the
dissociated item.
▪ When dissociating the last load from a circuit, select the Installed Spare setting for the Cell
Usage property.
▪ The software can create unrequired and unpredictable associations when you try to
dissociate a load that is connected to its feeder through more than one branch (for example,

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 232

 Making Electrical Associations

a cable or junction box), or when you move one of the feeding branches to another electrical
item. To avoid unwanted associations, you must first dissociate the load. Only then can
you dissociate the remaining items in the multiple branches. If you do not dissociate the
load first, the software may leave unrequired associations in the Electrical Engineer.

Automatic Creation of Feeder Circuits

The software automatically creates a feeder circuit when you associate a load or any equipment
item with a bus. This automatic creation of feeder circuits occurs when you do one of the
following:
▪ Drag a load or an equipment item from the Electrical Index to the Electrical Engineer.
▪ Drag a load or an equipment item from one bus to another in the Electrical Engineer.
▪ Select the Create circuits option on the Batch Load Association dialog box.
▪ Select the Create circuit option on the Feeder Data tab of the Common Properties dialog
box for any motor, static load, converting equipment, and other equipment.
▪ Select a PDB, bus, and cell without selecting an existing circuit on the Feeder Data tab of
the Common Properties dialog box for any motor, static load, converting equipment, and
other equipment.
Whenever you associate a load or an equipment item with a bus for the first time by dragging an
item from the Electrical Index to the Electrical Engineer, the software automatically creates a
feeder circuit for the dragged item. Also, whenever you change an existing association in the
Electrical Engineer, the software automatically creates a new feeder circuit and circuit
components on the bus to which you dragged the load or equipment item. In this case, the old
feeder circuit that belonged to the dissociated item remains in its original place. You can delete
it if you want to or leave it as a spare feeder circuit to associate with another equipment item.
Regardless of whether you drag a load to a bus from the Electrical Index to the Electrical
Engineer or within the Electrical Engineer, the software also creates circuit components for the
new feeder. In this case, you must ensure that you define the cell properties correctly. In the
Properties window for a cell, select the In Use setting for the Cell Usage property. When
dissociating the last load from a circuit, select the Installed Spare setting for the Cell Usage
property.
Note the following:
▪ If the load that you drag is associated with a typical circuit, the software creates the
necessary circuit components as they are defined in the typical circuit.
▪ If the item that you drag is not associated with a typical circuit, the software creates a feeder
circuit without any circuit components.
▪ If the item that you drag is not a load, the software creates a feeder circuit without any circuit
components.
Also, you can instruct the software to automatically create a feeder circuit and a cell when you
set the Feeder options on the Common Properties dialog box of any load or equipment item.
You also can do this when associating loads with buses in batch mode. For more information
about batch load association, see Associate Loads with a PDB in Batch Mode.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 233

 Making Electrical Associations

Associate Bus Riser Circuits with Coupler Circuits

This procedure shows how to associate bus riser circuits with coupler circuits to create a bus tie.
1. In the Electrical Engineer, find the bus riser and coupler circuits that you want to associate.
2. Select the bus riser circuit and drag it to the coupler circuit.

▪ Also, you can use a cable to connect a bus riser with a coupler. To do this, in the Electrical
Engineer, drag the required cable to a coupler. Then, drag a sectionizer to that
cable. Note that you can use only a single cable and not a series of cables for this purpose.
▪ To facilitate the drag-and- drop operation and to eliminate the need to scroll up or down in
the Electrical Engineer, open another Electrical Engineer window and navigate to the
required location in the tree view before you drag an item.

Associate a Control Station with an Electrical Item

This procedure shows how to associate a control station with an electrical item. Note that this
association does not appear in the Electrical Engineer. For instructions on how to associate a
control station with cables, see Associate a Control Station with Cables (on page 235).
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Panels > Control
Stations.
2. Right-click a control station and click Common Properties to open the Control Station
Common Properties dialog box.
3. Beside Associated load, click Find to open the Find dialog box.
4. From the Equipment type list, select the required equipment type.
5. Click Find Now.
6. From the data window, highlight an item tag.
7. Click OK to associate the item tag with the current control station.

▪ You can also associate a control station with an electrical item using the Apply Options
feature for the electrical item with which you want to associate a control station. If you apply
a control station to an item that is connected to a circuit, the software associates the control
station cables (instrumentation and control) with the circuit automatically when you select
the appropriate Options Manager setting. If you do not use this setting, you need to make
the association manually. For details, see Associate Control Station Cables with Equipment
Circuits (see "Associate Cables of Control Stations with Equipment Circuits" on page 235).
▪ You can associate only one control station with an electrical item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 234

 Making Electrical Associations

Associate a Control Station with Cables

This procedure explains how to associate a control station with cables.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Panels > Control
Stations.
2. Right-click a control station and click Common Properties to open the Control Station
Common Properties dialog box.
3. Click Add.
4. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now to display the available cables.
5. Select a cable to associate with the current control station and click Apply.
6. Repeat the previous step for each additional cable that you want to associate with the
control station.

▪ The Find dialog box displays only control and grounding cables that have at least one
unassociated side.
▪ You can associate one control station with more than one cable.
▪ You cannot associate a control station with a power cable.

Associate Cables of Control Stations with Equipment

Circuits
This procedure explains how to manually associate instrumentation or control cables (belonging
to control stations) with the circuit belonging to the equipment that the control station operates or
monitors. You can also specify automatic association of control station cables with equipment
circuits from the Options Manager.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Panels > Control
Stations.
2. In the lower pane, select one or more control stations.
3. Click Actions > Cables > Associate Cables with Equipment Circuits.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 235

 Making Electrical Associations

Associate Cables of Instruments with Equipment

Circuits
This procedure explains how to manually associate instrumentation or control cables (belonging
to instruments) with the circuit belonging to the equipment that the instrument operates or
monitors. You can also specify automatic association of instrument cables with equipment
circuits from the Options Manager.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Electrical Equipment > Instruments.
2. In the lower pane, select one or more control stations.
3. Click Actions > Cables > Associate Cables with Equipment Circuits.

Associate a Power Cable with Electrical Equipment

This procedure explains how to associate a power cable with an electrical item by making the
association in the Electrical Engineer.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cables.
2. Under the folder Power Cables, select the required cable and drag it under a feeder circuit
in the Electrical Engineer.
3. In the Electrical Engineer, right- click the cable, and on the shortcut menu, click Common
Properties.
4. Click the Design Data tab and note that the circuit path appears under From, in the Tag
box.
5. Close the dialog box, and in the Electrical Index, select the item of electrical equipment
with which you want to associate the cable.
You can select any load that does not already have an association in the Electrical
Engineer. For the rules that govern the conditions under which you can drag items onto
other items, see .Rules for Associating Electrical Equipment (on page 224).
6. Drag the item under the cable in the Electrical Engineer.
7. Open the dialog box for the cable again and on the Design Data tab, note that the item tag
for the equipment appears under To, in the Tag box.

▪ If an item already appears in the Electrical Engineer, you can drag a cable onto the item
where this is allowed.
▪ You can associate a power cable with a motor by defining a motor profile with that cable and
then applying the profile to the required motor.
▪ Changing the association of a terminated cable by dragging it to another equipment item in
the Electrical Engineer, disconnects this cable from the terminal strip of that
equipment. The software disconnects the cable without displaying a warning message.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 236

 Making Electrical Associations

Associate Additional Power Cables with Electrical

Equipment
This procedure explains how to add a power cable to an electrical item in parallel to an existing
power cable in the Electrical Engineer.
1. In the Electrical Engineer, expand the hierarchy to the load to which you want to add one
or more cables.
2. Right-click the cable associated with the load, and on the shortcut menu, click Add Cable.
3. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now to display the available power cables.
4. From the list of power cables, while holding CTRL, highlight each cable that you want to
add.
5. Click OK.
6. In the Electrical Engineer, right- click a cable that you added.
7. On the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
8. Click the Design Data tab and note that the associated load and feeder path appear in the
From and To sections, in the Tag boxes.

▪ Cables that you associate in this way do not appear in the parallel cable list in the Cable
Common Properties dialog box of other cables connected to the same load.
▪ If you dissociate a cable from the feeder, the software automatically dissociates that cable
from the load and dissociates all the other parallel cables from the feeder; however, those
cables remain associated with the load.
▪ Changing the association of a terminated cable by dragging it to another equipment item in
the Electrical Engineer, disconnects this cable from the terminal strip of that
equipment. The software disconnects the cable without displaying a warning message.
▪ When defining naming conventions for parallel cables, you can determine where in the cable
tag name you want to include the parallel cable suffix. In Options Manager, on the Define
Naming Conventions dialog box (Options > Naming Conventions > Define), define the
parallel cable suffix in the Segment definitions section. You can move the parallel cable
suffix property up or down the list to set the position of this property in the segment
definition. If you do not select this check box, the suffix for the parallel cables will appear at
the end of the cable tag name.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 237

 Making Electrical Associations

Associate a Non-Power Cable with Electrical

Equipment
This procedure explains how to associate a control, grounding, or instrumentation cable with an
electrical item using the Cable Common Properties dialog box.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Wiring Equipment > Cables.
2. Expand one of the folders Control Cables, Grounding Cables, or Instrumentation Cables
and select a cable.
3. Do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Common Properties.
▪ Right-click the cable and on the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
▪ Press CTRL + F2.
4. On the Cable Common Properties dialog box, click the Design Data tab.

5. Click the ellipsis button beside the From property to define one side of the cable.
6. On the Find dialog box, from the Equipment type list, select the required equipment type,
and click Find Now.
7. From the data window, highlight an item to select it, and click OK.

8. Click the ellipsis button beside the To property to define the other side of the cable.
Changing the association of a terminated cable with another equipment item on the
Cable Common Properties dialog box, disconnects this cable from the terminal strip of that
equipment. The software disconnects the cable without displaying a warning message.

Define Parallel Equipment

This option allows you to define a parallel relationship between equipment items.

▪ The definition of a parallel relationship between items is subject to certain rules. For details,
see Rules Governing Parallel Relations (on page 239).
▪ The software does not allow you to make parallel connections or change existing parallel
connections of cables on the Cable Common Properties dialog box. Parallel cable
connections or changes of parallel associations can be carried out only in cable block
diagrams.
1. Do one of the following:
▪ Click Actions > Manage Parallel Equipment.

▪ On the Actions toolbar, click .

2. On the Parallel Equipment Assistant dialog box, under Show parallel equipment data,
select one of the following filtering options to determine what data you want to see in the
Parallel equipment definition grid:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 238

 Making Electrical Associations

▪ Show all existing parallel pairs — shows all the existing parallel equipment items that
have been defined as pairs in the current plant.
▪ Parallel pairs placed on the current cable block diagram only — shows only those
paired equipment items that have been placed on the current cable block diagram.
▪ Parallel pairs not placed on any cable block diagram — shows only those paired
equipment items that have not been placed on any cable block diagram.
3. In the Parallel equipment definition grid, click Add to append a new empty row.

4. Select the new row and then click under Item 1 and Item 2 to find appropriate
equipment items.
5. Under Input/Output, click the list arrow and select In or Out to set the parallel connection
on the inlet or outlet side of the equipment.

▪ The list arrow and appear only after selecting a row.

▪ To cancel a parallel definition, select a row and click Remove.
6. Do one of the following:
▪ Click Apply if you want to define or change another pair of items.
▪ Click OK to accept all your definitions and close the Parallel Equipment Assistant.

▪ After completing the definition of the parallel pairs and opening a cable block diagram, all
the parallel pairs become available in the Parallel pairs list on the Modify Connector
ribbon. This ribbon becomes available after clicking a cable that has been placed on a cable
block diagram. For details, see Connect Equipment Items in Parallel (on page 241).
▪ In the Electrical Index and Electrical Engineer, a special indicator appears next to the
equipment items that are connected in parallel.
For example .

Rules Governing Parallel Relations

This topic provides detailed information about what electrical equipment items can exist in a
parallel relation with other equipment items.

Item Type Can Be Connected With Direction Example

Loads Any item belonging to the Only the IN side A motor can be connected to
Loads electrical a heater.
equipment subclass

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 239

 Making Electrical Associations

Item Type Can Be Connected With Direction Example

Converting equipment The items that belong to Transformers A transformer primary can
the same electrical only the IN side. be connected only to
equipment subclass only another transformer primary.
All other
converting A transformer cannot be
equipment types connected to a VFD.
can be
connected on
both sides.

Transformer Another transformer Only the OUT A transformer tertiary can be

components component only. side connected with another
transformer tertiary.

Offsite power supplies Offsite power supplies Only the OUT

only side

Generators Generators only Only the OUT

side

Incomer circuits Incomer circuits only Only the IN side

Junction boxes Junction boxes only Both sides: IN to

IN and OUT to
OUT

Local panel Local panels only Both sides: IN to

IN and OUT to
OUT

Panel circuits Panel circuits only Only the IN side

Standalone disconnect The items that belong to Both sides: IN to A starter can be connected
equipment the same electrical IN and OUT to to another starter. A starter
equipment subclass only OUT cannot be connected to a
fuse.

Instruments Another instrument Only the IN side

You can use the following items between equipment items connected in parallel:
▪ Cables.
▪ Standalone disconnect electrical equipment.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 240

 Making Electrical Associations

Connect Equipment Items in Parallel

This procedure explains how to make parallel connections of equipment items in a cable block
diagram. Before you can make any parallel connections in a cable block diagram, you must first
define parallel pairs of equipment items. For details, see Define Parallel Equipment (on page
238).
1. Open a cable block diagram and place the equipment items and cables that you require.
2. Select a cable that you want to use.

▪ For parallel connection, you can only select a cable that is not connected on either end.
▪ Once you click a cable or a connector, the software opens the Modify Connector
ribbon. For details on the various commands that are available on this ribbon, see
Modify Connector Ribbon (on page 1209).
3. On the Modify Connector ribbon, from the Parallel Pairs list, select the pair of items that
you want to connect in parallel. The software displays the connection points on all the
symbols of the pertinent equipment items.

▪ The Parallel Pairs list contains the items that have been placed on the current cable
block diagram and that have been defined as parallel pairs in the Parallel Equipment
Assistant. For details, see Define Parallel Equipment (on page 238).
▪ Some of the paired equipment items that appear on the Parallel Pairs list may appear
disabled. This means that at least one of the items belonging to this pair has already
been connected in parallel with another equipment item.
4. Drag an end of the selected cable to a connection point on an equipment item symbol.

Create a Daisy-Chain Connection Pattern

This topic provides the rules for connecting electrical items in a daisy-chain pattern.
It is possible to connect a number of electrical items in a daisy-chain pattern. You connect
electrical items in a daisy- chain pattern by dragging an item to another item of the same type
from the Electrical Index to the Electrical Engineer or within the Electrical Engineer. You
can connect the following items in a daisy-chain pattern:
▪ Loads — drag a load associated with a cable to another load in the Electrical Engineer.
▪ Heat traces — drag a heat trace to another heat trace in the Electrical Engineer. You can
also drag a heat trace to a junction box or a circuit in a junction box. Heat traces and
miscellaneous electrical equipment items do not require associated cables to make
daisy-chain connections.
▪ Miscellaneous electrical equipment items — drag a socket outlet, lighting fixture, welding
outlet, and so forth to another item belonging to the Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment
type. Also, you can drag an item belonging to the Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment type
to a junction box but not to a junction box circuit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 241

 Making Electrical Associations

▪ Junction boxes — drag a junction box (but not its circuit) to a heat trace or to an item
belonging to the Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment type. There is no need for a cable to
be associated with a junction box.

▪ On the Batch Load Association dialog box, the software displays items connected in a
daisy-chain pattern as if they are all connected in a parallel pattern. The software handles
both parallel and daisy-chain connections in the same way.
▪ On the Common Properties dialog box, items connected in a daisy-chain pattern appear as
if they are fed from the same feeder circuit.
▪ You cannot drag loads that are connected in a daisy-chain pattern to the same circuit to
create a parallel connection. However, you can drag them to other circuits.

Move Disconnect Equipment into Circuit

Use this procedure to move stand-alone disconnect equipment into a circuit so that it becomes a
circuit internal.
1. In the Electrical Engineer, select a stand-alone disconnect equipment item.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Move to Circuit.
3. Do one of the following:
▪ If there is only one available circuit, click Yes when prompted to move the disconnect
equipment.
▪ If the disconnect equipment item appears between two circuits, on the Select Circuit
dialog box, select the target circuit and then click OK.
In the circuit, the equipment that you moved receives sequence number 1. You can
change the sequence in group manually if needed.

Move Disconnect Equipment out of Circuit

Use this procedure to move a circuit internal out of the circuit and place it under the circuit in the
Electrical Engineer as stand-alone disconnect equipment.
1. In the Electrical Engineer, select and right-click a circuit.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
3. On the Circuit Common Properties dialog box, click Associated Items.
4. Under Circuit internals, select a circuit whose Order value is 1.
It is only possible to move out an internal whose Order value in the Circuit
internals pane is 1.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 242

SECTION 11

Load Associations
This section deals with PDB/bus load associations and balancing load data.
All electrical consumers and distribution equipment (PDBs) need a power source. The power
source must match the requirements of the supplied equipment in voltage levels, current
consumption and provide suitable protection and control circuits.
A load can be associated and connected to one circuit only.
A circuit may feed one or more loads or pieces of equipment.
You can use the following options to associate a load with a feeder circuit:
▪ Make the association on the load Common Properties dialog box.
▪ Make the association by dragging a load from the Electrical Index to a bus or circuit in the
Electrical Engineer.
▪ Drag a load to another bus or circuit in the Electrical Engineer.
▪ Use the batch load association feature.

Associate Loads with a PDB in Batch Mode

This procedure explains how to associate a number of loads with a selected power distribution
board. The software makes the associations and then sums up the electrical consumption and
the full load current that the associated loads require. This calculation facilitates the power
distribution board design at an early planning stage. Note that you can choose one of the
following calculation modes:
▪ Calculate the total consumed power only for those loads that are connected directly to the
current bus.
▪ Calculate the total consumed power for all the loads fed by the current bus as well as the
loads that are fed by the buses that are connected to the current bus (as specified in
Options Manager).

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the Electrical Equipment folder hierarchy and navigate to
the required folder, such as Motors, Static Electrical Equipment, Converting Equipment,
and so forth.
2. In the list view pane, select the items that you require.

▪ You can also associate a single load without selecting a batch of loads in the Item Tag
pane of the Electrical Index. This way you can associate different loads belonging to
any load category in the Electrical Index. For more details, see Associate a Single
Load with a PDB (on page 247).
▪ Also, you can select the required loads in the EDE.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 243

 Load Associations

3. Click Actions > Batch Load Association.

4. On the Batch Load Association dialog box, under Power distribution board, select the
required power distribution board.
5. From the Bus list, select a bus with which you want to associate the loads.
6. On the Bus tab, specify the rated data for the selected bus as needed and click Apply.
7. Click the Loads tab.
8. Click Add Selected Loads to add the items to the Associated loads list. (You selected
these items in the list view pane of the Electrical Index.)
9. In the Associated loads box, scroll to the right and define the phase assignment of the
current load by selecting the appropriate Phase check boxes.

▪ For a single-phase load, select one of the Phase check boxes.

▪ If you want a single-phase load to simulate a two-phase load which is connected to a
three-phase bus, select two of the Phase check boxes.
▪ For a three- phase load, select all three Phase check boxes.
10. Under Create circuits and cells, select the Create circuits check box to automatically
create a circuit for each associated load that has not been assigned to a circuit. Note that
this option does not affect the loads that have already been assigned to circuits.

▪ If you do not select the check boxes under Create circuits and cells, the software
associates the selected loads with a power distribution board or a bus. You can create
circuits at a later time.
▪ Note that circuits have a property called CircuitMode with values Connected and
Disconnected. If you set this property to Disconnected, the drill down algorithm will
stop the calculation there and will not roll up the loads connected to this feeder.
11. Select the Create cell check box to automatically create a cell where the new feeder circuit
for the associated load will be created.
Make sure that in the Properties window for the new cell, you select the In Use
setting for the Cell Usage property.
12. Click Add to add other loads to the association.
13. On the Find dialog box, in the Results data window, select the loads that you require.

▪ For further details about selecting items, see the Find dialog box.
▪ The software finds only those items that have the Is Load property in the Properties
window set to True or if this item is defined as a Consumer in the Common Properties
dialog box. Also, the Find dialog box displays only those load items that aren't
connected to a bus.
14. Under Electrical consumption using coincidence factors, select one of the following
calculation modes:
▪ For direct loads only — to calculate the total consumed power only for those loads
that are connected directly to the current bus.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 244

 Load Associations

▪ For all feeders — to calculate the total consumed power for all the loads fed by the
current bus as well as the loads that are fed by the buses that are connected to the
current bus (as specified in Options Manager). When you select this option, the
Circuits tab becomes available.
You can set a preference that instructs the software to take into account any
existing transformer power losses. For details, see Customize All Feeder Load Summary
Report Preferences.
15. Click Re-Calculate to refresh the display of the calculated values.
When selecting a PDB that contains a large downstream electrical distribution
system, it may take some time for the software to perform all the calculations before it
displays all the values. To avoid this situation, when opening the Batch Load Association
dialog box, the software displays the values that were stored in the database during the last
calculation. Clicking the Re- Calculate button allows you to re-calculate and refresh the
display the current calculation values.

▪ When creating a plant item in the Electrical Index, and if the plant item properties that are
included in the Manage Operating Cases dialog box have default values, these values are
set in all the existing operating cases of the current plant. Note that default values are set in
the Data Dictionary Manager or the Project Wide Parameters in Options Manager.
▪ When creating a plant item in the Electrical Index by dragging an item from the Reference
Data Explorer and if the reference item has properties that are included in the Manage
Operating Cases dialog box, the values that appear in those properties are copied only to
the active case of the current plant. All other cases in the plant will contain default values if
they exist. If no default values have been set for those properties, all the other operating
cases will not contain any values for those properties.
▪ When calculating load totals for buses and circuits, the software stores the name of the plant
operating case that was used during the latest calculation. The name of this operating case
is displayed at the top of the Properties window just above the toolbar and on the Batch
Load Association dialog box. Note that the Last Calculated Case Name and Last
Calculated Case Description properties are available when defining EDE layouts and
relevant reports.

1. To associate loads that have been associated only with a PDB and not with a bus, click the
Unassigned Loads tab.
2. Under Unassigned loads, select the item tag type and the Select check box for each load
that you want to associate.
3. Click Assign to Bus.
The software moves the selected load to the Loads tab.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click the Bus tab and define the bus rated data.
If, after calculating the rated power for all feeders, you move to the Bus tab and
change the bus data, make sure that you click Apply before you switch back to the Loads
tab.
6. Click the Loads tab and set the load phases.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 245

 Load Associations

7. Continue adding loads as you require and then click OK when done.
For information about associating a load with a different bus, see Balance Bus
Loads (on page 251).
The following table summarizes the information presented on the Loads and
Circuits tabs of the Batch Load Association dialog box:

Item Type Associated Loads Grid Calculated Results Circuits Tab

Loads connected Shown as Accounts for and shows Not applicable

directly to the non-compensated values. consumed compensated
selected bus. values.

Converting Shown when defined as Accounts for and shows Shown only if the converting
equipment loads and presented as consumed compensated equipment is not defined as a
non-compensated values. values. load.

Converting When this preference is Accounts for and shows Shown only if the converting
equipment losses selected, the item tag is non-compensated equipment is not defined as a
shown without any values. values. load.

Local panels and Shown when defined as Accounts for and shows Not applicable
junction boxes loads and presented as consumed compensated
non-compensated values. values.

Cabinets and Shown as Accounts for and shows Not applicable

instruments non-compensated values. consumed compensated
values.

Feeder circuit that Not applicable Accounts for and shows Shown if it feeds an incomer
feeds a consumed compensated circuit or converting
downstream bus values. equipment that is not defined
or converting as a load.
equipment.

Coupler circuit Not applicable Accounts for and shows Shown if it feeds a bus riser.
consumed compensated
values.

▪ Electrical items are included in calculations if they are defined as consumers. In addition to
loads, you can define converting equipment items, cabinets, local panels, and junction
boxes as consumers. To define an electrical item as a consumer, you have to set the Is
Load property in the Properties window for that item to True or define the electrical item as
a Consumer in the relevant Common Properties dialog box.
▪ If you define a converting equipment item, local panel, or junction box as a consumer and
perform a drill-down calculation, the software uses the rated and consumed electrical load
values of the equipment as the load values, the software ignores the entire branch that is
connected downstream from the equipment. Note that you enter the pertinent rated and
consumed electrical load values on the Common Properties dialog box of the equipment
item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 246

 Load Associations

▪ You can assign a load to a particular phase only if you defined the properties of the current
bus as having an AC supply and you set a value for the number of phases.
▪ The software displays the calculated consumption values according to the loads associated
with each bus for the selected phase. If you do not select any bus from the Bus list, the
software calculates the consumption for the entire power distribution board.
▪ The software can take into account converting equipment power losses if you have set your
report preferences accordingly. For details, see Customize All Feeder Load Summary
Report Preferences.
▪ If you associate a capacitor, the software subtracts the consumed kVAr value of that
capacitor from the total connected consumed kVAr value. Therefore, the consumed
electrical power (kVAr) may display a negative value. This means that there is a lagging
power factor.
▪ When performing bus load association and assigning a load to another bus on the Cached
Loads tab of the Bus Load Association dialog box, the software checks if the selected
load is associated with a heater that is connected through an auxiliary contact that is fed
from the same circuit as the selected load. If the software detects such a heater, it will
prompt you to move the associated circuit together with the load. If you click Yes, the
software will move the load and its heater together with the associated circuit to another
bus. If you click No, the software will only move the selected load without moving the heater
or the circuit. In this case, you will have to move the associated heater manually.
▪ If a particular load associated with a selected PDB or bus contains incomplete data, the
software displays an appropriate message in the Note box.
▪ To cancel an association of an item, under Associated loads, select a row and click
Remove.
▪ You cannot dissociate a load if it is connected to a circuit.

Associate a Single Load with a PDB

This procedure explains how to associate a single load with a selected power distribution board
or bus. The software makes the associations and sums up the electrical consumption and the
full load current that the associated load requires. This calculation facilitates the power
distribution board design at an early planning stage.
1. Click Actions > Batch Load Association.
2. On the Batch Load Association dialog box, under Power distribution board, select a
power distribution board.
3. From the Bus list, select a bus with which you want to associate the loads.
You do not have to select a bus if you do not want to associate any loads with a
specific bus under the selected PDB. In this case, the software calculates the load
consumption for the entire power distribution board rather than for a specific bus.
4. Click the Loads tab.
5. Click Add to open the Find dialog box.
6. From the Equipment type list, select the required equipment type.
7. Click Find Now.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 247

 Load Associations

The software finds only those load items that have the Is Load property in the
Properties window set to True or if this load is defined as a Consumer in the Common
Properties dialog box. In addition to loads, you can define other electrical items as
consumers. These items are converting equipment items, local panels, and junction boxes.
Also, the Find dialog box displays only those load items that are not connected to a bus.
8. From the data window, highlight the required load item tag.
9. Click OK to associate the load with the selected PDB.
10. Under Create circuits and cells, select the Create circuits check box to automatically
create a circuit for each associated load that has not been assigned to a circuit. Note that
this option does not affect the loads that have already been assigned to circuits.
If you do not select the check boxes under Create circuits and cells, the software
associates the selected loads with a power distribution board or a bus. You can create
circuits at a later time.
11. Select the Create cell check box to automatically create a cell where the software will
create the new feeder circuit for the associated load.
Make sure that in the Properties window for the new cell, you select the In Use
setting for the Cell Usage property.
12. Under Associated loads, scroll to the right and define the phase association of the current
load by selecting the appropriate Phase check boxes.

▪ For a single-phase load, select one of the Phase check boxes.

▪ If you want a single-phase load to simulate a two-phase load which is connected to a
three-phase bus, select two of the Phase check boxes.
▪ For a three- phase load, select all three Phase check boxes.
13. Click Apply and then click the Bus tab.
14. Define the bus rated power as needed.
15. To associate loads with a bus that have been associated only with a PDB, click Unassigned
Loads.
16. Under Unassigned loads, select the item tag type and the Select check box for each load
that you want to associate.
17. Click Assign to Bus.
18. Click Apply and then select another PDB or another bus.
19. Continue adding loads as you require and then click OK when done.
For information about associating a load with a different bus, see Balance Bus
Loads (on page 251).
The following table summarizes the information presented on the Loads and
Circuits tabs of the Batch Load Association dialog box:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 248

 Load Associations

Item Type Associated Loads Grid Calculated Results Circuits Tab

Loads connected Shown as Accounts for and shows Not applicable

directly to the non-compensated values. consumed compensated
selected bus. values.

Converting Shown when defined as Accounts for and shows Shown only if the converting
equipment loads and presented as consumed compensated equipment is not defined as a
non-compensated values. values. load.

Converting When this preference is Accounts for and shows Shown only if the converting
equipment losses selected, the item tag is non-compensated equipment is not defined as a
shown without any values. values. load.

Local panels and Shown when defined as Accounts for and shows Not applicable
junction boxes loads and presented as consumed compensated
non-compensated values. values.

Cabinets and Shown as Accounts for and shows Not applicable

instruments non-compensated values. consumed compensated
values.

Feeder circuit that Not applicable Accounts for and shows Shown if it feeds an incomer
feeds a consumed compensated circuit or converting
downstream bus values. equipment that is not defined
or converting as a load.
equipment.

Coupler circuit Not applicable Accounts for and shows Shown if it feeds a bus riser.
consumed compensated
values.

▪ You can assign a load to a particular phase only if you defined the properties of the current
bus as having an AC supply and you set a value for the number of phases.
▪ To cancel an association of an item, under Associated loads, select a row and click
Remove. You cannot dissociate a load if it is connected to a circuit.
▪ The software displays the calculated consumption according to the loads associated with
each bus. If you do not select any bus from the Bus list, the software calculates the
consumption for the entire power distribution board.
▪ When performing bus load association and assigning a load to another bus on the Cached
Loads tab of the Bus Load Association dialog box, the software checks if the selected
load is associated with a heater that is connected through an auxiliary contact that is fed
from the same circuit as the selected load. If the software detects such a heater, it will
prompt you to move the associated circuit together with the load. If you click Yes, the
software will move the load and its heater together with the associated circuit to another
bus. If you click No, the software will only move the selected load without moving the heater
or the circuit. In this case, you will have to move the associated heater manually.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 249

 Load Associations

▪ If you associate a capacitor, the software subtracts the rated kVAr value of that capacitor
from the total connected rated kVAr value. Therefore, the rated electrical power (kVAr) may
display a negative value. This means that there is a lagging power factor.
▪ If a particular load associated with a selected PDB or bus contains incomplete data, the
software displays an appropriate message in the Note box.

Display Bus Load Data

1. Click Actions > Batch Load Association.
2. On the Batch Load Association dialog box, under Power distribution board, select a
power distribution board.
3. From the Bus list, select a specific bus.
4. Click the Loads tab.
5. Under Bus phases, select All phases to see all the calculated electrical data for all the
associated loads.

▪ The software displays the calculated electrical consumption for the selected bus.
▪ To view the calculated electrical consumption for a particular phase, select the check boxes
as you require in the Bus phases group box.

Balancing Loads
Load balancing is an operation that you can perform at any stage of your plant or project.
However, it is recommended that you perform load balancing before you create feeder cables
between loads and their circuits, and before you apply profiles to the loads. The reason for this
is that when you move loads between buses, associated power cables remain attached to the
previous feeder circuits.

Validate Bus Loads

This procedure shows how to define current settings and requested spare capacity for bus load
lines and to perform validations of bus loads.
1. Associate loads with buses individually or in batch mode. For more information, refer to
Related Topics.
2. Click Actions > Batch Load Association.
3. On the Batch Load Association dialog box, under Power distribution board, select a
power distribution board.
4. From the Bus list, select a specific bus.
5. Click the Bus tab.
6. Type values in the Line current and Overload percentage boxes.
7. Enter or modify other values as required.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 250

 Load Associations

8. On the Loads tab, click Recalculate to ensure that calculations for Total running load and
Total peak load are up to date.
9. Close the Batch Load Association dialog box.
10. In the Electrical Index, select one or more PDBs or buses.
If Step 8 of this procedure has not been performed on some PDB buses,
click Actions > Calculate Bus Loads.
11. Click Actions > Total Bus Load Validation.
The software calculates the load data for the selected buses and displays the
results on the Total Bus Load Validation dialog box (on page 1120).
12. If required, click Excel Report to view the results in an Excel file.

▪ The software uses the total bus amperes as the basis for calculating the total bus load,
including any loads connected downstream. The input for the calculation comes from the
consumed active and reactive loads.
▪ The software does not perform bus load validation for loads that have incomplete data, that
is, where any of the following properties has a value of zero:
▪ The consumed active load.
▪ The consumed reactive load.
▪ The coincidence factor (X, Y, Z, or ZZ) that applies for the load.
▪ Operating mode (governs the coincidence factor used in consumed electrical power
calculations.
▪ Demand factor.
▪ Power factor at Demand
▪ Efficiency at Demand.

Balance Bus Loads

This procedure shows how to move loads between different buses in your plant.
1. Click Actions > Batch Load Association.
2. On the Batch Load Association dialog box, under Power distribution board, select a
power distribution board.
3. From the Bus list, select the required bus.
4. Click the Loads tab.
5. Select the loads that you want to move.
You can select multiple rows if you need to move several loads.
6. Click Move to Cache.
The software moves the load from Associated loads list to the Cached Loads tab.
7. Repeat the two previous steps for each load that you want to dissociate from the currently
selected bus.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 251

 Load Associations

8. Click the Cached Loads tab.

9. Click Apply.
10. From the Power distribution board and Bus lists, selected the required PDB and bus to
which you want to move the cached loads.

▪ On performing this step, the software prompts you to save the changes. If you click
Yes, the software dissociates the cached loads from the bus to which they were
assigned, and you can now reassign them.
▪ Also, the software displays a message allowing you to move the selected bus together
with its feeding circuit and the circuit internal items. However, if the load that you want
to move is connected to the bus through converting equipment, the feeding circuit
cannot be moved with the load.
11. Do one of the following:
▪ For each load that you want to reassign, select the check box in the Item Tag column.
▪ To reassign all of the loads in the list, select the Select all check box.
12. Click Assign to Bus.
When performing bus load association and assigning a load to another
bus on the Cached Loads tab of the Bus Load Association dialog box, the software
checks if the selected load is associated with a heater that is connected through an auxiliary
contact that is fed from the same circuit as the selected load. If the software detects such a
heater, it will prompt you to move the associated circuit together with the load. If you click
Yes, the software will move the load and its heater together with the associated circuit to
another bus. If you click No, the software will only move the selected load without moving
the heater or the circuit. In this case, you will have to move the associated heater manually.
13. If you have not assigned all the items to new buses, repeat the three previous steps for each
load that you want to reassign.
The Cached Loads tab behaves as a temporary data store only; the software
removes all loads from the list when you close the dialog box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 252

SECTION 12

Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Smart Electrical enables you to calculate bus load totals on a specific power distribution board,
bus, or on all the buses in the plant. This calculation facilitates the sizing of electrical equipment
such as generators, distribution transformers and their feeder cables, buses, UPSs and so
forth. After completing the calculation, Smart Electrical stores the results in the database. You
can calculate the bus load totals for all the existing buses in the plant or just for those PDBs or
buses that you select in the Electrical Index or the Electrical Engineer. Once the software
completes the calculation, you can generate a load summary report for the calculated loads
based on the calculated and stored properties.

▪ The software takes into account any existing equipment that is connected in parallel.
▪ When making calculations, Smart Electrical considers the worst-case scenario in its
calculation results and does not take into account any load flow that would be taken into
account by a power analysis application such as ETAP. That is, for calculation purposes,
Smart Electrical always assumes that the total connected load is supplied from one source
only. If there are multiple sources that supply the same connected load, Smart Electrical
assumes that each source has the capability to supply the connected load. Smart Electrical,
unlike any power analysis application, does not account for multiple sources that share a
load. Consequently, in Smart Electrical, the total load for a distribution network can appear
artificially high unless the Circuit Mode property is set to either Connected or
Disconnected as required on specific circuits.

Calculation Process: Drill-Down and Roll-Up

The calculation process consists of two parts, drill-down and roll-up.
▪ Drill-Down — The calculation starts from the highest level of a particular power flow that
you select in the Electrical Engineer. Then the calculation process continues down the
power flow all the way to the electrical consumers at the lowest level of the Electrical
Engineer hierarchy. The software performs this process automatically. You can tweak the
calculation process by switching the specific circuits on or off as you require. Also, you can
define converting equipment PDBs as consumers. In these cases, the drill-down process
does not continue beyond the pertinent converting equipment or PDBs. Also, in the
Properties window, you can change the Is Load property of an electrical item to False.
Note that the software does not include in the drill-down process any items below the
circuits that have been switched off. Nor does it include any converting equipment items that
have not been defined as consumers.
▪ Roll-Up — During this calculation process, the software collects the information from the
lowest level of a particular power flow that you select in the Electrical Engineer and goes
up the flow through the wiring, converting equipment, and feeder circuits all the way to the
buses connected by couplers or risers and up to their incomer circuits. Then, the software
gathers the values from the buses on the lower level of the electrical hierarchy and adds
them to the values of the buses on a higher level all the way to the top of the selected
electrical hierarchy. Note that the software stores the incomer totals in the calculation
properties of the incomer circuits in the Properties window of the incomers.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 253

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Electrical Load Data

When performing a load summary calculation, the software uses the values of the following load
properties:
▪ Rated active (kW at rated/nominal/100% load conditions) — Prated
▪ Rated reactive (kVAR at rated/nominal/100% load conditions) — Qrated
▪ Consumed active (kW at operating point/consumed load conditions) — Pconsumed
▪ Consumed reactive (kVAR at operating point /consumed load conditions) — Qconsumed
▪ Operating mode (Continuous, Intermittent, Standby or Spare)
▪ Coincidence factors for each and every mode of operation (x,y,z,zz)

Motor Power Calculation Mechanism

For most types of load, Smart Electrical calculates the electrical reactive and apparent power
values as a vector sum based on the mechanical power and the power factor (cos φ). This is the
common electrical formula derived from the power triangle shown below. The software displays
the calculated values in the Active power, Reactive power, and Apparent power fields. You
can enter values in the Rated power, Break power, Demand factor, and Power factor fields
only.
The software performs active, reactive, and apparent load calculations twice — for rated and
consumed (brake) power. For motors (dynamic loads), the power factor and efficiency values
that are used for consumed power calculation are derived from a three-point graph which is
interpolated from the given power factor and efficiency values at 100%, 75% and 50%.
Example:
Let's assume that a three-phase motor working as an intermittent load has the following values:
▪ Rated power = 100 kW (the nameplate mechanical power that is derived by a particular
motor)
▪ Brake power (also called shaft power) = 80 kW (80% of the rated power)
▪ Y = 0.5
▪ Power factor at full load = 0.85
▪ Efficiency at full load = 0.9
▪ Power factor at break point = 0.826 (at 80 % of the rated active power)
▪ Efficiency at break point = 0.884 (at 80 % of the rated active power). These calculated
values are the result of calculating the power factor at 75% = 0.82 and efficiency at 75% =
0.88.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 254

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

▪ For motors, these values are interpolated from three given points. For static loads the values
are provided only once.

▪ Active power (electrical):

P = P mechanical / ( — efficiency at working point))
Prated = 100 kW/0.9 = 111.1kW
Pconsumed = 80 kW/0.884 = 90.5kW
▪ Reactive power:
Q = P * tan (arcos (cos ))
Qrated = 111.1 * tan (arcos 0.85) = 68.9 kVAR
Qconsumed = 90.5 * tan (arcos 0.826) = 61.8 kVAR
▪ Apparent power:
S = √(P2 + Q2)
Srated (111.12 + 68.92) = 130.7 kVA
Sconsumed = √(90.52 + 61.82) = 109.6 kVA
▪ Full load current (FLC) for a three-phase load (with 380 VAC line voltage):
FLC = Srated / (U * √3)
FLC = 131000 / (380 * √3) = 198.6 A

Static Load Power Calculation Mechanism

For static loads, the power calculation is rather simple. No interpolation is performed by the
software to find the power factor and efficiency values at work point. The software calculates the
rated power kW, kVAR, and kVA values using efficiency and power factor values once at 100%
of a full load and once at demand (working) work point. However, you have to enter the power
factor and efficiency values yourself. The rest of the calculation is the same as for motors.

Special Cases (Junction Boxes and Cabinets)

For some item types, such as junction boxes and other panels, the software does not perform
the triangular power calculation even if the Is Load property has been set to True. For these
items, you need to enter the active and reactive power values manually. Smart Electrical does
not calculate apparent power for these items.
Smart Electrical does not calculate compensated values for loads. These
calculations are performed for circuits and buses.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 255

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Compensated and Uncompensated Electrical Load Values

As opposed to individual loads, for which only uncompensated values are calculated and
retained, for circuit and buses, the software operates with two sets of load data values:
▪ Uncompensated values — rated and consumed electrical load kW, kVAR, and kVA values
without applying coincidence factors. The software rolls up these values from the loads
connected to specific circuits or buses.
▪ Compensated values — rated and consumed electrical load kW, kVAR, and kVA values
multiplied by coincidence factors. It is possible to instruct the software to use one of the
following coincidence factors as shown on the Reports tab of the Preferences dialog box:

▪ Use each load coincidence factor — coincidence factor values of individual loads
▪ Use Bus PDB coincidence factor — bus coincidence factor values
▪ Calculate according to largest non-continuous load — Instructs the software to
calculate the total normal running and peak loading according to the largest
non-continuous load connected to the current bus including all the rolled-up loads
that are connected to the downstream buses. For details, see Calculate Bus
Loading According to the Largest Non-Continuous Load (on page 270).

Example
Let's assume that an intermittent load has the following values:
▪ Rated active power = 11.1 kW
▪ Rated reactive power (calculated or entered manually) = 6.9 kVAR

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 256

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

▪ Consumed active power = 8.5 kW

▪ Consumed reactive power = 5.9 kVAR
▪ Operating mode = intermittent
▪ Y = 0.5 (intermittent coincidence factor)
The uncompensated values would be as follows:
▪ Uncompensated rated active power = 11.1 kW
▪ Uncompensated rated reactive power = 6.9 kVAR
▪ Uncompensated consumed active power = 8.5 kW
▪ Uncompensated consumed reactive power = 5.9 kVAR
The compensated power values would be as follows (uncompensated values multiplied by the
coincidence factor):
▪ Compensated rated active power = 5.55 kW
▪ Compensated rated reactive power = 3.45 kVAR
▪ Compensated consumed active power = 4.25 kW
▪ Compensated consumed reactive power = 2.95 kVAR

▪ Bus and circuit totals depend on the settings of your preferences. Therefore, run the bus
load calculation to update the total values in the bus, circuit, and load properties.
▪ Electrical items are included in calculations if they are defined as consumers. In addition to
loads, you can define converting equipment items, cabinets, local panels, and junction
boxes as consumers. To define an electrical item as a consumer, you have to set the Is
Load property in the Properties window for that item to True or define the electrical item as
a Consumer in the relevant Common Properties dialog box. See the Bus Load
Configuration Examples.pdf., pages 12 and 23.
▪ If you define a converting equipment item, local panel, or junction box as a consumer and
perform a drill-down calculation, the software uses the rated and consumed electrical load
values of the equipment as the load values, the software ignores the entire branch that is
connected downstream from the equipment. Note that you enter the pertinent rated and
consumed electrical load values on the Common Properties dialog box of the equipment
item. See the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., pages 12 and 23.
▪ It is also possible to instruct the software not to perform a drill-down and roll-up of a bus.
You can do this by setting the Drill Down Enable Flag property to False in the Properties
window. In this case, the software will take into account only the manually entered
consumed / rated active or reactive values of that particular bus.
▪ Loads associated with PDBs are taken into account whether or not they are connected via
circuits. See the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., pages 5 - 9, 20, 12, and 22 - 27.
▪ Circuit connection mode (Connected or Disconnected) affects the calculation
results. Disconnecting a circuit excludes the downstream connected load from the
calculation.
▪ The circuit properties store the total value of the load that is connected to it as follows:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 257

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

▪ The properties of feeder circuits that feed direct loads store the load data. See the Bus
Load Configuration Examples.pdf., pages 5 - 9 and 12 -14.
▪ The properties of feeder circuits that feed downstream buses whether directly or through
converting equipment store the downstream bus load total values. Practically, these
values will be the same as for the buses that are fed by these circuits. See the Bus Load
Configuration Examples.pdf., page 16.
▪ The properties of coupler circuits store the total values of the bus is connected to the
corresponding riser provided that your preferences have been set do so. If your
preferences are set to exclude the couplers, the calculation results for the coupler
circuits will be null. See the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., page 17.
▪ The properties of riser circuits store the total values of the bus that is connected to the
feeding coupler. If your preferences are set to exclude risers, the calculation results for
riser circuits will be null. See the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., pages 17 - 18.
▪ If your preferences are set to take into account converting equipment losses, the circuit total
calculation results will include the kVAR and kW losses as continuous values. See the Bus
Load Configuration Examples.pdf., page 10.
▪ It is also possible to calculate a bus load summary for a freestanding bus.
For more information, see the following topics:
▪ Connectivity Across Buses (see "Connectivity Between Buses" on page 258)
▪ Calculating Bus Loading (on page 264)
▪ Correcting Bus Power Factors Using Capacitor Banks
▪ Bus Load Calculation Preferences (on page 305)
▪ Handling Special Cases of Bus Load Calculations (on page 305)
▪ Calculating Electrical Consumption During Batch Load Association (see "Calculating
Electrical Consumption After Batch Load Association" on page 306)
▪ Flow of Activities for Bus Load Calculations (on page 306)
▪ Bus, Circuit, and Converting Equipment Properties (on page 307)
▪ Calculate Bus Loading According to the Largest Non-Continuous Load (on page 270)

Connectivity Between Buses

Calculating bus loading amounts to summing up all the loads that are connected a specific bus.

Circuit Mode
The calculation of bus load summary depends on the mode of the circuits. The circuit mode
property can be Connected or Disconnected and it controls whether the loads are connected
or disconnected to the bus. You set the circuit mode on the Circuit Common Properties
dialog box or in the Properties window. Setting the circuit mode to Connected means that
power flows through the circuit and it acts as a connecting line between the power source and
the consumer device. Setting the circuit mode to Disconnected interrupts the circuit
connectivity and it means the power is not flowing therefore, the downstream connected loads or
buses are not taken into account in the calculation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 258

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

The following situations can arise when identifying the buses that are connected to a particular
bus:

Loads Connected Directly to a Bus

As shown in the diagram below, the loads are connected directly to the bus, which means that
they are connected to the bus via a circuit or directly even without a cable. A load can be
connected via a junction box or any other connecting item such as a panel, bus way, and so
forth, all of which are transparent to the bus load association. Example:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 259

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

▪ In the Electrical Engineer:

▪ In a single line diagram:

The software also takes into account loads that are connected in parallel and loads
that are connected in a daisy chain. For details, see Configuration H: Loads Connected in
Parallel (see "Configuration I: multiple loads connected by a junction box" on page 298) and

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 260

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Configuration I: Loads Connected in a Daisy-Chain Pattern (see "Configuration J: loads

connected in a daisy-chain pattern" on page 299).

Loads Connected Indirectly to a Bus (Via Converting Equipment)

In this case, the loads are connected to a bus indirectly. That is, the loads are connected
through a transformer, a variable frequency drive, or any other converting equipment item within
the circuit internals or external to the circuit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 261

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

In a single line diagram:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 262

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Buses Connected Via Feeder-Incomer Circuits

The image below shows a configuration of buses that feed downstream buses through a pair of
feeder-incomer circuits.

As shown above, the loads that connect the upper bus are the direct loads as well as all the
downstream connected buses which in turn also have loads that are connected to them
directly. Any calculation of the upper bus also takes into account the downstream connected
loads. Note that the software does not set any limitation on the number of downstream levels of
buses for a network. The software makes a recursive calculation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 263

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Buses Connected Via Coupler-Riser Circuits

Buses can also be connected to each other by sets of coupler-riser circuits. Such a connection
is usually used for connecting buses of the same voltage level mainly for redundancy and
backup purposes when one bus can take over the loads of the coupled bus in case there is a
power source loss in one of the adjacent buses.

Bus 400V, 500A, 3PH and bus 120V, 500A,3PH are coupled (connected) by the coupler and
riser circuits which in principle serve as mutual backups for power supply.

Calculating Bus Loading

Calculating bus loading amounts to summing up all the loads that are connected a particular
bus. When calculating the total loads connected to a bus, the software calculates the bus
totals, stores the individual subtotals in the database as calculated properties and then makes
these calculated properties accessible for reporting. During this stage, you can sum them up
any way you see appropriate.
In general, the total load of a bus is a variation of the sum of its active and reactive
vectors. Smart Electrical calculates these totals for each load by adding up the direct and
downstream rolled up loads. Then, Smart Electrical stores these results in the database.

▪ The software takes into account any existing equipment that is connected in parallel.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 264

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

▪ When making calculations, Smart Electrical considers the worst-case scenario in its
calculation results and does not take into account any load flow that would be taken into
account by a power analysis application such as ETAP. That is, for calculation purposes,
Smart Electrical always assumes that the total connected load is supplied from one source
only. If there are multiple sources that supply the same connected load, Smart Electrical
assumes that each source has the capability to supply the connected load. Smart Electrical,
unlike any power analysis application, does not account for multiple sources that share a
load. Consequently, in Smart Electrical, the total load for a distribution network can appear
artificially high unless the Circuit Mode property is set to either Connected or
Disconnected as required on specific circuits.
▪ For information about calculations made based on the largest non-continuous load, see
Calculate Bus Loading According to the Largest Non-Continuous Load (on page 270).

Bus Values Used in Calculations

Bus Rated Power Values
▪ Total uncompensated continuous active power
▪ Total uncompensated continuous reactive power
▪ Total uncompensated intermittent active power
▪ Total uncompensated intermittent reactive power
▪ Total uncompensated standby active power
▪ Total uncompensated standby reactive power
▪ Total uncompensated spare active power
▪ Total uncompensated spare reactive power
▪ Total compensated continuous active power
▪ Total compensated continuous reactive power
▪ Total compensated intermittent active power
▪ Total compensated intermittent reactive power
▪ Total compensated standby active power
▪ Total compensated standby reactive power
▪ Total compensated spare active power
▪ Total compensated spare reactive power
Bus Consumed Power Values
▪ Total uncompensated continuous active power
▪ Total uncompensated continuous reactive power
▪ Total uncompensated intermittent active power
▪ Total uncompensated intermittent reactive power
▪ Total uncompensated standby active power
▪ Total uncompensated standby reactive power
▪ Total uncompensated spare active power

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 265

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

▪ Total uncompensated spare reactive power

▪ Total compensated continuous active power
▪ Total compensated continuous reactive power
▪ Total compensated intermittent active power
▪ Total compensated intermittent reactive power
▪ Total compensated standby active power
▪ Total compensated standby reactive power
▪ Total compensated spare active power
▪ Total compensated spare reactive power

Circuit Load Calculation

Smart Electrical stores downstream load totals in the respective circuit items. The following
rules apply to the data that a circuit stores:
▪ Feeder circuits — hold the values of the total downstream connected load (if there is more
than one load connected to a circuit, the circuit stores the total values for all the connected
loads).
▪ Incomer circuits — store the total load of the bus that the incomer circuit is feeding. Note
that the incomer circuit values and total bus values should be the same.
▪ Coupler circuit — stores the values of the load of the coupled bus.
▪ Riser circuits — store the values of the bus that has the coupler, opposite the riser
circuit. That is, each coupler-riser paired circuit stores the values of its counterpart.

Calculating the Total Bus Loading

Smart Electrical calculates the following grand totals of bus loading for each set of the bus rated
power values and bus consumed power values:

Rated Power (Compensated and Uncompensated)

▪ Total running bus active load
▪ Total running bus reactive load
▪ Total running bus apparent load
▪ Running bus power factor
▪ Total peak bus active load
▪ Total peak bus reactive load
▪ Total peak bus apparent load
▪ Peak bus power factor

Consumed Power (Compensated and Uncompensated)

▪ Total running bus active load
▪ Total running bus reactive load

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 266

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

▪ Total running bus apparent load

▪ Running bus power factor
▪ Total peak bus active load
▪ Total peak bus reactive load
▪ Total peak bus apparent load
▪ Peak bus power factor

Bus Run Power Grand Total

The total running load is defined as the sum of the continuous and intermittent loads,
compensated or uncompensated, respectively. Active and reactive load values are summarized
and stored in separate properties. Rated and consumed values are also stored in separate
properties.

Uncompensated Run Power Total

(Prun) =  (Pcontinuous) +  (Pintermittent)
(Qrun) =  (Qcontinuous) +  (Qintermittent)

Compensated Run Power Total Using Individual Load Coincidence Factors

The coincidence factor of each load is taken into account separately.
(Prun) =  (X * Pcontinuous) +  (Y * Pintermittent)
(Qrun) =  (X * Qcontinuous) +  (Y * Qintermittent)

Compensated Run Power Total Using Bus Load Coincidence Factors

The software uses the bus coincidence factors to make the calculation. The coincidence factor
of each load has no effect on the calculation.
(Prun) =  (Pcontinuous) * X bus +  (Pintermittent) * Y bus
(Qrun) =  (Qcontinuous) * X bus +  (Qintermittent) * Y bus

Bus Peak Power Grand Total

The total peak load is defined as the sum of the continuous, intermittent, standby, and spare
loads - compensated and uncompensated respectively.

Uncompensated Peak Power Total

(Ppeak) =  (Pcontinuous) +  (Pintermittent) +  (Pstandby) +  (Pspare)
(Qpeak) =  (Qcontinuous) +  (Qintermittent) +  (Qstandby) +  (Qspare)

Compensated Peak Power Total Using Individual Load Coincidence Factors

The coincidence factor of each load is taken into account separately.
(Ppeak) =  (X * Pcontinuous) +  (Y * Pintermittent) +  (Z * Pstandby) +  (ZZ * Pspare)
(Qpeak) =  (X * Qcontinuous) +  (Y * Qintermittent) +  (Z * Qstandby) +  (ZZ * Qspare)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 267

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Compensated Peak Power Total Using Bus Load Coincidence Factors

The software uses the bus coincidence factors to make the calculation. The coincidence factor
of each load has no effect on the calculation.
(Ppeak) =  (Pcontinuous) * XB +  (Pintermittent) * YB +  (Pstandby) * ZB +(Pspare) * ZZB
(Qpeak) =  (Qcontinuous) * XB +  (Qintermittent) * YB +  (Qstandby) * ZB +(Qspare) * ZZB

Calculation Based on the Largest Non-Continuous Load

The following equations are used by the software to calculate the total normal running and peak
loading according to the largest non-continuous load connected to the current bus. This
calculation is made after selecting this preference option on the Load Summaries and Reports
tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Selecting Uncompensated values on the Preferences dialog box will always result
in having the sigma totals larger than any individual load.
The choice of the appropriate equation depends on whether the sigma intermittent active power
of a load connected directly or indirectly to the bus multiplied by the bus intermittent coincidence
factor is larger or smaller than the largest individual intermittent active power value of a load
connected directly or indirectly to the current bus. Once the software detects that there is such a
load, the software uses its reactive vector to calculate the reactive intermittent load by using it in
the calculation instead of the  (Y * Qintermittent) part of the equation.
In this case, the equations used are as follows

Compensated Run Power Total Using Bus Load Coincidence Factors

There is one set of calculated values for the consumed values and another set of the
rated values.
The software uses the bus coincidence factors to make the calculation. The coincidence factor
of each load has no effect on the calculation.
(Prun) =  (Pcontinuous) * X bus + Largest (Pintermittent) * Y bus
(Qrun) =  (Qcontinuous) * X bus + Largest (Qintermittent) * Y bus

Bus Peak Power Grand Total Based on the Largest Non-Continuous Load
The total peak load is defined as the sum of the continuous, intermittent, standby, and spare
loads - compensated and uncompensated respectively.

Compensated Peak Power Total Using Bus Load Coincidence Factors

There is one set of calculated values for the consumed values and another set of the
rated values.
The software uses the bus coincidence factors to make the calculation. The coincidence factor
of each load has no effect on the calculation.
(Ppeak) =  (Pcontinuous) * XB + Largest (Pintermittent) * YB + Largest (Pstandby) * ZB +Largest (Pspare) *
ZZB
(Qpeak) =  (Qcontinuous) * XB + Largest (Qintermittent) * YB + Largest (Qstandby) * ZB +Largest (Qspare) *
ZZB

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 268

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

In order to identify the largest non-continuous load, the software analyzes the
situation for intermittent, spare, and standby loads separately. For each of these operating
modes, the results of the analysis can be different. Therefore, the largest intermittent, standby,
and spare loads could be different loads.

Calculating Bus Grand Total Apparent Power

The bus grand total apparent power is calculated 2 3 = 8 times (for run and peak, compensated
and uncompensated, rated versus consumed power) as a vector sum of grand total of active
and reactive power: Note that for this calculation, there is no difference whether the calculation
preference was set for the largest non-continuous load or not.
(S) =  ((P))2 + (Q))2)
Where:
▪ P) — active power total
▪ Q) — reactive power total

Calculating Bus Power Factor

The following formula is used to calculate bus power factors (PF):
PF = (P) / (S)
Where:
▪ (P) — active power total
▪ (S) — apparent power total
This calculation is also performed eight times: for (run and peak) * (compensated and
uncompensated) * (rated and consumed).

Calculating Bus Line Current

The following formula is used to calculate bus line current:
I = (S) / (U * 3) in amperes
Where:
▪ (S) — compensated apparent power
▪ (U) — bus rated voltage (line voltage)
This calculation is performed only four times. It is made for compensated values only: (run and
peak) * (rated and consumed).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 269

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Calculate Bus Loading According to the Largest

Non-Continuous Load
When using the bus PDB coincidence factor to calculate bus loading, you can instruct the
software to calculate the total normal running and peak loading according to the largest
non-continuous load connected to the current bus. This type of calculation is performed after
selecting the appropriate preference setting:
1. In Smart Electrical, click File > Preferences.
2. On the Preferences dialog box, click the Load Summaries and Reports tab.
3. Select the Calculate according to largest non-continuous load check box.

For the purpose of this calculation, the software checks all the connected loads and looks for
the largest non-continuous load, that is, the load that has the highest intermittent, standby, or
spare value. The software looks for such a load among all the loads connected downstream to
the current bus, including the loads that were rolled up from the downstream buses. Note that
the software looks for the largest non-continuous load for each operating mode.
Your settings on the Preferences dialog box determine whether to use rated
or consumed values when looking for the largest non-continuous load. These settings also
determine which largest load to use when rolling loads up from the downstream buses.
Once such a load has been identified for the intermittent, standby, or spare operating mode, the
software compares its active power value to the sigma of all the connected loads multiplied by
the bus coincidence factor. If the active intermittent, spare, or standby power of that individual

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 270

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

load is greater than the sigma, the software uses this value to calculate the total active (kw) bus
loading. Note that the software uses the reactive power value of the largest non-continuous load
to calculate the total bus reactive power loading (kvar). In case there are several loads with the
same largest active power value, the software selects among them the load with the largest
reactive power value and treats it as the largest non-continuous load. For detailed information
about the equations, see the Calculation Based on the Largest Non-Continuous Load section in
the Calculating Bus Loading (on page 264) topic.
Once such a calculation has been performed, you can see this in the Properties window for the
given bus (Calculated According to Largest Load = True). If this property is True, it means
that the calculation for this bus has been performed according to the largest non-continuous
load. This is not an indication of the preference setting.
When generating an All Feeder Load Summary report, the report heading indicates that the
calculation has been made according to the largest non-continuous load and the largest
intermittent/spare/standby load is marked accordingly. For details, see Calculations Based on
the Largest Non-Continuous Load in the All Feeder Load Summary Report topic.
To make the calculation, do the following:
▪ In Smart Electrical, click Actions > Calculate Bus Loading.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 271

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Example 1
The following example shows a three-level network and based on the rated nameplate values.
This example is provided as a simple illustration of this calculation mode. In practice, however,
the calculations and identification of the largest intermittent load are based on calculated rated
or consumed active load values.

Analysis of PDB 5
PDB Motor ID NP Load Coincidence Resulting Largest Intermittent
Rating Status Factor Load Load
(HP) (C/I/S)

PDB 5 M15 100 I 0.3 30

PDB 5 M16 200 I 0.3 60 200

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 272

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

PDB Motor ID NP Load Coincidence Resulting Largest Intermittent

Rating Status Factor Load Load
(HP) (C/I/S)

PDB 5 M19 200 I 0.3 60

PDB 5 M18 200 I 0.3 60

Sum of Intermittent Loads with Factors 210

PDB 5 Total Intermittent Loading 210

In this example, since the largest intermittent load is 200 hp, which is smaller than the sum of
the intermittent loads, the total intermittent loading of PDB 5 equals 210 hp. Note that there are
only intermittent loads on this PDB.
Total running load of PDB 5 = PEAK =  (Continuous *1 + Intermittent * 0.3) loads =210hp

Rolling Up PDB 5 and Accounting for it in PDB 4

To calculate the bus loading of PDB 4, the software rolls up the individual loads on PDB 5 as if
they were connected directly to PDB 4.

PDB Motor ID NP Load Coincidence Resulting Largest Intermittent

Rating Status Factor Load Load
(HP) (C/I/S)

PDB 4 Mtr9 500 I 0.3 150

PDB 4 Mtr10 600 I 0.3 180

PDB 4 Mtr11 800 I 0.3 240 800

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 273

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

PDB Motor ID NP Load Coincidence Resulting Largest Intermittent

Rating Status Factor Load Load
(HP) (C/I/S)

T1 M15 100 I 0.3 30

T1 M16 200 I 0.3 60

T1 M17 200 I 0.3 60

T1 M18 200 I 0.3 60

Sum of Intermittent Loads with Factors 780

PDB 5 Total Intermittent Loading 800

In this example when calculating the total loading of the intermittent loading of PDB 4 , since the
largest intermittent load is 800 hp, which is larger than 780, the result is that the total intermittent
loading of PDB4 equals 800 hp. Therefore, when calculating the totals of PDB 4 (all the loads
are intermittent only):
Total running load of PDB 4 = PEAK =  (Continuous *1 + LARGEST INTERMITTENT
LOAD) loads =800hp

PDB 3
Prior to calculating the loading of PDB 1, which is the highest PDB in this example network, we
need to examine how PDB 3 contributes to the calculation.

PDB Motor ID NP Load Coincidence Resulting Largest Intermittent

Rating Status Factor Load Load
(HP) (C/I/S)

PDB 3 Mtr5 300 I 0.3 90

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 274

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

PDB Motor ID NP Load Coincidence Resulting Largest Intermittent

Rating Status Factor Load Load
(HP) (C/I/S)

PDB 3 Mtr7 400 C 1 400

PDB 3 Mtr8 500 I 0.3 150 500

PDB 3 Mtr17 500 C 1 500

Sum of Intermittent Loads with Factors 240

PDB 5 Total Intermittent Loading 500

Since the largest intermittent load is 500 hp, which is larger than 240, the total intermittent
loading of PDB 3 equals 500 hp.
In order to calculate the total running and peak load values (there are no standby loads):
Total running load of PDB 3= PEAK =  (Continuous + LARGEST INTERMITTENT LOAD)
loads = 900hp + 500hp = 1400hp

PDB 1
In order to calculate the total loading of PDB 1 (the upper bus), the software rolls up the
individual loads of all the downstream buses as follows:

PDB Motor NP Load Coincidence Resulting Largest Intermittent

ID Rating Status Factor Load Load
(HP) (C/I/S)

PDB 1 Mtr1 500 I 0.3 150

PDB 1 Mtr2 500 I 0.3 150

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 275

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

PDB Motor NP Load Coincidence Resulting Largest Intermittent

ID Rating Status Factor Load Load
(HP) (C/I/S)

PDB 1 Mtr3 500 C 1 500

PDB 1 Mtr4 1000 C 1 1000

Cable 13 Mtr5 300 I 0.3 90

Cable 13 Mtr7 400 C 1 400

Cable 13 Mtr8 500 I 0.3 150

Cable 13 Mtr17 500 C 1 500

Cable 11 Mtr9 500 I 0.3 150

Cable 11 Mtr10 600 I 0.3 180

Cable 11 Mtr11 800 I 0.3 240 800

Cable 11 M15 100 I 0.3 30

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 276

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

PDB Motor NP Load Coincidence Resulting Largest Intermittent

ID Rating Status Factor Load Load
(HP) (C/I/S)

Cable 11 M16 200 I 0.3 60

Cable 11 M17 200 I 0.3 60

Cable 11 M18 200 I 0.3 60

Sum of Intermittent Loads with Factors 1320

PDB 5 Total Intermittent Loading 1320

Since the largest intermittent load is 800 hp, which is smaller than 1320, the total loading
intermittent loading of PDB 1 equals 1320 hp.
Total running load of PDB 1= PEAK =  (Continuous + Intermittent load * 0.3) loads = [(Mtr3
+ Mtr4 + Mtr17) + (Mtr1 + Mtr2 + Mtr5 + Mtr8 + Mtr9 + Mtr10 + Mtr11 + Mtr15 + Mtr16 +
Mtr17 + Mtr18)] = [(1500hp +400hp + 500hp) + (1320hp)] = [240hp + 1320 hp] = 3720hp

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 277

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Example 2

When calculating the bus loading based on the largest non-continuous load, the software rolls
up the individual loads connected to the downstream buses and selects the largest load for each
non-continuous operating mode. In the example shown above, in order to calculate the total of
Bus A, all the loads of Bus B are rolled up to Bus A as if they were connected to Bus A.
Then, from M-1, M-2,M-3,M-4,M-6,M-7, M-100,M-200,M-300,M-400,M-500, the software will
compare the largest intermittent, standby and spare value as explained above.
The coincidence factor of both bus is: X=1;Y=0.3;Z=0.1
First, the software handles the lower bus (Bus B) and then rolls it upstream.

Bus B Loads
M-1 M-2 M-3 M-4r M-5 M-6 M-7

Consume 100 kw 100 kw 5.5 kw 5.5 kw 20 kw 20 kw 100 kw

d Active
Power

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 278

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

M-1 M-2 M-3 M-4r M-5 M-6 M-7

Consume 20 kvar 20 kvar 1 kvar 1 kvar 5 kvar 5 kvar 20 kvar

d Reactive
Power

Operating C C I I I Standby Standby

Mode

Largest X
Intermitten
t

Largest X
Standby

▪ The largest intermittent load on Bus B is M-5.

▪ The largest standby load on Bus B is M-7.
▪ Total intermittent active load on bus B= 0.3*(5.5kw+5.5kw+20 kw)=9.3 kw
Therefore:
9.3 kw <20 kw (M-5 largest intermittent active load)
Total Running Load of Bus B
The total active running normal load on Bus B:
Total (x*active continuous)+(largest active intermittent) = 100 kw+100 kw+20KW= 220 kw
The total reactive running normal load on Bus B:
Total (x*reactive continuous)+(largest reactive intermittent) = 20 kvar+20kvar+5Kvar=45
kvar
The total apparent running normal load on Bus B:
sqrt (220kw**2+45kvar**2)=224.6kva
Running normal power factor: 220/224.6= 0.98
Total Peak Load of Bus B
Total active standby load:
0.1*20kw+0.1*100kw= 12 kw
12 kw< 100 kw (M-7 largest active standby)
Therefore, the total active peak load on Bus B:
Total (x*active continuous)+(largest active intermittent)+(Largest active standby)= 100
kw+100 kw+20KW +100kw= 320 kw
The reactive power of the largest standby load M-7 is 20 kvar.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 279

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Therefore, the total reactive peak load on Bus B:

Total (x*reactive continuous)+(largest reactive intermittent)+(Largest reactive standby) =
40kvar+5kvar+20kvar= 65 kvar
The total peak load on bus B:
Sqrt(320kw**2+65kvar**2)= 326.5 kva
Peak power factor for Bus B:
320/326.5 = 0.98

Bus A Loads
The bus loading calculation for Bus A accounts for the loads rolled up from Bus B.
Bus B loading is stored in both the Incomer of Bus B and in the feeder circuit of Bus A
that feeds Bus B, stored in the various properties which can be seen in the Properties window.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 280

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

M-100 M-200 M-300 M-400r M-500 Bus B cnt Bus B Bus B

intrm standby

Consumed 100 kw 100 kw 50 kw 100 kw 110 kw 200 kw M-3 = 5.5 M-6 = 20

Active Power (M1=100kw kw kw
and
M-4 = 5.5 M-7 = 100
M2=100kw)
kw kw
M-5 = 20
kw

Consumed 20 kvar 20 kvar 10 kvar 20 kvar 40 kvar 40 kvar M-3 = 1 M-6 = 5

Reactive (M1=20kvar kvar kvar
Power and
M-4 = 1 M-7 = 20
M2=20kvar)
kvar kvar
M-5 = 5
kvar

Operating C I I Standby Standby C I Standby

Mode

Largest X
Intermittent

Largest X
Standby

▪ The largest intermittent load on Bus-A is M-200 with 100kw

▪ The largest standby load on Bus-A is M-500 with 110kw
Total intermittent Active load on bus A= 0.3*(100kw+50kw+31kw)= 54.3 kw
Therefore:
54.3 kw < 100 kw (M-200 largest intermittent active load)
The total active running normal load on Bus-A:
Total (x*active continuous)+(largest active intermittent) = (100 kw+200 kw)+100KW= 400kw
The total reactive running normal load on Bus-A:
Total (x*reactive continuous)+(largest reactive intermittent) = (20 kvar+40kvar)+20 kvar=
80kvar
The total running normal load of Bus-A:
sqrt (400**2+80**2)=sqrt(160000+6400)=407.9 kva
Running power factor: 400/407.9= 0.98

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 281

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Calculating the Total Peak Load on Bus-A

The software calculates the total active standby load and compares it to the largest standby
load:
0.1 * 100kw + 0.1 * 110kw + 0.1 * 120 = 33 kw
33 kw < 110 kw (M-500 largest active standby)
Therefore, the total active peak load on Bus-A:
Total {(x*active continuous)+(largest active intermittent)}+(Largest active standby) = 400
kw+110 kw= 510 kw
The reactive power of the largest standby load M-500 is 40kvar.
Therefore, the total reactive peak load on Bus-A:
Total (x*reactive continuous)+(largest reactive intermittent)+(Largest reactive standby) =
80kvar+40kvar = 120 kvar
Total Peak Load on Bus-A:
Sqrt(510kw**2+120kvar**2)= 523.9 kva
Peak power factor: 510/523.9 = 0.97

Calculating PDB Totals

If there are multiple buses in a given PDB, the software behaves as follows:
▪ The software does not sum up the buses. Instead, the software shows the total values for
each bus.
▪ The Multi-Sheet Switchboard Summary report does not sum up the buses on the PDB
Summary page. Instead, the report shows one PDB/Bus line for each bus within the PDB.

Bus Load Configuration Examples

The following configurations provide calculation examples that illustrate various calculation flows
and processes performed by the software. The calculation charts are contained in a PDF file
located in your Smart Electrical installation folder, for example C > Program Files > SmartPlant >
Electrical >Program > Bus Load Configuration Examples.PDF

Configurations A and B: a single load connected to a bus

The following explanation refers to the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., pages 5 - 9.
The example below illustrates a configuration in which a single load with different operation
modes is connected to a bus with or without a circuit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 282

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Load Power Parameters

A three-phase asynchronous motor loaded at 75% of its rated power connected to a bus by a
feeder circuit. The following parameters have been used:
▪ Motor rated power = 10 kW
▪ Break power = 7.5 kW
▪ Coincidence factors:
▪ X=1
▪ Y = 0.5
▪ Z = 0.1
▪ ZZ = 0.05
▪ Efficiency and power factor at full load = 0.82
You can connect the motor to the bus via a feeder (indirect connection) or without a feeder
(direct connection).
The following two images show the connection of Motor M-30 without a feeder.
In the Electrical Engineer:

In a single line diagram:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 283

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

The following two images show the connection of Motor M-2 to Bus A through a feeder.
In the Electrical Engineer:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 284

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

In a single line diagram:

The calculation results remain the same in both cases, regardless of whether the
connection is direct or indirect.

Configuration C: bus totals with or without converting

equipment losses
The following explanation refers to the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., pages 10 - 12.
The example below illustrates a configuration in which a single load is connected to a bus
through a feeder circuit and a VFD.
The load parameters are as follows:
▪ Motor rated power = 10 kW
▪ Break power = 7.5 kW
▪ Standby operation mode (Z = 0.1)
▪ Efficiency at full level = 0.9
▪ Power factor at full load = 0.85
When operating as a converting equipment device, the VFD parameters are as follows:
▪ Resistive power losses = 1 kW

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 285

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

▪ Reactive power losses = 1 kVAR

▪ Continuous operational mode (X = 1.0)
When operating as a load, the VFD parameters are as follows:
▪ Rated active power = 8 kW
▪ Rated reactive power = 2 kVAR
▪ Consumed reactive power = 1.5 kVAR
▪ Continuous operating mode (X = 1.0)
The following two images show the connection of Motor M-9.
In the Electrical Engineer:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 286

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

In a single line diagram:

Accounting for Converting Equipment Power Losses

When running bus load calculations, you can instruct the software to take into account
converting equipment power losses. The software adds these power losses to the upstream
feeding bus and circuits. The software treats them as continuous loads and includes their values
in both compensated and uncompensated calculations. The same losses are also taken into
account in the All Feeder Load Summary and PDB Load Summary reports.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 287

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

To account for converting equipment power losses, select the Account for converting
equipment power losses check box on the Reports tab of the Preferences dialog box.

See pages 10 and 11 of the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., file for bus total calculation
configuration examples with and without the converting equipment losses.

Defining Converting Equipment as Consumers

You can define converting equipment items as consumers. This allows you to include these
items in the calculations of load summaries, load associations, and when generating all feeder
load summary reports.
For details, see Define Converting Equipment as Consumers (on page 118).
Once you define the VFD as a consumer, the load properties of the converting equipment
replace the load parameters of the loads that are connected downstream of the VFD. The
operation mode and coincidence factors that are used for the bus totals are now derived from
the VFD and not from the downstream loads. See page 12 of the Bus Load Configuration
Examples.pdf., for calculation examples with converting equipment defined as consumers.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 288

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Configuration D: bus totals accounting for load or bus

coincidence factors
The following explanation refers to the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., pages 13 - 14.
This example is based on a configuration of multiple loads with different operation modes
connected to the same bus.
Smart Electrical enables you to calculate compensated loads in two ways. You can do one of
the following:
▪ Use the coincidence factor of each individual load. When calculating the compensated load
values, the software multiplies the raw uncompensated load kW and kVAR values by the
load coincidence factors. See the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., page 12.
▪ Use the average coincidence factors of the bus. When calculating the compensated load
values, the software multiplies the raw uncompensated load kW and kVAR values by the
coincidence factors as defined in the properties of the buses that these loads are connected
to. Make sure that you specify these coincidence factors for each bus. See the Bus Load
Configuration Examples.pdf., page 13.
Loads that are connected to a bus through circuits that are defined as disconnected
do not contribute to the bus load summary calculation.

Configuration E: a bus with mixed loads

The following explanation refers to the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., page 16.
This example illustrates how Smart Electrical handles the calculation of a bus load summary of
several loads that have a variety of load parameters.
In the images below, note that the power parameters are rolled up to the bus from the loads that
are connected to the bus in various ways: directly, through converting equipment, and the total
from another bus on a lower level.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 289

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

In the Electrical Engineer:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 290

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

In a single line diagram:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 291

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Configuration F: coupled buses

The following explanation refers to the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., pages 17 - 19.
The images below display a typical situation in which two buses that have the same voltage are
tied by coupler and riser circuits.
In the Electrical Engineer:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 292

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

In a single line diagram:

Smart Electrical makes it possible to calculate the total of bus loads for coupled buses in one of
three ways depending on your report preference setting:
Do not include coupled buses — Includes in the calculation only those loads that are
connected to the current bus and does not include the loads that are connected on the
redundant buses. See the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., page 17.
Include coupled buses connected by couplers only — Includes in the calculation the loads
connected on the current bus as well as loads connected on all the redundant buses that are
connected to the current bus by a coupler circuit. See the Bus Load Configuration
Examples.pdf., page 18.
Include coupled buses connected by couplers and risers — Includes in the calculation the
loads of the current bus as well as the loads on all the redundant buses that are connected to
the current bus by coupler and riser circuits. See the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf.,
page 19.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 293

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Configuration G: loads powered by an alternative power

source
The following explanation refers to the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., page 20.
Smart Electrical allows you to specify two power sources for equipment: a primary source and
an alternative source. When calculating a bus load summary, note the following:
▪ Alternative source circuit mode is automatically set to Disconnected by the software.
▪ Loads that are connected to circuits for which the circuit mode value is Disconnected
appear in bus load summaries, but the software does not take those loads into account in
the total load calculation.
▪ If a load is connected to a dual power source that originates from the same feeding
upstream bus, the software does not count such a load twice and accounts for it correctly in
load summaries and other load calculations.
▪ For batch load association calculations, a load connected to a circuit in Disconnected mode
is only displayed in the Associated loads data window of the Bus Load Association
dialog box. Such a load does not appear in the Calculation results group box. There is no
need to set the circuit mode as Connected or Disconnected for loads that have an
alternative power source. The software automatically sets the circuit mode of these loads to
Disconnected.
For more information, see Using Dual Source Power Supplies (on page 133) and Associate a
Dual Power Supply with an Equipment Item (on page 134).
The following is an example of a load connected to a dual power supply where load M2 is
connected to the main feeder F-11 and an alternative feeder F-12 on the same bus.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 294

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

In the Electrical Engineer:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 295

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

In a single line diagram:

Configuration H: loads connected in parallel

The following explanation refers to the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., page 21.
Starting from v2009 SP3, Smart Electrical supports parallel connection of loads. (For details,
see Define Parallel Equipment (on page 238).) Once a number of loads have been connected to
the same feeder, the software treats them as loads connected directly to a given bus. These
loads are taken into account whenever you perform a bus load calculation.
The example below illustrates a configuration in which three motors have been connected to the
same feeder

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 296

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

In the Electrical Engineer:

In a single line diagram:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 297

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Configuration I: multiple loads connected by a junction box

The following explanation refers to the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., pages 22- 23.
The example below illustrates a configuration in which three motors have been connected to the
same feeder circuit through a junction box or local panel. Such a connection is treated as a type
of parallel connection. As in a parallel connection, each load is connected through a junction box
or local panel and the operating mode of each load is different from the operating mode of the
other loads connected to that junction box.
In the Electrical Engineer:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 298

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

In a single line diagram:

Configuration J: loads connected in a daisy-chain pattern

The following explanation refers to the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., page 24.
Smart Electrical makes it possible to connect several loads in a daisy-chain pattern. (For details,
see Create a Daisy-Chain Connection Pattern (on page 241).) Once a number of loads have
been connected in a daisy-chain pattern, the software treats them as loads connected directly to
a given bus. These loads are taken into account whenever you perform a bus load calculation.
The example below illustrates a configuration in which three motors have been connected in a
daisy-chain pattern.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 299

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

In the Electrical Engineer:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 300

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

In a single line diagram:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 301

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Configuration K: a space heater connected to an auxiliary

contact
The following explanation refers to the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., page 25.
The following example refers to a situation where a space heater is connected to an auxiliary
contact. The space heater and the auxiliary contact are powered from a bus that does not feed
the main equipment. The space heater bus and the main equipment bus do not have to belong
to the same PDB. These two buses can belong to different PDBs if needed.
In the Electrical Engineer:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 302

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

In a single line diagram:

Correcting Bus Power Factors Using Capacitor Banks

When running batch load association and calculating the electrical consumption for a bus, the
software allows you to calculate the consumed reactive power of a capacitor bank that needs to
be associated with the selected bus so that you can correct the power factor of that
bus. Creating a capacitor bank that has the consumed reactive power you just calculated and
associating this capacitor bank with the current bus corrects the bus power factor when
calculating the electrical consumption of the bus.
The formula that Smart Electrical uses to calculate the required correction factor is as follows:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 303

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Where:
▪ Qcb = Reactive Power of the Capacitor Banks to be connected to the bus in order to have
the required cosd.
▪ P = The active power drawn from the bus.
▪ Q = The reactive power drawn from the bus before connecting the power factor
compensating capacitor.
1. On the Bus tab of the Batch Load Association dialog box, type a value under Required
power factor. This value determines the required power factor for the selected bus.
2. Click the Loads tab.
3. Under Electrical consumption using coincidence factors, select the For all feeders
option in order to make sure that the software performs a calculation that includes all
downstream loads and not only the ones that are connected directly. Also, the software will
recalculate the electrical consumption and the required corrective reactive power for the
selected bus.
If you choose to close the Batch Load Association dialog box at this time, you can
also run this calculation by clicking Actions > Calculate Bus Loads > Selected PDBs or
Buses.
4. On the Batch Load Association dialog box, click the Loads tab.
5. Under Required capacitor correction [kVAR], copy the calculated value. You can copy
either total running load or the total peak load value as you require.
6. Click OK on the Batch Load Association dialog box.
7. In the Electrical Index, create a new capacitor bank. For details, see Create Static
Electrical Equipment.
8. On the Common Properties dialog box for the new capacitor bank, click the Load Data
tab.
9. Under Rated power and Absorbed power fields, paste in the Required capacitor
correction [kVAR] value that you copied from the Batch Load Association dialog box.
10. Click the Feeder Data tab and associate the current capacitor bank with the bus for which
you ran the electrical consumption calculation.
11. Click OK to accept the values you entered and close the Common Properties dialog box.
You can now open the Batch Load Association dialog box and recalculate the bus
load consumption for that bus. Under Power factor@Run and Power factor@Peak, you can
see the newly calculated power factor values for the current bus associated with the new
capacitor bank while the value under Required capacitor correction value is zero or close to
zero.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 304

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Handling Special Cases of Bus Load Calculations

You should pay special attention to the way Smart Electrical treats and takes into account
certain item types when calculating bus loading.
▪ Three-winding transformers — A bus feeding a two-winding transformer takes into
account both the secondary and tertiary connected loads and buses.
▪ Transfer switch (a special PDB with two incomers and one feeder) — Make sure that
you connect the incomer circuit that you require.
▪ Equipment connected to an alternative power source — The software treats equipment
with two power sources as one load for each of the power paths. See the Bus Load
Configuration Examples.pdf., page 20.
Bus Drill Down Enabled property — If, in the Properties window, you set this property to
False, the software does not roll up any of its connected direct or indirect loads. Instead, the
software takes into account the rated and consumed power values that you have entered
manually in the Properties window of each respective bus.

Bus Load Calculation Preferences

Smart Electrical calculates bus load summaries according to the preferences that you set on the
Load Summaries and Reports tab of the Preferences dialog box. The options are as follows:
▪ Use each load coincidence factor — Uses the coincidence factor of each individual load
to calculate the total connected loads on the bus. When calculating the compensated load
values, the software multiplies the raw uncompensated load kW and kVAR values by the
load coincidence factors. See the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., page 13.
▪ Use Bus PDB coincidence factor — Uses the coincidence factor of the PDB bus to
calculate the total connected loads on the bus. When calculating the compensated load
values, the software multiplies the raw uncompensated load kW and kVAR values by the
coincidence factors as defined in the properties of the buses that these loads are connected
to. Make sure that you specify these coincidence factors for each bus. See the Bus Load
Configuration Examples.pdf., page 14.
▪ Calculate according to the largest non-continuous load — Instructs the software to
calculate the total normal running and peak loading according to the largest non-continuous
load connected to the current bus. For details, see Calculate Bus Loading According to the
Largest Non-Continuous Load (on page 270).
▪ Do not include coupled buses — When calculating bus totals, the software ignores
adjacent coupled buses (regardless of whether they are connected via couplers or
risers). The software does not take into account these adjacent buses and treats them as if
they are disconnected. See the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., page 17.
▪ Include coupled buses connected by couplers only — When calculating bus totals, the
software includes adjacent bus loads connected via couplers and excludes the buses
connected via risers. See the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., page 18.
▪ Include coupled buses connected by couplers and risers — When calculating bus
totals, the software includes adjacent bus loads connected via couplers and risers (full
redundancy). See the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., page 19.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 305

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

▪ Account for converting equipment power losses — When running bus load calculations,
allows you to instruct the software to calculate the total electrical consumption taking into
account converting equipment power losses. The software adds these power losses to the
upstream feeding circuits and bus and takes them into account as continuous loads. The
same losses are also taken into account in the All Feeder Load Summary and PDB Load
Summary reports. See the Bus Load Configuration Examples.pdf., page 10.
▪ Disconnected Circuits — If the mode of a circuit is set to Disconnected, Smart Electrical
ignores this circuit in the calculation regardless of the preference settings. See the Bus Load
Configuration Examples.pdf., page 15.

Calculating Electrical Consumption After Batch Load

Association
When running batch load association and calculating electrical consumption for all the feeders,
Smart Electrical uses the same algorithm as the bus loading calculation. Note that all the
values for the electrical consumption in batch load association are consumed and compensated
for their coincidence factors whether for individual loads or the current bus as set in the
preferences.
Also, the software calculates line current and power factors at run and peak conditions using
consumed values.
Smart Electrical calculates electrical consumption for a selected bus, all the rolled-up buses, and
the loads associated with that bus.
The software takes into account any existing equipment that is connected in
parallel.
The software makes all the calculations based on the phase filter in the batch load association.
As with bus load calculations, Smart Electrical stores the calculated electrical consumption
results in the database.

Flow of Activities for Bus Load Calculations

The following is a suggested flow of activities for bus load calculations.
1. In the Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer, select the buses or power distribution
boards (PDBs) for which you want to calculate a bus load summary. You can select one
bus or multiple buses as the starting point of the calculation.
2. Do one of the following to start the calculation process:
▪ Calculate the bus loads for the selected buses or PDBs. (see "Calculate Bus Loads for
Selected Buses or PDBs" on page 311)
▪ Calculate the bus loads for all the buses in the current plant. (see "Calculate Bus Loads
for All the Buses in the Plant" on page 311)
▪ Generate a calculation report for the buses you selected (see "Generate an All Feeder
Load Summary Report" on page 312).
The displayed calculation results are correct only for a specific situation. That
is, the results are true only for the loads that you selected and the property values that you
entered for these loads. The preference settings that you chose for these loads also affect the

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 306

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

calculation results. The calculation results do not change automatically if you add a load,
change a load property, or select a different preference setting. To get up-to-date results, you
have run the calculation again.

▪ You can customize the All Feeder Load Summary report according to your needs. For
details, see Customizing the All Feeder Load Summary Report (on page 676).
▪ You use the calculation results as a basis for equipment sizing.

Bus, Circuit, and Converting Equipment Properties

After calculating bus loading, Smart Electrical uses the following bus, circuit, and converting
equipment properties to store the calculation results:

Bus Properties
Calculated Line Currents @ Using Coincidence Factor Compensated Load Data
▪ LineCurrent_Normal_Consumed
▪ LineCurrent_Peak_Consumed
▪ LineCurrent_Normal_Rated
▪ LineCurrent_Peak_Rated

Calculated Total Rolled Up Bus Loading @ Using Consumed Load Data Compensated by
Coincidence Factors
▪ ComplRolledupRunActiveLoad_Consumed
▪ CompRolledupRunReactiveLoad_Consumed
▪ CompRolledupRunApparentLoad_Consumed
▪ CompRolledupRunPowerFactor_Consumed
▪ CompRolledupPeakActiveLoad_Consumed
▪ CompRolledupPeakReactiveLoad_Consumed
▪ CompRolledupPeakApparentLoad_Consumed
▪ CompRolledupPeakPowerFactor_Consumed

Calculated Total Rolled Up Bus Loading @ Using Rated Load Data Compensated by
Coincidence Factors
▪ CompRolledupRunActiveLoad_Rated
▪ CompRolledupRunReactiveLoad_Rated
▪ CompRolledupRunApparentLoad_Rated
▪ CompRolledupRunPowerFactor_Rated
▪ CompRolledupPeakActiveLoad_Rated

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 307

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

▪ CompRolledupPeakReactiveLoad_Rated
▪ CompRolledupPeakApparentLoad_Rated
▪ CompRolledupPeakPowerFactor_Rated

Calculated Total Rolled Up Bus Loading @ Using Consumed Load Data Without
Compensation of Coincidence Factors
▪ UncompRolledupRunActiveLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupRunReactiveLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupRunApparentLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupRunPowerFactor_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupPeakActiveLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupPeakReactiveLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupPeakApparentLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupPeakPowerFactor_Consumed

Calculated Total Rolled Up Bus Loading @ Using Rated Load Data Without Compensation
of Coincidence Factors
▪ UncompRolledupRunActiveLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupRunReactiveLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupRunApparentLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupRunPowerFactor_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupPeakActiveLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupPeakReactiveLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupPeakApparentLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupPeakPowerFactor_Rated

Calculated Total Rolled Up Bus Loading per Operating Modes @ Using Consumed Load
Data with Compensation of Coincidence Factors
▪ CompRolledupContinuousActiveLoad_Consumed
▪ CompRolledupContinuousReactiveLoad_Consumed
▪ CompdRolledupIntermittentActiveLoad_Consumed
▪ CompRolledupIntermittentReactiveLoad_Consumed
▪ CompRolledupStandbyActiveLoad_Consumed
▪ CompRolledupStandbyReactiveLoad_Consumed
▪ CompRolledupSpareActiveLoad_Consumed
▪ CompRolledupSpareReactiveLoad_Consumed

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 308

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Calculated Total Rolled Up Bus Loading per Operating Modes @ Using Rated Load Data
with Compensation of Coincidence Factors
▪ CompRolledupContinuousActiveLoad_Rated
▪ CompRolledupContinuousReactiveLoad_rated
▪ CompdRolledupIntermittentActiveLoad_Rated
▪ CompRolledupIntermittentReactiveLoad_Rated
▪ CompRolledupStandbyActiveLoad_Rated
▪ CompRolledupStandbyReactiveLoad_Rated
▪ CompRolledupSpareActiveLoad_Rated
▪ CompRolledupSpareReactiveLoad_Rated

Calculated Total Rolled Up Bus Loading per Operating Modes @ Using Consumed Load
Data Without Compensation of Coincidence Factors
▪ UncompRolledupContinuousActiveLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupContinuousReactiveLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupIntermittentActiveLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupIntermittentReactiveLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupStandbyActiveLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupStandbyReactiveLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupSpareActiveLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupSpareReactiveLoad_Consumed

Calculated Total Rolled Up Bus Loading per Operating Modes @ Using Rated Loads Data
Without Compensation of Coincidence Factors
▪ UncompRolledupContinuousActiveLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupContinuousReactiveLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupIntermittentActiveLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupIntermittentReactiveLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupStandbyActiveLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupStandbyReactiveLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupSpareActiveLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupSpareReactiveLoad_Rated

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 309

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Circuit Properties
Calculated Total Rolled Up Circuit Loading per Operating Modes @ Using Consumed Load
Data Without Compensation of Coincidence Factors
▪ UncompRolledupContinuousActiveLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupContinuousReactiveLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupIntermittentActiveLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupIntermittentReactiveLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupStandbyActiveLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupStandbyReactiveLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupSpareActiveLoad_Consumed
▪ UncompRolledupSpareReactiveLoad_Consumed

Calculated Total Rolled Up Circuit Loading per Operating Modes @ Using Rated Load Data
Without Compensation of Coincidence Factors
▪ UncompRolledupContinuousActiveLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupContinuousReactiveLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupIntermittentActiveLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupIntermittentReactiveLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupStandbyActiveLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupStandbyReactiveLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupSpareActiveLoad_Rated
▪ UncompRolledupSpareReactiveLoad_Rated

Converting Equipment Properties

Converting Equipment Properties
▪ ActiveLosses
▪ ReactiveLosses

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 310

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Calculate Bus Loads for Selected Buses or PDBs

To facilitate the sizing of electrical equipment such as generators, distribution transformers and
their feeder cables, buses, UPSs and so forth, Smart Electrical enables you to calculate bus
load totals and store the results in the database. The software provides for a fast way to
calculate the bus load totals for all the existing buses in the plant. Alternatively, you can select
the PDBs or buses for which you want to perform the bus load calculation. Smart Electrical
stores the calculation results in the database thus allowing you to generate an all feeder load
summary report for the calculated loads. The following procedure shows how to calculate load
totals for selected buses or PDBs.
1. In the Electrical Index, select the buses or PDBs for which you want to make the
calculation.
2. Click Actions > Calculate Bus Loads > Selected PDBs or Buses.

▪ The software makes the calculation and stores the results in the database.
▪ You can now generate an all feeder load summary for the selected PDBs or buses.
▪ The software takes into account any existing equipment that is connected in parallel.

Calculate Bus Loads for All the Buses in the Plant

To facilitate the sizing of electrical equipment such as generators, distribution transformers and
their feeder cables, buses, UPSs and so forth, Smart Electrical enables you to calculate bus
load totals and store the results in the database. The software provides for a fast way to
calculate the bus load totals for all the existing buses in the plant. Alternatively, you can select
the PDBs or buses for which you want to perform the bus load calculation. Smart Electrical
stores the calculation results in the database thus allowing you to generate an all feeder load
summary report for the calculated loads. This procedure shows how to calculate load totals for
all the buses in your plant.
▪ Click Actions > Calculate Bus Loads > All Plant Buses.

▪ The software makes the calculation and stores the results in the database.
▪ You can now generate an all feeder load summary for the plant PDBs or buses.
▪ The software takes into account any existing equipment that is connected in parallel.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 311

 Calculating Bus Load Summaries

Generate an All Feeder Load Summary Report

This procedure shows how to generate an all feeder load summary report for the selected PDBs
or buses. The software generates the report based on the values that it calculated for the PDBs
or buses that were saved to the database after the calculation.
Prior to generating your report, define your report settings on the on the Load
Summaries and Reports tab of the Preferences dialog box, select the following options:
▪ To take into account the coincidence factors, select Compensated values. The
calculation results will be multiplied by the coincidence factor of each load or by the
coincidence factor of the bus depending on the selected preference option.
▪ To ignore coincidence factors, select Uncompensated values. The calculation results
will not be multiplied by the coincidence factor of each load or by the coincidence factor
of the bus.
▪ To display rated electrical consumption, select Rated values. The calculation results
will be based on the rated values of the electrical consumption values of the selected
load.
▪ To display consumed electrical consumption, select Consumed values. The calculation
results will be based on the consumed values of the electrical consumption values of the
selected load.
Generate the report
1. In the Electrical Index, do one of the following:
▪ Select all power distribution boards in your plant.
▪ Select the buses or PDBs for which you ran the bus load calculation.
2. Click Reports > Plant Reports.
3. On the Plant Reports dialog box, select All Feeder Load Summary Report and click OK.
The software takes into account any existing equipment that is connected in parallel.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 312

SECTION 13

Drawings in Smart Electrical

This section includes topics that deal with various common actions that you can perform with
drawings in Smart Electrical.

Drawing Templates
Drawing templates are required for single line diagrams and schematics. A drawing template
specifies the page size and orientation of the drawing, and can include a border and title
block. Several standard drawing templates are delivered with the software. You usually create
a new drawing based on one of these existing templates. However, you can create new
templates or customize existing templates to meet your particular needs. This is accomplished
inside Smart Electrical.
The default storage locations for single line diagram and schematic templates are specified in
Options Manager. If you create a new template, you store it on the server in order for it to be
available for drawing creation.
Also, the software comes with a set of files containing borders and title blocks that fit the
delivered drawing templates. If you create a new template, you may also need to create a new
title block that fits your template correctly and which contains the appropriate information. You
can create title blocks in Catalog Manager or in a suitable graphics application such as
SmartSketch.
The software embeds symbols that you insert in the template. For this reason, if you
modify a border or title block symbol and you want the change to appear in all of your templates,
you must reinsert the symbol in each template individually.

Create a Drawing Template

To complete this procedure, you must modify the UAC security option to be
granted the same rights as the Administrator user. For more information see Set UAC Admin
Security (on page 314).
1. Click File > New > Template.
2. Select the new blank template and click File > Sheet Setup.
3. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, select the required page size and orientation for the
template from the list; for example, A4 Wide.
4. To add a border or title block, click Edit > Insert > Symbol.

▪ You must create the border or title block file in advance with suitable dimensions for the
template using Catalog Manager or a suitable graphics application such as
SmartSketch.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 313

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

▪ The inserted symbol is embedded in the template. For this reason, if you modify a
border or title block symbol and you want the change to appear in all of your templates,
you must reinsert the symbol in each template individually.
▪ For composite drawings, make sure that you select a title block symbol created
especially for composite drawings.
5. On the Select Symbol File dialog box, navigate to the required file and click Open to
display it in the drawing view.
6. To position the border on the template, do one of the following:
▪ Press the ESCAPE key to lock the border on to the template in the correct position
relative to the origin.
▪ Drag and drop the border in the position you require.
7. To add text to the template, click Edit > Insert > Text.
8. You can add other drawing objects in the appropriate file format or text if required by clicking
Edit > Insert > Symbol.
9. Click File > Save and type a name for the file in the required location.

▪ Drawing templates are saved in a special format that is recognized only in Smart
Electrical. Files in the format have an .spe extension, and you can only create them in
Smart Electrical.
▪ Make sure that you save your templates in the locations specified in the Locations window
in Options Manager. Note that templates for composite drawings reside in a different
location from the conventional drawing templates. See the Options Manager User's Guide
for further information.

Set UAC Admin Security

Even if you are a member of the Administrators group with Full Control privileges, you will need
to modify the UAC security option to be granted the same rights as the Administrator user.
1. Open the Control Panel and select Administrative Tools.
2. Open Local Security Policy.
3. In the tree view, click to expand Local Policies > Security Options.
4. In the right pane, scroll down to the option User Account Control: Run all administrators in
Admin Approval Mode (enabled by default).
5. Right-click this option and on the shortcut menu, click Properties.
6. Click the Disabled radio button.
7. Restart your computer.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 314

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Open a Drawing Template

1. Click File > Open > Template.
There two template types that can be used with Smart Electrical drawings:
conventional templates and Enterprise templates. Enterprise templates are mainly intended
for the use with composite drawings and they are compatible with other applications.
Conventional templates are intended for the use with conventional (non-composite)
drawings. You can, however, use Enterprise templates with conventional drawings and vice
versa.
2. Navigate to the location where your templates are stored and select the required template.
3. To edit the template, click File > Sheet Setup.
4. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, select the required page size and orientation for the
template from the list; for example, A4 Wide.
5. To add a symbol to the template, click Edit > Insert > Symbol.
You must create the drawing object in advance using Catalog Manager or a suitable
graphics application such as SmartSketch.
6. On the Select Symbol File dialog box, navigate to the required file and click Open to
display it in the drawing view.
7. Move the drawing object to the required position on the template.
8. To add text to the template, click Edit > Insert > Text.
9. Add or delete other drawing objects and text as required.
10. Click File > Save As and choose a name and location for the file.

Title Block Properties for Composite Drawings

You specify properties in your title block by adding them in Catalog Manager. This topic
describes all the available properties that you can use in title blocks of composite drawings.

Default (General Properties)

Property Notes

Document Name Drawing name

Document Name Complete Name Full name of the drawing

Current Time

Current Date

Date Created

Date Modified

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 315

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Document Data (Document Data Properties)

Property Notes

ItemTag Drawing item tag

Name Drawing name

ItemTagFullName Full name of the drawing

SP_ScaleFactor Scale factor

Description

DocumentToPublishFlag Allow publishing of the document

ItemStatus Document status as defined in the Properties

window for a document

DocumentType Document type as defined in the Data Dictionary

DocumentCategory Document category as defined in the Data

Dictionary

DocumentSubType Document Sub-Type

PlantGroup.Name Plant name

SheetName Sheet name

SheetOrder Sheet order

TotalNumberOfSheets Total number of sheets

Focal Item
Property Notes

Equipment.ElectricalEquipmentClass Focal Electrical Equipment Class

Equipment.ElectricalEquipmentSubClass Focal Electrical Equipment sub-Class

Equipment.ElectricalEquipmentType Focal Electrical Equipment Type

Equipment.ItemTag Focal Item Tag

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 316

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Revision
Property Notes

Revision Name

Created By

Revision Number

Revision Description

Revised By Name of the person who revised the drawing.

Revision Date Date when a revision was made.

Checked By Name of the person who checked the

revision.

Checked Date Date when the revision was checked.

Approved By Name of the person who approved the

revision.

Approval Date Date when the revision was approved.

If you have enterprise title block symbols that have a downward revision
growth, you can convert these title block symbols to the upward growth by running a conversion
utility in Catalog Manager. For details, see the Catalog Manager User Guide> Change the Order
of a Title Block Label (Note at the bottom of the topic).

General
Property Notes

SiteName Site name

PlantName Plant name

ActiveOperatingCaseName Active operating case name

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 317

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Title Block Info (Title Block Information)

Property Notes

IssueNo Issue number

IssuedRevision Issued revision

IssueDate Issue date

IssueReason Issue reason

Title Block Macros for Conventional Drawings

You specify macros in your title block by adding SmartText from the Catalog Manager and
defining the appropriate macro in the user properties. For all the available properties in each
macro category, you should refer to the Data Dictionary. This topic describes a number of
examples of macros that you can use in Smart Electrical drawing title blocks.

Plant Group Macros

The following macros specify the plant group properties in your title blocks. You can specify
any plant hierarchy level according to the settings of your plant that you defined in the Data
Dictionary. Plant hierarchy macros use the syntax [Plant Group Name].[Property]. The
following examples illustrate the use of this syntax for the name property:

Macro Notes

&Plant.name Retrieves plant name

&Area.name. Retrieves area name

&Unit.name. Retrieves unit name

&Subsystem.name. Retrieves subsystem name

Document Property Macros

Document property macros use the syntax Document.[Property]. The following macros are
available for specifying document properties:

Macro Notes

&Document.ItemTag Document drawing number as defined in the

Data Dictionary

&Document.Description Document description

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 318

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Macro Notes

&Document.LastRevision The latest revision of a document

&Document.DocumentCategory Document category as defined in the Data

Dictionary

&Document.DocumentType Document type as defined in the Data Dictionary

&Document.ItemStatus Document status as defined in the Properties

window for a document

&Document.YYY User-defined field name where YYY is any other

property defined in the Data Dictionary

&Document.ActiveCaseName Retrieves the name of the active operating case.

Document Revision Macros

Document revision macros use the syntax Revision.[Property].[Sequence], where [Sequence] is
a number that specifies the sequence of the revision. This way, you can arrange revisions in
ascending or descending order in the title block. Use the following macros to specify the
document revisions in your document title blocks:

Macro Notes

&Revision.RevisionNumber.x Revision number

&Revision.RevisionDate.x Revision date

&Revision.CreateBy.x Created by

&Revision.CheckBy.x Checked by

&Revision.RevisionDescription.x Revision description

&Revision.ZZZ.x User-defined field name where ZZZ is any other

property defined in the Data Dictionary.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 319

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Macros for Multi-Sheet Schematics

Multi-sheet schematic macros include the total number of sheets in a schematic drawing, the
sequence number of a particular sheet, and a sheet description. Use the following macros to
specify properties of multiple sheets in the title blocks of your schematic drawings:

Macro Notes

&Sheet.Quantity Defines the total number of sheets in a multi-sheet

schematic

&Sheet.Number Defines the sequence number of a particular sheet

&Sheet.Name Sheet name

When generating a report, for the correct macros to be retrieved on the title block of
your drawing, your working environment must be the same as the drawing. For example, if the
objects on your drawing were created in a section of your plant named Unit 1, you must be
working in the Unit 1 environment when generating the report, otherwise the software cannot
retrieve the correct macros.

Enable the Renaming of Sheet Tabs in a Drawing

The following procedure explains how to add a new macro to an appropriate drawing template.
This macro will then enable you to rename the Sheet tabs in Smart Electrical drawings so that
you can have different page names in multi-page drawings.
Do the following to add the name macro to a template:
1. In Catalog Manager, open the title block symbol that is used in one of your templates.
The symbol files are located in your reference data folder.
2. Add the following macro to the title block in the symbol:
&Sheet.Name
3. Save the symbol and close Catalog Manager.
4. Insert the title block symbol into an appropriate template.
You can now rename the Sheet tabs in the drawings that use the template into which you
inserted the new macro.
For details see:
▪ Rename the Sheet Tabs in a Schematic Drawing (on page 467)
▪ Rename the Sheet Tabs in an SLD Drawing (on page 525)
▪ Rename the Sheet Tabs in a CBD Drawing (on page 529)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 320

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Working With Drawings

Smart Electrical allows you to generate the following drawing types (conventional and
composite):
▪ Single line diagrams (SLDs)
▪ Electrical analysis SLDs
▪ Schematic drawings
▪ Miscellaneous drawings (any drawing that was created in SmartSketch or some other CAD
application)
▪ PDB layout drawings
▪ Wiring diagrams
▪ Cable block diagrams
After generation, you can view or manipulate the drawings before saving them. Among the
options available to you are:
▪ Viewing Drawings (on page 323)
▪ Finding Drawings (see "Find a Selected Plant Item in the Electrical Index or Electrical
Engineer" on page 322)
▪ Background Printing of Drawings
▪ Aligning Objects (see "Aligning Drawing Objects" on page 455)
Note that Smart Electrical drawings are governed by user access rights. When
opening or generating a drawing from the Electrical Index, one of the following access rights
can be in effect for specific users:
▪ None — Users cannot create, open, or view the drawings.
▪ Read-Only — Users can only open existing drawings for viewing, printing, and comparing.
No changes can be made to the drawing properties or settings.
▪ Modify Settings — Users can open, edit, print, rename, change the document properties,
and save the drawing. Users are unable to delete a drawing.
▪ Full Control — Users have full control when working with drawing, including the deletion of
drawings.
For more details, see Smart Engineering Manager User's Guide > User Access >Smart
Electrical User Rights.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 321

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Find a Selected Plant Item in the Electrical Index or

Electrical Engineer
This procedure shows you how to find plant items that appear on your SLD or CBD in the
Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer.
1. On your drawing, select the item you want to find in the Electrical Index or Electrical
Engineer.
Make sure that the Electrical Index and Electrical Engineer are open.
2. Right-click the selected item, and from the shortcut menu select Find in Electrical Index or
Find in Electrical Engineer. The software opens the folder where the item is stored and
highlights the plant item.
Smart Electrical searches for the required item, first in the custom folders, and then in
the All Items folder.

Plant Item Representation in Drawings

The software uses the following system to represent plant items in all types of drawings that use
symbols (SLDs, CBDs, and wiring diagrams).
1. First, Smart Electrical looks for a custom symbol associated with a particular plant item.
2. If no custom symbol has been defined, the software looks for a symbol defined in Option
Manager's symbology.
3. If no symbology item has been defined for a particular plant item, the software uses the
shipped default symbol for the item type to which the plant item belongs.
4. If for some reason, the shipped default symbol cannot be found (someone moved it to

another folder or deleted it by mistake), the software uses a general default symbol

View Associated Drawings of an Item

This procedure allows you to select an item from the Electrical Index and view a list of all the
drawings that the item appears on. You can filter the results by drawing type and then open a
specific drawing.
1. On the Electrical Index, select the item you want to view its associated drawings.
2. Right-click, and on the shortcut menu, click Associated Drawings.
3. On the Associated Drawings dialog box, from the Drawing Type list, select the drawing
type you want to view.
4. Select a drawing from the Associated Drawings pane, and click Open Drawing.
If the selected drawing type is a single line diagram, the software only shows the
associated drawings of the selected item when the selected item is the main item of the single
line drawing, and not a secondary item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 322

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Show Related Items

This procedure explains how to show plant items that are related to the main items that you
want to use in your SLDs and CBDs. The Show Related Items command opens a new window
that shows just those items that are related to the main item, allowing for quick selection when
adding to your CBD.
1. On the Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer navigate to the item that you want to see its
related items.
2. Right-click on the item and from the shortcut menu, select Show Related Items in a New
Window.

▪ A new window opens showing the open folders of the selected item and all the related
items, you can then drag and drop these items onto your CBD in the same way as from the
Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer.
▪ To close the Related Items window, double-click on the blue title bar at the top of the
window and then click on the close icon.

Viewing Drawings
When you generate or open schematics or single line diagrams, you can zoom and pan the
diagram to view the areas of interest to you.

Zoom Area
To zoom in on a selected area, click Zoom Area on the main toolbar.

To select the area to zoom, drag over the area. You can redefine the zoom area position and
dimensions by moving the mouse pointer while continuing to hold down the mouse button.

Zoom In
To zoom in on a selected area, click Zoom In on the main toolbar.

Click over the area where you want to zoom in. The point where you click becomes the center
of the zoom-in area.

Zoom Out
To zoom in on a selected area, click Zoom Out on the main toolbar.

Click over the area where you want to zoom out. The point where you click becomes the center
of the zoom-out area. For

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 323

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Fit
To fit the drawing on the visible display area, click Fit on the main toolbar.

If you change the size of the display area, you must click the command again to make the
drawing fit the modified display.

Pan
To view different parts of the drawing in the visible display area, click Pan on the main toolbar.

You can move the drawing in the display area as required.

Restore a Drawing View

After zooming or panning a drawing, you can restore the drawing to the previous
view. Repeated selection of this option toggles between the previous and last views.

Background Printing of Drawings

Several options are available for printing out various types of drawings:
▪ Printing out a drawing that is currently open.
▪ Background printing of one or more drawings from the Electrical Index.
▪ Background printing of one or more drawings from the EDE.

Print out an Open Drawing

1. With the drawing open, do one of the following:
▪ Click File > Print.

▪ Click on the main toolbar.

2. On the Print dialog box, select your print settings and then click OK.

Background Printing of One or More Drawings from the Electrical Index

You can print out one or more drawings without opening them. Note that the software always
prints the latest data.
1. In the Electrical Index, select one or more drawings in the List View pane.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click File > Print.

▪ Click on the main toolbar.

▪ Right-click the selected drawings and then on the shortcut menu, click Print.
3. On the Print dialog box, select your print settings and then click OK.
If you have opened a drawing but you want to print out a number of other
drawings, make sure that application has its focus in the List View pane of the Electrical Index

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 324

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

and not in the open drawing. If you click in the open drawing, this will shift the focus to the
drawing and the application will print out the open drawing and not the drawings that you
selected in the List View pane of the Electrical Index.

Background Printing of One or More Drawings from the EDE

You can print out one or more drawings without opening them. Note that the software always
prints the latest data.
1. In the EDE, select one or more drawings that you want to print.
If you happen to select one or more registered reports among your
selection, the software will print out only the drawings and ignore the registered reports. An
appropriate message to that effect is displayed.
2. Right-click the selected drawings and then on the shortcut menu, click Print Drawings.
3. On the Print dialog box, select your print settings and then click OK.
If one of the selected drawings (regardless of whether you selected them in
the EDE or in the Electrical Index) is a multi-page schematic that has no content, the software
ignores that drawing and does not send it to the printer.

Save Drawings as External Files

You can save a composite drawing as external file outside of the Smart Electrical system. Apart
from being able to save an open drawing, you can select a number of drawings and save them
in batch mode.

Save an Open Drawing as an External File

1. Click File > Save As.
2. On the Save As dialog box, enter the appropriate file path where you want to save the
drawing.
3. Select the appropriate file format in which you want to save the drawing.
The following file formats are available:
▪ Microstation (*.dgn)
▪ AutoCAD (*.dxf)
▪ AutoCAD (*.dwg)
▪ PDF (*.pdf)
▪ Smart Electrical (*.spe)
4. Select the Save all layers check box if you want to save all the existing layers in the
drawing. Clear this check box if you want to save only the visible layers.
5. Click OK.

Save Several Drawings as External Files

This option allows you to select a number of drawings and save them as external files without
opening them.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 325

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

If one of the selected drawings is out of date, the software informs you of this
fact and prompts you to select an option for saving. You can either save the up-to-date or the
out-of-date version of the drawing.
1. In the Electrical Index or EDE, select one or more drawings.
You can select multiple drawings in the List View section of the Electrical Index
only if the drawings belong to the same type.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click File > Save As.
▪ Right-click the selection and then on the shortcut menu, click Save As.
3. On the Save As dialog box, enter the appropriate file path where you want to save the
drawing.
4. Select the appropriate file format in which you want to save the drawing.
The following file formats are available:
▪ Microstation (*.dgn)
▪ AutoCAD (*.dxf)
▪ AutoCAD (*.dwg)
▪ PDF (*.pdf)
▪ Smart Electrical (*.spe)
5. Select the Save all layers check box if you want to save all the existing layers in the
drawing. Clear this check box if you want to save only the visible layers.
6. Click OK.

Associate Custom Symbols with Plant Items

This procedure shows you how to associate custom symbols that already exist in Catalog
Manager. You associate custom symbols with plant items that you select in the Electrical
Index, EDE, or Reference Data Explorer. Also, you make the association for a specific drawing
type (single line diagram, wiring diagram, and so forth). The associated custom symbols will
then appear in the generated drawings for all the plant items that you selected.
Create your custom symbol using Catalog Manager or any other appropriate
tool. Then, place the image file in the default folder or its sub-folders where you store your
reference data symbols. You set the default symbol folder in the Smart Electrical Options
Manager. For more details, see Defining File Locations in the Smart Electrical Option Manager
User's Guide.
1. In the Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer, select the item tag you want to associate
with a custom symbol.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click Actions > Associate Custom Symbols.
▪ Right-click the selected item and then click Associate Custom Symbols on the
shortcut menu.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 326

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

3. On the Associate/Dissociate Custom Symbols dialog box, from the Drawing type list
select All drawings or a specific drawing type for which you want to define a custom
symbol. Your selection here determines the availability of drawing types in the Associated
symbols grid below.
4. Click Add to insert a new row.
5. In the Associated symbols grid, under Drawing Type click on a cell, and from the list
select an appropriate drawing type, for example Single Line Diagrams.

6. Under Drawing Type Filter, click on a cell, and then click .

You can use this feature to associate different custom symbols with the same plant
item depending on the properties of a specific drawing.
7. On the Select Filter dialog box, select a filter that matches the selected drawing type or
define a new filter if needed.
The selected filter name appears in the Drawing Type Filter cell.

8. Under Symbol, click .

9. Browse to the symbol (.sym) file you want to add, and select the file.
You can only choose symbols that are stored in the default folder and its
sub-folders.
10. Click OK.

▪ You can only choose symbols that are stored in the default folder, and its sub-folders. You
set the symbols default folder in the Smart Electrical Options Manager. For more details,
see Defining File Locations in the Smart Electrical Option Manager Users Guide, under
Using Options Manager, Defining File Locations, Defining File Locations.
▪ If, during the generation of a drawing, the software cannot find a referenced symbol for a
specific electrical item, the software uses the default symbol file (default.sym) to represent
the item. You specify default files in Options Manager.
▪ For guidelines about the creation of custom symbols in Catalog Manager, see Guidelines for
Creating SLD Symbols in Catalog Manager (on page 519).

Dissociate a Custom Symbol from Item Tags

This procedure shows you how to dissociate a custom symbol from item tags that you selected
in the Electrical Index, EDE, or Reference Data Explorer.
You can select multiple item tags if you need to dissociate several plant items
from custom symbols.
1. In the Electrical Index, EDE, or Reference Data Explorer, select the item tags you want to
dissociate the custom symbol from.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click Actions > Associate/Dissociate Custom Symbols.
▪ Right-click the selection > Associate/Dissociate Custom Symbols.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 327

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

3. On the Associate/Dissociate Custom Symbols dialog box, click on the row you want to
remove from the item tag.
4. Click Remove.
5. Click OK.
Removing a symbol disassociates the symbol from the document type and item tag, it
does not delete it from the template.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 328

SECTION 14
Drawing Basic Elements
An element is any line, circle, or other part of the drawing. The Draw toolbar on the left side of
the drawing sheet contains most of the buttons that you can use to draw any type of basic
geometric element—freeform shapes, lines, arcs, circles, and so forth.

You can place most basic elements with just a few clicks. For example, if you want to place a
line, you can click Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw toolbar. Then, click two points to
indicate where to start and finish the line. If you do not want to place another line, you can
right-click to end the operation.
Right-clicking ends most operations in the software.
You can also place the line by clicking Line/Arc Continuous and then clicking and
dragging the pointer. When you release the mouse, the line appears on the drawing sheet. With
this method, you drag the pointer as if it were a pen. You can draw most elements, such as
rectangles, circles, and arcs, with this method, sometimes called mouse-down drawing. The
mouse-down method is typically used to place most elements in conceptual sketching and
modification.
If you want to place a precise line, click Line/Arc Continuous , type values into the ribbon
that appears, and then press ENTER. You can then click on the drawing sheet to place the line.
This method, sometimes called mouse-up drawing, is typically used for precision placement and
when you want to draw elements that are related to each other.
In some cases, you might want to click points on the drawing sheet and type values in the ribbon
to place an element. For example, you can click Line/Arc Continuous and then type 3.0
in the Length box on the ribbon box and press ENTER to lock the length value.

When a line that is three inches long appears next to the pointer, you can click anywhere on the
drawing sheet to indicate where to place one end of the line. Then, you move the line around
and click again to set the line's orientation angle.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 329

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

If you do not like the results of what you drew, you can click Undo on the Main toolbar. If you
want to repeat an action, click Redo on the Main toolbar.
See Also
Drawing FreeForm Shapes (on page 371)
Drawing Lines (on page 330)
Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons (on page 364)
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 346)

Drawing Lines
If you want to place a line, you click Line/Arc Continuous or Line on the Draw toolbar. Then,
you click a point on the drawing sheet to indicate where to start the line. You click a second
point to indicate where to end the line. If you do not want to place another line, right-click to end
the operation.
You can also place the line by clicking Line/Arc Continuous or Line and then clicking and
dragging the pointer. When you release the mouse, the line appears on the drawing sheet.
If you want to place a precise line, you can click Line/Arc Continuous or Line, type values into
the ribbon that appears, and then press ENTER. You then click on the drawing sheet to place
the line.
You can also use a combination of clicks and ribbon input to place the line. For example, you
can type a line length in the ribbon box to lock the length value and then set the line's orientation
angle graphically. You can set the color and line type by clicking a style in the Style list box.

See Also
Draw a Line (on page 331)
Drawing Doublelines (on page 344)
Draw a Line with FreeSketch (on page 373)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 330

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Draw a Line
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous .
2. Click the point where you want the line to begin.
3. Click the point where you want the line to end. This action defines the length and rotation
angle of the line.
4. Do one of the following:
▪ Right-click to end the line.
▪ To draw a series of connected lines, click at the point where you want each line
segment to end, and then right- click.
If you close the shape, the command restarts so you begin drawing again.

▪ Instead of clicking to draw the end points, you can type values on the ribbon bar. You can
also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
▪ Instead of clicking several different points to draw a line, you can drag the pointer to draw a
line.
▪ You can press ESC to end a line or a line segment.
▪ If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles. If Maintain
Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
▪ When you use Point On in the SmartSketch dialog box, you can draw a line tangent to two
curved elements. First, click the curved element, then move the pointer through the tangent
intent zone on the first element. Use the SmartSketch dialog box options to establish a
tangent relationship to the other element. If you do not use the tangent intent zone, the line
connects to the elements, but is not tangent to them.
▪ You can use relationships to make an end point of a line tangent or perpendicular to the key
point or end point of another element.
▪ You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a
line.
See Also
Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 332)
Line Ribbon (on page 332)
Drawing Basic Elements (on page 329)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 331

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Line/Arc Continuous Command

Draws one line or a series of connected lines. When you draw a series of lines, the second
point of one line is the first point of the next line.
You can also draw a continuous series of lines and arcs that can be perpendicular or tangent to
each other. You can create an open or closed shape by drawing lines and arcs in any
combination. The last point of the line or arc is the first point of the next line or arc.
The Line/Arc Continuous command starts in line mode by default. If you want to
start by drawing an arc, press SHIFT + A. While drawing, you can toggle between the two
modes by pressing SHIFT + A for arc mode or pressing SHIFT + L for line mode.
See Also
Draw a Line (on page 331)
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs (on page 354)
Line Ribbon (on page 332)
Line Ribbon
Style — Sets the drawing style.
Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box.
Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Width — Sets the line width.
Line — Switches the drawing mode from arc to line.
Arc — Switches the drawing mode from line to arc.
Length — Sets the length of a line. This box accepts only positive values.
Angle — Sets the angle of a line. This box accepts positive or negative values. A positive value
is counterclockwise from the X axis, and a negative value is clockwise from the X axis.
See Also
Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 332)
Draw a Line (on page 331)
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs (on page 354)

Draw a Point
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Point .
2. Click to place a point.

▪ Instead of clicking to place the point, you can type values in the coordinate boxes on the
ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input. The coordinate
origin is located at the bottom left corner of the window.
▪ You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a
point.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 332

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

See Also
Drawing Basic Elements (on page 329)
Point Command (on page 333)

Point Command
Draws a point. The point is displayed as a filled circle.

See Also
Drawing Basic Elements (on page 329)
Draw a Point (on page 332)
Point Ribbon (on page 333)

Point Ribbon
Style — Sets the drawing style.
Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box.
Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Width — Sets the line width.
X — Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y — Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.
See Also
Drawing Basic Elements (on page 329)
Point Command (on page 333)
Draw a Point (on page 332)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 333

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Drawing Connectors
You can use a connector to join two elements together. Connector , located on both the
Schematic and Draw toolbars, provides a convenient way to draw schematic diagrams and
other types of drawings.

Connector allows you to place connectors anywhere that you need them. You can connect
lines, circles, symbols, or points in free space.
Some symbols are created with connect points. When you attach a connector to a connect
point, the connector automatically attaches to the point at a predefined angle. Otherwise, the
connector locates and attaches to a keypoint or point along any elements in the symbol.
The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as gray circles with Xs.
You can also modify the connector after you place it by inserting or moving a line segment,
inserting or moving a vertex, or moving an element with a connector.
There are special connector styles that you can use in your diagram. On the Connector
ribbon, you can click the style that you want in the Style box. You can then draw a connector
that displays the line style that you selected. For example, in documents based on the Process
Block Diagram template, you can select Future and Phantom in the Line Style box on the
ribbon. When you select Future and draw a connector, the connector appears as a dashed line.

When you select Phantom and draw a connector, it appears grayed out; the connector is
highlighted when you point to it.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 334

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Besides line styles, you can also select line start and line end terminators on the Connector
ribbon. The following connectors display some of the different types of terminators that you can
apply.

See Also
Connector Command (on page 342)
Connector Ribbon (on page 343)
Place a Connector (on page 336)

Connector Drawing Elements

Connector on the Schematic toolbar allows you to place connectors anywhere that you need
them. You can connect lines, circles, symbols, or points in free space.
There are special connector styles that you can use in the diagram. Some examples in the
Process Flow template include Primary Line, Secondary Line, and Electric Signal. On the
Connector ribbon, you can click the style that you want in the Style box.

On the Connector ribbon, you can also select the line start and line end terminators that you
want. The following connectors display some of the different types of terminators that you can
apply.

Some symbols are created with connect points. When you attach a connector to a connect
point, the connector automatically attaches to the point at a predefined angle. Otherwise, the
connector locates and attaches to a keypoint or point along any elements in the symbol.
The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as gray circles with Xs.
If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the connector attaches to a connect point at
any angle.
See Also
Attach a Connector to an Object (on page 340)
Connect Two Objects (on page 341)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 335

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Place a Connector
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Connector .
2. Click to begin drawing the connector or move the pointer over the element to highlight the
potential key points or connect points.
The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as gray circles with
Xs. The active point along the element is a filled red circle. You can connect to any point on
the element.
If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the connector attaches to a connect
point at any angle.
3. After you select a starting point, the direction in which you move from that point determines
the angle at which the connector is drawn.
The following picture shows that the pointer has been moved away from the initial point in a
downward direction.

▪ You can generate two or more line segments with each click. When the pointer crosses
the current line segment, the software automatically generates another segment.
▪ The following graphic shows a connector with three line segments although you clicked
only once.

▪ To switch between drawing horizontal and vertical line segments or drawing diagonal
line segments, click Diagonal Mode (Alt).
▪ If the element itself is rotated, the takeoff angle is adjusted appropriately so that the
connector is perpendicular to the element.
▪ If you are connecting to a symbol, the connect point may have a pre-defined angle to
which the connector must connect.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 336

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

To create a connector path

▪ After you select a point to move from, you can click points to force a connector to go to a
certain path.

To end the connector

You can end a connector in the following ways:
▪ After you place one or more connector line segments, right click to end the connector.
▪ To attach the connector to another element, move the pointer over the element to display
the potential connect points. However, you can connect to any point on the element.
▪ When the point closest to the pointer is highlighted, you can click to define the end of the
connector. The pointer snaps to connect points.

▪ The software calculates the angle for the ending the connection point, based on how you
approach the element.
▪ If the calculated angle is not correct when you move the pointer away from the point, you
can move the pointer back over the point and try again.
▪ As you drag connected elements or symbols, the connections are maintained.
See Also
Connector Command (on page 342)
Connector Ribbon (on page 343)

Modify a Connector
To modify a connector, select the connector, using the Select Tool. You can then change the
connector in several ways.

To insert a line segment

▪ To insert a line segment into the connector, click Insert Segment Mode (Shift) on the
ribbon, or press Shift.
The pointer changes to a directional arrow when the command is in Insert Segment mode,
and the pointer is positioned over a connector segment.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 337

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

▪ Drag the pointer diagonally to define the shape of the segment. The following graphic shows
the connector dynamics display as you drag the pointer (A).

▪ When you release the drag, the segment is inserted as part of the connector.

To move a line segment

▪ To move a line segment, first move the pointer over a horizontal line segment or a vertical
line segment. Then click the segment and drag it to the location you want.

To insert a vertex
▪ To insert a vertex, first click Diagonal Mode (Alt) on the ribbon, or press Alt.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 338

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

▪ Move the pointer over a horizontal line segment or a vertical line segment to which you want
to add the vertex, and drag the segment to a new location. The pointer changes to a
directional arrow. As you drag the segment, the software inserts a vertex. In the following
graphic a vertex has been inserted in a horizontal line segment.

To move a vertex
▪ To move a vertex, move the pointer over the vertex. Then drag the vertex to move it.
▪ When Diagonal mode is not active, you can move the vertex only in a horizontal or vertical
direction. The following graphic shows that moving the vertex (A) results in line segments
that are horizontal or vertical.

▪ When Diagonal mode is active, you can move the vertex in any direction. This action means
that connector line segments are not limited to horizontal or vertical orientation. The
following graphic shows that moving the vertex (A) results in line segments that are no
longer horizontal or vertical.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 339

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

To move an element with a connector

▪ To move an element that is connected, select the element with the connector and move it.
The connector moves with the element.
To find out how to move an element, click Related Topics.

To modify end points

▪ You modify end points to move a connector from one connect point to another or to move a
connector point to another location.
▪ To move a connector, first select the connector. Then click the connector and drag it to a
connect point or another location.
After you connect a point, you can drag it to another connect point.
See Also
Connector Command (on page 342)
Connector Ribbon (on page 343)

Format a Connector
1. Select a connector.
2. On the Connector ribbon, set the options you want.

▪ On the shortcut menu, click Properties. Then, on the Element Properties dialog box, set
the options you want.
▪ You can also format a connector before you attach it by setting options on the ribbon.
▪ Changing the current style settings on the ribbon or Properties dialog box overrides the line
style formats.
▪ To change a line style, click the Style list on the ribbon, and select a style.
▪ To change clearance, type a value in the Clearance box on the ribbon.
See Also
Drawing Connectors (on page 334)
Connector Command (on page 342)

Attach a Connector to an Object

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Connector
2. In the Connector ribbon bar, set the line start and end terminators.
3. Pass the pointer over the target object to highlight the potential keypoints or connect points.
The connector can attach at keypoints on the symbol or predefined connect points.
The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as gray circles with
Xs.
4. Click the symbol to place the connector.
The connector attaches to the connect point that is nearest to the point that you clicked.
Otherwise, the connector attaches to a keypoint or any point along the elements in the symbol.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 340

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

See Also
Connector Drawing Elements (on page 335)
Modify a Connector (on page 337)

Merge Connectors
1. Select two connectors.
The first connector selected drives the manner in which the merge occurs
such that the properties of the first connector selected will be applied to the second
connector.

2. Click the Merge Connectors button on the Connectors ribbon. The connectors merge
into a single connector.
If more than two connectors are selected, the Merge Connectors command is
disabled on the Connectors ribbon.
See Also
Reverse Connector Direction (on page 341)
Connector Ribbon (on page 343)

Reverse Connector Direction

1. Select a connector.
2. From the shortcut menu, select Reverse Direction.
Right-click on the selected connector to display the shortcut menu.
See Also
Merge Connectors (on page 341)
Connector Ribbon (on page 343)

Connect Two Objects

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Connector .
2. In the Connector ribbon bar, set the line start and end terminators.
3. Pass the pointer over the target object to highlight the potential keypoints or connect points.
The connector can attach at keypoints on the symbol or predefined connect points.
The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as gray circles with
Xs.
4. Click to start the connector at a predefined connect point or keypoint.

▪ The direction in which you move from the start point determines the angle at which the
connector is drawn.
▪ If the object itself is rotated, the takeoff angle is adjusted appropriately so that the
connector is perpendicular to the object.
▪ If you press the ALT key while drawing a connector, the connector attaches to a
connect point at any angle.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 341

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

5. Pass the pointer over the second target object.

6. Click to end the connector at a predefined connect point or keypoint.
If one of the connected objects is moved the connection and clearance is maintained.
See Also
Connector Drawing Elements (on page 335)
Modify a Connector (on page 337)

Split a Connector
1. Click a connector.
2. Click Split Connector on the Connector ribbon.
3. Click the point at which to split the connector.

▪ When you click within the range of a symbol on the connector, the software trims the two
resulting connectors to the symbol's range. If the symbol has connect points, the software
attaches the resulting connectors to the symbol at the connect points. This command
displays the connect points located on a symbol.
▪ Split connector should not be used to trim a single connector to the edge of a symbol. In this
instance, the connector should be modified directly with its end handles.
▪ The Clearance value on the Connector ribbon will determine the shortest length of a
connector. Thus, if one end of a split connector is shorter than the clearance value, that
segment length will be increased to match the value.
See Also
Reverse Connector Direction (on page 341)
Merge Connectors (on page 341)
Connector Ribbon (on page 343)

Connector Command
Connects two elements together.
Using a connector, you can connect to an element by connecting to:
▪ Key points. Hollow gray circles indicate potential key points (such as endpoint, midpoint, and
others) on an element, when the element is located by the pointer.
▪ Connect points. Hollow red circles indicate potential connect points on a symbol.
▪ Any point on an element. A solid red filled circle is displayed when the pointer locates an
element at a point other than its key points.

▪ You must click the Connector command before you see the points for connecting on the
element.
▪ You can also access this command on the Schematic toolbar.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 342

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

See Also
Drawing Connectors (on page 334)
Place a Connector (on page 336)
Connector Ribbon (on page 343)

Connector Ribbon
When you click Connector on the Draw toolbar, you can place a connector. After you select a
connector, you can change it.
Most of the options on the Connector ribbon are the same whether you are placing or modifying
a connector. The only difference occurs when you select a single connector or multiple
connectors for modification. When you select a single connector, the Split button becomes
active. When you select multiple connectors, the Merge button becomes active. When you
modify a connector, an additional option is available to insert a segment into the selected
connector. This last option is Insert Segment Mode (Alt+S).

Ribbon Box Options

Style - Sets the line style for the connector.
Line Color - Sets the line color for the connector. You can click More to define custom
colors with the Colors dialog box (on page 590).
Line Type - Sets the connector line type and style.
Line Width - Sets the line width for the connector.
Line Start Terminator - Sets the terminator for star ting the connector.
Line End Terminator - Sets the terminator for ending the connector.
Terminators are compatible with any of the linear styles.
Diagonal Mode (Alt) - Allows you to either place or modify a connector with diagonal
segments.

Placing a Connector
Switches the connector placement between drawing horizontal and vertical line segments or
drawing diagonal line segments when you place a connector.
To alternate between drawing horizontal and vertical line segments or drawing diagonal
line segments, you also can press Alt.

Modifying a Connector
Inserts a vertex in a line segment of the connector when you are modifying a selected
connector.
This option is active only when you click Diagonal Mode (Alt), or when you press Alt.
Insert Segment Mode (ALT+S) - Inserts line segments into the connector. This option is
available only when you are modifying a connector.
This option is active when you click Insert Segment Mode (ALT+S), or when you press
ALT + S.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 343

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Split Connector Mode (Shift) - Splits the connector at the selected point. This option is
available only when you are modifying a connector.
This option is active when you click Split Connector (Shift), or when you press Shift.

Merge Connectors - Merges two connectors into a single connector, adding a segment
between the connectors if necessary. This option is only available when you select two
connectors.
Clearance - Specifies the amount of space that the software maintains between the connector
and the connected element (also known as range avoidance).
See Also
Connector Command (on page 342)
Modify a Connector (on page 337)
Place a Connector (on page 336)

Drawing Doublelines
You can use Place Doubleline to place a doubleline as you draw and clean corners as you
place the lines. This command is very useful in drawing an architectural floor plan for a house or
a factory.
Place Doubleline also miters joints and trims as it you draw. It puts endcaps on single lines.
On the Place Doubleline toolbar, you can define the thickness of the doubleline and
whether you draw the doubleline from the left, right, or center.
See Also
Place Doubleline Command (on page 345)
Draw a Doubleline (on page 344)

Draw a Doubleline
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Place Doubleline .
2. Click the point to begin the doubleline.
3. Click the point to end the doubleline. This action defines the length and rotation angle of the
doubleline.
4. Do one of the following:
▪ Right-click to end the doubleline.
▪ To draw a series of connected doublelines, click the points to end each doubleline
segment, and then right-click.
If you close the shape, the command restarts so you begin drawing again.

▪ PinPoint, in conjunction with Place Doubleline, allows you to place the doubleline relative
to a known point.
▪ You can use driven dimensions to determine distances between doubleline elements.
▪ Instead of clicking to draw the end points, you can type values on the ribbon to place precise
lines. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 344

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

▪ You can press Esc to end a doubleline or a doubleline segment.

▪ You can use the software to make an end point of a doubleline tangent or perpendicular to
the key point or end point of another element.
▪ You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a
doubleline.
▪ If Maintain Relationships is set, the software creates relationships between the endpoints
of the lines.
▪ If Maintain Relationships is set, you can use Selection to select portions of the drawing to
be moved while the relationships are maintained.
▪ When you use Point On, you can draw a doubleline tangent to two curved elements. First,
click the curved element, then move the pointer through the tangent intent zone on the first
element. Use the software to establish a tangent relationship to the other element. If you do
not use the tangent intent zone, the line connects to the elements, but is not tangent to
them.
See Also
Place Doubleline Command (on page 345)
Place Doubleline Ribbon (on page 345)

Place Doubleline Command

Draws a doubleline or a series of connected doublelines. When you draw a series of lines,
the second point of one line is the first point of the next line.
This button is most effective if you use it in a document based on one of the architectural
templates in the AEC category.
This button appears on a set of fly-out buttons. If you cannot locate this button, click and
hold Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw toolbar.
See Also
Draw a Line (on page 331)
Place Doubleline Ribbon (on page 345)
Place Doubleline Ribbon
Style - Sets the drawing style.
Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box (on page 590).
Line Type - Sets the drawing line type.
Line Width - Sets the line width.
Left Primary Line - Indicates that you are drawing the doubleline from the left side.
Right Primary Line - Indicates that you are drawing the doubleline from the right side.
Center Primary Line - Indicates that you are drawing the doubleline from the center.
Length - Sets the length of a line. This box accepts only positive values.
Angle - Sets the angle of a line. This box accepts positive or negative values. A positive value is
counterclockwise from the x axis, and a negative value is clockwise from the x axis.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 345

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Thickness - Determines the thickness of the doubleline. This thickness is the distance between
the doublelines. To change the width of each of the individual lines, use Line Width.
See Also
Draw a Line (on page 331)

Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses

If you want to draw a circle, you can click Circle by Center Point on the Draw toolbar. Then,
you click a point to define the center of the circle. To place the circle, you click a second point to
define the distance of the circle radius from the first point. You can use other commands on the
Draw toolbar to place arcs, ellipses, and other types of circles.

To place circles, click Circle by Center Point and while holding the mouse button down,
draw freehand. After you close the loop, the circle appears.
You can also place a precise circle by clicking Circle by Center Point and then typing
values into the ribbon. After you press ENTER, a circle appears around the pointer. You can
then place the defined circle by clicking the point you want on the drawing sheet.
See Also
Circle Ribbon (on page 347)
Curve Ribbon (on page 360)
Ellipse Ribbon (on page 363)

Draw a Circle by Defining Three Points

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Circle by 3 Points .

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 346

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

2. Click three points on the circumference of the circle.

▪ Instead of clicking several different points to draw a circle, you can draw a diagonal line and
the software automatically changes it to a circle.
▪ Instead of clicking to define the circumference of the circle, you can type values on the
ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input.
▪ You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a
circle.
See Also
Circle by 3 Points Command (on page 347)
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 346)
Circle Ribbon (on page 347)

Circle by 3 Points Command

Draws a circle using three points that define the circumference.
See Also
Draw a Circle by Defining Three Points (on page 346)
Circle Ribbon (on page 347)

Circle Ribbon
Sets options for placing circles.
Style — Sets the drawing style.
Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box.
Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Width — Sets the line width.
Diameter — Sets the diameter of the circle.
Radius — Sets the radius.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 347

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

See Also
Circle by 3 Points Command (on page 347)
Circle by Center Point Command (on page 349)
Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Elements (on page 349)

Draw a Circle by Center Point

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Circle by Center Point .
2. Click the location where you want the center point.
3. Click to define the radius.

▪ Instead of clicking to define the radius, you can type values on the ribbon bar. You can also
use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
▪ Instead of clicking several different points to draw a circle, you can draw a diagonal line and
the software automatically changes it to a circle.
▪ If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles. If Maintain
Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
▪ You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a
circle.
See Also
Circle by Center Point Command (on page 349)
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 346)
Circle Ribbon (on page 347)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 348

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Circle by Center Point Command

Draws a circle using a center point and radius.
See Also
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 346)
Draw a Circle by Center Point (on page 348)
Circle Ribbon (on page 347)

Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Elements

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Tangent Circle .
2. Move the pointer along an element until the software recognizes a point on element
relationship or a key point.
3. Click to make the circle tangent.
4. Do one of the following to define the radius:
▪ Move the pointer until the circle is in the position that you want, and then click.
▪ Move the pointer until the software recognizes a tangent or key point relationship with
another element, and then click.

▪ Instead of clicking several different points to draw a circle, you can draw a diagonal line, and
the software automatically changes it to a circle.
▪ You can define the radius first to make a circle tangent to the first element, but not fixed in
one position on it.
▪ After you type a value in the Diameter or Radius box, move the pointer along the element
until the software recognizes a point on element relationship, and then click. The circle is
then displayed dynamically, and you can move it along the element freely until you make it
tangent to another element or key point.
▪ You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a
circle.
▪ If you use Tangent Circle when Point On and End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box
are not set, you can draw a non-tangent circle by clicking two points that represent the
diameter.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 349

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

▪ If you use Tangent Circle when Point On and End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box
are not set, you can draw a non-tangent circle by clicking two points that represent the
diameter.

▪ If you use Tangent Circle when Point On and End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box
are not set, you can draw a non-tangent circle by clicking two points that represent the
diameter.
▪ If you use Tangent Circle when Point On and End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box
are not set, you can draw a non-tangent circle by clicking two points that represent the
diameter.
▪ If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
▪ If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
See Also
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 346)
Circle Ribbon (on page 347)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 350

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Tangent Circle Command

Draws a circle tangent to one or two elements.
See Also
Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Elements (on page 349)
Circle Ribbon (on page 347)

Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc by 3 Points .
2. Click the location to begin the sweep of the arc.
3. Do one of the following:
▪ Click the location that you want as midpoint of the arc, and then click the location that
you want to end the sweep of the arc.
▪ Click the location that you want to end the sweep of the arc, and then click the location
that you want as midpoint of the arc.

Use the intent zones at the first and second points to specify if the third point is
between the first two or beyond one of the first two.

▪ Instead of clicking to define the sweep and the midpoint, you can type values on the ribbon.
You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
▪ Instead of clicking several different points to draw an arc, you can draw a diagonal line and
the software automatically changes it to an arc.
▪ If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
▪ If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
▪ You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an
arc.
See Also
Arc by 3 Points Command (on page 352)
Arc Ribbon (on page 352)
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 346)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 351

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Arc by 3 Points Command

Draws an arc using three points. The first point defines an end point. You can then either
define a point on the arc and then the end point, or the end point and then a point on the arc.
The end points are not tangent or perpendicular to other elements.
See Also
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 346)
Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points (on page 351)
Arc Ribbon (on page 352)

Arc Ribbon
Style — Sets the drawing style.
Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box.
Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Width — Sets the line width.
Radius — Sets the radius.
Sweep — Sets the sweep angle.
See Also
Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points (on page 351)
Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements (on page 353)
Draw an Arc by Center Point (on page 352)

Draw an Arc by Center Point

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc by Center Point
2. Click the point where you want the center point.
3. Click where you want to begin and end the sweep of the arc.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 352

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

You can change the arc direction by moving the pointer.

▪ Instead of clicking to define the radius, you can type a value on the ribbon bar. You can also
use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
▪ Instead of clicking several different points to draw an arc, you can draw a diagonal line and
the software automatically changes it to an arc.
▪ If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
▪ If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
▪ You can use the boxes on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an
arc.
See Also
Arc Ribbon (on page 352)
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 346)

Arc by Center Point Command

Draws an arc using three points. The first point defines the center of the arc and the next two
points define the sweep.
See Also
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 346)
Draw an Arc by Center Point (on page 352)
Arc Ribbon (on page 352)

Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements

You must set the Point On or End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box to draw arcs
that are tangent to other elements. You must set SmartSketch Tangent on the SmartSketch
dialog box to draw an arc tangent to two elements. You can set these options by clicking
SmartSketch Settings on the Tools menu.
You must set the Point On or End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box to draw arcs
that are tangent to other elements. You must set SmartSketch Tangent on the SmartSketch
dialog box to draw an arc tangent to two elements. You can set these options by clicking
SmartSketch Settings on the Tools menu.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Tangent Arc .

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 353

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

2. Click an element to which you want the new arc to be tangent. You can click the end point of
a line or curved element, or any point on the element.
3. Move the pointer through one of the intent zones displayed at the position you just clicked.
If the command dynamics show an arc perpendicular to the existing element, move the
pointer back to the intent zones and exit through a different quadrant.
4. When the command dynamics show an arc that is tangent to the first element, move the
pointer to a position where the software recognizes the tangent relationship with another
element and then click.

▪ Instead of clicking to define the radius and sweep of the arc, you can type values on the
ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input.
▪ You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an
arc.
▪ If Maintain Relationships on the SmartSketch dialog box is set, the software places
relationship handles.
▪ If Maintain Relationships on the SmartSketch dialog box is set, the software places
relationship handles.
See Also
Arc Ribbon (on page 352)

Draw Connected Lines and Arcs

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous .
2. This command starts in line mode by default. If you want to start by drawing an arc, press
SHIFT + A.
3. Click the location to begin the line or arc.
4. Click the location to end the line or arc. You can use intent zones to specify if you want to
draw a tangent or perpendicular arc.
5. If you are drawing an arc, click a point on the arc to define the radius.
After you draw an arc, the command switches back to line mode automatically. You
can switch back to arc mode if you want to draw another arc.
6. Continue drawing lines or arcs, pressing SHIFT + A to switch to arc mode and SHIFT + L to
switch to line mode.
7. Right-click to finish.
If you close the shape, the command restarts so you begin drawing again.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 354

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

▪ Instead of pressing SHIFT + L or SHIFT + A to switch modes, you can use Line or Arc on
the ribbon.
▪ You can make the first line or arc tangent or perpendicular to an element. First, move the
pointer to the element to which you want to be tangent. Click when the software recognizes
a Point On the relationship. Then use the intent zones to indicate if you want the line to be
tangent or perpendicular.
▪ Instead of clicking locations on the drawing sheet, you can type values on the ribbon. You
can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
▪ Using the ribbon boxes to type values does not affect the settings of the Line or Arc modes.
See Also
Arc by Center Point Command (on page 353)
Arc by 3 Points Command (on page 352)
Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 332)

Draw Connected Lines and Arcs with FreeSketch

1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeSketch .
2. On the ribbon, set the line and arc element types with Element Type, and clear the other
element types.
3. Drag to draw a line or arc. When you stop moving the pointer, do not release the mouse
button.
4. Drag to draw a series of line segments and arcs, continuing to hold the mouse button as you
draw each line and arc.
If you release the mouse button while you are drawing, you can start drawing at the
last end point you entered. Confirm that End Point is set on the SmartSketch dialog box.
If you release the mouse button while you are drawing, you can start drawing at the
last end point you entered. Confirm that End Point is set on the SmartSketch dialog box.
5. When you have finished, release the mouse button.

▪ Use Adjust to adjust the geometry you draw.

▪ When Adjust is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer.
▪ When Adjust is on, the software interprets the lines as horizontal or vertical and the arcs as
tangent to the connected elements.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 355

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

▪ If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles. If Maintain

Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
▪ The software recognizes relationships at the start point and end point of the line. If Maintain
Relationships is set, the software places a connect relationship handle where the two lines
meet.
▪ You can use the boxes on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a line
or an arc.
See Also
FreeSketch Command (on page 375)
Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 332)

Tangent Arc Command

Draws an arc tangent or perpendicular to one or two elements. The first point defines one
end of the arc. If you place the first point on a key point of an element you want the arc to be
tangent or perpendicular to, then the second point defines the sweep.
If you place the first point in free space, then this command works like Arc by 3 Points. In this
case the first point defines an end point. You can then either define a point on the arc and then
the end point, or the end point and then a point on the arc.
While in dynamics for the second point, you can set the orientation of the arc by passing
the pointer through one of the four quadrants of the first point's intent zone.
See Also
Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements (on page 353)
Arc Ribbon (on page 352)

Draw a Curve
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Curve
2. Do one of the following:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 356

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

▪ To draw an open curve, set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to Open.

▪ To draw a closed curve, set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to Closed.

3. Click three or more points on the drawing sheet. These points represent nodes on the curve.
You must place at least three points to draw a curve.
4. Right-click to end the curve.

▪ You can drag the pointer to draw the shape of a curve. Instead of clicking several different
points to draw a curve, you can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes
it to a curve.
▪ The nodes at the start point and end point of a curve are always smooth.
▪ You can use Insert Node on the shortcut menu to add nodes to a curve.
▪ You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes from a curve.
▪ You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a
curve.
See Also
Change the Curve Type (on page 359)
Draw a Curve with FreeForm (on page 376)
Curve Ribbon (on page 360)
Curve Command (on page 360)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 357

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Insert a Node into a Curve

1. Locate the curve and right-click to display the shortcut menu.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Insert Node.
3. Position the pointer at the location to add a node.

4. Click to insert the node.

You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes from a curve.
See Also
Curve Command (on page 360)
Curve Ribbon (on page 360)
Draw a Curve (on page 356)

Insert Node Command (Shortcut Menu)

Adds a node to a curve.
Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must locate the curve.
See Also
Curve Command (on page 360)
Delete Node Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 359)
Insert a Node into a Curve (on page 358)
Draw a Curve (on page 356)

Delete a Node from a Curve

1. Locate the curve and right-click to display the shortcut menu.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete Node.
3. Select the node you want to delete.

▪ You can use the arrows on the ribbon to select a node.

▪ You can use Insert Node on the shortcut menu to add nodes to a curve.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 358

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

See Also
Curve Command (on page 360)
Curve Ribbon (on page 360)
Draw a Curve (on page 356)
Insert Node Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 358)

Delete Node Command (Shortcut Menu)

Deletes a node from a curve.
Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must locate a curve.
For more information, see Curve Ribbon (on page 360).
See Also
Curve Command (on page 360)
Insert a Node into a Curve (on page 358)
Draw a Curve (on page 356)
Delete a Node from a Curve (on page 358)

Change the Curve Type

1. Select the curve.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ To change an open curve to a closed curve, set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to
Closed.
▪ To change a closed curve to an open curve, select the node you want to open, and then
set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to Open.
If you do not select a node, the software opens the curve at the node that was automatically
activated when you selected the curve.

▪ You can use the arrows on the ribbon to select a node.

▪ You can use Insert Node on the shortcut menu to add nodes to a curve.
▪ You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes from a curve.
See Also
Curve Command (on page 360)
Curve Ribbon (on page 360)
Draw a Curve (on page 356)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 359

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Change the Node Type

1. Select the curve.
2. Select the node you want to change.
3. On the ribbon, click the button for the node type you want to change the node to: Smooth,
Symmetric, or Cusp.

▪ You can use the arrows on the ribbon to select a node.

▪ You can use Insert Node on the shortcut menu to add nodes to a curve.
▪ You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes from a curve.
See Also
Curve Command (on page 360)
Draw a Curve (on page 356)
Insert Node Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 358)

Curve Command
Draws a smooth, open, or closed curve. A series of curves can have smooth, symmetric and
cusp nodes. The node at the start point and the node at the end point of a curve are always
smooth.
See Also
Draw a Curve (on page 356)
Change the Curve Type (on page 359)
Curve Ribbon (on page 360)

Curve Ribbon
Style — Sets the drawing style.
Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box.
Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Width — Sets the line width.
Open — Sets the curve type to Open.
Closed — Sets the curve type to Closed.
The following options appear on the Curve ribbon only when a curve or curve
element is selected.
Previous Node — Activates the previous node on the curve. This button is available only
when you have selected a curve to edit.
Next Node — Activates the next node on the curve. This button is available only when you
have selected a curve to edit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 360

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Symmetric — Gives a curve the same curvature on each side of the selected node. This
button is available only when you have selected a curve to edit.

Smooth — Gives a curve a different curvature on each side of the selected node. The start
point and end point of a curve is always a smooth node. This button is available only when you
have selected a curve to edit.

Cusp — Makes a curve bend sharply at the selected node. This button is available only
when you have selected a curve to edit.

See Also
Curve Command (on page 360)
Draw a Curve (on page 356)
Change the Curve Type (on page 359)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 361

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Draw an Ellipse by Defining Three Points

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Ellipse by 3 Points .
2. Click the location to begin the primary axis.

3. Click the location to end the primary axis. This action defines the length of the primary axis
and the rotation angle.

4. Click a location on one side of the primary axis. This action defines the secondary axis.

The primary axis can be shorter than the secondary axis.

▪ Instead of clicking to define the primary and secondary axes of an ellipse, you can type
values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
▪ Instead of clicking several different points to draw an ellipse, you can draw a diagonal line,
and the software automatically changes it to an ellipse.
▪ You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an
ellipse.
▪ If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
▪ If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
See Also
Ellipse by 3 Points Command (on page 362)

Ellipse by 3 Points Command

Draws an ellipse using three edge points. The first two points define the length of the primary
axis and the rotation angle. The last point defines the secondary axis.
See Also
Draw an Ellipse by Defining Three Points (on page 362)
Ellipse Ribbon (on page 363)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 362

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Ellipse Ribbon
Style — Sets the drawing style.
Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box.
Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Width — Sets the line width.
Primary — Sets the length from the center point to the edge of the ellipse along the primary
axis.

The ellipse orientation is based on the primary axis.

Secondary — Sets the length from the center point to the edge of the ellipse along the
secondary axis.

The secondary axis is perpendicular to the primary axis.

Angle — Sets the angle of the primary axis of the ellipse. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X
axis. The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
See Also
Ellipse by Center Point Command (on page 364)
Ellipse by 3 Points Command (on page 362)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 363

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Draw an Ellipse by Center Point

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Ellipse by Center .
2. Click the location for the center of the primary axis.
3. Click the location to end the primary axis. This action defines the length of the primary axis
and the rotation angle.
4. Click a location on one side of the primary axis. This action defines the secondary axis.
The primary axis can be shorter than the secondary axis.

▪ Instead of clicking to define the axes and rotation angle of the ellipse, you can type values
on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
▪ Instead of clicking several different points to draw an ellipse, you can draw a diagonal line
and the software automatically changes it to an ellipse.
▪ You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an
ellipse.
See Also
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 346)
Ellipse by Center Point Command (on page 364)

Ellipse by Center Point Command

Draws an ellipse using the center point and two edge points. The center point and the next
point define half the length of the primary axis and the rotation angle. The last point defines the
secondary axis.
See Also
Draw an Ellipse by Center Point (on page 364)
Ellipse Ribbon (on page 363)

Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons

To draw a rectangle or square, click Rectangle on the Draw toolbar. Then, click two different
points to define the shape. If you want to precisely define dimensions, you can type values into
the ribbon and press ENTER.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 364

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

If you place dimensions on a rectangle or square, these are always driven dimensions. This
means that if you edit the value of the dimension, the object does not change. You need to edit
the width and height values on the ribbon to change the dimensions of the rectangle or square.
Also, you cannot ungroup a rectangle or square into individual lines.
If you want to place a rectangle or square that has driving dimensions, you need to
select Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw toolbar and place four separate lines in the shape
of a rectangle or square.
You can use the Polygon and Polygon by Center , also on the Draw toolbar, to draw
an n-side polygon. The default settings for both polygon commands are for drawing an isosceles
triangle. However, you can use the options on the Polygon and Polygon by Center ribbons to
specify the number of sides and dimension values.
Each polygon that you draw is really an object of grouped lines. Consequently, after the polygon
is drawn there is no way to modify its dimensions. You can, however, use Ungroup on the
Relationships toolbar to separate the polygon into its individual linear elements.
See Also
Fillet Rectangle Command (on page 368)
Polygon Command (on page 369)
Rectangle Command (on page 366)
Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch (on page 374)
Draw a Rectangle or Square (on page 365)

Draw a Rectangle or Square

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Rectangle .
2. Click the location for one corner of the rectangle or square.
3. Click to define the rotation angle and the width of the rectangle or square.
4. Do one of the following:
▪ To draw a rectangle, click to define the height.
▪ To draw a square, hold the SHIFT key, and then click. The command automatically
makes the height equal to the width.

▪ Instead of clicking to draw the rectangle or square, you can type values in the Width,
Height, and Angle boxes on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and
ribbon bar input.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 365

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

▪ Instead of clicking several different points to draw a rectangle, you can draw a diagonal line
and the software automatically changes it to a rectangle.

▪ You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a
rectangle or square.
▪ If you place dimensions on a rectangle, they are always driven dimensions.
▪ You cannot ungroup a rectangle into individual lines.
See Also
Rectangle Command (on page 366)

Rectangle Command
Draws a rectangle using three points. The first two points define the width and rotation angle
of the rectangle, and the third point defines the height. You can also draw a square with this
command.
See Also
Draw a Rectangle or Square (on page 365)
Rectangle Ribbon (on page 366)
Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons (on page 364)

Rectangle Ribbon
Style - Sets the drawing style.
Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box.
Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Width - Sets the line width.
Width — Sets the width of the rectangle or square.
Height — Sets the height of the rectangle or square.
Angle - Sets the orientation angle of the element. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X-axis. The
angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 366

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

See Also
Rectangle Command (on page 366)
Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch (on page 374)
Draw a Rectangle or Square (on page 365)

Draw a Fillet Rectangle

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Fillet Rectangle .

▪ If the Fillet Rectangle button is not displayed on the Draw toolbar, click the Rectangle
fly-out menu and select it from the list.
▪ When drawing a fillet rectangle, it is useful to have Maintain Relationships turned on.
Use Tools > Maintain Relationships to turn this command on and off.
2. Click a location to specify one corner of the fillet rectangle.
3. Move the mouse, and click again to define the rotation angle and the width of the fillet
rectangle.
4. Click a third point to define the height.
5. Move the mouse backwards or forwards to define the fillet radius.
To increase the fillet radius, move the mouse towards the center of the rectangle. To
decrease the radius, move the mouse away from the center of the rectangle.
6. Click in the drawing to place the fillet rectangle.

▪ The fillet rectangle is not a single object. Rather, it is a collection of eight separate elements
(four lines and four arcs) with relationships. As such, if you drag a line or an arc, you can
stretch the entire fillet rectangle shape horizontally, vertically, or diagonally.
▪ To modify the fillets after placement, select any one fillet and change its fillet value.
Changing one fillet does not impact the other three fillets.
▪ Instead of clicking to draw the fillet rectangle, you can type values in the Width, Height,
Angle, and Radius boxes on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and
ribbon bar input.
▪ When typing a value into the Radius box, you must specify a positive number that is greater
than 0. Also, the fillet radius must be less than one-half the size of the rectangle width or
height. For example, if the rectangle dimensions are 3" x 5", the fillet radius must be less
than 1.5".

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 367

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

▪ When using the ribbon to specify dimensions, you must define the width and the height of
the fillet rectangle before defining the radius.
See Also
Fillet Rectangle Command (on page 368)
Fillet Rectangle Command
Draws a fillet rectangle using four points and a user-specified fillet radius. The first two points
define the width and rotation angle of the fillet rectangle, and the third point defines the height.
The fillet radius can be specified dynamically using the mouse or by typing a value on the
ribbon. The fourth point defines the placement of the fillet rectangle in the drawing.
See Also
Draw a Fillet Rectangle (on page 367)
Fillet Rectangle Ribbon (on page 368)
Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons (on page 364)
Fillet Rectangle Ribbon
Style — Sets the drawing style.
Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box.
Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Width — Sets the line width.
Width - Sets the width of the fillet rectangle.
Height - Sets the height of the fillet rectangle.
Angle — Sets the orientation angle of the element. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X-axis. The
angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
Radius - Specifies the radius of the fillet. The value must be a positive number greater than 0
and less than 1/2 the value specified for the width or height. For example, if the dimensions of
the rectangle are 3" x 5", the fillet radius must be less than 1.5".
See Also
Fillet Rectangle Command (on page 368)
Draw a Fillet Rectangle (on page 367)

Draw an N-Sided Polygon

1. Click Polygon on the Draw toolbar.
If the Polygon button is not displayed on the Draw toolbar, click the Rectangle
fly-out menu and select it from the list.
2. In the Sides field of the Polygon ribbon, define the number of sides for the polygon.
Since the default value for this field is "3", leaving the value unchanged
results in an isosceles triangle.
3. On the Drawing sheet, click a point to define the starting point for the polygon.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 368

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

4. Click a second point to complete the polygon.

▪ Instead of clicking in the Drawing sheet to specify start and end points for the polygon, you
can type values on the ribbon bar. Each mouse-click places a polygon with the specified
dimensions on the sheet.
▪ You can use the options on the Polygon ribbon to apply formats, including line style and
line color, to any polygon prior to drawing it.
▪ By default, the polygon is placed as a grouped element. To place the polygon as individual
elements, turn off Group after Placement on the Polygon ribbon.
See Also
Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons (on page 364)
Polygon Command (on page 369)
Polygon Command
Draws an n-sided polygon based on properties you define.
See Also
Polygon by Center Command (on page 370)
Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons (on page 364)
Draw an N-Sided Polygon (on page 368)
Draw a Polygon by Center point (on page 370)
Polygon Ribbon (on page 369)
Polygon Ribbon
Sets options for drawing a polygon.
Style - Sets the drawing style.
Line Color - Defines the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box (on page 590).
Line Type- Specifies the drawing line type and style.
Line Width - Defines the width of the line.
Group after Placement - Binds the individual sides of the polygon at placement, so that you
can locate, select, and manipulate the polygon as a unit. This option is turned on by default. If
you turn off the option prior to drawing the polygon, the resulting polygon is placed as an
ungrouped collection of individual elements.
Sides - Sets the total number of sides for the polygon.
Length - Sets the length of the sides for the polygon. This field only accepts positive values.
Angle - Defines the orientation angle of the polygon. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x-axis.
The angle increases in the counter- clockwise direction.
See Also
Polygon Command (on page 369)
Draw an N-Sided Polygon (on page 368)
Draw a Polygon by Center point (on page 370)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 369

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Draw a Polygon by Center point

1. Click Polygon by Center on the Draw toolbar.
If the Polygon by Center button is not displayed on the Draw toolbar, click the
Rectangle fly-out menu and select it from the list.
2. Click the location where you want to place the center point.
3. Click to define the radius.
Because the default value for this field is 3, leaving the value unchanged
results in an isosceles triangle.
4. On the Drawing sheet, click a point to define the starting point for the polygon.
5. Click a second point to complete the polygon.

▪ Instead of clicking in the Drawing sheet to define the radius, you can type values on the
ribbon bar. Each mouse- click places a polygon with the specified dimensions on the sheet.
▪ You can use the options on the Polygon ribbon to apply formats, including line style and
line color, to any polygon prior to drawing it.
▪ By default, the polygon is placed as a grouped element. To place the polygon as individual
elements, turn off Group after Placement on the Polygon by Center ribbon.
See Also
Polygon by Center Command (on page 370)
Polygon Command (on page 369)
Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons (on page 364)
Polygon by Center Command
Draws an n-sided polygon based on properties you define.
See Also
Draw a Polygon by Center point (on page 370)
Polygon Ribbon (on page 369)
Polygon by Center Ribbon
Sets options for drawing a polygon by center point.
Style - Sets the drawing style.
Line Color - Defines the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box (on page 590).
Line Type- Specifies the drawing line type and style.
Line Width - Defines the width of the line.
Group after Placement - Binds the individual sides of the polygon at placement, so that you
can locate, select, and manipulate the polygon as a unit. This option is turned on by default. If
you turn off the option prior to drawing the polygon, the resulting polygon is placed as an
ungrouped collection of individual elements.
Sides - Sets the total number of sides for the polygon.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 370

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Radius - Sets the length of the radius for the polygon. This field only accepts positive values.
Angle - Defines the orientation angle of the polygon. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x-axis.
The angle increases in the counter- clockwise direction.
See Also
Polygon by Center Command (on page 370)
Polygon Command (on page 369)
Draw a Polygon by Center point (on page 370)

Drawing FreeForm Shapes

As you draw, you can place precisely defined lines, arcs, and circles by clicking and typing
values in the ribbon. You can also use tools to quickly sketch a design and let the software
convert it into a precision drawing.
FreeSketch and FreeForm allow you to quickly place fluid lines and let the software
convert these into precision shapes. FreeSketch draws lines, arcs, circles, and rectangles,
and FreeForm draws curves (splines). These commands can be found under Curve .

You can begin sketching anywhere on the drawing sheet. You can draw in free space or use key
points or end points of elements as reference points.

How FreeSketch and FreeForm Work

As you drag the pointer, a rough sketch of your design appears. When you release the pointer,
the software recognizes the shapes in your sketch and turns the sketch into a precise drawing.
You can control the accuracy of the shape recognition using the ribbon options.

FreeSketch and FreeForm Options

FreeSketch Adjust controls how closely FreeSketch interprets mouse movements. When
Adjust On is set, the software interprets all lines as either horizontal or vertical, and all arcs as

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 371

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

tangent. The first figure shows how the software interprets a rough sketch when Adjust On is
set.

The next figure shows how the software interprets a rough sketch when Adjust Off is set.

FreeForm Smoothing controls how closely the software interprets mouse movements when
drawing curves. The first figure shows how FreeForm interprets a rough sketch when
Smoothing On is set.

The next figure shows how the software interprets a rough sketch when Smoothing Off is set.

See Also
Draw a Curve with FreeForm (on page 376)
Draw a Circle with FreeSketch (on page 373)
Draw a Line with FreeSketch (on page 373)
Draw an Arc with FreeSketch (on page 374)
Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch (on page 374)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 372

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Draw a Line with FreeSketch

1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeSketch .
2. On the ribbon, set the Line element type and clear the other element type buttons.
3. Drag to draw a line or a series of connected lines.

▪ Adjust allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw.
▪ When Adjust is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer.
▪ When Adjust is on, the software interprets the lines as horizontal or vertical when you finish
drawing. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
▪ The software recognizes relationships at the start point and end point of the line. If Maintain
Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
▪ When you set the Line and Arc element types, you can draw connected lines and arcs.
▪ You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a
line.
See Also
FreeSketch Command (on page 375)
Drawing FreeForm Shapes (on page 371)
FreeSketch Ribbon (on page 376)

Draw a Circle with FreeSketch

Point On or End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box must be set to draw circles that
are tangent to other elements.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeSketch
2. On the ribbon, set the Circle element type and clear the other element type buttons.
3. Drag to sketch the shape of the circle or the diameter of the circle.

▪ Adjust allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw.
▪ When Adjust is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer.
▪ When Adjust is on, the software interprets your pointer movements as a circle.
▪ If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
▪ If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 373

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

▪ You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a
circle.
See Also
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 346)
FreeSketch Command (on page 375)

Draw an Arc with FreeSketch

You must set Point On or End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box to draw arcs that
are tangent to other elements. You can set these options by clicking SmartSketch Settings on
the Tools menu.
You must set Point On or End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box to draw arcs that
are tangent to other elements. You can set these options by clicking SmartSketch Settings on
the Tools menu.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeSketch .
2. On the ribbon, set the Arc element type and clear the other element type buttons.
3. Drag to draw an arc.

▪ Adjust allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw.
▪ When Adjust is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer.
▪ When Adjust is on, the software interprets arcs as tangent to the connected elements. If
Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
▪ The software recognizes relationships at the start point and end point of the arc. If Maintain
Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
▪ When you set the Line and Arc element types, you can draw connected lines and arcs.
▪ You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an
arc.
See Also
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 346)
FreeSketch Command (on page 375)
Drawing FreeForm Shapes (on page 371)

Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch

1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeSketch .

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 374

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

If FreeSketch is not displayed, click the Curve fly-out menu and

select it from the list.
2. On the ribbon, set the rectangle Element Type and clear the other Element Type buttons.
3. Drag the pointer to sketch the diagonal of the rectangle.

▪ Adjust allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw.
▪ When Adjust is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer.
▪ When Adjust is on, the software interprets the diagonal as a rectangle or square.
▪ You can use the buttons on the ribbon and shortcut menu to edit a rectangle or square.
See Also
Drawing FreeForm Shapes (on page 371)
FreeSketch Command (on page 375)
Rectangle Command (on page 366)

FreeSketch Command
Draws lines, arcs, rectangles, and circles by converting a sketch into a precision drawing.
You can specify which of these elements you want to draw using the ribbon.
See Also
Draw a Circle with FreeSketch (on page 373)
Draw a Line with FreeSketch (on page 373)
Draw a Curve with FreeForm (on page 376)
Draw an Arc with FreeSketch (on page 374)
Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch (on page 374)
FreeSketch Ribbon (on page 376)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 375

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

FreeSketch Ribbon
Style — Sets the drawing style.
Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box.
Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Width — Sets the line width.
Adjust On — Draws all lines recognized in the rough sketch as horizontal or vertical in the
precision drawing, and draws all arcs recognized in the rough sketch as tangent in the precision
drawing.
Adjust Off — Does not adjust the orientation of lines and arcs in your rough sketch.
Line — Draws lines in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough sketch.
Arc — Draws arcs in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough sketch.
Circle — Draws circles in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough sketch.
Rectangle — Draw rectangles in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough
sketch.
See Also
Drawing FreeForm Shapes (on page 371)
Drawing Basic Elements (on page 329)

Draw a Curve with FreeForm

1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeForm .
2. Drag to draw a curve.

▪ Smooth allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw.
▪ When Smooth is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer.
▪ When Smooth is on, the software creates smooth, symmetric, or cusp curves.
▪ You can use relationships to draw a curve that is tangent or perpendicular at its start point
and end point. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
▪ You can use relationships to draw a curve that is tangent or perpendicular at its start point
and end point. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
▪ You can begin or end your drawing using the end point or key point of an element.
▪ You can use Insert Node on the shortcut menu to add nodes to a curve.
▪ You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes from a curve.
▪ You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a
curve.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 376

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

See Also
Draw a Curve (on page 356)
Change the Curve Type (on page 359)
Drawing FreeForm Shapes (on page 371)
Drawing Basic Elements (on page 329)

FreeForm Command
Draws freeform curves, or splines.
See Also
Drawing FreeForm Shapes (on page 371)
Draw a Curve with FreeForm (on page 376)
FreeForm Ribbon (on page 377)
Drawing Basic Elements (on page 329)
FreeForm Ribbon
Style — Sets the drawing style.
Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box.
Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Width — Sets the line width.
Smoothing On — Draws cusp, smooth, and symmetric curves in the precision drawing by
recognizing these shapes in the rough sketch.
Smoothing Off — Draws elements that closely resemble the movements of your pointer,
without smoothing them into cusp, smooth, and symmetric curves.
See Also
Drawing Basic Elements (on page 329)
FreeForm Command (on page 377)
Draw a Curve with FreeForm (on page 376)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 377

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Creating Isometric Drawings

If you want to create 2D drawings that represent 3D elements, such as cubes, you can create an
isometric drawing. An isometric drawing is not a true 3D drawing, because you cannot view the
drawing in perspective or from another angle. However, you can create a 3D effect by aligning
the elements and objects in a drawing along three major axes.

Smart Electrical supplies several tools to create these types of documents:

▪ Isometric Rectangle
▪ Isometric Circle
▪ Isometric Line
▪ Segmented Styles
You can also use Customize on the Tools menu to place the isometric drawing
commands on a toolbar. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, click Draw in the
Categories list, and then drag the various Isometric buttons to an existing toolbar or use them to
create your own toolbar.
See Also
Draw an Isometric Rectangle (on page 382)
Draw an Isometric Line (on page 380)
Draw an Isometric Circle (on page 378)

Draw an Isometric Circle

1. Click Isometric Circle on the Isometric toolbar.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 378

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

If the Isometric toolbar is not displayed, click Tools > Add-Ins. On the Add-In
Manager dialog box, select the Isometric Toolbar Commands check box, and click OK.

2. Click a point to define the center point of the isometric circle.

3. Click a second point to complete the circle.
You cannot drag the pointer to draw the circle.

▪ You can set the plane on which to place the circle by setting options on the ribbon.
▪ You can also customize an existing toolbar to include the Isometric Circle command. Click
View > Toolbars to open the Customize dialog box. On the Tools tab, click Draw in the
Categories list, and drag the Isometric Circle button to an existing toolbar.
See Also
Isometric Circle Command (on page 379)
Isometric Circle Ribbon (on page 380)
Creating Isometric Drawings (on page 378)
Isometric Circle Command
Allows you to draw an isometric circle. You can use this button to create 2D circles that look
like 3D circles.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 379

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

To access this command, you must install the Isometric Toolbar add-in. Click Tools >
Add-Ins to open the Add- In Manager dialog box. Select the Isometric Toolbar Commands
checkbox, and click OK.
See Also
Draw an Isometric Circle (on page 378)
Isometric Circle Ribbon
Style - Sets the drawing style.
Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box (on page 590).
Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Width - Sets the line width.
Top - Allows you to draw the circle on the top plane.

Left - Allows you to draw the circle on the left plane.

Right - Allows you to draw the circle on the right plane.

Diameter - Sets the diameter of the isometric circle.

Radius - Defines the radius of the isometric circle.
See Also
Isometric Circle Command (on page 379)
Creating Isometric Drawings (on page 378)
Draw an Isometric Circle (on page 378)

Draw an Isometric Line

1. Click Isometric Line .

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 380

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

If the Isometric toolbar is not displayed, click Tools > Add-Ins. On the Add-In
Manager dialog box, select the Isometric Toolbar Commands check box, and click OK.

2. Click a point to start the line.

3. Click a point to complete the line.
You cannot drag the pointer to draw the line.

▪ You can set the angle for placing the line by setting options on the ribbon bar.
▪ You can also customize an existing toolbar to include the Isometric Line. Click View >
Toolbars to open the Customize dialog box. On the Tools tab, click Draw in the
Categories list, and drag the Isometric Line button to an existing toolbar.
See Also
Creating Isometric Drawings (on page 378)
Isometric Line Command (on page 381)
Isometric Line Ribbon (on page 382)
Isometric Line Command
Allows you to draw lines that appear at 30, 60, or 90 degrees in an isometric drawing. This
command creates 2D lines that look like they are in a 3D plane.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 381

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

To access this command, you must install the Isometric Toolbar add-in. Click Tools >
Add-Ins to open the Add- In Manager dialog box. Select the Isometric Toolbar Commands
checkbox, and click OK.
See Also
Draw an Isometric Line (on page 380)
Isometric Line Ribbon
Style - Sets the drawing style.
Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box (on page 590).
Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Width - Sets the line width.
Length - Sets the length of the isometric line.
Angle - Sets the angle of the isometric line.
See Also
Creating Isometric Drawings (on page 378)
Isometric Line Command (on page 381)
Draw an Isometric Line (on page 380)

Draw an Isometric Rectangle

1. Click Isometric Rectangle .
If the Isometric toolbar is not displayed, click Tools > Add-Ins. On the Add-In
Manager dialog box, select the Isometric Toolbar Commands check box, and click OK.

To confirm that the isometric rectangle consists of lines that remain

connected when you relocate them using the Select Tool command, turn on Maintain
Relationships on the Tools menu. If this option is not on, Isometric Rectangle creates a
rectangle composed of four separate lines that do not stay connected if you move each line.
2. Click a point to start defining the rectangle base.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 382

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

3. Click a second point to complete the rectangle base.

4. Click a third point to complete the rectangle.
You cannot drag the pointer to draw the rectangle.
To set the plane on which to place the rectangle, you can set options on the ribbon.
See Also
Creating Isometric Drawings (on page 378)
Isometric Rectangle Command (on page 383)
Isometric Rectangle Ribbon (on page 383)
Isometric Rectangle Command
Allows you to draw an isometric rectangle. You can use this command to create 2D
rectangles that look like 3D rectangles.

To access this command, you must install the Isometric Toolbar add-in. Click Tools >
Add-Ins to open the Add- In Manager dialog box. Select the Isometric Toolbar Commands
checkbox, and click OK.
See Also
Draw an Isometric Rectangle (on page 382)
Isometric Rectangle Ribbon
Style - Sets the drawing style.
Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box (on page 590).
Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Width - Sets the line width.
Top - Allows you to draw the rectangle on the top plane.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 383

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Left - Allows you to draw the rectangle on the left plane.

Right - Allows you to draw the rectangle on the right plane.

Width - Sets the width of the isometric rectangle.

Height - Sets the height of the isometric rectangle.
See Also
Creating Isometric Drawings (on page 378)
Isometric Rectangle Command (on page 383)
Draw an Isometric Rectangle (on page 382)

Format Part of an Element

1. Click Segmented Style on the Isometric toolbar.

▪ To enable the Isometric toolbar, click Tools > Add-Ins. On the Add-In Manager dialog
box, select the Isometric Toolbar Commands check box, and click OK.
▪ After you enable the Isometric Toolbar Commands add-in, you can use View >
Toolbars to toggle on/off the Isometric toolbar.
2. On the ribbon, click the style or colors that you want to apply to part of an element.
3. Click the element to which you want to apply the style. The format extends to the next
element that crosses or bounds the element to which you are applying the line type or color.

▪ Segmented Style does not recognize symbols as a bounding element.

▪ If you change the size of the element, you must re-apply the line type or color by using
Segmented Style.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 384

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Segmented Style Command

Applies a line type, line weight, or color to part of an element. When you apply the line type,
line weight, or color, the format extends to the next element that crosses or bounds the element
to which you are applying the line type or color. This is handy if you want to change the
appearance of just part of an element.

If you change the size of the element, you must re-apply the line type or color
using Segmented Style. Segmented Style does not recognize symbols as a bounding
element.
See Also
Format Part of an Element (on page 384)

Using Scaled Sketching

In drawings, you can have multiple embedded views on a drawing sheet that are at different
model scales (e.g. 1/4" = 1' and 1/8" = 1'). You can add graphics to the views and treat them as
if they were actual model graphics. Use the Scaled Sketching command to draw all graphics at a
consistent scale factor. The scale factor used is based on a user-selected SmartFrame.
For more information, see Dimensioning Drawing Elements in the User's Guide.
See Also
Scaled Sketching Command (on page 387)
Scaled Sketching Ribbon (on page 387)
Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor (on page 386)

Add the Scaled Sketching Button to the Smart Electrical Toolbar

Follow the steps below to add the custom Scaled Sketching command to Smart Electrical.
1. Click Tools > Customize.
2. On the Toolbars tab, select Tools.
3. Select and drag the Scaled Sketch icon to a place on your toolbar.
Now you can use the command from Smart Electrical. This command will be available each time
you open Smart Electrical.
See Also
Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor (on page 386)
Scaled Sketching Ribbon (on page 387)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 385

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor

Follow the steps below to use the Scaled Sketching command to draw or edit objects at a
specific scale factor.
Make sure you have added the Scaled Sketching command to your Smart Electrical
toolbar. See Add the Scaled Sketching Button to the Smart Electrical Toolbar (on page 385).
1. Click Scaled Sketching to open the Scaled Sketching ribbon.

Scaled Sketching Ribbon (on page 387)

2. To set the color of any objects not being edited using the scale factor, click Select color for
referenced data . Click on the required color from the color palette.

3. Insert a SmartFrame (see Working with Object, Linking and Embedding) and set the scale
factor of the SmartFrame, or click on an existing SmartFrame. The scale is read and taken
from that SmartFrame. The selected scale type is displayed in the Scaled Sketching
ribbon.

▪ Do not create or edit any layers when using the scaled sketching command.
▪ To get accurate dimensional data about scaled objects, be sure to dimension them
while in scaled sketching mode. The dimensions are automatically configured to display
at the value in which they were drawn.
4. Click Enter Scaled Sketch mode to start drawing at the selected scale.
The system scales the drawing sheet to match the specified scale value.
5. Use the application's drawing/editing commands to draw the required graphics.
6. Click Finish to end the selected scale mode.

▪ The only way to exit scaled sketching is to click Finish. All modifications you made in the
document are retained.
▪ Whenever you finish using scaled sketching, the undo history is cleared, and you cannot
undo any previous edits. Undo is available after you continue working in SmartSketch
Drawing Editor.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 386

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

▪ Leaders must be placed on objects (Labels, Text Boxes, and so forth) that were placed
during Scaled Sketch mode. If the objects were not placed during Scaled Sketch mode, the
leader is not remembered in the SmartFrame after the view is updated.

Scaled Sketching Command

Enables you to edit or draw new objects at a scale that is different from the drawing scale for
the active sheet. You can select a SmartFrame in the current document. The system then uses
the scale factor of that SmartFrame.
See Also
Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor (on page 386)
Scaled Sketching Ribbon (on page 387)

Scaled Sketching Ribbon

The Scaled Sketching ribbon displays when you click Scaled Sketching on the Smart Electrical
Drawings Compose toolbar.
Select color for referenced data - displays a color palette for you to set the color of any
objects not being edited using the scale factor.

Scale Setting
Displays the scale taken from the selected SmartFrame.
Enter Scaled Sketch Mode
Starts the system in using the scale factor for objects being drawn or edited.
Finish
Ends the scale mode.
See Also
Scaled Sketching Command (on page 387)
Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor (on page 386)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 387

SECTION 15
Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements
The software provides several simple methods for utilizing existing elements. You can quickly
move or copy an existing element or group of elements onto a drawing sheet. Moving or copying
elements saves you time by eliminating the need to re-create information, as well as help you
maintain accurate graphic data throughout a project.

Selecting Elements
You can select individual or multiple elements using the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar. When
you click the Select Tool, the pointer changes to an arrow with a locate zone indicator at the
end. As you move the pointer, any element that the locate zone passes over is displayed in the
highlight color. When an element is highlighted you can click to select it.
You can select more than one element at a time by clicking the Select Tool and then holding
the SHIFT or CTRL key as you click the elements you want to select. Or, you can click the
Select Tool and then drag the mouse to fence elements.
You can also use a tool called QuickPick to select elements that overlap. To use it, hover the
Select Tool pointer over the elements. When an ellipsis displays you can left-click or right-click
to display the number of selectable elements. You can move the pointer over the numbers;
when the element that you want highlights, you can click on the corresponding number to select
it.

Moving Elements
The software provides several methods for moving elements. You can drag an element with the
Select Tool or specify precision points with Move on the Change toolbar. You can also use
PinPoint with the Select Tool to move an element a precise distance in X and Y relative to a
known position on your drawing. For more information, see Move an Element with PinPoint and
the Move Command.

Copying Elements
You can copy elements with one of many methods:
▪ You can select an object and click Copy on the Main toolbar. The selected item is placed on
the Clipboard. Then, when you click Paste on the Main toolbar, the item is placed on the
drawing sheet. The element will not change from its original form.
▪ You can copy one or more elements by clicking the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar. After
the pointer changes to show that the element can be copied, hold the CTRL key and drag
the copy to its new location.
▪ Formatting, such as line weight, line color, and line style, can be copied from selected
objects and applied to other objects as they are selected using Format Painter on the Main
toolbar.
▪ You can make several copies of elements that are the same by selecting the element and
clicking Rectangular Pattern or Circular Pattern on the Change toolbar.
▪ You can also click Offset, Move, Scale, or Rotate on the Change toolbar to create copies.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 388

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Cutting and Deleting Elements

You can cut an element by clicking Cut on the Main toolbar. The element is placed on the
Clipboard. You can then use Paste to place the element in the current document or into other
documents.
If you do not Paste the element after cutting, it will be permanently removed
from the document.
You can permanently remove an element by selecting the element and pressing Delete on your
keyboard. You can also permanently remove an element by clicking Edit on the Main toolbar
and then selecting Delete.
See Also
Moving Elements (on page 400)
Copying and Pasting Elements (on page 405)
Cutting or Deleting Elements (on page 412)

Display the Change Toolbar

▪ On the Main toolbar, click the Change icon .
See Also
Cutting or Deleting Elements (on page 412)
Moving Elements (on page 400)
Copying and Pasting Elements (on page 405)

Selecting Elements
To select an element, you must use Select Tool at the top of the Draw toolbar. You can select
lines, arcs, or annotations, such as dimensions or fills. You can also select element groups,
embedded or linked objects, symbols, or handles on elements that indicate relationships.

Selecting Single Elements

To select an element, you can click the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar.

When you click Select Tool, the pointer changes to an arrow with a locate zone indicator at the
end. As you move the pointer, any element that the locate zone passes over is displayed in the
highlight color. When an element is highlighted, you can click to select it.

When you select an individual element, the following things happen:

▪ The element changes to the selection color. You can change the selection color using
Options on the Tools menu.
▪ The element's handles are displayed. Handles are solid squares at significant positions on a
selected element, such as end points and center points. Handles allow you to directly modify
the element—drag a handle to change the element's shape. Although you can select more
than one element at a time, only one element can have handles at a time.
▪ The element's important properties are displayed on a ribbon.
▪ If the element is linked or embedded into the current document, selecting it allows you to
double-click it for editing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 389

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

When you select multiple elements or grouped elements, they change to the selection color.

Selecting Multiple Elements

You can select more than one element at a time by clicking the Select Tool and then holding
the SHIFT or CTRL key as you click the elements you want to select. Or, you can click the
Select Tool and then drag the mouse to fence elements.
You can use the ribbon to select whether you want only elements completely enclosed by the
fence to be selected or any element that is partly enclosed by the fence. Many manipulation
commands, like delete, move, copy, and rotate, act upon all elements in the selection set.

Selecting an Element That Overlaps Other Elements

If you want to select an element that overlaps other elements, and you cannot highlight the
element you want by moving the pointer over it, you can use a tool called QuickPick. To use it,
hover the pointer over the exact intersection of the elements. When the software displays an
ellipsis, or three small circles, by the pointer, you can left-click or right-click to display a small
toolbar that shows the number of selectable elements. You can move the pointer over the
numbers; and, when the element that you want highlights, you can click on the corresponding
number to select it.

Clearing Elements
To clear an element or a group of elements, you can click any point on the drawing sheet.
See Also
Move an Element with the Select Tool (on page 403)
Copy an Element with the Select Tool (on page 406)
Select Elements Using SmartSelect (on page 393)

Select an Element
1. On the Main toolbar, click Select Tool.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ To select one element, click it.
▪ To select more than one element hold the SHIFT or CTRL key and click each element.
▪ To select more than one element at once, drag to fence the objects.
▪ To select one of several overlapping elements, use QuickPick.
▪ To select all elements, click CTRL + A or right-click in the Drawing sheet and click
Select All.

To select an element with QuickPick

QuickPick helps you to select elements that overlap each other.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 390

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

1. Position the pointer over the element you want to select and pause the pointer there.
2. When the pointer changes to an ellipsis (three dots), click. The software displays the
QuickPick toolbar near the pointer, with a button for each selectable element.

3. Move the pointer over QuickPick without clicking to highlight the corresponding elements.

4. When the element you want to select is highlighted, click the corresponding button on the
QuickPick toolbar.

To clear a selection
Do one of the following:
▪ Click in free space.
▪ Right-click in free space.
▪ Select another element without holding the SHIFT or CTRL key.
▪ To clear the selection of one element and leave other elements selected, click the element
while holding the SHIFT key.

▪ When the Select Tool is active, selectable elements highlight as you pass the pointer over
them. When the element you want to select is highlighted, click to select it.
▪ You can use the ribbon commands to set element selection options.
▪ You can change the element highlight and selection colors with Options on the Tools
menu.
See Also
Select Tool (on page 392)
Select Elements Using SmartSelect (on page 393)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 391

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Select Tool

Changes the pointer to the arrow-shaped selection pointer so that you can select, modify, and
manipulate elements. The circle at the end of the pointer arrow is the locate zone.
See Also
Move an Element with the Select Tool (on page 403)
Copy an Element with the Select Tool (on page 406)
Select Tool Ribbon (on page 392)

Select Tool Ribbon

The default selection ribbon is displayed only when nothing is selected. After you select an
object, the selection ribbon is replaced with a ribbon bar for editing the selected object.
To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and
read the ToolTip.
Inside — Specifies that elements inside the fence are selected.
Overlapping — Specifies that elements overlapped by the fence are selected, as well as
elements inside the fence.
Top Down — Specifies that groups of elements are located as opposed to individual
elements in a group.
Bottom Up — Specifies that individual elements in a group are located as opposed to the
whole group.
Expand — Displays another ribbon depending on the items that you selected on the drawing
sheet. This button appears when you select ten or more items on the drawing sheet. When you
click it, another ribbon appears.
The options that appear depend on the types of elements that you selected. For example, if you
select eleven lines, then the Line ribbon appears. If you select several types of items, then only
the common properties for those types of elements appear on the Select Tool ribbon. For
example, if you select nine lines and a circle, then the ribbon displays the Style, Line Type,
Width, and Color options. For more information about the options that appear, see the Help
topic for the selected element's ribbon.
If the items that you selected have no common properties, then no options will appear if you
click Expand. For example, if you select a dimension and ten lines and then click Expand, a
ribbon does not appear.
See Also
Move an Element with the Select Tool (on page 403)
Copy an Element with the Select Tool (on page 406)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 392

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Select All Command

Selects all visible elements in a window.
In addition to clicking Edit > Select All, you can also access this command when you
position the pointer in the document and right-click.
See Also
Selecting Elements (on page 389)

Select Elements Using SmartSelect

1. On the Draw toolbar, click SmartSelect .
2. On the SmartSelect toolbar, select the type of fence placement - Rectangle or
Polygon . Complete one of the following actions:
▪ Click Inside Fence on the SmartSelect toolbar to select all elements entirely inside
the fence.
▪ Click Overlapping Fence to select all elements entirely inside the fence and those
elements outside but touching the fence at some point.
3. Place a fence around the elements you want to select by following the prompts in the Status
Bar.
-or-
Click Chain Selection and click on an element that is endpoint-connected to other
elements. All endpoint-connected elements are automatically selected.
4. To locate groups of elements as opposed to individual elements in a group, click Top Down
on the SmartSelect toolbar.
-or-
Click Bottom Up to locate individual elements in a group as opposed to the whole
group.
You can click Locate Filter to define the types of drawing elements that can be
selected.
See Also
SmartSelect Command (on page 394)
SmartSelect Ribbon (on page 394)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 393

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

SmartSelect Command
Opens a ribbon bar that provides different ways to create select sets. You can create a
select set by:
▪ Drawing a rectangular or polygonal fence around elements based on points that you define.
▪ Using the Chain Selection command to select an element and all elements that are
chained or connected to the element based on endpoint connection.
▪ Using the Invert Selection command to clear the current element select set while adding
new elements to the select set.
See Also
SmartSelect Ribbon (on page 394)
Selecting Endpoint-Connected Elements (on page 395)
SmartSelect Ribbon
Rectangle - select elements defined by a rectangular fence. Drag the mouse to define a
dynamic rectangular shape. Release the mouse to select the element(s) inside or overlapping
the fence boundary.
Creates a select area, or fence, by drawing a rectangle around points that you define. When you
drag the mouse to define a rectangular fence, a dashed rectangular outline dynamically appears
as you drag. When you reach the correct size, release the mouse button to create the fence.
The dashed fence outline disappears and the elements are selected.
Polygon - select elements defined by a polygon-shaped fence. Click the mouse to define
points for a dynamic polygon shape. Right-click the mouse to select the element(s) inside or
overlapping the fence boundary.
Chain Selection - select other elements that are endpoint-connected to the selected
element.
Inside - select elements inside a rectangular or polygon fence.
Overlapping - select elements overlapped by a rectangular or polygon fence as well as
elements inside the fence.
Top Down - locate groups as opposed to individual elements in a group.
Bottom Up - locate individual elements in a group as opposed to the whole group.
Turn Filter On/Off - turn filtering for drawing elements on or off. When filtering is turned off,
the Locate Filter command is disabled.
Locate Filter - Opens the Define Locate Filter Dialog Box (on page 396) to specify the
type(s) of drawing elements that can be selected.

Invert Selection - remove selected elements from the select set while adding new elements
to the select set.
See Also
SmartSelect Command (on page 394)
Select Elements Using SmartSelect (on page 393)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 394

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Selecting Endpoint-Connected Elements

Use the Chain Selection command in the Select by SmartSelect ribbon to select multiple
elements that are endpoint-connected.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click SmartSelect .
2. On the SmartSelect ribbon, click Chain Selection .
3. Click to select a single element in the current drawing. Elements that are
endpoint-connected to that selected element are also selected.
Filter settings determine the type(s) of elements that can be selected. Use the
Locate Filter command in the SmartSelect ribbon to specify the type(s) of drawing elements to
be selected.
See Also
Selecting Elements (on page 389)
Select Elements Using SmartSelect (on page 393)
Invert Selection Command

Removes selected elements from the select set while adding unselected elements to the
select set. The Invert Selection command is in the SmartSelect ribbon.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click SmartSelect .

2. On the SmartSelect ribbon, click Invert Selection .

3. Elements in the active select set are cleared, and unselected elements are added to the
active select set.
Filter settings also determine the types of elements that can be selected. Use the
Locate Filter command on the SmartSelect ribbon to set the types of drawing elements to be
selected.
See Also
SmartSelect Ribbon (on page 394)
Filtering the Selection of Drawing Elements
The Locate Filter command on the SmartSelect ribbon allows you to specify the type(s) of
drawing elements selected. Follow the steps below to set up element filtering.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click SmartSelect .
2. From the Select by SmartSelect ribbon, use the Turn Filter On/Off toggle button to turn
on filtering (the button will be pressed in).
3. Click Locate Filter .
4. From the Define Locate Filter dialog box, specify the required element type(s) for selection.
5. Click OK to apply the filter.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 395

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Define Locate Filter Dialog Box

Specifies the type(s) of elements selected with SmartSelect. Click Locate Filter on the
SmartSelect toolbar to display this dialog box. Click to specify the element types from the list.
This command is inactive if filtering has been turned off. Use the Turn Filtering
On/Off command on the SmartSelect ribbon to enable and disable the use of filters during
element selection.
See Also
Select Elements Using SmartSelect (on page 393)
SmartSelect Ribbon (on page 394)

Undo Actions
Do one of the following:
▪ To undo the most recent action, on the Main toolbar, click Undo .
▪ To undo more than one action, click Undo List on the Main toolbar, and then select the
actions you want to undo.
You can do this action only if you have placed Undo List button on the Main toolbar.
You can place the button by selecting Tools > Customize > Edit, and then dragging it over to
the Main toolbar.
When operations are performed in the or in the Smart Electrical Drawing
Console, any actions in the Smart Electrical Undo buffer are removed. Consequently, any undo
actions must be performed manually.
See Also
Redo Actions (on page 397)

Undo Command
Reverses an action. You can change the number of actions that can be undone using
Options. You then click the General tab on the Options dialog box.

Undo List Command (Edit Menu)

Reverses an action based on what you select on the list.
▪ You can change the number of actions that can be undone using Options.
▪ View manipulations are not included in the action list.
To use Undo List, select Tools > Customize > Edit, and then drag it over to a menu or
the Main toolbar.
See Also
Options Command (on page 1235)
Redo Actions (on page 397)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 396

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Redo Actions
Do one of the following:
▪ To reverse the most recent Undo action, click Redo on the Main toolbar. The Redo
command is not enabled until an Undo action has been performed.
▪ To reverse more than one Undo action, click Redo List , and then select the actions you
want to perform.
You can perform a redo list action only if you have placed Redo List on a menu or
on the Main toolbar. Select Tools > Customize > Edit, and then drag the button over to the
menu or Main toolbar.
See Also
Undo Actions (on page 396)

Redo Command
Reverses the most recent Undo action performed.
See Also
Redo Actions (on page 397)
Drawing Basic Elements (on page 329)

Redo List Command

Lists the most recent Redo actions if multiple Undo operations have been performed.
To use Redo List, select Tools > Customize > Edit, and then place it on a menu or on
the Main toolbar.
See Also
Options Command (on page 1235)
Redo Actions (on page 397)
Undo Actions (on page 396)

Finding Elements
The software has the ability to find items in your drawing. You can define search criteria based
on an item type already placed in your drawing. When you have found all drawing items of a
certain type, you can modify their properties or reposition them.
When you find drawing items, the selected items are added to a select set. You can view the
common properties of the select set items in the Properties window and edit them, if
appropriate.
See Also
Drawing Basic Elements (on page 329)
Drawing Connectors (on page 334)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 397

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Find an Item in a Drawing

1. Click Edit > Find.
You can also click Ctrl + F to execute the Find command.
2. In the Find dialog box, use the options on the various tabs to define your search criteria.
3. Click Find Now to execute the search.

▪ Objects that match the specified search criteria appear as selected on the Smart Electrical
Drawing sheet. These objects are added to the select set.
▪ You can select Clear to void the results of the previous search and specify new search
criteria.
▪ You can select Reset to return the Find options to their default settings.

▪ You can use Tools > Customize to place the Find button on a toolbar.

Find Command

Searches for objects within a drawing based upon criteria you define. Instead of scouring
each sheet in your drawing, you can use the Find command to locate geometric elements and
symbols that have a specific format or a specific set of defined attributes.
First, define your search criteria in the Find dialog box, and then execute the search. Items that
match the defined criteria appear selected on the Drawing sheet.

Find Dialog Box

Provides options for locating matching information or formatting, throughout a drawing. You can
define your search criteria to look for as many (or as few) electrical item types as you wish.
Options for defining and refining search criteria can be found on the following tabs:

Type Tab (Find Dialog Box)

Specifies the type of Smart Electrical element, object, or attribute you wish to find. You can
define the parameters of your search to encompass a wide- range of items, including geometric
elements, Smart Electrical symbols, or a variety of attributes.
Find Now - Executes the search based on the criteria specified. When found, the matching
object appears highlighted on the active Drawing sheet.
Clear - Clears out the results of the last search conducted. All items that appeared selected in
the Smart Electrical drawing are cleared.
Reset - Returns the options on each of the Find dialog box tabs to their default settings.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 398

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Symbology Tab (Find Dialog Box)

Sets options for performing a search based on color, line weight, and line type.
Color - Specifies the drawing color used in the search criteria.
Width - Defines the line width used in the search criteria.
Type - Specifies the drawing line type used in the search criteria.
Find Now - Executes the search based on the criteria specified. When found, the matching
object appears highlighted on the active Drawing sheet.
Clear - Clears out the results of the last search conducted. All items that appeared selected in
the Smart Electrical drawing are cleared.
Reset -Returns the options on each of the Find dialog box tabs to their default settings.

Style Tab (Find Dialog Box)

Defines search criteria based on style attributes.
Linear - Specifies the line style used in the search criteria.
Fill - Specifies the type of fill used in the search criteria.
Dimension - Specifies the type of dimension used in the search criteria.
Text - Specifies the type of text used in the search criteria.
Find Now - Executes the search based on the criteria specified. When found, the matching
object appears highlighted on the active Drawing sheet.
Clear - Clears out the results of the last search conducted. All items that appeared selected in
the Smart Electrical drawing are cleared.
Reset - Returns the options on each of the Find dialog box tabs to their default settings.

Layer Tab (Find Dialog Box)

Specifies the layer of the Smart Electrical document on which to conduct the search. Two
options are available by default: All layers or the Default layer; however, if you have created
additional layers in the Smart Electrical document, they are also displayed.
Find Now - Executes the search based on the criteria specified. When found, the matching
object appears highlighted on the active Drawing sheet.
Clear - Clears out the results of the last search conducted. All items that appeared selected in
the Smart Electrical drawing are cleared.
Reset - Returns the options on each of the Find dialog box tabs to their default settings.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 399

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Text Tab (Find Dialog Box)

Sets search criteria based upon text-based options.
Text boxes and labels - Specifies the text string used in the search criteria.
Attribute names - Specifies the attribute name used in the search criteria.
Attribute values - Specifies the attribute value used in the search criteria.
Match case - Limits the search criteria to include only the text with the same capitalization as
the Text boxes and labels text.
Bold - Limits the search criteria to include only text that is bold.
Italics - Limits the search criteria to include only text that is italicized.
Underline - Limits the search criteria to include only text that is underlined.
Font name - Limits the search criteria to include only text that matches the font name specified.
Font size - Limits the search criteria to include only text that matches the font size specified.
Find Now - Executes the search based on the criteria specified. When found, the matching
object appears highlighted on the active Drawing sheet.
Clear - Clears out the results of the last search conducted. All items that appeared selected in
the Smart Electrical drawing are cleared.
Reset - Returns the options on each of the Find dialog box tabs to their default settings.

General Tab (Find Dialog Box)

Refines your search criteria to include a specific symbol name.
Symbol name - Specifies the name of the symbol to be located when the search executes.
Find Now - Executes the search based on the criteria specified. When found, the matching
object appears highlighted on the active Drawing sheet.
Clear - Clears out the results of the last search conducted. All items that appeared selected in
the Smart Electrical drawing are cleared.
Reset - Returns the options on each of the Find dialog box tabs to their default settings.

Moving Elements
You can move elements on the drawing sheet with one of several methods:

▪ Dragging elements with the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar.

▪ Specifying precision points with Move/Copy on the Change toolbar.
▪ Moving elements in small increments with Nudge on the Change toolbar.
You can also click Scale and Rotate on the Change toolbar to move elements.
You must press ALT while selecting a drawing view.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 400

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Using the Select Tool

To move an element, you must first select it with Select Tool on the Draw toolbar. You can
drag the selected element to move it without changing its shape.

The element's handles do not need to be displayed for you to move it. If they are
displayed, and you want to move the element and not modify it, position the pointer so it is not
over a handle.

You can move an element with precision if you use the relationship indicators.

When you modify a drawing, elements with maintained relationships automatically update to
honor the relationship. For example, if you move an element that shares a maintained parallel
relationship with another element, the other element moves as needed to remain parallel. If a
line and an arc share a maintained tangent relationship, they remain tangent when either is
modified.

Moving Elements by Specifying Precision Points

You can move a line that shares a tangent relationship with an arc if you select the line and click
Move on the Change toolbar. As you move the line, the line moves without maintaining the
relationship with the arc. You can then specify a 'from' point and a 'to' point by clicking on the
drawing sheet or by entering values in the ribbon. You can move any element by specifying
precision points with Move.
See Also
Move an Element with the Select Tool (on page 403)
Move an Element (on page 402)
Move an Element Precisely (on page 404)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 401

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Move an Element
1. Select one or more elements.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Move .
3. If you want to copy the elements, click Copy on the ribbon.
4. Click to define the 'from' point.
5. Click to define the 'to' point. After the elements move, the relationships with other elements
are not maintained.

▪ You must press ALT while selecting a drawing view.

▪ You can click Move before you select elements to move.
▪ Using the Move command on the Change toolbar will break any relationships the element
may have. You must move an element with the Select Tool (on page 403) to maintain its
relationships.
▪ Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to copy elements, you can hold down the CTRL key
while you click to position the elements.
▪ You can use the ribbon boxes to specify the "to" point. The values are relative distances
along the x and y axes. You must click to specify to which quadrant you want to move or
copy the selection set.
▪ When you move or copy elements, the "to" point becomes the next "from" point.
▪ The software maintains relationships within the select set if they are still applicable after you
have moved or copied the elements.
▪ You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom, Fit, and Pan, while you
are using Move.
▪ When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you to Move at the point where
you left off.
See Also
Move an Element with the Select Tool (on page 403)
Move Command (on page 404)
Move Ribbon (on page 404)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 402

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Move an Element with the Select Tool

1. On the Main toolbar, click Select Tool .
2. Position the pointer over the element, but not over any of the element's handles.
3. Drag the element to its new position.
You must press ALT while selecting a drawing view.

Move an element with precision

1. On the Main toolbar, click Select Tool .
2. Position the pointer over the element you want to move, at a location where the software
recognizes a key point.
3. Begin to drag the element.
4. Release the element when the software recognizes the key point of another element, or a
relationship between the element you are moving and another element.
If you want to move a selected element, make sure to position the pointer away from
any of the element's handles. Dragging a handle modifies the element instead of moving it.
See Also
Moving Elements (on page 400)
Selecting Elements (on page 389)

Move an Element with PinPoint and the Move Command

You can use PinPoint with the Move command to move an element a precise distance in X and
Y relative to a known position in your drawing.

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool .

2. On the Main toolbar, click PinPoint .

The PinPoint toolbar displays.
3. Click the location for the PinPoint target.

4. On the PinPoint toolbar, click Relative Tracking .

5. On the Change toolbar, click Move .
6. Select the element to move, and select the "from" position. Move the cursor, and select the
"to" position.
The software places the PinPoint target automatically and displays the distance between the
pointer and the PinPoint target as the cursor moves. The selected element moves to the new
location.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 403

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Move an Element Precisely

You can use PinPoint with the Select Tool to move an element a precise distance in X and Y
relative to a known position in your drawing.

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool .

2. On the Main toolbar, click PinPoint .
3. Click the location that you want for the PinPoint target point to be.
4. Using the Select tool, point to the element that you want to move. Relationship indicators
appear next to the pointer to indicate keypoints on the element.
5. When the relationship indicators identify the key point that you want, drag the element.
PinPoint displays the distance between the pointer and the reference point as you drag.
6. Release the mouse button when the element is where you want it.
You must press ALT while selecting a drawing view.
See Also
Placing Elements in Precise Locations (on page 451)
Draw with PinPoint (on page 452)

Move Command
Moves elements from one location to another. You can specify the locations by clicking on
the drawing sheet or by entering values in the ribbon. You can move one or more elements at a
time, and you can move element groups.
You must press ALT while selecting a drawing view.
See Also
Move an Element (on page 402)
Move an Element Precisely (on page 404)
Move Ribbon (on page 404)

Move Ribbon
Specifies the "from" point and "to" point when you move objects or elements.
Copy — Copies the elements in the selection set.
Create Free Space Dimensions — Works in conjunction with Copy to turn on or off
the ability to copy dimensions. You can create a copy of both the elements and associated
dimensions, or copy just the dimensions and connect them to other elements that are similar.
This option is not enabled by default.
Step Distance — Increments or decrements the value displayed in the ribbon boxes. For
example, typing a step value of 0.25 and moving the pointer away from the "from" point would
increment the distance from 0.25 to 0.5, 0.75, and so forth.
X — Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y — Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 404

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

See Also
Move Command (on page 404)
Move an Element (on page 402)
Move an Element Precisely (on page 404)

Nudge an Element
1. Select a graphical object in the Smart Electrical drawing.
You can select multiple objects using the Ctrl key.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Nudge .
3. In the Delta box, specify a delta value to control how much the object moves.
4. Use the arrow keys to "nudge" the object or select set in the corresponding direction (left,
right, up, down).
You can use Ctrl + arrow keys to move the object or select set a small delta.
The Nudge command stays active until you select another command.
You must press ALT while selecting a drawing view.
See Also
Nudge Command (on page 405)
Move an Element with the Select Tool (on page 403)
Move Ribbon (on page 404)
Nudge Command
Moves an element or a select set in small increments. You use the Delta box on the Nudge
ribbon to define the size of the increment, and then use the arrow keys to "nudge" the element
or select set in the corresponding direction (left, right, up, and down).
See Also
Move Command (on page 404)
Nudge an Element (on page 405)

Copying and Pasting Elements

You can copy any element, dimension, or object by selecting it and clicking Copy on the Main
toolbar. Copy places the selected item on the Clipboard. When you click Paste on the Main
toolbar, the item is placed on the drawing sheet.
You can also copy an element with the Select Tool. You click the Select Tool on the Draw
toolbar, select the element, and press CTRL as you drag the element across the drawing sheet.
You can also copy several selected elements in the same manner.
When you copy elements that have relationships, the relationships are copied and retained
when possible. For example, if you make a copy of two related lines, the relationship is also
copied. However, if you copy one of two lines that are related to each other, the relationship is
not copied.
See Also
Copy an Element (on page 406)
Copy an Element with the Select Tool (on page 406)
Paste an Element (on page 407)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 405

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Copy an Element
1. Select an element.
2. On the Main toolbar, click Copy .
You can also click CTRL + C to copy the selected element.

▪ After you copy an element and its relationships, they are placed on the Clipboard. You can
then use Paste to paste them into the current document, or into other documents.
▪ When you paste the element, it is pasted on top of the element you copied. To see the
pasted element, you must drag it.
See Also
Copy Command (on page 406)
Copying and Pasting Elements (on page 405)

Copy an Element with the Select Tool

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool .
2. Select one or more elements.
3. Position the pointer over the element, but not over any of the element's handles. The pointer
changes to show that the element can now be copied.
4. Hold the CTRL key and drag the copy to its new location.
See Also
Copy Command (on page 406)
Copying and Pasting Elements (on page 405)
Copy Command
Copies selected elements and their associated relationships to the Clipboard. When you use
this command, it replaces the previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents.
When you copy more than one element at a time, all relationships shared among the elements
are also copied. However, when you copy an element that shares a relationship with an element
that you are not copying, the relationship is not copied.
See Also
Copy an Element (on page 406)
Copy an Element with the Select Tool (on page 406)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 406

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Copy a Format
1. Click the object with the formatting you want to copy.
2. Click Format Painter Command (Main Toolbar) (on page 407) .
3. Click another object to apply the new formatting.

▪ If a connector with a line terminator is selected as the object from which to copy, the
terminator will be added to any other linear geometry selected with the Format Painter. This
is the only way to apply terminators to linear geometry that is not a connector.
▪ You can apply format changes to multiple objects by dragging a fence around the required
objects.
▪ When copying a format from text to geometry, or vice versa, only the color is applied.

Format Painter Command (Main Toolbar)

Copies formatting, such as line weight, color and line style, from a selected object and
applies it to other objects as they are selected. The two objects do not have to be similar.
Format Painter will format all objects including text, dimensions, and groups; however, it will not
re-format symbols

Paste an Element
You can place elements on the Clipboard with Copy or Cut, and then paste the elements into
the current document or another document.
1. Open the document in which you want to paste the contents of the Clipboard.
2. On the Main toolbar, click Paste .
You can also press CTRL + V to paste elements on the Clipboard into your
document.

▪ The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use Copy or Cut again.
▪ You cannot run Paste if the Clipboard is empty.
▪ You can use Undo to reverse the results of Paste.
▪ If you are unable to see the symbol, element, fill, or document that you pasted into your
Smart Electrical drawing, click Fit on the Main toolbar
▪ Pasted text and elements remain selected after you use Paste.
See Also
Copy Command (on page 406)
Cut Command (on page 413)
Paste Command (on page 408)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 407

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Paste Command
Inserts the Clipboard contents at the same coordinates the elements had in the source
document. The command is not available if the Clipboard is empty.
See Also
Paste an Element (on page 407)
Paste an Element with a Different Format (on page 408)

Paste an Element with a Different Format

1. Cut or copy the element you want to paste.
2. Click Edit > Paste Special.
3. To embed the information, click Paste.
4. To link the information, click Paste Link.
5. In the As box, select the format that you want to use to paste the information.
6. To paste the information into the lower left corner of the current document, click OK.

▪ The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use Paste Special again.
▪ You cannot run Paste Special if the Clipboard is empty.
▪ If you select an element as the insertion point and that element cannot be replaced, the
Clipboard contents are not pasted at the insertion point.
▪ You can use Undo to reverse the results of Paste Special.
▪ You can use Redo to repeatedly paste the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion point.
▪ If the Clipboard contains data, and you have selected data in the document, the software
replaces the selected data with the contents of the Clipboard.
▪ Pasted text and elements remain selected after you use Paste Special.
See Also
Paste Special Command (on page 409)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 408

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Paste Special Command

Inserts the Clipboard contents into a document using a selected format. This command is
available only on the Edit menu.
See Also
Paste Special Dialog Box (on page 409)
Paste an Element with a Different Format (on page 408)

Paste Special Dialog Box

Inserts the Clipboard contents into a document using a selected format.
To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the Question Mark in the
upper right corner of the dialog box and click the control that you want information about.
See Also
Copying and Pasting Elements (on page 405)
Paste an Element with a Different Format (on page 408)

Offset Elements
You can select elements to be offset before you use Offset. Or you can select Offset before
you select the elements.
1. On the Change toolbar, click Offset .
2. Click the element or elements that you want to offset.
3. In the Step Distance box on the ribbon, type the distance that you want to offset the
selected elements.
4. Click to define the direction in which you want to offset the elements.

▪ If the Change toolbar is not displayed, click Change on the Main toolbar.
▪ To select a chain of connected elements, select Offset Chain.
See Also
Associative Offset Command (on page 411)
Offset Command (on page 410)
Associative Offset Command (on page 411)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 409

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Offset Command
Draws an offset copy of an element or a set of contiguous elements. This command copies
elements while maintaining characteristics such as the angle of lines and the center point of arcs
and circles.
Offset copies the original element at a specified distance. Offsetting outside the perimeter of the
original element creates a larger element. Offsetting inside the perimeter of the original element
creates a smaller element.

Elements are transitioned as necessary during the offset operation.

See Also
Offset Ribbon (on page 410)
Offset Elements (on page 409)

Offset Ribbon
Select Chain — Selects a chain of continuous elements. If this option is not selected, Offset
selects only an individual element.
Step Distance — Sets the distance from the base element to the offset copy.
Cumulative Offset — Sets the total distance of the current offset graphic element from the
original graphic element.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 410

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

The following graphic illustrates the difference between step distance (A) and cumulative offset
(B).

See Also
Offset Command (on page 410)
Associative Offset Command (on page 411)
Offset Elements (on page 409)

Associative Offset Command

Draws an offset copy of a curve and applies an offset relation. This command copies
elements while maintaining characteristics such as the angle of lines and the center point of arcs
and circles.
Associative Offset copies the original curve geometry at a specified distance. Offsetting
outside the perimeter of the original element creates a larger element. Offsetting inside the
perimeter of the original element creates a smaller element.
The Associative Offset command is available only if you use Customize on the Tools
menu to place it on a toolbar or menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, select
Manipulation under Categories to display the Associative Offset button.
See Also
Offset Elements (on page 409)
Associative Offset Ribbon (on page 412)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 411

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Associative Offset Ribbon

Associative offsets - Sets the distance from the base element to the offset copy.
See Also
Associative Offset Command (on page 411)
Offset Command (on page 410)
Offset Elements (on page 409)

Cutting or Deleting Elements

To delete elements, select the elements and click Cut on the main toolbar or press DELETE on
the keyboard. Clicking Cut allows you to paste the element in another location. Pressing
DELETE removes the element permanently.
Relationships that are no longer applicable after you delete an element are automatically
deleted. For example, if you delete one of a pair of parallel lines, the parallel relationship is
deleted from the remaining line.

See Also
Cut Command (on page 413)
Delete Command (on page 413)
Cut an Element (on page 413)

Delete an Element
1. Select an element.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Delete.
▪ On the keyboard, press DELETE.
When you delete an element and its relationships, the relationships are not pasted
to the Clipboard and cannot be reinserted. However, you can restore an element and its
relationships by immediately using Undo.
See Also
Cut Command (on page 413)
Cutting or Deleting Elements (on page 412)
Delete Command (on page 413)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 412

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Delete Command
Deletes the selected element and any relationships and dimensions that have been placed
on it. You cannot reinsert or paste elements deleted with this command. However, you can
retrieve the data by immediately clicking Undo.
See Also
Cutting or Deleting Elements (on page 412)
Delete an Element (on page 412)

Cut an Element
1. Select an element.
2. On the Main toolbar, click Cut .
You can also press CTRL + X to cut the selected element.

▪ After you cut an element and its relationships from a document, they are placed on the
Clipboard. You can then use Paste to paste them into the current document, or into other
documents.
▪ When relationships exist between elements, cutting the elements from a document deletes
the relationships. If there is a relationship between a selected element and an unselected
element, you can do one of the following:
▪ Cut and paste only the selected element.
▪ Cut and paste both elements and their relationship.
▪ Cut and paste only the selected element and the relationship, then reconnect the
relationship to another element.
See Also
Cut Command (on page 413)
Delete Command (on page 413)
Paste Command (on page 408)
Cut Command
Cuts selected elements from the document and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected
elements replace the previous contents of the Clipboard.
See Also
Cutting or Deleting Elements (on page 412)
Cut an Element (on page 413)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 413

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Creating Patterns
Patterns are useful if you want to create several elements quickly that are the same without
using several commands. You can create patterns by selecting one or more elements and
making several copies of it with Rectangular Pattern or Circular Pattern on the toolbar.

To modify individual members of the pattern, you can select an individual member of the pattern
and change it the way you would any other element.
See Also
Draw a Circular Pattern (on page 416)
Draw a Rectangular Pattern (on page 414)

Draw a Rectangular Pattern

1. Select one or more elements to pattern.

2. On the Change toolbar, click Rectangular Pattern .

3. To define a rectangular area for the pattern, click Pattern Options on the ribbon.
4. On the Rectangular Pattern Options dialog box, select Fit to Rectangle.
Use the ribbon boxes and the Rectangular Pattern Options dialog box to define
other characteristics of the pattern, such as the number of pattern members and rows.
5. On the drawing sheet, click to identify one corner of the pattern and click to identify the
opposite corner of the pattern.
6. To finish creating the pattern, click Finish on the ribbon.

If you do not like the results of the pattern, you can use the Undo command.
See Also
Circular Pattern Ribbon (on page 416)
Rectangular Pattern Command (on page 415)
Rectangular Pattern Ribbon (on page 415)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 414

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Rectangular Pattern Command

Copies selected elements in a rectangular pattern on the drawing sheet.
See Also
Creating Patterns (on page 414)
Draw a Rectangular Pattern (on page 414)
Rectangular Pattern Ribbon (on page 415)

Rectangular Pattern Options Dialog Box

Pattern control — Specifies how the pattern is constructed.
▪ Incremental array — Draws a pattern with a set offset between members.
▪ Fit to rectangle — Draws a pattern by evenly spacing members along the x and y axes of
the pattern rectangle.
Stagger — Controls whether pattern members are arranged in a straight matrix, or whether
every other row or column is offset from its default position. Options are None, for a straight
matrix, Rows, to offset alternate pattern rows, and Columns, to offset alternate pattern columns.
Stagger — Sets the row or column stagger distance to the specified distance.
Stagger = 1/2 offset — Sets the row or column stagger distance to half the X Offset or Y Offset
value.
Include last column — Controls whether to include the last staggered column in the pattern or
to exclude the last column.
Preview — Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper.
See Also
Rectangular Pattern Command (on page 415)

Rectangular Pattern Ribbon

Options — Displays the Rectangular Pattern Options dialog box.
X count — Sets the number of pattern members along the x axis of the pattern rectangle.
Y count — Sets the number of pattern members along the y axis of the pattern rectangle.
X offset — Sets the distance between adjacent rows in the pattern, measured along the x axis
of the pattern rectangle.
Y offset — Sets the distance between adjacent rows in the pattern, measured along the y axis
of the pattern rectangle.
Angle — Sets the rotation angle of the pattern rectangle.
Finish — Completes the pattern. When you click this button, the pattern is created on the
drawing sheet and you can select other elements.
See Also
Rectangular Pattern Command (on page 415)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 415

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Draw a Circular Pattern

1. Select one or more elements to pattern.

2. On the Change toolbar, click Circular Pattern .

3. Click where you want the center of the circular pattern to be.
4. Use the ribbon boxes and the Circular Pattern Options dialog box to define other
characteristics of the pattern, such as the number of pattern members and rows.
5. To finish creating the pattern, click Finish on the ribbon.

If you do not like the results of the pattern, you can use the Undo command.
See Also
Circular Pattern Command (on page 416)
Circular Pattern Ribbon (on page 416)
Creating Patterns (on page 414)

Circular Pattern Command

Arranges selected elements in a circular pattern on the drawing sheet.
See Also
Circular Pattern Ribbon (on page 416)
Creating Patterns (on page 414)
Draw a Circular Pattern (on page 416)

Circular Pattern Ribbon

Options — Displays the Circular Pattern Options dialog box.
Count — Sets the number of copies in the pattern.
Rows — Sets the number of arc-shaped rows in the pattern. This option is available only when
Rows on the Circular Pattern Options dialog box is set to Multiple inward or Multiple
outward.
Angle — Sets the angle of the pattern. This box sets the sweep angle between pattern
members when Pattern control on the Circular Pattern Options dialog box is set to
Incremental array. This box also sets the total sweep angle when Pattern control is set to Fit
to arc.
Row spacing — Sets the distance between adjacent arc-shaped rows in the pattern, as
measured from the bottom of one row to the bottom of the next. The bottom is the side closest to
the center point of the circular pattern.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 416

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

See Also
Circular Pattern Command (on page 416)
Draw a Circular Pattern (on page 416)

Circular Pattern Options Dialog Box

Pattern control — Specifies how the pattern is constructed.
▪ Incremental array — Draws a pattern with a set sweep angle between members.
▪ Fit to arc — Draws a pattern by evenly spacing members along an arc.
Rows — Controls how pattern rows are arranged.
Single row — Draws a single row of pattern members.
Multiple inward — Draws multiple rows, each one closer to the pattern center than the last.
Multiple outward — Draws multiple rows, each one farther away from the pattern center than
the last.
Preview — Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper.
See Also
Circular Pattern Command (on page 416)
Circular Pattern Ribbon (on page 416)
Draw a Circular Pattern (on page 416)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 417

SECTION 16
Adding Text to Documents
You can add text to documents using different types of tools:
▪ Placing Annotations (on page 418), such as text boxes and balloons.
▪ Labels (on page 446), such as text labels and SmartLabels. Labels (on page 446), such as
text labels and SmartLabels. Labels (on page 446), such as text labels and SmartLabels.
You also can add text using a drag-and-drop operation. For example, you can drag an Excel
spreadsheet to a document to create a bill of materials.
See Also
Engineering Fonts (on page 451)
Place a Text Box (on page 423)
Place a SmartLabel (on page 449)
Create a Text Label (on page 448)
Place a Revision Cloud (on page 438)

Placing Annotations
An essential part of the drawing process is adding text, notes, and annotations. Annotations are
text and graphics that give information about a drawing. You can add this information quickly
and easily with the text and annotation commands in the software.
To place annotations in a document, you can click one of the following buttons:
▪ Text Box on the Draw toolbar

▪ Balloon on the Dimension toolbar

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 418

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Annotations with Leaders

When you create a balloon, you can place it with a leader by setting options on the ribbon. The
leader can point to another element or be placed in free space. Annotations with leaders have
the following components:

(A) Leader line

(B) Break line

(C) Graphic end

(D) Annotation

You can manipulate the annotation by selecting the leader and moving parts of it. You can
control the display of a leader break line and the graphic end and insert or delete vertices on a
leader.

Adding Leaders
You can add a leader to an annotation using Leader on the Dimension toolbar. All leaders
have two ends - the notation end and the graphic end. The notation end, or the end that
describes something, is often attached to a text box or the annotation itself; the graphic end is
the end near the object being described and frequently has a terminator arrow or free-space dot
on it. An annotation can have more than one leader. The graphic end of the annotation can point
to an element or be placed in free space. The notation end of a new leader must connect to an
annotation or the leader on an annotation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 419

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

You can create a callout by placing a text box and adding a leader to it with Leader .

Annotations and Associations

Annotations can be associative or non-associative. An associative annotation moves when its
associated element moves. Text boxes differ from the other annotations in that they are always
non-associative.
If you attach the terminator of a leader to an element, the annotation moves with the element.

If you point the graphic end of a leader to free space, the annotation is not associative to any
element in the drawing. To make an annotation associative, you can select the graphic end of
the leader and drag it to an element.

Formatting Annotations
You can format an annotation several ways. If you want several annotations to look the same,
you can apply a style by selecting it on the ribbon. You can apply dimension styles to balloons,
but not text boxes. You can apply text styles to text boxes.
If you want to format an existing balloon, click the balloon leader to select the balloon.
Then, you can change the format of the balloon.
If you want annotations to look unique, you can select an annotation and edit its properties with
the ribbon or with Properties on the Edit menu.
See Also
Place a Balloon (on page 435)
Place a Text Box (on page 423)
Add a Leader (on page 441)
Move an Annotation (on page 421)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 420

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Move an Annotation
1. Select an annotation to display its handles. As you move the pointer over the parts of the
annotation, the pointer changes to show whether you are on a part of the annotation or a
handle.

2. Click a handle and drag the leader or annotation to its new location.
The previous procedure describes the general steps you can use to move an annotation.
The following descriptions explain how to move specific parts of an annotation.

To move a terminator
1. When a terminator is connected to an element, drag the terminator handle to a new location
along the element. If you drag the handle off the end of an open element, such as a line, an
extension line automatically appears. The annotation and break line do not move.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 421

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

2. When a terminator is connected to an element, disconnect the terminator by holding the ALT
key while you drag the terminator handle. The terminator type automatically changes to the
active setting for a terminator in free space.

3. To reconnect a terminator to an element, drag the terminator handle to an element. The

terminator type automatically changes to the active setting for a terminator connected to an
element.

To move a leader line

1. Click a leader line and then drag the break line of a leader. The break line and annotation
move and the leader line changes in length, but not orientation.

2. If a leader was placed with the Leader command, you can move the leader away from the
annotation and attach it to another annotation or element. Click the leader line and then drag
the handle to the annotation or leader that you want to connect to.

To move a handle
Click a leader line and do one of the following:
1. Drag the handle closest to the annotation to move the annotation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 422

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

2. Drag the handle on a break line to move the leader line and annotation.

3. Drag a vertex handle to a new location.

See Also
Placing Annotations (on page 418)
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)

Place a Text Box

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Text Box .
2. To place a text box, drag to define the location and size of the text box. To see the text box,
begin typing text.

▪ When you place text by this method, the width measures exactly between the two
points. Text is wrapped, if necessary.
▪ The height measures at least the height between the two points. If necessary, the height
of the text box increases to fit all of the text.

▪ To place a text box, you can also click a point, and begin typing text. When you place text by
this method, the height and width are set to Auto mode. The size of the text box increases
automatically to contain all of the text. The text does not wrap.
▪ You can also place a text box by double-clicking any element. A blinking pointer appears
below or in the center of the element.
▪ You can press Enter to create a new line in a text box.
▪ When you are in edit mode, a border appears around the text box.
▪ To place a callout, you can add a leader to the text box using Leader on the Dimension
toolbar.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 423

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

See Also
Placing Annotations (on page 418)
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)

Text Box Handles

Text box handles manipulate the origin or the size of the text box while maintaining the
relationship between origin and justification.
Handles on text boxes appear as an X square, a hollow square, or a solid square.

▪ An X handle indicates the origin of the text box. Selecting an X handle modifies the origin.
▪ If you select a hollow handle, you move the text box; therefore, you are moving the origin of
the text box.
▪ You select a solid handle to modify the text box along at least one axis. You do not modify
the origin.
See Also
Placing Annotations (on page 418)
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)
Place a Text Box (on page 423)

Text Box Command

Places a text box in a document.

You can find this command on the Label Draw or Schematic Draw or Schematic toolbar.
See Also
Text Box Ribbon (on page 425)
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)
Place a Text Box (on page 423)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 424

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Text Box Ribbon

Formats a text box.
To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and
read the ToolTip.
Style — Lists and applies the available styles.
Font — Lists and applies the available fonts.
Font Size — Applies a text size.
Text Color — Sets the color of the font.
Bold — Makes text bold.
Italic — Italicizes text.
Underline — Underlines text.
Paragraph Alignment — Positions the paragraph to the left, center, or right of the text area
edges in edit mode.
You can also align the paragraph after you select text.
Border — Displays three options for setting borders. These options allow you to display no
border, display a border, or display a border with a shadow.
Dynamic Width Factor — Allows you to adjust the width of displayed text by changing the
width of the text box. The text width automatically adjusts as you change the text box width. By
default, this mode is turned off.
More — Displays more options on the ribbon.
Height — Sets the height of the text box.
Width — Sets the width of the text box.

▪ If you select text in the text box, Height and Width are not available because the text is
driving the dimension.
▪ If you select a text box and Height is not available, the text is driving Height with Auto
Save. The same is true for Width.
▪ If you place a text box with a single point, both Height and Width are not available. If you
drag a text box, Width is not available.
Angle — Sets the angle of the text box.
Horizontal Text Orientation — Specifies that the text is oriented horizontally on or in the
document.
Vertical Text Orientation — Specifies that the text is oriented vertically on or in the
document.
See Also
Resize a Text Box (on page 433)
Place a Text Box (on page 423)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 425

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

More Text Box Ribbon Commands

Height — Sets the height of the text box.
Width — Sets the width of the text box.

▪ If you select text in the text box, Height and Width are not available because the text is
driving the dimension.
▪ If you select a text box and Height is not available, the text is driving Height with Auto
Save. The same is true for Width.
▪ If you place a text box with a single point, both Height and Width are not available. If you
drag a text box, Width is not available.
Angle — Sets the angle of the text box.
Horizontal Text Orientation — Specifies that the text is oriented horizontally on or in the
document.
Vertical Text Orientation — Specifies that the text is oriented vertically on or in the
document.

Text Box Properties Dialog Box

Formats the font, paragraph, borders, or shading of a text box.
See Also
Info Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) (on page 427)
Border and Fill Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) (on page 426)
User Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) (on page 432)
Border and Fill Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box)
Border — Specifies the appearance of a border around a text box.
Show border — Displays the outline of the text box.
Border type — Sets the shape of the border around a text box. You can choose from a
selection of common geometric shapes.
Line style — Sets the line style for the text box.
Border color — Sets the color of the border.
Line width — Specifies the width of the border in paper or world units of the text box.
Paragraph separators — Places a horizontal line between each paragraph in a text box. This
option is only available if Show Border is selected.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 426

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

A paragraph is defined by a carriage return within the text body. Using the carriage return as the
sole means to create a new line of text will result in a text object with many lines as shown in the
following illustration:

As an alternative for controlling auto returns within the text body, you can restrain the width of
the box during placement or through the Text Box Properties dialog box.
Shadow — Places a shadow around the borders of text in a text box.
Shadow offset — Specifies a distance to offset the shadow in paper or world units of the text
box.
Fill color — Displays the color of a solid fill on an element boundary. This value overrides the
style of the fill. Transparent is the default. When you set the fill color to transparent, no fill is
visible on the boundary. You can also apply a fill color option with a fill pattern. Filled elements
always cover other elements when they overlap. A fill color always appears behind the fill
pattern when you apply both to the same boundary.
See Also
Apply a Border to a Text Box (on page 433)
Edit a Text Box (on page 433)

Info Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box)

Sheet — Shows the drawing sheet for an element.
Layer — Shows the layer on which an element appears in a drawing sheet.
Origin — Specifies the coordinates, or location, of a text box along the x and y axes.
All metrics on the text box are either in paper units or world units except origin. Origin is
always in world units.
Width — Sets the width of the text box to either At Least (at least the value you specify), Auto
(the text drives the width), or Exactly (exactly at the value you specify) in the At: field.
Height — Sets the height of the text box to either At Least (at least the value you specify), Auto
(the text drives the height), or Exactly (exactly at the value you specify) in the At: field.
Angle — Sets the angle of the text box.
The text box always rotates about the origin.
Text Orientation — Sets the orientation of the text either horizontally or vertically.
Units Space — Sets the text box units to either paper units or to world units.
Paper units represent units on an actual sheet of paper. Paper units are set in inches. Other
units are also available.
World units indicate real world distances, but can be scaled down to fit a sheet of paper.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 427

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Within the drawing environment, "world units" is synonymous with the term "model
units" found in other CAD packages.
Justification — Specifies the placement relationship between the origin and the shape (text
box) according to the horizontal and vertical components.
The inside text area is an area that the margins of the text box define. That is, margins are
inside the outside edges of the text box.
The following graphic illustrates top (1), right (2), bottom (3) and left (4) margins around the text
box for horizontal justification (A) and vertical justification (B).

The maximum cap height of the first formatted text line of each line defines the text area capline,
even if the line has been clipped out of the text box.
The line baseline is a font metric that describes an imaginary line for location of characters. The
largest descender for any font on the line defines the baseline. Therefore, the largest descender
of the fonts used on the last line defines the text area baseline, even if the line is clipped out of
the text box.
The following graphic illustrates text cap area (a) and text baseline (b) for horizontal justification
(A) and vertical justification (B).

You must define horizontal and vertical components together. These components apply to both
single-line and multi-line text. For multi-line text, the cap height of the first line is used for the
capline of the text, and the descender of the last line is used for the baseline of the text.
Horizontal — Specifies horizontal placement at six options based on shape (text box), text
area, and the text within the text box at left, center, and right positions.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 428

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Vertical — Specifies vertical placement at 10 options based on shape (text box), text area, and
the text within the text box.
▪ Text Baseline — Specifies the text area baseline.
▪ Text Top — Specifies the top of the text area, which begins at the bottom of the top margin.
▪ Text Capline — Specifies the text area capline.
▪ Text Half Ascender — Specifies half the distance from the text area baseline to the top of
the text area.
▪ Text Half Cap — Specifies the distance half way between the text area capline and
baseline.
▪ Text Center — Specifies the center of the text area.
▪ Text Bottom — Specifies the bottom of the text area.
▪ Shape Top — Specifies the top edge of the shape.
▪ Shape Center — Specifies center of the shape.
▪ Shape Bottom — Specifies the bottom of the shape.
Text Alignment — Specifies the placement of formatted text within the shape (text box).
You must define horizontal and vertical components together.
Horizontal — Specifies how each paragraph is aligned within the block of formatted text:
▪ Left — Places the edge of the first line of text at the left of the text area.
▪ Center — Places the formatted text in the center of the text area.
▪ Right — Places the formatted text in the right of the text area.
If Text Orientation is horizontal, you modify all the paragraph alignment properties
for all paragraphs within the text box. (These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of
the Info tab.)
If Text Orientation is vertical, you modify the shape alignment properties. (These properties
appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.)
Vertical — Places the block of formatted text at Top, Center, Bottom, or Justify area of the
text box:
▪ Top — Places the edge of the first line of text at the top of the text area.
▪ Center — Places the formatted text in the center of the text area.
▪ Bottom — Places the formatted text in the bottom of the text area.
▪ Justify — Places the first line of the first paragraph at the top of the text area.

▪ If Text Orientation is horizontal, you modify the shape alignment properties. (These
properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.)
▪ If Text Orientation is vertical, you modify all the paragraph alignment properties for all
paragraphs within the text box. (These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the
Info tab.)
Margins - Sets the distance between the edge of the shape and the edge of the text area.
Margins are in the same units as the text box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 429

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

▪ Top — Sets the distance between the top edge of the shape and the top edge of the text
area.
▪ Bottom — Sets the distance between the bottom edge of the shape and the bottom edge of
the text area.
▪ Left — Sets the distance between the left edge of the shape and the left edge of the text
area.
▪ Right — Sets the distance between the right edge of the shape and the right edge of the
text area.
See Also
Edit a Text Box (on page 433)
Place a Text Box (on page 423)
Paragraph Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box)
Text style — Displays the style for a text box.
Font — Lists and applies the available fonts.
Font size — Applies a text size.
Width factor — Sets the text width. The default is 1.0, or 100% text aspect ratio (width to
height).
To modify existing text, select the Dynamic Width Factor mode on the Text Box
ribbon to adjust the text width by changing the text box size. Select and drag the width handles
on the text box to the required size, and the software adjusts the text accordingly.
Font style — Lists the available font styles.
Underline — Underlines text.
Language — Lists and applies a language for text in a text box. If you use text characters from
more than one language in a text box, the option you specify in this box determines the way the
lines wrap in the paragraph.
Units space — Sets the paragraph to paper units or to world units. You can change this control
only when you are creating new styles from the Format Styles or Format Text Box dialog
boxes. When you view this control from the Properties dialog box, it is read-only. You can
change the control from the Info tab because all paragraphs contained within a text box must
exist in the same units.
Within the drawing environment, "world units" is synonymous with the term "model
units" found in other CAD packages.
Font size type — Specify the method for measuring font size: Ascender, Cap, or Tile.
Text color - Sets the color of the text.
Alignment - Sets the alignment of the text.
Line spacing - Sets the line spacing of the text:
▪ Single sets the line spacing for each line to display the largest font in the line.
▪ 1.5 sets the line space for the line to one-and-a-half that of single lines.
▪ Double sets the line spacing for the line to twice that of single lines.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 430

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Paragraph spacing — Specifies the amount of space before and after paragraphs. No spacing
exists before the first paragraph and or after the last paragraph.
Before — Adds space before a paragraph. This value is set in the current working units, not in
points.
After — Adds space after a paragraph. This value is set in the current working units, not in
points. You can set the units using Units on the Format menu.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 431

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

User Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box)

Attribute Set — Names a group of attributes. You can type a name in the box and press TAB.
Save — Places the attribute set on the element that you selected.
Remove — Removes the attribute set from the element that you selected.
Attributes — Sets the name, type, and value of the attribute set. You can type a name in the
box and press TAB.
Name — Sets the name of a unique attribute in the attribute set.
Type — Sets the type for the attribute, such as double, text, number, money, or date.
Value — Sets the value for the attribute. The value that you can enter is based on the type that
you selected in the Type box.
Add — Adds an attribute to the attribute set. After you click Add, the attribute appears in the
table.
Delete — Removes an attribute from the attribute set. You can select an attribute by clicking a
row in the table.

Move a Text Box

Drag the text box to the location that you want.
If handles of the text box are displayed, drag the highlighted border of the text box (or
anywhere inside of the text box) to move it—dragging one of the solid square handles resizes it.
See Also
Placing Annotations (on page 418)
See Also
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)

Delete Text in a Text Box

1. Select the text that you want to delete in the text box.
2. Press DELETE on the keyboard.
See Also
Placing Annotations (on page 418)
See Also
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 432

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Apply a Border to a Text Box

1. Select the text box to which you want to apply a border.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Properties.
3. On the Border and Fill tab of the Text Box Properties dialog box, set the options for the
type of border that you want.

▪ You can also apply a border by selecting a text box and clicking Border on the ribbon.
▪ To see a text box border that is greater than 2 mm, set Display as Printed on the View tab
of the Options dialog box.
See Also
Placing Annotations (on page 418)
See Also
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)

Edit a Text Box

1. Select the text box that you want to edit.
2. Double-click the box.
3. Point to the location to edit the text and type the text that you want.
See Also
Placing Annotations (on page 418)
See Also
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)

Resize a Text Box

1. Click a text box to display its handles.
2. (Optional) Click Dynamic Width Factor to adjust the width of the text to the box size.
Otherwise, only the box resizes.
3. Drag a handle to change the text box size.
You cannot drag hollow handles.
See Also
Placing Annotations (on page 418)
See Also
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 433

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Use Spell Checker

1. Click Tools > Spelling.
▪ The Spelling dialog box appears when the first word not found in the Microsoft Word
main dictionary is found. The Suggestions box lists recommended replacements.
▪ To leave the word unchanged: Click Ignore or click Ignore All.
▪ To change the word not found: If necessary, click the required word in the
Suggestions list, then click Change or Change All.
You can also type your replacement text in the Not in Dictionary box and then click
Change or Change All.
▪ To leave the word unchanged, and add it to the custom dictionary: Click Add. To
leave the word unchanged and add it to the AutoCorrect list: Click AutoCorrect
2. Click OK when notified that the spell check is complete.

▪ You can click Cancel to close the spell checker at any time.

▪ If you need information on any of the spell checking options, click to display Microsoft
Word Help.
Clicking the Options button in the Spelling dialog box will open the Spelling
and Grammar dialog box; however, you can only edit the options for specifying the custom
dictionary or the rules Word uses to check spelling. Word's grammar-check capabilities are not
functional in Smart Electrical documents.

▪ If no spelling errors are found, the Spelling dialog box will not display.
▪ The Spell Checker checks text boxes and double-click labels. It does not check
SmartLabels, text embedded in symbols, or text inside a leader.

Spelling Dialog Box

Displays possible spelling errors within the Smart Electrical document and offers suggestions for
correcting the errors.

Dialog Box Options

Not in Dictionary - Displays a possible error, such as a misspelled word or a duplicated word.
The possible errors appear in highlighted text. You can edit the text in this box and then click
Change to accept the correction.
Suggestions - Lists suggested corrections for the highlighted text in the Not in Dictionary box.
Spelling error replacement word suggestions are from the main dictionary and open custom
dictionaries.
Ignore - Leaves the highlighted text unchanged and finds the next spelling error.
Ignore All - Leaves all instances of the highlighted text unchanged throughout the document
and continues to check the remainder of the document.
Add - Adds the highlighted word in the Not in Dictionary box to the custom dictionary.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 434

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Change - Accepts the current selection in the Suggestions box or accepts the edited text you
have entered in the Not in Dictionary box.
Delete - Deletes a duplicated word.
If the error is a duplicate word, the Change button becomes a Delete button.
Change All - Changes all instances of an error in the active document.
AutoCorrect - Corrects the spelling error; however, unlike the functionality that exists in
Microsoft Word, the software does not monitor words as they are typed and does not
automatically corrects them.
Options - Opens the Spelling and Grammar dialog box.
Word's grammar-check capabilities are not functional in Smart Electrical
documents. Consequently, you can only edit the options for specifying the custom dictionary or
the rules Word uses to check spelling.
Undo - Reverses the most recent spelling check actions.
Cancel - Closes the dialog box without making any changes to the active document.
Close - Closes the dialog box after a change has been accepted.
After a change has been accepted, the Cancel button changes to a Close button.

Spelling Command
Uses the Microsoft Word spell checker to identify misspelled words and unknown words (that is,
words that are not in Word's dictionary). You can choose the correction you want to make, or
you can make your own changes. This command is available only on the Tools menu.

Place a Balloon
1. On the Label toolbar, click Balloon .
2. On the ribbon, set the options you want. In the Balloon Text box, type the text that you want
to appear in the balloon.
3. To place a balloon with a leader, click where you want to place the graphic end of the
leader. The graphic end can be on an element or a point in free space.

Click where you want to place the notation end of the leader.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 435

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

To place a balloon without a leader, clear Leader and click the element to which to
attach the balloon. You can also click a point in free space.
See Also
Placing Annotations (on page 418)
Balloon Command (on page 436)
Balloon Ribbon (on page 436)
Balloon Command
Places a balloon containing text. You can use balloons to refer to an element or a point in
free space. You can set options for controlling the size and shape of the balloon, text
presentation, and leader display.

See Also
Placing Annotations (on page 418)
Place a Balloon (on page 435)
Balloon Ribbon (on page 436)

Balloon Ribbon
Determines the size and shape of the balloon and the text within the balloon.
Dimension Style — Lists and applies the available styles.
Leader — Displays the leader line.
Break Line — Displays a horizontal break line at the notation end of a leader.
Height — Specifies the height of the balloon. The value you specify is a ratio of the font size
defined in the dimension style. The actual height of the balloon is the value you specify
multiplied by the dimension font size.
Text — Specifies the text you want inside the balloon.
Shape — Specifies the balloon shape from the list of available shapes.
Sides — Specifies the number of sides for the balloon. This option only displays when you
select an N-sided shape in the Shapes box on the ribbon.
See Also
Balloon Command (on page 436)
Place a Balloon (on page 435)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 436

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Balloon Properties Dialog Box

Sets the properties of a balloon.
See Also
General Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog Box) (on page 437)
Text and Leader Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog Box) (on page 437)

General Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog Box)

Balloon Text — Enters text in the balloon.
Balloon Height — Specifies the height of the balloon. The value you specify is a ratio of the font
size defined in the dimension style. The actual height of the balloon is the value you specify
multiplied by the dimension font size.
Balloon Shape — Specifies which balloon shape you want from the list of available shapes.
Number Of Sides — Sets the number of sides of an n-sided balloon shape. You must click ? in
the Shape list to use this option. You can then type the value you want.
See Also
Balloon Properties Dialog Box (on page 437)
Text and Leader Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog Box)
Text - Specifies how the text appears in a balloon annotation.
Font - Specifies the font to use for the text in the balloon annotation.
Font Style - Specifies the font style to use, such as bold or italic, for the text in the balloon
annotation.
Font Size - Displays the text size. You can type a size in the box.

Leader and projection line

Specifies how the leader and projection line are displayed.
Break Line - Displays a horizontal break line where the leader line meets the annotation text.
Type a value to specify the size of the break line. For example, when Break Line is set to 1, the
break line looks like the following picture.

Element Gap - Sets the distance that the projection line is set back from the element to which
the leader is attached. This value is a ratio of the font size. This option is disabled for balloons.
Extension - Sets the distance that the leader line extends beyond the dimension. This value is a
ratio of the font size. This option is disabled for balloons.

Color and Width

Color - Sets the color of an annotation.
Width - Sets the line width of all lines in an annotation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 437

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Type - Specifies the line type.

Terminator
Type - Sets the terminator type. Click different parts of the following picture to find out which
terminator type you want to use.

Length - Sets the length of the terminator. This value is a ratio of the font size. For example, in
the following picture, the length is set to three times the size of the font.

See Also
Balloon Properties Dialog Box (on page 437)
Leader Properties Dialog Box (on page 443)

Place a Revision Cloud

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Revision Cloud .
2. On the ribbon, select the size of the arcs you want to place in the Arc Mode list.
3. In the Caption box, type the text you want to place as a label for the revision cloud.
If you don't want a label generated, leave the Caption box blank.
4. Click a point in the drawing to indicate the start point for the revision cloud, and then move
the mouse to sketch the revision cloud.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 438

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

As you move the mouse, the software displays the outline of the revision cloud in
red.

5. To close the revision cloud, click again.

End drawing the revision cloud near the point where you started drawing so that the
final closing arc is not disproportionate in size to the other arcs that comprise the revision
cloud.
6. If you typed text in the Caption field, the software displays the label in a red rectangle on
your cursor at the bottom center of the revision cloud. Do one of the following:
▪ Drag the rectangle to the appropriate location and then click to place it.
▪ Right-click to place the label at the default location (bottom center of the revision cloud).

▪ To move a revision cloud after placement, select the revision cloud and drag it to the
appropriate location.
▪ You cannot modify the shape or the size of a revision cloud after placement.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 439

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Revision Cloud Command

Places a cloud around objects in a drawing. Prior to placement, you can define an arc size -
small, medium, large, or random. You can also place a label within the revision cloud or add
semi-transparent fill within its boundaries.
See also
Place a Revision Cloud (on page 438)
Revision Cloud Ribbon (on page 440)
Revision Cloud Ribbon
Determines the size and shape of the revision cloud and the text within the revision cloud.
Style - Sets the line style for the revision cloud.
Line Color - Sets the line color for the revision cloud. You can click More to define custom
colors with the Colors dialog box.
Line Type - Sets the revision cloud line type and style.
Line Width - Sets the line width for the revision cloud.
Arc Mode - Defines the size of the arcs that are placed as you draw the revision cloud. You can
specify that the arc sizes be drawn randomly, or you can specify that they are all either small,
medium, or large.
Caption - Specifies the text to be placed as a label for the revision cloud. If you do not want a
label to be automatically generated, leave the caption blank.
Fill Cloud? - Indicates whether or not the cloud is filled with a semi-transparent yellow fill. For
no fill, leave the checkbox empty. The following illustration shows a revision cloud with that was
drawn with the Fill Cloud? option turned on.

See also
Place a Revision Cloud (on page 438)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 440

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Add a Leader

1. On the Dimensions toolbar, click Leader .

2. Click a text box, callout, or another leader to place the notation end of the leader.

3. Click any element to place the graphic end of the leader, or click in free space.

▪ You can place either end of a leader first.

▪ After you place one end of the leader, the command only allows you to select an element
that is valid for placing the other end of the leader. For example, if you add the notation end
of the leader to a text box, the command then allows you to select only elements that are
valid for placing the graphic end of a leader. You could select a circle, but not another text
box.
▪ If you want to add a leader to a balloon, you can set an option on the Balloon ribbon. To
select an existing balloon, you must click the leader of the balloon.
See Also
Leader Command (on page 442)
Leader Ribbon (on page 442)
Placing Annotations (on page 418)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 441

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Leader Command
Adds a leader to an annotation or to another leader. All leaders have two ends — the notation
end and the graphic end. The notation end is the end that describes something and is often
attached to a text box or annotation; the graphic end is the end near the object being described
and frequently has a terminator arrow or free-space dot on it. You can place either end of the
leader first.
You can attach the notation end of a leader to one of the following:
▪ Text box
▪ Balloon
▪ Another leader on a dimension or annotation
You can place the graphic end of a leader in one of the following ways:
▪ Attach it to an element.
▪ Place it in free space.

See Also
Placing Annotations (on page 418)
Add a Leader (on page 441)
Leader Ribbon (on page 442)

Leader Ribbon
Dimension Style — Lists and applies the available styles.
Break Line — Displays a horizontal break line at the notation end of a leader.
Automatic Shape Connection Behavior — Specifies automatic, shape-changing
connection point behavior for the notation (end) reference. If the option is selected, the notation
end of the leader uses information from the notation object in combination with the current
leader position to determine the attachment point and break line direction. If the option is not
selected, the notation end of the leader attaches to the point on the notation object that was
selected when the leader was created, and the break line direction will not automatically break
away from the notation object.
Break Line Along — If the option is selected, the break line displays at an angle along the
notation object according to information provided by the object. For example, if a text box is at
an angle, the break line displays parallel to the text box at the same angle. If the option is not
selected, the break line remains in a horizontal position regardless of the angle of the notation
object.
Notation Object Attachment Lock — Locks the notation end of the leader to the notation
object so that any drag/modify operations on the leader will not detach it from the object.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 442

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Graphic Object Attachment Lock — Locks the graphic end of the leader to the graphic
object so that any drag/modify operations on the leader will not detach it from the object.
See Also
Leader Command (on page 442)
Add a Leader (on page 441)

Leader Properties Dialog Box

Edits the properties of an element to which you have added a leader using Add Leader.
See Also
Leader Command (on page 442)
Placing Annotations (on page 418)
Add a Leader (on page 441)

Insert a Vertex in a Leader

1. Select a leader to display its handles. As you move the pointer over the leader, the pointer
changes to show whether you are on a leader or a handle.

2. Position the pointer over the leader where you want to insert a vertex.
3. Hold the ALT key and click.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 443

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

4. Drag the handle to position the new vertex.

You cannot insert a vertex on the horizontal break line of a leader.

See Also
Leader Command (on page 442)
Placing Annotations (on page 418)
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)

Delete a Vertex from a Leader

1. Select the leader that has the vertex you want to delete. This displays its handles. As you
move the pointer over the leader, the pointer changes to show whether you are on a leader
or a handle.

2. Position the pointer over the vertex you want to delete.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 444

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

3. Hold the ALT key and click the handle on the vertex.

See Also
Leader Command (on page 442)
Placing Annotations (on page 418)
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)

Insert a Font Character into a Text Box

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Text Box and place a text box.
2. On the Dimension toolbar, click Character Map .
3. On the font character chart, click the character you want to insert.
4. Click Select.
5. Continue to click the characters you want, clicking Select after you click each character.
6. On the Unicode Character Map dialog box, click Copy to copy the characters to the
Clipboard.
7. Click inside the text box where you want to paste the characters.
8. Press Ctrl-V to paste.

Character Map Command

Inserts a character into a text box using a different font. You can also insert special
characters that do not have corresponding keys on the keyboard. You can use this command
when you type or edit text in a text box.

▪ If you are running Windows 95 or a higher version and this command is not available, you
must install the Character Map accessory. You can add it by clicking the Control Panel icon
and then the Add/Remove Programs icon. While adding the software, you can find the
Character Map software in the Accessories category. For detailed instructions on how to
add the Character Map accessory, see the Windows 95 on-line Help for Add/Remove
Programs.
▪ To place the Character Map button on a toolbar, click Tools > Customize to open the
Customize dialog box. On the Toolbars tab, select Tools from the Categories list. Click
and drag Character Map to an existing toolbar.
See Also
Unicode Character Map Dialog Box (on page 446)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 445

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)

Insert a Font Character into a Text Box (on page 445)

Unicode Character Map Dialog Box

Selects special characters for inserting into a text box. For additional information about using
Character Map, click the Help button in the Character Map dialog box.
Font — Lists the available fonts.
Help — Opens the online documentation for using Character Map effectively and efficiently.
Characters to copy — Displays selected characters to copy to the Clipboard.
Select — Copies selected characters to the Characters to copy box.
Copy — Copies the selected characters from the Characters to copy box to the Clipboard.
Advanced view — Lets you display groups of characters to help in refining a search of a
character's Unicode value. When you check the Advanced view check box, the Character Map
dialog box displays additional options.
Character set — Specifies the character set you want to search. If a character set is not
available, choose a different font from the Fonts list.
Go to Unicode — Allows you to type the four-digit Unicode value for the character you are
looking for. This option is only enabled if you have selected Unicode in the Character set list.
Group by — Specifies the group you want to use for your search. If you select Unicode
Subrange, a list of category characters is displayed.
Search for — Allows you to type all or part of the name of the character for which you are
searching.
Search — Executes the search based on the criteria you have defined.
See Also
Character Map Command (on page 445)
Placing Annotations (on page 418)
Insert a Font Character into a Text Box (on page 445)

Labels
Technical drawings often have many labels that display important information about the objects
or elements in the document. There are two types of labels: text labels and SmartLabels.
Text labels are associated with an element or object. If you move the element or object, the text
label moves with it. You can create text labels in a document by double-clicking an element or
object. A text label appears near the element so that you can type text. The label appears at the
location where the element is double-clicked, except for closed elements, such as a circle or
rectangle. The label position on closed elements is the center of the element. When you enter
the text that you want, the text label orients itself with the element.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 446

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Another kind of label, a SmartLabel, can be associated to an object or element's text attributes.
A SmartLabel is often distinguished by a question mark in the display.

A SmartLabel displays the attributes of the element or object as text in the document. You can
drag SmartLabels from the Symbol Explorer into the current document. SmartLabels have an
.sym extension. As you change an element's or object's attributes in the Attribute Viewer or the
Properties dialog box, the SmartLabel's text displays those changes.

If an element or object has no attributes, and you drag a SmartLabel to it, the element or object
picks up the attributes of the SmartLabel. For example, you might want to assign attributes to a
heat exchanger, such as pressure and material type. If the SmartLabel has the pressure and
material type defined, and the heat exchanger does not, the SmartLabel's pressure and material
type are copied to the heat exchanger.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 447

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

If an element already has existing attributes, a SmartLabel placed on the element displays the
values for the existing attributes. For example, if the heat exchanger already has values for
pressure and material type attributes, the values of those attributes are filled in for a SmartLabel
placed on the heat exchanger.
Not all SmartLabels assume the text attributes of an element or object. Some
SmartLabels contain shapes that grow automatically if you add text to the SmartLabel.
See Also
Edit a Text Label (on page 448)
Create a Text Label (on page 448)
Edit a SmartLabel (on page 450)
Place a SmartLabel (on page 449)

Create a Text Label

1. Double-click an element or object. A small, blinking pointer appears below the element or
object. For a closed element, the pointer appears in the center of that element
2. Type the text in the label.
3. Click outside the label to complete it. The text label rotates to align with the element or
object to which it is associated.

You can edit a text label like a text box.

See Also
Edit a Text Label (on page 448)
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)
Labels (on page 446)
Move a Label (on page 449)

Edit a Text Label

1. Double-click the label.
2. Type the text in the label.
3. Click a point outside the label to complete the operation. The text label rotates to align with
the element or object to which it is associated.
You can format a text label like a text box. Select the label and right-click. On the
shortcut menu, click Edit Text Properties.
See Also
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)
Labels (on page 446)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 448

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Move a Label
▪ If a text label or Smart Label is associated with an element or object, drag the element or
object. The label moves with the element or object.
▪ If a label is not associated with an element or object, drag the label.

See Also
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)
Labels (on page 446)

Place a SmartLabel
1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer .
2. Browse to the folder.
3. Drag the SmartLabel into the document. If you place the SmartLabel near an element in the
document, the SmartLabel is associated with that element.
See Also
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)
Labels (on page 446)

Place Multiple Labels

1. Click the Select Tool on the Schematic toolbar.
2. Double-click the symbol that you want to add a label to. A cursor appears below the symbol.
Double-click the symbol away from any existing labels.
3. Type the text.
4. Right-click your mouse to deselect the text command.

▪ The associated label will move with the symbol.

▪ The symbol label text can be edited by double-clicking on the label.
▪ The associated label can be moved by selecting it, unlocking it, and moving it to the required
location.
A small green lock represents a lock handle. You click the lock handle to unlock the
symbol. Unlocking allows you to move a symbol away from the element to which the symbol is
associated.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 449

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Edit a SmartLabel
1. Double-click an element or object.
2. In the Attribute Viewer, type the values that you want for the label.

▪ You can edit the properties or parameters of a SmartLabel.

▪ You can also edit the properties of the elements or text in the SmartLabel. Select the
SmartLabel and then click Edit Graphic Properties or Edit Text Properties on the shortcut
menu.
▪ If you place a symbol with a SmartLabel in a document, you cannot select or open the
SmartLabel to edit it like most symbols. You must create a new SmartLabel.
See Also
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)
Labels (on page 446)
Place a SmartLabel (on page 449)
Edit Text Properties Command (Shortcut Menu)
Allows you to edit the properties of the text in a SmartLabel.
You must select a SmartLabel before you can select this command on the shortcut
menu.
For more information, see Text Box Properties Dialog Box (on page 426).
See Also
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)
Place a SmartLabel (on page 449)
Edit a Text Label (on page 448)
Edit Graphic Properties Command (Shortcut Menu)
Allows you to edit the properties of the elements in a SmartLabel.
You must select a SmartLabel before you can select this command on the shortcut
menu.
Element Properties Dialog Box
Fill Properties Dialog Box
Balloon Properties Dialog Box (on page 437)
Group Properties Dialog Box
SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box
See Also
Edit a SmartLabel (on page 450)
Edit a Text Label (on page 448)
Create a Text Label (on page 448)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 450

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Engineering Fonts
The engineering fonts delivered with the software contain industry-specific fonts, special
characters, and symbols that you can use to annotate engineering drawings. These fonts
include degree symbols, diameter symbols, and other special characters and symbols that are
not usually included in a typical word processing package.
Your choice of font should be based on the industry for which you are creating engineering
drawings.
The software provides TrueType® fonts; with TrueType fonts, what you see on the screen is
what appears on the printed page. The screen display of the document closely matches the
printed document.
When you open a .dwg or .dgn document, the software provides a default mapping to determine
which TrueType font will be assigned to which AutoCAD or MicroStation font. You can make
changes to this mapping to define your own mapping. You can change the mapping with
Options on the Tools menu. On the Foreign Data tab, you can click the appropriate Options.
See Also
Character Map Command (on page 445)
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)
Insert a Font Character into a Text Box (on page 445)
Place a Text Box (on page 423)

Placing Elements in Precise Locations

PinPoint is a tool that helps you draw and modify elements relative to known positions in a
drawing. You can place a target point and then the software dynamically displays the horizontal
and vertical distance between the pointer and the target point. You can use PinPoint with all
element drawing commands. You can run PinPoint from the Tools menu or the Main toolbar.

How PinPoint Works

PinPoint allows you to provide coordinate input to commands as you draw. The x and y
coordinates are relative to a target point that you can position anywhere in the window. You can
change the location of the target point at any time by clicking Reposition Target on the ribbon
and then clicking a new position in the window.
As you move the pointer around, PinPoint dynamically displays the horizontal and vertical
distance between the pointer position and the target point. Help lines show the PinPoint X- and
Y-axis and the PinPoint orientation.

Locking and Freeing Values

You can lock the x coordinate or the y coordinate using the X and Y boxes on the ribbon. When
one coordinate value is locked, you can position the other coordinate by clicking a position in the
window. Or you can set both values using the ribbon boxes. If you want to free the dynamics for
a locked value, you can clear the value box by double-clicking in the box and pressing
Backspace or Delete.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 451

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

PinPoint Orientation
In its default orientation, PinPoint's x-axis is horizontal. You can re-orient the x-axis to any
angle by setting the angle on the PinPoint ribbon. The figure shows the PinPoint angle set to
20 degrees.
See Also
PinPoint Command (on page 454)
Move an Element Precisely (on page 404)
Re-Orient PinPoint (on page 453)
Reposition the PinPoint Target Point (on page 453)
Draw with PinPoint (on page 452)

Draw with PinPoint

1. On the Main toolbar, click PinPoint .
2. Click where you want the target point to be and run any drawing command. As you move
the pointer, PinPoint displays the coordinates of the current mouse location in relation to
the target point. To provide precision input to the current command, click when the
coordinate display indicates that the pointer is in the correct position or type coordinate
values in the X and Y ribbon boxes.

You cannot place elements with PinPoint on the Main toolbar if you are using
Grid Snap.

▪ When the pointer reaches a distance from the target point that is a multiple of the Step
Value set on the ribbon, the related coordinate value and help line become bold.
▪ If you know the exact x and y distances from the target point that you want to use as
command input, you can type the values in the X and Y ribbon boxes.
▪ When the PinPoint ribbon is active, you can use your function keys to toggle on/off the
PinPoint command (F9), lock the X: box for data input (F10), or lock the Y: box for data
input (F11).
▪ You can type a known x or y value into the X or Y ribbon box to lock one axis position, then
graphically define the coordinate for the other axis.
▪ You can move the target point at any time. Click Reposition on the ribbon, and then click
where you want the target point to be.
▪ You can re-orient the PinPoint x axis. Type a positive value in the Angle box on the
PinPoint ribbon to rotate the axis counterclockwise, or a negative value to rotate the axis
clockwise.
See Also
PinPoint Command (on page 454)
Placing Elements in Precise Locations (on page 451)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 452

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Move an Element with PinPoint and the Select Tool

You can use PinPoint with the Select Tool to move an element a precise distance in X and Y
relative to a known position in your drawing.

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool .

2. On the Main toolbar, click PinPoint .
3. Click the location that you want for the PinPoint target point to be.
4. Using the Select tool, point to the element that you want to move. Relationship indicators
appear next to the pointer to indicate keypoints on the element.
5. When the relationship indicators identify the key point that you want, drag the element.
PinPoint displays the distance between the pointer and the reference point as you drag.
6. Release the mouse button when the element is where you want it.
See Also
Placing Elements in Precise Locations (on page 451)
Re-Orient PinPoint (on page 453)
Reposition the PinPoint Target Point (on page 453)
Draw with PinPoint (on page 452)

Reposition the PinPoint Target Point

Do one of the following:
▪ On the PinPoint ribbon, click Reposition Target . The target point is attached to the
pointer. Click where you want the target point to be.
▪ Press F12. The target point moves to the current pointer location.
See Also
PinPoint Command (on page 454)
Placing Elements in Precise Locations (on page 451)

Re-Orient PinPoint
The default PinPoint orientation is with the PinPoint x axis horizontal. To re-orient the PinPoint
x axis, type an angle in the ribbon Angle box. A positive value rotates the horizontal axis
counterclockwise. A negative value rotates the axis clockwise. The y axis is automatically
re-positioned to remain perpendicular to the x axis.
See Also
Placing Elements in Precise Locations (on page 451)
Reposition the PinPoint Target Point (on page 453)
Draw with PinPoint (on page 452)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 453

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

PinPoint Command
Helps you draw elements with precision by displaying coordinate data at the pointer. The
displayed coordinates are relative to a target position that you set and can reset at any time.
Using PinPoint, you can draw elements at known locations on the drawing sheet, draw
elements known distances apart, and so forth. You can use PinPoint with all drawing
commands.
You cannot place elements with PinPoint on the Main toolbar if you are using
Grid Snap.
See Also
Re-Orient PinPoint (on page 453)
Reposition the PinPoint Target Point (on page 453)
Draw with PinPoint (on page 452)
PinPoint Ribbon (on page 454)

PinPoint Ribbon
Display On/Off (F9) - Displays or hides the PinPoint help lines and distance values.
Reposition Target (F12) - Attaches the target point to the pointer so that you can reposition
the target point. Click where you want the target point to be.
Relative Tracking - When toggled on, PinPoint is in relative mode such that the PinPoint
target moves to the last point clicked during a drawing command.
Define PinPoint Origin - Activates the Define PinPoint Origin Ribbon (on page 455)
containing fields for X & Y values which define a document origin for PinPoint.
To save this origin, you must select the Save PinPoint Origin button on the Define
PinPoint Origin ribbon bar.

Reposition Target to Origin - Moves the PinPoint target to the X,Y position that was saved
using the Save PinPoint Origin button on the Define PinPoint Origin ribbon bar.
Angle - Specifies the angle of the PinPoint x help line relative to its default horizontal
orientation. Positive values rotate the horizontal line counterclockwise. Negative values rotate
the horizontal line clockwise.
Step - Specifies the PinPoint step value. The step value is an incremental distance along the
PinPoint coordinate axes. When the distance between the target position and the current
pointer location is an increment of the step value, the related coordinate value and help line
become bold.
See Also
Move an Element Precisely (on page 404)
Re-Orient PinPoint (on page 453)
Reposition the PinPoint Target Point (on page 453)
Draw with PinPoint (on page 452)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 454

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Define PinPoint Origin Ribbon

When you click the Define PinPoint Origin button on the PinPoint ribbon bar, the Define
PinPoint Origin ribbon bar is displayed.
To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and
read the ToolTip.
Save PinPoint Origin — Saves the currently displayed X and Y values for each sheet in the
document.
Target X — Locks the horizontal distance between the target point and the current pointer
location to the value you type.
Target Y — Locks the vertical distance between the target point and the current pointer location
to the value you type.
See Also
PinPoint Ribbon (on page 454)
Re-Orient PinPoint (on page 453)
Reposition the PinPoint Target Point (on page 453)
Draw with PinPoint (on page 452)

Gapping Lines
A gap in a drawing is a condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically in the drawing
but not physically in the plant. In order to portray this condition, you can choose that lines show
a gap at these non-physical intersections. This can help the clarity of your drawing considerably.
Gapping is carried out automatically when you open an existing drawing. If you want to perform
gapping on a drawing that is already open, you must use the command Tools > Gap Now.

Perform Line Gapping in Your Drawing Now

▪ Click Tools > Gap Now.

Aligning Drawing Objects

Alignment involves lining up two or more objects vertically or horizontally, either by their edges
or their centers. Almost all diagrams and drawings require aligning certain items with each
other. You can rely on rulers, grids, and guides to help you place objects, or you can use these
features along with the alignment functions.

Aligning Items Vertically

You can align objects vertically in three different ways:
▪ Align objects by their left sides
▪ Align objects by their right sides
▪ Align objects by their centers

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 455

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

In the following illustration, the objects are aligned by their left sides:

The objects in the select set are moved horizontally from the place where they are selected until
they are aligned with the left edge of the leftmost object in the select set.
If two objects are horizontally near one another, one of the objects may be
placed behind another object. To avoid this, make sure that the items you select are never to
the left or right of one another when you use vertical alignment.

Aligning Items Horizontally

The Align command allows you to horizontally align objects in three different ways:
▪ Align objects by their tops
▪ Align objects by their bottoms
▪ Align objects by their centers

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 456

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

In the following illustration, the objects are aligned horizontally by their tops:

The objects in the select set are moved vertically from the place where they are selected until
they are aligned with the top edge of the top-most object in the select set.
If two objects are vertically near one another, one of the objects may be
placed behind another object. To avoid this, make sure that the items you select are never to the
top or bottom of one another when you use horizontal alignment.

Align Drawing Objects

1. On the drawing sheet, select two or more objects that you want to align.

▪ To select more than one object, hold down the SHIFT or CTRL key and click each
object.

▪ You can create a select set by clicking Select Tool on the Main toolbar and then
dragging a fence around the objects you want to include.

2. Click Align on the Main toolbar.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 457

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

3. On the Align Ribbon (on page 1203), click the button that corresponds to the alignment type
you want.

▪ When you use horizontal alignment, make sure the selected objects are not to the top or
bottom of one another.
If two shapes are vertically near one another, one of the objects may be placed behind
another object.
▪ When you use vertical alignment, make sure the selected objects are not to the right or left
of one another.
If two shapes are horizontally near one another, one of the objects may be placed behind
another object.
▪ Alignment features only line up objects; they do not distribute an equal amount of space
between aligned objects.
▪ You cannot align items that are glued to other objects, including labels and symbols.

Align Command
Allows you to align two or more objects in a select set. You can create a select set by
clicking Select Tool on the Main toolbar and dragging a fence around the items you want
to include. To select more than one object, hold down the SHIFT or CTRL key and click each
element.
The six align options provide the flexibility of arranging objects with less dragging.
You cannot align items that are glued to other objects, including labels and
symbols.

Manipulating Drawing Items

The topics in this section explain how to move, mirror, and rotate drawing items.

Move a Drawing Item

1. Select one or more items.
2. Select a drawing item and do one of the following:
▪ On the menu bar, click Edit > Move and then move the cursor to another location in the
drawing.

▪ Click Move on the Change Toolbar (on page 1203) and then move the cursor to
another location in the drawing.
▪ Drag an item without using the Move command. Select the item and then drag it to its
new location. If you want to copy the item, press CTRL while you drag it.

▪ If you move an item that owns other items, the owned items move also.
▪ You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom, Fit, and Pan, while you
are using the Move command. When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 458

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

you to the Move command at the point where you were when you started manipulating the
view.

Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element

1. Select one or more items.
2. Do one of the following:

▪ On the Change Toolbar (on page 1203), click Mirror .

▪ On the menu bar, click Edit > Mirror.
3. By dragging the pointer over the item, locate a mirror axis. The mirrored items are displayed
dynamically on the other side of the mirror axis.
4. Position the pointer so that the mirrored items appear where you want them, and then click.
You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom and Pan, while you are
using Mirror. When you finish manipulating the item, the software returns you to Mirror at the
point where you were when you started manipulating the view.

Mirror an Item About a Mirror Axis That You Define

1. Select one or more items.
2. Do one of the following:

▪ On the Change Toolbar (on page 1203), click Mirror .

▪ On the menu bar, click Edit > Mirror.
3. Define one end of the mirror axis by clicking in an appropriate empty portion of the drawing
or by clicking a keypoint . The software displays the mirror axis and the mirrored items
dynamically (that is, as you move your pointer).
4. Position the pointer so that the mirrored items appear where you want them, and then click.
If you want to copy the mirrored items, hold CTRL when you click to place your
items.

▪ Instead of positioning the mirror axis dynamically, you can use the Position Angle box on
the Mirror Ribbon (on page 460).
▪ You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom and Pan, while you are
using the Mirror command. When you finish manipulating the item, the software returns you
to the Mirror command at the point where you were when you started manipulating the item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 459

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Mirror Ribbon
Appears on the main toolbar when the Mirror command is active, and allows you to either
specify mirroring options or to observe mirroring options.

Copy — Copies the item or items when you mirror them.

Position Angle — Sets the angle of the mirror axis. The origin of the angle measurement is the
point that you clicked for the beginning of the mirror axis. Setting the position angle to zero
extends the axis horizontally to the right of the screen, 90 extends the axis vertically to the top,
180 extends the axis horizontally to the left, and 270 extends the axis vertically to the bottom.
To determine the option name on the ribbon, pause over an option and read the
ToolTip.

Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define

1. Select one or more items.
2. Do one of the following:

▪ On the Change Toolbar (on page 1203), click Rotate .

▪ On the menu bar, click Edit > Rotate.
3. Click at the center of rotation.
4. Then, click to define the other end of the rotation axis.
The software dynamically displays the rotation axis and items being rotated. The
location and position of the rotation axis defines the rotation from point.
5. Rotate the items into position by dragging the rotation axis.
6. Click to define the rotation to point.

▪ To rotate by arbitrary increments, type a value in the Step Angle box on the Rotate Ribbon
(on page 461).
▪ In order to copy the rotated items into the new position, you can hold CTRL while you click
to define the to point.
▪ You can use other manipulation commands, such as Zoom and Pan, while you are using
the Rotate command. When you finish manipulating the item, the software returns you to
the Rotate command at the point that you were when you started manipulating the view.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 460

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Rotate Ribbon
Appears when the Rotate command is active, and allows you to either observe rotation options
as you rotate an item or specify rotation options.

Copy — Creates a copy of the item that you are rotating.

Position Angle — Displays the angle between the horizontal axis through the center of rotation
(A) and the point that you rotate from (B). Then, if you rotate the item, the position angle (C)
changes to become the angle between the horizontal axis and the point to which you rotate. The
position angle is always a positive value measured counter-clockwise from the axis.

Rotation Angle — Defines the rotation angle. The rotation angle is the angle between the point
from which you rotate and the point to which you rotate. In the following picture, the center of
rotation (A) shows the point (B) from which you rotate the item.

The rotation angle (C) is the angle of change between the old and new positions of the rotated
item. The value is always positive.
Step Angle — Specifies the rotation step angle. The step angle specifies the increments, in
degrees, that an item rotates on a rotation axis. You can enter increments in the Step Angle
box. For example, if the box is set to 30.0, the rotation is displayed in 30 degree increments. The
default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully dynamic.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 461

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Manipulating Smart Labels

Component handles allow you to rotate or mirror a Smart Label around axes changing their
orientation in relation to the labels associated item. Only those Smart Labels that appear in
cable block diagrams, power distribution board layout drawings, single line diagrams, and wiring
diagrams, and are associated with connectors can be mirrored or rotated.
▪ The mirror handle allows you to mirror about the horizontal and vertical axes, defined in
relation to the origin of the item. You can mirror items by dragging the mirror handle in the
appropriate direction. The software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that
you can be sure to mirror the item correctly.
▪ The rotate handle provides a mechanism for rotating components around their origin.
You can rotate items by dragging the rotate handle in the appropriate direction. The
software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to rotate
the item correctly.
For more information, see Working with Labels in the Smart Engineering Manager Users Guide.

Create a Mirror Image of a Smart Label

This procedure shows you how to mirror a Smart Label about the horizontal and vertical axes.
1. Select the Smart Label in the drawing.

2. Click the mirror handle , the cursor changes to .

3. Drag the mirror handle in the direction that you want to mirror the item. The new label
position is outlined on our drawing.
4. Release the mirror handle.

Rotate a Smart Label

This procedure shows you how to rotate a Smart Label on your drawing.
1. Select the Smart label on the drawing.
2. Click the rotate handle .
3. Drag the rotate handle in the direction that you want to rotate the item.
You can click the rotate handle closer to or further from the center of the item to
change the step angle for the rotation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 462

 Drawings in Smart Electrical

Align Smart Labels

This procedure shows you how to align Smart Labels on your drawing.
1. In the Drawing view, select the labels that you want to align.
In order to align labels, you must be sure not to select any drawing items other than
labels. You can remove an item from a select set by pressing CTRL and clicking the item.
2. Click the appropriate alignment button on the main toolbar:

▪ Align Left — Align labels so that their left-most lines match

▪ Align Right — Align labels so that their right-most lines match

▪ Align Center About Vertical — Align labels so that their center points agree on a
horizontal line

▪ Align Center About Horizontal — Align labels so that their center points agree on
a vertical line

▪ Align Top — Align labels so that their top lines match

▪ Align Bottom — Align labels so that their bottom lines match

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 463

SECTION 17

Schematics
A schematic is a graphical representation of wiring and motor control systems. You create a
schematic by assembling it from typical blocks.
A block is a graphical representation of an electrical item. Blocks are parts of a complete
drawing. To create a block, start by creating an entire drawing in Catalog Manager or any CAD
application such as SmartSketch, AutoCAD, or MicroStation. Once the complete drawing is
ready, you select a part of the drawing and turn it into a block.
You can generate schematics for the following item types:
▪ All loads
▪ All converting equipment
▪ All disconnect equipment
▪ Circuits
▪ Buses
▪ Generators
▪ Battery banks
▪ Instruments
The software can generate a schematic by retrieving data for power related items from one
block or several blocks. If your generated schematic drawings contain the same information
(that is, the information repeats itself in identical sections of different schematic drawings), you
should consider creating a schematic block for the repeated parts so that this single block can
be used by several other schematic drawings. Note that you can create schematic drawings
that include several sheets. Multi-sheet schematics are mostly used when you need to display
complex electrical equipment for which a single sheet is not enough to show all the relevant
wiring details of the equipment.
After creating a block, you define the macros for that block. A macro is the smart text that you
attach to the block graphic. The software retrieves this smart text from the database and
attaches it to the block, thus making it part of the block file. You can create your macros in
Catalog Manager, SmartSketch, AutoCAD, or MicroStation.
Also, you must attach your blocks to templates. A template contains the definition for the
required title block, border, and page size. You attach your blocks to templates in Catalog
Manager, SmartSketch, or any other CAD application.
Before generating a schematic drawing, you create a typical block and a typical schematic that
you will attach to a load for which you want to generate a schematic drawing. For a detailed
workflow for generating and using schematic drawings, see Recommended Workflow for
Generating Schematic Drawings (on page 465).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 464

 Schematics

Recommended Workflow for Generating Schematic

Drawings
The following is a recommended workflow for generating schematics.

1. Create the graphical block files.

Create a complete drawing that includes all the needed graphical objects. You will then use this
complete drawing to create separate graphical blocks. Make sure that the complete drawing
includes a title block. Define the smart text labels (macros) and place them next to the specified
objects of the drawing. Create the individual schematic blocks and set their X and Y
displacement coordinates from the page origin. You can use Catalog Manager or SmartSketch
to create your schematic blocks, that is, symbols (files with the .sym extension). Also, You can
use any other CAD application such as AutoCAD or MicroStation to create .dwg or .dgn
files. For more information, see:
▪ Create Schematic Blocks in Catalog Manager (on page 485)
▪ Create Schematic Blocks in SmartSketch (on page 486)
▪ Guidelines for Creating Schematic Blocks in AutoCAD and MicroStation (on page 487)
▪ Macro Definition Guidelines (on page 467)

2. Create and define a new typical block.

In the Reference Data Explorer, create a new typical block. Edit the properties of the new
typical block and associate it with a file that contains the graphical representation of the current
typical block. For more information, see Create Typical Schematic Blocks (on page 70).

3. Create and define a new typical schematic.

In the Reference Data Explorer, create a new typical schematic. Edit the properties of the new
typical schematic and select the typical blocks that will comprise the typical schematic. Define
the displacement from the page origin for each block and set the block sequence if two or more
blocks are associated with the same block type. Also, select a suitable template. For more
information, see Create a Typical Schematic (on page 71).

4. Create and define a new profile.

In the Reference Data Explorer, create a new profile for the pertinent item type. Edit the
properties of the new profile and associate it with a typical schematic. For more information,
see Create a Profile (on page 64).

5. Apply the new profile to a selected electrical item.

Select an electrical item in the Electrical Index and use the Apply Options feature to apply the
new profile to the selected load. For more information, see Apply a Profile to an Item.

6. Generate a schematic for the selected electrical item.

Select an electrical item in the Electrical Index and generate the new schematic. For more
information, see Generate a Schematic (on page 477). For information about creating

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 465

 Schematics

multi-item schematics for more than one tag, see Generate a Multi-Item Schematic (on page
479).

▪ As an alternative to steps 4, 5, and 6, you can select an electrical item in the Electrical
Index and open the Generate Schematic dialog box where you can select a typical
schematic and then generate the drawing. If the selected typical schematic contains more
than one block of the same item type for which you have not predefined a sequence, you
can now associate each point with its proper plant item.
▪ Sometimes the software generates a schematic block with a scaling incompatibility between
the schematic blocks and the template used to generate the schematic drawing. This
scaling incompatibility occurs if you have used AutoCAD or MicroStation to create your
graphical block files. To correct this problem, you have to set the units of measure (inches
or millimeters) for the generated schematic drawing. For more information, see Set Units of
Measure for Generated Schematic Drawings (on page 483).

Working with the Elements of a Schematic Drawing

The software allows you perform various actions with an open schematic drawing. Apart from
regular actions in a drawing such as zooming, selecting, saving, and so forth, you can do the
following:

Action Description

Moving items You can only move macros in a schematic drawing. You
cannot move blocks. Click a macro to select it and then drag
it to another place in the drawing and then save the
drawing. Note that this does not affect the data in your
database.
In a typical schematic, you can move a block by changing its
X and Y coordinates.

Inserting annotations and redlining Add text labels, symbols, or watermarks to your schematic as
annotations. Add text, linked symbols, circles, rectangles,
and lines to your schematic as redlining. For more
information, see Managing Annotations and Redlining (see
"Annotations and Redlining" on page 624).

Renaming a document and Open your schematic and on the Edit menu, click Document
entering revisions Properties.

Saving a schematic as an external With an open schematic, on the File menu, click Save
file As. For more information, see Save a Schematic as an
External Document (see "Save a Schematic as an External
File" on page 484).

Printing a schematic On the File menu, click Print.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 466

 Schematics

Rename the Sheet Tabs in a Schematic Drawing

The following procedure explains how to rename the Sheet tabs in a generated drawing. This
enables you to have different page names for each of the pages in a multi-page drawing. Note
that you make the change in the typical schematic that is used for the schematic drawing that
you want to modify.
Prior to renaming the Sheet tabs, you have to add the &Sheet.Name macro
to the drawing template. For details, see Enable the Renaming of Sheet Tabs in a Drawing (on
page 320).
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, open the Typical Schematic Common Properties dialog
box for the typical schematic that you require.
2. Click the Sheets button.
3. On the Schematic Sheet Properties dialog box, select a sheet number in the Sheets group
box.
4. Under Sheet details, type the new tab name in the Sheet name field.
5. Click OK.
6. Repeat the above steps for all the sheets that you want to rename in the typical schematic.

Macro Definition Guidelines

You can generate schematics for the following item types:
▪ All loads
▪ All converting equipment
▪ All disconnect equipment
▪ Circuits
▪ Buses
▪ Generators
▪ Battery banks
▪ Instruments
You place macros on each block to retrieve relevant information from the database. Also,
macros define default values that appear in the drawing if no data for a particular property is
found in the database. Macros are text labels with a preceding ampersand (&). You can define
macros in Catalog Manager or one of the following CAD applications: SmartSketch, AutoCAD,
or MicroStation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 467

 Schematics

Macros Defined in Catalog Manager

In Catalog Manager, you define each block as a symbol (.sym) file. In addition to using text
labels as macros, you can also place SmartText labels in a symbol. The advantage of using a
SmartText label to define a macro is that instead of having to remember the item type property
and typing it, you can select the property you require from a list. However, you can only use
SmartText labels to specify properties of the specific electrical item that you specified for the
symbol. For example, if the symbol was created for a cable, you can only select cable
properties; if you want to retrieve properties for an associated item such as a motor, you must
use a text label for the macro.
Note that for all SmartText labels used in a symbol, you have to set the Unit Space property to
World.

Macro Syntax
The macro text has to contain the Smart Electrical item name, the name of the required item
property, and a sequence number, according to the syntax:
&[ItemType].[Property].[Sequence]
For example, if you want to specify a name of a motor, the text label has to be:
&Motor.ItemTag.1
If a particular block contains several items of the same item type (that is, several cables, control
stations, and so on), you have to use the sequence number to ensure item uniqueness. For
more details, see Sequencing Items in Block Macros (on page 470).
You can also add the Unit or Area name to an item by using the following syntax:
&[ItemType].Unit.Name or &[ItemType].Area.name
Note the following for multi-item schematics:
▪ The logic of the macro syntax for single-item schematics also applies to the macro syntax
for multi-item schematics. The macro syntax of multi-item schematics is almost the same as
the macro syntax of single-item schematics. The only difference is that for multi-item
schematics there is no definition of blocks. Therefore, you have to include the block name in
the macro syntax of multi-item schematics. The software retrieves the data from the block
type even if the associated item differs from the one that is associated with a particular
schematic.
▪ The software resolves the macros according to each item that has been associated with the
current schematic drawing on the Document Properties dialog box. Note that if the item
type is Bus, the associated items are only circuits.
▪ For more details about multi-item schematics, see Generate a Multi-Item Schematic (on
page 479).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 468

 Schematics

Panel Macros
Use the following syntax to create macros for local panels or junction boxes that include circuits:
&Circuit.Panel.[Property].[Sequence]

Cable Macros
Use the following syntax to create macros for cables:
▪ &Cable.[Property].[Sequence] — for power cables
▪ &ControlCable.[Property].[Sequence] — for control cables
▪ &GroundingCable.[Property].[Sequence] — for grounding cables
▪ &InstrumentationCable.[Property].[Sequence] — for instrumentation cables

Supported Electrical Items

Each drawing block can support the following electrical items and their properties:

Loads
Load blocks can include all the items that appear connected between a particular load and its
feeder circuit in the Electrical Engineer hierarchy. Also, load blocks include load-related object
properties regardless of whether these objects appear in the Electrical Engineer or not:
▪ Direct load properties.
▪ Related power cable properties.
▪ Related grounding cable properties.
▪ Related control cable properties.
▪ Related instrumentation cable properties.
▪ Related feeder circuit properties.
▪ Related circuit internal properties (disconnect equipment)
▪ Related bus properties.
▪ Related cell properties.
▪ Related power distribution board properties.
▪ Related control station properties.
▪ Related I/O signal item properties.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 469

 Schematics

Circuits
▪ Direct circuit properties.
▪ Related circuit component properties (circuit breakers, fuses, and so on.). If data for more
than one item of the same type (for example, two circuit breakers) has to be retrieved, the
macro name ends with a sequence number such as "& CircuitBreaker.ItemTag.1".
▪ Related electrical parent item properties: circuit - bus, circuit - power distribution board,
circuit - cell, and so on.
▪ Related I/O signal item properties.

Control Stations
▪ Direct control station properties.
▪ Related control cable properties. If data for more than one cable has to be retrieved, the
macro name ends with a sequence number, for example "&Cable.ItemTag.1".
▪ Related I/O signal item properties.

Converting Equipment
▪ The properties of all electrical items connected above the converting equipment item up to
the feeding bus and then down up to the first incomer circuit or load.
▪ Related I/O signal item properties.

Power Source Items, Generators and Battery Banks

▪ The properties of all electrical items connected below the power source item up to the first
incomer circuit.
▪ Related I/O signal item properties.
Now you can do one of the following:
▪ Continue with the next step in the recommended workflow for generating a schematic
drawing and learn how to create typical schematic blocks (on page 70).
▪ Return to the Recommended Workflow for Generating Schematic Drawings (on page 465).

Sequencing Items in Block Macros

You use a sequence number if a particular item type appears more than once in a specific
block. The sequence numbers define the item uniqueness and the order in which the items
appear in the generated schematic drawing. The sole function of the sequence numbers is to
help the software identify the plant items and retrieve the appropriate data from the right tags.
The sequence numbers are unique per item type. You add these sequence numbers to the
macros so that the software can retrieve the correct data belonging to the appropriate plant
item. You sequence the items belonging to the same type in the ascending order starting from
the first item that appears right before the load and continue up to the feeder circuit. These
numbers represent the order in which the various items are connected in the Electrical

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 470

 Schematics

Engineer or circuit internals in the Electrical Index. Note that these sequence numbers do not
correspond or relate to the Sequence in group values entered in the Properties window.
Also, the sequence numbers do not have to be consecutive (for example, 1,2,3), but they have
to be in ascending order, for example 1, 5, 12, 20 and so forth.
In order to match the macros with the appropriate plant items, the software creates lists of plant
item types. These lists contain items that are ordered according to their electrical connections
in the Electrical Engineer starting from the load and up to the feeder circuit. The lists also
include all the associated internals that exist in the circuits (either panel or feeder circuits) that
may exist along the electrical path. Once the lists are complete, the software matches each
plant item on the list with the macro that contains the appropriate sequence number. The
software matches the first plant item on the list with the macro that has the lowest sequence
number then with the macro that has the next number, and so on.

Handling Load Feeders with Parallel Branches

If there are several electrical paths/branches from a load to its feeder (for example,
forward/reverse power paths), the software starts creating the lists starting with the branch that
has the lowest sequence number. You define the branch order by setting the value in the
Sequence in group property of the item closest to the load of the pertinent branch.
After completing the list of the items of the first branch (including the feeder and its internals),
the software goes on to list the items of the next branch. The next branch is the one that has
the next numeric value in the Sequence in group property of the item closest to the load in that
branch. Note that the second list does not include the circuit and its internals as they are
already included in the first list.

Handling Incomer and Feeder Circuit Internals

Make sure that you define the sequence numbering of circuit internals in the following manner:
For incomer circuit internals and riser circuit internals - descending order, starting with the item
closest to the bus.
For feeder circuit internals and coupler circuit internals - ascending order, starting with the item
closest to the bus.

Handling Converting Equipment Items

The software handles converting equipment macros starting with the items that appear at the
bottom of the schematic based on the design in the Electrical Engineer. For a transformer that
has cables and circuits connected to both primary and secondary windings, the software first
resolves the items that have the lowest sequence in group numbers. After resolving the items
that are connected to the first secondary winding, the software continues resolving the items for
the primary winding from the bottom of the schematic up to the feeding bus. Then, the software
returns to the bottom of the schematic and continues resolving the items that are connected to
the other secondary winding (if one exists).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 471

 Schematics

Handling Non-Power Related Items of Schematic Drawings

After completing the list of the items along all the existing electrical paths from the load to the
feeder, the software looks for the associated control stations. If several control stations are
associated with the load, the Sequence in group value of the controls stations determines the
macro that is associated with that control station.
Example A (on page 472)
Example B (on page 473)
Example C (see "Macro Sequencing Example C" on page 474)
Example D (see "Macro Sequencing Example D" on page 475)
Example E (see "Macro Sequencing Example E" on page 476)
Example F (see "Macro Sequencing Example F" on page 477)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 472

 Schematics

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 473

 Schematics

Macro Sequencing Example C

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 474

 Schematics

Macro Sequencing Example D

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 475

 Schematics

Macro Sequencing Example E

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 476

 Schematics

Macro Sequencing Example F

Generate a Schematic
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the Electrical Equipment folder and select an item for
which you want to generate a schematic.
The software allows you to generate schematics for the following item types:
▪ All loads
▪ All converting equipment
▪ All disconnect equipment
▪ Circuits
▪ Buses

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 477

 Schematics

▪ Generators
▪ Battery banks
▪ Instruments (for single instruments only)
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click Actions > Generate Schematic.
▪ Right-click the selected item and then click Generate Schematic.

▪ Click on the toolbar.

3. On the Generate Schematic dialog box, under Typical schematic, select an appropriate
typical schematic that you created in the Reference Data Explorer.
4. Under Drawing name, type a name for the new schematic.
Examine the block data in the data window. Make sure that the typical blocks are
defined correctly and their displacement from the page origin is set correctly.
5. Click the Macros tab. Examine the macros in the data window. Make sure that each
macro is associated with a correct item. To associate a macro with another item, select a
macro in the data window and then under Macro details, select another item from the
Macro item name list.
6. Click the Unresolved Items tab to check whether there are item tags for which there are no
corresponding items in the associated typical schematic.
7. Click OK to generate the schematic.
The software can only generate schematic drawings for items that have predefined
typical schematics.

Generate a Schematic for an Instrument

The software allows you to generate a schematic for a selected instrument.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the following the Electrical Equipment > Instruments
hierarchy.
2. Select an instrument for which you want to generate a schematic and do one of the
following:
▪ Click Actions > Generate Schematic.

▪ Click on the toolbar.

3. On the Generate Schematic dialog box, under Typical schematic, select an appropriate
typical schematic that you created in the Reference Data Explorer.
4. Under Drawing name, type a name for the new schematic.
Examine the block data in the data window. Make sure that the typical blocks are
defined correctly and their displacement from the page origin is set correctly.
5. Click the Macros tab. Examine the macros in the data window. Make sure that each
macro is associated with a correct item. To associate a macro with another item, select a
macro in the data window and then under Macro details, select another item from the
Macro item name list.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 478

 Schematics

6. Click the Unresolved Items tab to check whether there are item tags for which there are no
corresponding items in the associated typical schematic.
7. Click OK to generate the schematic.

▪ The items that can be included in a schematic for an instrument are:

▪ The feeder and all the upstream items, up and including the bus.
▪ All the associated equipment, cables, and the existing signal.

Generate a Multi-Item Schematic

1. Create symbol (.sym) files for the following:
▪ Multi-tag header block type for the main drawing page.
▪ Multi-tag header block type for subsequent pages (usually the same as the multi-tag
header for the main drawing page, but placed at the center of the drawing sheet).
▪ Multi-tag macro block type.

▪ Ensure that the column widths, the number of columns, and the properties that the
macros represent match the corresponding characteristics of the headers.
▪ Since at this stage, the macros are not associated with a specific item type, the syntax
of the macro needs to include an expression representing the block type to which the
item type refers, as follows:
[ItemType].[Property].[Sequence].[BlockType].[BlockSequence]
▪ The logic of the macro syntax for single-item schematics also applies to the macro
syntax for multi-item schematics. The macro syntax of multi-item schematics is almost
the same as the macro syntax of single-item schematics. The only difference is that for
multi-item schematics there is no definition of blocks. Therefore, you have to include the
block name in the macro syntax of multi-item schematics. The software retrieves the
data from the block type even if the associated item differs from the one that is
associated with a particular schematic.
▪ The software resolves the macros according to each item that has been associated with
the current schematic drawing on the Document Properties dialog box. Note that if the
item type is Bus, the associated items are only circuits.
▪ Macro examples:

Macro Explanation

&Cable.ActualLength.1.Motor.1 Shows the actual length of the first

power cable that is connected to
Motor1. Motor1 is the first motor
connected to the circuit if the
schematic is generated for a circuit.

&Cable.ActualLength.2.Motor.1 Shows the actual length of the

second power cable that is
connected to Motor1. Motor1 is the

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 479

 Schematics

first motor connected to the circuit if

the schematic is generated for a
circuit.

&ControlStation.ItemTag.1.ControlStati Shows the item tag of the first

on.1 control station that is associated
with the motor for which the
schematic is generated.

&ControlStation.ItemTag.1.ControlStati Shows the item tag of the second

on.2 control station that is associated
with the motor for which the
schematic is generated.

2. For each of the symbol files that you created, define a typical block using the following block
types:
▪ Multi-Tag Header on Drawing Page — for the pages without drawings
▪ Multi-Tag Header — for the page where the drawing is placed (needed depending on
the typical schematic definitions)
▪ Multi-Tag Macros — for the macros that will appear in the schematic drawing
If you want to include a drawing on the first page of a schematic, you have
to create a typical block with a drawing. You can choose any block type for the drawing.
3. In the Reference Data Explorer, create a typical schematic that includes all the typical
blocks that you defined in the previous steps.
4. On the Typical Schematic Common Properties dialog box, select a multi-tag block type
and click Multi-Tag Options.
5. On the Multi-Tag Schematic Options dialog box, select whether to include a list on the
main drawing sheet, and specify the numbers of rows of data to appear on the main and
subsequent drawing sheets.
6. Apply this typical schematic to the tags that you want to appear in the multi-item schematic.
The tags must belong to the same subclass, for example, motors, heaters, or
transformers, and so forth.
7. In the Electrical Index, expand the Documents folder, and right-click the Schematic
Drawings folder.
8. Click New Multi-Tag Schematic.
9. Right-click the newly-created schematic, and on the shortcut menu, click Document
Properties.
10. On the Document Properties dialog box, from the Multi-tag typical schematic list, select
the typical schematic that you created in step 3.
11. From the Multi-tag typical schematic list, select an appropriate multi-tag typical schematic.
12. Click the Associated Items tab.
13. Select an appropriate item type.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 480

 Schematics

14. If you selected Bus from the Item type list, select an appropriate power distribution board
and bus.
15. If you did not select Bus from the Item type list, click the Associate button.
16. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now to find all the items belonging to the selected item
type that are associated with the current typical schematic.
17. In the Results box, select the items that you require and click OK.

▪ All the items that you selected in the Results box appear in the Associated Items list.
You can dissociate the items that you don't need.
▪ If you selected Bus from the Item type list, the Associated Items list automatically
displays all the circuits belonging to the current bus. You can sort these circuits either
according to their item tags or sequence in group values. The software updates this list
automatically if circuits have been added or deleted.
▪ For more information about multi-item schematics for buses, see Generate a Multi-Item
Schematic for a Bus (on page 481).
18. Click OK.
19. In the Electrical Index, do one of the following to generate the schematic:
▪ Double-click the schematic document.
▪ Right-click the schematic, and on the shortcut menu, click Open.
▪ Right-click any of the associated items, and on the shortcut menu, click Generate
Schematic. Ensure that in the dialog box that opens, under Drawing name, you select
the appropriate multi-item drawing.
When saving a multi-tag schematic as an external file, you need to save each page of
the schematic as a separate drawing.

Generate a Multi-Item Schematic for a Bus

This feature allows you to generate a schematic for a bus and include all the connected
electrical items in the schematic drawing. The generated schematic includes a typical drawing
on the first sheet followed by a table with data so that each row represents one circuit and the
properties of each item that are included in the circuit. The items that are included in the
schematic are not limited to a particular item type. They can be motors, generators, power
cables, circuit breakers, circuit internals, and so forth.
1. In the Electrical Index, right-click a bus and then click Apply Options.
2. On the Apply Options dialog box, click the Typical Schematic tab.
3. Select the Enable typical schematic check box and then click Find.
4. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now.
5. In the Results box, select an appropriate typical schematic.
6. In the Apply to box, select an option for applying the typical schematic. For details, see
Typical Schematic Tab (Apply Options Dialog Box) (on page 1007).
7. Click OK.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 481

 Schematics

For detailed information on how to create a typical schematic, see Create a

Typical Schematic (on page 71).
8. In the Electrical Index, expand the Schematic Drawings folder and select an appropriate
multi-tag schematic.
Alternatively, you can click New Multi-Tag Schematic to create a new one.
9. Right-click the selected schematic drawing and then click Document Properties.
10. From the Multi-tag typical schematic list, select an appropriate multi-tag typical schematic.
11. Click the Associated Items tab.
12. From the Item type list, select Bus.
13. Select an appropriate power distribution board and bus.

▪ The Associated Items list shows all the circuits belonging to the current bus. You can
sort these circuits either according to their item tags or sequence in group values.
▪ The software updates this list automatically if circuits have been added or deleted.
14. Click OK.
15. In the Electrical Index, double-click the schematic document to open it.

▪ The table in the schematic document displays all the circuits that belong to the current bus
and are sorted according to the setting you made on the Document Properties dialog box.
▪ For information about macros that are used for this type of schematic, see Generate a
Multi-Item Schematic (on page 479).

Generate Schematics in Batch Mode

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the Electrical Equipment folder that contains items for
which you want to generate a schematic.
The software allows you to generate schematics for the following item types:
▪ All loads
▪ All converting equipment
▪ All disconnect equipment
▪ Circuits
▪ Buses
▪ Generators
▪ Battery banks
2. In the list view, select several items.
3. Click Actions > Generate Schematic.
4. On the Batch Options for Schematics dialog box, select the Save files to disk check box
if you want to save the generated schematics as files.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 482

 Schematics

5. Under Path, type the exact path where the files will be saved, or click the ellipsis button
to browse to the required folder.
You can accept the displayed default path which you set in Options Manager.
6. From the Save as type list, select a file format.
7. Select the Print drawings check box if want to print out the generated schematics.
8. Click OK to generate the schematics.
The software can only generate schematic drawings for items that have predefined
typical schematics.

Set Units of Measure for Generated Schematic

Drawings
1. With the schematic drawing open, expand the folder hierarchy Tools > Options.
2. On the Options dialog box, click the Foreign Data tab.
3. Under Format, click MicroStation or AutoCAD depending on the application that you used
to create graphical block files.
4. Under Import, select the required unit of measure from the File units list.
5. Click OK.
6. Close the schematic drawing.
7. Regenerate the schematic drawing.

Including Enhanced SmartLoop Reports with

Schematics
When generating a schematic drawing for an electrical item, you can also specify the display of
an Enhanced SmartLoop report containing loop wiring data, provided the signal for the item for
which you display the schematic is associated with a loop. The loop data comes from Smart
Electrical after you publish the signal data to Smart Instrumentation, make the appropriate wiring
and loop associations, and publish the data back to Smart Electrical.

Include Enhanced SmartLoop Reports with Schematics

1. In Smart Electrical Options Manager, under General Settings, do the following:
▪ Beside Include Enhanced Reports in Schematics, select Yes.
▪ Beside Default Smart Instrumentation Domain Name, type the name of the source
domain.
2. In Smart Electrical, click File > Open > Template.
3. Select the template that you want to use for displaying the Enhanced SmartLoop report.
4. Click View > Display > Working Area.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 483

 Schematics

5. On the template drawing sheet, use the grab handles to define the size of the working area
in which the Enhanced SmartLoop report is to appear.
6. Save the template.
7. For the item for which you intend to generate the schematic, publish signal data to Smart
Instrumentation.
The item for which you want to include the Enhanced SmartLoop report must have a
related signal.
8. In Smart Instrumentation, create loops and associate them with the retrieved signal data.
9. Publish the data back to Smart Electrical, and generate the schematic for the item using the
template that you modified.

▪ The software displays the schematic on the initial drawing sheets and Enhanced SmartLoop
reports on subsequent drawing sheets, with one or more sheets per loop.
▪ The software supports multi- sheet Enhanced SmartLoop reports.

Open a Schematic Drawing

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the hierarchy Documents > Schematic Drawings.
2. Select a schematic drawing.
3. Click File > Open > Drawing.
Also, you can right-click a schematic drawing and on the shortcut menu, click Open.

Save a Schematic as an External File

1. With the schematic drawing open, click File > Save As.
2. On the Save As dialog box, navigate to the required folder.
3. Type the file name and select the required file type.
4. Click OK.

▪ If the schematic contains annotations, save it as an .spe file.

▪ When saving a drawing in AutoCAD format, you must specify the AutoCAD version prior to
saving. To set the AutoCAD version, open a drawing and then click Tools > Options. On
the Options dialog box, click the Foreign Data tab and select AutoCAD from the Format
list. Then, click Options in the Export box. On the AutoCAD Export Options dialog box,
select the appropriate AutoCAD version.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 484

 Schematics

Create Schematic Blocks in Catalog Manager

1. Open Catalog Manager.
2. Select the symbol folder in which you want to store the new symbol.
3. Create a new symbol in the Catalog.
4. Open the symbol drawing and set the Default layer to active.
5. Select a suitable sheet size for your drawing.

▪ Use the Grid Display and Grid Snap commands to place the origin properly.
▪ Edit the origin properties and set the origin layer as hidden objects.
6. Draw your block. Make sure that you make the Default layer as the active layer.
7. Add the SmartText.

▪ If the SmartText requires repositioning, change the active layer to Label.

▪ Do not forget to change the layer back to Default when you return to the drawing.
8. Add the macro text to retrieve the attributes that are not available for SmartText. For more
information about macro text, see Macro Definition Guidelines (on page 467).
9. Save the graphic as a symbol (.sym) file.
10. If the new symbol file is a complete typical schematic drawing, use it to create individual
schematic blocks. For more information, see Use a Complete Symbol File to Create
Schematic Blocks in Catalog Manager (on page 485).
Now you can do one of the following:
▪ Continue with the next step in the recommended workflow for generating a schematic
drawing and learn how to create typical schematic blocks (on page 70).
▪ Return to the Recommended Workflow for Generating Schematic Drawings (on page 465).

Use a Complete Symbol File to Create Schematic

Blocks in Catalog Manager
1. Open the complete schematic symbol file. (See step 9 in Create Schematic Blocks in
Catalog Manager (on page 485).)
2. Delete all the graphics, SmartText, and text labels that are not part of the required drawing
block.
3. Save the remaining graphics, SmartText, and text labels to a new symbol file. Use the
Save As command.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to create the rest of the schematic drawing blocks.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 485

 Schematics

Create Schematic Blocks in SmartSketch

1. Open SmartSketch.
2. Create a new drawing file (.igr) or open an existing schematic drawing.
You can open CAD files created in AutoCAD (.dwg) or MicroStation (.dgn).
3. Set the following parameters for an open drawing:
▪ Set all the layers in use to visible.
▪ Set the Default layer as the active layer.
▪ Move all the graphic objects from their original layer to the Default layer.
▪ Select a suitable sheet size for your drawing.
▪ Move the drawing origin to the bottom left corner of the sheet (0.0).
▪ Add all the macros for the required entities by defining the text labels starting with an
ampersand.
4. Save the .igr drawing.
5. Open the drawing and set the Default and Label layers to visible. Hide all the other layers.
6. If the .igr file is a complete typical schematic drawing, use it to create individual schematic
blocks by doing the following:
a. Select a set of graphics and macros that will comprise the new block symbol.
b. Click the Create Symbol icon.
Make sure that the new symbol does not include any SmartSketch
group (a collection of objects). If your symbol does include a group, you must ungroup
these objects.
c. Move the symbol origin to the bottom left corner of the drawing sheet.
d. Save the new drawing as a symbol file in your default symbol folder.
Now you can do one of the following:
▪ Continue with the next step in the recommended workflow for generating a schematic
drawing and learn how to create typical schematic blocks (on page 70).
▪ Return to the Recommended Workflow for Generating Schematic Drawings (on page 465).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 486

 Schematics

Guidelines for Creating Schematic Blocks in

AutoCAD and MicroStation
1. There is no need to create blocks or cells. Smart Electrical recognizes .dwg and .dgn files
and treats each drawing as a Smart Electrical block file.
2. Set the drawing sheet origin at the bottom left corner of the drawing sheet (0.0).

▪ When saving a drawing in AutoCAD format, you must specify the AutoCAD version prior to
saving. To set the AutoCAD version, open a drawing and then click Tools > Options. On
the Options dialog box, click the Foreign Data tab and select AutoCAD from the Format
list. Then, click Options in the Export box. On the AutoCAD Export Options dialog box,
select the appropriate AutoCAD version.
▪ When importing graphical blocks that were created in AutoCAD for typical schematics, the
software automatically translates and identifies the AutoCAD file if its AutoCAD version is
supported by the software. The supported versions of AutoCAD appear on the Version list
of the AutoCAD Export Options dialog box.
Now you can do one of the following:
▪ Continue with the next step in the recommended workflow for generating a schematic
drawing and learn how to create typical schematic blocks (on page 70).
▪ Return to the Recommended Workflow for Generating Schematic Drawings (on page 465).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 487

SECTION 18

Single Line Diagrams

This section contains topic that explain how to generate new single line diagrams, open existing
single line diagrams, what SLD types you can create, and so forth. There are also topics that
explain how to edit SLDs and manipulate SLD elements in a drawing. For more information, see
Working with SLD Elements (on page 490) and the links below.

Single Line Diagram Types and Symbols

Smart Electrical enables you to generate single line diagrams for the following:
▪ A power distribution board that you select in the Electrical Index.
A PDB-based single line diagram is a document that includes a power distribution board
general arrangement drawing and a power distribution board schedule. The software
generates a single line diagram for a selected power distribution board that contains all the
PDB buses, circuits, circuit components, and their inter-connections (bus couplings). Note
that the software places the PDB cells and circuits on a drawing in a particular order. This
order depends on the cell and circuit sequence in group value defined in the cell and circuit
properties.
▪ An electrical item that you select in the Electrical Engineer.
A single line diagram that you generate from the Electrical Engineer is a main or key single
line diagram of the electrical network for a selected set of items created according to the
generation options that you predefine.
▪ A blank single line diagram template (manual SLD).
Using a blank template allows you to drag electrical items from the Electrical Index that you
want to appear in your single line diagram. These items can include buses, offsite power
supplies, generators, battery banks, converting equipment not contained within PDBs, and
standalone disconnect electrical equipment. After positioning the items on the SLD
template, the software completes the drawing according to the generation options that you
defined. The generated SLD will include the dragged item and all the items below up to the
next associated load.

Single Line Diagram Types

You can generate the following types of single line diagram when generating an SLD for an
electrical item that you select in the Electrical Engineer. These options are not available when
generating PDB-based single line diagrams.
▪ Conventional — Generates a full and unfiltered single line diagram that includes all the
associated cables, converting equipment, and loads.
▪ Overall — Generates an SLD that displays multiple levels of buses but does not include
individual loads. The following table specifies the items that are included in overall SLDs:

Item Displayed in SLD

Power sources Shown

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 488

 Single Line Diagrams

Item Displayed in SLD

Buses Shown including their incomers. If there are bus incomers that
are not part of the SLD scope, the SLD displays the references
to their feeders. Also, overall SLDs show coupled buses and
their incomers and feeders.

Circuit internals Shown according to the settings on the Circuits & Internals
tab.

Feeder circuits Shown only if connected to a transformer, battery bank, UPS,

incomer circuit, or any load that is shown in the SLD.

Converting Shown
equipment

Loads Not shown apart from motors and heaters that have a minimum
rated power setting defined on the Miscellaneous tab.

Cables and User-defined. You can show or hide cables and busways as
busways you require. Note that if you choose to display the cables, the
software will show only those cables that are connected to the
loads included in the current SLD.

▪ Based on bus rated voltage — Generates an SLD based on the bus rated voltage that you
select from the list below.
▪ Electrical analysis SLD — Generates a single line diagram that you can publish to an
electrical analysis application such as ETAP. Also, after selecting this option you have to
define the options for circuits and circuit internals on the Circuits and Internals tab.

Symbols in Single Line Diagrams

When generating an SLD, the software searches for a symbol for each electrical item that is
included in the SLD source. Smart Electrical supplies you with a set of default symbols that you
can use in your drawings. Alternatively, you can create your own custom symbols in Catalog
Manager. After creating your symbols and defining them in the Options Manager, the software
then uses the SLD symbols according to the following rules:
1. Smart Electrical checks whether the items included in the SLD source are associated with
symbol files. Wherever such an association exists, the software uses the associated
symbol file to represent the electrical item in the single line diagram. You associate an item
with a symbol file using the Associate Custom Symbols command on the Actions menu
for an item that you select in the Electrical Index.
2. If Smart Electrical cannot find a symbol file associated with a particular electrical item, the
software uses a symbol with a name that matches the item type name of the electrical item
to be included in the single line diagram. This symbol resides in the folder defined in the
Default SLD Symbol Path location in Options Manager.
For more information about SLD symbols, see Guidelines for Creating SLD Symbols in Catalog
Manager (on page 519).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 489

 Single Line Diagrams

Working with SLD Elements

The software allows you perform various actions with an open single line diagram. In addition
to regular actions in a drawing such as zooming, selecting, saving, and so forth, you can do the
following:

Option Description

Moving items in the drawing Click a drawing item to select it and then drag it to another
place in the drawing. Save the SLD to keep the items you
moved in their new places. Note that this does not affect
the data in your database.

Drawing frames You can instruct the software to draw a frame around each
PDB bus group and around the circuits in each cell. To draw
these frames, select these options on the Buses tab of the
Single Line Diagram Options dialog box. Note that when
drawing a PDB frame, the software draws a separate frame
around each bus or a section of a bus (if a bus break was
used to break the bus symbol into sections). When creating
a PDB symbol in Catalog Manager, you can add a macro for
PDB item tags. This will enable you to display the PDB
name on each PDB frame shown on the SLD. For examples
of how the software draws PDB frames, see PDB Frame
Examples in SLDs (see "PDB Frames Examples in SLDs"
on page 514).

Moving and resizing frames The software draws frames around items belonging to PDBs
and around circuits in each cell. You can resize these
frames and move them to other places in the drawing as
needed. The software retains all your changes after saving
the drawing.

Optimizing frame size and After repositioning buses, cells, and other items in an open
position drawing, and after resizing and moving frames, you can click
the Edit > Adjust Frame Position and Size command to
optimize the size and position of the selected frames
according to the current position of the items in the selected
frames.

Associating a custom symbol with You can associate a custom symbol with a plant item so that
a plant item. this plant item will be represented using that symbol.
Furthermore, you can use this feature to associate different
custom symbols with the same plant item depending on the
properties of a specific drawing.. For more details, see
Associate Custom Symbols with Plant Items.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 490

 Single Line Diagrams

Option Description

Changing the orientation of a Select a root power source and then click on the Edit
branch that is connected between Drawing toolbar. You can change the orientation of a
a selected power source and a branch that is connected between the selected power
bus. source and a selected bus. You can display the branch
above or below a selected bus.

Entering and modifying item Select an electrical item and then enter or modify its
properties properties in the Properties window.

Changing the line type, line color Select a bus and then click the appropriate icon on the SLD
and line width of a selected bus toolbar to change the line type, line width, or line color for
the selected bus. Note that the software retains new line
display settings only if you save the SLD as an external
document. Otherwise, after reopening the SLD, the
software displays the original bus symbol. You can use
Options Manager to change the symbol that the software
uses to represent busses. To create a new symbol for
busses, use Catalog Manager. For more information, see
Guidelines for Creating SLD Symbols in Catalog Manager
(on page 519).

Modifying a connector by Allows you to control the shape of a connector.

inserting or moving a vertex or a
Click a connector to select it. Then on the Modify
line segment
Connector ribbon, click the Insert/Move Vertex icon .
You can now click a point on the connector and drag it to a
new location. Also, you can insert a line segment into a
connector by using Insert Segment on the Modify
Connector ribbon.
For more details about both functions, see Modify a
Connector (on page 337).

Moving a circuit connection point Select a circuit connector and drag its connection point
to another place on the bus along the bus to another place. Make sure you save the
drawing to retain the new circuit positions on the bus. This
option is available only between circuits of the same bus
and displayed on the same sheet.

Extending or shortening the Click a bus and then drag one the edge points on the bus to
length of a bus one side, depending on whether you want to lengthen or
shorten the bus. If you are shortening a bus, you can drag
the bus edge only as far as the nearest circuit. Note that the
circuit positions are retained on the bus as they were in the
drawing when it was saved the last time.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 491

 Single Line Diagrams

Option Description

Inserting annotations and Add text labels, symbols, or watermarks to your SLD as
redlining annotations. Add text, linked symbols, circles, rectangles,
and lines to your SLD as redlining. For more information,
see Managing Annotations and Redlining (see "Annotations
and Redlining" on page 624).

Renaming a document and Open your SLD and on the Edit menu, click Document
entering revisions Properties.

Saving an SLD as an external file With an open SLD, on the File menu, click Save As. For
more information, see Save a Single Line Diagram as an
External File (on page 504).

Setting SLD generation On the File menu, click Preferences. For more information,
preferences see Customize Preferences for SLD Generation (on page
34).

Setting new generation options On the Tools menu, click Drawing Options. For more
and regenerating an SLD information, see Generate an SLD from the Electrical
Engineer (on page 493).

Scaling the graphic elements in Before generating a drawing, you can instruct the software
an SLD drawing so that they fit in to automatically shrink all the graphic elements so that they
the working area of the drawing will fit into the working area of the drawing. To do this, select
the Shrink to page check box on the Page Settings tab of
the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box.
If after opening the SLD, you see that drawing still needs to
be rescaled, you can manually set a scale factor and then
regenerate the drawing. For more information, see Scaling
the Content of an SLD Drawing (on page 499).
In order for the software to rescale all the
items correctly, make sure that when creating symbols that
contain text or smart text, the Units space property is set to
World. Note the World is not the default setting for this
property.

Controlling the display of coupled For SLDs generated based on PDBs, you can instruct the
buses on multi-sheet SLDs software to keep the coupled buses on the same drawing
sheet or to split the display between two sheets. This way
you can balance the scaling of the graphics on all the pages
of an SLD and avoid the situation where one of the drawing
sheets is too congested and another drawing sheet has a lot
of empty space. For details, see step number 3 in the
Generate a Single Line Diagram for a PDB (on page 494)
procedure.

Printing an SLD On the File menu, click Print.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 492

 Single Line Diagrams

▪ The software uses the following conventions to display parallel cables in an SLD:
[...] in the item tag label and (xN) in the cable configuration label, where N is the number of
cables, for example:
Cable-32/A[...]
3 x 150mm2 (x5)
This means that there are five parallel cables represented by the same line in the SLD.
▪ Sometimes, after the software opens a drawing, the distance between connected items is
either too long or too short, which results in an inappropriate display of connectors. To
control the visual consistency of connectors, you can set a Clearance value that specifies
the amount of space that the software will maintain between the connector and the
connected element (also known as range avoidance). This action allows you to control the
visual consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns just before they attach to a
symbol.
To set Clearance, select a connector and then type the minimum distance from the symbols
where you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur. Note that the default setting is
zero.

Generating New Single Line Diagrams

When creating a new single line diagram, the following options are available:
▪ Generate an SLD from the Electrical Engineer (on page 493).
▪ Generate a Single Line Diagram for a PDB (on page 494).
▪ Generate a Manual SLD (on page 497).
▪ Generate Multiple Single Line Diagrams for PDBs in Batch Mode.
▪ Generate an SLD with a Bus Tie and Internal Components (on page 498).

Generate an SLD from the Electrical Engineer

This option allows you to generate a single line diagram based on the items you select in the
Electrical Engineer. First, you select the items from which you want the new SLD to
originate. Then, you set the generation options to define the electrical items that serve as the
initial points or sources of your SLD, define the SLD page and display settings, as well as the
definitions for the display of circuits and circuit components. After generating the SLD, you can
save the SLD as an internal drawing in the system or as an external drawing using the Save As
command. You can generate as many SLDs for the same item as needed.
1. In the Electrical Engineer, select the items for which you want to generate your single line
diagram.
You can use the CTRL key to select multiple items. A red check mark appears next
to each selected item in the Electrical Engineer.
2. Do one of the following to open the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box:
▪ Click File > New > SLD.
▪ Right-click a highlighted item and then on the shortcut menu, click New SLD.
3. On the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box, define the SLD generation options as you
require. For details, see Single Line Diagram Options Dialog Box (on page 1164).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 493

 Single Line Diagrams

You can define the required properties for the newly generated drawing on the
Document Properties tab of the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box. This tab is
available for all unsaved new SLDs that have not been created manually. For more
information, see Document Properties Tab (Single Line Diagram Options Dialog Box) (on
page 1179).
4. Click Generate.

▪ If you want to regenerate an open SLD drawing using different generation options, with the
SLD open, click Tools > Drawing Options.
▪ To save the drawing as an internal document, in the generated SLD drawing, click File >
Save.
▪ If there are overlapping connectors on the generated drawing, open the SLD and then click
Tools > Optimize Overlapping Connectors to reposition the connectors so that they do
not overlap. Note that this operation may take a few moments if your SLD contains a lot of
connectors.
▪ For information on how to use custom symbols in your SLDs and the SLD legends, see Use
Custom Symbols in SLDs.
▪ If, during the SLD generation, the software cannot find a referenced symbol for a specific
electrical item, the software uses the default symbol file (default.sym) to represent the
item. You specify default files in Options Manager.
▪ Sometimes, after the software opens a drawing, the distance between connected items is
either too long or too short, which results in an inappropriate display of connectors. To
control the visual consistency of connectors, you can set a Clearance value that specifies
the amount of space that the software will maintain between the connector and the
connected element (also known as range avoidance). This action allows you to control the
visual consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns just before they attach to a
symbol.
To set Clearance, select a connector and then type the minimum distance from the symbols
where you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur. Note that the default setting is
zero.

Generate a Single Line Diagram for a PDB

This option allows you to create a single line diagram for a PDB that you select in the Electrical
Index. You start by selecting the PDB for which you want to generate an SLD. Then, you
define the generation options such as the page settings and the settings for the display of the
circuits and circuit components. After generating the SLD, you can save the SLD as an internal
drawing in the software. Note that you can generate only one SLD per PDB. If you select a
PDB for which you have previously created an SLD, the software opens the existing SLD using
the generation options that you defined before the previous generation. To generate a
completely new SLD for such a PDB, first delete the SLD from the Documents folder in the
Electrical Index and then generate the SLD.
1. In the Electrical Index, select the power distribution board for which you want to generate a
single line diagram.
2. Do one of the following to open the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box:
▪ Click Actions > Generate SLD for PDB.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 494

 Single Line Diagrams

▪ Click on the toolbar.

▪ Right-click a highlighted item and then on the shortcut menu, click Generate SLD.
3. On the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box, define the SLD generation options as you
require. For details, see Single Line Diagram Options Dialog Box (on page 1164).
You can define the required properties for the newly generated drawing on the
Document Properties tab of the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box. This tab is
available for all unsaved new SLDs that have not been created manually. For more
information, see Document Properties Tab (Single Line Diagram Options Dialog Box) (on
page 1179).
If you are generating an SLD with multiple sheets, in order to balance the
scaling of the graphics on all the sheets in the drawing, you can control the display of
coupled buses. It is possible to place couple buses on a single drawing sheet or split the
display of the coupled buses between two drawing sheets. On the Bus tab of the Single
Line Diagram Options, do one of the following under Display options:
▪ Clear the Retain the display of coupled buses on the same sheet check box to split
the display of coupled buses and display them on two drawing sheets (recommended).
▪ Select Retain the display of coupled buses on the same sheet check box to keep
the display of coupled buses on the same drawing sheet (some of the drawing sheets
may appear congested while others may have a lot of empty space).
4. Click Generate.

▪ To save the drawing as an internal document, in the generated SLD drawing, click File >
Save.
▪ If there are overlapping connectors on the generated drawing, open the SLD and then click
Tools > Optimize Overlapping Connectors to reposition the connectors so that they do
not overlap. Note that this operation may take a few moments if your SLD contains a lot of
connectors.
▪ For information on how to use custom symbols in your SLDs and the SLD legends, see Use
Custom Symbols in SLDs.
▪ To include junction boxes and local panels in the drawing, set the IS LOAD property of that
junction box or local panel to TRUE. Alternatively, you can select the Consumer check box
on the Electrical Data tab of the Common Properties dialog box. Consequently, the
software will treat these items as any other loads in the generated drawing and they will
behave according to the drawing option settings that have been defined for them.
▪ If, during the SLD generation, the software cannot find a referenced symbol for a specific
electrical item, the software uses the default symbol file (default.sym) to represent the
item. You specify default files in Options Manager.
▪ Sometimes, after the software opens a drawing, the distance between connected items is
either too long or too short, which results in an inappropriate display of connectors. To
control the visual consistency of connectors, you can set a Clearance value that specifies
the amount of space that the software will maintain between the connector and the
connected element (also known as range avoidance). This action allows you to control the
visual consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns just before they attach to a
symbol.
To set Clearance, select a connector and then type the minimum distance from the symbols

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 495

 Single Line Diagrams

where you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur. Note that the default setting is
zero.

Break Bus Symbols into Sections

Prior to generating an SLD for a power distribution board or when regenerating an existing SLD
for a PDB, you can instruct the software to break the bus symbols on the drawing into bus
sections. This way, you can manage the number of feeder circuits that are connected under
each bus section on your SLD and make the labels of the connected electrical items more
legible.
1. On the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box, click the Buses tab.
This dialog box opens automatically if you are generating a new SLD for a power
distribution board. If you are regenerating an existing drawing, click Tools > Drawing
Options.
2. Under Display options, select the Force bus breaks check box.
When generating your SLD, the software breaks the bus symbols on the
drawing into sections and places them in rows underneath each other. The software
displays the electrical items on the buses over several rows according to the bus
breaks. You can move the individual bus sections and place them on the drawing as you
require. Also, you can move the incomer and feeder circuits from one bus section to another
on the same bus. Clear this check box to instruct the software not to break the bus symbols
into sections and display of all the circuits on the same row.
3. Under Maximum number of feeders per bus section to display, type the maximum
number of feeders to allow on each row of the drawing. The software forces bus breaks
wherever the number of feeders on the bus exceeds the specified maximum.
Note the following:
▪ When forcing bus breaks, the software places the maximum number of feeder circuits
on the first bus section according to the value that you enter. Then, the software places
the rest of the feeders on the next section. For example, if you enter 3 as the maximum
number of feeders per bus section and there are 5 feeders on that bus, the software will
place 3 feeders on the first section and the other 2 feeders on the second bus section.
▪ All the incomer circuits for each bus are drawn on the first bus section only.
▪ You can move the incomer and feeder circuits from one bus section to another bus
section on the same bus as you require. Click an incomer or a feeder circuit symbol to
select it and then drag its connection point on the bus to another bus section of the
same bus.
▪ Where two buses are connected by a coupler-riser, the software does not force a bus
break across the connection. Instead, the software draws the first bus section and then
counts the feeders from the riser on the second bus section before forcing the break.
For details, see Bus Break Example (on page 1173). Note that you can move coupler
and riser circuits to another section of the same bus just like any other circuit.
4. Select the Use multiple sheets if you want to display each row of items on a separate
drawing sheet. When this option is selected, the software uses off-page connector symbols
with appropriate labels to show the continuation between adjacent sheets. Clear to display
all the items on a single drawing sheet. When cleared, the software uses row break

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 496

 Single Line Diagrams

symbols to show the continuation between adjacent rows. Note that this option becomes
available after selecting Force bus breaks.
5. Click another tab or Generate as required.

Generate a Manual SLD

Manual SLDs are single line diagrams that you generate using a blank template. First you drag
the items you want in your SLD onto the template and position them on the drawing.
You can only place root items on the drawing. A root item can be any power source
items such as bus, converting equipment, generator, and battery bank.
Then, you set the generation options to define the electrical items that serve as the initial points
or sources of your SLD, define the SLD page and display settings, as well as the definitions for
the display of circuits and circuit components.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the Documents folder.
2. Right-click the Single Line Diagrams folder, right-click and then click New Manual SLD.
3. Select the new SLD in the Single Line Diagrams folder, and do one of the following:
▪ Right-click, and then on the shortcut menu click Open.
▪ Click File > Open > SLD.
4. From the Electrical Index, drag and drop onto the opened template the items you want in
your SLD.
5. Click Tools > Drawing Options.
6. On the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box, define the options you require for your
SLD template. For more information, see Single Line Diagram Options Dialog Box (on page
1164).
7. Click Generate.

▪ After generating the SLD, you can save the SLD as an internal drawing in the system or as
an external drawing using the Save As command. You can generate as many SLDs for the
same item as needed. If you want to regenerate an open SLD drawing using different
generation options, with the SLD open, click Tools > Drawing Options.
▪ In order to save an annotation that was added to a manual SLD, make sure that first you
click Generate on the Drawing Options dialog box and only then save the drawing. This
way, the software saves the SLD together with the inserted annotation.

Generate Multiple Single Line Diagrams for PDBs in Batch

Mode
This option allows you to generate in batch mode multiple single line diagrams for a selected
PDB. You can use this option to print the generated SLDs right after the software generates
them with or without saving the SLDs as external files.
1. In the Electrical Index, select the Power Distribution Equipment folder and select Power
Distribution Boards.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 497

 Single Line Diagrams

You can also generate multiple SLDs in batch mode from the EDE.
2. In the list view pane of the Electrical Index select the PDBs you require and do one of the
following to open the Batch Options for SLDs dialog box:
▪ Click Actions > Generate SLD for PDB.
▪ Right-click the selected items and then on the shortcut menu, click Generate SLD.
3. On the Batch Options for SLDs dialog box, do the following as you require:
▪ To save the SLDs as external files, select Save files, enter the file path where you want
to save the files, and then select the file type that you require.
▪ To print the generated SLDs automatically right after the software generates them,
select Print drawings.
▪ To show the loads associated with items on your SLD drawing, select Include loads.

▪ Generated SLDs show all circuit internals.

▪ Generated SLDs show cables and cable terminations.
▪ The software uses sequence numbers for circuits.
▪ The software uses the default SLD template that you defined in Options Manager.
▪ The SLDs do not display a legend that explain the symbols used in the SLDs.

Generate an SLD with a Bus Tie and Internal Components

This topic explains how to show the internals of a bus tie in a horizontal orientation on an SLD.
1. In the Electrical Index create your PDB including the Bus Tie coupler-riser relations with
their circuit internals.
2. From the Electrical Engineer, select the circuit with the Bus Tie coupler-riser that you want
to create an SLD for, and do one of the following:
▪ Click File > New > SLD.
▪ Right-click on the circuit, and then on the shortcut menu, click New SLD.
3. From the Electrical Index, select the PDB that contains the bus tie coupler-riser that you
want to create an SLD for, and do one of the following:
▪ Click Actions > Generate SLD for PDB.

▪ Click on the toolbar.

▪ Right-click the PDB, and then on the shortcut menu, click Generate SLD.
4. On the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box, select the Circuits and Internals tab,
and do the following:
▪ Select the options you require.
▪ Set the distance between the circuit internals and the circuits, remembering to make the
spacing wide enough so that the circuit items will not be crowded onto each other, and
require moving manually.
5. Select the Buses tab and select the required options.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 498

 Single Line Diagrams

6. Select the required options from the other tabs.

7. Click Generate.
For you to see the Bus Tie and its internal circuit you must use the correct
symbols. The Coupler circuit symbol, CircuitBusTieCoupler.sym and the Riser circuit symbol,
CircuitBusTieRiser.sym. Any of the symbols used in the internal circuits must use the syntax
<itemtype>BusTie.sym, for example CircuitbreakerBusTie.sym.

Scaling the Content of an SLD Drawing

This feature allows you to set a scale factor value for a single line diagram. This will scale the
content of the entire single line diagram including all the symbols, connectors, graphics that you
insert into the drawing, and all the distances between the graphical elements in the SLD. The
only part of the drawing that is not affected by the scale factor is the title block.
The scale factor value that you enter represents the size ratio between the original size of the
symbols (as they were created in Catalog Manager) and their size displayed in a generated
SLD. For example, if you enter 0.5, the size ratio will be 1:2 (the displayed size becomes
smaller than the original size of the symbols). However, if you enter 2, the size ratio will be 2:1
(the displayed size becomes bigger than the original size of the symbols).
You can set the scale factor by doing one of the following (note that the software rescales the
drawing on the fly right after you enter a new value):
▪ When an SLD is open, in the Properties window, change the Scale Factor property value
as needed.
▪ Change the Scale factor value on the Document Properties dialog box (Electrical index
> Documents >Single Line Diagrams > right-click the SLD drawing in the folder >
Document Properties).

For automatic SLDs generated for PDBs or SLDs generated from the Electrical Engineer:
1. Generate the SLD.
2. Once the software opens the drawing, in the Properties window, set the Scale Factor value
as you require. The software refreshes the display of the SLD after you enter the new scale
factor value.
Note that you have cleared the Shrink to page check box on the Page
Settings tab of the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box, the default scale factor value
is 1 (one), which means that the drawing is not scaled.

3. Click to save the drawing.

Note the following:
▪ All the distances between graphical elements that have been defined on the Single Line
Diagram Options dialog box and on the SLD tab of the Preferences dialog box are
affected by the scale factor.
▪ For multi-sheet SLDs, the scale factor that you set affects all the sheets of the drawing.
▪ If you select the Shrink to page check box on the Page Settings tab of the Single Line
Diagram Options dialog box, the software recalculates the scale factor accordingly so that
the content of the drawing fits into the working area of the drawing. This calculated value
overrides the scale factor that you have entered previously.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 499

 Single Line Diagrams

▪ If you change the Scale Factor property prior to opening the drawing, the new value takes
effect when opening the SLD.

For manual SLDs:

1. Start creating a manual SLD. For details, see Generate a Manual SLD (on page 497).
2. Set the scale factor value (the default value is scale factor 1) either in the Properties
window or on the Document Properties dialog box. The software rescales the drawing on
the fly right after entering the new scale factor value.
3. Generate the SLD.
Note the following:
▪ All the distances between graphical elements that have been defined on the Single Line
Diagram Options dialog box and on the SLD tab of the Preferences dialog box are
affected by the scale factor.
▪ The software scales all the graphical elements that you place on the drawing and all the
distances between the graphical elements according to the scale factor that you have
entered.
▪ After generating the SLD, all the graphical elements added to the drawing by the software
are also scaled according to the scale factor value that you have added.
▪ If you change the Scale Factor property prior to opening the drawing, the new value takes
effect when opening the SLD.

Abort SLD Generation Process

This option allows you to abort the generation process without the need to close down Smart
Electrical.
▪ In the SLD Generation Progress window, click Abort.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 500

 Single Line Diagrams

Opening Existing Single Line Diagrams

This topic explains how to open single line diagrams that you have saved as internal drawings.
If you have not changed any electrical items that pertain to the SLD that you want to open, the
software displays the drawing as it was saved the last time. However, if you have modified
some of the electrical data that pertains to that SLD, the software regenerates the drawing by
retrieving the information from the database. The software keeps the previous generation
options and all the existing annotations. The items that have not been modified retain their
previous positions in the SLD and keeping their existing coordinates. The new or modified
electrical items appear in the drawing with the coordinates that are calculated by the software.
You can open a single line diagram using one of the following methods:
▪ SLDs for power distribution boards - You open these single line diagrams from the
Electrical Index. For more information, see Open an SLD for a Power Distribution Board
(on page 502).
▪ SLDs based on items in the Electrical Engineer - You open these single line diagrams
from the Electrical Engineer. For more information, see Open an SLD Based on an
Electrical Engineer Item (on page 501).
▪ SLDs in the Documents folder in the Electrical Index - You can open an existing single
line diagram directly without selecting the electrical item for which it was generated if you
know the name of the SLD. The SLDs in the Documents folder are the single line
diagrams that you saved as internal drawings. For more information, see Open an SLD
from the Documents Folder (on page 503).
Sometimes, after the software opens a drawing, the distance between connected
items is either too long or too short, which results in an inappropriate display of connectors. To
control the visual consistency of connectors, you can set a Clearance value that specifies the
amount of space that the software will maintain between the connector and the connected
element (also known as range avoidance). This action allows you to control the visual
consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns just before they attach to a symbol.
To set Clearance, select a connector and then type the minimum distance from the symbols
where you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur. Note that the default setting is
zero.

Open an SLD Based on an Electrical Engineer Item

1. In the Electrical Engineer, select the item for which you want to open a single line diagram.
2. Click File > Open > SLD.

▪ You can right-click an item and click Open SLD on the shortcut menu.
▪ If the electrical item you selected is an origin for more than one SLD drawing, the software
opens the Open Single Line Diagram dialog box where you select the drawing that you
want to open.
▪ If you have opened an SLD drawing whose electrical data has changed (for example, you
added or deleted a bus, moved a circuit, and so on), the software does not display the SLD
clearly and some of the items might overlap. To fix the SLD, with the SLD drawing open,
click Tools > Drawing Options. Set the required SLD options and click Generate. The

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 501

 Single Line Diagrams

regenerated SLD drawing retains the existing annotations. However, it does not keep the
old circuit and circuit component placements in the drawing.

When regenerating a manual or automatic SLD, it is possible to do the following on the

Miscellaneous tab of the Single line Diagram Options dialog box:
▪ Reset the custom styles without recalculating the all the item positions in the drawing.
▪ Recalculate all the item positions in the drawing without resetting the custom styles.
▪ Reset all the custom styles and recalculate all the item positions in the drawing.
For details, see Reset and Retain Custom Styles and Item Positions (on page 502).

Open an SLD for a Power Distribution Board

1. In the Electrical Index, highlight a power distribution board.
2. Click File > Open > Drawing.

▪ You can right-click an item and click Open SLD on the shortcut menu.
▪ If you have opened an SLD drawing for a PDB whose electrical data has changed (for
example, you added or deleted a bus, moved a circuit, and so on), the software does not
display the SLD clearly and some of the items might overlap. To fix the SLD, with the SLD
drawing open, click Tools > Drawing Options. Set the required SLD options and click
Generate. The regenerated SLD drawing retains the existing annotations. However, it
does not keep the old circuit and circuit component placements in the drawing.
When regenerating a manual or automatic SLD, it is possible to do the following on the
Miscellaneous tab of the Single line Diagram Options dialog box:
▪ Reset the custom styles without recalculating the all the item positions in the drawing.
▪ Recalculate all the item positions in the drawing without resetting the custom styles.
▪ Reset all the custom styles and recalculate all the item positions in the drawing.
For details, see Reset and Retain Custom Styles and Item Positions (on page 502).

Reset and Retain Custom Styles and Item Positions

When regenerating a manual or automatic SLD, it is possible to do the following on the
Miscellaneous tab of the Single line Diagram Options dialog box:
▪ Reset the custom styles without recalculating the all the item positions in the drawing.
▪ Recalculate all the item positions in the drawing without resetting the custom styles.
▪ Reset all the custom styles and recalculate all the item positions in the drawing.
Under Item positions and styles, select one or both check boxes:
Recalculate saved item positions

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 502

 Single Line Diagrams

▪ For manual SLDs, when selected, the software recalculates the position of all the items in
the SLD in relation to their root items that have been added manually. Note that the software
will regenerate the drawing and if you have moved some of the items in the drawing, those
positions will not be retained except for root items.
Root items can be any power source items such as buses, converting equipment,
generators, and battery banks.
▪ For automatic SLDs, when selected, recalculates the position of all the items in the drawing
as if it was a new generation. That is, when regenerating an automatic SLD, the software
recalculates the positions of all the items based on the SLD preferences that you defined. If
you saved the item positions in your previous generation, these positions will not be
retained.
Retain bus positions — Allows you to retain all the positions of the buses as they were last
saved in the drawing. Note that all the branches will remain intact and all the items will be in the
saved positions.
Reset custom styles — (available only when regenerating an existing drawing) For both
automatic and manual SLDs, resets the symbol custom styles to that of the default styles as
they have been defined in Catalog Manager. Note that this option only affects those symbols
that are on the opened SLD. If you select this option, the software cancels all the manual
changes in the current SLD and all the items will be displayed as they are defined in your
symbology. Also note that this option depends on your preference settings for single line
diagrams. For more details about symbology, see the Catalog Manager User's Guide > Working
with Symbols.

Open an SLD from the Documents Folder

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the following hierarchy: Documents > Single Line
Diagrams.
2. Select an SLD.
3. Click File > Open > Drawing.

▪ You can right-click an SLD and click Open on the shortcut menu.
▪ If you have opened an SLD drawing for which the electrical data has changed (for example,
where you added or deleted a bus, moved a circuit, and so on), the software does not
display the SLD clearly and some of the items might overlap. To fix the SLD, with the SLD
drawing open, click Tools > Drawing Options. Set the required SLD options and click
Generate. The regenerated SLD drawing retains the existing annotations. However, it
does not keep the old circuit and circuit component placements in the drawing.
When regenerating a manual or automatic SLD, it is possible to do the following on the
Miscellaneous tab of the Single line Diagram Options dialog box:
▪ Reset the custom styles without recalculating the all the item positions in the drawing.
▪ Recalculate all the item positions in the drawing without resetting the custom styles.
▪ Reset all the custom styles and recalculate all the item positions in the drawing.
For details, see Reset and Retain Custom Styles and Item Positions (on page 502).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 503

 Single Line Diagrams

Save a Single Line Diagram as an External File

This procedure explains how to save a single line diagram as an external file.
1. Open or generate a single line diagram.
2. Click File > Save As.
When saving a drawing in AutoCAD format, you must specify the AutoCAD version
prior to saving. To set the AutoCAD version, open a drawing and then click Tools >
Options. On the Options dialog box, click the Foreign Data tab and select AutoCAD from the
Format list. Then, click Options in the Export box. On the AutoCAD Export Options dialog
box, select the appropriate AutoCAD version.

Show Control Stations in an SLD

This procedure allows you to show control stations associated with equipment in an SLD.
1. Open a single line diagram. For more information, see Opening Existing Single Line
Diagrams (on page 501).
2. Click Tools > Drawing Options.
3. On the Single Line Drawing Options dialog box, click the Related Equipment tag.
4. Under Control Station options, check Show control stations associated with
equipment.
5. Under Control stations displacement, type the values for the X: and Y: coordinates, and
select the units required from the Units list.
6. Click Generate.

Show Metering and Relaying Equipment in an SLD

This option allows you to show metering and relaying equipment associated with items in an
SLD.
1. Open a single line diagram. For more information, see Opening Existing Single Line
Diagrams (on page 501).
2. Click Tools > Drawing Options.
3. On the Single Line Drawing Options dialog box, click the Related Equipment tag.
4. Under Metering & Relaying Equipment options, check Show metering and relaying
equipment.
5. Under Metering equipment first symbol displacement, type the values for the X: and Y:
coordinates, select the units required from the Units list, and type the value for the Vertical
displacement.
6. Click Generate.
The logical connections are completed by you, on the drawing, after the drawing has
been generated.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 504

 Single Line Diagrams

Displaying Equipment Connected in Parallel

Single line diagrams display parallel connections that have been made among various
equipment items. In order for the software to display parallel connections appropriately, make
sure that you have connected the required equipment in parallel. For details on how to make
parallel connections, see Connect Equipment Items in Parallel (on page 241).

▪ If you are using customized symbols for cables and disconnect equipment, make sure that
you have prepared two symbols for these item types: one for the regular (vertical) display
(for example, MY_CABLE.SYM) and one for the horizontal display (for example,
MY_CABLE_PRL.SYM). You can, however, use the shipped symbols as you require.
▪ The software displays parallel connectivity even if there are no cables between the parallel
equipment items.

Placement of Items
The general rule for placing electrical items in an SLD is determined by the power flow of the
electrical items in a given SLD. For the items in a parallel branch, the placement rule is
determined according to the sequence of items in the Parallel Equipment Assistant. For
example, if in the Parallel Equipment Assistant, you defined Motor_1 in the Item 1 column and
Motor_2 in the Item 2 column, the software will place Motor_1 to the left of Motor_2. However,
if there is an overlap in the placement of items on the drawing due to the parallel connection
definitions, the power flow rule overrides the rule determined by the Parallel Equipment
Assistant. The software will first place the items based the power flow and then arrange the
items in the parallel branches in accordance with the definitions made in the Parallel
Equipment Assistant.
For manual SLDs, after placing an item that has been included in a parallel
chain in the Parallel Equipment Assistant, the software also automatically places all the items
that have parallel connection associations with the item you just placed.
These rules are illustrated in the following examples.

Example A:
Two variable speed drives connected in parallel.
▪ In the Parallel Equipment Assistant:

Item 1 Item 2

V-1G-2 V-1G-3

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 505

 Single Line Diagrams

▪ In Electrical Engineer:

▪ In a generated SLD:

Example B:
Two motors with a maintenance switch connected in parallel.
▪ In the Parallel Equipment Assistant:

Item 1 Item 2

M1A M1B

▪ In Electrical Engineer:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 506

 Single Line Diagrams

▪ In a generated SLD:

Example C:
Two transformers connected in parallel.
▪ In the Parallel Equipment Assistant:

Item 1 Item 2

T-1A T-1B

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 507

 Single Line Diagrams

▪ In Electrical Engineer:

▪ In a generated SLD:

Example D:
Three motors connected in parallel. The SLD is based on a single power source.
▪ In the Parallel Equipment Assistant:

Item 1 Item 2

MTR-1A MTR-1B

MTR-1B MTR-1C

▪ In Electrical Engineer (the SLD is based on a single power source):

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 508

 Single Line Diagrams

▪ In a generated SLD:

Example E:
Three motors connected in parallel. The SLD is based on two power sources.
▪ In the Parallel Equipment Assistant:

Item 1 Item 2

MTR-1A MTR-1B

MTR-1B MTR-1C

▪ In Electrical Engineer (the SLD is based on two power sources):

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 509

 Single Line Diagrams

▪ In a generated SLD:

To define the display settings, such as the vertical and horizontal distance between the
equipment items, see Set Parallel (see "Set Parallel Equipment Display Options" on page 510)

Set Parallel Equipment Display Options

This procedure allows you to define the display settings of parallel equipment in single line
diagrams.
1. On the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box, click the Related Equipment tab.
2. Under Parallel equipment settings, do the following:
a. Under Horizontal distance, type a value to determines the horizontal distance between
adjacent electrical equipment items that are connected in the parallel branch. For
instance, the distance between M1A and M1B in Example B in the Displaying
Equipment Connected in Parallel (on page 505) topic.
b. Under Vertical distance, type a value to determines the vertical distance between the
horizontal axis of the parallel equipment and the parallel connection branch. For
instance, the distance between M1A and C-M1A-DS in Example B in the Displaying
Equipment Connected in Parallel (on page 505) topic.
If a given parallel connection is defined on the inlet side, the software
displays the parallel branch above the main equipment. If a parallel connection is
defined on the outlet side, the software places the parallel branch below the main
equipment.
c. Under Units, select an appropriate unit of measure for the distance between the items
in the parallel branch.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 510

 Single Line Diagrams

Hide PDB Sub-Items in an SLD

In a single line diagram, you can hide the sub-items of a particular PDB and show that PDB and
all of its sub-items as a single block.
1. Select a PDB in the Electrical Index.
2. In the Properties window, set the Hide PDB internals property to TRUE.
3. When generating a single line diagram, on the General tab of the Single Line Diagram
Options dialog box, select the Activate 'Hide PDB internals' property check box.
4. Generate the SLD.
The software hides the PDB sub-items only for those PDBs whose Hide PDB
internals property has been set to TRUE. The other PDBs are displayed with all their
sub-items.

Set the Extent of Downstream Branches

For single line diagrams generated for PDBs, you can determine the extent of the downstream
branch that is included in the generated SLD,
1. Generate a single line diagram for a PDB. (For details, see Generate a Single Line Diagram
for a PDB (on page 494).)
2. On the General tab of the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box, in the Include in SLD
group box, select one of the following options from the Feeder display options:
▪ Do not show downstream branch items — Instructs the software to show only PDB
internal items: buses, cells, circuits, and circuit internals. The items that are connected
directly to the PDB internal items will be represented by a reference label.
▪ Show all items in the downstream branch up to the first load — Instructs the
software to show all the items in the feeder branch up to the first equipment item that is
defined as load. If this load is connected to a downstream equipment item, the
generated SLD will show a reference label that represents this equipment.
▪ Show all downstream branch items — Instructs the software to show the complete
feeder branch that will include all electrical items in the branch regardless whether they
have been defined as loads. The SLD will also show in the downstream branch other
buses within the same PDB and all the equipment that is connected to their feeders
downstream. If a load in the feeder branch is connected to a downstream bus that
belongs to another PDB, the SLD will show a reference label pointing to the associated
PDB and bus.
Note that the software stops the display of the downstream branch at
the item which belongs to the Loads folder in the Electrical Index. In this case, the
software shows a reference label that points to the existing downstream equipment.
3. Continue setting your options for the SLD generation as you require.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 511

 Single Line Diagrams

Placement of Circuits on Bus Sections

The software allows you to control the placement of incomer and feeder circuits on bus sections
in a generated SLD drawing. You control this placement by selecting a method for the circuit
positions on the bus symbols in the drawing. The placement depends on the sequence in
group values of each circuit. You can either place the incomer circuits on the first bus section
followed by the feeder circuits or place the incomer and feeder circuits continuously depending
on their sequence in group values.
1. Generate a single line diagram. (For details, see Generating New Single Line Diagrams (on
page 493).)
2. On the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box, click the Buses tab.
3. In the Display options group box, select one of the following methods that control the
placement circuits on the bus symbol in the generated SLD drawing:
▪ Position the incomers and feeders by showing the incomers on the first page and
first bus section — Allows you to set the position of the incomers and feeders on the
bus using the sequence in group values in such a way that the incomer and feeder
circuits in the group are counted separately. Selecting this option always results in
placing the incomer circuits on the first page and on the first bus section. The number
of bus sections, in this case, is determined only by the number of feeder circuits that are
defined for that bus.
▪ Position the incomers and feeders by their sequence numbers — Allows you to set
the position of the incomers and feeders on the bus using the sequence in group values
in such a way that all the incomer and feeder circuits in the group are counted together
in a continuous manner. Selecting this option results in placing the incomers and
feeders on bus sections based on the sequence in group values of the incomers and
feeders. The number of bus sections, in this case, is determined by the total number of
feeder and incomer circuits on a particular bus.

▪ Note that bus risers and couplers are always displayed on the same page adjacent to
each other.
▪ To ensure that all the circuits are placed correctly, all the circuits must have sequence in
group values. The software places the circuits that do not have sequence in group
values first and only then the rest of the circuits.
▪ For manual SLDs, the Position the incomers and feeders by their sequence
numbers option is not available. So when generating a manual SLD, the software
positions the incomers and feeders on the first page of the drawing and on the first bus
section.
4. Continue setting your options for the SLD generation as you require.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 512

 Single Line Diagrams

Hide Bus Feeders in an SLD

In a single line diagram, you can hide the bus feeders of a particular bus.
1. Select a bus in the Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer.
2. In the Properties window, set the Hide bus feeders property to TRUE.
3. When generating a single line diagram, on the General tab of the Single Line Diagram
Options dialog box, select the Activate 'Hide bus feeders' property check box.
4. Generate the SLD.

▪ The software hides the bus feeders only for those buses whose Hide bus feeders property
has been set to TRUE. The other buses are displayed with all their feeders.
▪ If a particular bus belongs to a PDB whose sub-items have been hidden, this bus and its
feeders will not be displayed in a single line diagram.

Hide Feeder Circuits in SLDs

This option allows you to hide (that is, not to include) a particular feeder circuit and its
downstream branch in the SLD that you are going to generate. Note that activating this feature,
the software will retain the gap of the hidden feeder circuit on the bus.
1. In the Electrical Index, select the feeder circuit that you do not want to display in the
generated SLD.
2. In the Properties window for the selected feeder circuit, scroll down to the IS SLD property
and set it to False.
3. On the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box, click the Circuits and Internals tab.
4. Clear the Show hidden feeder circuits and their downstream items check box.

▪ This feature is applicable only to feeder circuits. All other circuit types are not affected by
these settings.
▪ If the Hide bus feeders property has been set to TRUE, the IS SLD property has no effect.
▪ The IS SLD property, regardless of its setting, has no effect on incomers, couplers, and bus
risers.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 513

 Single Line Diagrams

Find an Electrical Item in an SLD

This feature allows you to find an electrical item in an open single line diagram. You select an
electrical item in the Electrical Engineer or the Electrical Index and the software finds the item
in the open SLD.
1. Open or generate a single line diagram.
2. In the Electrical Engineer or Electrical Index, expand the pertinent hierarchy in the tree
view.
3. Right-click an electrical item and select Find in SLD on the shortcut menu.

▪ The software highlights the item it finds in the SLD. You can now click to modify the
magnification level of the selected item. To cancel the selection, click somewhere outside
the drawing.
▪ In redlining mode, the Find in SLD option is not available.

Customize a PDB Border (Frame) on an SLD

1. Open Catalog Manager and create or edit the PDB border symbol. For more information,
see Create a Symbol in the Catalog Manager User's Guide, under Working with Symbols,
Creating Symbols, Create a Symbol.
2. Open Options Manager and define the symbology for the PDB border symbol created in
Catalog Manager. For more information, see Define an Item Type Symbol in the Options
Manager User's Guide, under Using Options Manager, Defining Item Type Symbology,
Define an Item Type Symbol.
3. In Smart Electrical associate your PDB border symbol with the PDB you require. For more
information, see Associate a Custom Symbol with an Item Tag

PDB Frames Examples in SLDs

The following images illustrate how the software draws PDB frames in single line diagrams.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 514

 Single Line Diagrams

Example 1: A PDB frame drawn around two buses that belong to the same PDB. Note the PDB
name shown in the drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 515

 Single Line Diagrams

Example 2: A PDB frame drawn around two sections of the same bus shown with a bus break.

Remove an Item from an SLD

This topic explains how to remove an item from a Single Line Drawing that was generated using
a blank template.

▪ This procedure only works for SLDs created using a blank SLD template (a manual SLD). It
cannot be used on SLDs that were automatically created by the software.
▪ Note that you can only remove root items from the drawing. A root item can be any power
source, such as a bus, converting equipment, generator, or battery bank. Therefore, you can
remove only a root item from a manual SLD drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 516

 Single Line Diagrams

▪ Removing items from a drawing does not delete them from the database. The items will no
longer appear on the drawing and will not be associated with that drawing. However, the
removed items will stay intact in your plant and appear normally in the Electrical Index.
1. On your open SLD select the item you want to delete.
2. Do one of the following:

▪ Click .
▪ Click Edit > Remove.
▪ Right-click, and from the shortcut menu, click Remove.

Creating and Using Compound Symbols for SLD

Diagrams
A compound symbol is a symbol comprising two symbols or more, where there is a functional
relationship between the item types the symbols represent. Compound symbols are created
within SLD items.
Draw and create the compound symbols in the Catalog Manager.
You can view the compound symbol and generate the SLD in Smart Electrical. In this way you
can use compound symbols to fully illustrate complex items such as circuits with their
internals. When creating a compound symbol or combining two compound symbols or more, the
items in the compound symbols must have valid relations.
The following guidelines apply when creating compound symbols:

General Guide Lines

A compound symbol is a group of symbols related to a main item with related item types. The
following item types are used as placeholders for compound symbols:
▪ Circuits / typical circuits
▪ Loads
▪ Conventional equipment
▪ Generators
After creating a compound symbol, you can select an individual item within the compound
symbol, and view the item properties and perform connections to auxiliary points.
Once a compound symbol has been created, you cannot break the graphics into individual
symbols that can be moved. The compound symbol is treated as a single unit and is moved as
one group.

Compound Symbol Composition Guidelines

Circuit / typical circuits
▪ Circuit data (main item data).
▪ All internals (including metering equipment).
▪ All I/O associated signals.
▪ Cable item tags associated to the circuit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 517

 Single Line Diagrams

▪ Schematic item tag.

Loads/converting equipment/generators
▪ Main item data (circuit information and properties).
▪ Associated control station and associated cable item tags.
▪ Associated instruments and their cable item tag.
▪ Motor space heater for motors.
▪ Schematics item tag.
▪ I/O signals.
▪ Control or instrument cables item, tags (embedded cable symbols retrieve cable data
without referring to their category).
Transformers and generators:
▪ Neutral grounding resistor data.
▪ Neutral grounding cable data (as property only).
▪ Neutral grounding metering equipment data.

Create and Use a Compound Symbol

1. Create a new item or use an existing one.
2. To create a compound symbol, drag the required symbols to the drawing sheet.
You can use Smart Text Editor to create a label if required. For details see Smart
Text dialog box help.

3. In the Properties window, select the appropriate item type from the list, and click .
4. In Option Manager, click Option > Locations.
5. In the Locations window, verify that the Default SLD Symbol Path location, matches the
symbol location in Catalog Manager.
6. In Option Manager, you can define the item type symbology. For details see, Define an
item type symbol topic in the Catalog Manager Guide.
7. In Smart Electrical index tree view pane, right click the predefined item and on the shortcut
menu click Associate Custom Symbol.
8. On the Associate Custom Symbol dialog box, click Add.
9. From the Document type column, from the list, select the required document type.
10. From the Symbol column, select the compound symbol to associate with the document
type.
11. In the Electrical Engineer tree view pane, right click the item and on the shortcut menu, click
New SLD.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 518

 Single Line Diagrams

12. On the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box, click Generate to view the SLD
containing the compound symbol.

▪ The compound symbol properties now appear in the Properties window in Smart Electrical.
▪ In a compound symbol, items of the same type are sequenced in-group. It is possible to
change the sequence but two items cannot have identical sequence values.
▪ It is possible to combine several compound symbols into one.

Guidelines for Creating SLD Symbols in Catalog

Manager
Smart Electrical uses symbols to generate single line diagrams. You create these symbols in
Catalog Manager. You store the symbol files in the folder that you define in the Default SLD
Symbol Path location in Options Manager.

General Guidelines
When generating a single line diagram, Smart Electrical searches for the symbols that match the
item type names. Therefore, all the symbol names must match the item type names of the
electrical items that you want to include in the SLD. You can, however, save a symbol file
under a different name and assign it to an electrical item using the Associate Custom Symbols
command from the Actions menu. In this case, the software will use the associated symbol file
to represent the electrical item in an SLD.
You have to set an item type for each symbol that you create. Each symbol consists of
graphical elements (lines, circles, and so forth), SmartText properties, fixed text (labels),
connect points, and an origin point.
Note that you can use all the graphical tools provided in Catalog Manager to create your
symbols.

Connect Points
Two types of connect points are used in SLDs:
▪ Connect Point — for main power connection.
▪ Auxiliary Point — for creating the logical connection between equipment, metering, and
relays.
All symbols must have at least two connect points, apart from some exceptions listed below.
Each connect point consists of a:
▪ Connection type — Connect point or auxiliary point.
▪ Connection angle — The angle at which the connection is made between the equipment
and the connector.
▪ Side — A numeric value used to distinguish between the "power in" –1, and the "power out"
– 2, sides of the equipment.
▪ Number — A sequential, unique, index number for the connect point. Each side, within a
connection type, starts at number one and progresses in sequential steps.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 519

 Single Line Diagrams

The upper and lower connect points must have the same X coordinates.

Origin Point
Place the origin point in the middle of the existing or virtual line that connects the upper and
lower point.

Special Symbols
The software uses several symbols to represent a transformer in a single line diagram -
Transformer symbol and TransformerComponent symbols. You create each symbol
separately. However, the origin point of all the symbols has to be placed in such a way that
when the software superimpositions all the symbols, it creates a complete representation of a
compound transformer.
Use the following properties to create transformer symbols:
▪ Symbol name — Transformer
▪ One upper connect point
▪ Connection angle: 90 degrees (up)
▪ Index 1
▪ Symbol name — TransformerComponent0
▪ One lower connect point
▪ Connection angle: — 90 degrees (down)
▪ Index 1
▪ Symbol name — TransformerComponent1
▪ One lower connect point
▪ Connection angle: — 90 degrees (down)
▪ Index 1
▪ Symbol name — TransformerComponent2
▪ One lower connect point
▪ Connection angle: -90 degrees (down)
▪ Index 1
Catalog Manager uses the TransformerComponent0 symbol together with the Transformer
symbol to create a 2-winding transformer representation.
Catalog Manager uses TransformerComponent1 together with the Transformer and
TransformerComponent 2 symbols to create a 3-winding transformer representation.
You can customize the transformer and transformer component symbols in the Options
Manager. For more details, see Define a Transformer Component Symbol.
For an example of origin placement in each of the transformer symbols, you can open any of the
above mentioned symbol files located in the folder that you define in the Default SLD Symbol
Path location in Options Manager.
▪ Bus symbols:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 520

 Single Line Diagrams

▪ Bus — Smart Electrical creates bus representations in SLD automatically. However,

you still need to create a bus symbol and set its line type, line width, and define
SmartText attributes. The origin point must always be at the left edge of the symbol.
▪ Smart Electrical uses the above properties to create the bus symbols in single line
diagrams. You can create as many bus symbols with different properties as required so
that you can generate single line diagrams with various line types and widths. Note that
Smart Electrical uses only the symbol properties and not the file itself to represent
buses in single line diagrams. After creating bus symbols and defining their properties
in Catalog Manager, you can modify the bus properties prior to generating an SLD by
associating a different symbol file using the Associate Custom Symbols command
from the Actions menu. This way, the software can generate a single line diagram with
various bus representations.
▪ Symbols that represent the connection between two buses in a PDB:
▪ Horizontal representation — Special symbols are used to show the horizontal
connection between two buses and their internals. The two symbols are
CircuitBusTieCoupler.sym and CircuitBusTieRiser.sym. All disconnect equipment,
cable, or any other item that needs to be displayed in the internals of the bus tie have a
specific syntax, <ItemType>BusTie.sym. The software generates the SLD and
searches for the BusTie.sym suffixed symbols if in the Single Line Diagram Options
dialog box the circuit internals have been chosen to be displayed. Note that the BusTie
symbol is a ‘circuit' type symbol and has its first connection point on the rightmost side
and the second connection point at the leftmost side.
▪ Vertical representation — The standard bus coupler-riser circuit connection
representation that includes both coupler and the riser circuits and displays them as
vertical objects, connected to each other. The software displays both circuits as
standard arrows.
If you want to have more than one symbol to represent a bus tie, you can create
a custom symbol (for example, MyDisconnectSwitch.sym) and assign it, for example, to
a disconnect switch using a default symbol or custom symbol. Then, create another
custom symbol with the same name plus BusTie (for example,
MyDisconnectSwitchBusTie.sym and arranged horizontally if needed). Place this
custom symbol in the SLD symbols folder. Smart Electrical will use this symbol if you
select the Use bus tie symbols check box on the Circuits & Internals tab of the
Single Line Diagram Options dialog box.
▪ Other symbols:
▪ Other special symbols include <ItemType>Alt.sym used to represent equipment that
has two sources of power supply, Buswrappingmarker_Right,
Buswrappingmarker_Left, and Triangle- Compare .
Note that the connect point numbering sequence for an Alt.sym symbol is "main power
in" – 1, "power out" – 2, and "alternate power in" – 3.
▪ From — This is a system symbol; do not modify it.
▪ Default (Symbol name = Default) — Smart Electrical uses a default symbol whenever a
required symbol for a particular item type does not exist. Default symbols require two
connect points. You can select any item type for the Default symbol.

▪ For information on how to use custom symbols in your SLDs and the SLD legends, see Use
Custom Symbols in SLDs.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 521

 Single Line Diagrams

▪ For information on how to place connect points in a symbol in Catalog Manager, see Place
Symbol Connect Points (on page 523).
▪ A list of all shipped symbols and their SmartText attributes is available in the symbols.txt file
located in the folder that you define in the Default SLD Symbol Path location in Options
Manager.
▪ Smart Electrical shipped data includes two sets of transformer symbol files. The IEC set
includes:
▪ TransformerIEC
▪ TransformerComponent0IEC
▪ TransformerComponent1IEC
▪ TransformerComponent2IEC
▪ The NEC set includes:
▪ TransformerNEC
▪ TransformerComponent0NEC
▪ TransformerComponent1NEC
▪ TransformerComponent2NEC
Since the software uses the Transformer, TransformerComponent0,
TransformerComponent1, and TransformerComponent2 symbols by default, you have to
replace this set with the NEC or IEC symbols and rename them without their IEC or NEC
suffixes if you want to use symbols belonging to another standard.
▪ The following limitations of SLD symbol creation exist in Catalog Manager:
▪ On the Smart Text Editor dialog box, you cannot use the Visible, Short Text, and
Format features.
▪ The angles for the symbol connect points are fixed at 90 degrees for the top connect
point and -90 degrees for the bottom connect point.
▪ There is no support of symbol properties in the Properties window except for the
selection of item types.
▪ The software does not retain the assigned smart text labels if you change the item type
of a symbol for which smart text labels have been created.
In order for the software to rescale all the items correctly, make sure that
when creating symbols that contain text or smart text, the Units space property is set to World.
Note the World is not the default setting for this property.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 522

 Single Line Diagrams

Place Symbol Connect Points

1. In Catalog Manager, open the required .sym file.

2. On the Catalog Tools toolbar, click Place Points .

3. From the Connection Type list, select the connection type required.
4. Click the symbol at the location where you want to add the connect point.
The software displays a dynamic dashed line representing the connection of the
new connect point.
5. Orient the dashed line to represent the appropriate connection angle for the new connect
point.
6. After the connection angle is correct, click again to place the connect point.

▪ You can also type the exact angle value in the Connect angle field to define the connection
angle.
▪ You can right-click during this procedure to reset the command.

Manipulating Smart Labels

Component handles allow you to rotate or mirror a Smart Label around axes changing their
orientation in relation to the labels associated item. Only those Smart Labels that appear in
cable block diagrams, power distribution board layout drawings, single line diagrams, and wiring
diagrams, and are associated with connectors can be mirrored or rotated.
▪ The mirror handle allows you to mirror about the horizontal and vertical axes, defined in
relation to the origin of the item. You can mirror items by dragging the mirror handle in the
appropriate direction. The software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that
you can be sure to mirror the item correctly.
▪ The rotate handle provides a mechanism for rotating components around their origin.
You can rotate items by dragging the rotate handle in the appropriate direction. The
software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to rotate
the item correctly.
For more information, see Working with Labels in the Smart Engineering Manager Users Guide.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 523

 Single Line Diagrams

Create a Mirror Image of a Smart Label

This procedure shows you how to mirror a Smart Label about the horizontal and vertical axes.
1. Select the Smart Label in the drawing.

2. Click the mirror handle , the cursor changes to .

3. Drag the mirror handle in the direction that you want to mirror the item. The new label
position is outlined on our drawing.
4. Release the mirror handle.

Rotate a Smart Label

This procedure shows you how to rotate a Smart Label on your drawing.
1. Select the Smart label on the drawing.
2. Click the rotate handle .
3. Drag the rotate handle in the direction that you want to rotate the item.
You can click the rotate handle closer to or further from the center of the item to
change the step angle for the rotation.

Align Smart Labels

This procedure shows you how to align Smart Labels on your drawing.
1. In the Drawing view, select the labels that you want to align.
In order to align labels, you must be sure not to select any drawing items other than
labels. You can remove an item from a select set by pressing CTRL and clicking the item.
2. Click the appropriate alignment button on the main toolbar:

▪ Align Left — Align labels so that their left-most lines match

▪ Align Right — Align labels so that their right-most lines match

▪ Align Center About Vertical — Align labels so that their center points agree on a
horizontal line

▪ Align Center About Horizontal — Align labels so that their center points agree on
a vertical line

▪ Align Top — Align labels so that their top lines match

▪ Align Bottom — Align labels so that their bottom lines match

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 524

 Single Line Diagrams

Insert a Legend in an Existing SLD

While defining SLD generation options, the software allows you to include a legend which
explains the meaning of all the symbols used in the generated SLD. The software also allows
you to insert a legend in an existing SLD that was generated without a legend. Once an SLD
contains a legend, you can drag the legend and move it like any other element in an SLD.
1. Open a single line diagram. For more information, see Opening Existing Single Line
Diagrams (on page 501).
2. Click Insert > Legend.
3. On the SLD Legend dialog box, select one of the following options:
▪ Horizontal.
▪ Vertical.
4. In the SLD, click where you want the software to insert the legend.

▪ Once an SLD contains a legend, it behaves like any other element in the SLD. Therefore,
you can resize it or drag it to another place in the SLD.
▪ The SLD legend contains the symbols that represent the electrical items in the open single
line diagram. For information on how to use custom symbols in your SLDs and the SLD
legends, see Use Custom Symbols in SLDs.
▪ For information about associating custom symbols, see Associate Custom Symbols with
Plant Items.

Rename the Sheet Tabs in an SLD Drawing

This procedure explains how to rename the Sheet tabs in a generated drawing. This enables
you to have different page names for each of the pages in a multi-page drawing.
Prior to renaming the Sheet tabs, you have to add the &Sheet.Name macro
to the drawing template. For details, see Enable the Renaming of Sheet Tabs in a Drawing (on
page 320).
1. Generate a new drawing.
2. In the generated drawing, do one of the following:
▪ Double-click a tab that you want to rename.
▪ On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click File > Sheet Setup.
3. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, click the Name tab and type a new name under Sheet
name.
4. Click OK to rename the tab.
The software retains the new name after you reopen the drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 525

SECTION 19

Cable Block Diagrams

Cable Block Diagrams (CBDs) provide a graphical representation of the interconnection of all
control, power, instrumentation, and grounding cables, and their related equipment such as
power distribution boards (PDBs), generators, motors, and so forth, within your plant. They
show the plant cable flow between the various cabinets and equipment of your plant.
Cable block diagrams are used in the preliminary planning stages of the plant life cycle to verify
the destination panels for cables as no wiring connections or terminations are needed at this
early stage of your plant. Cable block diagrams can also be used for ordering MTO (made to
order) cables at the feed stage of your plant, and later after the completion of your plant as part
of the maintenance program to show the location of all major cables, panels, junction boxes, and
so forth. Use the same equipment and cables in more than one drawing.
Smart Electrical allows you to drag items from the Electrical Index, Electrical Engineer, and
Reference Data Explorer to your drawing, and position them exactly where you want them to
be. You can create associations among the items, especially when placing cables on your
drawing. You can manually connect the cables on a CBD. The software checks the connections
and informs you if there is a problem.
To symbolize the placed items on the drawing, the software uses either a shipped symbol taken
from the reference data (specified by you on the Locations page in Options Manager) or a
custom symbol that you have associated with a specific item. If these images are not available
in the specified folder, the software uses a default image taken from the shipped reference data.
For more information, see Customizing Symbols and Defining File Locations in the Smart
Electrical Option Manager Users Guide.

Creating Cable Block Diagrams

There are two ways in which you can create a plant cable block diagram (CBD):
▪ Create a blank drawing and then place and connect the electrical items that you require. For
details, see Create a Blank Plant CBD (on page 527).
▪ Create a plant CBD based on a typical cable block diagram. Typical CBDs already contain
predefined electrical items and associations. Using this option automates the creation of
plant CBDs and electrical items as the software automatically creates these plant items
based on the typical definitions. For details, see Create a CBD Based on a Typical Cable
Block Diagram (on page 527).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 526

 Cable Block Diagrams

Create a Blank Plant CBD

This procedure explains how to create a blank cable block diagram where you can place the
electrical items that you require and make all the necessary associations and connections.
1. In the Electrical Index open the Documents folder.
2. Right-click the Cable Block Diagrams folder, and on the shortcut menu, click New Cable
Block Diagram.
3. Right-click the new cable block diagram and then click Document Properties.
4. On the Document Properties dialog box, do the following:
a. Under Document number, type a name of up to 80 characters for the new typical CBD.
b. Click in the Description box and type a brief description if needed.
c. From the Template name, select an appropriate drawing template.
d. To filter the display of cables in the CBD, select the appropriate check boxes under
Display cable types in cable block diagrams.
5. Click OK.
6. Place the required items on the new drawing.
In addition to smart graphics, you can also add auxiliary graphics, redlining, and
annotations to your CBD. For details, see Working with Smart Data and Auxiliary Graphics
in a CBD (on page 529). Once you save the drawing, the software retains all your additions
and modifications.

7. When done, click on the main toolbar before closing the drawing.
For more information, see Working with Smart Data and Auxiliary Graphics in a CBD
(on page 529).

Create a CBD Based on a Typical Cable Block Diagram

This procedure explains how to create a plant cable block diagram (CBD) based on a typical
CBD. The advantage of using this option is that you can automate the process of creating your
plant electrical items using predefined typical items and associations. The software
automatically creates a plant CBD, creates and places all the electrical items on the drawing,
and sets all the existing associations among the electrical items as defined in the typical CBD.
For details on how to create a typical CBD, see Create a Typical Cable Block Diagram (on page
66).
1. In the Electrical Index expand the Documents folder.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Drag an appropriate typical CBD from the Reference Data Explorer to the Cable Block
Diagrams folder in the Electrical Index.
▪ Right-click the Cable Block Diagrams folder and them on the shortcut menu, click
Create from Typical.
3. If you used the right-click option, use the Find dialog box to find an appropriate typical CBD
that will serve as a basis for the new CBD and click OK.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 527

 Cable Block Diagrams

4. If the new plant CBD is based on a typical CBD that contains typical circuits, do the
following:
a. On the Create New Plant Circuits dialog box (that opens automatically once you select
or drag a typical CBD that contains typical circuits), select an appropriate plant PDB by
clicking in the Plant PDB field.
You do not need to select a plant PDB if you want to assign your new circuit
to a free-standing bus.
b. From the Plant Bus list, select an appropriate bus belonging to the selected plant PDB
or click to select a free-standing bus.
If you do not select a bus for a particular typical circuit listed in this
dialog box, the software will not create a plant circuit for that typical circuit.
c. From the Plant Cell list, select an appropriate cell or create a new cell as you required.
You can skip the cell assignment for the new plant circuit if needed.
The software validates that the circuits created under a cell belong to the same
circuit type.
d. Click OK for the software to create new plant circuits and assign them according to the
selections you just made.
5. In the open CBD drawing, make any changes as required..
In addition to smart graphics, you can also add auxiliary graphics, redlining, and
annotations to your CBD. For details, see Working with Smart Data and Auxiliary Graphics
in a CBD (on page 529). Once you save the drawing, the software retains all your additions
and modifications.

6. When done, click on the main toolbar before closing the drawing.

▪ After saving the new CBD, the software associates the new plant items with the new CBD
drawing and allows you to open the new drawing from the Associated Drawings dialog box
(see "Associated Drawings for a Plant Item Dialog Box" on page 929).
▪ For more information about working with CBDs, see Working with Smart Data and Auxiliary
Graphics in a CBD (on page 529).

Open an Existing Cable Block Diagram

This procedure shows you how to open an existing cable block drawing.
1. In the Electrical Index, Documents Folder, expand the Cable Block Diagrams folder.
2. Select the cable bock diagram that you want to open, and do one of the following.
▪ Double-click the selected drawing.
▪ Click File > Open > Drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 528

 Cable Block Diagrams

▪ Click .
▪ Right-click and on the shortcut menu, click Open.

▪ For information about placing items on a drawing and connecting cable between equipment
items in a CBD, see Place and Connect Items in a Cable Block Diagram (on page 534).
▪ Sometimes, after the software opens a drawing, the distance between connected items is
either too long or too short, which results in an inappropriate display of connectors. To
control the visual consistency of connectors, you can set a Clearance value that specifies
the amount of space that the software will maintain between the connector and the
connected element (also known as range avoidance). This action allows you to control the
visual consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns just before they attach to a
symbol.
To set Clearance, select a connector and then type the minimum distance from the symbols
where you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur. Note that the default setting is
zero.

Rename the Sheet Tabs in a CBD Drawing

This procedure explains how to rename the Sheet tabs in a generated drawing.
Prior to renaming the Sheet tabs, you have to add the &Sheet.Name macro
to the drawing template. For details, see Enable the Renaming of Sheet Tabs in a Drawing (on
page 320).
1. Generate a new drawing.
2. In the generated drawing, do one of the following:
▪ Double-click a tab that you want to rename.
▪ On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click File > Sheet Setup.
3. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, click the Name tab and type a new name under Sheet
name.
4. Click OK to rename the tab.
The software retains the new name after you reopen the drawing.

Working with Smart Data and Auxiliary Graphics in a

CBD
Cable block diagrams (CBDs) provide you with a full graphical environment for your front-end
design. Apart from regular actions in a drawing such as zooming, selecting, saving, and so forth,
you can perform the following actions:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 529

 Cable Block Diagrams

Action Description

Placing electrical Items You can select an electrical item (a PDB, load, cable, and so
forth) in the Electrical Index or Reference Data Explore
and drag it to an open cable block diagram.
Local panels and junction boxes that
contain circuits cannot be placed on cable block diagrams..
See also Use Reference Items in a Cable Block Diagram
(on page 537).

Moving items Select an item and drag it to another location in the

drawing. Save the drawing to keep the items you moved in
their new locations. Note that this does not affect the data
in your database.

Placing cables Drag a cable from the Electrical Index, Electrical

Engineer, or Reference Data Explorer to an open CBD.
When placing parallel cables, drag only one of the parallel
cables in the set. The software represents parallel cables
using a single line.

Filtering out cables You can set a filter that instructs the software to hide
specific cables. For details, see Filter Out Cables from a
Cable Block Diagram (on page 538).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 530

 Cable Block Diagrams

Action Description

Placing single-core cable Select a single-core cable assembly in the Electrical Index
assemblies or Reference Data Explorer and drag it to an open cable
block diagram.

▪ When dragging from the Electrical Index, instead of

dragging a single-core cable assembly, you can drag
one of the current-carrying cables belonging to a given
single-core cable assembly.
▪ All the current-carrying cables of an assembly are
shown as one line in a CBD.
▪ Selecting a single-core cable assembly in a CBD
enables you to edit the properties of the individual
current-carrying cables in the Properties window.
▪ The grounding and neutral appear on the CBD as
separate lines. You can connect them as you require.
▪ You cannot place an assembly that has a cable which is
connected to an equipment item that has not been
placed on the current CBD.
▪ The software uses the symbol used for the
current-carrying cables to identify single-core cable
assemblies in the drawing.
▪ If you defined a cable formation macro in the symbol
used for single-core cable assemblies, the software
identifies the formation of an assembly according to the
following formula:
<Number of parallel power cables> multiplied by
[<Number of current-carrying cores> multiplied by
<formation of a single-core cable assembly>]
Example: 2 x [3 x (1 x )1 x 240 mm2))]

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 531

 Cable Block Diagrams

Action Description

Connecting and disconnecting To connect a cable, first place it on a CBD and then drag
cables one of the cable ends of to a connect point of an electrical
item.
After connecting a cable to an equipment item in a CBD, the
software retains the connection points on the equipment
symbol for all other CBDs where this equipment is used.
That is, when placing this equipment on another CBD, all
the existing connection points are retained on the equipment
symbol as they were during the original connection and it
will not be possible to connect other cables using those
connection points. The software stops retaining connection
points of equipment symbols if you disconnect the
equipment in a CBD. Also, the software does not retain the
connection points after changing the symbol of connected
equipment.
When connecting parallel cables, drag the end of the line
that represents the parallel cables to a connect point of an
equipment item.
To disconnect a set of parallel cables or a single cable, drag
its end away from a connect point of an electrical item.
If the symbol to which you want to connect the cable does
not have enough connection points, the software displays a
message informing you that there is a shortage of
connection points on that symbol.

Connecting a cable directly to a It is possible to drag a cable to a PDB in a CBD drawing and
PDB connect this cable to the PDB directly without a circuit. As a
result, in the Common Properties of that cable, the name
of that PDB will appear in either To or From connections of
the cable. This will enable you then to make a physical
connection to one of the circuits of the PDB.

Showing or hiding cable label You can show or hide the leader lines of cable labels by
leader lines
clicking on the Smart Label Modification toolbar.
When selecting a cable label in a drawing, the leader line is
always visible. If you want to see the leader line of a cable
when the cable label is not selected, select a cable label and

then click on the Smart Label Modification toolbar.

The leader line of that cable label remains visible after
selecting another graphical element in the drawing. To hide

the leader line, select a cable label and click on the

Smart Label Modification toolbar again.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 532

 Cable Block Diagrams

Action Description

Placing connectors To place a connector, click on the Draw toolbar. For

more details about various actions with connectors, see
Toolbars and Ribbons (on page 1202).
See also Mark Auxiliary Graphics on a Cable Block Diagram
(on page 539) to learn how to distinguish between plant
items and auxiliary graphics in a CBD.
A connector is a line that serves to connect items in
a drawing. A connector is an auxiliary graphic that does not
represent any plant item.

Connecting and disconnecting To connect a connector, first place it on a CBD and then
connectors drag one of its ends to an electrical item.
To disconnect a connector, drag its end away from the
equipment

Connecting and disconnecting After placing a single-core assembly on a CBD, drag one of
single-core cable assemblies its ends to a connect point of an equipment item. This action
connects all the other current-carrying cables belonging to
that assembly on the selected cable end. You can see this
association in the Cable Common Properties of each
individual cable.
To disconnect a single-core cable assembly, drag its end
away from a connect point of an electrical item.

Connecting equipment items in After placing the required equipment items and cables on a
parallel CBD, select a cable that hasn't been connected yet and then
select an equipment item pair from the Parallel Pairs list on
the Modify Connector ribbon. You can now drag the
selected cable to one of the pertinent equipment items that
you want to connect in parallel. For a detailed procedure,
see Connect Equipment Items in Parallel (on page 241).

Moving a connection point of a You can move a connection point of a connected cable or
connected cable or connector connector along the outer edge of the symbol to which the
cable is connected. Drag the required connection point
along the edge of the symbol. If you want to drag it to a point
that is already connected by another cable, disconnect that
cable first to make the connection point available for another
connection.

Manipulating Smart Labels and You can move and manipulate Smart Labels and macros in
macros an open CBD. For details, see the following:
▪ Manipulating Smart Labels (on page 462).
▪ Manipulating Drawing Items (on page 458).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 533

 Cable Block Diagrams

Action Description

Entering and modifying item Select an electrical item and then enter or modify its
properties properties in the Properties window.

Inserting annotations and Add text labels, symbols, or watermarks to your CBD as
redlining annotations. Add text, linked symbols, circles, rectangles,
and lines to your CBD as redlining. For more information,
see Managing Annotations and Redlining (see "Annotations
and Redlining" on page 624).

Removing items from a CBD In an open CBD, right-click the item and then click Remove
on the shortcut menu. Note that if you want to remove a
cable, you must first disconnect it.

Renaming a document and In an open CBD and click Edit > Document Properties.
entering revisions

Saving a CBD as an external file In an open CBD, click File > Save As.

Printing a CBD Click File > Print.

▪ Sometimes, after the software opens a drawing, the distance between connected items is
either too long or too short, which results in an inappropriate display of connectors. To
control the visual consistency of connectors, you can set a Clearance value that specifies
the amount of space that the software will maintain between the connector and the
connected element (also known as range avoidance). This action allows you to control the
visual consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns just before they attach to a
symbol.
To set Clearance, select a connector and then type the minimum distance from the symbols
where you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur. Note that the default setting is
zero.
▪ Cable block diagrams do not allow you to make dual power source connections. You can
make these connections in the Electrical Engineer. After making such a connection in the
Electrical Engineer, the cable block diagrams generated for these items will display the
dual power source connections correctly. You can, however, disconnect an item from an
alternative power source in a cable block diagram.

Place and Connect Items in a Cable Block Diagram

This procedure shows you how to place electrical items on an open CBD drawing and connect
the placed cables between appropriate items.
To symbolize the placed items on the drawing, the software uses either a shipped symbol taken
from the reference data (specified by you on the Locations page in Options Manager) or a
custom symbol that you have associated with a specific item. If these images are not available
in the specified folder, the software uses a default image taken from the shipped reference data.
For more information, see Customizing Symbols and Defining File Locations in the Smart
Electrical Option Manager Users Guide.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 534

 Cable Block Diagrams

For details about various actions that you can carry out in a cable block diagram. see
Working with Smart Data and Auxiliary Graphics in a CBD (on page 529).
1. Open a cable block diagram or create a new one.
2. Drag the appropriate items from the Electrical Index, Reference Data Explorer, or
Electrical Engineer to the open drawing and position them on the drawing as needed.
You can drag the following items to an open cable block diagram:
▪ All electrical equipment items apart from buses, and relay functions.
▪ You can drag disconnect electrical equipment items if they are stand-alone items,
that is, if they do not belong to any circuits.
▪ Metering equipment items can be dragged only if they are current transformers or
potential transformers.
▪ All wiring equipment items (panels, cables, and so forth) apart from busways, glands
and cableway components.
▪ In addition to smart graphics, you can also add auxiliary graphics, redlining, and
annotations to your CBD. For details, see Working with Smart Data and Auxiliary
Graphics in a CBD (on page 529). Once you save the drawing, the software retains all
your additions and modifications.
When placing a circuit or a PDB on a cable block diagram, the following
rules apply:
▪ Placing a circuit is allowed only if the parent PDB of the circuit is not in the current cable
block diagram.
▪ Placing a power distribution board is allowed only if none of the child circuits have been
placed in the current cable block diagram.
3. To connect a cable that has been placed on a CBD drawing, do the following
a. In the open drawing, click an appropriate cable.
b. Drag an appropriate cable end to the connection point of the item you want the cable to
connect 'From'.

▪ After dragging the cable that you want to connect to the symbol of a valid equipment
item, the software switches on all the available connection points on that equipment
symbol. The connection points on that symbol are turned on only when the dragged
cable is very close to or hovers over the equipment symbol to which you are
dragging the cable. If you drag the cable to another equipment symbol, the
connection points on the previous symbol are turned off.
▪ The software displays only the connection points available for the specific category
of the cable chosen. For more details, see Place Point Ribbon (Smart Electrical) in
the Catalog Manager User's Guide, under Working with Symbols > Place Point
Command. If no connection points are available, the software does not allow the
cable to be connected.
▪ If the symbol to which you want to connect the cable does not have enough
connection points, the software displays a message informing you that there is a
shortage of connection points on that symbol.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 535

 Cable Block Diagrams

c. Drag the other cable end to the connection point of the item you want the cable to
connect 'To'.

▪ For the rules that govern the connection to circuit symbols, see Rules for
Connecting to Circuit Symbols (on page 537).
▪ When using a reference cable to connect items in a CBD, the software automatically
creates a plant cable in the Electrical Index and makes all the required
associations.
4. To disconnect a cable from an electrical item in a CBD, click the required cable end and
drag it away from the connection point.

5. When done, click on the main toolbar before closing the drawing.

▪ After connecting a cable to an equipment item in a CBD, the software retains the connection
points on the equipment symbol for all other CBDs where this equipment is used. That is,
when placing this equipment on another CBD, all the existing connection points are retained
on the equipment symbol as they were during the original connection and it will not be
possible to connect other cables using those connection points. The software stops retaining
connection points of equipment symbols if you disconnect the equipment in a CBD. Also, the
software does not retain the connection points after changing the symbol of connected
equipment.
▪ You can also place auxiliary graphics, such as redlining, annotations, and water marks. For
information on how the software behaves when placing these and other items in a cable
block diagram, see Working with Smart Data and Auxiliary Graphics in a CBD (on page
529).
▪ Sometimes, after the software opens a drawing, the distance between connected items is
either too long or too short, which results in an inappropriate display of connectors. To
control the visual consistency of connectors, you can set a Clearance value that specifies
the amount of space that the software will maintain between the connector and the
connected element (also known as range avoidance). This action allows you to control the
visual consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns just before they attach to a
symbol.
To set Clearance, select a connector and then type the minimum distance from the symbols
where you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur. Note that the default setting is
zero.
▪ You can also associate cables with a specific circuit either in the Cable Common
Properties or the Electrical Engineer.
▪ Clicking Refresh also saves the drawing. If you do not use Refresh or you make changes to
your drawing after refreshing, the software prompts you to save the drawing on closing.
▪ You can move and reposition any item or cable by selecting and dragging the item to its new
position.
▪ If you delete any of the items that have been placed on a drawing, this item will no longer
appear on the drawings.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 536

 Cable Block Diagrams

Rules for Connecting to Circuit Symbols

When connecting a power cable to a circuit symbol, the software shows the available connection
points. Make sure that you connect to the circuit symbol power connect points according to the
following rules:
▪ Connecting to an incomer circuit — connect the cable on its Side 2 (the To side) to Side 1 of
the incomer.
▪ Connecting to a feeder or coupler circuit — connect the cable on its Side 1 (the From side)
to Side 2 of the feeder or coupler.
▪ Connecting to a bus riser — connect the cable on its Side 2 (the To side) to Side 1 of the
bus riser. Note that the cable must be connected to a coupler on its From side prior to
connecting the bus riser.
▪ Connecting to a panel circuit — you can connect to either side of the panel circuit. If you
connect to Side 1 of the panel circuit, connect the cable on its Side 2 (the To side). If you
connect to Side 2 of the panel circuit, connect the cable on its Side 1 (the From side).
When connecting a control, instrumentation, or grounding cable to a circuit symbol, it is only
possible to connect to non-power connect points of the circuit symbol. In this case, the software
shows both connection sides of the circuit symbol and you can connect to either side of the
circuit as you require.
Note that the same rules also apply when making connections in the Electrical Engineer or the
Cable Common Properties dialog box.

Use Reference Items in a Cable Block Diagram

You can drag a reference item from the Reference Data Explorer to a CBD. This way, you can
place this item in the CBD and create a new plant item based on that reference item. The new
plant item will also automatically appear in the Electrical Index.
You can drag the following reference items to an open cable block diagram:
▪ All electrical equipment items apart from buses and relay functions.

▪ You can drag disconnect electrical equipment items if they are stand-alone items, that
is, if they do not belong to any circuits.
▪ Metering equipment items can be dragged only if they are current transformers or
potential transformers.
▪ All wiring equipment items (panels, cables, and busways) apart from glands and cableway
components.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 537

 Cable Block Diagrams

Filter Out Cables from a Cable Block Diagram

This feature allows you to filter out unnecessary cables from a conventional cable block
diagram.
1. In the Electrical Index, right-click a conventional cable block diagram.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Document Properties.
3. On the Document Properties dialog box, in the Display cable types in cable block
diagrams group box, click the ellipsis button next to Filter.
4. Select an appropriate filter and click OK.
If the Select Filter dialog box does not have an appropriate filter, click New to
define a new filter. For details, see Creating and editing Filters in the Smart Engineering
Manager Filter Manager User's Guide.
5. Click OK on the Document Properties dialog box to apply the filter for the current cable
block diagram.

Use a Reference Circuit in a Cable Block Diagram

You can add a circuit to a cable block diagram by dragging a typical circuit from the Reference
Data Explorer. This action places a circuit symbol on the CBD and automatically creates a
plant circuit in the Electrical Index in the location that you specify.
1. Select an appropriate typical circuit in the Reference Data Explorer.
2. Drag this circuit to an open CBD.
3. On the Circuit dialog box, specify the power distribution board, bus, and cell where you
want the new circuit to be created.

▪ For a free-standing bus, you do not need to specify a power distribution board.
▪ You can select the Create cell check box if you want to create the new circuit in a cell
that doesn't exist yet.
4. Click OK.
If your preferences are set to open the Item Tag dialog box after creating a new item,
the software opens this dialog box after you define the location of the new circuit and after
placing the symbol on the drawing. On the Item Tag, you can change the name of the new
circuit as you need.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 538

 Cable Block Diagrams

Connect a Circuit to a Cable Connected to PDB

Once a cable has been connected to a PDB in a cable block diagram, it is possible to connect
that cable to a specific circuit.
1. In a cable block diagram connect a cable to a PDB.
2. Right-click the connected cable in the drawing.
3. On the shortcut menu, click Cable Common Properties.
4. Click the Connections tab.
5. Under From, click Find to find an appropriate circuit.
6. On the Find dialog box, select Circuit from the Equipment type list and click Find Now.
7. In the results pane, select an appropriate circuit and click OK.
The newly connected circuit is displayed in the Tag box under From on the
Connections tab of the Cable Common Properties dialog box. The connected circuit is
shown after the connected PDB, for example: PDB-5/BUS-5/CKT12.

Mark Auxiliary Graphics on a Cable Block Diagram

Auxiliary graphics are images that you draw on a cable block diagram. These images do not
carry any data that is stored in the database. For example, you can draw circles, lines,
rectangles, and so forth that will be saved on a CBD.
You can mark all the auxiliary graphics in an open drawing so that you can easily distinguish
between associated graphical elements and the unassociated ones (auxiliary graphics and
symbols). You create these markings by selecting specific settings in the Define Item Type
Symbology window in Options Manager.
1. In Options Manager, click Options > Item Type Symbology > Define.
2. In the Define Item Type Symbology window, select Unassociated Graphics from the
Item type list.
3. From the Document type list, select Composite Drawings and Conventional CBDs.
4. In the Define Item Type Symbology window, select your definitions as you require. For
details, see Define an Item Type Symbol in Options Manager Help.
5. In Smart Electrical, open a drawing and do one of the following to mark the unassociated
graphics:
▪ On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click View > Mark Unassociated Graphics.

▪ Click on the Edit drawing toolbar.

▪ To cancel the marking of unassociated graphics, click again.

▪ If an auxiliary graphic contains text, the software displays this text in the same color that you
defined for the auxiliary graphic.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 539

 Cable Block Diagrams

▪ Smart Electrical does not mark OLE objects as unassociated graphics because the
application does not treat OLE objects as unassociated graphics and OLE objects do not
respond to layer styling.

Remove Items from a Cable Block Diagram

This procedure shows you how to remove an electrical item from an open drawing.
1. On the drawing, select the item that you want to remove.
2. Do one of the following:

▪ On the Edit Drawing toolbar, click .

▪ Click Edit > Remove.
▪ Press the DELETE key.

Use Custom Symbols in Cable Block Diagrams

You can use a custom symbol to present a particular item in a cable block diagram (plant or
typical CBD). The software will use this custom symbol instead of a symbol taken from the
shipped reference data and specified by you on the Symbology page in Options Manager.
Create your custom symbol using Catalog Manager or any other appropriate
tool. Then, place the image file in the default folder or its sub-folders where you store your
reference data symbols. You set the default symbol folder in the Smart Electrical Options
Manager. For more details, see Defining File Locations in the Smart Electrical Option Manager
User's Guide.
1. In the Electrical Index, Electrical Engineer or Reference Data Explorer, select an item
that you want to associate with a custom symbol.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click Actions > Associate Custom Symbols.

▪ Click .
▪ Right-click the selected item and then click Associate Custom Symbols on the
shortcut menu.
3. On the Associate Custom Symbols dialog box, under Document Type click on a cell, and
from the list select Cable Block Diagrams.

4. Under Symbol, click .

5. Browse to the symbol (.sym) file you want to add, and select the file.
You can only choose the symbols that are stored in the default folder and
its sub-folders.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 540

 Cable Block Diagrams

6. Click OK.

▪ If, during the CBD creation, the software cannot find a referenced symbol for a specific
electrical item, the software uses the default symbol file (default.sym) to represent the
item. You specify default files in Options Manager.
▪ For guidelines about the creation of custom symbols in Catalog Manager, see Guidelines for
Creating SLD Symbols in Catalog Manager (on page 519).

Resolve Symbol Inconsistencies

This procedure explains how to resolve symbol inconsistencies in plant and typical cable block
diagrams. Symbol inconsistencies can occur if, for some reason. a symbol file has been
replaced or updated. Once you save a CBD, the software retains the symbols in the drawing as
they appear at the time of saving. If, at a later stage, some of the symbol files have been
updated, the CBD that you open will not display the updated symbols until you resolve the
inconsistencies. When updating the symbols, the software validates that the updated symbols
are suitable replacements for the old symbols. For example, the new symbols must have
suitable connect points so that connections can be made. If the new symbols are not suitable,
they will not replace the old ones in the drawing and the software will display an appropriate
message to that effect.
1. Open a cable block diagram and do one of the following:
▪ On the menu bar, click Actions > Resolve Symbol Inconsistencies.

▪ On the Actions ribbon click .

2. On the Resolve Symbol Inconsistencies dialog box, select the check boxes next to the
appropriate item tags.
3. Click Resolve.

▪ If the software does not resolve all of the symbols, a message appears that instructs you to
open the log file where you can see which symbols have not been replaced.
▪ The Resolve command button on the Resolve Symbol Inconsistencies dialog box is
available only after selecting at least one item tag to be resolved.
▪ If a symbol cannot be resolved, the software indicates it under Expected Result. You can
click the Symbol cannot be resolved text to see the reason why the symbol cannot be
resolved.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 541

 Cable Block Diagrams

Hide Cable Types

This procedure shows you how to hide (filter out) some of the cable types and use a display
exclusion filter when working on a cable block diagram. Cable block diagrams can become very
crowded, so by applying a filter you can hide those cables that you are not working with at that
moment, allowing you to concentrate on the job at hand. You can use the filter to show only
one cable type. For example, you can show only power cables, or show a combination of
cables, such as control and instrumentation cables. Also, you can use a predefined filter to
exclude certain cables from a CBD. The filter can be changed on the fly to show other cable
type or to hide a particular cable type.
1. In the Cable Block Diagrams folder, select the drawing you want to filter.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Document Properties.

▪ Click Document Properties .

▪ Right-click the document, and on the shortcut menu, click Document Properties.
3. Under Display cable types in cable block diagrams clear the check boxes beside those
cables that you do not want to see.

4. Under Exclusion filter, click (Ellipsis) to select a cable filter that will be used to hide
the cables specified in the selected filter.

▪ You can change the filter at any time by going to the Document Properties dialog box and
selecting or clearing the relevant check boxes.
▪ You can instruct the software to display the filter settings notation in your cable block
diagrams. For details, see Display a Filter Settings Notation in a CBD (on page 543).

Define a Focal Item for a Cable Block Diagram

You can define a focal item for a cable block diagram. A focal item is a plant item for which you
generate a cable block diagram. Once you define a focal item, the software associates it with a
specific cable block diagram.
1. In Electrical Engineer, expand the Documents folder and select an appropriate cable
block diagram.
2. Right-click the selected CBD and then click Document Properties.
3. On the Document Properties dialog box, click Find next to the Focal item box.
4. On the Find dialog box, select an appropriate item and click OK.

▪ If you want the software to display the name of the focal item in the title block of the
associated CBD, add a new macro to your document template, for example
&Document.Equipment.ItemTag.
▪ To dissociate a focal item from the current CBD, click Clear next to the Focal item box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 542

 Cable Block Diagrams

Display a Filter Settings Notation in a CBD

This procedure explains how to display a notation in your cable block diagrams that will specify
the filter settings used in an open CBD. You add a special macro to a document template and
the software will display the notation on all the CBDs that use this template. For example:

1. In Catalog Manager or SmartSketch, open the appropriate title block symbol that is used in
your cable block diagram template.
The software supplies a number of shipped templates with title blocks (.sym files) in
the reference data.
2. In the open title block symbol, add the following macro text:
&Document.Filters
You can insert the macro anywhere in the template depending on where you
want the notation to appear in your CBDs.
3. Save the modified title block and close Catalog Manager.
4. In Smart Electrical, click File > New > Template and create a template using the title block
you just created in Catalog Manager.
If the template contains a title block, select it and then delete it.
5. Click Insert > Symbol.
6. Select the .sym file to which you added the Document.Filters macro.
7. Click an appropriate X point in the template to insert the title block symbol.
8. Save and close the template.

▪ All the cable block diagrams based on the modified template will display the filter settings
notation.
▪ If you open a CBD that is not filtered, the software will not display the notation.
▪ For details on how to set a filter for a CBD, see Hide Cable Types (on page 542).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 543

SECTION 20

Wiring in Smart Electrical

Smart Electrical enables you to perform wiring and create wiring drawings. The software
provides for the creation of basic wiring and enables you to make the terminations that you
require. You can do the following:
▪ Create terminal strips for all types of applicable equipment.
▪ Create terminals on terminal strips.
▪ Manage both cable sides.
▪ Manage both conductor sides.
▪ Create wiring drawings and make connections.
▪ Generate termination reports.
Wiring diagrams in Smart Electrical handle interconnections among equipment items that are
external to PDBs or main equipment item types. Internal circuit wiring is handled in typical
schematics. Wiring diagrams show cable terminations with equipment terminal strips.
The software can terminate only those cable sides that have already been
associated with equipment. A cable end that has not been associated with an equipment item
cannot be terminated.

Symbology in Wiring Diagrams

You have to store the symbols for wiring diagrams in a location that you specify Options
Manager.
This location contains all the symbols that the wiring engine expects to get.
The software tries to present the wiring symbol of an item on a wiring diagram by first searching
to an existing custom symbol for a specific wiring element. If there is no custom symbol for that
wiring element, the software will use the symbol according to the definitions made in the
symbology for that specific item type. In case no symbol has been defined for that specific item
type in the symbology, the software will use the default symbol from the location for wiring
symbols defined in Options Manager.
The software is shipped with default wiring symbols for terminal strip, terminal and first terminal.
This allows you to generate diagrams out of the box without any further customization.
The minimum set of symbols required for wiring diagram generation is: first terminal and
terminal, cable, set and conductor.

Reports for Cable Wiring

After creating your wiring items and making the required terminations, you can generate cable
wiring schedule and terminal strip connection reports. For details, see Shipped Reports.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 544

 Wiring in Smart Electrical

Create a Terminal Strip in the Electrical Index

This procedure explains how to create a single terminal strip in the Electrical Index.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the hierarchy of the Electrical Equipment folder and then
an individual equipment item to display the Terminal Strips folder.
2. Right-click the Terminal Strips folder and then click New Terminal Strip.
3. If the Terminal Strip Properties dialog box does not open automatically, right-click the new
terminal strip and then on the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
Smart Electrical opens the Common Properties dialog box automatically after
creating a new item if you selected the Common Properties dialog box option on the
General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
4. On the Terminal Strip Properties dialog box, under Item tag, type a new name as you
require.
5. Type a short description if you require.
6. In the Terminal strip configuration group box, do one of the following:
▪ Click Find to find an existing reference configuration that you can apply to the current
terminal strip. For details, see Apply a Reference Terminal Strip Configuration to a
Terminal Strip (on page 546).
▪ Define a new terminal strip configuration. For details, see Define a Terminal Strip
Configuration for a Single Terminal Strip (on page 547).
7. Click OK.

Create a Terminal in the Electrical Index

This procedure explains how to add a terminal to a terminal strip in the Electrical Index.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the hierarchy of the Electrical Equipment folder and then
an individual equipment item and its terminal strips.
2. Right-click a terminal strip and then click New Terminal.
3. If the Terminal Properties dialog box does not open automatically, right-click the new
terminal and then on the shortcut menu, click Common Properties.
Smart Electrical opens the Common Properties dialog box automatically after
creating a new item if you selected the Common Properties dialog box option on the
General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
4. On the General tab of the Terminal Common Properties dialog box, under Item tag, type
a name for the new terminal as you require.
5. Type a short description if you require.
6. Select a terminal type that you require. You can define and customize types in Data
Dictionary Manager.
7. Select a terminal color that you require. You can define and customize terminal colors in
Data Dictionary Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 545

 Wiring in Smart Electrical

8. Under Sequence, type a value that sets the sequential number of the current terminal on its
terminal strip.
9. Click the Procurement tab.
10. Select a manufacturer and a model as you require. You can define and customize these
entries in Data Dictionary Manager.
11. Type a store part number if you require.

Define a Reference Terminal Strip Configuration

This procedure explains how to define a reference terminal strip configuration that you can apply
to a terminal strip. You can create as many reference configurations as you require and store
them in the Reference Data Explorer.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, right-click the Terminal Strip Configurations folder.
2. On the shortcut menu, click New Terminal Strip Configuration.
3. On the Terminal Strip Configuration dialog box, type the configuration name and
description as you require.
4. In the Configuration properties group box, enter the total number of terminals.
5. Under First terminal, enter an appropriate value.
6. In the Terminal strip pattern data grid, click and type in the Prefix field, click and type a
value if you want to prefix the names of the terminals.
7. Select the Numbered check box if you want the number of the terminal to appear between
the prefix and the suffix.
8. Select the Incremented check box if you want the terminal number to be incremented within
the pattern.
9. In the Suffix field, click and type a value if you want a suffix for the names of the terminals.
10. Click Add if you want to add another data row in the terminal strip pattern.
The maximum number of rows that you can add cannot exceed the total number of
terminals that you enter.
11. Click OK.

Apply a Reference Terminal Strip Configuration to a

Terminal Strip
This procedure explains how to apply a reference terminal strip configuration to a terminal
strip. Applying a reference configuration to a terminal strip saves time when creating terminal
strips.
1. In the Electrical Index or Reference Data Explorer, expand the hierarchy of the Electrical
Equipment folder as necessary to display the Terminal Strips folder.
2. Expand the Terminal Strips folder and then right-click a terminal strip that you require.
3. On the shortcut menu click Common Properties.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 546

 Wiring in Smart Electrical

4. On the Terminal Strip Properties dialog box, click Configuration.

5. On the Terminal Strip Configuration dialog box, click Find.
6. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now.
7. In the Results data window, select an appropriate terminal strip configuration and click OK.
8. On the Terminal Strip Configuration dialog box, click OK.

▪ The software does not allow you to apply a reference terminal strip configuration to a
terminal strip that has already been wired.
▪ If you apply a reference terminal strip configuration to a terminal strip that already has a
terminal strip configuration, the replaces the existing configuration with the reference
configuration that you are applying.

Define a Terminal Strip Configuration for a Single

Terminal Strip
This procedure explains how to define a terminal strip configuration for a terminal strip you are
currently editing. Note that the software does not retain the configuration that you define. The
software uses this configuration to create the terminals on the current terminal strip but does not
store the configuration in the database.
1. On the Terminal Strip Properties dialog box, under Terminal strip configuration, enter
the total number of terminals.
2. Under First terminal, enter an appropriate value.
3. In the Terminal strip pattern data grid, click and type in the Prefix field, click and type a
value if you want to prefix the names of the terminals.
4. Select the Numbered check box if you want the number of the terminal to appear between
the prefix and the suffix.
5. Select the Incremented check box if you want the terminal number to be incremented within
the pattern.
6. In the Suffix field, click and type a value if you want a suffix for the names of the terminals.
7. Click Add if you want to add another data row in the terminal strip pattern.
The maximum number of rows that you can add cannot exceed the total number of
terminals that you enter.
8. Click OK.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 547

 Wiring in Smart Electrical

Customizing a Reference Symbol

The software provides a default reference symbol for wiring diagrams. This default reference
symbol shows the plant item to which the cable is terminated. You may have a situation in which
an equipment terminal strip connected to a cable whose other side is shown on another wiring
diagram. In this case, you need a reference symbol that points to the terminal strip and not to
the plant item. To remedy this situation you have to customize another reference symbol that
shows not just the equipment name of the equipment it connects to but also the terminal strip
and the drawing number that this strip is placed in.
Do the following in Catalog Manager to customize another reference symbol.
1. In Catalog Manager, under Wiring Symbols, find Reference.sym and rename it to
Reference_old.sym.
2. Clone this symbol and then rename the cloned symbol to Reference.sym.
3. Open the new Reference.sym symbol.
4. Change the type of the new symbol to terminal strip.
5. Add all the required macros to the new symbol in accordance with what you want the
reference symbol to show. You can use any macro that belongs to the terminal strip
properties, for example:
▪ Strip.ItemTag
▪ Equipment.ItemTag
To display the name of the drawing, do the following:
a. In the Properties window of Smart Electrical, enter the name of the drawing in one of
the properties of the terminal strip, for example, in the Description property.)
b. In Catalog Manager, use this property to add a macro to the new reference symbol.

Termination of Plant Cables

Smart Electrical enables you to effect termination of plant cables. You can create wiring
diagrams where you make the terminations that you require. Also, you can generate various
wiring reports that show the wiring of the plant items.
Note that you can only terminate those cables that have already been
associated with the electrical items that you want to wire. Therefore, before terminating the
cable wires, make sure that you associate the required cables with appropriate plant items.
The software provides you with several ways to carry out the required termination. You can
choose one of the following termination methods:
▪ Continuous connection — Allows you to perform wiring in a sequential order starting with a
terminal that you select.
▪ Custom connection — Allows you to select a reference custom connection type for the
terminals that you want to wire.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 548

 Wiring in Smart Electrical

▪ Batch cable connection — Allows you to select a number of cables that have the same
wiring pattern. You can connect these cables in batch mode to plant items that have the
same connectivity.

▪ When you change the association of a terminated power cable by dragging it to another
equipment item in the Electrical Engineer, the software disconnects this cable from the
terminal strip of that equipment. Changing the association of a terminated non-power cable
on the Cable Common Properties dialog box also results in disconnection. The software
disconnects the cable without displaying a warning message.
▪ The software allows you to wire non-power cables to all the circuits that belong to a PDB
that has already been associated with a non-power cable in a CBD or the Cable Common
Properties dialog box. In a wiring diagram, after placing the circuits of a PDB that has
already been associated with a non-power cable, the software identifies the connection
points of these circuits and enables you to wire the associated non-power cable or its
constituents.
▪ You can place an entire terminal strip on a wiring diagram by dragging it to an open drawing
from the Electrical Index. In a conventional wiring diagram, it is also possible to place a
sub-set of terminals or individual terminals on an open diagram. Drag the required terminals
from the List View pane in the Electrical Index and place them on the diagram as needed.
Note that you cannot place the same terminal more than once on the same wiring diagram.
▪ Cables that have already been terminated cannot be connected to different wiring
equipment. You need to disconnect them first and then connect them as needed.
▪ When designing electrical terminations of space heaters, to terminate the auxiliary contact
with a space heater or any other electrical equipment item, terminate the cable conductors
to the terminal strip of the circuit where the auxiliary contact is located.
▪ In a wiring diagram, the software allows you to split the wires of a non-power cable and
terminate them to any terminal strip of any of the circuits of a PDB or of local panel or
junction box.
▪ You can lengthen the connectors that represent conductors and cable sets in a wiring
diagram. To control the position of a conductor or cable set on a drawing, click the
connector that represents the conductor or cable set and then drag the connection point to
the required position on the drawing.

Define a Connection Type

This option allows you to select, create, or edit a connection type in the Reference Data
Explorer. A connection type facilitates rapid cable set connections. You define a connection
type that contains a connection pattern. A connection type contains the definition of the pattern
by which wires will be connected on a terminal strip, and allows automatic connection of
successive cable sets. Once a wiring pattern has been defined, you can select it when you wire
plant items using the custom connection method. The connection type that you select during
the connection procedure will determine how the connections are made.
1. In the Reference Data Explorer, right-click the Connection Types folder.
2. On the shortcut menu, click New Connection Type.
3. On the Connection Type dialog box, type a connection type name and description.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 549

 Wiring in Smart Electrical

4. For instrumentation cables, in the Skip between sets field, enter the number of terminals
that you want to skip between the first conductor of the previously connected set and the
first conductor of the next set. The skipped terminals will be left unconnected.
5. In the Conductors group box, do the following:
6. Click in the Skip text field and type the number of terminals to skip before connecting this
conductor in the cable set. The skip refers to the number of terminals that will be left
unconnected between consecutive cable sets. Enter the number of terminals to be skipped
according to your needs. In most cases, this value is incremented for successive
conductors. You can accept the displayed value if suitable.
7. In the Land Side field, select the A – Active or O – Opposite check box to select the
terminal side to which you want to connect each conductor. The side that is currently active
depends on the side that you start connecting.
In the environment of a wiring drawing, the A side is the active side of the terminal
that you want to connect. It can be its left or right side, depending on which terminal side
you clicked after you moved the cursor over the connection points. The O side is the
opposite side of the active side.
8. Click Add to add another row to the Conductors data window.

▪ The Conductor field signifies a specific conductor in a cable set. The displayed
Wire00x values represent the conductor names and are used to illustrate the current
connection type configuration. This field is not editable.
▪ The number of rows that you add has to match the number of conductors that will be
connected. The software does not connect the leftover conductors that do not have
connection type definitions in the Conductors data window.
9. Click OK.

Terminate Plant Cables Using the Custom Connection

Method
This procedure explains how to terminate plant cables in a wiring drawing using the custom
connection method. The custom connection method allows you to make your connections
based on an existing reference connection type of a selected cable. You start by selecting a
terminal to be wired first and the software then connects the rest of the terminals according to
the connection type.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the Documents folder.
2. Right-click the Wiring Diagrams folder and then on the shortcut menu, click New Wiring
Diagram.
3. Drag the plant items that you want to wire from any open window to the new wiring drawing.

▪ You can drag any appropriate item such as a motor, circuit, panel, and so forth.
▪ You can drag your items from the Electrical Index, Electrical Engineer, or Related
Items window.
4. Do one of the following:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 550

 Wiring in Smart Electrical

▪ Click Activate Connection Mode .

▪ Click Edit > Activate Connection Mode.
5. In the Electrical Index, Electrical Engineer, or Related Items window, select an
appropriate cable that you want to terminate.
You can connect only those cables that are associated with equipment on one or
both cable sides.
6. In the wiring drawing, move the cursor over the terminal strip that you want to connect to the
cable.

▪ The software displays the available, valid connection points of the terminal strip on your
drawing. For more details, see Place Point Ribbon (SPEL) in the Catalog Manager
User's Guide, under Working with Symbols > Place Point Command.
▪ You can place an entire terminal strip on a wiring diagram by dragging it to an open
drawing from the Electrical Index. In a conventional wiring diagram, it is also possible
to place a sub-set of terminals or individual terminals on an open diagram. Drag the
required terminals from the List View pane in the Electrical Index and place them on
the diagram as needed. Note that you cannot place the same terminal more than once
on the same wiring diagram.
7. Click the connection point of the terminal to which you want to connect the first conductor on
the appropriate side.

▪ You can connect the first conductor to any terminal on the current terminal strip. The
software will then connect the remaining conductors according to the custom connection
type that you select. (See the following steps in this procedure.)
▪ The number of conductors that you can connect cannot exceed the number of available
wiring connection points on a terminal.
▪ You can connect only one conductor on a wiring connection point.
8. On the shortcut menu, click Custom Connection.
9. On the Cable Connection Type Selection dialog box, select a connection type you require.
10. Click Connect.

▪ The software provides a set of default symbols for terminal strips, terminals, first terminals,
cables, cable sets, and conductors. You can customize your own wiring symbols in Catalog
Manager. For details, see Creating Symbols in the Catalog Manager User's Guide, under
Working with Symbols, Creating Symbols.
▪ You can perform various actions in a wiring drawing, such as moving items by dragging
them to position the items in the drawing, removing items from the drawing, disconnecting
cables, and so forth.
▪ Removing a wiring item from a drawing does not delete that item from your plant.
▪ Disconnecting two wiring items in a drawing, disconnects the items in your plant, removes
the connecting cable from the drawing, and retains the association between the cable and

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 551

 Wiring in Smart Electrical

the items in your plant. For details, see Disconnect Cables from Items in Cable Block
Diagrams.
▪ Clicking Refresh saves the drawing. If you do not click Refresh or you make changes to
your drawing after refreshing, the software prompts you to save the drawing on closing.
▪ To exit the Connection Mode select another command or press the ESCAPE key.
▪ You can add other wiring items to the drawing by dragging them to drawing from the
Electrical Index or Related Items window.
▪ After adding a wiring item that is connected to a cable, the drawing displays the item
connected to the cable on one of the cables sides and the name of the item tag of the wiring
item that is connected on the other cable side. After dragging that wiring item to the
drawing, software replaces the item tag name with the symbol of that wiring item.
▪ The software allows you to add annotations and use redlining in your wiring drawings. For
details, see Managing Annotations and Redlining (see "Annotations and Redlining" on page
624).
▪ If you move a macro to another place in the drawing, clicking a macro highlights the cable,
cable set, or conductor that is associated with that macro. This way you can see which
cable, cable set, or conductor belongs to that macro.
▪ Sometimes, after the software opens a drawing, the distance between connected items is
either too long or too short, which results in an inappropriate display of connectors. To
control the visual consistency of connectors, you can set a Clearance value that specifies
the amount of space that the software will maintain between the connector and the
connected element (also known as range avoidance). This action allows you to control the
visual consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns just before they attach to a
symbol.
To set Clearance, select a connector and then type the minimum distance from the symbols
where you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur. Note that the default setting is
zero.

Terminate Plant Cables Using the Continuous Connection

Method
This procedure explains how to terminate plant cables in a wiring drawing using the continuous
connection method. The continuous connection method allows you to make a connection in a
sequential way by selecting a terminal that will be wired first. The software then automatically
wires the rest of the terminals in a sequential order.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the Documents folder.
2. Right-click the Wiring Diagrams folder and then on the shortcut menu, click New Wiring
Diagram.
3. Drag the plant items that you want to wire from any open window to the new wiring drawing.

▪ You can drag any appropriate item such as a motor, circuit, panel, and so forth.
▪ You can drag your items from the Electrical Index, Electrical Engineer, or Related
Items window.
4. Do one of the following:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 552

 Wiring in Smart Electrical

▪ Click Activate Connection Mode .

▪ Click Edit > Activate Connection Mode.
5. In the Electrical Index, Electrical Engineer, or Related Items window, select an
appropriate cable that you want to terminate.
You can connect only those cables that are associated with equipment on one or
both cable sides.
6. In the wiring drawing, move the cursor over the terminal strip that you want to connect to the
cable.

▪ The software displays the available, valid connection points of the terminal strip on your
drawing. For more details, see Place Point Ribbon (SPEL) in the Catalog Manager
User's Guide, under Working with Symbols > Place Point Command.
▪ You can place an entire terminal strip on a wiring diagram by dragging it to an open
drawing from the Electrical Index. In a conventional wiring diagram, it is also possible
to place a sub-set of terminals or individual terminals on an open diagram. Drag the
required terminals from the List View pane in the Electrical Index and place them on
the diagram as needed. Note that you cannot place the same terminal more than once
on the same wiring diagram.
7. Click the connection point of the terminal to which you want to connect the first conductor on
the appropriate side.

▪ You can connect the first conductor to any terminal on the current terminal strip. The
software will then automatically connect the remaining conductors in a sequential order.
▪ The number of conductors that you can connect cannot exceed the number of available
wiring connection points on a terminal.
▪ You can connect only one conductor on a wiring connection point.
8. On the shortcut menu, click Continuous Connection.
9. In the wiring drawing, move the cursor over the connection points of the second terminal
strip.
10. On the shortcut menu, click Continuous Connection.

▪ The software provides a set of default symbols for terminal strips, terminals, first terminals,
cables, cable sets, and conductors. You can customize your own wiring symbols in Catalog
Manager. For details, see Working with Symbols > Creating Symbols in the Catalog
Manager User's Guide.
▪ You can perform various actions in a wiring drawing, such as moving items by dragging
them to position the items in the drawing, removing items from the drawing, disconnecting
cables, and so forth.
▪ Removing a wiring item from a drawing does not delete that item from your plant.
▪ Disconnecting two wiring items in a drawing, disconnects the items in your plant, removes
the connecting cable from the drawing, and retains the association between the cable and

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 553

 Wiring in Smart Electrical

the items in your plant. For details, see Disconnect Cables from Items in Cable Block
Diagrams.
▪ Clicking Refresh saves the drawing. If you do not click Refresh or you make changes to
your drawing after refreshing, the software prompts you to save the drawing on closing.
▪ To exit the Connection Mode, select another command or press the ESCAPE key.
▪ You can add other wiring items to the drawing by dragging them to drawing from the
Electrical Index or Related Items window.
▪ After adding a wiring item that is connected to a cable, the drawing displays the item
connected to the cable on one of the cables sides and the name of the item tag of the wiring
item that is connected on the other cable side. After dragging that wiring item to the
drawing, software replaces the item tag name with the symbol of that wiring item.
▪ The software allows you to add annotations and use redlining in your wiring drawings. For
details, see Managing Annotations and Redlining (see "Annotations and Redlining" on page
624).
▪ If you move a macro to another place in the drawing, clicking a macro highlights the cable,
cable set, or conductor that is associated with that macro. This way you can see which
cable, cable set, or conductor belongs to that macro.
▪ Sometimes, after the software opens a drawing, the distance between connected items is
either too long or too short, which results in an inappropriate display of connectors. To
control the visual consistency of connectors, you can set a Clearance value that specifies
the amount of space that the software will maintain between the connector and the
connected element (also known as range avoidance). This action allows you to control the
visual consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns just before they attach to a
symbol.
To set Clearance, select a connector and then type the minimum distance from the symbols
where you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur. Note that the default setting is
zero.

Terminate Plant Cables in Batch Mode

This feature enables you to terminate (in batch mode) numerous plant cables that belong to the
same category, for example, power, control, instrumentation, and so forth. For example, you
can you can terminate all the plant control cables that are associated with 10hp motors and their
circuits. The software allows you to select a connection method (continuous or custom) for the
batch operation.
1. In the Electrical Index, click the Cables folder.
2. In the Item Tag pane, select the cables you want to terminate in batch mode.
You can only connect cables in batch mode if they belong to the same category, for
example, power, control, instrumentation, and so forth.
3. Click Actions > Cables > Batch Cable Connection.
4. On the Batch Cable Connection dialog box, select the Activate cable side 1 (From)
check box or Activate cable side 2 (To) check box, or both check boxes.
5. Under Action, select the Connect check box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 554

 Wiring in Smart Electrical

6. Under Terminal strip sequence, type the sequence of the appropriate terminal strip that is
associated with the equipment you want to connect. The value you type defines the
terminal strip to be connected. Type a value for one or both cable sides as you require.
7. Under First terminal, type a value to instruct the software which terminal on the current
terminal strip is to be connected first.
8. Select an appropriate active connection side for one or both cable ends.
9. From the Connection type list for one or both cable sides, select an appropriate connection
type.
From the Connection type list, you can select Continuous (wire the first selected
terminal of an item and then automatically wire the rest of the terminals) or a name of an
existing custom connection type. If the connection type that you require is not on the list,
create it in the Reference Data Explorer. For details, see Define a Connection Type (on
page 549).
10. In the Cable connection details data window, select the Select check box next to the
appropriate cables that you want to connect.
11. Click OK.

▪ Cables that have already been terminated cannot be connected to different wiring
equipment. You need to disconnect them first and then connect them as needed.
▪ When designing electrical terminations of space heaters, to terminate the auxiliary contact
with a space heater or any other electrical equipment item, terminate the cable conductors
to the terminal strip of the circuit where the auxiliary contact is located.

Terminate a Cable Set

This procedure shows you how to terminate a single cable set.
1. Open a wiring diagram and do one of the following:

▪ Click Activate Connection Mode .

▪ Click Edit > Activate Connection Mode.
2. In Electrical Index, Electrical Engineer, or Related Items window, expand the hierarchy of
a cable to display its sets.
3. Select a cable set.
4. In the wiring drawing, move the cursor over the terminal strip that you want to connect to the
cable set.

▪ The software displays the available, valid connection points of the terminal strip on your
drawing. For more details, see Place Point Ribbon (SPEL) in the Catalog Manager
User's Guide, under Working with Symbols > Place Point Command.
▪ You can place an entire terminal strip on a wiring diagram by dragging it to an open
drawing from the Electrical Index. In a conventional wiring diagram, it is also possible
to place a sub-set of terminals or individual terminals on an open diagram. Drag the

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 555

 Wiring in Smart Electrical

required terminals from the List View pane in the Electrical Index and place them on
the diagram as needed. Note that you cannot place the same terminal more than once
on the same wiring diagram.
5. Click the connection point of the terminal to which you want to connect the cable set.
6. On the shortcut menu, click Custom Connection.
If you select the Continuous Connection Method, the software connects the cable
set starting with the terminal you clicked and completes the connection of the other
terminals in a sequential order.
7. On the Cable Connection Type Selection dialog box, select a connection type you require.
8. Click Connect.

Terminate a Single Conductor

This procedure shows you how to terminate a single conductor.
1. Open a wiring diagram and do one of the following:

▪ Click Activate Connection Mode .

▪ Click Edit > Activate Connection Mode.
2. In Electrical Index, Electrical Engineer, or Related Items window, expand the hierarchy of
a cable to display its conductors.
3. Select a conductor.
4. In the wiring diagram, move the cursor over the terminal strip that you want to connect to the
conductor.

▪ The software displays the available, valid connection points of the terminal strip on your
drawing. For more details, see Place Point Ribbon (SPEL) in the Catalog Manager
User's Guide, under Working with Symbols > Place Point Command.
▪ You can place an entire terminal strip on a wiring diagram by dragging it to an open
drawing from the Electrical Index. In a conventional wiring diagram, it is also possible
to place a sub-set of terminals or individual terminals on an open diagram. Drag the
required terminals from the List View pane in the Electrical Index and place them on
the diagram as needed. Note that you cannot place the same terminal more than once
on the same wiring diagram.
5. Click the connection point of the terminal to which you want to connect the conductor.
In a wiring diagram, the software does not show the item tag label for conductors
whose polarity property is defined as shield.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 556

 Wiring in Smart Electrical

Connect a Jumper
This procedure shows you how to connect a jumper on a terminal strip.
1. In a wiring diagram that has a terminal strip, do one of the following:

▪ Click Activate Jumper Mode .

▪ Click Edit > Activate Jumper Mode.
2. Select the first jumper connection point that you want to connect.
The software displays the available, valid jumper connection points on the terminal
strip. For more details, see Place Point Ribbon (Smart Electrical) in the Catalog Manager
User's Guide, under Working with Symbols > Place Point Command.
3. Move the cursor to the next jumper connection point on the same terminal strip and click it.

▪ The terminal symbols must be defined with jumper connection points.

▪ You can only connect jumpers on terminals that belong to the same terminal strip.
▪ The software represents the jumpers using the default conductor symbol without displaying
the item tag macro. To customize a jumper symbol, see Customize a Jumper Symbol (on
page 558).

Disconnect a Cable, Cable Set, or Conductor in a Wiring

Diagram
This procedure shows you how to disconnect cables, cable sets, or conductors in a wiring
diagram. When disconnecting a cable, the software disconnects it on both sides and removes it
from the drawing. However, the cable still remains associated with the wiring items even if it
has been disconnected. When disconnecting a cable set or a conductor, the software also
removes the disconnected set or conductor from the drawing.
1. In a wiring drawing, select a cable, cable set, or conductor that you want to disconnect.
2. Do one of the following:

▪ Click .
▪ Click Edit > Disconnect.
▪ Right-click, and on the shortcut menu, click Disconnect Items.

▪ After you confirm the disconnection of a cable, the software disconnects the cable on both
sides and removes it from the drawing. However, the software does not delete the cable
from the plant and retains the association between the wiring items and the cable.
▪ When disconnecting cable sets or conductors, the software removes these items from the
drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 557

 Wiring in Smart Electrical

Disconnect Plant Cables in Batch Mode

This feature allows you to disconnect multiple plant cables from their wiring equipment in batch
mode. The software disconnects all the selected plant cables, their cable sets, and conductors.
However, the software retains the cable associations with their equipment.
1. In the Electrical Index, click the Cables folder.
2. In the Item Tag pane, select the cables that you want to disconnect in batch mode.
3. Click Actions > Cables > Batch Cable Connection.
4. On the Batch Cable Connection dialog box, select the Activate cable side 1 (From)
check box, or Activate cable side 2 (To) check box, or both check boxes.
5. Under Action, select the Disconnect check box.
6. Click Apply or OK.

Remove Items from a Wiring Diagram

This procedure shows you how to remove an electrical item from an open drawing.
1. On the drawing, select the item that you want to remove.
2. Do one of the following:

▪ On the Edit Drawing toolbar, click .

▪ Click Edit > Remove.
▪ Press the DELETE key.

Customize a Jumper Symbol

1. Clone a conductor symbol in Catalog Manager and rename it to jumper.
2. Define the customized jumper symbol on the Symbology page in Options Manager.
3. In Options Manager, define a conductor symbol for a wiring diagram using the following
filter:
electrical equipment type = jumper

Open an Existing Wiring Diagram

1. In the Electrical Index, click Documents > Wiring Diagrams.
2. Select a wiring diagram and do one of the following:
▪ Click File > Open > Drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 558

 Wiring in Smart Electrical

▪ Click .
▪ Right-click and on the shortcut menu, click Open.

▪ When opening a wiring diagram that contained a wiring item that has been deleted from
your plant, the wiring diagram no longer displays this item, showing the cable and wiring
item connected to the other cable end.
▪ If you deleted both wiring items that were connected to a cable, the wiring diagram displays
the cable only.
▪ If you deleted a cable that was used to connect two wiring items, the wiring diagram shows
the two items as disconnected.
▪ Removing a wiring item from a diagram does not delete that item from your plant.
▪ Disconnecting two wiring items in a diagram, disconnects the items in your plant, removes
the connecting cable from the diagram and retains the association between the cable and
the items in your plant.
▪ You can add other wiring items to the diagram by dragging them to diagram from the
Electrical Index or Related Items window.
▪ After adding a wiring item that is connected to a cable, the diagram displays the item
connected to the cable on one of the cables sides and the name of the item tag of the wiring
item that is connected on the other cable side. After dragging that wiring item to the
diagram, software replaces the item tag name with the symbol of that wiring item.
▪ The software allows you to add annotations and use redlining in your wiring diagrams. For
details, see Managing Annotations and Redlining (see "Annotations and Redlining" on page
624).
▪ If you move a macro to another place in the drawing, clicking a macro highlights the cable,
cable set, or conductor that is associated with that macro. This way you can see which
cable, cable set, or conductor belongs to that macro.
▪ In a wiring diagram, the software does not show the item tag label for conductors whose
polarity property is defined as shield.
▪ Sometimes, after the software opens a drawing, the distance between connected items is
either too long or too short, which results in an inappropriate display of connectors. To
control the visual consistency of connectors, you can set a Clearance value that specifies
the amount of space that the software will maintain between the connector and the
connected element (also known as range avoidance). This action allows you to control the
visual consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns just before they attach to a
symbol.
To set Clearance, select a connector and then type the minimum distance from the symbols
where you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur. Note that the default setting is
zero.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 559

SECTION 21

Composite Drawings
Composite drawings are enhanced drawings that can contain graphical elements belonging to
various drawing types. For example, a composite single line diagram can contain not only SLD
graphical elements but also schematics, cable block diagram, and wiring graphical elements.
Also, composite drawings enable you to draw auxiliary graphics and associate these graphics
with plant items.
You can drag a symbol and a label from the Symbols folder of the Reference Data Explorer to
a composite drawing and associate this symbol with a plant item.
Furthermore, you can use an existing composite drawing as a basis for another composite
drawing by copying its contents.
The following workflow examples illustrate how you can use composite drawings.

Example Workflow 1:
1. Create a new composite drawing in the Electrical Index.
2. Associate the new drawing with a predefined template/title block.
3. Use the free sketch drawing commands to create auxiliary graphics.
4. Use connectors to interconnect various graphical elements.
5. Associate plant items with graphical elements.
6. Add a revision and save the drawing.

Example Workflow 2:
1. Create a symbol in Catalog Manager.
2. Associate the new symbol with an item type.
3. Create a new composite drawing in the Electrical Index.
4. Associate the new drawing with a predefined template/title block.
5. From the Catalog Explorer Window, drag the required symbols and labels that contain
smart text and place them in the composite drawing.
6. Associate plant items with the symbols in the drawing.
7. Add a revision and save the drawing.

Example Workflow 3:
1. Create a new composite drawing in the Electrical Index.
2. Associate the new drawing with a predefined template/title block.
3. In the Electrical Index, select a plant item that is associated with a reference or custom
symbol.
4. Drag this plant item to the composite drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 560

 Composite Drawings

5. Add a revision and save the drawing.

Example Workflow 4:
1. Create a new composite drawing in the Electrical Index.
2. Associate the new drawing with a predefined template/title block.
3. Open an existing drawing (an external CAD file or a Smart Electrical drawing).
4. Copy the required content (partial or full) and paste it into the composite drawing.
5. Associate the graphical elements with plant items and reference symbols and labels as
needed.
6. Add a revision and save the drawing.

Create a Composite Drawing

You can create a composite drawing for the following drawing types:
▪ Single Line Diagrams
▪ Schematic Drawings
▪ Cable Block Diagrams
▪ Wiring Diagrams
▪ Miscellaneous Drawings
▪ PDB Layout Drawings
1. In the Electrical Index, under Documents, select an appropriate drawing type folder (for
example, Single Line Diagrams, Schematic Drawings, and so on).
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click File > New > Item.
▪ Right-click an appropriate drawing type folder (for example, Single Line Diagrams,
Schematic Drawings, and so on) and then on the shortcut menu, click New
Composite [drawing type].
3. On the New Item dialog box, select Composite [drawing type].
4. Click OK.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 561

 Composite Drawings

Open a Composite Drawing

Do the following to open a composite drawing:
1. In the Electrical Index, under Documents, select an appropriate drawing type folder (for
example, Single Line Diagrams, Schematic Drawings, and so on).
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Double-click the item in the appropriate folder.
▪ Right-click the item and then on the shortcut menu, click Open.
▪ Click File > Open > Drawing.

▪ If the drawing that you are trying to open is in use by another user, the software will let you
open it in read-only mode. In a read-only drawing, you cannot perform any editing action.
This means that you cannot place anything on the drawing, remove or manipulate graphical
elements, attach labels, and so forth. You can, however, move the graphical elements
around in the drawing but you cannot save these changes. All the menu bars and ribbons
are not accessible and you cannot save the drawing. You can perform "view" actions such
as viewing the properties of an item or displaying a tooltip of an item.
▪ A drawing in read-only mode is treated by the software as "locked". If for some reason, there
is a need to clear the locking, your administrator can do it manually. For details, see Clear
Document Locking in the Options Manager Guide.
▪ Making a change to a plant item that has been placed on a drawing refreshes the data
automatically in all the open drawings where this plant item has been placed. For example,
changing a property of a motor placed on a drawing automatically updates this property on a
label attached to that motor in the drawing.

Select a Template for a Composite Drawing

Once a drawing has been created, you can select an appropriate template for this composite
drawing. If you need to create a new template, see Create a Drawing Template for instructions.

▪ When selecting a template for a composite drawing, make sure that you select an
Enterprise template, that is, a template that is suitable for composite drawings and
which is compatible with other applications. Selecting a conventional template for a
composite drawing will result in the inability of the software to resolve the macros in the
drawing. You can, however, select an Enterprise template for a conventional drawing.
▪ Make sure that all the templates residing in the default location for composite drawing
templates are Enterprise templates. These templates are suitable for composite
drawings and are compatible with other applications. You define the default location in
the Locations window of Options Manager.
1. In Electrical Index, expand the hierarchy of the Documents folder until the required
drawing is available for selection.
2. Select an appropriate composite drawing and do one of the following:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 562

 Composite Drawings

▪ Click Edit > Document Properties.

▪ Right-click the drawing and then on the shortcut menu, click Document Properties.
3. On the Document Properties dialog box, select an appropriate template from the Template
name list.
4. Click OK.
Once the document template has been replaced, the software sets the drawing as
"out-of-date". This is indicated in the Properties window of the selected drawing. After opening
this this drawing, the software automatically refreshes all the data in the drawing and the
Out-of-Date property is set to No.

Working with Composite Drawings

The software allows you perform various actions with an open composite drawing. In addition
to regular actions in a drawing such as zooming, selecting, saving, and so forth, you can do the
following:

Option Description

Drawing various shapes using the After opening a composite drawing, the software provides a
free sketch commands range of toolbars with free sketch commands that allow you to
draw various shapes and forms to create auxiliary graphics.
You can undo one or several actions and redo actions
performed with auxiliary graphics. For more information about
undoing and redoing actions, see Undo and Redo Actions in
Composite Drawings (on page 567).

Placing plant items You can place a plant item on an open drawing by dragging a
plant item to the drawing from the Electrical Index or
Electrical Engineer. If the plant item is associated with a
custom symbol, the plant item will be designated in the
drawing by that symbol. If no custom symbol has been
associated with that plant item, the software uses the default
symbol. For more details, see Place a Plant Item on a
Composite Drawing (on page 574).

Finding a plant item in an active You can find a plant item in an active open drawing by
drawing right-clicking the plant item in the Electrical Index or
Electrical Engineer. The software highlights the plant item in
the active drawing and zooms in on the item. For details, see
Find a Plant Item in an Active Composite Drawing (on page
576).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 563

 Composite Drawings

Option Description

Copying and pasting graphical You can paste a graphical element that you have copied from
elements another drawing (an external drawing or any other drawing
created in Smart Electrical.) Use the CTRL+C and CTRL+V
commands to copy and paste graphical elements. For more
details, see Copy and Paste Graphical Elements in a
Composite Drawing (on page 580).

Pasting graphical elements You can use the Paste Special shortcut command to retain
associated with plant items the association with a plant item if you have copied a graphical
element that has been associated with a plant item. For
details, see Paste Graphical Elements and Retain Their
Associations (see "Retain Plant Item Associations of Graphical
Elements while Pasting" on page 581).

Copying the formatting of You can use the Format Painter on the Change toolbar
graphical elements. to copy the formatting of a selected graphical element and
apply it to other graphical elements as they are selected. The
two graphical elements have to belong to the same type. For
details, see Copy the Formatting of a Graphical Element (on
page 581).

Removing graphical elements To remove a graphical element from an open drawing,

from the drawing right-click the graphical element and then click Remove on the
shortcut menu. Alternatively, after selecting the graphical
element, click Edit > Remove.

Moving graphical elements on the Click an item to select it and then drag it to another place in
drawing the drawing. Save the drawing to keep the items you moved
in their new places. Note that this does not affect the data in
your database.

Grouping and ungrouping You can group graphical elements in a drawing so that they
auxiliary graphics and other behave as a single set. For details, see Grouping Graphical
graphical elements Elements in a Composite Drawing (on page 568).

Associating auxiliary graphics Right-click an auxiliary graphic in the composite drawing and
with electrical items in your plant then on the shortcut menu, click Associate with Electrical
item. For more details, see Associate an Auxiliary Graphic
with a Plant Item (on page 576).

Showing existing associations of To help you identify the plant items that you need to associate
plant items placed on a drawing with auxiliary graphics in an open drawing, right-click a plant
item placed on a drawing and then on the shortcut menu, click
Show in Association Assistant. For more details, see
Association Assistant (on page 578).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 564

 Composite Drawings

Option Description

Marking unassociated graphical The software enables you to mark all the graphical elements
elements in a drawing in the drawing that have not been associated with plant items.
This way you can easily distinguish the associated graphical
elements (auxiliary graphics and symbols) from the
unassociated ones. For details, see Mark Unassociated
Graphical Elements (on page 582).

Refreshing the data in an open Press F5 or click View > Refresh on the main menu bar to
drawing refresh the data in an open drawing.

Generating a Composite You can generate a report that shows all the item tags and the
Drawing Index report composite drawings in which they appear. For details, see
Create a Composite Drawing Index Report (on page 653).

Resolving out-of-date issues There are a number of ways that you can resolve out-of-date
issues in composite drawings. One of these ways is to
generate an Out-of-Date Summary report. For more
information, see Resolving Out-of-Date Issues in Composite
Drawings (on page 603) and Generate an Out-of-Date
Summary Report (on page 604).

Dissociating auxiliary graphics Right-click an auxiliary graphic in the composite drawing and
from electrical items in your plant then on the shortcut menu, click Dissociate from Electrical
item. For more details, see Dissociate Graphical Elements
from a Plant Item (on page 577).

Locating an associated plant item To find the plant item associated with a graphical element,
in the Electrical Index and right-click the graphical element and then click Find in
Electrical Engineer Electrical Index or Find in Electrical Engineer.

Viewing and modifying the Once you select an auxiliary graphic associated with a plant
properties of a plant item item, the properties of that plant item are displayed in the
associated with an auxiliary Properties window. You can view and modify them as you
graphic require.
Also, you can right-click an auxiliary graphic associated with a
plant item and then click Common Properties. The software
opens the Common Properties of the associated plant item
and you can view and modify them as needed.

Placing symbols on a drawing You can place a symbol on a drawing by dragging it from
Catalog Explorer to an open drawing. You can place the same
symbol on the drawing multiple times. For details, see Place a
Symbol on a Drawing.

Associating symbols with Right-click a symbol in an open composite drawing and then
electrical items in your plant on the shortcut menu, click Associate with Electrical item.
For more details, see Associate a Symbol with a Plant Item
(on page 609).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 565

 Composite Drawings

Option Description

Dissociating a symbol from an Right-click an auxiliary graphic in the composite drawing and
electrical item in your plant then on the shortcut menu, click Dissociate from Electrical
item. For more details, see Dissociate a Symbol from a Plant
Item (on page 611).

Attaching labels to graphical You can attach a label to any graphical element whether an
elements associated or unassociated auxiliary graphic, a smart symbol,
or a plant item that has been placed on a drawing. For more
details, see Attach a Label to a Graphical Element (a Graphic
or Symbol) (on page 620).

Showing the item type of a label You can hover over a label that has been associated with an
auxiliary graphic to show the item type of the label in a
ToolTip.

Changing the line type, line color Select a connector and then click the appropriate icon on the
and line width of a connector Drawing ribbon to change the line type, line width, or line
color for the selected connector. Note that if you associate a
connector with a plant item, the Merge and Split commands
become unavailable.

Indicating the flow direction on a You can indicate the flow direction on a terminator or a bus by
connector or bus placing a line with an arrow. For details, see Show the Flow
Direction on a Bus or Connector (on page 582).

Inserting annotations and Add text labels, symbols, or watermarks to your drawing as
redlining annotations. Add text, linked symbols, circles, rectangles,
and lines to your drawing as redlining. For more information,
see Managing Annotations and Redlining (see "Annotations
and Redlining" on page 624).

Renaming a document and Open your drawing and click Edit > Document Properties.
entering revisions

Printing out a drawing You can print a single drawing or multiple composite drawings.
For details, see Printing Composite Drawings.

Automatic saving of open The software automatically saves an open drawing when a
drawings change has been made in the drawing. This happens, for
example, when making any type of association, placing a plant
item on the drawing, grouping or ungrouping graphical
elements, and so forth. For full details, see Automatic Saving
of Composite Drawings (on page 603).

Saving drawings as external files You can save one or more drawings as external files, that is,
outside of the Smart Electrical system. You can select the
drawings in the Electrical Index or EDE. For more information,
see Save Drawings as an External Files.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 566

 Composite Drawings

Undo and Redo Actions in Composite Drawings

You can undo and redo an action performed with an auxiliary graphic in a composite drawing.
Also, you can undo or redo several actions all at once if needed.
The software does not perform Undo or Redo actions after carrying out one of
the following operations in a drawing:
▪ Associating a plant item with an auxiliary graphic.
▪ Dissociating a plant item from a graphical element.
▪ Placing an item on a drawing: a plant item, smart symbol, smart label, smart connector, and
so on.
▪ Grouping or ungrouping items in a drawing.
▪ Copying or pasting items in a drawing.
▪ Removing or deleting an item.
▪ Saving a drawing.
Undo the latest action performed with auxiliary graphics
Do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Undo.

▪ Click on the main toolbar.

▪ Press CTRL + Z.
Undo multiple actions performed with auxiliary graphics
▪ Click on the main toolbar.
Note the following:
▪ The number of actions that the software undoes is defined on the General tab of the
Options dialog box (click Tools > Options General tab > Undo steps.)
▪ Click the arrow on the icon to see the list of the actions to be undone.
Redo the latest action performed with auxiliary graphics
Do one of the following to reverse (cancel) the latest undo action:
▪ Click Edit >Redo.
▪ Click on the main toolbar.
▪ Press CTRL + Y.
Undo multiple actions performed with auxiliary graphics
You can reverse (cancel) a number of actions all at once if multiple Undo actions have been
performed,
▪ Click on the main toolbar.
Click the arrow on the icon to see the list of the undone actions to be reversed.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 567

 Composite Drawings

Grouping Graphical Elements in a Composite

Drawing
A group is a set of graphical elements that you have selected and grouped together. The set
behaves like any other select set. Grouping graphical elements allows you to work with them as
a unit. For example, you can move, copy, or delete the entire pattern at once, as if it were a
single element.
The following list describes some of the properties of groups:
▪ A graphical element can be nested only in one group.
▪ Grouped elements must reside in the same document and be on the same drawing sheet.
▪ Any element in a drawing can be grouped.
▪ Any combination of elements, such as lines, text, circles, and so forth, can be grouped.
You can use the Group command to nest two or more entire groups within a larger group, or
you can nest individual elements and groups within a larger group.
Once elements are grouped, you can use the Ungroup command to ungroup all of the elements
at the same time.

Selecting Groups and Nested Groups

You can select a group by using Select Tool on the Draw toolbar and then clicking the
group.
If you want to adjust the position of a nested element in a group, use the Smart Selection tool or
QuickPick to select it and then move it within the group.
For details on how to use the Smart Selection tool, see Select a Graphical Element Using
Smart Selection (on page 570).
For details on how to use the Smart Selection tool, see QuickPick, see Select a Graphical
Element with QuickPick (on page 571).
You cannot take a nested element out of a group. If you need to do this, use the
Ungroup command and then group the required elements again.

Performing Tasks on Groups

Once you select a group, you can use a command or ribbon option on all of its members. For
example, when you move, copy, or delete a group, all of its members are moved, copied, or
deleted.
When you copy an entire group, all of its members are copied, including nested groups. The
software creates a new group that contains all of the members of the original group.
You can associate a group with a plant item. For details, see Associate a Plant Item with a
Group or a Nested Element in a Group (on page 572).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 568

 Composite Drawings

Group or Ungroup Graphical Elements in a Composite

Drawing
Grouping graphical elements allows you to work with them as a unit. The nested elements must
reside in the same document and drawing sheet.

Group graphical elements

1. Select two or more graphical elements.
2. On the Group toolbar, click Group .

Ungroup graphical elements

1. Select a group.
2. On the Group toolbar, click Ungroup .

Move a nested element to another place in the drawing

1. Use Smart Selection or QuickPick to select the element you want to move.
2. Drag the element to another place in the drawing.

▪ You can nest groups by selecting two or more groups. You can then ungroup the entire
group.
▪ You can select a group and other elements and use Group to group them.
▪ You can perform tasks on all the nested elements by selecting the group and then selecting
the command or ribbon option you want to use.
▪ You can use Smart Selection or QuickPick to select and edit one or more nested
elements. For details, see:
▪ Select a Graphical Element Using Smart Selection (on page 570).
▪ Select a Graphical Element with QuickPick (on page 571).
▪ You can use the Properties dialog box to find out if a graphical element is part of a group.
Right-click the graphical element and then, on the shortcut menu, click Properties to see
the information.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 569

 Composite Drawings

Select a Graphical Element Using Smart Selection

You can use Smart Selection instead of QuickPick to select a nested graphical element in a
compound symbol or grouped graphical element. The Smart Selection tool provides a faster
and more convenient way to make selections of nested elements.
1. Select a compound symbol or grouped graphical element and then do one of the following:

▪ Click on the Actions toolbar.

▪ Right-click the selected compound symbol or a grouped graphical element and then on
the shortcut menu, click Smart Selection.
The Smart Selection tool opens next to the item you right-clicked:

If you select a compound symbol or a grouped element that has a multi-level

hierarchy, the Smart Selection tool shows an arrow pointing to the right to indicate an
existing lower level hierarchy. You can click this arrow to expand the hierarchy if you need to
select that item.
2. Move the pointer over a nested item name in the Smart Selection tool to highlight the
corresponding nested item in the graphic:

3. Click the required nested item name in the Smart Selection tool to select the nested item.
The software selects the nested item and closes the Smart Selection tool. You can
now perform any action with the selected nested item as needed, for example associate it
with a plant item or move if you need to adjust its placement in the drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 570

 Composite Drawings

Select a Graphical Element with QuickPick

QuickPick helps you to select elements that overlap each other.
1. Position the pointer over the element you want to select and pause the pointer there.
2. When the pointer changes to an ellipsis (three dots), click. The software displays the
QuickPick tool near the pointer, with a button for each selectable element.

3. Move the pointer over QuickPick without clicking to highlight the corresponding elements.

4. When the element you want to select is highlighted, click the corresponding button on the
QuickPick tool.

▪ When the Select Tool is active, selectable elements highlight as you pass the pointer over
them. When the element you want to select is highlighted, click to select it.
▪ You can use the ribbon commands to set element selection options.
▪ You can change the element highlight and selection colors with the Tools > Options
command.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 571

 Composite Drawings

Associate a Plant Item with a Group or a Nested Element in a

Group
This feature allows you to select a grouped set of graphical elements and associate it with a
plant item. Also, you can associate a plant item with an individual nested element within a group.

Associate an Electrical item in the Electrical Index with a Group

1. In the Electrical Index, select an appropriate electrical item.
2. Press and hold the CTRL key.
3. Drag the electrical item to an appropriate group in the open composite drawing.

▪ You can release the CTRL key once the indicator turns to , which means that the
dragged item is already within the drawing boundaries.

▪ The indicator means that no association is possible. The indicator means that
an association is possible if you release the mouse button when pointing to an
unassociated auxiliary graphic.
4. Release the mouse button to make the association.
If you drag a plant item to a group that is already associated with a plant item, the
indicator appears. If you release the mouse button at this point, a message appears
prompting you to choose whether you want to change the association or keep the original
one.

Associate a Nested Element with a Plant Item

It is not possible to associate a plant item with a nested element in a group by
dragging the plant item to the nested element. The following procedure describes how to make
such an association.
1. In an open composite drawing, use the Smart Selection tool QuickPick to select a nested
group element in a group.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Right-click the nested group element and then on the shortcut menu, click Associate
with Electrical Item.

▪ Click on the Actions toolbar.

▪ On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Actions >Associate with Electrical Item.
3. On the Find dialog box, do the following:
a. Select an appropriate item type from the Equipment type list.
b. Click Find Now.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 572

 Composite Drawings

c. In the Results pane, select an appropriate plant item and click OK.

▪ After selecting an associated group or a nested element, you can see the properties of the
associated plant item in the Properties window. You can modify these properties as
needed. When selecting an associated group, expand Select Set to see the plant items that
are associated with the individual nested items.
▪ If an associated group does not contain nested elements that are associated with plant
items, you can right-click this group and then click Common Properties to view and modify
the properties of the plant item associated with the group.
▪ If you ungroup an associated group, the software dissociates the group from the plant item.
If there are nested elements in that group, they remain on the drawing and their associations
are not affected.
▪ To find the associated plant item in the Electrical Index and Electrical Engineer, right-click
the group or a nested element in a group and then on the shortcut menu click Find in
Electrical Index or Find in Electrical Engineer.
▪ If you remove an associated group from the drawing, the software dissociates the group
from the plant item and removes the graphical elements from the drawing. The plant item
that was associated with the group is not affected.

Dissociate a Group from a Plant Item

This procedure explains how to dissociate one or more groups from plant items.
1. In an open composite drawing, select one or more groups that you want to dissociate from
plant items.

▪ You can make your selection by holding down the CTRL key.
▪ You can select groups and other graphical elements as needed.
2. Do one of the following:

▪ On the Actions toolbar, click .

▪ On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Actions > Dissociate from Electrical Item.
▪ Right-click a group and then on the shortcut menu, click Dissociate from Electrical
Item.
3. In the message box that opens, click Yes to confirm the dissociation.

▪ To dissociate a nested element in a group, use the Smart Selection tool or QuickPick to
select the nested element and then repeat step 2 in the above procedure.
▪ To dissociate a group and all its nested elements, after right-clicking the group, click
Dissociate All Elements Including All Nested Elements on the shortcut menu.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 573

 Composite Drawings

Remove a Group from a Composite Drawing

This procedure explains how to remove one or more groups from a composite drawing.
If a group is associated with a plant item, this association will be broken.
1. In an open composite drawing, select one or more groups that you want to remove.
You can make your selection by holding down the CTRL key and then clicking the
individual elements using the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar or by dragging your
mouse over the graphical elements to draw a virtual frame.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Remove.
▪ Right-click the graphic and then click Remove.

▪ On the Edit Drawing toolbar, click .

3. If a group is associated with an electrical item in your plant, click Yes in the message box to
confirm the removal.
The software removes only the auxiliary graphics from the open composite drawing.
The associated plant items remain unaffected.

Place a Plant Item on a Composite Drawing

1. Open or create a composite drawing.
2. From the Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer, drag a plant item to the open drawing.

▪ As a rule, the software uses the associated custom symbols to show the plant items in the
drawing.
▪ If a particular plant item hasn't been associated with a custom symbol, the software looks for
symbol defined in Option Manager's symbology.
▪ If no symbology symbol has been set for that plant item, Smart Electrical uses the default
symbol for that particular item type. Smart Electrical provides default symbols for each item
type that are commonly used in a drawing of a particular category, for example, motor
symbols in SLDs). The default symbol file names are designated as <item type>.sym (for
example, motor.sym). Make sure that all the default symbols for these item types have been
placed in the appropriate symbol folders and these locations have been defined in Options
Manager. For example, if you want to show a terminal strip of a motor by dragging motor
terminal strip to an open composite drawing, make sure that the terminal strip symbol is
located in the SLD symbol folder.
▪ When associating cables, buses, conductors, segments, and cableways with symbols, it is
advisable to associate them with symbols that belong to the connector type. This way you
will be able to connect these items on both sides of the connector and design connector
paths on the drawing as you require. Connector type symbols are especially useful when
designing cable routing. You can select a connector symbol in the Catalog Explorer and
immediately start designing the routing by clicking in the appropriate spots on the drawing.
You create connector symbols in Catalog Manager. For details, see the Catalog Manager
User's Guide.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 574

 Composite Drawings

▪ Selecting a plant item in the drawing shows the properties of the plant item in the
Properties window.
▪ Removing a plant item from the drawing does not delete the plant item from your plant.
▪ Deleting a plant item in the Electrical Index automatically refreshes the display of the open
drawings where this plant item was used.

Transformer Behavior in SLD Composite Drawings

When placing a transformer plant item on an SLD composite drawing, the software allows you to
do the following and behaves in the following manner:
▪ You place a transformer on a drawing by dragging it to an open drawing from the Electrical
Index or Electrical Engineer.
▪ The software uses the default transformer symbol and default transformer component
symbol to represent a two-winding or three-winding transformer that is not associated with a
custom symbol.
▪ The transformer and its components are placed as groups so that the transformer and its
components are manipulated on a drawing as a single unit and their properties are
refreshed after updating the transformer data.
▪ After placing a transformer associated with a compound symbol, the software automatically
associates the nested symbols with the transformer components.
▪ You can dissociate a nested symbol from a transformer component if needed.
▪ When dissociating a transformer from a symbol, you can use the Dissociate All Elements
Including All Nested Elements shortcut menu command to automatically dissociates the
transformer and its primary and secondary windings in a single action.
▪ You can associate an unassociated transformer symbol with a plant transformer.
▪ It is not possible to drag just a transformer component to a drawing.
▪ You can place a transformer component symbol from the Catalog Explorer and associate
this symbol with a plant item using the Find feature.
▪ When placing a plant transformer or transformer component that is associated with a
custom symbol, the software uses the associated custom symbol to represent the plant item
on the drawing.
▪ The software allows you to place a transformer and its components that are associated with
a custom compound symbol.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 575

 Composite Drawings

Find a Plant Item in an Active Composite Drawing

The following procedure explains how to find in an active open composite drawing a plant item
that you see in the Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer.
1. Select a plant item in the Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Find > In Active Composite Drawing.
▪ Right-click the plant item and then on the shortcut menu, click Find in Active
Composite Drawing.
Note the following:
▪ The software highlights the first plant item that it finds and zooms in on it in the active
drawing.
▪ If the software finds the plant item on a sheet that is not currently active, this sheet becomes
active.
▪ If the software finds the plant item on a hidden layer, the layer becomes visible.

Associate an Auxiliary Graphic with a Plant Item

You can select an auxiliary graphic that you have drawn in a composite drawing and associate
this auxiliary graphic with an electrical item in your plant. Once this association has been made,
you can select the auxiliary graphic and open the common properties of the associated electrical
item for viewing or editing. You can also change the property values of the associated electrical
item in the Properties window.

Associate an Electrical item by Dragging

1. In the Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer, select an appropriate electrical item.
2. Drag the electrical item to an appropriate auxiliary graphic in the open composite drawing.
3. Once the dragged electrical item is within the boundaries of the drawing, press and hold the
CTRL key.
4. Release the mouse button and the CTRL key to make the association.

▪ You can release the CTRL key once the indicator turns from to , which means
that the dragged item is already within the drawing boundaries.

▪ The indicator means that no association is possible.

▪ The indicator means that an association is possible if you release the mouse button
when pointing to a symbol.
▪ If you drag a plant item to an auxiliary graphic that is already associated with a plant
item, the indicator appears. If you release the mouse button at this point, a message

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 576

 Composite Drawings

appears prompting you to choose whether you want to change the association or keep
the original one.

Find an Electrical Item and Associate It with an Auxiliary Graphic

1. Select an auxiliary graphic in the drawing and do one of the following:

▪ On the Actions toolbar, click .

▪ On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Actions > Associate with Electrical Item.
▪ Right-click the selected auxiliary graphic and then on the shortcut menu, click
Associate with Electrical Item.
2. Use the Find dialog box to find the electrical item with which you want to associate the
selected auxiliary graphic.
3. Click OK on the Find dialog box to make the association.

▪ After selecting an associated auxiliary graphic, the properties of the associated plant
item are displayed in the Properties window.
▪ You can open the Common Properties of the associated plant item by right-clicking the
auxiliary graphic and then selecting Common Properties on the shortcut menu.
▪ To find the associated plant item in the Electrical Index and Electrical Engineer,
right-click the graphic in the composite drawing and then on the shortcut menu, click
Find in Electrical Index or Find in Electrical Engineer.
▪ You can generate a Composite Drawing Index report that shows all the plant items and
the composite drawings in which they appear. For details, see Create a Composite
Drawing Index Report (on page 653).

Dissociate Graphical Elements from a Plant Item

This procedure explains how to dissociate one or more graphical elements in a composite
drawing from plant items.
1. In an open composite drawing, select one or more graphical elements that you want to
dissociate from plant items.

▪ You can make your selection by holding down CTRL and then clicking the individual
elements using the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar or by dragging your mouse
over the graphical elements to draw a virtual frame.
▪ You can select groups and individual auxiliary graphics as needed.
2. Do one of the following:

▪ On the Actions toolbar, click .

▪ On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Actions > Dissociate from Electrical Item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 577

 Composite Drawings

▪ Right-click the auxiliary graphic and then on the shortcut menu, click Dissociate from
Electrical Item.
3. In the message box that opens, click Yes to confirm the dissociation.

Remove Graphical Elements from a Composite

Drawing
This procedure explains how to remove one or more graphical elements from a composite
drawing. These elements can be individual auxiliary graphics or groups.
If a graphical element or a group is associated with a plant item, this
association will be broken.
1. In an open composite drawing, select one or more graphical elements that you want to
remove.

▪ You can make your selection by holding down the CTRL key and then clicking the
individual elements using the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar or by dragging your
mouse over the graphical elements to draw a virtual frame.
▪ You can select groups and individual auxiliary graphics as needed.
2. Do one of the following:

▪ On the Edit Drawing toolbar, click .

▪ Click Edit > Remove.
▪ Right-click the graphic and then click Remove.
3. If an auxiliary graphic or a group is associated with an electrical item in your plant, click Yes
in the message box to confirm the removal.
The software removes only the auxiliary graphics from the open composite drawing.
The associated plant items remain unaffected.

Association Assistant
Association Assistant enables you to retrieve and display the existing associations of a plant
item that you select in a drawing. This way you can easily identify and associate the plant
items that you need to add in the open drawing.
To open the Association Assistant for a specific plant item, do one of the following:
▪ In an open drawing, click a plant item and then click Actions > Show Plant Item in
Association Assistant.
▪ In an open drawing, right-click a plant item and then on the shortcut menu, click Show in
Association Assistant.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 578

 Composite Drawings

The Association Assistant Display

Power Flow Items — This tab contains all the plant items that belong to the power flow of the
item selected in the active drawing.
The scope of the items included in the display is as follows:
▪ For a selected PDB — all the associated buses
▪ For a selected bus — all the associated circuits
▪ For all other selected items — all the associated upstream and downstream items till the
next bus or an item which has a multiple parent or child items.
Each row in the tabular view of the Association Assistant represents a plant item associated
with the item you selected in the active drawing.
▪ Connection Sequence — Displays the sequence in which the plant item in the current
row is connected to the selected plant item in the active drawing.
▪ Item Tag — Displays the item tag connected to the selected plant item in the active
drawing. The following icons are used to indicate:

▪ Cable assemblies —

▪ Parallel cables —

▪ Parallel equipment —
▪ Item Type — Displays the item type of the item tag connected to the selected plant item
in the active drawing.
▪ Description — Displays the description of the item tag connected to the selected plant
item in the active drawing.

▪ An icon indicator to the left of the sequence number of an item symbolizes that this
item has already been placed on the active drawing.
▪ Cables show a tooltip with the From and To associations.
Other Related Items — This tab contains all the plant items that are associated with the
selected item in addition to the power flow items, for example selected in the active drawing, for
example circuit internals, control cables, cells, cable drums, and so forth.
▪ Item Tag — Displays the item tag connected to the selected plant item in the active
drawing. The following icons are used to indicate:

▪ Cable assemblies —

▪ Parallel cables —

▪ Parallel equipment —
▪ Item Type — Displays the item type of the item tag associated with the selected plant item
in the active drawing.
▪ Description — Displays the description of the item tag associated with the selected plant
item in the active drawing.
▪ Search — Allows you to find a plant item in the Association Assistant.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 579

 Composite Drawings

You can do the following:

▪ Place a plant item displayed in the Association Assistant on the active drawing:
1. In the Association Assistant, click a plant item.
2. Drag the item to the active drawing.

▪ Associate a plant item displayed in the Association Assistant with a graphical element (an
auxiliary graphic or a symbol) in the drawing:
1. In the Association Assistant, click a plant item.
2. Press and hold CTRL.
3. Drag the item to an auxiliary graphic or a symbol in the active drawing.
For more details about making associations in composite drawings, see
Associate an Auxiliary Graphic with a Plant Item (on page 576).
▪ Double-click a plant item in the Association Assistant to display the existing associations
of that item.
Note the following regarding the behavior of the Association Assistant.
▪ The data displayed in the Association Assistant is only relevant to the drawing from
which you opened the Association Assistant. Therefore, if several drawings are open
on your computer, and you switch to another drawing, the data in the Association
Assistant will remain unchanged.
▪ If you close the drawing for which you opened the Association Assistant, the
Association Assistant also closes.
▪ If you want to display association data for another item in the same drawing or another
drawing, the data in the Association Assistant will change in the same window of the
Association Assistant. There can be only one instance of the Association Assistant
window.
▪ You can drag an item from the Association Assistant to any open drawing.
▪ The title bar of the Association Assistant displays the drawing and the plant item for
which the Association Assistant was opened.

Copy and Paste Graphical Elements in a Composite

Drawing
You can copy and paste single or multiple graphical elements in composite drawings:
▪ within the same composite drawing.
▪ from one composite drawing to another.
▪ from a conventional drawing to a composite drawing.
▪ from an external drawing to a composite drawing.
Copy and paste graphical elements

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 580

 Composite Drawings

1. Select the graphical elements that you want to copy and do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Copy.
▪ On the Main toolbar, click .
▪ Press CTRL+C on your keyboard.
▪ Right-click the selection and on the shortcut menu, click Copy.
2. Click in the target composite drawing and then do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Paste.
▪ On the Main toolbar, click .
▪ Press CTRL+V on your keyboard.
▪ Right-click the in the drawing and then on the shortcut menu, click Paste.
3. Move the pasted graphical element to an appropriate place in the drawing.

Copy the Formatting of a Graphical Element

This option enables you to copy the formatting of a graphical element, such as line weight, color
and line style, from a selected graphical element and apply it to other graphical elements as they
are selected.
The graphical elements have to belong to the same graphical element type.
1. Click the graphical element with the formatting you want to copy.
2. Click the Format Painter on the Change toolbar.
3. Click another graphical element to apply the new formatting.

Retain Plant Item Associations of Graphical Elements

while Pasting
You can retain the association of graphical elements with their plant items when pasting copied
graphical elements into a composite drawing.
1. Open the target composite drawing and do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Paste Special.
▪ Right-click in the target composite drawing and then on the shortcut menu, click Paste
Special.
2. Move the pasted graphical elements to an appropriate place in the drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 581

 Composite Drawings

Show the Flow Direction on a Bus or Connector

You can add an auxiliary graphic line that indicates the direction of the flow. You can then
associate this line with a connector or bus in your plant.
1. In an open drawing, use the command on the Draw toolbar to insert an auxiliary
connector.
2. Click the auxiliary connector to select it.
3. On the Modify Connector ribbon bar, select an appropriate arrow symbol from either the
left or right list.
If you want to indicate the flow direction in the middle of an auxiliary connector, create
two lines with arrows and put the end of the second line right at the beginning of the first line.

Mark Unassociated Graphical Elements

You can mark all the unassociated graphical elements in an open drawing so that you can easily
distinguish between associated graphical elements and the unassociated ones (auxiliary
graphics and symbols). You create these markings by selecting specific settings in the Define
Item Type Symbology window in Options Manager.
1. In Options Manager, click Options > Item Type Symbology > Define.
2. In the Define Item Type Symbology window, select Unassociated Graphics from the
Item type list.
3. From the Document type list, select Composite Drawings and Conventional CBDs.
4. In the Define Item Type Symbology window, select your definitions as you require. For
details, see Define an Item Type Symbol in Options Manager Help.
5. In Smart Electrical, open a drawing and do one of the following to mark the unassociated
graphics:
▪ On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click View > Mark Unassociated Graphics.

▪ Click on the Edit drawing toolbar.

▪ To cancel the marking of unassociated graphics, click again.

▪ If an auxiliary graphic contains text, the software displays this text in the same color that you
defined for the auxiliary graphic.
▪ Smart Electrical does not mark OLE objects as unassociated graphics because the
application does not treat OLE objects as unassociated graphics and OLE objects do not
respond to layer styling.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 582

 Composite Drawings

Opening External Drawings

External drawings are drawing files created in another application. After opening an external
drawing, the software allows to do the following:
▪ Copy the entire content of the external drawing.
▪ Copy only the selected graphical elements of the external drawing.
▪ Paste the selection into a composite drawing.
You can open drawings that have the following file extensions:
*.igr (SmartSketch)
*.dxf (AutoCAD)
*.dwg (AutoCAD)
*.dgn (MicroStation)
Prior to opening an external drawing, define the manner in which Smart Electrical will import the
external drawing.

To set import options for external drawings

1. On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Tools > Options.
2. On the Options dialog box, click the Foreign Data tab.
3. From the Format list, select MicroStation or AutoCAD.
4. In the Import group box, click Options.
5. In the dialog box that opens, from the Options list, select Symbol or Groups.

▪ If you set your import setting to Symbol, the graphical element that you paste from an
external drawing into a composite drawing will be treated as a non-smart symbol. You
can associate this symbol with a plant item and attach a label to it as needed. Also, if
the external graphical element that you pasted in needs to be disassembled in the
composite drawing, right-click the external graphical element and then on the shortcut
menu, click Convert to Group and then ungroup it as you would ungroup any group in
a composite drawing. Note that the Convert to Group command is not available if a
label has been attached to it or if the symbol has been associated with a plant item.
Note that this conversion is irreversible - you will not be able to convert it back to
symbol.
▪ If you set your import setting to Groups, the graphical element that you paste from an
external drawing into a composite drawing will be treated as a group of graphical
elements. You can associate this group with a plant item and attach a label to it as
needed. You can ungroup this external graphical element if needed.

To open an external drawing

▪ On the Smart Electrical menu, click File > Open > External Drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 583

 Composite Drawings

Save Drawings as External Files

You can save a composite drawing as external file outside of the Smart Electrical system. Apart
from being able to save an open drawing, you can select a number of drawings and save them
in batch mode.

Save an Open Drawing as an External File

1. Click File > Save As.
2. On the Save As dialog box, enter the appropriate file path where you want to save the
drawing.
3. Select the appropriate file format in which you want to save the drawing.
The following file formats are available:
▪ Microstation (*.dgn)
▪ AutoCAD (*.dxf)
▪ AutoCAD (*.dwg)
▪ PDF (*.pdf)
▪ Smart Electrical (*.spe)
4. Select the Save all layers check box if you want to save all the existing layers in the
drawing. Clear this check box if you want to save only the visible layers.
5. Click OK.

Save Several Drawings as External Files

This option allows you to select a number of drawings and save them as external files without
opening them.
If one of the selected drawings is out of date, the software informs you of this
fact and prompts you to select an option for saving. You can either save the up-to-date or the
out-of-date version of the drawing.
1. In the Electrical Index or EDE, select one or more drawings.
You can select multiple drawings in the List View section of the Electrical Index
only if the drawings belong to the same type.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click File > Save As.
▪ Right-click the selection and then on the shortcut menu, click Save As.
3. On the Save As dialog box, enter the appropriate file path where you want to save the
drawing.
4. Select the appropriate file format in which you want to save the drawing.
The following file formats are available:
▪ Microstation (*.dgn)
▪ AutoCAD (*.dxf)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 584

 Composite Drawings

▪ AutoCAD (*.dwg)
▪ PDF (*.pdf)
▪ Smart Electrical (*.spe)
5. Select the Save all layers check box if you want to save all the existing layers in the
drawing. Clear this check box if you want to save only the visible layers.
6. Click OK.

Using Layers to Arrange Elements

Layers and display settings can help you group elements so that you can manipulate them more
easily on a drawing sheet. Layers and display settings also make it easier to keep track of
different types of elements. Each drawing sheet in a document can contain several layers.
When you draw an element, it is assigned to the active layer. To see which layer is active, or to
change the active layer, you can use Layers on the Main toolbar.

Controlling the Display of Elements and Objects

After assigning an element or object to a layer, you can set display criteria to control the way
items appear in a window by using Display Manager on the Tools menu. With this command,
you can set display criteria for any sheet and its associated layers in the current document. The
display settings can include the color or line type and line width of elements or objects.
If two windows are open for the same document, the display settings that you select with
the Display Manager dialog box affect every window view of the drawing sheet.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 585

 Composite Drawings

Displaying Layers
To view elements on specific layers, you can turn on one or more layers by selecting Layers.
When you turn layers off, you cannot see the elements assigned to the layers on the drawing
sheet. For example, you can assign lines to one layer and closed elements to another layer.
Then, if you turn off the layer for closed elements and turn on the layer for lines, you see only
lines on the drawing sheet.

You can still see relationships between elements that are assigned to different layers on a
drawing sheet. For example, suppose a line and a circle are tangent and they are assigned to
different layers. If the line's layer is displayed and the circle's layer is hidden, you can still see
the tangent relationship handle on the line. If the line's layer is hidden as well, the tangent
relationship handle is hidden.
With Display Manager on the Tools menu, you can control the way elements appear on sheets
or layers by changing settings, such as the line type or color. You can also create custom colors
for the display.

Layers and Layer Groups

While layers provide a way to control the display of elements on a drawing sheet, layer groups
give you another way to control the display of elements on drawing sheets. You can use Layer
Groups on the Tools menu to define layer groups.

Creating New Layers

You can create new layers using Layer Groups, or by typing a new layer name on the ribbon.
You cannot give the same name to two layers on the same drawing sheet.

Assigning Elements to Layers

Although you can assign an element to only one layer, you can change the layer to which an
element is assigned. You can find out which layer an element is assigned to by selecting it and
using Properties on the Edit menu.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 586

 Composite Drawings

See Also
Display Manager Command (on page 587)
Layers Command (on page 592)
Control the Display of Elements in a Window (on page 587)
Create a Layer (on page 591)
Change the Layer of an Element (on page 593)
Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group (on page 595)

Control the Display of Elements in a Window

1. Click Tools > Display Manager.
2. On the Sheets tab, set the options you want to use for displaying elements in a window. The
color, line type, and width settings are applied to all the elements on the sheet.
To set the display for a specific layer on a sheet, select the sheet on the Sheets tab.
The layers that are in that sheet are displayed on the Layers tab. You can specify display
settings for each layer in a sheet by clicking the Layers tab and setting the options you
want.
If you want to quickly display or hide layers for the current drawing sheet, you can
click Layers on the Tools menu. Then, on the Layers ribbon, you can click Layer Status to
display or hide layers.
See Also
Display Manager Command (on page 587)
Display Manager Dialog Box (on page 588)

Display Manager Command

Specifies the way elements or objects appear in a window for all drawing sheets and their
associated layers in the document.
You can quickly set display options (Layers on/off) for the current drawing sheet on the
Layer Display dialog box. You can access the Layer Display dialog box using Layers on the
Tools menu.
See Also
Change the Active Layer (on page 593)
Create a Layer (on page 591)
Display Manager Dialog Box (on page 588)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 587

 Composite Drawings

Display Manager Dialog Box

Specifies the way elements or objects display in a window for all drawing sheets and their
associated layers in the document. You can specify color, line type, and width overrides.
However, the software ignores color overrides for objects with blank color. Objects with blank
color do not display.
You can set display options (Layers on/off) for the current drawing sheet on the Layer
Display dialog box. You can access the Layer Display dialog box using Layers on the Tools
menu.
See Also
Display Manager Command (on page 587)
Sheets Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box) (on page 588)
Layers Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box) (on page 589)

Sheets Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box)

Controls the way elements or objects appear on a drawing sheet.
Row Button — Specifies at what level you want to display or hide items. When you click a
button to the left of a row, an arrow appears by that row. Clicking this button selects the drawing
sheet or linked/embedded object so that you can modify its display. Any options you set on the
Layers tab of the Display Manager dialog box are applied to the sheet or object that you
selected.
Sheets — Displays a list of sheets and linked/embedded objects in the current document. An
arrow appears by the current active drawing sheet. You can control the display of each sheet or
object by setting the options you want in the Color, Line Type, or Width columns. The Display
and Lock options can only be set from the Layers tab.
Display — Controls the layers listed on the Layers tab. If you set the box next to a layer, the
elements on that layer are displayed in the active document.
▪ A check appears in each box when you first access the Layers tab.
▪ You can set the box next to each layer to display all the elements.
▪ On the Layers tab, you cannot turn the active layer off.
Lock — Locks or unlocks layers in a view to control whether the software can locate elements
on a layer. If a layer is locked, you can still see the elements on the screen, but you cannot
locate them or perform actions on them. You cannot lock the active layer.
▪ If the lock beside a layer appears locked, you cannot locate elements on the layer in the
active document or drawing sheet.
▪ If the lock beside a layer appears unlocked, the elements on the layer can be located.
Color — Overrides a color for all elements on a drawing sheet or in a linked/embedded object.
You can select a color from the list. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors
dialog box.
Line Type — Overrides a line type for all elements on a drawing sheet or in a linked/embedded
object.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 588

 Composite Drawings

Width — Overrides a line width for all elements on a drawing sheet or in a linked/embedded
object.
OK — Saves the changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box.
Cancel — Ignores any changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box.
Apply — Applies the current display settings without closing the Display Manager dialog box.
Clear — Removes all overrides from the selected row. You must select a row before you can
click this button. You can clear settings from only one row at a time.
Help - Activates the Online Help for the Display Manager dialog box.
See Also
Display Manager Dialog Box (on page 588)

Layers Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box)

Controls the way layers and layer groups appear in a window.
Row Button - Indicates the layer being modified. The active layer cannot be modified and is
indicated by a solid filled check box in the display column.
Layers - Controls the display using layers and layers groups. The Layers column displays an
alphabetical list of layers and layer groups for the active drawing sheet.
Layer groups appear first in the list followed by individual layers. You can control the display of
each layer by setting the options you want in the Display, Lock, Color, Type, or Width
columns.
Display - Displays the elements listed on the Layers tab. If you set the box next to the element,
the element is displayed in the active document (if its layer is displayed).
A check appears in each box when you first access the Layers tab.
▪ You can set the box next to each element to display all the elements.
▪ On the Layers tab, you cannot turn the active layer off.
Lock - Locks or unlocks elements and layers in a view to control whether the software can
locate them. If an element or layer is locked, you can still see it on the screen, but you cannot
locate it or perform actions on it. You cannot lock the active layer.
If the lock beside a sheet or layer appears locked, you cannot locate the element or layer in the
active document or drawing sheet.
If the lock beside a sheet or layer appears unlocked, the element or layer is not locked and you
can locate it.
Color - Overrides the color for a layer or layer group or applies another color to an element. You
can select a color from the list. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors
dialog box.
Line Type - Overrides a line type for a drawing sheet or embedded object and sets another line
style for an element or linked object.
Width - Selects another line width for layer or layer group.
OK - Saves the changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box.
Cancel - Ignores any changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 589

 Composite Drawings

Apply - Applies the current display settings.

Clear - Removes all overrides from the selected row. You must select a row before you can click
this button. You can clear settings from only one row at a time.
Help - Activates the Online Help for the Display Manager dialog box.
See Also
Display Manager Dialog Box (on page 588)
Modify Layers in a Layer Group (on page 594)
Create a Layer (on page 591)
Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group (on page 595)

Create a Color for Displaying Sheets or Layers

When you use Display Manager to control the way elements or objects appear in window, you
can create custom colors for the display of sheets or layers.
1. Click Tools > Display Manager.
2. On the Display Manager dialog box, click the row of the layer or sheet you want to change
the color of.
3. Click the cell in the Color column.
4. At the bottom of the palette, click More.
5. On the Colors dialog box, click Define Custom Colors and set the options you want to
create a new color.
6. Click Add to Custom Colors.
7. On the Custom Color Name dialog box, type the name that you want for the color you
created. This name appears on the palette that you access when you click a cell in the
Color column.
See Also
Colors Dialog Box (on page 590)
Display Manager Command (on page 587)

Colors Dialog Box

Creates colors that you define by mixing a combination of hue, saturation, and luminosity values
or red, green, and blue values. After you click Define Custom Colors, the easiest way to
experiment with different colors is to drag the pointer around on the color matrix.
After you create a color and close the dialog box, the Custom Color Name dialog box appears,
allowing you to save the custom color with a name.
To change the settings for a custom color, you can click a custom color box and then specify a
different color. To define a new custom color, click an empty custom color box, specify a new
color, and then click Add to Custom Colors.
To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the Question Mark in the upper
right corner of the dialog box and click the control that you want information about.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 590

 Composite Drawings

See Also
Display Manager Dialog Box (on page 588)

Create a Layer
1. On the Main toolbar, click Layers .
2. On the Layers ribbon, type the name of the new layer in the Layer box and press ENTER.

▪ You can also create a layer using Layer Groups on the Tools menu. On the Groups dialog
box, you type the name of a new layer in the Layers box and press ENTER. The name of
the new layer is displayed at the bottom of the Layers table.
▪ You cannot give the same name to two layers on the same drawing sheet.
▪ You can create as many layers on a drawing sheet as you need.
See Also
Layer Groups Command (on page 595)
Layers Command (on page 592)

Display or Hide Layers

1. Do one of the following:
▪ On the Main toolbar, click Layers .
▪ Click Tools > Layers.
2. On the Layers ribbon, click the Layer Status icon. The Layer Display dialog box displays
all layers available for the current drawing sheet. The layers that appear in gray text are
hidden or turned off. The layer that appears in red text is the active layer.
3. Click a layer name to display or hide the layer on the drawing sheet.
4. Click Apply.
If you want to display or hide layers for drawing sheets other than the current sheet,
you can use Display Manager on the Tools menu. On the Display Manager dialog box,
Sheets tab, click the sheet you want. Then, on the Layers tab, in the Layers column, click the
layers you want to display or hide. These settings override the settings on the Layer Display
dialog box.
See Also
Layer Groups Command (on page 595)
Layers Command (on page 592)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 591

 Composite Drawings

Layers Command
Displays or hides layers. This command also sets the active layer and changes the layer of
an element.
You can set display criteria for all the sheets and their associated layers in the current
document with Display Manager on the Tools menu.
See Also
Display Manager Command (on page 587)
Change the Active Layer (on page 593)
Create a Layer (on page 591)
Layers Ribbon (on page 592)

Layers Ribbon
Layer — Displays the active layer on the drawing sheet. You can change the active layer by
selecting from a list of all the layers on the active sheet. Typing a new layer name creates a new
layer.
Change Layer — Accesses the Change Layer dialog box so that you can change the layer
of elements. This option is available only when you have selected a set of elements on the
drawing.
Layer Display — Accesses the Layer Display dialog box. This dialog box has a Layer list
that you can use to display or hide layers on the drawing sheet.
See Also
Layers Command (on page 592)
Change the Active Layer (on page 593)
Create a Layer (on page 591)

Layer Display Dialog Box

Sets display criteria for the layers in the current drawing sheet.
You can set display criteria for all the sheets in the current document with Display
Manager on the Tools menu.
Active Layer Only — Displays the active layer. If this option is set and the active layer changes,
then the new active layer displays, and the previous active layer is hidden.
Layers — Displays a list of layers on the active drawing sheet. Bold, black text shows that the
layer is displayed on the drawing sheet. Plain, gray text shows the layer is hidden. Bold, red text
preceded by a bullet shows that the layer is active.
Occupied Only — Lists only layers containing elements. Empty layers do not appear on the list.
Groups — Displays or hides the layer groups list on the dialog box. When you click this button,
the dialog box displays a list of all layer groups for the active drawing sheet. You can select a
group from the list to display or hide these layers on the drawing sheet.
On — Displays the layers in the selected layer group.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 592

 Composite Drawings

Off — Hides the layers in the selected layer group.

Apply — Applies the current display settings to all windows. The dialog remains displayed.
Close — Applies the current display settings to all windows and closes the dialog.
See Also
Layers Command (on page 592)
Change the Active Layer (on page 593)
Create a Layer (on page 591)
Change the Layer of an Element (on page 593)
Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group (on page 595)

Change the Layer of an Element

An element can be assigned to only one layer.
1. Select the elements whose layer you want to change.
2. On the Main toolbar, click Layers .Click Tools > Layers.
3. On the Layer ribbon, click Change Layer.
4. On the Change Layer dialog box, in the Change all to list, click the layer to change the
elements to.
You can also change the layer of an element by selecting the element and clicking
Properties on the Edit menu.
See Also
Display Manager Command (on page 587)
Layers Command (on page 592)

Change the Active Layer

1. On the Main toolbar, click Layers .
2. On the Layers ribbon, type or select the name of another layer in the Layer box.
If you type the name of a layer that does not exist, a new layer is created.
See Also
Display Manager Command (on page 587)
Layers Command (on page 592)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 593

 Composite Drawings

Change Layer Dialog Box

This option is available only when one or more elements are selected.
Current Layers — Lists the layers for all the selected elements.
Change all to — Lists all the layers for the active sheet. Selecting a layer from the list changes
the layer for all the elements in the selection set.
See Also
Change the Active Layer (on page 593)
Change the Layer of an Element (on page 593)

Create a Layer Group

1. Click Tools > Layer Groups.
2. On the Layer Groups dialog box, in the Groups box, type the name of the new group and
press ENTER.
3. In the Layers table, in the Grouped column, click each box to include the layers in the
group.

▪ In the Grouped column, if the check box beside the layer name already has a check mark,
the layer is a member of the current layer group.
▪ You cannot give the same name to two layers on the same drawing sheet.
See Also
Layer Groups Command (on page 595)
Layer Groups Dialog Box (on page 595)

Modify Layers in a Layer Group

1. Click Tools > Layer Groups.
2. On the Layer Groups dialog box, in the Groups table, select the group you want to change
by clicking the button on the left side of the row. In the Layers table, if the check box by the
layer name is set, the layer is in the layer group.
3. In the Layers table, set or clear the check box of each layer to add or remove it from the
layer group.
See Also
Layer Groups Command (on page 595)
Layer Groups Dialog Box (on page 595)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 594

 Composite Drawings

Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group

1. Click Tools > Layer Groups.
2. On the Groups dialog box, click a group in the Groups table.
You should click directly on the Group name to change it. The name is then
highlighted and a blinking pointer appears, allowing you to type the new name.
3. Do one of the following:
▪ To change the name of a group, type the new name and press ENTER.
▪ To change the name of a layer, click the name of the layer you want to change in the
Layers table. Then, type a new name and press ENTER.
See Also
Layer Groups Command (on page 595)
Layer Groups Dialog Box (on page 595)

Layer Groups Command

Creates, modifies, or deletes layers and layer groups. You can only work with layers on the
current working sheet. This command is available only on the Tools menu.
See Also
Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group (on page 595)
Create a Layer Group (on page 594)
Layer Groups Dialog Box (on page 595)

Layer Groups Dialog Box

Creates, modifies, or deletes layers and layer groups. You can only work with layers for the
active sheet in the active window. You cannot delete the active layer or a layer that has
elements placed on it.
Layers — Displays a list of all the layers on the current drawing sheet so that you can create
new layers. You can type the name of a layer in the Layers box to create a new layer. You can
also add or remove layers in a layer group with the Layers table. When you select a group in
the Groups table, the check boxes in the Grouped column of the Layers table indicate the
status of the layers. If the check box is set, the layer is a member of the group that you selected
in the Groups table. If the check box is cleared, the layer is not a member of the group.
Groups — Displays all layer groups for the current sheet. You can define a new group by typing
a name in the Groups box. You can select a group from the Groups table to display the layers
in the group in the Groups table. To select a group, you must click the button on the left side of
the row for a group. You can use the Description column to add a description to the layer
group. Typing a name of an existing layer group makes that group active. You can then add or
remove layers in a group.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 595

 Composite Drawings

See Also
Layer Groups Command (on page 595)
Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group (on page 595)
Create a Layer Group (on page 594)

Delete a Layer Group

1. Click Tools > Layer Groups.
2. On the Layer Groups dialog box, in the Groups table, click on the layer group you want to
delete.
3. Press DELETE.
See Also
Layer Groups Command (on page 595)
Layer Groups Dialog Box (on page 595)

Object Linking and Embedding in Composite

Drawings
Smart Electrical supports Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) to provide a flexible and efficient
means of inserting and working with external objects. An object is data created in another
application and inserted in a composite drawing. Part of the power OLE provides is the ability to
update objects automatically if they've been modified in their source document, or to edit objects
in place.
Smart Electrical is fully compatible with OLE-compliant software, such as Microsoft Office. You
can transfer text, numbers, sound bites, or intelligent graphics between documents that were
created with Smart Electrical and other Microsoft Office applications. For example, you can use
Microsoft Word to create a materials report and then display the report in your composite
drawing. You can also link a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet to a composite drawing. You can then
use the spreadsheet in the composite drawing. You can even create a document that contains a
drawing created by Smart Electrical, notes from Microsoft Word, a spreadsheet created by
Excel, and an image created in Photoshop.
You can insert objects into your composite drawings using any of the following methods:
▪ Linking
▪ Embedding
▪ Cutting/Copying-and-Pasting
After inserting an object into a composite drawing, you can use it as any other
auxiliary graphic. You can associate it with a plant item, group it with other graphical elements,
and so forth.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 596

 Composite Drawings

SmartFrames
Any time a data file is inserted as embedded or linked, or pasted into a composite drawing in
Smart Electrical, a SmartFrame is created containing the object. A SmartFrame usually appears
as a rectangular outline in a document file, but it can also have other boundary type shapes
(elliptical, for example).

SmartFrames provide ways for these objects to be manipulated, including moving, scaling,
rotating, mirroring, and cropping. SmartFrames also contain properties for defining borders,
styles and placement options. You can access these properties via the SmartFrames Properties
dialog box.

Linking
Linking takes data that's stored in one location (referred to as the source document) and places
a reference to it in another location (referred to as the destination document). Linking allows you
to use consistently updated versions of an object in multiple composite drawings. You can edit
the linked object only by opening the source document and making your changes there. When
you change the original data, the linked data automatically updates. You can link an object in a
composite drawing by inserting the information with Object on the Insert menu.

Relative Paths for Linked Objects

Linked objects placed in a composite drawing are saved as relative links. You can think of a
relative link as being a "child" of the composite drawing in which it is inserted. A relative link
points to the location of the linked file in relation to the "parent" drawing. For example, a link to
Building\Doors\door1.igr points to a file called door1.igr, which is located in the Building/Doors
subdirectory inside the directory or folder where the parent drawing is located. The use of
relative links in your composite drawings enables you to create drawings that are portable,
meaning you can copy or move an entire directory structure to another location without updating
the file paths.
The parent drawing must already exist as a saved file prior to inserting the
linked object; otherwise, there is no "relative" location.

Embedding
Embedding takes data from the source document and stores a copy of the information in the
destination document. The copy becomes an independent version of the original information.
Although editing the data in the original application has no effect on the copied version, you can
edit the embedded object in-place from within the composite drawing. You can embed an object
inside a composite drawing by inserting the information with Object on the Insert menu.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 597

 Composite Drawings

Linking and Embedding with Copy/Cut-and-Paste

You're not limited to using the Smart Electrical Insert menu to link or embed files. You can move
information between documents or between locations using Cut, Copy, and Paste on the Edit
menu in any OLE-compliant software.
You can also move information between Smart Electrical and other software by selecting the
information in a document or a document in the Windows Explorer and dragging it to another
location or another document. With this method, you simply select the information that you want
to move, press the left mouse button, and drag the document to a location inside Smart
Electrical or another Office application. To finish the operation, release the left mouse button.
If you want to copy the information, and not move it, press Alt while dragging the object.
When you drop the information, a shortcut menu appears beside the pointer. The options on the
shortcut menu allow you to select how you want to place the information in the destination
document, such as pasting, linking, and so forth.
If the software that you are copying or pasting to cannot edit the information, it will automatically
store, or embed, the information in the document. You can then edit the embedded information
with the software that created it. If you cannot edit the information, the information is displayed
as a static picture.

When Do I Link or Embed?

Choosing whether to link or embed depends, in large part, on how you intend to use your
composite drawing. Linking is useful when you want to share information in many different
places and have that information update automatically. For example, if you want to display a
composite drawing in several different documents, you can link the drawing inside each
document. Then, later, when you edit the drawing, each document automatically displays the
results of the drawing updates. Another consideration is file size. Because linking only adds a
reference to a file, the data does not significantly increase the size of the composite drawing. If
you want to keep the document's size small, considering linking the data.
If you place dimensions or constraints to items located within a reference file, it
is recommended that you do not manipulate those items in the reference file without first
deleting the dimension or constraint in the Master file. Such manipulations could cause
problems in the Master file.
If the document's size is not an important factor, then you might want to use embedding.
Because an embedded object becomes part of the composite drawing, it will increase the file
size. Embedding is also useful when you want to keep your data in one file, or if you want to
distribute the data among several people who may not have access to the source application.
For example, if you want to send out several drawings for review, you can embed your drawing
document into a Word document and mail the Word document to each reviewer.
Embedding information is also a good choice if the information does not require frequent
updating.
If you want to embed an object or edit an embedded object, you must have
access to the software that created it.
When using connectors to connect OLE objects in a composite drawing, the
connector points are not visible.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 598

 Composite Drawings

How Embedding Works

When you embed data from another program, the object becomes part of the composite
drawing. When you double-click the embedded object in a composite drawing, the software in
which the object was created opens so that you can edit it. When you go back to the composite
drawing in Smart Electrical, the object updates automatically with the changes that you made.
The changes, however, exist only in the current drawing.
You can embed existing information or create a new object and then embed it.

Embedding an Object
Suppose you want to use Word to add comments to a composite drawing. First, click Insert >
Object. On the dialog box, click Create New and then click Microsoft Word in the list. After you
click OK, Word opens so that you can edit the object. If Word is already open, the new
document creates a new window in Word. After you type your notes, click Update on the File
menu in Word. You should then switch back to the composite drawing. A box the size of the
object appears beside the pointer. You can then click on the drawing sheet to place the Word
object and display your notes on the drawing sheet. You can use this same process with any
documents created with Office-compatible or OLE- compliant software.
If you want to insert some notes that you already have in a Word document, you can use the
Insert > Object command. On the dialog box, you should select Create From File and then
enter the name of the Word document to insert the entire document into the composite drawing.
If you want to embed the object, make sure the Link check box is not set.
You can also embed information that you copied from another document. Copy the information,
and then switch to the composite drawing and use Paste Special to paste the information as an
embedded object.

Editing an Embedded Object

To edit an embedded object, you can double-click the object to open the software that created
the object. The menus and toolbars of the current software are temporarily replaced by the
menus and toolbars of the software that just opened.
The software that created both documents must support OLE.

Embed an Object
Embed a New Object
1. With a composite drawing open, click Insert > Object.
2. On the Insert Object dialog box, click Create New.
3. In the Object Type box, click the type that describes the software in which you want to
create the object, and then click OK.
The contents of the list depend on which applications installed on your computer support
linking and embedding.
4. In the source application, create an object that you want to insert into your composite
drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 599

 Composite Drawings

5. Return to Smart Electrical by doing one of the following:

▪ If the object was created in another application that is in a separate window, click Exit
on the File menu in that application.
▪ If the software temporarily replaces some of the Smart Electrical menus and toolbars,
click anywhere outside the embedded object.
▪ When you return to Smart Electrical, a box the size of the object appears beside the
pointer. You can click on the drawing sheet to place the object that you edited or
created. While the box appears beside the pointer, if you press the ESCAPE key, the
object will be placed at the default location.
6. To embed the new object in the open composite drawing, click in the drawing where you
want the embed object to appear.
7. Save the composite drawing before exiting.

Embed an Existing Object

1. With a composite drawing open, click Insert > Object.
2. On the Insert Object dialog box, click Create from File.
3. Select the Link check box.
This command instructs the software to update the embedded object in
your composite drawing every time there is a change in the source object. If you do not
select this check box, the embedded object will not be updated if the source file changes.
4. Do one of the following:
▪ In the File box, type the file path to the object that you want to embed in your composite
drawing.
▪ Click Browse to locate the required file.
5. Click OK to return to your composite drawing.
6. To embed the new object in the open composite drawing, click in the drawing where you
want the embed object to appear.

Edit an Embedded Object with the Source Software

1. Double-click the embedded object.
2. Edit the object.
3. Do one of the following:
▪ If you are editing the object in a separate application window, click Exit on the File menu to
return to Smart Electrical.
▪ If you are editing the object in software that temporarily replaces the Smart Electrical menus
and toolbars, click anywhere outside the embedded object to return to Smart Electrical.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 600

 Composite Drawings

Insert Object Command

Inserts objects into a document through linking and embedding. The difference between linking
and embedding is how data is stored and updated. The Insert Object command inserts any
OLE 2.0 enabled object, such as a Word document, .AVI document, or CAD document. The
inserted object can then be edited by double-clicking it.
▪ When you link an object to a document, the document stores information about where the
object is located—the object is not stored in the document. When you embed an object in a
document, a copy of the object is stored in the document.
▪ When you make changes to a linked object, all documents that have links to that object
update. When you make changes to an embedded object, only the copy of the object that is
stored in the document updates.

Insert Object Dialog Box

Create New — Creates a new object to insert into the composite drawing that is currently open.
After you insert the object, you will be able to automatically enter information into it.
Create from File — Inserts a picture of the file contents into your drawing. The picture will be
linked to the file so that changes to the file will be reflected in your drawing. You will be able to
edit the inserted object with the program used to create the file.
File — Provides a space to type the file name you want to insert into your document.
Browse — Provides a dialog box for locating the file you want to insert into your document.
Link — Allows you to choose whether you want to link or embed your file.
Result — Shows the type of file you are inserting. This information changes depending on the
type of file you are inserting.

Open an OLE Object for Editing

1. Select an OLE object.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ If the object is linked, click Edit Linked Worksheet Object > Open to open the source
file in which the object was created.
▪ If the object is embedded, double-click the object to edit it.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 601

 Composite Drawings

Edit a Linked Object

1. Double-click a linked object from within the composite drawing to open up the source file
and make any necessary changes.
2. In the source file, make the changes you want to the linked object.
3. In the source file, click File > Save to save the changes in the source file.
4. In the source file, click File > Exit to return to the composite drawing.

Close a Linked Object's Source Document and Save the

Changes
Close is available only after you double-click an object and edit it.
▪ Click File > Close. The changes you made to the object are saved to memory.
When you use Close, you are not asked to save the document.

Printing Composite Drawings

Several options are available for printing out composite drawings:
▪ Printing out a drawing that is currently open.
▪ Background printing of one or more drawings from the Electrical Index.
▪ Background printing of one or more drawings from the EDE.

Print Out an Open Composite Drawing

1. With the drawing open, do one of the following:
▪ Click File > Print.

▪ Click on the main toolbar.

2. On the Print dialog box, select your print settings and then click OK.

Background Printing of One or More Composite Drawings

You can print out one or more drawings without opening them.
If one of the selected drawings is out of date, the software informs you of this
fact and prompts you to select an option for printing: either the up-to-date or the out-of-date
version of the drawing.
1. Do one of the following:
▪ In the Electrical Index, select one or more drawings in the List View pane.
▪ In the EDE, select one or more drawings that you want to print.
2. Do one of the following:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 602

 Composite Drawings

▪ Click File > Print.

▪ Click on the main toolbar.

▪ Right-click the selected drawings and then on the shortcut menu, click Print.
3. On the Print dialog box, select your print settings and then click OK.
If you have opened a composite drawing but you want to print out a number of
other composite drawings, make sure that application has its focus in the List View pane of the
Electrical Index and not in the open drawing. If you click in the open drawing, this will shift the
focus to the drawing and the application will print out the open drawing and not the drawings that
you selected in the List View pane of the Electrical Index.

Automatic Saving of Composite Drawings

The software automatically saves an open drawing when a change has been made in the
drawing. This happens when one of the following actions is performed in an open drawing:
▪ Grouping or ungrouping graphical elements
▪ Placing or removing a plant item
▪ Placing or removing a symbol
▪ Attaching or removing a label
▪ Associating or dissociating graphical elements
▪ Placing or removing a connector
▪ Deleting an auxiliary graphic
▪ Copying, pasting, or cutting a graphical element.

Resolving Out-of-Date Issues in Composite Drawings

During the course of the life cycle of your plant, some of your composite drawing can become
out of date. You can do a number of things to remedy this situation:
▪ When opening a composite drawing, the software refreshes the data and some of the out-of
date issues are resolved automatically on the fly. For example, changes made to the
properties of plant items or deletion of plant items are resolved on the fly. Also, changes in
the properties of a drawing or revision changes are also resolved automatically.
▪ When printing a single drawing without opening it or when printing several drawings in batch
mode the software prompts you to select an appropriate option for printing. You can print out
an up-to-date drawing but the out-of-date issues will still remain unresolved until you open
the drawings or resolve them manually.
▪ In an open drawing, you can always press F5 to refresh the data. Don't forget to save the
drawing to retain the changes.
▪ There are several out-of date situations that the software can identify for you by running the
Out-of-Date Summary Report. When running this report, some of the issues are resolved

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 603

 Composite Drawings

automatically. For details about this report, see Generate an Out-of-Date Summary Report
(on page 604) for details.) When running this report, the software identifies and resolves
automatically the changes in the document template or if the template has been replaced.
▪ Smart Electrical cannot resolve all out-of-date issues automatically. However, running the
Out-of-Date Summary Report can detect and identify the out-of-date issues. You can
then resolve these issues manually in the specified drawings. The report specifies the
drawings and items that need to be fixed. You can see which items in the drawings are out
of date and resolve these issues manually in the relevant drawings. Here are the situations
that the software detects and specifies in the Out-of-Date Summary Report:
▪ Modification of symbols or labels (can only be resolved manually in the specified
drawings).
▪ Missing symbols or labels (can only be resolved manually in the specified drawings).
▪ Changes in the association of custom symbols (can only be resolved manually in the
specified drawings).
▪ Changes in the properties of related items (can be resolved by pressing F5 in the
drawings).
▪ Changes in the select lists (can be resolved by pressing F5 in the drawings).
▪ Changes in the units of measure (can be resolved by pressing F5 in the drawings).
▪ Changes in plant item properties, symbol files, or symbology filters that have been set in
Options Manager (Options > Item Type Symbology > Define).

Generate an Out-of-Date Summary Report

You can generate an out-of-date summary report for the composite drawings in your plant. This
report facilitates the resolution of out-of-date issues in your composite drawings.
The report reflects the data contained in the drawings only.

Generate an Out-of-Date report for all plant drawings

▪ On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Actions > Out-of-Date Composite Drawings
Summary Report.

Generate an Out-of-Date report for selected drawings

1. In the Electrical Index, select the composite drawings for which you want to generate the
report.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Actions > Out-of-Date Composite Drawings
Summary Report.
▪ Right-click the selected drawings and then on the shortcut menu, click Generate an
Out-of-Date Summary Report.

▪ This report cannot be customized.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 604

 Composite Drawings

▪ For details on how to resolve out of date issues, see Resolving Out-of-Date Issues in
Composite Drawings (on page 603).
If you drag a non-default symbol from the Catalog Explorer to a composite
drawing and then associate it with a plant item, this symbol will appear as out-of-date in the
summary report. You can ignore this indication or change the default symbol for that particular
item type.

Converting Conventional SLDs to Composite SLDs

The software provides the ability to convert a conventional single line diagram to a composite
SLD. At the end of the conversion process, the software creates a new composite SLD and
retains the original conventional drawing intact. The newly created drawing becomes a fully
functional composite SLD.
The conversion process entails the following:
▪ All the graphical elements and their positions are retained with the following exceptions:
▪ PDBs are represented by a rectangle with text. The associations with plant items are
retained.
▪ Buses are represented by lines with text. The associations with plant items are retained.
▪ Cells are represented by a rectangle with text. The associations with plant items are
retained.
▪ All the associations of graphical elements with plant items are retained.
▪ All the cables are converted to cable symbols with connectors.
▪ All the labels and symbols and their associations are retained.
▪ Redlining elements are retained on the redlining layer of the new composite drawing.
▪ All document revisions of the original drawing are retained and archived revisions can be
viewed.
The name of the new composite drawing is the same as the original conventional drawing name
followed by a sequence number.
The new composite drawing is attached to a composite drawing template that has the same
name as the conventional drawing template. If such a template is absent from the folder
specified in Options Manager Locations window, the software attaches the new composite SLD
to the default composite SLD template.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 605

 Composite Drawings

Convert a Conventional SLD to a Composite SLD

1. Open a conventional single line diagram. For details, see Opening Existing Single Line
Diagrams (on page 501).
2. On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Actions > Convert to Composite Drawing.
At the end of the process, the software informs you that the process has been
completed successfully and shows the name of the new drawing. If the conversion is completed
partially, you can either delete the new drawing or add the missing elements manually.

Associating Compound Symbols with Plant Items

Once you have placed a symbol on a drawing, you can associate it with a plant item. You carry
out this association by dragging a plant item from the Electrical Index to the symbol in the open
drawing.

Associating Compound and Nested Symbols

When associating a compound symbol with a plant item that has child items, the software
automatically associates the child plant items with the nested symbols that reside in the
associated compound symbol. For example, a circuit in your plant can have several child items
such as a circuit breaker, a fuse, and starter. If you associate a compound symbol with this
circuit, the nested symbols residing in that compound symbol will automatically be associated
with child items of that plant circuit. The software identifies the item type of each nested symbol
and associates it with the appropriate plant child item. In case there are several child items that
belong to the same item type, the software uses the sequence in group number to make the
appropriate association.
Therefore, it is recommended that you create your compound symbols to fit the structure of your
plant items. Here is another example:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 606

 Composite Drawings

A circuit in your plant that has two fuses, a starter, and a circuit breaker. We recommend that
you use a circuit assembly symbol that looks like so:

As you can see, there are two nested fuse symbols, each one identified by a number shown on
the ribbon. Once you associate this circuit assembly compound symbol with your plant item, the
software automatically associates the nested symbols with the child items of that circuit. The
nested fuse symbol whose number is 1 (as shown above) will be associated with the plant fuse
that has the lowest sequence in group number and the second nested fuse symbol will be
associated with the second fuse belonging to that plant circuit.
For more information about how to make the actual association, see Associate a Symbol with a
Plant Item (on page 609).

Dissociating Compound and Nested Symbols

When dissociating a compound symbol from a plant item, the software also automatically
dissociates all the nested symbols. Therefore, if you want to dissociate a nested symbol or
change the association of a nested symbol, do not dissociate the compound symbol.
For more information, see Dissociate a Symbol from a Plant Item (on page 611).

Changing the Association of Nested Symbols

As stated above, the software automatically associates nested symbols with the appropriate
child items of the plant item associated with the compound symbol. It is not possible to associate
nested symbols with plant items without first associating the compound symbol first. Once the
nested symbols have been associated, you can manually change the association of the nested
symbols by using the Smart Selection tool to select the required nested symbol.
You must first dissociate the nested symbol from its plant item and only then make a new
association. You can use the Smart Selection tool to select the required nested symbol.
Note the following:
▪ The software validates that the plant item that you selected for the association is a child item
of the main plant item in the compound symbol. If the plant item that you selected for this

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 607

 Composite Drawings

association is a child item of another plant item that is not related to the current symbol, the
software displays a message letting you decide whether to make this association or not.
▪ If there are more child plant items than nested symbols in the compound symbol, the
software automatically associates those child plant items that have the highest sequence in
group value. Those child plant with the lowest sequence in group values for which there
aren't enough nested symbols will not be associated with any symbol.
▪ If there are more nested symbols than child plant items, these nested symbols will remain
unassociated.
▪ If you change the sequence in group of a child plant item, you need to change the
association manually.
▪ If you delete the main plant item, all the nested symbols as well as the parent symbol in that
compound symbol become dissociated.

Deleting Plant Items from the Plant

When deleting a plant item in the Electrical Index, the software now automatically updates the
associated compound symbol. The software behaves as follows:
▪ If the deleted plant item was associated with the parent compound symbol, the software
dissociates the remaining plant items from the nested symbols and automatically refreshes
the compound symbol in the drawing. In the example shown below, deleting the motor M-3A
in the Electrical Index will cause the software to dissociate the heater H-M-3A and the
CS-2 control station from the nested symbols. The compound symbol itself will remain
intact. The software performs this update automatically on the fly.

▪ If the deleted plant item is associated with one of the nested symbols, the software
dissociates the nested symbol from the deleted plant item and automatically refreshes the
display of the compound symbol in the drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 608

 Composite Drawings

Associate a Symbol with a Plant Item

The following procedure deals with the association of regular and compound symbols. For
nested symbols, see Associate a Nested Symbol with a Plant Item (on page 610).
You can associate a symbol with a plant item by using one of the following methods:
▪ Dragging a plant item to a symbol that has already been placed on a drawing.
▪ Selecting a symbol in the drawing and associating it with a plant item selected in the Find
dialog box.

Associate a Symbol by Dragging

1. Open a composite drawing and place the required symbols on the drawing. For details,
see Place a Symbol on a Drawing.
2. In the Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer, select an appropriate electrical item.
3. Drag the electrical item to an appropriate symbol in the open composite drawing.
4. Once the dragged electrical item is within the boundaries of the drawing, press and hold the
CTRL key.
5. Release the mouse button and the CTRL key to make the association.

▪ You can release the CTRL key once the indicator turns from to , which means
that the dragged item is already within the drawing boundaries.

▪ The indicator means that no association is possible.

▪ The indicator means that an association is possible if you release the mouse button
when pointing to a symbol.

▪ If you drag a plant item to a symbol that is already associated with a plant item, the
indicator appears. If you release the mouse button at this point, a message appears
prompting you to choose whether you want to change the association or keep the
original one.

Find an Electrical Item and Associate It with a Symbol

1. Select a symbol in the drawing and do one of the following:

▪ On the Actions toolbar, click .

▪ On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Actions > Associate with Electrical Item.
▪ Right-click the selected symbol and then on the shortcut menu, click Associate with
Electrical Item.
2. Use the Find dialog box to find the electrical item with which you want to associate the
selected symbol.
On the Find dialog box, the equipment type is selected automatically according to
the item type of the symbol. For example, if you selected a motor symbol, only Motor is
available in the Equipment type list.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 609

 Composite Drawings

3. Click OK on the Find dialog box to make the association.

▪ After selecting a symbol associated with a plant item, the properties of that plant item
are displayed in the Properties window. For a compound symbol, expand Select Set to
view the plant items associated with the nested symbols.
▪ You can open the Common Properties of an associated plant item by right-clicking the
symbol and then on the shortcut menu, selecting Common Properties. For a
compound symbol, this is possible only if the nested symbols are not associated with
any plant items. You can select a nested symbol to display the Common Properties of
the associated plant item.
▪ To find the associated plant item in the Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer,
right-click the symbol in the composite drawing and then on the shortcut menu click
Find in Electrical Index or Find in Electrical Engineer.
After associating a symbol with a plant item, the smart text labels show the
property values of the associated plant item as defined in the symbol label. Updating these
properties on the same machine where the drawing is currently open automatically updates the
smart text labels on the open drawing.
If, for some reason, such a label contains no plant item property value, you can instruct the
software to display a specific text indicator that you define in the General Settings of Options
Manager. You can, however, leave out the text indicator, if needed. It is always advisable to
press F5 to refresh the drawing data after every change that can affect all your plant drawings.
For details, see the General Settings Window topic in the Options Manager Guide.
When associating cables, buses, conductors, segments, and cableways with symbols, it
is advisable to associate them with symbols that belong to the connector type. This way you
will be able to connect these items on both sides of the connector and design connector paths
on the drawing as you require. Connector type symbols are especially useful when designing
cable routing. You can select a connector symbol in the Catalog Explorer and immediately start
designing the routing by clicking in the appropriate spots on the drawing. You create connector
symbols in Catalog Manager. For details, see the Catalog Manager User's Guide.

Associate a Nested Symbol with a Plant Item

Nested symbols reside within compound symbols. Do the following to associate a nested
symbol with a plant item.
1. In a compound symbol, use the Smart Selection tool or QuickPick to select an individual
nested symbol and do one of the following:

▪ On the Actions toolbar, click .

▪ On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Actions > Associate with Electrical Item.
▪ Right-click the selected symbol and then on the shortcut menu, click Associate with
Electrical Item.
2. Use the Find dialog box to find the electrical item with which you want to associate the
selected symbol.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 610

 Composite Drawings

On the Find dialog box, from the Equipment type list, you can select only the
equipment type that is appropriate for the selected symbol. For example, if you selected a
motor symbol, only Motor is available in the Equipment type list.
3. Click OK on the Find dialog box to make the association.

▪ After selecting a symbol associated with a plant item, the properties of that plant item
are displayed in the Properties window. For a compound symbol, expand Select Set to
view the plant items associated with the nested symbols.
▪ You can open the Common Properties of an associated plant item by right-clicking the
symbol and then on the shortcut menu, selecting Common Properties. For a
compound symbol, this is possible only if the nested symbols are not associated with
any plant items. You can select a nested symbol to display the Common Properties of
the associated plant item.
▪ To find the associated plant item in the Electrical Index or Electrical Engineer,
right-click the symbol in the composite drawing and then on the shortcut menu click
Find in Electrical Index or Find in Electrical Engineer.
After associating a symbol with a plant item, the smart text labels show the
property values of the associated plant item as defined in the symbol label. Updating these
properties on the same machine where the drawing is currently open automatically updates the
smart text labels on the open drawing.
If, for some reason, such a label contains no plant item property value, you can instruct the
software to display a specific text indicator that you define in the General Settings of Options
Manager. You can, however, leave out the text indicator, if needed. It is always advisable to
press F5 to refresh the drawing data after every change that can affect all your plant drawings.
For details, see the General Settings Window topic in the Options Manager Guide.
When associating cables, buses, conductors, segments, and cableways with symbols, it
is advisable to associate them with symbols that belong to the connector type. This way you
will be able to connect these items on both sides of the connector and design connector paths
on the drawing as you require. Connector type symbols are especially useful when designing
cable routing. You can select a connector symbol in the Catalog Explorer and immediately start
designing the routing by clicking in the appropriate spots on the drawing. You create connector
symbols in Catalog Manager. For details, see the Catalog Manager User's Guide.

Dissociate a Symbol from a Plant Item

This procedure explains how to dissociate one or more symbols from plant items.
1. In an open composite drawing, select one or more symbols that you want to dissociate from
plant items.

▪ You can make your selection by holding down the CTRL key.
▪ You can select symbols and other graphical elements as needed.
2. Do one of the following:

▪ On the Actions toolbar, click .

▪ On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Actions > Dissociate from Electrical Item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 611

 Composite Drawings

▪ Right-click a symbol and then on the shortcut menu, click Dissociate from Electrical
Item.
3. In the message box that opens, click Yes to confirm the dissociation.

▪ To dissociate a nested symbol in a compound symbol, use the Smart Selection tool or
QuickPick to select the nested symbol and then repeat step 2 in the above procedure.
▪ To dissociate a compound symbol and all its nested symbols, after right-clicking the
compound symbol, click Dissociate All Elements Including All Nested Elements on the
shortcut menu.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 612

Using Smart Catalog Explorer
Smart Catalog Explorer is an interface used to view and manipulate an electronic catalog
containing drawing symbols and their associated properties. Conceptually, Smart Catalog
Explorer resembles a manufacturer's catalog with pictures of parts to build a plant. The catalog
tree view contains drawing items organized by item type that reflects the folder structure under
the Symbols folder in the reference data and also items designated by users as Favorites. Smart
Catalog Explorer includes the following features for easy navigation:
▪ Favorites section
▪ Quick Catalog
▪ Flags used to mark catalog items for searching

Navigating in Smart Catalog Explorer

Smart Catalog Explorer consists of the following navigational areas:
▪ Toolbar
▪ Tree view
▪ Icon view / List view

Toolbar
The toolbar includes the following commands:

▪ Expand All / Collapse All — Expands or collapses the entire tree view.

▪ Tile Vertically / Tile Horizontally — Toggles between the tiling of the tree view and
icons or list view vertically (tree view on top) or horizontally (tree view on the left).

▪ Icons / List — Toggles the display of the catalog items as tiles (where each tile displays
an icon, the symbol name, and a tool tip) or a grid showing a list of properties including the
icon for the item.

▪ Display Favorites — Displays the list of catalog items assigned to the Favorites folders.

▪ Quick Catalog — Displays the list of catalog items assigned to the Quick Catalog.

▪ Import — Imports to Smart Catalog Explorer a .bin file containing Favorites, Quick
Catalog, and Flags settings.

▪ Export — Exports all Favorites, Quick Catalog, and Flags settings from Smart Catalog
Explorer to a .bin file.

Search Box
The Search box is used to find items by typing a string that is part of the symbol name or a
single flag. The scope of the search is on the currently selected folder and its sub-folders. If the
folder in the tree view is changed, the search is canceled.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 613

 Using Smart Catalog Explorer

Searches are case-insensitive.

Tree View
The tree view displays a hierarchy of nodes that contain catalog items. You can navigate
through the tree view by clicking the different nodes. A small right-facing triangle to the left of the
node name indicates that the node contains sub-nodes. Click the node to expand it. To close a
node, click the triangle to the left of the open node name. If the selected node contains any
drawing symbols, the software displays them in the icon / list view.
If the Symbols node is not displayed in the tree view, ensure that in Options
Manager, the Catalog Explorer Root Path value does not include a trailing '\' (backslash)
character.

Icon View / List View

When a folder is selected in the tree view, the icon view or list view displays all the symbols in
that folder and its sub-folders, organized by item class. From these views, you can select
catalog items before placing them in a stockpile. You can specify the view style for the symbols
in the list view by toggling the Icons / List toolbar command.
▪ Icon view — Displays the catalog items as tiles. Each tile shows an image of the item, the
item's name, including the file extension (.sym for symbols or .pid for assemblies), and a tool
tip with additional information. Below the image, a toolbar appears with several commands.
▪ List view — Displays the catalog items in a grid, showing the following options or
properties:
▪ Toolbar commands — These commands are identical to the commands that appear in
the icon view.
▪ Catalog item image
▪ Item's name
▪ File Type, which can be Symbol (.sym file) or Assembly (.pid file)
▪ Item Class
▪ Folder Path

Icon View / List View Commands

The following commands are available:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 614

 Using Smart Catalog Explorer

▪ Add to Quick Catalog — Assigns the item to the Quick Catalog and moves that item to
the top of the view area. If more than one item is assigned to the Quick Catalog for a
particular folder and its sub-folders, the items are displayed in the order in which they were
assigned. When a catalog item is assigned to the Quick Catalog, the icon changes to ; to
remove an assigned catalog item from the Quick Catalog, click this icon.

▪ Add to Favorites — Opens the Add to Favorites dialog box, from where you can
select an existing Favorites folder or create a new folder in which to add the catalog item.
When a catalog item is included under the Favorites folder, the icon changes to .

▪ Flags — Opens the Flags dialog box. Flags are used to assign additional search
strings to an item apart from the item's name. When one or more flags are assigned to a
catalog item, the icon changes to .

Smart Catalog Explorer Command (View >Toolbars)

Turns the display of Smart Catalog Explorer on or off.

Display or Hide Smart Catalog Explorer

To toggle the display of Smart Catalog Explorer, do one of the following.
▪ Click View > Display > Smart Catalog Explorer.

▪ On the toolbar, click the Smart Catalog Explorer icon .

▪ Right-click the empty area in the main toolbar and on the shortcut menu, click Smart
Catalog Explorer.
▪ Click View > Toolbars and in the Toolbars dialog box, select or clear Smart Catalog
Explorer.

▪ In the menu, a check mark appears when the Smart Catalog Explorer is displayed.
▪ When displayed, you can dock or undock the Smart Catalog Explorer window. When
undocked, you can close the window by clicking the Close box in the top right corner.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 615

 Using Smart Catalog Explorer

Working with Smart Catalog Explorer Items

From Smart Catalog Explorer, you can place items on a composite drawing sheet.

Place an Item from Catalog Explorer

1. In the tree view, navigate to the folder containing the catalog item you want to work with.
2. In the icon / list view, select the tile or row of the required catalog item.
3. Drag and Drop the selected item in the required position in the drawing to place the item.

▪ If the item that you place has multiple possible orientations in relation to other items, you
can use the Configuration (QuickPick) tool to select the appropriate placement for the item.
▪ You can enter values for properties of the placed item by right-clicking the item, and then
selecting Properties to display the Properties window.
▪ Labels are a special class of item. You can place labels with one-point placement or
two-point placement, depending on the label.

Using the Quick Catalog Feature

You can assign frequently-used symbols to the Quick Catalog to make them immediately
available for quick selection without the need to navigate the folders in the tree view or to use
the Search feature. When you open the Quick Catalog, symbols are organized by item class. In
addition, when you click a folder in the tree view containing symbols, those symbols that are in
the Quick Catalog appear at the top of the icon view or list view.

Add an item to the Quick Catalog

1. In the tree view, navigate to the folder containing the catalog item you want to work with.
2. In the icon / list view, select the tile or row of the required catalog item.

3. In the tile or the leftmost column, click Add to Quick Catalog .

The icon changes to and the catalog item moves to the top in the list view or, in the icon
view, to the Quick Catalog section before the other symbols in the item class.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 616

 Using Smart Catalog Explorer

View items in the Quick Catalog

▪ On the toolbar, click Quick Catalog .
The Quick Catalog appears with the items shown in the same order as they appear in the
Reference Data folder paths.
When you select a folder in the tree view with items that are included in the Quick
Catalog, those items appear at the top of the list (in list view) or under the Quick Catalog at the
top (in icon view) in the order in which they were assigned to the Quick Catalog; that is, with the
first assigned item at the beginning.

Remove items from the Quick Catalog

1. Do one of the following:

▪ On the toolbar, click Quick Catalog .

▪ In the tree view, select a folder that includes items in the Quick Catalog.
2. For each catalog item you want to remove, in the tile (icon view) or the leftmost column (list
view), click Remove from Quick Catalog .
In the icon or list view, the item moves back to its original position under the item
class and the icon changes to .

3. After removing items in the Quick Catalog, click Quick Catalog to refresh the display so
that all removed items no longer appear.

Using the Favorites Feature

You can assign frequently-used symbols to the Favorites folders to organize and categorize
them for your convenience without the need to navigate the folders in the tree view or to use the
Search feature to find specific symbols.

Add an item to Favorites

1. In the tree view, navigate to the folder containing the catalog item you want to work with.
2. In the icon / list view, select the tile or row of the required catalog item.

3. In the tile or the leftmost column, click Add to Favorites .

The icon changes to and the Add to Favorites dialog box opens.
4. In the dialog box, do one of the following:
▪ Navigate to an existing sub-folder below the Favorites folder.
▪ Click the Favorites folder or a sub-folder and then click New Folder.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 617

 Using Smart Catalog Explorer

5. For a new folder, in the label box, type the folder name.

▪ To save a new folder, click outside the label box or press Insert on the keyboard.
▪ To remove a newly added folder without saving, press Delete on the keyboard.
6. Click Save.
Use the Cancel command to cancel the inclusion of a symbol in a new folder. When
you click this command, the new folder is created and the symbol is added in the main
Favorites folder.

View items in Favorites

1. Do one of the following:

▪ On the toolbar, click Display Favorites .

▪ In the tree view, click the Favorites folder.
2. Right-click the folders and click Expand to expand the folder view to the required sub-folder
level.
At each folder level under Favorites, the symbols in the selected folder and in all
sub-folders below that level are displayed.

Remove items from Favorites

1. Do one of the following:

▪ On the toolbar, click Display Favorites .

▪ In the tree view, click the Favorites folder.
2. Right-click the folders and click Expand to expand the folder view to the required sub-folder
level.
3. For each Favorites item you want to remove, in the tile (icon view) or the leftmost column
(list view), click Remove from Favorites .
You can remove from Favorites all items from a particular folder and from the
sub-folders at all levels below that folder along with deletion of those folders (other than at the
Favorites root folder level). To do this, right-click the folder and on the shortcut menu, click
Remove.

Using the Search Features

The Search feature allows you to find catalog items based on their names or assigned flags by
typing a string that is part of the symbol name or a single flag.

▪ The scope of the search is on the currently selected folder and its sub-folders.
▪ Searches are case-insensitive.
▪ If the folder in the tree view is changed, the search is canceled.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 618

 Using Smart Catalog Explorer

Search for an item in Smart Catalog Explorer

1. If you know the folder in which you want to search, in the tree view, navigate to that folder;
otherwise, click the Symbols or Favorites folder.
The name of the top-level folder appears in the icon or list view area.
2. In the Search box at the top right corner of Smart Catalog Explorer, type a text string
corresponding to all or part of the name or of one flag for the symbols you want to search
for.

Searches are case-insensitive.

3. Click to start the search.

Items found in the search results appear in the icon or list view area sorted by their
folder location, with items in the Quick Catalog at the top.

Assign flags to an item

Flags provide an additional means of searching for catalog items other than by their names. By
assigning one or more flags to multiple symbols, you can search for symbols in different folders
that have identical flags.

▪ You can only add a specific flag once per symbol; however, because flags are
case-sensitive, you can add the same string more than once to a symbol if the cases are not
identical, for example: AAA, AAa, aaa.
▪ Searches are case-insensitive, therefore typing the string 'aaa' in the Search box will show
symbols that have any of the flags: AAA, AAa, or aaa.
▪ There is no limit to the number of flags you can assign to a symbol; however, when
searching using flags, you can only type all or part of the string for a single flag per search.
1. In the tree view, navigate to the folder containing the catalog item you want to work with.
2. In the icon / list view, select the tile or row of the required catalog item.

3. In the tile or the leftmost column, click Flags .

The icon changes to and the Flags dialog box opens.

You can also click the icon for an item that already has one or more flags where
you want to assign additional flags.
4. In the text box where the label 'Add a Flag' appears, type the flags you want to assign to the
item, separated by commas.
5. Click Add.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 619

 Using Smart Catalog Explorer

Remove a flag from an item

1. In the tree view, navigate to the folder containing the catalog item you want to work with.
2. In the icon / list view, select the tile or row of the required catalog item.

3. In the tile or the leftmost column, click Flags .

4. In the Flags dialog box, beside each flag you want to remove, click the small 'x':

If you want to remove a particular flag from more than one item, first use the Search
feature to find the items that have that flag assigned.

Attach a Label to a Graphical Element (a Graphic or Symbol)

Technical drawings often have many labels that display important information about the objects
or elements in the document. The text and graphical information in labels completes the drawing
and constitutes its intelligence to the reviewer.
The textual part of a label symbol is attribute data from the database and is defined using the
Smart Text Editor (in Catalog Manager). Defining text this way makes labels containing this text
a true reflection of the information in the database. To help you maintain this data, you can also
add and modify information as you place labels in the drawing.
Labels can have several properties. One of these properties is Placement Type, which can be
either One-Point or Two-Point type. If a label is a One-Point label, the placement command
automatically positions the label at an offset from the given point. If a label is a Two-Point
label, the placement command allows you to reposition the label after identifying the item to be
labeled with the first click.
Labels can have leader lines (lines that connect labels with graphical elements). To enable
leader lines, make sure that when creating a label in Catalog Explorer, you set the Is Leader
Visible label property to True.
When selecting a label in a drawing, the leader line is always visible. If you want to

see the leader line of a label when it's not selected, select a label and then click on the
Smart Label Modification toolbar. The leader line of that label remains visible after
selecting another graphical element in the drawing. To hide the leader line, select a label

and click on the Smart Label Modification toolbar again.

Dragging a label away from the graphical element that it is attached to extends the length of the
leader line. This way you can see which graphical element the label is attached to.
For more information about the creation of labels, see the Catalog Manager Guide > Working
with Labels > Create a Label.
The following procedure explains how to attach a label to a graphical element.
You can attach a label to any of the following:
▪ An auxiliary graphic regardless of whether it has or has not been associated with a plant
item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 620

 Using Smart Catalog Explorer

▪ A smart symbol (compound or regular) dragged from Catalog Explorer, regardless of

whether it has or has not been associated with a plant item.
▪ A plant item placed on a drawing.
1. In Catalog Explorer, expand the catalog node in the Tree view to display the Label folder.
For more information, see Navigate the Catalog Explorer Tree View.
2. In the Catalog Explorer list view, do one of the following:
▪ Drag an appropriate label to a graphic element in the open drawing.
Release the mouse button when the indicator is displayed to attach the label.
▪ Select an appropriate label (by clicking a label in Catalog Explorer) and then hover over
a graphical element in an open drawing.
For a one-point label. click once when the indicator is displayed to attach the label.
For a two-point label, click once when the indicator is displayed to select the graphic
element to which you want to attach the label. Then, click again to place the label.
You can place the same label multiple times when you point to a graphical element.
Press ESC on your keyboard or click the right mouse button to exit the placement
mode.

▪ After attaching a label to an unassociated auxiliary graphic, the auxiliary graphic takes on
the type of the attached label. That is, you will be able to associate this auxiliary graphic only
with a plant item compatible with the type of the attached label.
▪ After associating a symbol with a plant item, the smart text labels show the property values
of the associated plant item as defined in the symbol label. Updating these properties on the
same machine where the drawing is currently open automatically updates the smart text
labels on the open drawing.
If, for some reason, such a label contains no plant item property value, you can instruct the
software to display a specific text indicator that you define in the General Settings of
Options Manager. You can, however, leave out the text indicator, if needed. It is always
advisable to press F5 to refresh the drawing data after every change that can affect all your
plant drawings.
For details, see the General Settings Window topic in the Options Manager Guide.
▪ Making a change to a plant item that has been placed on a drawing refreshes the data
automatically in all the open drawings where this plant item has been placed. For example,
changing a property of a motor placed on a drawing automatically updates this property on a
label attached to that motor in the drawing.
▪ To remove a label from a drawing, right click the label and then click Remove. This action
does not delete the label from Catalog Explorer library. It only removes the label from the
current drawing.
If a label used in a drawing has been deleted from the Catalog Explorer library,
replaced by another label, or modified in any manner, the drawings in which this label has been
used becomes out of date. For details about resolving out-of-date issues, see Resolving
Out-of-Date Issues in Composite Drawings (on page 603).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 621

 Using Smart Catalog Explorer

Find and View Associated Drawings for a Symbol

You can select a symbol in Catalog Explorer and display the composite drawings where the
selected symbol is used. You can filter the drawings by drawing type or display only those
drawings where the selected symbol is out of date. Then, you can open the drawing if needed.
1. Select a symbol in Catalog Explorer.
2. Right-click the symbol and then on the shortcut menu, click Show Associated Drawings.
3. On the Associated Composite Drawings dialog box, from the Filter by drawing type list,
select the type of composite drawings that you want to display.
4. Select the Out-of-date symbol only check box if you want to show only the drawings where
the selected symbol is out of date.
A symbol is rendered "out of date" if it has been changed in some manner and there
is a difference between the symbol in Catalog Explorer and the symbol on the drawing. In
other words, the symbol has been edited or its date has been changed, and so forth.
5. In the Associated drawings grid, select a drawing and click Open Drawing.

Clone and Attach a Label

This feature allows you to clone an existing label that is attached to graphical element in an
open drawing. You can attach a cloned label to more than one graphical element in the open
drawing.
1. In an open composite drawing, click a label to select it and do one of the following:
▪ On the main Smart Electrical menu bar, click Edit > Place New.
▪ Right-click the selected label and then on the shortcut menu, click Place New.
After activating this command, the software enters the attachment mode, which is
signified by the and indicators.
2. Move the cursor to the graphical element to which you want to attach the selected label.

▪ The graphical element has to be compatible with the type of the cloned label.
▪ You can adjust the position of the label by dragging it to the required spot in the
drawing.

3. Once the indicator changes from to , click to attach the cloned label.

▪ You can attach the cloned label multiple times by repeating steps 2 and 3.
▪ To exit the attachment mode, press ESC or right-click somewhere in the open drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 622

 Using Smart Catalog Explorer

Remove a Symbol from a Drawing

You can remove a regular or compound symbol from a drawing. Note that this action does not
delete the symbol from the Catalog Explorer library.
If the symbol that you want to remove is associated with a plant item, this
association will be broken.
1. Do one of the following to remove a symbol from a drawing:
▪ Right-click a symbol in an open drawing and then click Remove.
▪ Select a symbol in an open drawing and then press DELETE on your keyboard.
2. Click OK to confirm the removal of the symbol.
It is not possible to remove a nested symbol from a drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 623

SECTION 22

Annotations and Redlining

You can mark up single line diagrams, schematic drawings, cable block diagrams, and wiring
drawings using text or symbols as annotations. The software saves annotations in the same
layer as the graphical elements of the drawing.
You can lock an annotation to a selected item tag. So, if you move the item tag, the software
also moves the annotation. Alternatively, you can set the annotation to be moved independently
of the item tag.
When working with annotations, you can do the following:
▪ Insert Annotation Text (on page 625)
▪ Insert Annotation Symbols (on page 626)
▪ Edit Annotation Text (on page 626)
▪ Delete Annotations (on page 627)
Redlining appears in a separate drawing layer and you can hide and display redlining as you
require. If a drawing has more than one sheet, you can create redlining and hide or display it
independently for each sheet. Therefore, while working in redlining mode, you cannot access
any items in the main drawing layer. The software saves the drawing with the redlining
items. When opening a drawing that contains redlining items, the software automatically
displays the drawing in redlining mode. You can switch back to regular mode and modify the
drawing as needed. The software saves the existing redlining items regardless of whether you
open the drawing in redlining mode or not. You can add text, symbols, lines, circles, rectangles,
and watermarks as redlining.
In schematic drawings for which the software also retrieves Enhanced Smart Reports
data from Smart Instrumentation, you can add annotations and redlining to the Enhanced Smart
Reports drawing sheets.
When working in redlining mode, you can do the following:
▪ Insert Redlining Text (on page 627)
▪ Insert Redlining Graphical Elements (on page 628)
▪ Edit Redlining Text (on page 628)
▪ Delete Redlining (on page 629)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 624

 Annotations and Redlining

Insert Annotation Text

1. Open a drawing and do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Insert > Text.
▪ On the toolbar, click .
2. On the Text Properties dialog box, click the General tab.
3. Type the annotation text in the Caption box.
You can type an unlimited number of lines with up to 28 characters on each line.
4. Select Set as watermark if you want to define the text as a watermark that appears in a
layer under other drawing items.
5. Under Annotation locking, select Lock to item tag to lock the position of the annotation
text to the selected item tag. In this case, when moving the item tag, the attached
annotation moves with it.
6. Select Move independently if you want to be able to move the annotation text
independently from the item tag that it is locked to. For this option, the software keeps the
annotation text locked to the item tag but allows you to move the annotation text too.
The Annotation locking and Move independently properties are only available if
you first selected an item tag before inserting text.
7. Click the Properties tab.
8. In the Horizontal and Vertical lists, select options to align text within the text box
boundaries.
9. Select Show border if you want to display the text box border.
10. To rotate the annotation text box, do one of the following in the Rotation box:
▪ Enter a positive value in degrees to rotate the macro attribute or label clockwise (CW).
▪ Enter a negative value in degrees to rotate the macro attribute or label
counter-clockwise (CCW).
11. From the Orientation list, select a text box orientation if needed.
In the vertical orientation, the software rotates the letters 45° CCW.
12. Click Font to open a dialog box where you can specify the text font, font style, size, effects,
color, and script.
13. Click a blank area on the drawing sheet to position the text.
You can select several text boxes by holding the CTRL key while clicking each text
box and then dragging the selected text boxes to the required location in the drawing.
14. Click File > Save.
In order to save an annotation that was added to a manual SLD, make sure that first
you click Generate on the Drawing Options dialog box and only then save the drawing. This
way, the software saves the SLD together with the inserted annotation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 625

 Annotations and Redlining

Insert Annotation Symbols

1. Open an appropriate drawing.
2. Click Edit > Insert > Symbol and then navigate to the required .sym file.
3. Click on the drawing to position the symbol.
4. Click File > Save.

Edit Annotation Text

1. Open an appropriate drawing.
2. Select an annotation text box.
3. Do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Text.
▪ On the toolbar, click .
4. On the Text Properties dialog box, click the General tab.
5. Modify the annotation text in the Caption box.
When you modify an annotation, the option Set as watermark is not available. You
can set this option only when defining the text properties for the first time.
6. Click the Properties tab.
7. In the Horizontal and Vertical lists, select options to align text within the text box
boundaries.
8. Select Show border if you want to display the text box border.
9. To rotate the annotation text box, do one of the following in the Rotation box:
▪ Enter a positive value in degrees to rotate the macro attribute or label clockwise (CW).
▪ Enter a negative value in degrees to rotate the macro attribute or label
counter-clockwise (CCW).
10. From the Orientation list, select a text box orientation if needed.
In the vertical orientation, the software rotates the letters 45° CCW.
11. Click Font to open a dialog box where you can specify the text font, font style, size, effects,
color, and script.
12. Click File > Save.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 626

 Annotations and Redlining

Delete Annotations
1. Open an appropriate drawing.
2. Select an annotation item on the drawing sheet.
You can select several items at a time. To do so, hold the CTRL key and click each
item. The font and border color of the annotations change when you select them.
3. Press the DELETE key.
4. Click File > Save.
When you delete an annotation, it is not pasted to the Clipboard and you cannot
reinsert it. You cannot restore a deleted annotation after you have saved the file.

Insert Redlining Text

1. Open an appropriate drawing.
2. To activate redlining mode, click Edit > Redlining.
When redlining mode is switched on, a check mark appears beside the menu
command, and also, the text 'Redlining' appears as the label for the selected drawing sheet.
3. Do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Insert > Text.
▪ On the toolbar, click .
4. On the Text Properties dialog box, click the General tab.
5. Type the annotation text in the Caption box.
You can type an unlimited number of lines with up to 28 characters on each line.
6. Select Set as watermark if you want to define the text as a watermark that appears in a
layer under other drawing items.
7. Click the Properties tab.
8. In the Horizontal and Vertical lists, select options to align text within the text box
boundaries.
9. Select Show border if you want to display the text box border.
10. To rotate the annotation text box, do one of the following in the Rotation box:
▪ Enter a positive value in degrees to rotate the macro attribute or label clockwise (CW).
▪ Enter a negative value in degrees to rotate the macro attribute or label
counter-clockwise (CCW).
11. From the Orientation list, select a text box orientation if needed.
In the vertical orientation, the software rotates the letters 45° CCW.
12. Click Font to open a dialog box where you can specify the text font, font style, size, effects,
color, and script.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 627

 Annotations and Redlining

13. Click a blank area on the drawing sheet to position the text.
14. Click File > Save to save the drawing with the added redlining text.

Insert Redlining Graphical Elements

1. Open an appropriate drawing.
2. To activate redlining mode, click Edit > Redlining.
When redlining mode is switched on, a check mark appears beside the menu
command, and also, the text 'Redlining' appears as the label for the selected drawing sheet.
3. To insert a line, do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Insert > Line.

▪ On the toolbar, click .

4. To insert a circle, do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Insert > Circle.

▪ On the toolbar, click .

5. To insert a rectangle, do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Insert > Rectangle.

▪ On the toolbar, click .

6. To insert a curved line, do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Insert > Curve.

▪ On the toolbar, click .

7. Click on the drawing to position the redlining element.
8. Click File > Save to save the drawing with the added redlining items.

Edit Redlining Text

1. Open an appropriate drawing.
2. To activate redlining mode, click Edit > Redlining.
When redlining mode is switched on, a check mark appears beside the menu
command and also, the text 'Redlining' appears as the label for the selected drawing sheet.
3. Select the required redlining text.
4. Do one of the following:
▪ Click Edit > Text.
▪ On the toolbar, click .
5. On the Text Properties dialog box, click the General tab.
6. Modify the annotation text in the Caption box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 628

 Annotations and Redlining

When you modify an annotation, the option Set as watermark is not available. You
can set this option only when defining the text properties for the first time.
7. Click the Properties tab.
8. In the Horizontal and Vertical lists, select options to align text within the text box
boundaries.
9. Select Show border if you want to display the text box border.
10. To rotate the annotation text box, do one of the following in the Rotation box:
▪ Enter a positive value in degrees to rotate the macro attribute or label clockwise (CW).
▪ Enter a negative value in degrees to rotate the macro attribute or label
counter-clockwise (CCW).
11. From the Orientation list, select a text box orientation if needed.
In the vertical orientation, the software rotates the letters 45° CCW.
12. Click Font to open a dialog box where you can specify the text font, font style, size, effects,
color, and script.
13. Click File > Save.

Delete Redlining
1. Open an appropriate drawing.
2. Click Edit > Redlining.
3. Select a redlining item in the single line diagram.
4. Press the DELETE key.
5. Click File > Save.
When you delete redlining, it is not pasted to the Clipboard and you cannot reinsert
it. You cannot restore a deleted redlining item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 629

SECTION 23

Working with Documents

The software supports two types of documents - internal and external documents.

Open Last Saved Document

You can open the last saved version of a document without regenerating it. That is, the data in
the document will not be retrieved from the database and the information will be displayed as it
was at the time the document was saved. This feature is applicable to any drawing and
registered report. Note that a copy of the document is saved in the database. The document will
be opened in view-only mode.
Note the following information about saving a view-only copy of a document:
▪ For registered reports, after opening a report in Excel, you need to save your report by
clicking Save in Excel (Save As does not save a view-only copy of the report).
▪ For drawings, the software saves a view-only copy to the database automatically every
time you save a drawing.
To open the last saved document, do the following:
1. In the Electrical Index, select a drawing or registered report.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click File > Open > Last Saved Document.
▪ Right-click the document and then on the shortcut menu, click Open Last Saved
Document.

Internal Documents in Smart Electrical

Internal documents are cable block diagrams, single line diagrams, schematic drawings, wiring
diagrams, and power distribution board layout design drawings. You create these documents
for selected electrical items and, therefore, you do not need to associate them with the
items. The software adds your internal documents to the document repository automatically
and you can associate them with other electrical items as needed. You can add and maintain
revisions in internal documents. The software allows you to select a revision numbering
method, enter a revision number, date, short description, and the name of the person who
modified the document. Also, you can add or update the last revision of a number of selected
documents. When you work with internal documents, your tasks mostly include managing
revisions for single or multiple documents, archiving documents and comparing them with
current versions.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 630

 Working with Documents

Add a Document Revision

This procedure explains how to add a revision to a single document.
1. Open or generate an SLD or a schematic drawing.
2. Click Edit > Document Properties.
To access the Document Properties command, first select an item in the drawing.
3. On the Document Properties dialog box, click New.
4. Under Revision method, select a revision numbering method that you require for the
current document.
If a document you are revising already has a revision, do not change the revision
method unless you want the software to start a new revision numbering.
5. In the Revisions group box, under Revision Numbering, accept the displayed value or
type the one that you require.

▪ If you type a value that does not comply with the current revision method, the next time
you add a new revision, the software starts a new numbering. For example, the
selected revision method is P0, P1, P2 and the last revision is P3. If you add a new
revision number RRR and then another one using the P0, P1, P2 method, the software
displays the newly added revision as P0.
▪ If you type a value that complies with the numbering method but the value is not
sequential, the software increments the number of the next revision that you add. For
example, the selected revision method is P0, P1, P2 and the last revision is P3. If you
add a new revision number P1, the software will increment the following revision to P2.
6. Type all the other pertinent information relating to the revision date, person who created and
checked the revision, and so forth.

▪ You can delete a selected revision by highlighting a row and clicking Delete. The software
updated the revision numbers automatically if the subsequent revision number complies with
the selected revision method. However, you cannot delete a revision if you are working in an
integrated environment. In this case, the revisions are controlled by SmartPlant Foundation.
▪ Using the Data Dictionary Manager, it is possible to determine which fields are available on
the Revisions tab. For details, see Data Dictionary User's Guide > Modify Properties of
Database Tables.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 631

 Working with Documents

Manage Global Revisions

This option allows you to perform a number of revision activities for a group of selected
documents. You can add, update, upgrade, and delete revisions in batch mode.
1. In the list view of the Electrical Index, select the documents that you require.
2. Click Actions > Global Revisions.
3. From the Activity list, select an activity to perform with a global revision:
▪ Add revision - adds a new revision to the selected documents in accordance with the
value that you specify for the Revision number setting. The software determines
which revision method suits best the value that you typed in the Revision number field
and adjusts the revision method accordingly. If the revision number value that you are
adding conforms with method of the last existing revision, the software will continue to
number the new revision accordingly. If the software cannot determine a suitable
revision method for the typed value, the revision method will switch to Other. Also, if
you do not enter a value in the Revision number field, the software will add a new
revision using the Other method and will not provide a value in the Revision number
field of the individual documents.
▪ Upgrade revision - adds a new revision by raising the last revision number of all the
selected documents. The software identifies the revision numbering method of each
document (P0, P1, P2; 0,1,2, A,B,C, and so forth) and raises the revision number to the
next value according to the existing revision method. You cannot change the revision
method but you can update all the other settings by entering new settings.
▪ Delete last revision - deletes the last revision of all the selected documents.
▪ Delete all revisions - deletes all the revisions of all the selected documents.
4. From Revision method for items without revisions, select a revision method if some of
the selected documents have not been revised yet.
5. Edit the settings as you require.
The software archives all the added and upgraded revisions of the selected
documents so that you can compare the data of an archived document with the current
version. For more information, see Compare an Archived Document with a Current Document
(on page 632).

Compare an Archived Document with a Current Document

The software allows you to archive SLDs, schematic drawings, wiring diagrams, and cable block
diagrams in your Smart Electrical database. This option then makes it possible to compare an
archived version of a document with the data in the current version of that document. Before
comparing an archived version of a document, you can click View to open it for viewing. To
enable the archiving option, make sure that your Project Administrator switches on the archiving
option in Options Manager. Once the archiving option is switched on, the software
automatically archives every added or modified revision whether you did it for a single document
or used the Global Revision feature for multiple documents.
You can archive and compare single line diagrams, schematics, wiring
diagrams, and cable block diagrams. However, the software does not allow you to archive
miscellaneous drawings.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 632

 Working with Documents

1. Open or generate a drawing.

2. Modify the drawing as you require.
3. Save the drawing.
4. Click Edit > Document Properties.
5. Add a revision and click OK on the Document Properties dialog box.
Repeat the above procedure as many times as required to add archived versions of
the document to the database.
6. In the Electrical Index, expand the Documents folder hierarchy to display the names of the
existing SLDs or schematics.
7. In the appropriate document folder, select the document you require and do one of the
following to open the Compare Documents dialog box:
▪ Click Actions > Compare Documents.
▪ Right-click the document and select Compare Documents from the shortcut menu.
8. Select an archived version of the document and click Compare.
Before clicking Compare, you can click View to open the selected drawing that you
want to compare. The software opens the archived drawing in view mode only.

▪ The software displays clouds around the items that differ from the current data. The last
revision number is shown in a triangle beside the cloud.
▪ The software uses index numbers to identify the changes in associations between electrical
items.
▪ The software generates a tabular report where it shows all the changes and shows the
changes in associations using index numbers as they appear in the drawing.
▪ For registered reports, the software opens two Excel files. One of the Excel files displays
changed data with a blue shading. The second file is a summary of all changes and it is
called Registered Comparison Report. This report displays the previous and current data
for each tag that has undergone a change. Note that you can compare a registered report
only if this is a simple tabular report.
▪ In SLDs, the software indicates the following changes:
▪ All added and deleted electrical items except for control stations.
▪ Added, deleted, and updated properties of electrical items.
▪ Changes in associations.
▪ Attachment to a different document template.
▪ In schematic drawings, the software indicates the following changes:
▪ Added, deleted, and updated properties of electrical items.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 633

 Working with Documents

Batch Compare Documents

1. In the Electrical Index, expand the Documents folder hierarchy to display the names of the
existing SLDs or schematics.
2. Select the Single Line Diagrams or Schematic Drawings folder.
3. In the lower pane, select the documents you require and do one of the following to open the
Batch Compare Documents dialog box:
▪ Click Actions > Compare Documents.
▪ Right-click the document and select Compare Documents from the shortcut menu.
4. To save the comparison report, select Save files.
5. Under Path, type the folder path where you want to save the report, and from the Save as
type list, select the required file format.
6. To print the current and last revised versions of the selected drawings, select Print
drawings.
7. To print a set of reports comparing the changes between the current and last revised
drawings, select Print comparison reports.

▪ The software compares the current data with the last saved revision.
▪ In SLDs and schematics, the software displays clouds around the items that differ from the
current data.
▪ The software uses index numbers to identify the changes in associations between electrical
items.
▪ The software generates a tabular report where it shows all the changes and shows the
changes in associations using index numbers as they appear in the drawing.
▪ In SLDs, the software indicates the following changes:
▪ All added and deleted electrical items except for control stations.
▪ Added, deleted, and updated properties of electrical items.
▪ Changes in associations.
▪ Attachment to a different document template.
▪ In schematic drawings, the software indicates the following changes:
▪ Added, deleted, and updated properties of electrical items.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 634

 Working with Documents

External Documents
External documents are external files that you associate with electrical items in the
software. These files can be reference documents or drawings, such as a general specification
number, requisition number, vendor document, civil or structural document, site layout drawing,
an electrical communications drawing, and so forth.
The software allows you to create a document reference repository that stores all the document
references in your system. You can add external file references to your document repository or
just create references that you can link to external files later. It is possible to display all the
documents associated with a selected electrical item classified according to document category
and type. Also, you can associate documents with multiple items if needed. Note that if you
delete an electrical item that is associated with an external document, the software deletes the
external document association automatically.

Define an External Document Reference

You define a document reference by adding a reference to the list of document references. You
can then associate this reference with an external file. The software adds this association by
storing the file path in the database.
1. Click Actions > Define Document Reference.
2. On the Document Reference Definition dialog box, under Filter by, select a document
category.
3. Select a document type.
4. Click Add.
5. Under Edit, type a value in the Document box.
If you selected All types from the Document type list under Filter by, select the
required value from the Document type list under Edit.
6. Type a suitable document description in the Description box if needed.

7. Beside the Path and file name box, click the ellipsis button to select the required file.
You do not have to associate a document reference with an external file. You can
do this at some other time when needed.
8. On the Select File dialog box, select the required file.
9. Click Apply to store the document reference in the database and select another document
category if needed.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 635

 Working with Documents

Associate External Documents with Electrical Items

After you define external document references, you select one or more electrical items and
associate them with external documents. You can associate an electrical item with a document
reference or with an external file that is linked to the document reference. The software allows
you to associate single or multiple electrical items with the same external document. Also, you
can associate the same external file with multiple items in the software.
1. Define a reference for the document that you want to associate. For details, see Define an
External Document Reference (on page 635).
2. In the Electrical Index or EDE, select an electrical item.
You can also associate multiple electrical items with the same external
document. In the Electrical Index, click a folder that contains electrical items and highlight
in the list view pane the items that you require.
3. Click Actions > Associate Document.
4. On the Associate Documents dialog box, under Filter by, select a document category and
type from the lists.
5. Click Add.
6. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now to display the available documents.
The Find dialog box finds only those documents that belong to the document
category and type that you select on the Associate Documents dialog box.
7. Select each document that you want to associate with the selected item and then click
Apply.
To associate documents belonging to another category or type, return to the Associate
Documents dialog box, select the required document category and type, click Associate again,
and repeat the succeeding steps in this procedure.

Dissociate an External Document

This option allows you to dissociate electrical items from external documents.
1. In the Electrical Index, select an electrical item.
2. Click Actions > Associate Document.
3. On the Associate Documents dialog box, under Filter by, select a document category.
4. From the Document type list, select a document type.
5. Under List, highlight the document that you want to dissociate.
6. Click Remove.
To dissociate a document belonging to another type or category, click Apply and then
select another document type and category as required.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 636

 Working with Documents

Dissociate an External Document from Multiple Electrical

Items in Batch Mode
This option allows you to dissociate an external document from multiple electrical items in batch
mode.
1. In the list view of the Electrical Index, select the electrical items you require.
2. Click Actions > Associate Document.
3. On the Associate Documents dialog box, under Filter by, select a document category.
4. From the Document type list, select a document type.
5. Click Dissociate.
6. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now.
7. Select the document that you want to dissociate from the selected items and click OK.
8. On the Associate Documents dialog box, click OK or Apply.

Open an External Document

This option allows you to open an external file that is associated with a document reference.
1. In the Electrical Index, select an electrical item.
2. Click Actions > Associate Document.
You can also open an associated document by clicking Actions > Define
Document Reference.
3. On the Associate Documents dialog box or the Document Reference Definition dialog
box, under List, select the document that you want to open.
On the Document Reference Definition dialog box, under Filter by, select the
required document category and type.
4. Click Open.

Inserting External Graphics Files into Smart Electrical

Templates
The software allows you to create plant drawings based on graphics files created in
SmartSketch or any other CAD application. These plant drawings are called miscellaneous
drawings. You create miscellaneous drawings by inserting an external graphics file into a Smart
Electrical template.
Once you create a miscellaneous drawing and save it to your Smart Electrical database, the
software updates the drawing title block and the revision data. The software also enters the
revision property macros, which enables the retrieval of information from the database when you
reopen the drawing. Smart Electrical organizes these drawings in the Miscellaneous
Drawings folder in the Electrical Index.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 637

 Working with Documents

You can open a miscellaneous drawing and manage its revisions as you require. However, you
cannot archive a miscellaneous drawing and therefore you cannot compare it with a previous
revision.
Just like with external documents, Smart Electrical allows you to associate a miscellaneous
drawing with an electrical item.

Insert an External Graphics File into a Smart Electrical

Template
This option allows you to insert an external graphics file into a Smart Electrical template. An
external graphics file can be any file created in SmartSketch or any other CAD application.
Open Options Manager and set a default path for miscellaneous drawings.
For details, see Define File Locations in the Options Manager User's Guide.
1. In Smart Electrical, double- click the Documents folder and then right-click the
Miscellaneous Drawings folder in the Electrical Index.
2. On the shortcut menu, click New Miscellaneous Drawing.
3. On the New Miscellaneous Drawing dialog box, beside the Template box, click the ellipsis
button to select a template that you require.
4. Under Document number, type a document name. Note that this is a required field.
5. Type a short description if needed and click OK.
6. In the drawing that opens, to insert a symbol, click Edit > Insert > Symbol.
7. On the Select Symbol File dialog box, select a symbol and click OK.
8. To place the symbol in the drawing, position the cursor in the open drawing and then press
the left mouse button. Note that the cursor marks the symbol origin (the left bottom corner).
You can insert as many symbols as you require.
9. Click File > Save to save the miscellaneous drawing.

▪ After saving a miscellaneous document, you can set the appropriate revisions as you
require. For details, see Add a Document Revision (on page 631).
▪ You can associate an electrical item with a miscellaneous drawing. For details, see
Associate External Documents with Electrical Items.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 638

SECTION 24

Engineering Data Editor

You use the Engineering Data Editor (EDE) for viewing data and performing editing or other
operations on one or more items of a specified item type.
The Edit View (on page 1190) dialog box allows you to define the items you want to see in the
table view. You customize a filter and layout for the display on the Advanced Table Properties
(see "Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box" on page 1188) dialog box.
The main features of the EDE are:

Header
The header displays the following information:
▪ The number of EDEs opened by you in the current session.
▪ The Item Type, Filter, and Layout selected in the Edit View dialog box on which your table
is based.

EDE Toolbar
The EDE Toolbar is displayed below the header and includes commands that are frequently
used when you are working with the EDE. Some of the toolbar actions are available as
right-click shortcuts when you click on a row, cell, or group of cells. For more information, see
EDE Toolbar and Shortcut Menu (on page 641).

Search
Use the Search box to search the EDE grid. Type an alphanumeric string, as you type the active
search engine begins filtering out character by character, the grid items that do not match your
string.

Data
▪ You can populate data viewed in the table in one of the following ways:
▪ Selecting a table cell and typing the appropriate information.
▪ If the property has a select list associated with it, then you choose the value from the select
list.
▪ If the cell is populated by a value that results in calculating another cell, the software
performs the calculation and displays the result in the appropriate cell.
If the cell is populated by a read-only property or a property that is only automatically generated
by validation or calculation, you cannot edit that cell. You can select an entire row,
corresponding to the properties of a single item tag, by clicking the corresponding row number to
the left of the table. Then you can view the properties in the Properties window and edit item
properties there, too.
The contents of cells can be copied to other cells, provided the cell contents are compatible.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 639

 Engineering Data Editor

The maximum number of rows per page is 500 rows. Below the grid you can
find details of how many rows are displayed and how many cells are selected.

Data Manipulation
You can perform the following operations in the grid of the EDE:
▪ Move a cell from one location to another like in Excel.
▪ Change the width of a cell by dragging the edge of the cell header and making the cell wider
or narrower. When you save the settings, the software retains cell widths the next time you
open the layout.
▪ Freeze one or more columns to prevent them from scrolling. Hover the mouse over the left
side of the first column (normally the Item Tag column) until the cursor changes to a
double-headed horizontal arrow. Click and drag the vertical line to the right side of the last
column you want to freeze. The software prevents all the columns to the left of the dragged
dividing line scrolling horizontally.
▪ Click a cell in the left empty column to select the entire row.
▪ Double-click a cell to select its contents for editing.
▪ For a multiple selection using the SHIFT or CTRL keys, click the relevant row numbers.
▪ Click the upper left empty header to select all the items.

Printing
You can print out the contents the current table. For more details, see Print EDE Content (on
page 651).

▪ When navigating in the EDE, the Properties window is enabled. When you select a tag in
the EDE, the data for the tag appears in the Properties window. Editing a property of a tag
in the Properties window is immediately reflected in the EDE and vice versa.
▪ After exiting Smart Electrical, and starting a new session, the software retains the size and
position of all the windows that were open in the previous session.

Start the EDE

▪ Click Window > New > Engineering Data Editor.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 640

 Engineering Data Editor

EDE Toolbar and Shortcut Menu

The following commands can be accessed from the EDE Toolbar and when appropriate are
available as a right-click shortcut.

New
Click the arrow to select;
New Item - Creates a new item based on your selection from the select list.
New Multiple Items - Opens the Create Multiple New Items dialog box where you can create
new multiple items in the Electrical Index.
Your new item or items might not be visible in the EDE grid depending on the filter set in
the EDE View dialog box. Edit the EDE View and remove the filter if you require to view the new
items in the grid.

Edit
Click the arrow to select from the following:

Copy - Copies the value in the selected row, cell, or group of cells, to the Clipboard so that
it can be pasted somewhere else. This command does not remove the value from the
table. Values placed on the Clipboard remain there until newer values are copied over them.
Right-click shortcut is available.

Paste - Places the value or values on the Clipboard into the selected row, cell, or group of
cells. Values do not paste successfully if you have selected a cell for which the value is strictly
generated by validation or calculation, or is read-only. When pasting, you must select the same
number of rows as the number of rows that were copied to the Clipboard.
Right-click shortcut is available.

Select All - Selects all the cells in the active EDE view. You can use this command to
create a select set and view its properties in the Properties window, for instance.
Right-click shortcut is available.

Delete - Deletes the selected items from the database.

Right-click shortcut is available.

View
Click the arrow to select from the following:

Edit View - Opens the Edit View dialog box where you can edit the current EDE view.

Save Settings - Stores the table layout and the order and width of the EDE columns.

Save to Excel - Opens the Save as dialog box where you can save the displayed EDE
view as an Excel sheet.
If you want to save all your data in the EDE, first click Clear Column Filters to
remove any filters you have applied to the columns and then click Save to Excel .

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 641

 Engineering Data Editor

Clear Column Filters - Click to clear all filters you have applied to the columns of your
EDE.

Refresh - Refreshes the table with current data from the database. Note that in a
multi-user environment, more than one person may be updating data. Your opened table does
not refresh automatically and you therefore need to run this command periodically to display the
most recent data. Where another user has made a change on an item for which you have
opened the properties in the table, the software notifies you that your input will be rejected until
you first refresh the data.

Enable Grouping - Opens the group area below the Search field. Drag the column headers
you want to group by to this area. Drag back to the grid column headers you do not want to
group by or click Disable Grouping to close the grouping area and cancel the grouping.

Disable Grouping (available when Enable Grouping is active) - Click to close the grouping
area and cancel any grouping you have created.

Right-click shortcuts only

To access the following commands right-click on the grid and select the action required.
Duplicate Item - Creates a new item identical to the selected item. If the value of the Comply
To Naming Convention tag property for the item is set to True, the duplicated item tag is based
on the naming convention for the item type.
Print Drawings (Document Item Type only) - Allows you to select one or more drawings and
print them.
▪ Registered drawings cannot be printed from the EDE.
Save As (Document Item Type only) - Opens the Save As dialog box and allows you to save
your selected drawing in another format. The formats are:
▪ Microstation (.dgn)
▪ Autocad (.dxf)
▪ Autocad (.dwg)
▪ PDF (.pdf)
▪ Document (.spe)
Find - Click on an item in the grid and select find to open a list of options. The options are find
the selected item in:
▪ The Electrical Index
▪ The Electrical Engineer
▪ An SLD
▪ An Active Composite Document
Common Properties - Opens the Common Properties dialog box for the selected item where
you can enter the required electrical properties. This command is only available for items that
have a dialog box, such as motors, cables, control stations, and so forth.
Wrap Text - Right-click on a column header to apply text wrapping to the column.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 642

 Engineering Data Editor

Define a New EDE View

1. Click Window > New > Engineering Data Editor.
2. On the Edit View dialog box, select an item type from the Item Type list.
3. Select a filter from the Filter list.
4. Select a layout from the Layout list.
5. Click OK.

▪ When you create a EDE view for abstract item types such as loads or converting electrical
equipment, as opposed to specific item types such as motors or transformers, the software
displays all the common properties for these item types in the EDE. With loads, for
example motors and heaters both appear, but the software cannot display their specific
properties in one common EDE view. However, when you select items of the same specific
type, all the properties appear in the Properties window.
▪ If you do not find a filter you want under Filter, you can define a filter on the Filter tab of the
Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Open the Advanced Table Properties dialog box
by clicking Advanced on the Edit View dialog box.
▪ If you do not find a layout you want under Layout, you can define a layout on the Layout
tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Open the Advanced Table Properties
dialog box by clicking Advanced on the Edit View dialog box.

▪ To modify an existing table, click View and then Edit View to open the Edit View
dialog box.

▪ To print out the contents of an open EDE, click View and then click Save to Excel
. Use the Excel file to print your EDE view. For details, see Print EDE Content (on page
651).
▪ For an explanation of the EDE Tool bar and shortcut commands, see EDE Toolbar and
Shortcut Menu (on page 641).

Define a Filter for an EDE View

1. Do one of the following

▪ In an open EDE, click View >Edit View .

▪ Click Window > New > Engineering Data Editor
2. On the Edit View dialog box, select an item type.
3. Click Advanced on the Edit View dialog box.
4. On the Filter tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box, specify a name for the filter
in Base filter.
Select Default if you want this filter to be the default for the item type that you
selected on the Edit View dialog box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 643

 Engineering Data Editor

5. Click Browse if you want to search for a filter or create a new filter - either simple or
compound - using the Select Filter dialog box.
6. To further define a filter, populate the Definition box with properties and values. Click Add
to add a line to the Definition box.
7. Select a property, an operator, and a value from the Edit group. Property lists properties
that apply to your item type; Operator lists all the possible relationships, such as greater
than and not equal to; select the specific property value you want to filter for in Value.
You can use an operator with a property that has a value with a unit of
measure. For example, you can filter a table showing motors to show only those motors
that have the brake power value greater than the value you set in the filter.
8. To add more entries, repeat steps 4 and 5.
9. Click Delete if you want to delete the current row in the Definition box.
10. Click either Match all or Match any.
11. Click OK on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box and again on the Edit View dialog
box so that the software can populate your table.

Define a New EDE View Layout

The following procedure deals with the definition of EDE view layouts.
EDE layouts are limited to 350,000 cells. It is highly recommended that you
work with filtered layouts to avoid the creation of numerous cells that you might not need.
1. Open the Edit View dialog box by doing one of the following:
▪ Click Window > New > Edit View.

▪ In an open EDE, click View >Edit View ..

You can define a layout by selecting a default layout from the Layout list and
modifying it. You can then save and use the modified layout. For a list of the default
layouts that come shipped with the software, see Shipped Default Layouts (on page 645).
2. Click Advanced.
3. On the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box, specify a name for the
layout.
Select Default if you want this layout to be the default table layout for the item type,
which you specified on the Edit View dialog box. Since there can only be one default
layout per item type, whichever layout you last selected as the default becomes the current
default layout.
4. Click Save if you want to save the layout in order to apply it to another EDE, click Delete if
you want to delete the layout.
To further define a layout, populate the Definition group box with display and sort properties.
1. Click Add to add a line entry to the Display Property list in the Contents box.
2. Specify the Property and Caption in the Edit group at the bottom of the dialog box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 644

 Engineering Data Editor

To add and define more display properties, repeat steps 1 and 2.

To change the display order of the columns in the EDE view, select a row in the
Display Property column under Contents and click Up or Down.
3. In the Sorting box, click in the Sort Property list and click Add to add an entry. Then
select the property, order, and type in the Edit group at the bottom of the dialog box.
To add and define more sort properties, repeat step 3.
To change the sort order of the properties in the EDE, select a row in the Sort
Property box and click Up or Down.
The Add, Insert, Delete, Move Up, and Move Down buttons apply to the
active list view, which can be either Display Property or Sort Property.

Shipped Default Layouts

Several default layouts come shipped with the software. You can use them to define your own
layouts by changing the layout name, adding or deleting properties as required, and saving
under a new name.
The following shipped layouts are available for the appropriate item types:
▪ Default Battery Bank List
▪ Default Bus List
▪ Default Cable List
▪ Default Circuit List
▪ Default Circuit Breaker List
▪ Default Control Stations List
▪ Default Document List
▪ Default Generator List
▪ Default Load List
▪ Motor List
▪ Default PDB List
▪ Default Reference Cable List

Modify the Table Properties of an Existing EDE View

1. In the open EDE, click View >Edit View .
2. Review and edit the item type, filter, and layout.
3. If you want to customize a filter or layout click Advanced on the Edit View dialog box and
do the following as required.
Define a Filter for an EDE View (on page 643).
Define a New EDE View Layout (on page 644).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 645

 Engineering Data Editor

4. Click OK on the Edit View dialog box to display the modified view.

▪ After defining a layout, you can save it if you want to apply it to another EDE view. To save
the view layout, specify a name in Name and click Save on the Advanced Table
Properties Layout tab.
▪ You can edit some of the properties of those items that appear in the EDE. You can edit
the contents of some cells directly in the EDE if the corresponding property is not read-only
or generated strictly by validation; you can copy, cut, and paste properties too, with the
same restriction, or you can click on the first row on the left of the EDE to select an item and
edit its properties in the Properties window.
▪ For the explanation of the shortcut commands that are available in the EDE, see EDE
Toolbar and Shortcut Menu (on page 641).

Delete an EDE Layout

1. In the open EDE, click View >Edit View ..
2. Click Advanced.
3. On the Advanced Table Properties dialog box, click the Layout tab.
4. From the Name list, select the layout you want to delete.
5. Under the Name group box, click Delete.
6. When prompted, click Yes to confirm the deletion.
7. Click OK, and then click OK on the Edit View dialog box.

Update EDE Data

Changes in the database, and therefore your data are happening all the time. The software does
not update the EDE data automatically. To update the data displayed in the EDE view:

▪ Click Refresh on the EDE toolbar.

Search for Tags from the EDE

You can search for tags that appear in the EDE.
1. In the EDE, select the tag you are looking for.
You can also select the whole row.
2. Right-click, and on the shortcut menu, click Find.
3. Select from one of the following:
▪ Find in Electrical Engineer.
▪ Find in Electrical Index.
▪ Find in SLD.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 646

 Engineering Data Editor

▪ Find in Active Composite Document.

Working with EDE Views

The software allows you perform various actions in an open EDE view. You can do the
following:
Search the EDE View Grid
In the Search field, type 3 or more characters. As you type, the first four suggested items that
match the search criteria are displayed under the Search field and also highlighted in yellow in
the grid along with the rest of the suggested search results. To clear your search, click the X on
the right.

▪ As you type your search string rows that do not match the string are hidden in the grid.
Only items that match the search string are displayed.
▪ Click on a string displayed under the Search field to locate the string in the grid.
▪ A search using a wildcard (*) must be used with an alphanumeric character.
▪ If nothing matches your search criteria the Search field is displayed with a red border.
Group Columns in the Grid
To group your data by a specific attribute, do the following;

1. Click Enable Grouping to open the Group by area.

2. Drag and drop a column header to the Group by area where it says Drag a column header
and drop it here to group by that column.

▪ To remove a column header, drag the column header to anywhere on the grid. To remove
all the grouping, click to close the Group by area.
▪ You can group more than one attribute, by dragging another column header to the Group by
area.
▪ The order in which you apply the groupings changes the filtered results. The filtered results
are additive. This means that each additional column header you add will be based on the
current filter.
Sorting Items in the Grid
The first time you open an EDE view, the results are displayed in an ascending order based on
the Item Name column. To reverse the sorting, click on the column header. A little sort arrow in
the column header displays the sort order. Click again to remove the sorting. Press and hold the
SHIFT key and click columns to sort by more than one column. Data in columns is sorted
alphabetically.
When performing ascending or descending sorts on columns in the EDE View, all
cells with NULL values do not participate in the sorting, and always display at the top of the
report.
All cells with empty fields do participate in the sorting, and display at the top when sorting a

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 647

 Engineering Data Editor

column in ascending order, and at the bottom, when sorting in descending order. The sorting is
applied to all pages of the EDE, not just the first page.
Filter Items in the Grid

1. To filter your data, click , in the column header.

2. In the dialog box that opens do one of the following:
▪ In the top section - select from the list of values listed in the column. The filtered results
will display in the column automatically, as you check the boxes of your preference.
Type in the Search field to narrow the available selection if required.
▪ In the Show row section, select the required operator. Type a value in the blank field
and select And/Or.
3. When you have finished adding criteria to your filter, click Filter to display the filtered
results.

▪ A filtered column displays a blue colored icon .

▪ If a column includes empty values, a check box with the value [null] appears in the list.
Clear Filters
To clear filters, do one of the following:
1. To clear a filter from a specific column.

a. Click on the column you want to remove the filter from.

b. Click Clear Filter .

2. On the EDE toolbar, click Clear column filters .

Move Columns in the Grid
Click and drag a column header right or left and drop it in the new location.
Edit the Data in the Grid (Edit mode)
Double-click any cell in the grid and type in your new content or change existing content. Click
outside the cell to save the contents.
When populating cells with numeric values, enter a number within the minimum and
maximum values that an integer data type can handle, between 0 and 2147483647.
Copy/Paste is possible in Edit mode, but only to another cell that is in Edit
mode.
Copy and Paste Data
Select the cell (single-click) with the data you want to copy, right-click and from the shortcut
menu click Copy. Select the cell (single-click) where you want to paste the data, right-click and
from the shortcut menu click Paste.

▪ A dashed border around the copied cell/s indicate the data has been copied and ready for
pasting.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 648

 Engineering Data Editor

▪ The standard windows keyboard shortcuts can also be used.

To copy and paste from multiple cells, press and hold the CTRL key, and use the cursor to
select (single-click) the cells required. Use the right-click shortcut menu to copy the selected
cells. Select (single-click) the cells in the grid where you want to paste the copied information
and use the right-click shortcut menu to paste.
The copied information will be cleared (and so will the copy – dash indication) from the clipboard
and not pasted, in these cases:
▪ When the selected cell is in Edit mode (double-clicking on the cell).
▪ When one or more of these changes are made to the EDE layout:
▪ Edit of the EDE definition.
▪ Column addition.
▪ Column re-order.
▪ Splitting screen.
▪ Applying a filter.
▪ Sorting.
Copy and Paste Data - Troubleshooting
If the copy/paste was not successful, one of the following messages is displayed in the ribbon
bar:
▪ Cannot paste the selected cells:
▪ Check you have selected destination cells.
▪ Check that the selected cells are not in Edit mode.
▪ Make sure that the selected destination layout matches the copied cells layout. The
destination area needs to contain the same layout of rows and columns as the source.
▪ Check you are not trying to perform multiple pasting with the same content.
▪ Cannot set lookup value from different source:
You are trying to paste a value from a cell where the values are from a select list to a cell
that cannot contain select list values. For example, a value copied from a select list of
instrument manufacturers cannot be pasted to a cell with a select list of model numbers.
You can only copy select list value to a cell with the same select list type or to a blank cell.
▪ Cannot set value to read-only cell:
You are trying to paste a value into a cell whose properties have been set to read-only.
▪ Item cannot be pasted into list:
You are trying to paste a value from a cell whose properties have a dependency on another
property. For example, if a panel model in a particular cell is related to manufacturer
Honeywell, it can only be pasted into another panel model cell for which the related
manufacturer is also Honeywell.
Use the Right-Click Shortcut Menu in the Grid
The shortcut menu provides commands for manipulating items in the grid. These commands are
similar to the commands available in the EDE toolbar.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 649

 Engineering Data Editor

Since the grid does not represent items in a hierarchical layout, make sure when you edit a cell
that it doesn't affect other items related to that cell. For example: duplicating a junction box will
duplicate all the terminal strips connected to that junction box. The availability of these controls
changes from item to item in the grid, and is dependent on one or more of the following
conditions:
▪ If an item is listed in an identifier field column, all the controls are available to it (for example
an Instrument Name column, or a Tag Number column).
▪ If an item is located in an identifier field column, all the controls are available.
▪ If an item is located at the top of the hierarchy, only the following controls are available:
New, Duplicate, and Delete.
▪ Not all the right-click menu options are available for all the item types.
The Copy and Paste controls are available to all items that are not of item type:
Plant, Area, Unit, Project, and Domain.
Freeze Columns in the Grid
To keep information from scrolling off the screen when moving through the grid, you can freeze
one or more columns to keep them in place. Hover the mouse cursor over the line dividing
between the EDE Explorer and the left side of the grid and drag the separator at the edge of the
window to the right. You can drag it either over one column or over a few columns.

Apply text wrapping to a column

By default, wrapping text is not applied to the column data. Wrapping text is applied to individual
columns using a shortcut menu. To apply text wrapping to a column, do the following:
▪ Right-click on the column header and select Wrap Text.
Applying text wrap to a large number of columns can slow the software
performance.

Copy Data from the EDE to an External File

1. Open a EDE view.
2. Select a row, cell, or group of cells.
You can click the upper left empty header to select all the items.
3. Right-click inside the EDE and on the shortcut menu, click Copy.
4. Open an external file, for example a Microsoft Word file or an Excel sheet.
5. Paste the data into the required location.
In Word, the data is pasted in with tab separators between columns and paragraphs
between rows. In Excel, the data is pasted into the same cell positions as the original cell
positions in the EDE.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 650

 Engineering Data Editor

Print EDE Content

To print the content of an EDE view you must save the EDE as an Excel file. Open the file in
Excel and use the Excel Print command to print the file.

Print Documents from an EDE View

To print documents from an EDE view:
1. On a Document Item Type view, select the documents you want to print.
2. Right-click, and from the shortcut menu, click Print Drawings.
3. On the Print dialog box, check the settings are correct.
4. Click OK.
Registered drawings cannot be printed from an EDE.

Save a Document from an EDE in Another Format

You can save a drawing document in another format for opening in an external program.
1. On a Document Item Type view, select the documents you want to save in another format.
2. Right-click on the grid and from the shortcut menu select Save As.
3. On the Save As dialog box, check the file path is correct.
The file types that are available are:
▪ Microstation (.dgn)
▪ Autocad (.dxf)
▪ Autocad (.dwg)
▪ PDF (.pdf)
▪ Document (.spe)
4. Under Save as type, select the file format you want to save the document in.
5. Select Show all layers in output if required
6. Click OK.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 651

SECTION 25

Reports in Smart Electrical

The following section deals with the creation and management of reports in Smart Electrical.
Smart Electrical allows you to generate a number pf report types in Excel format. These reports
are based on shipped or customized Excel templates. After setting the template for your report,
you can generate a shipped or customized report.

Create a New Customized Report

This procedure describes the work flow for creating new customized reports.
1. On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Reports > New.
2. On the New Report Template dialog box, select an appropriate source template.
3. Under Name, type the report name.
4. Select an appropriate item type for which your report will be used.
5. Select an appropriate report format: fixed, tabular, or composite. For details, see New
Report Template Dialog Box.
6. Click OK.
7. On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Reports > Edit and select your new report to edit
in MS Excel.
8. Edit your report headers as you require. For details, see Define Report Headers.
9. Edit your report contents. For details, see Define the Contents of Your Report Template (on
page 690).
10. To open your new report, click Reports > My Reports.
11. Select your report from the My Reports list and click OK to open it in Microsoft Excel.

Using Space Heater Relations in EDE and Custom Reports

In versions older than SmartPlant Electrical 2015, it was possible to create only one space
heater under a given motor. Due to the fact that this limitation no longer exists in version 2015
and above, the legacy motor attributions in the heater table no longer retrieve the motor data for
the child heaters. To remedy this situation, you need to do the following:
▪ For Heater type, in the EDE and your custom report, replace all the Motor attributions with
Equipment.ItemTag or any other attribution of a similar type.
▪ For Motor type, in all custom reports, replace the Motor -> Heater relation with the Motor ->
HeaterChild relation and add the required properties from the HeaterChild table.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 652

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Create a Composite Drawing Index Report

The following procedure explains how to create a Composite Drawing Index report that shows
all plant items and the composite drawings in which they appear. This report can help you find
all the plant items that have not been included in a composite drawing.
1. On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Reports > New.
2. On the New Report Template dialog box, do the following:
▪ Source template — select Blank.
▪ Name — type an appropriate name for your new report.
▪ Item type — select Plant Item.
▪ Report type — select Tabular format.
▪ Description — type a short description as needed.
3. Click OK and then click Yes when prompted to edit the report.
4. In Microsoft Excel, click Add-Ins > Define.
5. On the Define Report Contents dialog box, click New.
6. On the New Items dialog box, select Representation as the related item and click Apply
and then Close.
7. On the Define Report Contents dialog box, select Plant Item and click Define.
8. On the Properties tab of the Define Report Items dialog box, select the Item Tag property
and click OK.
9. On the Define Report Contents dialog box, select Representation and click Define.
10. On the Properties tab of the Define Report Items dialog box, select the
Document.ItemTag property and click OK.
11. On the Define Report Contents dialog box, click Close.
12. In Microsoft Excel, define the Item Tag and Composite Drawing Item Tag column
headers.
13. Select the Item Tag header and click Map Properties > Item Tag > Item Tag.
14. Select the Composite Drawing Item Tag header and click Map Properties >
Representation > Document.ItemTag.
15. Save the report template and generate the report.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 653

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Example:

Generate a Report for Selected Items

1. In the Electrical Index, select the items for which you want to generate a report.
2. Click Reports > Plant Reports.
Alternatively, click Reports > My Reports to select a customized report that you
defined already.
3. On the Plant Reports dialog box or the My Reports dialog box, choose the items you want
to report on.
4. In the Report using group box, select one of the following options:
▪ Current selection - Produces a report containing the selected items in your current
table. This option is not available if no table items are selected.
▪ Entire table - Produces a report containing the contents of the EDE.
5. Click OK.

▪ You must have Microsoft Excel installed on your computer to display reports.
▪ The software stores the reports that you generate on your local computer in the Windows
directory under \Profiles\<username>\My Reports\Output.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 654

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Shipped Reports
Smart Electrical provides you with a number of predefined reports. You can use these reports
as templates for any other reports. You can define your own sort and filter settings. Also, you
can use sort, filter or other queries to create new reports.
Note that if you do not select particular items in a table that you open in the EDE, the software
generates a report that includes all the tags belonging to the item type that the report is based
on.
Every time you generate a report, the software retrieves the relevant data from the database
and calculates the pertinent results based on the currently retrieved values. The software does
not store the report and the calculation results in the database, but rather in the Excel file that
the software creates after generating the report. The software recalculates the values every
time you generate the report. Therefore, the report displays the data only as it exists at the time
of the report generation. You can then save the report as an external Excel file if needed.
Note that there are hidden columns and Visual Basic code in the templates of these reports. Be
very careful when editing a template or a report, as this may render your report unusable.
To support the latest versions of MS Office, the templates of the following
reports are provided only in the XLSM format:
▪ All Feeder Load Summary Report
▪ Multi-Sheet Switchboard Summary
The following reports are available:

I/O Signal List

I/O Signal List is a report that is intended for publishing signal data to Smart
Instrumentation. The report includes all I/O signals defined in the units of the current
plant. This report provides the following information:
▪ I/O signal tags
▪ Description
▪ I/O types
▪ Host
▪ Card
▪ Channel
▪ Address
▪ CS tag
▪ Reference instrument loop

I/O Signal List - With Issue

I/O Signal List - with issue is a report that is intended for publishing signal data to the integrated
environment. The report includes all I/O signals defined in the units of the current plant. This
report provides the following information:
▪ I/O signal tags

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 655

 Reports in Smart Electrical

▪ Description
▪ I/O types
▪ Host
▪ Card
▪ Channel
▪ Address
▪ CS tag
▪ Reference instrument loop

I/O Signal and Equipment - With Issue

I/O Signal and Equipment - with issue is a report that is intended for publishing signal and
equipment data, or just equipment data to the integrated environment. The report includes all
I/O signals and equipment defined in the units of the current plant. The report provides the
following information:
▪ I/O signal tags
▪ Description
▪ Equipment tags
▪ Item type
▪ I/O type
▪ Host
▪ Card
▪ Channel
▪ Address
▪ CS tag
▪ Reference instrument loop

Instrument and Cabinet Load List

Instrument and Cabinet Load List is a report that is intended for publishing instruments and
cabinets that have been retrieved from Smart Instrumentation as loads. The report actually
displays data for all electrical equipment types; however, when you use it for publishing data to
Smart Instrumentation, the software automatically selects data for instruments and cabinets
only; you should not use a filter to do so. This report provides the following information:
▪ Instrument / cabinet tags
▪ Tag types
▪ Description
▪ Instrument rated power
▪ Cabinet rated power

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 656

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Instruments and Cabinet Load List - With Issue

Instrument and Cabinet Load List is a report that is intended for publishing instruments and
cabinets that have been retrieved from Smart Instrumentation as loads to the integrated
environment. The report actually displays data for all electrical equipment types; however,
when you use it for publishing data to the integrated environment, the software automatically
selects data for instruments and cabinets only; you should not use a filter to do so. This report
provides the following information:
▪ Instrument / cabinet tags
▪ Tag types
▪ Description
▪ Instrument rated power
▪ Cabinet rated power

Electrical Load List

Electrical Load List is a report that you generate based on the load item type. The software
retrieves the load tags with the relevant load tag data, such a rated power, brake power for
motors, as well as values for efficiency, power factor, full load current, and so forth.
To customize this report VB programming skills are required.

PDB Load Summary

PDB Load Summary is a report that you generate based on a load item type. The purpose of
this report is to provide a list of loads that are associated with power distribution boards, to sum
the electrical kW, kVAR values of these loads and, based on the individual coincidence factors,
calculate normal and peak consumptions that enable you to estimate the required capacities
that a particular PDB has to deliver.
The report specifics are as follows:
▪ For each associated load, the report lists such properties as load rated power, the load
demand factor, operating mode, and the electrical rated values (in kW and kVAr) of the load.
▪ On the first page of the report, the software shows the loads that are not yet associated with
any PDB. On the subsequent pages of the report, the software lists each PDB and its
associated loads.
▪ The report includes only those PDBs that are associated with loads. However, the report
does not include loads that do not belong to the load item type.
▪ Loads that are connected to circuits for which the circuit mode value is Disconnected
appear in load summaries, but the software does not take those loads into account in the
total load calculation.
▪ The report groups and sorts the loads according to their associated PDB.
▪ The software sums the electrical quantities to provide the total running load and the total
peak load based on the coincidence factors that has been defined for each load.
▪ Under each PDB in the report, the software sorts the loads according to their bus
association and then alphanumerically under the bus.
▪ The software does not filter out any specific PDB. If you do not filter the PDBs, the software
lists all the existing PDBs. To create a report for a specific PDB, use an appropriate

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 657

 Reports in Smart Electrical

filter. The software displays each PDB on a separate page. The first page is reserved for
those loads that are not associated with a PDB.
▪ The report multiplies each electrical load by its coincidence factor (x, y, z or zz).
▪ Based on the total kW and KVA values, the software calculates the needed power factor in
the report.
▪ The software does not store the report and the calculation results in the database, but rather
in the Excel file that the software creates after generating the report. The software
recalculates the values every time you generate the report. Therefore, the report displays
the data only as it exists at the time of the report generation. You can then save the report
as an external Excel file if needed.
▪ For associated capacitors, the software subtracts the rated kVAr value of the capacitor from
the total connected rated kVAr value. Therefore, the rated electrical power ( kVAr) may
display a negative value. This means that there is a lagging power factor.
▪ When localizing the software, do not translate the values (Continuous, Intermittent,
Standby, and Spare) that appear in the Operating Mode list of the Data Dictionary. The
software will not be able to perform some of the calculations if these values are changed.
▪ It is also possible to generate a PDB load summary for a freestanding bus.
To customize this report VB programming skills are required.

All Feeder Load Summary Report

The All Feeder Load Summary report is a summary of the loads that are connected to the buses
of a power distribution board that you select in the Electrical Index or the Electrical
Engineer. This report is based on either the consumed or rated power of the selected loads.
The All Feeder Load Summary report provides a list of loads that are associated with power
distribution boards, to sum the electrical kW, kVAR values of these loads and, based on the
coincidence factors of the relevant buses or the individual loads, calculate normal and peak
consumptions that enable you to estimate the required capacities that a particular PDB has to
deliver. The report sums the loads that are connected to the downstream buses. This ability to
look for downstream loads that are fed from the selected bus is sometimes called "drill down" or
"roll up".
For details, see All Feeder Load Summary Report.
To customize this report VB programming skills are required.

Multi-Sheet Switchboard Summary Report

This multi-sheet load summary report includes the following:
▪ a cover sheet
▪ a general notes sheet
▪ a switchboard summary sheet that shows all the PDBs included in the report and their
properties
▪ a transformer sizing sheet
▪ an all feeder summary report sheet for each bus belonging to the PDBs in the report
▪ if you generate a registered report, the report will include a separate all feeder summary
sheet for each bus in the current plant (for all the PDBs)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 658

 Reports in Smart Electrical

▪ if you generate a report for specific PDBs, each bus of the selected PDBs will have its
own all feeder summary sheet
For details, see Multi-Sheet Switchboard Summary Report.

Cable Take-Off
Cable Take-Off is a report that provides a summary of all the existing cables in your plant,
including the cables that haven't been sized yet.
The report specifics are as follows:
▪ Provides technical details about the cable types.
▪ Calculates the total estimated and design lengths of each cable type.
▪ Calculates the lengths of single core conductor configuration cables based on the number of
conductors of each cable.
▪ Provides estimated cable lengths both in meters and feet.
▪ Allows you to expand each cable type to view the individual cable tags.

Cable Schedule
Cable Schedule is a report that lists all the existing plant cables.
This report provides the following information:
▪ Cable tag
▪ Cable category
▪ Reference cable name
▪ Cable formation
▪ Jacket color
▪ Rated voltage
▪ Cable origin and destination sides (the To and From cable sides). The To and From
information includes the tag of the electrical item that the cable is associated with. If one of
the cable sides is assigned to a PDB, the report displays the path of the circuit tag: PDB/
bus/(cell)/ circuit.
▪ Cable length data: estimated, design, and actual length
▪ Cable drum information: drum item tag and drum length
▪ Cable cut information: cable cut name, sequence, length, and assigned cable drum
▪ Cable routing path
▪ If you are generating a cable schedule report for a cable that is connected to an auxiliary
contact, the cable schedule report will display the full connection path:
PDB > Bus > Cell > Circuit > Circuit internal disconnect electrical equipment > Auxiliary
contact
Or
Stand-alone disconnect electrical equipment > Auxiliary contact

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 659

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Cable Schedule - with issue

Cable Schedule - with issue is a report that lists all the existing plant cables for publishing to the
integrated environment.
This report provides the following information:
▪ Cable tag
▪ Cable category
▪ Reference cable name
▪ Cable formation
▪ Jacket color
▪ Rated voltage
▪ Cable origin and destination sides (the To and From cable sides). The To and From
information includes the tag of the electrical item that the cable is associated with. If one of
the cable sides is assigned to a PDB, the report displays the path of the circuit tag: PDB/
bus/(cell)/ circuit.
▪ Cable length data: estimated, design, and actual length
▪ Cable drum information: drum item tag and drum length
▪ Cable cut information: cable cut name, sequence, length, and assigned cable drum
▪ Cable routing path
▪ If you are generating a cable schedule report for a cable that is connected to an auxiliary
contact, the cable schedule report will display the full connection path:
PDB > Bus > Cell > Circuit > Circuit internal disconnect electrical equipment > Auxiliary
contact
Or
Stand-alone disconnect electrical equipment > Auxiliary contact

Cable Sizing Summary

Cable Sizing Summary is a report that lists all the cable sizing input and output data for a
specified power cable. You are required to create a filter for this report to display power cables
only. This report is useful as a quick reference for your sizing considerations and criteria at any
time during the life cycle of your plant.
This report provides the following information:
▪ Cable tag name.
▪ Cable origin and destination sides (the To and From cable sides). The To and From
information includes the tag of the electrical item that the cable is assigned to.
▪ Input values such as load voltage, full load current, number of phases, and so forth.
▪ Sizing results such as reference cable, conductor size, calculated voltage drop, and so forth.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 660

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Cable Wiring Schedule

Cable Wiring Schedule is a report that provides a list of selected cables and their conductors
showing to which terminal strips and terminals the cables are connected. The report is based
on the item type of the cables for which you want to generate a report. When customizing your
cable wiring schedule report, use the following conductor properties to define the association
between the conductors and the terminals that are connected on both sides of the cables.
▪ Side1.Terminal.Item.Tag
▪ Side1.Terminal Strip.Item.Tag
▪ Side2.Terminal.Item.Tag
▪ Side2.Terminal Strip.Item.Tag

Terminal Strip Schedule Reports

Smart Electrical provides with three terminal strip schedule reports. These reports show wiring
information from the perspective of the wiring equipment that you select in the Electrical
Index. The connection between the terminals and the conductors is based on the Conductor-
Terminal table. The following reports are available:
▪ Terminal Strip Schedule —A report based on the terminal strips you select in the Electrical
Index.
▪ Terminal Strip Schedule - Panel —A report based on the panels you select in the Electrical
Index.
▪ Terminal Strip Schedule - PDB —A report based on the power distribution boards you select
in the Electrical Index.

Cable Pulling Card

Cable Pulling Card is used during the construction phase of a plant. Its purpose is to track the
pulling of cables from drums and to record the actual routing and length of cables.
The report provides the following cable and drum information:
▪ Cable type, cable formation, cable designation (= cable type), from equipment, to
equipment, route, assigned drum, actual drum number, design length, tail from, pulled
length, and so forth.
Note that this report is customizable if needed.

Cable Termination Card

Cable Termination Card is used during the construction phase of a plant. Its purpose is to track
the wiring and termination of a cable.
The report contains three sections:
▪ Cable test card information: cable number, cable type, To and From equipment, conductor
arrangement, and so forth
▪ Cable termination card source side: cable number, formation, designation, type; To and
From equipment, and gland type.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 661

 Reports in Smart Electrical

▪ Cable termination card destination side: cable number, formation, designation, type; To and
From equipment, cable schedule number, wiring diagram number, gland details, and so
forth.
Note that this report is customizable if needed.

Drum Composition
▪ Displays the cable assignments for each drum in your plant.

Segment Width Estimate

▪ You can use the Segment Width Estimate report for calculating the tray widths and number
of layers needed so that you can select appropriate reference cableway components.

Cableway Component Material Take-Off

▪ Displays the quantity of items required for each type of reference cableway component
when ordering items from the manufacturer.

Cableway Segment Schedule

▪ Displays the list of cables in each cableway segment that makes up your cable routing.

Segment Fill
▪ Displays the fill status and tray loading for each segment and indicates whether or not the
segment is overfilled.

PDB Schedule
▪ PDB Schedule is a report that you generate based on the circuit item type. The report
specifics are as follows:
▪ The report lists, for all the power distribution boards in the current plant, all the circuits,
loads, circuit internal components with the technical details of each circuit.
▪ The report includes the associated schematic drawings.
▪ The report uses a predefined filter to display the associated schematic drawings. To
customize this report VB programming skills are required.
▪ It is also possible to generate a PDB schedule for a freestanding bus.

Power Distribution Panel Schedule

▪ Power Distribution Panel Schedule is a report that is intended for single phase loads
connected to distribution panels. The report specifics are as follows:
▪ The report lists, for all the power distribution boards in the current plant, all the circuits,
each with its protection device type and current rating (the software supports a single
protection device per circuit) and the loads associated with each circuit.
▪ The report sorts the circuits by phase and then by circuit (all the circuits for phase 1,
then phase 2, and then phase 3).
▪ The report calculates the following: Full load current for each phase, Total load current
of the bus, Total kW per phase, Total kW per bus.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 662

 Reports in Smart Electrical

▪ This report is not suitable for PDBs that include 3-phase loads.
▪ To customize this report VB programming skills are required.

Reference Cable Schedule for Smart 3D

This report is used in Smart 3D to bulk load Smart Electrical reference cables into the Smart 3D.

All Feeder Load Summary Report

The All Feeder Load Summary Report is a summary of the loads that are connected to the
buses of a power distribution board that you select in the Electrical Index or the Electrical
Engineer. This report is based on either the consumed or rated power of the selected loads.
The software takes into account any existing equipment that is connected in
parallel.
The All Feeder Load Summary Report provides a list of loads that are associated with power
distribution boards, to sum the electrical kW, kVAR values of these loads and, based on the
coincidence factors of the relevant buses or the individual loads, calculate normal and peak
consumptions that enable you to estimate the required capacities that a particular PDB has to
deliver. The report sums the loads that are connected to the downstream buses. This ability to
look for downstream loads that are fed from the selected bus is sometimes called "drill down" or
"roll up".

Displaying Plant Item Values for Plant Operating Cases

Just before the software starts generating your report, it automatically opens a dialog box which
allows you to select the plant operating cases for which you want to run the report. As a result,
the generated report will contain sets of load data, each set for a different operating case that
you select. This way you can compare the various bus loadings at different operating cases and
use them as a basis for equipment sizing. If only one operating case exists in the plant, the
software generates the report without opening this dialog box.
Prior to generating your report, select an appropriate template that
enables case data. The following templates are available with the shipped reports:
▪ Multi-Sheet Switchboard Summary.xlsm
▪ All Feeder Load Summary.xlsm
Once you start generating an All Feeder Load Summary report, the software retrieves the data
of all the loads that are connected to the buses that belong to the PDBs or buses that you
selected in the Electrical Index or the Electrical Engineer and starts the bus drill-down
calculation. The software retrieves the values for one bus at a time (the summary is per bus
within the selected PDB) including the loads that are connected to the downstream loads that
are connected and fed from the bus for which the software calculates the summary. The
generated report shows the individual loads connected to the bus as well as all the feeders that
feed the downstream buses and their loads.

Calculations
When making calculations, Smart Electrical considers the worst-case scenario
in its calculation results and does not take into account any load flow that would be taken into
account by a power analysis application such as ETAP. That is, for calculation purposes,

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 663

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Smart Electrical always assumes that the total connected load is supplied from one source only.
If there are multiple sources that supply the same connected load, Smart Electrical assumes
that each source has the capability to supply the connected load. Smart Electrical, unlike any
power analysis application, does not account for multiple sources that share a load.
Consequently, in Smart Electrical, the total load for a distribution network can appear artificially
high unless the Circuit Mode property is set to either Connected or Disconnected as required
on specific circuits.
The All Feeder Summary report shows consumed or rated power values, compensated or
uncompensated for the coincidence factors of the buses or loads (depending on the preference
settings). For details, see Customize All Feeder Load Summary Report Preferences.
Furthermore, this report also shows the kV and kVAR values for individual loads grouped
according to the relevant operation mode of the load. The report also includes the converting
equipment power losses data as well as circuit totals.
Note that circuits have a property called CircuitMode with values Connected and
Disconnected. If you set this property to Disconnected, the drill down algorithm will stop the
calculation and the software will not roll up the loads connected to this circuit.
At the bottom of the All Feeder Load Summary report, the software displays the calculated
compensated totals of all the loads at normal and peak operations.

Calculations Based on the Largest Non-Continuous Load

When you generate a report based on the largest non-continuous load (see Calculate Bus
Loading According to the Largest Non-Continuous Load (on page 270) ), the report displays
special indications to this effect.
▪ The report title states that the report is calculated according to the largest non-continuous
load.
▪ At the bottom of the report, in the Notes section, the report contains an explanation of how
the values in the active and reactive columns have been calculated.
▪ In case the bus loading calculation has been made based on the largest non-continuous
load, a background color is used to mark the active and/or reactive values of the largest
non-continuous load regardless of whether it's a load directly connected to the bus or rolled
up from one of the downstream buses.
▪ In case the bus loading calculation has been made based on the sigma of the
non-continuous loads, no background color is used to mark the largest load.
▪ If the largest load comes from a downstream feeder circuit that feeds downstream buses,
the software adds and shows the downstream largest load item tag and its kw and kva
values to enable you to double-check these values if needed. There can be up to three
loads with a total of up to six lines, two for each operating mode: the largest intermittent kw,
largest intermittent kvar, largest spare kw, largest spare kvar, largest stand-by kw, and
largest stand-by kvar.
▪ The bus totals also show the equation and the values that the software used to make the
calculations.
▪ In case the software detects that the largest load is one of the loads connected to a
downstream bus, the report also shows the following:
▪ The active and reactive calculated values of the relevant circuits are marked with a
background color.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 664

 Reports in Smart Electrical

▪ The name of the largest load appears below the circuit values.
▪ The full equation used to make the calculation is shown at the bottom.
▪ When using a feeder-incomer connection within the same PDB, the calculation will be the
same as for a coupler-riser connection. Therefore, all the results in the switch gear
worksheet will display a summation of all buses instead of the upper drilled down peak value
of the upper bus.

Report Customization
Note that you can customize your All Feeder Load Summary report. For instructions, see
Customizing the All Feeder Load Summary Report (on page 676).

Defining a Filter for the PDBs to Be Included in the Report

You can filter a registered report which is based on a report template. This way you can
determine which PDBs (and their buses) will be included in your report. The excluded PDBs,
although not shown in the report, will be fully accounted for in the overall calculation.
Make sure that the report which you are going to filter is a registered report.
1. In the Filter Manager, create a new filter.
2. Make sure that on the Add Filter dialog box, you select Power Distribution Board from the
Filter for list.

In the example shown above, only the PDBs whose item tags include "LS" and "LM" will be
included in the report.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 665

 Reports in Smart Electrical

3. In Smart Electrical, open the Registered Report Common Properties and select the newly
defined filter from the Filter list.

The software will filter the PDBs when you run the report.

▪ Electrical items are included in calculations if they are defined as consumers. In addition to
loads, you can define converting equipment items, cabinets, local panels, and junction
boxes as consumers. To define an electrical item as a consumer, you have to set the Is
Load property in the Properties window for that item to True or define the electrical item as
a Consumer in the relevant Common Properties dialog box.
▪ If you define a converting equipment item, local panel, or junction box as a consumer and
perform a drill-down calculation, the software uses the rated and consumed electrical load
values of the equipment as the load values, the software ignores the entire branch that is
connected downstream from the equipment. Note that you enter the pertinent rated and
consumed electrical load values on the Common Properties dialog box of the equipment
item.
▪ If you create a circular network that contains several buses that feed other common
downstream buses, the report will display a larger than expected value for the total of the
circuits. In a circular network, each of the circuits includes common loads and,
consequently, the total of the circuits is reflected in the summation of the common loads.
To prevent this from happening, disconnect one of the circuits that feeds the downstream
buses.
▪ The circuit totals that are shown in the Bus grid of the report do not account for transformer
losses. The bus totals, however, do account for these losses.
▪ It is also possible to generate a report for a freestanding bus.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 666

 Reports in Smart Electrical

▪ You can customize this report as needed. (Note that VB programming skills are required.)
For detailed information about customizing this report, see the SpelCalcInf.chm file, which is
located in the home folder where your Smart Electrical is installed, for example C > Program
Files>SmartPlant>Electrical>Program\resdlls>0009>SpelCalcInf.chm.

Multi-Sheet Switchboard Summary Report

General
The multi-sheet load summary report includes the following:
▪ a cover sheet
▪ a general notes sheet
▪ a switchboard summary sheet that shows all the PDBs included in the report and their
properties
▪ a transformer sizing sheet
▪ a bus summary sheet for each bus belonging to the PDBs in the report

Displaying Plant Item Values for Plant Operating Cases

Just before the software starts generating your report, it automatically opens a dialog box which
allows you to select the plant operating cases for which you want to run the report. As a result,
the generated report will contain sets of load data, each set for a different operating case that
you select. This way you can compare the various bus loadings at different operating cases and
use them as a basis for equipment sizing. If only one operating case exists in the plant, the
software generates the report without opening this dialog box.
Prior to generating your report, select an appropriate template that
enables case data. The following templates are available with the shipped reports:
▪ Multi-Sheet Switchboard Summary.xlsm
▪ All Feeder Load Summary.xlsm

Calculations Based on the Largest Non-Continuous Load

When you generate a report based on the largest non-continuous load (see Calculate Bus
Loading According to the Largest Non-Continuous Load (on page 270) ), the report displays
special indications to this effect.
▪ The report title states that the report is calculated according to the largest non-continuous
load.
▪ At the bottom of the report, in the Notes section, the report contains an explanation of how
the values in the active and reactive columns have been calculated.
▪ In case the bus loading calculation has been made based on the largest non-continuous
load, a background color is used to mark the active and/or reactive values of the largest
non-continuous load regardless of whether it's a load directly connected to the bus or rolled
up from one of the downstream buses.
▪ In case the bus loading calculation has been made based on the sigma of the
non-continuous loads, no background color is used to mark the largest load.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 667

 Reports in Smart Electrical

▪ If the largest load comes from a downstream feeder circuit that feeds downstream buses,
the software adds and shows the downstream largest load item tag and its kw and kva
values to enable you to double-check these values if needed. There can be up to three
loads with a total of up to six lines, two for each operating mode: the largest intermittent kw,
largest intermittent kvar, largest spare kw, largest spare kvar, largest stand-by kw, and
largest stand-by kvar.
▪ The bus totals also show the equation and the values that the software used to make the
calculations.
▪ In case the software detects that the largest load is one of the loads connected to a
downstream bus, the report also shows the following:
▪ The active and reactive calculated values of the relevant circuits are marked with a
background color.
▪ The name of the largest load appears below the circuit values.
▪ The full equation used to make the calculation is shown at the bottom.
▪ When using a feeder-incomer connection within the same PDB, the calculation will be the
same as for a coupler-riser connection. Therefore, all the results in the switch gear
worksheet will display a summation of all buses instead of the upper drilled down peak value
of the upper bus.

The Report Scope

The scope of the report is as follows:
▪ For a registered report, the report includes all the buses in the current plant (belonging to all
the PDBs in the plant). Note that you can define the scope by applying a custom filter to
your registered report.
▪ For a plant report, the scope includes only the buses that belong to the PDBs that you select
for the report.
▪ The software takes into account any existing equipment that is connected in parallel.
Adding Rows Above the Grids:
1. In Smart Electrical, click Reports > Edit and select the Multi-Sheet Switchboard Summary
template.
2. In Excel, click Add-Inns and then Options.
3. On the Report Options dialog box, increment the number that appears in the Rows in
report header. Note that the minimum number of headers in the report is 13.
4. Then on the Switchboard Summary, Transformer Sizing, and Template sheets of the report
template, right-click an empty row above the grid and click Insert.
5. Type in the required text in the new row.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 the number of times for each added row. If, for example, you
increment the number of rows by 3, perform steps 4 and 5 tree times.

Defining a Filter for the PDBs to Be Included in the Report

You can filter a registered report which is based on a report template. This way you can
determine which PDBs (and their buses) will be included in your report. The excluded PDBs,
although not shown in the report, will be fully accounted for in the overall calculation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 668

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Make sure that the report which you are going to filter is a registered report.
1. In the Filter Manager, create a new filter.
2. Make sure that on the Add Filter dialog box, you select Power Distribution Board from the
Filter for list.

In the example shown above, only the PDBs whose item tags include "LS" and "LM" will be
included in the report.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 669

 Reports in Smart Electrical

3. In Smart Electrical, open the Registered Report Common Properties and select the newly
defined filter from the Filter list.

The software will filter the PDBs when you run the report.

Sheet 1: Cover Sheet

The cover sheet is fully customizable. All the data is inserted by users.
▪ Document Title — typed in by users.
▪ Document Number —in case of a plant report, the document number is typed in by users. In
case of a registered report, this is the name of the registered report in Smart Electrical
(inserted into the report by Smart Electrical).
▪ Project Number — typed in by users.
Excel inserts these definitions on all the other subsequent sheets of the report.

Sheet 2: Notes and Hold Sheet

The notes and holds sheet is fully customizable. All the data is inserted by users. The project
name and document number are taken from the Cover sheet by Excel.

Sheet 3: General Notes Sheet

The notes and holds sheet is fully customizable. All the data is inserted by users. The project
name and document number are taken from the Cover sheet by Excel.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 670

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Sheet 4: Switchboard Summary Sheet

The switchboard summary sheet shows in a grid form all the PDBs for which the report was
generated. Each row in the grid is one specific PDB and its properties. Note the following:
▪ All the values (apart from Revision) are generated and inserted by the software, either
Smart Electrical or Excel.
▪ You can add more columns to the grid.
▪ The column header can be renamed.
▪ The units of measure cannot be changed.
▪ The project name and document number are inserted from the Cover sheet by Excel.
▪ The sequence of the switchboards in the grid is determined by the electrical hierarchy.
The Switchboard Summary grid:

Column Explanation Value Inserted By

Entry number Grid sequence number Excel

Switchboard Tag PDB item tag number Smart Electrical

Number

Description The Description property of the current Smart Electrical

PDB

Location The Building Name property of the Smart Electrical

current PDB

Nominal Voltage The highest rated voltage value of all Smart Electrical
the buses in the PDB.

Nominal Current The highest current rating value of all Smart Electrical
Rating the buses in the PDB.

Load Current (A) The peak total load current value Excel
Calculated calculated by Excel according to a
predefined formula. The calculation is
made on the assumption that it is a
3-phase AC bus system.

Continuous Continuous active and reactive Smart

electrical consumption values Electrical
calculated according to your report
preferences. (See below.)

Intermittent Intermittent active and reactive Smart

electrical consumption values Electrical
calculated according to your report
preferences. (See below.)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 671

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Column Explanation Value Inserted By

Standby Standby active and reactive electrical Smart

consumption values calculated Electrical
according to your report preferences.
(See below.)

Spare Spare active and reactive electrical Smart

consumption values calculated Electrical
according to your report preferences.
(See below.)

Peak Total The sum of the peak compensated The bus total are taken
(kW and kVar) consumed active and reactive electrical from Smart Electrical and
consumption of all the buses calculated added up by Excel
by Smart Electrical.

Peak Total (kVA) Peak compensated consumed apparent Smart Electrical

electrical consumption.

Remarks The Note property of the current PDB Smart Electrical

Revision Revision value User

Sheet 5: Transformer Sizing Sheet

The Transformer Sizing sheet shows in a grid form all the transformers that feed the selected
PDBs except for the following:
▪ The transformers that reside inside in circuit internals.
▪ The transformers that feed the buses within the same PDB.
▪ The transformers that feed free-standing buses.
To include the transformer that feeds the highest level PDB, you need to add a virtual
PDB with a bus above that transformer.
Each row in the grid is one specific transformer and its properties. Note the following:
▪ You can add more columns to the grid.
▪ You can rename the column headers.
▪ You cannot change the units of measure.
▪ The project name and document number are taken from the Cover sheet by Excel.
The Transformer Sizing grid:

Column Explanation Value Inserted By

Entry number Grid sequence number Excel

Tag Number Transformer item tag number Smart Electrical

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 672

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Column Explanation Value Inserted By

Description The Description property of the Smart Electrical

transformer

Location The Building Name property of the Smart Electrical

transformer

Dry / Oil Filled The Cooling Type property of the Smart Electrical
transformer

Voltage (kV) - Primary The Rated Voltage property of the Smart Electrical
transformer

Voltage (kV) - The Output Rated Voltage property of Smart Electrical

Secondary the transformer secondary. (In case of a
3-winding transformer, the values of the
tertiary are not shown.)

Peak (kVA) The peak total calculated apparent Excel (The same values
electrical consumption of all the PDBs that appear for the peak
that are fed by the transformer. totals in the switchboard
summary grid for the
respective PDBs.)

10% of Design Margin 110% of the peak power value Excel / User (The default
setting in the formula is
The provided formula multiplies the
10% which can be changed
peak total kVA value by 1.1. You can
by users.)
modify this formula to any percentage of
the design margin in your plant.

% Loading The loading percentage of the Excel

transformer according to the formula
cell of the Excel template. This value is
calculated as a ration between the
transformer peak loading divided by the
selected transformer rating.

Rating MVA The minimum recommended User

(ONAF and ANAF) transformer ratings according to the
values in the transformer selection table
located to the right of the grid border.
(See the note below.)

ONAF/ONAN Ratio The ratio between the transformer Excel

rating at ONAF/ONAN cooling value.

Primary Current (A) The primary calculated current at Excel

ONAN/AN ONAN/AN cooling.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 673

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Column Explanation Value Inserted By

Primary Current (A) The primary calculated current at Excel

ONAF/ANAF ONAF/ANAF cooling.

Secondary Current (A) The secondary calculated current at Excel

ONAN/AN ONAN/AN cooling.

Secondary Current (A) The secondary calculated current at Excel

ONAF/ANAF ONAF/ANAF cooling.

Selected Transformer The rating of the selected transformer in User

Rating (MVA) MVA

Remarks The Notes property of the transformer Smart Electrical

Revision Revision value User

To the right of the grid border, there is a transformer selection table which starts at
R10C23 and ends at R10C40. This table contains catalog values of standard transformer
rating. The formula in R14C11 is defined to select the first transformer with the rating greater or
equal to the value that is calculated in the Design Margin cell, which has a default setting of
10% (which you can change if needed).

Sheet 6 (and all other consecutive sheets): Bus Summary Report Sheet
The report provides one sheet for each bus belonging to the PDBs for which the report is
generated. The buses are sequenced according to their electrical hierarchy. All the values are
calculated and inserted by Smart Electrical. The data above the grid is taken from the Cover
sheet by Excel.
Note that the compensated total values depend on the user preference setting (rated or
consumed). For details, see the IMPORTANT note below.
The report has the following sections:
▪ Direct Loads — Lists all the loads connected directly to the current bus. All the values are
generated and inserted into the report by Smart Electrical.
▪ Loads Connected by Converting Equipment — Lists all the loads connected indirectly
through converting equipment to the current bus.
▪ Converting Equipment Losses — Lists all the converting equipment items for which
contribute to power losses. Note that this section appears only if you have selected the
Account for converting equipment power losses check box on the Reports tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
▪ Circuits — Lists all the buses that are connected downstream under current bus, regardless
of whether the buses are connected directly or through converting equipment. The data
shown here is feeder totals.
▪ Circuit Totals — The sum of all the loads that appear in the grid for each individual row.
▪ Compensated Peak Load — Shows the total compensated peak total value.
▪ Compensated Running Load — Shows the total compensated running load value.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 674

 Reports in Smart Electrical

See also All Feeder Load Summary Report for more details.
Note the following for all the sheets in the report:
▪ For all the operating mode values (continuous, intermittent, standby, and spare), the values
in all the grids depend on your selections on the Load Summaries and Reports tab of the
Preferences dialog box:

The settings here do not affect the Compensated Peak Load and Compensated Running
Load totals.
Also note the following:
▪ Do not change the text in the Name box of Excel unless you want to redefine the way the
report functions.
▪ Do not change the formulas Formula box of Excel.
▪ Do not change the position of the columns that have a reference in any of the formulas.
▪ You can add columns on the right of the grids.
▪ You can rename the column headers in the grid (apart from the unit of measure headers)
▪ You can add any text that you need above the grid.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 675

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Customizing the All Feeder Load Summary Report

The software allows you to customize your All Feeder Load Summary Report. You can do the
following:
▪ Change the column names.
▪ Move the columns to another position.
▪ Add new columns.
▪ Remove redundant columns.
▪ Build new sheets from scratch.
For detailed information about customizing this report, see the SpelCalcInf.chm file, which is
located in the home folder where your Smart Electrical is installed, for example C > Program
Files>SmartPlant>Electrical>Program\resdlls>0009>SpelCalcInf.chm.

Registering Reports
After generating a report in Smart Electrical, you need to register the new report if you want to
turn it into a formal deliverable. Registering reports allows you to do the following:
▪ Publish the report and all the data included in the report.
▪ Set report revisions.
▪ Track revisions for plant items in a registered report.
▪ Compare the content of a registered report with an archived version of that report.
When you register a report, it appears under Documents > Registered Reports in the
Electrical Index. Note that you can associate an electrical item with a registered report. Note
that if you do not register a report, the above functionality is not available.
Working with registered reports (generating, editing, and deleting) is subject to
user rights that are set by your administrator in Smart Engineering Manager. These user rights
are:
None — prevents users from registering reports.
Read-Only — allows users only to open and view the registered reports.
Modify Settings — allows users to create and edit registered reports using the Common
Properties dialog box, set revisions.
Full Control — allows users to modify and delete registered reports.
For more information, see Smart Engineering Manager Guide > User Access >Smart Electrical
User Rights.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 676

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Register a Report
1. Click Actions > Register Report.
2. On the Registered Report Common Properties dialog box, beside the Report template
box, click the ellipsis button and select a report file.
You can create a custom report or select one of the reports that is shipped with
Smart Electrical. For the full list of shipped reports, see Shipped Reports.
3. If you want to filter the data that appears in the report, beside Filter, click the ellipsis button
and select a filter that is suitable for the report template. For details of how to create or
modify a filter, see Filter Manager Online Help.
4. Select a value from the Document main item type list if needed.
This value is for information purposes only.
5. Type a name for the document, and if required, a description.
6. To use the report for publishing data to an XML file, select Enable document for
publishing.

▪ A report that you register can display revision numbers after you archive the report.
▪ The registered report with its filter defines the exact scope or subset of data to be published.
You can view the layout of this report and the properties that are included in the report when
you open the report; however, the actual data (properties) to be published with each item is
defined in the code.

Compare a Registered Report with an Archived Version

The software allows you to archive a registered report in your Smart Electrical database. This
option then makes it possible to compare the current data of the report (that is stored in the
database) with the data of an archived report. Before comparing an archived version of a
report, you can click View to open it for viewing. To enable the archiving option, make sure that
your Project Administrator switches on the archiving option in Options Manager. Once the
archiving option is switched on, the software automatically archives every added or modified
revision whether you did it for a single report or used the Global Revision feature for multiple
reports.
1. Open a registered report.
2. Modify the report as you require.
3. Save the report.
4. Click Edit > Document Properties.
5. Add a revision and click OK on the Document Properties dialog box.
Repeat the above procedure as many times as required to add archived versions of
the report to the database.
6. In the Electrical Index, expand the Documents >Registered Reports folder hierarchy to
display the names of the existing registered reports.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 677

 Reports in Smart Electrical

7. Select the report that you require and do one of the following to open the Compare
Documents dialog box:
▪ Click Actions > Compare Documents.
▪ Right-click the report and select Compare Documents from the shortcut menu.
8. Select an archived version of the report and click Compare.
Before clicking Compare, you can click View to open the selected report that you
want to compare. The software opens the archived report in view mode only.

▪ The software generates a tabular report where it shows all the changes.
▪ The software opens two Excel files. One of the Excel files displays changed data with a blue
shading. The second file is a summary of all changes and it is called Registered
Comparison Report. This report displays the previous and current data for each tag that
has undergone a change. Note that you can compare a registered report only if this is a
simple tabular report.
▪ To improve the performance of the compare mechanism, in the report template, do the
following to add a property that holds a unique value, for example, SP_ID:
1. Start a new customized report or edit an existing report (shipped or customized).

2. In Microsoft Excel, click on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar.

3. On the Define Report Contents dialog box, select the item type for which the new report is
intended and click Define.
4. On the Define Report Item dialog box, from the Available properties list, select the SP_ID
property and click the right arrow to add it to the Selected properties list and click OK.
5. Close the Define Report Contents dialog box.
6. In Microsoft Excel, click in the cell that will contain the SP_ID property.
7. Click Map Properties on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar and point to the SP_ID property.
8. Select a cell that is located above the mapped SP_ID cell.
9. Click in the Name Box of Microsoft Excel and type SP_ID.
10. Save the report.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 678

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Include Revision Data in Customized Registered Reports

This procedure explains how to include revision data in customized registered reports. Note,
that the shipped reports already include this code in the templates.
You can display as many revision levels as you require.
1. Click Reports > Edit.
2. On the Edit Report Template dialog box, select a registered report template.
3. Click Open.
4. In the Excel report template, select the cells for the revision headers and type the header
text in the selected cells.
If you want the revision information to appear at the top of the report, select the cells
in the Header section of the template.
5. Select another cell to contain the revision data.
6. In the Name Box, type the appropriate name for mapping the required revision data, for
example:

7. Press ENTER.
8. After adding all the required revision data, save the Excel template.

▪ The following revision mapping names are available:

▪ LastRevision (same as RevisionNumber_1)
▪ RevisionNumber_1
▪ RevisionDate_1
▪ CreateBy_1
▪ CheckBy_1
▪ ApproveBy_1
▪ RevisionDescription_1
▪ You can include as many revision levels as you need. You specify the revision number by
adding an underscore (_) followed by a number to the mapping name. The lowest number
that follows the underscore retrieves the latest revision. For example, if you want to specify
the data indicated for 4 revision numbers in the document in descending sequence, you
need to include the mapping names (one name per cell) in the following order:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 679

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Revision By Date

RevisionNumber_1 CreateBy_1 RevisionDate_1

RevisionNumber_2 CreateBy_2 RevisionDate_2

RevisionNumber_3 CreateBy_3 RevisionDate_3

RevisionNumber_4 CreateBy_4 RevisionDate_4

Manage Single Plant Item Revisions in Registered Reports

This feature allows you to manage revisions for single plant items that are included in registered
reports. You can add a Revision column and register your new or edited report. This will enable
you to see the revision number of each item in your shipped and customized registered reports.
Also, your registered reports will indicate all the changed properties and mark the new items that
have been added since the last revision. Note that this feature is applicable to global revisions
too.
In order to see the latest revision number in the title blocks of customized
reports, we recommend that you first start by reading the Include Revision Data in Customized
Registered Reports (on page 679) topic. Then continue with the procedure below.
Do the following to add a Revision column in your reports:
1. Start a new customized report or edit an existing report (shipped or customized).

2. In Microsoft Excel, click on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar.

3. On the Define Report Contents dialog box, select the item type for which the new report is
intended and click Define.
4. On the Define Report Item dialog box, from the Available properties list, select the SP_ID
property and click the right arrow to add it to the Selected properties list and click OK.
5. Close the Define Report Contents dialog box.
6. In Microsoft Excel, click in the cell that will contain the SP_ID property.
7. Click Map Properties on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar and point to the SP_ID property.
8. Select a cell that is located above the mapped SP_ID cell.
9. Click in the Name Box of Microsoft Excel and type SP_ID.
10. Add a new column and select a cell in this column.
11. Do one of the following:
▪ To display only the latest revision indicators in the Revision column for new or changed
items, type RevisionColumnA in the Name Box of Microsoft Excel.
▪ To display all revision indicators in the Revision column for all the items, type
RevisionColumnB in the Name Box of Microsoft Excel.
12. Save the report template.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 680

 Reports in Smart Electrical

To enable revision tracking in your customized and shipped reports, you must
register the new and edited reports after completing this procedure. For details about registering
reports, see Register a Report.
After generating a registered report, the following is shown in your report:
▪ After adding the first revision to a report, the report title block displays P0.
▪ After making a change or adding a new item (without adding a new revision), the software
does the following:
▪ In the Revision column, P0* appear for each changed item.
▪ The software highlights every changed property.
▪ An asterisk (*) appears in the Revision column for each new item that did not exist in
the previous revision.
▪ The rows that contain the new items are shown in bold.
▪ After adding a new revision, the software does the following:
▪ The Revision column displays the new revision number for all the items that have been
changed or added since the previous revision.
▪ The software highlights every changed property.
▪ The rows that contain the new items are shown in bold.

Displaying Only the Latest Revision Indicators

Example 1: Adding the first revision made for a particular report gives all the items the starting
revision — P0 displayed in the title block only.

Example 2: When opening an archived version of this report from the Registered Reports
folder in the Electrical Index, the report will show the changes since the previous revision. The
example below shows a report which is work in progress and not an issued version.
The properties of the changed plant items that are included in the report after the initial revision
will be highlighted.
Changes to existing items will be indicated by an asterisk (*) next to their revision indicator (P0*)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 681

 Reports in Smart Electrical

New items that did not exist in the previous revisions will display an asterisk in the Revision
column and will appear in bold.

Example 3: Adding a new revision (P1) will display the revision indicator (P1) in the Revision
column replacing the previous revision indicator (P0*). Also, the revisions that were indicated
with an asterisk (*) are replaced with the P1 indicator. Note that all new rows will appear in bold:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 682

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Displaying All Revision Indicators

Example 1: Adding the first revision made for a particular report gives all the items the starting
revision — P0 displayed in the title block and in the Revision column for all the items

Example 2: When opening an archived version of this report from the Registered Reports
folder in the Electrical Index, the report will show the changes since the previous revision. The
example below shows a report which is work in progress and not an issued version.
The properties of the changed plant items that are included in the report after the initial revision
will be highlighted.
Changes to existing items will be indicated by an asterisk (*) next to their revision indicator (P0*)
New items that did not exist in the previous revisions will display an asterisk in the Revision
column and will appear in bold. All the items that have not changed display their latest revision
indicator in the Revision column.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 683

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Example 3: Adding a new revision (P1) will display the revision indicator (P1) in the Revision
column replacing the previous revision indicator (P0*). Also, the revisions that were indicated
with an asterisk (*) are replaced with the P1 indicator. Note that all new rows will appear in bold:
All the items that have not changed display their latest revision indicator in the Revision column.

Note that if you are using a filter in your report, the filter can affect the
behavior of the revision indicator. For example, if in a previous revision some of the data was
filtered out, removing the filter in a later revision will cause the item to appear as new.

Save Free Text in Registered Reports

You can add free text (text that is not part of engineering data that is kept in your Smart
Electrical database) to any registered report that uses the fixed format option. This is especially
useful with data sheet type reports. Retaining free text becomes possible after enabling a
special Excel add-in the report templates. Note that you have to enable this add-in for the
template of each registered report that will have free text.
After archiving a registered report, the software retains the free text and the smart data with
every revision. This way, each revision can have different free text.
a. Prior to carrying out the following procedure, you have to select the
Trust access to VBA project object model check box in your Microsoft Excel Options.
To do this, in Excel Options, click Trust Center > Trust Center Settings > Macro
Settings > Trust access to VBA project object model.
The following procedure provides the instructions for enabling this special Excel add-in and
saving the free text.
1. On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Reports > Edit.
2. Select the template that you require and click Open.
3. For existing reports, add the following VB code in the report template:
a. In the report template (Microsoft Excel), press Alt+F11.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 684

 Reports in Smart Electrical

b. Under VBAProject, double-click ThisWorkbook.

c. In the General declaration section, add the following string:
Public m_objXLAgent As Object
d. Locate the Public Sub BeginReport(vParam As Variant) string and then type the
following underneath:
Set m_objXLAgent = vParam
e. Save your changes and close the template.
4. In the report template, do the following to add a property that holds a unique value. For
example, the ItemTag property (Motor_1, Motor _2, and so forth.)

a. In Microsoft Excel, click on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar.

b. On the Define Report Contents dialog box, select the item type for which the new
report is intended and click Define.
c. On the Define Report Item dialog box, from the Available properties list, select any
unique property and click the right arrow to add it to the Selected properties list and
click OK.
We recommend that you select SP_ID because this property is known to be
unique.
d. Close the Define Report Contents dialog box.
e. In Microsoft Excel, click in any available cell where you want the selected property (for
example, SP_ID) to appear.
f. Click Map Properties on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar and point to the item type for
which the current report is intended.
g. From the list of the selected properties for this report, click the property that you
selected (for example, SP_ID) to place this property in the selected cell.
h. Click in the Name Box of Microsoft Excel and type Item_ID to name the cell that holds
the selected property (for example, SP_ID).
Note that Item_ID is the only name that is available in the Excel Name Box. It
does not actually matter where you place this cell as long as it exists in the report
template.
5. To register the report, click Actions > Registered Reports on the Smart Electrical menu
bar.
6. On the Registered Reports Common Properties dialog box, select the required template.
7. Type the report name and a brief description if needed.
8. Click OK to add the report to the Registered Reports folder in the Electrical Index.
9. Double-click the report in the Registered Reports folder.
10. Edit the report as needed and add your free text in the data sheet.
You can add free text only in those cells that do not hold macros or
template headers.
11. Do the following in Microsoft Excel to save the free text that you entered in the data sheet:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 685

 Reports in Smart Electrical

a. Click the Add-Ins tab.

b. Click Retain Free Text on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar.
12. Add a new revision.
Make sure that before you start this procedure, the Archive Documents
option is enabled in the General Settings of Options Manager. Also, if you do not add a
new revision the report, the free text will not be saved.
13. Save the report before closing the data sheet.

Associate an Electrical Item with a Registered Report

1. Define a document reference for the registered report that you want to associate. For
details, see Define an External Document Reference (on page 635).
2. In the Electrical Index, select an electrical item.
You can also associate multiple electrical items with the same registered report. In
the Electrical Index, click a folder that contains electrical items and highlight in the list view
pane the items that you require.
3. Click Actions > Associate Document.
4. On the Associate Documents dialog box, under Filter by, under Document category,
select Electrical Documents. This selection determines the available options in the
Document type list. You can define and customize document categories in the Data
Dictionary Manager.
5. From the Document type list, select System Reports.
6. Click Add.
7. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now to display the available documents.
The Find dialog box finds only those documents that belong to the document
category and type that you select on the Associate Documents dialog box.
8. Select each document that you want to associate with the selected item and then click
Apply.
To associate documents belonging to another category or type, return to the Associate
Documents dialog box, select the required document category and type, click Associate again,
and repeat the succeeding steps in this procedure.

Creating and Editing Report Templates

The tasks in this section deal with the creation and management of report templates.
You can create blank templates or you can base them on an existing one. The software allows
you to define the template headers, the content section, and define the report layout of tabular,
composite, or fixed format templates.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 686

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Display the Properties of a Report Template

You can inspect some of the properties that are currently in force for your template, such as the
report item type and the report format.
1. Click Reports > Edit.
2. Select a report from the Available reports list on the Edit Report Template dialog box.
3. Click Properties.

Create a New Blank Report Template

You can define a new report template which is not based on a pre-existing template.
1. Click Reports > New.
2. On the New Report Template dialog box, select Blank from the Source template list.

▪ You can create a new report template based on an existing template by specifying a
source template also. For more information, see Create a Report Template Based on an
Existing Template (on page 688).
▪ Since delivered reports are all in tabular format, you must choose Blank if you want a
fixed or composite format report template. You can select Blank for a tabular format
report template, nonetheless.
3. In the Name box, type a meaningful name to describe the report template you are creating.
This entry is the name of your Microsoft Excel workbook. When you save the
template, the software appends the .xlsm extension to the name.
4. In the Item type box, select an item type.
5. In the Report type box, choose template format.
These options are only available when you choose Blank from the Source
template list.
6. In the Description box, type a description for the template.
7. If you want this template to be available at the plant-level, select the Add to plant reports
option.
You must have the appropriate permissions, granted in Smart Engineering
Manager, to create plant-level report templates.
8. Click OK to create the template.
9. When the software gives you the option to edit your new template in Microsoft Excel, click
OK and define the layout and contents of the template. For more information about these
procedures, see the following topics:
▪ Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template (on page 692)
▪ Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template (on page 694)
▪ Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template (on page 694)
▪ Define the Contents of Your Report Template (on page 690)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 687

 Reports in Smart Electrical

When creating a new report template, the software saves the file as an Excel .xlsm
file.

Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template

You can define a new report template by using another template as a source.
1. Click Reports > New.
2. On the New Report Template dialog box, select an existing template from the Source
template list.
3. In the Name box, type a name for the new report template.
4. In the Description box, type a description for the new report template.
5. Click OK.
6. When the software gives you the option to edit your template, click OK to open Microsoft
Excel and define the contents and layout of your report. For more information about these
procedures, see the following topics:
▪ Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template (on page 692)
▪ Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template (on page 694)
▪ Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template (on page 694)
▪ Define the Contents of Your Report Template (on page 690)

Edit a Report Template

You must have the correct privileges, granted in Smart Engineering Manager,
to be able to edit a report template.
1. Click Reports > Edit.
2. On the Edit Report Template dialog box, select a report from the Available reports list.
3. Click Properties on the Edit Report Template dialog box in order to edit template
properties on the Report Properties dialog box.
Because you are modifying a template that already is defined, changing the Report
type option and the description are the only available actions on the Report Properties
dialog box.
4. Click Open on the Edit Report Template dialog box to display the report in Microsoft Excel
so that you can edit the layout and contents of your report template. For more information
about these procedures, see the following topics:
▪ Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template (on page 692)
▪ Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template (on page 694)
▪ Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template (on page 694)
▪ Define the Contents of Your Report Template (on page 690)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 688

 Reports in Smart Electrical

Define Report Headers

This procedure explains how to define the headers in your report template.
1. Click Reports > Edit.
2. On the Edit Report Template dialog box, select a report template.
3. Click Open.
4. In the Excel report template, select the cells for the report headers and type the header text
in the selected cells.
5. Select another cell for the report header.
6. In the Name Box, type the appropriate name for mapping the report header, for example:

Your report template is based on Excel Macro-Enabled Workbook (*.xlsm),

you cannot use the words "BUS" and "PDB" as column names because these words are
reserved names in Microsoft Excel. If you need to use these words as headers, we suggest
that you add another character or a number to the text, for example BUS1.
For more details about reserved words in Microsoft Excel, see
http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc179188(office.12).aspx
(http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc179188(office.12).aspx).
7. Press ENTER.
8. After adding all the required data, save the Excel template.

▪ To include the properties of a document in your report, add the following macro to the
template:
d_attribute name (For example: d_ItemTag or d_Description)
▪ You can add plant and plant group column headers to your templates. Use the following
macros to show plant and plant group names. Note that all macro names are
case-sensitive:
▪ Plant.Name
▪ Area.Name
▪ Unit.Name
▪ Unit.<custom property>
▪ You can use custom properties to add client information.
▪ For project and contractor information, use the following:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 689

 Reports in Smart Electrical

▪ Project.<PropertName>
▪ Contractor.<PropertName>

Define the Contents of Your Report Template

You can edit your report template in Microsoft Excel and specify what item properties are
available for you to report on.
1. In Microsoft Excel, click Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar.
2. If you want to add a new report item type so that its properties will be available to map onto
your report template, select the node in the Report on hierarchy under which you want the
new item type to appear. Click New.

▪ When you click New on the Define Report Contents dialog box, you can choose from
only those items which are related to the item you selected in the Report on hierarchy.
▪ The highest node in the Report on hierarchy that you can add a new item under is the
node that belongs to the report item type that you base your template definition on. You
can add items under any nodes subordinate to the main report item type as long as they
have items related to them.
▪ Using the New command skillfully allows you to navigate in all directions in the plant
hierarchy and gather properties from throughout the plant database.
3. On the New Items dialog box, select the new item you want to add to the hierarchy.
4. You can change the name of the item that is displayed in the hierarchy by typing your choice
in the Name Box.
If the item you choose has the same name as an item elsewhere in the hierarchy,
you must type a different name for it in the Name box.
5. Click Apply.
6. When you have added all the items you want from this list, click Close.
If you want to add more new items under another node in the hierarchy, choose that
node and repeat steps 2 through 5.
7. On the Define Report Contents dialog box, select an item whose properties you want to be
available for your report template.
8. Click Define.
9. On the Properties tab of the Define Report Items dialog box, choose the properties that
you want to be available to map to your report template.

▪ If you want to sort the order in which your items are listed when you generate a report,
choose the property or properties to sort on by using the Sort tab.
▪ If you want to change the filter that finds your report items, use the Filter tab. For
instance, you may want to change from a filter that displays all pumps to using a filter
that displays only active pumps.
10. Click OK. The Define Report Contents dialog box remains open, and so you can repeat
steps 2 through 9 to continue adding more items and specifying their properties.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 690

 Reports in Smart Electrical

11. When you have chosen all the properties you want in your report, click OK on the Define
Report Contents dialog box.

▪ All the properties you have specified to be available to map into your template are now
displayed when you click Map Properties on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. Now you
can use the properties you have specified in the layout of your template.
▪ To include the properties of a document in your report, add the following macro to the
template:
d_attribute name (For example: d_ItemTag or d_Description)
▪ You can add plant and plant group column headers to your templates. Use the following
macros to show plant and plant group names. Note that all macro names are case
sensitive:
▪ Plant.Name
▪ Area.Name
▪ Unit.Name
▪ Unit.<custom property>
▪ You can use custom properties to add client information.
▪ For project and contractor information, use the following:
▪ Project.<PropertName>
▪ Contractor.<PropertName>

Show Values and Short Values in a Report

If your report includes select list properties, you can instruct the software to display these
properties as they appear under Values in the Data Dictionary, as short text (as defined under
Short Values in the Data Dictionary), or both. You can display both definitions in your report and
have a column for Values and another column for Short Values if needed.
1. In Smart Electrical, click Reports > New.
2. On the New Reports Template dialog box, select Blank from the Source template list.
3. Type a name for the new report.
4. Select an item type that the report will be based on.
5. Select a report type and add the report to plant reports if needed.
6. Click OK and then click Yes when prompted to edit the report.

7. In Microsoft Excel, click on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar.

8. On the Define Report Contents dialog box, select the item type for the new report and click
Define.
9. On the Define Report Item dialog box, select the appropriate properties that you want to
include in your report. Make sure that you select the properties that belong to the select list
type data. (For more details, see steps 9 and 10 of the Define the Contents of Your Report
Template (on page 690) procedure.)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 691

 Reports in Smart Electrical

10. Make sure that the Use short text check box is not selected.
You can also display the index values. To do so, select the Use select list index
check box.
11. Click OK to return to Microsoft Excel.
12. Define the columns for your report as needed.
13. If you want to display Short Values in addition to the Values of select list properties in your
report, add a new column for the Short Value.
14. Type the column headers for the Short Values and Values as needed.
The column header for Value and Short Value can be any text. For example,
Long Manufacturer or Short Manufacturer.
15. For the property column header that will display the Short value, type a name in the Name
Box of Microsoft Excel as shown below:
▪ ShortValue_[property name]
For example:
ShortValue_Manufacturer
16. Save the report.
17. To activate this functionality, edit your Excel report.
18. In the Microsoft Excel, do one of the following:
▪ Press Alt+F11.
▪ Click View and then Macros > View Macros.
19. On the Macros dialog box, click Edit.
20. At the top of "ThisWorkBook" sheet code, type the following code:
Public m_objXLAgent As Object
21. In the BeginReport() function, type the following row:
Set m_objXLAgent = vParam
22. In the FinalReport() function, type the following row:
Call m_objXLAgent.UpdateShortValuesForExcel (me)
23. Save the report.

Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template

You can edit your tabular format report template in Microsoft Excel and specify how the labels
and data are displayed.

1. On the Add-Ins tab of the Excel sheet, click Options .

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 692

 Reports in Smart Electrical

2. In the Report Options dialog box, choose the size of your report header by setting a value
in the Rows in report header option.

▪ The header is part of the tabular format report template where data is not mapped
based on rows. That is, you are free to type a label and map report item properties
anywhere in the lines that you designate for your header.
▪ The header is a good place to put information that applies to all the items in your report,
such as Unit or Plant Name.
▪ Also, you can add graphics in your report header.
▪ Be sure to include space in your header for the labels of your columns.
If an item property is added in the header and more than one value for that
property exists (including null values), separate tabs will be created in the generated report
for each common value; for example, if items of equipment appear in a report with the
Number of Trays property shown in the header area, where vessels have 2 or 3 as the
number of trays and where trays are not applicable for other equipment items, three tabs will
appear in the report: one for items having 2 trays, one for items having 3 trays, and one for
items that do not include the Number of Trays property (null value).
3. Choose the number of empty lines that you want between rows in your report. Each row is
filled with properties for one item.
Some report templates, for example some Line List reports, designate two rows
of data for each report item and then an empty row.
4. If you want to sort the map properties, under 'Map Properties' sort order, click Ascending
or Descending.

▪ When sorted in ascending or descending order, the properties that have sub-properties
appear first sorted alphabetically, followed by the properties that do not have
sub-properties, sorted alphabetically.
▪ For a summary report, the list entry Report Item Group Total that appears at the lowest
level is always at the bottom of the list, regardless of the sort order selected.
5. Click OK to close the Report Options dialog box.
6. Complete general labels and graphics, if needed, in your header.
7. Complete column headings in the last row of your header.
8. Select a cell in your report template where you want to map a particular property.
This cell can be either in the body of the report or in the header.
9. Choose the property that you want to map to your cell from the Map Properties menu. The
items on this menu are chosen when you define the contents of your template. For more
information, see Define the Contents of Your Report Template.

▪ You only have to map each item property once in the template. Values of the properties
for all the items will appear in subsequent rows in the generated report and will follow
the format you map for the first instance of the item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 693

 Reports in Smart Electrical

▪ Only one property can be mapped to a given cell, although the same property can be
mapped to more than one cell.
10. Repeat the previous steps until you have mapped all the properties that you want to include
in this report template.
11. Save the template and exit Microsoft Excel.

▪ The file location of plant-level report templates is specified in Options Manager.

▪ If you add any property value in a cell belonging to a row allocated as part of the header, a
new Microsoft Excel worksheet is created and the header is saved on the new sheet
because the entire header no longer fits in the space allotted on the first sheet. You can
customize the number of rows in the report header by using the Options command on
the Add-Ins tab and choosing a larger value in the Rows in report header option in the
Report Options dialog box.

Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template

You can edit your fixed format report template in Microsoft Excel and specify how the labels and
data are displayed.
1. Choose a cell on your Microsoft Excel worksheet and type labeling information into it.
A label is not a required feature of a fixed format report template. You can simply
map properties to cells without any labeling if you want.
2. Choose a cell where you want the property associated with the labeling to appear.
3. On the Add-Ins tab of the Excel sheet, click Map Properties and from the menu select the
property that you want to map to the cell you chose in the previous step.
The properties on the Map Properties menu are specified when you define the
contents of your report. For more information, see Define the Contents of Your Report
Template.
4. Repeat the previous steps until you have labeled and mapped all the needed report item
properties to the corresponding locations in your template. When you generate a fixed
format report, the data for each report item appears in its own worksheet, and the layout for
each worksheet matches the layout defined for the first worksheet.

The Options command is not available on the Add-Ins tab for fixed format report
templates because you are free to place headers and data anywhere on your worksheet.

Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template

You can edit your composite format report template in Microsoft Excel and specify how the
labels and data are displayed.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 694

 Reports in Smart Electrical

1. Define the layout of the first Microsoft Excel worksheet. In a composite format report
template, the first worksheet automatically uses the fixed format. For more information about
defining fixed format report templates, see Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report
Template (on page 694).

▪ Each item in the report has its own page. The properties of the first item are displayed
on the first worksheet, but the properties for component items in the report are displayed
starting with the third sheet because the second worksheet uses the tabular format.

▪ On the Add-Ins tab of the Excel sheet, you use the Options command to designate
space for your header and to specify the number of blank lines that you want between
rows of data on your report. The Options command is not available for fixed format
report templates because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want to
on your worksheet; however, the Options command is available for you to use in the
tabular portion of the composite report template.
2. Define the layout of the second Microsoft Excel worksheet for reporting on component items
related to the main item that is reported on in the first sheet. In a composite format report
template, the second worksheet is automatically tabular format. For more information about
defining tabular format report templates, see Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report
Template (on page 692).
3. After you have defined the layout for the first and second worksheets in your report
template, save the template and exit Excel.

▪ You can map only one property into a given cell, although you can map the same property
to more than one cell.
▪ When you add any property value in the header, a new Microsoft Excel worksheet is
created, and the header is saved on the new sheet because the entire header no longer fits
in the space allotted on the first sheet. You can customize the number of rows in the report
header by using the Options command and choosing a larger value in the Rows in report
header option.

Delete a Report Template

You must have the correct privileges, granted in Smart Engineering Manager,
to be able to delete a report template.
1. Click Reports > Delete on the main menu bar.
2. On the Delete Report Template dialog box, select a report from the Available reports list.
3. Click OK to delete the report template.
4. Click Close.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 695

SECTION 26

Using KKS Naming Conventions in

Smart Electrical
Smart Electrical supports KKS naming conventions for process-related identification of the
following item types:
▪ PDBs
▪ Circuits
▪ Loads
▪ Converting equipment
▪ Disconnect electrical equipment
▪ Signal runs
▪ Panels (control stations, cabinets, junction boxes, local panels)
▪ Cables
In addition, the software supports point of installation identification for buses and cells.
For each of these item types, the following KKS segment properties are available:

KKS Level Name Property Description

Total Plant Total Plant Single character (numeric or

alphabetic).

System Code System Code Prefix Single digit.

(optional)

System Classification Three-character alphabetic key,

selected from a standard list, that
represents the type of system in use the
plant.

System Numbering Two-digit number with leading zeros.

Equipment Unit Equipment Unit Two-character alphabetic key, selected

Code Classification from a standard list that represents the
type of equipment within the system
used for measuring or monitoring the
system, or the type of measurement
circuit (level, flow, and so forth).

Equipment Unit Numbering Three-digit number with leading zeros.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 696

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

KKS Level Name Property Description

Equipment Unit Additional Optional character (alphabetic) used for

Code special cases such as a thermocouple
with dual elements.

Component Code Component Classification Two-character alphabetic key, selected

from a standard list that represents the
type of component.

Component Numbering Two-digit number with leading zeros.

Numbering Tag Sequence Number Four-character numeric or alphabetic

Element (for (non- KKS) value representing the unique
cables only) numbering of a particular cable.

Examples
For a switchgear or PDB, only the System Code segments are required in most cases. Thus a
suitable KKS name for a medium voltage PDB would be '1 0BBA01', where the values are
designated as follows:

Property Value Description

Total Plant 1

System Code Prefix 0

System Classification BBA BBA MV distribution board

System Numbering 01

Equipment Unit Classification (Not used)

Equipment Unit Numbering (Not used)

For a motor, the KKS identification '1 0PAC01 AP001B –M01' could be used, where the values
are designated as follows:

Property Value Description

Total Plant 1

System Code Prefix 0

System Classification PAC Circulating (main cooling) water

pump system

System Numbering 01

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 697

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

Property Value Description

Equipment Unit Classification AP Pump units

Equipment Unit Numbering 001

Component Classification -M Motors

Component Numbering 01

▪ When making electrical associations, KKS naming is propagated between certain

items. For a complete list of propagation rules, see Propagation of KKS Names in (see
"Propagation of KKS Names in Smart Electrical" on page 708)Smart Electrical.
▪ You can change the terminology of a key on a project-specific basis provided that the
contents remain unchanged. Make sure that you do not select a code that is designated as
Blocked. Blocked coding letters are reserved for future technologies and new systems
engineering configurations. They may only be allocated and released by the VGB
Technical Committee on Technical Classification Systems.

Configuring Smart Electrical to Work in KKS Mode

Two methods are available for defining a new Smart Electrical plant that works in KKS mode.
▪ Create a plant in Smart Engineering Manager using a default data dictionary template (a
.ddt file) and then import the KKS metadata. For details, see Creating a KKS Plant Using a
Default DDT File (on page 698).
▪ Create a KKS plant in Smart Engineering Manager using a supplied KKS dictionary template
(a .ddt file). For details, see Creating a KKS Plant Using a Supplied DDT File (on page
701).

When you create a Smart Electrical plant in Smart Engineering Manager, the software creates
an empty plant which does not work in KKS mode. In order to be able to work in KKS mode,
you need to import the reference KKS metadata. This will enable you to work in KKS mode
using your own data dictionary template.
After importing the KKS metadata, you can configure the KKS naming conventions using rules
or hard-coded tag propagation. Note that it is also possible to use KKS mode in an existing
plant.
For more information, see Create a KKS Plant Using a Default DDT File (on page 699).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 698

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

Create a KKS Plant Using a Default DDT File

1. Create a new Smart Electrical plant in Smart Engineering Manager.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Download the KKSMetaData.mdb and ReferenceData.xml files from the following
location:
http://engineeringdata.intergraph.com (http://engineeringdata.intergraph.com/)
On the webpage, from the By Standard list, select KKS and save both files in the same
folder.
▪ From the KKS zip file, extract the KKSMetaData.mdb and ReferenceData.xml files into
the same folder.
3. In Smart Electrical Options Manager, click Options > Reference Data Import.
4. On the Reference Data Import dialog box, click Browse and navigate to the
ReferenceData.xml file which you extracted from the KKS zip file.
5. Click OK.
6. On the Reference Data Import dialog box, select the check box assigned to KKS Meta
Data Reference Data Type.
7. Click Import.
8. In Options Manager, in the Item Types window, for each item type where you require KKS
naming, define an appropriate plant group type and an item type uniqueness level.
For each item type where you require KKS naming, you can specify an appropriate
default value for the Component Classification property in the Plant-Wide Parameters
window. Click Options > Plant- Wide Parameters and select the required plant group and
for each item type where you require KKS naming.
9. In Options Manager define the required naming conventions for each item type where you
need KKS naming.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 699

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

10. An example of a KKS naming convention for a motor:

11. In Options Manager, on the General Settings page, under KKS mode, do one of the
following:
▪ Select Yes to configure the KKS naming conventions using hard-coded tag
propagation. This completes the KKS mode configuration using hard-coded tag
propagation. Note that using the hard-coded tag propagation, the software does not
propagate properties of non-KKS segments.
▪ Select No to configure the KKS naming conventions using copy rules. Selecting No
cancels the hard-coded tag propagation and you have to define your own tag
propagation by creating copy rules for each type of tag propagation in your plant. Also,
you need to define a naming convention for each item type that requires KKS naming.

▪ You can use the sample KKS_SAMPLE_SPELRules.rul file to see an example of rules that
copy KKS properties from a load to its metering equipment. To see the sample rules,
extract the KKS_SAMPLE_SPELRules.rul file from the KKS zip file into your Smart
Electrical Reference data folder.
▪ To preserve name uniqueness of KKS select list values (KKS key descriptors), the
non-unique value names end in suffixes denoted as their short values.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 700

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

An example of a KKS copy rule:

Creating a KKS Plant Using a Supplied DDT File

When you create a Smart Electrical plant based on a supplied KKS data dictionary template file,
the software creates an empty plant which includes KKS definitions. These definitions include
standard KKS select list items and predefined naming conventions.
Note that creating a plant based on this .ddt file, the software will create a plant with a
Plant-Area-Unit breakdown hierarchy structure. Also note that the supplied .ddt file is
version-dependent and you cannot use a .ddt file from another version.
Two methods are available for configuring Smart Electrical to work in KKS mode:
▪ Configuring Smart Electrical for KKS mode using hard-coded tag propagation. For details,
see Configure (see "Configure Smart Electrical for KKS Mode Using Hard-Coded Tag
Propagation" on page 702)Smart Electrical for KKS Mode Using Hard-Coded Tag
Propagation (see "Configure Smart Electrical for KKS Mode Using Hard-Coded Tag
Propagation" on page 702).
▪ Configuring Smart Electrical for KKS using rules. For details, see Configure (see
"Configure Smart Electrical for KKS Using Rules" on page 706)Smart Electrical for KKS
Using Rules (see "Configure Smart Electrical for KKS Using Rules" on page 706).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 701

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

Configure Smart Electrical for KKS Mode Using

Hard-Coded Tag Propagation
1. Download the Smart Engineering Manager KKS upgrade files. These include the
KKS_R1_SPEL.ddt file, which you should place in the Templates folder.
2. Create a new plant for use with KKS naming.
3. Expand the tree view for your newly-created plant and right-click the Applications folder.
4. On the shortcut menu, click Associate Applications.
5. On the first wizard page, under Applications to associate, select the Smart Electrical
check box and in the Smart Electrical reference data path box, type the folder path or use
the ellipsis button to navigate to the path.

6. Click Next.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 702

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

7. On the second wizard page, under Data dictionary source, click Use custom template,
and in the Template path box, type the folder path or use the ellipsis button to
navigate to the KKS_R1_SPEL.ddt file.

8. Add roles to the plant as required.

9. Start Smart Electrical Options Manager.
10. Click Options > General Settings.
Once you have associated a data dictionary template, the KKS mode option is
automatically set to Yes and the KKS names will be propagated automatically.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 703

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

11. Click Options > Plant-Wide Parameters.

12. In the Plant-Wide Parameters window, select the required plant group and for each item
type where you require KKS naming, specify an appropriate default value for the
Component Classification property.
13. Click Options > Naming Conventions > Copy for Plant Group.
14. Select Copy from reference data and select the required source and target plant groups.
To preview the naming conventions in the reference plant group that you copied to
your plant, click Options > Naming Conventions > View in Reference Data.
15. Click Options > Naming Conventions > Define.
16. On the Define Naming Conventions dialog box, modify the naming conventions for each
item type as required.
The Define Naming Conventions dialog box opens with the KKS naming
conventions already selected by default. You can delete segment properties that you do
not require or add freeform properties in addition to the KKS segments; however, note that
in this KKS mode, Smart Electrical does not propagate properties of non-KKS segments.
To preserve name uniqueness of KKS select list values (KKS key descriptors),
the non-unique value names end in suffixes denoted as their short values.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 704

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

An example of a KKS naming convention for a motor:

When propagating KKS naming, the software copies the naming from the source item
segments to the appropriate target item segments. For this reason, in the naming convention of
a target item, you should not delete segments that are likely to receive values by
propagation. Non-relevant segments in the target item are left blank. For a complete list of
propagation rules, see Propagation of KKS Names in (see "Propagation of KKS Names in
Smart Electrical" on page 708)Smart Electrical.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 705

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

Configure Smart Electrical for KKS Using Rules

1. Download the Smart Engineering Manager KKS upgrade files. These include the
KKS_R1_SPEL.ddt and KKS_Sample_SPELRules.rul files.
2. Place the KKS_R1_SPEL.ddt file in the Templates folder and the
KKS_Sample_SPELRules.rul file in the Reference Data folder.
3. Create a new plant for use with KKS naming.
4. Expand the tree view for your newly-created plant and right-click the Applications folder.
5. On the shortcut menu, click Associate Applications.
6. On the first wizard page, under Applications to associate, select the Smart Electrical
check box and in the Smart Electrical reference data path box, type the folder path or use
the ellipsis button to navigate to the path.

7. Click Next.
8. On the second wizard page, under Data dictionary source, click Use custom template,
and in the Template path box, type the folder path or use the ellipsis button to
navigate to the KKS_R1_SPEL.ddt file.
9. Add roles to the plant as required.
10. Start Smart Electrical Options Manager.
11. Click Options > General Settings.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 706

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

12. In the General Settings window, for the KKS mode option, select No.

▪ Selecting No cancels the hard-coded tag propagation and you have to define your own
tag propagation by creating copy rules for each type of tag propagation in your plant.
▪ You can use the sample KKS_SAMPLE_SPELRules.rul file to see an example of rules
that copy KKS properties from a load to its metering equipment. To see the sample
rules, extract the KKS_SAMPLE_SPELRules.rul file from the KKS zip file into your
Smart Electrical Reference Data folder.
▪ For each item type where you require KKS naming, you can specify an appropriate
default value for the Component Classification property in the Plant-Wide Parameters
window. Click Options > Plant- Wide Parameters and select the required plant group
and for each item type where you require KKS naming.
13. Define your own naming conventions or copy the reference naming conventions.
14. To copy the reference naming conventions, click Options > Naming Conventions > Copy
for Plant Group.
15. Select Copy from reference data and select the required source and target plant groups.
To preview the naming conventions in the reference plant group that you copied to
your plant, click Options > Naming Conventions > View in Reference Data.
16. Click Options > Naming Conventions > Define.
17. On the Define Naming Conventions dialog box, modify the naming conventions for each
item type as required.

▪ The Define Naming Conventions dialog box opens with the KKS naming conventions
already selected by default. You can delete segment properties that you do not require
or add freeform properties in addition to the KKS segments; however, note that in this
KKS mode, Smart Electrical propagates properties based only on the set of predefined
copy rules.
▪ To preserve name uniqueness of KKS select list values (KKS key descriptors), the
non-unique value names end in suffixes denoted as their short values.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 707

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

An example of a KKS copy rule:

Propagation of KKS Names in Smart Electrical

When an item, such as a motor, has KKS naming, and you make an electrical association, for
example to an MCC or a control station, the software automatically propagates the naming to
the associated item. The software also propagates naming when you create a hierarchy such
as PDB > Bus > Feeder in the Electrical Index and then rename the source item. The following
table shows how the software handles propagation, along with naming examples.

Target Item Inherited Components of Possible Source Example of Source

Type Target Item Name Item Types Item Name

Bus All populated segments of PDB

PDB tag

Cell All populated segments of Bus

bus tag + number in group

Control station KKS System and Equipment Associated

Unit Codes equipment

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 708

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

Target Item Inherited Components of Possible Source Example of Source

Type Target Item Name Item Types Item Name

Feeder circuit Load item tag + KKS All loads 1 0PAC01 AP01B –E01
and internals segments (heater)

Instrument KKS System and Equipment Associated

Unit Codes equipment

Space heater KKS motor naming + heater Motor 1 0PAC01 AP01B –M01
component code, for
example: 1 0PAC01 AP01B
–E01

Incomer circuit Upstream power source Upstream power

and internals KKS tag segments source

Transformer KKS System Code of Transformer (main GT

component connected item + KKS item)
numeric segments for
secondaries, for example:
GT002, GT003

I/O signal KKS System and Equipment Motor, feeder circuit,

Unit Codes + signal control station,
application / origin code instrument

For more details of how propagation works, see Examples of KKS Naming Propagation (on
page 709).

▪ The software performs propagation according to hard-coded rules. Name segments that
are not included in a propagation rule remain blank.
▪ On connecting a cable side to a load or a panel, the KKS naming is propagated to the
cable. When both sides of a cable are connected, the naming comes from the first
alphabetic item. On disconnection, the cable retains the name it received by propagation
until you reconnect it.

Examples of KKS Naming Propagation

This example shows how the software propagates naming when you associate a motor with a
control station to a PDB > Bus > Cell > Feeder hierarchy.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 709

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

Example 1: Naming an item in an already created hierarchy

1. In the Electrical Index, create a hierarchy such as PDB > Bus > Cell > Feeder:

2. Rename the source item (PDB):

3. View the result in the Electrical Index:

4. Click Refresh to update the display.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 710

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

5. The software propagates the PDB naming to the bus and the cell as shown:

Note that the propagation does not continue to the Feeder circuit.

Example 2: Associating one item with another one by dragging

1. Create a new motor and assign it the following name:

2. Drag the motor from the Electrical Index and drop it on the target item (feeder circuit) in the
Electrical Engineer:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 711

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

3. The software propagates the motor naming to the feeder circuit as shown:

Example 3: Associating one or more items with another one by applying a profile
1. This example shows how naming is propagated when you add control stations to the motor
by applying a profile:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 712

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

2. The software propagates the motor naming to the first control station as shown:

Adjust the naming of the target item tags manually if required.

Scope of KKS Issues for the Current Smart Electrical

Version
The current version of Smart Electrical supports KKS naming conventions for process-related
identification of most electrical equipment items.

Out of Scope Issues

The following issues are not supported in the current development:
▪ Operations in an integrated environment

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 713

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

▪ Configuration rules for KKS establishments

▪ Modification of the KKS classification keys
▪ Copying KKS data from one plant group to another
▪ Grouping of items hierarchically by a common physical system classification or equipment
unit
▪ Point of installation identification, other than for buses and cells
▪ Location and connection identification
▪ Signal identification (signal area, signal applications, and gated signals)
▪ KKS naming conventions for cableways, cableway segments, and cable drums

▪ The software does not automatically increment numbering properties of KKS segments.
▪ When creating multiple items, the names of all the items, other than the first one, appear in
the interface as zeros, for example: '00000', even though KKS naming is actually applied to
them. In such cases, the user needs to rename the individual items by changing the
appropriate numbering segment, after which the software displays the item names correctly.
▪ The software does not reset cable names when you disconnect one of the cable sides from
an associated item that originally propagated its naming to the cable.
▪ Moving an item to a different level in the Electrical Engineer or changing item properties
does not affect the item name.
▪ If you change the naming convention, it only affects new items. Existing items retain their
names according to the previous naming convention.
▪ The software does not make any validations between the item type and the KKS code.
▪ The software does not validate imported data.

1. Select an item and do one of the following:

▪ On the item's Common Properties dialog box, beside Item tag, click the ellipsis button
.
▪ Right-click the item and on the shortcut menu, click Rename.
2. Type appropriate values in each segment of the item tag.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 714

 Using KKS Naming Conventions in Smart Electrical

▪ Move the mouse pointer over a segment to display a Tool Tip indicating the name of the
segment.

▪ Click the ellipsis button beside a Classification segment to display the appropriate
Classification (on page 715)dialog box, from which you can select suitable values. If you
have already typed part of the key prior to clicking the ellipsis button, the Classification
dialog box opens at the appropriate place in the list.
▪ When a numeric segment accepts more than one digit, if you enter fewer digits than the
maximum, the software automatically adds leading zeros to the value you typed. You
cannot remove the leading zeros from the segment.
▪ The following is an example of a KKS tag name for a motor:

These dialog boxes allow you to select suitable classification keys when defining names of items
that use KKS naming conventions. The specific classification name depends on the segment
that you selected in the Item Tag dialog box.
Find key —Allows you to type a 2- or 3-character code to drill down to an item in the Select key
list.
Select key —Displays the set of available keys in a 2- or 3- level hierarchy. Click to expand
the current portion of the hierarchy further and drill down until the full key appears in the Find
key field. You can hold the mouse pointer over longer values to display a Tool Tip showing the
full name. To select the key for the name segment, double-click the key or click the OK
command. Note that the OK command is only enabled when you select the appropriate level of
the hierarchy.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 715

SECTION 27

Project Management in Smart Electrical

Smart Electrical supports owner operator and EPC activities with As-Built functionality. You
define the main plant as the As-Built and you can then add any number of additional plant
groups to create your projects. The Plant Administrator needs to activate the plant and scope it
with the particular As-Built. When you work with projects, the database is partitioned into
several schemas: a single schema for As-Built and separate schemas for projects. An
operational plant exists and most of the activities are concerned with routine maintenance or
plant modernization (revamp).
To facilitate plant modernization, the software enables you to create one or more projects using
existing electrical data for the operating plant as a starting point for plant modernization
(revamp). Each project is defined for one plant only, and a plant can have several associated
projects.
You can also use projects when working in integrated environment.
It is strongly recommended that when working in a disconnected Project
As-Built mode, changes to meta data should be done in one source plant only and these
changes have to be propagated to all other targets. Failing to follow this process ( for example,
modifying Data Dictionary values in more than one plant) may result in the Reference Data
Synchronization Manager not being able to properly compare and synchronize the changes
across the source/target plants.
After merging project data with As-Built, you cannot reverse the process. For this reason, at all
stages of plant modernization, you should ensure that there is full coordination of engineering
activities between As-Built and projects to avoid inadvertent loss of data. It is also
recommended that you back-up your database before starting the projects.

▪ You can work only in "online" mode — that is, As-Built and projects must be connected to
the same database.
▪ When working in a plant that is registered with SmartPlant Foundation, the software
automatically determines the project status in the database according to the project status.
▪ To be able to view and edit data in As-Built, make sure that in the Options Manager, on the
General Settings page, Allow Full Access to As-Built is set to Yes.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 716

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

Scoping the Project

The Plant Administrator must specify those plant groups from which it will be possible to scope
items. When the Plant Administrator specifies a plant group for scoping, the software includes
in the scoping all higher-level plant groups in the same branch as the selected plant group, for
example, if the plant groups are Plant-Area-Unit, and the Plant Administrator selects an area for
scoping, the plant above that area is also included in the scope. For more information, see
Engineering Manager User's Guide, Set Project Scope.

Understanding Statuses
A project status shows the stage of the project life-cycle. Possible project statuses are:
▪ Active — The initial state of a project right after its creation.
▪ Completed — Indicates that all the work on the project items has been completed and that
the items are ready to be merged back into the As-Built. You cannot claim items in a project
whose status has been set to Completed or Merged.
In a project, when searching for completed items in the Project Management
window, it is possible to select the related items which have not been completed yet and
change their status to Completed.
▪ Merged — Indicates that all the project items have been merged back into the As-Built.
▪ Canceled — Indicates that the project has been canceled and it can be deleted. Selecting
this project status changes the status of the items in the project from Claimed to Scoped.
The status of an item in a project determines what you can do with the item, for example,
editing the properties in the project. Possible item statuses in the project are:
▪ Scoped — Indicates that the item becomes available for viewing in the project and that it
can be claimed.
▪ Claimed — Indicates scoped items that have been copied to the project and they are
enabled for editing. There are two modes of claiming:
▪ Exclusive — Items can only be edited in the current project and cannot be claimed for
another project.
▪ Shared — Items can be claimed for another project and edited in that project.
▪ Completed — Indicates that the work on the item has been completed and the item is ready
to be merged back into the As-Built.
▪ Merged — Indicates that the item has been merged back into the As-Built.
The Project Management table displays the status of claimed items.
To view the status of a claimed item in a project while in the As-Built, right-click an item in the list
view pane of the Electrical Index and then click Item Status in Project. This command opens
the Item Status in Projects dialog box, which shows the item status, claim mode, and project
name for each project in which the selected item is claimed.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 717

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

Rules for Changing Statuses

The following general rules apply to the relationship between the project status and item status
in project:
1. To be able to scope items, the project status must be Active or Merged.
2. To be able to merge items, the item status in the project must be Completed.
3. You cannot re-scope an item (refresh the scope) if the item has already been claimed. You
have to change the status of the item to Scoped and then reclaim it.
4. To be able to merge a project, all the items of that project must have status Completed.
5. It is possible to set the status of a project to Completed in As-Built if all the status of all
claimed items is Completed.
6. In a project, it is possible to change the status of a project to Completed disregarding the
status of the items in project. This operation automatically sets the status of all the items in
the project to Completed, except for registered reports and all documents (SLDs,
schematics, miscellaneous drawings and electrical analysis SLDs). To include these items
when merging the project, you must mark them manually as completed in a separate
session.
The following table shows the various commands available for changing the status of the items
in the project and how they affect these statuses.

Command Initial Status Final Status Comments

Scope None, Scoped Scoped Performed in As-Built. If the initial

status is Scoped, refreshes the
data by re- scoping the item.

Set Claim Mode Scoped Claimed Performed in a project. Invoked

(Exclusive, Shared, after clicking Apply.
or Release Claim)

Mark as Completed Claimed Completed Performed in a project. Invoked

after clicking Apply. Item stops
being editable and is ready to be
merged.

Clear Mark as Completed Claimed Performed in a project. Invoked

Completed after clicking Apply and receives
same claim mode as when first
claimed. Makes the item editable.

Mark as Reclaimed Merged Claimed Performed in a project. Invoked

after clicking Apply and receives
same claim mode as when first
claimed. Makes the item
editable. This command is option
is required when working with
SmartPlant Foundation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 718

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

Command Initial Status Final Status Comments

Release Claim Claimed Released Performed in a project. Invoked

after clicking Apply. The claim
mode changes to
Released. Enables re- scoping of
the item in As- Built.

Merge Completed Merged Performed in As-Built. Overwrites

the previous As- Built data.

In a project, when searching for completed items in the Project Management

window, it is possible to select the related items which have not been completed yet and change
their status to Completed.

Modify Project Status

This procedure explains how to display the current project status, both with respect to
SmartPlant Foundation and the plant and to update or modify those statuses.
1. Open the project for which you want to view the status.

2. On the Project Management toolbar, click to open the Project Status dialog box.
3. In the Smart Electrical project status area, ascertain the current status of your project with
respect to the plant.
A check mark denotes the current status. Possible statuses include Active,
Completed, Merged, and Canceled.
4. To change an active project to completed, click Complete Project. This button is available
only when the Smart Electrical project status is Active.
When you change the project status to Completed, the software automatically sets
the status of all the items in the project to Completed.
5. To change a completed project back to active, click Return to Active. This button is
available only when the Smart Electrical project status is Completed.
6. To merge a completed project into the Plant, click Merge Project. This button is available
only when the Smart Electrical project status is Completed.
7. To cancel the active project, click Cancel Project.

▪ If you are registered with SmartPlant Foundation, click Refresh Status on the Project Status
(see "Project Status Dialog Box" on page 1112) dialog box to update the SmartPlant
project status display.
▪ In SmartPlant, the Complete Project, Reactivate, and Merge Project options are not
available unless the SmartPlant project status is also active. The Cancel Project option
is not available unless the SmartPlant project status is also Canceled.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 719

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

Managing Revisions in an As-Built and Project

Environment
In an As-Built environment the revision uniqueness must be maintained between the Projects
and the As-Built across the whole Plant. You can maintain uniqueness in either of the following
ways:
▪ Using a SmartPlant Foundation revision scheme, where the software tracks incremental
changes.
▪ Using a Smart Electrical revision scheme.
SmartPlant Foundation also uses the reserved revision method. The software
generates a number following the highest existing minor revision when there is a gap in the
minor revision sequence.
Example:
Drawing_Proj was claimed to Project 1. It was modified in the project and saved in Project 1 with
revision C01. Drawing_Proj was claimed to Project 2, was modified in the project and saved
later in Project 2 with revision C02.
* SmartPlant Foundation maintains the next revision number to the item (in this case:
document) that gets published first, and a subsequent number to the item that gets published
second. In the table below, the Drawing_Proj from Project 1 was published first, and
Drawing_Proj from Project 2 was published second.

Document name Start of available Changes to major and Published Major

major and minor minor revision when and minor revision
revision in Projects numbers generated
by SPF*

As-Built Drawing C00

Project 1 Drawing_Proj C00 C01 C03

Project 2 Drawing_Proj C00 C02 C04

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 720

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

Scoping Items
Once the Plant Administrator has scoped the project, you can start specifying which items will
be available for viewing in the project. This selection is called scoping items.
You scope items by selecting the required items in As-Built. The selection can be one of the
following:
▪ The entire plant hierarchy that was assigned in Smart Engineering Manager, according to
the scoping definitions that the Plant Administrator has made.
▪ Individual items in the Electrical Engineer.
▪ Individual items in the Electrical Index.
▪ Multiple items in the EDE.
You can select loads, converting equipment, power sources, free cables, PDBs, and so
forth. Note that the software automatically scopes all the items that are associated with the
scoped items. These items are called related items. Related items are those items that have
an electrical or functional relationship to a main item. Related items may include control
stations, associated cables, circuits, and signals.
In addition to the items that are included in the scoped plant groups, you can also scope items
that belong to unscoped plant groups. However, you will not be able to claim these items or edit
them in the project.
When scoping, the software follows certain rules that govern which items become available for
viewing in the project. For details, see Rules for Scoping Items (on page 722).

Select a Project
This procedure shows you how to select a project for the current As-Built plant. Note that you
have to select a project every time you reopen the Project Management table.
1. In an As-Built plant, click Window > New > Project Management.
2. In the Project Management table, do one of the following:

▪ Click on the Project Management toolbar.

▪ Right-click in the Project Management table and then click Select Project.

▪ You have to select a project every time you reopen the Project Management table.
▪ After closing the Project Management table, the software removes all the items from the
Project Management table.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 721

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

Rules for Scoping Items

The general rule for scoping is that when selecting items, the software automatically scopes all
the related items and all the items that extend up to and including the item power source. For
example, selecting a motor that is connected to a feeder circuit, the software will scope the
motor control stations, the motor feeder cable, the feeder circuit, the bus, and the PDB.
You can automate the process of scoping plant items by scoping a composite
drawing. Once a composite drawing is scoped, all the plant items that are associated with
graphical elements on the drawing are scoped automatically. Furthermore, the parent items of
those plant items are also scoped automatically even if the parent items are not on the scoped
composite drawing.
The extent of the related items that are scoped along with the main selected item are indicated
in the following table.

Main Item Related Item Notes

Loads, converting ▪ Cables of any category ▪ When scoping loads and

equipment, power (From / To sides) equipment connected to a bus,
sources the scope includes all the items
▪ Control stations and their
(generators, battery in the Electrical Engineer
cables
banks, offsite branch up to and including the
power) ▪ Instruments and their circuit and circuit internals,
cables excluding the PDB and bus and
▪ I/O signals any other irrelevant circuits of
that PDB.
▪ Associated Circuits, their
internals and their
▪ Any cables connected to the
circuit rather than directly to the
PDB-Bus-Cell associations
scoped load will not be scoped
▪ Metering equipment with the circuit. Instead, those
cables will be scoped with
related equipment like control
stations.

Power distribution None ▪ All buses, circuits and internals,

boards up to the boundary of the PDB
have to be scoped separately as
they are not included in the
scope automatically when
scoping a PDB.
▪ No associated items external to
the PDB items, such as cables
or signals associated with the
PDB or circuits will be scoped.

Drums Does not include cables assigned to

the drum that have not been scoped.

Cableways ▪ All cableway segments

▪ Entire cable that is routed

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 722

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

Main Item Related Item Notes

through one or more
segments of the cableway

Instruments ▪ Cables of any category

(From / To sides)
▪ I/O signals
▪ Associated Circuits, their
internals and their
PDB-Bus-Cell associations
▪ Metering equipment

Local panels, ▪ Cables of any category

junction boxes, (From / To sides)
cabinets ▪ I/O signals
▪ Associated Circuits and
their internals
▪ Metering equipment

▪ To scope space heaters and auxiliary contacts, see Guidelines for Scoping Space Heaters
and Auxiliary Contacts (on page 723).
▪ When scoping an item that is connected in parallel with another equipment item, the
software automatically scopes all the items that are connected in parallel to the scoped item.
For example, if you select Motor-1 that has been connected in parallel with Motor-2 and
Motor-3, the software will also automatically scope Motor-2 and Motor-3 together with their
upstream items all the way to their power sources.
▪ You can scope the same item for more than one project.

Guidelines for Scoping Space Heaters and Auxiliary Contacts

When creating projects and scoping disconnect electrical equipment that have auxiliary
contacts, follow the guidelines specified below:

As-Built Items Project Requirement Scoping and Merging

A motor connected to Design the space heater and Scope the motor branch and the
a standard feeder its complete power source PDB with its circuit so that it can be
circuit and add the required claimed in the project.
disconnect equipment

Add a space heater, When merging, select both the

auxiliary contacts, the power motor, its new circuits, and the space
supply circuits, and the heater circuitry
interconnecting cables.

A motor with a space Delete all or part of the Select the motor as a scoped item all

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 723

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

As-Built Items Project Requirement Scoping and Merging

heater connected to space heater circuitry. its related space heater circuitry
the auxiliary contact of (space heater, its feeder cable, the
the motor circuitry and auxiliary contacts, the cable that
the feeder to the feeds the auxiliary contacts. Note
auxiliary contacts that the bus and the PDB that feeds
circuitry the auxiliary circuitry will be scoped
as view only.

Add Items to the Project Management Table in As-Built

This procedure explains how to open the Project Management table and add the items that you
require. Note that you have to add items that you want to work with every time you reopen the
Project Management table.
1. In an As-Built plant, click Window > New > Project Management.
2. Select the required project. For details, see Select a Project (on page 721).
3. Drag the required items one-by- one to the Project Management table. You can drag
items from any of the following:
▪ Electrical Index
▪ Electrical Engineer
▪ EDE

▪ You have to add items every time you reopen the Project Management table.
▪ You cannot add items to a project that has been set to Completed.

Scope Items
Once the Plant Administrator has scoped your project, you can start scoping the items that will
be available for viewing in the project.
1. In Smart Electrical, click File > Open > Plant Group to open an As-Built plant.
2. On the Open Plant Group dialog box, click Select Plant.
3. On the Open Plant Group dialog box, select the appropriate plant hierarchy level and click
OK.
4. Click Window > New > Project Management.

5. In the Project Management table in As-Built, click .

6. On the Select Project dialog box, select the project you require and click OK.
7. With the Project Management table in As-Built open, select the main items for scoping and
then do one of the following:
▪ Drag the selected item to the Project Management table. Note that you can only drag
single items. For multiple items wherever possible, use the Add command.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 724

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

▪ Click on the Project Management toolbar.

Note that you can use the buffer to make a preliminary selection of items that you
may want to add to the Project Management tables. For details, see Use the Buffer to
Scope Items.
8. Select the check box beside each main item that you want to scope.

9. Click to scope the items.

▪ The software also scopes related items automatically.

▪ You can automate the process of scoping plant items by scoping a composite drawing.
Once a composite drawing is scoped, all the plant items that are associated with graphical
elements on the drawing are scoped automatically. Furthermore, the parent items of those
plant items are also scoped automatically even if the parent items are not on the scoped
composite drawing.
▪ When scoping an item that is connected in parallel with another equipment item, the
software automatically scopes all the items that are connected in parallel to the scoped item.
For example, if you select Motor-1 that has been connected in parallel with Motor-2 and
Motor-3, the software will also automatically scope Motor-2 and Motor-3 together with their
upstream items all the way to their power sources.
▪ Certain related items that are scoped, such as circuit internals, do not appear in the Project
Management table.

Use the Buffer to Scope Items

The buffer in the Project Management table allows you to make a preliminary selection of items
that you want to scope.
1. With the Project Management table in an As-Built plant open, do one of the following:

▪ Click on the Project Management toolbar.

▪ Right-click in the Project Management table and then click Show/Hide Buffer.
2. Drag the required items one-by- one to the buffer in the Project Management table. You
can drag items from any of the following:
▪ Electrical Index
▪ Electrical Engineer
▪ EDE
▪ a schematic
▪ a single line diagram
3. In the Buffer, click the check boxes next to the items that you want to scope.
4. Do one of the following:

▪ Click on the on the Project Management toolbar.

▪ Right-click in the Project Management table and then click Paste from Buffer.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 725

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

Claiming Items
Claiming items is the first action that you do when starting to work in a project. The items that
have been scoped to your current project become available only after you claim them. Claimed
items in a project become editable and you can modify them or delete them as needed.
Unclaimed items are not available in your project even if they have been scoped for this project
in As-Built.
You claim items by opening the project to which they were scoped, and then you select
individual items to claim.
You can claim main or related items separately. When claiming an item in a project, with the
appropriate Options Manager setting, you can choose claim mode Shared or Exclusive.

▪ You cannot claim items in a project whose status has been set to Completed or Merged.
▪ You do not need to claim new items that you create in the project.

Add Items to the Project Management Table in a Project

1. Open the required project.
2. Click Window > New > Project Management.
3. Do one of the following:
▪ Drag a single item to the Project Management table from the Electrical Index,
Electrical Engineer, or the EDE to the Project Management table.

▪ Select a single item in a schematic or SLD and click .

▪ Select multiple items the Electrical Index, or the EDE and click .

▪ You cannot add items to a project that has been set to Completed.
▪ After closing the Project Management table, the software clears the all the items from the
table.
▪ You have to add items every time you reopen the Project Management table.

Claim Items
You claim items by opening the project to which they were scoped, and then you select
individual items to claim. Note that you can claim main or related items separately. When
claiming an item in a project, with the appropriate Options Manager setting, you can choose
claim mode Shared or Exclusive.
1. In a project, click Window > New > Project Management.
2. Add the items that you require. For details, see Add Items to the Project Management
Table in a Project.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 726

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

3. Select the check box beside each item that you want to claim. For details of item statuses
in the project that determine which items you can mark for claiming, see Rules for Changing
Statuses (on page 718).
4. For each item that you want to claim, select Shared or Exclusive as the claim mode. Note
that if, in the Options Manager, General Settings, the As-Built Claim Mode option is set to
Exclusive, the Shared claim mode is not available.
5. Click the Apply command to claim the items.

▪ The items are now available for editing in the project. When you have finished editing
items, you can change their status to Completed. Items with status Completed are ready
for merging into As-Built.
▪ Check the data under Result Status to make sure that there are no problems.
▪ You cannot claim items in a project whose status has been set to Completed or Merged.

Set Claim Mode

This option allows you to set the required claim mode. The following claim modes are available:
▪ Exclusive — Allows you to claim As-Built items in the current project only.
▪ Shared — Allows users of different projects to claim the same As-Built items for their
projects.
▪ Release Claim — Allows you to cancel the claim of the selected items and then re- scope
them in As-Built. Re-scoping the items will update the data in the project.
Note that the Shared claim mode is available only after making an appropriate setting in the
Options Manager. Also, if your plant is registered with SmartPlant Foundation, the Shared
mode is not available, regardless of the setting you define in the Options Manager. For details,
see General Settings Window in the Options Manager User's Guide.
1. In a project, click Window > New > Project Management.
2. Add the items that you require. For details, see Add Items to the Project Management
Table in a Project.
3. Select the check box beside each required item. For details of item statuses in the project,
see Rules for Changing Statuses (on page 718).
4. Do one of the following:

▪ Click on the Project Management toolbar and then select Exclusive, Shared, or
Release Claim.
▪ Right-click in the Project Management table and then on the shortcut menu, point to
Set Claim Mode and then click Exclusive, Shared, or Release Claim.
5. Click the Apply command to claim the items.
The Shared claim mode is only available after selecting the appropriate setting in the
Options Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 727

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

Release Claim
Releasing the claim of an item enables you to cancel the claim of an item. This action makes it
possible to re-scope the item in As-Built if you need to update the data in the project. After the
item has been re-scoped, you can claim it again in the project and then edit the updated
data. Note that when releasing the claim of an item, it status in the project remains
Claimed. However, the claim mode changes to Release Claim. Items whose claim mode is
Release Claim behave exactly in the same way as the scoped items as the software re-scopes
these items.
1. In a project, click Window > New > Project Management.

2. Right-click in the Project Management table and then click Show Claimed Items .
3. Select the check box beside each item for which you want to release the claim.
4. Do one of the following:

▪ Click on the Project Management toolbar.

▪ Right-click in the Project Management table and then on the shortcut menu, click
Release Claim.
5. Do one of the following:

▪ Click on the Project Management toolbar.

▪ Right-click in the Project Management table and then click Apply.

▪ After setting the claim mode to Release Claim, the status of the items still remains behave
exactly in the same way as the scoped items as the software re-scopes them.
▪ To claim the items whose claim mode to Release Claim, right-click in the Project
Management table and then on the shortcut menu, click Mark as Reclaimed.

Mark Selected Items as Completed

Just before you are ready to return the items from your project to As-Built, you have to change
the status of these items in the project to Completed. The items that have been marked as
completed are no longer available for editing in the project and are ready for merging into
As-Built.
1. Open the required project.
2. Add the items that you require. For details, see Add Items to the Project Management
Table in a Project.
3. Select the check box beside each item that you want to mark as completed. For details of
item statuses in the project, see Rules for Changing Statuses (on page 718).
4. Do one of the following:

▪ Click on the Project Management toolbar.

▪ Right-click in the Project Management table and then on the shortcut menu, click Mark
as Completed.
5. Click the Apply command to claim the items.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 728

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

The items that have been marked as completed are no longer available for editing in
the project and are ready for merging into As- Built.

Clear Mark as Completed

This option allows to you to change the Completed status back to Claimed. These items will
again become available for editing in the project.
1. Open the required project.
2. Add the items that you require. For details, see Add Items to the Project Management
Table in a Project.
3. Select the check box beside each required item. For details of item statuses in the project,
see Rules for Changing Statuses (on page 718).
4. Do one of the following:

▪ Click on the Project Management toolbar.

▪ Right-click in the Project Management table and then on the shortcut menu, click Clear
Mark as Completed.
5. Click the Apply command to claim the items.
The items whose status is Clear Mark as Completed become available for editing in
the project.

Change the Status of All Completed Items to Claimed

This feature allows you to revert the Completed status of all the project items to Claimed. This
is especially helpful when you want to use an existing plant as a source for similar plants by
using the Load plant as project feature in Smart Engineering Manager. You can load this plant
as a project into different plants, edit this project, and then merge it into your As-Built plant.
1. Open the project for which you want to change the item statuses.

2. On the Project Management toolbar, click to open the Project Status dialog box.
3. Click the Claim All Completed Items button.
4. When prompted to confirm the action, click Yes.
5. On the Project Status dialog box, click Close.
Note that this command is available only for active projects. If your project is
not active, prior to changing the item statuses, you need to click Reactivate on the Project
Status dialog box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 729

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

Complete a Project
Prior to merging all the project items into As-Built, you have to change the status of all the
project items to Completed. Setting the project status to Completed automatically changes the
status of all the project items to Completed and allows you to run a full merge of the current
project into As-Built. For details about running a full merge, see Merge All the Project Items into
As-Built (Full Merge) (see "Merge All Project Items into As-Built (Full Merge)" on page 734).
1. In a project, click Window > New > Project Management.

2. On the Project Management toolbar, click .

3. On the Project Status dialog box, click Complete Project.
4. Click Close.

▪ You cannot claim items in a project whose status has been set to Completed or Merged.
▪ A project can only be returned to an Active state from the Completed or Merged state. If a
project has been set to Canceled, it cannot be changed back to Active. Canceled is
permanent state.

Return a Project to the Active Status

This procedure explains how to reactivate a project which has been merged or set as
Completed.
1. In a project, click Window > New > Project Management.

2. On the Project Management toolbar, click .

3. On the Project Status dialog box, click Reactivate.
4. Click Close.

Release from Merge

After merging items into the As-Built plant, users of other projects cannot claim these
items. This option makes it possible to release merged items so that they can be claimed for
other projects. After applying this option, the merged items in your current project become
marked as scoped.
1. In a project, click Window > New > Project Management.

2. Right-click in the Project Management table and then click Show Merged Items .
3. Select the check box beside each item you want to release.
4. Do one of the following:

▪ Click on the Project Management toolbar.

▪ Right-click in the Project Management table and then click Release from Merge.
5. Do one of the following:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 730

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

▪ Click on the Project Management toolbar.

▪ Right-click in the Project Management table and then click Apply.
After releasing from merge, the status of the items in the project becomes Scoped,
that is, the items will be scoped after you click Apply again.

Merging Items into As-Built

Merging is the final stage of the project cycle. After you have edited items in your project, you
can merge those items into As-Built. The merge operation completely overwrites existing data
in As-Built with the data from the project. For this reason, once you have merged data, the
changes are irreversible.

▪ You can merge all the project items into As-Built or only some of the completed items that
you select.
▪ If you add a new item in the project, after merging the item, the software creates it in
As-Built.
▪ If you modify data for an item in the project, after merging, the software overwrites the
existing data for that item in As-Built.
▪ If you delete an item in the project, after merging the item, the software deletes it in As-Built.
▪ When merging an item that is connected in parallel with another equipment item, the
software automatically merges all the items that are connected in parallel to the scoped
item. For example, if you select Motor-1 that has been connected in parallel with Motor-2
and Motor-3, the software will also automatically merge Motor-2 and Motor-3 and their
upstream items all the way to their power sources.
▪ When merging a composite drawing, all the plant items that are associated with graphical
elements on the drawing will be merged automatically on condition that they and their parent
items have been completed or merged. If the status of at least one of the items or one of the
parent items is not completed or merged, the software will not allow you to merge the
composite drawing.
▪ You can claim an item in a project and subsequently modify its data in As-Built. If you then
want to transfer the item changes from As-Built to the project, you must update the item
manually in the project. To assist you in doing this, it is recommended that you run a
comparison report first. You can also run the Release Claim command in the project to
automatically re-scope the item with the updated data from As-Built, but in this case any
changes you have made to the item in the project will be lost.
▪ You can only edit data in As-Built if in Options Manager, General Settings, the Allow
Editing in As-Built property is set to Yes.
▪ For the rules that govern document revisions, see Rules Governing Revisions for
Documents Merged Back into As-Built (on page 733).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 731

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

Compare a Document in a Project with a Document in

As-Built
After scoping and modifying items in a project, you can compare documents of the same type in
As-Built and in the project, for example, registered reports, SLDs, schematics. If changes that
you made to the item are reflected in the document, the software compares the changes and
indicates them on a comparison report. Note that the software generates As-Built and project
reports automatically when you run this command. This comparison can serve as a
precautionary measure before merging project documents into As-Built.
1. In an As-Built plant, click Window > New > Project Management.
2. Select the required project. For details, see Select a Project (on page 721).
3. From the Electrical Index, add the required documents to the Project Management
table. For details, see Add Items to the Project Management Table in As-Built.
4. In the Electrical Index, select a registered report, a schematic or an SLD that you want to
compare.
5. In the Project Management table, select the check box next to the document that you want
to compare.
6. Right-click in the Project Management table and then click Compare Documents.

▪ For the rules that govern document revisions when merging documents into As-Built, see
Rules Governing Revisions for Documents Merged Back into As-Built (on page 733).
▪ In SLDs and schematics, the software displays clouds around the items that differ from the
current data. The last revision number is shown in a triangle beside the cloud.
▪ The software uses index numbers to identify the changes in associations between electrical
items.
▪ The software generates a tabular report where it shows all the changes and shows the
changes in associations using index numbers as they appear in the drawing.
▪ For registered reports, the software opens two Excel files. One of the Excel files displays
changed data with blue shading. The second file is a summary of all changes and it is
called Registered Comparison Report. This report displays the previous and current data
for each tag that has undergone a change. Note that you can compare a registered report
only if it is a simple tabular report.
▪ In SLDs, the software indicates the following changes:
▪ All added and deleted electrical items except for control stations.
▪ Added, deleted, and updated properties of electrical items.
▪ Changes in associations.
▪ Attachment to a different document template.
▪ In schematic drawings, the software indicates the following changes:
▪ Added, deleted, and updated properties of electrical items.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 732

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

Rules Governing Revisions for Documents Merged Back

into As-Built
When merging a document from a project back into As-Built, the software manages the
document revisions according to the following rules:
▪ The revision numbering of a document in a project is done manually. When merging a
document into As-Built, and the revision number of the document in the project is lower than
the one in As-Built, the software raises the revision number automatically.
▪ If the revision number of the document in the project is higher than the one in As-Built, after
merging the document back into As-Built, the software treats the revision number that was
set in the project as the latest revision.
▪ If a document has different revision methods in As-Built and a project, after merging such a
document back into As-Built, the software inserts the revision as it was used in the project
and treats this revision as the latest one. All consequent revisions of this document will use
the new method as it was set in the project.
▪ If the revision number of the document that you want to merge into As-Built is identical to the
one in the project, the software can do one of the following according to the preference that
you have set on the General Settings page in Options Manager.
▪ Reject the document — the software will not merge the current document into As-Built
and will add an appropriate note in the log file.
▪ Increment the revision number — the software will raise the revision number in
As-Built.
▪ Use the existing number and overwrite the revision — the software will retain the
revision number in As-Built but will overwrite the revision information.

Run a Test Merge

You can run a test merge before merging the items into As- Built. This operation allows you to
check whether there are any problems with the items that you want to merge into As- Built. The
software creates a log file that describes the problem that may occur during a test run.
1. In the Project Management table (for As-Built), select the required project.
2. Do one of the following:

▪ On the Project Management table toolbar, click .

▪ Right-click in the Project Management table and then click Find Completed Items to
see which items have been completed in the project.
3. Right-click in the Project Management table and then click Test Merge.
The software generates a log file that shows any possible problems that might occur
during the test merge. For details, see Generate Error Log Files (on page 880).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 733

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

Merge All Project Items into As-Built (Full Merge)

The following procedure explains how to merge all the project items into As-Built.
Merging is the final stage of a project cycle. After you have edited items in your project, you can
merge those items into As-Built. The merge operation completely overwrites existing data in
As-Built with data from the project. For this reason, once you have committed to merge data,
the changes are irreversible.
Note that in order to run a full merge, the status of the project must be set to
Completed. For details, see Complete a Project (on page 730).
1. In an As-Built plant, click Window > New > Project Management.
2. Select the required project whose status has been set to Completed. For details, see
Select a Project (on page 721).

3. On the Project Management toolbar, click .

4. On the Project Status dialog box, click Merge Project.
5. Click Close.

▪ The software merges all the completed items into As-Built, including the child items.
▪ The status of all the child items in the project must be Completed. If the status of some of
the child items is not set to Completed, full merge is not possible.
▪ When merging a composite drawing, all the plant items that are associated with graphical
elements on the drawing will be merged automatically on condition that they and their parent
items have been completed or merged. If the status of at least one of the items or one of the
parent items is not completed or merged, the software will not allow you to merge the
composite drawing.
▪ Once a project has been merged, the software sets the status of the project and the status
of all the items in the project to Merged. No further activities are possible in this project as
all the items in the project are locked and cannot be edited. If you want to edit some of the
items in a merged project, you must first reactivate the project. After reactivating a project,
all the items in that project become scoped and you will have to claim the items that you
want to edit.

Merge Selected Project Items into As-Built (Partial Merge)

The software allows you to run a partial merge of the project items that have already been
completed. You can instruct the software to find all the completed items in a project and add
them to the Project Management table. You can then examine these items and select the ones
that you want to merge into As-Built.
The merge operation completely overwrites existing data in As-Built with data
from the project. For this reason, once you have committed to merge data, the changes are
irreversible.
1. In an As-Built plant, click Window > New > Project Management.
2. Select the required project. For details, see Select a Project (on page 721).
3. Do one of the following to find the items that have been completed in the project:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 734

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

▪ Click on the Project Management toolbar.

▪ Right-click in the Project Management table and then click Find Completed Items.
4. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now.
5. Under Results, select the items that you require and click OK.
6. In the Project Management table, select the check box next to a completed item that you
want to merge into As-Built.
You cannot merge into As-Built items that have child items which have not been
completed yet.
7. Do one of the following:

▪ Click on the Project Management toolbar.

▪ Right-click in the Project Management table and then click Merge.

▪ If you select an item that has child items whose status is not set to Completed, the main
item cannot be merged.
▪ When merging a composite drawing, all the plant items that are associated with graphical
elements on the drawing will be merged automatically on condition that they and their parent
items have been completed or merged. If the status of at least one of the items or one of the
parent items is not completed or merged, the software will not allow you to merge the
composite drawing.
▪ When merging an item that is connected in parallel with another equipment item, the
software automatically merges all the items that are connected in parallel to the scoped
item. For example, if you select Motor-1 that has been connected in parallel with Motor-2
and Motor-3, the software will also automatically merge Motor-2 and Motor-3 and their
upstream items all the way to their power sources.

Plant Operating Cases in As-Built and Projects

When scoping As-Built items for a project, all the operating case data is copied together with the
scoped items.
When creating a project, all the plant operating cases that exist in As-Built are created
automatically in the new project.
Note the following information regarding plant operating cases when working with As-Built and
projects.

As-Built Projects

Plant operating case You can add, delete, and You can add and rename cases as needed.
management rename plant operating cases You can delete only those cases that exist
as needed (performed in in the selected project only and they do not
Options Manager). exist in As-Built.
If there are plant operating
case inconsistencies between
▪ If the governing or active case in a
As-Built and an associated

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 735

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

As-Built Projects
project, you have to make sure project is defined differently from
that the names of the As-Built, when merging data into
operating cases in the projects As-Built, the software applies the
are the same as in As-Built. governing or active case functionality to
the operating case that is defined as
governing or active in As-Built and not
to the case defined as governing or
active in the project.
▪ When scoping items for a project whose
governing or active case is different
from As-Built, the software applies the
governing and active case functionality
to the operating case that is defined as
governing and active in As-Built and not
to the case in the project.
▪ Adding or renaming cases can cause
inconsistencies between the current
project and As-Built. You will have to
make sure that the names of the
operating cases in the project are the
same as in As-Built. Typically, you
would add or rename an operating case
to fix any existing inconsistency that can
be caused by adding or renaming an
operating case in As-Built.

Scoping All plant operating case data of

the scoped items is
automatically copied to the
appropriate plant operating
case of the project once the
scoping is completed.
If the governing case defined
in a project is different from the
governing case in As-Built, the
governing case in the project
remains unchanged when
scoping items for that project.

Merging All plant operating case data of the merged

items is automatically copied to the
appropriate As-Built operating case once
the merging is completed.
If the governing case defined in a project is
different from the governing case in
As-Built, the governing case in the project
remains unchanged when merging items for
that project.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 736

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

As-Built Projects

▪ The software copies the item data to the appropriate operating case according the ID of the
relevant operating case. So, even if an operating case has been renamed at one stage or
another, the software will still copy the item data to the appropriate operating case,
▪ If you attempt to merge data in an operating case that was created in the project and this
case, does not exist in As-Built, the software stops the merge process and informs you that
you need to create an operating case in As-Built that has exactly the same name as in the
project.
▪ For more information about plant operating cases, see Managing Plant Operating Cases.
▪ For more information about synchronizing plant operating cases, see Synchronize Plant
Operating Cases (on page 737).

Synchronize Plant Operating Cases

The software checks for plant operating case inconsistencies when selecting a project in
As-Built or opening a project in Project Management.
If the software detects a case inconsistency between As-Built and the selected project, you have
to synchronize the plant operating cases that have been found as inconsistent. The names of
these cases are shown by the software in the warning message that opens automatically once
an inconsistency is detected. Inconsistencies can occur when adding, deleting, or renaming
plant operating cases in As-Built or one of the existing projects belonging to As-Built. For
example, if you add a plant operating case in a project, you will have to add the same case in
As-Built in order to merge the case data into As-Built.
Synchronize Plant Operating Cases
1. In Options Manager, click Tools > Manage Plant Operating Cases.
2. On the Manage Plant Operating Cases dialog box, add, delete, or rename the plant
operating cases that have been detected as inconsistent.
3. In Smart Electrical, open Project Management and select the project that had inconsistent
cases.
4. If no warning message appears, all the cases have been synchronized.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 737

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

Miscellaneous Options for Project Management

The following additional options are available:
▪ Filter the Project Management Table Display (on page 738)
▪ Select a Display Option (Jump Template) (see "Select a Display Option" on page 739)
▪ Generate an Excel Report (Jump Template) (see "Generate an Excel Report" on page 739)

Filter the Project Management Table Display

This option allows you to filter the display of the items in the Project Management table
according to the status of items in the project.
1. In an As-Built plant or project, click Window > New > Project Management.
2. If your work environment is an As-Built plant, select the required project. For details, see
Select a Project (on page 721).
3. Do one of the following:
▪ Click the required icon on the Project Management toolbar.
▪ Right-click in the Project Management table and then click one of the following
commands:

Icon Command Explanation

Show Completed Items Filters the display to show only those items that
have been completed in the project.

Show Merged Items Filters the display to show only those items that
have been merged back into As-Built.

Show Claimed Items Filters the display to show only those items that
have been claimed for the project.

Show Items Deleted from Filters the display to show only those items that
As-Built have been deleted in As-Built.

Show Item Properties Displays the values of the item properties for an
item similar to the Properties window view, but
in read- only mode. Click Alphabetic to
display the properties in alphabetical order; click
Categorized to display the properties
grouped by specific categories. The software
can display the properties of only one item at a
time; the item for which the row is highlighted.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 738

 Project Management in Smart Electrical

Select a Display Option

This option allows you to specify the display mode in the data window. You can display the
main items only, the main items expanded to show their related items, or a list showing all
items. If a particular related item is associated with more than one main item, that related item
appears once only in the list view. In list view only, you can sort the items as required by
clicking the column headers in the data window.
1. In an As-Built plant or project, click Window > New > Project Management.
2. If your work environment is an As- Built plant, select the required project. For more
information, see Select a Project (on page 721).
3. Do one of the following:

▪ Click on the Project Management toolbar and then select the required option.
▪ Right-click in the Project Management table, click Display, and then click a command:
Main Items Only, Main Items with Related Items, All Items as List.

Generate an Excel Report

This option allows you to generate a report in Excel showing the current selection in the Project
Management table, arranged according to the main items. In the report, you can expand the
main items to display their related items.
1. In an As-Built plant or project, click Window > New > Project Management.
2. If your work environment is an As- Built plant, select the required project. For more
information, see Select a Project (on page 721).
3. Do one of the following:

▪ Click on the Project Management toolbar.

▪ Right-click in the Project Management table and then click Excel Report.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 739

SECTION 28

Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart

Electrical
This section covers information about using off-site projects with Smart Electrical. Off-site
projects are used for performing plant engineering activities at distributed locations, typically at
an EPC’s location. During project execution at the EPC’s location, work can continue at the
owner’s location. At any stage of the project, you can merge back to the owner’s location all or
some of the changes made in the EPC. Integration activities are performed in the owner’s
As-Built only.

▪ The function of an off-site plant in Smart Electrical parallels that of a standalone Workshare
satellite in Smart P&ID, and therefore the terms 'satellite' and 'off-site plant' may sometimes
be used interchangeably; however, it is important to realize that the implementation is
different in the two applications.
▪ Publish, Retrieve and other SmartPlant menu items are only available in the As-Built, not
in the projects.
▪ You must first claim items in projects in order to modify them. The As-Built does not claim
items to edit them.
▪ As-Built editing will be enabled according to As-Built access rights.

Types of Information Handled by Off-Site Projects

Off-site projects handle several types of information, as summarized in the following table.

Information Type Description Examples

Plant items Data that you create or import into the Motors and other loads,
Electrical Index and use to make panels, cables, cableways.
electrical relationships in the Electrical
Engineer.

Reference schema Template data used to set standards for Reference cables, typical
items work performed in the plant and to blocks, cableway
improve the performance of the plant components
creation by using a predefined set of
data. These items appear in the
Reference Data Explorer.

Reference data Data that defines the structure or Data dictionary, drawing
(metadata) presentation of plant and reference templates, plant reports.
schema items.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 740

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Information Handling
The following table summarizes how the software handles these different types of information at
various stages of the workflow.

Workflow Stage Information Type Method of Handling

Initial data scoping Plant items User specifies which data to scope in Smart
and transfer to Electrical. User creates package in Smart
off-site plant Engineering Manager for transferring the data to the
off-site plant.

Reference schema The software copies all reference schema items in

items the host to the package that the user creates for
transferring the plant items.

Reference data The software copies all metadata in the host to the
(metadata) package that the user creates for transferring the
plant items.

Data re-scoping Plant items User can specify additional data to re-scope in
Smart Electrical but cannot de-scope existing items
that were previously scoped. User creates
package in Smart Engineering Manager for
transferring the data to the off-site plant.

Reference schema The software re-scopes all new reference schema

items items related to the plant items that the user has
re-scoped. The software includes these reference
schema items in the package that the user creates
for transferring the plant items.

Reference data No changes to metadata when re-scoping.

(metadata)

Transfer of data Plant items User specifies which items to transfer in Smart
back to host Electrical by merging those items in the off-site
plant. User creates packages in Smart Engineering
Manager for transferring the data to the host.

Reference schema The software merges all new reference schema

items items related to the plant items in the package that
returns to the host.

Reference data If user edited metadata in the off-site plant, the user
(metadata) must run the Reference Data Synchronization
(RDS) Manager for updating the metadata in the
host.

When saving a project for reloading into a plant or saving a plant for merging in the
host, Smart Engineering Manager copies to the host or off-site plant all new reference schema
items of the following types only:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 741

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

▪ Reference cables
▪ Typical blocks
▪ Typical schematics
▪ Cableway components
Existing reference schema items and other types of reference schema items remain unchanged.

Scope of Allowed Activities

Before you start working with an off-site project, you should familiarize yourself with activities
that you can perform and those that you should not perform. The following constraints apply:
▪ You should avoid editing data in the host project, as this will result in overwritten data when
transferring the package to the off-site plant.
▪ Do not modify data in the off-site plant reconciliation area.

Out of Scope Items

The following features are out of scope in the current release:
▪ The software does not perform validation of item tag sequence uniqueness in the off-site
plant. Instead, it is the responsibility of the Host Administrator to supply suitable sequence
ranges to the Off-Site Plant Administrator.
▪ When saving a project for reloading into a plant or saving a plant for merging in the host,
Smart Engineering Manager copies to the host or off-site plant all new reference schema
items of the following types only:
▪ Reference cables
▪ Typical blocks
▪ Typical schematics
▪ Cableway components
Existing reference schema items and other types of reference schema items remain
unchanged.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 742

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Flowchart for Smart Electrical Off-Site Projects

Smart Electrical Off-Site Projects Workflow

This workflow provides a high-level description of how to implement off-site projects. For details
of the menu commands and dialog box options needed for each of the scenarios, refer to the
detailed procedure for that scenario.

Initial Scoping and Data Transfer

1. Create a plant, to be defined as the host, with one or more projects.
2. Scope the required items to a project.
3. Export the project as a package.
Once you have created an initial package, you cannot de-scope items in
the As-Built.
The exported package includes reference schema items (reference cables,
typical blocks, cableway components, lookup tables, and so).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 743

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

4. Import the package into the off-site plant.

▪ In the off-site plant, the software creates a schema known as the reconciliation area.
The data in the reconciliation area is identical to that of the project that you exported.
▪ On the page where Smart Electrical is shown as the application to associate, if, under
the section Select the schema data for copying, you select the Project check box, the
software also creates an off-site project that initially contains data identical to that of
both the source project and the reconciliation area.
5. Edit data in the off-site project as needed.
Do not change the names of units in the off-site plant where you transfer
data, otherwise the software will not be able to merge the data back to the host later.

▪ During editing in the off-site plant, it is possible to continue to make changes in the host
As-Built. To synchronize those changes with the off-site plant, you must re-scope the
host data (for details, see below).
▪ If, after exporting the project as a package, you create new metadata in the host
As-Built that affects the plant data, you must run the Reference Data Synchronization
(RDS) Manager to create a separate RDS package. You must synchronize metadata
with the host using this RDS package before importing the package containing the plant
items. For details of how to create the RDS package and how to synchronize the
metadata, refer to the Reference Data Synchronization Manager User's Guide.

Transferring Data Back to the Host

1. In the off-site plant, merge data from the project into the reconciliation area.
If required, you can perform a partial merge.
2. Export data from the off-site plant reconciliation area as a package.
3. If, in the off-site plant, you created new metadata that affects the plant data, you must run
the Reference Data Synchronization Manager to create an RDS package in the off-site plant
and then import this package into the host.
You cannot make changes to the metadata in the plant breakdown structure
table in the off-site plant. For example, do not add any user-defined fields in your plant
breakdown structure. Doing so may damage the host project when you synchronize the
metadata back to it.
This step updates the entire set of metadata. You must run this step
before importing the package containing the plant items.
4. Import the package into the host.

▪ The software copies all new reference cables, typical blocks, and cableway components
to the host. Changes in existing reference cables, typical blocks, and cableway
components do not propagate back automatically to the host at this stage but will do so
when you re-scope data from the host.
▪ In the host, the software updates the project only. As-Built data remains unaffected.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 744

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

5. Merge the project into the As-Built in the host.

You can also perform a partial merge if necessary

Re-Scoping and Synchronizing Updated As-Built Data

1. Re-scope the As-Built data in the host.
2. Export the re-scoped project as a package.
This action creates an update of the existing package.
3. If you created an RDS package, import this package into the off-site plant using the
Reference Data Synchronization Manager.
Metadata is shared between the reconciliation area and projects in the off-site
plant. You must run this step before importing the package containing the plant items.
4. Import the updated package into the off-site plant.

▪ The software copies all new reference cables, typical blocks, and cableway components
to the off-site plant. Existing reference cables, typical blocks, and cableway
components remain in the off-site plant unchanged.
▪ In the off-site plant, the software updates data in the reconciliation area only. Data in
the project remains unaffected.
5. In the off-site plant, scope or claim items as necessary into the project.
This step should be performed with care to ensure that you do not
inadvertently overwrite any of the data that you changed in both the off-site project and the
host As-Built.

Scope Host Data and Transfer to Off-Site Plant

1. In Smart Electrical, open the host plant (As-Built) and select the project that you want to
specify as the host project.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 745

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

2. Scope the required items to the host project.

3. Open the project and select the plant group where your data resides.

4. Claim the items to the project.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 746

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

5. Close Smart Electrical.

6. Open Smart Engineering Manager and connect to the host.
7. Select the host project and on the shortcut menu, click Save Project as Offsite.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 747

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

8. On the Save Project as Offsite dialog box, accept the default location for exporting the
plant to, or change the location by clicking the Browse button .

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 748

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

9. Click OK to export the host project data as a package. The status bar at the bottom of the
dialog box shows the current activity.

10. In Smart Engineering Manager, connect to the off-site plant.

11. Click Plant Structures and on the shortcut menu, click Load Offsite Plant Structure.

12. On the following page of the Load Offsite Plant Structure Wizard, beside Zip file of plant,
click the Browse button .

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 749

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

13. Browse to the zip file containing the package from the host that you want to load.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 750

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

14. Click Next. The page shows you details of the package.

15. In the Name field, type the name of the new plant to be created in the off-site plant.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 751

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

16. To create a project in the plant, select the Project check box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 752

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

17. Specify the plant structure path (in this example, the plant structure path was copied from
the folder path one level above the backup location).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 753

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

18. In the System user and System password fields, type appropriate values for your
database.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 754

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

19. Click Next to accept the database server and user connection information or specify a
different path for the Smart Electrical reference data.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 755

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

20. Click Finish to load the package and create the new As-Built and project for the off-site
plant.

Transfer Data from the Off-Site Plant to the Host

Before commencing this procedure, if you have created or modified metadata
in the off-site plant, you must synchronize the metadata between the off-site plant and the host
using the Reference Data Synchronization (RDS) Manager. Refer to the appropriate user's
guides as follows:
▪ For details of how to create or modify metadata, refer to the Smart Data Dictionary Manager
User's Guide.
You cannot make changes to the metadata in the plant breakdown structure
table in the off-site plant. For example, do not add any user-defined fields in your plant
breakdown structure. Doing so may damage the host project when you synchronize the
metadata back to it.
▪ For details of how to create an RDS package and synchronize the metadata between the
off-site plant and the host, refer to the Reference Data Synchronization Manager User's
Guide.
1. In Smart Electrical, open the off-site plant and select the project where you made changes
to the data.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 756

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

2. Select the items that you want to merge back to the Reconciliation Area.

3. Change the status of those items to Completed.

4. Connect to the Reconciliation Area in the off-site plant and merge the items.
5. Open Smart Engineering Manager and connect to the off-site plant.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 757

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

6. Select the off-site plant and on the shortcut menu, click Save Plant for Merge in Host.

7. Click Next to accept the values on the Save Plant for Merge in Host dialog box.

If you made revisions in the plant and you want to include those revisions in the
package, select Include Smart Electrical revisions.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 758

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

The status bar at the bottom of the dialog box shows the current activity.

8. Select the host project and on the shortcut menu, click Load Standalone Project.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 759

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

9. On the following page of the Load Standalone Project Wizard, beside Zip file of plant,
click the Browse button .

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 760

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

10. Browse to the zip file containing the package from the off-site plant that you want to load.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 761

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

11. Click Next. The page shows you details of the package.

12. Click Finish to load the package into the host project.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 762

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

13. Open Smart Electrical and merge the updated project data back to the As-Built.

Rescope and Synchronize Updated As-Built Data

1. In Smart Electrical, re-scope the required items to the host project.
Once you have created an initial package, you cannot de-scope items in
the As-Built.
2. Close Smart Electrical.
3. Open Smart Engineering Manager and connect to the host.
4. Select the host project, right-click, and click Save Project for Reload.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 763

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

5. On the Save Project for Reload dialog box, change the export location by clicking the
Browse button .

6. Click OK to export the re-scoped host project data as a package.

7. Select the off-site plant and on the shortcut menu, click Load Standalone Project.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 764

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

8. On the following page of the Load Standalone Project Wizard, beside Zip file of plant,
click the Browse button .

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 765

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

9. Browse to the zip file containing the package with re-scoped data from the host that you
want to load.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 766

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

10. Click Next. The page shows you details of the package.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 767

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

11. Click Finish to load the package into the off-site plant.

▪ The software loads the package into the reconciliation area only; data in the off-site
project is unaffected.
▪ Data loaded into the reconciliation area from a re-scoped package does not have any
status assigned.

Smart Electrical EPC Greenfield Plant Workflow

This workflow applies to initiation of data in a greenfield plant that is subsequently transferred to
the host plant as a project. It applies to the creation of new items only in the host; this workflow
cannot be used to update or delete existing items in the host.
1. Create a greenfield plant at the required site.

▪ We recommend that you use the same Data Dictionary template for the greenfield plant
as the template that was used to create the host plant. If the plants were created using
different Data Dictionary templates, you must run Reference Data Synchronization
(RDS) Manager to create a separate RDS package. You must synchronize metadata
with the host using this RDS package before importing the package containing the
greenfield plant items. For details of how to create an RDS package and how to
synchronize metadata, refer to the Reference Data Synchronization Manager User's
Guide.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 768

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

▪ When running the Associate Applications command for the greenfield plant, the plant
can only be associated with Smart Electrical and must not be associated with any other
applications.
2. Create the required items in the greenfield plant.
Ensure that all the data in the greenfield plant is correct before saving the
plant as a package. This is important because, you will only be able to load the package into
the target plant as a project once.
3. Save the plant as a package using the Save Plant Structure command. For details, see
Save a Plant Structure (on page 769).
4. To synchronize reference schema items (reference cables, cableway components, typical
blocks, typical schematics, lookup tables, and so on) between the plants, do the following in
Smart Electrical Options Manager:
a. Connect to the greenfield plant and create a reference data package. For details, see
Create a Reference Data Package.
b. Connect to the host plant and update the reference data from the package you created
in the greenfield plant. For details, see Update Reference Data from a Package.
These actions synchronize the items created in the Smart Electrical Reference
Data Explorer of the greenfield plant by updating them in the Smart Electrical Reference
Data Explorer of the host plant.
5. In Smart Engineering Manager, right-click the required host plant (target) and click Enable
Projects.
6. Import the package into the host plant as a project using the Load Plant as Project
command. For details, see Load a Plant as a Project (on page 772).
The Load Plant as Project command is enabled only if the plant is associated
with Smart Electrical alone and not with any other application and only after the Enable
Projects command has been run for the plant.

Save a Plant Structure

When running the Save Plant Structure command, make sure that there is
enough free disk space on the machine where the software will create the .zip file.
1. In Smart Engineering Manager, in the tree view, right-click the plant structure you want to
save, and on the shortcut menu, click Save Plant Structure.

2. In the Save Plant Structure dialog box, click the ellipsis button beside the Export plant
to location field, and browse to the folder where you want to save the plant structure.
3. Under Include applications, select at least one application to be saved with the plant
structure.
4. If required, select to include revisions or versions with the applications you selected.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 769

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Create a Reference Data Package

The following procedure explains how to create a package file that will contain the reference
data that you want to send to an off-site plant.
1. On the Options Manager menu bar, click Tools > Update Reference Data > Create
Package.
2. To set the view In the Items grid for a selected folder, click Layout in the Current view
group box and select an appropriate layout that has been created in the EDE of the current
plant or project.
You set the view for each folder that you select in the Reference Data tree view.
If you do not select any layout, the Items grid displays the basic view that includes the item
tag names and their descriptions.
3. On the Create Reference Data Package dialog box, do the following to select the reference
items that you want to include in the package:
a. Expand the Reference Data tree view and select a required sub-folder.
b. Select or clear the Select check box beside each reference item in the grid. Note that if
you select an item that has child items (for example a motor with a space heater), the
software selects the child items automatically without displaying them in the grid.
You can also do the following:
▪ In the Current view group box, click the Select all shown items check box to
select all the reference items that belong to the current folder in the Reference Data
tree view.
▪ Do not clear the Select all mandatory items check box so that all the reference
items that have been used to create plant items in the current plant or project are
included in the package.
▪ Select the Select all reference items check box to include all the reference items
that exist in the current plant or project.
4. Click the Create Package button to start the package creation process.

▪ If a reference item has been used in the current plant, the software marks this reference
item as mandatory and it is recommended that you include it in the package.
▪ Click Save Session to save your selections if you want to pause the current session. Click
Open Session to resume your selections. You can open a saved session from a package or
session file.
Click Open Session to open a saved session. On the Open dialog box, from the Files of type
list, select one of the following:
▪ Reference Data Selection Session (xml) — to open a saved selections session.
▪ Reference Data Package (zip) — to open a session from an existing package.
▪ Click Report to generate an Excel file that will contain all the selections that you have made.
▪ Once the software finishes creating the package, a message is displayed informing you
whether or not the package has been created successfully. Click the Log button to open the

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 770

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

package creation log file to see if there are any reference items that failed to be included in
the package.

Update Reference Data from a Package

The following procedure explains how to update your reference data from a package that was
created in a host or an off-site project.
1. On the Options Manager menu bar, click Tools > Update Reference Data > Update from
Package.
2. On the Update from Package dialog box, click Open Package and navigate to the required
package file.
3. To set the view In the Items grid for a selected folder, click Layout in the Current view
group box and select an appropriate layout that has been created in the EDE of the current
plant or project.
You set the view for each folder that you select in the Package Reference Data
tree view. If you do not select any layout, the Items grid displays the basic view that
includes the item tag names and their descriptions.
4. In the Items grid, examine the items that have been selected by the software from the
current package and do one of the following:
▪ Do not clear the Select check box to include the package item in the update.
▪ Clear the Select check box to exclude the package item from the update.

▪ In the Items grid, child items that were included with their parent items are not shown by
the software. For example, if the package contains a reference motor with a space
heater, both items are included in the package without displaying the space heater in
the grid.
▪ It is not possible to select existing items to be included in the update. In this version of
the software, only new items can be included in the update process.
▪ Make sure that you click Save Selections after making a change in the selection. This
way the package will retain all the selections.
5. Click the Report button to generate an Excel file that shows all the items that you have
selected from the current package.
6. Click the Update Data button to start the update process.

▪ If a reference item has been used in the current plant, the software marks this reference
item as mandatory and it is recommended that you include it in the package.
▪ Click Save Selections to save your selections if you want to pause the current session. The
software saves your selections in the current package. Click Open Package and navigate to
the package file to resume your selections.
▪ Once the software finishes the update process, a message is displayed informing you
whether or not the update has been completed successfully. Click the Log button to open
the update log file to see if there are any package items that failed to be included in the
update.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 771

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Load a Plant as a Project

While it is possible to load several projects into the target plant, you are
allowed to load a given source plant as a project only once; therefore you should ensure that all
the data in that source plant is correct before performing this procedure.
1. In Smart Engineering Manager, in the tree view, right-click the plant into which you want to
load the project, and on the shortcut menu, click Load Plant as Project.
The Load Plant as Project command is enabled only if the plant is associated
with Smart Electrical alone and not with any other application and only after the Enable
Projects command has been run for the plant.

2. On the Load Plant as Project dialog box, click the ellipsis button beside the Zip file of
plant field and browse to the plant structure you want to load.
3. In the Project name field, change the name of the project as you require.
The project name must be unique in the site; therefore it cannot be the
same as the name of any existing plant in the target site.
4. Map the source and target plant groups by doing one of the following:
▪ If the hierarchies in the source and target are identical, you can map each level of the
hierarchy in the source to its corresponding level in the target by clicking Map All.
▪ Under Target plant groups, select a plant group and drag it to the required row of the
grid under Mapped plant groups.
▪ Under Mapped plant groups, select a row, and under Target plant groups, select a
plant group and then click Map.
5. Click OK to load the project.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 772

SECTION 29

Smart Electrical Off-Site Projects Reference

This section describes the various commands, dialog boxes, and wizards used for implementing
off-site projects in Smart Electrical.

In This Section
Save Project as Offsite Command (File Menu) ............................. 773
Save Project as Offsite Dialog Box ................................................ 774
Save Project for Reload Command (File Menu) ............................ 775
Save Project for Reload Dialog Box .............................................. 775
Save Plant for Merge in Host Command (File Menu) .................... 775
Save Plant for Merge in Host Dialog Box ...................................... 776
Load Offsite Plant Structure Command (File Menu) ..................... 777
Load Offsite Plant Structure Wizard .............................................. 777
Load Plant as Project Command (File Menu) ................................ 789
Load Plant as Project Dialog Box .................................................. 789
Load Standalone Project Command (File Menu) .......................... 791
Load Standalone Project Wizard ................................................... 791

Save Project as Offsite Command (File Menu)

Opens the Save Project as Offsite dialog box, which allows you to save a project from the host
site for the first time as a package. You can load the package later in order to create an off-site
plant As-Built for the first time.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 773

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Save Project as Offsite Dialog Box

Name — Type the name of the project.

Export plant to location — Click the ellipsis button to specify the path for the location of
the .zip file package to be created containing the project data.

Include applications
Select the application that you want to include in the off-site project. The available options are:
▪ Smart P&ID
▪ Smart Electrical

Revision and version options

Allows you to include revisions and versions for Smart P&ID and revisions for Smart Electrical
with the saved off-site project if required.
Include Smart P&ID revisions — Select to include Smart P&ID revisions with the package.
Include associated Smart P&ID versions — Select to save associated versions with the
package. This option is only available if you select Include Smart P&ID revisions.
Include Smart Electrical revisions — Select to include Smart Electrical revisions with the
package.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 774

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Save Project for Reload Command (File Menu)

Opens the Save Project for Reload dialog box, which allows you to create a package with
re-scoped host site data.

Save Project for Reload Dialog Box

Name — Type the name of the project.

Export plant to location — Click the ellipsis button to specify the path for the location of
the .zip file package to be created containing the project data.

Include applications
Select the application that you want to include in the saved project. The available options are:
▪ Smart P&ID
▪ Smart Electrical

Revision and version options

Allows you to include revisions and versions for Smart P&ID and revisions for Smart Electrical
with the saved project if required.
Include Smart P&ID revisions — Select to include Smart P&ID revisions with the package.
Include associated Smart P&ID versions — Select to save associated versions with the
package. This option is only available if you select Include Smart P&ID revisions.
Include Smart Electrical revisions — Select to include Smart Electrical revisions with the
package.

Save Plant for Merge in Host Command (File Menu)

Opens the Save Plant for Merge in Host dialog box, which allows you to save a project from
the off-site plant as a package for re-importing modified data into the host site.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 775

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Save Plant for Merge in Host Dialog Box

Name — Type the name of the project.

Export plant to location — Click the ellipsis button to specify the path for the location of
the .zip file package to be created containing the plant data.

Include applications
Select the application that you want to include in the plant. The available options are:
▪ Smart P&ID
▪ Smart Electrical

Revision and version options

Allows you to include revisions and versions for Smart P&ID and revisions for Smart Electrical
with the saved plant if required.
Include Smart P&ID revisions — Select to include Smart P&ID revisions with the package.
Include associated Smart P&ID versions — Select to save associated versions with the
package. This option is only available if you select Include Smart P&ID revisions.
Include Smart Electrical revisions — Select to include Smart Electrical revisions with the
package.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 776

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Load Offsite Plant Structure Command (File Menu)

Opens the Load Offsite Plant Structure Wizard, which allows you to import into an off-site
plant for the first time a package that was created in the host plant.

Load Offsite Plant Structure Wizard

The Load Offsite Plant Structure wizard guides you through the required process to load into
an off-site plant a package that was created in the host plant. At the end of the process, the
software creates a new plant structure with a project containing all the plant items that were
scoped from the host.

Source Path (Load Offsite Plant Structure Wizard)

This page allows you to specify the location of the plant structure files for the copied plant or
project.
All paths must use the Universal Naming Convention (UNC) format and cannot
exceed 255 characters.

Zip file of plant — Specify the path to the location of the plant structure you want to load.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 777

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Plant Name (Load Offsite Plant Structure Wizard)

This page allows you to view and define a name and description for the new plant root item.
An asterisk (*) at the end of an item name indicates a value is required for that item.

Plant group type — Displays the plant group type of the root item.
Name — Displays the name of the copied plant structure. You must change this name if it is
not unique in the site to which you are copying the plant structure. This name is limited to 80
characters and cannot contain any of the following characters: ~ ` ! % ^ & * ( ) - + = { } [ ] \ / ; : ‘ "
<>,.?|
Description — Type a description for the plant (optional). The description is limited to 240
characters.
Address — Type an address identification for the plant. This option appears only if the plant
structure uses Hierarchy 2: Site/Plant/Unit or uses a hierarchy with the Site plant group type as
the root item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 778

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Associate Applications (Load Offsite Plant Structure Wizard)

Allows you to select the applications you want to associate with the selected plant
structure. Any combination can be made, that is, one, two, or all three applications can be
selected. This selection determines the order in which the software opens the wizard
pages. The wizard pages and the options displayed in the pages are application-specific and
depend on the order in which you select the applications.

▪ Applications to associate — Select the application that you want to associate with the
plant structure. The options are: Smart P&ID and Smart Electrical.

Target Paths (Load Offsite Plant Structure Wizard)

Defines the paths to the storage locations relevant for the plant data and drawings.

▪ The paths for the plant structure and backup location must use the Universal Naming
Convention (UNC) format and cannot exceed 255 characters.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 779

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

▪ An asterisk (*) at the end of an item name indicates a value is required for that item.

Plant structure path — Specify the path to the storage location for the plant data and the
drawing files. You must create the plant structure share before running this wizard, using the
form \\siteserver\sitename\plantname. The wizard will create the 'plantname' folder if it does not
already exist.
Backup location — Specify the path to the shared storage folder for backing up the plant files.
Seed location — Specify the location of your plant scripts and resources, which are required for
successful loading of the plant. The default seed location is the Smart Engineering Manager
home folder.
Save seed location as the preferred setting — Select to make the current seed location your
default setting.

▪ Select a backup location outside the Plant structure path to avoid recursive backups being
stored in a single backup file. For example, if the Plant structure path is
\\siteserver\sitename\plantname, do not set the backup location for plantname to
\\siteserver\sitename\plantname\backups.
▪ Be sure the backup location has plenty of available space because the restore process
generates a temporary folder in this backup location while the plant data is being
restored. This folder is removed when the process finishes.
Location paths cannot contain any of the following characters: ~ ` ! % * ( ) { } [ ] / ; : ' "
<>,?|

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 780

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Database Information (Load Offsite Plant Structure Wizard)

Define the database for your plant structure. An asterisk (*) at the end of an item name
indicates that a value is required for that item.

Database type — Displays the database type (Oracle or SQL Server) used by the site in which
the plant will be created.
Oracle alias — Type the name of the Oracle Net Service name as defined by your database
administrator. This option appears only if Oracle is selected as the database type.
Database node — Type the Node Name of the server on which the SQL Server database
resides. This option appears only if SQL Server is selected as the database type. This node
name cannot contain any spaces.
System user — Type a database system user name. This name does not have to be the
database administrator user name, but this user must have sysadmin privileges (for SQL
Server) or the DBA role (for Oracle).
System password — Type the system password.

▪ Oracle system passwords cannot contain any special characters other than: @ ('at' symbol),
. (period), and _ (underscore). SQL Server database passwords cannot contain the
character: '
On an Oracle platform using different instances, when exiting this Wizard page, you may receive
a message about having insufficient privileges to create the plant structure, followed by a list of

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 781

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

the required privileges. To fix this problem, you must create one or more of these privileges
manually using Oracle tools.

Plant Schema (Load Offsite Plant Structure Wizard)

Allows you to specify the tablespace and user name for the plant schema. An asterisk (*) at the
end of an item name indicates a value is required for that item.
Database type — Displays the database type (Oracle or SQL Server) used by the site in which
the plant will be created.
Oracle service/alias — Displays the Oracle Net Service alias specified previously in which the
plant will be created. This option appears only if Oracle is selected as the database type.
Database server — Displays the Node Name of the server on which the SQL Server database
resides. This option appears only if SQL Server is selected as the database type.
Database name — Select the name of the SQL Server database in which the plant will be
created. This option appears only if SQL Server is selected as the database type.
Oracle tablespace — Select the default Oracle tablespace name for your plant
database. These tablespaces were defined when the database administrator created the
default database instance using Oracle Database Assistant. This option appears only if Oracle
is selected as the database type.
Oracle temp tablespace — Select the default Oracle temporary tablespace name for your plant
database. If this list is empty, contact your database administrator. This option appears only if
Oracle is selected as the database type on the previous page.

▪ We recommend that you do not use SYSTEM for the default tablespace because Oracle
uses this tablespace for its own use.
▪ If you create new Oracle tablespaces or SQL Server databases after starting this wizard,
you must refresh the tablespace list by clicking Back and then clicking Next to return to this
page before the new information will display in the appropriate lists.
Database username — Type the user name you want to use for the plant schema user. This
value, which must be unique in the database, defaults to the plant name that you specified
earlier. For more information about default database user names, see Understanding Default
Database User Names.
Database password — Type the password for the plant schema user. We recommend using
the database user name specified above as this password.
Confirm password — Re-type the password for the plant schema user.

▪ The software sets the related password defaults for the above user name automatically to
<default user name> for Oracle and to <default user name> + '1' for SQL Server. In the
case of SQL Server 2014 running on Windows Server 2012, if you are using SQL Server
authentication, you can specify that SQL Server is to use the password validation rules that
are used by Windows Server 2012.
▪ Database usernames cannot start with a numeric digit and cannot contain any of the
following characters: ~ ` ! % ^ & * ( ) - + = { } [ ] \ / ; : ‘ " < > , . ? |

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 782

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

▪ Oracle database user names are limited to 30 characters. Because plant names can be up
to 64 characters long, the software truncates the characters to the maximum allowed by
Oracle in creating the default database user names.
▪ Oracle database passwords cannot contain the characters: " ' @
▪ SQL Server database passwords cannot contain the character: '

Plant Data Dictionary (Load Offsite Plant Structure Wizard)

Allows you to specify the tablespace and user name for the plant data dictionary. The data
dictionary contains database tables, database table attributes, item types, select list definitions,
and select list entries. An asterisk (*) at the end of an item name indicates a value is required
for that item.
Database type — Displays the database type (Oracle or SQL Server) used by the site in which
the plant will be created.
Oracle service/alias — Displays the Oracle Net Service alias specified previously in which the
plant will be created. This option appears only if Oracle is selected as the database type.
Database server — Displays the Node Name of the server on which the SQL Server database
resides. This option appears only if SQL Server is selected as the database type.
Database name — Displays the name of the SQL Server database in which the plant will be
created. This option appears only if SQL Server is selected as the database type.
Oracle tablespace — Select the default Oracle tablespace name for your plant
database. These tablespaces were defined when the database administrator created the
default database instance using Oracle Database Assistant. This option appears only if Oracle
is selected as the database type.
Oracle temp tablespace — Select the default Oracle temporary tablespace name for your plant
database. If this list is empty, contact your database administrator. This option appears only if
Oracle is selected as the database type on the previous page.

▪ We recommend that you do not use SYSTEM for the default tablespace because Oracle
uses this tablespace for its own use.
▪ If you create new Oracle tablespaces or SQL Server databases after starting this wizard,
you must refresh the tablespace list by clicking Back and then clicking Next to return to this
page before the new information will display in the appropriate lists.
Database username — Type the user name you want to use for the plant data dictionary
user. This value, which must be unique in the database, defaults to the plant name that you
specified earlier, with the letter "d" appended. For more information about default database
user names, see Understanding Default Database User Names.
Database password — Type the password for the plant data dictionary user. We recommend
using the database user name specified above as this password.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 783

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Confirm password — Re-type the password for the plant data dictionary user.

▪ The software sets the related password defaults for the above user name automatically to
<default user name> for Oracle and to <default user name> + '1' for SQL Server. In the
case of SQL Server 2014 running on Windows Server 2012, if you are using SQL Server
authentication, you can specify that SQL Server is to use the password validation rules that
are used by Windows Server 2012.
▪ Database usernames cannot start with a numeric digit and cannot contain any of the
following characters: ~ ` ! % ^ & * ( ) - + = { } [ ] \ / ; : ‘ " < > , . ? |
▪ Oracle database user names are limited to 30 characters. Because plant names can be up
to 64 characters long, the software truncates the characters to the maximum allowed by
Oracle in creating the default database user names.
▪ Oracle database passwords cannot contain the characters: " ' @
▪ SQL Server database passwords cannot contain the character: '

Smart Electrical Schema (Load Offsite Plant Structure Wizard)

Defines the Smart Electrical schema database information for your Smart Electrical plant
structure.

▪ This screen is only displayed if an application was associated to the plant structure selected
previously in the Applications to associate page of the wizard.
▪ An asterisk (*) at the end of an item name indicates a value is required for that item.

Oracle service/alias — Displays the Oracle Net Service alias specified previously in which the
plant will be created. This option appears only if Oracle is selected as the database type.
Database node — Displays the Node Name of the server on which the SQL Server database
resides. This option appears only if SQL Server is selected as the database type.
Database name — Displays the name of the SQL Server database in which the plant will be
created. This option appears only if SQL Server is selected as the database type.
Oracle tablespace — Select the default Oracle tablespace name for your plant
database. These tablespaces were defined when the database administrator created the
default database instance using Oracle Database Assistant. This option appears only if Oracle
is selected as the database type.

▪ We recommend that you do not use SYSTEM for the default tablespace because Oracle
uses this tablespace for its own uses.
▪ If you create new Oracle tablespaces or SQL Server databases after starting this wizard,
you must refresh the tablespace list by clicking Back and then clicking Next to return to this
page before the new information will display in the appropriate lists.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 784

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Oracle temp tablespace — Select the default Oracle temporary tablespace name for your plant
database. If this list is empty, contact your database administrator. This option appears only if
Oracle is selected as the database type on the previous page.
Database username — Type the user name you want to use for the Smart Electrical schema
user. This value, which must be unique in the database, defaults to the plant name that you
specified earlier, with the letters "el" appended. For more information about default database
user names, see Understanding Default Database User Names.
Database password — Displays the default database password, as set by the database
software. You can change the password for the Smart Electrical database user by typing a new
password in the Database password field. We recommend using the default Smart Electrical
user name defined above as this password.
Confirm password — Re-type the password for the database user.

▪ The software sets the related password defaults for the above user name automatically to
<default user name> for Oracle and to <default user name> + '1' for SQL Server. In the
case of SQL Server 2014 running on Windows Server 2012, if you are using SQL Server
authentication, you can specify that SQL Server is to use the password validation rules that
are used by Windows Server 2012.
▪ Database usernames cannot start with a numeric digit and cannot contain any of the
following characters: ~ ` ! % ^ & * ( ) - + = { } [ ] \ / ; : ‘ " < > , . ? |
▪ Oracle database user names are limited to 30 characters. Because plant names can be up
to 64 characters long, the software truncates the characters to the maximum allowed by
Oracle in creating the default database user names.
▪ Oracle database passwords cannot contain the characters: " ' @
▪ SQL Server database passwords cannot contain the character: '
Smart Electrical reference data path — Taken from the Plant Structure Path as set
previously in the Target Paths screen of the wizard. To select a different path, type the
required path or click the ellipsis button to browse to the reference data path for the
application options. This field is limited to 255 characters.
When loading a plant structure, the software checks the reference data folder
structure and, if necessary, creates additional folder levels to ensure that all files with the same
names are located in unique folder paths.

Smart Electrical Reference Schema (Load Offsite Plant

Structure Wizard)
Defines the Smart Electrical reference schema database information for your Smart Electrical
plant structure.

▪ This screen is only displayed if Smart Electrical was associated to the plant structure
selected previously in the Applications to associate page of the wizard.
▪ An asterisk (*) at the end of an item name indicates a value is required for that item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 785

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Application to associate — Displays the application being associated. This value is carried
forward from the previous page.
Schema type — Displays the application schema type. This value is carried forward from the
previous page.
Oracle service/alias — Displays the Oracle Net Service alias specified previously in which the
plant will be created. This option appears only if Oracle is selected as the database type.
Database node — Displays the Node Name of the server on which the SQL Server database
resides. This option appears only if SQL Server is selected as the database type.
Database name — Displays the name of the SQL Server database in which the plant will be
created. This option appears only if SQL Server is selected as the database type.
Oracle tablespace — Select the default Oracle tablespace name for your plant
database. These tablespaces were defined when the database administrator created the
default database instance using Oracle Database Assistant. This option appears only if Oracle
is selected as the database type.

▪ We recommend that you do not use SYSTEM for the default tablespace because Oracle
uses this tablespace for its own uses.
▪ If you create new Oracle tablespaces or SQL Server databases after starting this wizard,
you must refresh the tablespace list by clicking Back and then clicking Next to return to this
page before the new information will display in the appropriate lists.
Oracle temp tablespace — Select the default Oracle temporary tablespace name for your plant
database. If this list is empty, contact your database administrator. This option appears only if
Oracle is selected as the database type on the previous page.
Database username — Type the user name you want to use for the Smart Electrical reference
schema user. This value, which must be unique in the database, defaults to the plant name that
you specified earlier, with the letters 'elref' appended. For more information about default
database user names, see Understanding Default Database User Names.
Database password — Displays the default database password, as set by the database
software. You can change the password for the Smart Electrical database user by typing a new
password in the Database password field. We recommend using the default Smart Electrical
user name defined above as this password.
Confirm password — Re-type the password for the database user.

▪ The software sets the related password defaults for the above user name automatically to
<default user name> for Oracle and to <default user name> + '1' for SQL Server. In the
case of SQL Server 2014 running on Windows Server 2012, if you are using SQL Server
authentication, you can specify that SQL Server is to use the password validation rules that
are used by Windows Server 2012.
▪ Database usernames cannot start with a numeric digit and cannot contain any of the
following characters: ~ ` ! % ^ & * ( ) - + = { } [ ] \ / ; : ‘ " < > , . ? |
▪ Oracle database user names are limited to 30 characters. Because plant names can be up
to 64 characters long, the software truncates the characters to the maximum allowed by
Oracle in creating the default database user names.
▪ Oracle database passwords cannot contain the characters: " ' @

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 786

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

▪ SQL Server database passwords cannot contain the character: '

Smart Electrical Data Dictionary (Load Offsite Plant Structure

Wizard)
Allows you to enter all the database and user information for Smart Electrical data
dictionary. The tablespaces and other database information displayed in the drop-down lists
are based on the database used in the plant structure creation. The database user name must
be unique.
An asterisk (*) means a value is required for that box.
Application to associate — Displays the application being associated. This value is carried
forward from the previous page.
Schema type — Displays the application schema type. This value is carried forward from the
previous page.
Oracle service/alias — Specifies the Oracle Net Service name as defined by your database
administrator. This value is carried forward from the plant structure definition and appears only
if using Oracle.
Database node — Displays the Node Name of the server on which the SQL Server database
resides. This option appears only if SQL Server is selected as the database type.
Database name — Displays the name of the SQL Server database in which the plant will be
created. This option appears only if SQL Server is selected as the database type.
Oracle tablespace — Select the default Oracle tablespace name for your plant
database. These tablespaces were defined when the database administrator created the
default database instance using Oracle Database Assistant. This option appears only if Oracle
is selected as the database type.
Oracle temp tablespace — Select the default Oracle temporary tablespace name for your plant
database. If this list is empty, contact your database administrator. This option appears only if
Oracle is selected as the database type on the previous page.

▪ We recommend that you do not use SYSTEM for the default tablespace because Oracle
uses this tablespace for its own use.
▪ If you create new Oracle tablespaces or SQL Server databases after starting this wizard,
you must refresh the tablespace list by clicking Back and then clicking Next to return to this
page before the new information will display in the appropriate lists.
Database username — Type the user name you want to use for the application data dictionary
user. This value, which must be unique in the database, defaults to the plant name that you
specified earlier, with the letters 'eld' appended. For more information about default database
user names, see Understanding Default Database User Names.
Database password — Type the password for the application data dictionary user. We
recommend using the application data dictionary user name defined in the field above as this
password.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 787

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Confirm password — Re-type the password for the database user.

▪ The software sets the related password defaults for the above user name automatically to
<default user name> for Oracle and to <default user name> + '1' for SQL Server. In the
case of SQL Server 2014 running on Windows Server 2012, if you are using SQL Server
authentication, you can specify that SQL Server is to use the password validation rules that
are used by Windows Server 2012.
▪ Database usernames cannot start with a numeric digit and cannot contain any of the
following characters: ~ ` ! % ^ & * ( ) - + = { } [ ] \ / ; : ‘ " < > , . ? |
▪ Oracle database user names are limited to 30 characters. Because plant names can be up
to 64 characters long, the software truncates the characters to the maximum allowed by
Oracle in creating the default database user names.
▪ Oracle database passwords cannot contain the characters: " ' @
▪ SQL Server database passwords cannot contain the character: '

Summary (Load Offsite Plant Structure Wizard)

Displays the settings you defined for loading your plant structure. Review these settings
carefully. If you are satisfied with the settings, click Finish. Otherwise, click Back to change
one or more of the settings.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 788

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Load Plant as Project Command (File Menu)

Opens the Load Plant as Project dialog box, which allows you to load a saved plant .zip file as
a project in the selected plant.
This command is enabled only if the plant is associated with Smart Electrical alone
and not with any other application and only after the Enable Projects command has been run
for the plant.

Load Plant as Project Dialog Box

This window allows you to select a source plant structure created from a Greenfield plant for
loading into your current plant as a new project.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 789

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Zip file of plant — Specify the path to the location of the plant structure you want to load.
Project name — The name of the new project, which comes from the name of the selected
source plant.
Project description — If a description of the selected source plant exists, it appears in this field
as the description of the new project.

Mapping
Allows you to map the target plant groups in your current plant to the source that is used as the
basis of the new project.

Mapped plant groups

Shows the relationship between the source and target plant groups.
Source — Displays all the plant groups in the hierarchy of the selected source for mapping with
the target plant groups.
Target — Displays the target plant groups that have been mapped to the sources.

Target plant groups

Shows the plant hierarchy for use in the mapping. To perform mapping, select a plant group at
a particular level and drag it to the Target column beside a suitable source plant group or select
a target and a source item and then click Map.
Include all parent plant groups of selected plant group when mapping —The state of this
check box affects the outcome when you click the Map command. When this check box is
cleared, the Map command maps the selected target item to the highlighted source item. When
it is selected, the Map command maps the selected target item and all its parent items in the
hierarchy to the appropriate source items. This option is only available if the plant group types
and number of levels in the target plant hierarchy match those in the source plant hierarchy.
Map — Maps the selected source and target plant groups.
Unmap — Removes the mapping between the source and target plant groups from the selected
row in the Mapped plant groups pane.
Map All — Maps all the source and target plant groups. This option is only available if the
source and target plant hierarchies are based on identical templates.
Show Unmapped / Show All — Toggles the list in the Mapped plant groups pane between
displaying only the rows that have unmapped source plant groups and displaying all the source
plant groups.
Locate Source — Opens a dialog box displaying the selected source plant group in its location
in the plant hierarchy.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 790

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Load Standalone Project Command (File Menu)

Opens the Load Standalone Project Wizard, which allows you to import a package containing
modified data into a host site or to import a package containing re-scoped host data into an
off-site plant.

Load Standalone Project Wizard

The Load Standalone Project wizard guides you through the required process to load into an
off-site plant a package containing re-scoped host data.

Source Path (Load Standalone Project Wizard)

This page allows you to specify the location of the plant structure files for the copied plant or
project.
All paths must use the Universal Naming Convention (UNC) format and cannot
exceed 255 characters.

Zip file of plant — Specify the path to the location of the plant structure you want to load.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 791

 Working with Off-Site Projects in Smart Electrical

Summary (Load Standalone Project Wizard)

Displays the settings you defined for loading your plant structure. Review these settings
carefully. If you are satisfied with the settings, click Finish. Otherwise, click Back to change
one or more of the settings.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 792

SECTION 30

Publishing Data for Interfaces

This section deals with publishing Smart Electrical data.

Publish Data from Smart Electrical (2018)

Follow these steps to publish data for Smart Instrumentation. If you want to publish electrical
equipment, follow the separate procedure Publish Equipment from (see "Publish Equipment
from Smart Electrical" on page 795)Smart Electrical.
1. Prepare the data for the documents to publish by doing one or both of the following:
▪ Create power-requiring cabinets or instruments by retrieving power elements from
Smart Instrumentation and running the tasks on the To Do List for the retrieved
data. For details, see Retrieve Data from the (see "Retrieve Data from the Smart
Instrumentation Interface" on page 857)Smart Instrumentation Interface (see "Retrieve
Data from the Smart Instrumentation Interface" on page 857).
▪ Create signals in Smart Electrical for items that you want to associate with control
systems in Smart Instrumentation. For details, see Working with Signals.
2. Register a report template for each item type for which you want to publish data. For
details, see Register a Report.
You can publish data for the following item types:
▪ Cabinets owned by Smart Instrumentation (the software identifies these using a
database flag).
▪ Instruments owned by Smart Instrumentation (the software identifies these using a
database flag).
▪ Equipment (instruments and cabinets); the software does not publish other item types
specified under Equipment. You can define your own document for publishing
equipment data or you can use the shipped report, Instruments and Cabinets.xlsm,
which is located in the folder where you install Smart Electrical Reference Data.
▪ Electrical equipment, with or without I/O signals. You can define your own document
for publishing equipment data or you can use the shipped report, IO Signals and
Equipment.xlsm, which is located in the folder where you install Smart Electrical
Reference Data.
▪ SignalRun. You can define your own document for publishing I/O signal data or you
can use the shipped report, IO Signal List.xlsm, which is located in the folder where
you install Smart Electrical Reference Data. You can apply a filter to limit the scope of
the signals to include, for example, only certain plant group types or certain I/O types.

▪ When publishing data for item type Equipment, do not filter for cabinets or
instruments. You can however, define a filter that limits the scope of the plant group
type or the data subset.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 793

 Publishing Data for Interfaces

▪ Select an existing filter to define the scope of the data to publish. If you require, you
can register the same report template several times with different filters; however, each
registered report must have a unique name. (For details of how to create or modify a
filter, see Filter Manager Online Help.)
▪ You must select the Enable document for publishing check box to ensure that the
software includes the data from the report in the generated .xml file when you publish
from Smart Electrical.
3. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Documents > Registered Reports.
Before publishing a document, you can specify its title and description by doing the
following:
a. Select the document

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 794

 Publishing Data for Interfaces

b. Enter values in the Properties window as shown:

These values will appear in the published .xml file.

4. Select one or more of the reports for which you have enabled publishing and click
SmartPlant > Publish.
You can also right-click the document, and then click Publish.
5. If you are working in File mode, on the Publish to File dialog box, specify the folder in
which to save the generated .xml files by typing the path in the Folder to save XML files
box and if you require, change the default data file and meta file names.

Publish Equipment from Smart Electrical

Follow these steps to publish equipment with or without signals for Smart Instrumentation.
1. Select an item of equipment such as a motor or heater, and if required, add an I/O signal to
it.
2. In the Properties window, display the Allow Publish Flag property and set its value to
True.

Click the Alphabetic toolbar button to display the properties alphabetically; the
Allow Publish Flag property appears at the top of the list.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 795

 Publishing Data for Interfaces

3. Assign the equipment to a circuit and set the value of the Allow Publish Flag property of
the circuit to True.
4. Register a report for publishing as follows:
5. Click Actions > Register Report.
6. On the Register Report Common Properties dialog box, beside Report template, click
and select IO Signals and Equipment.

7. Beside Filter, click and select Filters for Reports > EquipmentToPublish.
The EquipmentToPublish filter comes shipped with the software.
8. Type a name in the Document name field.
9. Ensure that the Enable document for publishing check box is selected.
10. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Documents > Registered Reports.
11. Right-click the document that you created and on the shortcut menu, click Open.
12. In the Registered Reports folder, right-click the document again, and on the shortcut menu,
click Document Properties.
13. On the Document Properties dialog box Revisions tab, click New.
14. On the SmartPlant Foundation Revise dialog box, beside Revision Scheme, select a value
from the list.
15. Under Revise in Tool, beside Major, select the value Next from the list.
16. Click OK to implement the revision.
17. Close the Revise and Document Properties dialog boxes.
Before publishing a document, you can specify its title and description by doing the
following:
a. Select the document

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 796

 Publishing Data for Interfaces

b. Enter values in the Properties window as shown:

These values will appear in the published .xml file.

18. Click SmartPlant > Publish.
19. On the Publish dialog box, select one or more of the reports for which you have enabled
publishing, and click OK.
You can also right-click the document, and then click Publish.
20. If you are working in File mode, on the Publish to File dialog box, specify the folder in
which to save the generated .xml files by typing the path in the Folder to save XML files
box and if you require, change the default data file and meta file names.
If you publish an equipment item without a signal, you can create a signal (as an
Electrical Tag) and associate it in Smart Instrumentation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 797

SECTION 31

Working with Integration

The integration functionality standardizes and improves the communication among the various
authoring tools you use in the course of designing, constructing, and operating a plant. Smart
integration manages data exchange among these authoring tools, which enables sharing and
re-use of plant information throughout the plant life-cycle. SmartPlant Foundation acts as a
repository for data and a medium through which information is shared among other tools, such
as Smart Instrumentation, Smart P&ID, and Smart 3D.
Most of the commands that provide access to Smart integration functionality exist in the
common user interface available on the SmartPlant menu in Smart Engineering Manager,
Smart Instrumentation, Smart Electrical, Smart P&ID, and Drawing Manager.
The following graphic displays what Smart Electrical publishes and retrieves and shows the flow
of data and the different types of data.

SmartPlant Electrical interacts with SmartPlant Foundation by correlating items between the
plant database and the SmartPlant Foundation database, retrieving documents such as
Electrical Power Elements, Electrical Signal List, Cable Schedule reports, and P&IDs, from
SmartPlant Foundation. Also, SmartPlant Electrical creates a set of tasks in the To Do List that
you can run to update the plant database. In SmartPlant Electrical, you can also use the
commands on the SmartPlant menu to publish documents and retrieve data, access
SmartPlant Foundation to browse data, and subscribe to change notifications and compare
documents.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 798

 Working with Integration

You can only use the SmartPlant menu commands after your plant is registered. For
more information, see Smart Engineering Manager Help.

Registering Tools
Before you can publish and retrieve documents from any of the other authoring tools, such as
Smart P&ID or Smart Instrumentation, you must register each plant in Smart Electrical with a
SmartPlant Foundation database. The connection allows Smart Electrical to use the commands
on the SmartPlant menu. A Smart Engineering Manager administrator typically registers a
plant.
The software maps a plant and all its projects to a single SmartPlant Foundation URL, which
points to one, and only one, SmartPlant Foundation plant database and its projects. When you
use the Register command in any of the authoring tools, you are registering an authoring tool
plant with a SmartPlant Foundation URL and plant that you specify.
The system administrator must register each plant in the authoring tool once; this action takes
place in Smart Engineering Manager. After the plant is registered, you can publish and retrieve
documents.

Tool Requirements for Integrating Smart Electrical

This topic describes rules and settings that allow Smart Electrical data to be shared correctly
with Smart 3D, Smart Instrumentation and Smart P&ID, and the other tools that are part of an
integrated environment. Other tools that are not listed here have no known Smart Electrical /
Smart integration issues.

Integration with Smart Instrumentation

In order to have a successful data exchange between Smart Electrical and Smart
Instrumentation, make sure that:
▪ Both Smart Electrical and Smart Instrumentation have the same plant hierarchy structure
▪ In Smart Instrumentation, instruments and I/O signals are defined on the lowest plant
hierarchy level
▪ In Smart Instrumentation, cabinets are defined on the highest plant hierarchy level
▪ In Smart Electrical, you defined a registered report for both the I/O lists and for Instruments
requiring power supply.
You must also ensure that the following Smart Electrical select lists and Smart Instrumentation
supporting tables contain identical values:
▪ System I/0 type
▪ Rated Voltage
▪ Power Supply AC/DC Flag
▪ Number of Phases
▪ Operating Mode
▪ Process Function
▪ Frequency

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 799

 Working with Integration

Furthermore, in Smart Electrical Options Manager, in the General Settings window, you need
to make the following changes:
▪ For the Smart Instrumentation Default Domain setting, specify the name of a Smart
Instrumentation domain which you want to set as a source domain for retrieving detailed
wiring data to be included in schematics.
▪ If you want to retrieve enhanced reports to be included in schematics, select Yes for the
setting Include Enhanced Reports in Schematics.
In the two tools, the units of measure of certain properties might be defined using a different
precision accuracy. For example, 1.2 kW (one-digit accuracy of precision) in Smart Electrical
corresponds to 1.23 kW (two-digit accuracy of precision) in Smart Instrumentation. This may
result in inconsistencies and could be interpreted as an update when retrieving data.
These properties are:
▪ Rated Active Power
▪ Rated Reactive Power
▪ Rated Apparent Power
▪ Full Load Current
▪ Operating Mode Coincidence Factors (X, Y, Z, ZZ)
▪ Starting Current

Integration with Smart 3D

In order to have a successful data exchange between Smart Electrical and Smart 3D, make sure
that Smart Electrical reference cables used in the project match the cables Smart 3D has in its
Catalog. Smart 3D identifies the type of the retrieved cable by looking at the reference cable
name in the Catalog; if this cable in the Catalog does not exist, the retrieved cable is identified
as an unknown cable for cable routing purposes.

▪ Smart Electrical ships a sample report named Reference Data Cables Interface to Smart
3D, which you can use as a source to be transferred to Smart 3D, so that Smart 3D users
can create their Catalog using the report data.
▪ If cables that originated in Smart Electrical were subsequently deleted in Smart 3D and then
published back from Smart 3D, Smart Electrical does not generate Delete tasks for those
cables.
Make sure that the following select lists in Smart Electrical match the content of the related
select lists in Smart 3D:
▪ Routing status
▪ Segregation level
Smart Electrical also publishes to Smart 3D the relations to the cable side 1 and side 2. If
Smart 3D does not contain the relations, Smart 3D cannot perform cable routing.
This means that:
▪ In Smart Electrical, the cables must have their side 1 and side 2 associated before
publishing.
▪ In Smart 3D, users must make sure that each object referenced in the cable sides has a
corresponding object in the Smart 3D data model.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 800

 Working with Integration

Integration with Smart P&ID

Smart Electrical can retrieve items of electrical equipment that were published from Smart
P&ID. Electrical equipment in Smart P&ID constitutes electrical motors and heaters only.
Smart Electrical retrieves any items of process equipment that are associated with the electrical
equipment: for example, if a motor is associated with a pump in Smart P&ID, the pump is
retrieved along with the motor in Smart Electrical. Likewise, if the software retrieves a heater
that is associated with a vessel, then that vessel is also retrieved. The software also supports
retrieval of multiple electrical equipment associations to a single item of process equipment, for
example, where several heaters are used to heat up one vessel. Note that Smart Electrical
does not retrieve items of process equipment that are not associated with electrical items.
When Smart P&ID and Smart Electrical are both enabled for a plant, they are
both enabled for all projects of that plant. If a project requires only one of these applications,
create separate plants for each application, and then enable Smart P&ID for one plant and
Smart Electrical for the other.
When retrieving an item of mechanical equipment associated with a motor from
Smart P&ID, the numerical value and units of measure of the Power Driver Rated property as
set in Smart P&ID must exactly match an existing value of the Motor Rated Power property in
Smart Electrical for the task to run successfully. In addition, if you run the Smart Electrical
command to copy the value of the process equipment Absorbed Power property to the motor
Brake Power property, the software only validates values of the brake power that do not exceed
the motor rated power, as determined by the standard Smart Electrical rule.

Using Projects in an Integrated Environment

When working in an integrated environment with a plant that has projects, you need to make the
following changes in Smart Electrical Options Manager, in the General Settings window:
▪ For the Allow Full Access to As-Built setting, select No. To use such a plant in an
integrated environment, you must ensure that it is not possible to change As-Built data in
As-Built itself. After you select No for this setting, the software can only update As-Built
when you merge project data with As-Built.
▪ For the As-Built Claim Mode setting, select Exclusive. Smart integration does not support
having the same item claimed for different projects.

Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client

▪ Click SmartPlant > Browser.

▪ This command is available only if the active plant has been registered. For more
information, see Smart Engineering Manager Help.
▪ From the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client, you can perform a number of tasks, such as
publishing or retrieving documents, comparing documents, subscribing to document
changes, and so forth. Many of these tasks can be performed from the authoring tools,
such as Smart Instrumentation or Smart P&ID, but the Web Client provides unique access
to other features such as the Web Client To Do List and search capabilities.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 801

 Working with Integration

Schema Mapping
This section describes the assumptions, rules, and limitations imposed by the Smart Enterprise
Adapter for Smart Electrical on schema mapping.
This section describes the structure of the tool schema and how it is used by the authoring tool
Smart Enterprise Adapter in support of the publish and retrieve operations. This topic does not
provide a list of the classes, properties, or enumerated lists (select lists) that are mapped by the
delivered Smart Electrical tool schema. You can obtain this information by viewing the tool
schema directly. This set of topics does not describe the user interface of the Schema Editor.
Before modifying the mapping for Smart Electrical, you must understand:
▪ The Smart Electrical software
▪ The Smart Electrical data model
▪ The delivered mapping for Smart Electrical
▪ How the delivered mapping for Smart Electrical works
▪ SmartPlant schema modeling
▪ The Schema Editor
▪ The To Do List feature of Smart Electrical
In the topics that describe schema mapping, the following terms are frequently referenced:
▪ Tool schema — Defines the Smart Electrical objects to be published or retrieved and how
they map to objects in the SmartPlant schema. The tool schema implements mapping
between the objects in the Smart Electrical data model and the objects in the SmartPlant
schema. Users who customize either the Smart Electrical data model or the SmartPlant
schema may also need to customize the mapping contained in the tool schema.
▪ SmartPlant schema — Defines the Smart integration data model.
▪ Adapter — The Smart Electrical code module that supports the Smart integration
commands.
When you publish Smart Electrical data, the Smart Enterprise Adapter extracts data from the
Smart Electrical database and converts it into a set of objects and relationships that are
compatible with the SmartPlant schema. These objects and relationships are defined in an .xml
file, which is sent to SmartPlant Foundation for further processing. For Smart Electrical, the
name of this file is SPELMap.xml, and it is located in the Smart Electrical home folder.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 802

 Working with Integration

General Information About Schema Mapping

This topic provides general information about the mapping in Smart Electrical.

Smart Enterprise Adapter for Smart Electrical

Each authoring tool has an adapter that processes information during the publish and retrieve
operations. One of the adapter's functions is to map information between the SmartPlant
Foundation database and the particular authoring tool. The Smart Enterprise Adapter for Smart
Electrical is a component that belongs to Smart Electrical and requires installation of Smart
Electrical Version 2018 on Oracle 12c, or SQL Server 2014 or SQL Server 2016. Any
communication between SmartPlant Foundation and Smart Electrical is performed via this
adapter, which sends information to SmartPlant Foundation through the Common UI where the
user is shown the appropriate user interface and data available.
The adapter does not handle tool schema files directly but uses them indirectly. The tool
schema files are used to define the retrieve map file, which is then used by the adapter. Direct
use of the schema files would mean that the adapter accessed them directly to do its
work. Both retrieve and publish operations only work through map files.

Mapping Configuration
The Smart Enterprise Adapter for Smart Electrical uses the tool schema map file and the
Schema Editor, delivered with the SmartPlant Schema Component, to perform mapping
between the Smart Electrical object structure and the structure of objects in the SmartPlant
schema. The map file is installed with Smart Electrical Setup. This file includes all objects that
are mapped for SmartPlant (not all objects that exist in Smart Electrical, not all properties, only
those that can be of any relevance for other applications that use SmartPlant ). In accordance
with the Smart Electrical data model, the Schema Editor knows what Smart Electrical object to
put a property on.

Tool Schema Location

The name of the Smart Electrical tool schema file is SPELMap.xml. Smart Electrical uses this
file for all types of published and retrieved documents. This file must exist in the installation
home folder of Smart Electrical. The SPELMap.xml should be treated as an installation
file. Although, using the Schema Editor, it is possible to change the content of the map file, the
file name must remain SPELMap.xml.

Mapping Rules and Limitations

Schema mapping in Smart Electrical has some important rules and limitations.

Rules for Mapping Documents and SmartPlant Foundation Revisions

In Smart Electrical, a document object has various properties but only the document type
property is mapped to a document category enumeration list in the SmartPlant schema. A list of
Smart Electrical documents that can be published and retrieved is defined in the SmartPlant
schema and can be viewed in the Schema Editor.
Also, Smart Enterprise Adapter for Smart Electrical supports mapping of SmartPlant Foundation
revisions. Whenever a Smart Electrical user creates a new revision, the SmartPlant Client calls
a common dialog box in which the user defines the revision schema and the revision number,

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 803

 Working with Integration

this number is saved in SmartPlant Foundation and SmartPlant Foundation returns this number
to Smart Electrical via the adapter.

Rules for Property Naming

The names of the properties in the Smart Electrical tool schema must exactly match the names
of the properties in the Smart Electrical data model, including the case.

Limitations of the SmartPlant Schema

The retrieve map is updated directly from the contents defined in the SmartPlant schema;
therefore, the following restriction on the SmartPlant schema exists: in rare cases, if an entry is
removed from the SmartPlant schema, you may need to edit the retrieve map file to remove the
deleted entry. You should use the Schema Editor delivered with the SmartPlant Schema
Component for this purpose.

Map File Location and Definition Restrictions

By default, the SPELMap.xml is installed in the Smart Electrical home folder. You can change
the map file location in the SmartPlant resource path box in the Locations window of the
Options Manager utility.
Although, using the Schema Editor, it is possible to change the content of the map file, the file
name must remain SPELMap.xml.

Equipment Inheritance Mapping Restrictions

Currently, Smart Electrical equipment inheritance is not implemented in the tool schema. This
is a subject of future development. You have to map properties of equipment manually. Since
there is no equipment inheritance, mapping is only performed on the level of a concrete
(tangible) object class. To define relationships between various object classes, interfaces in the
tool schema are used. Interfaces in the tool schema do not contain properties.

Objects and Relationships

This topic describes objects and object relationships that are relevant to the Smart Electrical tool
schema. Relationship descriptions reference names shown in a diagram that represents the
data model of the Smart Electrical tool schema. For details, see Tool Schema Data Model
Diagram (on page 809).

MapClass
The MapClass object corresponds to the IMapClassDef interface in the Tool Schema Data
Model diagram. In general, there is a MapClass object in the tool schema for each Smart
Electrical class (ItemType) that needs to be published or retrieved. MapClass is referred to as
SPMapClassDef in the Schema Editor user interface. The properties and relationships for a
MapClass object can be viewed in the Edit Map Class Definition dialog box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 804

 Working with Integration

General
Property Description

UID The property value is required, must be unique, with

all characters in upper case. UID of a map class
must be SPEL_<CLASSNAME>, where CLASSNAME
is the name of a corresponding item type in the Smart
Electrical data model. For example, the UID of the
Motor class must be SPEL_MOTOR.

Name The property value is required. This property

designates the internal name of the Smart Electrical
item type, exactly as defined in the Data Dictionary.

Tool Schema Relationships

Relationship Description

Map Properties The map properties associated with the

MapClass object must be defined and related to
the MapClass object. The relationship name in
the diagram is MapClassMapProperties

Mapping Relationships
Relationship Description

Publish to SmartPlant This relationship must be set to a class

Class in the SmartPlant schema if this class is
to be published. When this relationship
is set, an instance of the target class is
published for each instance of the
source class in the document being
published. The relationship name in
the diagram is MapClassToClass.

Retrieve from SmartPlant The list of interfaces from which

interface properties are to be retrieved must be
set if this class is to be used for
retrieval. The relationship name in the
diagram is ClassToMapClass.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 805

 Working with Integration

MapProperty
The MapProperty object corresponds to the IMapPropertyDef interface in the Tool Schema Data
Model diagram. In general, there is a MapProperty object in the tool schema for each Smart
Electrical property that needs to be published or retrieved. The properties and relationships for
a MapProperty object can be viewed in the Edit Map Property Definition dialog box.

General
Property Description

UID The property value is required, must be unique, with all characters in
upper case. UID of a map property must be
SPEL_<CLASSNAME>_<PROPERTYNAME>. For example, UID of
Motor.ItemTag property must be SPEL_MOTOR_ITEMTAG.

Name The property value is required. This property designates the internal
name of the Smart Electrical attribute, as defined in the Data
Dictionary.

Process Process criteria are used when retrieving properties of Smart Electrical
Criteria objects in the following case:
1. In Smart Electrical, there is an object mapped to an object in the
SmartPlant schema, for example SPEL_A to SmartPlant_A.
2. Not all of the Smart Electrical object properties are mapped to the
properties of the mapped object in the SmartPlant schema.
For example, SPEL_A_Property_A is mapped to
SmartPlant_A_Property_A but SPEL_A_Property_B is not
mapped in the SmartPlant_A object because SmartPlant_A does
not contain the corresponding property SmartPlant_A_Property_B.
3. The corresponding property is available in another SmartPlant
schema object, for example, SmartPlant_AA. To map the
SPEL_A_Property_B, a relationship must exist between the
SmartPlant_A and SmartPlant_AA objects.
A relationship is designated by a text string that corresponds to the
process criteria setting of the SPEL_A_Property_B property in Smart
Electrical. If there are intermediate objects between the mapped
SmartPlant schema object and the object in the SmartPlant schema
that has the required property, the process criteria of the property in
Smart Electrical must contain all relationship definitions of SmartPlant
schema objects, separated by a comma delimiter.

Tool Schema Relationships

Relationship Description

Exposed by Map Every MapProperty object must be related to a

Classes MapClass object. The relationship name in the
diagram is MapClassMapProperties.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 806

 Working with Integration

Scoped by Enumeration If the data type of the property is enumerated, the

MapProperty object must be related to a MapEnumList
object. If the data type of the property is UoM, the
MapProperty must be related to a MapUoMList
object. Otherwise, this relationship is not
needed. The relationship name in the diagram is
MapPropertyMapEnumList.

Mapping Relationships
Relationship Description

Map Property to This relationship defines the property in the SmartPlant

Property schema to which this tool property is to be
published. If this relationship is not defined, the
property will not be published. The relationship name
in the diagram is MapPropertyToProperty.

Property to Map This relationship defines the property in the SmartPlant

Property schema from which this tool property is to be
retrieved. If this relationship is not defined, the
property will not be retrieved. The relationship name in
the diagram is PropertyToMapProperty.

MapEnumList
The MapEnumList object corresponds to the IMapEnumListDef interface in the Tool Schema
Data Model diagram. In general, there is a MapEnumList object in the tool schema for each
Smart Electrical enumerated list associated with a property that needs to be published or
retrieved. The properties and relationships for a MapEnumList object can be viewed in the Edit
Map Enumerated List Definition dialog box.

General
Property Description

UID The property value is required, must be unique,

characters are not case-sensitive. UID of an
enumerated list must be
SPEL_<EnumListName>. For example, UID of the
YesNo enum list must be SPEL_YesNo.

Name The value of this property is the name of the Smart

Electrical enum list.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 807

 Working with Integration

Tool Schema Relationships

Relationship Description

Scoped Map A MapEnumList object must be related to

Properties the MapProperty objects that it
scopes. The relationship name in the
diagram is MapPropertyMapEnumList.

Contains A MapEnumList object can contain a

variable number of MapEnum objects. The
relationship name in the diagram is
MapEnumListMapEnum.

Mapping Relationships
Relationship Description

Maps To To support the publish operation, a MapEnumList

object should be related to the corresponding
enum list in the SmartPlant schema by means of
the Maps To relationship. The relationship name
in the diagram is MapEnumListToEnumList.

Maps From To support the retrieve operation, a MapEnumList

object should be related to the corresponding
enum list in the SmartPlant schema by means of
the Mapped From relationship. The relationship
name in the diagram is
EnumListToMapEnumList.

MapEnum
The MapEnum object corresponds to the IMapEnumDef interface in the Tool Schema Data
Model diagram. In general, there is a MapEnum object in the tool schema for each Smart
Electrical enumerated list entry that needs to be mapped. The properties and relationships for a
MapEnum object can be viewed in the Edit Map Enumerated List Definition dialog box (the
same dialog box is used for MapEnumList objects.)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 808

 Working with Integration

General
Property Description

UID The property value must be unique. UID of an

enumerated list entry must be
SPEL_<EnumListName>_<CodelistIndex>, where
CodelistIndex is the value of the index of the
corresponding select list entry in the Smart Electrical
data model. Values of codelist index are stored in the
Data Dictionary table CODELISTS. For example, UID
of the Yes entry of the YesNo enum list must be
SPEL_YesNo_1.

Name The value of this property is a text setting of the Smart

Electrical enum list entry.

Tool Schema Relationships

Relationship Description

Contained In Every MapEnum object must be related to a

MapEnumList object. The relationship name in
the diagram is MapEnumListMapEnum.

Mapping Relationships
Relationship Description

Maps To This relationship defines the SmartPlant schema

enum value to which this Smart Electrical enum
value is to be published. If this relationship is
not defined, the enum value will not be
published. The relationship name in the
diagram is MapEnumToEnum.

Maps From This relationship defines the Smart Electrical

enum value to which the SmartPlant schema
enum value is to be retrieved. If this relationship
is not defined, the enum value will not be
retrieved. The relationship name in the diagram
is EnumToMapEnum.

Tool Schema Data Model Diagram

The diagram below shows a representation of the objects and relationships that are relevant to
the Smart Electrical tool schema. The rectangles on the left side of the diagram represent
objects within the tool schema. The rectangles on the right represent objects within the
SmartPlant schema. The relationships that connect objects on the left with objects on the right

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 809

 Working with Integration

are the mapping relationships. The map file contains both the tool schema objects and the
mapping relationships.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 810

 Working with Integration

Smart Electrical Mapping Examples

The sections that follow provide mapping examples for Smart Electrical. For more information
and mapping examples, see the SmartPlant Mapping User's Guide.

Example: Creating and Mapping a String Property for Smart

Electrical
The following example demonstrates how to perform the following tasks:
▪ create a new system code property for multiple plant items in Smart Electrical.
▪ extend the SmartPlant schema to create the custom system code property and create
publish mapping relationships so that Smart Electrical can publish the property so that it can
be retrieved by other tools.
The Smart Electrical database already contains a property named SystemCode, so
you cannot create another property with the same name. Therefore, in this example, you will
create a property in Smart Electrical called SystemCode1 that will map to the SystemCode
property in the SmartPlant schema.

Before You Extend the Smart Electrical Database

1. Make a backup of the SmartPlant Foundation site database and any vaults for the site.
2. Make a backup of the Smart Electrical database and the SPELMap.xml file located in the
SmartPlant resources directory.

Create the New SystemCode1 Property in Data Dictionary Manager

1. Click Start > All Programs > Smart Engineering Manager > Data Dictionary Manager.
2. Connect to the appropriate plant server for Smart Electrical.
3. In the Database Tables list, select Plant Item.

4. On the toolbar, click Add Property .

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 811

 Working with Integration

5. In the Add Property dialog box, define information for the System Code property, being
sure to select String in the Data Type list. Click OK.

6. Click File > Save to save your changes in Data Dictionary Manager.
7. Click File > Exit.

Launch Schema Editor and Load the Smart Electrical Tool Map Schema
The ICustomInterface must be realized by the class definitions that represent objects in this
authoring tool that will be publishing or retrieving the custom property. If you have not configured
ICustomInterface, see Creating a New Interface for Mapping Examples in the SmartPlant
Mapping User's Guide for more information.
1. In the Desktop Client, set your scope for the applicable plant, and then find the CMF file.
2. Right-click the CMF file, and then click Edit > Check Out.
3. Click OK in the Check Out dialog box.
4. In the New Items window, right-click the new version of the CMF file, and select Launch
Schema Editor.
5. On the Set Active Configurations dialog box, select the schema version that you want to
view.
6. Click OK to set the configuration.

▪ For more options, click Advanced on the Set Active Configuration dialog box.
▪ By default, changes to the SmartPlant Schema are written to all versions managed by
the CMF file. You can choose to write changes to only selected versions; however, that
is not recommended.
▪ If you choose to view one version of the schema (Specify configurations to display
window) but write changes to all versions (Set Configurations for new objects

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 812

 Working with Integration

window), an information window appears when you click OK, indicating that you will be
prompted with every change to the schema to confirm that you want to write the
changes to all versions. Click OK to continue.
The CMF file must be checked in to SmartPlant Foundation before users can
publish from an authoring tool. In the Schema Editor, click File > SmartPlant > Edit
Engineering Tool Options, and select Smart Electrical in the list of authoring tools to load
the Smart Electrical tool map schema.
7. Under Startup options, select the Load map schema and Connect to application schema
check boxes, and click OK.
8. In each row in the Synchronize dialog box, the values in the tool database and tool map
schema columns indicate actions to correct inconsistencies between the tool metadata and
tool map schema. Select the appropriate action in each row, and then click OK.

▪ Each row represents a discrepancy between the tool database and the tool map
schema.
▪ Default actions are blue when the Synchronize dialog box appears. However, if you
select a different option, it will become blue instead.
▪ In many cases, only one operation is supported to synchronize the tool database and
tool map schema. For example, if a new property was found in the database, the
metadata adapter can add the property to the tool map schema, but it cannot remove
the property from the tool database.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 813

 Working with Integration

9. In the Map Environment, expand Smart Electrical > Loaded Map Schemas > Smart
Electrical Tool Schema.
10. Expand Map Classes, and right-click Motor.
11. On the shortcut menu, select Edit Motor.
12. In the Edit Map Class Definition dialog box, select the Publish tab.

13. Click New Property Definition on the toolbar above the Unmapped SmartPlant
properties section on the right side of the dialog box.
14. In the New Property Definition dialog box, define the new SmartPlant schema
SystemCode property.

▪ In the Exposed by interface definitions dialog box, click Browse, and select
ICustomInterface as the interface definition that exposes this property.
▪ In the Scoped by property type box, select string.
15. Click OK.
16. Under Unmapped application properties, select SystemCode1.
17. Under Unmapped SmartPlant properties, select SystemCode.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 814

 Working with Integration

18. On the toolbar, click Map .

19. Click OK.

Save the Tool Map Schema and SmartPlant Schema Changes

▪ Click File > Save All Modified Files to save the SmartPlant schema changes (CMF file)
and the tool map schema.

▪ When you close the Schema Editor, the software prompts you to save your connection
information, user interface options, and loaded tool map schemas to a session file. Click
Yes in the message box to save the session file so that you can use it to return to this
working environment. However, you should not open a session file after launching the CMF
file from the Desktop Client.
▪ If you save changes to the CMF file or a tool map schema but did not validate the changes
before exiting, the software displays an information message to remind you that the file
contains changes that have not been validated. Click OK to dismiss the message.
▪ If you make changes to the SmartPlant schema, you must load the changes into the
SmartPlant Foundation database.
▪ Additionally, if you made changes to the SmartPlant schema, you should regenerate the
component schemas for the site before testing any publish or retrieve mapping
relationships. For more information, see the SmartPlant Schema Editor User's Guide.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 815

 Working with Integration

Example: Creating and Mapping a Complex Property for Smart

Electrical
The following example demonstrates how to create a custom select list in the Smart Electrical
database and associate it with a new EngSystem property available to multiple plant items. It
also illustrates how to add that same custom enumerated list and property to the SmartPlant
schema and how to create publish mapping so that the property can be published from Smart
Electrical.

Before You Extend the Smart Electrical Database

1. Make a backup of the SmartPlant Foundation site database and any vaults for the site.
2. Make a backup of the Smart Electrical database and the SPELMap.xml file located in the
SmartPlant resources directory.

Create the New Engineering System Property in Data Dictionary Manager

1. Click Start > All Programs > Intergraph Smart Engineering Manager > Data Dictionary
Manager.
2. Connect to the appropriate plant server for Smart Electrical.
3. Click Select List on the left side of the Data Dictionary Manager window.
4. In the first empty row in the Select List table, type EngSys as the name.
5. Select None from the Dependent List.
6. Click Select Entry on the left side of the Data Dictionary Manager window.
7. Under Selected List, select EngSys.
8. In the first empty row, create a new entry with a value of AA and a short value of Steam
Gen & Fired Htr, Water/Steam Side.

9. Click Add Row, and enter the following values, creating a new row for each:

Value Short Value

BA Steam Generator and Fired Heater, Air/Gas Side

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 816

 Working with Integration

Value Short Value

CA Ammonia/Urea

DC Crude Oil Production

EA Auxiliary AC Power Systems

10. Click Edit > Add Property .

11. In the Add Property dialog box, create a new property with the following information:

Property Value

Name EngSystem

Display Name Engineering System

Data Type Select List

Select List EngSys

Default Value None

Category Process

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 817

 Working with Integration

12. Click OK.

13. Click File > Save.
14. Click File > Exit.

Launch Schema Editor and Synchronize the Tool Map Schema

The ICustomInterface must be realized by the class definitions that represent objects in this
authoring tool that will be publishing or retrieving the custom property. If you have not configured
ICustomInterface, see Creating a New Interface for Mapping Examples in the SmartPlant
Mapping User's Guide for more information.
1. In the Desktop Client, set your scope for the applicable plant, and then find the CMF file.
2. Right-click the CMF file, and then click Edit > Check Out.
3. Click OK in the Check Out dialog box.
4. In the New Items window, right-click the new version of the CMF file, and select Launch
Schema Editor.
5. On the Set Active Configurations dialog box, select the schema version that you want to
view.
6. Click OK to set the configuration.

▪ For more options, click Advanced on the Set Active Configuration dialog box.
▪ By default, changes to the SmartPlant Schema are written to all versions managed by
the CMF file. You can choose to write changes to only selected versions; however, that
is not recommended.
▪ If you choose to view one version of the schema (Specify configurations to display
window) but write changes to all versions (Set Configurations for new objects
window), an information window appears when you click OK, indicating that you will be

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 818

 Working with Integration

prompted with every change to the schema to confirm that you want to write the
changes to all versions. Click OK to continue.
The CMF file must be checked in to SmartPlant Foundation before users can
publish from an authoring tool. In the Schema Editor, click File > SmartPlant > Edit
Engineering Tool Options, and select Smart Electrical in the list of authoring tools to load
the Smart Electrical tool map schema.
7. Under Startup options, select the Load map schema and Connect to application schema
check boxes, and click OK.
8. In each row in the Synchronize dialog box, the values in the tool database and tool map
schema columns indicate actions to correct inconsistencies between the tool metadata and
tool map schema. Select the appropriate action in each row, and then click OK.

▪ Each row represents a discrepancy between the tool database and the tool map
schema.
▪ Default actions are blue when the Synchronize dialog box appears. However, if you
select a different option, it will become blue instead.
▪ In many cases, only one operation is supported to synchronize the tool database and
tool map schema. For example, if a new property was found in the database, the
metadata adapter can add the property to the tool map schema, but it cannot remove
the property from the tool database.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 819

 Working with Integration

Add the New Enumerated List to the SmartPlant Schema and Map
1. In the Map Environment, expand Smart P&ID > Loaded Map Schemas > Smart P&ID
Tool Schema.
2. Expand Map Enumerated Lists, and right-click EngSys.
3. On the shortcut menu, select Edit EngSys.
4. In the Edit Map Enumerated List Definition dialog box, select the Advanced tab.
5. At the bottom of the dialog box, click New SmartPlant Enumerated List with Correlated
Entries.

This process creates an enumerated list in the SmartPlant schema with the same
name and values as the list in the tool map schema. Additionally, the software will
automatically map all the enumerations for publish. A dialog box will suggest that you can
map the enumeration for retrieve as well. Click Yes to create both publish and retrieve
mapping relationships, or No to create only publish mapping relationships.
6. Click OK in the Create Enumerated List and Entries dialog box.
Depending on your selections on the Set Active Configurations dialog box when
you launched the Schema Editor, you may be prompted to confirm that you want to create
the new list and enumerations in multiple versions of the schema.
7. In the Edit Map Enumerated List Definition dialog box, click OK.
8. In the Map Enumerated Lists node, right-click EngSys.
9. On the shortcut menu, select Edit EngSys.
10. In the Edit Map Enumerated List Definition dialog box, select the Publish tab.
11. Under SmartPlant in the upper right window, right-click EngSys.
12. On the shortcut menu, select Edit <UID>.
13. Click each entry, and under Overview, edit the number to match the values in the following
table:

Name/Short Description Number

AA 10111

BA 10112

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 820

 Working with Integration

Name/Short Description Number

CA 10113

DC 10114

EA 10115

14. Click OK.

The modification of the Number value of each enumeration is required for Smart 3D,
which will determine the actual value assigned to each enumeration. No other authoring tools
use this value.

Add the New Property to the SmartPlant Schema

1. In the Map Classes node, right-click Motor.
2. On the shortcut menu, select Edit SPEL_MOTOR.
3. Select the Publish tab.
4. Above Unmapped SmartPlant properties on the right side of the dialog box, click New
Property Definition on the toolbar.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 821

 Working with Integration

5. In the New Property Definition dialog box, define the new SmartPlant schema
EngineeringSys property.

▪ In the Exposed by interface definitions box, click Browse, and select

ICustomInterface as the interface definition that exposes this property.
▪ In the Scoped by property type box, select EngSys.
6. Click OK.
7. Under Unmapped application properties, select EngSystem.
8. Under Unmapped SmartPlant properties, select EngineeringSys.

9. On the toolbar, click Map .

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 822

 Working with Integration

Save the Tool Map Schema and SmartPlant Schema Changes

▪ Click File > Save All Modified Files to save the SmartPlant schema changes (CMF file)
and the tool map schema.

▪ When you close the Schema Editor, the software prompts you to save your connection
information, user interface options, and loaded tool map schemas to a session file. Click
Yes in the message box to save the session file so that you can use it to return to this
working environment. However, you should not open a session file after launching the CMF
file from the Desktop Client.
▪ If you save changes to the CMF file or a tool map schema but did not validate the changes
before exiting, the software displays an information message to remind you that the file
contains changes that have not been validated. Click OK to dismiss the message.
▪ If you make changes to the SmartPlant schema, you must load the changes into the
SmartPlant Foundation database.
▪ Additionally, if you made changes to the SmartPlant schema, you should regenerate the
component schemas for the site before testing any publish or retrieve mapping
relationships. For more information, see the SmartPlant Schema Editor User's Guide.

Publish Operation Description

Documents that Smart Electrical can publish are reports saved in Excel format. A Smart
Electrical report contains an item list responding to certain criteria. Items in the list can have
relationships with other types of items that are not listed in the report. A published document
contains both the report items and the related items. The underlying logic of defining
relationships between the items in the Smart Electrical data model is partly hard-coded in Smart
Enterprise Adapter.
When a Smart Electrical document is published, Smart Enterprise Adapter extracts data from
the Smart Electrical database and converts it into a set of objects and relationships that are
compatible with SmartPlant schema. These objects and relationships are written out to an .xml
file and are sent to the SmartPlant server for further processing. Smart Enterprise Adapter
depends on the data in the tool schema to support the publish operation. For each published
class in the tool schema, there is a code module in Smart Enterprise Adapter known as a Map
Object.
The Smart Enterprise Adapter for Smart Electrical contains these tasks:
▪ Query the Smart Electrical Database — The adapter queries the database to obtain the
collection of items to be published. The adapter retrieves all Smart Electrical items that are
included in the published document.
▪ Publishing scope — For all report and drawing types, the scope of the data to be
published is based on the content of the published drawing or report. The software
treats every plant item in the drawing or report as a document item and includes it in the
publishing scope.
▪ Create a Data Object — For each item to be published, the Map Object creates a data
object in the document container. Any item type that you want to publish must be mapped
from the tool map schema to the SmartPlant Schema. The class of this object is the
SmartPlant Class related to the MapClass via the MapClassToClass relationship.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 823

 Working with Integration

▪ Set the Property Values — The property values on the data object are set according to the
values on the Smart Electrical item. The list of properties to be published is defined by the
list of MapProperties related to the current MapClass.
▪ Publish Relationships — The Map Object defines the types of relationships that are to be
published for each data object it publishes.
When getting the scope for a document, if the setting Publishing scope of document content
is set to Document items and all related items, the adapter searches for the related items for
each item retrieved, according to the mapped relationships for this MapClass.
When setting the scope for publishing registered reports, the default setting in Options Manager
under Publishing scope of document content is Document items only. This means that all the
plant items that are included in the report will be published.
▪ If the MapClass of the item realizes interface IPBSItem, the relation with
PBSItemCollection is added.
▪ If the MapClass of the item realizes interface INonDrawingItem, the relation with
NonDrawingItemCollection is added.
For each item being published, all Same As values (properties SP_SameAsUID,
SP_SameAsUID1 through SP_SameAsUID9 having non-empty values) are published as
SameAs objects.

Retrieve Operation Description

When an external document is retrieved, Smart Enterprise Adapter compares the objects in that
document to the data in the Smart Electrical database and generates the following tasks in the
To Do List:
▪ Create Task — Generated when a new item needs to be created
▪ Update Task — Generated when an existing item needs to be modified
▪ Delete Task — Generated when an existing item needs to be deleted
Smart Enterprise Adapter depends on the data in the tool schema to support the retrieve
operation. When a document is retrieved, Smart Enterprise Adapter receives two containers of
data:
▪ Document Container — Includes all of the published objects and relationships for that
document
▪ Tombstone Container — Includes information about deleted objects and relationships

Smart Enterprise Adapter Actions in the Document Container

Smart Enterprise Adapter iterates over all of the objects in the Document Container and
performs the following actions:
▪ Use Primary Interface to Determine Class — The incoming object is tested for a primary
interface to determine which Map Class should handle the retrieval of that object.
▪ Generate Update Task — Smart Enterprise Adapter searches for an existing Smart
Electrical item to update. If an item is found, it generates an Update Task in the To Do
List. The properties of the incoming object are compared against the properties of the
existing item. When differences are found, property updates are added to the task. The list
of properties to be compared is defined by the properties in the tool schema.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 824

 Working with Integration

▪ Generate Create Task — If no item is found to update, a Create task is generated in the To
Do List. Property updates are added to the task for each of the incoming property values.
The list of properties to be added is defined by the properties in the tool schema.
▪ Generate Claim Task — If no item is found in As-Built, a Claim task is generated in the To
Do List. Property updates are added to the task for each of the incoming property
values. The list of properties to be added is defined by the properties in the tool schema.
▪ Retrieve Relationships — Depending on the class being retrieved, Smart Enterprise Adapter
defines the types of relationships that are to be retrieved for each data object.

Smart Enterprise Adapter Actions in the Tombstone Container

Smart Enterprise Adapter iterates over all of the objects in the Tombstone Container and
performs the following actions:
▪ Generate Delete Task — When Smart Enterprise Adapter encounters a delete instruction in
the tombstone container, Smart Enterprise Adapter searches for an existing item in the
Smart Electrical project that is correlated to the item that was deleted in the other
application. If such an item is found in the project and this item does not exist in As-Built, a
Delete Task is generated in the To Do List.
▪ Generate Claim Task and Delete Task — When Smart Enterprise Adapter encounters a
delete instruction in the tombstone container, Smart Enterprise Adapter searches for an
existing item in the Smart Electrical project that is correlated to the item that was deleted in
the other application. If such an item is not found in the project but this item exists in As-
Built, a Claim Task and Delete Task are generated in the To Do List.
▪ Generate Unclaim Task — When Smart Enterprise Adapter encounters an un-claim
instruction in the tombstone container, Smart Enterprise Adapter searches for an existing
item in the Smart Electrical As-Built that is correlated to the item that was unclaimed in the
other application. If such an item is found in As-Built, an Un-claim Task is generated in the
To Do List.
▪ Remove Delete Task — When Smart Enterprise Adapter encounters a resurrect instruction
in the tombstone container, Smart Enterprise Adapter searches for an existing Delete Task
that is correlated to the item for which the resurrect instruction was issued. If such a task is
found, this Delete Task is removed.

Revising Documents
The document revision process makes it possible to revise a document within the tool and in
SmartPlant Foundation and save the revision values to the tool database without re-publishing
the document.
When using SmartPlant Foundation revisions, depending on the revision scheme selected, you
can set minor as well as major revisions.
To select between the option of managing major and minor revisions from the tool or from
SmartPlant Foundation, edit the field for "Revision management software for publishing
documents" in Options Manager.
You can revise a document by using any previous revisions that are available from the last
published revision, skip revision numbers, change the revision scheme, and manually add a
revision number. Then have it validated against the revision Scheme. Be aware that the Scheme
does not support minor revisions for all types of revision schemes. For a revision scheme that

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 825

 Working with Integration

allows minor revisions, you can add a minor revision to a document that already has a major
revision defined or add a minor revision to a newly created major revision.
You edit the revision within the tool using the Revisions Tab, in Document Properties. The
format for minor and major revisions is determined by the selection made from the Revision
Scheme list, which is editable in the common UI, Revise dialog box. Once selected, both minor
and major revision are displayed together in the same properties field, as well as in the tool’s
database. The minor revision is incremented automatically as you make changes to the
document. Once you apply a new major revision, the numbering of the minor revision restarts.
The sequence of the combined major and minor revision must be unique throughout the entire
plant. When the software identifies a non-unique revision sequence, a message requesting to
replace the sequence is generated.
Example:
You revise a new document in the tool using the major revision scheme Rev A (A, B, C, D…)
and select to start with revision C, then SmartPlant Foundation reserves revision number C for
the document. In the tool you can still revise with any previous revision value, such as A or B.
However, if the document is published to SmartPlant Foundation with revision number C, you
are not allowed to go back to the previous revision numbers. The minor Revision Scheme can
either be numerical or alphabetical.
The following table contains the major and minor revision numbers based on the document
Revision Scheme of RevA01, in SmartPlant Foundation:

Document in Next available major Next available minor Combined major and
As-Built revision value revision number minor revision number

Sample_Doc C 01 C01

Revise a Document
To configure minor and major revisions that are defined in SmartPlant Foundation, make sure
you set the "Revision management software for publishing documents" in Options Manager to:
SmartPlant Foundation. Re-open Smart Electrical and perform the following:
1. Right-click a document, and on the shortcut menu, click Document Properties.
2. On the Document Properties dialog box Revisions tab, click New.
3. On the SmartPlant Foundation Revise dialog box, from the Revision Scheme > Name,
select an option from the list. From the Type, select an option from the list.
4. On the Current Revision in Tool > Major, select a value from the list.
5. On the Current Revision in Tool > Minor, select a value from the list.
6. Optional, to start a new Major revision, click the Next Major button.
7. Optional, to start a new Minor revision, click the Next Minor button.
▪ The consecutive value displays in the Current Revision in Tool > Major field.
▪ The consecutive value displays in the Current Revision in Tool > Minor field.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 826

 Working with Integration

8. Click OK to return to the Document Properties dialog box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 827

 Working with Integration

Publishing Documents
In an integrated SmartPlant environment, the authoring tools share data and relationships when
you publish documents containing the data and relationships. The publishing process involves
selecting a document to publish, assigning it to a workflow when necessary, and specifying a
version and revision of the document if specified in SmartPlant Foundation. For most
documents, the software also publishes the data that is associated with the document when you
publish.
The authoring tools (Smart P&ID or Smart Instrumentation, for instance) publish data in .xml
format. All leading and trailing spaces are trimmed from all strings and from all values without
units. These spaces will not appear in the published data file. The software then loads the
data from the .xml files to the SmartPlant Foundation database. After the data is loaded into
SmartPlant Foundation, you can retrieve the data into other authoring tools.
When you publish documents, the software does the following things:
▪ Creates a new master document and the first revision in SmartPlant Foundation the first
time that you publish a particular document. From that point on, the software creates new
versions and revisions each time that you publish the document. The software relates
revisions to the master document. You can publish subsequent revisions into a workflow,
which can be a different workflow from the original publish action. Changes in the
document status of a related revision change the status of the subsequently published
versions and revisions of the document.
▪ Publishes a visual representation of the document that you can view without the authoring
tool. For many applications, this is an Intergraph proprietary file, called a RAD file. The
viewable file can also be an Excel workbook or another viewable file type, such as .pdf or
.doc. Users can review and edit the visual representation of the document using
SmartPlant Markup.
▪ Publishes associated data, depending on workflow approval. If the data is approved and
loaded, it is used for reporting and subsequent retrieval by downstream applications. The
software publishes only meaningful engineering data. The published data is not enough to
re-create the document in the original authoring tool.
▪ The software publishes some document types without the associated data, such as reports
from authoring tools (for example, line lists in P&ID). You can submit documents published
without data to workflows just like documents with data. The document types and data that
you can publish depend on the authoring tool that you use.
▪ When setting the scope for publishing registered reports, the default setting in Options
Manager under Publishing scope of document content is Document items only. This
means that all the plant items that are included in the report will be published.
For more information about revisions and versions, see the SmartPlant Foundation
documentation.

Reasons to Publish
You can publish documents and associated data for several reasons:
▪ To exchange and enhance data among tools, to avoid creating data multiple times in
multiple authoring tools
▪ To report on common data that originates in multiple tools

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 828

 Working with Integration

▪ To provide enterprise-wide accessibility to published documents

▪ To manage change, including workflow history and document revision management
You can also publish documents to share information with users in other tools without going
through a formal workflow. To share data, you can publish a document to a For sharing
workflow that has only a load step so that the data is loaded into SmartPlant Foundation as soon
as you publish the document.
You can also publish a document by not assigning the document to a workflow, but rather by
using the default workflow from SmartPlant Foundation. When you do not select a workflow for
a document during publishing, SmartPlant Loader loads the document into SmartPlant
Foundation as soon as it reaches the top of the Loader queue.
Note that Smart Electrical does not support minor revisions. Therefore, when
publishing a document, only major revisions are published.

Document Types for Publishing

Each authoring tool publishes different documents and data.
The published PBS document contains information about the physical plant with a structure
consisting of plants, areas, and units. The default structure is plant/area/unit, but you can
define a custom hierarchy in the Schema Editor. When a PBS document is published from
SmartPlant Foundation, the authoring tools are notified about the plant, areas, and units that
need to be created in each authoring tool.
The project breakdown structure, project definition document, and project list contain information
about projects and their statuses.
The project breakdown structure contains a single project and the hierarchy of contracts under
that project in a plant/project structure. The project definition document contains information for
a single project that needs to be created in the authoring tool. The project list contains a list of
all projects in a plant, and it is used by those authoring tools that create all projects at one time.
The plant breakdown structure and project breakdown structure used in the authoring
tools must match the structure in SmartPlant Foundation for publishing from the authoring tools
and object correlation to work correctly.
In Smart Electrical, the following document types can be published out of the box. Your
administrator can configure other documents for publish.
▪ Composite Drawings (for all publishable drawing types)
▪ Single Line Diagrams (including all the plant items on the drawing)
▪ Cable Block Diagrams (including all the plant items on the drawing)
▪ Schematic Drawings (including all the plant items on the drawing)
▪ Wiring Diagrams (including all the plant items on the drawing)
▪ PDB Layout Drawings (including all the plant items on the drawing)
▪ Cable Schedule Reports
▪ Electrical Signal I/O and Equipment Lists
▪ Microsoft Excel Reports, such as Instruments and Cabinets Requiring Electrical Power
▪ Smart Electrical Custom Excel Reports (for example, Load Lists, PDB Schedule, and so on.)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 829

 Working with Integration

When publishing Smart Electrical plant items, all the trailing spaces in the tag names
are removed automatically if so set in Options Manager.

Publishing from Smart Electrical - Work Process

* This step applies to a plant that is configured to use SmartPlant Foundation revisions. If your
plant is configured to use Smart Electrical revisions, a new revision is added in the Smart
Electrical Revise dialog box.

Prerequisites for Publishing

▪ Prior to publishing, in Options Manager General Settings window, select whether you want
to publish plant items with or without the existing spaces in their item tag names.
▪ When publishing documents, the plant group type and uniqueness level set for publishable
item types must be the same as the settings for those item types in the retrieving tool.
▪ When the retrieving tool is Smart Instrumentation, the plant group type and uniqueness
level must be set to Unit for the following item types: Signal Runs, PDBs, Motors,
Heaters, Other Electrical Equipment, Instruments, and Circuits. Also the plant group
type must be set to Plant for Cabinets (the uniqueness level setting is not important in
this case).
▪ In Smart P&ID, the plant group type and uniqueness level can be set to any level except
for the highest plant group type. It is recommended that the plant group type and
uniqueness level are set to Unit in Smart Electrical and Smart P&ID for Smart Electrical
publishable item types.

Publish Documents from Smart Electrical

Before you can publish a document for the first time, at least one revision of
that document must exist. The software finds only those documents that have revisions. If a
document has several revisions, the software finds the most recent revision of that document.
1. Click SmartPlant > Publish.

▪ This command is available only if you have registered the active plant using the
SmartPlant Registration Wizard. For more information, see Smart Engineering Manager
Help

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 830

 Working with Integration

▪ If you logged on to the authoring tool with a user name that is not defined in the
integrated environment, you are prompted to log on when you use this command.
2. Add any additional documents to the Selected documents list by clicking one of the
following toolbar buttons:

▪ Engineering Tool — Opens the Find dialog box for selecting documents.
▪ File System — Opens a standard Microsoft dialog box that allows you to select
files. When you select a file with this Select File dialog box, the Document Properties
dialog box appears, allowing you to specify information about the file, such as whether it
is a new file; the category, type, and subtype of the document; and the name,
description, and title of the document.

▪ Find — Opens the Find Documents to Publish dialog box, which allows you to
search for documents. These are documents that have at least one revision and that
were not published after creation of the last revision. For more information, see Find
Documents to Publish Dialog Box.
The documents that appear in the Selected documents list in the Publish dialog
box when it first appears are publishable documents that were selected within the authoring
tool before you clicked the Publish command.
3. Edit properties as required for the selected documents.

▪ When multiple documents are selected, only property values shared by all the selected
documents appear in the grid. Changing a value in the grid changes that value for all the
selected documents.
▪ To remove an entry (or node) from the Selected documents list, select the node in the
tree, and then click the Delete toolbar button.
4. From the Operations list, choose a publish method.
▪ Select Publish to immediately start the publishing process as soon as you click OK.
▪ Select Background publish to publish the selected documents immediately as a
separate process, allowing you to perform other tasks at the same time. When you use
this feature, an e-mail message alerts you when the process is complete.
5. Click OK to complete the publishing procedure.

▪ During publishing, an information dialog box appears with a progress bar. Click Show
Details to view details of the operation showing steps completed successfully, the current
step that is running, and steps yet to run. You can click Hide Details to hide this section of
the dialog box. If the View Log button on the dialog box is enabled, messages are available
concerning the operation. These messages may include errors or warnings or even
informational messages. Click View Log to see these messages.
▪ The SmartPlant Schema file must be checked into SmartPlant Foundation when you
publish. If the publish operation fails, contact your SmartPlant Foundation system
administrator to make sure the SmartPlant Schema is checked into SmartPlant Foundation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 831

 Working with Integration

What do you want to do?

▪ Find Documents to Publish from Smart Electrical (on page 833)

Publish Workflows
When a SmartPlant application publishes, the user can publish documents using a workflow.
The following list describes the delivered publish workflows and use cases for the workflows.

Workflow Workflow Description Workflow Use Cases

Auto-Correlate Compares the objects in a Use Auto-correlate

published document to the objects
that are already in SmartPlant ▪ When a publishing tool does not
Foundation. If the object correlates have correlation functionality.
by name or through the relationship ▪ When a publishing tool does not
with the parent object (using rules) retrieve.
to an object with the same shared
object definition, SmartPlant
▪ When using SmartPlant
Foundation to perform
Foundation automatically correlates
consistency checking and the
the objects. If the object can
authoring applications do not
correlate to more than one object
retrieve.
through multiple shared object
definitions, a task is placed in the ▪ When Shared Objects To
To Do list to allow the user to select Correlate option is used to
the correlation. configure which types of objects
are auto-correlated.

AutoLoadPublish Generates a document load task Use AutoLoadPublish when you

and consolidate task for the intend to load the published
publishing document. These tasks document data into SmartPlant
are performed by the SmartPlant Foundation.
Foundation Scheduler.

AutoLoadPublish Publish large 3D models. Creates Use AutoLoadPublishMerge when

Merge the published 3D document, loads you intend to view or navigate
the 3D data in SmartPlant multiple 3D models as one
Foundation, then merges these composite 3D model document in
object sets into a new composite one 3D view.
document that represents the entire
3D model.

Correlate Places published objects with Correlate works similar to

possible correlations in the To Do Auto-Correlate except you can view
list. From the To Do list, the user the possible correlations before the
manually correlates selected items. actual correlation takes place.
SmartPlant Foundation creates a
shared object.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 832

 Working with Integration

Workflow Workflow Description Workflow Use Cases

Publish Takes the document through an Use Publish when you want the
approval step. Upon approval, it published document approved
creates the document load and before it is loaded into SmartPlant
consolidate tasks. Foundation. The approval step is
added to the To Do list.

PublishWithDocL Loads document into a document Use PublishWithDocLoad when you

oad configuration and submits want to view the document data in
document to approval step. Upon SmartPlant Foundation before
approval, it creates document the approval. The approval step is added
load and consolidate tasks. to the To Do list.

PublishForLoadO Generates a document load task Use PublishForLoadOnly when you

nly and consolidate task for the want to publish documents to view,
publishing document and makes the navigate and also for consistency
documents irretrievable by any tool. checking in SmartPlant Foundation
These tasks are performed by the without the possibility of the
SmartPlant Foundation Scheduler. document being retrieved by any
tool.

Find Documents to Publish from Smart Electrical

1. Click SmartPlant > Find Documents to Publish.

▪ This feature is also available by clicking Find on the Publish dialog box.
▪ This command is available only if you have registered the active plant using the
SmartPlant Registration Wizard.
▪ The Find Documents to Publish command determines which documents need to be
published or re-published and displays the results on the Find Documents to Publish
dialog box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 833

 Working with Integration

2. From the Select documents to publish list on the Find Documents to Publish dialog box,
select the check box beside the documents that you want to publish.

You can quickly select the entire list by clicking Select All, or you can clear the
entire list by clicking Clear All.
3. Click OK to accept the selections. The documents you selected to publish now appear in the
Documents to Publish list on the Publish dialog box and are ready to be published.
The lists displayed on the Find Documents to Publish dialog box are compiled at
the time indicated in the Last search performed box. You can update the lists by clicking
Update, but this process can be time-consuming, depending on whether you are running the
applications in synchronous or asynchronous mode.

Publishing from a Project in an Integrated Environment

When working with As-Built and Projects, you can publish and retrieve documents from Smart
Electrical when you are connected to SmartPlant Foundation. The Publish option is available
from the Project. The Publish and Retrieve option is available from the As-Built.
To enable publishing from a project, you must create a project under the relevant plant in
SmartPlant Foundation with the same name (case-sensitive) as the project in Smart Electrical.
When you publish a document from a project in an integrated environment, SmartPlant
Foundation gets updated information from the tool, to any changes made to the items which are
included in the document. The tool publishes both; Items claimed from As-Built, and newly
created items in the current project.
An item that was published from the tool’s project and then unclaimed, or moved out of a
document, can be left in the project for reference only.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 834

 Working with Integration

Relations are published in cases where two related items are claimed to a project, or when new
relations are created in the project.
The action performed by the adapter in the Document container are as follows: A
Claim task - that includes only claimed items (not new items created in the project and their
relations).

Retrieving Documents
When you retrieve documents into an authoring tool, you are retrieving the document data that
was published by another authoring tool. For example, in Smart Instrumentation, you can
retrieve engineering information from a published P&ID into the Smart Instrumentation
database.
The authoring tools provide commands that let you select a document and retrieve it into that
tool. You can use either the SmartPlant > Retrieve command to open a wizard that assists you
in retrieving applicable documents, or with some authoring tools, you can configure an automatic
retrieval feature.
When you publish a 3D model, you must now enable the Scheduler and
Loader in SmartPlant Foundation to make the 3D model data document retrievable. The load,
consolidate, and merge tasks must complete successfully before the 3D model document can
be retrieved.
The software trims all leading and trailing spaces from all strings and from all values
without units of measure. These spaces do not appear in the retrieved data file.
Additionally, you can access the Web Client through the SmartPlant > Browser command. This
allows you to select the document or documents that you want to retrieve from your Web Client
To Do List, the tree view, or by using the Web Client search functionality. After you select the
documents that you want to retrieve, you can use the Retrieve command on the Web Client
SmartPlant menu to start the retrieval process.
The Retrieve command provided in the authoring tools is slightly different from the Retrieve
command available in the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. The Web Client presents a list of
documents from which you can select those you want to retrieve. However, when you use the
command from an authoring tool without first selecting documents, the software searches the
SmartPlant Foundation project for documents to retrieve, and these are presented in a list on
the Retrieve dialog box.
You can retrieve a document in two ways:
▪ As published — Retrieves only the data the authoring tool originally published with the
selected revision and version of the document. Retrieving as-published data retrieves the
.XML file the authoring tool published from the appropriate SmartPlant Foundation vault.
▪ With the latest data — Retrieves the latest data associated with the selected document in
the SmartPlant Foundation database. If another, more-recently published document
contains updates to objects in the selected document, the software retrieves the most
current data in the SmartPlant Foundation database for those shared objects. When you
retrieve the latest data, SmartPlant Foundation generates an .XML file containing the
published data.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 835

 Working with Integration

Document Types for Retrieval

The types of documents that you can retrieve depend on the authoring tool you are using. The
following lists include the documents that each authoring tool can retrieve:
Aspen
▪ Equipment Data Sheets
▪ P&IDs
▪ Process Flow Diagrams (PFDs)
▪ Plant Breakdown Structure (PBS)
▪ Project Lists
▪ Summary Sheet documents and data
Smart P&ID
▪ Equipment Data Sheets
▪ Equipment Lists
▪ Instrument Index documents
▪ Instrument I/O Assignment documents
▪ Instrument Master Lists
▪ P&IDs
▪ Process Flow Diagrams (PFDs)
▪ Stream Data Sheets (published as Equipment Data Sheets)
Smart Electrical
▪ P&IDs
▪ Smart Instrumentation Electrical Signal Lists
▪ Smart Instrumentation Electrical Power Elements
▪ 3D Cable Data (Smart Review File Type)
Smart Engineering Manager
▪ PBS
▪ Project Definition Documents
Smart Instrumentation
▪ Instrument Index documents
▪ Instrument Process Data Sheets (IPD)
▪ P&IDs
▪ Plant Breakdown Structure (PBS)
▪ Project Definition Documents
▪ Smart Electrical I/O Lists
▪ Smart Electrical Power Elements

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 836

 Working with Integration

Smart 3D
▪ P&IDs
▪ Cable Schedules
▪ Dimensional Datasheets (DDPs)
▪ Plant Breakdown Structure (PBS)
▪ Project Breakdown Structure
▪ Project Lists
PDS
Does not retrieve
All Authoring Tools
From the authoring tools, you can retrieve the plant breakdown structure (PBS) and project
documents. The PBS and project documents, created in SmartPlant Foundation and published,
are retrieved by authoring tools to provide information about the plants, areas, units, projects,
and contracts that need to be created in the authoring tool so that the information is consistent
across all authoring tools.
The PBS document published by SmartPlant Foundation contains information about the physical
plant with a structure consisting of plants, areas, and units. The default structure is
plant/area/unit, but you can define a custom hierarchy in the Schema Editor. The project
breakdown structure, project list, and project definition document contain information about the
project or projects and their statuses in a plant/project structure.

▪ Retrieving the project breakdown documents and the PBS into Smart Engineering Manager
creates the appropriate structures automatically.
▪ When using Smart Instrumentation, you must create the plant hierarchy according to the
PBS information in SmartPlant Foundation before you retrieve either the PBS or the project
definition document. You must create a plant hierarchy with at least three levels with a
minimum of one unit before you can retrieve the PBS and project definition document.
▪ When working in a project, retrieval is not available.
▪ For certain document types, the tool schema definition may specify that To Do List tasks
(Create, Update, or Delete) will not be generated for those document types. For details, see
Suppress Generation of Tasks on Retrieve.

Data Handling After Retrieval

The authoring tool that you use also determines how the system deals with changes in
downstream data when you retrieve a document. Smart P&ID, Smart Instrumentation, Smart
Electrical, and Aspen analyze the impact of the newly retrieved data on the existing database,
and then place tasks on the authoring tool's To Do List that allows you to modify items at the
appropriate time in the design process. The To Do list gives you the opportunity to view and
understand potential changes before accepting those changes. In Smart 3D, you can view the
P&ID using the View > P&ID command to pull in the data and correlate items.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 837

 Working with Integration

Design Basis
Objects that tools retrieve from other authoring tool documents can become the design basis for
objects in downstream documents. Objects that become the design basis for other objects can
be specific objects that get richer as they move through the life-cycle or can be schematic or
logical objects in one application that evolve into more detailed objects downstream.
Design basis is implicit based on retrieval; you do not have to define it. For example, a pump
retrieved from a PFD becomes the design basis for a pump in the P&ID. When you change
common properties for the pump and retrieve the changes into Smart P&ID, tasks to update
property values automatically appear in the To Do List. The same process works for logical
items that are a design basis for other items, such as a stream in Aspen that results in multiple
pipe runs in Smart P&ID, or a P&ID tag in Smart P&ID can evolve into a control loop with
associated tag numbers in Smart Instrumentation.

Retrieving to Smart Electrical - Work Process

Retrieve Documents to Smart Electrical

1. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve. The Retrieve dialog box appears.

▪ This command is available only if you have registered the active plant using the
SmartPlant Registration Wizard. For more information, see Smart Engineering Manager
Help
▪ If you logged on to the authoring tool with a user name that is not defined in the
integrated environment, you are prompted to log on when you use this command.
▪ The Retrieve command searches the SmartPlant Foundation plant for documents that
are ready to be retrieved into the authoring tool. These documents appear in the
Documents to retrieve list in the Retrieve dialog box.
2. In the Document type list box, specify the type of document to be retrieved. The default
option is All.
3. Select further filtering options in the Show area of the dialog box.
▪ Select New documents to only display documents that have not been retrieved
previously.
▪ Select New versions of retrieved documents to only display documents that are a
new version of a previously retrieved document.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 838

 Working with Integration

▪ Select Unchanged documents to display documents that have not been modified since
the last retrieval process.
4. Select Documents of all owning groups to display all documents.
5. In the Documents to retrieve list, select the check box beside each document you want to
retrieve. To help identify the documents, review the details in the Type, Revision, Version,
and Last Retrieved columns.
To quickly select the entire list, click Select All. To quickly cancel the selections,
click Clear All.
6. For each document you selected, use the Retrieve Option column to specify whether you
want to retrieve the document with the latest data or retrieve it as published.
7. Click OK to retrieve the specified documents.

▪ Select the Batch retrieve option if you want the retrieve process to run in batch mode. If
you select this option, an e-mail message will alert you when the process is complete.
Otherwise, the retrieval process begins when you click OK.
▪ The Deleted and Unclaimed Objects document is retrieved automatically every time you
retrieve, if there is a newer version of this document since the last retrieval. The
document is not included in the list, but it is retrieved automatically, when necessary, to
ensure that the applicable information is updated.
▪ During retrieval, an information dialog box appears with a progress bar. If the View Log
button on the dialog box is enabled, messages are available concerning the operation.
These messages may include errors or warnings or even informational messages. Click
View Log to see these messages.

Using the To Do List

The To Do List allows you to keep track of tasks required to keep your plant updated with
information in an integrated environment. Specifically, this feature aids in retrieving data by
providing a list of all the things that must be added, deleted, or modified to bring the plant data
into agreement with the latest retrieved information.
All the users of a plant database share a single To Do List. You can view the entire To Do List
and see the tasks that have been completed and those that are pending. Some types of tasks
have associated code and when you run those tasks, the software modifies the database.
From the To Do List, you can run, defer, or delete tasks, or specify tasks that you want the
software to ignore in future retrievals. Additionally, you can view properties for each task in the
To Do List and, if required, specify that certain task properties are ignored when the task is
retrieved. The information that is available is specific to the type of task that is selected: Create
tasks and Update tasks, for instance, but certain information is provided for all types. The
available task types are
▪ Create — Creates a new item.
▪ Update — Updates the selected properties of the specified item.
▪ Delete — Deletes the specified item from the plant.
Each task in the To Do List has a status. Initially, the status is Open. If you successfully run the
task, the status changes to Complete . If you attempt to run a task, but the process is not

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 839

 Working with Integration

completed successfully, the status is changed to Error . Error status occurs, for example, if
you attempt to run an Update task assigned to a drawing that is not currently open. You can
also postpone running a task and change its status to Deferred .

▪ When an Update task is created in the To Do List, the units of measure used in properties
are automatically converted to the defaults for the plant. The units of measure used for
properties in Create tasks are converted to the plant defaults when the task is run.
▪ By clicking the heading of columns on the To Do List, you sort the list by the values in that
column.
▪ Smart Electrical does not support task dependencies. For this reason, you must run Create
tasks in the appropriate sequence for items that have a dependency relationship. For
example, if the To Do List contains Create tasks for a motor and for some related process
equipment, the software cannot run the task for the motor first because in the Smart
Electrical database, the process equipment ID already appears as a property of the
motor. You must first run the Create task for the process equipment, and only then for
motor. In cases where the software fails to run related Create tasks, you can restore the
tasks and run them again in the correct sequence.

What do you want to do?

▪ Open the To Do List (on page 841)
▪ Modify To Do List Task Properties (on page 841)
▪ Run Tasks from the To Do List (on page 841)
▪ Filter To Do List Tasks (on page 841)
▪ Sort To Do List Tasks (on page 842)
▪ Defer Tasks from the To Do List (on page 842)
▪ Remove Tasks from the To Do List (on page 842)
▪ Display Deleted To Do List Tasks (on page 842)
▪ Ignore To Do List Tasks (on page 843)
▪ Ignore Task Properties (on page 843)
▪ Display Ignored To Do List Tasks (on page 843)
▪ Update the To Do List Display (on page 844)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 840

 Working with Integration

Open the To Do List

▪ Click SmartPlant > To Do List on the main menu bar to open the To Do List dialog box (on
page 846), from which you can organize and run tasks.

Modify To Do List Task Properties

1. Click SmartPlant > To Do List.
2. From the task list on the To Do List dialog box (on page 846), select the task that you want
to edit.

3. On the toolbar, click Properties .

You can also open the Task Properties dialog box by double-clicking a task in the
To Do List.
4. On the Task Properties (see "Task Properties Dialog Box" on page 848) dialog box, click
the Details tab.
The properties available for each task depend on the type of task. For all types, you
can edit the status, description, and notes for the task. For Create and Update tasks, you can
ignore task properties when running a task. For Create tasks, you can edit the catalog item
being created and turn off or on the values assigned to different properties for that item. For
Update tasks, you can turn off or on the new values assigned to properties for the item.

Run Tasks from the To Do List

1. Click SmartPlant > To Do List.
2. On the To Do List dialog box (on page 846), select one or more tasks to run.

▪ You can select all the tasks on the To Do List by pressing CTRL + A.
▪ You can select additional tasks that have a relationship with the selected tasks by
clicking Select Related Tasks .

3. On the toolbar, click Run .

Filter To Do List Tasks

1. Click SmartPlant > To Do List.

2. On the toolbar, click Filter/Sort Tasks .

3. On the Filter/Sort Tasks dialog box, click the Filter tab.

4. Beside the Filter name box, click the ellipsis button to select a filter.
If you cannot find a suitable existing filter, click New to create a new filter. For more
information about creating filters, see the Filter Manager User's Guide.
5. Click OK to apply the filter on the To Do List.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 841

 Working with Integration

Sort To Do List Tasks

1. Click SmartPlant > To Do List.

2. On the toolbar, click Filter/Sort Tasks .

3. On the Filter/Sort Tasks dialog box, click the Sort tab.
4. Select up to three To Do List properties as sort criteria by selecting from the Sort by lists;
for example: Item Type, Task Status, Task Type.
5. For each sorting property, select whether to sort in ascending or descending order.

Defer Tasks from the To Do List

1. Click SmartPlant > To Do List.
2. On the To Do List dialog box (on page 846), select the tasks that you want to defer.

▪ You can select all the tasks on the To Do List by pressing CTRL + A.
▪ You can select additional tasks that have a relationship with the selected tasks by
clicking Select Related Tasks .

3. On the toolbar, click Defer .

Remove Tasks from the To Do List

1. Click SmartPlant > To Do List.
2. On the To Do List dialog box (on page 846), select the tasks that you want to remove.

▪ You can select all the tasks on the To Do List by pressing CTRL + A.
▪ You can select additional tasks that have a relationship with the selected tasks by
clicking Select Related Tasks .

3. On the toolbar, click Delete .

Display Deleted To Do List Tasks

1. Click SmartPlant > To Do List.
2. On the To Do List (see "To Do List Dialog Box" on page 846) toolbar, click View Deleted
Tasks .
To return to the To Do List, click this command again.
3. To delete tasks permanently, select the tasks that you want to delete, and on the To Do List
toolbar, click Delete .

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 842

 Working with Integration

Ignore To Do List Tasks

1. Click SmartPlant > To Do List.
2. On the To Do List dialog box, select the Create tasks that you want to be ignored.

3. On the toolbar, click Ignore .

Ignore Task Properties

1. Click SmartPlant > To Do List.
2. On the To Do List dialog box (on page 846), select a Create or Update task for which you
want to ignore properties.

3. On the toolbar, click Properties .

You can also open the Task Properties dialog box by double-clicking a task in the
To Do List.
4. On the Task Properties (see "Task Properties Dialog Box" on page 848) dialog box, click
the Details tab.
5. Select the Ignore check box beside each property that you want the software to ignore
when running the task.
When you select to ignore a property, the software does not update that property
when you run the task for the current or for subsequent retrieve sessions. If the new value
of the property changes in the published data, on the next retrieve, that property is no longer
ignored. If you want to ignore the property only for the current retrieve session, clear both
the Activate and Ignore check boxes beside the property.
After running a task that includes ignored properties, that task is copied from the To
Do List to the ignored tasks list, where only the properties that were selected to be ignored
appear on the Details tab.

Display Ignored To Do List Tasks

1. Click SmartPlant > To Do List.

2. On the toolbar, click View Ignored Tasks .

To return to the To Do List, click this command again.
3. To delete ignored tasks permanently, select the tasks that you want to delete, and on the To
Do List toolbar, click Delete . This action makes the task available from the To Do List
the next time you retrieve the document to which the task belongs.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 843

 Working with Integration

Update the To Do List Display

▪ On the To Do List (see "To Do List Dialog Box" on page 846) dialog box toolbar, click
Refresh .

Correlating and Uncorrelating Smart Electrical Items

Correlation is defined as establishing a relationship between a plant item in Smart Electrical and
an item that is retrieved from another authoring tool. For example, a motor M-100 was created in
Smart Electrical. In SmartPlant Foundation, a motor M-100 was also created independently from
Smart Electrical. If data for that motor is updated and published from Smart P&ID and then
retrieved to Smart Electrical, the motor in Smart Electrical becomes correlated with the motor in
Smart P&ID and an Update task is generated for the correlated motor. The correlation is
established in Smart Electrical by adding automatically the SPPID GUID (called Same As) to the
Smart Electrical motor.
Since the same item can exist in more than one authoring tool, there can be more
than one correlation with the same Smart Electrical item. Therefore, a Smart Electrical item can
have more than one Same As GUIDs, one for each authoring tool.

Automatic Correlation
Automatic correlation takes place when you run a Create or Update task in the To Do List for a
plant item in Smart Electrical. Automatic correlation occurs in the following situations:
▪ When retrieving an item that does not have a matching item tag in Smart Electrical.
This results in the generation of a Create task in the Smart Electrical To Do List. When
running this Create task, the item is created in the Smart Electrical database and is
automatically correlated with the item retrieved from the other authoring tool.
▪ When retrieving an item that has a matching item tag with an existing item that was created
independently in Smart Electrical and which was not retrieved from another authoring tool.
If both items in Smart Electrical and the external authoring tool belong to the same plant
group hierarchy level (for example, Unit 1), an Update task is created in the Smart Electrical
To Do List. When running this Update task, the properties of the Smart Electrical plant item
are updated with the properties of the retrieved item and the item is automatically correlated
with the item in the external authoring tool.

Uncorrelating Items
If for some reason you want to break the relationship of a Smart Electrical plant item with an
item in another authoring tool, you can uncorrelate the item in one of the following ways:
▪ On the To Do List, you can uncorrelate items in their Update, Delete, or Move tasks.
▪ Use the SmartPlant > Uncorrelate menu command. When using this option, you can
uncorrelate items even if they were not deleted or their properties were not changed in the
external authoring tool.
If active tasks exist for the uncorrelated item, these tasks change. For details, see
Uncorrelate Smart Electrical Items (on page 845).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 844

 Working with Integration

Uncorrelate Smart Electrical Items

You can break the relationship of a plant item in Smart Electrical with correlated items in another
authoring tool. You can do this by using the Uncorrelate command in one of the following ways:

Uncorrelate Items on the To Do List

1. On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click SmartPlant > To Do List.
2. Select a Delete, Update, or Move task.

3. Click on the To Do List toolbar.

4. Click Yes in the prompt to confirm the uncorrelation.

▪ The Uncorrelate command is not available if you select multiple tasks.

▪ If you run the Uncorrelate command for a Delete task, the To Do List removes this
task for this item. If there are Move and Update tasks for an uncorrelated item, these
tasks change to Create.

Uncorrelate Items Using the Menu Command in Smart Electrical

This option allows you to search and select plant items that you want to uncorrelate from items
in other authoring tools.
1. On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click SmartPlant > Uncorrelate.
2. On the Find dialog box, click Find Now.
3. In the Results data window, select the plant items that you want to uncorrelate.
4. Click OK.
At the end of the process, the software displays a message informing you that the
uncorrelation has been completed successfully. If some of the plant items cannot be
uncorrelated, the message will state so and refer you to the Smart Electrical log for details.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 845

SECTION 32

Windows and Dialog Boxes

To Do List Dialog Box
Provides the ability to manage tasks that need to be run within a Smart Electrical database to
keep the plant current with information in the SmartPlant Foundation database. This dialog box
opens when you click SmartPlant > To Do List on the main menu bar. The commands
associated with the To Do List dialog box are all on the To Do List toolbar.

Properties — Displays the Task Properties (see "Task Properties Dialog Box" on page
848) dialog box for the selected task. This dialog box shows the detailed properties of the
task. This command is available only when a single task is selected.

Run — Runs the task that you select from the list. This command is available when an
executable task is selected and the status of the selected task is Open or Error. If multiple tasks
are selected, this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 846

 Working with Integration

When a task runs, the status of the task and the Run Date and Run By
properties are updated. If the task runs successfully, the status is updated to Completed
. If there is a problem, the status changes to Error , and a timestamp and error
message are added to the Notes area.

Defer — Toggles the status of the selected tasks between Open and Deferred . This
command is available only when the selected tasks have either Open, Error , or Deferred
status.

Delete — Allows you to delete the selected task from the To Do List. This command is
available only when one or more tasks are selected. When you use this command in the To Do
List, the software moves the tasks to the deleted tasks list. When you use this command to
delete permanently one or more tasks in the deleted tasks list, a confirmation dialog box
appears to verify deletion of the selected tasks.

Ignore — Allows you to specify the selected task from the To Do List as an ignored
task. This command is available only when one or more tasks are selected. When you invoke
this command, the software moves all the selected tasks to the ignored tasks list. An ignored
task is skipped for all subsequent retrieve operations. To make a task available for running
again the next time you retrieve data, you must delete that task from the ignored tasks list.

Uncorrelate — Allows you to break the relationship of Smart Electrical plant items with
items in other authoring tools. This command is available only when Update, Move, or Delete
tasks are selected. Once the software completes the uncorrelation, the Smart Electrical plant
items are no longer correlated with the authoring tool from which those tasks were retrieved.

▪ The Uncorrelate command is not available if you select multiple tasks.

▪ If you run the Uncorrelate command for a Delete task, the To Do List removes this
task for this item. If there are Move and Update tasks for an uncorrelated item, these
tasks change to Create. For more details, see Correlating and Uncorrelating Smart
Electrical Items (on page 844) and Uncorrelate Smart Electrical Items (on page 845) .

View Deleted Tasks — Toggles the view between the To Do List and the deleted tasks
list. To completely delete tasks, you select them from the deleted tasks list and click Delete
.

View Ignored Tasks — Toggles the view between the To Do List and the ignored tasks
list. To make tasks available for running again the next time you retrieve data, you select them
from the ignored tasks list and click Delete .

Filter/Sort Tasks — Opens a dialog box that allows you to filter or sort the list of tasks by
the headings in the To Do List. This is useful if, for example, you want to filter or sort the tasks
in order to run tasks of one type only, such as Create tasks.

Select Related Tasks — When you select one or more tasks, choosing this command
selects all tasks that have a relationship with the selected tasks, whether they are above or
below those tasks in the database hierarchy. For example, if process equipment such as a
pump is associated with a motor and you select a task for the motor, this command will also
select related tasks for the pump; likewise, if you select a task for the pump, this command will
also select related tasks for the motor. Note that only tasks that were retrieved from the same
document are selected.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 847

 Working with Integration

Refresh — Updates the information that is displayed in the To Do List. Since only one To
Do List is generated per plant, multiple users can be working in the To Do List at the same time,
and so the information can change at any time. You can use the Refresh command to stay
up-to-date.

Report — Opens Microsoft Excel and runs a report on the contents of the To Do List. The
report is located in the reference data path.
Task List — Populates automatically when you retrieve a document. This list provides
information about each task, including, for example, the type of the task, the item type, the item
tag affected by the task, and so forth. By clicking the heading of any of these columns, you can
sort the list by the values in that column. Alternately clicking the same column heading toggles
the sort between ascending and descending order. Double-clicking a task opens the Task
Properties (see "Task Properties Dialog Box" on page 848) dialog box for that task.

Task Properties Dialog Box

Provides information about tasks that are defined in the task list of the To Do List dialog
box. The type of task that you selected from the To Do List determines the information that
appears on this dialog box. There are three basic types of tasks: Create, Update, and
Delete. You must select a task from the To Do List in order to open this dialog box. This
dialog box opens when you double-click the task from the To Do List dialog box or when you
select the task and click Properties . You must select a task from the To Do List in order to
open this dialog box.

General Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box)

Displays properties that are common to all types of tasks.
Task — Displays the status and type of task, and a description of what happens when the task
is run.
Name — Provides a descriptive string that helps you identify the purpose of the task. This value
is not a unique identifier for the task.
Status — Indicates the level of completion of the task. The following choices are available:
TaskOpen, TaskCompleted , TaskDeferred , and Error . When a task is created, the
status is set to TaskOpen, which does not have an identifying icon in the list of To Do List tasks.
Type — Describes the task type, for example, Manual Create, Manual Update, or Manual
Delete.
Description — Allows you to type a description for the task, for example, of what happens in
the database when the task is run.
Source — Provides general information about the task source.
Engineering Tool — Displays the name of the application that published the document.
Document — Displays the name of the document from which this task originated, for example,
an instrument index from Smart Instrumentation.
Item tag — Displays the item tag of the source object from which this task originated. This
information is read-only.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 848

 Working with Integration

Destination — Provides general information about the item tag affected by the task.
Item tag — Displays the item tag of the item to be processed in the Smart Electrical database.
For Update and Delete tasks, this box displays the item tag of an existing item. For Create
tasks, this box displays the item tag of the item that the software is going to create. This
information is read-only.

Details Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box)

Provides information that is common to all types of tasks and that concerns the source and
destination of the information being imported as part of the task.
Item type — The item type that the software assigns to the item when entering the property
values in the Smart Electrical database. Examples of item types are SignalRun, Instrument,
and Cabinet.
Item properties — Displays the task data properties and enables you to select which properties
to include when you run the task. For an Update task, only those properties for which the
values have changed are shown.
Activate — Creates or updates the value in the database when you run the task. This option
applies to Create and Update tasks only for which the status is New or Deferred.
Ignore — Ignores the new value of the property when you run the task, unless the new value
changes after subsequent retrieval. This option applies to Create and Update tasks only for
which the status is New or Deferred. To ignore a property for the current retrieve session only,
clear both the Activate and Ignore check boxes.
Property — The name of the item property as it appears in Smart Electrical.
New Value — The new value of the item property in the Smart Electrical database as indicated
in the retrieved document. This column only appears if the task type is Create or Update.
Old Value — The current value of the item property in the Smart Electrical database. This
column only appears if the task type is Update.

History Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box)

Provides information this is common to all types of tasks and that concerns the history of the
task. This information includes the user names and dates for the creation of an item,
modification of an item, and so forth. The information on this tab is read-only.

Created
Displays creation details for the task.
By — Displays the user name of the task creator.
Date — Displays the date and time that the task was created.

Modified
Displays modify details for the task, other than for Create tasks.
By — Displays the user name that last ran, modified, or deleted the task.
Date — Displays the date and time that the task was last run, modified, or deleted.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 849

 Working with Integration

Run
Displays details for the task when last run.
By — Displays the user name that last ran the task.
Date — Displays the date and time that the task was last run.

Deleted
Displays details for a deleted task. Note that this refers to deletion of the task itself, not of the
item that the task affects.
By — Displays the user name that removed the task.
Date — Displays the date and time that the task was removed.

Notes Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box)

Allows you to enter freeform text about the task. You can also enter hyperlinks to other
documents for more extensive information. Information about the execution of the task, such as
the success of the procedure, is added to the end of any existing notes for a task.

Compare a Document with a Published Version

This procedure explains how to compare the current version of a document with a previously
published version.
1. In the Electrical Index, expand the folder hierarchy Documents > Registered Reports.
2. Select the required document.
3. Click SmartPlant > Compare with Published Version to open a dialog box.

4. Click Engineering Tool to select a different tool document.

In Smart Electrical, this command opens the Find dialog box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 850

 Working with Integration

5. In the Revision and version options, select the SmartPlant Foundation document you want
to compare.
6. Click OK. SmartPlant Foundation opens and displays a visual comparison of the document
versions, together with a list of properties that have changed.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 851

SECTION 33

Menu Commands
The following menu commands are available in the software.

Publish Plant Groups Command (SmartPlant Menu)

Saves an .xml data file containing details of the plant groups and their structure in the current
site server.

Publish Command (SmartPlant Menu)

Opens the Publish dialog box to allow you to send the information of the selected documents
for retrieval by other tools.

Find Documents to Publish Command (SmartPlant Menu)

Opens the Find Documents to Publish dialog box, which helps you select the documents that
you want to publish and specifies those documents that have never been published or have
been modified and need to be published again or have been deleted since the last publish.
This list is specific to the authoring tool from which you are working.

Retrieve Command (SmartPlant Menu)

Opens the Retrieve dialog box and provides a list of the files that can be retrieved by Smart
Electrical. You can select the documents that you want to retrieve and thereby bring in the
information for the published documents.

Compare with Published Version Command (SmartPlant

Menu)
Allows you to compare the current document with a previous revision and version of that
document that was published. This command opens the Compare with Published Version
dialog box, from which you select the document revision and version for comparison. The
comparison result is displayed in SmartPlant Foundation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 852

 Working with Integration

Publish to External Analyzing Tool Command (SmartPlant

Menu)
Allows you to save the information in a saved electrical analysis SLD from the authoring tool to
an .xml file used to publish data to the ETAP external analyzing tools.
When you use the Smart Instrumentation Interface, this command opens a dialog box that
allows you to specify the location and name of the file used for publishing the data.

To Do List Command (SmartPlant Menu)

Opens the To Do List dialog box, which lists tasks to be performed in Smart Electrical. From
this dialog box, you can run, defer, or delete tasks, and you can organize your tasks.

Browser Command (SmartPlant Menu)

Opens a web-based user interface that allows you to interact with SmartPlant Foundation if the
active plant is registered. From this interface, you can perform a number of tasks, such as
browsing for documents that have been published, using the SmartPlant Foundation To Do List
to complete tasks, comparing published documents with the data in your authoring tool, and
subscribing to documents in order to receive notification of changes to the documents.

Upgrade Schema Command (SmartPlant Menu)

Upgrades the existing Smart Engineering Manager with the active plant to a newer version.
The software upgrades the SPELMap.xml file, including user customizations, with the latest
version data from the files in the ..\Electrical\bin folder path and registers the schema version at
the beginning of the .xml file.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 853

SECTION 34

Smart Application Interfaces

The topics in this section deal with interfacing with other Smart applications.

Smart Instrumentation Interface

The Smart Instrumentation Interface allows you to exchange data between the two applications
using the following document types:
Power elements —You initially define power supply requirements in Smart Instrumentation for
tag numbers and for any panel type except for junction boxes and device panels. On publishing
the data from Smart Instrumentation, Smart Electrical uses the published power supply data to
create instruments from Smart Instrumentation tag number data and cabinets from panel data in
Smart Instrumentation. You can then publish the data and retrieve it back to Smart
Instrumentation with Smart Electrical PDB information.
Signals —Signal data can originate in Smart Electrical or in Smart Instrumentation. You can
define signal data for generators, battery banks, converting equipment, loads, control stations,
any type of circuit, and disconnect equipment. On retrieving all Smart Electrical signals, Smart
Instrumentation creates special electrical tags, for which you can perform wiring and I/O control
system tag assignments. After the wiring is complete, you can publish the data back to Smart
Electrical for further processing and use it to display PLC or other host I/O data in Smart
Electrical schematics.
Electrical Equipment —You can publish electrical equipment such as motors and heaters, with
or without signals. For details of the procedure, see Publish Equipment from (see "Publish
Equipment from Smart Electrical" on page 795)Smart Electrical.

▪ The documents published by the two applications do not contain the same properties. For
example, instrument and cabinet data includes power supply parameters such as rated
voltage, full load current, and so forth, which originate in Smart Instrumentation. However,
Smart Electrical only publishes PDB/Cell/Circuit information. Similarly, Smart
Instrumentation publishes host data for signals that originate in Smart Electrical, but Smart
Electrical does not publish the host data back to Smart Instrumentation. For this reason, if,
in Smart Electrical, you change data values that originated from Smart Instrumentation, you
should update those values accordingly in Smart Instrumentation, and vice versa.
▪ If you publish signals in Smart Electrical for circuits that feed items other than loads,
converting equipment, generators, battery banks, instruments, or cabinets, then on
retrieving the items in Smart Instrumentation and running the tasks, Smart Instrumentation
does not display the associated items.
▪ Whenever you run tasks in the interface that create or update items in Smart Electrical, the
software does not validate the data; however, you can select the items and perform batch
data validation (for details, see Fix Inconsistencies).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 854

 Smart Application Interfaces

Prerequisites for Working with the Smart Instrumentation

Interface
Before you can work with the Smart Instrumentation Interface, do the following:
1. Install the latest version of the MSXML Parser prior to installing Smart Electrical.
During Smart Electrical installation, the software prompts you to install MSXML
Parser if it is not already installed on your computer.
2. Install the SmartPlant Schema Component from the Smart Electrical CD Browser (click
Add-In Software, and then click Schema Component Installation).
On the Select Optional Features page, clear the Schema Editor check box if you
do not need to use the Schema Editor.
3. Install the SmartPlant Client from the Smart Electrical CD Browser (click Add-In Software,
and then click SmartPlant Client Installation).
On the Select Features page, make sure that you clear the SmartPlant Automatic
Retrieval check box.
4. In Smart Engineering Manager, set access rights for publish and retrieve to Full.
5. In Smart Engineering Manager Format Manager, set the accuracy or units of the following
properties to be the same as the corresponding properties in Smart Instrumentation to
ensure that there are no mismatches when retrieving data into Smart Electrical:

Property Units or Accuracy Value

Instrument and cabinet rated power kW

Rated active, reactive, and apparent kW, kVAr, kVA

loads

Full load current and starting current A

Coincidence factors x, y, z, zz and Format = g3

power factors at 100%

6. In Smart Engineering Manager, under Hierarchy Templates, set up a plant hierarchy with
an identical plant structure and with identical plant group names to the plant hierarchy items
in Smart Instrumentation for which you are going to publish and retrieve data.
7. In Smart Electrical Options Manager, under Item Types, select the following values for the
properties indicated:

Item Type Plant group type Item type uniqueness Is unique (check
level box)

Cabinet Plant (or equivalent Plant Select

highest-level plant group)

Instrument Unit (or equivalent Unit Select

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 855

 Smart Application Interfaces

Item Type Plant group type Item type uniqueness Is unique (check
level box)
lowest-level plant group)

SignalRun Unit (or equivalent Unit Select

lowest-level plant group)

8. In the Smart Electrical program, publish the plant group data and structure (click
SmartPlant > Publish Plant Groups). This operation creates a file, Plant Groups.xml in
the folder of the current plant. Smart Instrumentation uses the data in this file to map and
register the Smart Electrical plant groups in the new Smart Instrumentation domain.
Before working with the interface, ensure that the appropriate prerequisites are also
met on the Smart Instrumentation side. For details, refer to the Smart Instrumentation Online
Help topic: Prerequisites for Working with the Smart Electrical Interface.

Mapping Plant Groups to Smart Instrumentation

In Smart Electrical Options Manager, you can determine for each item type the plant hierarchy
level to which that item type belongs, and at which level the item tags are defined as being
unique. In cases where uniqueness applies at a lower level than the entire plant, such as per
unit (or equivalent lower level plant group), it is possible for items with identical tags to exist in
different units. For example, you can have two motors in two different units, each of which has
an identical signal, JSM-100. If you then publish data for these signals for retrieval to the same
target unit, Smart Instrumentation will not be able to distinguish between them and the data
does not get transferred correctly. Moreover, on transferring data back to Smart Electrical, the
software cannot determine to which Smart Electrical unit each set of data belongs.
To ensure that data published from Smart Electrical is defined uniquely in Smart
Instrumentation, you must define unique mapping between the plant groups in the two
applications. In this way, Smart Instrumentation recognizes each Smart Electrical item as being
unique.

Map Plant Groups to Smart Instrumentation

1. In Smart Engineering Manager, under Hierarchy Templates, set up a plant hierarchy with an
identical structure to the one in Smart Instrumentation.
2. Create plant groups for Smart Electrical with identical names to the plant hierarchy items in
Smart Instrumentation for which you are going to publish and retrieve data.
3. In Smart Electrical, click SmartPlant > Publish Plant Groups.
4. On the Publish to File dialog box, specify the folder in which to save the generated .xml
files by typing the path in the Folder to save XML files box.
5. In Smart Instrumentation, log in to the default plant of the required domain and retrieve the
published .xml file containing the Smart Electrical plant group data and structure.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 856

 Smart Application Interfaces

6. Run the generated tasks from the Smart Instrumentation To Do List to create the target
plant hierarchy structure.

▪ After you have defined the mapping between the source and target units (or equivalent
lowest level plant group) and you have transferred data to Smart Instrumentation, you
should not change the target unit mapping definitions, because the data cannot be moved in
Smart Instrumentation in certain cases (for example where no naming convention is defined
for the target unit).
▪ You can create additional units in the Smart Electrical plant group hierarchy if needed. In
this case, you must run the Publish Plant Groups command again to create those units in
Smart Instrumentation and map them to the Smart Electrical units.

Retrieve Data from the Smart Instrumentation Interface

Follow these steps to retrieve data from Smart Instrumentation:
1. Open Smart Electrical.
2. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve.
3. On the Retrieve Document dialog box (on page 1079), type the path to the folder where the
source .xml files containing the published data are located, or click Browse to navigate to
the folder.
4. From the Document list, select a document to retrieve.
The software automatically retrieves the appropriate .xml files associated with the
document that you select.
5. Click SmartPlant > To Do List.
6. On the To Do List dialog box, highlight one or more tasks (hold down CTRL for multiple
selection) and on the toolbar, click one of the following icons:

▪ - Runs the selected tasks.

▪ - Defers the selected tasks.

▪ - Deletes the selected tasks.

▪ - Displays the properties of the selected tasks.

▪ The software retrieves data into the appropriate plant groups at various levels of the plant
hierarchy, regardless of the plant group that you are currently logged in to.
▪ When you run a task that creates a new cabinet or instrument, the software changes the
value of the Override FLA calculation property to Manual to ensure that there is no
inconsistency between Smart Electrical and Smart Instrumentation for the values of the Full
load current property.
▪ If you view the properties of a Create task, the destination item tag is the same as the
source item tag until you run the task. After you run the task, the destination item tag
receives the appropriate Smart Electrical designation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 857

 Smart Application Interfaces

▪ It is possible for Smart Instrumentation users to delete items that originated from Smart
Electrical, such as signals. In this case, when data is next published from Smart
Instrumentation and retrieved into Smart Electrical, the software creates Delete tasks for
those items on the To Do List dialog box. If you do not want those items to be deleted from
the Smart Electrical database, you should click to remove the task from the To Do List
dialog box.

Importing Cables from Smart Instrumentation

Both Smart Instrumentation and Smart Electrical have their own cable libraries and cable
management features. Each of these applications manages its cables (instrumentation, power,
and control cables) differently. Oftentimes, cables that were created in Smart Instrumentation
cannot be handled by Smart Electrical although these cables are controlled by the same control
systems, routed in the same cable trays, and they serve the same equipment.
The software allows you to import Smart Instrumentation cables and use all the available cable
management features of Smart Electrical to handle the cables that were imported from Smart
Instrumentation. You can carry out the following activities with the imported cables:
▪ Design cable routing.
▪ Create and edit cable block diagrams.
▪ Effect drum assignment.
▪ Publish cable routing to Smart 3D.
▪ Generate cable schedules.

▪ To be able to import Smart Instrumentation cables and manage them in Smart Electrical,
you have to coordinate the reference cable libraries in both applications.
▪ For sample cable import links, please contact customer support.
▪ After importing Smart Instrumentation cables, Smart Electrical will indicate which cables and
equipment came from Smart Instrumentation. You can distinguish Smart Instrumentation
cables and equipment by using the SPIID property that is available when filtering items and
generating reports.

Synchronizing Smart Instrumentation and Smart Electrical

Reference Cables
Smart Electrical requires all plant cables to be associated with reference cables. Smart
Instrumentation, however, does not have such a requirement. In Smart Instrumentation, the
functionality that can be comparable to Smart Electrical reference cable is the cable type
property, which is a supporting table in Smart Instrumentation.
Note that in Smart Instrumentation it is possible to set the software to work in the cable
dependency mode. This mode is set in the Administration module. This mode enables Smart
Instrumentation to keep reference cables and plant cables consistent in terms of cable structure
and a few other properties. It is advisable that you work in this mode although it's not mandatory.
If you choose not to work in the cable dependency mode, there may be a number of
discrepancies between the plant cables and reference data. Also, Smart Instrumentation users
can create new plant cables which will be without any reference cable. If you decide not to use

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 858

 Smart Application Interfaces

the cable dependency option, you can still set appropriate rules to make sure that a cable type is
used and that there is an association with reference cable.

As shown here, the Smart Electrical equivalent of a reference cable is the Smart
Instrumentation cable type property.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 859

 Smart Application Interfaces

If you want to have Smart Instrumentation cables in Smart Electrical, create reference
instrumentation cables in the Reference Data Explorer. In most cases these cables are
instrumentation cables but this is not a limitation that will be imposed. Cables can also be control
or ground cables and in rare cases, power cables.

The software will import Smart Instrumentation cables that do not have correlated reference
cables in Smart Electrical (according to the cable-type). However, these cables will not have
conductors or any other cable specification since the definition of these cables is incomplete.
Be aware that if you import cables that do not have a definite structure (that is, several of sets
and conductors) and are not associated with a well-defined reference cable, at a later stage you
will not be able to synchronize the plant cables with the updated reference cable automatically.
You will have to do it manually, by using the Replace Cable command for each cable that you
want to synchronize or by doing it in batch mode.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 860

 Smart Application Interfaces

One way to synchronize Smart Instrumentation cable type list is to export Smart Electrical
reference cables and to import the reference cable names into Smart Instrumentation cable type
table.

Exporting Smart Instrumentation Cables

Smart Instrumentation utilizes a predefined SQL query in order to export Smart Instrumentation
cables to Smart Electrical. The SQL query is called Cable Connection and is found in the SQL
folder that was installed in the folder where you installed Smart Instrumentation. After generating
the Cable Connection.sql, you save the results as an Excel.xlsm file.
You can also generate the SQL query as a view only EDE, and then save it as an
Excel.xlsm file.
The following data is included in the SQL:
▪ The cable names (including all the relevant KKS segments if working in KKS mode).
▪ The cable types.
▪ The item tag connected to the From side — the panel_name or cmpnt_name to which the
cable is connected at its End 1.
▪ The From description — cmpnt_serv (if it is an instrument)
▪ The From category — the From panel/instrument category (instrument, device panel,
junction box, cabinet, DCS or PLC panel, and so on).
▪ The To item tag — the panel_name or cmpnt_name to which the cable is connected at its
End 2.
▪ The To description — cmpnt_serv (if this is an instrument).
▪ The To category — the To instrument or panel category (instrument, device panel, junction
box, cabinet, DCS or PLC panel, and so on).
▪ The pulling area.
The From item tag and the To item tag values reflect the cable destinations, that is an
instrument (cmpnt_name) or a panel (panel_name), depending on a particular case.
The destinations are included in the export so that Smart Electrical is able to create them as
objects and add the relevant associations. The basic rules for these objects are:
▪ For a device panel associated with a single instrument, the software retrieves the instrument
name.
▪ If multiple instruments are associated with the same device panel and run in the same
cable, the software retrieves the first connected instrument.
Smart Instrumentation also exports all the equipment that that is associated with the
cable ends regardless of whether this equipment is connected or not.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 861

 Smart Application Interfaces

Importing Cables to Smart Electrical

Smart Electrical uses the Import Manager to import the Smart Instrumentation cables and the
object with which the cables are associated (connected).
The following import links are shipped with the software in Import Manager for this purpose. You
can customize these links as you see fit.
▪ Pulling area (select list)
▪ Plant cables
▪ Reference cable associations
▪ Instruments (for cables that are associated with device panels)
▪ Panels (various types)
▪ End 1 cable association
▪ End 2 cable association
The software does not import device panels that are not associated with instruments. If, at a
later stage, you associate a device panel with an instrument, you will have to run import again.
Run the following two links:
▪ Instrument From Side (make sure that you select the Do not insert new records check
box).
▪ Instrument To Cable
For cables with multiple destinations on the same side: If a cable is connected to more than a
one panel on the same cable-end, the first destination panel name will be used. Since Smart
Electrical does not support multiple cable destinations, you do not have to specify the other
destinations.
Note that the export file includes, in addition to the above data, the IDs of the panel, cable, and
instrument objects.

Importing the To and From Objects

When importing Smart Instrumentation cables, the software also imports the objects that
connected to the To and From sides of the imported cables. The following table shows the
mapping of the imported objects from Smart Instrumentation to Smart Electrical.

Smart Instrumentation Smart Electrical

Device panel (with an associated Instrument

instrument)

Junction box Junction box

Cabinet Cabinet

DCS / PLC panel Cabinet

Marshaling rack Cabinet

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 862

 Smart Application Interfaces

The default plant break down system (plant - area - unit) for importing Smart
Instrumentation cables and equipment is defined in the shipped links in Import Manager. The
default setting is that all the items will be imported on the highest plant hierarchy level. You can
customize this data by editing the shipped links as you require.

Workflow for Importing Smart Instrumentation Cables

The following workflow describes the necessary steps that are needed to import Smart
Instrumentation cables and their To and From equipment.

Do the following in Smart Instrumentation:

1. From the SQL Editor folder in the Smart Instrumentation reference folder, import the Cable
Connection.sql file, found in the SQL folder in the Smart Instrumentation home folder.
2. Generate a View only EDE using the Cable Connection.sql file.
3. Save the results as an Excel.xls file
The name of the Excel file must be SPIDomainCables.xls and you must
save it in the same location where the SPI_Import.xml (supplied with Smart Electrical) is
stored.

Do the following in Microsoft Excel:

▪ Open the SPIDomainCables.xls and define a name range for a range that starts at A1 and
includes the last cell in the PanelId2 column.
The name must be SPI_Cables.

Do the following in Smart Electrical Import Manager:

1. In the left pane, under Link Groups, select the SPI_Import group and then select all the
links belonging to this group in the right pane.
2. Click Tools > Update Source Connection.
3. On the Data Link Properties dialog box, change the database name to SPI_Cables.xls and
make sure that the path points to the location where you saved the SPI_Cables.xls file.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the Ref. Cables group.
5. In the left pane, select all the links belonging to the Ref. Cables group and run import.
Smart Instrumentation reference cables (called cable types in Smart
Instrumentation) are imported into the Smart Electrical cable list in order to create an
association between the reference and plant cables. Note that the import procedure only
imports the reference cable names without any other data. As a result, you must enter this
data manually so that the imported reference cables have all the required data (for example,
cable structure). If you decide to enter this data at a later stage and use these reference
cables to create plant cables, the software will create these plant cables without any sets or
conductors.
6. In the left pane, select all the links belonging to the SPI_Import group and run import.
For information how to generate an SQL/EDE in Smart Instrumentation and how to
define a name range in Microsoft Excel, refer to the pertinent topics in the documentation of
Smart Instrumentation and Microsoft Excel.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 863

SECTION 35

ETAP - Smart Electrical Bidirectional

Interface
The ETAP - Smart Electrical interface allows you to import ETAP data to Smart Electrical and
export data to ETAP. When exporting data to ETAP you can publish single electrical analysis
SLDs or a complete set of all the existing electrical analysis SLDs in one set. When retrieving
ETAP data, you can retrieve a particular ETAP one-line diagram or publish all plant data to
Smart Electrical. (Note that this is an ETAP feature and the setting is defined in ETAP.)
The interface is based on a fixed mapping file that is shipped with Smart Electrical. This file
determines the mapping between the ETAP elements and various equipment types in Smart
Electrical. ETAP users cannot modify the mapping of ETAP elements to SEL item types.
However, it is possible to change the mapping of the properties in both Smart Electrical and
ETAP and change the direction of the data propagation between the two applications.

▪ Note the following limitations regarding publishing and retrieving parallel connections:
▪ It is not possible to publish to ETAP electrical items that are connected in parallel.
These items will not be published at all.
▪ When retrieving electrical items that are connected in parallel from ETAP, the software
creates a new bus in Smart Electrical and connects these items to this bus using a
non-parallel connection.
▪ When publishing junction boxes from Smart Electrical to ETAP, ETAP retrieves these items
as bus nodes. When ETAP users publish this bus back to Smart Electrical, it is retrieved as
a junction box and its circuit is retrieved as a panel circuit.

Publishing Data to an External Analyzing Tool

In Smart Electrical you can generate single line diagrams that allow you to publish the data they
contain to an electrical analysis application such as ETAP. When you set the SLD generation
options, you can specify the levels of the power distribution network for which the SLD displays
the data, and this, in turn, affects the published output data. The software generates an .xml file
in a format appropriate for ETAP, which you specify in the Options Manager. The data transfer
process is 'one-way' — that is, from Smart Electrical to the electrical analysis application,
according to the flow described in the following diagram:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 864

 ETAP - Smart Electrical Bidirectional Interface

After you publish the data from Smart Electrical, ETAP has its own data exchange program
which enables the import and translation of the Smart Electrical .xml file.

ETAP - Smart Electrical Mapped Items

Smart Electrical is shipped with a fixed default mapping of ETAP elements and Smart Electrical
equipment. The table below shows this default mapping.
Note that in cases where the mapping is "many-to-one", you must define the type by specifying
the identifier that you select from the Equipment Type Identifier select list (shown here in SEL
Equipment Type Identifier column).

ETAP Element Smart Electrical SEL Equipment Type Identifier

Battery Battery bank -

Busduct Busway Busduct

AC Bus Bus -

DC Bus Bus DC Bus

Bus (see note below) Local panel -

Bus (see note below) Junction box -

AC Cable Cable -

DC Cable Cable DC Cable

Capacitor Capacitor -

Charger Battery charger -

Contactor (ContactorType = Contactor -

Contactor)

Contactor (ContactorType = Starter -

Starter)

Current transformer Current transformer -

Fuse Fuse -

DC Circuit breaker Circuit breaker DC Circuit breaker

DC Converter Other converting equipment DC Converter

DC Fuse Fuse DC Fuse

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 865

 ETAP - Smart Electrical Bidirectional Interface

ETAP Element Smart Electrical SEL Equipment Type Identifier

DC Impedance Busway DC Impedance

DC Lumped load Other electrical equipment DC Lumped load

Grounding adapter Other disconnect electrical Grounding adapter

equipment

HVCB Circuit breaker High Voltage CB

HVDC transmission link Busway HVDC transmission link

LVCB Circuit breaker Low Voltage CB

In-line overload relay Overload relay In-line overload relay

Impedance Busway -

Induction motor Generator Induction Generator

Inverter (see the note below for Other converting equipment Inverter
more details)

Lumped load Other electrical equipment Lumped load

Induction motor Motor -

DC Machine Motor DC Motor

DC Motor Motor DC Motor

MG Set Other electrical equipment MG Set

Motorized Valve Motor Motorized Valve

Overload heater Overload relay -

Panel Other electrical equipment Panel

Photo voltaic array Offsite power Photo voltaic array

DC Photo voltaic array Offsite power DC Photo voltaic array

Potential transformer (see the note Potential transformer -

below for more details)

Power grid Offsite power -

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 866

 ETAP - Smart Electrical Bidirectional Interface

ETAP Element Smart Electrical SEL Equipment Type Identifier

Reactor Current limiting reactor -

Recloser Circuit breaker Recloser

Single throw switch Disconnect switch -

DC Single throw switch Disconnect switch DC Single throw switch

Static load (Load type = Resistor) Resistor -

DC Static load (Load type = Resistor DC Resistor

Resistor)

Static load (Load type = Heater) Heater

DC Static load (Load type = Heater DC Heater

Heater)

Static load (Load type = Trace) Heat trace -

DC Static load (Load type = Trace) Heat trace DC Heat Trace

Static load (Load type = Lighting) Lighting fixture -

DC Static load (Load type = Lighting fixture DC Lighting fixture

Lighting)

Static load (Load type = Socket Socket outlet -

outlet)

DC Static load (Load type = Socket outlet DC Socket outlet

Socket outlet)

Static load (Load type = Welding Welding outlet -

outlet)

DC Static load (Load type = Welding outlet DC Welding outlet

Welding outlet)

Static load (Load type = Cabinet) Cabinet -

DC Static load (Load type = Cabinet DC Cabinet

Cabinet)

Static load (Load type = Instrument -

Instrument)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 867

 ETAP - Smart Electrical Bidirectional Interface

ETAP Element Smart Electrical SEL Equipment Type Identifier

DC Static load (Load type = Instrument DC Instrument

Instrument)

Static load (Load type = Other) Other electrical equipment Special Electrical Equipment

DC Static Load (Load type = Other electrical equipment DC Special Electrical Equipment
Other)

SVC Other electrical equipment SVC

Synchronous motor Motor Synchronous motor

Synchronous Generator Generator -

Three-winding transformer Three-winding transformer -

Two-winding transformer Two-winding transformer -

Transmission line Busway Transmission line

Variable frequency drive Variable frequency drive -

Uninterruptible power supply Uninterruptible power supply -

Inverters
ETAP inverters are published to Smart Electrical as other converting equipment items.
Therefore, when retrieving an inverter to Smart Electrical or publishing other converting
equipment items that emulate inverters, make sure that you do the following:
▪ The other converting equipment item that emulates an inverter must be connected to a DC
power supply and its AC/DC power supply flag must be set to DC.

Junction Boxes
When publishing junction boxes from Smart Electrical to ETAP, ETAP retrieves these items as
bus nodes. When ETAP users publish this bus back to Smart Electrical, it is retrieved as a
junction box and its circuit is retrieved as a panel circuit.

Local Panels and Their Panel Circuits

When exporting a local panel with or without its panel circuit to ETAP, it is retrieved as a bus.
When ETAP users publish this bus back to Smart Electrical, it is retrieved as a local panel and
the circuit is retrieved as a panel circuit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 868

 ETAP - Smart Electrical Bidirectional Interface

Potential Transformers
There are special rules when publishing and retrieving potential transformers.

Publishing Potential Transformers to ETAP

▪ Potential transformers that function as metering equipment are not published.
▪ A potential transformer created in a feeder or coupler circuit is published with the bus
functioning as the power source of the potential transformer. In ETAP, the potential
transformer is retrieved connected below the bus.
▪ Stand-alone potential transformers are published connected to their equipment as they exist
in the electrical flow.

Retrieving Potential Transformers from ETAP

▪ If a potential transformer is connected upstream to a bus and a power source, it is retrieved
as a circuit internal of an incomer which is connected to the bus.
▪ If a potential transformer is connected under a bus, it is retrieved as a circuit internal of a
feeder which is connected to the bus.
▪ If a potential transformer is connected to one of the ends of a bus, it is retrieved as a circuit
internal of an additional feeder which is connected to the bus.

Unsupported Items
A number of items are not supported by the ETAP - Smart Electrical interface. Publishing an
unsupported item can have the following possible results:
▪ Items could be skipped or ignored in the importing application. After exporting these items
back to the original application, they may be deleted or become disconnected or dissociated
from their related items.
▪ Inability to synchronize or update data.
▪ Unexpected behavior.

Unsupported ETAP Elements

The following ETAP elements are not supported by the ETAP - Smart Electrical interface:
▪ Instrumentation
▪ Multi-function relays
▪ Wind turbine generator
▪ Double through switches

Unsupported Smart Instrumentation

The following Smart Electrical items are not supported by the ETAP - Smart Electrical interface:
▪ Metering equipment (except for current transformers and potential transformers)
▪ Other disconnect equipment
▪ Control stations (not exported at all)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 869

 ETAP - Smart Electrical Bidirectional Interface

▪ Circuits (not exported at all)

▪ Cells (not exported at all)
▪ Power distribution boards (not exported at all)

Synchronizing Select List Items

Make sure that the required ETAP drop-down list items are fully synchronized with Smart
Electrical select list items. If an ETAP drop-down list item does not exist in Smart Electrical, add
it to an appropriate select list in Data Dictionary Manager. For details, see the Data Manager
Dictionary Documentation. Mapping of Smart Electrical select list items is done in ETAP. For
further information, see the appropriate ETAP documentation.

Preliminary Settings for ETAP

Prior to importing ETAP data or exporting Smart Electrical data to ETAP, you have to define a
number of settings in Smart Electrical Options Manager:
▪ Define the ETAP Project Name (on page 870)
▪ Map ETAP File Location (on page 871)
▪ Import ETAP Mapping Data (on page 871)
▪ Set the ETAP-SEL Reference Cable Exchange File Location (see "Set the ETAP-Smart
Electrical Reference Cable Exchange File Location" on page 871)
▪ Export (see "Export Smart Electrical Reference Cables (Power Cables)" on page
872)Smart Electrical Reference Cables (Power Cables) (see "Export Smart Electrical
Reference Cables (Power Cables)" on page 872)
▪ Export (see "Export Smart Electrical Reference Cables (Cable Specifications)" on page
873)Smart Electrical Reference Cables (Cable Specifications) (see "Export Smart Electrical
Reference Cables (Cable Specifications)" on page 873)
▪ Import ETAP Library Cables (on page 875)

Define the ETAP Project Name

Prior to working with the ETAP - Smart Electrical interface, you have to define the name of the
ETAP project exactly as it appears in ETAP.
1. In Options Manager, click Options > General Settings.
2. In the General Settings window, to the right of Project name in external analyzing
software type the exact name of the project as it appears in ETAP.

3. Click Save .

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 870

 ETAP - Smart Electrical Bidirectional Interface

Map ETAP File Location

The mapping of Smart Electrical item properties to ETAP item types is done in ETAP Mapping
Table. This information is stored in ETAP in an .mdb file and converted by Smart Electrical to
an .xml file called ETAPSPELMapping.xml. Smart Electrical provides a default .xml file and you
can change its default location if needed.
1. In Options Manager, click Options > Locations.
2. In the Locations window, to the left of the ETAP Smart Electrical mapping file click the
ellipsis button .
3. Navigate to the ETAPSPELMapping.xml file.

4. Click Save .

Import ETAP Mapping Data

One of the first things that you should do is to synchronize the mapping table of a specific ETAP
project with the Smart Electrical mapping file. Smart Electrical always checks the compatibility
of the mapping file when importing data from ETAP. In case of version inconsistency, a
warning message is displayed asking to import the latest mapping file from ETAP.
1. In Options Manager, click Interfaces > ETAP > Build Mapping XML.
2. On the Build Mapping XML dialog box, navigate to the appropriate mapping .mdb file and
click Open.

▪ This .mdb file is located in the ETAP home directory, under the specific project library >
DataEx_SPEL.
▪ Smart Electrical converts this .mdb file to ETAPSPELMapping.xml and overwrites the
file in the location specified in Option Manager under ETAP - Smart Electrical mapping
file location.

Set the ETAP-Smart Electrical Reference Cable Exchange

File Location
Smart Electrical and ETAP can exchange reference cable information so that cable libraries
become synchronized. Smart Electrical provides a default exchange .mdb file and you can use
it or modify it as you see fit. The default location of this file is also set automatically in Options
Manager in the Smart Electrical reference data library, under ETAP. However, you can change
this location if required.
1. In Options Manager, click Options > Locations.
2. In the Locations window, to the left of the ETAP - SEL reference cable exchange file click
the ellipsis button .
3. Do one of the following:
▪ Navigate to the shipped default mdb file in the following location:
Program Files\SmartPlant\Electrical Reference Data\ETAP\ETAPSPELCableLib.mdb

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 871

 ETAP - Smart Electrical Bidirectional Interface

▪ Navigate to an appropriate .mdb file of your choice.

4. Click Save .

Export Smart Electrical Reference Cables (Power Cables)

You can synchronize the Smart Electrical reference cables with the ETAP cable library of a
particular ETAP project if you want to have a commonly shared cable library. This
synchronization is optional. If you do not synchronize the libraries, both applications function
independently of the cable library of the other application. However, if you synchronize the
cable libraries, each application will identify the reference cables that were specified by the other
application.
To effect this synchronization, you need to export your reference cables to ETAP and import
ETAP library cables to Smart Electrical. The following procedure explains how to export your
reference cables by selecting the reference power cables from the entire list of all the existing
reference power cables.
1. On the Options Manager menu bar, click Interface > ETAP > Export Reference Cables.
2. On the Reference Power Cable Selection Method page of the Export Smart Electrical
Reference Cables wizard, select the All power cables option.
3. Click Next.
4. On the Reference Cable Selection page, select the reference power cables that you want
to export.
5. Click Finish.

▪ The software exports the reference cables to the cable library file that you specified in
Options Manager and appends the new cables to the list of the existing cables in that library.
▪ To ensure that the exported reference cables are consistent with the ETAP cable library,
Smart Electrical filters out the reference cables that have additional conductors to the
current carrying conductors. These cables are not exported to the ETAPSPELCableLib.MDB
file. When ETAP retrieves a SEL analysis SLD which included such a reference cable,
ETAP ignores the additional conductors and does not insert this reference cable into the
ETAP cable library.
▪ If you export reference cables that already exist in the cable library, the software ignores the
cables that have identical properties. The software exports only those cables whose
properties differ from the cables that already exist.
▪ There are certain cable properties that must be defined for the reference cables prior to
exporting them. These properties form the ETAP cable headers and they are all mandatory
for ETAP. In addition to the properties required by Smart Electrical to form reference
cables, you must define other properties that form the ETAP cable headers. Any reference
cable that lacks even one of these property definitions is rejected by the software after the
export process. The following properties must be defined before starting export:
▪ Conductor Material
▪ Frequency
▪ Base Temperature
▪ Installation

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 872

 ETAP - Smart Electrical Bidirectional Interface

▪ Insulation Material
▪ Insulation Voltage Rating
▪ kV Class
▪ Length Unit of Measure
▪ Number of Conductors
▪ Source Name
▪ Ta Base Above Ground
▪ Ta Base Under Ground
▪ Tc Base Above Ground
▪ Tc Base Under Ground
▪ Unit System
▪ RHO
▪ If you want to use Smart Electrical cables in ETAP, you have to define all the electrical
properties that are required by ETAP. We recommend that you specify a distinct "source
name" for these cables so that they do not interfere with or override ETAP original library
cables.

Export Smart Electrical Reference Cables (Cable

Specifications)
You can synchronize the Smart Electrical reference cables with the ETAP cable library of a
particular ETAP project if you want to have a commonly shared cable library. This
synchronization is optional. If you do not synchronize the libraries, both applications function
independently of the cable library of the other application. However, if you synchronize the
cable libraries, each application will identify the reference cables that were specified by the other
application.
To effect this synchronization, you need to export your reference cables to ETAP and import
ETAP library cables. This procedure explains how to export your reference cables by selecting
particular cable specifications.
1. On the Options Manager menu bar, click Interface > ETAP > Export Reference Cables.
2. On the Reference Power Cable Selection Method page of the Export Smart Electrical
Reference Cables wizard, click the Power cables with selected cable specifications
option.
3. Under Cable specifications, select the appropriate specifications and click Add.
After clicking Next, the software will display a list of reference power cables that
have the cable specifications you select on this page.
4. Click Next.
5. On the Reference Cable Selection page, select the reference cables that you need.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 873

 ETAP - Smart Electrical Bidirectional Interface

6. Click Finish.

▪ The software exports the reference cables to the cable library file that you specified in
Options Manager and appends the new cables to the list of the existing cables in that library.
▪ To ensure that the exported reference cables are consistent with the ETAP cable library,
Smart Electrical filters out the reference cables that have additional conductors to the
current carrying conductors. These cables are not exported to the ETAPSPELCableLib.MDB
file. When ETAP retrieves a SEL analysis SLD which included such a reference cable,
ETAP ignores the additional conductors and does not insert this reference cable into the
ETAP cable library.
▪ If you export reference cables that already exist in the cable library, the software ignores the
cables that have identical properties. The software exports only those cables whose
properties differ from the cables that already exist.
▪ There are certain cable properties that must be defined for the reference cables prior to
exporting them. These properties form the ETAP cable headers and they are all mandatory
for ETAP. In addition to the properties required by Smart Electrical to form reference
cables, you must define other properties that form the ETAP cable headers. Any reference
cable that lacks even one of these property definitions is rejected by the software after the
export process. The following properties must be defined before starting export:
▪ Conductor Material
▪ Frequency
▪ Base Temperature
▪ Installation
▪ Insulation Material
▪ Insulation Voltage Rating
▪ kV Class
▪ Length Unit of Measure
▪ Number of Conductors
▪ Source Name
▪ Ta Base Above Ground
▪ Ta Base Under Ground
▪ Tc Base Above Ground
▪ Tc Base Under Ground
▪ Unit System
▪ RHO
▪ If you want to use Smart Electrical cables in ETAP, you have to define all the electrical
properties that are required by ETAP. We recommend that you specify a distinct "source
name" for these cables so that they do not interfere with or override ETAP original library
cables.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 874

 ETAP - Smart Electrical Bidirectional Interface

Import ETAP Library Cables

You can synchronize the Smart Electrical reference cables with the ETAP cable library of a
particular ETAP project if you want to have a commonly shared cable library. This
synchronization is optional. If you do not synchronize the libraries, both applications function
independently of the cable library of the other application. However, if you synchronize the
cable libraries, each application will identify the reference cables that were specified by the other
application.
To effect this synchronization, you need to import ETAP library cables and export your reference
cables to ETAP. This procedure explains how to import ETAP library cables.
ETAP exports project library cables to an .mdb file which is then used by Smart
Electrical to effect the import.
1. On the Options Manager menu bar, click Interface > ETAP > Import Reference Cables.

2. On the Import ETAP Library Cables dialog box, click and navigate to an ETAP .mdb
file that contains ETAP library cables.
3. Under Cable details, select the required cables, click Update Cable Specifications.

▪ You must specify an appropriate cable specification for each ETAP library cable before
you import the cables to Smart Electrical.
▪ Make sure that before you start the import process, all the source names of the ETAP
library cables that you want to import have been added to the Source name select list
in the Data Dictionary.
4. On the Cable Specification dialog box, do one of the following:
▪ Click the Select check box next to the cables that you want to import.
▪ Click Select all to select all the cables in the Cable details data window.
5. Click OK to start the import process.
When importing ETAP library cables, Smart Electrical now uses the ETAP
conductor material and Kv class property values in the naming of cable item tags in addition to
the other property values. Also, the software does the following:
▪ The imported cables keep the conductor material and Kv class data as this data was
entered in ETAP.
▪ The following abbreviations are used in Smart Electrical:
▪ "Magnetic" — "Mag"
▪ "Non-Magnetic" — "NonMag
▪ "Overhead" — "Ov"
▪ Insulation material property names are trimmed to four characters. For example, "rubber"
appears as "rubb"
▪ Import source is trimmed to four characters.
▪ "mm2" or "AWG/kcm" units of measure have been added to the conductor size property.
▪ Kv data has been added adjacent to insulation voltage rating.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 875

 ETAP - Smart Electrical Bidirectional Interface

▪ If an item tag exceeds the 50-character limitation, the string is trimmed. If after trimming, the
software detects the existence of an identical item tag, the string is trimmed to 47 characters
and adds -1 to the end of the string. This number can be incremented until it reaches 99.

Publish a Single SLD Drawing to ETAP (Partial

Publishing)
Smart Electrical publishes single line diagrams to ETAP using electrical analysis SLDs. After
generating an electrical analysis SLD and saving it, ETAP will use its XML as the source for
import.
Note that publishing a single SLD to ETAP is called partial publishing. The XML that you
create by saving the SLD has this partial identifier. As a result, in ETAP there will be no
indication of deleted items after importing partial SLDs. To indicate that certain items have
been deleted in Smart Electrical, use the full publishing method.
1. In Smart Electrical, in the Electrical Engineer, select an appropriate item for which you
want to generate an electrical analysis SLD.
The item can be on any hierarchy level in the Electrical Engineer, for example a
bus.
2. Right-click the item that you selected and then on the shortcut menu, click New SLD.
3. On the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box, in the SLD type group box, select
Electrical analysis SLD.
4. Click Generate.
5. Save the drawing.
6. In the Electrical Index, expand the Documents > Electrical Analysis SLDs hierarchy.
If you want to publish an existing SLD and make sure that you retain all
the changes made since the last time it was published, you must open this SLD and save it
prior to publishing. If you do not do that, the software will publish the updated items with
inappropriate coordinates. As a result, ETAP will position these SLD items in inappropriate
places on ETAP drawings.
7. Right-click the new SLD drawing and then on the shortcut menu, click Publish to External
Analyzing Tool.
8. On the Publish to External Analyzing Tool dialog box, save the drawing as an .xml file,
which will be used by ETAP as an import source.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 876

 ETAP - Smart Electrical Bidirectional Interface

Publish All Plant SLDs to ETAP (Full Publishing)

Smart Electrical publishes single line diagrams to ETAP using electrical analysis SLDs. After
generating an electrical analysis SLD and saving it, ETAP will use its XML as the source for
import.
Full publishing of SLDs to ETAP is when you publish all the existing electrical analysis SLDs in a
single set of drawings. This set is identified as the complete SLD of the plant and it includes all
plant items that constitute the electrical analysis SLDs.
The full publishing method enables you to create an indication in ETAP of items that have been
deleted in Smart Electrical. When ETAP imports a full xml, the software compares the items
that are included in the current session with the existing project as stored in the ETAP database
and deletes all the items that are not found in the full xml that was used for import.

▪ The data transfer between Smart Electrical and ETAP is based on the mapping table. Only
those properties that have been mapped with the appropriate mapping direction are
propagated from Smart Electrical to ETAP. For more details, see ETAP - Smart Electrical
Mapped Items (on page 865).
▪ If you want to publish existing SLDs and make sure that you retain all the changes made
since the last time these SLDs were published, you must open each SLD and save it prior to
publishing. If you do not do that, the software will publish the updated items with
inappropriate coordinates. As a result, ETAP will position these SLD items in inappropriate
places on ETAP drawings.
1. On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Tools > ETAP Interface > Publish All.
2. On the Publish to External Analyzing Tool dialog box, save the file as an .xml file, which
will be used by ETAP as an import source.

Retrieve ETAP Project Data

ETAP exports its project data in XML format. ETAP users can select all the project data or
specific items (see the documentation in ETAP on how to make this selection).
In order to preserve the electrical associations that exist in ETAP, before
publishing to Smart Electrical, make sure that all the relevant electrical items are connected to a
power source in ETAP. The power source items themselves, however, need not be included in
the publish.
1. On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click Tools > ETAP Interface > Retrieve.
2. Navigate to the appropriate ETAP project .xml file and click Open.

▪ The retrieve process starts only if the ETAP project name specified in the selected .xml
file is the one specified in Options Manager. If the project name specified in Options
Manager is different from the one in the selected .xml file, the software rejects the
retrieval and displays a warning message.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 877

 ETAP - Smart Electrical Bidirectional Interface

▪ The software checks the mapping table revision number, which is also part of the ETAP
project .xml file. If the mapping has been modified in ETAP and no new mapping has
been done, the software displays a warning. You can continue the retrieval if you want
to do so.
▪ Once the retrieve is completed, it results in a To Do List action similar to the one used in
Smart Electrical in integration. You can examine each task before committing the
whole action list to your Smart Electrical database.
3. On the Smart Electrical menu bar, click SmartPlant > To Do List.
4. In the To Do List window, double-click a task to check what data is going to be populated in
your database.
The following types of task can appear in the To Do List:
▪ Create — New items will be created in Smart Electrical if the items are totally new in
Smart Electrical. A new item in Smart Electrical is an item that the software cannot
identify by its Smart Electrical ID (SP_ID), ETAP IID, or Smart Electrical item tag.
Note that if the retrieved item is a disconnect equipment item, the software does not
check for the item tag property.
▪ Update — Existing items will be updated if Smart Electrical can identify them by one
of the properties mentioned above.
▪ Delete — Items deleted in ETAP will be deleted in Smart Electrical. Note that this
type of task is only possible when performing a Full Retrieve from ETAP.

5. Select the tasks you want to run and click Run .

You can change the feeder-incomer circuit connections which are created
after retrieving data from ETAP to coupler-riser connections. You can change the type of these
circuits on the Common Propertied of the relevant feeder. From the Circuit type list, select
COUPLER. After making this change, the type of the connected circuit also changes from an
incomer to a bus riser. You can perform the same procedure in the Common Properties of an
incomer and change it to feeder.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 878

SECTION 36

Troubleshooting Errors and Rule

Inconsistencies
In This Section
Generating Error Log Files ............................................................ 879
Activate Log File Generation ......................................................... 879
Generate Error Log Files ............................................................... 880
Troubleshooting Rule Inconsistencies ........................................... 880
Fix Inconsistencies ........................................................................ 881
Troubleshoot Rule Inconsistencies ................................................ 881
Operator Descriptions and Rule Examples ................................... 882

Generating Error Log Files

There are several batch operations that you can perform in Smart Electrical, some of which may
not be completed or performed due to failures in validations, missing data, and so forth. You
can view a list of errors for these operations in an appropriate log file. Among the operations for
which the software generates log files are applying profiles, batch cable sizing, replacing cables,
batch data deletion, copying and pasting multiple items in the EDE, and bulk copying and
pasting of values in the Properties window.
The software generates an additional log file called RadApplication log. It is mostly used for
recording problems that may occur when working with the graphic environment of your drawings
and documents. The file also records various general errors that may occur in the process of
using Smart Electrical. In some cases, sending an excerpt from this file or the entire log file to
Customer Support may speed up the process of getting assistance. Note that the software
places the RadApplication log file on the desktop of your client machine.

Activate Log File Generation

1. Click File > Preferences.
2. On the Preferences dialog box, under Log file options in the General tab folder, select
Activate log file generation.
3. Click OK.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 879

 Troubleshooting Errors and Rule Inconsistencies

Generate Error Log Files

1. Click File > Open > Log Files.
2. On the Log Files dialog box, select a log file category from the Log file type list.
3. Select one of the following:
▪ All log file data - select to display data and rule inconsistency errors.
▪ Rule inconsistencies only - select to display rule inconsistency errors only.
▪ All log file data excluding rule inconsistencies - select to display data errors only.
4. Select Show log file data for last operation only to display errors for the last performed
operation relating to the specified log file. Clear to display accumulated errors for
successive operations.
5. Click Open.
The software generates the log file in a Microsoft Excel workbook where you can
view a list of any failed operations in the selected category. You can then go back to the
Log Files dialog box, select another log file type, and click Open. The software displays the
log file in the previously opened Excel workbook but in another worksheet.
6. Click Close.
The software creates log files only after you activate the log file option on the General
tab of the Preferences dialog box.

Troubleshooting Rule Inconsistencies

When you modify the value of any property of an item for which rules are defined in the Rule
Manager and the software detects a value that is inconsistent with one or more rules, the
software responds in accordance with the action specified for the inconsistency. You can view
inconsistencies for selected items at the time of data updating, or you can display a summary of
rule inconsistency statistics and view a log file with details of the inconsistencies at any
time. The software displays inconsistencies for values of item properties and of relationship
properties between a main item and an item associated with it.
When viewing inconsistencies at the time of updating, you can choose to accept or reject
inconsistencies where the action specified is Warn. If you accept the inconsistency, the
software saves the data and warns you that the inconsistency exists each time you update the
data. If you reject the inconsistency, the software does not update the database with values
that violate the rules.
When the specified action is Reject, the software does not update the database until you fix the
values that violate the rule.
After viewing inconsistencies, you can change the data values manually as needed to meet the
rule criteria.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 880

 Troubleshooting Errors and Rule Inconsistencies

Fix Inconsistencies
This option checks for rule violations. The command opens the log that shows the
inconsistencies that are found and displays a summary of rule violations that may have occurred
for the selected items. Also, this feature finds plant items that violate an existing copy rule
whose copy option works in one direction and has a reject action. In this case, the software fixes
the violation by activating that copy rule for the troublesome plant item and copies the required
value or property to avoid the rule violation. Note that the main purpose of this feature is to
check and trigger the new rules for plant items that were created before the rules were in place.
1. Click Actions > Fix Inconsistencies.
2. To display the log file as an .xlsm file, on the Fix Inconsistencies dialog box, click Show
Log.

▪ To make this feature available in Smart Electrical, in the General Settings of Options
Manager, select Enable for the Consistency Rules setting.
▪ You can also display the log file in Excel format if you require.

Troubleshoot Rule Inconsistencies

This procedure applies when you update any data value for an item where there are one or
more rule violations. After you click OK or Apply on a Common Properties dialog box, or you
update a value in the Properties window or the EDE, you can view the rule inconsistencies.
1. If a message appears prompting you to view rule inconsistencies, click Yes.
2. On the Rule Inconsistencies dialog box, do one of the following:
▪ Click Reject Operation to close the dialog box without saving updated data values.
▪ Click Accept Inconsistencies to close the dialog box and save the data even though
the data values violate the rules.
▪ Click Close to close the dialog box when one or more rule inconsistencies exist for
which the action is specified as Reject.
The commands Reject Operation and Accept Inconsistencies apply only to
inconsistencies for which the action is Warn. These commands only appear when there are no
inconsistencies that specify the Reject action.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 881

 Troubleshooting Errors and Rule Inconsistencies

Operator Descriptions and Rule Examples

Describes operators available on the Consistency tab of the Rule Properties dialog box. Also,
provides examples of rules that you can create using a particular operator.
In the examples shown in the table, the rule components are displayed in brackets to
separate them visually from properties or values. When a string that follows an operator does
not start with a bracket, this indicates a single component rule.

Operator Description Rule Example

= functions as 'equal to' with In a filtered subset of 1hp motors:

numeric characters or as (Motor) Rated voltage = 120 v
'like' with text strings

> greater than (Cable) Insulation rated voltage > (Motor) Rated
voltage

>= greater than or equal to (Motor) Rated power >= (Motor) Brake power

< smaller than (Motor) Asynchronous speed < (Motor) Synchronous

speed

<= smaller than or equal to (Motor) Asynchronous speed <= (Motor)

Synchronous speed

<> or equal to In a filtered subset of heaters with heater rated power

above 10kW:
(Heater) Number of phases <> 1

IN any of the specified values In a filtered subset of 10hp motors:

(Motor) Rated voltage In 380 V; 415 V; 460 V
Comment: The values are case- sensitive and must
be typed exactly as they appear in the Data
Dictionary. The value separator must be either a
semi-colon or a comma.

Is Null ensures whether the user Supply ACDC Is Null

enters values for the item
tag belonging to the rule
component

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 882

 Troubleshooting Errors and Rule Inconsistencies

Operator Description Rule Example

Is Not Null used for testing or (Cable) Design length >= (Cable) Estimated length
comparing values or (Cable) Design length Is not Null
properties in a conjunction (Cable) Estimated length Is not Null
with another rule Comment: if you do use the Is Not Null operator in
consistency this rule, the software treats the expression as true
even if the values for the (Cable) Design length and
(Cable) Estimated length properties are not defined
at all.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 883

SECTION 37

Appendix
In This Section
Smart Electrical Data Model .......................................................... 884
Customizing Your Data .................................................................. 884
API Programming for Smart Electrical ........................................... 886
Electrical Calculations .................................................................... 886
Custom Validations and Calculations ............................................ 891
Switching the Plant Operational Mode .......................................... 895
Custom Common Properties Forms .............................................. 896
Typical Cable Block Diagram Utility Dialog Box ............................ 900

Smart Electrical Data Model

The data model is the persistent storage structure for data manipulated by Smart Electrical.
The Smart Electrical Data Model Excel spreadsheet is a two-dimensional representation of the
Smart Electrical data model. This spreadsheet lists item types, item properties, and data types,
as well as all the constructed item attributions that apply to Electrical objects. This list is
alphabetical according to item type.
The SPELDataModel.xlsx file is located in your Smart Electrical installation folder > Program
Files > SmartPlant > Electrical > Program > resdlls > 0009 > SPELDataModel.xlsx.

Customizing Your Data

Many of the data values that you use in Smart Electrical appear in select lists. You can
customize some of the select lists by modifying existing values, hiding or displaying particular
values, or adding new values using the Update Select Lists (see "Update Select Lists Dialog
Box" on page 928) dialog box. For further information on how to use this feature, refer to Online
Help for the Data Dictionary Manager.
The software uses the values in certain select lists to filter the values of other properties or to
perform calculations. We strongly recommend that you not make any changes to the values in
these select lists. If you do, proceed with extreme caution before modifying any of these select
lists, because doing so can adversely affect your data. The following select lists belong to this
category:
▪ Application
▪ Cable Application Area
▪ Cable Structure
▪ Cable Tray Construction
▪ Cableway Segment
▪ Cell Usage

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 884

 Appendix

▪ Conformity To Standard
▪ Core Phase Usage
▪ Count Quality
▪ Current Transformer Ratio
▪ Document Category
▪ Document Type
▪ Equipment Type Identifier
▪ Frequency
▪ Function
▪ Instrument Function Type
▪ Instrument Process Function
▪ KKS Component Key
▪ KKS Component Key B1
▪ KKS Equipment Unit Key
▪ KKS Equipment Unit Key A1
▪ KKS System Key
▪ KKS System Key F1
▪ KKS System Key F1 F2
▪ kVClass
▪ Length Units of Measure
▪ LRC Code Letter
▪ Plant Group Type
▪ Project Setting Type
▪ Restart Flag
▪ Routing
▪ Segment Category
▪ Source Name
▪ System Cable Category
▪ Tapping
▪ Tray Fill Validation Method
▪ Unit of Measure

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 885

 Appendix

API Programming for Smart Electrical

Smart Electrical enables you to use API programming. Make sure that you install the Smart
Electrical Programming Reference when installing Smart Electrical. For details, see Smart
Electrical Installation Guide > Installing the Software > Install Smart Electrical.
To access the Smart Electrical Programming Reference, do the following:
▪ In Microsoft Visual Studio 2012 or 2013, click Help > View Help > Smart Electrical
Programming Reference.
The Smart Electrical API allows you to do the following:
▪ Create an application that can access and use Smart Electrical data,
▪ Create custom commands in Smart Electrical.
▪ Customize Smart Electrical reports.
▪ Expand the capabilities of custom validation and calculation in Smart Electrical.
Using API programming for Smart Electrical does not hold an additional seat if
you use API while running Smart Electrical. However, if you use API programming without
running Smart Electrical, an additional seat is held until exiting API programming.

Electrical Calculations
The software calculates electrical power requirements for motors based on the load data you
enter, which in turn comes from the motor manufacturer. On the Electrical Motor Common
Properties dialog box, Electrical Data tab (see "Electrical Data Tab (Electrical Motor Common
Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1037), the software displays the results of the electrical power
requirement calculations.

Calculations for Motors

Input Data
The software requires the following data, which you enter on the Electrical Motor Common
Properties dialog box, Load Data tab (see "Load Data Tab (Electrical Motor Common Properties
Dialog Box)" on page 1035):
Motor rated power - Specifies the maximum mechanical power requirement for the motor.
Brake power - Specifies the mechanical power requirement for the motor at the demand point.
Demand factor - The software calculates the demand factor as the ratio of the brake power to
the motor rated power. The demand factor represents the operating point of the motor that the
software uses for the calculations.
Power factor - The software calculates the power factor at the operating point based on the
standard power factor values at 50%, 75%, and 100% of the motor rated power.
Efficiency - The software calculates the efficiency at the operating point based on the standard
efficiency values at 50%, 75%, and 100% of the motor rated power.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 886

 Appendix

Power Factor Calculations

The software calculates the power factor and efficiency at the operating point by assuming a
linear relation between the standard values at 50%, 75%, and 100% of the motor rated power
and interpolating accordingly. For an operating point below 50% of the motor rated power, the
software extrapolates using the known slope between the values at 50% and 75% of the motor
rated power.
The following values apply to power factor calculations:
▪ PF50 = power factor @ 50% (number between 0 and 1)
▪ PF75 = power factor @ 75% (number between 0 and 1)
▪ PF100 = power factor @ 100% (number between 0 and 1)
▪ PF@DF = power factor @ demand factor (number between 0 and 1)
▪ DF = demand factor (number between 0 and 1)
▪ EF@OP = efficiency @ operating point (number between 0 and 1)
The graph shows how the software uses the user input values to calculate the power factor at a
given demand factor.

Based on the graph, the software calculates the power factor for different ranges of the demand
factor using the following formulas.
For a demand factor between 75% and 100%:

For a demand factor between 50% and 75%:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 887

 Appendix

For a demand factor below 50%:

The software uses a similar set of formulas to calculate the efficiency.

Locked Rotor Current Calculation by Code Letter

(Applicable for NEC)
Indicating a code letter copies a fixed value from the LockedRotorIndicatingCodeLetters
lookup table to the kVA to HP ratio property.

Apparent Power (VA) = 1000  kVA to HP ratio * Motor Rated Power (hp)

This equation is applicable only when setting the conformity standard to NEC and the
FLA calculation to TABLES.

Calculations for Static Loads

Rated Power
Rated power is the electrical output power of a load as it appears on the load nameplate. The
units of measure depend on the type of load.

Absorbed Power
This is the output electrical power at normal operating point.

Demand Factor
This is the ratio of the load power requirement at a specified operating point to the rated power.
The demand factor influences the consumed electrical power of the load.
The software calculates the demand factor as the ratio of the absorbed power to the rated
power. The demand factor represents the operating point of the load that the software uses for
the calculations. Demand factor values can be inserted manually or calculated as the ratio of
absorbed power to rated power.

Power Factor
This is the power factor of a static load at rated or operating point. Power factor values can be
between zero and one, entered manually.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 888

 Appendix

Efficiency
This is the efficiency of a static load at rated and operating point. Efficiency values can be
between zero and one, entered manually.

Equations
The software uses the following equation to calculate absorbed power (or demand factor):

Electrical Power Calculations

The software calculates the rated, particular, and consumed load, that is, the electrical power,
using the equations below.
The following equations are used to calculate rated value for all static loads except for
capacitors and harmonic filters:

The following equations are used to calculate consumed value for all static loads except for
capacitors and harmonic filters:

The following equations are used to calculate consumed values for capacitors and harmonic
filters:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 889

 Appendix

Reactive Load (kVAR) = Absorbed Power (kVAR)

▪ For static loads, the software uses the values of the absorbed and rated electrical power to
calculate the electrical quantities.
▪ For capacitors and harmonic filters, the active load property is disabled and has a null value.
▪ For heaters, the reactive load property is disabled and has a null value.

Calculation of Full Load Current

The software uses the following formulas to calculate full load current.

Where:
▪ k=1 for DC and single-phase AC
▪ k=3 for three-phase AC
▪ Rated voltage is the line voltage

Calculation of Synchronous Speed

The software calculates the synchronous speed of a motor or a generator according to the
following equation:

Earth Loop Impedance Calculation

Earth loop impedance is the total resistance between the current source and earth when
clearing a faulty current to earth. The earth loop impedance determines the maximum potential
between the point at which the fault occurs and earth. The software performs earth loop
impedance per cable and calculates the total impedance as the sum of the grounding path
impedance, external loop impedance, and impedance of the cable carrying the
current. According to the user's requirement, the grounding path can be through the cable
armor, or through a separate grounding cable.
You can find this information in the Cable Algorithms.xlsm file, which resides in Smart
Electrical program folder:
\Program Files (x86)\SmartPlant\Electrical\bin\resdlls\0009\

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 890

 Appendix

In the file, maximize the window and click the EARTH LOOP IMPEDANCE tab.

Custom Validations and Calculations

The software uses validations to check the input values of properties and if required, to change
the values of other properties prior to processing by the Smart Electrical business layer.
Calculations provide a means of allowing data input for a property using a separate dialog
box. When you specify a calculation, an ellipsis appears beside the value of the property in the
Properties window of Smart Electrical or beside the appropriate text box on a Common
Properties dialog box.

Implement Validation
1. Create a Visual Studio C# project with type Custom Library.
2. On the project Properties dialog box, type a project name.
3. Ensure that the SPELCustomInf.tlb file is registered on the machine where you are going to
build your custom .dll file by using the regtlib command. This file should be located in the
folder where Smart Electrical is installed and contains the appropriate interfaces that the VB
project must reference.
Validation implements the interface ISPELValidate, which contains the DoValidate
method and LastErrorMessage property.
4. In the References dialog box, ensure that SP Electrical Customization Interfaces is
selected, then click OK.
5. Create a reference to the file C:\Program
Files\SmartPlant\Electrical\Program\ISPClientData3V2.dll.
6. Create a class containing your code (for an example of a validation task, see Validation
Code Example).
7. Compile the .dll file and place it in the required folder.
The DLL should be compiled using Microsoft .Net Framework 4.6.2
8. Open the Data Dictionary Manager (Data Dictionary Manager.exe) and click Database
Tables .
9. Select the required item (for example, Plant Item) and double-click the required property of
that item (for example, Name).
You need to have an understanding of the database table structure in order to
decide which item and property to select.
10. Beside Validation ID, type a ProgID which is usually made up of <Class Library
name>.<Class name>. For example, if the Class Library name is MyCustomValidation and
the class name is Class1.cs, the ProgID you would type is MyCustomValidation.Class1.
You can associate each item type property with one class only; however, the
function code in the class can specify any number of cases or conditions.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 891

 Appendix

11. Run Smart Electrical to check that the code works (make sure that you are connected to the
correct plant).

▪ The software performs the custom validation whenever you change the value of the property
in the Properties window, in the EDE, and if appropriate, in a Common Properties dialog
box. The software does not validate changed data input that originates from elsewhere, for
example, lookup tables.
▪ The software performs custom validations prior to performing validations in the business
object layer; however, if a custom validation conflicts with a business layer rule, the software
ignores the custom validation.
▪ If a custom validation affects other properties that have their own custom validation
definitions, the software only performs the validation for the property where you change the
value directly; it ignores the custom validations for the other properties.
▪ When performing a total bus load validation, the software accounted only for those items
that are defined as consumers. In addition to loads, you can define other electrical items as
consumers. These items are converting equipment items, local panels, and junction boxes.
To define an item as a consumer, you have to set the Is Load property in the Properties
window for that item to True or define this electrical item as a Consumer in the Common
Properties dialog box of that item.

Implement Calculation
1. Create a Visual Studio C# project with type Class Library.
2. On the project Properties dialog box, type a project name.
3. Ensure that the SPELCustomInf.tlb file is registered on the machine where you are going to
build your custom .dll file. This file should be located in the folder where Smart Electrical is
installed and contains the appropriate interfaces that the C# project must reference.
Calculation implements the interface ISPELCalculate, which contains the
DoCalculate method.
4. In the References dialog box, ensure that SP Electrical Customization Interfaces is
selected, then click OK.
5. Create a reference to the file C:\Program
Files\SmartPlant\Electrical\Program\ISPClientData3V2.dll.
6. Create a class containing your code.
7. Compile the .dll file and place it in the required folder.
You should compile the DLL with Microsoft Framework .Net 4.6.2.
8. Open the Data Dictionary Manager (Data Dictionary Manager.exe) and click Database
Tables .
9. Select the required item (for example, Plant Item) and double-click the required property of
that item (for example, Name).
You need to have an understanding of the database table structure in order to
decide which item and property to select.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 892

 Appendix

10. Beside Calculation ID, type a ProgID which is usually made up of <Project name>.<Class
name>. For example, if the Project name is MyCustomValidation and the class name is
Class1.cs, the ProgID you would type is MyCustomValidation.Class1.
11. Run Smart Electrical to check that the code works (make sure that you are connected to the
correct plant).

Validation Code Example

The code in the following validation example allows you to change the value in the Name
property of a motor item type. Also, this code modifies the value in the Description property and
changes it to a string made up of the item type (motor), the item tag, and the string 'custom
validated'.
1. In the General Declarations section of the class add the following lines:
Option Explicit Implements SPELCustomInf.ISPELValidate Private m_strLastErrorMessage
As String
2. Implement the DoValidate method as follows:
public class MotorNameValidation : ISPELValidate
{
private string _lastErrorMsg;

public string LastErrorMessage => _lastErrorMsg;

public bool DoValidate(ISPItem objISPItem, string strPropName,

object varNewValue)
{
if (objISPItem.ItemType.Name != "Motor")
{
_lastErrorMsg = "Motors only allowed!";
return false;
}

objISPItem.Attributes["Description"].Value =
$"{objISPItem.ItemType.Name}
{objISPItem.Attributes["ItemTag"].Value} {varNewValue}";

return true;
}
}

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 893

 Appendix

Item Type Validation Example

The code in the following example allows you to write an item type validation routine that will
improve the efficiency of your plant or project.
The following example deals with the item type validation of Motors. The example shows how a
motor with a Rated Power of 20hp and Rated Voltage of 460 volts, can only be saved with
specific values. In this example these three properties must have specific values in order to save
the Motor. The three properties and their values are;
▪ Supply = AC
▪ Number of phases = 3
▪ Frequency = 60Hz
If any of these conditions are not met an error message is displayed.
For this code example to work, prior to implementing the item type validation, you
have to create a new custom property for motors in Data Dictionary.
You can use this example code to write your own programming routine for a different item type.
public class MotorValidation : ISPELItemValidation
{
private string _lastErrorMessage;
public string LastErrorMessage => _lastErrorMessage;
public bool SavingItem(ISPItem objISPItem)
{
try
{
// Works only for Motor
if (objISPItem.ItemType.Name != "Motor")
{
return true;
}

// Get the fields that are involved in calculation with

SI(The International System of Units) values
var ratedPower =
objISPItem.Attributes["MotorRatedPower"].Value as string;
var voltage =
objISPItem.Attributes["RatedVoltage"].Value as string;

// Validation for 25hp and 460v only

if (ratedPower != "20 hp" && voltage != "460 V")
{
return true;
}

var supply =
objISPItem.Attributes["SupplyAcDcFlag"].Value as string;
if (supply != "AC")
{
_lastErrorMessage = "Motor supply must be AC";

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 894

 Appendix

return false;
}

var phasesNum =
objISPItem.Attributes["NoOfPhases"].Value as string;
if (phasesNum != "3")
{
_lastErrorMessage = "Motor number of phases must be 3";
return false;
}

var frequency = objISPItem.Attributes["Frequency"].Value

as string;
if (frequency != "60 Hz")
{
_lastErrorMessage = "Motor Frequency must be 60Hz";
return false;
}

}
catch (Exception err)
{
_lastErrorMessage = err.Message;
return false;
}

return true;
}
}

Switching the Plant Operational Mode

Smart Electrical enables you to define various plant operational cases (modes). Typically, such
a mode can be, for example, Winter Loads, Summer Loads, and so on. After defining an
operational mode, you can, in one single operation, switch all the motors, instruments and
cabinets to a mode that you select.
For this operation to work, you need to add new properties in user-defined fields for the alternate
case (mode) load data, create appropriate rules in the Rule Manager, and define a filter in the
Filter Manager. Once you make all these definitions, you can select a specific operational mode
that will trigger the copying mechanism in Smart Electrical, thus switching to the appropriate
scenario. After switching to another operational mode, the software makes a global update of
the relevant values that affect all the direct electrical calculations that use these values. You can
see these values in the Properties window or the Common Properties dialog box for specific
electrical items.
Contact Smart Electrical technical support if you need help with the configuration of
an operational case.
1. In Smart Electrical, click Actions > Switch Plant Operational Mode.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 895

 Appendix

2. On the Switch Plant Operational Mode dialog box, select an appropriate operational
mode.
3. Click OK.

Custom Common Properties Forms

You can create custom common properties forms that you can use in addition to the standard
built-in common properties dialog boxes in Smart Electrical. You can design your custom
common properties form in any way that fits your needs. You can include as many property
fields as you like as long as they appear in the Properties window for the item type for which
your custom form is intended. You cannot include a property field that does not appear in the
Properties window. You can create several forms for the same item type and all of these
custom forms will be available for all the electrical items belonging to that specific item types.
Custom forms are created per user and these forms will not be available to other
users unless you copy the SPELCustomForms.xml file and the project DLL file that you created
in Microsoft Visual Studio to the same locations on your computer, namely, the Smart Electrical
installation folder, for example:
c:\Program Files\SmartPlant\Electrical\Program\...
The customization process consists of the following two work flows:
Creating a Custom Common Properties Form
and
Defining Custom Forms in Smart Electrical
After completing these two work flows, you will be able to open either the standard built-in
common properties form or one of the custom forms that you have defined for the current item
type.

Create a Custom Common Properties Form

The following procedure contains the required work flow for the creation of a customized
common properties form in Microsoft Visual Studio.
1. In Microsoft Visual Studio6, create a C# Windows Form Application project.
You must use Microsoft .NET Framework 4.6.2.
2. Add any required references to SPELControls.dll and SpelCustomInf.dll
3. Rename Form1.cs to your custom form name.
4. Inside the Form1.cs file, add Namespaces, Ingr.Spel.SPELControls, and SpelCustomInf.
5. Set Form1.cs to implement ISPLCustomForm interface.
6. Add required controls to the form.
A Combo box must be of type SPELCombobox.
7. Define a tag for each control with the appropriate name.
The tag name must be the same as the Smart Electrical property name in
the Data Dictionary.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 896

 Appendix

8. Set Class Library as an Output type.

9. Create .dll.
10. Place the .dll in the SPEL home folder > bin with the .xml file

Example Code for Creating a Custom Motor Form.

public partial class MotorForm : Form, ISPELCustomForm

{
IFormEngine _formEngine;
public MotorForm()
{
InitializeComponent();
}

public Form CreateForm(string strFormName, IFormEngine

objFormEngine)
{
this._formEngine = objFormEngine;
this.Name = strFormName;

return this;
}

// method must be added to a DropDown event for fill the combo

private void comboBox1_DropDown(object sender, EventArgs e)
{
_formEngine.OnDropDown(sender as SPELComboBox);
}

// must be added to SelectedIndexChanged event for select value

private void comboBox1_SelectedIndexChanged(object sender,
EventArgs e)
{
_formEngine.ValueChange(sender as SPELComboBox);
}

private void comboBox2_DropDown(object sender, EventArgs e)

{
_formEngine.OnDropDown(sender as SPELComboBox);
}

private void comboBox2_SelectedIndexChanged(object sender,

EventArgs e)
{
_formEngine.ValueChange(sender as SPELComboBox);
}

// method for textbox value change

private void textBox2_TextChanged(object sender, EventArgs e)
{
_formEngine.ValueChange(sender as TextBox);
}

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 897

 Appendix

private void comboBox3_DropDown(object sender, EventArgs e)

{
_formEngine.OnDropDown(sender as SPELComboBox);
}

private void comboBox3_SelectedIndexChanged(object sender,

EventArgs e)
{
_formEngine.ValueChange(sender as SPELComboBox);
}

// to save changes to a database

private void button1_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
{
Cursor.Current = Cursors.WaitCursor;
_formEngine.SaveChanges();
this.Close();
}

// to close the form

private void button2_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
{
this.Close();
}
}

Define Custom Forms in Smart Electrical

The following procedure explains how to define the available custom common properties form in
Smart Electrical.
Smart Electrical provides two files that are located in the Program folder of
your Smart Electrical installation. These two files are SPELCustomForms.xml and
SPELCustomForms.xsd. Make sure that you do not move these files from this location and
that you do not make any changes to the SPELCustomForms.xsd file.
To integrate your custom forms, edit the SPELCustomForms.xml file. If you want to keep the
SPELCustomForms.xml file as an example, rename it or copy it to another location.
Here is an example of such an XML file:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<ItemTypes xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.lll.com SPELCustomForms.xsd">
<ItemType Name="Motor" DefaultProgId =
"CustomForm.CustomEdit">
<Forms>
<Form Name = "Motor_Form1" Description =
"Motors - type 1 />
<Form Name = "Motor_Form2" ProgId
="CustomForm.CustomEdit" Description = "Motors - type 1" />

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 898

 Appendix

<Form Name = "Motor_Form3" ProgId

="CustomForm.CustomEdit" Description = "Motors - type 2" />
<Form Name = "Motor_Form4" ProgId
="CustomForm.CustomEdit" Description = "Motors - type 3" />
</Forms>
</ItemType>
<ItemType Name="Generator" DefaultProgId =
"CustomForm.CustomEdit">
<Forms>
<Form Name = "Cable_Form1" ProgId
="CustomForm.CustomEdit" Description = "Power Cables" />
<Form Name = "Cable_Form2" ProgId
="CustomForm.CustomEdit" Description = "Instr. Cables" />
</Forms>
</ItemType>
</ItemTypes>

When editing the SPELCustomForms.xml file, remember the following:

▪ For each item type, there has to be an <ItemType> node that points to the appropriate
Visual Studio Class Library and module class according to the following syntax:
<ItemType Name="Motor" DefaultProgId = "[Class Library Project
Name].[Module Class Name]">
For example:
<ItemType Name="Motor" DefaultProgId = "CustomForm.CustomEdit">
If a form that you created belongs to a project different from the one indicated in
the DefaultProgId node, add a new line in the <Forms> node that points to the required
project.
▪ Under the <ItemType> node, there has to be a <Forms> node under which you add all the
forms that you want to have for this item type.
▪ Each <Form Name> node must have a name definition and it can have a ProgId and
description definitions. Use the following syntax:
<Form Name = "[Form Name]" ProgId ="[Class Library Project Name].[Module
Class Name]" Description = "[Text]" />
Note the following:
▪ There must be a name definition for each form. This name will appear on the Select
Common Properties dialog box, in the Common Properties Form field.
▪ You can define a ProgId different from the default ProgId or you can omit this definition
if you like. If there is no ProgId for a particular form, the default ProgId will be in use.
▪ The Description definition that you type here will appear on the Select Common
Properties dialog box, in the Description field. You can omit the Definition description
if you like.
▪ If you want to add another form for a different item type, define an additional <ItemType
Name> node for that form.
▪ If want to share your custom forms with another user, copy the DLL file that was created by
Visual Studio and the SPELCustomForms.xml file to the Smart Electrical installation folder

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 899

 Appendix

of the user who will share your custom forms. There is no need to copy the
SPELCustomForms.xsd file as it is provided with every installation.
Remember that you must register the DLL file once it is copied to another
computer.

Select Common Properties Form Dialog Box

Whenever you want to open the common properties of a particular electrical item, this dialog box
opens automatically if a custom common properties form exists for the current item type.
The dialog box allows you to select a custom common properties form or the standard built-in
common properties form that you want to open for the current electrical item. For information on
how to create custom common properties forms, see Custom Common Properties Forms.
The dialog options are as follows:
Common Properties Form — Lists the names of all the existing custom forms for the current
item type. The custom form names are defined in the SPELCustomForms.xml file, under the
<Forms> node. For details, see Define Custom Forms in Smart Electrical.
Note that the standard built-in common properties form is always at the
top of the list.
Description — Displays a brief description of the available common properties forms. This is
the text that has been entered in the <Form Name> node, after Description in the
SPELCustomForms.xml file.
OK — Opens the selected common properties form and closes this dialog.

Typical Cable Block Diagram Utility Dialog Box

The typical cable block diagram utility enables you to save typical cable block diagram data as
an external ZIP file and then transfer the typical cable block diagram data to other plants created
from a custom Data Dictionary template. For example, if you created a new plant based on a
custom data dictionary template, you will have to copy the typical cable block data to your new
plant. The software saves the typical cable block diagram data in a ZIP file. The whole
procedure consists of two main steps: saving the data and then integrating it in a new plant.
To save your typical cable block diagram data:
1. Run the SPELTypicalCBDUtil.exe file which is located in the installation folder of your Smart
Electrical, for example:
C:\Program Files\SmartPlant\Electrical\Program\SPELTypicalCBDutil.exe
2. Select the Save typical CBD data option.
3. Under File name, type the name of the new ZIP file.

4. Click to navigate to the folder where you want to save the new ZIP file.
5. Click Run.
To integrate your typical cable block diagram data in another plant:
1. Run the SPELTypicalCBDUtil.exe file to start the utility if needed.
2. Select the Integrate typical CBD data option.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 900

 Configuration File Settings for MicroStation Translation

3. Click to navigate to the appropriate ZIP file which contains the typical CBD data.
4. Click Run.
The dialog options are as follows:
Save typical CBD data — Saves the typical CBD data as an external ZIP file in the location
indicated under File name.
Integrate typical CBD data — Unzips the external file and integrates the typical CBD data into
the current plant (indicated in the title bar of this dialog box).
File name — Allows you to type and display the name and file path of the ZIP file that you want
to save or unzip. Click to navigate to the appropriate location.
Run — Saves the data as a Zip file or integrates the unzipped typical CBD data depending on
the option you selected above.
Change Plant — Allows you to change the plant where you want to save the ZIP file or where
you want to integrate the unzipped typical CBD data.

Configuration File Settings for

MicroStation Translation
The configuration file, itmstn.ini, is delivered with the Translators option to [Product
Folder]\Program\Rad2d\bin. This configuration file is used by translators and provides the
capability for customizing the process of translation between the software and a MicroStation
document.
Many of the options found in the itmstn.ini file are accessible through the
various tabs on the MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box (on page 1160) and the
MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box (on page 1158). It is recommended that options
modified directly in the .ini file be done so only by an experienced user at his/her own risk.
The following table defines the .ini settings, along with any corresponding default values:

[Name of the Section]/

Name of the Setting Description Import Export Default Value

[Options]

Seed File Name of a seed file used for N/A Yes Seed2d.dgn .dgn file name
export.

Enable Logging If set, a log file will be created. Yes Yes 0 0/1

Read Default Units Sets the default units used Yes N/A 64 59=m; 61=mm; 62=cm;
when importing foreign data. 63=km; 64=in; 65=ft;
66=yd; 67=mil

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 901

 Configuration File Settings for MicroStation Translation

[Name of the Section]/

Name of the Setting Description Import Export Default Value

Template File Sets the document that will be Yes N/A TransMstn.igr .igr file name
used as a template when or .sha file name
importing foreign data. TransMstn.sh (SmartSketch Drawing
a Editor)

Symbol Template File Sets the symbol file that will be Yes N/A File name
used as a template when
importing foreign data.

Dissolve Symbol to Groups A flag that indicates whether or N/A Yes 0 0/1
not to dissolve parametric and
multi-representation symbols to
groups.

Ignore Sheet Scale If set to 1, the translated file fits Yes N/A 1 0/1
to the sheet size by adjusting
the sheet scale.

Processing Batch If set, progress bar dialog boxes Yes Yes 1 0/1
Translation do not display during the
translation.

Attribute Sets Names of attribute sets. Yes Yes _SymInst String consisting of
attribute set names
delimited by semicolons.

Read Cell Options Specifies how shared cells in Yes N/A Shared Rigid groups/ Shared
MicroStation are handled. The embeds embeds
first option translates cells into
groups, whereas the second
option translates cells into
symbols.

Import Cells2 as Symbols Specifies that Type 2 cells Yes N/A 0 0=Type2 cells are
should be imported from imported as groups.
MicroStation V8 files as either
groups or symbols. 1=Type2 cells are
imported as symbols.

Write Version Sets what version of the foreign N/A Yes 8 7, 8

file format is created on export
when you invoke the Save As
method from the API, or when
you save to DGN from a Smart
3D task.

Read Reference Options Specifies options to process Yes N/A Translate/ Link/ Merge
reference files during
translation.

Read Reference Paths Specifies the paths for reference Yes N/A Folder Name
files.

Sub Units Per Master Units Sets the value to determine the Yes N/A 10 Number
sub units used for importing
MicroStation cell files.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 902

 Configuration File Settings for MicroStation Translation

[Name of the Section]/

Name of the Setting Description Import Export Default Value

Pos Units Per Sub Units Sets the value to determine the Yes N/A 1000 Number
positional units used for
importing MicroStation cell files.

Max. Nesting Depth Determines how deep the Yes N/A 0 Number
translation processes the nested
reference files.

Application Text Type Specifies details for text Yes Yes 0 0 = Text origin is always
translation. in the upper left corner.
1 = Origin preserved.
2 = Reserved for future
use.
4 = Indicates that when
the text is imported from a
MicroStation file that has
both horizontal and
vertical mirroring, then
Smart Electrical adds180
degrees to the existing
angle. In this case, Smart
Electrical does not set the
mirroring properties on
the text to attain
WYSIWYG (What You
See Is What You Get)
(Import Only).
5 = Provides a combined
effect of values 1 and 4.

MS Resource Files Determines the location of Yes N/A Folder name

MicroStation resource files.

Process Non- Displayable Determines if non-displayable Yes Yes 1 0/1

Reference Files reference files are translated.

Attributes as Smart Text Determines if SmartText is Yes N/A 0 0 = Translates tag data as
created from MicroStation tag SmartText.
data.
1 = Translates tag data as
text boxes.

EDF as Smart Text Determines if tags are Yes N/A 0 0/1

processed as SmartText.

Stroke Reference Determines if attached N/A Yes 0/1

reference files are stroked on
export.

Stroke Text Determines if text is stroked N/A Yes 0 0/1

during export.

Disk-based Symbols When set to 1, .sym files are Yes N/A 0 0/1
created for each cell in a .dgn
file during import.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 903

 Configuration File Settings for MicroStation Translation

[Name of the Section]/

Name of the Setting Description Import Export Default Value

Ignore Non-Displayable When set to 1, non-displayable N/A Yes 0 0/1

Symbols objects are exported.

Preserve Layers on If set, members of symbols are N/A Yes 0 0/1

Dissolved Symbols exported even if their layer is
turned off.

Preserve MSTN UDLS When set to 0, user-defined Yes Yes 1 0/1

styles linestyles are stroked.

Push Owner Attributes to its If set to 1, dynamic attributes N/A Yes 1 0/1
Children are moved from a group
(symbol) to its members.

Metafile to Raster DPI Sets the dpi resolution for raster N/A Yes 350 DPI resolution
resolution metadata during export.

Stroking Tolerance Determines the accuracy used N/A Yes 0.1 millimeters
when objects are stroked during
export.

Always Shift GO to Center In case the document range is N/A Yes 0 0/1
Drawing not larger than the .dgn file
design plane but is outside of it.

No Background Color If background is white, forces it N/A Yes 0/1

to be black (does not apply to
the printout image).

Hatch supported complexity Supported hatch complexity of N/A Yes 1 (only

output format. supports a
single
independent
hatch line with
dashes and
gaps)

Need hatch description and If true, then stroke hatch even N/A Yes 0 0/1
stroke when hatch name and
description are included in
symbology.

Style Resource Name Sets the style filename to be N/A Yes Filename
used on export.

Delete Symbol Definitions If set, symbol definitions are Yes N/A 1 0/1
deleted after the translation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 904

 Configuration File Settings for MicroStation Translation

[Name of the Section]/

Name of the Setting Description Import Export Default Value

Symbol Layers Saves the level information by Yes N/A 0 If set to 0, it allows setting
pushing each symbol to the Honor Layer Display ON
level of its first graphical for Graphic cells and OFF
element. for Point Cells.
If set to 1, it forces the
Honor Layer Display to be
OFF.
If set to 2, it honors the
Symbol Layers = 0 setting
and pushes symbols to
the same level as that of
its first graphical element.
If set to 3, it forces Honor
Layer display to be OFF,
and pushes all the
symbols to the same level
as that of its first
graphical element.

Export Transparency Specifies how objects with N/A Yes 100 0-100.
Threshold transparency are translated.
Any object with a transparency If set to 0, objects with
that is less than or equal to the transparency are not
Export Transparency Threshold translated.
is translated. Otherwise, the If set to 100, all objects
object is not translated. with transparency are
translated.
If you open the
DGN file in MicroStation, then
any translated objects display
with no transparency. For
example, if the Export
Transparency Threshold is 60,
and the object transparency is
55, the object is translated, but
displays with 0 transparency.

Merge References If set to 1, linked and embedded N/A Yes 0 0 = No merge

reference files are merged into a
single master file. Image 1 = Merge into master file
references are also merged. If
set to 0, the software does not
merge the referenced files into
the master file.

The Merge
References setting applies only
when saving to the MicroStation
V8 format. This setting does not
apply to MicroStation V7 files.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 905

 Configuration File Settings for MicroStation Translation

[Name of the Section]/

Name of the Setting Description Import Export Default Value

EnableExRGBColor Specifies whether or not the N/A Yes 1 0 = The extended colors
software saves extended colors are not saved to the color
to the color table. table. The software
selects a color for the
This setting applies graphic entity that is
only when saving to the closest to an existing
MicroStation V8 format. color in the color table.
1 = The extended colors
are saved to the color
table.

Process Construction Determines if construction class Yes N/A 0 0 = The software does not
Elements elements are translated. translate construction
class elements.
1 = The software
translates construction
class elements.

[Read Default View] and [Write Default View]

Type Describes the view type of the Yes Yes Read: Active Standard, Transformation
MicroStation file to be imported Matrix, Active
or the Smart Electrical file to be Write:
exported. Standard

Name Specifies the name of the view. Yes N/A Top Top, Front, Right, Bottom,
This is used when Type is set to Left, Back, Isometric,
Standard. Right Isometric

Transformation Specifies the transformation Yes Yes 10000100001 4x4 matrix

matrix when the view type is set 00001
to Transformation Matrix.

Reference Point Yes Yes Read: 0.0 X Y Z value

0.0 0.0
Write: 0.0
1.0 0.0

Normal Yes Yes Read: 1.0 X Y Z value

-1.0 1.0
Write: 0.0
0.0 1.0

Active View Used when Type is set to Yes N/A 1 1 to 8

Active.

[Read Linestyles] and [Write Determines the mapping of Yes Yes

Linestyles] linestyles between the foreign
file format and RAD.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 906

 Configuration File Settings for AutoCAD Translation

[Name of the Section]/

Name of the Setting Description Import Export Default Value

[Read Text Fonts] and Translator configuration files Yes Yes

[Write Text Fonts] can optionally store the
language identifier of the
FontNameOriginal= translated font in the Read Text
FontNameMapped: LangId Fonts section. If no identifier
exists in the configuration file,
RAD uses the identifier set
under the regional settings of
the control panel.

[Read Widths] and [Write Determines the mapping of the Yes Yes
Widths] line widths between the foreign
file format and RAD.

[Write Layers] Determines the mapping of RAD N/A Yes

layers to MicroStation levels.

Configuration File Settings for AutoCAD

Translation
The configuration file, itacad.ini, is delivered with the Translators option to [Product
Folder]\Program\Rad2d\bin. This configuration file is used by translators and provides the
capability for customizing the process of translation between the software and an AutoCAD
document.
Many of the options found in the itacad.ini file are accessible through the
various tabs on the AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box (on page 1154) and AutoCAD Export
Options Dialog Box (on page 1156). It is recommended that options modified directly in the .ini
file be done so only by an experienced user at their own risk.
The following table defines the supported .INI settings, along with any corresponding default
values:

[Name of the Description Import Export Default Value

Section /Name
of the setting]

[Options]

Seed File Name of a seed file used for N/A Yes .dwg file name
export.

Enable Logging If set, a log file will be created. Yes Yes 0 0/1

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 907

 Configuration File Settings for AutoCAD Translation

[Name of the Description Import Export Default Value

Section /Name
of the setting]

Read Default Units Sets the default units used when Yes N/A 64 59=m; 61=mm; 62=cm;
importing foreign data. 63=km; 64=in; 65=ft; 66=yd;
67=mil

Template File Sets the document that will be Yes N/A TransAcad.igr .igr file name
used as a template when importing or .sha file name (SmartSketch
foreign data. TransAcad.sha Drawing Editor)

Symbol Template Sets the symbol file that will be Yes N/A File name
File used as a template when importing
foreign data.

Dissolve Symbol to A flag that indicates whether or not N/A Yes 0 0/1
Groups to dissolve parametric and
multi-representation symbols to
groups.

Ignore Sheet Scale If set to 1, the translated file fits to Yes N/A 1 0/1
the sheet size by adjusting the
sheet scale.

Processing Batch If set, progress bar dialog boxes Yes Yes 1 0/1
Translation do not display during the
translation.

Attribute Sets Names of attribute sets. Yes Yes String consisting of attribute
set names delimited by
semicolons

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 908

 Configuration File Settings for AutoCAD Translation

[Name of the Description Import Export Default Value

Section /Name
of the setting]

Read Block Sets how the blocks imported from Yes N/A Shared embeds Rigid groups/ Shared embeds
Options AutoCAD are handled. The first
option translates blocks into
groups, whereas the second
option translates blocks into
symbols.

Write Version Sets what version of the foreign N/A Yes 2013 2000, 2004, 2007, 2010,
file format is created on export 2013
when you invoke the Save As
method from the API, or when you
save to DWG from a Smart 3D
task.

Read Reference Specifies options to process Yes N/A Translate/Link/Merge

Options reference files during translation.

Read Default Width Sets the width to be assigned to Yes N/A 0.25 Millimeters
AutoCAD entities that do not have
width or color to width mapping.

Write Polyline Sets the width to determine when N/A Yes 10.0 Millimeters
Width Threshold polylines with width are created.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 909

 Configuration File Settings for AutoCAD Translation

[Name of the Description Import Export Default Value

Section /Name
of the setting]

Export All Graphics This flag deals with the export of N/A Yes 2 0/1/2
to PaperSpace files with reference attachments.
If set to 0, all graphic objects are
exported to Model space.
SmartFrames with clipping
boundaries do not display properly
and detail views are ignored. If set
to 1, all graphic objects are
exported into Paper space.
SmartFrames with clipping
boundaries display properly. Detail
views are ignored. If set to 2, all
graphic objects are exported to
Model space and Paper space is
populated so that the original
SmartSketch sheet is recreated.

Process Multiple This flag indicates whether or not Yes N/A 0 0/1
Orientation in to handle multiple orientation in
Viewports viewports.

Max. Determines how deep the Yes N/A -1 Number

Nesting Depth translation processes the nested
reference files.

Application Text Determines if text origin and Yes Yes 1 0 = Text origin is always in
Type justification are preserved. the upper left corner
1 = Origin preserved
2 = Reserved for future use
4 = Not Available

BigFonts Location Provides the location of big fonts Yes No Folder location containing the
that can display text in Asian AutoCAD font files and the
languages. required text mapping files to
be used when importing
AutoCAD drawings. The text
mapping file name must be
the same as the big font
name. All character mapping
text files require a section
called BigFont Mapping.
Example:
[BigFont Mapping]
~8 = 189
(ASCII Value of fractional
value ½)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 910

 Configuration File Settings for AutoCAD Translation

[Name of the Description Import Export Default Value

Section /Name
of the setting]

Single Text If set to 1, horizontal text alignment Yes No 0/1

Alignment is set to Horizontal justification. If
not specified or if it is set to 0,
horizontal text alignment is set to
Left.

Process Determines if non-displayable Yes Yes 0 0/1

Non-Displayable reference files are translated.
Reference Files

Attributes as Smart Determines if SmartText is created Yes N/A 0 0 = Translates attributes as

Text from AutoCAD attributes SmartText
1 = Translates attributes as
text boxes

AutoCAD Extended Sets the XData to be imported. Yes N/A ACADASE String consisting of XData
Data names delimited by
semicolons.

Stroke Reference Determines if attached reference N/A Yes 0/1

files are stroked on export.

Stroke Text Determines if text is stroked on N/A Yes 0/1

export.

Stroke Dimension If set, dimension objects are N/A Yes 1 0/1

stroked on export.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 911

 Configuration File Settings for AutoCAD Translation

[Name of the Description Import Export Default Value

Section /Name
of the setting]

Disk-based When set to 1, .sym files are Yes N/A 0 0/1

Symbols created for each block in a .dwg
during import.

Ignore When set to 1, non-displayable N/A Yes 0/1

Non-Displayable objects are exported.
Symbols

Preserve Layers on If set to 1, members of symbol are N/A Yes 0/1

Dissolved Symbols exported even if their layer is
turned off.

Push Owner If set to 1, dynamic attributes are N/A Yes 1 0/1

Attributes to its moved from a group (symbol) to its
Children members.

Metafile to Raster Sets the dpi resolution for raster N/A Yes 350 DPI resolution
DPI Resolution metadata during export.

Stroking Tolerance Determines the accuracy used N/A Yes 0.1 Millimeters
when objects are stroked during
export.

Hatch supported Supported hatch complexity of N/A Yes 3 1 = only supports a single
complexity output format. independent hatch line with
dashes and gaps)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 912

 Configuration File Settings for AutoCAD Translation

[Name of the Description Import Export Default Value

Section /Name
of the setting]

Need hatch If true, then stroke hatch even N/A Yes 1 0/1
description and when hatch name and description
stroke are included in symbology.

Style Resource Sets the style filename to be used N/A Yes acadpat.igr File name
Name on export.

Delete Symbol If set, symbol definitions are Yes N/A 1 0/1

Definitions deleted after the translation.

Merge References If set to 1 or 2, linked and No Yes 1 0 = No Merge

embedded references are
translated to AutoCAD block 1 = Merge with BIND
references and merged into a 2 = Merge with INSERT
single master DWG file. Image
references are also merged. If set
to 0, separate DWG files will be
generated for each linked and
embedded reference.

AutoCAD Specifies the background color to No Yes -1 Convert the hexadecimal

Background apply to blank entities. This setting color value to a decimal
is used if AutoCAD is not on the number. For example, define
machine where the translation the hexadecimal value for
occurs. If the AutoCAD black, 000000, as 0, and
Background option is not specified, define the hexadecimal value
the color of blank entities displays for white, FFFFFF, as
as black and white in AutoCAD. 16777215.

If AutoCAD is on the
machine where the translation
occurs, the AutoCAD registry
model background color is used,
regardless of the AutoCAD
Background value.

Export Graphic If this option is set to 1, No Yes 1 0/1

Groups SmartSketch groups translate to
AutoCAD as groups. If the option
is set to 0, SmartSketch groups
translate to AutoCAD as individual
objects.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 913

 Configuration File Settings for AutoCAD Translation

[Name of the Description Import Export Default Value

Section /Name
of the setting]

Override Layers on The OLOE ini setting is used only No Yes 1 0 = Seed file layer controls
Export when the itacad.ini file has a seed the visibility and symbology of
file entry. the graphics
1 = RAD document layer
controls the visibility and
symbology of the graphics
2 = Actual block is placed on
the correct layer

Export Specifies how objects with No Yes 100 0-100

Transparency transparency are translated. Any
Threshold object with a transparency that is 0 = Objects with
less than or equal to the Export transparency are not
Transparency Threshold is translated.
translated. Otherwise, the object is 100 = Objects with
not translated. transparency are translated.

▪ If you open the .dwg file

in a version of AutoCAD
that does not support
transparency, then any
translated objects
display with no
transparency.
▪ AutoCAD displays all
objects with a
transparency of 90 and
above with a
transparency of 90. To
completely hide an
object with a
transparency of 90 or
greater, adjust the
Export Transparency
Threshold. For example,
to hide objects with 100
transparency, set the
Export Transparency
Threshold to 99.

Clipping Boundary Allows you to create and Yes No 0 Enter the required size. For
Growth accommodate larger the size units, the software
cross-reference clipping uses the unit value of the
boundaries. Length Readout Units
setting in File > Properties >
Units.

[Read Default View] and [Write Default View]

Type Describes the view type of the Yes Yes Read: Standard Standard, Transformation
AutoCAD file to be imported or the Matrix, Active
Smart Electrical file to be exported. Write:
Transformation
Matrix

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 914

 Configuration File Settings for AutoCAD Translation

[Name of the Description Import Export Default Value

Section /Name
of the setting]

Name Specifies the name of the view. Yes N/A Top Top, Front, Right, Bottom,
This is used when Type is set to Left, Back, NW Isometric, NE
Standard. Isometric, SW Isometric, SE
Isometric

Transformation Specifies the transformation matrix Yes Yes 100001000010 4x4 matrix
when the view type is set to 0001
Transformation Matrix.

Reference Point Yes Yes Read: 0.0 0.0 X Y Z value

0.0
Write: 0.0 1.0
0.0

Normal Yes Yes Read: 1.0 0.0 X Y Z value

0.0
Write: 0.0 0.0
1.0

Projection Yes N/A 1.0 1.0 1.0 X Y Z value

Vector

[Read Linestyles] Determines the mapping of Yes Yes

and [Write linestyles between the foreign file
Linestyles] format and RAD.

[Read Text Fonts] Translator configuration files can Yes Yes

and [Write Text optionally store the language
Fonts] identifier of the translated font in
the Read Text Fonts section. If no
FontNameOriginal= identifier exists in the configuration
FontNameMapped: file, RAD uses the identifier set
LangId under the regional settings of the
control panel.

[Read Widths] and Determines the mapping of the line Yes Yes
[Write Widths] widths between the foreign file
format and RAD.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 915

SECTION 38

Windows and Dialog Boxes

General
Customize Dialog Box
Changes the display of toolbar buttons and menus according to your needs. This dialog box
opens when you click Tools > Customize on the main menu bar.
Menu Tab (on page 916)
Toolbars Tab (on page 917)

Menu Tab
Adds or removes commands from menus or the main menu bar. You can add a command to an
existing menu or build a custom menu with the commands that you want. Or you can add a
single command to the main menu bar.
Add Command — Places a command on a menu. This button is available only when you select
a command or macro in the Commands box or Macros box.
Add Menu — Places a menu at the level currently open on the menu tree. When you add a
menu with this option, you can add commands to the new menu later. If you add a menu to an
existing menu, you create a cascading menu. After you click this button, you can type the name
that you want in the tree view and then enter it by clicking any other location on the dialog box.
Browse — Opens the Select Macro Directory dialog box. When you select a folder and click
OK, the Macros list displays the macros for the folder that you selected. The Browse button
appears only when you choose Macros in the Categories list.
Categories — Allows you to specify the category that you want to select a command or macro
from. Then you can add the command or macro to the menu or main menu bar. When you
select the title of a group of commands in this box, you can click the title of a command in the
Commands list. When you select Macros in the Categories list, you can select a macro from
the Macros list.
Commands — Allows you to specify the command that you want to add to the menu.
Description — Displays a description of the command that you selected before you add it to a
menu. Descriptions do not appear for macros.
Macros — Allows you to specify the macro that you want to add to the menu. If you select a
macro, you can click Browse to change the folder for macros.
Menu Tree — Lists the menus and their associated commands or macros. To see all the
commands on a menu, double-click a menu name or click the "+" next to the menu name. When
you click Add Command, Add Menu, or Remove, the changes show up on the menu tree.
Also, you edit menu and command names in this view.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 916

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Place into selected menu — Overrides the default placement and places a command or macro
on the menu that is currently selected in the menu tree. If you do not set this option, then the
macros, commands, or menus are added at the level that is currently open in the menu tree.
Reset All — Restores all menus and the main menu bar to the original settings.
Remove — Removes the command or menu that you selected in the menu tree.

Toolbars Tab
Adds or removes commands from toolbars.
Categories — Lists the categories of the toolbars that you can customize. Choose one and the
corresponding buttons appear in the Buttons area.
Buttons — Lists the buttons available in the active category. You can drag a button from this
area onto a toolbar.
Description — Describes the button selected in the Buttons area.

Custom Button Dialog Box

Allows you to assign a toolbar button icon to a macro. This dialog box opens when you drag a
macro from the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box to the toolbar.
Buttons — Displays the available icons.
Assign — Specifies the icon for your button and closes the dialog box.
Browse — Opens the Select Bitmap File dialog box, which allows you to look for an icon on
your local computer or on the network.

Description Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to enter a long text value in the Description text box in the Common
Properties dialog box for an item. For long descriptions, click the ellipsis button to bring
up the Description dialog box.
Description — Allows you to enter a description for the item.
Very long descriptions cannot be displayed in their entirety in labels, reports, and so
forth.

File Properties Dialog Box (File > Properties)

Tracks information about the properties of a drawing. There are five tabs:
General (see "General Tab" on page 1090)
Summary (see "Summary Tab" on page 1091)
Statistics (see "Statistics Tab" on page 1091)
Units (see "Units Tab" on page 1091)
Browser

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 917

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

You must save the drawing before you can access the Statistics and Summary tabs
of the File Properties dialog box.

Find Dialog Box

Allows you to search for a specific item based on user-defined search criteria. The items that
are available depend on the object from which you invoke the Find command.
Tag — Enter the tag name of an item for which you want to search. You can type an asterisk
(*) as a wildcard character to find multiple characters or a question mark (?) as a wildcard
character for a single character.
Equipment type — Specifies the type of item for which you want to search. When you use
Find from the Reference Data Explorer, the equipment type that appears is Ref Plant Item;
when you use Find from the Electrical Index or the Electrical Engineer, the equipment type
that appears is Plant Item. In specific dialog boxes, where you use the Find dialog box to
associate items, the software displays only the equipment type appropriate for the item that you
select.
Layout — If one or more layouts are defined in the EDE for the selected equipment type, you
can select a specific layout to specify the property columns that appear in the list of results. If
you do not specify a layout, the software displays the results using the default columns.

Properties
Show only properties that have data values — Select to filter the list of properties so that only
those properties that have data values are displayed.
You can display properties alphabetically or by categories by clicking the
corresponding display mode button. Click to display alphabetically. Click to display by
categories.
Property — Displays the properties of the selected equipment type.
Value — Enter the value of the property that appears in the Property box to search for items
that have that value only. You can type an asterisk (*) as a wildcard character to find multiple
characters or a question mark (?) as a wildcard character for a single character. If the property
has values that appear in a list, select the required value from the list.

Results
Displays the search results with a list of the items that correspond to the criteria that you entered
in the upper part of this dialog box.
No. — The sequence of the item as it appears in the list of results.
Item Tag — The tag name of the item.
Equipment Type — The equipment type to which the item belongs.
Find Now — Click to start a search of the items that correspond to the equipment type, and
where relevant, the other filter criteria that you select for the search.
New Search — Click to clear all search criteria in preparation for a new search.
Results — Displays a list of the items that meet the search criteria. Highlight an item on the list
and select it by doing one of the following:
▪ Press the ENTER key.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 918

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ Double-click the item.

▪ Where you are allowed to select more than one item, for example when adding typical
control stations to a motor profile, press the CTRL or SHIFT keys to make multiple
selections, and then click OK or Apply.
OK — Click to navigate to or select items that are highlighted in the Results window and close
the Find dialog box.
Cancel — Click to close the Find dialog box without navigating to or selecting highlighted items.
You can also press the ESCAPE key to cancel the operation.
Apply — Click to navigate to or select items that are highlighted in the Results window. This
option is useful when it is possible to select more than one item and you want to do so without
closing the dialog box.

Move Items to Plant Group Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you click Actions > Move Items.
You can move multiple or single items to another plant group regardless of the hierarchy level
definitions made in the Options Manager. The plant group definitions made in the Options
Manager serve only as default settings and do not prevent you from moving items to other
hierarchy levels. Also, you can move items to a plant group that is different from the one in
which these items were created.
Expand the hierarchy to the required plant group type and select the plant group to which you
want to move the items.

New Item Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select an item type in the Reference Data Explorer, in the
Electrical Index, or in the EDE, and you click File > New > Item where it is possible to create
more than one type of new item. The dialog box displays a list of available item types from
which you select the required item type for the new item.
Available items — Displays a list of item types. The available item types depend on the
selection you made prior to opening the dialog box. Select the required item type from the list.

Create Multiple New Items Dialog Box

You use this dialog box to create multiple new items in the Electrical Index. You can create
multiple new items without any electrical data or items that are based on an existing reference
item in the Reference Data Explorer.
For the list of all the supported item types, see Multiple New Items - List of Supported Items (on
page 88).
Item type — Displays the name of the item type folder that you have selected.
Reference Items — Displays the name of the reference item that you selected on the Find
dialog box. Click the Ellipsis button to open the Find dialog box where you can find and
select an appropriate reference item that will serve as basis for the new items.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 919

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

If you do not select any reference item, the software will create plant items
without any electrical data.
Number of items — Allows you to enter the number of new items that you want Smart Electrical
to create.

Open Plant Group Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you click File > Open > Plant Group and it allows you to
navigate to a specific plant group within a plant.
Expand the hierarchy to the required plant group type and select the plant group where you
want to work.
Select Plant — Opens a dialog box with a list of plants for selection.

Open Plant Structure Dialog Box

Displays the structure of the plant to which you are connected. Enables you to set options for
connecting to a site with a different plant structure.
Available plant structures — Lists the available plant structures. You can select only one plant
structure at a time.
Application type — Displays the application associated with this database.
Open — Connects you to the selected database and checks whether you have the correct
access privileges for the selected plant.
Site Server — Opens the Open Site Server dialog box, where you can select an initialization
file from local and network directories. Plants that correspond to the initialization file you
choose are subsequently displayed in the list of available plants in the database.

Preferences Dialog Box

Allows you to customize default preferences for various general options, preferences related to
single line diagram (SLD) options, PDB load summary generation settings, and delete loads
settings.
General Tab (see "General Tab (Preferences Dialog Box)" on page 921)
SLD Generation Tab (see "SLD Generation Tab (Preferences Dialog Box)" on page 922)
Load Summaries and Reports Tab
Delete Loads Tab (see "Delete Load Tab (Preferences Dialog Box)" on page 925)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 920

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

General Tab (Preferences Dialog Box)

Allows you to customize default preferences for creating and duplicating new items, displaying
PDB item tags in the Electrical Engineer, and activating log file generation.

Open dialog box after creating or duplicating an item

Allow you to customize a preference for software response after creating or duplicating an item.
None — Displays a created or duplicated item in the Electrical Index or the Reference Data
Explorer without opening either the Item Tag or Common Properties dialog box, with a default
property value and naming convention defined in Options Manager.
Item Tag dialog box — Opens the Item Tag dialog box that allows you to type the item tag
name for the new item. The text can either be free text or a mask that fits the item naming
convention.
Common Properties dialog box — Opens the Common Properties dialog box for the created
or duplicated item, where you can enter electrical properties as you require.

Electrical Engineer display options for buses, incomers, bus risers, and auxiliary contacts
Allows you to display in the Electrical Engineer the names of associated PDB item tags and
panel item tags as part of the names of buses, incomers, bus risers, panel circuits, and auxiliary
contacts.
Include associated PDB and panel item tags — Displays in the Electrical Engineer buses,
incomers, panel circuits, and bus risers together with the associated PDB item tags. For
example:
MCC 200 / Bus A
JB-7 / CKT-35

Log file options

Allow you to generate various error log files to display errors that can occur during a batch
operation, such as batch generation of schematics, batch cable sizing, batch deletion of items,
batch load association, and so forth.
Activate log file generation — Enables log file generation options.

Display license expiration reminder … days in advance

Allows you to specify the number of days (between 1 and 30) prior to license expiration that the
software will display an advance warning.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 921

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

SLD Generation Tab (Preferences Dialog Box)

Allows you to specify various preferences for the generation of single line diagrams (SLD).

SLD drawings
Allow you to set general preferences for SLD generation.
Save settings of last generated drawing — Saves and then applies all the settings defined on
the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box apart from the settings defined on the
Preferences dialog box (SLD margins and Distance for SLD internals). This preference
option takes effect after generating an SLD and applies to all subsequent SLD
generations. Clearing the Save settings of the last generated drawing check box saves only
the SLD margin preferences and returns all the other SLD options to the application defaults.
Use bus tie symbols — This option deals with the way the software represents the connection
between two redundant buses in a power distribution board.
▪ Select this option to show a horizontal representation between two buses using the
BusTie.sym file. In this case, the software shows the connection between the two buses as
a straight bus-tie connection without showing the items connected between and within the
circuits. Note that the BusTie symbol is a "circuit" type symbol and has its first connection
point on the rightmost side and the second connection point at the leftmost side. Also, the
item property in the SLD displays only the coupler information. Furthermore, if you use the
Find in SLD command, the software finds the pertinent coupler and not the bus riser.
▪ Clear this option to show a vertical representation of a connection between two buses. This
is the standard bus coupler-riser circuit connection representation that includes both coupler
and the riser circuits and displays them as vertical objects, connected to each other. The
software displays both circuits as standard arrows.
After moving electrical items in a generated drawing, moving and resizing the
frames that the software draws around items belonging to PDBs and around circuits in each cell,
the software always retains the position of all electrical items in saved drawings without the need
to instruct the software to do so.

SLD margins
Define the default unit of measure for SLD margins and distance between the page edges and
the SLD drawing so that the drawing does not overlap the title block and the SLD border.
Units — Select the unit of measure for the SLD margins (mm or inches). The unit of measure
for top, bottom, left and right margins changes dynamically, according to the selection that you
make.
Top — Allows you to type the value for the top drawing margin.
Bottom — Allows you to type the value for the bottom drawing margin.
Right — Allows you to type the value for the right drawing margin.
Left — Allows you to type the value for the left drawing margin.

Distances between electrical items in SLDs

Set a distance between electrical items SLD drawings.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 922

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Vertical distance between electrical items — Allows you to define the vertical distance
between electrical items in your SLD drawings. This setting applies to all electrical items in a
branch except for circuit internals. Type in the required value and select the unit of measure.
This option becomes available after selecting the Recalculate saved item position check box.
Distance between buses — Allows you to type a value for the horizontal distance between the
buses and select a unit of measure.
Distance between circuit internals — Allows you to type a value for the vertical distance
between the circuit internal components (fuses, starters, and so forth) and select a unit of
measure.
Distance between circuits — Allows you to type a value for the horizontal distance between
the circuits above and below the buses and select a unit of measure.

Load Summaries and Reports Tab (Preferences Dialog Box)

Allows you to specify various preference settings for the generation All Feeder/Multi-Sheet Load
Summary reports.

Displaying Plant Item Values for Plant Operating Cases

Just before the software starts generating your report, it automatically opens a dialog box which
allows you to select the plant operating cases for which you want to run the report. As a result,
the generated report will contain sets of load data, each set for a different operating case that
you select. This way you can compare the various bus loadings at different operating cases and
use them as a basis for equipment sizing. If only one operating case exists in the plant, the
software generates the report without opening this dialog box.
Prior to generating your report, select an appropriate template that
enables case data. The following templates are available with the shipped reports:
▪ Multi-Sheet Switchboard Summary.xlsm
▪ All Feeder Load Summary.xlsm

Calculation method
The options in this section allow you to specify the coincidence factor to be used in the
calculation of the total connected loads.
The options are available only if you have been given the appropriate access
rights.
Use each load coincidence factor — Uses the coincidence factor of each individual load to
calculate the total connected loads on the bus. When calculating the compensated load values,
the software multiplies the raw uncompensated load kW and kVAR values by the load
coincidence factors.
Use Bus PDB coincidence factor — Uses the coincidence factors of the PDB bus to calculate
the total connected loads on the bus. When calculating the compensated load values, the
software multiplies the raw uncompensated load kW and kVAR values by the coincidence
factors as defined in the properties of the buses that these loads are connected to. Make sure
that you specify these coincidence factors for each bus.
Calculate according to largest non-continuous load — Instructs the software to calculate

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 923

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

the total normal running and peak loading according to the largest non-continuous load
connected to the current bus including all the rolled-up loads that are connected to the
downstream buses. For details, see Calculate Bus Loading According to the Largest
Non-Continuous Load (on page 270).

Inclusion of coupled buses in All Feeder Load Summary Report

The options in this section allow you to specify inclusion options of coupled buses in the All
Feeder Load Summary calculation.
The options are available only if you have been given the appropriate access
rights.
Do not include coupled buses — Includes in the calculation only those loads that are
connected to the current bus and does not include the loads that are connected on the
redundant buses.
Include coupled buses connected by couplers only — Includes in the calculation the loads
connected on the current bus as well as loads connected on all the redundant buses that are
connected to the current bus by a coupler circuit.
Include coupled buses connected by couplers and risers — Includes in the calculation the
loads of the current bus as well as the loads on all the redundant buses that are connected to
the current bus by coupler and riser circuits.

(Check Box)
Account for converting equipment power losses — When running bus load calculations,
allows you to instruct the software to calculate the total electrical consumption taking into
account converting equipment power losses. The software adds these power losses to the
upstream feeding bus and takes them into accounts as continuous loads. The same losses are
also taken into account in the All Feeder Load Summary report.
The options are available only if you have been given the appropriate access
rights.

Report value types

Rated — Instructs the software to display rated power values in a generated All
Feeder/Multi-Sheet Load Summary report.
Consumed — Instructs the software to display consumed power values in a generated All
Feeder/Multi-Sheet Load Summary report.

Compensated/Uncompensated values
Compensated — Instructs the software to display compensated values in a generated All
Feeder/Multi-Sheet Load Summary report.
Uncompensated values — Instructs the software to display uncompensated values in a
generated All Feeder/Multi-Sheet Load Summary report.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 924

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Delete Load Tab (Preferences Dialog Box)

Allows you to customize the Delete Load default settings as set in Options Manager. You use
these settings to select which related (sub) items of a main item are deleted when deleting a
main item from the Electrical Index.

Delete associated items

Feeding power cables — Allows you to delete feeding power cables.
Control, grounding, and instrumentation cables — Allows you to delete associated control,
grounding, and instrumentation cables.
Control station and instruments — Allows you to delete the associated control stations and
instruments.
Feeder circuits and cells — Allows you to delete the associated feeding circuits and cells.
Schematic documents — Allows you to delete the associated schematic documents.
I/O signals — Allows you to delete the associated I/O signals.

Select Filter Dialog Box

Allows you to select an available filter or add a new filter that is associated with your custom
folder.
Select an available filter by opening a folder in the tree view, selecting the required filter, and
clicking OK.
New — Allows you to add a new filter to the selected filter folder.
Properties — Opens the Properties dialog box of the selected filter.
For more information about filters, see Using Filters in the Filter Manager User's Guide, under
Using Filters.

Print Dialog Box

Controls how a drawing is printed. This dialog box opens when you click File > Print.

Printer
Name — Specifies the printer that you want to use. You can select from a list of all the available
configured printers. The information below the Name box applies to the selected printer. The
printer that you select in the Name box is the default printer for the rest of the current design
session until you specify a different printer.
Properties — Opens the Printer Document Properties dialog box, which allows you to specify
page setup and other printer settings specific to the selected printer.
Status — Describes the state of the selected printer, for example, busy or idle. This area is
read-only.
Type — Displays the type of printer currently selected. This area is read-only.
Where — Identifies the printer path, printer port, queue name, or physical location of the
currently selected printer. This area is read-only.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 925

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Comment — Displays additional information about the selected printer, if available.

Print range
All sheets — Prints all the existing sheets in the drawing.
Selected sheets — Prints only the sheets that you have selected in the drawing.
Sheets — Allows you to specify the sheets that you want to print. You can specify a range of
pages that you want to print. You can type the starting page you want to print as the "From"
value and the ending page you want to print as the "To" value. In the Sheets box, type a range
with a hyphen between the sheet numbers. For example, to print sheets 3 through 7, type 3-7.
This prints each sheet on a separate piece of paper.

Copies
Number of copies — Specifies the number of copies to print.
Collate — Organizes sheets when you print multiple copies.

Options
Print all layers — Instructs the software to print out all the existing layers in the drawing. If you
clear this check box, only the items on the visible layers are printed out.
Pure black and white — Prints a black and white drawing without any other color or grayscale.
Settings — Opens the Settings dialog box, which allows you to set the scale and origin of the
printout.

Save as PDF Dialog Box

Converts the active drawing to a PDF document.
Sheets - Displays options to specify the sheets to be converted to PDF. With multi-sheet
documents, you can specify that all sheets are converted, or you can specify that only certain
sheets are converted.
Create bookmarks - Creates a bookmark for each sheet added to the PDF file.
Resolution - Modifies the dots per inch, or "dpi". The greater the dpi, the better the clarity.
Increasing the resolution setting increases the file size and can slightly increase the time
required to process some files.
Color - Creates a PDF using the colors available in the document. You can only create a color
PDF from a color drawing sheet.
Grayscale - Creates a PDF using a 256-color grayscale.
Pure black and white - Creates a PDF that has no color or grayscale. Anything that is not pure
white is drawn as black.
JPEG compression - Compresses images embedded in your document according to the
compression level you define. If your drawing contains a lot of images, compression settings are
very important for achieving good image quality at a manageable file size. Use the pull-down
menu to set the compression level. Compression levels in the High quality range do not
noticeably affect image quality and produce larger file sizes than settings in the Low quality

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 926

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

range. However, using a mid-range compression level usually strikes the best balance in
creating a compact file while still maintaining enough information to product high-quality images.

Switch Active Operating Case Dialog Box

Smart Electrical allows you to perform bus and PDB load summaries based on various sets of
load values. These various sets of load data (referred here to as plant operating cases)
provide the ability to analyze the total electrical load consumption of your plant based on
different load properties and values. Typically, such operating cases are called Winter,
Summer, and so on. However, you can create and define a number of such operating cases
which cover your plant requirements.
Operating cases are defined in Options Manager. For details, see Manage Operating Case Data
for Plant Items.
This dialog box enables you, in one single operation, to switch all the plant loads, instruments
and cabinets to a plant operating case that you select.
Operating Case — Displays the name of the operating case. Click the option button to the left
of the name to select it as the active case.
Description — Displays the description of the operating case.
Switch — Click to make the switch to the selected operating case.

Switch Mode (Rule-Driven) Dialog Box

(Note that this dialog box is old rule-driven functionality that has been retained from the previous
versions.)
This dialog box enables you, in one single operation, to switch all the plant loads, instruments
and cabinets to a plant operational case (mode) that you select.
For this operation to work, you need to add new properties in user-defined fields for the alternate
case (mode) load data, create appropriate rules in Rule Manager, and define a filter in Filter
Manager. Once you make all these definitions, you can select a specific operational mode that
will trigger the copying mechanism in Smart Electrical, thus switching to the appropriate
scenario. After switching to another operational mode, the software makes a global update of
the relevant values that affect all the direct electrical calculations that use these values. You can
see these values in the Properties window or the Common Properties dialog box for specific
electrical items.
Plant operational mode — Allows you to select a scenario for electrical load consumption in
your plant.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 927

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Toolbars Dialog Box

Sets options for displaying, hiding, or changing toolbars. The settings on this dialog box are
remembered for the current user.
Toolbars — Lists the available toolbars. You can select the box next to the toolbar you want to
display, hide, or change.
Toolbar name — Displays the name of the toolbar that you have selected.
New — Accesses the New Toolbar dialog box in which you can specify a name for the new
toolbar.
Customize — Adds buttons to or removes buttons from built-in toolbars with the Customize
dialog box.
Reset — Resets the selected toolbar to the original icons.
Color buttons — Adds color to the toolbar buttons. If this option is cleared, toolbar buttons are
black and white.
Large buttons — Enlarges toolbar buttons so that they are easier to see.
Show ToolTips — Displays on-screen descriptions of a toolbar button when the pointer pauses
over it.
Classic icons — Displays the toolbar icons using the classic icons. If this option is not selected,
toolbars use the high-color icons.
OK — Saves changes and dismisses the dialog.
Cancel — Ignores any changes and dismisses the dialog.
Help — Displays the Help topic for this dialog.

Update Select Lists Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to add or edit items on Smart Electrical select lists.

Sort - Opens the Sort dialog box. You can sort select entries based on entries in one or
more column.

Move Up — Moves the chosen select entry row up one position.

Move Down — Moves the chosen select entry row down one position.
Selected list — Allows you to select a select list for updating. You can define new select lists
in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Dependent list — Indicates that the value in the selected list depends on a particular selected
value in another list. For example, if you choose Model from the selected list, the dependent
list value is Manufacturer. If a list has no dependent list related to it, the value None appears.
Disable — Select to hide the select list entry in the user interface. Clear to make the entry
available to users.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 928

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Value — The name of the select list entry in the column. You can add select list entries by
typing in the Value column of the last row of the selected list. All entries in a particular select
list must have unique values, and you cannot delete entries in select lists.
Short Value — A shortened name for the select list entry, if necessary, in the column. The
short value is the one that appears in drop-down lists in the user interface.
Dependent Value — Provides a way to link related select lists, if a dependent list is available.
For example, Electrical Equipment Type is dependent on Electrical Equipment Subclass,
which is in turn dependent on Electrical Equipment Class. So the range of values that you
see in the Properties window is limited to values defined for a dependent list, if one is specified
for the given property. For instance, motors belong to the Electrical Equipment Subclass:
Motor and to Electrical Equipment Class: Electrical Equipment. The available values in the
Electrical Equipment Type select list, such as Squirrel Cage, apply only to motors, and do not
appear in lists for other electrical equipment subclasses.

Associations
Associated Drawings for a Plant Item Dialog Box
Allows you to find and view the drawings that are associated with a plant item selected in the
Electrical Index. You can filter the drawings by drawing type, and then select and open a
drawing.
Filter by drawing type
Filters the drawings by their types (conventional and composite drawings). The types are:
▪ All drawings
▪ Schematics
▪ Wiring diagrams
▪ Cable block diagrams (CBD)
▪ Single line diagrams (SLD)
▪ PDB layouts
▪ Miscellaneous drawings (composite miscellaneous drawings only)
Associated Drawings
The grid shows the drawings according to the filter that you have selected. You can double-click
a drawing to open it or click the Open Drawing command button.
Drawing — Displays the name of the document.
Description — Displays a description of the drawing. (Only available if a description was
entered in the common properties of the selected item).
Drawing Type — Displays the drawing type.
Open Drawing — Opens the selected drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 929

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Associated Drawings for a Symbol Dialog Box

Allows you to find and view the drawings that are associated with a symbol selected in Catalog
Explorer. You can filter the drawings by drawing type and then select and open a drawing.
Filter by drawing type
Filters the drawings by their types (composite drawings only). The types are:
▪ All drawings
▪ Schematics
▪ Wiring diagrams
▪ Cable block diagrams (CBD)
▪ Single line diagrams (SLD)
▪ PDB layouts
▪ Miscellaneous drawings
Out-of-date symbol only — Filters the drawings to display only those composite drawings
where the selected symbol is out of date
Associated Drawings
The grid shows the drawings according to the filter that you have selected. You can double-click
a drawing to open it or click the Open Drawing command button.
Drawing — Displays the name of the drawing.
Description — Displays a description of the document. (Only available if a description was
entered in the common properties of the selected item).
Drawing Type — Displays the drawing type.
Open Drawing — Opens the selected drawing.

Cables
Apply Reference Data to Plant Cables Dialog Box
Enables you to update data in plant cables in batch mode where the reference data for those
cables has changed.
Data window — Displays plant cables for which data has changed in the reference cables
associated with those plant cables, with details of the cable category, cable tag, cable formation,
and the reference cable. Beside each cable name is a check box that allows you to select the
cable for applying the new reference data. For a parallel cable assembly, the software displays
only the first cable of the assembly; however it applies the reference data to all the cables in the
assembly.
Select all — Allows you to select all the cables in the list for applying updated reference data.
Apply — Applies the new reference data for the selected cables.
Close — Closes the dialog box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 930

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Compare — Opens the Compare Plant and Reference Cable Data Dialog Box (see
"Synchronize Plant and Reference Cable Data Dialog Box" on page 972), from which you can
compare for the selected plant cable the properties that have different values in the plant and
reference cables.

Assign Drums to Cables Wizard

Allows you to assign cables to cable drums in batch mode. The software allows you to specify
automatic creation of additional drums as needed or deletion of empty drums. While assigning
the selected cables to cable drums, the software will optimize this assignment so that you can
utilize the drum capacity to the optimum.
For detailed information about the logic used by Smart Electrical to optimize cable drum
assignment, see Optimization of Cable Drum Assignment.

Drum and Cable Options (Assign Drums to Cables Wizard)

Choose options on this page to specify initially which cables you want to assign to drums and
how you want the software to deal with drum creation and deletion. You must specify one or all
of the reference cables and at least one pulling area to be able to proceed to the next step.
Include assigned cables — Select this check box if you want to revamp your entire drum -
cable assignments. When you select this option, the software dissociates any cables that are
already assigned to drums, and then assigns all the cables. Clear the check box to assign only
those cables that have not been assigned to drums yet.

▪ The wizard does not include any cable drums that allow multiple pulling areas.
▪ The wizard does not include cables assigned to drums that comply with the drum
exclusion filter parameters.
Create new drums — Select this check box to create new drums automatically for each cable
type if the drum - cable assignment results in all existing drums being used. The software
creates new drums using the defined naming conventions. If you clear this option, the software
assigns the cables to existing drums only and leaves the remaining cables unassigned until you
create new drums manually.

Reference cable — Click the ellipsis button to select a reference cable used to specify the
types of cables that you want to assign to drums automatically or select the Select all reference
cables check box to specify all the cables of all types in the plant.
Delete empty drums — Select this check box so that if reassignment of cables results in empty
drums, the software will delete those drums.
The software does not delete the empty drums that comply with the drum
exclusion filter parameters.
Drum exclusion filter — Allows you to select a filter with drum parameters that you do not want
to include in the assignment. That is, any drums that comply with the parameters set in the
selected filter will be excluded from being assigned to plant cables.
Filter name — Displays the name of the selected filter.
Browse — Allows you to browse and select an appropriate filter. You can define a new filter
in Filter Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 931

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Clear Filter — Allows you to clear the filter if you do not want to exclude any drums from the
assignment.
Pulling area — Select at least one pulling area to assign cables in all the pulling areas.

— Moves the highlighted pulling area to the Selected pane.

— Moves all the pulling area from to the Selected pane.

Use the buttons that show the opposite direction to move the selected pulling areas back to the
All pane.

Select Cables (Assign Drums to Cables Wizard)

The displayed cables are those that meet the criteria that you selected on the Drum and Cable
Options wizard page. When you select a group of cables and click Next, the software orders
the cables by type (specified by the combination of cable category, cable specification, and
cable formation), cable length, and by pulling area. Then for each cable type per pulling area,
beginning with the longest cable, the software assigns the cables to the drums, beginning with
the drum that has the highest available capacity. The software continues to assign cables to
the drum provided the total cable length on the drum does not exceed the maximum drum
capacity. If assigning a particular cable to a drum would result a total cable length that is
greater than the maximum drum capacity, the software assigns that cable to the next available
drum.

▪ You can specify the order of the cables that have not been assigned yet and organize these
cables either in a descending or alternate order. You set the sorting method on the General
page in Options Manager. If you select the Descending method, the software sorts the
cables starting with the longest cable and then goes down to the shortest one. If you select
the Alternate method, the software starts with the longest cable, then with the shortest, then
with the second longest and then back to the shortest again, and so on.
▪ If you need to add or modify data values for a particular cable, you can do so by selecting
the required row and then clicking Common Properties. You can then edit the cable data
as needed.
▪ You can define and customize pulling areas in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Select — Select the check box beside each cable that you want to include in the automatic
drum assignment. You can only select a cable for assignment to a drum if a cable length and
pulling area are defined.
Cable Tag — The identifying tag of the plant cable. An asterisk next to a cable name indicates
that the cable has been split into cable cuts.
Cable Category — Displays the category that defines the purpose for which the cable is used:
Power, Instrumentation, Control, or Grounding.
Cable Specification — Displays the category of reference cables to which the reference cable
associated with the plant cable belongs.
Cable Formation — Displays the cable formation (number and size of conductors) for the
reference cable.
Actual Length — Displays the actual length of the cable, as calculated by the software.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 932

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Pulling Area — Displays the pulling area assigned to the cable.

Cable Cut — Displays the name of the cable cut that has been defined manually or by this
wizard.
Select all — Selects this check box to select all the available cables for inclusion in automatic
drum assignment, provided that the cable length and pulling area are defined. Clear to clear the
selection for all the cables.
Common Properties — Opens the Cable Common Properties dialog box for the selected
cable to allow you to update the cable properties.

Drum - Cable Assignment Summary (Assign Drums to Cables

Wizard)
This page provides you with a summary of the drum - cable assignment for the cables you
selected on the Select Cables wizard page. The summary includes the actual length of cable
assigned to each drum, the cable drum to which each cable was assigned, and the total length
of cable assigned to the drum. If the software created a new drum, the row appears in bold
type. Bold gray text indicates drum - cable assignments that failed, and the reason for the
failure appears in the Comments column.

Batch Cable Side and Gland Associations Dialog Box

Allows you to associate and dissociate one or both sides of a group of non- power cables with a
specific item such as a cabinet. You can also assign glands of the same type to a group of
cables belonging to any category.

From
Describes information relating to the connection point for one side of the cable.
Tag — Indicates the name of the item associated with this cable side. If you associate the
From cable side with a circuit that belongs to a PDB, the software displays the path of the circuit
tag: PDB/ bus/(cell)/ circuit.
Description — Displays the description that is taken from the description of the tag associated
with the From side of the cable.
Dissociate existing connection — Dissociates an item that already has an association with
this cable side. Also, allows you to dissociate selected multiple power cables in batch mode.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box, where you can select an appropriate item to associate.
Clear — Clears the selection that appears in the Tag and Description boxes.
Gland — Displays a gland associated with this cable side, if appropriate.
Dissociate gland — Dissociates a gland that already has an association with this cable side.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box, where you can select an appropriate cable gland that you
want to associate.
Clear — Clears the selection that appears in the Gland box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 933

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

To
Describes information relating to the connection point for the opposite side of the cable to the
From side.
Tag — Indicates the name of the item associated with this cable side. If the item that you
associate is connected to a PDB/Cell/Circuit, the software displays the association on the From
side.
Description — Displays the description that is taken from the description of the tag associated
with the To side of the cable.
Dissociate existing connection — Dissociates an item that already has an association with
this cable side. Also, allows you to dissociate selected multiple power cables in batch mode.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box, where you can select an appropriate item to associate.
Clear — Clears the selection that appears in the Tag and Description boxes.
Gland — Displays a gland associated with this cable side, if appropriate.
Dissociate gland — Dissociates a gland that already has an association with this cable side.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box, where you can select an appropriate cable gland that you
want to associate.
Clear — Clears the selection that appears in the Gland box.
Cable Tag — Displays the name of the cable. Select the check box beside the cable tag to
select the cable for associating with specified items and glands.
Description — Displays the description for the cable, if defined.
Cable Category — Displays the cable category: Control, Instrumentation, or Grounding.
Cable Specification — Displays the cable specification, if defined.
From — Displays the item currently associated on the From cable side, if defined.
To — Displays the item currently associated on the To cable side, if defined.

Batch Size Cables Window

Enables you to size cables in batch mode.
▪ The software does not size a cable for which it cannot find a reference
cable with the specified cable specification that matches the value of the minimum
conductor cross-section for parallel cables defined in Options Manager. You should
either change the value in Options Manager or create a new reference cable with the
appropriate cross-section in the Reference Data Explorer.
▪ The software filters out from the Cable-Sizing Matrix all the reference cables whose
insulation voltage rating is smaller than the rated voltage of the current cable. Also, the
software does not allow a situation where the insulation voltage rating is smaller than
the rated voltage of a given cable. This situation is prevented when:
▪ Sizing a single cable or several cables in batch mode.
▪ Refreshing load data in batch mode or by clicking the Refresh Data button on the
Sizing Data tab.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 934

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ Replacing the associated reference cable of one or more plant cables.

▪ Manually modifying cable data on the Common Properties dialog box or the
Properties window.
Data window — Displays the cables that you selected in the Electrical Index, with details of
the cable tag, cable formation, input sizing data, and where applicable, sizing results. Beside
each cable name is a Select check box that allows you to select the cable for sizing.
Select all — Allows you to select all the cables in the list for sizing.
OK — Performs the sizing for the selected cables and close the dialog box.
Apply Sizing — Performs the sizing for the selected cables.
Excel Report — Displays the data in this dialog box in a Microsoft Excel file. This is useful if
you want to format the layout or print out the data.

Cable Common Properties Dialog Box

Enables you to set options for defining general cable properties, design details, connections,
earth loop impedance, and cable sizing data.
General Tab (see "General Tab (Cable Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page 935)
Design Data Tab (see "Design Data Tab (Cable Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page 940)
Connections Tab (see "Connections Tab (Cable Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page 944)
Sizing Data Tab (see "Sizing Data Tab (Cable Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page 945)
Earth Loop Impedance Tab (see "Earth Loop Impedance Tab (Cable Common Properties Dialog
Box)" on page 952)
Procurement Tab (see "Procurement Tab (Cable Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page
954)

General Tab (Cable Common Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for general properties that identify and characterize the cable. An asterisk beside
a property name indicates required data.
The cables that you create in your plant must be based on existing reference
cables.
Sizing required — For power cables only, when creating a power cable, the software selects
this check box by default. Also, the software selects this check box if you change any cable
property that affects cable sizing. After clicking the Apply Sizing button, the software clears
this check box. For the list of cable and load properties that cause the automatic selection of this
check box, see Automatic Switch-On of the Sizing Required Flag (on page 183).
Cable tag — Identifies the cable. The cable tag appears beside the cable in the Electrical
Index. You must enter a value that matches the naming convention for the cable. You define
naming conventions in the Options Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 935

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Description — Allows you to type a description of the cable, for information only. Note that for
a parallel cable assembly, you can edit the description of each cable independently.
Cable category — Defines the purpose for which the cable is used. The cable category can be
power, control, grounding, or instrumentation. The software automatically assigns the cable
category according to the folder in which you create the cable, and you cannot change the
value.
Cable specification — Indicates the family of cables to which the reference cable
belongs. You must select a value for this property. When sizing a cable, the software searches
only for those reference cables that belong to the selected cable specification. You can define
and customize cable specifications in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Reference cable — Allows you to select a reference cable which serves as a basis for the
current plant cable created in the Electrical Index. The availability of reference cables on this
list depends on the Cable specification and Conductor arrangement that you select. Note
that reference cables whose Availability property is set to False in the Properties window will
not appear on this list.
When you select a reference cable, the software completes most of the properties of the cable
automatically, and you cannot edit these values.
When creating a new power cable, the default Reference cable value is Non- sized power
cable, meaning that you can enter values for the sizing data.

To sort the list of the reference cables alphabetically click . To sort the list by
cable size, click .
Cable usage — If required, select a value for this property to further categorize the cable, for
example, for control voltage definitions, level definitions, and so forth. You can define and
customize cable usages in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Armor type — Specifies the type of armor used to protect the cable from its environment. For
example, types of armor include non-armored, steel, or lead. This read-only value comes from
the reference cable used as the basis for this cable.
Outer jacket insulation — Specifies the material used for the cable jacket. For example,
insulation materials include polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and polyethylene. This read-only value
comes from the reference cable used as the basis for this cable.
Notes — Allows you to type user notes, for example if you want to provide additional information
regarding special features of the cable.
Insulation voltage rating — Shows the voltage that corresponds to the manufacturer voltage
rating for the cable. This read-only value comes from the reference cable used as the basis for
this cable.
Insulation temperature rating — Shows the temperature that corresponds to the manufacturer
rating of the maximum operating temperature for the cable. This read-only value comes from
the reference cable used as the basis for this cable.
Basic ampacity in air — Shows the ampere capacity of the cable in air under the basic
conditions that the manufacturer specifies. The software uses this property in the sizing
algorithm when you select In Air as the value for the Cable routing property on the Sizing Data
tab. This read-only value comes from the reference cable used as the basis for this cable.
Basic ampacity in ground — Shows the ampere capacity of the cable in the ground under the
basic conditions that the manufacturer specifies. The software uses this property in the sizing
algorithm when you select Under Ground as the value for the Cable routing property on the

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 936

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Sizing Data tab. This read-only value comes from the reference cable used as the basis for
this cable.
Custom basic ampacity — Shows the custom ampere capacity of the cable under basic
conditions when the sizing of a cable was done using a custom cable routing method which is
not InAir or UnderGround. The software calculates this property based on a corresponding
lookup table which you specify in the Options Manager General Settings window. The software
uses the custom basic ampacity value to size the current cable only after selecting a custom
cable routing method from the Routing list on the Sizing Data tab of this dialog box. For more
details, see Define Custom Basic Ampacity for Cable Sizing (on page 185).
Reactance per unit length — Shows the value of reactance per unit length that matches the
manufacturer specification. Reactance per unit length applies only to cables that carry
alternating current (AC). The software uses this property in the sizing algorithm. This read-only
value comes from the reference cable used as the basis for this cable.
Resistance per unit length — Shows the value of resistance per unit length that matches the
manufacturer specification. The software uses this property in the sizing algorithm. This
read-only value comes from the reference cable used as the basis for this cable.

Construction
Describes the physical characteristics related to the construction of the cable. The available
values depend on the conductor arrangement that you select.
Conductor arrangement — Defines the number and arrangement of the conductors in the
cable (not applicable for instrumentation cables). Your selection filters the list of available
reference cables so that only those cables that match the cable formation that you have
selected are available in the Reference cable list. Once you select an appropriate reference
cable, the software automatically sets the values for the conductor arrangement,
current-carrying, neutral, and grounding conductors.
Also, when sizing a power cable, the software searches only for those reference cables that
have the selected conductor arrangement. The following standard options are available:
▪ Single core cable — Creates a current-carrying cable with a single core. For this
option, you can specify an arrangement of any number of single-core conductors, for
example, 3 single-core cables, but you cannot specify any additional conductors.
▪ 2-core cable — Creates a cable with two current-carrying conductors and no additional
conductors. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ 2+1-core cable — Creates a cable with two current-carrying conductors and one
additional conductor. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ 3-core cable — Creates a cable with three current-carrying conductors and no
additional conductors. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ 3+1-core cable — Creates a cable with three current-carrying conductors and one
additional conductor. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ 3+2-core cable — Creates a cable with three current-carrying conductors and two
additional conductors. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ Multicore cable — Creates a cable with multiple conductors. For this option, you can
specify any number of conductors and additional conductors.
You can change the names of the standard conductor arrangement items in the
Data Dictionary Manager. However, the software performs calculations according to the

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 937

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

position in the list of the item that you select. For example, a 2-core cable is always the
second item in the list.
Current-carrying conductors — For the Multicore conductor arrangement, allows you to
specify the number of conductors within the cable used for carrying the current (not applicable
for instrumentation cables).
For all other conductor arrangements, specifies the number of power-carrying conductors
depending on the specific conductor arrangement that you have selected.
Size — Allows you to select a standard size for the current- carrying conductors. You can
define and customize the available cable sizes in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Neutral conductors — Allows you to specify the number of neutral conductors. The availability
of this setting depends on the conductor arrangement that you select.
Size — Allows you to select a standard size for the neutral-conductors. You can define and
customize the available cable sizes in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Grounding conductors — Allows you to specify the number of grounding conductors. The
availability of this setting depends on the conductor arrangement that you select.
Size — Allows you to select a standard size for the grounding-conductors. You can define and
customize the available cable sizes in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Cable formation — Displays computed information based on the total number and the size of
the conductors or cable sets specified. The size appears as a question mark when the
reference cable type is Non-sized power cable or when you have not sized a power cable.
Set type — (available for instrumentation cables only) Allows you to select a standard value that
represents the arrangement of the wires in the set, such as Wire, Pair, Pair w/Shield, Triad,
Triad w/Shield, and so forth. You can select values of this property for a new cable only; you
cannot select a different value for an existing or duplicated cable.
The value Other is available for future use. If you do not want this value to
appear in the list, make it invisible in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Number of sets — (available for instrumentation cables only) Allows you to type the number of
cable sets that the cable contains. Click the ellipsis button to open the Cable Set
Properties dialog box (on page 971) where you can modify the set definitions if required.
Size — Displays the standard size for the current-carrying conductors or cable sets.
Material — Specifies the conductor material used for the current-carrying conductors or cable
sets. This read-only value comes from the reference cable used as the basis for this
cable. For power cables, the software uses this property in conjunction with the Conductor
Material Coefficients lookup table for performing short circuit cable sizing.
Insulation — Specifies the material used for insulating the current-carrying conductors or cable
sets. For example, insulation materials include polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and polyethylene. This
read-only value comes from the reference cable used as the basis for this cable. For power
cables, the software uses this property in conjunction with the Conductor Insulation
Temperatures lookup table for performing short circuit cable sizing.
Additional conductors — Depending on the selected conductor arrangement, this property
specifies the number of additional non-current-carrying conductors, such as ground wires (not
applicable for instrumentation cables).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 938

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Overall shield — For instrumentation cables only, select to specify an overall shield for the
cable. When you select this option, you need to specify the size and material of the overall
shield.
Size — Displays the standard size for the additional conductors or overall shield.
Material — For instrumentation cables only, allows you to select the material used for an overall
shield. You can define and customize the available materials in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Communication wire — For instrumentation cables only, select to specify a communication
wire for the cable.
Color pattern — Select a color pattern for the cable from one of the patterns available. Click
the ellipsis button to define or modify a color pattern.
Use for neutral grounding — For grounding cables only, select this option to make the cable
available for selection as a grounding cable on the Transformer Connections and Tapping
dialog box.

Parallel cables
Describes the number of cables in parallel and the list of cable names. The software calculates
these values based on the result of a cable sizing operation or you can specify the number of
parallel cables manually in order to create a parallel cable assembly.
When defining naming conventions for parallel cables, you can determine
where in the cable tag name you want to include the parallel cable suffix. In Options
Manager, on the Define Naming Conventions dialog box (Options > Naming
Conventions > Define), define the parallel cable suffix in the Segment definitions section.
You can move the parallel cable suffix property up or down the list to set the position of this
property in the segment definition. If you do not select this check box, the suffix for the
parallel cables will appear at the end of the cable tag name.
Total number — Specifies the number of parallel cables where the current cable is part of a
cable assembly that shares the load current and constitutes an inseparable group. When you
perform and apply cable sizing where the recommended number of parallel cables shown on the
Sizing Data tab exceeds the value in this box, the software copies the calculated value to this
box after you click Apply. You can also select the number of parallel cables manually without
performing sizing. To specify a single cable, select the blank value. In the Options Manager,
you can specify the minimum conductor size and the maximum number of parallel cables
allowed.
List — Allows you to select any cable from the list to view its common properties. The name of
the cable in the Cable tag box changes accordingly. If you change a property of a parallel cable,
this change affects all the parallel cables in the list. The only property that does not affect the
other parallel cables is Description.
When generating parallel cables, either through cable sizing or when you increase
the total number of parallel cables, the software creates the additional cables based on the
original cable name and adds a suffix. In Options Manager, you can specify whether to use
a numeric or alphanumeric suffix by default; you can overwrite the default suffix for each
parallel cable by typing a value for the Parallel Cable Suffix property in the Properties
window. Note that if you rename a parallel cable in an assembly, the software does not
update the Parallel Cable Suffix property for that cable. These cables behave as
individual cables, so that if you delete one of the cables, the software leaves the other
cables intact. However, if you change a parameter for one of the cables, the software
updates the same parameter for all the cables.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 939

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Command Buttons
Synchronize With Reference — Opens the Synchronize Plant and Reference Cable Data
Dialog Box (on page 972), which enables you to see if there are any differences between the
values in the properties of the current plant cable and the values in the associated reference
cable. You can then copy the reference data to the plant cable so that the plant and reference
cable data is fully synchronized. Note that this command becomes available only when there is
a difference between plant and reference data for the current item.

Design Data Tab (Cable Common Properties Dialog Box)

Enables you to enter and view cable design data for routing, cable drum assignment, and cable
sizing. An asterisk beside a property name indicates required data.

Drum assignment
Allows you to assign the current cable to a cable drum and lock the drum to the current cable if
needed.
Lock to drum — Locks the current cable to the cable drum specified under Drum. Note that
locking a cable to a drum makes it impossible to dissociate this cable from the assigned drum or
change the assignment to another cable drum. You can unlock the drum from the current cable
by clearing the Lock to drum check box here or on the Cable Drum Common Properties
dialog box.
When using the Assign Drums to Cables wizard, the software optimizes
the assignment of cables to drums. The optimization mechanism disregards all the cables
that either have been locked to drums or already have been installed. Installed and locked
cables are, therefore, fixed on those drums. When calculating the Total cable length left
on drum value, the optimization mechanism subtracts the length of the locked and installed
cables from the maximum drum capacity. For details about the optimization process, see
Optimization of Cable Drum Assignment (on page 195).
Drum — Displays the name of the cable drum to which you assigned the current cable. The
drum name appears after you select it in the Find dialog box. Note that this box is available only
if the length of the current cable does not exceed the maximum cable drum capacity.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box, where you can select a cable drum to which you assign the
current cable. Note that the software finds only those cable drums that have been associated
with the same reference cable and pulling area as the current cable.
Unassign — Cancels the assignment of the current cable to the cable drum displayed under
Drum. Note that the software does not allow this action if the current cable is locked to the
assigned cable drum.
Number of splices — Displays the number of cable splices that have been defined in
accordance with the cable cuts that have been created in the Cable Cut Definitions dialog box.
Cable Cuts — Opens the Cable Cut Definitions dialog box that allows you to define cable cuts
manually. You cannot open the Cable Cut Definitions dialog box if the cable actual length has
not been defined. This command is not available for a cable that has already been assigned to a
drum.
Pulling area — Allows you to select a pulling area to use when routing the cable from the
selected drum. You can define and customize pulling areas in the Data Dictionary Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 940

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Cable routing
This group box, enables you to view the existing routing definition of the current cable and
access the Cable Routing Definition dialog box.
Segregation level — Allows you to select an appropriate segregation level for the current cable.
You cannot complete the routing definition without selecting a segregation level. The
segregation level of the cable must match the segregation level of all the cableway segments to
which you assign the cable. Note that once you have added at least one segment to the
routing, you cannot change the segregation level; to do so, you must first remove all the
segments.
Define — Opens the Cable Routing Definition dialog box.
Sequence — Indicates the sequence of the segment in the routing path.
Cableway — Displays the cableway from which you want to select a segment.
Segment — Displays the segment through which the cable is routed.
Length — Displays the segment length for the selected segment. You define this value in the
Properties window.
Drop-off Length — Displays a value that accounts for the point at which the cable exits the
cableway segment so that Smart Electrical can calculate the actual cable length more
accurately. This value specifies the length of the cable on the assigned segment. This way the
distance between the end of the segment and the drop-off point of the cable is not included in
the Actual length of the cable.
Segment fill — Displays the percentage of the segment filled by cables.

Design data
Provides information about the physical characteristics of the cable. These values are used for
cable sizing and cable routing.
Note that for parallel cables, when you change estimated cable length or design cable length,
the software automatically changes the values for all of the other parallel cables.
Changing a value that affects the Actual design/installed length of the
current cable and if this Actual design/installed length value has already been used to size
the cable, the software automatically recalculates the voltage drop. If the new Actual
design/installed length exceeds the sizing parameters of the current cable, you will need to
resize the cable by clicking the Calculate Sizing button on the Sizing Data tab. The software
displays an appropriate message to this effect in the Calculation information box on the
Sizing Data tab and turns on the Sizing required flag on the General tab of the Cable
Common Properties dialog box.
Use external routing length — Instructs the software to overwrite the Actual design/installed
length value with the existing External routing length value. If you select this check box, and
the External routing length property does not have a value, the software uses a value of zero
in calculations. If you clear this check box, the software uses the value of one of the following
properties: Estimated length, Design length, or Routing length.
Use this command only if the Actual design/installed length value has
been defined. The software cancels the association of the current cable with its drum if you
select this check box and the Actual des/installed length value is not defined. The name of
the drum under Drum assignment will no longer be displayed as the cable will removed
from its drum.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 941

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

To be routed in S3D— Select this check box to include the routing definition values when
publishing this cable. The routing definition values will then be available for retrieval in Smart
3D.
Estimated length — Allows you to enter the estimated length of cable before installation with
appropriate units of measure. In sizing calculations, the software uses this value if you do not
specify a design length. You can specify the default units of measure for your plant in the Data
Dictionary Manager.
Design length — Allows you to enter a more accurate length for the cable after installation with
appropriate units of measure. In sizing calculations, this value overrides the estimated
length. You can specify the default units of measure for your plant in the Data Dictionary
Manager.
Routing length — If you added routing information, displays the total length of the segments
that you defined.
External routing length — If you retrieved routing information from Smart 3D, the software can
use the routing length obtained with the retrieved data, provided that you select the Use
external routing length check box.
The following cable lengths are published by Smart 3D:
▪ Cableway length — the length of the cable that exists in the cableways.
▪ Tail length at origin / destination — the amount of cable length between the cableway
and the origin / destination devices.
▪ Estimated total length — the sum of cableway length and tail lengths at
origin/destination (a read-only property in Smart 3D).
▪ Spare cable length at origin/destination — the extra cable defined by a user at
origin/destination devices.
▪ Cut cable length — the sum of estimated total length and spare cable lengths at
origin/destination (a read-only property in Smart 3D).
Currently the External routing length property in Smart Electrical is mapped to
the Cut cable length property in Smart 3D. The software copies the External routing
length value to the Actual cable length property when setting the External routing length
property. Smart Electrical uses this value in all of its calculations and drum management.
Tails and spares defined in Smart Electrical are not taken into consideration. Smart
Electrical accounts for the length retrieved from Smart 3D as the right length for all
purposes.
External routing path — Displays the external routing path taken from Smart 3D, provided that
you select the Use external routing length check box. To view the full path click the ellipsis
button .
Tail 1 — For single cables, allows you to type a value for the spare tail length at one end the
cable, if you require.
For parallel cables or single-core cable assemblies, displays the value taken from
the Cable Routing Definition dialog box.
Length — A calculated field that displays the design length, or if not available, the estimated
length.
Tail 2 — For single cables, allows you to type a value for the spare tail length at the other end
the cable, if you require.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 942

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

For parallel cables or single-core cable assemblies, displays the value taken from
the Cable Routing Definition dialog box.
Spare length — For single cables, allows you to type a value for additional spare cable length,
if you require.
For parallel cables or single-core cable assemblies, displays the value
taken from the Cable Routing Definition dialog box.
Actual design/installed length — The actual length of the cable, calculated from the sum of
tail length 1, the main length of the cable (routing length, design length or estimated length), tail
length 2, and the spare length. The software uses this value to calculate cable sizing and
optimize cable drums.
The software overwrites the calculated Actual design/installed length value in
the following cases:
▪ After selecting the Use external routing length check box, the Actual
design/installed length value is overwritten with the existing External routing length
value.
▪ After selecting the Cable installed check box, the Actual design/installed length
value is overwritten with the Installed length value.
▪ When replacing the Actual design/installed length value, the Installed length
property overrides the External routing length property.
For information about the software behavior for parallel cables that were
updated outside of Smart Electrical, see .Routing of Parallel Cables Updated Externally (on
page 204)

Installed data
Allows you to enter data so that the software can take into account the actual installed data of
the current cable. The software calculates the installed length based on the values that you
enter for Marked length — side 1 and Marked length — side 2 fields.
Marked length — side 1 — Allows you to type a value for the marked length on side 1 of the
cable. This is a marking that the vendor usually marks at standard fixed metered intervals along
the entire length of the cable.
Marked length — side 2 — Allows you to type a value for the marked length on side 2 of the
cable. This is a marking that the vendor usually marks at standard fixed metered intervals along
the entire length of the cable.
Installed length — A calculated field that displays the actual installed length of the cable. The
software calculates this value if you enter both Marked length — side 1 and Marked length
— side 2 values. The result is the absolute delta between the Marked length — side 1 and
Marked length — side 2 values. If you do not enter both Marked length — side 1 and
Marked length — side 2 values, you can type in the installed value yourself.
Cable installed — Allows you to define the cable as installed in the field. Once you select this
check box, the software overwrites the value under Actual design/installed length with the
Installed length value. The software uses the Actual design/installed length value to
calculate cable sizing and optimize cable drums.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 943

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Command Button
Synchronize With Reference — Opens the Synchronize Plant and Reference Cable Data
Dialog Box (on page 972), which enables you to see if there are any differences between the
values in the properties of the current plant cable and the values in the associated reference
cable. You can then copy the reference data to the plant cable so that the plant and reference
cable data is fully synchronized. Note that this command becomes available only when there is
a difference between plant and reference data for the current item.

Connections Tab (Cable Common Properties Dialog Box)

From
Describes information relating to the connection point for one side of the cable. For a power
cable, this property indicates the cable side that is closer to the power source.
The software does not allow you to make parallel connections or change
existing parallel connections of cables on the Cable Common Properties dialog box. Parallel
cable connections or changes of parallel associations can be carried out only in cable block
diagrams.
Tag — Indicates the name of the item associated with this cable side. If you associate the
From cable side with a circuit that belongs to a PDB, the software displays the path of the circuit
tag: PDB/ bus/(cell)/ circuit.
Description — Displays the description that is taken from the description of the tag associated
with the From side of the cable and is read-only.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box, where you can select an appropriate item to associate. (Not
available if one of the ends of the current cable is connected in parallel.)
Dissociate — Dissociates an item that already has an association with this cable side.

▪ If you make electrical associations in the Electrical Engineer or on the Feeder Data tab of
the Electrical Motor Common Properties dialog box, the software populates the Tag
property on the From cable side with the appropriate data.
▪ If you associate a power cable with a load that you previously associated with a circuit, the
software inserts the cable between the circuit and the load and populates the Tag property
with the circuit data.
▪ Once you have made an association for a power cable, all further changes, including
dissociation, must be made in the Electrical Engineer.
Gland — Displays a gland associated with this cable side, if appropriate.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box, where you can select an appropriate cable gland to
associate.
Dissociate — Dissociates a gland that already has an association with this cable side.

To
Describes information relating to the connection point for the opposite side of the cable to the
From side. For a power cable, this property indicates the cable side that is closer to a
consumer.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 944

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

The software does not allow you to make parallel connections or change
existing parallel connections of cables on the Cable Common Properties dialog box. Parallel
cable connections or changes of parallel associations can be carried out only in cable block
diagrams.
Tag — Indicates the name of the item associated with this cable side. For a power cable, if you
associate the To cable side with a load, the software uses data from the load to populate some
of the properties on the Sizing Data tab; if the load is connected to a PDB/Cell/Circuit, the
software displays the association on the From side.
Description — Displays the description that is taken from the description of the tag associated
with the To side of the cable and is read-only.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box, where you can select an appropriate item to associate. (Not
available if one of the ends of the current cable is connected in parallel.)
Dissociate — Dissociates an item that already has an association with this cable side.

▪ If you associate a power cable with a motor by applying a profile, the software populates the
To property with the motor tag.
▪ Once you have made an association for a power cable, all further changes, including
dissociation, must be made in the Electrical Engineer.
Gland — Displays a gland associated with this cable side, if appropriate.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box, where you can select an appropriate cable gland to
associate.
Dissociate — Dissociates a gland that already has an association with this cable side.

Command Button
Synchronize With Reference — Opens the Synchronize Plant and Reference Cable Data
Dialog Box (on page 972), which enables you to see if there are any differences between the
values in the properties of the current plant cable and the values in the associated reference
cable. You can then copy the reference data to the plant cable so that the plant and reference
cable data is fully synchronized. Note that this command becomes available only when there is
a difference between plant and reference data for the current item.

Sizing Data Tab (Cable Common Properties Dialog Box)

Provides information about the electrical load for a power cable. The software uses this
information as input values for cable sizing. When the cable has a connected load, the software
copies the electrical parameters of the load to the cable. You can change the values of these
parameters used for cable sizing if required. An asterisk beside a property name indicates
required data for sizing.
Supply — Allows you to select the type of supply: alternating current (AC) or direct current
(DC). If the cable is connected to a load for which you select the Consumer check box on the
General tab of the appropriate load Common Properties dialog box, the software copies the
value from the load to this box. Note that the value of this property is automatically inherited
from the load, converting equipment, or any other electrical equipment that this power cable is
connected to.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 945

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

The software calculates the cable cross-section size using different

voltage drop formulas for AC and DC supplies.
Rated voltage — Allows you to select an appropriate operating voltage for a load associated
with the cable. If the cable is connected to a load for which you select the Consumer check
box, the software uses the value from the load. When selecting Protection Setting in the
Cable Sizing tab the system expects the user to enter the current rating of the protection
device. The calculation algorithm is programmed so that when sizing the cable the system
compares the load of the Full Load current (multiplied by the code factor if Use Code Factor is
enabled) with the protection device setting and uses the larger amperage (Full Load Amp X
Code Factor or Protection Setting) as the required ampacity.
Number of phases — Select the number of phases in the power supply to the load: 1, 2, or
3. If the cable is connected to a load for which you select the Consumer check box, the
software uses the value from the load. This property applies for an AC supply only. Note that
the value of this property is automatically inherited from the load, converting equipment, or any
other electrical equipment that this power cable is connected to.

▪ The software calculates sizing for 1- and 3-phase supplies only, using a different voltage
drop formula for each option.
▪ When selecting Protection Setting in the Cable Sizing tab the system expects the user
to enter the current rating of the protection device. The calculation algorithm is
programmed so that when sizing the cable the system compares the load of the Full
Load current (multiplied by the code factor if Use Code Factor is enabled) with the
protection device setting and uses the larger amperage (Full Load Amp X Code Factor
or Protection Setting) as the required ampacity.
Full load current (FLA) — Enter the electrical current, in mA, A, or kA, that the cable must
supply without causing damage to the insulation. The software uses the value of the full load
current to calculate sizing involving the thermal calculation. Note that the value of this property is
automatically inherited from the load, converting equipment, or any other electrical equipment
that this power cable is connected to.
When selecting Protection Setting in the Cable Sizing tab the system
expects the user to enter the current rating of the protection device. The calculation
algorithm is programmed so that when sizing the cable the system compares the load of the
Full Load current (multiplied by the code factor if Use Code Factor is enabled) with the
protection device setting and uses the larger amperage (Full Load Amp X Code Factor or
Protection Setting) as the required ampacity.
Starting current — (This is a required property for motors and some other loads) If a motor is
connected to the cable, the software enters the value of the locked rotor current (LRC). For a
motor, the starting current value can typically be 400 - 600% larger than the full load current and
is therefore important when evaluating the current requirements used to perform sizing. Note
that this option is available for all power cables whether they are connected to motors or not.
When selecting Protection Setting in the Cable Sizing tab the system expects the user to
enter the current rating of the protection device. The calculation algorithm is programmed so that
when sizing the cable the system compares the load of the Full Load current (multiplied by the
code factor if Use Code Factor is enabled) with the protection device setting and uses the
larger amperage (Full Load Amp X Code Factor or Protection Setting) as the required
ampacity.
Use code factor — You can specify whether to use an FLA multiplier factor for thermal
ampacity calculations. The code factor affects the units of various quantities such as the cable

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 946

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

size and the sizing calculation. The standard options defined in the Data Dictionary Manager
are:
▪ Yes — The software multiplies the full load current by a factor set by the user in the
Code Factor field. If yes is selected and no value entered in the Code Factor field
then no calculation is made and the message is displayed: Enter a value in the Code
field.
▪ No — The software does not multiply the full load current.
The selection for this option also determines the available values of conductor size, frequency,
and rated voltage.
Code factor — Allows you to type the value for the FLA multiplier. The code factor value is
used to multiply the FLA which is used to calculate the required thermal ampacity, if no value is
entered then the software uses a factor of 1. This field is only available when Use code factor
is set to Yes.
Power factor at full load — Allows you to enter the power factor of the equipment that the
cable feeds under normal full load running conditions. The power factor is the ratio of active
power to apparent power and can have a value between 0 and 1. If the cable is connected to a
load for which you select the Consumer check box, the software uses the value from the load.
Note that if the power supply is DC, the power factor at full load and at starting is always 1 (one)
and it cannot be changed. When selecting Protection Setting in the Cable Sizing tab the
system expects the user to enter the current rating of the protection device. The calculation
algorithm is programmed so that when sizing the cable the system compares the load of the Full
Load current (multiplied by the code factor if Use Code Factor is enabled) with the protection
device setting and uses the larger amperage (Full Load Amp X Code Factor or Protection
Setting) as the required ampacity.
Power factor at starting — Allows you to enter the power factor of the equipment that the cable
feeds under starting conditions. If the cable is connected to a motor for which you select the
Consumer check box, the software uses the value from the motor. This property is not
available for loads other than motors. Note that if the power supply is DC, the power factor at full
load and at starting is always 1 (one) and it cannot be changed. When selecting Protection
Setting in the Cable Sizing tab the system expects the user to enter the current rating of the
protection device. The calculation algorithm is programmed so that when sizing the cable the
system compares the load of the Full Load current (multiplied by the code factor if Use Code
Factor is enabled) with the protection device setting and uses the larger amperage (Full Load
Amp X Code Factor or Protection Setting) as the required ampacity.
Routing — Allows you to select an appropriate routing type for the current cable: InAir,
UnderGround, or some other custom routing type that you define. The option that you select
affects whether the software uses the ampacity value in air, in the ground, or custom basic
ampacity when sizing a cable.
Auto-restart — Select this option to indicate whether a motor connected to the cable restarts
automatically or manually after a power outage. This property is not available for loads other
than motors.

De-rating factors
The basic ampacity of the cable applies to standard conditions that the manufacturer
specifies. Under actual operating conditions, such as a higher environmental temperature, or a
location where several cables are routed close to one another, the ampacity changes. The
de-rating and utilization factors take into account the operating conditions of the cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 947

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

De-rating factor — Allows you to enter a value for the de-rating factor, which the software uses
to calculate the cable de-rated ampacity under actual operating conditions. The software
multiplies the basic ampacity by the de-rating factor to obtain the de-rated ampacity. A value of
less than 1 means that the de-rated ampacity is lower than the basic ampacity, and this will
result in a requirement for a larger size cable.
Utilization factor — Enter a value between 0 and 1 to represent an additional factor that
de-rates the cable ampacity. If you do not need to use this property, set the value to 1. The
software multiplies the basic ampacity by this factor to obtain the de-rated ampacity.
Ambient temp. factor — Enter a value between 0 and 2 to represent a temperature factor that
affects the de-rated cable ampacity. For the software to apply this factor to the calculation, in the
Options Manager, you must first set the value of the Apply Temperature Correction Factor to
Cable Sizing property to Yes; setting the value of the property to No is the equivalent of using a
value of 1 for the temperature factor.
If you change any of the de-rating factors for a sized cable, the software
automatically selects the Sizing required check box on the General tab.

Voltage drop (%)

The cable needs to supply electrical current at a voltage that is no more than a few percentage
points below the rated voltage. The voltage drop is expressed as a percentage of the rated
voltage. The software compares the allowable and the recommended calculations of the
voltage drop at running and starting conditions and uses the result to specify the smallest cable
that meets the maximum voltage drop requirements.
Allowable at full load — Allows you to enter the maximum allowable voltage drop percentage
when the connected load is running under normal full load conditions. The allowable voltage
drop must have a value greater than zero. To ignore the voltage drop in the sizing calculation,
type a value of 100.
When selecting Protection Setting in the Cable Sizing tab the system expects
the user to enter the current rating of the protection device. The calculation algorithm is
programmed so that when sizing the cable the system compares the load of the Full Load
current (multiplied by the code factor if Use Code Factor is enabled) with the protection
device setting and uses the larger amperage (Full Load Amp X Code Factor or Protection
Setting) as the required ampacity.
Value in use — Displays the currently used calculated value of the percentage voltage drop of
the cable when the load is running under normal operating conditions, using the actual length of
the cable.
Allowable at starting — Allows you to enter the maximum allowable percentage voltage drop
when starting the equipment. The allowable voltage drop must have a value greater than
zero. To ignore the voltage drop in the sizing calculation, type a value of 100.

▪ This is a required property for motors and some other load types.
▪ When selecting Protection Setting in the Cable Sizing tab the system expects the user
to enter the current rating of the protection device. The calculation algorithm is
programmed so that when sizing the cable the system compares the load of the Full
Load current (multiplied by the code factor if Use Code Factor is enabled) with the
protection device setting and uses the larger amperage (Full Load Amp X Code Factor
or Protection Setting) as the required ampacity.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 948

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Value in use — Displays the currently used calculated value of the voltage drop percentage of
the cable when starting the motor, using the estimated or design length of the cable.
The software clears all the Recommended cable sizing results values and
both Value in use entries in the Voltage drop % group box if you do one of the following. Also,
the software turns on the Sizing required flag and you have to recalculate the cable sizing.
▪ Replace the associated reference cable.
▪ Turn a single power cable into a set of parallel cables by adding a parallel cable.
▪ Turn a set of parallel cables into a single power cable by deleting parallel cables.

Short circuit
If you want to include short circuit calculations in the cable sizing, you enter values for the
properties in this section. The software uses this data along with the coefficients that are found
in the Conductor Material Coefficients and Conductor Insulation Temperatures lookup
tables to calculate the minimum required conductor cross-section area. Suitable values must
be available in these tables for the software to be able to perform the calculation.
Use short circuit cable sizing — Select to enable and activate the short circuit properties and
algorithm when you want the cable sizing to include short circuit calculations.
Duration — Allows you to type the maximum time for which the cable is expected to withstand a
fault short circuit current until a protection device interrupts the current flow in the circuit.
Fault current — Allows you to type the maximum short circuit fault current that can flow through
the cable, and for which the cable needs to be sized.
Required area (cmils) — Displays the calculated minimum conductor cross-section area
required for the cable to meet the short circuit criteria that you specify.

Protection setting
Allows you to specify cable sizing based on the rated current for a protection device such as a
fuse or circuit breaker, rather than using the load current.
Include protection device — Select to specify the rated current of the protection device for use
in sizing calculations. Clear to use the load current value.
Protection settings — Allows you to type the rated current of the protection device for use in
sizing the cable. When selecting Protection Setting in the Cable Sizing tab the system
expects the user to enter the current rating of the protection device. The calculation algorithm is
programmed so that when sizing the cable the system compares the load of the Full Load
current (multiplied by the code factor if Use Code Factor is enabled) with the protection device
setting and uses the larger amperage (Full Load Amp X Code Factor or Protection Setting)
as the required ampacity.

Recommended cable sizing results

Displays the recommended sizing calculations based on the load data that you supply for the
cable. All the information is read- only.
If the cable is connected to a load for which you select the Consumer check box,
the software uses the electrical values of the load that are inherited by the cable to calculate
the cross-section size of that cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 949

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Cross section — Displays the recommended cross section of the current-carrying conductors
for the load requirement. You can click the ellipsis button to open the Cable Sizing Matrix
and select another more suitable reference cable. For more information, see Cable Sizing Matrix
Dialog Box (on page 971).

▪ The software does not size a cable for which it cannot find a reference cable with the
specified cable specification that matches the value of the minimum conductor
cross-section for parallel cables defined in Options Manager. You should either change
the value in Options Manager or create a new reference cable with the appropriate
cross-section in the Reference Data Explorer.
▪ The software filters out from the Cable-Sizing Matrix all the reference cables whose
insulation voltage rating is smaller than the rated voltage of the current cable. Also, the
software does not allow a situation where the insulation voltage rating is smaller than
the rated voltage of a given cable. This situation is prevented when:
▪ Sizing a single cable or several cables in batch mode.
▪ Refreshing load data in batch mode or by clicking the Refresh Data button on the
Sizing Data tab.
▪ Replacing the associated reference cable of one or more plant cables.
▪ Manually modifying cable data on the Common Properties dialog box or the
Properties window.
De-rated cable ampacity — Displays the recommended cable ampacity calculation under
actual operating conditions. The software calculates the de-rated ampacity by multiplying the
basic ampacity by the de-rating factor and the utilization factor.
Number of parallel cables — Indicates the recommended number of parallel cables required
when no single reference cable meets the minimum cable sizing requirements. The software
creates parallel cables as a result of the sizing. The cables are handled as an inseparable
group, and any action that you perform on one of the cables causes all the cables in that group
to follow that operation.
Voltage drop at full load — Displays the recommended voltage drop percentage of the cable
when the connected load is running under normal full load conditions.
Voltage drop at starting — Displays the recommended voltage drop percentage of the cable
when starting the equipment.
Maximum cable length — Indicates the maximum allowed cable length according to the
recommended cross-section calculation.
The software clears all the Recommended cable sizing results values and
both Value in use entries in the Voltage drop % group box if you do one of the following. Also,
the software turns on the Sizing required flag and you have to recalculate the cable sizing.
▪ Replace the associated reference cable.
▪ Turn a single power cable into a set of parallel cables by adding a parallel cable.
▪ Turn a set of parallel cables into a single power cable by deleting parallel cables.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 950

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Calculation Information
Displays messages related to verification of the sizing calculation such as missing data or
indicating a cable-load association. Also displays a message if the current cable needs to be
resized.
The software displays the message Not found when no suitable reference cable
matches the sizing results under the following conditions: when no reference cable exists
corresponding to the cable specification or arrangement, when there are missing values for
ampacity, resistance, or reactance, or when the number of parallel cables exceeds the limit
specified in Options Manager by the Maximum Number of Parallel Cables property.

System notes
Displays messages related to performed actions such as connecting a load, sizing, and so forth.

Command Buttons
Refresh Data — Updates any information derived from a load connected to the cable. This
button is available when the load data changes since the previous time of sizing of the cable or
when you perform cable sizing for the first time.
The software updates the values of the following properties for all item
types if these properties have been defined:
▪ Full load current (FLA)
▪ Starting current
▪ Rated voltage
▪ Supply (AC/DC)
▪ Number of passes
▪ Power factor at full load
▪ Power factor at starting
Calculate Sizing — Calculates the cable cross-section size using the input data and
recommends the most suitable reference cable based on your selected cable specification and
formation.
Apply Sizing — Copies the data to the cable from the reference cable that the software
recommends as a result of the cable sizing.
If you replace the associated reference cable of a terminated cable, the
software does not allow you to resize this cable unless the new reference cable has the
same conductor arrangement as the replaced reference cable.
Synchronize With Reference — Opens the Synchronize Plant and Reference Cable Data
Dialog Box (on page 972), which enables you to see if there are any differences between the
values in the properties of the current plant cable and the values in the associated reference
cable. You can then copy the reference data to the plant cable so that the plant and reference
cable data is fully synchronized. Note that this command becomes available only when there is
a difference between plant and reference data for the current item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 951

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Earth Loop Impedance Tab (Cable Common Properties Dialog

Box)
This tab appears for plant power cables only. You can specify parameters for cable grounding
using the cable armor or using a separate grounding cable, as well as external impedance, and
the software can calculate the total earth loop impedance for the cable.
Earth loop impedance calculation required — Select this option when you want to calculate
the earth loop impedance for this particular line. After you click Calculate, the software clears
this check box.

Cable impedance path

Allows you to specify the grounding path used for the cable using the cable armor or via a
separate grounding cable, if available.
Use cable armor — When you select this option, the software uses the cable armor as the
return path for grounding with the values that you specify for the armor resistance and reactance
to calculate the earth loop impedance.
Armor impedance per unit length — Displays the overall armor impedance per unit length,
which the software calculates from the Armor Reactance and Armor Resistivity properties as
specified in the Properties window.
Actual cable length — The value of the Actual length property that the software calculates on
the Design Data tab.
Total armor impedance — The total cable armor impedance, calculated as the product of the
armor impedance per unit length and the actual cable length.
Use separate grounding cable — When you select this option, the software uses a grounding
cable that is associated with the load as the return path for grounding with the values that you
specify for the grounding cable resistance and reactance to calculate the earth loop
impedance. Note that this option is only available if a grounding cable is already associated
with the load on the To side of the power cable.
Tag — The item tag of the grounding cable associated with the load on the To side of the power
cable.
Cable formation — Displays the cable formation of the grounding cable as specified in the
cable common properties.
Cable impedance per unit length — Displays the overall grounding impedance per unit length,
comprised of the Reactance per unit length and Resistivity per unit length properties which
are specified for the grounding cable.
Actual cable length — The value of the Actual length property for the grounding cable.
Total grounding cable impedance — The grounding cable impedance, calculated as the
product of the cable impedance per unit length and the actual cable length.
External loop impedance — Allows you to type a value for any additional impedance
associated with the power source.
Total earth loop impedance — The total impedance, calculated as the sum of the grounding
path impedance, external loop impedance, and impedance of the cable carrying the current.
Calculate — Click to update the calculation of the total earth loop impedance.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 952

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

System notes — Displays messages related to earth loop impedance calculations.

Command Button
Synchronize With Reference — Opens the Synchronize Plant and Reference Cable Data
Dialog Box (on page 972), which enables you to see if there are any differences between the
values in the properties of the current plant cable and the values in the associated reference
cable. You can then copy the reference data to the plant cable so that the plant and reference
cable data is fully synchronized. Note that this command becomes available only when there is
a difference between plant and reference data for the current item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 953

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Procurement Tab (Cable Common Properties Dialog Box)

Enables you to enter information related to ordering a specific cable for your inventory.
Manufacturer — Allows you to select a manufacturer. You can define and customize
manufacturers in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Model — Allows you to select a cable model. The available models are specific to the
manufacturer. You can select a model without selecting a manufacturer. The software then
selects the appropriate manufacturer automatically according to the selected model. You can
define and customize models in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Stores part number — Allows you to enter a reference number for the cable in your
inventory. This read-only value comes from the reference cable used as the basis for this
cable.

Command Button
Synchronize With Reference — Opens the Synchronize Plant and Reference Cable Data
Dialog Box (on page 972), which enables you to see if there are any differences between the
values in the properties of the current plant cable and the values in the associated reference
cable. You can then copy the reference data to the plant cable so that the plant and reference
cable data is fully synchronized. Note that this command becomes available only when there is
a difference between plant and reference data for the current item.

Cable Cut Definitions Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define cable cuts manually for a cable that has not been assigned
to a drum. This way you can assign predefined cable cuts to a cable drum in the Assign Drums
to Cables Wizard or in the Cable Drum Common Properties. Also, on the Design Data tab of
the Cable Common Properties, the software indicates the number of splices in accordance
with the number of cable cuts that exist for a given cable.

▪ If you decrease the cable actual length, the software automatically deletes the cable
cuts that exceed the cable actual length value. The software deletes the cable cuts from
the bottom up.
▪ If you increase the cable actual length, the software automatically adds a new cable cut
if you selected the Retain manual cable cuts for drum wizard assignment check box.
The software will not add another cable cut if this check box has not been selected.
▪ All the values in this dialog box are read-only for a cable that has been locked to a drum
or installed and you cannot add, delete, or change a cable cut length for such a cable.
Cable actual length — Displays the calculated cable actual length value of the current cable.
Remaining length on cable — Displays the remaining cable length after adding a cable cut.

Cable Cuts Grid

Sequence — Displays the sequence of the cable cut for the current cable.
Cut Item Tag — Displays the name of the cable cuts that have been created after clicking Add.
The software names the cable cut automatically but you can click in the box and type a name as
you require.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 954

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Cut Length — Allows you to define the length of the selected cable cut.

▪ Note that the total length of all the cable cuts must be exactly the same as the Cable
actual length of the current cable.
▪ You cannot change the length of a cable cut that has been assigned to a drum.
Assigned Cable Drum — Displays the name of the cable drum that the cable cut has been
assigned to.

Command Buttons
Add — Adds a new cable cut for which you have to define a length.
Delete — Deletes the selected cable cut. If the cable cut has been assigned to a drum,
unassign it from the drum before deleting it.
Unassign From Drum — Cancels the assignment of the selected cable cut from its cable drum.
This will allow you to change the length of that cable cut or delete it if needed.
Retain manual cable cuts for drum wizard assignment — Instructs the software to make the
existing cable cuts available in the Assign Drums to Cables Wizard. The software will retain
the defined lengths of the existing cable cuts when using the Assign Drums to Cables Wizard
and when selecting the Include assigned cables check box to reshuffle the drums. Also, if you
increase the cable length, the software automatically adds a new cable cut to account for this
addition to the cable length. Clearing this check box instructs the software not to make these
cable cuts available for assignment in the wizard. Instead, the entire cable will be available for
drum assignment. All the existing cable cuts will be deleted from the Cable Cut Definitions
dialog box after selecting the entire cable and after the wizard completes the assignment
process.
For more information, see Define Manual Cable Cuts (on page 158).

Cable Routing
Topics
Actual Routing Path Dialog Box..................................................... 956
Batch Cable Routing Dialog Box ................................................... 956
Cable Routing Definition Dialog Box ............................................. 957
Cableway Common Properties Dialog Box ................................... 960
Cableway Segment Common Properties Dialog Box .................... 961
External Routing Path Dialog Box ................................................. 964
Reference Cableway Component Common Properties Dialog Box
....................................................................................................... 965
Predefined Routes Dialog Box....................................................... 967
Route Properties Dialog Box ......................................................... 967
Routing Path Dialog Box ................................................................ 968

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 955

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Actual Routing Path Dialog Box

The actual routing path for a cable is determined by the value of the Use External Routing
Length property. If set to True, the software displays the external routing path retrieved from
Smart 3D, if it exists. If the value of the Use External Routing Length property is set to False,
this dialog box displays the routing path defined in Smart Electrical, if it exists.

Batch Cable Routing Dialog Box

Enables you to define a cable routing path and assign cables to this routing path in batch mode.
Clear routing from selected cables - Select to delete existing routing from selected cables
without assigning new cable routing, when you click Apply or OK. Clear to enable assignment
of cables to the routing path that you define in the Cable routing group box.

Cable routing
In this group box, you build the routing path to which you then assign cables.
Select predefined route — When you click Find, allows you to select a predefined route to use
as a basis for the cable routing definition.
Copy route from cable — When you click Find, allows you to select routing from another cable
to use as a basis for the cable routing definition.
Segregation level — Displays the segregation level that applies for the cables that you selected
prior to opening this dialog box. The value of the segregation level is read-only.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box, from which you can select as predefined route or a cable
with routing for copying, according to the option you have selected. Note that only routes or
cables that belong to the current segregation level are available for selection.
Save as New Route — Opens the Route Properties dialog box, from which you can save the
current routing definition as a new predefined route.

Route details
Displays the cableways and segments that make up the routing. Note that only those segments
that belong to the current segregation level are available for selection.
Sequence — Indicates the sequence of the segment in the routing path.
Cableway — Select the cableway from which you want to select a segment.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 956

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Segment — Select the segment through which you want to route the cables. You can use each
segment only once in a route.
Length — Displays the segment length for the selected segment. You define this value in the
Properties window.
Add — Adds a new segment row below the currently selected row.
Insert — Adds a new segment row above the currently selected row.
Up — Moves the selected row above the previous row each time that you click this option. The
order of the rows affects the order of the segments in the route.
Down — Moves the selected row below the next row each time that you click this option. The
order of the rows affects the order of the segments in the route.
Remove — Removes the currently selected segment from the route.
Routing length — Displays the total length of the segments that you defined.

Select cables
Displays the cables that you selected in the Electrical Index or EDE, with details of the cable
tag, cable formation, cable category, armor type, and routing path. Beside each cable name, in
the Select column, is a check box that allows you to select the cable for routing.
Select all — Allows you to select all the displayed cables for routing.

Cable Routing Definition Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define the routing of the currently selected cable. Here you can
define the routing of a single cable or for a set of parallel cables. Also, you can select a
predefined route or copy an existing route from another cable.
Routing method for parallel cables — Allows you to select the routing method for parallel
cables:
▪ Set same route for all cables — Instructs the software to define an identical route for
all the cables in the set.
▪ Allow different routes for all cables — Instructs the software to allow you to define
different routes for all the cables in the set.
These options are available for parallel cables only.
Segregation level — Allows you to select an appropriate segregation level for the current cable.
You cannot complete the routing definition without selecting a segregation level. The
segregation level of the cable must match the segregation level of all the cableway segments to
which you assign the cable. Note that once you have added at least one segment to the
routing, you cannot change the segregation level; to do so, you must first remove all the
segments.

Cables
This chart displays cable tag or tags, their length values, and the source from which the value is
taken.
Cable Tag — Displays the name of the cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 957

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Length — Displays the design length of the cable. (This value is not displayed if the Cable
installed or Use external routing length check box has been selected.)
Route Source — Displays the source of the current routing data. (Note that if the Use external
routing length check box on the Design Data tab of the Cable Common Properties has been
selected, the External routing is displayed in this column.)
Tail 1 — Displays the tail 1 length value of the current cable. (This value is not displayed if the
Cable installed or Use external routing length check box has been selected.)
Tail 2 — Displays the tail 2 length value of the current cable. (This value is not displayed if the
Cable installed or Use external routing length check box has been selected.)
Spare — Displays the spare length value of the current cable. (This value is not displayed if the
Cable installed or Use external routing length check box has been selected.)
Total Length — Displays the total length of the cable.
Note that for parallel cables and single-core cable assemblies, the total
length value must be identical for all the cables in the set.

Routing definition
This section allows you to design the routing of the current cable. You can design a new route or
use an existing route. The grid displays the cableways and segments that make up the
routing. Note that only those segments that belong to the current segregation level are
available for selection.
Sequence — Indicates the sequence of the segment in the routing path.
Cableway — Allows you to select a cableway from which you want to select a segment.
Segment — Allows you to select a segment through which you want to route the cables. You
can use each segment only once in a route.
Length — Displays the segment length for the selected segment. This value is taken from the
Length field under Design data.
Drop-off Length — Allows you to account for the point at which the cable exits the cableway
segment so that Smart Electrical can calculate the actual cable length more accurately. This
value specifies the length of the cable on the assigned segment. This way the distance between
the end of the segment and the drop-off point of the cable is not included in the Actual length of
the cable.
Segment Fill — Displays the percentage of the segment filled by cables.
Find route — Allows you to select a search option for an existing route. Note that only those
segments that belong to the current segregation level can be searched for. You can select one
of the following:
▪ Select Predefined Route — Opens the Find dialog box, which allows you to look for an
existing predefined route.
▪ From Cable — Opens the Find dialog box, which allows you to look for a cable that has
a suitable predefined route.
▪ Parallel cable tags — Allows you to select one of the parallel cables in the set. This
option is available only if Allow different routes for all cables is selected.
Save as New Route — Allows you to save the current routing definition as a new predefined
route.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 958

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Add — Allows you to add an empty row below the currently selected row.
Remove — Removes the currently selected segment from the route.
Up — Moves the selected row above the previous row each time that you click this option. The
order of the rows affects the order of the segments in the route.
Down — Moves the selected row below the next row each time that you click this option. The
order of the rows affects the order of the segments in the route.

Design data
This section allows you to design the length of the current cable.
Tail 1 — Allows you to type a value for the spare tail length at one end the cable, if you require.
Length — A calculated field that displays the design length, or if not available, the estimated
length.
Tail 2 — Allows you to type a value for the spare tail length at the other end the cable, if you
require.
Spare length — Allows you to type a value for additional spare cable length, if you require.
Actual design/installed length — The actual length of the cable, calculated from the sum of
tail length 1, the main length of the cable (routing length, design length or estimated length), tail
length 2, and the spare length. The software uses this value to calculate cable sizing and
optimize cable drums.
The software overwrites the calculated Actual design/installed length value in
the following cases:
▪ After selecting the Use external routing length check box, the Actual
design/installed length value is overwritten with the existing External routing length
value.
▪ After selecting the Cable installed check box, the Actual design/installed length
value is overwritten with the Installed length value.
▪ When replacing the Actual design/installed length value, the Installed length
property overrides the External routing length property.
For information about the software behavior for parallel cables that were
updated outside of Smart Electrical, see Routing of Parallel Cables Updated Externally (on page
204).

Installed data
Allows you to enter data so that the software can take into account the actual installed data of
the current cable. The software calculates the installed length based on the values that you
enter for Marked length — side 1 and Marked length — side 2 fields.
Marked length — side 1 — Allows you to type a value for the marked length on side 1 of the
cable. This is a marking that the vendor usually marks at standard fixed metered intervals along
the entire length of the cable.
Marked length — side 2 — Allows you to type a value for the marked length on side 2 of the
cable. This is a marking that the vendor usually marks at standard fixed metered intervals along
the entire length of the cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 959

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Installed length — A calculated field that displays the actual installed length of the cable. The
software calculates this value if you enter both Marked length — side 1 and Marked length
— side 2 values. The result is the absolute delta between the Marked length — side 1 and
Marked length — side 2 values. If you do not enter both Marked length — side 1 and
Marked length — side 2 values, you can type in the installed value yourself.
Cable installed — Allows you to define the cable as installed in the field. Once you select this
check box, the software overwrites the value under Actual design/installed length with the
Installed length value. The software uses the Actual design/installed length value to
calculate cable sizing and optimize cable drums.

Cableway Common Properties Dialog Box

Enables you to set options for defining properties of cableways, including the segments that
make up the cableway.
Cableway — Identifies the cableway. The cableway tag appears beside the cableway in the
Electrical Index. You must enter a value that matches the naming convention for the
cableway. You define naming conventions in the Options Manager.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the cableway, for information only.

Segments
This section displays details of the segments that make up the cableway. When you start to
define the segments, the details appear. You can modify the item tag if required; all other
properties are view-only. You can also add segments to a cableway and you can delete and
sort segments that do not have cables assigned to them. Note that if you insert a segment in
the middle of a cableway that already has assigned cables, the software automatically updates
the routing.
Item Tag — Allows you to modify the item tag that identifies the cableway segment.
Reference Component — The reference cableway component used for the segment.
Category — The category to which the segment belongs: Tray, Conduit, or Miscellaneous.
Description — Displays the segment description, if applicable.
Add — Adds a new segment row below the currently selected row.
Insert — Adds a new segment row above the currently selected row.
Up — Moves the selected row above the previous row each time that you click this option. The
order of the rows affects the order of the segments in the cableway.
Down — Moves the selected row below the next row each time that you click this option. The
order of the rows affects the order of the segments in the cableway.
Remove — Removes the currently selected segment from the cableway.
Notes — Allows you to type user notes, for example if you want to provide additional information
regarding special features of the cableway.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 960

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Cableway Segment Common Properties Dialog Box

Enables you to set options for defining properties of cableway segments used in cable
routing. You can specify any one of three categories of cableway segments: trays, conduits,
and miscellaneous components. Miscellaneous components are used to make various
connections between trays and conduits.
General Tab (see "General Tab (Cableway Segment Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page
961)
Associated Cables Tab (see "Associated Cables Tab (Cableway Segment Common Properties
Dialog Box)" on page 964)

General Tab (Cableway Segment Common Properties Dialog Box)

Allows you to define and edit basic properties of a cableway segment used to route cables.
Item tag — Allows you to specify a tag that uniquely identifies the cableway segment.
Cableway — Displays the cableway with which the segment is associated. This value is
read-only.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the cableway segment, for information only.
Item status — Allows you to select an appropriate status of the equipment indicating whether
the item is active or deleted.
Category — Displays the category of the cableway component used as the reference item for
the cableway segment. If no reference cableway component is selected, you can also select a
category: Tray, Conduit, or Miscellaneous, which the software uses to filter the results when
you click Find to look for a reference cableway component to associate.
Segregation level — Allows you to specify a segregation level for the segment. All segments
that belong to a particular routing path must have the same segregation level, and all cables that
you route through those segments must have the same segregation level as those segments.

Reference component
Describes the reference cableway component used as the catalog item for the
segment. Default values for some of the segment properties, such as Length, Width, and
some fill properties come from the component.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box, where you can select a reference cableway component to
which you assign the current cableway segment.
Dissociate — Allows you to clear the association of the selected reference component with the
cableway segment.
Length — Allows you to type a value for the length of the segment. You can use the value that
you type to represent a space reservation or an actual length of routing.
Diameter — Displays the value of the diameter of the cableway segment. This read-only value
comes from the reference cableway component used as the basis for this segment and applies
only to segments with category Conduit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 961

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Width — Displays the value of the width of the cableway segment. This read-only value comes
from the reference cableway component used as the basis for this segment and applies only to
segments with category Tray or Miscellaneous.
Depth — Displays the value of the depth of the cableway segment. This read-only value comes
from the reference cableway component used as the basis for this segment and applies only to
segments with category Tray or Miscellaneous.
Notes — Allows you to enter text, for example, if you want to provide additional information
about the segment.

Adjacent segments
Displays the names of the segments on either side of the current segment in the cableway. The
positions of the segments are determined by the sequence assigned to them on the Cableway
Common Properties dialog box.
From segment — The segment with sequence number preceding that of the current
segment. If no segment precedes the current segment, the software displays End.
To segment — The segment with sequence number following that of the current segment. If
no segment follows the current segment, the software displays End.

Segment fill
The software calculates on the fly the segment fill percentage for the cables. These cables are
routed on the segment as part of the routing, validating the segment fill percent values against
the maximum allowed values that you specify or, as defined by NEC code. The software takes
into account the fill factor that you specify and the maximum weight per unit length allowed on
the tray. If any of the actual values exceed the allowed values, the software rejects them and
displays a warning message. For area or width calculations, the software performs the
validation according to the segment category and whether or not the segment is covered. The
dynamic text that appears indicates the validation method that the software uses. Note that
cable fill validation depends on the values that exist in the Conductor Area cmils lookup
table. If the value that you require is not in this lookup table, add it manually before calculating
the segment fill percentage.
Allow overfill — Select this check box to ignore validation of values that exceed the allowed
area or weight.
Covered — Displays whether the current cableway segment is covered or not. You cannot
change this setting because this parameter is inherited from the associated cableway
component tray in the Reference Data Explorer.
Calculation criteria — Select the required tray fill calculation (shown in percent) by Area or
Width or Auto. Select Auto if you require the calculation by the Covered flag (default). Note
that when using NEC validation method, the Calculation criteria list is disabled.
Maximum area — The maximum available area for the segment. For a covered segment, the
software calculates the area by multiplying the width and depth values together. For a conduit,
the software calculates the area from the diameter. This value is read-only, and comes from the
reference cableway component. Note that When using the NEC Validation method, the
Maximum area, Allowed area, Accumulated area and Accumulated diameter values are
calculated in inches.
Allowed area — The actual maximum area of the segment that cables included in the routing
are allowed to occupy. The software calculates this value as the product of the maximum area

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 962

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

and the fill factor. Note that when using the NEC validation method, the Allowed area value is
derived from NEC tables according to the cable type of the cables, located in the tray. Note that
when using NEC validation method, for conduits, the Allowed area value changes according to
the number of cables in the conduit. Note that this pane will be activated only if the calculation is
by Area.
Allowed width — The actual maximum width of the segment that cables included in the routing
are allowed to occupy. The software calculates this value as the product of the Maximum width
of the tray, the layers and the Fill factor, Using NEC validation method the software derives the
Allowed width from the NEC tables. Note that this pane will be activated only if the calculation
is by width.
Fill factor — Type a value representing the fraction of the maximum area or the maximum width
that you want to allow when adding cables to the segment. You can type any positive value,
including values that are greater than 1; however, for conduits, covered trays or for NEC, the fill
factor value should not exceed 1.
De-rating factor — Used for NEC validation, This code factor can have one of three different
values (0.4, 0.5, 0.9), The code multiplies the Allowable width or the Allowable area.
Accumulated area — The total area occupied by the cables routed through the current
segment. When appropriate, the software validates this value against the allowed area value.
Note that when using the NEC validation method, the Accumulated area value may be higher
than the Allowed area value.
Number of layers — Type an integer indicating the number of layers of cables that you want to
allow when the software performs validation by diameter.
Accumulated diameter — The sum of the outer diameters of all the cables routed through the
current segment. When appropriate, the software validates this value against the product of the
segment width, the fill factor, and the number of layers.
Single-core cable fill % — Calculates the segment fill percentage assuming that only
single-core cables are routed through the current segment.
Multi--core cable fill % — Calculates the segment fill percentage assuming that only multi-core
cables are routed through the current segment.
Total fill % — Calculates the total combined segment fill percentage for single-core and
multi-core cables that are routed through the current segment.
Maximum weight — The maximum weight per unit length of cables that the segment is capable
of supporting. This value is read-only and comes from the reference cableway component.
Allowed weight — The actual maximum weight per unit length that cables included in the
routing are allowed to reach. The software calculates this value as the product of the maximum
weight and the weight factor.
Weight factor — Type a value representing the fraction of the maximum weight per unit length
that you want to allow when adding cables to the segment. You can type any positive value,
including values that are greater than 1.
Accumulated weight — The total weight per unit length of the cables routed through the
current segment.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 963

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Associated Cables Tab (Cableway Segment Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Displays a list of the cables associated with the segment. The data on this tab is
read-only. You make the actual associations on the Cable Common Properties dialog box or
on the Batch Route Cables dialog box.
Item Tag — Identifies the cable. The cable tag appears beside the cable in the Electrical Index.
Formation — Displays information based on the total number and the size of the conductors or
cable sets specified for the particular cable.
Weight / Length — Displays the weight per unit length of the cable. This value is important
when filling the segment to ensure that the total weight per unit length of the cables in the
segment does not exceed the maximum allowed value for the segment. This is the value
assigned to the Weight Per Length property that appears in the Properties window.
Outside Diameter — Displays the outside diameter of the cable. When filling a segment, this
value is important for validating that the accumulated outside diameter of the cables in the
segment does not exceed the maximum allowed value for the segment in the case of an
uncovered segment, or that the accumulated area of the cables does not exceed the maximum
allowed area in the case of a covered segment. This is the value assigned to the Outside
Diameter property that appears in the Properties window.

External Routing Path Dialog Box

If an external routing path is defined for a cable using values retrieved from Smart 3D, this
dialog box displays the sequence of cableways and cable segments in that routing path.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 964

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Reference Cableway Component Common Properties Dialog

Box
Enables you to define reference components for creating cableway segments used in cable
routing. You can define three categories of cableway components: trays, conduits, and
miscellaneous components. You use miscellaneous components to make various connections
between trays and conduits.
General Tab (see "General Tab (Reference Cableway Component Common Properties Dialog
Box)" on page 965)
Procurement Tab (see "Procurement Tab (Reference Cableway Component Common
Properties Dialog Box)" on page 967)

General Tab (Reference Cableway Component Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Sets options for general properties that identify and characterize the cableway component.
Cableway component tag — Allows you to specify a tag that uniquely identifies the cableway
component. This is also the commodity tag that identifies the cableway component as a bulk
item.
Category — Shows the purpose for which the cableway component is used. Examples of
cableway component categories are tray, conduit, and miscellaneous. The software
automatically assigns the category according to the folder in which you create the cableway
component, and you cannot change the value.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the cableway component, for information
only.
Type — Allows you to select a value for the cableway component type. You can define and
customize cableway component types in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Nominal size — Allows you to type a numerical value corresponding to the manufacturer's data
for the diameter or width of the cableway component. This value is for reference only; it is not
used in any software calculations.
Length — Allows to specifies the default length for the segments to which you assign this
cableway component.
Count quantity — Allows you to specifies whether to count the tray length Metric or Imperial
units (Length), or to count the number of items (Number of Items).
Covered — Select this check box to specify a covered segment; clear for an uncovered
segment. This option applies only to cableway component types for which the category is Tray
or Miscellaneous. Selection of this check box affects the calculation of certain segment fill
parameters in the segment that you associate this cableway component with. If you modify this
property after assigning a cable to a segment based on this cableway component, the software
recalculates the segment fill parameters and accepts the change provided you do not exceed
the loading parameter values. Note that the Covered calculation applies in case you do not
select Area or Width calculation for the segment.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 965

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Ventilated — Allows you to specify a cableway component that is ventilated. You can use this
value for filtering cableway components. Note that when using the NEC validation method, the
Ventilated option is disabled.
Metallic — Allows you to specify a cableway component that is metallic. You can use this
value for filtering cableway components.
Flexible — (Applies to conduits only). Allows you to specify a flexible conduit; clear to specify a
rigid conduit. You can use this value for filtering cableway components.
Bending radius — Allows you to specify a bending radius for a component representing a
corner or junction segment. For a very wide segment, the value you type is likely to be some
average value.
Bottom — Allows you to select a value for the structure of the cableway component bottom; for
example, Ladder, Solid. This option applies only to cableway component types for which the
category is Tray or Miscellaneous. You can define and customize cableway component
bottom types in the Data Dictionary Manager. Note that when using NEC validation method, the
Bottom pane does not appear.
Construction — Specifies the tray type, which affects how the software calculates the segment
field. Available values are: Ventilated channel, Solid channel, Ladder, Ventilated trough,
Solid bottom tray. This option appears only when using the NEC validation method

Loading parameters
Normal span — The span required between two supports to ensure proper support of the
component when fully loaded.
Fill factor — Allows you to type a positive value to be used as the default for segments to which
you assign this cableway component in your plant. The fill factor is a quantity that the software
multiplies the maximum diameter or area of the segment by (according to the segment category)
in order to calculate the allowed area or diameter for cable fill. Note that when using the NEC
validation method, the Fill factor is limited to one.
Weight factor — Allows you to type a positive value to be used as the default for segments to
which you assign this cableway component in your plant. The weight factor is a quantity that
the software multiplies the maximum weight per unit length of the segment by in order to
calculate the allowed weight per unit length for cable fill.
Maximum weight per unit length — Allows you to type a value for the maximum weight of
cable per unit length that the segment is capable of supporting.

Dimensions
The software uses the values you type for the dimensions to calculate the area of cableway
segments that you associate with this cableway component. If you change the value of the
dimensions after you have assigned a cable to any of these segments, the software recalculates
the segment fill parameters and accepts the change provided you do not exceed the loading
parameter values.
Width — Allows you to type a value for the width of the cableway component. This option
applies only to cableway components with category Tray or Miscellaneous.
Depth — Allows you to type a value for the depth of the cableway component. This option
applies only to cableway components with category Tray or Miscellaneous.
Diameter — Allows you to type a value for the diameter of the cableway component. This
option applies only to cableway components with category Conduit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 966

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Area — Displays a calculated value of the area of the cableway component, according to the
width and depth (for trays or miscellaneous components) or according to the diameter (for
conduits).

Procurement Tab (Reference Cableway Component Common Properties

Dialog Box)
Allows you to enter information related to ordering a specific cableway component for your
inventory.
Manufacturer — Allows you to select a manufacturer. You can define and customize
manufacturers in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Manufacturer part number — Allows you to enter a part number specified by the manufacturer
of the cableway component.
Stores part number — Allows you to enter a reference number for the cableway component in
your inventory.

Predefined Routes Dialog Box

Displays all the available routes defined in your plant. The information on this dialog box is
read-only.

Route list
Route — Displays the name of the route.
Description — Displays a description for the route.
New — Opens the Route Properties dialog box (on page 967) to allow you to create a new
route.
Properties — Opens the Route Properties dialog box to allow you to view or modify the
properties of the selected route.
Delete — Deletes the selected route from the database.

Route Properties Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to display the cableways and segments in a predefined route.
Route — Displays the name of the route.
Description — Displays a description for the route.
Segregation level — You must select a segregation level for the route. The software applies
the segregation level that you select to all segments in the route. Note that once you have
added at least one segment to the routing, you cannot change the segregation level; to do so,
you must first remove all the segments.

Route details
Cableway — Select a cableway to filter the segments. You must select a cableway before you
can select a segment .

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 967

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Segment — Select a segment to use in the routing path. Only segments that have the same
segregation level as the one defined for the route are available for selection. Note that you can
use each segment only once in a route.
Length — Displays the length of the selected segment with the appropriate units. This value is
read-only.
Add — Adds a new segment row below the currently selected row.
Insert — Adds a new segment row above the currently selected row.
Up — Moves the selected row above the previous row each time that you click this option. The
order of the rows affects the order of the segments in the route.
Down — Moves the selected row below the next row each time that you click this option. The
order of the rows affects the order of the segments in the route.
Remove — Removes the currently selected segment from the cableway.

Routing Path Dialog Box

If a routing path is defined for a cable in Smart Electrical, this dialog box displays the sequence
of cableways and cable segments in that routing path.

Cable Drum Common Properties Dialog Box

Allows you to define and edit basic cable drum properties, and to assign plant cables to the
current cable drum. An asterisk beside a property name indicates required data.
Drum tag — Identifies the cable drum. The drum tag appears beside the cable drum in the
Electrical Index.
Procurement status — Allows you to set a procurement status for the current drum. The
following statuses are available:
▪ In bids — Puts no restrictions on the current drum or the cable that is assigned to this
drum.
▪ Ordered — Instructs the software to do the following:
▪ You cannot delete the current drum.
▪ You can no longer change the Total cable length to order/delivered value. This
value becomes unavailable for editing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 968

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ It is possible to reassign this drum to another cable or add another cable to this
drum as long as the Total cable length to order has not been exceeded.
▪ Delivered — Defines the drum as delivered to the construction site. Prevents you from
editing the Total cable length to order/delivered value.
Spare drum — Allows you to define the current drum as spare. Defining a cable drum as spare
entails the following:
▪ The cable drum becomes reserved and the software does not assign it to any cable.
▪ You cannot delete a spare cable drum.
▪ You cannot modify the Total cable length to order value.
▪ You cannot define a drum as spare if it is assigned to a cable. You have to cancel all the
cable assignment by clicking Remove in the Assigned cables group box.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the cable drum, for information only.
Reference cable — Displays the reference cable that you selected for the current cable
drum. You must select a reference cable for the drum. To set a reference cable or to select a
different one, click to open the Select Reference Cable dialog box (on page 980). Note
that you can only select a different reference cable if the drum has no assigned cables.
You can change the drum capacity of a drum even if the drum is assigned to a
cable. This way you can implement new drum capacities supplied by vendors. You can
edit the properties of the associated reference cable and add or change the drum
capacity values for that reference cable. Once you have added new Minimum and
Maximum values or changed the existing Minimum and Maximum values of the
associated reference cable, Click to open the Select Reference Cable dialog box
and then click Select to set a different drum capacity for a drum regardless of whether
the drum has or has not been assigned to a cable.
Pulling area — Allows you to select a single cable pulling area to which you assign the
drum. Once you define an appropriate reference cable and select a pulling area, after clicking
Add in the Assigned cables data window below, the software can find only those cables that
are associated with the currently selected pulling area. If you want to assign cables that belong
to multiple pulling areas, select the Allow multiple pulling areas check box, which makes the
Pulling area list unavailable. Also note that you can only select another pulling area if the drum
has no assigned cables. You can define and customize pulling areas in the Data Dictionary
Manager.
Minimum cable length to order — Displays the minimum length of cable when ordering from
the supplier. The software enters this value automatically after you select an appropriate
reference cable. This value is taken from the Design Data tab of the Reference Cable
Common Properties dialog box.
Maximum drum capacity — Displays the maximum total cable length that this drum can hold,
including any spare cable. The software enters this value automatically after you select an
appropriate reference cable. This value is taken from the Design Data tab of the Reference
Cable Common Properties dialog box. The software validates the total cable length on the
drum against this value.
Total cable length to order/delivered — Allows you to specify the length of cable to order from
a supplier for future assignment. This value must lie between the minimum cable length to order
and the maximum drum capacity and cannot be less than the total cable length on the drum.
Note that this value becomes unavailable for editing after changing the procurement status to

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 969

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Ordered. Once the procurement status is set to Ordered, the software takes into account the
Total cable length to order/delivered value in all relevant calculations.
Total actual length assigned (planned) — Displays the sum of the actual planned length
values of all the assigned cables.
Spare percentage on drum — Allows you to specify a spare percentage for the current drum.
This value is used by the software to calculate a spare cable length factor, for example, to make
allowance for cutting errors. For example, if you want a drum spare factor of 5%, type 5. For
calculation details, see Rules Governing Cable Drum Calculations (on page 198).
Scrap cable length — Displays the scrap cable length value that is used by the software to
calculate the Total cable length on drum value. You can define the cable scrap length only for
reference cables. This value will be used by the software only for drum calculation purposes and
will not be added to the actual cable length of the plant cables.
Total cable length on drum (planned) — Displays the total planned length of the assigned
cables on the current drum. The software calculates this value by adding up the Total actual
length assigned (planned), Spare percentage on drum, and Scrap cable length values of
the current drum. You can assign more cables to this drum so long as this value does not
exceed the value of the Maximum drum capacity property.
Total cable length left on drum — Displays the remaining total length of the cables on the
current drum after the cables have been installed. The software calculates this value by
subtracting the total length of the installed cables from the Total cable length to
order/delivered value.

Assigned cables
Displays the cables assigned to the current cable drum. Note that you can only assign cables
after you have selected a reference cable and a pulling area.
Locked — Allows you to lock a cable to the current drum. Note that locking a cable to a drum
makes it impossible to unassign this cable from the assigned drum or change the assignment to
another cable drum. You can unlock the drum from the current cable by clearing the Locked
check box here or clear the Lock to drum check box on the Design Tab of the Cable Common
Properties dialog box.
When using the Assign Drums to Cables wizard, the software optimizes
the assignment of cables to drums. The optimization mechanism disregards all the cables
that either have been locked to drums or already have been installed. Installed and locked
cables are, therefore, fixed on those drums. When calculating the Total cable length left
on drum value, the optimization mechanism subtracts the length of the locked and installed
cables from the maximum drum capacity. For details about the optimization process, see
Optimization of Cable Drum Assignment (on page 195).
Tag name — Identifies the cable. The tag name appears beside the cable in the Electrical
Index.
Installation Status — Displays whether the cable is installed in the field or not. If the cable is
installed, the software takes its Actual Length value to calculate the Total cable length left on
drum value.
Formation — Describes cable structure in terms of the number of conductors, and where
appropriate, additional conductors with their sizes. For example, 3 x 2.5 mm2 + 2 x 1.0
mm2 described a cable with three 2.5 mm2 main conductors and two 2.5 mm 2 additional
conductors.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 970

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Actual Length — A derived value for cable length. If in the Cable Common Properties dialog
box a cable has a value for Estimated length, but no value for Design length, then the
estimated length is the value for Actual Length. If there is a value for Design length, then this
is also the value for Actual Length.
Allow multiple pulling areas — When assigning cables to the current drum, select to instruct
the software to look for all available cables that belong to the selected reference cable. If you do
not select this check box, you need to select an appropriate pulling area from the Pulling area
list. Once you define an appropriate reference cable and allow multiple pulling areas, after
clicking Add in the Assigned cables data window below, the software finds all the cables that
belong to the current reference cable and not just those cables that are assigned to one specific
pulling area.
Add — Opens the Find dialog box, where you search for available cables to assign to the
current cable drum. The available cables are those that belong to the same reference cable
and pulling areas that you specify for the cable drum. This option is available only after you
enter the required data and only if the current drum is not defined as spare.
Remove — Removes the selected cable from the current cable drum. This option is available
only when cables are associated with the cable drum.

Cable Set Properties Dialog Box

Provides information about cable sets that you define for an instrumentation cable.
Sequence — Indicates the sequence of the set in the cable. Note
that you cannot change the values in this column.
Set Type — The set type represents the arrangement of the wires in the set, such as Wire,
Pair, Pair w/Shield, Triad, Triad w/Shield, and so forth. The default value for this property
comes from the set type selected for the cable. You can edit the values of this property so long
as you have not assigned a reference cable to a plant cable. If the set type is unknown, for
example if you change the number of sets in the Cable Common Properties dialog box, the
value Other appears.
Item Tag — Displays the item tag for each set. You can change these values if required.

Cable Sizing Matrix Dialog Box

Enables you to review all the acceptable reference cables and parallel combinations defined in
the Reference Data Explorer that can be used for the specified load and electrical parameters,
and to select from the list a single cable or an assembly of parallel cables. Only those cables
that meet or exceed all the sizing criteria appear in the list.
When sizing cables, the software filters out from the Cable-Sizing Matrix all
the reference cables whose insulation voltage rating is smaller than the rated voltage of the
current cable.
Comment — Indicates whether the suggested cable in the list exactly meets the sizing data
criteria or exceeds the needed size as shown by the values: Recommended or Oversized.
Conductor Size — Shows the conductor cross-section area for each cable that meets the
sizing criteria.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 971

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Number of Cables — Indicates the number of parallel cables for all appropriate recommended
or oversized cables that meet the sizing criteria, up to a maximum determined by the values of
the minimum cross-section area and maximum number of parallel cables as specified in the
Options Manager.
Reference Cable Item Tag — Indicates the name of the associated reference cable.
Description — Displays the reference cable description.
Basic Ampacity in Air — Indicates the basic ampacity in air value.
Basic Ampacity in Ground — Indicates the basic ampacity in ground value.
Maximum Cable Length — Indicates the maximum allowed length of cable of the
recommended cross-section that meets the voltage drop requirements.
Required Area (cmils) — This column appears only if you select the Use short circuit cable
sizing check box and enter short circuit sizing data. It indicates the minimum required
conductor cross-section area in cmils needed to meet the short circuit criteria that you specify.
Export To Excel — Creates an Excel spreadsheet that contains the data in the current matrix.

Synchronize Plant and Reference Cable Data Dialog Box

Enables you to view all the differences between selected plant cable data and the associated
reference cable data. You can then copy the reference data to the plant cable so that the plant
and reference cable data is fully synchronized.
Property — Displays the all the names of the cable properties whose values differ from the
values in the associated reference cable.
Note that the properties that are set for synchronization are determined in
Options Manager. You can also add user-defined properties that will also appear here if
their values have changed.(For details, see the Options Manager Guide, Defining
Plant-Wide Parameters > Set Cable Properties for Synchronization.)
Plant Cable Value — Displays the current value of the property in the selected plant cable.
Reference Cable Value — Displays the value of the property in the associated reference cable.
Copy Reference Data — Copies all the changed data shown in this dialog box from the
reference cable to the current plant cable. For a parallel cable assembly, the software applies
the reference data to all the cables in the assembly.
Cancel — Closes the dialog box without synchronizing the cable data.

Define Color Pattern Dialog Box

Enables you to define the colors of each conductor in a cable, and whether the cable consists of
a single set of conductors or repeating sets where the cables are identified by the same colors.
Color pattern tag - Select an existing color pattern tag or type a new tag name after clicking
New.
New — Click to define a new color pattern.
Delete — Click to delete the color pattern that appears in the Color pattern tag box.
Pattern type —Click the required option:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 972

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ Individual colors — Assign a single color to each conductor. If the number of conductors
in the Cable Common Properties dialog box is greater than the number of colors you
define in this dialog box, the software does not assign colors to the extra conductors.
▪ Repeating colors — Assign color to the conductors according to the sequence of each
conductor. If the number of conductors in the Cable Common Properties dialog box is
greater than the number of colors that you define in this dialog box, the software assigns the
colors repeatedly in sequence to all the conductors. This way, you can define colors to
apply to multiple sets of conductors.

Wire definitions
Sequence — Indicates the sequence of the conductor in the cable or set.
Color — Select a color for each conductor.
Sequence — Indicates the sequence of the conductor in the cable or set.
Color — Select a color for each conductor.
Add — Adds an empty row below the currently selected row.
Insert — Adds an empty row above the currently selected row.
Up — Moves the selected row above the previous row each time that you click this option. The
order of the rows affects the order of the conductors in the cable or set.
Down — Moves the selected row below the next row each time that you click this option. The
order of the rows affects the order of the conductors in the cable or set.
Remove — Removes the currently selected conductor.

Insert Power Cable Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to insert a power cable between items of equipment in the Electrical
Engineer. You can either select an existing power cable from the reference cable library or
select appropriate cable specification properties.

Cable definition
Select from cable library — Choose this option to select an existing reference power cable.
Reference cable — Display the power cable you selected on the Select Reference Cable
dialog box.

— Opens the Select Reference Cable dialog box, which contains reference power cables.
Specify construction — Select this option to define a new power cable based on a specified
conductor arrangement. This option is available only when you define a reference power cable
for an item profile and a reference circuit.
Conductor arrangement — Defines the number and arrangement of the conductors in the
power cable. The following standard options are available:
Conductors — Specifies the number of conductors within the power cable used for carrying the
current, excluding the neutral, the ground, or additional conductors. If you selected Single-core
or Multicore as the conductor arrangement, this option allows you to specify the number of
conductors or cores in the cable that carry the electric current.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 973

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Additional conductors — If you selected Multicore as the conductor arrangement, this

property specifies the number of additional non-current-carrying conductors, such as ground
wires.
OK — Inserts the specified power cable between items of equipment under the equipment item
you selected in the Electrical Engineer.

Reference Gland Common Properties Dialog Box

Enables you to set options for defining cable glands. When you define plant cables, you can
add glands to one or both cable ends. The software is able to calculate a gland take-off and
generate the results in a report.
General Tab (see "General Tab (Reference Gland Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page
974)
Details Tab (see "Details Tab (Reference Gland Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page 975)
Procurement Tab (see "Procurement Tab (Reference Gland Common Properties Dialog Box)"
on page 975)

General Tab (Reference Gland Common Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for general properties that identify and characterize the gland. An asterisk beside
a property name indicates required data.
Gland tag — Identifies the gland. The reference gland tag is the name that appears beside the
gland in the Reference Data Explorer.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the gland, for information only.
Gland type — Allows you to select a gland type from the list. You can define and customize
gland types in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Gland size — Allows you to select a standard code used to represent the gland size.
Gland material — Allows you to select the material used for the body of the gland.
Plating — Allows you to select a material used for gland plating, if appropriate. You can define
and customize plating materials in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Explosion protection — Allows you to select the type of explosion protection required for the
gland, if appropriate.
Ingression protection — Allows you to select the type of ingression protection required for the
gland, if appropriate.
Design standard — Allows you to select a design standard from the list. You can define and
customize design standards in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Certification — Allows you to select a certification standard from the list. You can define and
customize certification standards in the Data Dictionary Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 974

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Details Tab (Reference Gland Common Properties Dialog Box)

Provides information about the structure and dimensions of the gland, and of accessories
associated with the gland. An asterisk beside a property name indicates required data.

Thread
Thread type — Allows you to select the thread type used for the gland.
Thread size — Allows you to select a standard code used to represent the thread size.

Gland seal range

Outer sheath maximum diameter — Allows you to type a value for the maximum diameter of
the outer gland sheath, including units.
Outer sheath minimum diameter — Allows you to type a value for the minimum diameter
(after compression) of the outer gland sheath, including units.
Inner sheath maximum diameter — Allows you to type a value for the maximum diameter of
the inner gland sheath, including units.
Inner sheath minimum diameter — Allows you to type a value for the minimum diameter (after
compression) of the inner gland sheath, including units.

Components and accessories

Locknut — Allows you to select the material of the gland locknut, if appropriate.
IP washer — Allows you to select the material of the gland IP washer, if appropriate.
Shroud — Allows you to select the material of the gland shroud, if appropriate.
Earth tag — If the gland includes an earth tag, allows you to select the material from the list.
Seal — If the gland includes a seal, allows you to select the material from the list.
Serrated lock — If the gland includes a serrated lock, allows you to select the material from the
list.
Armor clamps — Allows you to select this check box if the gland is suitable for armored cable.

Procurement Tab (Reference Gland Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Allows you to enter information related to ordering glands for your inventory.
Manufacturer — Allows you to select a manufacturer. You can define and customize
manufacturers in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Manufacturer part number — Allows you to enter a part number specified by the manufacturer
of the gland type.
Stores part number — Allows you to enter a reference number for the gland type in your
inventory.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 975

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Reference Cable Library Dialog Box

Enables you to select a reference cable defined in the Reference Data Explorer for connecting
to a control station.
Reference Cable — Shows the list of reference cables that belong to the cable specification
that you select on the Select Reference Cable dialog box.
Formation — Describes the structure of the cable in terms of the number of conductors, and
where appropriate, additional conductors with their sizes. For example, 3 x 2.5 mm2 + 2 x 1.0
mm2 - that is, three 2.5 mm2 main conductors and two 2.5 mm 2 additional conductors.
Cable Specification — Indicates the family of cables to which the reference cable belongs
corresponding to the cable specification that you select before opening this dialog box. You can
define and customize cable specifications in the Data Dictionary Manager
Armor Type — Indicates the type of armor used to protect the cable from its environment. For
example, types of armor include non-armored, steel, or lead.
Insulation — Indicates the material used for the cable jacket. For example, insulation materials
include PVC and polyethylene.
Temperature — Indicates the manufacturer rating of the maximum operating temperature for
the cable.
Voltage Rating — Indicates the standard voltage rating that applies to the cable.

Replace Cable Structure Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to do one of the following:
▪ Replace the reference cable of selected plant cables. Note that all the selected cables must
belong to the same cable category.
▪ Replace the reference cable of selected plant power cables with a reference single-core
cables assembly. Instead of the selected plant power cable, the software creates a new
assembly of cables in the Electrical Index. The name of the new single-core cable
assembly will be the same as the name of the power cable that it replaces. The names of
the individual power cables in the assembly will be according to the naming conventions set
for your plant.

Selected cables
Displays the plant cables that you have selected in the Electrical Index. Select the check box
beside each cable whose reference cable you want to replace.

▪ The software does not allow you to replace a parallel cable with a single-core cable
assembly. Parallel cables are not shown in this grid if under Change you select the
Replace with a single-core cable assembly option. If you select the Reference cable
option, only the first cable in the parallel set appears in the grid.
▪ The software does not allow you to replace the reference cable of those cables that
have already been wired, installed, or locked to a drum.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 976

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Change
Allows you to instruct the software to replace the associated reference cable with another
reference cable or with a reference single-core cable assembly.
Reference cable —Instructs the software to replace the associated reference cable with
another reference cable.
Replace with single-core cable assembly — Instructs the software to replace the associated
reference cable with a reference single-core cable assembly.

Filter by
Allows you to select a set of criteria to filter the available reference cables or reference
single-core cable assemblies from which you select to replace the existing reference cable. The
options vary depending on your Change selection above.
Cable category — (Available only when the Change option is Reference cable.) Displays the
category that defines the purpose for which the cable is used, that is, power, control, grounding,
or instrumentation. The category depends on the folder from which you selected the cables and
is read-only.
The software replaces cables of the same category. For example, you can only
replace a power cable with another power cable.
Cable specification — Allows you to select a specification that defines a family of cables, each
consisting of a specific group of reference cables. (Available only when the Change option is
Reference cable.)
Conductor arrangement — (Available only when the Change option is Reference cable.)
Allows you to select an option that defines the number and arrangement of the conductors
required. Only those reference cables that correspond to the selected conductor arrangement
appear. The following standard options are available:
▪ Single core cable —Selects current-carrying cables with a single core.
▪ 2-core cable — Selects cables with two current-carrying conductors and no additional
conductors.
▪ 2+1-core cable — Selects cables with two current-carrying conductors and one additional
conductor.
▪ 3-core cable — Selects cables with three current-carrying conductors and no additional
conductors.
▪ 3+1-core cable — Selects cables with three current-carrying conductors and one additional
conductor.
▪ 3+2-core cable — Selects cables with three current-carrying conductors and two additional
conductors.
▪ Multicore cable — Selects cables with multiple conductors.
Size — (Available only when the Change option is Reference cable.) Allows you to select a
predetermined cable size. Only those reference cables that correspond to a selected cable size
appear.
Phase arrangement — (available only when the Change option is Replace with single-core
cable assembly.) Allows you to select a predetermined phase arrangement. . Only those

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 977

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

reference single-core cable assemblies that correspond to the selected phase arrangement
appear.

Select replacement structure

Allows you to select an appropriate reference cable or a reference single-core cable assembly
that will replace the associated reference cable of the plant cables that you selected in the
Selected cables grid. Note that the display is filtered according to your selections above. Also,
the display varies depending on your Change selection.
Cable Tag — (Available only when the Change option is Reference cable.) Displays the name
of the reference cable that you want to use as the replacement.
Cable Formation — (Available only when the Change option is Reference cable.) Displays the
cable formation (number and size of conductors)of the reference cables shown in the grid.
Conductor Material — (Available only when the Change option is Reference cable.) Displays
the conductor material of the reference cables shown in the grid.
Conductor Arrangement — (Available only when the Change option is Reference cable.)
Displays the conductor arrangement of the reference cables shown in the grid.
Cable Assembly Name — (Available only when the Change option is Replace with
single-core cable assembly.) Displays the name of the reference single-core cable assembly
that you want to use as the replacement.
Phase Arrangement — (Available only when the Change option is Replace with single-core
cable assembly.) Displays the phase arrangements of the reference single-core cable
assemblies shown in the grid.
Description — (Available only when the Change option is Replace with single-core cable
assembly.) Displays the descriptions of the reference single-core cable assemblies shown in
the grid.
Note the following when using another reference cable to replace an
associated reference cable:
▪ The software only allows the replacement of cables belonging the same category. For
example, you can only replace a power cable with another power cable.
▪ The software does not allow you to replace a reference cable associated with a terminated
plant cable unless the new reference cable has the same conductor arrangement as the
replaced reference cable.
▪ The software does not allow you to replace cables that have already been installed or
locked to a drum.
▪ After replacing the associated reference cable, the software removes the plant cable from
the associated cable drum.
▪ The software replaces the values of the selected plant power cables with the property
values in the reference cable that you select in the Select replacement structure grid.
▪ Note that the properties that will be updated are set in Options Manager. You can make
these settings if you have appropriate access rights. In Options Manager, click Options >
Set Cable Properties for Synchronization. (For more details, see the Options Manager
Guide > Defining Plant-Wide Parameters > Set Cable Properties for Synchronization.)
▪ When the selected cables for replacing include parallel cables, only one tag per parallel
cable appears in the display; however the software performs the operation for all the parallel

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 978

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

cables in each set. If descriptions exist for the individual parallel cables, the software
retains those descriptions.
▪ When replacing a group of parallel cables generated by the sizing procedure with cables
that have a different formation, make sure that for the Reference cable property, you select
Non-sized power cable. Otherwise, you can only replace parallel cables with another
group of cables that have the same formation. For example, you can only replace three
parallel cables of 300 mm2 (3*300 m m2) with another configuration of 3 parallel cables, such
as 3*90 mm2, 3*(3*25 mm2+1*10 mm2), and so forth.
▪ The software retains any existing connections with electrical equipment when replacing the
reference cable with another reference cable.
▪ The software retains any existing cable routing.
Note the following when using a reference single-core cable assembly to
replace an associated reference cable:
▪ In the new assembly, the software creates the constituent phase, grounding, and neutral
single-core cables based on the definitions of the selected reference single-core cable
assembly. If the constituent grounding and neutral cables belong to the Power category,
they will retain the equipment connections of the original cable. If the constituent grounding
and neutral cables belong to the Grounding category, they will not retain the equipment
connections of the original cable.
▪ The constituent cables preserve the values of the native cable tag, such as tag sequence,
tag prefix, design length, estimated length, tail 1 and tail 2 lengths, and spare length. The
only additions are the phase labels, for example L1, L2, L3, etc.
▪ If there are no cable naming conventions, two cases are possible:
▪ Case 1: No cable naming conventions and the native cable has not been renamed:
▪ The assembly container tag gets the name of the native cable.
▪ The constituent cables get the default cable alias as defined in Options Manager
and the cable sequence number of the native cable preceded by the single core
cable assembly suffix.
▪ Case 2: No cable naming conventions but the native cable has been renamed:
▪ The assembly container tag gets the name of the native cable.
▪ The constituent cables get the default cable alias as defined in Options Manager
and the cable sequence number of the native cable preceded by the single core
cable assembly suffix.
▪ Example: If you rename CABLE-32 to MyCable (note that 32 is the cable sequence
number). After replacing MyCable with a single core cable assembly, the assembly
container name becomes MyCable and the constituent cables are named
CABLE-32/L1, CABLE-32/L2, etc. and CABLE-32/G1, CABLE-32/N1
▪ If there are cable naming conventions and you rename a cable before replacing it with a
single core cable assembly:
▪ The assembly container tag gets the name of the native cable.
▪ The constituent cables get their tags based on the naming conventions.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 979

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ Example: If you rename CNC-001 to CABLE-30, the assembly container becomes

CABLE-30 while the constituent cables are named CNC-001/L1, CNC-001/L2,
CNC-001/L3 and CNC-001/G1, CNC-001/G1.
▪ The software does not allow you to replace a parallel cable with a single-core cable
assembly. Parallel cables do not appear in the Selected cables grid if the Replace with a
single-core cable assembly option is active.
▪ The software does not allow you to replace the reference cable of those cables that have
already been wired, installed, or locked to a drum.
▪ The software does not replace power cables with single-core assemblies if the power cables
are assigned to cable drums. If you selected such cables for replacement, the software
displays a message at the end of the process informing you of the problem and asking you
to open the log file where you can see the exact description of the problem. (Note that drum
assignment can be seen on the Design Data tab of the Cable Common Properties dialog
box, in the Drum box under Drum assignment. If there is no indication in the Drum box,
this means that the cable is not assigned to any cable drum.)
▪ Note that any existing cable routing is not retained after replacing the cable structure with
single-core cable assembly.

Select Reference Cable Dialog Box

You use this dialog box when performing one of the following operations:
▪ Setting a reference cable for the cable drum that you are defining on the Cable Drum
Properties dialog box (see "Cable Drum Common Properties Dialog Box" on page 968)
▪ Selecting a power cable for inserting between two items of equipment in the Electrical
Engineer.
▪ Selecting a reference cable for a single-core cable assembly.

Filter criteria
Filters the Reference cable list, from which you select a reference cable. Each field for which
you select a value further filters the list.
Cable category — Allows you to select a category that defines the purpose for which the cable
is used: Power, Instrumentation, Control, or Grounding. This is a required field for this dialog
box.
When defining a neutral or grounding cable for a single-core cable assembly, you can
select a power or grounding cable from the Cable category list. Power cables used as
grounding or neutral cables are automatically connected as phase cables and they appear in the
Electrical Engineer. In cable block diagrams and SLDs, the software displays them as phase
power cables belonging to single-core cable assemblies.
Cable specification — Allows you to select a filter criterion that defines a family of cables, each
consisting of a specific group of reference cables.
Conductor arrangement — Allows you to select a filter criterion that defines conductor number
and arrangement.
Size — Allows you to select a cable size as a filter criterion.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 980

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Select cable
Reference cable — Allows you to select a reference cable for the cable drum that you are
defining on the Cable Drum Common Properties dialog box. This is a required field for this
dialog box.
Cable formation — Displays the cable formation (number and size of conductors) for the
selected reference cable.

Drum sizes
These options allow you to select an appropriate set of cable lengths for cable assignment to
drums.
Minimum cable length to order — Displays the minimum length of cable when ordering from
the supplier. The software enters this value automatically after you select an appropriate set of
cable lengths on the Drum Sizes dialog box.
Maximum drum capacity — Displays the maximum total cable length that the drum can hold,
including any spare cable. The software enters this value automatically after you select an
appropriate set of cable lengths on the Drum Sizes dialog box.
Select — Opens the Drum Sizes dialog box where you can select an appropriate set of cable
lengths to optimize the drum associated with the current reference cable.
You can change the drum capacity of a drum even if the drum is assigned to a
cable. This way you can implement new drum capacities supplied by vendors. You can
edit the properties of the associated reference cable and add or change the drum
capacity values for that reference cable. Once you have added new Minimum and
Maximum values or changed the existing Minimum and Maximum values of the
associated reference cable, click the Select button to set a different drum capacity for a
drum regardless of whether the drum has or has not been assigned to a cable.

Drum Sizes Dialog Box

This dialog box enables you to select an appropriate set of cable lengths for drum assignment.
The values that you see here are the ones that have been entered on the Design Data tab of
the Reference Cable Common Properties dialog box. To add or modify these values, open the
Reference Cable Common Properties dialog box of the reference cable associated with the
current drum and click the Design Data tab.
Select an appropriate row and click OK. After clicking OK, the software automatically enters the
selected values in the appropriate fields on the Select Reference Cable dialog box.
Minimum — Displays the Minimum cable length to order value, which is the minimum length
of cable when ordering from the supplier.
Maximum — Displays the Maximum drum capacity value, which is the maximum total cable
length that the drum can hold, including any spare cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 981

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Synchronize Gland Associations Dialog Box

You use this dialog box to synchronize the glands on plant cables with the glands on the
reference cables. Two synchronization options are available:
▪ Synchronize the glands on selected plant cables with the glands on the reference cables
associated with each of the selected plant cables. For details, see Synchronize Cable
Glands with Reference Cables in Batch Mode (on page 161).
▪ Synchronize the glands on a number of plant cables with the glands on a specific reference
cable. For details, see Synchronize Cable Gland Associations with a Specific Reference
Cable (on page 162).

Filter cable criteria

This group box contains options for filtering the plant cables that you want to select for the
synchronization. These cables appear under Cable data below the Filter cable criteria group
box.
If you selected the required cables in the Electrical Index, the filter
options are not available.
Cable category — Allows you to select a cable category for filtering the cable data.
Cable specification — Allows you to select a cable specification for filtering the cable data.
Conductor arrangement — Allows you to select a conductor arrangement for filtering the cable
data.
Conductor size — Allows you to select a conductor size for filtering the cable data.
Reference cable — Allows you to select a reference cable whose glands will be used for all the
plant cables that you select for synchronization.
You must select an appropriate reference cable to be able to populate the
Cable data grid.
Cable formation — Allows you to select a cable formation for filtering the cable data.

Synchronize
Allows you to select one of the options below to instruct the software to synchronize the glands
on one of the cable sides or both.
▪ Glands on both cable sides — Synchronizes the glands on both sides of the selected
cables.
▪ Glands on the "To" cable sides — Synchronizes the glands on the "To" side of the
selected cables.
▪ Glands on the "From" cable sides — Synchronizes the glands on the "From" side of the
selected cables.
Show Cable Data — Populates the Cable data section with all the plant cables that comply with
filter condition that you have set and whose glands are inconsistent with the glands on the
selected reference cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 982

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

This button becomes available only after selecting a reference cable in the
Filter criteria group box and the gland on that reference cable is inconsistent with glands on
the selected plant cables.

Cable data
This data window holds all the cables that comply with the filter criteria that you set in the Filter
cable criteria group box. Selecting the check box beside a cable includes the cable in the
synchronization process.
Select cables — Allows you to select multiple cables in the Cable data section. Click the check
box to select All or click the arrow to select one of the following commands:
▪ All — Selects all the cables in the data window.
▪ None — Clears the selection of all the cables in the data window.
▪ All cables without glands — Selects all the cables that do not have any glands.
▪ All cables with different glands — Selects all the cables whose glands are different from
the ones on the associated reference cables.

Single-Core Cable Assembly Common Properties Dialog

Box
This dialog box displays the common properties of a single-core cable assembly.
Assembly tag — Displays the name of the selected single-core cable assembly. Click the
ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can edit the name.
Cable arrangement — Allows you to select an appropriate cable arrangement of the
single-core cable assembly.
Phase arrangement — For new assemblies, allows you to select an appropriate phase
arrangement of the single-core cable assembly: For existing assemblies, the phase
arrangement value is view-only and it changes according to additions or deletions of grounding
and neutral cables in the assembly.
▪ 1 PH — A single-phase cable assembly that contains one current carrying core cable
and at least one neutral cable. You can use this cable assembly for connections with AC
single-phase circuits (2-wire circuits).
▪ 1 PH +G — A single-phase cable assembly that contains one current carrying core
cable and at least one grounding and one neutral cable. You can use this cable
assembly for connections with AC single-phase circuits (3-wire circuits).
▪ 3 PH — A three-phase cable assembly that contains three current carrying core cables
for AC circuits.
▪ 3 PH + G — A three-phase cable assembly that contains three current carrying core
cables for AC circuits and at least one grounding cable.
▪ 3 PH + N — A three-phase cable assembly that contains three current carrying core
cables for AC circuits and at least one neutral cable.
▪ 3 PH + N +G — A three-phase cable assembly that contains three current carrying core
cables for AC circuits and at least one grounding and one neutral cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 983

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ DC — A cable assembly that contains two identical current carrying core cables for DC
circuits. Note that the Supply property of the current carrying core cables (the power
cables) is automatically set to DC and it cannot be changed.
For existing assemblies, the phase formation is not editable. However,
when adding and/or deleting grounding and neutral cables, the software automatically
changes the phase arrangement according to your action. For more details, see Change the
Formation of a Single-Core Cable Assembly (on page 174).
Description — Displays the user defined description of the single-core cable assembly. Click
the ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can type longer text for the description.
Width — Allows you to select a width of the single-core cable assembly.
Height — Allows you to select a height of the single-core cable assembly.
Area — Displays the area occupied by the single-core cable assembly. Automatically
calculated from properties entered in the Width and Height fields.
Select Predefined Cable Assembly — Opens the Find dialog box, which allows you to search
for a predefined reference single-core cable assembly that will serve a basis for a new plant
single-core cable assembly.

Current carrying cores

Reference cable — Allows you to select a reference cable from the Reference Data Explorer
window. Click the ellipsis button to open the Select Reference Cable dialog box and
select the required reference cable. This list becomes enabled after you select an appropriate
phase arrangement.
Cable specification — Displays the reference cable Cable Specification Number. This is
automatically inserted when selecting the reference cable and cannot be edited.
Cable formation — Displays the reference cable's Cable Formation. This is automatically
inserted when selecting the reference cable and cannot be edited.
Phase label 1 — Allows you to select a suffix for the first phase connector.
Phase label 2 — Allows you to select a suffix for the second phase connector. The software
only allows the selection of a label that is not being used by a connector within the assembly.
Phase label 3 — Allows you to select a suffix for the third phase connector. The software only
allows the selection of a label that is not being used by another connector within the assembly.

Neutral cables
Allows you to select the neutral cable of the single-core cable assembly (only available if a
neutral cable has been included as part of the phase arrangement.
Click Add to open the Select Reference Cable dialog box to add the required cables.
Click Remove to remove cables that are not required.
Item tag — Displays the cable name.
Category — Displays the cable category.
Specification — Displays the cable specifications
Formation — Displays the cable formation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 984

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Grounding cables
Allows you to select the grounding cable of the single-core cable assembly (only available if a
grounding cable has been included as part of the phase arrangement.
Click Add to open the Select Reference Cable dialog box to add the required cables.
Click Remove to remove cables that are not required.
Item tag — Displays the cable name.
Category — Displays the cable category.
Specification — Displays the cable specifications
Formation — Displays the cable formation.
You can click Add or Delete if you want to add or delete a cable from the current
assembly. You cannot delete a neutral or grounding cable if it is required by the phase
arrangement that you selected for the current single-core cable assembly.

Reference Single-Core Cable Assembly Common Properties

This dialog box allows you to enter or edit the common properties associated with a reference
single-core cable assembly.
Assembly tag — Displays the name of the selected single-core cable assembly. Click the
ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can edit the name.
Cable arrangement — Allows you to select a cable arrangement for the single-core cable
assembly.
Phase arrangement — Allows you to select an appropriate phase arrangement of the
single-core cable assembly:
▪ 1 PH — A single-phase cable assembly that contains one current carrying core cable
and at least one neutral cable. You can use this cable assembly for connections with AC
single-phase circuits (2-wire circuits).
▪ 1 PH +G — A single-phase cable assembly that contains one current carrying core
cable and at least one grounding and one neutral cable. You can use this cable
assembly for connections with AC single-phase circuits (3-wire circuits).
▪ 3 PH — A three-phase cable assembly that contains three current carrying core cables
for AC circuits.
▪ 3 PH + G — A three-phase cable assembly that contains three current carrying core
cables for AC circuits and at least one grounding cable.
▪ 3 PH + N — A three-phase cable assembly that contains three current carrying core
cables for AC circuits and at least one neutral cable.
▪ 3 PH + N +G — A three-phase cable assembly that contains three current carrying core
cables for AC circuits and at least one grounding and one neutral cable.
▪ DC — A cable assembly that contains two identical current carrying core cables for DC
circuits.
Description — Allows you to type a description for the single-core cable assembly. Click the
ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can type longer text for the description.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 985

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Width — Type the width of the single-core cable assembly.

Height — Type the height of the single-core cable assembly.
Area — Automatically calculates and displays the area occupied by the single-core cable
assembly using the values typed in the Width and Height fields.
Select predefined Cable Assembly — Click this button to open the Find dialog box where you
can search for and select a predefined cable assembly (available only when creating a new
single-core cable assembly in the Electrical Index, not in the Reference Data Explorer).

Current carrying cores

Reference cable — Allows you to select a reference cable from the Reference Data Explorer
window. Click the ellipsis button to open the Select Reference Cable dialog box and
select the required reference cable. This list becomes enabled after you select an appropriate
phase arrangement.
Cable specification — Displays the reference cable Cable Specification Number. This is
automatically inserted when selecting the reference cable and cannot be edited.
Cable formation — Displays the reference cable's Cable Formation. This is automatically
inserted when selecting the reference cable and cannot be edited.
Phase label 1 — Allows you to select a suffix for the first phase connector.
Phase label 2 — Allows you to select a suffix for the second phase connector. The software
only allows the selection of a label that is not being used by a connector within the assembly.
Phase label 3 — Allows you to select a suffix for the third phase connector. The software only
allows the selection of a label that is not being used by another connector within the assembly.

Neutral cables
Allows you to select the neutral cable of the single-core cable assembly (only available if a
neutral cable has been included as part of the phase arrangement.
Click Add to open the Select Reference Cable dialog box to add the required cables.
Click Remove to remove cables that are not required.
Item tag — Displays the cable name.
Category — Displays the cable category.
Specification — Displays the cable specifications
Formation — Displays the cable formation.

Grounding cables
Allows you to select the grounding cable of the single-core cable assembly (only available if a
grounding cable has been included as part of the phase arrangement.
Click Add to open the Select Reference Cable dialog box to add the required cables.
Click Remove to remove cables that are not required.
Item tag — Displays the cable name.
Category — Displays the cable category.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 986

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Specification — Displays the cable specifications

Formation — Displays the cable formation.
You can click Add or Delete if you want to add or delete a cable from the current
assembly. You cannot delete a neutral or grounding cable if it is required by the phase
arrangement that you selected for the current single-core cable assembly.

Cable Block Diagrams

Create New Plant Circuits Dialog Box
This dialog box opens automatically when you select or drag a typical CBD that contains typical
circuits. The dialog box allows you to create new plant circuits according to the typical circuits
listed in the dialog box. Also, you assign each new plant circuit that will be created to an
appropriate PDB, bus, and cell in your plant.
The dialog box lists all the typical circuits that are contained in the current typical CBD. You
select an appropriate PDB, bus, and cell for each new plant circuit that will be created. If you
want to assign a new plant circuit to a free-standing bus, do not select a PDB. Just click in
the Plant Bus field to find an appropriate free-standing bus.
You can assign your new plant circuits to appropriate cells, create new cells or skip the cell
assignment as needed. To create a new cell, select Create new cell from the Plant Cell list.
Note that if you do not select a bus for a particular typical circuit listed in this
dialog box, the software will not create a plant circuit for that typical circuit.
The dialog options are as follows:
Typical Circuit — Displays the name of each typical circuit contained in the current typical
CBD.
Typical Circuit Type — Displays the type of each typical circuit contained in the current CBD.
(For example, Feeder)

Plant PDB — Allows you to select an appropriate plant PDB (by clicking ) to which you want
to assign the new plant circuit.
Plant Bus — If you have selected a plant PDB, allows you to select an appropriate plant bus to
which you want to assign the new plant circuit. If you chose not to select a PDB, click to
select a free-standing bus.
Plant Cell — Allows you to select an appropriate cell or create a new one.
OK — Closes this dialog box and creates the plant circuits that will also be placed on the new
CBD drawing.
Clear — Clears the PDB, bus and cell selection that you have made for the selected typical
circuit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 987

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Resolve Symbol Inconsistencies Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to resolve symbol inconsistencies in plant and typical cable block
diagrams. Symbol inconsistencies can occur if, for some reason. a symbol file has been
replaced or updated. Once you save a CBD, the software retains the symbols in the drawing as
they appear at the time of saving. If, at a later stage, some of the symbol files have been
updated, the CBD that you open will not display the updated symbols until you resolve the
inconsistencies. When updating the symbols, the software validates that the updated symbols
are suitable replacements for the old symbols. For example, the new symbols must have
suitable connect points so that connections can be made. If the new symbols are not suitable,
they will not replace the old ones in the drawing and the software will display an appropriate
message to that effect.
Item Tag — Allows you to select the item tag that the symbol represents in the CBD. You must
select at least one item tag to enable the Resolve command button. Note that the Item Tag
check box is not available for symbols that cannot be resolved.
Item Type — Displays the item type that the symbol represents.
Current Symbol File Name — Displays the symbol file name as it is currently used in the
database.
Displayed Symbol File Name — Displays the symbol file name as it appears in the open CBD.
Inconsistency Reason — Displays a brief reason for the inconsistency.
Expected Result — Informs you if the current symbol can or cannot be replaced. If the symbol
cannot be replaced, click the message text to display a brief explanation why the software
cannot replace the current symbol.
Resolve — Replaces the symbols in the CBD with the updated symbols.

▪ If the software does not resolve all of the symbols, a message appears that instructs you to
open the log file where you can see which symbols have not been replaced.
▪ The Resolve command button on the Resolve Symbol Inconsistencies dialog box is
available only after selecting at least one item tag to be resolved.
▪ If a symbol cannot be resolved, the software indicates it under Expected Result. You can
click the Symbol cannot be resolved text to see the reason why the symbol cannot be
resolved.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 988

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Custom Folders
A compound filter consists of more than one simple filter. Simple filters are added to the
compound filter either by dragging the simple filter to the compound filter folder or by creating
new simple filters under the compound filter in the filter hierarchy. Compound filters apply only to
homogeneous item types. This dialog box specifies the properties of a compound filter,
including the name, description, and whether to match all or any of the simple filter criteria.

Name — Specifies the filter name. The name can be any combination of characters and has no
length limit. Filter names within a plant must be unique. This name appears as the filter name in
the Filter Manager interface.
Description — Specifies a phrase or sentence about the filter. The description can be any
combination of characters and has no length limit. The description appears as a ToolTip when
you point to the filter name in the Filter Manager interface.

Filter method
Allows you to decide whether items must meet all or only one criterion to pass through the filter.
Match all — Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter.
Match any — Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through
the filter. Match any is the default matching method.

Custom Folder Properties Dialog Box

Allows you to view a custom folder's properties and change them if required.
Custom folder name — Shows the folders name. Change the name by typing over the existing
name, if required.
Filter name — Shows the filter name for the custom folder. Click Browse to change the filter if
required.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 989

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Filter Properties Dialog Box

Specifies properties of a filter, including the name, description, and the other properties that you
want to filter for. Each item type owns a set of properties. Examples of item types are Battery
Bank, Cable, and Motor, and examples of properties for these item types are Float Voltage,
Resistivity, and Motor Rated Power, respectively.
Name — Specifies the filter name. The name can be any combination of characters and has no
length limit. Filter names within a plant must be unique. This name appears as the filter name on
the Filter Manager interface.
Description — A phrase or sentence about the filter. The description can be any combination of
characters and has no length limit. The description appears as a ToolTip when you point to the
filter name on the Filter Manager interface.
Filter for — Contains the top-level items from the Data Dictionary. Specifies available properties
in the Definition grid.

Definition
Displays all defined criteria associated with a filter. To add to or modify the definition list, you
must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group. If you are
defining the EDE, the criteria that you enter on the Filter tab on the Advanced Table
Properties dialog box are combined with the base filter that you select.
Match all — Items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter.
Match any — Items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter.
Match any is the default matching method.
Add — Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list. Enables the fields in the Edit
group so that you can edit the new entry.
Delete — Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. This button is active only when
you select a criterion in the definition list.

Edit
Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria.
Property — Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. Examples of properties
include Rated Power, Rated Voltage, and Frequency. You define or modify filtering criteria by
selecting a property, an operator, and a value.
Operator — Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. Relationships
include, for example, greater than, >, equal to, =; not equal to, <>, and so forth.
Value — Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. If a list of
properties is not already associated with the Value box, you must type a value, which can be
free text, or specify null. You can type a percent sign (%) as a wildcard character to find multiple
characters or an underscore (_) as a wildcard character for a single character. Do not use an
asterisk (*) in the Value box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 990

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

New Custom Folder Dialog Box

Allows you to create a custom folder, within an item type folder, in the Reference Data Explorer
or the Electrical Index. You then apply a filter to the custom folder to add the specific items
you want to the folder.
Custom folder name — Allows you to type the folders name.
Filter name — Shows the filter name for the custom folder. Click Browse to select the required
filter.

Select Filter Dialog Box

Allows you to select a filter for filtering the data for a particular item type to display in a EDE view
or in a report. Using this dialog box, you can create a new filter or modify an existing filter. To
display this dialog box, you can:
▪ Click Browse on the Filter tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box while you are
choosing your item type for displaying in a EDE view.
▪ Click Browse on the Filter tab of the Define Report Items dialog box while you are
choosing your report item type.
New — Displays the New Filter dialog box, which allows you to specify a new simple or new
compound filter.
Properties — Allows you to edit the properties of the selected filter. This button displays the
Filter Properties dialog box or the Compound Filter Properties dialog box, depending on your
selection in the filter list. If you create a compound filter, you select the individual simple filters
that comprise a compound filter and click Properties to view the Filter Properties dialog box for
those simple filters.

Documents and Drawings

Associate Documents Dialog Box
Enables you to associate documents with selected electrical items. Also, you can open the
associated documents for editing, and you can dissociate a document if needed. An asterisk
beside a property name indicates required data.
The dialog box opens when you select an electrical item and then click Actions > Associate
Documents.
The options are as follows:

Filter by
Allows you to select a set of criteria to filter the documents that you associate with selected
electrical items.
Document category — Filters the documents according to document category. This selection
determines the available options in the Document type list. You can define and customize
document categories in the Data Dictionary Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 991

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Document type — Filters the document category according to document type. This selection
determines the documents that the software retrieves after you click Find in the Edit group.
Selecting All types filters the documents according to category only. You can define and
customize document types in the Data Dictionary Manager.

List
Displays all the documents associated with the selected electrical items.
Add — Opens the Find dialog box that allows you to find a document that you want to associate
with the current electrical item.
Open — Opens the document that you have selected under List. (Not available for internal
documents.)
Remove — Removes the document that you have selected under List.

Properties
Displays the properties of a document that you select under List.
Document — Displays the name of the selected document. The value for this property appears
after you click Find and select the document reference on the Find dialog box. The Find dialog
box retrieves all the existing document references and documents belonging to the selected
document category and type.
Document type — Displays the type of the selected document.
Description — Displays the description of a selected document.
Path and file name — Displays the name and the file path of the selected external file.

Define Document Reference Dialog Box

Enables you to define a reference for an external document.

Filter by
Includes the set of criteria to filter the external documents that you associate with selected
electrical items.
Document category — Filters the external documents according to document category. This
selection determines the external document references that the software retrieves after clicking
the ellipsis button in the Edit group beside Path and file name. You can define and
customize document categories in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Document type — Filters the external document category according to document type. This
selection determines the external documents that the software retrieves after clicking the ellipsis
button in the Edit group beside Path and file name. Selecting All types causes the
software to filter the documents according to category only. You can define and customize
document categories in the Data Dictionary Manager.

List
Displays all the documents associated with the selected electrical items.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 992

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Open — Opens the document that you have selected under List.
Remove — Removes the document that you have selected under List.
Add — Appends a new document row with information about a document you are about to
associate.

Properties
Allows you to edit the properties of a document that you select under List.
Document — Allows you to type the name of the selected external document.
Document type — Allows you to select the type of the selected external document.
Description — Allows you to type the description of a selected external document.
Path and file name — Displays the name and the file path of the selected external file. To
navigate to the file name and path, click the ellipsis button .

PDF Settings Dialog Box

You use this dialog box to define PDF settings when saving a drawing as PDF.
You access this dialog box after clicking the PDF Settings button on the Save As dialog box.
The dialog box options are as follows:
Resolution — Allows you to select an appropriate resolution.
Color Options — Allows you to select color, grayscale, or pure black and white setting for the
generated PDF.
JPEG Compression — Allows you to select an appropriate JPEG compression.
Create bookmarks — Instructs the software to create bookmarks in the PDF file. The
bookmarks are based on the sheet names in the drawing.

Save As Dialog Box

You use this dialog box to save a drawing as an external file in one of the available file formats.
The dialog box options are as follows:
File path — Displays the file path where the drawing will be saved. Click in the box and type the
file path as needed or click Browse.
Browse — Allows you to navigate to the appropriate location where you want to save the
drawing.
Save as type — Allows you to select an appropriate file format in which you want to save the
drawing.
The following file formats are available:
▪ Microstation (*.dgn)
▪ AutoCAD (*.dxf)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 993

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ AutoCAD (*.dwg)
▪ PDF (*.pdf)
▪ Smart Electrical (*.spe)

PDF Settings — (available only after selecting PDF (*.pdf) as file type) Opens the PDF
Settings dialog box that allows you to define PDF settings for the current drawing.
Show all layers in output — Allows you to instruct the software to show all the layers when
opening the saved file. Clear this check box to show only the top layer.

Explore Elsewhere Dialog Box

Opens when you click Browse on the Catalog Explorer Find dialog box, allowing you to search
any network drives or the local directory structure for a symbol library.
Look in — Enter the location from which you want to view symbol information or select a drive
from this list and use the tree that is displayed below to find the location you want.

Behavior Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box)

This tab is available only for documents that are symbols and have an .sym
extension.
Insertion Type - Specifies the insertion type for a symbol. You can set the insertion type by
clicking Options on the Tools menu and then clicking the Symbols tab on the Options dialog
box. After you set an insertion type for a symbol, you cannot change the type.
Update - Displays the type of update for the link on the symbol. To change the update status of
a link, click Automatic. To prevent updating the link, click Frozen. You can select Automatic
when you want the document to automatically reflect any changes to the symbol document. You
can select Frozen when you do not want the symbol in the current document to change at all.
Scale Factor - Specifies the scale factor that the symbol uses when you drag it into the active
document. The scale factor used is relative to the model units of the symbol. For example, if you
set the scale factor to 2 and the symbol has 1 cm square in model units, it displays 2 cm square
when you drag it into the active document.
Lock Scale - Specifies if you can scale the symbol after you place it in a document.
You can scale a symbol by clicking Scale on the Change toolbar or by dragging the
symbol handles.
Allow Rotation By Relationships - Allows a symbol to change its orientation on the drawing
sheet according to the applied relationships. If you clear the check box, the symbol does not
change its orientation regardless of changes to its relationships.
This check box is available only when the symbol is an open document. You can open the
symbol document (.sym) with the Open command on the File menu. When you set or clear this
check box and close the symbol document, the setting affects the behavior of the symbol when
it is dragged from the BrowserSymbol Explorer onto the drawing sheet.
The check box is clear by default. When the check box is clear, a symbol maintains its
orientation to the drawing sheet when you move the symbol or other elements that are related to

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 994

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

it. In the following example, the line and symbol share a dimensional relationship. The lower end
of the symbol is grounded in place with a lock relationship.

If you edit the dimensional value of the driving dimension between the line and symbol to modify
the position of the elements, the symbol does not change its orientation on the drawing sheet.
The driving dimension changes to a driven dimension that is not to scale, as indicated by the
underlined dimensional value.

When you set the Allow Rotation By Relationships check box, the symbol changes orientation
on the drawing sheet according to the applied relationships. In the example, when you edit the
dimensional value of the driving dimension to change the position of the elements, the symbol
changes orientation on the drawing sheet, maintaining the dimensional relationships.

Treat as Paper - Displays a symbol in a drawing at a 1:1 ratio, regardless of the container scale.
If you select Treat as Paper, you cannot select Lock Scale, change the scale, or change the
photographic style scale.
Nested Display - Defines the behavior of nested symbols. The options are Public and Private.
When you open a document that contains nested symbols, the public option displays these
symbols, but the private option hides these symbols.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 995

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Format Tab (Connectors)

These options display for connector properties.
Style - Sets the drawing style.
Color - Sets the drawing color.
Width - Sets the line width.
Type - Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Start Terminator - Sets the terminator for starting the connector.
Line End Terminator - Sets the terminator for ending the connector.
Terminators are compatible with any of the linear styles.

Format Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box)

Style — Sets the drawing style.
Color — Sets the drawing color.
Width — Sets the line width.
Type — Sets the drawing line type and style.

Info Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box)

The contents of this tab vary depending on whether you selected or highlighted one of the
following types of elements:

Line Tab Options

Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type.
Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the
name of the drawing sheet.
Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element.
Start Point — Sets the X and Y values for the start point of the element.
X — Sets a value for the X coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y — Sets a value for the Y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.
End Point — Sets the X and Y values for the end point of an element.
X — Sets a value for the X coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y — Sets a value for the Y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.
Length — Displays the length of a curve. You cannot edit this value.
Angle — Sets the angle of a line.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 996

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Arc Tab Options

Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type.
Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the
name of the drawing sheet.
Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element.
Start Point — Sets the X and Y values for the start point of the element.
X — Sets a value for the X-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y — Sets a value for the Y-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.
Center Point — Sets the X and Y values for the center point of the arc.
X — Sets a value for the X-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y — Sets a value for the Y-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.
End Point — Sets the X and Y values for the end point of an element.
X — Sets a value for the X-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y — Sets a value for the Y-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.
Radius — Sets the radius.
Start Angle — Displays the angle formed by the X axis and the first point of the sweep angle.
Zero degrees is horizontal to the x-axis.
Sweep Angle — Sets the sweep angle.

Circle Tab Options

Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type.
Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the
name of the drawing sheet.
Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element.
Center Point — Sets the X and Y values for the center point of the circle.
X — Sets a value for the X coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y — Sets a value for the Y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.
Radius — Sets the radius.
Diameter — Sets the diameter of the circle.
Circumference — Displays the circumference of a closed element. Although you cannot edit
the circumference, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry.
Area — Displays the area of a closed element. Although you cannot edit the area, the box
automatically updates when you edit the geometry.

Curve Tab Options

Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type.
Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the
name of the drawing sheet.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 997

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element.

Curve Type — Displays the type of curve (open or closed). You cannot edit this field.
Order — Displays the order of the curve. Higher order curves are more accurate or precise than
lower order curves. All curves drawn with the curve command will be 4th order curves.
Vertices — Sets the coordinates of the nodes on the curve.
Nodes — Lists the nodes on a selected curve. When you select a node from the list, its x and y
values are displayed so you can edit them. The node type is also displayed.
Length — Displays the length of a curve. You cannot edit this value.
Area — Displays the area of a closed curve. Although you cannot edit the area, the box
automatically updates when you edit the geometry.
The X/Y coordinate values are read-only.

Ellipse Tab Options

Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type.
Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the
name of the drawing sheet.
Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element.
Center Point — Sets the X and Y values for the center point of a closed element.
X — Sets a value for the X-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y — Sets a value for the Y-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.
Primary Axis — Sets the length of the primary axis. The ellipse orientation is based on the
primary axis.

Secondary Axis — Sets the length of the secondary axis. The secondary axis is perpendicular
to the primary axis.

Rotation Angle — Sets the angle of the primary axis of the ellipse. Zero degrees is horizontal to
the X-axis. The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
Circumference — Displays the circumference of a closed element. Although you cannot edit
the circumference, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 998

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Area — Displays the area of a closed element. Although you cannot edit the area, the box
automatically updates when you edit the geometry.

Point Tab Options

Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type.
Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the
name of the drawing sheet.
Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element.
Coordinate — Sets the X and Y values for an element.
X — Sets a value for the X-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y — Sets a value for the Y-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.

Fillet Tab Options

Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type.
Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the
name of the drawing sheet.
Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element.
Radius — Specifies the radius between the two elements you want to use to create the fillet.

Chamfer Tab Options

Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type.
Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the
name of the drawing sheet.
Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element.
Angle — Measures the angle between the chamfer and the first linear element.

Setback A — Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the chamfer on the first
linear element you selected.
Setback B — Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the chamfer on the
second linear element you selected.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 999

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Rectangle Tab Options

Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type.
Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the
name of the drawing sheet.
Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element.
Centroid — Defines the exact center of the rectangle with X and Y coordinates.
Height — Sets the height of the rectangle or square.
Width — Sets the width of the rectangle or square.
Angle — Sets the orientation angle of the element. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X-axis. The
angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
Circumference — Displays the circumference of a closed element. Although you cannot edit
the circumference, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry.
Area — Displays the area of a closed element. Although you cannot edit the area, the box
automatically updates when you edit the geometry.

Connector Tab Options

Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type.
Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the
name of the drawing sheet.
Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element.
Start Point — Sets the X and Y values for the start point of the connector.
X — Sets a value for the X-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y — Sets a value for the Y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
End Point — Sets the X and Y values for the end point of a connector.
X — Sets a value for the X coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
# Vertices — Sets the number of vertices for a connector.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1000

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Info Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box)

Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You can't edit any of these.
Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet the element is on. You cannot edit the name
of the drawing sheet.
Name — Displays the name of the group. The software names the group when you create it.
Number of Items — Displays the number of elements in the group. This label updates
automatically when you add elements to or delete elements from the group.
Is Nested Within Another Group — Shows whether the group is nested within another group.
This label updates automatically when you nest a group using Group, or ungroup a group using
Ungroup.
Contains Nested Groups — Displays whether or not the selected group contains nested
groups.
Closed — The Preview Box shows whether the members of the group are primitive elements,
such as lines, arcs, and curves; whether the end points of these elements are connected; and
whether the members of the group form a closed region.
This box updates automatically when you add elements to or delete elements from the group.
End-Point Connected — The Preview Box shows whether the members of the group are
primitive elements, such as lines, arcs, and curves, and whether the end points of these
elements are connected. This label updates automatically when you add elements to or delete
elements from the group.

Info Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box)

Displays and allows you to set symbol placement options such as the symbol angle, layer on
which you want to place the symbol, and coordinates for the symbol.
Name - Displays the name of the parent document of the symbol.
Layer - Specifies the layer on which you place the symbol. When you place a symbol, it is
placed on the active layer.
X Origin - Specifies the X coordinate of the symbol origin.
Y Origin - Specifies the Y coordinate of the symbol origin.
Angle - Displays the current angle of the symbol. You can specify a new angle. The number of
degrees increases in the counterclockwise direction. For example, 90 degrees is at the top of
the screen.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1001

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

User Tab (Properties Dialog Box)

Attribute set — Names a group of attributes. You can type a name in the box and press TAB.
Save — Places the attribute set on the element that you selected.
Remove — Removes the attribute set from the element that you selected.

Attributes
Sets the name, type, and value of the attribute set. You can type a name in the box and press
TAB.
Name — Sets the name of a unique attribute in the attribute set.
Type — Sets the type for the attribute, such as double, text, number, money, or date.
Value — Sets the value for the attribute. The value that you can type is based on the value in
the Type box.
Add — Adds an attribute to the attribute set. After you click Add, the attribute appears in the
table.
Delete — Removes an attribute from the attribute set. You can select an attribute by clicking a
row in the table.

User Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box)

Displays and allows you to set property options for each symbol that you place. This feature
provides an administrative tool for tracking property information, such as the serial number of
label text, for each placement of a symbol.
Name - Defines a property name.
Type - Specifies the property type you want to define for the symbol property name. You can
choose from text, double, number, boolean, money, byte, integer, date, or single.
Value - Specifies a value for the symbol. For example, you can assign a manufacturer name, a
serial number, or other descriptive information as a value.
Properties - The properties table lists all the properties currently defined for the symbol.
Add - Creates an attribute for the symbol.
Delete - Deletes the attribute that you select in the Properties box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1002

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

User Tab (Properties Dialog Box)

Attribute set — Names a group of attributes. You can type a name in the box and press TAB.
Save — Places the attribute set on the element that you selected.
Remove — Removes the attribute set from the element that you selected.

Attributes
Sets the name, type, and value of the attribute set. You can type a name in the box and press
TAB.
Name — Sets the name of a unique attribute in the attribute set.
Type — Sets the type for the attribute, such as double, text, number, money, or date.
Value — Sets the value for the attribute. The value that you can type is based on the value in
the Type box.
Add — Adds an attribute to the attribute set. After you click Add, the attribute appears in the
table.
Delete — Removes an attribute from the attribute set. You can select an attribute by clicking a
row in the table.

Toolbars Dialog Box

Sets options for displaying, hiding, or changing toolbars. The settings on this dialog box are
remembered for the current user.
Toolbars — Lists the available toolbars. You can select the box next to the toolbar you want to
display, hide, or change.
Toolbar name — Displays the name of the toolbar that you have selected.
New — Accesses the New Toolbar dialog box in which you can specify a name for the new
toolbar.
Customize — Adds buttons to or removes buttons from built-in toolbars with the Customize
dialog box.
Reset — Resets the selected toolbar to the original icons.
Color buttons — Adds color to the toolbar buttons. If this option is cleared, toolbar buttons are
black and white.
Large buttons — Enlarges toolbar buttons so that they are easier to see.
Show ToolTips — Displays on-screen descriptions of a toolbar button when the pointer pauses
over it.
Classic icons — Displays the toolbar icons using the classic icons. If this option is not selected,
toolbars use the high-color icons.
OK — Saves changes and dismisses the dialog.
Cancel — Ignores any changes and dismisses the dialog.
Help — Displays the Help topic for this dialog.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1003

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Electrical Equipment
Apply Options Dialog Box
Enables you to apply default profiles, circuits, control stations, schematics, and lookup tables, all
of which you define in the Reference Data Explorer, to electrical equipment. In this way, you
can create items and populate them with data in a batch operation, thus keeping to a minimum
the editing that you need to perform for individual items.

Equipment Profile Tab (Apply Options Dialog Box)

Sets options for applying profiles to loads and converting equipment.
Enable equipment profile — Makes all the controls on this tab available. This check box is
used for security to prevent you from applying a profile in error.
Number of items to create — This option is available only when you select the folder for the
item you require prior to selecting Apply Options, and after you select Enable equipment
profile. It allows you to specify the number of new items to create in the Electrical Index in
accordance with the profile you select.
Equipment type — Displays the equipment type to which you apply the profile corresponding to
the item or folder you have selected. Examples of equipment types are motors and cables.
Profile name — Displays the default profile for the appropriate equipment class, as defined in
the Equipment Profile Properties dialog box. When you select a folder to create new items in
batch mode using the profile, the label appears as Create item based on profile. Click Find to
navigate to a different profile.
Apply to — Enables you to select the rule that the software implements when applying the
profile. The options are:
▪ All items — Applies the profile to all the selected items.
▪ Items with no profile — Applies the profile only to items without an existing profile. Use
this option to add a profile only to new items among the items that you selected.
▪ Items with a different profile from the selection — Changes the profile of the selected
items to the current profile. Use this option to add a profile to items with a modified profile
definition.
▪ Items with the same profile as the selection — Updates an existing profile for the
selected items.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1004

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Populate empty item properties — Select this check box to update only those item properties
that contain null data — the software does not overwrite any data that is not null.
Clear the check box to leave existing values of the item properties as they are, regardless of
whether they contain null or not null values.

▪ If you modify the components of a typical circuit that already has a reference from an item,
the software does not update the change in the reference until you next apply a typical
circuit or a profile to the item.
▪ When an item has associated power cables, and you connect the item to a circuit by
applying a profile with a typical circuit, if there is more than one cable, the software
associates the free ends of all the power cables with the circuit.
▪ If you apply a profile for a reference motor with a heater to a plant motor without a heater,
the software adds a heater to the plant motor.
▪ If the item that you are applying a profile to is connected to a feeder circuit, the system
replaces the circuit so that it matches the applied typical circuit as specified in the profile.
▪ If the item is connected to feeder equipment other than a circuit (such as a variable
frequency drive, a transformer, or a battery bank), the software does not apply the profile.

Typical Circuit Tab (Apply Options Dialog Box)

Sets options for applying typical circuits to electrical equipment.
Enable typical circuit — Makes all the controls on this tab available. This check box is used
for security to prevent you from applying a typical circuit in error.

Select typical circuit

Clear last applied typical circuit — Clears the typical circuit that you last applied. Select this
option if you do not want to apply any typical circuit to the item.
Function — Displays the function of the selected typical circuit. Examples of functions are
Incomer and Feeder.
Typical circuit — Displays the typical circuit for the item. Click Find to navigate to the typical
circuit that you want to select.
Apply to — Enables you to select the rule that the software implements when associating the
typical circuit. The options are:
All items — Applies the typical circuit to all the selected items.
▪ Items with no typical circuit — Applies the typical circuit only to items without an existing
typical circuit. Use this option to add a typical circuit only to new items among the items that
you selected.
▪ Items with a different typical circuit from the selection — Changes the typical circuit of
the selected items to the current typical circuit. Use this option to add a typical circuit to
items with a modified typical circuit definition.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1005

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ Items with the same typical circuit as the selection — Updates an existing typical circuit
for the selected items.

▪ If you apply a typical circuit to an item that is already associated with a circuit, the software
adjusts the components of the circuit to match the typical circuit specified by the item.
▪ If you modify the components of a typical circuit that already has a reference from an item,
the software does not update the change in the reference until you next apply a typical
circuit or a profile to the item.
▪ If the item that you are applying the typical circuit to is connected to a feeder circuit, the
system replaces the circuit so that it matches the applied typical circuit as specified in the
profile.
▪ If the item is connected to feeder equipment other than a circuit (such as a variable
frequency drive, a transformer, or a battery bank), the software does not apply the typical
circuit.
▪ If more than one item is connected to the same circuit, the software changes the last applied
typical circuit for all the items.
▪ If you apply a typical circuit that includes associated reference cables, the software creates
plant cables from them and adds the plant cables to the circuit with the To sides of the
cables associated with the circuit.
▪ You can clear the typical circuit of an item that is not connected to any circuit by selecting
Clear the last applied typical circuit.
▪ You can apply a typical circuit on a circuit, provided that the circuit has no equipment
connected to it.

Control Stations Tab (Apply Options Dialog Box)

Sets options for applying a control station to a load, converting equipment, generator, battery
bank, and disconnect electrical equipment item.
Enable control stations — Makes all the controls on this tab available. This check box is
used for security to prevent you from applying control stations in error.
(Data window) — Displays the control stations you select for the load. Click Find to navigate
to the control stations you want to select.

▪ If you select a reference control station that has one or more associated control cables, the
software creates these cables in the control station that you add to the plant load.
Apply to — Enables you to select the rule that the software implements when associating the
control station. The options are:
▪ All items — Applies the control station to all the selected items. Select Replace control
stations to replace all existing control stations and their associated control cables; any
existing associations, such as a connection of a control cable to a junction box, are
retained. Clear Replace control stations to add the selected control stations and their
associated control cables to the selected loads along with the existing control stations.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1006

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ Items with no control station — Applies the control station only to items without an
existing control station. Use this option to add a control station only to new items among
those items that you have selected.

Lookup Table Tab (Apply Options Dialog Box)

Sets options for applying a lookup table to the selected items.
Enable lookup table — Makes all the controls on this tab available. This check box is used for
security to prevent you from applying a lookup table in error.
Equipment type — Displays the equipment type to which you apply the lookup table
corresponding to the item or folder you have selected. Examples of equipment types are
motors and cables.
Lookup table — Displays the default lookup table, as defined in the Lookup Table Properties
dialog box, for the appropriate equipment class. Click Find to navigate to the required lookup
table. (Not available when applying lookup table to circuits.)

Lookup Table Tab (Apply Options Dialog Box) - for Circuit

Internal Components
Sets options for applying a lookup table to the selected plant circuit internal components.
Enable associated lookup tables of circuit internals — Makes all the controls on this tab
available. This check box is used for security to prevent you from applying a lookup table in
error.
Equipment type — Displays the equipment type (Circuit) to which you apply the lookup table.

Typical Schematic Tab (Apply Options Dialog Box)

Sets options for applying typical schematics to loads and instruments.
Enable typical schematic — Makes all the controls on this tab available. This check box is
used for security to prevent you from applying a typical schematic in error.

Select typical schematic

Clear last applied typical schematic — Clears the typical schematic that you last
applied. Select this option if you do not want to apply any typical schematic to the load.
Typical schematic — Displays the typical schematic for the load or instrument. Click Find to
navigate to the typical schematic that you want to select.
Apply to - Enables you to select the rule that the software implements when associating the
typical schematic. The options are:
▪ All items — Applies the typical schematic to all the selected loads or instruments.
▪ Items with no typical schematic — Applies the typical schematic only to loads or
instruments that have no existing typical schematic. Use this option to add a typical
schematic only to new items among the items that you selected.
▪ Items with a different typical schematic from the selection — Changes the typical
schematic of the selected loads or instruments to the current typical schematic. Use this
option to add a typical schematic to items with a modified typical schematic definition.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1007

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Typical I/O Set Tab (Apply Options Dialog Box)

Sets options for applying a typical I/O set to items in the Electrical Index.
Enable typical I/O set — Makes all the controls on this tab available. This check box is used for
security to prevent you from applying a typical I/O set in error.

Select typical I/O set

Clear last applied typical I/O set — Clears the typical I/O set that you last applied. Select this
option if you do not want to apply any typical I/O set to the item.
Typical I/O set — Displays the typical I/O set for the item. Click Find to navigate to the typical
I/O set that you want to select.
Apply to — Enables you to select the rule that the software implements when associating the
typical I/O set. The options are:
All items — Applies the typical I/O set to all the selected items.
▪ Items with no typical I/O set — Applies the typical I/O set only to items without an existing
typical I/O set. Use this option to add a typical I/O set only to new items among the items
that you selected.
▪ Items with a different typical I/O set from the selection — Changes the typical I/O set of
the selected items to the current typical I/O set. Use this option to add a typical I/O set to
items with a modified typical I/O set definition.

Typical CBD Tab (Apply Options Dialog Box)

Sets options for applying a typical cable block diagram to plant loads.
You can select a number of loads in the Electrical Index and apply a typical CBD profile to these
loads. As a result of this operation, the software will do the following based on the definitions in
the selected typical CBD:
▪ Create all the plant equipment as defined in the typical CBD.
▪ Make all the associations among the new plant equipment as defined in the typical CBD.
▪ Create plant cable block diagrams in which the selected plant load serves as a focal item.
The names of the new CBDs will be the same as the names of the loads to which you
applied the selected typical CBD.
The tab options are as follows:
Enable equipment profile — Makes all the controls on this tab available. This check box is
used for security to prevent you from applying a profile in error.
Typical cable block diagram — Displays the name of the typical block diagram that you have
selected on the Find dialog box.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box which allows you to find an appropriate typical cable block
diagram that will be applied to the selected loads.
Populate empty item properties — Select the Populate empty item properties check box to
update only those item properties that contain null data. When you select this option, the
software does not overwrite the data that is not null.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1008

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Clear the check box to leave existing values of the item properties as they are, regardless of
whether they contain null or not null values.
The software does not apply a typical CBD to plant loads in the following
cases and logs the rejection reason in the Apply Typical CBD log file:
▪ If the typical CBD does not contain any typical item that belongs to the same item type as
the electrical item to which you are applying the typical CBD.
▪ If the typical CBD contains more than one typical item that belongs to the same item type as
the electrical item to which you are applying the typical CBD.
▪ If the electrical item is not associated with a bus but the selected typical CBD contains a
reference bus circuit.
▪ If the selected electrical item is already associated with other plant items.
When applying a typical CBD to motors with space heaters:
▪ The software deletes the space heater from the plant and applies the typical CBD to the
motor.
▪ If the typical CBD contains a reference motor with a space heater, the software creates a
new plant space heater under the plant motor after applying the typical CBD.
▪ If the plant space heater is associated with other items (for example, cables, control
stations, signals, terminal strips, and so on), the software does not apply the selected typical
CBD to the motor of the space heater and logs the rejection reason in the Apply Typical
CBD log file.
When applying a typical CBD to loads that are associated with buses:
▪ After applying a typical CBD, the software validates that the association has been retained.
▪ If the association has been broken, the software searches for the root item in the electrical
branch where the load is connected. If the root item is not a circuit, the software attempts to
associate the root item with the bus in that electrical branch.
▪ If the association of the root item with a bus is not possible, the software does not stop or
cancel the process of applying the selected typical CBD.

Batch Load Association Dialog Box

The Batch Load Association dialog box enables you to balance load flow of a particular bus
and associate multiple loads with a power distribution board (PDB) and a bus. Also, allows you
to display the calculated consumption for the entire power distribution board or a particular bus
belonging to the selected power distribution board. You can also assign a load to a particular
phase or define a load as a three-phase load.
Power distribution board — Specifies the power distribution board with which you associate
the loads.
Bus — Allows you to select a specific bus for which you want to perform load association.

Bus phases
(Available for the Loads tab only)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1009

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

The check boxes in this group box allow you to filter the display of loads in the Associated
loads data window according to their assigned phases. You define the bus phase labels in the
bus Properties window.
Phase 1 — Filters the Associated loads list and displays only the loads that are associated
with phase 1.
Phase 2 — Filters the Associated loads list and displays only the loads that are associated
with phase 2.
Phase 3 — Filters the Associated loads list and displays only the loads that are associated
with phase 3.
All phases — Displays all the loads disregarding their phase association.

Create circuits and cells

(Available for the Loads tab only)
Create circuits — Enables you to automatically create a feeder circuit for all the loads that are
not associated with circuits. This selection does not affect the associated loads that are already
associated with feeder circuits. The software creates a circuit based on the last applied typical
circuit. If no typical circuit is associated with the current load, the software creates a feeder
circuit without any circuit components.
Create cells — Enables you to automatically create a cell where the software creates the feeder
circuits for the associated loads.
Bus Tab (see "Bus Tab (Batch Load Association Dialog Box)" on page 1010)
Loads Tab (see "Loads Tab (Batch Load Association Dialog Box)" on page 1012)
Unassigned Loads Tab (see "Unassigned Loads Tab (Batch Load Association Dialog Box)" on
page 1016)
Circuits Tab (see "Circuits Tab (Batch Load Association Dialog Box)" on page 1017)
Cached Loads Tab (see "Cached Loads Tab (Batch Load Association Dialog Box)" on page
1019)
Show Preferences — Displays the preference settings for the calculation method for All Feeder
Load Summary Report and the settings for the inclusion of coupled buses in All Feeder Load
Summary Report.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Bus Tab (Batch Load Association Dialog Box)

The Batch Load Association dialog box enables you to balance load flow of a particular bus
and associate multiple loads with a power distribution board (PDB) and a bus. Also, allows you
to display the calculated consumption for the entire power distribution board or a particular bus
belonging to the selected power distribution board. You can also assign a load to a particular
phase or define a load as a three-phase load.
Power distribution board — Specifies the power distribution board with which you associate
the loads.
Bus — Allows you to select a specific bus for which you want to perform load association.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1010

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Bus phases
(Available for the Loads tab only)
The check boxes in this group box allow you to filter the display of loads in the Associated
loads data window according to their assigned phases. You define the bus phase labels in the
bus Properties window.
Phase 1 — Filters the Associated loads list and displays only the loads that are associated
with phase 1.
Phase 2 — Filters the Associated loads list and displays only the loads that are associated
with phase 2.
Phase 3 — Filters the Associated loads list and displays only the loads that are associated
with phase 3.
All phases — Displays all the loads disregarding their phase association.

Create circuits and cells

(Available for the Loads tab only)
Create circuits — Enables you to automatically create a feeder circuit for all the loads that are
not associated with circuits. This selection does not affect the associated loads that are already
associated with feeder circuits. The software creates a circuit based on the last applied typical
circuit. If no typical circuit is associated with the current load, the software creates a feeder
circuit without any circuit components.
Create cells — Enables you to automatically create a cell where the software creates the feeder
circuits for the associated loads.

Bus Tab
Allows you to specify the rated data for a selected bus.

Bus rated data

Line voltage — Allows you to specify a voltage associated with the bus line.
Maximum line current — Allows you to specify the maximum value of the line current.
Maximum active power — Allows you to specify the maximum kW value for the selected bus.
Maximum reactive power — Allows you to specify the maximum kVAr value for the selected
bus.
Maximum apparent power — Allows you to specify the maximum kVA value for the selected
bus.
Supply — Displays the supply (AC or DC) of the selected bus. You define these values in the
Properties window of the current bus.
Number of phase — Displays the phase number for the selected bus. (Applies to AC current
supply only.)
Overload percentage — Allows you to specify the overload percentage on the maximum line
current. The line current determines the maximum allowed load on the bus. The overload
percentage can have a value between 0 and 100. For example, if you specify a maximum line
current of 100 A and an overload percentage value of 20, the software determines that the bus

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1011

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

is overloaded if the total calculated line current exceeds 120 A. You can view overload data for
a particular bus on the Total Bus Load Validation dialog box (on page 1120).
Spare load percentage — Allows you to specify a value between 0 and 100 for the spare
capacity on the bus for future expansion. The software uses this value to calculate the available
spare capacity of the bus.
Required power factor — Allows you to specify a power factor value that is required for the
current bus. When calculating the electrical consumption for this bus, the software also
calculates the power factor of a capacitor bank that is needed to correct the power factor of this
bus. For details, see Correcting Bus Power Factors Using Capacitor Banks.
Show Preferences — Displays the preference settings for the calculation method for All Feeder
Load Summary Report and the settings for the inclusion of coupled buses in All Feeder Load
Summary Report.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Loads Tab (Batch Load Association Dialog Box)

The Batch Load Association dialog box enables you to balance load flow of a particular bus
and associate multiple loads with a power distribution board (PDB) and a bus. Also, allows you
to display the calculated consumption for the entire power distribution board or a particular bus
belonging to the selected power distribution board. You can also assign a load to a particular
phase or define a load as a three-phase load.
Power distribution board — Specifies the power distribution board with which you associate
the loads.
Bus — Allows you to select a specific bus for which you want to perform load association.

Bus phases
(Available for the Loads tab only)
The check boxes in this group box allow you to filter the display of loads in the Associated
loads data window according to their assigned phases. You define the bus phase labels in the
bus Properties window.
Phase 1 — Filters the Associated loads list and displays only the loads that are associated
with phase 1.
Phase 2 — Filters the Associated loads list and displays only the loads that are associated
with phase 2.
Phase 3 — Filters the Associated loads list and displays only the loads that are associated
with phase 3.
All phases — Displays all the loads disregarding their phase association.

Create circuits and cells

(Available for the Loads tab only)
Create circuits — Enables you to automatically create a feeder circuit for all the loads that are
not associated with circuits. This selection does not affect the associated loads that are already

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1012

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

associated with feeder circuits. The software creates a circuit based on the last applied typical
circuit. If no typical circuit is associated with the current load, the software creates a feeder
circuit without any circuit components.
Create cells — Enables you to automatically create a cell where the software creates the feeder
circuits for the associated loads.

Loads Tab
Associated loads
Displays the loads or converting electrical equipment that you added to be associated with the
current PDB and bus. Also, displays the loads or converting electrical equipment that you have
already associated with the selected power distribution board before opening this dialog
box. Note that the converting equipment associated with the current bus are shown in the
Associated loads grid if:
▪ You have selected the Account for converting equipment power losses check box on
the Reports tab of the Preferences dialog box.
▪ The converting equipment associated with the current bus has been defined as a load. (In
this case the associated converting equipment appears in the grid regardless of whether or
not you selected the Account for converting equipment power losses check box on the
Reports tab of the Preferences dialog box.)
The following table summarizes the information presented in the Associated loads grid. For a
comprehensive summary of how the software presents the information on the Batch Load
Association dialog box, see the summary table at the bottom of the Associate Loads with a
PDB in Batch Mode procedure, above the notes.

Item Type Associated Loads Grid

Loads connected directly to Shown as non-compensated values.

the selected bus.

Converting equipment Shown when defined as loads and

presented as non-compensated values.

Converting equipment losses When this preference is selected, the item

tag is shown without any values.

Local panels and junction Shown when defined as loads and

boxes presented as non-compensated values.

Cabinets and instruments Shown as non-compensated values.

Feeder circuit that feeds a Not applicable

downstream bus or converting
equipment.

Coupler circuit Not applicable

This data window displays the key properties of the loads, including load type, consumed and
rated power, full load current, and details of their electrical connection hierarchy.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1013

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

In the data window, you can assign a load to a particular phase or define it at as a multi-phase
load by selecting all three phases. Also, you can select a number of rows and move the
selected loads to cache. The moved loads then appear on the Cached Loads tab. Note that all
of the values, apart from phase assignment, in the Associated loads data window are
read-only.
The software takes into account any existing equipment that is connected
in parallel.
Item Tag — Displays the item tag of the selected load.
Type — Displays the electrical equipment sub-class of the load, for example, motor, heater.
Consumed Active — Displays the consumed kW of the selected load.
Consumed Reactive — Displays the consumed kVar of the selected load.
Rated Active — Displays the rated kW of the selected load.
Rated Reactive — Displays the rated kVAr of the selected load.
Full Load Current — Displays the full load current for the selected load.
Circuit — Displays the circuit with which the load is associated.
Cell — Displays the cell with which the selected load is associated.
Phase 1 — Allows you to assign the selected load to phase 1.
Phase 2 — Allows you to assign the selected load to phase 2.
Phase 3 — Allows you to assign the selected load to phase 3.
If you want a single-phase load to simulate a two-phase load that is
connected to a three-phase bus, select two of the Phase check boxes.
Move to Cache — Unassigns the currently selected loads from its associated bus and moves
them to the Cached Loads tab for reassignment. You can select multiple rows as needed.
Add — Adds a load or converting electrical equipment to be associated with the selected power
distribution board.
Remove — Cancels the association of the highlighted load or converting electrical equipment
from the PDB or bus. You cannot remove a load that is already connected to a circuit.
Add Selected Loads — Adds the loads you selected in the list view pane of the Electrical
Index. These loads become associated with the current PDB after you click OK or Apply.

Calculated results (consumed values)

Displays the calculated consumed values for all the associated loads, such as motors, heaters,
converting electrical equipment (for example, a VFD) and so forth for a selected bus filtered
according to phase definition.
The following table summarizes the information presented in the Associated loads grid. For a
comprehensive summary of how the software presents the information on the Batch Load
Association dialog box, see the summary table at the bottom of the Associate Loads with a
PDB in Batch Mode procedure, above the notes.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1014

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Item Type Calculated Results

Loads connected directly to Accounts for and shows consumed compensated

the selected bus. values.

Converting equipment Accounts for and shows consumed compensated

values.

Converting equipment Accounts for and shows non-compensated values.

losses

Local panels and junction Accounts for and shows consumed compensated
boxes values.

Cabinets and instruments Accounts for and shows consumed compensated

values.

Feeder circuit that feeds a Accounts for and shows consumed compensated
downstream bus or values.
converting equipment.

Coupler circuit Accounts for and shows consumed compensated

values.

Electrical consumption using coincidence factors — Displays calculated consumed values

using coincidence factors for either direct loads or all feeders.
Re-Calculate — Re-calculates all the values based on the selections you made in the Power
distribution board and Bus lists. When selecting a PDB that contains a large downstream
electrical distribution system, it may take some time for the software to perform all the
calculations before it displays all the values. To avoid this situation, when opening the Batch
Load Association dialog box, the software displays the values that were stored in the database
during the last calculation. Clicking the Re-Calculate button allows you to re-calculate and
refresh the display the current calculation values.
The software automatically updates the name of the last calculated case after
clicking Re-Calculate.
For direct loads only [calculated for active case ...] — Calculates the total consumed power
only for those loads that are connected directly to the current bus or through a feeder circuit. All
other loads are considered indirect loads including all types of converting equipment.
The software displays the name of the active plant operating case
according to which the values are calculated. The values in the grid below are always
calculated and displayed for the active case.
For all feeders [last calculated case: ...] — Calculates the total consumed power for all the
loads fed by the current bus as well as the loads that are fed by the buses that are connected to
the current bus (as specified in Options Manager). When you select this option, the Circuits
tab becomes available.
The software displays the name of the plant operating case that was used
during the latest calculation. The values in the grid below are calculated and displayed for
the last calculated case.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1015

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Active [kW] — Displays the calculated total consumed active (at the demand point) electrical
power for all the associated loads in kilowatts.
Reactive [kVAR] — Displays the calculated total consumed reactive electrical power for all the
associated loads in kilovolt amperes reactive. When displaying the calculated consumed
reactive electrical power for all the associated loads in kilovolt amperes and associating a
capacitor, the software subtracts the rated kVAR value of that capacitor from the total connected
rated kVAR value. Therefore, the consumed electrical power (kVAR) may display a negative
value. This means that there is a lagging power factor.
Apparent [kVA] — Displays the calculated total apparent consumed electrical power for all the
associated loads in kilovolt amperes.
Required capacitor correction [kVAR] — Displays the calculated value for the power factor of
the capacitor that is needed to correct the bus power factor. For details, see Correcting Bus
Power Factors Using Capacitor Banks.
Line current [A] — Displays the calculated line current for the associated loads. The software
calculates this value based on the total running load.
Power factor — Calculates the power factor by dividing the total rated active power (in
kilowatts) by the total apparent rated power (in kilovolt amperes). If there is a lagging power
factor, this value may be negative. The software calculates this value based on the total
running load.
Notes — Displays an appropriate message regarding the associated loads. For example,
Incomplete load data.
You can set a preference that instructs the software to account for transformer power
losses. For details, see Customize All Feeder Load Summary Report Preferences.
Show Preferences — Displays the preference settings for the calculation method for All Feeder
Load Summary Report and the settings for the inclusion of coupled buses in All Feeder Load
Summary Report.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Unassigned Loads Tab (Batch Load Association Dialog Box)

The Batch Load Association dialog box enables you to balance load flow of a particular bus
and associate multiple loads with a power distribution board (PDB) and a bus. Also, allows you
to display the calculated consumption for the entire power distribution board or a particular bus
belonging to the selected power distribution board. You can also assign a load to a particular
phase or define a load as a three-phase load.
Power distribution board — Specifies the power distribution board with which you associate
the loads.
Bus — Allows you to select a specific bus for which you want to perform load association.

Bus phases
(Available for the Loads tab only)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1016

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

The check boxes in this group box allow you to filter the display of loads in the Associated
loads data window according to their assigned phases. You define the bus phase labels in the
bus Properties window.
Phase 1 — Filters the Associated loads list and displays only the loads that are associated
with phase 1.
Phase 2 — Filters the Associated loads list and displays only the loads that are associated
with phase 2.
Phase 3 — Filters the Associated loads list and displays only the loads that are associated
with phase 3.
All phases — Displays all the loads disregarding their phase association.

Create circuits and cells

(Available for the Loads tab only)
Create circuits — Enables you to automatically create a feeder circuit for all the loads that are
not associated with circuits. This selection does not affect the associated loads that are already
associated with feeder circuits. The software creates a circuit based on the last applied typical
circuit. If no typical circuit is associated with the current load, the software creates a feeder
circuit without any circuit components.
Create cells — Enables you to automatically create a cell where the software creates the feeder
circuits for the associated loads.

Unassigned Loads Tab

Allows you to associate unassigned loads that are associated with a PDB but have not yet been
associated with a bus.
Item Tag — Displays the item tag for a load that has not been associated with a bus.
Type — Displays the electrical equipment sub-class of the load, for example, motor, heater.
Select — Selects the item tag to be assigned to the current bus.
Assign To Bus — Associates the selected item tags with the current bus after clicking Apply.
Show Preferences — Displays the preference settings for the calculation method for All Feeder
Load Summary Report and the settings for the inclusion of coupled buses in All Feeder Load
Summary Report.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Circuits Tab (Batch Load Association Dialog Box)

The Batch Load Association dialog box enables you to balance load flow of a particular bus
and associate multiple loads with a power distribution board (PDB) and a bus. Also, allows you
to display the calculated consumption for the entire power distribution board or a particular bus
belonging to the selected power distribution board. You can also assign a load to a particular
phase or define a load as a three-phase load.
Power distribution board — Specifies the power distribution board with which you associate
the loads.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1017

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Bus — Allows you to select a specific bus for which you want to perform load association.

Bus phases
(Available for the Loads tab only)
The check boxes in this group box allow you to filter the display of loads in the Associated
loads data window according to their assigned phases. You define the bus phase labels in the
bus Properties window.
Phase 1 — Filters the Associated loads list and displays only the loads that are associated
with phase 1.
Phase 2 — Filters the Associated loads list and displays only the loads that are associated
with phase 2.
Phase 3 — Filters the Associated loads list and displays only the loads that are associated
with phase 3.
All phases — Displays all the loads disregarding their phase association.

Create circuits and cells

(Available for the Loads tab only)
Create circuits — Enables you to automatically create a feeder circuit for all the loads that are
not associated with circuits. This selection does not affect the associated loads that are already
associated with feeder circuits. The software creates a circuit based on the last applied typical
circuit. If no typical circuit is associated with the current load, the software creates a feeder
circuit without any circuit components.
Create cells — Enables you to automatically create a cell where the software creates the feeder
circuits for the associated loads.

Circuits Tab
Allows you to display all the circuits that are connected to the current bus and which feed other
buses.
The following table summarizes the information presented on the Circuits tab. For a
comprehensive summary of how the software presents the information on the Batch Load
Association dialog box, see the summary table at the bottom of the Associate Loads with a
PDB in Batch Mode procedure, above the notes.

Item Type Circuits Tab

Loads connected directly Not applicable

to the selected bus.

Converting equipment Shown only if the converting equipment is not

defined as a load.

Converting equipment Shown only if the converting equipment is not

losses defined as a load.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1018

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Item Type Circuits Tab

Local panels and Not applicable

junction boxes

Cabinets and Not applicable

instruments

Feeder circuit that feeds Shown if it feeds an incomer circuit or

a downstream bus or converting equipment that is not defined as a
converting equipment. load.

Coupler circuit Shown if it feeds a bus riser.

Item Tag — Displays the item tag for the circuit connected to the current bus and which feeds
other circuits.
Description — Displays the circuit description.
Circuit Type — Displays the circuit type, for example: Feeder, Incomer.
Rated Active Power — Displays the rated kW of the circuit.
Rated Reactive Power — Displays the rated kVAr of the circuit.
Rated Apparent Power — Displays the rated kVA of the circuit.
Show Preferences — Displays the preference settings for the calculation method for All Feeder
Load Summary Report and the settings for the inclusion of coupled buses in All Feeder Load
Summary Report.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Cached Loads Tab (Batch Load Association Dialog Box)

The Batch Load Association dialog box enables you to balance load flow of a particular bus
and associate multiple loads with a power distribution board (PDB) and a bus. Also, allows you
to display the calculated consumption for the entire power distribution board or a particular bus
belonging to the selected power distribution board. You can also assign a load to a particular
phase or define a load as a three-phase load.
Power distribution board — Specifies the power distribution board with which you associate
the loads.
Bus — Allows you to select a specific bus for which you want to perform load association.

Bus phases
(Available for the Loads tab only)
The check boxes in this group box allow you to filter the display of loads in the Associated
loads data window according to their assigned phases. You define the bus phase labels in the
bus Properties window.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1019

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Phase 1 — Filters the Associated loads list and displays only the loads that are associated
with phase 1.
Phase 2 — Filters the Associated loads list and displays only the loads that are associated
with phase 2.
Phase 3 — Filters the Associated loads list and displays only the loads that are associated
with phase 3.
All phases — Displays all the loads disregarding their phase association.

Create circuits and cells

(Available for the Loads tab only)
Create circuits — Enables you to automatically create a feeder circuit for all the loads that are
not associated with circuits. This selection does not affect the associated loads that are already
associated with feeder circuits. The software creates a circuit based on the last applied typical
circuit. If no typical circuit is associated with the current load, the software creates a feeder
circuit without any circuit components.
Create cells — Enables you to automatically create a cell where the software creates the feeder
circuits for the associated loads.

Cached Loads Tab

Displays a list of loads that you have unassigned from buses in order to reassign them to a
different bus for the purpose of load balancing.
Item Tag — Displays the load item tag.
Type — Displays the electrical equipment sub-class of the load, for example, motor, heater.
Consumed Active — Displays the consumed active power consumption for the load.
Consumed Reactive — Displays the consumed reactive power consumption for the load.
Rated Active — Displays the rated active power consumption for the load.
Rated Reactive — Displays the rated reactive power consumption for the load.
Full Load Current — Displays the manufacturer's stated full load current for the load.
Assign To Bus — Assigns the cached loads to the current bus.
Show Preferences — Displays the preference settings for the calculation method for All Feeder
Load Summary Report and the settings for the inclusion of coupled buses in All Feeder Load
Summary Report.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Battery Bank Common Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for defining the general properties of a battery bank. Also, this dialog box defines
properties that the software uses for calculating electrical output and associating the battery
bank with the electrical supply.
General Tab (see "General Tab (Battery Bank Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1021)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1020

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Electrical Data Tab (see "Electrical Data Tab (Battery Bank Common Properties Dialog Box)" on
page 1022)
Controls and Signals Tab (see "Controls and Signals Tab (Battery Bank Common Properties
Dialog Box)" on page 1022)
Instruments Tab (see "Instruments Tab (Battery Bank Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page
1023)

General Tab (Battery Bank Common Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for general properties that identify and characterize the battery bank. An asterisk
beside a property name indicates required data.
Item tag — Identifies the battery bank. The tag is the name that appears beside the battery
bank in the Electrical Index or the Reference Data Explorer. In the Reference Data
Explorer, you must enter a string in this box. In the Electrical Index, the item tag matches the
naming convention for the battery bank. Click the ellipsis button to open a dialog box
where you can modify the item tag segments that are editable.
The tag property Comply with Naming Convention determines the behavior of an
item tag name. When the property is set to True, the protection masks and segment properties
behave according to the settings for the item naming convention in the Options Manager. When
the property is set to False, you can edit the tag name value freely. Whether you set this
property to True or False, the software ensures compliance with uniqueness if you set the Is
Unique parameter to True in the Item Type Properties option of the Options Manager.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the battery bank, for information only.
Manufacturer — Allows you to select a manufacturer for the battery bank. You can define and
customize manufacturers in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Model — Allows you to select a battery bank model. The available models are specific to the
manufacturer. You can select a model without selecting a manufacturer. The software then
selects the appropriate manufacturer automatically according to the selected model. You can
define and customize models in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Item status — Allows you to select an appropriate status of the equipment indicating whether
the item is active or deleted.
Type — Allows you to enter a description of the type of battery bank such as Lead-acid or
Nicad. The software uses this description in filters and reports. You can define and customize
types in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Last applied profile — Indicates the last profile that you applied to the battery bank, if
appropriate. This information is read-only.
Last applied typical schematic — Indicates the last typical schematic that you applied to the
battery bank, if appropriate. This information is read-only.
Last applied lookup table — Indicates the last lookup table that you applied to the battery
bank, if appropriate. This information is read-only.
Design type — Allows you to select a standard that specifies the construction of the battery
bank. You can define and customize design types in the Data Dictionary Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1021

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Mounting — Allows you to select a standard type of mounting as specified by the vendor for the
battery bank. You can define and customize mountings in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Notes — Allows you to enter text, for example, if you want to provide additional information
about the battery bank.

Electrical Data Tab (Battery Bank Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Provides information about the battery bank properties based on the output power requirements.
Rated active power — Shows the maximum quantity of electrical power, usually in kW, that the
battery bank is able to supply to the network.
Rated voltage — Select the voltage which the battery bank is designed to supply. This quantity
usually appears on the battery bank nameplate. You can define and customize the available
rated voltages in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Override FLA calculation — Select the required option to determine whether the software uses
a calculated or manually typed full load current value. If you select Calculated, the software
calculates the full load current value based on values you enter on the Electrical Data tab; the
calculated value overwrites any value that you previously entered manually. Selecting Manual
enables data entry in the Full load current box, with the last calculated full load current as the
starting value.
Full load current (FLA) — The electrical current, in amperes, that the battery bank supplies
when operating at maximum power. The full load current usually appears on the nameplate of
the battery bank. You can select Calculated or Manual from the Override FLA calculation list
to determine whether the software calculates this value or whether you enter a value
manually. When the battery bank has an attached cable, the software copies this value to the
cable and uses it as a default value for sizing the cable.
Flooded seal — Select whether the battery bank seal type is flooded or not flooded.
Number of cells — Type the number of individual cells that make up the battery bank.
Float voltage — Allows you to select a battery float voltage from a standard set of values. The
float voltage is the voltage that has to be applied to the battery to maintain its charge level.

Controls and Signals Tab (Battery Bank Common Properties

Dialog Box)
Provides optional information for control stations that control the battery bank operation, and
controls and signals for the battery bank.

Associated control stations

Displays a list of control stations associated with the battery bank. This information is read-only
and appears if you associated a control station with the battery bank from the Control Station
Common Properties dialog box.
Item Tag — Displays the control station tag for the associated control station.
Type — Displays the reference control station when you create the associated plant control
station by copying a reference control station from the Reference Data Explorer. For a control
station you created in the Electrical Index, no value appears in this column.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1022

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Associated I/O signals

Describes all the I/O signals that are associated with the item where the signals need monitoring
or operation at the PLC / DCS.
Item Tag — Displays the signal tag for the associated I/O signal.
Equipment Type — Displays the equipment type of the item that the signal originates from,
which can be the battery bank, an associated circuit, or a control station.
Description — Displays a description of the associated I/O signal.
I/O Type — Displays the signal I/O type according to whether the signal is an input or an output,
and whether the signal type is analog or digital.
Loop Number — Displays the loop number, if one exists, for signal data that you retrieved from
Smart Instrumentation.
Last applied typical I/O set — Indicates the last typical I/O set of signals that you applied to the
battery bank, if appropriate. This information is read-only and appears only if you apply a
typical I/O set by dragging it from the Reference Data Explorer or by applying options to the
battery bank.

Instruments Tab (Battery Bank Common Properties Dialog Box)

Displays instruments that monitor and control the operation of the battery bank.

Associated instruments
Displays a list of instruments associated with the battery bank. This information is read-only
and appears if you associated an instrument with the battery bank from the Instrument
Properties dialog box on the Associated Equipment tab.
Item Tag — Displays the tag for the associated instrument.
Instrument Type — Displays the reference instrument when you create the associated plant
instrument by copying an instrument from the Reference Data Explorer. For an instrument
that you created in the Electrical Index, no value appears in this column.
Description — Displays a description of the associated instrument.
I/O Type — Displays the system I/O type for the instrument according to whether the signal is
an input or an output, and whether the signal type is analog or digital. This value appears if you
defined a system I/O type on the Instrument Properties dialog box.

Converting Equipment Common Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for defining the general properties of converting equipment such as a
transformer. Also, this dialog box defines properties that the software uses for calculating
electrical loads and associating the equipment with the electrical supply.
General Tab
Electrical Data Tab (see "Electrical Data Tab (Converting Equipment Common Properties Dialog
Box)" on page 1025)
Controls and Signals Tab (see "Controls and Signals Tab (Converting Equipment Common
Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1027)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1023

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Instruments Tab (see "Instruments Tab (Converting Equipment Common Properties Dialog
Box)" on page 1028)
Feeder Data Tab (see "Feeder Data Tab (Converting Equipment Common Properties Dialog
Box)" on page 1029)
Alternative Feeder Tab (see "Alternative Feeder Tab (Converting Equipment Common
Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1031)

General Tab (Converting Equipment Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Sets options for general properties that identify and characterize the converting equipment. An
asterisk beside a property name indicates required data.
Consumer — Allows you to define the current electrical item as a consumer. This means that
the software will include this item in load summary calculations, batch load associations, and all
feeder summary reports. The software uses the electrical power values that you enter for this
item on the Electrical Data tab. Also, you can use this property for filtering items that you want
to appear in the EDE or in reports. The software does not select this check box by default for
converting equipment.
Also, for junction boxes and local panels, selecting this check box instructs the software to
include the current junction board or local panel in single line diagrams generated for power
distribution boards.
Item tag — Identifies the item of equipment. The tag is the name that appears beside the item
in the Electrical Index or the Reference Data Explorer. In the Reference Data Explorer, you
must enter a string in this box. In the Electrical Index, the item tag matches the naming
convention for the item. Click the ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can
modify the item tag segments that are editable.
The tag property Comply with Naming Convention determines the behavior of an
item tag name. When the property is set to True, the protection masks and segment properties
behave according to the settings for the item naming convention in the Options Manager. When
the property is set to False, you can edit the tag name value freely. Whether you set this
property to True or False, the software ensures compliance with uniqueness if you set the Is
Unique parameter to True in the Item Type Properties option of the Options Manager.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the item, for information only.
Manufacturer — Allows you to select a manufacturer for the converting equipment. You can
define and customize manufacturers in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Model — Allows you to select an item model. The available models are specific to the
manufacturer. You can select a model without selecting a manufacturer. The software then
selects the appropriate manufacturer automatically according to the selected model. You can
define and customize models in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Process equipment — Allows you to enter a description of the equipment that the converting
equipment affects or is associated with.
Item status — Allows you to select an appropriate status of the equipment indicating whether
the item is active or deleted.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1024

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Converting equipment type — Displays the electrical equipment sub-class of the converting
equipment, for example, transformer or UPS. The value is read-only. The software uses this
description in filters and reports.
Type — Allows you to enter a description of the specific type of converting equipment indicated
under Converting equipment type. The software uses this description in filters and
reports. You can define and customize types in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Last applied profile — Indicates the last profile that you applied to the equipment, if
appropriate. This information is read-only.
Last applied typical schematic — Indicates the last typical schematic that you applied to the
equipment, if appropriate. This information is read-only.
Last applied lookup table — Indicates the last lookup table that you applied to the equipment,
if appropriate. This information is read-only.
Design type — Allows you to select a standard that specifies the construction of the converting
equipment. You can define and customize design types in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Mounting — Allows you to select a standard type of mounting as specified by the vendor for the
type of equipment. You can define and customize mountings in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Notes — Allows you to enter text, for example, if you want to provide additional information
about the item.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Electrical Data Tab (Converting Equipment Common Properties

Dialog Box)
Provides information about the converting equipment properties based on the output power
requirements.
Rated power — Allows you to enter the required maximum input power for the equipment. This
quantity usually appears on the equipment nameplate. You must enter a value with appropriate
units of measure for the standard that you are using. The units of measure depend on the type
of equipment. The software specifies the units of measure in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Rated voltage — Select the input voltage at which the equipment is designed to operate. This
quantity ensures electrical compatibility between the electrical supply and the equipment. It
usually appears on the equipment nameplate.
Number of phases — Select the number of phases in the power supply to the equipment. You
can select 1 or 3 phases. This property applies for an AC supply only.
Supply — Select the type of supply: alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC).
Frequency (Hz) — Select the operating frequency of the equipment. This property applies for
an AC supply only.
Override FLA calculation — Select the required option to determine whether the software uses
a calculated or manually typed full load current value. If you select Calculated, the software
calculates the full load current value based on values you enter on the Load Data tab; the
calculated value overwrites any value that you previously entered manually. Selecting Manual
enables data entry in the Full load current box, with the last calculated full load current as the
starting value.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1025

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Phase arrangement — Select the required value to determine which of the available phases
are in use for the current equipment, for example 3 PH + N (three phases plus neutral). This
property applies for an AC supply only and the values on this list that are available for selection
depend on the number of phases that you have selected.
Full load current (FLA) — The electrical current, in amperes, that the equipment draws from
the supply when operating at maximum power. The full load current usually appears on the
equipment nameplate. You can select Calculated or Manual from the Override FLA
calculation list to determine whether the software calculates this value or whether you enter a
value manually.
Resistive losses — Allows you to enter a value for the active power loss that is caused by the
resistance of the windings (copper losses). The software uses this value when taking into
account the converting equipment power losses when calculating batch load association and
generating an All Feeder Load Summary report. The software takes into account these losses if
you set your report preferences accordingly. (Click File > Preferences > Reports and then
select the Account for converting equipment power losses.)
Reactive losses — Allows to enter a value for the reactive power loss that is caused by the
magnetic effects in the core (iron losses). The software uses this value when taking into
account the converting equipment power losses during batch load association and generating
an All Feeder Load Summary report. The software takes into account these losses if you set
your report preferences accordingly. (Click File > Preferences > Load Summaries and
Reports and then select the Account for converting equipment power losses.)

Electrical power
Entering electrical power values allows you to include these values in the calculations of load
summaries, batch load associations, and when generating all feeder load summary reports.
When performing a drill-down calculation for a PDB that has a branch connected to a bus
through a consumer converting equipment item, the software accounts for the total of this
branch using the electrical power values of this converting equipment item. Note that the
software will use these values only if the current converting equipment has been defined as a
consumer. For details, see Define Converting Equipment as Consumers (on page 118).
Rated active load — Allows you to enter an appropriate rated active load value.
Rated reactive load — Allows you to enter an appropriate rated reactive load value.
Rated apparent load — Displays the rated apparent load value calculated by the software.
Consumed active load — Allows you to enter an appropriate consumed active load value.
Consumed reactive load — Allows you to enter an appropriate consumed reactive load value.
Consumed apparent load — Displays the consumed apparent load value calculated by the
software.

Secondary output
This section provides information about the output from the equipment. When the converting
equipment is a transformer, the software displays the item tags for the secondary windings, as
well as appropriate information according to whether the transformer design has one or two sets
of secondary windings. Note that this section is available for all types of converting equipment
apart from limiting current reactors. The name of the secondary equipment appears after a slash
in this label.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1026

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Rated power — Displays the maximum output power for the equipment.

▪ For two-winding transformers, the rated power of the secondary winding is copied
automatically from the primary rated power.
▪ For three-winding transformers, the rated power of each secondary winding can be
smaller or equal to the rated power of the primary winding. Both secondary windings
can have the same rated power value as long as the rated power value of neither
secondary winding exceeds the rated power value of the primary winding.
Nominal current — Enter the output current for the converting equipment, including appropriate
units such as amperes. For a transformer, this is the current in the secondary windings.
Rated voltage — Select the output voltage at which the equipment is designed to
operate. This quantity ensures electrical compatibility between the electrical supply and the
equipment. It usually appears on the equipment nameplate.

Current limiting reactors

This section enables you to define the reduction of the short- circuit power of networks or
installations to an acceptable value with regard to the short-circuit strength of the equipment or
the breaking capacity of the circuit breaker.
Insulation level — Allows you to enter the rated voltage level for the insulation of the
equipment.
Resistance — Allows you to enter the resistive value of the current limiting reactor.
Reactance — Allows you to enter the reactance values of the current limiting reactor.
Short circuit current [RMS] — Allows you to enter the level of fault current (Root Mean
Square).
Short circuit current [Peak] — Allows you to enter the maximum level of the fault current.
Power factor — Allows you to enter an appropriate power factor for the current limiting reactor.
Basic impulse level — Allows you to define the maximum voltage level for the impulse test of
the current limiting reactor.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Controls and Signals Tab (Converting Equipment Common

Properties Dialog Box)
Provides optional information for control stations that control the equipment operation, and
controls and signals for the equipment.

Associated control stations

Displays a list of control stations associated with the equipment. This information is read-only
and appears either if you associated a control station with the equipment from the Control
Station Common Properties dialog box.
Item Tag — Displays the control station tag for the associated control station.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1027

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Type — Displays the reference control station when you create the associated plant control
station by copying a reference control station from the Reference Data Explorer. For a control
station that you created in the Electrical Index, no value appears in this column.

Associated I/O signals

Describes all the I/O signals that are associated with the item where the signals need monitoring
or operation at the PLC / DCS.
Item Tag — Displays the signal tag for the associated I/O signal.
Equipment Type — Displays the equipment type of the item that the signal originates from,
which can be the converting equipment, an associated circuit, or a control station.
Description — Displays a description of the associated I/O signal.
I/O Type — Displays the signal I/O type according to whether the signal is an input or an output,
and whether the signal type is analog or digital.
Loop Number — Displays the loop number, if one exists, for signal data that you retrieved from
Smart Instrumentation.
Last applied typical I/O set — Indicates the last typical I/O set of signals that you applied to the
equipment, if appropriate. This information is read-only and appears only if you apply a typical
I/O set by dragging it from the Reference Data Explorer or by applying options to the
equipment.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Instruments Tab (Converting Equipment Common Properties

Dialog Box)
Displays instruments that monitor and control the operation of the equipment.

Associated instruments
Displays a list of instruments associated with the equipment. This information is read-only and
appears if you associated an instrument with the equipment from the Instrument Properties
dialog box on the Associated Equipment tab.
Item Tag — Displays the tag for the associated instrument.
Instrument Type — Displays the reference instrument when you create the associated plant
instrument by copying an instrument from the Reference Data Explorer. For an instrument
that you created in the Electrical Index, no value appears in this column.
Description — Displays a description of the associated instrument.
I/O Type — Displays the system I/O type for the instrument according to whether the signal is
an input or an output, and whether the signal type is analog or digital. This value appears if you
defined a system I/O type on the Instrument Properties dialog box.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1028

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Feeder Data Tab (Converting Equipment Common Properties

Dialog Box)
Provides information about the feeder and details of associated protection devices such as
fuses, circuit breakers, overload relays, and so forth in items of equipment that belong to your
plant. The values on this tab reflect the definitions that you make in the Electrical Engineer.
Once you associate the equipment with a circuit, the feeder data becomes
read-only. Further changes are possible only through the Electrical Engineer. For more
information, see Associate Electrical Equipment with Feeders (on page 231).

Location
Enables you to specify the location of the feeder for the converting equipment item. Also, you
can specify these settings by performing associations in the Electrical Engineer.

▪ The data in the Location group box (power distribution board, bus, cell, circuit, and
details of circuit internals) is shown regardless of whether the load is fed directly from a
circuit or via several other equipment items.
▪ Where the feeder source is an item of equipment other than a PDB, the source tag
appears in the Feeder equipment box and all the properties in this section are
disabled.
Power distribution board — Allows you to specify and display the power distribution board in
which the feeder is located. If you select a PDB without specifying a bus, the software assigns
the PDB to the equipment, but you can change feeder data values later if you need to.
Bus — Allows you to specify and display the bus to which the equipment is assigned. The
values in this list depend on the selected power distribution board. If you select a bus without
specifying a circuit, the software assigns the bus to the equipment, but you can change feeder
data values later if you need to.
Cell — Allows you to specify and display the cell/bucket/compartment to which the equipment is
assigned. The values in this list depend on the selected bus.
Circuit — Allows you to specify and display the circuit to which the equipment is assigned. If
the circuit resides in a particular cell, the values in this list depend on the selected cell. If the
circuit is linked directly to the bus, and is not linked to a cell, the values in the list depend on the
selected bus.
If you select a cell without selecting an existing circuit, the software automatically
creates a new circuit when you click Apply.
Create circuit — Allows you to create a new feeder circuit in the bus to which the equipment is
assigned when you click Apply. The software automatically assigns the circuit name. When
you select this check box, the Create cell check box becomes active. Also, with the new circuit,
if you have specified a typical circuit for the equipment, the software assigns circuit components
based on that typical circuit.
If you do not select this check box, then unless you select a cell, the software does
not create a circuit and the equipment-bus association does not appear in the Electrical
Engineer. In this case, you can select the check box the next time you select this tab folder to
actually create the circuit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1029

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Create cell — Allows you to create a new cell in the bus to which the equipment is
assigned. The software automatically assigns the cell name.
Phase 1 — Allows you to associate the current equipment with phase 1 of the selected
bus. The availability of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of
phases list on the Electrical Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC
supply. Phase 1 refers to the label L1 or R, as defined by the value of the Phase Label1 bus
property.
Phase 2 — Allows you to associate the current equipment with phase 2 of the selected
bus. The availability of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of
phases list on the Electrical Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC
supply. Phase 2 refers to the label L2 or S, as defined by the value of the Phase Label2 bus
property.
Phase 3 — Allows you to associate the current equipment with phase 3 of the selected
bus. The availability of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of
phases list on the Electrical Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC
supply. Phase 3 refers to the label L3 or T, as defined by the value of the Phase Label3 bus
property.
If you want a single-phase load to simulate a two-phase load that is
connected to a three-phase bus, select two of the Phase check boxes.
Details of circuit internals — Displays details of the components in the selected circuit. The
values are read-only.
To update the circuit components, you need to modify the selected circuit in the
Electrical Index. For more information, refer to Related Topics.
Component Type — Displays the type of component in the circuit, such as a circuit breaker or
a fuse.
Component Tag — Displays the component identifying tag, as shown in the Electrical Index.
Order — Determines the position of the component in relation to the bus when the circuit
contains more than one component. The greater the value, the further the component is from
the bus.
Show in SLD — Indicates whether the software shows a graphical representation of the
component when you generate a single line diagram for the PDB.

Feeder equipment
Where equipment other than a PDB circuit feeds the converting equipment, the software
displays the item tag of the feeding equipment in this box. For example, if the feeder equipment
is a generator, the generator tag is displayed.
Where a feeder equipment tag appears, the properties under the Location section
are disabled. Likewise, where the feeder source is a PDB, the source data appears under the
Location section and this property is disabled.

Last applied typical circuit

Indicates the last typical circuit that you applied to the converting equipment, if appropriate.
Tag — Displays the tag of the last applied typical circuit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1030

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Function — Displays the function of the last applied typical circuit. For a converting equipment
item, this is always Feeder.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Alternative Feeder Tab (Converting Equipment Common

Properties Dialog Box)
Displays the location of an alternative feeder, if defined, in items of equipment that belong to
your plant. You specify these settings by performing associations in the Electrical
Engineer. All properties on this tab are view-only.

Location
Power distribution board - Displays the power distribution board in which the feeder is located.
Bus — Displays the bus belonging to the power distribution board.
Cell — Displays a cell/bucket/ compartment to which the equipment is assigned, if defined.
Circuit — Displays the circuit to which the equipment is assigned.
Feeder equipment — Displays the item used as the alternative supply (generator, battery bank,
off-site power and so forth).
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Copy Driver Power Absorbed Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to copy the power values for selected motors from the Driver Power
Absorbed property of the item of process equipment to the Brake Power property of the motor
with which it is associated. This functionality exists for process equipment and motors that have
been retrieved from Smart P&ID.
Select — Allows you to select the row for copying the values when you click Apply or OK.
Process Equipment Tag — Identifies the process equipment item.
Description — Displays the description of the process equipment item, if it exists.
PID Drawing Number — Displays the PID drawing number of the process equipment item.
Driver Rated Power — Displays the driver rated power of the process equipment item.
Driver Power Absorbed — Displays the driver power absorbed of the process equipment
item. This is the property that is copied when you select the item.
Electrical Equipment Tag — Displays the tag of the electrical equipment, such as a motor, with
which the process equipment item is associated.
Motor Rated Power — Displays the value of the motor rated power, if the process equipment
item is associated with a motor.
Brake Power — Displays the current value of the brake power of the motor, before copying the
values.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1031

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Heater Rated Power — Displays the value of the heater rated power, if the process equipment
item is associated with a heater.
Select all — Selects all of the process equipment items for copying data.

Description Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to enter a long text value in the Description text box in the Common
Properties dialog box for an item. For long descriptions, click the ellipsis button to bring
up the Description dialog box.
Description — Allows you to enter a description for the item.
Very long descriptions cannot be displayed in their entirety in labels, reports, and so
forth.

Disconnect Electrical Equipment Common Properties Dialog

Box
Sets options for defining the general properties of disconnect electrical equipment.
Item tag — Identifies the disconnect equipment. The item tag appears beside the disconnect
equipment in the Electrical Index. The item tag matches the naming convention for the
disconnect equipment. Click the ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can modify
the tag segments that are editable.
Type — Displays the disconnect equipment type.
Last applied typical I/O set — Indicates the last typical I/O set of signals that you applied to the
equipment, if appropriate. This information is read-only and appears only if you apply a typical
I/O set by dragging it from the Reference Data Explorer or by applying options to the
equipment.
Last applied typical schematic — Indicates the last typical schematic that you applied to the
equipment, if appropriate. This information is read-only.
Assigned lookup table - Indicates the last lookup table that you applied to the equipment, if
appropriate. This information is read-only.

Associated control stations

Displays a list of control stations associated with the equipment. This information is read-only
and appears if you associated a control station with the load from the Control Station Common
Properties dialog box.
Item Tag — Displays the tag for the associated control station.
Type — Displays the reference control station when you create the associated plant control
station by copying a reference control station from the Reference Data Explorer. For a control
station that you created in the Electrical Index, no value appears in this column.

Associated I/O signals

Displays a list of all the I/O signals associated with the equipment. This information is read-only
and appears if you associated an I/O signal with the disconnect equipment.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1032

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Item Tag — Displays the tag for the associated I/O signal.
Equipment Type — Displays the disconnect equipment type.
Description — Displays the description for the I/O signal, if entered.
I/O Type — Displays the I/O type defined for the signal, such as AO, AI, Fieldbus, and so forth.
Loop Number — Displays the loop number, if one exists, for signal data that you retrieved from
Smart Instrumentation.

Electrical Motor Common Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for defining the general properties of an electrical motor. Also, this dialog box
defines properties that the software uses for calculating loads and associating the motor with the
electrical supply.
General Tab
Load Data Tab (see "Load Data Tab (Electrical Motor Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page
1035)
Electrical Data Tab (see "Electrical Data Tab (Electrical Motor Common Properties Dialog Box)"
on page 1037)
Controls and Signals Tab (see "Controls and Signals Tab (Electrical Motor Common Properties
Dialog Box)" on page 1039)
Instruments Tab (see "Instruments Tab (Electrical Motor Common Properties Dialog Box)" on
page 1040)
Feeder Data Tab (see "Feeder Data Tab (Electrical Motor Common Properties Dialog Box)" on
page 1041)
Alternative Feeder Tab (see "Alternative Feeder Tab (Electrical Motor Common Properties
Dialog Box)" on page 1043)

General Tab (Electrical Motor Common Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for general motor properties that identify and characterize the motor. An asterisk
beside a property name indicates required data.
Consumer — You can use this property for filtering items that you want to appear in the EDE or
in reports. The software selects this check box by default when you create a new motor.
Item tag — Identifies the motor. The tag is the name that appears beside the motor in the
Electrical Index or the Reference Data Explorer. In the Reference Data Explorer, you must
enter a string in this box. In the Electrical Index, the item tag matches the naming convention
for the motor. Click the ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can modify the item
tag segments that are editable.
The tag property Comply with Naming Convention determines the behavior of an
item tag name. When the property is set to True, the protection masks and segment properties
behave according to the settings for the item naming convention in the Options Manager. When
the property is set to False, you can edit the tag name value freely. Whether you set this
property to True or False, the software ensures compliance with uniqueness if you set the Is
Unique parameter to True in the Item Type Properties option of the Options Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1033

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Description — Allows you to type a description of the motor, for information only. Click the
ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can type longer text for the description.
When typing the description in the dialog box, to begin a new line, press CTRL +
ENTER.
Manufacturer — Allows you to select a manufacturer for the motor. You can define and
customize manufacturers in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Model — Allows you to select a motor model. The available models are specific to the
manufacturer. You can select a model without selecting a manufacturer. The software then
selects the appropriate manufacturer automatically according to the selected model. You can
define and customize models in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Process equipment — Allows you to enter a description of the equipment that the motor
drives. If the motor was retrieved from Smart P&ID and included an association with an item of
process equipment, the software fills this property with the name of the process equipment.
Item status — Allows you to select an appropriate status of the equipment indicating whether
the item is active or deleted.
Conformity to standard — Allows you to specify the standard for electrical calculations when
you associate a power cable with the motor. The standard affects the sizing calculation that the
software uses for an associated cable. The standard options defined in the Data Dictionary
Manager are:
▪ National Electrical Code (NEC) — The standard used in the US. When you select the
NEC standard, the software allows you to use the NEC lookup tables to automate
population of motor data in your plant.
▪ International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) — The standard used primarily in
Europe.
The conformity to standard also determines the available values of conductor size, frequency,
and rated voltage.
Motor design letter — Allows you to select a design letter, which is a standard designation for
NEC motors. The design letter provides an indication of the values of various mechanical and
electrical characteristics of the motor.
Type — Allows you to enter a description of the type of motor. The software uses this
description in filters and reports. You can define and customize types in the Data Dictionary
Manager.
Last applied profile — Indicates the last profile that you applied to the motor, if
appropriate. This information is read- only.
Last applied typical schematic — Indicates the last typical schematic that you applied to the
motor, if appropriate. This information is read-only.
Last applied lookup table — Indicates the last lookup table that you applied to the motor, if
appropriate. This information is read-only.
Design type — Allows you to select a standard that specifies the construction of the motor. For
example, standards include Totally Enclosed Air Cooled (TEAC) and Totally Enclosed Fan
Cooled (TEFC). You can define and customize design types in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Mounting — Allows you to select a standard type of mounting as specified by the vendor for the
type of the load or machine. You can define and customize mountings in the Data Dictionary
Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1034

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Process operational requirements — Allows you to select the operational requirements of the
plant in which the motor is located. The following standard system options are available:
▪ Emergency
▪ Normal plant operation
▪ Shutdown
▪ Startup
You can define additional values for this list in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Frame size — Provides a list of US standard values that define the physical and mechanical
properties and dimensions of the motor. You can define and customize frame sizes in the Data
Dictionary Manager.
Notes — Allows you to enter text, for example, if you want to provide additional information
about the motor.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Load Data Tab (Electrical Motor Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Provides information about the mechanical power and usage requirements of the motor. You
can find many of these quantities on the motor nameplate. An asterisk beside a property name
indicates required data.
Rated power — Allows you to select a standard rated power value that represents the
maximum mechanical power that a motor shaft is required to supply. This quantity usually
appears on the motor nameplate. You can define and customize the rated power values in the
Data Dictionary Manager. The available rated power values can only have hp or kW as the
units of measure.
Brake power — Allows you to enter the minimum mechanical power required to make the motor
shaft rotate and drive the pump or process equipment attached to the motor. If you enter a
value, it cannot be greater than the value of the rated power and must have appropriate units of
measure for the standard that you are using: W, kW, MW, or hp. You can specify the default
plant units of measure in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Minimum required power — Allows you to enter a value that corresponds to a minimum power
requirement of the motor. This quantity is applicable if you are using the IEC (European)
standard. If you enter a value, it cannot be greater than the value of the rated power and must
have appropriate units of measure: W, kW, MW, or hp. You can specify the default plant units
of measure in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Supply — Select the type of supply: alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC).
Number of poles — Select the number of poles for the motor. For example, you can select 2
or 4 poles. You can define and customize the available number of poles in the Data Dictionary
Manager.
Rated voltage — Select the voltage at which the motor is designed to operate. This quantity
usually appears on the motor nameplate. You can define and customize the available rated
voltages in the Data Dictionary Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1035

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Particular power — Allows you to enter the power requirement of the motor under a specific
operating point that the user specifies. This quantity is applicable if you are using the IEC
standard. If you enter a value, it cannot be greater than the value of the rated power and must
have appropriate units of measure: W, kW, MW, or hp. You can specify the default plant units
of measure in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Number of phases — Select the number of phases in the power supply to the motor. You can
select 1 or 3 phases. This property applies for an AC supply only.
Frequency (Hz) — Select the operating frequency of the motor. You can define and customize
the available frequencies in the Data Dictionary Manager. This property applies for an AC
supply only.
Phase arrangement — Select the required value to determine which of the available phases
are in use for the current load, for example 3 PH + N (three phases plus neutral). This property
applies for an AC supply only.
Operating factor — Enter a value between 0 and 1 to represent the ratio of the load power
requirement to the rated power at an operating point that you specify. The software multiplies
the consumed electrical power by the operating factor to calculate average power usage.
Demand factor — Displays a calculated value that represents the ratio of the brake power to
the motor rated power. The software calculates the demand factor automatically using the
values of the brake power and the motor rated power that you specify on this dialog box
tab. Alternatively, you can type a demand factor value for the software to calculate the Brake
power value. Demand factor values affect the following properties of electrical motors:
▪ Brake power
▪ Power factor and efficiency at demand
▪ Consumed electrical power

▪ You can enter demand factor values only if it has been enabled in Data Dictionary
Manager.
▪ For details about the various calculation modes, see Break Power / Demand Factor
Calculation (see "Brake Power / Demand Factor Calculation" on page 96).
LRC power factor — Allows you to enter the value of the ratio of the active power to the
apparent power at locked rotor current (LRC). The LRC power factor can have a value between
0 and 1.
Number of wires — Select the number of wires used to supply power to the motor.
Synchronous speed — Displays the maximum theoretical rate of rotation of a machine shaft, in
revolutions per minute (rpm), assuming no energy losses due to the magnetic field, pole
architecture, and so forth.
Asynchronous speed — Allows you to enter the actual rate of rotation of a motor shaft. If you
enter a value, it cannot be greater than the value of the synchronous speed.
Te stall time — Allows you to enter the time that it takes the motor to come to rest after you
switch off the power.
Run-up time — Allows you to enter the time that it takes the motor to reach its operating speed
after you switch on the power.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1036

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Coincidence factors
Allows you to enter values corresponding to the percentage utilization of the motor for the
selected operating mode. Also known as duty factors. Type a value between 0 and 1 for the
required mode. A value of 0 corresponds to an unused motor, while a value of 1 corresponds to
continuous operation.
Operating mode — Select the operating mode that describes how the motor is used in practice
in the plant. The standard available operating modes are:
▪ Continuous
▪ Intermittent
▪ Standby
▪ Spare
The coincidence factor corresponding to the selected operating mode provides a
quantitative measure of the motor behavior in that mode.

Power factor and efficiency

Enter the values under the conditions of 50%, 75%, and 100% of the rated power. The software
uses these values with the rated power and demand factor to calculate the power factor and
efficiency at the brake power.
Power factor — Enter the ratio of active power to apparent power under the conditions of 50%,
75%, and 100% of the rated power. The power factor can have a value between 0 and 1.
Efficiency — Enter the ratio of power output to power input under the conditions of 50%, 75%,
and 100% of the rated power. The efficiency can have a value between 0 and 1.
At demand — The software calculates the power factor and efficiency at the brake power by
linear interpolation of the values you enter at 50%, 75%, and 100% of the rated power.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Electrical Data Tab (Electrical Motor Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Provides information about the electrical motor properties based on the mechanical power
requirements. Note that the software makes non-compensated calculations.

Electrical power
The software calculates the electrical power based on load data for the motor. Note that these
calculations are non-compensated. (For details about non-compensated values, see
Calculating Bus Load Summaries (on page 253).) Note that the values are all read-only.
The software can perform the calculation at three operating points:
▪ Rated — Maximum power.
▪ Consumed — Normal operation at the motor brake power.
▪ Particular — An additional point that you can specify.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1037

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Active — Shows the quantity of electrical power in kW drawn from the network and supplied to
the motor that is actually converted to mechanical work.
Reactive — Shows the quantity of reactive power in kVAR that the motor draws from the
network.
Apparent — Shows the quantity of electrical power in kVA that represents the vector sum of the
active and reactive power. This quantity is the actual power that the network needs to generate.
Average — Shows the average electrical power consumption for the motor. The software uses
the average electrical power consumption to calculate overall electrical load requirements. The
software calculates the average load by multiplying the consumed active electrical power by the
operating factor that you entered on the Load Data tab.

Full load current and locked rotor current data

Override FLA calculation — Select the required option to determine whether the software uses
a calculated or manually typed full load current value. The following options are available:
▪ Calculated — The software calculates the full load current value based on values you enter
on the Load Data tab (rated power and rated voltage); the calculated value overwrites any
previous value. You can then type a value manually for the Locked rotor current or the
LRC to FLA ratio property; whichever one of these values you type, the software then
calculates the remaining value automatically.
▪ Manual — Enables data entry in the Full load current box. In this mode, you must first
type a value for the full load current. Next, you can type a value for the Locked rotor
current or the LRC to FLA ratio property; whichever one of these values you type, the
software then calculates the remaining value automatically.
▪ Tables — Enables you to use NEC or other lookup tables to apply values for the Full load
current and Locked rotor current properties (in this mode, these properties and the LRC
to FLA ratio property are read-only). With this option, you can select Use locked rotor
indicating code, in which case the software calculates a value for the Locked rotor
current property by using the maximum value for the specified indicating code letter. If you
clear Use locked rotor indicating code, the software applies a value from the lookup
tables (if applied). Note that to make this option available, you must first import the NEC
lookup tables into your plant (for details, see Import Reference Data in the Options Manager
User's Guide) and on the General tab, you must select NEC as the value for Conformity to
standard.
Full load current (FLA) — The electrical current, in amperes, that the motor draws from the
supply when operating at maximum power. The full load current usually appears on the motor
nameplate. You can modify the value of this property only when you select Manual from the
Override FLA calculation list. Note that in the Calculated mode, the actual value calculated
depends on whether the motor is single- or 3-phase. When the motor has an attached cable,
the software copies this value to the cable and uses it as a default value for sizing the cable.
Locked rotor current (LRC) — Shows the initial electrical current, in amperes or kilo amperes,
required to start rotation of the motor. The software calculates this value automatically when
values for the full load current and the LRC / FLA ratio already appear. Note that in Manual
mode, if you want to enter a value in this field manually so that the software can calculate the
value of the LRC / FLA ratio, you must first type a value for the Full load current
property. When you select Tables as the value of the Override FLA calculation property, you
can select an indicating code letter for the software to calculate a value. The software uses the
following formula when calculating locked rotor currents (kVA/hp):

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1038

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

MotorRatedPower*CodeIndicatingFactor*1000/ k*RatedVoltage
where k = SQRT(3) if there are 3 phases and 1 if there is one phase.
LRC to FLA ratio — Shows the value of the ratio of locked rotor current to full load current,
usually shown on the motor nameplate. The software calculates this value automatically when
values for the full load current and the locked rotor current already appear. Note that in Manual
mode, if you want to enter a value in this field manually so that the software can calculate the
value of the locked rotor current, you must first type a value for the Full load current property.
Use locked rotor indicating code — Select to enable the Indicating code letter (kVA / HP)
list and then select a code letter from the list. Some manufacturers indicate the code letter on
the motor nameplate. This option is only available when you select the Tables mode.
Indicating code letter (kVA / HP) — Select the code that specifies the power requirement for
the motor with locked rotor, applicable if you are working with the NEC standard. Each code
letter represents a specified range of kilovolt- amperes per horsepower with locked rotor. The
software uses the highest value in the range to calculate the locked rotor current.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Controls and Signals Tab (Electrical Motor Common Properties

Dialog Box)
Provides optional information for control stations that control the motor operation, and controls
and signals for a motor.

Associated control stations

Displays a list of control stations associated with the motor. This information is read-only and
appears either if you associated a control station with the motor from the Control Station
Common Properties dialog box or if you applied a profile defined in the Reference Data
Explorer.
Item Tag — Displays the control station tag for the associated control station.
Type — Displays the reference control station when you create the associated plant control
station by copying a reference control station from the Reference Data Explorer. For a control
station that you created in the Electrical Index, no value appears in this column.

Associated I/O signals

Describes all the I/O signals that are associated with the motor where the signals need
monitoring or operation at the PLC / DCS.
Item Tag — Displays the signal tag for the associated I/O signal.
Equipment Type — Displays the equipment type of the item that the signal originates from,
which can be the motor, an associated circuit, or a control station.
Description — Displays a description of the associated I/O signal.
I/O Type — Displays the signal I/O type according to whether the signal is an input or an output,
and whether the signal type is analog or digital.
Loop Number — Displays the loop number, if one exists, for signal data that you retrieved from
Smart Instrumentation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1039

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Last applied typical I/O set — Indicates the last typical I/O set of signals that you applied to the
motor, if appropriate. This information is read-only and appears only if you apply a typical I/O
set by dragging it from the Reference Data Explorer or by applying options to the motor.

Controller
Provides controller details in the case where there is a device that controls the motor operation.
Type of controller — Describes the controller mechanism. Examples of controller
mechanisms are solid-state relay (SSR), silicon controlled rectifier (SCR), and electronic.
Variable frequency drive — Select this check box if the controller is a variable-frequency drive.

Restart options
Auto restart — Select the required option to indicate whether motor restart after a power
outage is automatic or manual.
Restart group — Select the group of motors to which the motor belongs when restarting. After
a power outage, the motors restart in groups, rather than all together, to avoid overloading the
network.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Instruments Tab (Electrical Motor Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Displays instruments that monitor and control the motor operation.

Associated instruments
Displays a list of instruments associated with the motor. This information is read-only and
appears if you associated an instrument with the motor from the Instrument Properties dialog
box on the Associated Equipment tab.
Item Tag — Displays the tag for the associated instrument.
Instrument Type — Displays the reference instrument function type property after creating a
plant instrument by copying an instrument from the Reference Data Explorer. For an
instrument that you created in the Electrical Index, no value appears in this column.
Description — Displays a description of the associated instrument.
I/O Type — Displays the system I/O type for the instrument according to whether the signal is
an input or an output, and whether the signal type is analog or digital. This value appears if you
defined a system I/O type on the Instrument Properties dialog box.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1040

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Feeder Data Tab (Electrical Motor Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Provides information about the feeder and details of associated protection devices such as
fuses, circuit breakers, overload relays, and so forth in motors that belong to your plant. The
values on this tab reflect the definitions that you make in the Electrical Engineer.
Once you associate the equipment with a circuit, the feeder data becomes
read-only. Further changes are possible only through the Electrical Engineer. For more
information, see Associate Electrical Equipment with Feeders (on page 231).

Location
Enables you to specify the location of the motor feeder. Also, you can specify these settings by
performing associations in the Electrical Engineer.

▪ The data in the Location group box (power distribution board, bus, cell, circuit, and
details of circuit internals) is shown regardless of whether the load is fed directly from a
circuit or via several other equipment items.
▪ Where the feeder source is an item of equipment other than a PDB, the source tag
appears in the Feeder equipment box and all the properties in this section are
disabled.
Power distribution board — Allows you to specify and display the power distribution board in
which the feeder is located. If you select a PDB without specifying a bus, the software assigns
the PDB to the motor, but you can change feeder data values later if you need to.
Bus — Allows you to specify and display the bus to which the motor is assigned. The values in
this list depend on the selected power distribution board. If you select a bus without specifying
a circuit, the software assigns the bus to the motor, but you can change feeder data values later
if you need to.
Cell — Allows you to specify and display a cell/bucket/ compartment to which the motor is
assigned. The values in this list depend on the selected bus.
Circuit — Allows you to specify and display the circuit to which the motor is assigned. If the
circuit resides in a particular cell, the values in this list depend on the selected cell. If the circuit
is linked directly to the bus, and is not linked to a cell, the values in the list depend on the
selected bus.
If you select a cell without selecting an existing circuit, the software automatically
creates a new circuit when you click Apply.
Create circuit — Allows you to create a new feeder circuit in the bus to which the motor is
assigned when you click Apply. The software automatically assigns the circuit name. When
you select this check box, the Create cell check box becomes active. Also, with the new circuit,
if you have specified a typical circuit for the motor, the software assigns circuit components
based on that typical circuit.
If you do not select this check box, then unless you select a cell, the software
does not create a circuit and the motor-bus association does not appear in the Electrical
Engineer. In this case, you can select the check box the next time you select this tab folder
to actually create the circuit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1041

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Create cell — Select to create a new cell in the bus to which the motor is assigned. The
software automatically assigns the cell name.
If you select both the Create cell and Create circuit check boxes, the software
creates a circuit directly under the cell in the Electrical Index.
Phase 1 — Allows you to associate the current load with phase 1 of the selected bus. The
availability of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of phases list on
the Load Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC supply. Phase 1 refers
to the label L1 or R, as defined by the value of the Phase Label1 bus property.
Phase 2 — Allows you to associate the current load with phase 2 of the selected bus. The
availability of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of phases list on
the Load Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC supply. Phase 2 refers
to the label L2 or S, as defined by the value of the Phase Label2 bus property.
Phase 3 — Allows you to associate the current load with phase 3 of the selected bus. The
availability of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of phases list on
the Load Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC supply. Phase 3 refers
to the label L3 or T, as defined by the value of the Phase Label3 bus property.
If you want a single-phase load to simulate a two-phase load that is
connected to a three-phase bus, select two of the Phase check boxes.
Details of circuit internals — Displays details of the components in the selected circuit. The
values are read-only.
To update and replace the circuit components, you need to re-apply a typical
circuit to the motor or modify the selected circuit in the Electrical Index. For more
information, refer to Related Topics.
Component Type — Displays the type of component in the circuit, such as a circuit breaker or
a fuse.
Component Tag — Displays the component identifying tag, as shown in the Electrical Index.
Order — Determines the position of the component in relation to the bus when the circuit
contains more than one component. The greater the value, the further the component is from
the bus.
Show in SLD — Indicates whether the software shows a graphical representation of the
component when you generate a single line diagram for the PDB.

Feeder equipment
Where equipment other than a PDB circuit feeds the motor, the software displays the item tag of
the feeding equipment in this box. For example, if a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) feeds the
motor, the VFD tag is displayed.
Where a feeder equipment tag appears, the properties under the Location
section are disabled. Likewise, where the feeder source is a PDB, the source data appears
under the Location section and this property is disabled.

Last applied typical circuit

Indicates the last typical circuit that you applied to the motor, if appropriate.
Tag — Displays the tag of the last applied typical circuit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1042

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Function — Displays the function of the last applied typical circuit. For a motor, this property
appears as Feeder.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Alternative Feeder Tab (Electrical Motor Common Properties

Dialog Box)
Displays the location of an alternative motor feeder, if defined, in motors that belong to your
plant. You specify these settings by performing associations in the Electrical Engineer. All
properties on this tab are view-only.

Location
Power distribution board — Displays the power distribution board in which the feeder is
located.
Bus — Displays the bus belonging to the power distribution board.
Cell — Displays a cell/bucket/ compartment to which the motor is assigned, if defined.
Circuit — Displays the circuit to which the motor is assigned.
Feeder equipment — Displays the item used as the alternative supply (generator, battery bank,
off-site power and so forth).
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Generator Common Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for defining the general properties of a generator. Also, this dialog box defines
properties that the software uses for calculating electrical output and associating the generator
with the electrical supply.
General Tab (see "General Tab (Generator Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1044)
Electrical Data Tab (see "Electrical Data Tab (Generator Common Properties Dialog Box)" on
page 1045)
Controls and Signals Tab (see "Controls and Signals Tab (Generator Common Properties
Dialog Box)" on page 1046)
Instruments Tab (see "Instruments Tab (Generator Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page
1047)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1043

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

General Tab (Generator Common Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for general properties that identify and characterize the generator. An asterisk
beside a property name indicates required data.
Item tag — Identifies the generator. The tag is the name that appears beside the generator in
the Electrical Index or the Reference Data Explorer. In the Reference Data Explorer, you
must enter a string in this box. In the Electrical Index, the item tag matches the naming
convention for the generator. Click the ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can
modify the item tag segments that are editable.
The tag property Comply with Naming Convention determines the behavior of an
item tag name. When the property is set to True, the protection masks and segment properties
behave according to the settings for the item naming convention in the Options Manager. When
the property is set to False, you can edit the tag name value freely. Whether you set this
property to True or False, the software ensures compliance with uniqueness if you set the Is
Unique parameter to True in the Item Type Properties option of the Options Manager.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the generator, for information only.
Manufacturer — Allows you to select a manufacturer for the generator. You can define and
customize manufacturers in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Model — Allows you to select a generator model. The available models are specific to the
manufacturer. You can select a model without selecting a manufacturer. The software then
selects the appropriate manufacturer automatically according to the selected model. You can
define and customize models in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Process equipment — Allows you to enter a description of the equipment that the generator
affects.
Exciter type — Allows you to select the type of exciter used to establish the magnetic field in
the stator; for example, Fixed, Brushless, Static. The software uses this description in filters
and reports. You can define and customize exciter types in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Item status — Allows you to select an appropriate status of the equipment indicating whether
the item is active or deleted.
Type — Allows you to enter a description of the type of generator; for example Turbo, Hydro,
Air-cooled. The software uses this description in filters and reports. You can define and
customize types in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Last applied profile — Indicates the last profile that you applied to the generator, if
appropriate. This information is read-only.
Last applied typical schematic — Indicates the last typical schematic that you applied to the
generator, if appropriate. This information is read-only.
Last applied lookup table — Indicates the last lookup table that you applied to the generator, if
appropriate. This information is read-only.
Design type — Allows you to select a standard that specifies the construction of the
generator. You can define and customize design types in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Mounting — Allows you to select a standard type of mounting as specified by the vendor for the
type of the generator. You can define and customize mountings in the Data Dictionary
Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1044

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Governor type — Allows you to select the type of governor used to control the generator
speed; for example, Steam turbine, Gas turbine, Digital. The software uses this description in
filters and reports. You can define and customize governor types in the Data Dictionary
Manager.
Frame size — Provides a list of US standard values that define the physical and mechanical
properties and dimensions of the generator. You can define and customize frame sizes in the
Data Dictionary Manager.
Notes — Allows you to enter text, for example, if you want to provide additional information
about the generator.

Electrical Data Tab (Generator Common Properties Dialog Bo x)

Provides information about the load properties based on the output power requirements.
Rated apparent power — Shows the quantity of electrical power in kVA that represents the
vector sum of the active and reactive power.
Power factor — Enter the ratio of active power to apparent power at 100% of the rated power
and at the demand point. The power factor can have a value between 0 and 1.
Rated active power — Shows the maximum quantity of electrical power in kW that the
generator needs to supply to the network.
Supply — Select the type of supply that the generator produces: alternating current (AC) or
direct current (DC).
Number of phases — Select the number of phases in the generator output. You can select 1
or 3 phases. This property applies for an AC supply only.
Frequency (Hz) — Select the operating frequency of the generator. You can define and
customize the available frequencies in the Data Dictionary Manager. This property applies for
an AC output only.
Rated voltage — Select the voltage which the generator is designed to supply. This quantity
usually appears on the generator nameplate. You can define and customize the available rated
voltages in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Efficiency — Enter the ratio of power output to power input under the conditions of 50%, 75%,
and 100% of the rated power. The efficiency can have a value between 0 and 1.
Neutral Earthing — Allows you to select a child power cable or busway to create a neutral
earthing connection branch under the current generator in the Electrical Engineer. In an SLD,
the software will create an independent branch connected to a non-power connection point of
the generator. For more information, see Define a Neutral Earthing Connection for Generators
(on page 113).
Number of poles — Select the number of poles for the generator. For example, you can select
2 or 4 poles. You can define and customize the available number of poles in the Data
Dictionary Manager.
Synchronous speed — Displays the maximum theoretical rate of rotation of a machine shaft, in
revolutions per minute (rpm), assuming no energy losses due to the magnetic field, pole
architecture, and so forth.
Override FLA calculation — Select the required option to determine whether the software uses
a calculated or manually typed full load current value. If you select Calculated, the software
calculates the full load current value based on values you enter on this tab; the calculated value

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1045

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

overwrites any value that you previously entered manually. Selecting Manual enables data
entry in the Full load current box, with the last calculated full load current as the starting value.
Full load current (FLA) — The electrical current, in amperes, that the generator supplies when
operating at maximum power. The full load current usually appears on the nameplate of the
generator. You can select Calculated or Manual from the Override FLA calculation list to
determine whether the software calculates this value or whether you enter a value manually.
Control mode — Allows you to select the generator control mode that determines how the
generator behaves under different load conditions; for example, Isochronous, Droop,
Isochronous/Droop. The software uses this description in filters and reports. You can define
and customize control modes in the Data Dictionary Manager.

Controls and Signals Tab (Generator Common Properties

Dialog Box)
Provides optional information for control stations that control the generator operation, and
controls and signals for the generator.

Associated control stations

Displays a list of control stations associated with the generator. This information is read-only
and appears if you associated a control station with the generator from the Control Station
Common Properties dialog box.
Item Tag — Displays the control station tag for the associated control station.
Type — Displays the reference control station when you create the associated plant control
station by copying a reference control station from the Reference Data Explorer. For a control
station that you created in the Electrical Index, no value appears in this column.

Associated I/O signals

Describes all the I/O signals that are associated with the item where the signals need monitoring
or operation at the PLC / DCS.
Item Tag — Displays the signal tag for the associated I/O signal.
Equipment Type — Displays the equipment type of the item that the signal originates from,
which can be the generator, an associated circuit, or a control station.
Description — Displays a description of the associated I/O signal.
I/O Type — Displays the signal I/O type according to whether the signal is an input or an output,
and whether the signal type is analog or digital.
Loop Number — Displays the loop number, if one exists, for signal data that you retrieved from
Smart Instrumentation.
Last applied typical I/O set — Indicates the last typical I/O set of signals that you applied to the
generator, if appropriate. This information is read-only and appears only if you apply a typical
I/O set by dragging it from the Reference Data Explorer or by applying options to the
generator.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1046

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Instruments Tab (Generator Common Properties Dialog Box)

Displays instruments that monitor and control the operation of the generator.

Associated instruments
Displays a list of instruments associated with the generator. This information is read-only and
appears if you associated an instrument with the generator from the Instrument Properties
dialog box on the Associated Equipment tab.
Item Tag — Displays the tag for the associated instrument.
Instrument Type — Displays the reference instrument when you create the associated plant
instrument by copying an instrument from the Reference Data Explorer. For an instrument
that you created in the Electrical Index, no value appears in this column.
Description — Displays a description of the associated instrument.
I/O Type — Displays the system I/O type for the instrument according to whether the signal is
an input or an output, and whether the signal type is analog or digital. This value appears if you
defined a system I/O type on the Instrument Properties dialog box.

Instrument Common Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for defining the general properties of instruments. Also, this dialog box defines
properties that the software uses for calculating electrical loads and associating the instrument
with the electrical supply.
General Tab (see "General Tab (Instrument Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1048)
Electrical Data Tab (see "Electrical Data Tab (Instrument Common Properties Dialog Box)" on
page 1049)
Associated Items Tab (see "Associated Items Tab (Instrument Common Properties Dialog Box)"
on page 1050)
Instrument Data Tab (see "Instrument Data Tab (Instrument Common Properties Dialog Box)"
on page 1051)
Feeder Data Tab (see "Feeder Data Tab (Instrument Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page
1052)
Alternative Feeder Tab (see "Alternative Feeder Tab (Instrument Common Properties Dialog
Box)" on page 1053)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1047

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

General Tab (Instrument Common Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for general properties that identify and characterize an instrument. An asterisk
beside a property name indicates required data.
Item tag — Identifies the instrument. The tag is the name that appears beside the instrument in
the Electrical Index or the Reference Data Explorer. In the Reference Data Explorer, you
must enter a string in this box. In the Electrical Index, the item tag matches the naming
convention for the instrument. Click the ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can
modify the item tag segments that are editable.
The tag property Comply with Naming Convention determines the behavior of an
item tag name. When the property is set to True, the protection masks and segment properties
behave according to the settings for the item naming convention in the Options Manager. When
the property is set to False, you can edit the tag name value freely. Whether you set this
property to True or False, the software ensures compliance with uniqueness if you set the Is
Unique parameter to True in the Item Type Properties option of the Options Manager.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the instrument, for information only.
Manufacturer — Allows you to select a manufacturer for the instrument. You can define and
customize manufacturers in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Model — Allows you to select an instrument model. The available models are specific to the
manufacturer. You can select a model without selecting a manufacturer. The software then
selects the appropriate manufacturer automatically according to the selected model. You can
define and customize models in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Item status — Allows you to select an appropriate status of the equipment indicating whether
the item is active or deleted.
Type — Allows you to select an instrument type such as I/P TRANSDUCER or D/P TYPE
FLOW TRANSMITTER. The available instrument types depend on the selected process
function. The software uses this value in filters and reports and when specifying data for import
or export.
Process function — Allows you to select a process function such as flow, level, relief valve,
and so forth.
Criticality — Allows you to select the required instrument criticality, which is used for classifying
instruments for maintenance purposes. The software uses this value in filters and reports and
when specifying data for import or export.
System I/O type — Allows you to select an instrument system I/O type such as AO (analog
output) or PI (pulse input).
Reference loop number — Allows you to type the number of a control loop to which the
instrument belongs, if appropriate.
Last applied typical I/O set — Indicates the last typical I/O set of signals that you applied to the
instrument, if appropriate. This information is read-only and appears only if you apply a typical
I/O set by dragging it from the Reference Data Explorer to the instrument.
Notes — Allows you to enter text, for example, if you want to provide additional information
about the instrument.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1048

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Electrical Data Tab (Instrument Common Properties Dialog Box)

Provides information about instrument properties and properties of the equipment associated
with the instrument.
Supply — Select the type of supply that the instrument requires: alternating current (AC) or
direct current (DC).
Number of phases — Select the number of phases for the instrument. You can select 1 or 3
phases. This property applies for an AC supply only.
Frequency (Hz) — Select the operating frequency of the instrument. You can define and
customize the available frequencies in the Data Dictionary Manager. This property applies for
an AC output only.
Instrument rated power — Allows you to enter the power requirement for the instrument.
Power factor — Enter the ratio of active power to apparent power at 100% of the rated power
and at the demand point for the associated equipment. The power factor can have a value
between 0 and 1.
Rated voltage — Select the voltage at which the instrument is designed to operate. This
quantity usually appears on the instrument nameplate. You can define and customize the
available rated voltages in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Rated active power — Shows the quantity of electrical power in kW drawn from the network
and supplied to the associated equipment that is actually converted to output power.
Rated reactive power — Shows the quantity of reactive power in kVAR that the associated
equipment draws from the network.
Rated apparent power — Shows the quantity of electrical power in kVA that represents the
vector sum of the active and reactive power. This quantity is the actual power that the network
needs to generate for the associated equipment.
Override FLA calculation — Select the required option to determine whether the software uses
a calculated or manually typed full load current value. If you select Calculated, the software
calculates the full load current value based on values you enter on this tab; the calculated value
overwrites any value that you previously entered manually. Selecting Manual enables data
entry in the Full load current box, with the last calculated full load current as the starting value.
Full load current (FLA) — The electrical current, in amperes, that the instrument measures for
the associated equipment when operating at maximum power. You can select Calculated or
Manual from the Override FLA calculation list to determine whether the software calculates
this value or whether you enter a value manually. When the associated equipment has an
attached cable, the software copies this value to the cable and uses it as a default value for
sizing the cable.
Starting current — The electrical current, in amperes, that the instrument measures for the
associated equipment when starting. When the instrument has an attached cable, the software
copies this value to the cable and uses it as a default value for sizing the cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1049

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Coincidence factors
Allows you to enter values corresponding to the percentage utilization of the associated
equipment for the selected operating mode. Also known as duty factors. Type a value
between 0 and 1 for the required mode. A value of 0 corresponds to an unused load, while a
value of 1 corresponds to continuous operation.
Operating mode - Select the operating mode that describes how the associated equipment is
used in practice in the plant. The standard available operating modes are:
Continuous
Intermittent
▪ Standby
▪ Spare
The coincidence factor corresponding to the selected operating mode provides a
quantitative measure of the associated equipment behavior in that mode. You can customize
the available operating modes in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Associated Items Tab (Instrument Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Provides information for the equipment and cables that are associated with the instrument.
Associated equipment — Displays the item of electrical equipment associated with the
instrument.
You can associate one electrical item only per instrument.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box, which allows you to select an electrical item to associate
with the instrument.
Clear — Allows you to clear the electrical item association to the instrument.

Associated cables
Displays the plant cables that the software associates with the instrument.
(Data window) — Describes the names and cable specifications of the associated cables.
Add — Opens the Find dialog box, which allows you to select control, grounding, or
instrumentation cables to associate with the instrument.
You can associate more than one cable per instrument.
Remove — Removes the selected associated cable from the instrument.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1050

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Instrument Data Tab (Instrument Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Displays instrument data including switching properties and measurement ranges.
Output type — The output types provides an indication of how the instrument output behaves in
response to the input. Output can be linear or square root, for example. The value you select
is informative only and does not affect any other data values. You can define and customize
output types in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Switch action — Where the instrument includes a mechanical or an electronic switch, select an
option that describes how the switch behaves, for example, Energize to trip, Open on failure,
and so forth.
Solenoid supply — Where the instrument includes a solenoid, select the type of supply to the
solenoid: alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC).
Solenoid voltage — Where the instrument includes a solenoid, select the voltage at which the
solenoid is designed to operate. You can define and customize the available rated voltages in
the Data Dictionary Manager.
Solenoid action — Where the instrument includes a solenoid, select an option that describes
how the solenoid behaves, for example, Energize to trip, Open on failure, and so forth.
Set point 1 value — Allows you to type a value for a set point (input) at which the instrument
alarms or trips, if required, and select the appropriate units from the list.
Set point 2 value — Allows you to type a value for a second set point (input) at which the
instrument alarms or trips, if required, and select the appropriate units from the list.
Set point 3 value — Allows you to type a value for a third set point (input) at which the
instrument alarms or trips, if required, and select the appropriate units from the list.
Set point 4 value — Allows you to type a value for a fourth set point (input) at which the
instrument alarms or trips, if required, and select the appropriate units from the list.
Lower range value — Allows you to type a value for the lowest input that the instrument can
accept and select the appropriate units from the list.
Higher range value — Allows you to type a value for the highest input that the instrument can
accept and select the appropriate units from the list.
Minimum output value — Allows you to type a value for the lowest output that the instrument is
required to produce and select the appropriate units from the list.
Maximum output value — Allows you to type a value for the highest output that the instrument
is required to produce and select the appropriate units from the list.
Display scale minimum — Allows you to type a value for the minimum value that normally
appears on the instrument display and select the appropriate units from the list. This is usually
important for analog displays.
Display scale maximum — Allows you to type a value for the maximum value that normally
appears on the instrument display and select the appropriate units from the list.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1051

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Feeder Data Tab (Instrument Common Properties Dialo g Box)

Provides information about the feeder and details of associated protection devices such as
fuses, circuit breakers, overload relays, and so forth in instruments that belong to your
plant. The values on this tab reflect the definitions that you make in the Electrical Engineer.
Once you associate the equipment with a circuit, the feeder data becomes
read-only. Further changes are possible only through the Electrical Engineer. For more
information, see Associate Electrical Equipment with Feeders (on page 231).

Location
Enables you to specify the location of the instrument feeder. Also, you can specify these
settings by performing associations in the Electrical Engineer.
Power distribution board — Allows you to specify and display the power distribution board in
which the feeder is located. If you select a PDB without specifying a bus, the software assigns
the PDB to the instrument, but you can change feeder data values later if you need to.
Bus — Allows you to specify and display the bus to which the instrument is assigned. The
values in this list depend on the selected power distribution board. If you select a bus without
specifying a circuit, the software assigns the bus to the instrument, but you can change feeder
data values later if you need to.
Cell — Allows you to specify and display a cell/bucket/ compartment to which the instrument is
assigned. The values in this list depend on the selected bus.
Circuit — Allows you to specify and display the circuit to which the instrument is assigned. If
the circuit resides in a particular cell, the values in this list depend on the selected cell. If the
circuit is linked directly to the bus, and is not linked to a cell, the values in the list depend on the
selected bus.
If you select a cell without selecting an existing circuit, the software automatically
creates a new circuit when you click Apply.
Create circuit — Select to create a new feeder circuit in the bus to which the instrument is
assigned when you click Apply. The software automatically assigns the circuit name. When
you select this check box, the Create cell check box becomes active. Also, with the new circuit,
if you have specified a typical circuit for the instrument, the software assigns circuit components
based on that typical circuit.
If you do not select this check box, then unless you select a cell, the software does
not create a circuit and the instrument-bus association does not appear in the Electrical
Engineer. In this case, you can select the check box the next time you select this tab folder to
actually create the circuit.
Create cell — Select to create a new cell in the bus to which the instrument is assigned. The
software automatically assigns the cell name.
Phase 1 — Allows you to associate the current instrument with phase 1 of the selected
bus. The availability of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of
phases list on the Electrical Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC
supply. Phase 1 refers to the label L1 or R, as defined by the value of the Phase Label1 bus
property.
Phase 2 — Allows you to associate the current instrument with phase 2 of the selected
bus. The availability of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1052

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

phases list on the Electrical Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC
supply. Phase 2 refers to the label L2 or S, as defined by the value of the Phase Label2 bus
property.
Phase 3 — Allows you to associate the current instrument with phase 3 of the selected
bus. The availability of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of
phases list on the Electrical Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC
supply. Phase 3 refers to the label L3 or T, as defined by the value of the Phase Label3 bus
property.
If you want a single-phase load to simulate a two-phase load that is
connected to a three-phase bus, select two of the Phase check boxes to assign the
instrument to two phases.
Details of circuit internals — Displays details of the components in the selected circuit. The
values are read-only.
To update the circuit components, you need to modify the selected circuit in the
Electrical Index. For more information, refer to Related Topics.
Component Type — Displays the type of component in the circuit, such as a circuit breaker or
a fuse.
Component Tag — Displays the component identifying tag, as shown in the Electrical Index.
Order — Determines the position of the component in relation to the bus when the circuit
contains more than one component. The greater the value, the further the component is from
the bus.
Show in SLD — Indicates whether the software shows a graphical representation of the
component when you generate a single line diagram for the PDB.

Alternative Feeder Tab (Instrument Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Displays the location of an alternative feeder, if defined, in instruments that belong to your
plant. You specify these settings by performing associations in the Electrical Engineer. All
properties on this tab are view-only.

Location
Power distribution board - Displays the power distribution board in which the feeder is located.
Bus — Displays the bus belonging to the power distribution board.
Cell — Displays a cell/bucket/ compartment to which the instrument is assigned, if defined.
Circuit — Displays the circuit to which the instrument is assigned.
Feeder equipment — Displays the item used as the alternative supply (generator, battery bank,
off-site power and so forth).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1053

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Item Tag Dialog Box

The item tag dialog box appears whenever you create or duplicate an item in the Reference
Data Explorer or Electrical Index or whenever you duplicate an item.
In Common Properties dialog boxes, the Item Tag dialog box opens when you click the ellipsis
button beside the Item tag text box.
Item tag — Allows you to type text for the item tag, which can either be free text or a mask that
fits the item naming convention according to whether you invoke the use of the naming
convention for the item type. You define and activate the naming convention for the item type in
Options Manager.

Manage Operating Cases Dialog Box

You use this dialog box to enter or edit property values of individual electrical equipment items
and buses for relevant operating cases.
To access this dialog box, click the Manage Operating Cases command button on the
Common Properties of the relevant electrical equipment item. For a bus, click the Manage
Operating Cases command button on the Bus Load Association dialog box.
Operating Case — Displays the name of the operating case as it was defined in Options
Manager. The active case always appears at the top of the list.
Item Tag Properties — The columns that appear to the right of the Operating Case column
display the values of the relevant properties for the current item tag. Plant items belonging to
different item types have different properties in this grid. You can click in a cell and type a value
as needed. Also, you can copy and paste values using the Copy and Paste commands.
If you type in a value that does not comply with the format for the current
property, an error message is displayed.
Apply — Saves the values shown in the grid.

▪ When creating a plant item in the Electrical Index, and if the plant item properties that are
included in the Manage Operating Cases dialog box have default values, these values are
set in all the existing operating cases of the current plant. Note that default values are set in
the Data Dictionary Manager or the Project Wide Parameters in Options Manager.
▪ When creating a plant item in the Electrical Index by dragging an item from the Reference
Data Explorer and if the reference item has properties that are included in the Manage
Operating Cases dialog box, the values that appear in those properties are copied only to
the active case of the current plant. All other cases in the plant will contain default values if
they exist. If no default values have been set for those properties, all the other operating
cases will not contain any values for those properties.
▪ When calculating load totals for buses and circuits, the software stores the name of the plant
operating case that was used during the latest calculation. The name of this operating case
is displayed at the top of the Properties window just above the toolbar and on the Batch
Load Association dialog box. Note that the Last Calculated Case Name and Last
Calculated Case Description properties are available when defining EDE layouts and
relevant reports.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1054

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Metering Equipment Common Properties Dialog Box

Enables you to specify general and electrical data for equipment used to measure electrical
parameters.
General Tab (see "General Tab (Metering Equipment Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page
1055)
Ranges Tab (see "Ranges Tab (Metering Equipment Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page
1056)
Functions Tab (see "Functions Tab (Metering Equipment Common Properties Dialog Box)" on
page 1058)

General Tab (Metering Equipment Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Sets options for general properties that identify and characterize the metering equipment. An
asterisk beside a property name indicates required data.
Item tag — Identifies the metering equipment. The tag is the name that appears beside the
metering equipment in the Electrical Index. The item tag matches the naming convention for
the metering equipment. Click the ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can
modify the item tag segments that are editable.
The tag property Comply with Naming Convention determines the behavior of an
item tag name. When the property is set to True, the protection masks and segment properties
behave according to the settings for the item naming convention in the Options Manager. When
the property is set to False, you can edit the tag name value freely. Whether you set this
property to True or False, the software ensures compliance with uniqueness if you set the Is
Unique parameter to True in the Item Type Properties option of the Options Manager.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the metering equipment, for information only.
Manufacturer — Allows you to select a manufacturer for the metering equipment. You can
define and customize manufacturers in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Model — Allows you to select a metering equipment model. The available models are specific
to the manufacturer. You can select a model without selecting a manufacturer. The software
then selects the appropriate manufacturer automatically according to the selected model. You
can define and customize models in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Type — Displays the type of metering equipment, such as Potential Transformer, Ammeter,
or Multimeter. The metering equipment type determines the electrical properties that appear
on this dialog box. This value is read-only.
Item status — Allows you to select an appropriate status of the equipment indicating whether
the item is active or deleted.
Design type — Allows you to select a standard that specifies the construction of the metering
equipment. You can define and customize design types in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Mounting — Allows you to select a standard type of mounting as specified by the vendor for the
metering equipment. You can define and customize mountings in the Data Dictionary Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1055

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Primary rating — Enter the voltage applied on the primary winding. Applies to current
transformers and potential transformers only.
Secondary rating — Enter the voltage output on the secondary winding. Applies to current
transformers and potential transformers only.
Ratio — The calculated ratio of the primary rating to the secondary rating. Applies to current
transformers and potential transformers only.
Connection type — Allows you to specify whether a potential transformer is used to measure
voltages between two lines or between one line and ground.
Operating voltage — Select a nominal operating voltage for a voltmeter.
Operating current — Enter a nominal operating current for an ammeter, including units. Note
that the software does not validate this value against the minimum and maximum meter ranges.
Minimum meter range — Enter the minimum voltage or current that the meter is designed to
measure, including units. Applies to ammeters and voltmeters only.
Maximum meter range — Enter the maximum voltage or current that the meter is designed to
measure, including units. Applies to ammeters and voltmeters only.
Notes — Allows you to enter text, for example, if you want to provide additional information
about the metering equipment.

Ranges Tab (Metering Equipment Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Allows you to set nominal operating values and ranges for specified properties of a multimeter.

Current
Select if using the meter to measure current values.
Operating current — Allows you to enter a nominal operating current for the meter, including
units. Note that the software does not validate this value against the minimum and maximum
meter ranges.
Minimum meter range — Allows you to enter the minimum current that the meter is designed
to measure, including units.
Maximum meter range — Allows you to enter the maximum current that the meter is designed
to measure, including units.

Voltage
Select if using the meter to measure voltage values.
Operating voltage — Allows you to select a nominal operating voltage for the meter.
Minimum meter range — Allows you to enter the minimum voltage that the meter is designed
to measure, including units.
Maximum meter range — Allows you to enter the maximum voltage that the meter is designed
to measure, including units.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1056

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Active power
Select if using the meter to measure active power values.
Operating power — Allows you to enter a nominal operating value of active power for the
meter, including units. Note that the software does not validate this value against the minimum
and maximum meter ranges.
Minimum meter range — Allows you to enter the minimum active power that the meter is
designed to measure, including units.
Maximum meter range — Allows you to enter the maximum active power that the meter is
designed to measure, including units.

Reactive power
Select if using the meter to measure reactive power values.
Operating power — Allows you to enter a nominal operating value of reactive power for the
meter, including units. Note that the software does not validate this value against the minimum
and maximum meter ranges.
Minimum meter range — Allows you to enter the minimum reactive power that the meter is
designed to measure, including units.
Maximum meter range — Allows you to enter the maximum reactive power that the meter is
designed to measure, including units.

Frequency
Select if using the meter to measure frequency values.
Operating frequency — Allows you to select a nominal operating frequency for the meter.
Minimum meter range — Allows you to enter the minimum frequency that the meter is
designed to measure, including units.
Maximum meter range — Allows you to enter the maximum frequency that the meter is
designed to measure, including units.

Power factor
Select if using the meter to measure power factor values.
Operating PF — Allows you to type a nominal operating power factor value for the meter.
Minimum meter range — Allows you to type the minimum power factor that the meter is
designed to measure.
Maximum meter range — Allows you to type the maximum power factor that the meter is
designed to measure.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1057

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Functions Tab (Metering Equipment Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Allows you to specify functions for a protection relay. This tab is disabled for other types of
metering equipment.
Functions
Displays the relay functions according to the data based on the reference function that you
select with default or modified values as specified under Function details. You can sort the
data according to column names by clicking a column header.
To maintain a particular sequence of relay functions that you require, add a
user-defined field that can hold sequence numbers and then click the header of that column
to sort the data.
Add — Adds another row and opens the Find dialog box which allows you to select a reference
function as a basis for the relay function you define.
Remove — Removes the currently selected function.

Function details
After you select a reference function, this section allows you to modify the values. The software
retains any values that you modify for the specific protection relay.
Item Tag — Displays the item tag of the reference item you selected on the Find dialog box.
You can click and type another item type name as needed.
Type — Select a function type from the list of available function types.
Code — Type a relay function code value if you require.
Setting (%) — Allows you to specify a value representing the percentage of the entire
measurement range at which the relay action takes place.
Setting — Allows you to specify the absolute value of the measurement at which the relay
action takes place.
Relay action — Select the action for the relay to perform at the specified setting value.
Time To Trip — Allows you to specify an appropriate time to trip value.
Status — Select an appropriate item tag status from the list.
In Data Dictionary, you can add user-defined properties for your protection relay
functions. For details, see the Data Dictionary documentation.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1058

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Other Electrical Equipment Common Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for defining the general properties of an item of equipment such as a lighting fixture
or a socket outlet. Also, this dialog box defines properties that the software uses for calculating
electrical loads and associating the item with the electrical supply.
General Tab
Load Data Tab (see "Load Data Tab (Other Electrical Equipment Common Properties Dialog
Box)" on page 1061)
Electrical Data Tab (see "Electrical Data Tab (Other Electrical Equipment Common Properties
Dialog Box)" on page 1062)
Controls and Signals Tab (see "Controls and Signals Tab (Other Electrical Equipment Common
Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1063)
Instruments Tab (see "Instruments Tab (Other Electrical Equipment Common Properties Dialog
Box)" on page 1064)
Feeder Data Tab (see "Feeder Data Tab (Other Electrical Equipment Common Properties
Dialog Box)" on page 1064)
Alternative Feeder Tab (see "Alternative Feeder Tab (Other Electrical Equipment Common
Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1066)

General Tab (Other Electrical Equipment Common Properties

Dialog Box)
Sets options for general properties that identify and characterize the load. An asterisk beside a
property name indicates required data.
Consumer — Allows you to define the current electrical item as a consumer. This means that
the software will include this item in load summary calculations, batch load associations, and all
feeder summary reports. The software uses the electrical power values that you enter for this
item on the Electrical Data tab. Also, you can use this property for filtering items that you want
to appear in the EDE or in reports. The software does not select this check box by default for
converting equipment.
Also, for junction boxes and local panels, selecting this check box instructs the software to
include the current junction board or local panel in single line diagrams generated for power
distribution boards.
Item tag — Identifies the load. The tag is the name that appears beside the load in the
Electrical Index or the Reference Data Explorer. In the Reference Data Explorer, you must
enter a string in this box. In the Electrical Index, the tag matches the naming convention for
the load. Click the ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can modify the item tag
segments that are editable.
The tag property Comply with Naming Convention determines the behavior of an
item tag name. When the property is set to True, the protection masks and segment properties
behave according to the settings for the item naming convention in the Options Manager. When
the property is set to False, you can edit the tag name value freely. Whether you set this
property to True or False, the software ensures compliance with uniqueness if you set the Is
Unique parameter to True in the Item Type Properties option of the Options Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1059

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Description — Allows you to type a description of the load, for information only.
Manufacturer — Allows you to select a manufacturer for the load. You can define and
customize manufacturers in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Model — Allows you to select a load model. The available models are specific to the
manufacturer. You can select a model without selecting a manufacturer. The software then
selects the appropriate manufacturer automatically according to the selected model. You can
define and customize models in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Process equipment — Allows you to enter a description of the equipment that the load affects.
Item status — Allows you to select an appropriate status of the equipment indicating whether
the item is active or deleted.
Type — Allows you to select one of the following electrical equipment sub-classes: Lighting
Fixture, Socket Outlet, Welding Outlet, or Special Electrical Equipment. When you select a
value, the software moves the item to the appropriate sub-folder of the Electrical Index. The
software uses this description in filters and reports.
Last applied profile — Indicates the last profile that you applied to the load, if
appropriate. This information is read- only.
Last applied typical schematic — Indicates the last typical schematic that you applied to the
load, if appropriate. This information is read-only.
Last applied lookup table — Indicates the last lookup table that you applied to the load, if
appropriate. This information is read-only.
Design type — Allows you to select a standard that specifies the construction of the load. You
can define and customize design types in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Mounting — Allows you to select a standard type of mounting as specified by the vendor for the
type of the load or machine. You can define and customize mountings in the Data Dictionary
Manager.
Process operational requirements — Allows you to select the operational requirements of the
plant in which the load is located. The following standard system options are available:
▪ Emergency
▪ Normal plant operation
▪ Shutdown
▪ Startup
You can define additional values for this list in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Notes — Allows you to enter text, for example, if you want to provide additional information
about the load.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1060

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Load Data Tab (Other Electrical Equipment Common Properties

Dialog Box)
Provides information about the mechanical power and usage requirements of the load. You can
find many of these quantities on the load nameplate. An asterisk beside a property name
indicates required data.
Rated power — The nameplate power output of the load. You must enter a value with
appropriate units of measure for the standard that you are using. The units of measure depend
on the type of load. You can specify the default plant units of measure in the Data Dictionary
Manager.
For harmonic filters and capacitors, the rated power units are VAR, kVAR, or
mVAR.
Rated voltage — Allows you to select the voltage at which the load is designed to
operate. This quantity ensures electrical compatibility between the electrical supply and the
equipment. It usually appears on the load nameplate. You can define and customize the
available rated voltages in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Demand factor — Allows you to enter a value between 0 and 1 to represent the ratio of the load
power requirement at a specified operating point to the rated power. The demand factor
influences the consumed electrical power for the load.
The software can calculate the demand factor if you enter the required values for
rated power and absorbed power. Enter the required values and then click in the Demand
factor box to display the calculated value.
Absorbed power — Allows you to enter the minimum electrical power required to operate the
static load. If you enter a value, it cannot be greater than the value of the rated power and must
have appropriate units of measure for the standard that you are using: W, kW, MW, or hp. You
can specify the default units of measure for your plant in the Data Dictionary Manager.
The software can calculate the absorbed power if you enter the required values for
the rated power and demand factor. Enter the required values and then click in the
Absorbed power box to display the calculated value.
Supply — Allows you to select the type of supply: alternating current (AC) or direct current
(DC).
Number of phases — Allows you to select the number of phases in the power supply to the
load. You can select 1 or 3 phases. This property applies for an AC supply only.
Phase arrangement — Allows you to select the required value to determine which of the
available phases are in use for the current load, for example 2 PH + N (two phases plus
neutral). This property applies for an AC supply only.
Frequency (Hz) — Allows you to select the operating frequency of the load. This property
applies for an AC supply only. You can define and customize the available frequencies in the
Data Dictionary Manager.
Number of wires — Allows you to select the number of wires used to supply power to the load.

Coincidence factors
Allows you to enter values corresponding to the percentage utilization of the load for the
selected operating mode. Also known as duty factors. Type a value between 0 and 1 for the

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1061

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

required mode. A value of 0 corresponds to an unused load, while a value of 1 corresponds to

continuous operation.
Operating mode — Allows you to select the operating mode that describes how the load is
used in practice in the plant. The standard available operating modes are:
▪ Continuous
▪ Intermittent
▪ Standby
▪ Spare
The coincidence factor corresponding to the selected operating mode provides a
quantitative measure of the load behavior in that mode.

Power factor and efficiency

Enter the values under conditions of 100% of the rated power and at the demand point. The
software uses these values in the Load Summary Report.
Power factor — Allows you to enter the ratio of active power to apparent power at 100% of the
rated power and at the demand point. The power factor can have a value between 0 and 1.
Power factor does not apply to harmonic filters and capacitors.
Efficiency — Allows you to enter the ratio of power output to power input at 100% of the rated
power and at the demand point. The efficiency can have a value between 0 and 1.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Electrical Data Tab (Other Electrical Equipment Common

Properties Dialog Box)
Provides information about the load properties based on the output power requirements.

Electrical power
The software calculates the electrical power based on the load data. The values are all
read-only. The software can perform the calculation at two operating points:
▪ Rated — Maximum power.
▪ Consumed — Normal operation at the operating power.
Active — Shows the quantity of electrical power in kW drawn from the network and supplied to
the load that is actually converted to output power.
Reactive — Shows the quantity of reactive power in kVAR that the load draws from the network.
Apparent — Shows the quantity of electrical power in kVA that represents the vector sum of the
active and reactive power. This quantity is the actual power that the network needs to generate.
Override FLA calculation — Select the required option to determine whether the software uses
a calculated or manually typed full load current value. If you select Calculated, the software
calculates the full load current value based on values you enter on the Load Data tab; the
calculated value overwrites any value that you previously entered manually. Selecting Manual

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1062

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

enables data entry in the Full load current box, with the last calculated full load current as the
starting value.
Full load current (FLA) — The electrical current, in amperes, that the load draws from the
supply when operating at maximum power. The full load current usually appears on the
nameplate of the load. You can select Calculated or Manual from the Override FLA
calculation list to determine whether the software calculates this value or whether you enter a
value manually. When the load has an attached cable, the software copies this value to the
cable and uses it as a default value for sizing the cable.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Controls and Signals Tab (Other Electrical Equipment Common

Properties Dialog Box)
Provides optional information for control stations that control the load operation, and controls
and signals for the load.

Associated control stations

Displays a list of control stations associated with the load. This information is read-only and
appears either if you associated a control station with the load from the Control Station
Common Properties dialog box.
Item Tag — Displays the control station tag for the associated control station.
Type — Displays the reference control station when you create the associated plant control
station by copying a reference control station from the Reference Data Explorer. For a control
station that you created in the Electrical Index, no value appears in this column.

Associated I/O signals

Describes all the I/O signals that are associated with the item where the signals need monitoring
or operation at the PLC / DCS.
Item Tag — Displays the signal tag for the associated I/O signal.
Equipment Type — Displays the equipment type of the item that the signal originates from,
which can be the electrical equipment, an associated circuit, or a control station.
Description — Displays a description of the associated I/O signal.
I/O Type — Displays the signal I/O type according to whether the signal is an input or an output,
and whether the signal type is analog or digital.
Loop Number — Displays the loop number, if one exists, for signal data that you retrieved from
Smart Instrumentation.
Last applied typical I/O set — Indicates the last typical I/O set of signals that you applied to the
load, if appropriate. This information is read-only and appears only if you apply a typical I/O set
by dragging it from the Reference Data Explorer or by applying options to the load.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1063

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Instruments Tab (Other Electrical Equipment Common

Properties Dialog Box)
Displays instruments that monitor and control the operation of the equipment.

Associated instruments
Displays a list of instruments associated with the equipment. This information is read-only and
appears if you associated an instrument with the equipment from the Instrument Properties
dialog box on the Associated Equipment tab.
Item Tag — Displays the tag for the associated instrument.
Instrument Type — Displays the reference instrument when you create the associated plant
instrument by copying an instrument from the Reference Data Explorer. For an instrument
that you created in the Electrical Index, no value appears in this column.
Description — Displays a description of the associated instrument.
I/O Type — Displays the system I/O type for the instrument according to whether the signal is
an input or an output, and whether the signal type is analog or digital. This value appears if you
defined a system I/O type on the Instrument Properties dialog box.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Feeder Data Tab (Other Electrical Equipment Common

Properties Dialog Box)
Provides information about the feeder and details of associated protection devices such as
fuses, circuit breakers, overload relays, and so forth in loads that belong to your plant. The
values on this tab reflect the definitions that you make in the Electrical Engineer.
Once you associate the equipment with a circuit, the feeder data becomes
read-only. Further changes are possible only through the Electrical Engineer. For more
information, see Associate Electrical Equipment with Feeders (on page 231).

Location
Enables you to specify the location of the load feeder. Also, you can specify these settings by
performing associations in the Electrical Engineer.

▪ The data in the Location group box (power distribution board, bus, cell, circuit, and
details of circuit internals) is shown regardless of whether the load is fed directly from a
circuit or via several other equipment items.
▪ Where the feeder source is an item of equipment other than a PDB, the source tag
appears in the Feeder equipment box and all the properties in this section are
disabled.
Power distribution board — Allows you to specify and display the power distribution board in
which the feeder is located. If you select a PDB without specifying a bus, the software assigns
the PDB to the load, but you can change feeder data values later if you need to.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1064

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Bus — Allows you to specify and display the bus to which the load is assigned. The values in
this list depend on the selected power distribution board. If you select a bus without specifying
a circuit, the software assigns the bus to the load, but you can change feeder data values later if
you need to.
Cell — Allows you to specify and display a cell/bucket/ compartment to which the load is
assigned. The values in this list depend on the selected bus.
Circuit — Allows you to specify and display the circuit to which the load is assigned. If the
circuit resides in a particular cell, the values in this list depend on the selected cell. If the circuit
is linked directly to the bus, and is not linked to a cell, the values in the list depend on the
selected bus.
If you select a cell without selecting an existing circuit, the software automatically
creates a new circuit when you click Apply.
Create circuit — Allows you to create a new feeder circuit in the bus to which the load is
assigned when you click Apply. The software automatically assigns the circuit name. When
you select this check box, the Create cell check box becomes active. Also, with the new circuit,
if you have specified a typical circuit for the load, the software assigns circuit components based
on that typical circuit.
If you do not select this check box, then unless you select a cell, the software does
not create a circuit and the load-bus association does not appear in the Electrical Engineer. In
this case, you can select the check box the next time you select this tab folder to actually create
the circuit.
Create cell — Allows you to create a new cell in the bus to which the load is assigned. The
software automatically assigns the cell name.
Phase 1 — Allows you to associate the current load with phase 1 of the selected bus. The
availability of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of phases list on
the Load Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC supply. Phase 1 refers
to the label L1 or R, as defined by the value of the Phase Label1 bus property.
Phase 2 — Allows you to associate the current load with phase 2 of the selected bus. The
availability of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of phases list on
the Load Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC supply. Phase 2 refers
to the label L2 or S, as defined by the value of the Phase Label2 bus property.
Phase 3 — Allows you to associate the current load with phase 3 of the selected bus. The
availability of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of phases list on
the Load Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC supply. Phase 3 refers
to the label L3 or T, as defined by the value of the Phase Label3 bus property.
If you want a single-phase load to simulate a two-phase load that is
connected to a three-phase bus, select two of the Phase check boxes.
Details of circuit internals — Displays details of the components in the selected circuit. The
values are read-only.
To update the circuit components, you need to modify the selected circuit in the
Electrical Index. For more information, refer to Related Topics.
Component Type — Displays the type of component in the circuit, such as a circuit breaker or
a fuse.
Component Tag — Displays the component identifying tag, as shown in the Electrical Index.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1065

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Order — Determines the position of the component in relation to the bus when the circuit
contains more than one component. The greater the value, the further the component is from
the bus.
Show in SLD — Indicates whether the software shows a graphical representation of the
component when you generate a single line diagram for the PDB.

Feeder equipment
Where equipment other than a PDB circuit feeds the load, the software displays the item tag of
the feeding equipment in this box. For example, if a transformer feeds the load, the transformer
tag is displayed.
Where a feeder equipment tag appears, the properties under the Location section
are disabled. Likewise, where the feeder source is a PDB, the source data appears under the
Location section and this property is disabled.

Last applied typical circuit

Indicates the last typical circuit that you applied to the load, if appropriate.
Tag — Displays the tag of the last applied typical circuit.
Function — Displays the function of the last applied typical circuit. For a load, this is always
Feeder.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Alternative Feeder Tab (Other Electrical Equipment Common

Properties Dialog Box)
Displays the location of an alternative load feeder, if defined, in loads that belong to your
plant. You specify these settings by performing associations in the Electrical Engineer All
properties on this tab are view-only.

Location
Power distribution board - Displays the power distribution board in which the feeder is located.
Bus — Displays the bus belonging to the power distribution board.
Cell — Displays a cell/bucket/ compartment to which the load is assigned, if defined.
Circuit — Displays the circuit to which the load is assigned.
Feeder equipment — Displays the item used as the alternative supply (generator, battery bank,
off-site power and so forth).
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1066

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Parallel Equipment Assistant Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define pairs of equipment items that can be connected in parallel.
You can then place these pairs on cable block diagrams and they will appear as connected in
parallel.
The definition of a parallel relationship between items is subject to certain
rules. For details, see Rules Governing Parallel Relations (on page 239).

To open this dialog box, click on the Actions toolbar or click Actions > Manage Parallel
Equipment.
The dialog box options are as follows:

Show parallel equipment data

Enables you to filter the data that is displayed in the Parallel equipment definition section of
the dialog box.
Show all existing parallel pairs — Shows all the existing parallel equipment items that have
been defined as pairs in the current plant.
Parallel pairs placed on the current cable block diagram only — Shows only those paired
equipment items that have been placed on the current cable block diagram.
Parallel pairs not placed on any cable block diagram — Shows only those paired equipment
items that have not been placed on any cable block diagram.

Parallel equipment definition

Enables you define equipment items as couples so that they can be connected in parallel. To
define two items as coupled or to replace one of the coupled items, select a row and then click
to find the equipment item that you require. You can then set the direction of the equipment
connection (In or Out). Note that the and list arrow appear only after selecting a row.

Item 1 — Clicking allows you to select the first equipment item in the current couple.

Item 2 — Clicking allows you to select the second equipment item in the current couple.
Direction — Allows you to select the connection direction of the equipment: In or Out. Note that
list arrow appears only after you select a particular line.

Add — Appends a new empty row to the grid, after which you can click to find an
appropriate equipment item.
Remove — Removes the selected row from the grid and after clicking Apply or OK cancels the
coupling of the items.
The software saves the changes only after you click Apply or OK.

▪ After completing the definition of the parallel pairs and opening a cable block diagram, all
the parallel pairs become available in the Parallel pairs list on the Modify Connector
ribbon. This ribbon becomes available after clicking a cable that has been placed on a cable
block diagram. For details, see Connect Equipment Items in Parallel (on page 241).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1067

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ In the Electrical Index and Electrical Engineer, a special indicator appears next to the
equipment items that are connected in parallel.
For example .

Static Load Common Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for defining the general properties of a static load such as a heater. Also, this
dialog box defines properties that the software uses for calculating electrical loads and
associating the item with the electrical supply.
General Tab
Load Data Tab (see "Load Data Tab (Static Load Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page
1070)
Electrical Data Tab (see "Electrical Data Tab (Static Load Common Properties Dialog Box)" on
page 1072)
Controls and Signals Tab (see "Controls and Signals Tab (Static Load Common Properties
Dialog Box)" on page 1073)
Instruments Tab (see "Instruments Tab (Static Load Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page
1074)
Feeder Data Tab (see "Feeder Data Tab (Static Load Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page
1074)
Alternative Feeder Tab (see "Alternative Feeder Tab (Static Load Common Properties Dialog
Box)" on page 1076)

General Tab (Static Load Common Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for general properties that identify and characterize the load. An asterisk beside a
property name indicates required data.
Consumer — You can use this property for filtering items that you want to appear in the EDE or
in reports. The software selects this check box by default when you create a new static load.
Item tag — Identifies the load. The tag is the name that appears beside the load in the
Electrical Index or the Reference Data Explorer. In the Reference Data Explorer, you must
enter a string in this box. In the Electrical Index, the item tag matches the naming convention
for the load. Click the ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can modify the item
tag segments that are editable.
The tag property Comply with Naming Convention determines the behavior of an
item tag name. When the property is set to True, the protection masks and segment properties
behave according to the settings for the item naming convention in the Options Manager. When
the property is set to False, you can edit the tag name value freely. Whether you set this
property to True or False, the software ensures compliance with uniqueness if you set the Is
Unique parameter to True in the Item Type Properties option of the Options Manager.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the load, for information only.
Manufacturer — Allows you to select a manufacturer for the load. You can define and
customize manufacturers in the Data Dictionary Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1068

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Model — Allows you to select a load model. The available models are specific to the
manufacturer. You can select a model without selecting a manufacturer. The software then
selects the appropriate manufacturer automatically according to the selected model. You can
define and customize models in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Process equipment — Allows you to enter a description of the equipment that the load
affects. If the load was retrieved from Smart P&ID and included an association with an item of
process equipment, the software fills this property with the name of the process equipment.
Item status — Allows you to select an appropriate status of the equipment indicating whether
the item is active or deleted.
Type — Displays the electrical equipment sub-class of the load, for example, heater or
harmonic filter. The value is read-only. The software uses this description in filters and reports.
Last applied profile — Indicates the last profile that you applied to the load, if
appropriate. This information is read-only.
Last applied typical schematic — Indicates the last typical schematic that you applied to the
load, if appropriate. This information is read-only.
Last applied lookup table — Indicates the last lookup table that you applied to the load, if
appropriate. This information is read-only.
Design type — Allows you to select a standard that specifies the construction of the load. You
can define and customize design types in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Mounting — Allows you to select a standard type of mounting as specified by the vendor for the
type of the load or machine. You can define and customize mountings in the Data Dictionary
Manager.
Process operational requirements — Allows you to select the operational requirements of the
plant in which the load is located. The following standard system options are available:
▪ Emergency
▪ Normal plant operation
▪ Shutdown
▪ Startup
You can define additional values for this list in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Notes — Allows you to enter text, for example, if you want to provide additional information
about the load.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1069

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Load Data Tab (Static Load Common Properties Dialog Box)

Provides information about the mechanical power and usage requirements of the load. You can
find many of these quantities on the load nameplate. An asterisk beside a property name
indicates required data.
Rated power — The nameplate power output of the load. You must enter a value with
appropriate units of measure for the standard that you are using. The units of measure depend
on the type of load. You can specify the default plant units of measure in the Data Dictionary
Manager. Note that for harmonic filters and capacitors, the rated power units are VAR, kVAR, or
mVAR.
Rated voltage — Allows you to select the voltage at which the load is designed to
operate. This quantity ensures electrical compatibility between the electrical supply and the
equipment. It usually appears on the load nameplate. You can define and customize the
available rated voltages in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Demand factor — Allows you to enter a value between 0 and 1 to represent the ratio of the load
power requirement at a specified operating point to the rated power. The demand factor
influences the consumed electrical power for the load.
The software can calculate the demand factor if you enter the required values for
rated power and absorbed power. Enter the required values and then click in the Demand
factor box to display the calculated value.
Absorbed power — Allows you to enter the minimum electrical power required to operate the
static load. If you enter a value, it cannot be greater than the value of the rated power and must
have appropriate units of measure for the standard that you are using: W, kW, MW, or hp. You
can specify the default units of measure for your plant in the Data Dictionary Manager.
The software can calculate the absorbed power if you enter the required values for
the rated power and demand factor. Enter the required values and then click in the
Absorbed power box to display the calculated value.
Supply — Allows you to select the type of supply: alternating current (AC) or direct current
(DC).
Number of wires — Allows you to select the number of wires used to supply power to the load.
Number of phases — Allows you to select the number of phases in the power supply to the
load. You can select 1 or 3 phases. This property applies for an AC supply only.
Phase arrangement — Allows you to select the required value to determine which of the
available phases are in use for the current load, for example 2 PH + N (two phases plus
neutral). This property applies for an AC supply only.
Frequency (Hz) — Allows you to select the operating frequency of the load. This property
applies for an AC supply only. You can define and customize the available frequencies in the
Data Dictionary Manager.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Coincidence factors
Allows you to enter values corresponding to the percentage utilization of the load for the
selected operating mode. Also known as duty factors. Type a value between 0 and 1 for the

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1070

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

required mode. A value of 0 corresponds to an unused load, while a value of 1 corresponds to

continuous operation.
Operating mode — Allows you to select the operating mode that describes how the load is
used in practice in the plant. The standard available operating modes are:
▪ Continuous
▪ Intermittent
▪ Standby
▪ Spare
The coincidence factor corresponding to the selected operating mode provides a
quantitative measure of the load behavior in that mode.

Neutral earthing data

(Available only for resistors.)
The values in group box relate to a resistor that is used as a neutral earthing resistor.
Resistance — Allows you to select you to select a resistance value for the current resistor.
Reactance — Allows you to select a reactance value for the current resistor.
Initial current — Allows you to select an initial current value for the current resistor.
Line to neutral voltage — Allows you to select a line to neutral voltage value for the current
resistor.
Allowable "time on" — Allows you to select an allowable "time on" value for the current
resistor.

Power factor and efficiency

Enter the values under conditions of 100% of the rated power and at the demand point. The
software uses these values in the Load Summary Report.
Power factor — Allows you to enter the ratio of active power to apparent power at 100% of the
rated power and at the demand point. The power factor can have a value between 0 and 1.
Power factor does not apply to harmonic filters and capacitors.
Efficiency — Allows you to enter the ratio of power output to power input at 100% of the rated
power and at the demand point. The efficiency can have a value between 0 and 1.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1071

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Electrical Data Tab (Static Load Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Provides information about the load properties based on the output power requirements.

Electrical power
The software calculates the electrical power based on the load data. Note that these
calculations are non-compensated. (For details about non-compensated values, see
Calculating Bus Load Summaries (on page 253).) Note that the values are all read-only.
The software can perform the calculation at two operating points:
▪ Rated — Maximum power.
▪ Consumed — Normal operation at the operating power.
Active — Shows the quantity of electrical power in kW drawn from the network and supplied to
the load that is actually converted to output power.
Reactive — Shows the quantity of reactive power in kVAR that the load draws from the network.
Apparent — Shows the quantity of electrical power in kVA that represents the vector sum of the
active and reactive power. This quantity is the actual power that the network needs to generate.
For harmonic filters and capacitors, the active power is zero, therefore the reactive
power is equivalent to the apparent power.
Override FLA calculation — Allows you to select the required option to determine whether the
software uses a calculated or manually typed full load current value. If you select Calculated,
the software calculates the full load current value based on values you enter on the Load Data
tab; the calculated value overwrites any value that you previously entered manually. Selecting
Manual enables data entry in the Full load current box, with the last calculated full load current
as the starting value.
Full load current (FLA) — The electrical current, in amperes, that the load draws from the
supply when operating at maximum power. The full load current usually appears on the
nameplate of the load. You can select Calculated or Manual from the Override FLA
calculation list to determine whether the software calculates this value or whether you enter a
value manually. When the load has an attached cable, the software copies this value to the
cable and uses it as a default value for sizing the cable.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1072

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Controls and Signals Tab (Static Load Common Properties

Dialog Box)
Provides optional information for control stations that control the load operation, as well as the
controls and signals for a load.

Associated control stations

Displays a list of control stations associated with the load. This information is read-only and
appears either if you associated a control station with the load from the Control Station
Common Properties dialog box or if you applied a profile defined in the Reference Data
Explorer.
Item Tag — Displays the control station tag for the associated control station.
Type — Displays the reference control station when you create the associated plant control
station by copying a reference control station from the Reference Data Explorer. For a control
station that you created in the Electrical Index, no value appears in this column.

Associated I/O signals

Describes all the I/O signals that are associated with the item where the signals need monitoring
or operation at the PLC / DCS.
Item Tag — Displays the signal tag for the associated I/O signal.
Equipment Type — Displays the equipment type of the item that the signal originates from,
which can be a heater, a capacitor, a harmonic filter, an associated circuit, or a control station.
Description — Displays a description of the associated I/O signal.
I/O Type — Displays the signal I/O type according to whether the signal is an input or an output,
and whether the signal type is analog or digital.
Loop Number — Displays the loop number, if one exists, for signal data that you retrieved from
Smart Instrumentation.
Last applied typical I/O set — Indicates the last typical I/O set of signals that you applied to the
load, if appropriate. This information is read-only and appears only if you apply a typical I/O set
by dragging it from the Reference Data Explorer or by applying options to the load.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1073

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Instruments Tab (Static Load Common Properties Dialog Box)

(This tab is not available for Reference Static Loads.)
Displays instruments that monitor and control the load operation.

Associated instruments
Displays a list of instruments associated with the load. This information is read-only and
appears if you associated an instrument with the load from the Instrument Properties dialog
box on the Associated Equipment tab.
Item Tag — Displays the tag for the associated instrument.
Instrument Type — Displays the reference instrument when you create the associated plant
instrument by copying an instrument from the Reference Data Explorer. For an instrument
that you created in the Electrical Index, no value appears in this column.
Description — Displays a description of the associated instrument.
I/O Type — Displays the system I/O type for the instrument according to whether the signal is
an input or an output, and whether the signal type is analog or digital. This value appears if you
defined a system I/O type on the Instrument Properties dialog box.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Feeder Data Tab (Static Load Common Properties Dialog Box)

Provides information about the feeder and details of associated protection devices such as
fuses, circuit breakers, overload relays, and so forth in loads that belong to your plant. The
values on this tab reflect the definitions that you make in the Electrical Engineer.
Once you associate the equipment with a circuit, the feeder data becomes
read-only. Further changes are possible only through the Electrical Engineer. For more
information, see Associate Electrical Equipment with Feeders (on page 231).

Location
Enables you to specify the location of the load feeder. Also, you can specify these settings by
performing associations in the Electrical Engineer.

▪ The data in the Location group box (power distribution board, bus, cell, circuit, and
details of circuit internals) is shown regardless of whether the load is fed directly from a
circuit or via several other equipment items.
▪ Where the feeder source is an item of equipment other than a PDB, the source tag
appears in the Feeder equipment box and all the properties in this section are
disabled.
Power distribution board — Allows you to specify and display the power distribution board in
which the feeder is located. If you select a PDB without specifying a bus, the software assigns
the PDB to the load, but you can change feeder data values later if you need to.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1074

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Bus — Allows you to specify and display the bus to which the load is assigned. The values in
this list depend on the selected power distribution board. If you select a bus without specifying
a circuit, the software assigns the bus to the load, but you can change feeder data values later if
you need to.
Cell — Allows you to specify and display a cell/bucket/ compartment to which the load is
assigned. The values in this list depend on the selected bus.
Circuit — Allows you to specify and display the circuit to which the load is assigned. If the
circuit resides in a particular cell, the values in this list depend on the selected cell. If the circuit
is linked directly to the bus, and is not linked to a cell, the values in the list depend on the
selected bus.
If you select a cell without selecting an existing circuit, the software automatically
creates a new circuit when you click Apply.
Create circuit — Creates a new feeder circuit in the bus to which the load is assigned when you
click Apply. The software automatically assigns the circuit name. When you select this check
box, the Create cell check box becomes active. Also, with the new circuit, if you have specified
a typical circuit for the load, the software assigns circuit components based on that typical
circuit.
If you do not select this check box, then unless you select a cell, the software
does not create a circuit and the load-bus association does not appear in the Electrical
Engineer. In this case, you can select the check box the next time you select this tab folder
to actually create the circuit.
Create cell — Creates a new cell in the bus to which the load is assigned. The software
automatically assigns the cell name.
Phase 1 — Allows you to associate the current load with phase 1 of the selected bus. The
availability of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of phases list on
the Load Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC supply. Phase 1 refers
to the label L1 or R, as defined by the value of the Phase Label1 bus property.
Phase 2 — Allows you to associate the current load with phase 2 of the selected bus. The
availability of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of phases list on
the Load Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC supply. Phase 2 refers
to the label L2 or S, as defined by the value of the Phase Label2 bus property.
Phase 3 — Allows you to associate the current load with phase 3 of the selected bus. The
availability of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of phases list on
the Load Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC supply. Phase 3 refers
to the label L3 or T, as defined by the value of the Phase Label3 bus property.
If you want a single-phase load to simulate a two-phase load that is
connected to a three-phase bus, select two of the Phase check boxes.
Details of circuit internals — Displays details of the components in the selected circuit. The
values are read-only.
To update the circuit components, you need to modify the selected circuit in the
Electrical Index. For more information, refer to Related Topics.
Component Type — Displays the type of component in the circuit, such as a circuit breaker or
a fuse.
Component Tag — Displays the component identifying tag, as shown in the Electrical Index.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1075

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Order — Determines the position of the component in relation to the bus when the circuit
contains more than one component. The greater the value, the further the component is from
the bus.
Show in SLD — Indicates whether the software shows a graphical representation of the
component when you generate a single line diagram for the PDB.

Feeder equipment
Where equipment other than a PDB circuit feeds the load, the software displays the item tag of
the feeding equipment in this box. For example, if a transformer feeds the load, the transformer
tag is displayed.
Where a feeder equipment tag appears, the properties under the Location
section are disabled. Likewise, where the feeder source is a PDB, the source data appears
under the Location section and this property is disabled.

Last applied typical circuit

Indicates the last typical circuit that you applied to the load, if appropriate.
Tag — Displays the tag of the last applied typical circuit.
Function — Displays the function of the last applied typical circuit. For a load, this is always
Feeder.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Alternative Feeder Tab (Static Load Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Displays the location of an alternative load feeder, if defined, in loads that belong to your
plant. You specify these settings by performing associations in the Electrical Engineer. All
properties on this tab are view-only.

Location
Power distribution board — Displays the power distribution board in which the feeder is
located.
Bus — Displays the bus belonging to the power distribution board.
Cell — Displays a cell/bucket/ compartment to which the load is assigned, if defined.
Circuit — Displays the circuit to which the load is assigned.
Feeder equipment — Displays the item used as the alternative supply (generator, battery bank,
off-site power and so forth).
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1076

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Transformer Connections and Tapping Dialog Box

Sets options for defining the types of connection (Delta, Wye, and so forth) and neutral
grounding for 3-phase transformers in your plant. Also allows you to specify tapping
arrangements on the primary and secondary transformer windings for transformers with all types
of feeds.
Primary Tab (see "Primary Tab (Transformer Connections and Tapping Dialog Box)" on page
1077)
Secondary 1 / Secondary 2 Tab (see "Secondary Tab (Transformer Connections and Tapping
Dialog Box)" on page 1078)

Primary Tab (Transformer Connections and Tapping Dialog

Box)
Allows you to specify values for connections and tapping on the primary transformer winding.
Tag — Identifies the transformer. The tag is the name that appears beside the item in the
Electrical Index. The tag matches the naming convention for the item. Click the ellipsis button
to open a dialog box where you can modify the tag segments that are editable.
Connection — Allows you to select the type of connection for a 3-phase input.
Neutral grounding — Allows you to specify whether to use neutral grounding. The following
standard options are available:
▪ Ungrounded — Does not require grounding.
▪ Solid grounding — Grounding is achieved by means of a cable connected directly to
ground.
▪ Impedance — Grounding is achieved by means of a cable connected to ground via a
resistor.
Grounding cable — Allows you to specify a grounding cable when the Neutral grounding
value is Solid grounding or Impedance. Click the ellipsis button to open the Find dialog
box from which you can select a suitable grounding cable. Note that for a cable to be available
for use as a grounding cable, its Neutral Earthing property must be set to True.
Grounding resistor — Allows you to specify a resistor when the Neutral grounding value is
Impedance. You can use a grounding resistor with or without a grounding cable. Click the
ellipsis button to open the Find dialog box from which you can select a suitable
resistor. You define resistors under Static Electrical Equipment in the Electrical Index. Note
that on the Find dialog box, the software retrieves all the existing resistors regardless of whether
they have or have not been associated with transformers. Make sure that you select an
appropriate resistor that has not been associated yet.

Tapping options
Tapping required — Allows you to enable the tapping options.
Tapping — Allows to select a tapping option. The options are for information only and do not
affect the ability to enter data values for the other properties in this section.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1077

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Tapping percentage per step — Allows to type the percentage of the total winding length to be
used for each step interval for tapping.
Number of steps — Allows to type the total number of tapping points required along the
winding.
Total tapping percentage range — The calculated value of the product of the tapping
percentage per step and the number of steps.

Neutral Earthing Metering Equipment

Component Type — Displays the Component Type.
Component Tag — Displays the Component Tag number.
Order — Shows the order of appearance of the metering equipment on your drawing, the lower
the number the closer to the winding.
Add — Opens the Find dialog box and lists available PT/CT whose Neutral Earthing flag is
False.
Remove — Removes the selected component.

Secondary Tab (Transformer Connections and Tapping Dialog

Box)
Allows you to specify values for connections and tapping on a secondary transformer winding.
Tag — Identifies the transformer. The tag is the name that appears beside the item in the
Electrical Index. The tag matches the naming convention for the item. Click the ellipsis button
to open a dialog box where you can modify the tag segments that are editable.
Connection — Allows you to select the type of connection for a 3-phase output.
Neutral grounding — Allows you to specify whether to use neutral grounding. The following
standard options are available:
▪ Ungrounded - Does not require grounding.
▪ Solid grounding - Grounding is achieved by means of a cable connected directly to
ground.
▪ Impedance - Grounding is achieved by means of a cable connected to ground via a
resistor.
Grounding cable — Allows you to specify a grounding cable when the Neutral grounding
value is Solid grounding or Impedance. Click the ellipsis button to open the Find dialog
box from which you can select a suitable grounding cable. Note that for a cable to be available
for use as a grounding cable, its Neutral Earthing property must be set to True.
Grounding resistor — Allows you to specify a resistor when the Neutral grounding value is
Impedance. You can use a grounding resistor with or without a grounding cable. Click the
ellipsis button to open the Find dialog box from which you can select a suitable
resistor. You define resistors under Static Electrical Equipment in the Electrical Index. Note
that on the Find dialog box, the software retrieves all the existing resistors regardless of whether
they have or have not been associated with transformers. Make sure that you select an
appropriate resistor that has not been associated yet.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1078

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Connection group — Allows you to select a connection group from the list, for example Dy11,
Yy0. Note that the software does not validate the connection group value with respect to the
values of the other connection properties that you specify.
Phase shift (degrees) — Allows you to type a value between 0 and 360 representing the phase
shift between this winding and the winding that feeds it.
Winding fed from — Allows you to select an option to specify whether the primary winding or
the other secondary winding feeds the current winding (relevant to 3-winding transformers only).
Combined phase shift (degrees) — allows you to type a value between 0 and 360
representing the phase shift between this winding and the primary winding (relevant to 3-winding
transformers only).

Tapping options
Tapping required — Allows you to select this check box to enable the tapping options.
Tapping — Allows you to select a tapping option. The options are for information only and do
not affect the ability to enter data values for the other properties in this section.
Tapping percentage per step — Allows you to type the percentage of the total winding length
to be used for each step interval for tapping.
Number of steps — Allows you to type the total number of tapping points required along the
winding.
Total tapping percentage range — The calculated value of the product of the tapping
percentage per step and the number of steps.

Neutral Earthing Metering Equipment

Component Type — Displays the Component Type.
Component Tag — Displays the Component Tag number.
Order — Shows the order of appearance of the metering equipment on your drawing, the lower
the number the closer to the winding.
Add — Opens the Find dialog box and lists available PT/CT whose Neutral Earthing flag is
False.
Remove — Removes the selected component.

Interfaces
Retrieve Document Dialog Box
Source XML folder — allows you to type the path to the source folder containing the .xml files
associated with the document that you want to retrieve or click Browse to navigate to the
required location.
Document — Allows you to select from the list the document that you want to retrieve.
OK — Retrieves the selected document and closes the dialog box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1079

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Internal Documents and Revisions

Batch Compare Documents Dialog Box
Allows you to compare data for the current versions of multiple selected documents with the last
saved revision for each document.

Save options
Save files — Saves the selected drawings as external files.
Path — Allows you to type the file path or click Browse to navigate to the folder where you want
to save the drawings. The software automatically displays the default path that you have set for
your drawings in the Options Manager.
Save as type — Allows you to select a file format for the drawings you want to save.
Print drawings — Prints out all the drawings that you are comparing.
Print comparison reports — Prints a comparison report for each selected document.

Compare Documents Dialog Box

Allows you to compare data for the current version of the selected document with the last saved
revision for that document.
Document number — Displays the document name.
Description — Displays the document description.
Revision method — Displays the revision numbering method for the current document.

Revisions
Select a revision to compare with the current version.
Archived — A check mark in this box indicates that the software archived a copy of the
pertinent document revision.
Revision Number — Displays the revision number that complies with the selected revision
method. After clicking New, the software increments the last revision by one or use the next
letter in the alphabet. Also, the software allows you to type an appropriate revision number if
you choose not to accept the displayed value.
Revision Date — The date when you made the revision.
Created by — The name or the initials of the person who made the revision.
Checked by — The name or the initials of the person who checked the revision.
Approved by — The name or the initials of the person who approved the revision.
Description — Displays a description of the revision.
View — Allows you to open a selected archived version of the document. The software opens
archived documents in view mode only.
Compare — Compares the current version of the document with the selected revision.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1080

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Document Properties Dialog Box

Enables you to enter and manage the properties of a document. You can define the document
name, select an appropriate template, and type a description. On the Revisions tab, you can
enter and manage internal document revisions. On the Associated Items tab, you can
associate items for multi-item schematics. Note that if you open this dialog box without first
opening a pertinent document, all the dialog box options are in view mode only.
Document number — Allows you to type the document name.
Document title — Allows you to type the name of the document. Note that this is a required
field which is necessary for publishing the document to SmartPlant Foundation. The software
fills this property automatically with the value displayed under Document number. You can
replace this text with another alphanumeric string as you see fit. If this property is left blank, the
current document will not be published.
Template name (available only for all composite drawings and conventional SLDs, wiring
diagrams, cable block diagrams, and PDB layout drawings) — Allows you to choose an
appropriate template for your drawing.

▪ When selecting a template for a composite drawing, make sure that you select an
Enterprise template, that is, a template that is suitable for composite drawings and
which is compatible with other applications. Selecting a conventional template for a
composite drawing will result in the inability of the software to resolve the macros in the
drawing. You can, however, select an Enterprise template for a conventional drawing.
▪ Make sure that all the templates residing in the default location for composite drawing
templates are Enterprise templates. These templates are suitable for composite
drawings and are compatible with other applications. You define the default location in
the Locations window of Options Manager.
Description — Allows you to type the document description.
Allow document publishing — Select to allow publishing of the current document.
Publishing scope for document content — Allows you to select the publishing scope of the
current document. Note that this setting overrides the setting in Options Manager. The options
for the publishing scope are as follows:
▪ Document items only — Publishes the document and all the plant items contained in
the published document.
▪ Document items and first-level relations — Publishes the document, all the plant
items contained in the document, and the first-level related items of the plant items
contained in the published document
▪ Document items and all related items — Publishes the document, all the plant items
contained in the document, and the related items of the plant items contained in the
published document
Scale factor — Available only for SLDs and PDB layout drawings:
▪ SLD drawings — Allows you to scale the content of the entire single line diagram
including all the symbols, connectors, graphics that you insert into the drawing, and all
the distances between the graphical elements in the SLD. The only part of the drawing
that is not affected by the scale factor is the title block.
The scale factor value that you enter represents the size ratio between the original size

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1081

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

of the symbols (as they were created in Catalog Manager) and their size displayed in a
generated SLD. For more details, see Scaling the Content of an SLD Drawing (on page
499).
For example, if you enter 0.5, the size ratio will be 1:2 (the displayed size becomes
smaller than the original size of the symbols). However, if you enter 2, the size ratio will
be 2:1 (the displayed size becomes bigger than the original size of the symbols).
▪ PDB layouts — The scale factor value that you to enter represents the size ratio
between the physical size of the PDB and its representation in the drawing. You can
only enter a whole number without a fraction. For example, if you enter 17, the size ratio
will be 1:17 (the drawing representation will be 17 times smaller than the actual size of
the PDB).

For multi-tag schematics only:

Multi-tag typical schematic — Allows you to select a multi-tag typical schematic when you first
create a multi-tag schematic document. A multi-tag schematic is one that includes in its
definitions multi-tag blocks with header and list macros used to display the tag data. Once you
associate items with the document, the software displays this property in view mode only. Note
that this property is not available for single-tag schematics.

Display cable types in cable block diagrams

Allows you to choose the cable types to be displayed in your cable block diagram. You can
change the cable type at any time by opening the Document Properties dialog box and
selecting or clearing the relevant check boxes. Selecting a particular check box displays the
cables of that type on your cable block diagram. The available options are:
▪ Power
▪ Instrumentation
▪ Control
▪ Grounding
▪ Display only cables connecting two visible items — Select to display only those cables
that connect between two items that are actually visible on the drawing. If only one of the
items is visible, the cable is not displayed. This option applies only to the cable types that
you choose to display. Clear this check box to display all cables of the selected types.
▪ Exclusion filter — Allows you to filter out unnecessary cables from a conventional cable
block diagram. The software applies the selected filter after clicking OK on the Document
Properties dialog box. The cables that comply with the selected filter will be hidden in the
current CBD.

▪ (Ellipsis) — Allows you to select a filter that filters out unnecessary cables from a
conventional cable block diagram.
▪ Clear — Clears the filter box. If no filter is selected, the software displays all the existing
cables in a generated conventional cable block diagram.

For cable block diagrams only:

Focal item — Allows you to define a focal item for a cable block diagram. A focal item is a plant
item which is associated with a specific cable block diagram. An item can be associated with
more than one CBD.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1082

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Find — Opens the Find dialog box that allows you to select an appropriate item that will
function as the focal item.
Clear — Allows you to dissociate the focal item from the current CBD.

For registered reports only:

Report item type — Displays the main item that the selected report template represents.
Document main item type — For certain report item types only, allows you to select an item
type related to the document, for example, where the report item type is Electrical Equipment,
you can select from this list Cable, Converting Equipment, Motor, and so forth. The value
that you select is for information purposes only.
Revisions Tab (see "Revisions Tab (Document Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1083)
Associated Items Tab (see "Associated Items Tab (Document Properties Dialog Box)" on page
1087)

Revisions Tab (Document Properties Dialog Box)

Enables you to enter and manage internal document revisions. Note that if you open this dialog
box without first opening a pertinent document, all the dialog box options are in view mode only.
Document number — Allows you to type the document name.
Document title — Allows you to type the name of the document. Note that this is a required
field which is necessary for publishing the document to SmartPlant Foundation. The software
fills this property automatically with the value displayed under Document number. You can
replace this text with another alphanumeric string as you see fit. If this property is left blank, the
current document will not be published.
Template name (available only for all composite drawings and conventional SLDs, wiring
diagrams, cable block diagrams, and PDB layout drawings) — Allows you to choose an
appropriate template for your drawing.

▪ When selecting a template for a composite drawing, make sure that you select an
Enterprise template, that is, a template that is suitable for composite drawings and
which is compatible with other applications. Selecting a conventional template for a
composite drawing will result in the inability of the software to resolve the macros in the
drawing. You can, however, select an Enterprise template for a conventional drawing.
▪ Make sure that all the templates residing in the default location for composite drawing
templates are Enterprise templates. These templates are suitable for composite
drawings and are compatible with other applications. You define the default location in
the Locations window of Options Manager.
Description — Allows you to type the document description.
Allow document publishing — Select to allow publishing of the current document.
Publishing scope for document content — Allows you to select the publishing scope of the
current document. Note that this setting overrides the setting in Options Manager. The options
for the publishing scope are as follows:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1083

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ Document items only — Publishes the document and all the plant items contained in
the published document.
▪ Document items and first-level relations — Publishes the document, all the plant
items contained in the document, and the first-level related items of the plant items
contained in the published document
▪ Document items and all related items — Publishes the document, all the plant items
contained in the document, and the related items of the plant items contained in the
published document
Scale factor — Available only for SLDs and PDB layout drawings:
▪ SLD drawings — Allows you to scale the content of the entire single line diagram
including all the symbols, connectors, graphics that you insert into the drawing, and all
the distances between the graphical elements in the SLD. The only part of the drawing
that is not affected by the scale factor is the title block.
The scale factor value that you enter represents the size ratio between the original size
of the symbols (as they were created in Catalog Manager) and their size displayed in a
generated SLD. For more details, see Scaling the Content of an SLD Drawing (on page
499).
For example, if you enter 0.5, the size ratio will be 1:2 (the displayed size becomes
smaller than the original size of the symbols). However, if you enter 2, the size ratio will
be 2:1 (the displayed size becomes bigger than the original size of the symbols).
▪ PDB layouts — The scale factor value that you to enter represents the size ratio
between the physical size of the PDB and its representation in the drawing. You can
only enter a whole number without a fraction. For example, if you enter 17, the size ratio
will be 1:17 (the drawing representation will be 17 times smaller than the actual size of
the PDB).

For multi-tag schematics only:

Multi-tag typical schematic — Allows you to select a multi-tag typical schematic when you first
create a multi-tag schematic document. A multi-tag schematic is one that includes in its
definitions multi-tag blocks with header and list macros used to display the tag data. Once you
associate items with the document, the software displays this property in view mode only. Note
that this property is not available for single-tag schematics.

Display cable types in cable block diagrams

Allows you to choose the cable types to be displayed in your cable block diagram. You can
change the cable type at any time by opening the Document Properties dialog box and
selecting or clearing the relevant check boxes. Selecting a particular check box displays the
cables of that type on your cable block diagram. The available options are:
▪ Power
▪ Instrumentation
▪ Control
▪ Grounding
▪ Display only cables connecting two visible items — Select to display only those cables
that connect between two items that are actually visible on the drawing. If only one of the
items is visible, the cable is not displayed. This option applies only to the cable types that
you choose to display. Clear this check box to display all cables of the selected types.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1084

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ Exclusion filter — Allows you to filter out unnecessary cables from a conventional cable
block diagram. The software applies the selected filter after clicking OK on the Document
Properties dialog box. The cables that comply with the selected filter will be hidden in the
current CBD.

▪ (Ellipsis) — Allows you to select a filter that filters out unnecessary cables from a
conventional cable block diagram.
▪ Clear — Clears the filter box. If no filter is selected, the software displays all the existing
cables in a generated conventional cable block diagram.

For cable block diagrams only:

Focal item — Allows you to define a focal item for a cable block diagram. A focal item is a plant
item which is associated with a specific cable block diagram. An item can be associated with
more than one CBD.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box that allows you to select an appropriate item that will
function as the focal item.
Clear — Allows you to dissociate the focal item from the current CBD.

For registered reports only:

Report item type — Displays the main item that the selected report template represents.
Document main item type — For certain report item types only, allows you to select an item
type related to the document, for example, where the report item type is Electrical Equipment,
you can select from this list Cable, Converting Equipment, Motor, and so forth. The value
that you select is for information purposes only.
Revision method — Allows you to select a revision numbering method for the current
document. The selected method affects the value displayed under Revision Number after you
click New. If you change the revision method for a document with existing revisions, the
software starts a new numbering the next time you add a revision. Note that if you select
Other, the software does not display a revision number after clicking New.

Revisions
Note that you cannot delete a revision when working in an integrated
environment. The revisions are controlled by SmartPlant Foundation.
Revision method — Allows you to select a revision numbering method for the current
document. The selected method affects the value displayed under Revision Number after you
click New. If you change the revision method for a document with existing revisions, the
software starts a new numbering the next time you add a revision. Note that if you select
Other, the software does not display a revision number after clicking New.
Archived — A check mark in this box indicates that the software archived a copy of the
pertinent document revision.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1085

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Revision Number — Displays the revision number that complies with the selected revision
method. After clicking New, the software increments the last revision by one or use the next
letter in the alphabet. Also, the software allows you to type an appropriate revision number if
you choose not to accept the displayed value.

▪ If you type a value that does not comply with the current revision method, the next time you
add a new revision, the software starts a new numbering. For example, the selected
revision method is P0, P1, P2 and the last revision is P3. If you add a new revision number
RRR and then another one using the P0, P1, P2 method, the software displays the newly
added revision as P0.
▪ If you type a value that complies with the numbering method but the value you is not
sequential, the software increments the number of the next revision that you add. For
example, the selected revision method is P0, P1, P2 and the last revision is P3. If you add
a new revision number P1, the software increments the following revision to P2.
Revision Date — The date and time of the revision.
Created by — The name or the initials of the person who made the revision.
Checked by — The name or the initials of the person who checked the revision.
Approved by — The name or the initials of the person who approved the revision.
Description — Allows you to type a brief revision description.
Revision Name — The name of the revision or other identifying text. You can overwrite this
text if required.
View — Allows you to open a selected archived version of the document. The software opens
archived documents in view mode only.

▪ Using Data Dictionary Manager, it is possible to determine which fields are available on
the Revisions tab. To hide a specific field, set the Display to User property in the Data
Dictionary to No. For details, see Modify Properties of Database Tables in the Data
Dictionary User's Guide.
▪ When adding a revision UDF in Data Dictionary Manager, the software automatically
adds a new revision column to the Revisions grid. You can edit the revision properties
as required.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1086

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Associated Items Tab (Document Properties Dialog Box)

Enables you to associate items for multi-tag schematics.
Document number — Allows you to type the document name.
Document title — Allows you to type the name of the document. Note that this is a required
field which is necessary for publishing the document to SmartPlant Foundation. The software
fills this property automatically with the value displayed under Document number. You can
replace this text with another alphanumeric string as you see fit. If this property is left blank, the
current document will not be published.
Template name (available only for all composite drawings and conventional SLDs, wiring
diagrams, cable block diagrams, and PDB layout drawings) — Allows you to choose an
appropriate template for your drawing.

▪ When selecting a template for a composite drawing, make sure that you select an
Enterprise template, that is, a template that is suitable for composite drawings and
which is compatible with other applications. Selecting a conventional template for a
composite drawing will result in the inability of the software to resolve the macros in the
drawing. You can, however, select an Enterprise template for a conventional drawing.
▪ Make sure that all the templates residing in the default location for composite drawing
templates are Enterprise templates. These templates are suitable for composite
drawings and are compatible with other applications. You define the default location in
the Locations window of Options Manager.
Description — Allows you to type the document description.
Allow document publishing — Select to allow publishing of the current document.
Publishing scope for document content — Allows you to select the publishing scope of the
current document. Note that this setting overrides the setting in Options Manager. The options
for the publishing scope are as follows:
▪ Document items only — Publishes the document and all the plant items contained in
the published document.
▪ Document items and first-level relations — Publishes the document, all the plant
items contained in the document, and the first-level related items of the plant items
contained in the published document
▪ Document items and all related items — Publishes the document, all the plant items
contained in the document, and the related items of the plant items contained in the
published document
Scale factor — Available only for SLDs and PDB layout drawings:
▪ SLD drawings — Allows you to scale the content of the entire single line diagram
including all the symbols, connectors, graphics that you insert into the drawing, and all
the distances between the graphical elements in the SLD. The only part of the drawing
that is not affected by the scale factor is the title block.
The scale factor value that you enter represents the size ratio between the original size
of the symbols (as they were created in Catalog Manager) and their size displayed in a
generated SLD. For more details, see Scaling the Content of an SLD Drawing (on page
499).
For example, if you enter 0.5, the size ratio will be 1:2 (the displayed size becomes

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1087

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

smaller than the original size of the symbols). However, if you enter 2, the size ratio will
be 2:1 (the displayed size becomes bigger than the original size of the symbols).
▪ PDB layouts — The scale factor value that you to enter represents the size ratio
between the physical size of the PDB and its representation in the drawing. You can
only enter a whole number without a fraction. For example, if you enter 17, the size ratio
will be 1:17 (the drawing representation will be 17 times smaller than the actual size of
the PDB).

For multi-tag schematics only:

Multi-tag typical schematic — Allows you to select a multi-tag typical schematic when you first
create a multi-tag schematic document. A multi-tag schematic is one that includes in its
definitions multi-tag blocks with header and list macros used to display the tag data. Once you
associate items with the document, the software displays this property in view mode only. Note
that this property is not available for single-tag schematics.

Display cable types in cable block diagrams

Allows you to choose the cable types to be displayed in your cable block diagram. You can
change the cable type at any time by opening the Document Properties dialog box and
selecting or clearing the relevant check boxes. Selecting a particular check box displays the
cables of that type on your cable block diagram. The available options are:
▪ Power
▪ Instrumentation
▪ Control
▪ Grounding
▪ Display only cables connecting two visible items — Select to display only those cables
that connect between two items that are actually visible on the drawing. If only one of the
items is visible, the cable is not displayed. This option applies only to the cable types that
you choose to display. Clear this check box to display all cables of the selected types.
▪ Exclusion filter — Allows you to filter out unnecessary cables from a conventional cable
block diagram. The software applies the selected filter after clicking OK on the Document
Properties dialog box. The cables that comply with the selected filter will be hidden in the
current CBD.

▪ (Ellipsis) — Allows you to select a filter that filters out unnecessary cables from a
conventional cable block diagram.
▪ Clear — Clears the filter box. If no filter is selected, the software displays all the existing
cables in a generated conventional cable block diagram.

For cable block diagrams only:

Focal item — Allows you to define a focal item for a cable block diagram. A focal item is a plant
item which is associated with a specific cable block diagram. An item can be associated with
more than one CBD.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box that allows you to select an appropriate item that will
function as the focal item.
Clear — Allows you to dissociate the focal item from the current CBD.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1088

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

For registered reports only:

Report item type — Displays the main item that the selected report template represents.
Document main item type — For certain report item types only, allows you to select an item
type related to the document, for example, where the report item type is Electrical Equipment,
you can select from this list Cable, Converting Equipment, Motor, and so forth. The value
that you select is for information purposes only.

Associated Items (available for multi-tag schematics only)

Item type — Allows you to select an item type for the electrical items that you want to associate
with the current multi-item schematic:
▪ Selecting the Bus item type enables you to generate a multi-tag schematic that includes all
the circuits that are connected to the bus selected from the list on the right.
▪ Selecting any other item type apart from Bus, enables you to associate only those items
that belong to the selected item type. You can associate the required items by clicking
Associate.
Power Distribution Board — (available only if you selected Bus from the Item type list) Allows
you to select an appropriate PDB that has the bus which you want to associate with the current
multi-item schematic.
Bus — (available only if you selected Bus from the Item type list) Allows you to select an
appropriate bus which you want to associate with the current multi-item schematic.
Associated Items — Displays the list of items of a particular item type that are associated with
the document. If you selected Bus in the Item type list, the associated items are the circuits that
belong to the selected bus.
Associate — (available only if you did not select Bus from the Item type list) Opens the Find
dialog box to allow you to associate with the document items of a particular item type.
Dissociate — (not available if you selected Bus from the Item type list) Dissociates the
selected item from the document. You can only dissociate items individually.
Sort by — Enables you to sort the associated items. Note that this setting determines the
sorting of items in the table that appears in the generated multi-tag schematic.
▪ Item tag — Sorts the associated items according to their item tag names.
▪ Sequence in group — (available only if the associated items are circuits) Sorts the
associated circuits according to their sequence in group values.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1089

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

File Properties Dialog Box

Tracks information about the properties of a drawing. Open this dialog box by clicking File >
Properties on the main menu bar.
General Tab (on page 1090)
Summary Tab (on page 1091)
Statistics Tab (on page 1091)
Units Tab (on page 1091)
You must save the drawing before you can access the Statistics and Summary tabs
of the File Properties dialog box.

General Tab
Displays general information about the current document.
Type — Displays the type of document. The type is based on the application used to create the
document.
Location — Displays the directory containing the document.
Size — Displays the size of the document in bytes, kilobytes, and megabytes.
MS-DOS Name — Displays the name of the document as it would appear in a Windows file
naming system.
Created — Displays the date and time that the document was created or copied.
Modified — Displays the date and time that the document was last modified.
Accessed — Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied.
Attributes — Displays the properties of the current document. These settings are read-only.
Read-Only — Indicates that the document is read-only. You cannot open a read-only file for
writing. You cannot create a file with the same name as a read-only file.
Archive — Shows that the document is an archive document.
Hidden — Indicates that the document is a hidden document. You usually cannot see this
document in the Windows.
System — Shows that the document is a system document. You usually cannot see this
document unless you change the view options in Windows Explorer.
If some of the above information is not available, the dialog box displays Unknown.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1090

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Summary Tab
Displays the title and author, if available, along with keywords and comments for the current
document. The software generates the author and template information when you create, save,
or print the document. You can edit these properties, with the exception of the template, unless
the document is write-protected.
Title — Specifies the title of the current document.
Subject — Gives a general description of the current document.
Author — Displays the name of the person who created the document.
Keywords — Displays a list of words that identify the document when you browse or search
documents.
Comments — Specifies comments about the current document.
Template — Specifies the current drawing template.

Statistics Tab
Displays detailed information about the current document. The software automatically generates
these properties when you create, save, or print the document.
Created — Displays the date and time the document was created or copied.
Creating Application — Displays the name of the application that created the document.
Modified — Displays the date and time the document was last modified.
Accessed — Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied.
Last Saved By — Displays the name of the person who last saved the document.
Saving Application — Displays the name of the application that most recently saved the
document.
Currently Opened By — Displays the name of the person who has the document open.

Units Tab
Sets up units of measure and precision readout for the length, area, or angle values in a
drawing.
The precision readout sets the number of significant figures to appear. It represents the
accuracy of the unit readout value. The precision setting does not alter the numbers that you
type into a property, only the display of the numbers. Values ending in 5 are rounded up. For
example, if the precision readout is .123 and you draw a line that is 2.1056 inches long, then the
line value length is rounded up to 2.106 inches.
Length Readout — Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the length values in a
document.
Angle Readout — Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the angle values in a
document.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1091

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Area Readout — Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the area values in a
document.

▪ To avoid loss of precision in units when switching between small and large types of a
particular unit, increase the precision, that is, increase decimal places, of the larger unit
through Format Manager.
▪ When placed on a drawing, all delivered labels that include units of measure use the plant
default formats defined in Options Manager, and so labels do not always display the units of
measure selected in the Properties window. To ensure that a label displays the units of
measure specified in the Properties window, in Catalog Manager, select the required label,
and from the Format list on the SmartText Editor dialog box, select the As Entered option.
▪ The software supports round-trip conversion of units without loss of precision. That is, you
can convert centimeters to meters and back and retain the originally entered value of
centimeters with no round-off loss.

Browser Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)

Sets the home address for the active document. Every time you open this document and click
Home on the Symbol Explorer, the Symbol Explorer goes to the address in the Address box.
Address - Sets the home address for the current document. When you open a document and
then open the Symbol Explorer and click Home , the Symbol Explorer goes to the address
that you type here. You can any address that you use in a web browser, such as Microsoft
Internet Explorer; for example, you can type http://www.smartsketch.com.
If you want to set the Symbol Explorer to always look at the symbols folder on your computer,
you can type the full path to your symbols folder in the Address box. Each time you open this
document and click Home in the Symbol Explorer, the symbol documents in the folder path
you specified are displayed.
Browse - Accesses the Modify Location dialog box so that you can set another folder for the
Symbol Explorer to look in. You can set the dialog box to look in folders on your computer or a
network drive.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1092

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Global Revisions Dialog Box

Enables you to assign and manage revisions to a group of documents that you select.
Activity — Allows you to select one of the following revision activities:
▪ Add revision — Adds a new revision to the selected documents in accordance with the
value you specify in the Revision number field in the Settings group box. The software
determines which revision method suits best the value that you typed in the Revision
number field and adjusts the revision method accordingly. If the revision number value that
you are adding conforms with method of the last existing revision, the software will continue
to number the new revision accordingly. If the software cannot determine a suitable
revision method for the typed value, the revision method will switch to Other. Also, if you
do not enter a value in the Revision number field, the software will add a new revision
using the Other method and will not provide a value in the Revision number field of the
individual documents.
▪ Upgrade revision — Adds a new revision by raising the last revision number of all the
selected documents. The software identifies the revision numbering method of each
document (P0, P1, P2; 0,1,2, A,B,C, and so forth) and raises the revision number to the next
value according to the existing revision method. You cannot change the revision method
but you can update all the other settings by entering new settings.
▪ Delete last revision — Deletes the last revision of all the selected documents.
▪ Delete all revisions — Deletes all the revisions of all the selected documents.
Revision method for items without revisions — Allows you to select a revision method for
documents without revisions. This option is available only after selecting Upgrade revision
from the Activity list.

Settings
Revision number — Allows you to type an appropriate revision number to be used when
adding or updating revisions. This setting is not available when upgrading revisions.
Revision date — Allows you to enter the revision date.
Created by — Allows you to type the name or the initials of the person who made the revision.
Checked by — Allows you to type the name or the initials of the person who checked the
revision.
Approved by — Allows you to type the name or the initials of the person who approved the
revision.
Revision description — Allows you to type a brief revision description.
The software archives all the added and upgraded revisions of the selected
documents so that you can compare the data of an archived document with the current
version. For more information, see Comparing Documents (see "Compare an Archived
Document with a Current Document" on page 632).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1093

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

New Miscellaneous Drawing Dialog Box

Allows you to specify a new miscellaneous drawing for saving to the Smart Electrical
database. A miscellaneous drawing can be any drawing that was created in SmartSketch or
some other CAD application. After saving this drawing to your Smart Electrical database, the
software allows you to associate this drawing with a Smart Electrical item and manage
revisions. Note that the software does not allow you to archive miscellaneous drawings.
On clicking OK, the software opens the selected template and you can then insert .sym files
created in SmartSketch or some other application.

Template — Click the ellipsis button to select a drawing template (.spe file). The template
determines the paper size and orientation, and the title block that appears on the drawing.
Document number — Allows you to type a document number used to identify the drawing.
Description — Allows you to type a description for the drawing if required.

Registered Report Common Properties Dialog Box

Enables you to register plant reports in the Smart Electrical database so that you can apply
revisions to the reports in the same way as for other documents. When you register a report, it
appears under Documents > Registered Reports in the Electrical Index.
Report template — Displays the report template associated with the report you select to
register. To select a report, click the ellipsis button and navigate to one of the Excel
reports that comes shipped with Smart Electrical. For the full list of shipped reports, see
Shipped Reports.
Filter — Displays a filter, if selected, for filtering the data that you want to present in the
report. To select a filter, click the ellipsis button and choose a filter that is appropriate for
the report template.
Report item type — Displays the main item that the selected report template represents.
Document main item type — For certain report item types only, allows you to select an item
type related to the document, for example, where the report item type is Electrical Equipment,
you can select from this list Cable, Converting Equipment, Motor, and so forth. The value
that you select is for information purposes only.
Document name — Allows you to type a name for the document, which appears under the
Reports folder.
Description — Allows you to type text description for the report if required. Press CTRL +
ENTER to start a new line.
Enable document for publishing — Select to use the report for publishing data to an XML
file. This option is available for reports based on item types that you can publish: cabinets,
instruments, equipment (which you should filter for cabinets and instruments), and signal
run. Clear the check box if you do not intend to publish data for one of these item
types. Clearing the check box makes the report registration process faster.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1094

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Panels
Cabinet Common Properties Dialog Box
Cabinets are multi-purpose electrical enclosures for various types of equipment. This dialog box
sets options for defining the common properties of wiring cabinets. Also, this dialog box defines
properties that the software uses for calculating electrical loads and associating an electrical
item with a power supply.
General Tab (see "General Tab (Junction Box Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1101)
Electrical Data Tab
Feeder Data Tab (see "Feeder Data Tab (Cabinet Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page
1097)
Alternative Feeder Tab (see "Alternative Feeder Tab (Cabinet Common Properties Dialog Box)"
on page 1099)

General Tab (Cabinet Common Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for general properties that identify and characterize the cabinet. An asterisk
beside a property name indicates required data.
Item tag - Identifies the cabinet. The tag is the name that appears beside the cabinet in the
Electrical Index or the Reference Data Explorer. In the Reference Data Explorer, you must
enter a string in this box. In the Electrical Index, the item tag matches the naming convention
for the cabinet. Click the ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can modify the
item tag segments that are editable.
The tag property Comply with Naming Convention determines the behavior of an
item tag name. When the property is set to True, the protection masks and segment properties
behave according to the settings for the item naming convention in the Options Manager. When
the property is set to False, you can edit the tag name value freely. Whether you set this
property to True or False, the software ensures compliance with uniqueness if you set the Is
Unique parameter to True in the Item Type Properties option that you set in Options Manager.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the cabinet, for information only.
Manufacturer — Allows you to select a manufacturer for the cabinet. You can define and
customize manufacturers in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Model — Allows you to select a cabinet model. The available models are specific to the
manufacturer. You can select a model without selecting a manufacturer. The software then
selects the appropriate manufacturer automatically according to the selected model. You can
define and customize models in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Type — Displays the type of cabinet. You can define and customize cabinet types in the Data
Dictionary Manager. The software uses this description in filters and reports.
Item status — Allows you to select an appropriate status of the equipment indicating whether
the item is active or deleted.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1095

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Notes — Allows you to enter text, for example, if you want to provide additional information
about the cabinet.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Electrical Data Tab (Cabinet Common Properties Dialog Box)

Provides information about the electrical requirements of the cabinet.
Cabinet rated power — The power supply that the cabinet can handle, as shown on the
cabinet nameplate. You must enter a value with appropriate units of measure for the standard
that you are using. The units of measure depend on the type of load. You can specify the
default units of measure for your plant in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Power factor — Enter the ratio of active power to apparent power at 100% of the rated power
and at the demand point. The power factor can have a value between 0 and 1.
Rated active power — Shows the quantity of electrical power in kW drawn from the network
and that is actually converted to output power.
Rated reactive power — Shows the quantity of reactive power in kVAR that the cabinet items
draw from the network.
Rated apparent power - Shows the quantity of electrical power in kVA that represents the
vector sum of the active and reactive power. This quantity is the actual power that the network
needs to generate.
Supply — Select the type of supply: alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC).
Number of phases — Select the number of phases in the power supply to the load. You can
select 1 or 3 phases. This property applies for an AC supply only.
Frequency (Hz) — Select the operating frequency of the load. This property applies for an AC
supply only. You can define and customize the available frequencies in the Data Dictionary
Manager.
Phase arrangement — Select a value to determine which of the available phases are in use for
the current load, for example 2 PH + N (two phases plus neutral). This property applies for an
AC supply only.
Rated voltage — Select the voltage at which the load is designed to operate. This quantity
ensures electrical compatibility between the electrical supply and the equipment. It usually
appears on the load nameplate. You can define and customize the available rated voltages in
the Data Dictionary Manager.
Number of wires — Select the number of wires used to supply power to the load.
Override FLA calculation — Select the required option to determine whether the software uses
a calculated or manually typed full load current value. If you select Calculated, the software
calculates the full load current value based on values you enter on the Load Data tab; the
calculated value overwrites any value that you previously entered manually. Selecting Manual
enables data entry in the Full load current box, with the last calculated full load current as the
starting value.
Full load current (FLA) — The electrical current, in amperes, that the load draws from the
supply when operating at maximum power. The full load current usually appears on the
nameplate of the load. You can select Calculated or Manual from the Override FLA

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1096

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

calculation list to determine whether the software calculates this value or whether you enter a
value manually. When the load has an attached cable, the software copies this value to the
cable and uses it as a default value for sizing the cable.
Starting current — The electrical current, in amperes, that the cabinet uses for the associated
equipment when starting. When the cabinet has an attached cable, the software copies this
value to the cable and uses it as a default value for sizing the cable.

Coincidence factors
Allows you to enter values corresponding to the percentage utilization of the load for the
selected operating mode. Also known as duty factors. Type a value between 0 and 1 for the
required mode. A value of 0 corresponds to an unused load, while a value of 1 corresponds to
continuous operation.
Operating mode — Select the operating mode that describes how the cabinet is used in
practice in the plant. The standard available operating modes are:
Continuous
▪ Intermittent
▪ Standby
▪ Spare
The coincidence factor corresponding to the selected operating mode provides a
quantitative measure of the cabinet behavior in that mode. You can customize the available
operating modes in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Feeder Data Tab (Cabinet Common Properties Dialog Box)

Provides information about the feeder and details of associated protection devices such as
fuses, circuit breakers, overload relays, and so forth in cabinets that belong to your plant. The
values on this tab reflect the definitions that you make in the Electrical Engineer.
Once you associate the equipment with a circuit, the feeder data becomes
read-only. Further changes are possible only through the Electrical Engineer. For more
information, see Associate Electrical Equipment with Feeders (on page 231).

Location
Enables you to specify the location of the cabinet feeder. Also, you can specify these settings
by performing associations in the Electrical Engineer.
Where the feeder source is an item of equipment other than a PDB, the source tag
appears in the Feeder equipment box and all the properties in this section are disabled.
Power distribution board — Allows you to specify and display the power distribution board in
which the feeder is located. If you select a PDB without specifying a bus, the software assigns
the PDB to the cabinet, but you can change feeder data values later if you need to.
Bus — Allows you to specify and display the bus to which the cabinet is assigned. The values
in this list depend on the selected PDB number. If you select a bus without specifying a circuit,

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1097

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

the software assigns the bus to the cabinet, but you can change feeder data values later if you
need to.
Cell — Allows you to specify and display a cell/bucket/ compartment to which the cabinet is
assigned. The values in this list depend on the selected bus.
Circuit — Allows you to specify and display the circuit to which the cabinet is assigned. If the
circuit resides in a particular cell, the values in this list depend on the selected cell. If the circuit
is linked directly to the bus, and is not linked to a cell, the values in the list depend on the
selected bus.
If you select a cell without selecting an existing circuit, the software automatically
creates a new circuit when you click Apply.
Create circuit — Allows you to create a new feeder circuit in the bus to which the cabinet is
assigned when you click Apply. The software automatically assigns the circuit name. When
you select this check box, the Create cell check box becomes active. Also, with the new circuit,
if you have specified a typical circuit for the cabinet, the software assigns circuit components
based on that typical circuit.
If you do not select this check box, then unless you select a cell, the software does
not create a circuit and the cabinet-bus association does not appear in the Electrical
Engineer. In this case, you can select the check box the next time you select this tab folder to
actually create the circuit.
Create cell — Allows you to create a new cell in the bus to which the cabinet is assigned. The
software automatically assigns the cell name.
Phase 1 — Allows you to associate the current cabinet with phase 1 of the selected bus. The
availability of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of phases list on
the Load Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC supply. Phase 1 refers
to the label L1 or R, as defined by the value of the Phase Label1 bus property.
Phase 2 — Allows you to associate the current cabinet with phase 2 of the selected bus. The
availability of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of phases list on
the Load Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC supply. Phase 2 refers
to the label L2 or S, as defined by the value of the Phase Label2 bus property.
Phase 3 — Allows you to associate the current cabinet with phase 3 of the selected bus. The
availability of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of phases list on
the Load Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC supply. Phase 3 refers
to the label L3 or T, as defined by the value of the Phase Label3 bus property.
If you want a single-phase load to simulate a two-phase load that is
connected to a three-phase bus, select two of the Phase check boxes to assign the cabinet
to two phases.
Details of circuit internals — Displays details of the components in the selected circuit. The
values are read-only.
To update the circuit components, you need to modify the selected circuit in the
Electrical Index. For more information, refer to Related Topics.
Component Type — Displays the type of component in the circuit, such as a circuit breaker or
a fuse.
Component Tag — Displays the component identifying tag, as shown in the Electrical Index.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1098

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Order — Determines the position of the component in relation to the bus when the circuit
contains more than one component. The greater the value, the further the component is from
the bus.
Show in SLD — Indicates whether the software shows a graphical representation of the
component when you generate a single line diagram for the PDB.

Alternative Feeder Tab (Cabinet Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Displays the location of an alternative or second feeder (for example, a UPS), if defined. You
specify these settings by performing associations in the Electrical Engineer. All properties on
this tab are view-only.

Location
Power distribution board — Displays the power distribution board in which the feeder is
located.
Bus — Displays the bus belonging to the power distribution board.
Cell — Displays a cell/bucket/ compartment to which the cabinet is assigned, if defined.
Circuit — Displays the circuit to which the cabinet is assigned.
Feeder equipment — Displays the item used as the alternative supply (generator, battery bank,
off-site power and so forth).

Local Panel Common Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for defining the common properties of local cabinets. Also, this dialog box defines
properties that the software uses for calculating electrical loads and associating the item with the
electrical supply.
General Tab (see "General Tab (Junction Box Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1101)
Electrical Data Tab

General Tab (Local Panel Common Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for general properties that identify and characterize the local panel. An asterisk
beside a property name indicates required data.
Item tag — Identifies the local panel. The tag is the name that appears beside the local panel
in the Electrical Index or the Reference Data Explorer. In the Reference Data Explorer, you
must enter a string in this box. In the Electrical Index, the item tag matches the naming
convention for the local panel. Click the ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can
modify the item tag segments that are editable.
The tag property Comply with Naming Convention determines the behavior of an
item tag name. When the property is set to True, the protection masks and segment properties

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1099

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

behave according to the settings for the item naming convention in Options Manager. When the
property is set to False, you can edit the tag name value freely. Whether you set this property
to True or False, the software ensures compliance with uniqueness if you set the Is Unique
parameter to True in the Item Type Properties option that you set in Options Manager.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the local panel, for information only.
Manufacturer — Allows you to select a manufacturer for the local panel. You can define and
customize manufacturers in Data Dictionary Manager.
Model — Allows you to select a local panel model. The available models are specific to the
manufacturer. You can select a model without selecting a manufacturer. The software then
selects the appropriate manufacturer automatically according to the selected model. You can
define and customize models in Data Dictionary Manager.
Type — Displays the type of local panel. You can define and customize local panel types in
Data Dictionary Manager. The software uses this description in filters and reports.
Item status — Allows you to select an appropriate status of the equipment indicating whether
the item is active or deleted.
Notes — Allows you to enter text, for example, if you want to provide additional information
about the local panel.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Electrical Data Tab (Local Panel Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Provides information about the electrical requirements of the local panel.
Consumer — Allows you to define the current electrical item as a consumer. This means that
the software will include this item in load summary calculations, batch load associations, and all
feeder summary reports. The software uses the electrical power values that you enter for this
item on the Electrical Data tab. Also, you can use this property for filtering items that you want
to appear in the EDE or in reports. The software does not select this check box by default for
converting equipment.
Also, for junction boxes and local panels, selecting this check box instructs the software to
include the current junction board or local panel in single line diagrams generated for power
distribution boards.
Rated active load — Allows you to enter the value for the rated active power. The units of
measure depend on the type of load. You can specify the default units of measure for your
plant in Data Dictionary Manager.
Rated reactive load — Allows you to enter the value for the rated reactive power. The units of
measure depend on the type of load. You can specify the default units of measure for your
plant in Data Dictionary Manager.
Rated apparent load — Displays the calculated value for the rated apparent power.
Consumed active load — Allows you to enter the value for the consumed active power. The
units of measure depend on the type of load. You can specify the default units of measure for
your plant in Data Dictionary Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1100

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Consumed reactive load — Allows you to enter the value for the consumed reactive
power. The units of measure depend on the type of load. You can specify the default units of
measure for your plant in Data Dictionary Manager.
Consumed apparent load — Displays the calculated value for the consumed apparent power.
Supply — Allows you to select the type of supply that the local power requires: alternating
current (AC) or direct current (DC).
Number of phases — Allows you to select the number of phases for the local panel. You can
select 1 or 3 phases. This property applies for an AC supply only.

Coincidence factors
Allows you to enter values corresponding to the percentage utilization of the motor for the
selected operating mode. Also known as duty factors. Type a value between 0 and 1 for the
required mode. A value of 0 corresponds to an unused motor, while a value of 1 corresponds to
continuous operation.
Operating mode — Select the operating mode that describes how the motor is used in practice
in the plant. The standard available operating modes are:
▪ Continuous
▪ Intermittent
▪ Standby
▪ Spare
The coincidence factor corresponding to the selected operating mode provides a
quantitative measure of the motor behavior in that mode.

Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Junction Box Common Properties

Sets options for defining the common properties of junction boxes. Also, this dialog box defines
properties that the software uses for calculating electrical loads and associating the item with the
electrical supply.
General Tab (see "General Tab (Junction Box Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1101)
Electrical Data Tab

General Tab (Junction Box Common Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for general properties that identify and characterize the junction box. An asterisk
beside a property name indicates required data.
Item tag - Identifies the junction box. The tag is the name that appears beside the junction box
in the Electrical Index or the Reference Data Explorer. In the Reference Data Explorer, you

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1101

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

must enter a string in this box. In the Electrical Index, the item tag matches the naming
convention for the junction box. Click the ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you
can modify the item tag segments that are editable.
The tag property Comply with Naming Convention determines the behavior of an
item tag name. When the property is set to True, the protection masks and segment properties
behave according to the settings for the item naming convention in Options Manager. When the
property is set to False, you can edit the tag name value freely. Whether you set this property
to True or False, the software ensures compliance with uniqueness if you set the Is Unique
parameter to True in the Item Type Properties option that you set in Options Manager.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the junction box, for information only.
Manufacturer — Allows you to select a manufacturer for the junction box. You can define and
customize manufacturers in Data Dictionary Manager.
Model — Allows you to select a junction box model. The available models are specific to the
manufacturer. You can select a model without selecting a manufacturer. The software then
selects the appropriate manufacturer automatically according to the selected model. You can
define and customize models in Data Dictionary Manager.
Type — Displays the type of junction box. You can define and customize junction box types in
Data Dictionary Manager. The software uses this description in filters and reports.
Item status — Allows you to select an appropriate status of the equipment indicating whether
the item is active or deleted.
Notes — Allows you to enter text, for example, if you want to provide additional information
about the local panel.
Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Electrical Data Tab (Junction Box Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Provides information about the electrical requirements of the junction box.
Consumer — Allows you to define the current electrical item as a consumer. This means that
the software will include this item in load summary calculations, batch load associations, and all
feeder summary reports. The software uses the electrical power values that you enter for this
item on the Electrical Data tab. Also, you can use this property for filtering items that you want
to appear in the EDE or in reports. The software does not select this check box by default for
converting equipment.
Also, for junction boxes and local panels, selecting this check box instructs the software to
include the current junction board or local panel in single line diagrams generated for power
distribution boards.
Rated active load — Allows you to enter the value for the rated active power. The units of
measure depend on the type of load. You can specify the default units of measure for your
plant in Data Dictionary Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1102

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Rated reactive load — Allows you to enter the value for the rated reactive power. The units of
measure depend on the type of load. You can specify the default units of measure for your
plant in Data Dictionary Manager.
Rated apparent load — Displays the calculated value for the rated apparent power.
Consumed active load — Allows you to enter the value for the consumed active power. The
units of measure depend on the type of load. You can specify the default units of measure for
your plant in Data Dictionary Manager.
Consumed reactive load — Allows you to enter the value for the consumed reactive
power. The units of measure depend on the type of load. You can specify the default units of
measure for your plant in Data Dictionary Manager.
Consumed apparent load — Displays the calculated value for the consumed apparent power.
Supply — Allows you to select the type of supply that the local power requires: alternating
current (AC) or direct current (DC).
Number of phases — Allows you to select the number of phases for the junction box. You can
select 1 or 3 phases. This property applies for an AC supply only.

Coincidence factors
Allows you to enter values corresponding to the percentage utilization of the motor for the
selected operating mode. Also known as duty factors. Type a value between 0 and 1 for the
required mode. A value of 0 corresponds to an unused motor, while a value of 1 corresponds to
continuous operation.
Operating mode — Select the operating mode that describes how the motor is used in practice
in the plant. The standard available operating modes are:
▪ Continuous
▪ Intermittent
▪ Standby
▪ Spare
The coincidence factor corresponding to the selected operating mode provides a
quantitative measure of the motor behavior in that mode.

Manage Operating Cases — Opens the Manage Operating Cases dialog box where you can
add, edit, or delete property values specific to various plant operating cases that exist for the
current plant item.

Control Station Common Properties Dialog Box

Enables you to associate a control station with a cable and an electrical item such as a motor,
heater, capacitor, harmonic filter, resistor, heat traces, UPS, VFD, battery chargers, other
converting and electrical equipment.
Item tag — Identifies the control station. The item tag appears beside the control station in the
Electrical Index. The item tag matches the naming convention for the control station. Click

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1103

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

the ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can modify the tag segments that are
editable.
Last applied typical I/O set — Indicates the last typical I/O set of signals that you applied to the
control station, if appropriate. This information is read-only and appears only if you apply a
typical I/O set by dragging it from the Reference Data Explorer or by applying options to the
control station.
Associated equipment — Displays the electrical item associated with the control station.
You can associate one electrical item only per control station.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box, which allows you to select an electrical item to associate
with the control station.
Dissociate — Allows you to clear the association of the selected equipment with the control
station.

Associated cables
Displays the plant cables that the software associates with the control station.
(Data window) — Describes the names and cable specifications of the associated cables.
Add — Opens the Find dialog box, which allows you to select control, grounding, or
instrumentation cables to associate with the control station.
You can associate more than one cable per control station.
Remove — Removes the selected associated cable from the control station.

Project Management
Project Management Table (As-Built)
The Project Management table in As-Built allows you to select a target project and to scope
items for that project, and to merge items in the project back to As-Built after you have edited or
created them in the project. The commands associated with the Project Management table
are all on the Project Management toolbar. This table opens when you click Window > New >
Project Management on the main menu bar.

Header Description

(Check box) Applies to main items only. When selected, includes those items
in the action specified the Scope, Clear, and Merge
commands. The check box in the main header row is used to
select or clear all the check boxes in the column.

Main Item Tag The tag of the main item. A main item can be a motor or some
other load, converting equipment, a power source, any free
cable, a PDB, or a document.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1104

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Header Description

Related Item Tag The tag of the related item which has an electrical association
with the main item; for example, if the main item is a motor,
related items can include cables, signals, control stations, and
circuits.

Item Type Indicates the item type of the main item or related item.

Status in project Indicates the status of the item. For details, see Understanding
Statuses (on page 717).

Claim Mode Indicates whether the item, if claimed, has been claimed
exclusively or shared, or whether it has been released from the
claim. In As-Built, this property is read-only.

New Item Indicates whether an item has been newly-created in the

project. Note that after merging the item, this field appears
blank.

Item Path Indicates the parent hierarchy of a non- unique item. For
example, in the case of a circuit, the item path shows the
PDB\Bus\(Cell) hierarchy.

Description The item description, if appropriate, as it appears for the item

properties.

Plant Group Indicates the plant group to which the item belongs.

Deleted Indicates whether the item has been deleted in the project since
the last time it was scoped.

Result Status Indicates the result of a major operation such as Merge. For
example, the status Done appears after the software commits an
operation successfully.

When scoping an item that is connected in parallel with another equipment item, the
software automatically scopes all the items that are connected in parallel to the scoped item. For
example, if you select Motor-1 that has been connected in parallel with Motor-2 and Motor-3, the
software will also automatically scope Motor-2 and Motor-3 together with their upstream items all
the way to their power sources.

Project Management Toolbar

Contains the commands that you can run from the Project Management table (see "Project
Management Table (As-Built)" on page 1104).

Icon Command Explanation

Select Project Allows you to select a project for scoping and claiming
As-Built data. You must select a project that already exists

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1105

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Icon Command Explanation

and is assigned to the plant before you can perform any other
activities.

Project Status Allows you to change the current status of the

project. Possible project statuses are: Active, Completed,
Merged, or Canceled. For details of the rules governing
changes in the project status, see Rules for Changing
Statuses (on page 718).

Add Items When you select one or more items from the Electrical
Index or the EDE, adds those items to the Project
Management table where you can select them for scoping to
your project. For items that you select in the Electrical
Engineer, adds the selected item with any related items
below it, and also related items above it up to the feeder
PDB.

Scope Makes each main item from the Project Management table
available for the project if the check box beside it is
selected. If a selected main item has related items, these
are also included in the scope. If you scope an item that is
not a main item, such as a control station, the software
automatically selects the associated main item for
scoping. Where an item was previously scoped, this
command refreshes the data.

Test Merge Allows you to test the merging of items that have status
Completed and for which you have selected the check
boxes. This operation can assist you in troubleshooting
problems before you commit to merging the data.

Merge Allows you to merge items that have status Completed and
for which you have selected the check boxes.

Find Completed Opens the Find dialog box, which allows you to find all the
Items completed items in the project. You can select all or some of
the completed items and then merge them into As-Built.

Show Merged Filters the display to show only those items that have been
Items merged back into As-Built. Note that the filter relates to the
status of the items in the database and not necessarily the
status currently displayed in the Project Management table.

Show Claimed Filters the display to show only those items that have been
Items claimed for the project. Note that the filter relates to the
status of the items in the database and not necessarily the
status currently displayed in the Project Management table.

Show Items Filters the display to show only those items that have been
Deleted from deleted in As-Built. Note that the filter relates to the status of

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1106

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Icon Command Explanation

As- Built the items in the database and not necessarily the status
currently displayed in the Project Management table.

Show Item Displays the values of the item properties for an item similar
Properties to the Properties window view, but in read- only
mode. Click Alphabetic to display the properties in
alphabetical order; click Categorized to display the
properties grouped by specific categories. The software can
display the properties of only one item at a time; the item for
which the row is highlighted.

Clear All Clears all items from the Project Management table.

Clear Clears each main item from the Project Management table if
the check box beside it is selected. If a selected main item
has related items, these are also cleared.

Show / Hide Toggles the buffer display, which you use to make a
Buffer preliminary selection of items that you may want to add to the
Project Management table. You drag selected items to the
buffer from the Electrical Index, the Electrical Engineer, or
the EDE.

Paste from Pastes to the Project Management table items from the
Buffer buffer whose check boxes are selected.

Excel Report Generates a report in Excel showing the current selection in

the Project Management table, arranged according to the
main items. In the report, you can expand the main items to
display their related items.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1107

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Icon Command Explanation

Display Allows you to specify the display mode in the data

window. You can display the main items only, the main
items expanded to show their related items, or a list showing
all items. If a particular related item is associated with more
than one main item, that related item appears once only in
the list view. In list view only, you can sort the items as
required by clicking the column headers in the data window.

Compare After scoping and modifying items in a project, you use this
Documents command to compare documents of the same type in
As-Built and in the project, for example, registered reports,
SLDs, schematics. If changes that you made to the item are
reflected in the document, the software compares the
changes and indicates them on a comparison report. Note
that the software generates As-Built and project reports
automatically when you run this command.

Project Management Table (Project)

The Project Management table, when opened in the project, displays all items that you last
scoped from As-Built, along with any previously scoped items whether or not they have been
claimed. Its main purpose is for claiming items and releasing claimed items. Note that you can
claim related items independently of their main items. The commands associated with the
Project Management table are all on the Project Management toolbar (on page 1109). This
table opens when you click Window > New > Project Management on the main menu bar.

Header Description

(Check box) Applies to main items only. When selected, includes those
items in the action specified the Scope, Clear, and Merge
commands. The check box in the main header row is used to
select or clear all the check boxes in the column.

Main Item Tag The tag of the main item. A main item can be a motor or some
other load, a PDB, a cable.

Related Item Tag The tag of the related item which has an electrical association
with the main item; for example, if the main item is a motor,
related items can include cables, signals, control stations, and
circuits.

Item Type Indicates the item type of the main item or related item.

Status in project Indicates the status of the item. For details, see Understanding
Statuses (on page 717).

Claim Mode Indicates whether the item, if claimed, has been claimed

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1108

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Header Description
exclusively or shared, or whether it has been released from the
claim. In As-Built, this property is read-only.

New Item Indicates whether an item has been newly-created in the

project. Note that after merging the item, this field appears
blank.

Item Path Indicates the parent hierarchy of a non- unique item. For
example, in the case of a circuit, the item path shows the
PDB\Bus\(Cell) hierarchy.

Description The item description, if appropriate, as it appears for the item

properties.

Plant Group Indicates the plant group to which the item belongs.

Result Status Indicates the result of a major operation such as Merge. For
example, the status Done appears after the software commits
an operation successfully.

When merging an item that is connected in parallel with another equipment item, the
software automatically merges all the items that are connected in parallel to the scoped item.
For example, if you select Motor-1 that has been connected in parallel with Motor-2 and Motor-3,
the software will also automatically merge Motor-2 and Motor-3 and their upstream items all the
way to their power sources.

Project Management Toolbar

Contains the commands that you can run from the Project Management table (see "Project
Management Table (Project)" on page 1108).

Icon Command Explanation

Project Opens the Project Status dialog box, which displays

Management the status of the current project status, both with
respect to SmartPlant Foundation.

Add Items Allows you to add items that you added or modified in
the project for eventually merging to As-Built.

Apply Applies the command to change the status of the

items whose check boxes are selected. The action
performed depends on the status of the item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1109

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Icon Command Explanation

Set Claim Mode Allows you to mark any item with status Scoped or
Merged for claiming, if the check box beside the item
is selected. Note that after claiming an item
exclusively, it becomes unavailable for claiming to
other projects. After clicking Apply, the status of
each marked item changes to Claimed.

Mark as Marks an item with status Merged for claiming again

Reclaimed in the project, if the check box beside the item is
selected. After clicking Apply, the status of the item
changes to Claimed.

Mark as Marks an item with status Claimed for being ready to

Completed merge back to As-Built, if the check box beside the
item is selected. You can then merge these items in
As-Built.

Clear Mark as Marks an item with status Completed for returning to

Completed Claimed status, if the check box beside the item is
selected. After clicking Apply, the status of each
marked item changes to Claimed. The claim mode,
Exclusive or Shared, returns to what it was when the
item was originally claimed.

Release Claim Marks an item with status Claimed for releasing from
the claim, if the check box beside the item is
selected. After clicking Apply, the status of the item
changes to Scoped as the software re- scopes these
items.

Release from Marks an item with status Merged for releasing from
Merge the merge, if the check box beside the item is
selected. After clicking Apply, the status of the item
changes to Scoped and the software makes it
possible to claim these items for other projects.

Test Merge Allows you to test the merging of items that have
status Completed and for which you have selected
the check boxes. This operation can assist you in
troubleshooting problems before you commit to
merging the data.

Publish After Publishes all documents that have already been

Merge published in the scope of the project and afterwards
merged into As-Built. (For use with an integrated
environment.)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1110

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Icon Command Explanation

Find Completed Opens the Find dialog box, which allows you to find
Items all the completed items in the project. You can select
all or some of the completed items and then merge
them into As-Built.

Show Merged Filters the display to show only those items that have
Items been merged back into As-Built. Note that the filter
relates to the status of the items in the database and
not necessarily the status currently displayed in the
Project Management table.

Show Claimed Filters the display to show only those items that have
Items been claimed for the project. Note that the filter
relates to the status of the items in the database and
not necessarily the status currently displayed in the
Project Management table.

Show Items Filters the display to show only those items that have
Deleted from been deleted from the project. Note that the filter
Project relates to the status of the items in the database and
not necessarily the status currently displayed in the
Project Management table.

Show Item Displays the values of the item properties for an item
Properties similar to the Properties window view, but in read-
only mode. Click Alphabetic to display the
properties in alphabetical order; click Categorized
to display the properties grouped by specific
categories. The software can display the properties
of only one item at a time; the item for which the row is
highlighted.

Select Related Allows you to select all related items for which the
Items main item is already selected for the next action that
you want to perform. A sub-menu option also allows
you to clear the selection of all related items.

Clear All Clears all items from the Project Management table.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1111

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Icon Command Explanation

Clear Clears each item from the Project Management table

if the check box beside it is selected.

Excel Report Generates a report in Excel showing the current

selection in the Project Management table, reflecting
the selected display mode. In the report, you can
expand the main items to display their related items.

Display Allows you to specify the display mode in the data

window. You can display the main items only, the
main items expanded to show their related items, or a
list showing all items. If a particular related item is
associated with more than one main item, that related
item appears once only in the list view. In list view
only, you can sort the items as required by clicking the
column headers in the data window.

Project Status Dialog Box

Displays the current project status, with respect to the As-Built plant and allows you to update or
modify those statuses. This dialog box opens when you click on the Project Management
toolbar.

▪ You can change the status of a Smart Electrical project only from a project. If you open the
Project Status dialog box in As-Built, the project status is view-only and it cannot be
changed.
▪ You cannot claim items in a project whose status has been set to Completed or Merged.
Smart Electrical project status — Indicates whether the project is Active, Completed,
Merged, or Canceled. If your project status is Merged, then no further actions are available on
this dialog box.
Reactivate — Returns the Smart Electrical project status to active. This button is available
only when the Smart Electrical project status is Completed and the SmartPlant project
status, if applicable, is Active.
Complete Project — Sets the Smart Electrical project status to completed. This button is
available only when the Smart Electrical project status is Active and the SmartPlant project
status is also Active. When you click Complete Project, a confirmation message appears.
Merge Project — Sets the Smart Electrical project status to Merged. This button is available
only when the Smart Electrical project status is Completed and the SmartPlant project
status is also Completed. When you click Merge Project, a confirmation message appears.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1112

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Cancel Project — Clears all claims on all objects and sets the Smart Electrical project status
to Canceled. This button is available only when the SmartPlant project status is
Canceled. If the Plant is not registered with SmartPlant, then the project is simply canceled out
of Smart Electrical.
Claim All Completed Items — (not available from As-Built) Reverts the status of all completed
items to Claimed. This command is only available for active projects. For more information,
see Change the Status of All Completed Items to Claimed (on page 729).

Select Project Dialog Box

Allows you to select a project for scoping items.
Project — Allows you to select a project for scoping items.
Description — Displays the project description.
Status — Displays the project status: Active, Completed, Merged, or Canceled.
View related items in scope — Allows you to view the items related to the items you select for
scoping. Note that selecting this option slows down the performance. The software scopes
related items automatically even if they are not viewed.

Power Distribution Boards

Add New Internal Item Dialog Box
Allows you to add an internal item to a PDB circuit from the Circuit Common Properties dialog
box. Internal items can include various types of disconnect equipment, converting equipment,
and measuring equipment.
Available Items — Allows you to select an item to add as an internal item for the circuit.

Circuit Common Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for defining the general properties of a circuit. Also, this dialog box defines
properties that the software uses for associating the circuit with the electrical supply.
General Tab (see "General Tab (Circuit Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1114)
Electrical Data Tab (see "Electrical Data Tab (Circuit Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page
1114)
Associated Items Tab (see "Associated Items Tab (Circuit Common Properties Dialog Box)" on
page 1115)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1113

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

General Tab (Circuit Common Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for general properties that identify and characterize the circuit. An asterisk beside
a property name indicates required data.
Item tag — Identifies the circuit. The tag is the name that appears beside the circuit in the
Electrical Index. The item tag matches the naming convention for the circuit. Click the ellipsis
button to open a dialog box where you can modify the item tag segments that are editable.
The tag property Comply with Naming Convention determines the behavior of an
item tag name. When the property is set to True, the protection masks and segment properties
behave according to the settings for the item naming convention in the Options Manager. When
the property is set to False, you can edit the tag name value freely. Whether you set this
property to True or False, the software ensures compliance with uniqueness if you set the Is
Unique parameter to True in the Item Type Properties option of the Options Manager.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the circuit, for information only.
Circuit mode — Indicates whether the circuit is connected or disconnected. When you
designate the circuit as Connected, the software includes in power calculations any loads that
are associated with the circuit. The results of these calculations appear on the Batch Load
Association dialog box and in various shipped load summary reports.
Circuit type — Describes the type of circuit: incomer, feeder, coupler, or bus riser.
Last applied typical circuit — Indicates the last typical circuit that you applied to the circuit, if
appropriate. This information is read-only.
Last applied typical schematic - Indicates the last typical schematic that you applied to the
circuit, if appropriate. This information is read-only.
Last applied typical I/O set — Indicates the last typical I/O set of signals that you applied to the
circuit, if appropriate. This information is read-only and appears only if you apply a typical I/O
set by dragging it from the Reference Data Explorer or by applying options to the circuit.
Notes — Allows you to enter text, for example, if you want to provide additional information
about the circuit.

Electrical Data Tab (Circuit Common Properties Dialog Box)

Provides electrical information about the equipment connected to the circuit and the circuit
location.
Supply — Allows you to select the type of supply that the circuit produces: alternating current
(AC) or direct current (DC).
Rated voltage — Allows you to select the voltage which the circuit is designed to supply. This
quantity usually appears on the circuit nameplate. You can define and customize the available
rated voltages in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Frequency (Hz) — Allows you to select the operating frequency of the circuit. You can define
and customize the available frequencies in the Data Dictionary Manager. This property applies
for an AC output only.
Number of phases — Allows you to select the number of phases in the circuit output. You can
select 1 or 3 phases. This property applies for an AC supply only.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1114

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Phase arrangement — Allows you to select a value to determine which of the available phases
are in use for the current circuit, for example 3 PH + N (three phases plus neutral). This
property applies for an AC supply only.
Phase 1 — Allows you to associate the circuit with phase 1 of the selected bus. The availability
of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of phases list on the
Electrical Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC supply. Phase 1 refers
to the label L1 or R, as defined by the value of the Phase Label1 bus property.
Phase 2 — Allows you to associate the circuit with phase 2 of the selected bus. The availability
of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of phases list on the
Electrical Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC supply. Phase 2 refers
to the label L2 or S, as defined by the value of the Phase Label2 bus property.
Phase 3 — Allows you to associate the circuit with phase 3 of the selected bus. The availability
of this option depends on the value you selected from the Number of phases list on the
Electrical Data tab and applies only where the selected bus has an AC supply. Phase 3 refers
to the label L3 or T, as defined by the value of the Phase Label3 bus property.
If you want a single-phase load to simulate a two-phase load that is
connected to a three-phase bus, select two of the Phase check boxes to assign the circuit to
two phases.

Location
Specifies the location of the circuit in the electrical network.
Power distribution board - Indicates the power distribution board in which the circuit is located.
Bus — Indicates the bus on which the circuit is located.
Cell — Indicates the cell/bucket/compartment on which the circuit is located, if applicable.

Associated Items Tab (Circuit Common Properties Dialog Box)

Provides optional information for signals and internal items associated with the circuit. Also,
allows to associate a lookup table with a circuit internal component.

Associated loads
Displays the list of loads that are associated with the circuit. It is possible to display only those
loads that are associated directly with the current circuit (this is the default option) or all the
loads associated downstream with the current circuit.
Item Tag — Displays the item tag for the associated load.
Type — Displays the electrical equipment item type of the associated load, for example, motor,
heater.
Show only loads associated directly — Displays in the Associated loads box only those
loads that are connected directly to the current circuit. (This is the default setting.)
Show all loads associated downstream — Displays in the Associated loads box all the loads
that are connected downstream to the current circuit. Note that the application resets the
selection to the default option after reopening this dialog box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1115

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

After selecting this option, the software retrieves all the downstream loads
that are associated with the current circuit. If this electrical network branch is long, it can
take a long time to retrieve all the data.

Circuit signals
Describes all the signals that are associated with the circuit.
Item Tag — Displays the signal tag for the associated circuit signal.
Equipment Type — Displays the equipment type of the item that the signal originates from.
Description — Displays a description of the associated I/O signal.
I/O Type — Displays the signal I/O type according to whether the signal is an input or an output,
and whether the signal type is analog or digital.
Loop Number — Displays the loop number, if one exists, for signal data that you retrieved from
Smart Instrumentation.

Associated cables
Describes all the cables that are associated with the circuit.
Reference Cable — Displays the reference cable for the cable associated with the circuit.
Specification — Indicates the family of cables to which the cable belongs.
Cable Formation — Displays the cable formation (number and size of conductors) for the
cable.

Circuit internals
Displays details of the components in the selected circuit. The values are read-only.
To update the circuit components, you need to modify the selected circuit in the
Electrical Index. For more information, refer to Related Topics.
Component Type — Displays the type of component in the circuit, such as a circuit breaker or
a fuse.
Component Tag — Displays the component identifying tag, as shown in the Electrical Index.
Lookup Table — Allows you to select a lookup table that you want to associate with an internal
component of a circuit. You will then be able to apply this associated lookup table to a project
circuit when you run the Apply Lookup Tables feature on the Apply Options dialog box to
propagate the lookup table data to the circuit internal components.
Order — Determines the position of the component in relation to the bus when the circuit
contains more than one component. The greater the value, the further the component is from
the bus.
Show in SLD — Indicates whether the software shows a graphical representation of the
component when you generate a single line diagram for the PDB.
Add — Opens the Add Internal Item dialog box to enable you to add new internal components
for the circuit.
Move Out — Allows you to move a circuit internal out of the circuit and place it under the circuit
in the Electrical Engineer as stand-alone disconnect equipment. It is only possible to move
out an internal whose Order value in the Circuit internals pane is 1.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1116

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Remove — Removes the currently selected component from the circuit.

Circuit Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define a circuit after dragging a reference circuit from the
Reference Data Explorer to a cable block diagram. The software creates this circuit in the
cable block diagram and the Electrical Index in the location that you specify here.
Power distribution board — Allows you to select a power distribution board where the new
circuit will be located.
Bus — Allows you to select a bus where the new circuit will be located.
Cell — Allows you to select a cell where the new circuit will be located.
Create cell — If a cell that you need does not exist yet, allows you to create a new cell.

Set Circuit Sequence Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to change the sequence of circuits of a selected bus.
You can change the sequence by doing one of the following:
▪ Select a row and click the Up and Down arrows.
▪ Drag a row up or down the list. You can see a tooltip that indicates the selected row and
the row before or after which the dragged row will be placed.
▪ Change the sequence by changing the Starting sequence and Increment by values.
Note that you cannot enter 0 (zero) in either field.
Starting sequence — Allows you to enter a value that will determine the starting sequence of
the circuits for the current bus.
Increment by — Allows you to enter a value by which you want to increment the sequence of all
the circuits belonging to the current bus.
Sequence — Displays the current sequence number of a circuit.
Circuit Item Tag — Displays the item tag of a circuit.
Circuit Type — Displays the type of a circuit.
Cell Item Tag — Displays the cell item tag of a circuit.
Circuit Description — Displays the description of a circuit if available.

▪ Setting the sequence of circuits within cells not in a consecutive manner can cause a
haphazard or incorrect placement of these circuits in generated SLDs. Some of the circuits
in these SLDs may be drawn within cell frames to which they do not belong. Furthermore,
there may be an overlap of cell frames. If the software detects that some of the circuits are
not ordered consecutively, a warning message is displayed that prompts you to change the
circuit sequence in a consecutive manner.
▪ Also note that couplers are always placed in the rightmost position of the bus and their
respective bus risers are placed in the leftmost position regardless of their sequence
numbers.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1117

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Cell Size Dialog Box

Enables you to change the size of a compartment so that it can accommodate a cell with a
different size. You can resize a compartment that is already assigned to a cell.
Width — Enter the cell width.
Height — Enter the cell height.

▪ One unit of measure represents the width or height of a standard cell. You can make the
size of a cell as big as needed as long as the cell is within the limits of the defined PDB
cabinet. Also, you can define a cell to have a fraction of a cell size. For example, enter 0.5
for half the cell width or height.
▪ When decreasing the size of a compartment, the maximum number of compartments that a
vertical section or a horizontal row can have depends on the value that you enter for the
Compartments in Row and Compartments in Section properties in the Properties
window for the power distribution board to which the cell belongs.
▪ When increasing the size of a compartment, the software enlarges the compartment only to
its right or down.
▪ When increasing the size of a compartment, the software checks if the adjacent cells that
are under and to the right of the current cell can accommodate the new cell size. Note that
you have to divide the adjacent compartment to prepare it for the new increased cell.
▪ You cannot exceed the boundaries of a vertical section. You can only increase the number
of compartments within the boundaries of a vertical section. You can increase the height of
a compartment. In this case, the compartment will occupy the full size of the compartment
located directly below it.
▪ The software resizes the compartments with the upper left corner of the compartment as its
point of origin.
▪ You cannot resize a compartment if its new size infringes on an adjacent compartment that
is occupied by another cell.

Power Distribution Board Structure Dialog Box

Allows you to design the physical structure of a power distribution board. This structure takes
the form of a layout grid made up of units for which you set the required height and width. You
define the number of vertical sections and the number of rows in the PDB. After designing a
PDB structure, you can open the layout drawing for a particular PDB and make the required cell
associations with appropriate layout grid units.

General definitions
These settings allow you to define the height and width of the grid units that make up the PDB
layout drawing. The width of the vertical sections and the height of the grid rows are measured
in these units. Also, you can define the current PDB as double-sided.
Item tag — Displays the name of the power distribution board for which you are designing this
structure.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1118

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Double-sided PDB — Allows you to set the current PDB as double-sided. This will enable you
to define a section side as front or rear.
Grid unit height — Allows you to define the height of the grid units in the PDB layout
drawing. This setting determines the height of the grid rows.
Grid unit width — Allows you to define the width of the grid units in the PDB layout
drawing. This setting affects the width of the vertical sections.

Section definitions
These settings allow you to define the vertical sections of the current PDB.
Number of sections — Allows you to enter the number of sections that will comprise the
current PDB. You can add more sections at the bottom of the list if you click Add.
Sequence — Displays the sequence number of the vertical sections in the PDB.
Section — Allows you to type a name for a vertical section.
Width — Allows you to type a number that will define the width of the current section. The
value is measured in grid units. For example, if you type 3 under Width and the grid unit width
is 10 inches, the section width will be 30 inches.
Section Side — Allows you to set the section side as Front or Rear.
Add — Allows you to add another section to the bottom of the list. The new section will appear
on the right side of the PDB in the PDB design drawing.
Move Up — Allows you to move a selected section up the list. Note that the software retains
the name of the section after moving it.
Move Down — Allows you to move a selected section down the list. Note that the software
retains the name of the section after moving it.
Delete — Allows you to delete a section from the bottom of the list. You can select and delete
several consecutive section from the bottom of the list. Note that the software does not allow
you to delete a section that already contains an assigned cell. Remove the assigned cell from
the PDB layout before deleting the redundant section.

Grid rows
Allows you to define the vertical structure of the current PDB. That is, you define the number of
rows that will make up the height of the current PDB.
Number of rows — Allows you to enter the number of rows that will comprise the layout of the
current PDB. You can add more rows at the top of the list if you click Add.
Row naming type — Allows you to automatically name the rows according to the type that you
select. The options are:
▪ Free text — Allows you to type any alpha-numeric characters that you need. This is the
default setting. Note that if you already have names for your rows, changing this setting to
Free text removes all the names that were displayed before.
▪ A.B.C. — Names the rows as A, B, C, and so on (in ascending order).
▪ 1,2,3 — Names the rows as 1, 2, 3, and so on (in ascending order).
▪ C.B.A. — Names the rows as C, B, A, and so on (in descending order).
▪ 3,2,1 — Names the rows as 3, 2, 1, and so on (in descending order).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1119

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Vertical Position — Displays the vertical sequence numbers of the grid rows. Note that the top
of the list always shows the lowest row in the PDB.
Row — Displays the row names. Also allows you to type a name as you require, which
overrides the automatic naming.
Add — Allows you to add another row to the top of the list. Note that the software names the
added row according to the selected naming type. You can click in the required row name and
over type the name as you need.
Delete — Allows you to delete a row from the top of the list. You can select and delete several
consecutive rows from the top of the list. Note that the software does not allow you to delete a
row that is already assigned to a cell. Remove the assigned cell from the PDB layout before
deleting the redundant row.

Command Buttons
Apply — After changing the data, refreshes the display of data in the dialog box.

Select Alternative Power Source Dialog Box

Displays the contents of the Electrical Engineer, from which you can select an alternative
power source when working with dual power source equipment.
OK — This command is enabled after you select a valid item for use as an alternative power
source.
Cancel — Closes the dialog box without selecting an alternative power source.
Expand — Expands the hierarchy below the selected item.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box to allow you to select a suitable item for use as an
alternative power source.

Total Bus Load Validation Dialog Box

Allows you to validate the total loads on buses for selected power distribution boards or
buses. The software calculates the total line current for all selected buses and displays the
results for each bus that you included in the selection. You can export the list to an Excel file for
checking or marking up the information conveniently.
PDB (Power Distribution Board) — Displays the name of the power distribution board with
which the bus is associated.
Bus — Displays the name of the bus for which the software validates the load data.
Overload — If the total calculated line current exceeds the maximum allowable load for the bus
the software displays Yes to indicate that the bus is overloaded. The maximum allowable load
equals the maximum bus capacity plus the percentage overload specified for the bus.
Total Calculated Line Current (A) — The sum of the current in amperes for all the loads that
are attached to the bus.
Bus Current Rating (A) — The maximum rated current that the bus is designed to carry.
Required Overload Percentage — The percentage overload allowed on the bus before the
software displays a warning message.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1120

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Actual Overload Percentage — The actual percentage overload above the maximum bus
capacity. If the total line current is less than or equal to the maximum bus capacity, displays a
value of 0 (zero).
Required Spare Load Percentage — The percentage spare load allocated on the bus for
future addition of loads.
Actual Spare Load Percentage — The percentage difference between the value of the bus
current rating that you specify on the Batch Load Association dialog box and the calculated
line current. If the total line current is greater than or equal to the required spare load
percentage, displays a value of 0 (zero).
Close — Click to close this dialog box.
Excel Report — Click to display the data in this dialog box in a Microsoft Excel file. This is
useful if you want to format the layout or print out the data.

Zoom Options Dialog Box

Enables you to modify the magnification level of the displayed PDB layout design sheet.
Fit to cabinet size — Displays the entire PDB layout design sheet.
Use same zoom factor (%) for height and width — Sets the same zoom ratio for both the
height and width of the cell boxes in the PDB layout design sheet.
Size — With the option Use same zoom factor (%) for height and width, enter the cell box
zoom factor for the cell height and width.
Select custom zoom factor (%) — Sets the zoom ratio independently for the height and width
of the cell boxes in the PDB layout design sheet.
Height — With the option Select custom zoom factor (%), enter the cell box zoom factor for
the cell height.
Width — With the option Select custom zoom factor (%), enter the cell box zoom factor for the
cell width.
Use default size — Displays the PDB layout design sheet at the original zoom level.

Redlining and Annotations

Text Properties Dialog Box
Enables you to add or modify an annotation and create a watermark in a single line diagram.
General Tab (see "General Tab (Text Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1122)
Properties Tab (see "Properties Tab (Text Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1122)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1121

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

General Tab (Text Properties Dialog Box)

Enables you to enter an annotation text string in a single line diagram.

Text
Caption — Type the text that you want to appear in the in the annotation box.

Watermark
Set as watermark — Select the box if you want to use the text as a watermark, which means
that it appears behind other drawing items. This option is not available when editing an
annotation.

Annotation locking
Lock to item tag — Select the box to lock the position of the annotation text to the selected
item tag. In this case, when moving the item tag, the attached annotation moves with it.
Move independently — Select this option to be able to move the annotation text independently
from the item tag that it is locked to. For this option, the software keeps the annotation text
locked to the item tag but allows you to move the annotation text too.

Properties Tab (Text Properties Dialog Box)

Sets text properties such as font, size, alignment in the text box, and rotation for an annotation
in a single line diagram.

Style
The preview window displays the appearance of the selected font.
Font — Click to open the standard Windows Font dialog box to define the font, font style, size,
color, and other properties.

Border
Show Border — Select this option to display a border around the text.

Text alignment
Horizontal — Select the horizontal alignment of the text: left, center, or right.
Vertical — Select the vertical alignment of the text: top, center, bottom, or justified.

Placement
Rotation — Type the rotation angle of the text in degrees. You can enter positive values from 0
to 360 degrees, or negative values to 180 degrees. The text rotates counter-clockwise when
you type a negative value.
Orientation — Select the orientation of the text inside the text box: horizontal or vertical.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1122

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Reference Items
Associate Reference Cable Dialog Box
Enables you to select an existing reference cable or specify a new reference cable to associate
with a control station or an item profile.
Cable specification — Allows you to select an appropriate cable specification. You must
select a cable specification before you can select a cable.

Cable definition
Select from cable library — Choose this option to select an existing reference cable.
Reference cable — Indicates the selected reference cable for associating with the control
station or profile.
Select — Opens the Reference Cable Library window, which shows the cables that belong to
the cable specification that you selected.
Specify construction — Select this option to define a new reference cable based on a
specified conductor arrangement. This option is available only when you define a reference
cable for an item profile and a reference circuit.
Conductor arrangement — Allows you to define the number and arrangement of the
conductors in the cable. The following standard options are available:
▪ Single core cable — Creates a current-carrying cable with a single core. For this option,
you can specify an arrangement of any number of single-core conductors, for example, 3
single-core cables, but you cannot specify any additional conductors.
▪ 2-core cable — Creates a cable with two current-carrying conductors and no additional
conductors. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ 2+1-core cable — Creates a cable with two current-carrying conductors and one additional
conductor. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ 3-core cable — Creates a cable with three current-carrying conductors and no additional
conductors. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ 3+1-core cable — Creates a cable with three current-carrying conductors and one
additional conductor. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ 3+2-core cable — Creates a cable with three current-carrying conductors and two
additional conductors. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ Multicore cable — Creates a cable with multiple conductors. For this option, you can
specify any number of conductors and additional conductors.
You can change the names of the standard conductor arrangement items in the Data
Dictionary Manager. However, the software performs calculations according to the position in
the list of the item that you select. For example, a 2-core cable is always the second item in the
list.
Conductors — Allows you to specify the number of conductors within the cable used for
carrying the current, excluding the neutral, the ground, or additional conductors. If you selected
Single- core or Multicore as the conductor arrangement, this option allows you to specify the
number of conductors or cores in the cable that carry the electric current.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1123

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Additional conductors — If you selected Multicore as the conductor arrangement, allows you
to specify the number of additional non-current-carrying conductors, such as ground wires.

Equipment Profile Properties Dialog Box

Defines a profile in the Reference Data Explorer. For each profile, you can select a typical
schematic, a lookup table, a catalog item, associated cables, control stations, and a typical
circuit with protection devices. For a motor with an internal heater, you can select a cable and
typical circuit for the heater.
General Tab (see "General Tab (Equipment Profile Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1124)
Protection Devices Tab (see "Protection Devices Tab (Equipment Profile Properties Dialog
Box)" on page 1125)
Space Heater Tab (see "Space Heater Tab (Equipment Profile Properties Dialog Box)" on page
1125)
Miscellaneous Tab (see "Miscellaneous Tab (Equipment Profile Properties Dialog Box)" on page
1126)

General Tab (Equipment Profile Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies values for general profile properties that apply to loads in the Electrical Index.
Profile tag — Allows you to enter a tag name that identifies the profile.
Item type — Indicates the equipment type according to the folder in which you created the
profile. The value is read-only.
Set as default — Defines this profile as the default for the specified equipment type when you
apply a profile to a load.
Reference item — Allows you to select a reference item for copying the property values when
you apply the profile.

Associated cables and cable assembly

Displays the reference cables and cable assembly that the software associates with the load
when you apply the profile.
Cables — Describes the properties of the associated cables. In particular, this window shows
the conductor arrangement.
Add — Opens the Select Reference Cable dialog box to associate a new reference cable with
the profile.
Edit — Opens the Select Reference Cable dialog box to select a different reference cable for
associating with the profile.
Remove — Removes the selected associated cable from the profile.
Cable assembly — Displays the reference cable assembly that you selected in the Find dialog
box.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box where you can find an appropriate cable assembly for the
current profile.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1124

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Remove — Removes the selected associated cable assembly from the profile.

Typical control station

Displays the names and descriptions of typical control stations that the software associates with
the load when you apply the profile.
Control stations may have associated cables.
Add — Click to display all the available control stations on the Find dialog box, where you can
select a control station for the profile.
Remove — Removes the selected control station and its cable from the profile.

Protection Devices Tab (Equipment Profile Properties Dialog

Box)
Specifies typical circuits for use when applying profiles to equipment in the Electrical Index.
Typical circuit — Displays the circuit that the software associates with the equipment when you
apply the profile.
Find — Allows you to select a typical circuit.
Clear — Allows you to clear the selected typical circuit association to the equipment.
Function — Indicates the purpose of the selected typical circuit. You define the typical circuit
function when you create the typical circuit. For loads, the typical circuit function is always
Feeder.
Internal components — Displays details of the internal components for the selected typical
circuit. For example, an internal component can be a contractor or a fuse.

Space Heater Tab (Equipment Profile Properties Dialog Box)

Enables you to define cables and typical circuits associated with a space heater. This option is
available only for profiles that include a motor with an internal heater.

Associated cables
Displays the reference cables that the software associates with the space heater when you
apply the profile.
(Data window) — Describes the properties of the associated cables. In particular, this window
shows the conductor arrangement.
Add — Opens the Select Reference Cable dialog box to associate a new reference cable with
the heater.
Edit — Opens the Select Reference Cable dialog box to select a different reference cable for
associating with the heater.
Remove — Removes the selected associated cable from the heater.
Typical circuit — Displays the circuit that the software associates with the space heater when
you apply the profile.
Find — Click to select a typical circuit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1125

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Clear — Allows you to clear the selected typical circuit association to the space heater.
Function — Indicates the purpose of the typical circuit. You define the typical circuit function
when you create the typical circuit. An example of a function is a feeder.
Internal components — Describes details of the internal components for the selected typical
circuit.

Miscellaneous Tab (Equipment Profile Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies a typical schematic and lookup table for a profile.
Typical schematic — Allows you to select a typical schematic for the item to which you want to
apply the profile. The software then uses this typical schematic when you generate a schematic
for the item.
Find — Allows you to display all the available typical schematics on the Find dialog box, where
you can select the required typical schematic for the profile.
Clear — Allows you to clear the selected typical schematic association to the item.
Lookup table — Allows you to select a lookup table for the required item to which you apply the
profile. The software then uses this lookup table when you generate a schematic for the item.
Find — Allows you to display all the available lookup tables on the Find dialog box, where you
can select the required lookup table for the profile.
Clear — Allows you to clear the selected lookup table association to the item.
Typical instruments — Allows you to select one or more typical instruments for the profile. If
required, you can add the same typical instrument more than once. When you apply the profile
to an item, the software creates associated instruments for the item based on the typical
instruments.
Add — Allows you to display all the available typical instruments on the Find dialog box, where
you can select the required typical instrument for the profile.
Remove — Removes the currently selected typical instrument from the list.

Lookup Table Properties Dialog Box

Defines default values for a set of properties that you can apply to a project item.
Data Tab (see "Data Tab (Lookup Table Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1127)
Structure Tab (see "Structure Tab (Lookup Table Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1128)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1126

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Data Tab (Lookup Table Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies sets of data values for the properties defined on the Structure tab. You usually
define the structure once, but you will probably add data quite often. The key values define the
uniqueness of each row of data. When you apply a lookup table to a plant item and select a
particular row, the software enters the values in that row for the appropriate properties of the
plant item.
Lookup table tag — Allows you to enter a tag name that identifies the lookup table.
Set as default — Select to define this lookup table as the default for the specified equipment
type when you apply a lookup table to a load.

▪ Each time you define a row of data, the software adds a new blank row automatically at the
end of the list. To define more than 17 rows, you have to do one of the following: increase
the window size, maximize the window, close the window and then re-open it, or press the
'down arrow' key on the keyboard.
▪ Each combination of data in the key fields must be unique. The software indicates key
fields by double sets of asterisks (**) in the header labels. For more details, see Lookup
Table Data Example (on page 77).
▪ For a 2- or 3-winding transformer, the Number of Secondaries property always appears by
default as a key field. For a 2- winding transformer, it has a value of 1; for a 3-winding
transformer, it has a value of 2.
▪ You can split the view of the data columns by dragging or double-clicking the split box at the
left of the horizontal scroll bar. This allows you to scroll the columns independently in each
split region. To remove the split, drag the vertical divider to the left.
▪ You can sort the rows of data according to a particular column by clicking the column
header. Repeatedly clicking a column header displays the data in alternating ascending
and descending order.
Remove — Removes the currently selected row of data.
Copy Row — Copies the data from the currently selected row to the Clipboard.
Paste Row — Pastes data from the Clipboard to the currently selected row. This action
replaces all existing values in the row.
Excel Report — Click to display the data in this dialog box in a Microsoft Excel file. This is
useful if you want to format the layout or print out the data. Also, after correcting errors, you can
use the Excel file as a data source for re-importing the data using the Import Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1127

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Structure Tab (Lookup Table Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the properties for which you want to assign default values to a plant item. You define
each property as an input (key value) or an output.
Lookup table tag — Allows you to enter a tag name that identifies the lookup table.
Set as default — Select to define this lookup table as the default for the specified equipment
type when you apply a lookup table to a plant item.
Definition — Displays the properties included in the lookup table.
Add — Adds a new row. You define a property and its characteristics in the Edit section of
this dialog box.
Remove — Removes the currently selected property from the lookup table definition.
Up — Moves the selected row above the previous row each time that you click this option. The
order of the rows affects the order in which the properties appear on the Data tab.
Down — Moves the selected row below the next row each time that you click this option. The
order of the rows affects the order in which the properties appear on the Data tab.

Edit
Provides options for you to select a property and specify how it behaves when you apply the
lookup table.
Item type — Displays the item type for which the lookup table applies. The value is read-only,
except in the case of transformers, where you can select whether to show the properties of the
primary winding or of a secondary winding.
Property — Allows you to select a property for use in the lookup table. In the case of a lookup
table for a transformer, the Number of Secondaries property appears by default and you
cannot delete it.
Caption — Allows you to type any text to use as the caption for the property. The caption
appears in the header row on the Data tab.
Input / output — Allows you to specify how the software uses the property when you apply the
lookup table to a load. Available options are:
▪ Input — The property behaves as a key - that is, it specifies the uniqueness of each set of
lookup table values on the Data tab, in addition to providing the data value.
▪ Output — The property only provides a data value when you apply the lookup table to a
load. This option is disabled for read-only data.
Overwrite option — Allows you to specify whether the property value overwrites an existing
value when you apply the lookup table to a load.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1128

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Reference Cable Common Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for defining general cable properties and design details for reference cables from
which you create plant cables in the Electrical Index.
General Tab (see "General Tab (Reference Cable Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page
1129)
Design Data Tab (see "Design Data Tab (Reference Cable Common Properties Dialog Box)" on
page 1132)
Connections Tab (see "Connections Tab (Reference Cable Common Properties Dialog Box)" on
page 1134)
Procurement Tab (see "Procurement Tab (Reference Cable Common Properties Dialog Box)"
on page 1134)

General Tab (Reference Cable Common Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for general properties that identify and characterize the cable. An asterisk beside
a property name indicates required data.
Reference cable — Requires you to specify an item tag that uniquely identifies the reference
cable. The item tag appears beside the cable in the Reference Data Explorer. You must enter
a string in this box to define the cable.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the cable, for information only.
Cable category — Displays the purpose for which the cable is used. The cable category can
be power, control, grounding, or instrumentation. The software automatically assigns the cable
category according to the folder in which you create the cable in the Reference Data Explorer,
and you cannot change this value.
Cable specification — Requires you to select the cable specification, which identifies the cable
type and properties, and groups cables that have common properties. You must select a value
for this property. You can define and customize cable specifications in the Data Dictionary
Manager.
Cable usage — Allows you to specify a value for this property to further categorize the cable,
for example, for control voltage definitions, level definitions, and so forth. You can define and
customize cable usages in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Armor type — Allows you to specify the type of armor used to protect the cable from its
environment. For example, types of armor include non-armored, steel, or lead. You can define
and customize armor types in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Outer jacket insulation — Allows you to specify the material used for the cable jacket. For
example, insulation materials include PVC and polyethylene. You can define and customize
insulation materials in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Notes — Allows you to type user notes, for example if you want to provide additional information
regarding special features of the cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1129

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Construction
Describes the physical characteristics related to the construction of the cable. When the
reference item is a non- sized power cable, you can edit the data; otherwise, the items are
read-only. The available values depend on the conductor arrangement you select.
Conductor arrangement — Requires you to select an option for a new reference cable that
defines the number and arrangement of the conductors in the cable (not applicable for
instrumentation cables). Your selection affects how you can modify the cable
construction. The following standard options are available:
▪ Single core cable — Creates a current-carrying cable with a single core. For this
option, you can specify an arrangement of any number of single-core conductors, for
example, 3 single-core cables, but you cannot specify any additional conductors.
▪ 2-core cable — Creates a cable with two current-carrying conductors and no additional
conductors. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ 2+1-core cable — Creates a cable with two current-carrying conductors and one
additional conductor. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ 3-core cable — Creates a cable with three current-carrying conductors and no
additional conductors. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ 3+1-core cable — Creates a cable with three current-carrying conductors and one
additional conductor. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ 3+2-core cable — Creates a cable with three current-carrying conductors and two
additional conductors. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ Multicore cable — Creates a cable with multiple conductors. For this option, you can
specify any number of conductors and additional conductors.
You can change the names of the standard conductor arrangement items in the Data
Dictionary Manager. However, the software performs calculations according to the position in
the list of the item that you select. Also, you can define new conductor arrangements that the
software can use to filter the available reference cables when sizing plant cables.
Current-carrying conductors — For the Multicore conductor arrangement, allows you to
specify the number of conductors within the cable used for carrying the current (not applicable
for instrumentation cables).
For all other conductor arrangements, specifies the number of power-carrying conductors
depending on the specific conductor arrangement that you have selected.
Size — Allows you to select a standard size for the current- carrying conductors. You can
define and customize the available cable sizes in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Neutral conductors — Allows you to specify the number of neutral conductors. The availability
of this setting depends on the conductor arrangement that you select.
Size — Allows you to select a standard size for the neutral-conductors. You can define and
customize the available cable sizes in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Grounding conductors — Allows you to specify the number of grounding conductors. The
availability of this setting depends on the conductor arrangement that you select.
Size — Allows you to select a standard size for the grounding-conductors. You can define and
customize the available cable sizes in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Cable formation — Displays computed information based on the total number and the size of
the conductors or cable sets specified.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1130

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Set type — (available for instrumentation cables only) Allows you to select a standard value that
represents the arrangement of the wires in the set, such as Wire, Pair, Pair w/Shield, Triad,
Triad w/Shield, and so forth. You can select values of this property for a new cable only; you
cannot select a different value for an existing or duplicated cable.
The value Other is available for future use. If you do not want this value to
appear in the list, make it invisible in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Number of sets — (available for instrumentation cables only) Allows you to type the number
of cable sets that the cable contains. Click the ellipsis button to open the Cable Set
Properties dialog box (on page 971) where you can modify the set definitions if required.
Material — Requires you to specify the conductor material used for the current-carrying
conductors or cable sets. The software automatically copies to plant power cables the values in
the Conductor Material Coefficients lookup table that are appropriate for the selected
conductor material; these values are required for short circuit cable sizing. You can define and
customize conductor materials in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Insulation — Requires you to specify the material used for insulating the current-carrying
conductors or cable sets. For example, insulation materials include polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
and polyethylene. The software automatically copies to plant power cables the values in the
Conductor Insulation Temperatures lookup table that are appropriate for the selected
insulation material; these values are required for short circuit cable sizing. You can define and
customize insulation materials in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Overall shield — (available for instrumentation cables only) Allows you to specify an overall
shield for the cable. When you select this option, you need to specify the size and material of
the overall shield.
Communication wire — (available for instrumentation cables only) Allows you to specify a
communication wire for the cable.
Color pattern — Allows you to select a color pattern for the cable from one of the patterns
available. Click the ellipsis button to define or modify a color pattern.
Insulation voltage rating — Requires you to select a standard voltage rating that corresponds
to the manufacturer voltage rating for the cable. You can define and customize the available
voltage ratings, including units, in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Insulation temperature rating — Requires you to select a standard temperature rating that
corresponds to the manufacturer rating of the maximum operating temperature for the
cable. You can define and customize the available temperature ratings, including units, in the
Data Dictionary Manager.
Basic ampacity in air — Requires you to define the ampere capacity of the cable in air under
the basic conditions that the manufacturer specifies. This quantity is a measure of the ability of
the cable to deliver electric current in air. Enter a value with the required units of current. For
power cables, this value is required for sizing; for other types of cables, the value is optional.
Basic ampacity in ground — Requires you to define the ampere capacity of the cable in the
ground under the basic conditions that the manufacturer specifies. This quantity is a measure
of the ability of the cable to deliver electric current under the ground. Enter a value with the
required units of current. For power cables, this value is required for sizing; for other types of
cables, the value is optional.
Custom basic ampacity — This property is not used in reference cable definitions.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1131

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Reactance per unit length — Requires you to enter the reactance per unit length for a cable
that carries alternating current (AC) according to the value that the manufacturer specifies for
the cable type. Enter a value with the required units. For power cables, this value is required
for sizing; for other types of cables, the value is optional.
Resistance per unit length — Requires you to enter the resistance per unit length according to
the value that the manufacturer specifies for the cable type. Enter a value with the required
units. For power cables, this value is required for sizing; for other types of cables, the value is
optional.

Parallel cables
Describes the number of cables in parallel and the list of cable names. This information only
applies to plant cables.

Design Data Tab (Reference Cable Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Enables you to define the cable drum sizes, routing, length, and so forth. An asterisk beside a
property name indicates required data.

Drum definition
Allows you to define cable drum parameters that are used to assign plant cables to drums. Once
you assign a reference cable to a particular drum, the software uses these values for manual
and automatic cable assignment to drums.
When assigning cables to drums manually, you associate a drum with a specific reference
cable. You can define multiple drum sizes for each reference cable. These drum sizes are
based on various cable lengths that a drum can hold. Once you associate a drum with a
reference cable that has multiple drum sizes, you can select the most appropriate drum size for
a particular drum.
When assigning plant cables to drums automatically, the software optimizes the cable
assignment. Smart Electrical optimizes this assignment based on the drum sizes, the maximum
percentage of free cable length on the drums and the scrap cable length that you have defined
for each reference cable that you select for drum assignment. For more details, see
Optimization of Cable Drum Assignment. For information about manual definition of cable cuts,
see Define Manual Cable Cuts (on page 158).
You perform automatic cable assignment by using the Assign Drums to Cables wizard. When
using the wizard, you define the assignment parameters by selecting the following:
▪ All the available reference cables or just one specific reference cable.
▪ One or more pulling area.
The wizard will then assign all the plant cables that comply with these parameters. Furthermore,
the software will optimize cable assignment to the drums based on the drum sizes, the
maximum percentage of free cable lengths on the drums, and the scrap cable length that you
have defined for each reference cable that you selected in the wizard.
Drum sizes — Allows you to define multiple sets of cable lengths that will be used in cable drum
assignment. Note that all the values that you enter in this grid become available on the Drum
Sizes dialog box when setting a reference cable for a cable drum.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1132

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ Minimum — Allows you to type a value and select an appropriate unit of measure for the
minimum length of cable when ordering from a supplier.
▪ Maximum — Allows you to type a value and select an appropriate unit of measure for the
maximum drum capacity. This value is the total cable length that a drum can hold, including
any spare cable.
▪ Remove — Deletes a row that you select.
Maximum free length on drum (%) — Allows you to type a value which sets the maximum
percentage of free space that can be left on a drum. A drum that has more free space than the
value you set here makes the drum not optimized. Note that this option is applicable to
automatic cable assignment only. The software indicates if a drum is not optimized in the cable
drum log file.
Scrap cable length — Allows you to specify the scrap length for the cables that are based on
the current reference cable. The software will use this value when calculating the total cable
length on a drum in your plant. Note this value has no effect on any other calculations.

Cable routing
This information only applies to plant cables.

Design data
Provides information about the physical characteristics of the cable.
Use external routing length — This information only applies to project cables.
Estimated length — Allows you to enter the estimated length of cable before installation for use
as a default value in project cables.
Design length — Allows you to enter a more accurate length for the cable after installation for
use as a default value in plant cables.
Routing length — This information only applies to plant cables.
External routing length — This information only applies to plant cables.
Tail 1 — Type a value for the spare tail length at one end the cable, if you require, for use as a
default value in plant cables.
Length — A calculated field that displays the design length, or if not available, the estimated
length.
Tail 2 — Type a value for the spare tail length at the other end the cable, if you require, for use
as a default value in plant cables.
Spare length — Type a value for additional spare cable length, if you require, for use as a
default value in plant cables.
Actual length — This information only applies to plant cables.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1133

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Connections Tab (Reference Cable Common Properties Dialog

Box)
From / To
Describes information about the connection points for the cable. This information only applies
to plant cables.
Gland — Displays a gland associated with the cable side, if appropriate.
Find — Click to open the Find dialog box, where you can select an appropriate cable gland to
associate on the From or To cable side.
Dissociate — Click to dissociate a gland that already has an association with the cable side.

Procurement Tab (Reference Cable Common Properties Dialog

Box)
Enables you to enter information related to ordering a specific cable for your inventory. When
the reference item is a non-sized power cable, you can edit the data; otherwise, the items are
read-only.
Manufacturer — Allows you to select a manufacturer. You can define and customize
manufacturers in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Model number — Allows you to select a cable model. The available models are specific to the
manufacturer. You can define and customize models in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Stores part number — Allows you to enter a reference number for the cable in your inventory.

Reference Control Station Common Properties Dialog Box

Enables you to associate reference cables with a reference control station that you defined in
the Reference Data Explorer.
Item tag — Allows you to enter a tag name that identifies the control station.

Associated cables
Displays the reference cables that the software associates with the control station.
(Data window) — Describes the properties of the associated cables. In particular, this window
shows the conductor arrangement.
Add — Opens the Select Reference Cable dialog box to associate a new reference cable with
the control station.
Remove — Removes the selected associated cable from the control station.

Typical I/O set

Displays a typical I/O set of signals for the control station.
Find — Allows you to display all the available typical I/O sets on the Find dialog box, where you
can select the required typical I/O set for the control station.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1134

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Clear — Allows you to clear the association of the selected typical I/O set with the control
station.

Schematic Sheet Properties Dialog Box

Allows you to define multiple sheets and sheet properties for a typical schematic drawing.

Sheets
Sheet Number — Displays the sheet number that you typed under Sheet number in the Sheet
details group box.
Sheet Name — Displays the sheet name that you typed under Sheet name in the Sheet
details group box.
Add — Adds a new row to allow you to define a new sheet.
Remove — Removes a selected sheet from the list. The software deletes the removed sheet
from the database after you click OK.

Sheet details
Sheet number — Allows you to type a sheet sequence number for a sheet selected in the
Sheets list. You will then be able to select this sheet number and assign it to a block when
editing the properties of that typical schematic drawing.
Sheet name — Allows you to type a sheet name for a sheet selected in the Sheets list.

Select Reference Cable Dialog Box

You use this dialog box to select an appropriate reference cable when defining equipment
profiles, associating an instrument, control station, and so forth with a reference cable.
Cable category — Allows you to select a category that defines the purpose for which the cable
is used: Power, Instrumentation, Control, or Grounding. This is a required field for this dialog
box.
Cable specification — Allows you to select a filter criterion that defines a family of cables, each
consisting of a specific group of reference cables.

Cable definition
Select from cable library — Allows you to select a reference cable by choosing an existing
reference cable.
Reference cable — Click Select and then select an appropriate cable from the cable library.
Specify construction — Allows you to associate a new plant cable which you create based on
the construction definitions below.
Conductor arrangement — Allows you to define the number and arrangement of the
conductors in the cable. The following standard options are available:
▪ Single core cable — Creates a current-carrying cable with a single core. For this option,
you can specify an arrangement of any number of single-core conductors, for example, 3
single-core cables, but you cannot specify any additional conductors.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1135

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ 2-core cable — Creates a cable with two current-carrying conductors and no additional
conductors. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ 2+1-core cable — Creates a cable with two current-carrying conductors and one additional
conductor. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ 3-core cable — Creates a cable with three current-carrying conductors and no additional
conductors. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ 3+1-core cable — Creates a cable with three current-carrying conductors and one
additional conductor. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ 3+2-core cable — Creates a cable with three current-carrying conductors and two
additional conductors. You cannot modify the cable construction for this option.
▪ Multicore cable — Creates a cable with multiple conductors. For this option, you can
specify any number of conductors and additional conductors.
You can change the names of the standard conductor arrangement items in the Data
Dictionary Manager. However, the software performs calculations according to the position in
the list of the item that you select. For example, a 2-core cable is always the second item in the
list.
Conductors — Allows you to specify the number of conductors within the cable used for
carrying the current, excluding the neutral, the ground, or additional conductors. If you selected
Single- core or Multicore as the conductor arrangement, this option allows you to specify the
number of conductors or cores in the cable that carry the electric current.
Additional conductors — If you selected Multicore as the conductor arrangement, allows you
to specify the number of additional non-current-carrying conductors, such as ground wires.

Typical Circuit Common Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for defining the properties of a typical circuit.
Circuit — Identifies the typical circuit. The item tag appears beside the typical circuit in the
Reference Data Explorer. Click the ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can
modify the tag segments that are editable.
Circuit type — Displays the type of the typical circuit, which can be Incomer, Feeder, Coupler,
or Bus Riser.

Details of circuit internals

Displays the components associated with the typical circuit.
Component Type — Displays the type of component in the circuit, such as a circuit breaker or
a fuse.
Component Tag — Displays the component identifying tag, as shown in the Reference Data
Explorer.
Lookup Table — Allows you to select a lookup table that will be associated with the
corresponding circuit internal component. You will then be able to apply this associated lookup
table to a plant circuit when you run the Apply Lookup Tables feature on the Apply Options
dialog box to propagate the lookup table data to the circuit internal components.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1136

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Order — Determines the position of the component in relation to the bus when the circuit
contains more than one component. The greater the value, the further the component is from
the bus.
Show in SLD — Indicates whether the software shows a graphical representation of the
component when you generate a single line diagram for the PDB.

Associated cables
Displays the reference cables that you associate with the typical circuit.
(Data window) — Describes the properties of the associated cables. In particular, this window
shows the conductor arrangement.
Add — Opens the Select Reference Cable dialog box to associate a new reference cable with
the typical circuit.
Remove — Removes the selected associated cable from the typical circuit.

Typical I/O set

Find —Opens the Find dialog box, which allows you to select a typical I/O set to associate with
the typical circuit.
Clear — Allows you to clear the typical I/O set association to the typical circuit.

Typical Cable Block Diagram Properties

Enables you to enter and manage the properties of a typical cable block diagram. You can
define the document name, select an appropriate template, and type a description.
Document number — Allows you to type the document name.
Template name — Allows you to choose an appropriate template for your typical CBD.
Description — Allows you to type the document description.

Display cable types in cable block diagrams

Allows you to choose the cable types to be displayed in your typical cable block diagram. You
can change the cable type at any time by opening the Typical Cable Block Diagram
Properties dialog box and selecting or clearing the relevant check boxes. Selecting a particular
check box displays the cables of that type on your cable block diagram. The available cable
type options are:
▪ Power
▪ Instrumentation
▪ Control
▪ Grounding

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1137

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Typical Schematic Blocks Dialog Box

Selects blocks for use in the typical schematics that you define in the Reference Data Explorer.
Blocks — Displays the list of the blocks in the database.
Add — Adds a new row. You define a block and its characteristics in the Block details section
of this dialog box.
Delete — Deletes the currently selected block.
Block name — Allows you to enter a name for the block.
Block type — Allows you to select a block type representing the item type associated with the
block, for example, a motor.
File name — Displays the name of the drawing file that represents the block graphically. The
software supports file types .sym, .dwg, and .igr. Click the ellipsis button to navigate to the
required file.

▪ You can only select drawing files from the default folder specified in the Options Manager;
you cannot navigate to files in any other folder.
▪ You can click View to preview the currently selected block before selecting it.

Typical Schematic Common Properties Dialog Box

Defines a typical schematic with associated blocks in the Reference Data Explorer. You use
the typical schematic as a template to generate a schematic for a specified load in the Electrical
Index.
Name — Type a name for the typical schematic.
Template — Select a template for the schematic. The template determines the page size and
orientation, and the border and title blocks that appear on the schematic.
Typical schematic block properties — Lists the blocks that will comprise the typical
schematic.
Add — Adds another row that displays the block properties according to your selections under
Block details. Make sure that the blocks that you add belong to the same CAD
format. Generating a schematic drawing based on a typical schematic that uses different CAD
formats (for example, .sym and .dgn files) may result in generation errors.
Remove — Removes the currently selected block from the schematic.
Block name — Select a block from the available blocks in the library.
Block type — Displays the block type representing the item type associated with the block,
such as a motor. This value is read-only.
Sequence — This option applies for situations where there is more than one block of the same
type in the schematic. Type an integer that represents the sequence in which the software
associates the blocks with matching plant items that belong to the same item type. The
software uses these sequence numbers if there are multiple plant items belonging to the same
item type, for example, a schematic that contains two control station blocks that have to be
associated with plant items. The software associates the block that has lowest sequence

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1138

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

number with the plant item that has the lowest Sequence in group attribute among the plant
items belonging to same item type. Example: A typical schematic contains two blocks A and B
for which sequence numbers are 5 and 8 respectively. If used with a motor that has two control
stations CS-1 and CS-2 whose Sequence in group attributes are 3 and 8 respectively, the
software matches Block A with Control Station CS-1 and Block B with Control Station CS-2.

▪ You can click View to preview the currently selected block before adding it to the typical
schematic.
▪ This option is not available for multi-tag blocks.
Sheet number — Allows you to assign a sheet number to the current block in the typical
schematic you are modifying or creating. The values in this list correspond to the sheets that
you create in the Schematic Sheet Properties dialog box. You can assign the same block to
several different sheets if you want the block to appear more than once on different sheets of
the same schematic. Note that you should assign a sheet to each block in the typical
schematic. Unassigned sheets are not kept in the database by the software. This option is not
available for multi-tag blocks.
Note that the drawing always appears on the first page of the schematic
while the multi-tag blocks appear on the subsequent pages.
X — Allows you to enter a positive or negative numeric value in the CAD application units of
measure for the X-coordinate. In the generated schematic drawing, the software will shift the
relevant block on the X (vertical) axis according to the value you enter.
Y — Allows you to enter a positive or negative numeric value in the CAD application units of
measure for the Y-coordinate. In the generated schematic drawing, the software will shift the
relevant block on the Y (horizontal) axis according to the value you enter.
Multi-Tag Options — Opens the Multi-Tag Schematic Options dialog box where you can
specify whether to include a tag list on the main drawing page of a multi-item schematic, and the
maximum number of rows in the list to allow on the drawing sheets. This option is available
when you select a multi-tag block.
Sheets — Opens the Schematic Sheet Properties dialog box where you can define multiple
sheets for the current typical schematic drawing.

Reports and Report Templates

Define Report Contents Dialog Box
Defines new items to include in your report and selects the cells to include for the new items.
This dialog box opens when you click the Define command.
Define — Displays the Define Report Items dialog box. For the selected item in the Report on
tree, you define the properties that you want available for inclusion in your report template.
Delete — Removes an item from the tree view and from your report structure. Its properties are
no longer available for your report template.
New — Displays the New Items dialog box. You use this dialog box to specify new item types to
include in the Report on tree. If you add a new item type, its properties are available for
inclusion in your report template.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1139

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Report on — Displays a tree view of item types whose properties are available for inclusion in
your report template. To include the properties, you must select an item from the Report on list
and click Define. Then you can map the properties that you select to cells in your report
template.
The level into which you add an item type affects the properties that you can access
for your template. That is, a new item type added into the hierarchy under another item type
does not give you access to the same properties that you have if the item type is higher in the
hierarchy. For instance, if you add the equipment item type under nozzles, the equipment item
type only reports on equipment associated with a nozzle, and equipment without nozzles is not
reported.

Define Report Items Dialog Box

Specifies the report item properties available for your report. Select the properties to include for
each report item type and define sorting and filtering for those properties. This dialog box is
accessed by clicking Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box, which, in turn, is
accessed by clicking the Define command on the Add-Ins tab.
Properties Tab (on page 1140)
Filter Tab (on page 1141)
Sort Tab (on page 1141)

Properties Tab
Displays properties for a report item so you can select properties to use in your report template.
This tab is part of the Define Report Items dialog box, which opens when you click Define on
the Define Report Contents dialog box.
Group by the selected property — Automatically adds a special Report Item Group Total
property to the Map Properties menu on the Add-Ins tab. The Report Item Group Total
property displays the number of items that have identical reported properties. If you want to tally
similar items in this way, be sure not to map unique properties, such as item tags, onto your
report. If you do, then items are never grouped together because a unique tag is a property that
items never share. For example, you can use this feature to give you the total numbers of valves
with 1" nominal diameter, 1.5" nominal diameter, 2" nominal diameter, and so forth.
Repeat parent data — Displays the cells of parent item data in your report. For example, if your
report contains Unit then Drawing as a child of Unit, selecting this option for Drawing causes
repetition of Unit cells on any line that contains Drawing cells.
Available properties — Displays all properties for the report item you specified on the Define
Report Contents dialog box.
Selected properties — Lists the report item properties you have selected from the Available
properties list that are consequently available for inclusion in your report.
Left Arrow — Moves the selected item in the Selected properties list to the Available
properties list. You can select more than one item by using the CTRL and SHIFT keys and then
clicking the left arrow. Also, double-clicking an item in the Selected properties list moves it to
the Available properties list.
Right Arrow — Moves the selected item out of the Available properties list and into the
Selected properties list. You can select more than one item by using the CTRL and SHIFT

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1140

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

keys and then clicking the right arrow. Also, double-clicking an item in the Available properties
list moves it to the Selected properties list.
Use short text — Displays the short text value, which is defined in Data Dictionary Manager.
Only select-listed properties can be displayed in their short value form. In a few cases, the short
value is longer than the regular value.
Use select list index — Includes the numerical index of the select entry along with either the
short value or select list value for that property. For more information about select lists and their
values and indices, see Data Dictionary Manager Help.

Filter Tab
Defines the filter that you want to use for your report item. This tab is part of the Define Report
Items dialog box, which opens when you click Define on the Define Report Contents dialog
box, which, in turn, opens when you click the Define command on the Add-Ins tab.
Applied filter — Displays your selected filter. To select a new filter, type a valid filter name or
click Browse to locate a filter.
Browse — Displays the Select Filter dialog box, which allows you to choose or to further define
item types for your report template.

Sort Tab
Defines the cells that you use to sort the report items and how. This tab is part of the Define
Report Items dialog box, which opens when you click Define on the Define Report Contents
dialog box, which, in turn, opens when you click the Define command on the Add-Ins tab.
Available properties — Lists all the properties of your report item.
Down Arrow — Moves the selected item down in sorting priority.
Left Arrow — Moves the selected item in the Sort properties list to the Available properties
list. You can select more than one item and then click this button. Also, double-clicking an item
moves it to the Available properties list.
Order — Specifies the sorting order (ascending or descending) for the report data.
Right Arrow — Moves the selected item in the Available properties list to the Sort properties
list. You can select more than one item and then click this button. Also, double-clicking an item
moves it to the Sort properties list.
Sort properties — Displays the properties selected for sorting.
Up Arrow — Moves the selected item up in sorting priority.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1141

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Delete Report Template Dialog Box

Displays a list of available report templates. You can delete a selected report template if you
have the proper privileges, granted in Smart Engineering Manager. This dialog box opens when
you click Reports > Delete on the main menu bar.
Available Reports — Lists all available report templates.

Edit Report Template Dialog Box

Displays a list of available report templates and opens the selected report template in Microsoft
Excel so that you can make changes to it. Click Properties to view and update properties for a
report template. This dialog box opens when you click Reports > Edit on the main menu bar.
Search — Type a string to search for one or more report templates. As you type, those report
templates in the list with names that include the search string are displayed, as shown in the
following example:

Available reports — Lists all report templates available to edit or customize. Select a template
from the list.
Open — Displays the selected template in Microsoft Excel.
Properties — Displays the Report Properties dialog box where you can modify the description
and the report template format.
You must have the correct privileges, granted in Smart Engineering Manager,
to edit plant-level report templates.

My Reports Dialog Box

Allows you to choose one of your custom reports and to specify what items to report on. This
dialog box opens either when you click Reports > My Reports on the main toolbar or when you
click View > My Reports on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. If you want to run a report on
drawing items, use the Reports menu; if you want to run a report on table items, use the
Engineering Data Editor menu.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1142

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Search — Type a string to search for one or more report templates. As you type, those report
templates in the list with names that include the search string are displayed, as shown in the
following example:

Report using
Displays options for specifying the scope of your report. The options that appear in this area
depend on whether the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor is active when you access
this dialog box. The available options are:
▪ Current Selection — Produces a report containing the items currently selected in your
drawing or table. This option is not available if no drawing or table items are selected. You
cannot choose the Include items in drawing stockpile option when you choose Current
Selection.
▪ Entire drawing — Produces a report containing the contents of the entire drawing. This
option is available only when you use the Reports menu command.
Include items in drawing stockpile — Allows you to specify whether or not you want items
that reside in the drawing stockpile in your report. This option is available only when you use the
Reports menu command, not the Engineering Data Editor command.

New Items Dialog Box

Opens when you click New on the Define Report Contents dialog box and displays a list of
items that are related to the item that you selected there. Select an item type to make its
properties available to include in your report.
Apply — Adds the selected item type to the Report on tree on the Define Report Contents
dialog box. The software adds this item type as a child of the item type selected on the Define
Report Contents dialog box.
The level into which you add an item type affects the properties that you can access
for your template. That is, a new item type added into the hierarchy under another item type
does not give you access to the same properties that you have if the item type is higher in the
hierarchy. For instance, if you add the equipment item type under nozzles, the equipment item
type only reports on equipment associated with a nozzle, and equipment without nozzles is not
reported.
Items related to — Displays a list of item types related to the item type that you selected in the
Report on tree on the Define Report Contents dialog box. Select item types from this list to
include in your report template. The properties of the new item types are then available to use in
your report.
Name — Displays the name of the selected item type. You can rename the item. If you have
duplicate item type names in your report item type hierarchy, the software prompts you to
rename the new item type uniquely.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1143

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

New Report Template Dialog Box

Displays options for creating plant-level and user-level report templates. This dialog box opens
when you click Reports > New on the main menu bar.
Source template — Lists the names of all existing report templates and Blank. You select a
user-level template, plant-level template, or Blank. The Blank option creates a Microsoft Excel
workbook with no predetermined formatting information. If you chose Blank, you must specify
an item type; whereas, if you do not choose Blank, the software automatically displays the item
type that corresponds to your source template. Templates in this list appear in alphabetical
order.
Name — Allows you to enter a meaningful name to describe the report that you are creating.
This name matches your Microsoft Excel workbook. The software appends .xlsm to the name
when you save the Excel workbook.
Item type — Defines the item properties available in your report. If you do not select a Blank
source template type, then the Item type option automatically displays the item type that
corresponds to your source template.
Report Type — Specifies your report format. Available options include fixed, tabular, and
composite. All delivered report templates are tabular format.
▪ Fixed format — Creates one Microsoft Excel worksheet for each item. You only edit the first
worksheet, but all fixed format worksheets, one for each item of the report item type, follow
the format of the first worksheet when you generate your report. The Options command
on the Add-Ins tab is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you
are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on your worksheet.
▪ Tabular format — Formats your report in a table. That is, the properties of each item
included in your report begin on a unique row, or the template format is row-based. All
delivered reports are tabular format.
▪ Composite format — Formats your report in a combination of fixed and tabular formats.
The first sheet in the workbook is Fixed format; the second sheet is Tabular format.
Subsequent fixed format worksheets are created after sheet two for each item of your report
item type when you generate your report.
Description — Describes the report type that this template produces. You can assign any
description.

Plant Reports Dialog Box

Allows you to choose a report and specify what items to report on. This dialog box opens either
when you click Reports > Plant Reports on the main toolbar or when you click View > Plant
Reports on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. If you want to run a report on drawing items,
use the Reports menu; if you want to run a report on table items, use the Engineering Data
Editor View menu.
Current Selection — Produces a report containing the items currently selected in your drawing
or table. This option is not available if no drawing or table items are selected.
Entire drawing — Produces a report containing the contents of the entire drawing. This option
is available only when you use the Reports menu command.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1144

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Report Options Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to set various options for a report template. You can specify the
number of blank lines between each row between in your report, the number of rows in your
report header, and sort the map properties.

This dialog box opens when you click the Options command.
Skip lines between rows — Defines the number of blank lines between each row in your
report. You can enter a value in the box or use the scroll buttons to select a value. The
maximum value allowed is 1000.
Rows in report header — Specifies the number of rows in your report header.
The Options command is available for tabular and composite format report templates
only. It is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place captions
and properties in any configuration that you want. In fixed format report templates, you are not
constrained to have a header or rows at all.
'Map Properties' sort order — Allows you to sort the properties in the report the report
template. These properties are available when you click Map Properties on the report template
toolbar.
▪ Ascending — Sorts the list of properties in the report template in ascending alphabetical
order.
▪ Descending — Sorts the list of properties in the report template in descending alphabetical
order.
▪ None — Leaves the properties in the original order in which they appear in the list.

▪ When sorted in ascending or descending order, the properties that have sub-properties
appear first sorted alphabetically, followed by the properties that do not have sub-properties,
sorted alphabetically.
▪ For a summary report, the list entry Report Item Group Total that appears at the lowest
level is always at the bottom of the list, regardless of the sort order selected.
Prompt for alternative format — Select this check box to display a prompt for an alternative
format when reporting on a property that has units of measure. When cleared, the property will
display using the format specified in the Properties window.

Report Properties Dialog Box

Displays properties for plant-level and user-level report templates. This dialog box opens when
you click Properties on the Edit Report Template dialog box. All fields other than Report type
and Description are read-only.
Source template — Displays the name of the report template used for the report. The source
template can be a user-level template, plant-level template, or Blank.
Name — Displays the name of the report. The name matches your Microsoft Excel workbook.
The software appends .xlsm to the name when you save the Excel workbook.
Item type — Displays the item type that determines which properties are available to populate
your report.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1145

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Report Type — Specifies your report format. Available options include fixed, tabular, and
composite.
▪ Fixed format — Creates one Microsoft Excel worksheet for each item. You only edit the first
worksheet, but all fixed format worksheets, one for each item of the report item type, follow
the format of the first worksheet when you generate your report. The Options command
on the Add-Ins tab is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you
are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on your worksheet.
▪ Tabular format — Formats your report in a table. That is, the properties of each item
included in your report begin on a unique row, or the report format is row-based. All
delivered report templates are tabular.
▪ Composite format — Formats your report in a combination of fixed and tabular styles. The
first sheet in the workbook is fixed format; the second sheet is tabular format. When you
generate your report, the software creates subsequent fixed format worksheets after sheet
two for each item that matches your report item type.
Description — Describes the report type that this template produces. You can assign any
description.

Select Operating Cases Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to select the plant operating cases for which you want to run your
report. Also, you can determine the sequence of the data sets in the generated report. As a
result, the generated report will contain sets of load data, each set for a different operating case
that you select. This way you can compare the various bus loadings at different operating cases
and use them as a basis for equipment sizing.
The software opens this dialog box automatically if there are several plant operating and you
have selected one of the following templates for your report. If only one operating exists in your
plant, the software generates the report without opening this dialog box.
Prior to generating your report, select an appropriate template that enables
case data. The following templates are available:
▪ Multi-Sheet Switchboard Summary.xlsm
▪ All Feeder Load Summary .xlsm
Select all — Allows you to select all the existing operating cases to appear on your report.
Operating Case check box — Allows you to select the operating cases to appear on your
report.
Up and Down arrows — Allows you to sequence the sets of the selected operating case in the
generated report.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1146

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Schematics
Batch Generate Schematics Dialog Box
Allows you to print and set save options for the schematics you generate in batch mode.

Save options
Save files — Saves the generated drawings as external files.
Path — Allows you to type the file path or click Browse to navigate to the folder where you want
to save the drawings. The software automatically displays the default path that you have set for
your drawings in the Options Manager.
Save as type — Allows you to select a file format for the drawings you want to save.
Print drawings — Prints out all the drawings that you are generating.

Generate Schematic Dialog Box

Enables you to generate a schematic drawing for a selected item in the Electrical Index based
on a typical schematic that includes the drawing blocks and macros that you require for the
generation.
Typical schematic — Select a typical schematic that you created in the Reference Data
Explorer.
Drawing name — Type a name of the schematic you are generating.
Load name — Displays the selected load for which you are generating a schematic.
Blocks Tab (see "Blocks Tab (Generate Schematic Dialog Box)" on page 1147)
Macros Tab (see "Macros Tab (Generate Schematic Dialog Box)" on page 1148)
Unresolved Items Tab (see "Unresolved Items Tab (Generate Schematic Dialog Box)" on page
1149)

Blocks Tab (Generate Schematic Dialog Box)

Displays the data of the blocks that comprise the typical schematic that you selected in the
Typical schematic list.
Typical schematic — Select a typical schematic that you created in the Reference Data
Explorer.
Drawing name — Type a name of the schematic you are generating.
Load name — Displays the selected load for which you are generating a schematic.

Data window
Block Type — Displays the block type (motor, circuit, or control station) of the selected block.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1147

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Item Name — Displays the name of the electrical item with which the block is associated. You
can change this association in the Block details group box.
Block Name — Displays the name of the typical block.
X — Displays the X block displacement coordinate from the page origin. The software takes this
value from the properties of the associated typical schematic.
Y — Displays the Y block displacement coordinate from the page origin. The software takes this
value from the properties of the associated typical schematic.
File Name — Displays the name of the graphic file that the typical block is associated with.

Block details
Block type —Displays the block type that the selected typical block belongs to.
Item name — Displays the electrical item that the selected typical block is associated
with. Select another electrical item if you want to change this association.
Block name — Displays the name of the selected typical block.
Sheet number — Displays the sheet number that is assigned to the selected typical block. The
software displays a sheet number only if the selected typical schematic contains multiple sheets.

Macros Tab (Generate Schematic Dialog Box)

Displays the data of the macros that you have defined for the typical blocks
Typical schematic — Select a typical schematic that you created in the Reference Data
Explorer.
Drawing name — Type a name of the schematic you are generating.
Load name — Displays the selected load for which you are generating a schematic.

Data window
Item Name — Displays the name of the electrical item that the selected macro is associated
with.
Macro Item Type and Sequence — Displays the macro item type and the item sequence for
macro items belonging to the same item type defined for the same typical block.
Macro Item Name — Displays the name of the electrical item that the selected macro is
associated with.

Macro details
Macro item type and sequence —Displays the macro item type and the item sequence for
macro items belonging to the same item type defined for the same typical block.
Macro item name — Displays the name of the electrical item that the selected macro is
associated with. Select another electrical item if you want to change this association.
Show macros of selected block — Allows you to select to display the macro data for the block
you selected in the Block tab folder.
Show all macros — Allows you to select to display the macro data for all the blocks you
belonging to the selected typical schematic.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1148

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Unresolved Items Tab (Generate Schematic Dialog Box)

Displays the item tags associated with the current load and which do not have corresponding
items in the associated typical schematic.
Typical schematic — Select a typical schematic that you created in the Reference Data
Explorer.
Drawing name — Type a name of the schematic you are generating.
Load name — Displays the selected load for which you are generating a schematic.
Item Name — Displays the associated item tags for which there no corresponding items in the
typical schematic.

Multi-Tag Schematic Options Dialog Box

When you create a multi-tag schematic drawing, you use this dialog box to specify the layout of
the tag-specific data used in the typical schematic. You can specify whether to include tabular
data on the drawing pages that display graphical items, and the maximum number of rows for
displaying data on the drawing sheets and other sheets. Note that when saving a multi-tag
schematic as an external file, you need to save each page of the schematic as a separate
drawing.

Main drawing sheet details

Include tag list — Select if you want to display tag data in a table on the drawing sheet that
contains the graphics as well as on subsequent drawing sheets without graphics. For a
multi-sheet drawing, the software displays the data only on the last drawing sheet and
subsequent sheets. Clear to display the tag data on subsequent sheets only.
Maximum number of rows — Allows you to specify the maximum number of data rows that the
software displays on drawing sheets that contain graphics. This option is available only when
you select Include tag list.
Maximum number of rows on subsequent sheets — Allows you to specify the maximum
number of data rows that the software displays on subsequent drawing sheets that do not show
graphics.

Options Dialog Box

Sets options for the current document. For example, you can set the grid display by clicking the
View tab.
See Also
Customize the Software with the Options Command (on page 1162)
Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 1150)
General Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 1150)
File Locations Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 1151)
View Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 1152)
Symbols Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 1153)
Reference Files Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 1153)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1149

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls color settings for the active document.
Sheet - Sets the default color of all drawing sheets in the active document.
Sheet color is stored in the file. However, when you specify a sheet color on
the Colors tab, it will override the sheet color stored in previously saved files. To allow the
display of a saved sheet color, access the Colors tab and select Default before re-opening the
drawing file.
Highlight - Sets the highlight color.
Selected Element - Sets the color of selected elements.
Disabled Elements - Sets the color of disabled elements. This setting can also define the color
of relationship indicators and their corresponding glyphs if Maintain Relationships is disabled.
Select Tools > SmartSketch Settings to see the relationship indicators and their corresponding
glyphs or images.
Handles - Sets the color of handles when an element is selected. Also, if Maintain Relationships
is enabled, the Handles option sets the color for the relationship indicators that display during
element placement.
Owner group - Sets the display color of the group containing the selected element during
dimension placement.
The color is used during dimension placement. For example, you could have elements that
belong to different groups on top of each other. When you place dimensions, it could be difficult
to determine which group a selected element is from. To clarify this situation, the dimension
commands highlight the selected element and display the owning group in the Owner group
color. For more information on placing dimensions, see Dimensioning Drawing Elements.
If you set the sheet color the same as another control setting, the control color setting
and the cursor color is automatically changed to a complementary color. For example, if you
have both the Selected Element color and the Sheet color set to Yellow, the sheet background
displays yellow and the selected elements display in a complementary blue color.
See Also
Options Dialog Box (on page 1149)
Customize the Software with the Options Command (on page 1162)

General Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls settings such as the display of 3-D effects and the number of entries in the list of
recently used files.
Update Links Automatically At Open - Updates links automatically when the document is
open and this option is set.
Recently Used Files List - Sets the number of entries for the Recent Files area of the File
menu when the Recent Files area is set.
Dimension Keyin Values Automatically - Places dimensions for recognized step values or for
values you type in a ribbon field while drawing a geometric element. For example, select
Rectangle on the Draw toolbar. On the ribbon, type a value in the Width, Height, and/or Angle

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1150

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

fields, press ENTER or TAB, and then click the location in the Drawing sheet where you want to
place the rectangle.

Display Unit Of Measurement Labels - Displays the units of measurement in the value field.
Set printer paper size to sheet size - Automatically sets the printer paper size to match the
sheet size (if the printer supports that size).
Display XY coordinate readout - Displays the XY coordinate of the cursor position in the right
side of the application window status bar.
Undo Steps - Sets the number of operations that can be undone.
Middle Button Operation - Sets up the middle mouse button so that it can be used for either
scrolling or panning. The default action of the middle mouse button is Windows Scrolling.
See Also
Options Dialog Box (on page 1149)
Customize the Software with the Options Command (on page 1162)

File Locations Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Specifies the default location for documents, templates, and other objects you create or use in
the software. You can use the following types of documents:
▪ Document
▪ Templates that you define
▪ Fonts
▪ Macros
▪ MicroStation references
▪ AutoCAD references
File Types - Indicates the file type for which you want to specify a location.
Location - Displays the designated location for each file type.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1151

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Modify - Accesses the Modify Location dialog box. The folder selected with the dialog box is
displayed in the Location column on this tab. After you select a location, you can delete it later
by selecting the location in the Location column and pressing Delete.
See Also
Options Dialog Box (on page 1149)
Customize the Software with the Options Command (on page 1162)

View Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls the appearance of the software and document window, such as the display of the
graph paper, ruler, and scroll bar.
Display - Controls the display.
Display as printed - Displays the drawing as it appears on paper. This option is enabled by
default.
Style view scale - Controls the width of linear styles as displayed on the screen. This option is
only available when Display as printed is disabled and will not apply to printed drawings.
Maximum line width - Sets the maximum width allowed for the display linear styles. This option
is only available when Display as printed is disabled and will not apply to printed drawings.
Reset - Resets Style view scale and Maximum line width to their default values. This option is
only available when Display as printed disabled.
Window - Controls the window display.
Vertical Scroll Bar - Displays the vertical scroll bar of the active window.
Horizontal Scroll Bar - Displays the horizontal scroll bar of the active window.
Sheet Tabs - Displays the drawing sheet tabs.
Grid - Sets options for the grid.
The grid display option must be checked from the view menu before these settings
will be visible.
Grid Display - Displays a grid so that you can place elements with precision. The grid lines are
not considered part of the document and do not print.
Grid Snap - Aligns elements with the grid. The grid is an invisible set of lines in the document
that helps you align elements. When you set Grid Snap, elements always align with the grid
lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines.
Grid Style - Changes the format of the grid lines to either static or dynamic. When you zoom in
or out, the software dynamically generates the grid lines for a dynamic grid. You can set
dynamic grid lines to appear at fine, medium, or coarse levels. The grid lines appear at common
major measurement increments. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the
darker, solid grid lines. A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or
out. The grid maintains a constant minimum spacing.
Grid Index - Determines the number of index grid lines, also known as minor grid lines, to be
equally spaced between the major grid lines. This option is available only if you select Static in
the Grid Style list box.
Grid Spacing - Sets the spacing of the major grid lines. This option is available only if you
select Static in the Grid Style list box. The selected options on the Units tab of the Properties
dialog box determine the units that you can use, such as inches or centimeters.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1152

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

You can open the Properties dialog box by clicking Properties on the File menu.
Grid Density - Changes the number of dashes in the index lines, or minor grid lines, between
intersections with the grid lines. This option is available only if you select Dynamic in the Grid
Style list box.
Sheet outline - Sets options for the outline of the drawing sheet.
Display - Displays the outline of a drawing sheet so you can view its boundaries.
Use during fit - Specifies whether or not to use the sheet outline during a fit.
See Also
Options Dialog Box (on page 1149)
Customize the Software with the Options Command (on page 1162)

Symbols Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Determines the default actions when you drag a symbol into the document. You can override the
settings on this tab when you drag a symbol. You can press Ctrl to embed the symbol or Ctrl +
Shift to link the symbol.
Drag and Drop Default - Specifies actions when you drag a symbol into the document.
Embed - Sets the default action so that the symbol embeds when you drag it on the drawing
sheet. Embedding the symbol means that the software places a copy of the symbol in the
document. If you edit one instance of the embedded symbol in a document, all copies of that
symbol within the current document reflect those changes.
Link - Sets the default action so that the symbol is linked when you drag it into the document.
Linking the symbol allows you to edit the original symbol document. The symbol that you placed
on the drawing sheet updates automatically. If you edit the symbol inside the active document,
those changes are saved in the .sym document on your computer.
See Also
Options Dialog Box (on page 1149)
Customize the Software with the Options Command (on page 1162)

Reference Files Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Scale - Sets a scale option for importing a document.
Coincident - Brings in a reference file, also known as an inserted object, at full scale (1:1) and
coincident to its original coordinate position. The setting shifts the drawing sheet to the lower left
of the document graphic range and then determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the reference
file within the sheet. If the current document already contains graphics, the drawing sheet shifts
to include those graphics.
If you use the Coincident setting, the reference file does not appear when you drag the
pointer.
Select Scale - Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. The specified ratio defines the size of
the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. For a 2:1 ratio, 2 represents the size
of the drawing and 1 represents the size of the real-world object.
Fit to Sheet determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the reference file within the sheet
but allows you to specify where to insert the file by clicking on the drawing sheet.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1153

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Custom Scale - Sets the scale that you type in the boxes for a document that you insert or
drag. For example, when you type in 3 and 2 in each of the respective boxes, the scale of the
foreign document is one-and-a-half times its original size.
See Also
Options Dialog Box (on page 1149)
Customize the Software with the Options Command (on page 1162)

Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Sets options for moving information into the current document by dragging a document or by
clicking one of the following commands:
▪ Paste Special on the Edit menu
▪ Object on the Insert menu
▪ Open on the File menu.
Format - Sets the type of format that you can use for importing or saving a document. When
you click MicroStation or AutoCAD and then click the appropriate Options, you can access a
specific dialog box to set options for importing or saving AutoCAD (.dxf, .dwg) or MicroStation
(.dgn) documents. Smart Electrical supports importing and exporting AutoCAD 2013, 2014,
2015, 2016, and 2017 files with the AutoCAD 2013 format.
Import - Sets options for importing an AutoCAD or MicroStation document.
File Units - Sets the units for the document you want to import. When you insert or drag a
document into the drawing sheet, the software uses this setting only when the document has
units assigned that the software does not recognize.
Orientation - Sets the orientation for the document that you want to import.
Options - Accesses one of the dialog boxes for importing an AutoCAD or MicroStation
document.
Export - Sets options for exporting an AutoCAD or MicroStation document.
Options - Accesses a dialog box for exporting an AutoCAD or MicroStation document.

AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box

Controls how an AutoCAD document is opened or inserted into the current document.
To use this functionality, you must install the Translators option.
See Also
General Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 1155)
Font Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 1155)
Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 1156)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1154

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

General Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box)

Blocks - Specifies whether an AutoCAD block is imported as an embedded symbol or a group
of elements. An embedded symbol document has a .sym extension. When you import an
AutoCAD document, a temporary folder is created in the Temp folder on your hard drive. The
temporary folder contains the symbols that are embedded in the AutoCAD document. By
default, these symbols are deleted after the document is imported into the drawing sheet. You
can change a setting in ITACAD.INI and change the following line in the Options section: Delete
Symbol Definitions = 0.
Template File - Specifies the path and filename for the template that you want to use to create
a document.
Browse - Displays the Browse dialog box.
Fit imported data to active drawing sheet - Places the AutoCAD data on the active drawing
sheet. If the checkbox is not selected, the imported data is placed on a new drawing sheet.
See Also
AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box (on page 1154)
Font Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box)
Maps AutoCAD fonts to system TrueType fonts.
SmartSketch supports system TrueType fonts. AutoCAD-compiled shape fonts (.shx)
and postscript binary fonts (.pfb) are not supported. Many of the standard AutoCAD fonts are
pre-mapped to their most equivalent TrueType fonts. If a font is not mapped, it defaults to the
font specified in the first entry in the font mapping list.
See Also
AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box (on page 1154)
Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box)
Maps the MicroStation line styles to line style definitions in the software. The core MicroStation
line styles (0 - 7) default to equivalent SmartSketch line styles unless they are mapped on the
Linestyle Tab.
The number values listed below can be used in the line style table to map MicroStation
line styles to line style definitions in the software. When mapping line styles use the line style
number, not the line style name.

MicroStation SmartSketch

Line Style Number Line Style Number

Solid 0 Normal 9

Dotted 1 Dashed 10

Medium Dotted 2 Dotted 11

Long Dotted 3 Dash Dot 12

Dot Dash 4 Dash 2Dot 13

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1155

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Short Dash 5 Chain 18

Dash Dot Dot 6 Double Chain 20

Long Short Dash 7 2Dash Dot 21

See Also
MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box (on page 1160)
Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box)
Maps a line width for the current document to an AutoCAD color.
Default Width - Defines the width to assign to all AutoCAD entities that do not have width or
color-to-width mapping.
See Also
AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box (on page 1154)

AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box

Controls how a document will be saved to AutoCAD file format.
To use this functionality, you must install the Translators option.
See Also
General Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 1156)
Font Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 1157)
Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 1158)

General Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box)

Version - Specifies the versions of AutoCAD that can be used for export. You can select
multiple versions. The selected versions display in the Save as type list in the Save As dialog
box. Your selection does not change the value of the Write Version property in the
configuration file.
Prototype DWG File - Specifies the default prototype drawing (.dwg) file to use during
translation. This document can contain appropriate styles, color tables, and other preconfigured
settings.
Browse - Displays the AutoCAD Template File dialog box.
See Also
AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box (on page 1156)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1156

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Font Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box)

Maps the fonts in the current document to AutoCAD-compiled shape fonts (.shx), AutoCAD
postscript binary fonts (.pfb), or system TrueType fonts (.ttf).
If a font is not mapped, it defaults to the font specified in the first entry in the font
mapping list.
See Also
AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box (on page 1156)
Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box)
Maps the line styles in the software to MicroStation line styles.
Smart Electrical user-defined and named linestyles must be mapped to named linestyles in
MicroStation. You cannot map named linestyles to the standard MicroStation numeric line
codes. You can map numeric to numeric or named to named. To map a Smart Electrical
user-defined linestyle to a MicroStation numeric line code, create a named linestyle in
MicroStation and link it to the appropriate MicroStation line code (0-7). The linestyle must exist
in the resources file used by the MicroStation seed file specified for the translation.
The number values listed below can be used in the Linestyle table to map line styles in
the current document to MicroStation line styles. When mapping line styles, use the line style
number; not the line style name.

SmartSketch MicroStation

Line Style Number Line Style Number

Normal 9 Solid 0

Dashed 10 Dotted 1

Dotted 11 Medium Dotted 2

Dash Dot 12 Long Dotted 3

Dash 2Dot 13 Dot Dash 4

Chain 18 Short Dash 5

Double Chain 20 Dash Dot Dot 6

2Dash Dot 21 Long Short dash 7

See Also
MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box (on page 1158)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1157

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box)

Maps a line width in the current document to an AutoCAD color.
Polyline Width Threshold - Defines the threshold used to determine when polylines with width
must be created.
See Also
AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box (on page 1156)

MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box

Controls how a document will be translated to a MicroStation file format.
To use this functionality, you must install the Translators option.
See Also
General Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 1158)
Font Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 1159)
LineStyle Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 1157)
Line Width Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 1160)
Layer Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 1160)

General Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box)

Version - Specifies the versions of MicroStation that can be used for export. You can select
multiple versions. The selected versions display in the Save as type list in the Save As dialog
box. Your selection does not change the value of the Write Version property in the
configuration file.
Seed File - Specifies the path of a default seed file that contains appropriate units, color tables,
and other important information.
When you specify a 2D seed file while exporting a 3D MicroStation reference file
from the current document, the 3D reference file is not saved in MicroStation. For the 3D
MicroStation reference file to be saved in MicroStation, you must specify a 3D seed file on the
MicroStation Export Options dialog box.
Browse - Displays the Seed File dialog box.
See Also
MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box (on page 1158)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1158

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Font Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box)

Maps the fonts in the software to a MicroStation font.
See Also
MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box (on page 1158)
Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box)
Maps the line styles in the software to MicroStation line styles.
Smart Electrical user-defined and named linestyles must be mapped to named linestyles in
MicroStation. You cannot map named linestyles to the standard MicroStation numeric line
codes. You can map numeric to numeric or named to named. To map a Smart Electrical
user-defined linestyle to a MicroStation numeric line code, create a named linestyle in
MicroStation and link it to the appropriate MicroStation line code (0-7). The linestyle must exist
in the resources file used by the MicroStation seed file specified for the translation.
The number values listed below can be used in the Linestyle table to map line styles in
the current document to MicroStation line styles. When mapping line styles, use the line style
number; not the line style name.

SmartSketch MicroStation

Line Style Number Line Style Number

Normal 9 Solid 0

Dashed 10 Dotted 1

Dotted 11 Medium Dotted 2

Dash Dot 12 Long Dotted 3

Dash 2Dot 13 Dot Dash 4

Chain 18 Short Dash 5

Double Chain 20 Dash Dot Dot 6

2Dash Dot 21 Long Short dash 7

See Also
MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box (on page 1158)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1159

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Line Width Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box)

Maps the software line widths to MicroStation weights.
See Also
MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box (on page 1158)
Layer Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box)
Layer Mapping Table - Maps the layers in the software to MicroStation level numbers 1-63.
Layer Mapping Table is used for export to V7 DGN. There is no layer mapping when
exporting to V8 DGN. SmartSketch layers translate to matching layer names in MicroStation V8.
See Also
MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box (on page 1158)

MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box

Controls how a MicroStation document is opened or inserted into the current document.
To use this functionality, you must install the Translators option.
See Also
General Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 1160)
Font Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 1161)
Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 1155)
Line Width Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 1162)

General Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box)

Cell Library - Sets options for translating MicroStation cell libraries. When a cell library is
imported, a symbol document with a .sym extension is created.
Units of Resolution - Determines the sub-unit and positional unit settings for MicroStation V7
(.CEL) cell libraries.
▪ Cell libraries from MicroStation V7 documents do not have units and depend on these
settings for the units of resolution. The settings have no effect on translating documents with
a .dgn extension; the settings only affect MicroStation V7 documents with a .CEL extension.
▪ For MicroStation V8 .CEL files, Smart Electrical uses the units of resolution contained in the
model itself and ignores the Units of Resolution settings.
Cells - Sets options for importing cells in MicroStation documents. When you import a
MicroStation document, a temporary folder is created in the Temp folder on your computer. The
temporary folder contains the symbols that are embedded in the MicroStation document. By
default, these symbols are deleted after the document is imported into the drawing sheet. You
can change a setting in ITMSTN.INI to save the symbols instead. In Notepad, open ITMSTN.INI
and change the following line in the Options section: Delete Symbol Definitions = 0.
Options - Determines if cells are imported as elements on the drawing sheet or embedded
symbols. Symbol documents have an .sym extension. For example, type 2 cells are imported as
groups and shared cells, type 34, are imported as symbols.
Template File - Specifies the path and filename for the template that you want to use to create
a document.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1160

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Browse - Accesses the Browse dialog box.

Fit imported data to active sheet - Places the MicroStation data on the active drawing sheet. If
the checkbox is not selected, the imported data is placed on a new drawing sheet.
See Also
MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box (on page 1160)
Font Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box)
Maps the software font to a MicroStation font.
See Also
MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box (on page 1158)
Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box)
Maps the MicroStation line styles to line style definitions in the software. The core MicroStation
line styles (0 - 7) default to equivalent SmartSketch line styles unless they are mapped on the
Linestyle Tab.
The number values listed below can be used in the line style table to map MicroStation
line styles to line style definitions in the software. When mapping line styles use the line style
number, not the line style name.

MicroStation SmartSketch

Line Style Number Line Style Number

Solid 0 Normal 9

Dotted 1 Dashed 10

Medium Dotted 2 Dotted 11

Long Dotted 3 Dash Dot 12

Dot Dash 4 Dash 2Dot 13

Short Dash 5 Chain 18

Dash Dot Dot 6 Double Chain 20

Long Short Dash 7 2Dash Dot 21

See Also
MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box (on page 1160)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1161

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Line Width Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box)

Maps the MicroStation weights to line widths in the software.
See Also
MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box (on page 1160)

Customize the Software with the Options Command

You can use Options on the Tools menu to customize the software. You can change such
things as the screen appearance, document location, and display colors.
1. Click Tools > Options.
2. On the Options dialog box, select the tab containing the information you want to customize.
3. Use the controls on the Options dialog box to make the appropriate changes.
See Also
Options Command (on page 1235)

Set File Locations

1. Click Tools > Options.
2. On the Options dialog box, click the File Locations tab.
3. Select one of the file types in the list.
4. Click Modify, and on the Modify Location dialog box, select the folder where you want the
software to look for the file type.
You can set the software to look for files on another machine. To connect to another
machine, click the Modify button to define other folders or network paths.
See Also
Options Command (on page 1235)

Sheet Setup Dialog Box

Defines the properties of the active drawing sheet.
See Also
Size and Scale Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) (on page 1163)
Background Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) (on page 1164)
Name Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) (on page 1164)
See Also
Size and Scale Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) (on page 1163)
Background Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) (on page 1164)
Name Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) (on page 1164)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1162

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Size and Scale Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box)

Defines details for the drawing sheet size, scale, and print setup information.
Sheet size - Sets the size for the drawing sheet.
Same as print setup - Sets the drawing sheet size using the current print setup definition. For
example, if the printer is set up as 8 1/2 X 11, the drawing sheet size is set up as 8 1/2 X 11.
Standard - Defines the drawing sheet size from a list of standard ANSI and ISO paper sizes.
Custom - Defines the drawing sheet size according to the entered width and height values.
Drawing scale - Sets options for the scale of the drawing sheet.
Scale (1:1) - Sets the drawing scale to a 1:1 ratio. As a result, the representation of the objects
on the drawing sheet is the same size as the real- world object being described.
Select Scale - Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. The specified ratio defines the size of
the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. For a 2:1 ratio, the 2 represents the
size of the drawing and the 1 represents the size of the real-world object.
Custom - Defines a custom or scale ratio. The first value defines the distance on the drawing
sheet and the second value defines what this distance is equal to in the real world.
Paper units - Sets the paper units for the drawing sheet.
Units - Controls the display of numeric values in dialog boxes that define the size of non-scaled
objects. Some examples of non-scaled object values are text height and line width. This setting
does not affect dimension units.
Only value boxes use this option. For example, if you are working in feet and inches, you can
specify that you want to read and type values for text height in fractional inches. (1/8" instead of
0.00'-0.125")
When printing or plotting a drawing sheet, the non-scaled items appear on the printed
document with the exact size that you specify.
Precision - Sets the number of significant figures to display, or the accuracy of the unit readout
value. The precision setting does not change the numbers that you can type in the fields, only
the display of the numbers in the field. Values ending in 5 are rounded up to the next whole
number.
For example, if you set this control to .001 and you draw a line that is 2.1056 inches, then the
line length value is rounded. The length value appears as 2.106 inches. If you set this control to
0.01 and you type a line length value of 3.5 mm, the length value appears as 3.50 mm.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1163

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Background Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box)

Defines the color, margin settings, and background sheet display information.
Background sheet — Specifies the background sheet that you want to use for the working
sheet. If you have not created a background sheet, this box does not display any options. You
must first create a background sheet before you can select it from the list.
All graphics on the background sheet display on the working sheet. Changing the background
sheet updates the size and margin settings of the working sheet to the values defined by the
selected background sheet.
Show background — Displays the background sheet graphics on the selected working sheet.
Preview — Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper.

Name Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box)

Defines the name of a drawing sheet. You can also change the name of a drawing sheet.
Sheet name — Specifies a name for the drawing sheet. You can also use this box to rename a
drawing sheet by selecting the sheet in the document before clicking Sheet Setup on the File
menu.

Single Line Diagrams

Single Line Diagram Options Dialog Box
Enables you to define generation settings for single line diagrams.
General Tab (see "General Tab (Single Line Diagram Options Dialog Box)" on page 1165)
Source Definitions Tab (see "Source Definitions Tab (Single Line Diagram Options Dialog Box)"
on page 1167)
Page Settings Tab (see "Page Settings Tab (Single Line Diagram Options Dialog Box)" on page
1168)
Circuit & Internals Tab (see "Circuits & Internals Tab (Single Line Diagram Options Dialog Box)"
on page 1169)
Buses Tab (see "Buses Tab (Single Line Diagram Options Dialog Box)" on page 1170)
Related Equipment Tab (see "Related Equipment Tab (Single Line Diagram Options Dialog
Box)" on page 1175)
Miscellaneous Tab (see "Miscellaneous Tab (Single Line Diagram Options Dialog Box)" on page
1177)
Document Properties Tab (see "Document Properties Tab (Single Line Diagram Options Dialog
Box)" on page 1179)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1164

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

General Tab (Single Line Diagram Options Dialog Box)

Enables you to define the document number, SLD type, and other general settings for a single
line diagram.

Document
Allows you to define a document name and description of a single line diagram that you are
going to generate.
Document number — Allows you to type an SLD name.
Description — Allows you to type a short SLD description.

SLD type
Allows you to select a type of SLD that you want to generate. These options are not available
when generating PDB-based single line diagrams.
▪ Conventional — Generates a full and unfiltered single line diagram that includes all the
associated cables, converting equipment, and loads.
▪ Overall — Generates an SLD that displays multiple levels of buses but does not include
individual loads. The following table specifies the items that are included in overall SLDs:

Item Displayed in SLD

Power sources Shown

Buses Shown including their incomers. If there are bus incomers that
are not part of the SLD scope, the SLD displays the references
to their feeders. Also, overall SLDs show coupled buses and
their incomers and feeders.

Circuit internals Shown according to the settings on the Circuits & Internals
tab.

Feeder circuits Shown only if connected to a transformer, battery bank, UPS,

incomer circuit, or any load that is shown in the SLD.

Converting Shown
equipment

Loads Not shown apart from motors and heaters that have a minimum
rated power setting defined on the Miscellaneous tab.

Cables and User-defined. You can show or hide cables and busways as
busways you require. Note that if you choose to display the cables, the
software will show only those cables that are connected to the
loads included in the current SLD.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1165

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ Based on bus rated voltage — Generates an SLD based on the bus rated voltage that you
select from the list below.
▪ Electrical analysis SLD — Generates a single line diagram that you can publish to an
electrical analysis application such as ETAP. Also, after selecting this option you have to
define the options for circuits and circuit internals on the Circuits and Internals tab.

Include in SLD
Enables you to define the scope of the source data that you want to include in a single line
diagram that you generate for electrical items in the Electrical Engineer. Note that these
options do not apply to SLDs based on power distribution boards.
All items powered from the selected source — Generates an SLD for the electrical items you
selected in the Electrical Engineer (shown in the box below). The SLD will include the
selected items and all the items powered from the selected sources. The software will generate
an SLD where the selected electrical items are the origin points from which the power network is
drawn.
The selected sources and their sub-items in the Expanded Electrical Engineer —
Generates an SLD for the selected sources. To use this option, expand the required Electrical
Engineer hierarchy and then select the items that will be the SLD entry points. The SLD will
include only the selected items and their sub-items located under them in the expanded
hierarchy of the Electrical Engineer. Note that this option is not available for SLDs generated
from the Electrical Index.
The selected sources and the items connected below the specified number of bus levels
— Generates an SLD for the selected items in the Electrical Engineer and in the Number of
bus levels box, type the number of bus levels below the selected sources to be included in the
SLD. The SLD will display the selected items and all the items connected to the specified
number of bus levels below the source. The SLD will also include the buses at the levels you
define, all the circuits belonging to these buses down to the incomer connections or until their
electrical end.
Feeder display options — (available only when generating SLDs for power distribution boards)
Allows you to select an option that determines the extent of the downstream branch display in
the generated SLD. The following three options are available:
▪ Do not show downstream branch items — Instructs the software to show only PDB
internal items: buses, cells, circuits, and circuit internals. The items that are connected
directly to the PDB internal items will be represented by a reference label.
▪ Show all items in the downstream branch up to the first load — Instructs the
software to show all the items in the feeder branch up to the first equipment item that is
defined as load. If this load is connected to a downstream equipment item, the
generated SLD will show a reference label that represents this equipment.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1166

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ Show all downstream branch items — Instructs the software to show the complete
feeder branch that will include all electrical items in the branch regardless whether they
have been defined as loads. The SLD will also show in the downstream branch other
buses within the same PDB and all the equipment that is connected to their feeders
downstream. If a load in the feeder branch is connected to a downstream bus that
belongs to another PDB, the SLD will show a reference label pointing to the associated
PDB and bus.
Note that the software stops the display of the downstream branch at
the item which belongs to the Loads folder in the Electrical Index. In this case, the
software shows a reference label that points to the existing downstream equipment.
Incomer display options — (available only when generating SLDs for power distribution
boards) Allows you to select an option that determines whether to show the upstream incomer
branch in the generated SLD. The following two options are available:
▪ Do not show upstream branch items — Instructs the software not to display any items
of the upstream branch. However, the generated SLD will show a reference to the
upstream equipment that feeds the incomer.
▪ Show upstream branch items — Instructs the software to display the items of the
upstream branch. In the incomer branch, the software will show the first associated
electrical equipment and then a reference to the next equipment item that is connected
in the upstream branch.
Activate 'Hide PDB internals' property — Allows you to show the entire PDB and all of its
sub-items as a single block without showing the PDB sub-items on your SLD. This option takes
effect only if the Hide PDB internals property for the current PDB is set to TRUE in the
Properties window.
Activate 'Hide bus feeders' property — Allows you to hide the bus feeders on your SLD. This
option takes effect only if the Hide bus feeders property for the current bus is set to TRUE in
the Properties window. Note that if you do not select the Activate 'Hide bus feeders'
property check box and you set the Hide bus feeders property for the current bus to FALSE,
the software will still hide bus feeders if you selected the Activate 'Hide PDB internals'
property check box and set its Hide PDB internals property to TRUE.

Source Definitions Tab (Single Line Diagram Options Dialog

Box)
Enables you to define the scope of the source data that you want to include in a single line
diagram that you generate for electrical items in the Electrical Engineer. Note that these
options do not apply to SLDs based on power distribution boards.
All items powered from the selected source — Generates an SLD for the electrical items you
selected in the Electrical Engineer (shown in the box below). The SLD will include the
selected items and all the items powered from the selected sources. The software will generate
an SLD where the selected electrical items are the origin points from which the power network is
drawn.
The selected sources and their sub-items in the Expanded Electrical Engineer —
Generates an SLD for the selected sources. Expand the Electrical Engineer hierarchy and
then select the items that will be the SLD entry points. The SLD will include only the selected
items and their sub- items located under them in the expanded hierarchy of the Electrical

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1167

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Engineer. Note that if you use this option, the software does not allow you to save the SLD as
an internal document. You can, however, save it as an external document.
The selected sources and the items connected below the specified number of bus levels
— Generates an SLD for the selected items in the Electrical Engineer and in the Number of
bus levels box, type the number of bus levels below the selected sources to be included in the
SLD. The SLD will display the selected items and all the items connected to the specified
number of bus levels below the source. The SLD will also include the buses at the levels you
define, all the circuits belonging to these buses down to the incomer connections or till their
electrical end.

Page Settings Tab (Single Line Diagram Options Dialog Box)

Enables you to define the size of the active generation area and fit the drawing to the page size.

Page settings
Enables you to define the size of the active generation area.
Default SLD template — Generates a single line diagram based on the default template file you
define in Options Manager.
A0 wide template file — Generates a single line diagram based on the A0 wide template file
provided to you by the system. This template file is called A0_Template.spe and the software
sets its default location in Options Manager under Default Report Template Path. You can
change this location if needed but do not delete this file.
Selected template — Generates a single line diagram based on the template file you select
from the list below this option button.
Shrink to page — Fits the content of the drawing (excluding the title block) into the working
area of the drawing as defined by the SLD margin settings.

SLD margins
Enables you to define the distance between the page edges and the SLD so that the drawing
does not overlap the title block.
Top — Allows you to type a value in inches for the top drawing margin.
Bottom — Allows you to type a value in inches for the bottom drawing margin.
Right — Allows you to type a value in inches for the right drawing margin.
Left — Allows you to type a value in inches for the left drawing margin.
Units — Allows you to select a unit of measure for the SLD margins.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1168

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Circuits & Internals Tab (Single Line Diagram Options Dialog

Box)
Enables you to define the presentation of circuits and their components in a generated single
line diagram.

Circuit internals
Enables you to define the presentation of circuit components.
Show only enabled circuit internals — Includes only those circuit components in the single
line diagram for which the Is SLD parameter in the Properties window is set to TRUE.
Show all circuit internals — Includes in the single line diagram all the circuit components
regardless of their Is SLD parameter setting in the Properties window.
Do not show any circuit internals — Excludes the circuit components in the generated single
line diagram.
Distance between circuit internals — Enables you to define the vertical distance between the
circuit components in the generated SLD.
Options for electrical analysis SLDs — Enables you to define the presentation of circuits and
circuit components in an electrical analysis SLD. Note that these options are only available
after selecting Electrical analysis SLD on the General tab. This is used to publish SLD to a
third-party analyst application such as ETAP.
Show only circuits — Includes circuits but does not show any circuit components in generated
electrical analysis single line diagrams.
Show only circuit internals — Includes only circuit components but without the circuits.
Do not show circuits or circuit internals — Excludes circuits and the circuit components in
the generated single line diagram.

Circuits
Enables you to define the presentation of circuits.
Use bus tie symbols — This option deals with the way the software represents the connection
between two redundant buses in a power distribution board.
▪ Select this option to show a horizontal representation between two buses using the
BusTie.sym file. In this case, the software shows the connection between the two buses as
a straight bus-tie connection without showing the items connected between and within the
circuits. Note that the BusTie symbol is a "circuit" type symbol and has its first connection
point on the rightmost side and the second connection point at the leftmost side. Also, the
item property in the SLD displays only the coupler information. Furthermore, if you use the
Find in SLD command, the software finds the pertinent coupler and not the bus riser.
▪ Clear this option to use a vertical representation of a connection between two buses. This
is the standard bus coupler-riser circuit connection representation that includes both coupler
and the riser circuits and displays them as vertical objects, connected to each other. The
software displays both circuits as standard arrows.
Distance between circuits — Allows you to define the horizontal distance between the circuits
above and below the buses in the generated SLD.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1169

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Show hidden feeder circuits and their downstream items — To hide feeder circuits and their
downstream items in newly generated SLDs, clear this check box and set the IS SLD property of
the required feeder circuits to FALSE. For more details, see Hide Feeder Circuits in SLDs (on
page 513).

Buses Tab (Single Line Diagram Options Dialog Box)

Enables you to define bus settings for a single line diagram.

Frames and distances

Draw frames around the circuits in each cell — Draws a border around the circuits belonging
to the same cell. You can resize or move the frame to another place in the drawing as you
require. The software retains your changes after saving the drawing.
Draw a PDB frame — Allows you to select an option for drawing a border around electrical
items in the drawing.
▪ Around each individual bus section in the PDBs — Draws a border around a bus or a
bus section belonging to the same power distribution board. You can resize the frame or
move it to another place in the drawing as you require. The software retains your changes
after saving the drawing.
▪ Around all internals of each PDB — Draws a border around the internal items belonging
to a PDB in the drawing. For example, if there are two PDBs in the drawing, there will be two
frames — one frame around the internals of each PDB.
When drawing a PDB frame, the software draws a separate frame around
each bus or a section of a bus (if a bus break was used to break the bus symbol into sections).
When creating a PDB symbol in Catalog Manager, you can add a macro for PDB item tags. This
will enable you to display the PDB name on each PDB frame shown on the SLD. For examples
of how the software draws PDB frames, see PDB Frame Examples in SLDs (see "PDB Frames
Examples in SLDs" on page 514).
Distance between buses — Allows you to define the horizontal distance between the buses
displayed on the same drawing level.

Display options
The options in this group box allow you to do the following:
▪ Control the placement and position of the incomer and feeder circuits on the bus in an SLD
drawing.
▪ Instruct the software to break the bus symbols on the drawing into several sections. You
can use these options if an SLD for a PDB includes a large number of circuits so that the
labels on the SLD drawing are more legible. The number of sections for each bus is
determined by the maximum number of incomer and feeder circuits per bus section that you
define.
Position the incomers and feeders by showing the incomers on the first page and first
bus section — Allows you to set the position of the incomers and feeders on the bus using the
sequence in group values in such a way that the incomer and feeder circuits in the group are
counted separately. Selecting this option always results in placing the incomer circuits on the
first page and on the first bus section. The number of bus sections, in this case, is determined
only by the number of feeder circuits that are defined for that bus.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1170

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Position the incomers and feeders by their sequence numbers — Allows you to set the
position of the incomers and feeders on the bus using the sequence in group values in such a
way that all the incomer and feeder circuits in the group are counted together in a continuous
manner. Selecting this option results in placing the incomers and feeders on bus sections based
on the sequence in group values of the incomers and feeders. The number of bus sections, in
this case, is determined by the total number of feeder and incomer circuits on a particular bus.

▪ Note that bus risers and couplers are always displayed on the same page adjacent to
each other.
▪ To ensure that all the circuits are placed correctly, all the circuits must have sequence in
group values. The software places the circuits that do not have sequence in group
values first and only then the rest of the circuits.
▪ For manual SLDs, the Position the incomers and feeders by their sequence
numbers option is not available. So when generating a manual SLD, the software
positions the incomers and feeders on the first page of the drawing and on the first bus
section.
Force bus breaks — (applicable only to SLDs that are based on power distribution boards and
that are generated from the Electrical Index)
Breaks the bus symbols on the drawing into sections and places them in rows underneath each
other. The software displays the electrical items on the buses in several rows according to the
bus breaks. You can move the individual bus sections and place them on the drawing as you
require. Also, you can move the incomer and feeder circuits from one bus section to another on
the same bus.
Clear this check box to instruct the software not to break the bus symbols into sections and
display of all the circuits on the same row.
Maximum number of circuits per bus section to display — (applicable only to SLDs that are
based on power distribution boards and that are generated from the Electrical Index. This
option becomes available when you select Force bus breaks.)
Allows you to enter the maximum number of circuits that can appear in each row of the
drawing. The software forces bus breaks wherever the number of circuits on the bus exceeds
the specified value.

▪ When forcing bus breaks, the software places the maximum number of feeder circuits
on the first bus section according to the value that you enter. Then, the software places
the rest of the feeders on the next section. For example, if you enter 3 as the maximum
number of feeders per bus section and there are 5 feeders on that bus, the software will
place 3 feeders on the first section and the other 2 feeders on the second bus section.
▪ All the incomer circuits for each bus are drawn on the first bus section only.
▪ You can move the incomer and feeder circuits from one bus section to another bus
section on the same bus as you require. Click an incomer or a feeder circuit symbol to
select it and then drag its connection point on the bus to another bus section of the
same bus.
▪ Where two buses are connected by a coupler-riser, the software does not force a bus
break across the connection. Instead, the software draws the first bus section and then
counts the feeders from the riser on the second bus section before forcing the break.
For details, see Bus Break Example (on page 1173). Note that you can move coupler
and riser circuits to another section of the same bus just like any other circuit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1171

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Use multiple sheets — (applicable only to SLDs that are based on power distribution boards
and that are generated from the Electrical Index)
Instructs the software to display each row of items on a separate drawing sheet. When
selected, the software uses off-page connector symbols with appropriate labels to show the
continuation between adjacent sheets. Clear to display all the items on a single drawing sheet.
When cleared, the software uses row break symbols to show the continuation between adjacent
rows. Note that this option becomes available after selecting Force bus breaks.
Retain the display of coupled buses on the same sheet — (applicable only to SLDs that are
based on power distribution boards)
You use this option to instruct the software to keep the coupled buses on the same drawing
sheet or to split the display between two sheets. This way you can balance the scaling of the
SLD and avoid the situation where one of the drawing sheets is too congested and another
drawing sheet has a lot of empty space.
▪ Clear the check box to split the display of coupled buses and display them on two
drawing sheets (recommended).
▪ Select the check box to keep the display of coupled buses on the same drawing sheet
(some of the drawing sheets may appear congested while others may have a lot of
empty space). Note that selecting this option may cause the software to create fewer
circuits per section of a specific bus than the value you entered under Maximum
number of circuits per bus section to display.

Off-page connector symbols

Row break symbol

Reference to the riser circuit on the coupled bus

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1172

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Reference to the coupler circuit on the coupled bus

Suppose you have a PDB SLD with three buses that have the following arrangement:
▪ Bus A has two incomers (CKT-I1 and CKT-I2) and 8 feeder circuits (CKT-1A to CKT-8A).
▪ Bus B has an incomer (CKT-I3), 4 feeder circuits (CKT-1B to CKT-4B), and a coupler circuit,
CKT-5B (C).
▪ Bus C has two incomers (CKT-I4 and CKT-I5), 4 feeder circuits (CKT-2C to CKT-5C), and a
bus riser circuit, CKT-1C (R).
▪ The bus riser-coupler pair connects buses B and C.
The diagram appears as follows when there are no bus breaks, with illegible labels:

The drawings below show how different parts of the SLD appear when you select to force bus
breaks and specify a maximum of three feeder circuits to display per bus section.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1173

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Breaks on Bus A
The first bus break appears after the third feeder circuit. The final bus section contains the last
two feeders. Note that both of the incomer circuits appear on the first bus section only.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1174

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Breaks on Buses B and C

The first break on Bus B appears after the third feeder circuit; the second section does not break
after the coupler, even though it is the third circuit on that section; instead, the coupler-riser pair
is displayed on the same row, and the software forces a break after the third circuit on Bus C.

Related Equipment Tab (Single Line Diagram Options Dialog

Box)
The options on this tab enable you to define if and how the software will display control stations,
space heaters, meters, and relaying equipment in generated single line diagrams. Also, you can
set the horizontal and vertical distance between equipment items that are connected in parallel.

Control station options

Show control stations associated with equipment — When selected, displays control
stations that are associated with electrical equipment items. Note that if an item is associated
with more than one control station, the software displays only the first control station in the SLD.
Note that this option is not available if you have selected the Do not show
downstream items setting from the Feeder display options list on the General tab.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1175

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Control station symbol displacement — Allows you to enter the X and Y coordinates and
their unit of measure to define the displacement of the control station from the symbol that
represents the equipment with which the control station is associated.

Space heater options

These options allow you to define display options for space heaters and place them next to their
associated plant items or separately, below their power supply equipment.
These options apply only if you use space heater symbols that are not part of a
nested symbol.
Show space heaters next to associated plant items — When selected, displays all the
connected space heaters next to their associated plant items. The spaces heaters will be placed
on the drawing based on the defined displacement values.
Clearing this check box does the following:
▪ Displays the connected space heaters under their feeding equipment if this feeding
equipment is included in the current SLD.
▪ Does not display the space heaters if their feeding equipment is not displayed in the
current SLD.
Displaying power cables that connect feeders and auxiliary contacts:
▪ If the space heater is not fed from the same bus as its associated plant item, the
software displays the connecting power cable only if the feeding bus is included in the
current SLD. If the bus feeding the space heater is not on the current drawing, the
software displays a reference to the feeding bus.
Space heater symbol displacement — Allows you to enter the X and Y coordinates and their
unit of measure to define the displacement of the space heater from the symbol that represents
the equipment with which the space heater is associated. In case of multiple space heaters
connected to the same equipment, the displacement value refers to the distance to the adjacent
space heater.
For full details about space heater placement on SLDs, see Show Space
Heaters Next to the Associated Plant Items in SLDs (on page 110)

Auxiliary contact options

These options allow you to define display options for auxiliary contacts in generated single line
diagrams.
These options apply only if you use auxiliary contact symbols that are not part of a
compound symbol.
Show auxiliary contacts next to disconnect equipment — When selected, displays the
auxiliary contacts next to their associated disconnect equipment. Clearing this check box does
one of the following:
▪ Displays the auxiliary contacts under their feeding equipment if this feeding equipment
is displayed in the current SLD.
▪ Does not display the auxiliary contacts if their feeding equipment is not displayed in the
current SLD.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1176

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Auxiliary contact symbol displacement — Allows you to enter the X and Y coordinates and
their unit of measure to define the displacement of the auxiliary contact from the symbol that
represents the equipment with which the auxiliary contact is associated.

Metering and relaying equipment options

Show metering and relaying equipment — When selected, displays metering and relaying
equipment in single line diagrams.
Metering equipment first symbol displacement — Allows you to enter the X and Y
coordinates and their unit of measure to define the displacement of the metering equipment from
the symbol that represents the equipment with which the metering equipment is associated.
Vertical displacement — Allows you to enter the value for the vertical displacement of
subsequent metering equipment and their symbols, below the first metering equipment item.

▪ The software does not display control station properties in the Properties window when
you select a control station in an SLD.
▪ The software does not allow you to compare control station changes with an archived
SLD.

Parallel equipment settings

These options allow you to define how the software will present electrical equipment items that
are connected in parallel.
Horizontal distance — Allows you to enter a value that determines the horizontal distance
between adjacent electrical equipment items that are connected in parallel. Also, sets the
horizontal distance between parallel feeder branches of a circuit.
You can enter a negative value to display the parallel equipment to the left or to
the right of the main axis.
Vertical distance — Allows you to enter a value that determines the vertical distance between
the horizontal axis of the equipment connected between the parallel pair and the parallel branch.
Units — Allows you to select an appropriate unit of measure for the distance between the items
in the parallel branch.

Miscellaneous Tab (Single Line Diagram Options Dialog Box)

Enables you to define miscellaneous SLD options that include options for displaying cables,
motors, and heaters. Also, allows you to display a symbol legend in the single line diagram.

Cable and busway display options

Do not show cables — Enables you to determine whether or not to display associated power
cables when generating conventional SLDs or SLDs based on bus rated voltage.
Do not show busways — Enables you to determine whether or not to display associated
busways when generating conventional SLDs or SLDs based on bus rated voltage.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1177

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Overall SLD options

Allow you to determine whether or not you want to include any associated motors or heaters
when generating an overall SLD. Note that if you choose not to display any motors or heaters,
the SLD will not show the feeders associated with the motors or heaters. These options are
only available after choosing Overall under SLD type on the General tab.
Show motors — Allows you to include associated motors whose minimum rated power is
above the value that you select from Include motors with rated power greater than list.
Include motors with rated power greater than — Allows you to include associated heaters
whose minimum rated power is above the value that you select from Include heaters with
rated power greater than list.
Show heaters — Allows you to display main heaters.
Include heaters with rated power greater than — Allows you to type the minimum rated
power and select the unit of measure to determine which heaters the software will include in the
SLD.

Legend
Enables you to include a legend that explains the SLD symbols used in the drawing. Note that
once an SLD contains a legend, you can drag the legend and move it like any other element in
an SLD. An SLD legend contains all the symbols that the software uses to represent all the
electrical items in a single line diagram. Also, the software shows custom symbols if you have
defined the Electrical Equipment Type property and selected a symbol from the Symbol
Name list in the Properties window for a particular electrical item.
Draw legend — Adds a legend in an SLD.
Horizontally — Positions the legend horizontally.
Vertically — Positions the legend vertically.

Item positions and styles

These options allow you to define vertical distance between electrical items. Also, when
regenerating an existing drawing, these options allow you to control the position of items in a
drawing after manually changing the original position of items in that drawing. Also, allows you
to instruct the software to reset all the custom styles of symbols in the drawing to their initial
styles.
Vertical distance between electrical items — Allows you to define the vertical distance
between electrical items in your SLD drawings. This setting applies to all electrical items in a
branch except for circuit internals. Type in the required value and select the unit of measure.
This option becomes available after selecting the Recalculate saved item position check box.
Recalculate saved item positions
▪ For manual SLDs, when selected, the software recalculates the position of all the items in
the SLD in relation to their root items that have been added manually. Note that the software
will regenerate the drawing and if you have moved some of the items in the drawing, those
positions will not be retained except for root items.
Root items can be any power source items such as buses, converting equipment,
generators, and battery banks.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1178

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ For automatic SLDs, when selected, recalculates the position of all the items in the drawing
as if it was a new generation. That is, when regenerating an automatic SLD, the software
recalculates the positions of all the items based on the SLD preferences that you defined. If
you saved the item positions in your previous generation, these positions will not be
retained.
Retain bus positions — Allows you to retain all the positions of the buses as they were last
saved in the drawing. Note that all the branches will remain intact and all the items will be in the
saved positions.
Reset custom styles — (available only when regenerating an existing drawing) For both
automatic and manual SLDs, resets the symbol custom styles to that of the default styles as
they have been defined in Catalog Manager. Note that this option only affects those symbols
that are on the opened SLD. If you select this option, the software cancels all the manual
changes in the current SLD and all the items will be displayed as they are defined in your
symbology. Also note that this option depends on your preference settings for single line
diagrams. For more details about symbology, see the Catalog Manager User's Guide > Working
with Symbols.

Reference label options

Allows you to define a symbol that will serve as a reference label representing the connection
and relationship to the items that are not displayed on a single line diagram.
Show reference label — Allows you to display or hide the reference label in the current
drawing.
Reference label — Allows you to type a symbol name or browse to a symbol that will be used
as the reference label in the current SLD.
Note that if you do not select a symbol, the software uses a default symbol for the items that are
not shown.

Document Properties Tab (Single Line Diagram Options Dialog

Box)
(Not available for manual SLDs)
Enables you to enter property values for a new single line diagram.
The properties available here are the same as the ones available for an existing SLD in the
Properties window.
The purpose of this tab is to enable you to enter document properties for drawings that have not
been saved yet in the Documents folder of the Electrical Index. This way you can set
document properties that primarily are used by symbology (defined in Options Manager) so that
different types of SLDs can have different symbol presentations of the same item type. For
example, you can have different symbols for a motor depending on the type of SLD.
Once you save the drawing and it becomes available in the Documents folder, this tab is no
longer visible and you can set the document properties in the Properties window after opening
the drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1179

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Batch Generate SLDs Dialog Box

Enables you to print and set save options for batch generation of single line diagrams that you
generate for power distribution boards.
Save files to disk — Saves the generated drawings as external files.
Path — Allows you to type the file path or click to navigate to the folder where you want to save
the drawings. The software automatically displays the default path that you have set for your
drawings in Options Manager.
Save as type — Allows you to select a file format for the drawings you want to save.
Print Drawings — Prints out all the drawings that you are generating.
Include Loads — Shows the loads associated with items on your SLD drawing.

Open Single Line Diagram Dialog Box

Enables you to select and open a single line diagram for an electrical item that is an origin for
more than one SLD document.
Document number — Displays the document number.
Document description — Displays the document description.

SLD Legend Dialog Box

Enables you to insert a legend that explains the SLD symbols used in the drawing. Note that
once an SLD contains a legend, it behaves like any other element in the SLD. Therefore, you
can resize it or drag it to another place in the SLD. An SLD legend contains all the symbols that
the software uses to represent all the electrical items in a single line diagram. Also, the
software shows custom symbols if you have defined the Electrical Equipment Type property
and selected a symbol from the Symbol Name list in the Properties window for a particular
electrical item.
Horizontal — Allows you to display the legend horizontally.
Vertical — Allows you to display the legend vertically.

Change Branch Orientation Dialog Box

You use this dialog box to change the orientation of a branch that is connected between a
selected power source and a bus in a single line diagram. The software changes the orientation
of all the branch and displays it above or below the bus.

To open this dialog box, in an SLD drawing, select a root power source and then click on the
Edit Drawing toolbar.
The dialog box options are as follows:
Connected buses — Allows you to select a bus that is connected to the root power source that
you selected. The software will change the orientation of all the items in the branch that are
connected between the selected power source and this bus.
Above the selected bus — Changes the orientation of the branch above the selected bus.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1180

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Below the selected bus — Changes the orientation of the branch below the selected bus.

Symbols
Associate/Dissociate Custom Symbols Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to associate or dissociate custom symbols that already exist in
Catalog Manager. You associate custom symbols with plant items that you select in the
Electrical Index, EDE, or Reference Data Explorer. Also, you make the association for a
specific drawing type (single line diagram, wiring diagram, and so forth). The associated custom
symbols will then appear in the generated drawings for all the plant items that you selected.
When dissociating custom symbols, select the required item tags in the Electrical
Index, EDE, or Reference Data Explorer and click Remove.
Item Tag — Displays the item tag selected for symbol association or the number of items
selected.
Drawing Type — Allows you to select the drawing type for the item tags that you want to
associate or dissociate.

Associated symbols
This grid contains rows that allow you to associate or dissociate symbols. Note that the Up and
Down arrows determine not just the sequence in which the symbols appear but also the priority
that determines which symbol will be used first for a specific drawing type.
Drawing Type — Allows you to select the drawing type for the item tags that you want to
associate or dissociate.
Drawing Type Filter — Allows you to select a filter that is appropriate for the selected drawing
type. You can use this feature to associate different custom symbols with the same item type
depending on the properties of a specific drawing.
Symbol — Allows you to select the custom symbol you want to associate with the document
type and item tag or dissociate it from a custom symbol. Click , to view the custom symbols
in the default Symbols folder and its sub-folders. The default symbol folder is defined under
Options > Locations in the Smart Electrical Options Manager.
If you selected multiple items, the software indicates in parentheses the number of
items that have already been associated with a custom symbol that is assigned to a specific
item type.
Add — Adds a new row for defining a document and symbol association. The Add button is
deactivated when no more rows can be added.
Remove — Removes the selected row from the item tag.
Up — Moves the selected row up thus raising the usage priority of the symbol in that row.
Down — Moves the selected row down thus lowering the usage priority of the symbol in that
row.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1181

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Format Line Dialog Box

Sets options for placing lines. You can access this dialog box by clicking Line on the Format
menu. You define line styles by clicking Style on the Format menu.

Format Text Box Dialog Box

Sets options for placing text boxes. You can access this dialog box by clicking Text Box on the
Format menu.
See Also
Character Map Command (on page 445)
Border and Fill Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) (on page 426)
Info Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) (on page 427)

Info Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box)

Sheet — Shows the drawing sheet for an element.
Layer — Shows the layer on which an element appears in a drawing sheet.
Origin — Specifies the coordinates, or location, of a text box along the x and y axes.
All metrics on the text box are either in paper units or world units except origin. Origin is
always in world units.
Width — Sets the width of the text box to either At Least (at least the value you specify), Auto
(the text drives the width), or Exactly (exactly at the value you specify) in the At: field.
Height — Sets the height of the text box to either At Least (at least the value you specify), Auto
(the text drives the height), or Exactly (exactly at the value you specify) in the At: field.
Angle — Sets the angle of the text box.
The text box always rotates about the origin.
Text Orientation — Sets the orientation of the text either horizontally or vertically.
Units Space — Sets the text box units to either paper units or to world units.
Paper units represent units on an actual sheet of paper. Paper units are set in inches. Other
units are also available.
World units indicate real world distances but can be scaled down to fit a sheet of paper.
Within the drawing environment, "world units" is synonymous with the term "model
units" found in other CAD packages.
Justification — Specifies the placement relationship between the origin and the shape (text
box) according to the horizontal and vertical components.
The inside text area is an area that the margins of the text box define. That is, margins are
inside the outside edges of the text box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1182

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

The following graphic illustrates top (1), right (2), bottom (3) and left (4) margins around the text
box for horizontal justification (A) and vertical justification (B).

The maximum cap height of the first formatted text line of each line defines the text area capline,
even if the line has been clipped out of the text box.
The line baseline is a font metric that describes an imaginary line for location of characters. The
largest descender for any font on the line defines the baseline. Therefore, the largest descender
of the fonts used on the last line defines the text area baseline, even if the line is clipped out of
the text box.
The following graphic illustrates text cap area (a) and text baseline (b) for horizontal justification
(A) and vertical justification (B).

You must define horizontal and vertical components together. These components apply to both
single-line and multi-line text. For multi-line text, the cap height of the first line is used for the
capline of the text, and the descender of the last line is used for the baseline of the text.
Horizontal — Specifies horizontal placement at six options based on shape (text box), text
area, and the text within the text box at left, center, and right positions.
Vertical — Specifies vertical placement at 10 options based on shape (text box), text area, and
the text within the text box.
▪ Text Baseline — Specifies the text area baseline.
▪ Text Top — Specifies the top of the text area, which begins at the bottom of the top margin.
▪ Text Capline — Specifies the text area capline.
▪ Text Half Ascender — Specifies half the distance from the text area baseline to the top of
the text area.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1183

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ Text Half Cap — Specifies the distance half way between the text area capline and
baseline.
▪ Text Center — Specifies the center of the text area.
▪ Text Bottom — Specifies the bottom of the text area.
▪ Shape Top — Specifies the top edge of the shape.
▪ Shape Center — Specifies center of the shape.
▪ Shape Bottom — Specifies the bottom of the shape.
Text Alignment — Specifies the placement of formatted text within the shape (text box).
You must define horizontal and vertical components together.
Horizontal — Specifies how each paragraph is aligned within the block of formatted text:
▪ Left — Places the edge of the first line of text at the left of the text area.
▪ Center — Places the formatted text in the center of the text area.
▪ Right — Places the formatted text in the right of the text area.
If Text Orientation is horizontal, you modify all the paragraph alignment properties
for all paragraphs within the text box. (These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of
the Info tab.)
If Text Orientation is vertical, you modify the shape alignment properties. (These properties
appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.)
Vertical — Places the block of formatted text at Top, Center, Bottom, or Justify area of the
text box:
▪ Top — Places the edge of the first line of text at the top of the text area.
▪ Center — Places the formatted text in the center of the text area.
▪ Bottom — Places the formatted text in the bottom of the text area.
▪ Justify — Places the first line of the first paragraph at the top of the text area.

▪ If Text Orientation is horizontal, you modify the shape alignment properties. (These
properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.)
▪ If Text Orientation is vertical, you modify all the paragraph alignment properties for all
paragraphs within the text box. (These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the
Info tab.)
Margins - Sets the distance between the edge of the shape and the edge of the text area.
Margins are in the same units as the text box.
▪ Top — Sets the distance between the top edge of the shape and the top edge of the text
area.
▪ Bottom — Sets the distance between the bottom edge of the shape and the bottom edge of
the text area.
▪ Left — Sets the distance between the left edge of the shape and the left edge of the text
area.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1184

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ Right — Sets the distance between the right edge of the shape and the right edge of the
text area.
See Also
Edit a Text Box (on page 433)
Place a Text Box (on page 423)

Paragraph Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box)

Text style — Displays the style for a text box.
Font — Lists and applies the available fonts.
Font size — Applies a text size.
Width factor — Sets the text width. The default is 1.0, or 100% text aspect ratio (width to
height).
To modify existing text, select the Dynamic Width Factor mode on the Text Box
ribbon to adjust the text width by changing the text box size. Select and drag the width handles
on the text box to the required size, and the software adjusts the text accordingly.
Font style — Lists the available font styles.
Underline — Underlines text.
Language — Lists and applies a language for text in a text box. If you use text characters from
more than one language in a text box, the option you specify in this box determines the way the
lines wrap in the paragraph.
Units space — Sets the paragraph to paper units or to world units. You can change this control
only when you are creating new styles from the Format Styles or Format Text Box dialog
boxes. When you view this control from the Properties dialog box, it is read-only. You can
change the control from the Info tab because all paragraphs contained within a text box must
exist in the same units.
Within the drawing environment, "world units" is synonymous with the term "model
units" found in other CAD packages.
Font size type — Specify the method for measuring font size: Ascender, Cap, or Tile.
Text color - Sets the color of the text.
Alignment - Sets the alignment of the text.
Line spacing - Sets the line spacing of the text:
▪ Single sets the line spacing for each line to display the largest font in the line.
▪ 1.5 sets the line space for the line to one-and-a-half that of single lines.
▪ Double sets the line spacing for the line to twice that of single lines.
Paragraph spacing — Specifies the amount of space before and after paragraphs. No spacing
exists before the first paragraph and or after the last paragraph.
Before — Adds space before a paragraph. This value is set in the current working units, not in
points.
After — Adds space after a paragraph. This value is set in the current working units, not in
points. You can set the units using Units on the Format menu.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1185

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Border and Fill Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box)

Border — Specifies the appearance of a border around a text box.
Show border — Displays the outline of the text box.
Border type — Sets the shape of the border around a text box. You can choose from a
selection of common geometric shapes.
Line style — Sets the line style for the text box.
Border color — Sets the color of the border.
Line width — Specifies the width of the border in paper or world units of the text box.
Paragraph separators — Places a horizontal line between each paragraph in a text box. This
option is only available if Show Border is selected.
A paragraph is defined by a carriage return within the text body. Using the carriage return as the
sole means to create a new line of text will result in a text object with many lines as shown in the
following illustration:

As an alternative for controlling auto returns within the text body, you can restrain the width of
the box during placement or through the Text Box Properties dialog box.
Shadow — Places a shadow around the borders of text in a text box.
Shadow offset — Specifies a distance to offset the shadow in paper or world units of the text
box.
Fill color — Displays the color of a solid fill on an element boundary. This value overrides the
style of the fill. Transparent is the default. When you set the fill color to transparent, no fill is
visible on the boundary. You can also apply a fill color option with a fill pattern. Filled elements
always cover other elements when they overlap. A fill color always appears behind the fill
pattern when you apply both to the same boundary.
See Also
Apply a Border to a Text Box (on page 433)
Edit a Text Box (on page 433)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1186

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box

Customizes the operation of the software in recognizing and placing relationships. You can set
pointer behavior and specify which relationships are recognized as you draw.
See Also
Relationships Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box) (on page 1187)
Cursor Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box) (on page 1187)

Relationships Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box)

This tab allows you select the relationships that are recognized by the software as you draw. Set
the relationships you want to recognize and clear the relationships you do not want to recognize.
Clear all relationships so that the software does not place relationship handles.

Cursor Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box)

Cursor Setup — Sets the sizes of the Locate Zone and Intent Zone around the pointer.
Locate Zone — Sets the size of the locate zone radius. The locate zone is a region around the
pointer.
The software recognizes relationships based on elements within the locate zone so that you do
not have to move the pointer to an exact position. For example, if part of an element is within the
locate zone, the software recognizes a Point On relationship. The size of the locate zone is
indicated by a circle around the center of the pointer crosshair. Values from 3 to 12 pixels are
valid.
Intent Zone — Sets the size of the intent zone radius. Intent zones allow drawing commands to
interpret your intentions as you draw. Values from 3 to 12 pixels are valid.
Preview — Shows the size of the locate zone and the symbol for the selected relationship.

The Preview option does not apply to changes made to intent zone values.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1187

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

EDE
Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box
Allows you to define, select, and save filters or layouts for a EDE view. This dialog box opens
when you click Advanced on the Edit View dialog box, which opens when you click Window >
New > Engineering Data Editor on the main toolbar.
When the EDE is open you can click View > Edit View on the EDE tool bar and then
Advanced on the Edit View dialog box to open the Advanced Table Properties dialog box.
Filter Tab (Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box) (on page 1188)
Layout Tab (Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box) (on page 1189)

Filter Tab (Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box)

Allows you to define, select, and save a filter for an EDE View.

Base filter
Displays details of a saved filter.
Name — Displays the name of the filter as defined in Filter Manager.
Default — Indicates if the named filter is the default filter for the item type selected on the Table
Properties dialog box. You can designate a filter as the default by checking this box.
Browse — Opens the Select Filter dialog box, which allows you to select a base filter.

Definition
Allows you to add, remove, or edit filter criteria and to specify the relationship between multiple
criteria.
Match all — Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter.
Match any — Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through
the filter. Match any is the default matching method.
Add — Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the
Edit group so that you can edit the new entry.
Delete — Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. This button is available only
when you select a criterion in the definition list.

Edit
Provides options that allow you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria.
Property — Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. Examples of properties
include Equipment Type, Instrument Type, and Estimated Length. You define or modify filtering
criteria by selecting a property, an operator, and a value.
Operator — Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. Relationships
include, for example, greater than, >; equal to, =; not equal to, <>; and so forth.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1188

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Value — Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. If a list of
attributes is not already associated with the Value box, you must type a value, which can be free
text, or choose null. You can type a percent sign, %, as a wildcard character to find multiple
characters, or type an underscore, ( _ ), as a wildcard character for a single character. Do not
use an asterisk, *, in the Value box.

Layout Tab (Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box)

Allows you to define, select, and save a layout for a EDE view.
Name - Displays the name of a saved layout. You can enter a new layout name and then click
Save to save the layout for re-use, or you can select any of the layouts in the list.
Default - Indicates whether the named layout is the default layout for the item type on the Edit
View dialog box. You can designate a layout as the default by selecting this box and then
clicking Save.
Usage - Lists the property display types associated with the Properties window. Options
include a blank value, Brief, Bulk, and Brief/Bulk. The selected item type and display attributes
define what appears in the Properties window when you select the Show Brief Properties,
Copy Bulk Properties, or Paste Bulk Properties commands from the Properties window
toolbar.
You can have only Brief and one Bulk layout per item type. The last layout that you
define as Brief or Bulk is set as such and replaces the previous one.
Delete (Name) - Removes the named layout.
Save - Saves the data in this dialog box as a named layout. Layout names must be unique.
Definition - Displays all defined criteria associated with the selected layout. This group contains
two list views. In order to add to or modify either list, you must select a line in the list and then
define or edit the property in the Edit group. The buttons to the right act upon the active list
view.
Display Property - Lists the columns that appear in the EDE. To edit an entry, select it and
modify the property in the Edit group.
Caption (Name) - Displays the caption for each column in the EDE.
Sort Property - Lists the properties that apply to the item type specified in the Table Properties
dialog box.
Order - Lists the sort orders, ascending and descending. You can select one.
Type - Lists the sort types, numeric and alphanumeric. You select one.
Add - Adds a new entry at the end of the existing entries. Enables the fields in the Edit group so
that you can edit the new entry.
Insert - Places a new entry above the currently selected entry. Enables the fields in the Edit
group so that you can edit the new entry.
Delete (Definition) - Removes the currently selected entry.
Up - Moves the currently selected entry up one line.
Down - Moves the currently selected entry down one line.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1189

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Edit - Allows you to edit a single entry selected in either the Display Property or Sort Property
list views. If you select an entry in the Display Property view, the Edit group allows you to edit
the property and the caption. If you select an entry in the Sort Property view, the Edit group
allows you to edit the property, order and type.
Property - Displays a list of all the properties that apply to the item type defined in the Edit View
dialog box. If you select an entry in the Display Property view, you can specify the property and
its caption. If you select an entry in the Sort Property view, you can specify the property, its
order, and its type.
Caption - Displays the caption for each column in the EDE.

Edit View
Enables you to select the item types, filters, and layouts for a EDE view. This dialog box
appears when you click Window > New > Table on the main toolbar or when you right-click
Table Properties on the EDE view shortcut menu.
Item Type — Lists all the item types that you can select; for example, equipment.
Filter — Lists all of the filters that have been saved for the selected item type.
Layout — Lists all of the layouts that have been saved for the selected item type.
Advanced — Displays the Advanced Table Properties dialog box, where you can define and
save filters or layouts for a EDE view. You can specify the default filter and layout for a certain
item type.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1190

SECTION 39

Troubleshooting Errors and Rule Inconsistencies

Log Files Dialog Box
Allows you to select from a list of categories and display an error log file for the selected
category. You can generate an error log file for any batch operation in Smart Electrical as well
as for bulk copying and pasting of values in the Properties window. Note that you need to
activate the error log file generation on the Preferences dialog box before you attempt to
generate any error log file.
Log file type — Select the category for which you want to view the log file. Note the
functionality of the following two error log files:
▪ Comprehensive Error Log File — Contains all errors of all types.
▪ Miscellaneous Error Log File — Contains errors that do not fit the description of any of
the available log file types.
Clear Log — Clears the contents of the log for the selected log file type.

Show
Allows you to specify which types of errors appear in the log files.
All log file data — Displays data and rule inconsistency errors.
Rule inconsistencies only — Displays rule inconsistency errors only.
All log file data excluding rule inconsistencies — Displays data errors only.
Show log file data for last operation only — Select to display errors for the last performed
operation relating to the specified log file. Clear to display accumulated errors for successive
operations.
Open — Opens a log file of the selected category in Microsoft Excel. After generating the log
file in Excel, you switch back to the Log File Selection dialog box and select another
category. Clicking Open displays the log in the same Excel workbook but in a different
worksheet.
Close — Closes this dialog box.

Fix Inconsistencies Dialog Box

After checking for rule violations, performing any copy rule operations, and fixing inconsistencies
found, the dialog box enables you to view a summary detailing the number of items checked, the
number of inconsistencies found, and the type of inconsistencies found.

Summary
Total number of items — Shows the total number of items that you selected in the Electrical
Index or EDE.
Inconsistency Type — Indicate the type of rule inconsistency, if any, that the software
found. The following levels are indicated: No inconsistency, Logged, Warning, and
Rejected, according to the options specified in the Rule Manager.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1191

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Number of Items — Indicates the number of selected items that the software found with
inconsistencies corresponding to the indicated inconsistency type.
Cancel — Cancels the processing while the software is checking items for rule
inconsistencies. When the software has finished checking all the selected items, this command
changes to Close.
Show Log — Displays an Excel file showing details of rule inconsistencies that the software
found for the selected items.

Rule Inconsistencies Dialog Box

Enables you to view rule inconsistencies for operations related to the selected items.

Data Window
Displays the rules with details of inconsistencies and the action to be taken.
Rule Name — The name of the rule as defined by the user. The same rule name can appear
more than once if several inconsistencies exist for that rule.
Inconsistencies — Indicates the way in which the data is inconsistent with the rule for the
specified item. The following example specifies an inconsistency for a rule whereby a 100hp
motor must have a rated voltage of at least 400V:
Motor=100hp(M-A-1000):Rated Voltage(220V)>=(400V)
Where the components of the formula are as follows:

Component Value

Operand 1 Motor=100hp

Item tag (M-A-1000)

Property Rated Voltage

Actual database value (1000V)

Operator >=

Operand 2 property / value (400V)

In this case, the actual rated voltage for motor M-A-1000 is 220V, and so this value represents a
rule inconsistency.
▪ Action — Specifies the action that is required where there is an inconsistency. The
actions can be:
▪ Log — Records the rule inconsistency to a log file without notifying you. You can
access the log file from Smart Electrical.
▪ Warn — Prompts you to reject or accept the operation when a rule inconsistency is
found. This action gives you flexibility in making an appropriate decision.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1192

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ Reject — Automatically rejects the operation that you performed and notifies you about
the rule inconsistency. This action prevents you from accepting any operation when the
software detects an inconsistency.
Solutions — Displays the solutions that are available for the specific inconsistency. Only
solutions consistent with the specific rule will be displayed. The following solutions are available
if the operator is = (equal) Copy Rule:
▪ Approve Inconsistency - Performs the operation, even though data values or
relationships exist that are inconsistent with the rules. In the case of rule
inconsistencies for which the action is specified as Warn, the software accepts the
latest data values and saves them in the database.
▪ Copy data from item1 to item2 — Copies value from property from item 1 to item 2.
▪ Copy data from item2 to item1 — Copies value from property from item 2 to item 1.
▪ Copy data from value to item1 — Copies fixed value to the property in item 1.
Reject Operation — Rejects the operation on the item or relationship for which the software
finds rule inconsistencies. In the case of rule inconsistencies for which the action is specified as
Warn, the software does not save the data.
Accept Solutions — Performs the operation, according to the selected solution even though
data values or relationships exist that are inconsistent with the rules.
Show Rule - Opens the Rule Properties dialog box with read-only information showing details
of the selected rule.

Rule Properties Dialog Box

Enables you to view the properties of the rules that appear on the Rule Inconsistencies dialog
box.
Rule properties include the following settings:
▪ Rule name and description
▪ Rule components (that is, item types or filters created for certain item types in Filter
Manager)
▪ Logical expressions which determine rule consistency criteria
▪ Action associated with a logical expression (an action applies whenever the user operation
in Smart Electrical does not comply with the logical expression)
General Tab (see "General Tab (Rule Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1194)
Rule Components Tab (see "Rule Components Tab (Rule Properties Dialog Box)" on page
1194)
Consistency Tab (see "Consistency Tab (Rule Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1195)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1193

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

General Tab (Rule Properties Dialog Box)

Enables you to view the rule name, description, or priority.
Rule name — Defines the name of the rule.
Rule description — Identifies the purpose or function of your rule.
Disable rule — Not in use. Note that only those rules appear for which this check box was not
selected in the Rule Manager.
Priority — Determines which rule applies first when rules conflict with each other. Values lie in
the range from 1 to 100, where 1 represents the lowest priority and 100 represents the
highest. When a user of Smart Electrical performs an operation that involves items to which
several rules apply, the software first applies the rules with the highest priority.
In a case of rule inconsistency, if a specific logical expression in the rule is associated with the
Reject action, the software rejects the operation automatically and does not apply any other
rules that has lower priorities. Likewise, if a logical expression is associated with the Warn
action, and the user rejects the operation, the software does not apply any other rules that has
lower priorities.
A priority applies to an entire rule, not to a particular logical expression.

Rule Components Tab (Rule Properties Dialog Box)

Enables you to view the rule type —relation rule or single component rule — together with the
rule components. Rule components can be either filters created in Filter Manager or item types
available in Smart Electrical (except for reference data item types). A filter specifies an
extensive class of item types to which the rule applies. A relation rule consists of a pair of rule
components. A single component rule has only one rule component.

Component 1
Displays the first rule component and set or changes the rule type.
Filter or item type — Displays the first rule component.
Single component — Indicates the rule type. When this check box is selected, the software
uses a single component rule for the component specified in the Filter or item Type box under
Component 1. A single component rule enables you to evaluate and validate consistency of
the properties or property values of a specific item tag.

Component 2
Available only when the rule type is a relation rule. Specifies a second rule component, which
the software can display as an operand in logical relations in the Consistency tab.
Filter or item type — Displays the second rule component.
The order of the rule components is not important. Relation rules are be bi-
directional. If your rule components are different, and in the Consistency tab you create a
logical expression using both components as operands, the rule applies to any of the
components involved in user operations in Smart Electrical.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1194

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Consistency Tab (Rule Properties Dialog Box)

Defines consistency check criteria and enables you to view logical expressions that exist for the
rule.
Whenever the software detects a rule violation, it performs the action assigned to the specific
logical expression. Depending on an action, the software can record the inconsistency to a log
file, reject the user operation automatically, or prompt the user to accept or reject the operation.
Each row is the tab is a specific logical expression that consists of various parameters for
creating a relationship between a pair of rule components or between one rule component and
its property or a specific value. A user operation that does not satisfy all of the consistency
criteria is considered a rule violation.

Consistency criteria
Displays the consistency criteria which consist of one or more logical expressions and an action
associated with specific expressions. A logical expression is a relationship created between
two operands by means of a logical operator.
A logical expression consists of the left and right parts separated by an operator:
▪ Left part — Must always contain Operand 1 and its property, where Operand 1 represents a
rule component.
▪ Right part — Can contain either a rule component as an Operand 2 and its property or the
Value operand and a value specified for the property of Operand 1.
Operand 1 — Displays a rule component specified in the Rule Components tab. If the rule
type is single component, the cell displays the rule component specified on the Rule
Components tab under Component 1.
Property — Lists appropriate properties for the rule component that appears in the Operand 1
list.
Operator — Displays the operator for the logical relation. For details about operator
descriptions, see Operator Descriptions and Rule Examples (on page 882).
Operand 2 — Displays a rule component specified in the Rule Components tab or the Value
operand of a property selected in the Property column. For a rule component, this column
displays the relationship between properties of rule components. For the Value operand, this
column displays the relationship between the rule component property and the property value.
Property/Value — Depending on the selection in the Operand 2 column, lists properties or
values. If the Operand 2 column contains a rule component, this column displays a property of
a specific item type or filter. If the Operand 2 column contains the Value operand, this column
displays the value for the property defined in the Property column. Depending on the operator,
a value can be free text, a number of units of measure separated by commas or semi colons, or
a value selected from the list.
Action — Displays the action for the software to perform in case of inconsistency. In Smart
Electrical, the software applies an action only when the software detects a rule inconsistency
(that is, whenever a user violates the logical expression with which you associate the
action). The software records rule inconsistency details into a log file which you can generate
from Smart Electrical.
The actions are:

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1195

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

▪ Log — Records the rule inconsistency to the log file without notifying you.
▪ Warn — Prompts you to reject or accept the operation when a rule inconsistency is
found. This action gives you flexibility in making an appropriate decision.
▪ Reject — Rejects user operation automatically and notifies the user about the rule
inconsistency. This action prevents you from accepting the operation when the software
detects an inconsistency.

Wiring
Topics
Batch Cable Connection Dialog Box ............................................. 1196
Cable Connection Type Selection Dialog Box ............................... 1198
Connection Type Dialog Box ......................................................... 1198
Terminal Strip Configuration Dialog Box ....................................... 1199
Terminal Strip Common Properties Dialog Box ............................. 1200
Terminal Common Properties Dialog Box ..................................... 1201

Batch Cable Connection Dialog Box

Allows you to terminate or disconnect, in batch mode, numerous plant cables that belong to the
same category, for example, power, control, instrumentation, and so forth. You can terminate
all the plant control cables that are associated with 10hp motors.

Cable side 1 (From) / Cable side 2 (To)

These group boxes allows you to define the From and To sides of the cables you are going to
connect.
Activate cable side 1 (From) / Activate cable side 2 (To) — Activate the options for the From
and To sides of the cables you are going to connect. You can activate one or both sides and
select different actions for them as needed.
Action — Allows you to select the required action that you want the software to perform:
▪ Connect — Select this option to make batch terminations of the cables selected under
Cable connection details.
Cables that have already been terminated cannot be connected to
different wiring equipment. You need to disconnect them firs and then connect them as
needed.
▪ Disconnect — Select this option to disconnect all the cables selected under Cable
connection details in batch mode. This action disconnects the cables, their cable sets,
and conductors.
Disconnecting cables in batch mode does not cancel their
associations with the equipment. Also, it is possible to choose different actions for Side
1(From) and Side 2 (To).
Terminal strip sequence — Allows you to type a value that defines the terminal strip that is
associated with the equipment that you want to connect. The value that you type corresponds
to the terminal sequence in group. This setting cannot be changed if you selected the
Disconnect action.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1196

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

First terminal — Allows you to type a value that instructs the software as to which terminal on
the current terminal strip is to be connected first. This setting cannot be changed if you selected
the Disconnect action.
Active connection side — Allows you to select the side of the terminals to be connected to the
cable end. These settings cannot be changed if you selected the Disconnect action.
▪ Left — The active side
▪ Right — The opposite side
Connection type — Allows you to select a connection method for the From and To sides of the
cables. You can select one of the following: These settings cannot be changed if you selected
the Disconnect action.
▪ Continuous — Allows you to make a connection in a sequential way by selecting a terminal
that will be wired first. The software then automatically wires the rest of the terminals in a
sequential order.
▪ An existing custom connection type — Allows you to make your connections based on an
existing reference connection type of a selected cable. You start by selecting a terminal to
be wired first and the software then connects the rest of the terminals according to the
connection type. If the connection type that you require is not on the list, create it in the
Reference Data Explorer. For details, see Define a Connection Type (on page 549).

Cable connection details

Select — Allows you to select the cables to be included in the batch connection.
Cable Tag — Displays the names of the cables that you can select for the batch connection.
Cable Category — Displays the category of the cables, for example Control, Power, and so
forth.
Cable Formation — Displays the formation of the cables, for example 3x1.5 mm2.
From Equipment — Displays the name of the equipment associated with the From side of the
current cable.
To Equipment — Displays the name of the equipment associated with the To side of the
current cable.
From Terminal Strip — Displays the name of the terminal strip on the equipment that is
associated with the From side of the current cable.
To Terminal Strip — Displays the name of the terminal strip on the equipment that is
associated with the To side of the current cable.
Cable Common Properties — Opens the Cable Common Properties dialog box where you
can edit the properties of a cable that you select in the Cable connection details data window.
Select all — Selects all the cables displayed in the data window.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1197

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Cable Connection Type Selection Dialog Box

Allows you to select a cable connection type that you can use to wire plant items using the
custom connection method in a wiring drawing or when connecting cables in batch mode.
Cable — Displays the name of the cable that you selected to terminate.
Item — Displays the name of the wiring item you selected in the current wiring drawing or in the
Batch Cable Connection dialog box.

Cable connection details

This data window contains all the cable sets of the current cable and connection types for each
cable set.
▪ Select — Allows you to select an appropriate cable set in a multi-set cable.
▪ Cable/Set — Displays the name of the cable or cable set you are selecting for termination.
▪ Connection Type — Allows you to select an appropriate connection type for the current
cable termination. If the connection type that you require is not on the list, create it in the
Reference Data Explorer. For details, see Define a Connection Type (on page 549).
▪ Connect — Effects the termination of the terminal you selected in the current wiring
drawing.

Connection Type Dialog Box

Allows you to define a connection type that facilitates rapid cable set connections. You define a
connection type that contains a pattern by which Smart Electrical connects conductors to
terminals on a terminal strip.

Connection type — Allows you to type a connection type name. Click the ellipsis button
to open a dialog box where you can modify the connection type segments.
Description — Allows you to type a description connection type, for information only. Click the
ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can type longer text for the description.
When typing the description in the dialog box, to begin a new line, press CTRL +
ENTER.
Skip between sets — Allows you to enter the number of terminals that you want to skip
between the first conductor of the previously connected set and the first conductor of the next
set.

Conductors
This data window contains all the conductors of the selected cable set, showing their names and
configurations. The number of rows that you should add has to match the number of
conductors that will be connected. The software does not connect the leftover conductors that
do not have connection type definitions in the Conductors data window.
Conductor — Displays a specific conductor in a cable set. The displayed Wire00x values
represent the conductor names and are used to illustrate the current connection type
configuration. This field is not editable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1198

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Skip — Allows you to type the number of terminals to skip before connecting this conductor in
the set. The skip refers to the number of terminals that will be left unconnected between
consecutive cable sets. Enter the number of terminals to be skipped according to your
needs. In most cases, this value is incremented for successive conductors.
Land Side — Allows you to set the side of the terminal to which you want to connect each
conductor.
▪ A —The active side of the terminal. In the environment of a wiring drawing, the A side
is the active side of the terminal that you want to connect. It can be its left or right side,
depending on which terminal side you clicked after you moved the cursor over the
connection points.
▪ O —The opposite side of the terminal. In the environment of a wiring drawing, the O
side is the opposite side of the terminal that you want to connect. It can be its left or
right side, depending on which terminal side you clicked after you moved the cursor
over the connection points.
Add — Adds a new row to the Conductors data window where you can define a new conductor
connection. The number of rows must match the number of conductors you are going to
connect. The software does not connect the leftover conductors that do not have connection
type definitions in the Conductors data window.
Remove — Removes the selected row from the Conductors data window.

Terminal Strip Configuration Dialog Box

Allows you to define a reference terminal strip configuration that you can apply to a terminal strip
whose properties you are editing in the Electrical Index.
Note that Smart Electrical creates terminal strip configurations based on the number of terminals
that you enter and terminal strip pattern that you define.
Configuration — Allows you to type a name for the current reference terminal strip
configuration.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the current reference terminal strip
configuration.

Configuration properties
Total number of terminals — Allows you to enter a number of terminals to be created on the
current terminal strip. Note that this number should always be higher than the
First terminal — Allows you to type or select a starting number of the first terminal on the
current terminal strip.

Terminal strip pattern

This data window displays the pattern of terminal numbering on the terminal strip based on your
Total number of terminals value. The pattern reflects the number of rows (terminals) that will
constitute the basic repeating numbering (naming) pattern.
Sequence — Displays the sequential number of a terminal.
Prefix — Allows you to type a prefix for the terminal if you require.
Incremented — Increments the terminal number within the pattern.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1199

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Numbered — Makes the number of the terminal appear between the prefix and the suffix.
Suffix — Allows you to type a suffix for the terminal if you require.
Add — Adds a new row to the terminal strip pattern. The maximum number of rows that you
can add cannot exceed the total number of terminals that you enter.
Remove — Removes the highlighted row from the terminal strip pattern.

Terminal Strip Common Properties Dialog Box

Allows you to define the properties of a terminal strip and set its terminal configuration.

Item tag — Allows you to type a terminal strip name. Click the ellipsis button to open a
dialog box where you can modify the terminal strip tag segments.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the terminal strip, for information only. Click
the ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can type longer text for the description.
When typing the description in the dialog box, to begin a new line, press CTRL +
ENTER.

Terminal strip configuration

Allows you to apply a reference terminal strip configuration to the current terminal strip. Also,
you can define a terminal strip configuration on the fly. The software creates the terminal strips
and the terminals based on the configuration you use. However, the software does not retain
the configuration that you create on the fly. To save a configuration for later use, define a
reference terminal configuration in the Reference Data Explorer. For details, see Define a
Reference Terminal Strip Configuration (on page 546).
Total number of terminals — Allows you to enter a number of terminals to be created on the
current terminal strip.
First terminal — Allows you to enter a starting number for the first terminal on the current
terminal strip.
Find — Opens the Find dialog box that allows you to find an appropriate reference terminal strip
configuration that you want to apply to the current terminal strip.

Terminal strip pattern

This data window displays the pattern of terminal numbering on the terminal strip based on your
Total number of terminals value. The pattern reflects the number of rows (terminals) that will
constitute the basic repeating numbering (naming) pattern.
Sequence — Displays the sequential number of a terminal.
Prefix — Allows you to type a prefix for the terminal if you require.
Incremented — Increments the terminal number within the pattern.
Numbered — Makes the number of the terminal appear between the prefix and the suffix.
Suffix — Allows you to type a suffix for the terminal if you require.
Add — Adds a new row to the terminal strip pattern.
Remove — Removes the highlighted row from the terminal strip pattern.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1200

 Windows and Dialog Boxes

Terminal Common Properties Dialog Box

Enables you to define the properties of a terminal.
General Tab (see "General Tab (Terminal Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page 1201)
Procurement Tab (see "Procurement Tab (Terminal Common Properties Dialog Box)" on page
1201)

General Tab (Terminal Common Properties Dialog Box)

Allows you to define the general properties of a terminal.

Item tag — Allows you to type a terminal name. Click the ellipsis button to open a dialog
box where you can modify the terminal strip tag segments.
Equipment — Displays the name of the associated electrical equipment.
Description — Allows you to type a description of the terminal, for information only. Click the
ellipsis button to open a dialog box where you can type longer text for the description.
When typing the description in the dialog box, to begin a new line, press CTRL +
ENTER.
Terminal strip — Displays the terminal strip that is associated with the current terminal.
Type — Allows you to select a type for the current terminal. You can define and customize
types in Data Dictionary Manager.
Terminal color — Allows you to select a color for the current terminal. You can define and
customize terminal colors in Data Dictionary Manager.
Sequence — Allows you to enter the sequential number of the current terminal on its terminal
strip.

Procurement Tab (Terminal Common Properties Dialog Box)

Enables you to enter information related to ordering a specific terminal for your inventory.
Manufacturer — Allows you to select a manufacturer. You can define and customize
manufacturers in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Model — Allows you to select a terminal model. The available models are specific to the
manufacturer. You can select a model without selecting a manufacturer. The software then
selects the appropriate manufacturer automatically according to the selected model. You can
define and customize models in the Data Dictionary Manager.
Store part number — Allows you to enter a reference number for the terminal in your
inventory. This read-only value comes from the reference cable used as the basis for this
cable.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1201

SECTION 40

Toolbars and Ribbons

Actions Toolbar
The Actions toolbar contains commands that allow you to carry out various commands with
electrical items in your plant. This toolbar displays by default docked to the left side of the
interface.

Batch Load Association — Allows you to perform batch load

association between loads and power distribution boards.

Dissociate — Dissociates a selected item in the Electrical

Engineer from its parent item.

Batch Size Cables — Allows you to perform batch sizing for a

selected group of power cables.

Replace Cables — Allows you to perform batch replacement of a

group of cables within a particular category (power, control, or
grounding).

Apply Options — Allows you to apply a profile, a circuit, or

control stations to motors or to apply lookup table data to items.

Generate SLD for PDB — Generates a single line diagram for a

selected PDB.

Generate Schematic — Generates a new schematic for a

selected item.

Design PDB Layout — Opens the environment where you can

design the layout of a power distribution board.

Define Document Reference — Defines a reference to an

external document.

Associate Document — Associates external files or documents

with the selected item.

Resolve Symbol Inconsistencies — Resolves symbol

inconsistencies in an open cable block diagram.

Parallel Equipment Assistant — Opens the Parallel Equipment

Assistant dialog box where you can define a parallel relationship
between equipment items.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1202

 Toolbars and Ribbons

Smart Selection — Allows you to select a nested graphical

element in a compound symbol or grouped graphical element. The
Smart Selection tool provides a faster and more convenient way
to make selections of nested elements.

Align Ribbon
Align Left — Aligns the left side of objects in a select set.

Align Right — Aligns the right side of objects in a select set.

Align about Horizontal — Aligns the objects in a select set along

their horizontal centers.

Align about Vertical — Aligns the objects in a select set along

their vertical centers.

Align Top — Aligns the tops of objects in a select set.

Align Bottom — Aligns the bottoms of objects in a select set.

Change Toolbar
The Change toolbar contains commands that you can use to modify the graphic elements in a
drawing. You can activate the Change toolbar by using the View > Toolbars command.

Icon Description

Move — Moves elements from one location to another.

Align — Allows you to align two or more elements in a selection

set.

Nudge — Moves a drawing item using keypad arrows.

Offset — Draws an offset copy of an element or a set of

contiguous elements.

Rotate — Rotates one or more elements.

Mirror — Mirrors one or more selected elements about a line that

you define.

Scale — Reduces or enlarges selected elements by a scale factor

that you define.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1203

 Toolbars and Ribbons

Icon Description

Bring to Front — Moves a selected element to the front of the

display order.

Send to Back — Moves a selected element to the back of the

display order.

Pull Up — Moves a selected element up one position in the

display order.

Push Down — Moves a selected element down one position in

the display order.

Connect — Makes a point fixed on another element.

Horizontal / Vertical — Makes a line or two points horizontal or

vertical.

Parallel — Makes two lines parallel.

Perpendicular — Makes a line or arc perpendicular to another

element.

Tangent — Makes two elements tangent.

Colinear — Makes two lines colinear.

Concentric — Makes two arcs or circles concentric.

Symmetric — Makes two elements symmetric.

Equal — Makes two elements or dimensions equal.

Lock — Locks an element so that it cannot be moved.

Relationship Handless — Toggles the display of relationships

within the active window.

Alignment Indicator — Turns on the horizontal and vertical

relationship indicator.

Format Painter — Copies formatting, such as line weight, color

and line style, from a selected graphical element and applies it to
other graphical elements as they are selected. The two graphical
elements have to belong to the same type. The command is
available in all composite drawings and conventional cable block
diagrams.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1204

 Toolbars and Ribbons

Draw Toolbar
The Draw toolbar displays by default docked to the left side of the interface. You can use the
commands on this toolbar to place the basic elements of your symbol. Note that these
commands are available for composite drawings only.

Select Tool — Use to select, modify, and manipulate elements.

Line — Draws one line or a series of connected lines.

Tangent Arc — Draws an arc tangent or perpendicular to one or two

elements.

Line/Arc Continuous — Creates lines and arcs.

Circle by Center Point — Draws a circle using a center point and

radius.

Ellipse by Center Point — Draws an ellipse using the center point

and two edge points.

Rectangle — Draws a rectangle using three points.

Curve — Draws a smooth, open or closed curve.

FreeSketch — Draws lines, arcs, rectangles, and circles by

converting a sketch into a precision drawing.

Fillet — Draws a fillet between two elements.

Chamfer — Draws a chamfer, or bevel.

Trim — Trims open and closed elements to the closest intersection in

both directions.

Extend to Next — Extends one or more open elements until they

intersect with the nearest element.

Place Connector — Connects two elements together.

Revision Cloud — Places a revision cloud in the drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1205

 Toolbars and Ribbons

Edit Drawing Toolbar

The Edit Drawing toolbar contains commands that you can use to edit or insert text, activate
the connection and jumper mode, and so on. To activate the Edit Drawing toolbar click View >
Toolbars.

Insert Text — Inserts a text annotation.

Edit Text — Edits a text annotation.

Toggle Redlining — Turns on or off redlining mode.

Activate Connection Mode — Turns on the connection mode in

wiring diagrams. Press ESCAPE on your keyboard to turn the
connection mode off.

Activate Jumper Mode — Turns on the jumper mode. Press

ESCAPE on your keyboard to turn the jumper mode off.

Disconnect — Disconnects electrical items.

Remove — Removes the selected item from the drawing.

Move Cell — Moves a cell to another location in a PDB Layout

grid.

Remove Cell — Removes a cell from a PDB Layout grid.

Change Branch Orientation — Changes the orientation of an

SLD branch connected to a selected power source.

Toggle Marking of Unassociated Graphics — Marks or does

not mark unassociated graphics.

Activate Association Mode — Turns on the association mode

that allows non-power flow associations in cable block diagrams.
Press ESCAPE on your keyboard to turn the connection mode off.

Show/Hide Association Connectors — Toggles the display of

logical connectors that shows non-power flow associations
between items in cable block diagrams.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1206

 Toolbars and Ribbons

Group Toolbar
The Group toolbar allows you to group a number of elements in a drawing so that you can work
with them as a unit.

Group — Groups the selected elements in the drawing.

Ungroup — Ungroups the elements in the selected group.

Rectangular Pattern — Groups the selected elements in a

rectangular pattern.

Circular Pattern — Groups the selected elements in a circular

pattern.

Label Toolbar
The Label toolbar allows you to attach various types of labels to symbols

SmartDimension — Dimensions all geometry.

Distance Between — Dimensions the distance between elements.

Angle Between — Dimensions the distance between multiple

elements.

Axis — Sets the dimension axis.

Coordinate Dimension — Places a coordinate dimension.

Symmetric Diameter — Places a symmetric diameter dimension.

Measure Distance — Measures the distance between two points.

Measure Area — Measures the area of closed areas.

Text Box — Creates a box where text can be entered.

Character Map — Provides access to the Microsoft Character

Mapping functionality.

Leader — Adds leaders to annotation elements or existing leaders.

Balloon — Places a balloon next to an element or a free space point.

Fill — Fills a closed region.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1207

 Toolbars and Ribbons

Main Toolbar
The Main toolbar contains commands for the most common commands in the software. This
toolbar is displayed by default docked to the left side of the interface.

New Item — Creates a new item of the selected item type.

Open Drawing — Opens an existing drawing.

Save — Saves the active document.

Print — Prints the open file.

Cut — Deletes the selected item and moves it to the Clipboard.

Copy — Copies the selected item to the Clipboard.

Paste — Pastes the contents of the Clipboard.

Delete — Deletes the selected items.

Undo — Undoes the last action.

Redo — Redoes the last action.

Undo List — Reverses an action based on what you select on the list.

Redo List — Lists the most recent Redo actions if multiple Undo
operations have been performed.

Duplicate — Duplicates the selected item.

Select Tool — Selects graphical elements.

Zoom Area — Allows you to select an area on the drawing that zooms
to fit the entire display area.

Zoom In — Zooms in on a graphical element in fixed increments.

Zoom Out — Zooms out on a graphical element in fixed increments.

Fit — Resizes the drawing to fit the display area.

Pan — Pans across the drawing to enable you to view different areas.

Document Properties — Opens the properties of the selected

document.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1208

 Toolbars and Ribbons

Common Properties — Opens the Common Properties dialog box for

the selected item.

Properties Window — Displays or hides the Properties window.

New Electrical Index — Opens a new Electrical Index window.

New Electrical Engineer — Opens a new Electrical Engineer window.

New Reference Data Explorer — Opens a new Reference Data

Explorer window.

New Reference Electrical Engineer — Opens a new Reference

Electrical Engineer window.

New Table — Opens the EDE for items of the selected class.

New Project Management — Opens a new Project Management

window.

Help — Opens the appropriate Help topic in the Online Guide.

Modify Connector Ribbon

This ribbon contains commands that allow you to modify the display of connectors. You can
define the connector line style, color, type, width, and so forth. Also, you can define the
connector clearance. This ribbon becomes available after clicking a cable or a connector in a
cable block diagram.
Terminators are compatible with any of the linear styles.

List Style — Sets the line style for the connector.

Line Color — Sets the line color for the connector.

Line Type — Sets the connector line type and style.

Line Width — Sets the line width for the connector.

List Line Start Terminator — Sets the terminator for star ting the
connector.

List Line End Terminator — Sets the terminator for ending the
connector.

Split Connector (Shift) — Splits the connector at the selected

point. This option is available only when you are modifying a

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1209

 Toolbars and Ribbons

connector. Not available in SLDs.

Merge Connectors — Merges two connectors into a single

connector, adding a segment between the connectors if necessary.
This option is only available when you select two connectors.

Insert / Move Vertex — Allows you to either insert a vertex into the
connector or move a vertex on the connector.

Insert Segment — Inserts line segments into the connector.

List Clearance — Allows you to define a connector clearance.

List Parallel Pairs — Allows you to select a pair of equipment items that
you want to connect in parallel. For details, see Connect Equipment
Items in Parallel (on page 241).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1210

SECTION 41

Menu Commands
The following menu commands are available in the software.

New > Item Command (File Menu)

Creates a new item or adds a node under the selected node in the Reference Data Explorer or
Electrical Index.
Clicking on the down-arrow of the File menu button above accesses a list of the
associated commands. Clicking on the File menu button itself repeats the last command you
used from the File menu.

New > Multiple Items (File Menu)

Opens the Create Multiple New Items dialog box where you can create multiple new items in
the selected folder of the Electrical Index.

New > SLD Command (File Menu)

Allows you to generate an automatic SLD for an electrical item that you selected in the
Electrical Engineer. The software opens the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box (on
page 1164), which allows you to define SLD generation settings.
This menu option is available only after selecting an electrical item in the Electrical Engineer.

New > Template Command (File Menu)

Creates a new blank template in the current plant.
To complete this procedure, you must modify the UAC security option to be
granted the same rights as the Administrator user. For more information see Set UAC Admin
Security (on page 314).
Templates created at the user- level instead of the administrator-level are not
available to other users for creating drawings.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1211

 Menu Commands

New > Custom Folder (File Menu)

This menu command is available when you select an equipment folder in the Reference Data
Explorer or Electrical Index.
Opens the Create a Custom Folder dialog box, which allows you to create a custom folder
within the selected equipment folder.

Open > Plant Group Command (File Menu)

Displays the Open Plant Group dialog box (on page 920), which allows you to navigate to a
specific plant group within a plant.

Open > Drawing Command (File Menu)

This menu option is available when you select a schematic drawing in the Electrical Index.
Opens the schematic drawing that you select.

Open > Last Saved Document (File Menu)

Allows you to open the last saved drawing or registered report without regenerating it from the
database.

Open > PDB Layout Command (File Menu)

This menu option is available when you select a PDB or a PDB layout drawing in the Electrical
Index.
Opens an existing PDB layout drawing. For more information, see Design a Power Distribution
Board Layout (on page 130).

Open > SLD Command (File Menu)

This menu option is available when you:
▪ Select an existing SLD drawing in the Electrical Index.
▪ Select an electrical item in the Electrical Engineer.
Opens a saved single line diagram for the item that you select.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1212

 Menu Commands

Open > External Drawing Command (File Menu)

Opens a dialog box where you can select and open a drawing that was created in another
application, for example AutoCAD, MicroStation, or SmartSketch.

Open > Template Command (File Menu)

Opens a template within the current plant. Templates are in the .spe file format. You can edit
the template by changing the page setup or modifying the border and title block.

Open > Log Files Command (File Menu)

Opens a dialog box with a list of categories from which you can select and view log files.

Close Command (File Menu)

Closes the active drawing or EDE. The software saves your changes automatically.

Save Command (File Menu)

Stores the active drawing or template. If you have not already named the drawing or template,
the Save As dialog box appears. If you have already named the drawing or template, no dialog
box appears. Project location and paths are set in Smart Engineering Manager and Options
Manager.

Save As Command (File Menu)

Opens the Save As dialog box. Saves the active document to a new format.

Preferences Command (File Menu)

Opens the Preferences dialog box, where you can set preferences for general and single line
diagram generation options, load summary report options, and delete load options.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1213

 Menu Commands

Print Command (File Menu)

Sends a copy of the active drawing to a specified plotter, printer, or file. Options are available for
defining the printing area, range, number of copies, and other printing characteristics. Selecting
File > Print opens the Print dialog box.
Before using this command, you must install and select a printer. For help on installing a printer,
see the Windows documentation.

Sheet Setup Command (File Menu)

Allows you to define a drawing sheet size, scale, and other print settings.

Properties Command (File Menu)

Accesses general information about the current drawing and opens the File Properties dialog
box (see "File Properties Dialog Box (File > Properties)" on page 917). You can review and edit
the drawing summary and statistics.

Exit Command (File Menu)

Closes the active drawing and quits the software. The software checks for unsaved changes
when you quit.
On exiting the software, the positions and sizes of all dialog bars (Reference Data
Explorer, Electrical Index, and Electrical Engineer), as well as any filter settings, are
retained. The next time that you log on to the program, you see the same set of data displayed
as it was in the previous session.

Undo Command (Edit Menu)

Undoes the last action

Redo Command (Edit Menu)

Performs the last undone action.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1214

 Menu Commands

Cut Command (Edit Menu)

Cuts selected items from the drawing and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected items
replace the previous contents of the Clipboard.

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Copies selected items and their associated properties in the database to the Clipboard. This
command replaces the previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents.

Paste Command (Edit Menu)

Inserts the Clipboard contents at the same location the items occupied in the source document
or drawing. The command is not available if the Clipboard is empty.

Delete Command (Edit Menu)

Removes the selected item from the database.

Select All Command (Edit Menu)

Selects all visible items in a view.
You can access this command when you right-click a blank area in a table. On the
shortcut menu click Select All.

Duplicate Command (Edit Menu)

This command is available when you select an item in the Electrical Index or the Reference
Data Explorer. When you duplicate an item, the software creates the new item with a unique
item tag. If a naming convention is defined for the item type, the new item tag follows that
naming convention.

▪ On the Preferences dialog box, General tab, under Open after creating or duplicating an
item, you can specify whether to open the Item Tag dialog box when you duplicate the item.
▪ Some items have a Common Properties dialog box from which you can edit the most
common properties for the item. You can specify in the preferences to open this dialog box
directly when you duplicate the item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1215

 Menu Commands

Rename Command (Edit Menu)

This menu option is available when you select an item in the Electrical Index, Electrical
Engineer, or Reference Data Explorer.
Opens the Item Tag dialog box (on page 1054), which allows you to rename the selected item.

Align Command (Edit Menu)

Allows you to align two or more objects in a drawing.

Nudge Command (Edit Menu)

Allows you to use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move a drawing item.

Move Command (Edit Menu)

Moves items from one location to another. You can specify the locations by clicking the drawing
sheet or by entering relative values in the Move ribbon. You can move one or multiple items at a
time, and you can move select sets. You can access this command from the Edit menu or the
main toolbar.
You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom, Fit, and Pan, while
you are using the Move command. When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns
you to the Move command at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view.

Find in Active Composite Drawing Command (Edit

Menu)
Allows you to find a plant item in the active composite drawing.
For details, see Find a Plant Item in an Active Drawing (see "Find a Plant Item in an Active
Composite Drawing" on page 576).

Rotate Command (Edit Menu)

Rotates one or more items a precise distance or angle about a specified point. You can access
this command from the Edit menu and the main toolbar, too.
You can rotate an item about its center with the rotate component handle. The rotate
handle appears as a green circle to the right of the selected item.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1216

 Menu Commands

Mirror Command (Edit Menu)

Reflects one or more selected items about a line or axis that you define. You can mirror without
copying, or mirror and copy. You can access this command from the Edit menu or the main
toolbar.
You can use mirror handles to mirror an item about its center. The mirror handle
appears as a green plus sign at the right center of the item when you select the item.

Fit to Page Command (Edit Menu)

Rescales the graphic items of a drawing into the drawing working area.

Place New Command (Edit Menu)

(Available only after selecting a label in a drawing)
Allows you to clone a selected label in an open composite drawing and attach it to compatible
graphical elements in the open drawing.

Activate Connection Mode Command (Edit Menu)

In wiring diagrams, allows you to add connectors between all available connection points on
symbols.
(Not available for other types of drawing.)

Activate Association Mode Command (Edit Menu)

Allows you to create an association between a control station or instrument and an equipment
item.

Show/Hide Association Connectors Command (Edit

Menu)
Toggles the display of logical connectors that show non-power flow associations between items
in cable block diagrams.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1217

 Menu Commands

Show Plant Item in Association Assistant Command

(Actions Menu)
Opens the Association Assistant for the plant item you selected in an active drawing.

Activate Jumper Mode Command (Edit Menu)

Allows you to connect jumpers in a wiring diagram.

Disconnect (Edit Menu)

This menu option is available when working in a cable block diagrams.
Allows you to select a cable and disconnect the wiring items that the cable is connecting. This
action removes the cable from the current drawing. This action does not delete anything from
the database. Note that this action only disconnects the items from each other. The software
retains the association between the item and the cable.

Change Branch Orientation Command (Edit Menu)

This menu command is available when you select a root power source in an open single line
diagram.
Opens the Change Branch Orientation dialog box, which allows to change the orientation of a
branch connected between a selected power source and a bus.

Remove (Edit Menu)

This menu command is available when working with cable block diagrams, single line diagrams
and wiring drawings.
Allows you to remove an item from a cable block diagram, single line diagram, or a wiring
drawing. This action does not delete the item from your plant. It only removes it from the open
drawing.
When removing an item from an SLD, this command is only applicable for SLDs
created using a blank SLD template. It cannot be used in SLDs that were automatically created
by the software. For more information about the items that can be removed from a manual SLD,
, see Remove an Item from an SLD (on page 516).

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1218

 Menu Commands

Redlining Command (Edit Menu)

Turns on or off the redlining mode for single line diagrams.

Move Cell Command (Edit Menu)

Allows you to move a cell to another location in a PDB Layout grid.

Remove Cell Command (Edit Menu)

Allows you to remove a cell to from a PDB Layout grid.

Insert > New Sheet Command (Insert Menu)

Creates a new drawing sheet in the document using the default drawing sheet settings.

Insert > Image Command (Edit Menu)

This command is available after opening a single line diagram (SLD) or schematic drawing.
Opens a dialog box where you can navigate to an image to insert in the drawing.

Insert > Symbol Command (Edit Menu)

This command is available after opening a single line diagram (SLD) or schematic drawing.
Opens a dialog box where you can navigate to a symbol to insert in the drawing.

Insert > Object Command (Insert Menu)

Opens the Insert Object dialog box, where you can insert objects into a drawing with linking or
embedding. The difference between linking and embedding is the method for storing and
updating data.
▪ When you link an object to a drawing, the drawing stores information about the location of
the object, but the object itself is not stored in the drawing. When you embed an object in a
drawing, the software stores a copy of the object in the drawing.
▪ When you change a linked object, all drawings that have links to that object are updated.
When you change an embedded object, the software updates only the copy of the object
stored in the drawing.
The Insert Object command inserts any OLE-enabled object, such as a Microsoft Word file, .avi
document, or CAD drawing, such as a .dwg drawing. You can edit an embedded object by

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1219

 Menu Commands

double-clicking it. You can edit a linked object by selecting it and then clicking Edit > Links and
selecting Open Source.

Insert > Text Command (Edit Menu)

This menu option is available after opening an SLD or a schematic drawing.
Opens the Text Properties dialog box (on page 1121), which enables you to add or modify
annotation or redlining text and create a watermark.

Insert > Legend Command (Edit Menu)

This menu option is available after opening an SLD drawing.
Opens the SLD Legend dialog box (on page 1180), which enables you to add a legend showing
the meaning of all the symbols that appear in the default symbol folder and any other symbols
that are specific to the current single line diagram.

Insert > Line Command (Edit Menu)

This command is available after opening a single line diagram (SLD) or schematic drawing.
Allows you to insert a redlining line in the drawing.

Insert > Circle Command (Edit Menu)

This command is available after opening a single line diagram (SLD) or schematic drawing.
Allows you to insert a redlining circle in the drawing.

Insert > Rectangle Command (Edit Menu)

This command is available after opening a single line diagram (SLD) or schematic drawing.
Allows you to insert a redlining rectangle in the drawing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1220

 Menu Commands

Insert > Curve Command (Edit Menu)

This command is available after opening a single line diagram (SLD) or schematic drawing.
Allows you to insert a redlining curve in the drawing.

Text Command (Edit Menu)

This menu option is available after opening an SLD or a schematic drawing.
Opens the Text Properties dialog box (on page 1121), which enables you to modify an
annotation text string that you have selected in a drawing.

Convert to Composite Drawing Command (Actions

Menu)
Converts the currently open conventional drawing to a composite drawing. The command is
available only when a conventional drawing is open. The software creates a new composite
drawing leaving the original conventional drawing intact.

Format > Line Command (Format Menu)

Sets options for placing lines. You can access this dialog box by clicking Line on the Format
menu.

Format > Text Box Command (Format Menu)

Opens the Format Text Box dialog box that allows you to format a new text box as you place it.

Character Map Command

Inserts a character into a text box using a different font. You can also insert special
characters that do not have corresponding keys on the keyboard. You can use this command
when you type or edit text in a text box.

▪ If you are running Windows 95 or a higher version and this command is not available, you
must install the Character Map accessory. You can add it by clicking the Control Panel icon
and then the Add/Remove Programs icon. While adding the software, you can find the
Character Map software in the Accessories category. For detailed instructions on how to
add the Character Map accessory, see the Windows 95 on-line Help for Add/Remove
Programs.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1221

 Menu Commands

▪ To place the Character Map button on a toolbar, click Tools > Customize to open the
Customize dialog box. On the Toolbars tab, select Tools from the Categories list. Click
and drag Character Map to an existing toolbar.
See Also
Unicode Character Map Dialog Box (on page 446)
Adding Text to Documents (on page 418)
Insert a Font Character into a Text Box (on page 445)

Adjust Frame Position and Size Command (Edit

Menu)
This menu command is available only after opening or generating an SLD drawing.
The command optimizes the position and size of selected frames according to the current
position of the buses, cells and other items in the selected frames.

Document Properties Command (Edit Menu)

This menu option is available when you open a drawing or select a drawing in the Electrical
Index.
Opens the Document Properties dialog box (on page 1081), which enables you to enter or
modify the document name, description and revisions.

▪ If you choose this command without first opening a pertinent document, all the options in the
dialog box options appear in read-only mode.
▪ If you click outside the drawing, this command is not available. To access this command,
first select an item in the drawing.

Common Properties Command (Edit Menu)

Opens the Common Properties dialog box for the selected item where you can enter electrical
properties as you require. This command is only available for items that have a dialog box,
such as motors, loads, converting equipment, cables, control stations, and so forth.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1222

 Menu Commands

Table Properties Command (Edit Menu)

Opens the Table Properties dialog box, which enables you to specify the item type (such as
Battery Bank, Cable, and Load), a layout for the item type which determines how the software
presents the item type data, and if required, a filter.

Transformer Connections and Tapping Command

(Edit Menu)
This menu option is available when you select a transformer in the Electrical Index.
Opens the Transformer Connections and Tapping dialog box (on page 1077), which enables
you to set options for defining the types of connection (Delta, Wye, and so forth) and neutral
grounding for 3-phase transformers in your plant. Also allows you to specify tapping
arrangements on the primary and secondary transformer windings for transformers with all types
of feeds.

Previous Zoom Level Command (View Menu)

Restores the previous view of a drawing.

Refresh Command (View Menu)

Refreshes the drawing or report with updated data.

Show Selected Electrical Branches Only Command

(View Menu)
Filters the display of the Electrical Engineer window and shows only the selected branches of
the network structure.
To display all the existing data in the Electrical Engineer, close the Electrical Engineer and
open a new session by clicking on the main toolbar.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1223

 Menu Commands

Show in New Window Command (View Menu)

Filters the display of the Electrical Engineer window and shows only the selected branches of
the network structure in a new Electrical Engineer window.

Show Items of All Plant Groups Command (View

Menu)
Toggles the display of the Electrical Index, Reference Data Explorer, and EDE to show all
items in the plant for which you have the appropriate access rights or to show only items that
belong to plant groups in the current login path. For example, in a plant hierarchy 7 with the
following tree:

Logging into Unit 101 filters out all items except for those associated with Unit 101, Area 100,
and Plant 1. The software filters out items associated with Unit 100 or with Area 200 and its
units (Unit 200, Unit 201).

Show Related Items (View Menu)

Opens a new frame and shows all items related to main selected item.

Add Filter Command (View Menu)

Adds a filter tab to the drawings in the Design window. This command displays the Select Filter
(see "Select Filter Dialog Box" on page 925) dialog box, which contains a subset of the
commands in Filter Manager.

Save Settings Command (View Menu)

Stores all filters if the active view is a drawing view. Stores the table layout and column widths if
the active view is a table view.
Your settings are automatically saved.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1224

 Menu Commands

Zoom Area Command (View Menu)

Allows you to select an area of a drawing that zooms to fit the entire working area of a drawing.

Zoom In Command (View Menu)

Allows you to zoom in on a drawing by fixed increments.

Zoom Out Command (View Menu)

Allows you to zoom out on a drawing by fixed increments.

Fit Command (View Menu)

Allows you to resize the drawing to fit the working area of the drawing.

Pan Command (View Menu)

Allows you to pan across the drawing to view different areas of the drawing.

Show Grid Command (View Menu)

Allows you to display grid lines in an open drawing.

Snap to Grid Command (View Menu)

Snaps the cursor to grid points in an open drawing.

Show Auxiliary Graphics Symbology

Enables you mark the auxiliary graphics in a cable block diagram.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1225

 Menu Commands

Display > Properties Window Command (View Menu)

Turns the display of the Properties window on or off.

Display > Working Area Command (View Menu)

Displays the working area of an automated drawing.

Display > Item Status in Project Command (View

Menu)
Allows you to show the status of selected items in a project.

Toolbars Command (View Menu)

Opens the Toolbars dialog box, which allows you to create new toolbars and displays or hide
selected toolbars. You can change toolbar color schemes and button sizes.

Design PDB Layout Command (Actions Menu)

This menu option is available after selecting a power distribution board in the Electrical Index.
Allows you to design a PDB layout for a selected power distribution board. After designing a
PDB layout, you can open the layout drawing for a particular PDB and make the required cell
associations with appropriate layout grid units.

Batch Load Association Command (Actions Menu)

Opens the Batch Load Association dialog box (on page 1009), which allows you to associate
multiple loads with a power distribution board (PDB) and display the aggregate calculated
electrical consumption.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1226

 Menu Commands

Total Bus Load Validation Command (Actions Menu)

Opens the Total Bus Load Validation dialog box (on page 1120), which allows you to validate
the total loads on buses for selected power distribution boards or buses.

Calculate Bus Loads > Selected PDBs or Buses

Command (Actions Menu)
Calculates load totals for selected buses or PDBs.

Calculate Bus Loads > All Plant Buses Command

(Actions Menu)
Calculates load totals for all the buses in your plant.

Associate Bus with PDB Command (Actions Menu)

Allows you to associate a free-standing bus with a power distribution board.

Dissociate Bus from PDB Command (Actions Menu)

Allows you to dissociate a selected bus from a PBD and make this bus a free-standing bus.

Generate SLD for PDB Command (Actions Menu)

Allows you to generate an automatic SLD for a power distribution board that you selected in the
Electrical Index. The software opens the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box (on page
1164), which allows you to define SLD generation settings.
This menu option is available only after selecting a power distribution board in the Electrical
Index.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1227

 Menu Commands

Associate with Electrical Item Command (Actions

Menu)
Opens the Find dialog box which allows you to find an electrical item in your plant and
associate it with the selected graphical element in the current composite drawing.

Dissociate from Electrical Item Command (Actions

Menu)
Dissociates the selected graphical element from its electrical item in the plant.

Generate Schematic Command (Actions Menu)

This menu option is available after selecting a load in the Electrical Index.
Opens the Generate Schematic dialog box (on page 1147), which enables you to generate a
schematic drawing for the selected load.

Define Document Reference Command (Actions

Menu)

Opens the Document Reference Definition dialog box (see "Define Document Reference Dialog
Box" on page 992), which enables you to define a reference for an external document.

Associate Documents Command (Actions Menu)

Opens the Associate Documents dialog box (on page 991), which enables you to associate
external documents with selected electrical items.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1228

 Menu Commands

Global Revisions Command (Actions Menu)

Opens the Global Revisions dialog box (on page 1093), which allows you to assign and manage
revisions for a group of documents.

Compare Documents Command (Actions Menu)

Opens the Document Properties dialog box (on page 1081) where you can select an archived
version of the current document with which you want to compare the document that you have
selected.

Resolve Symbol Inconsistencies Command (Actions

Menu)
Opens a dialog box that allows you resolve symbol inconsistencies in single line diagrams.

Associate Custom Symbols Command

Opens the Associate Custom Symbols dialog box where you can associate a customized
symbol with a document type and specific item tag. You also remove a customized symbol
from here.

Dissociate Command (Actions Menu)

This menu command is available when you select an electrical item in the Electrical Engineer.
Cancels the electrical association of the selected electrical item with its feeding item in the
Electrical Engineer.

Move Items Command (Actions Menu)

Displays the Move Items to Plant Group dialog box (on page 919), which allows you to select
the plant group to which you want to move selected electrical items.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1229

 Menu Commands

Switch Mode (Rule-Driven) Command (Actions Menu)

Opens the Switch Plant Operational Mode dialog box that enables you, in one single
operation, to switch all the plant loads, instruments and cabinets to a plant operational case
(mode) that you select.

Switch Active Operating Case Command (Actions

Menu)
Opens the Switch Active Operating Case dialog box, which allows you to switch all the plant
loads, instruments, and cabinets to a plant operating case that you select.
If this command is disabled, this means that you have not been granted Full
Control access rights for this feature in Smart Engineering Manager.

Cables > Batch Size Cables Command (Actions Menu)

This menu option is available when you select a cable in the Electrical Index.
Opens the Batch Size Cables dialog box (see "Batch Size Cables Window" on page 934), which
enables you to size cables in batch mode.

Replace Cable Structure Command (Actions > Cables

Menu)

This menu option is available when you select a cable in the Electrical Index.
Opens the Replace Cable Structure Dialog Box (on page 976), which enables you to replace the
associated reference cable with another reference cable or a single-core cable assembly.

Cables > Apply Reference Data to Cables Command

(Actions Menu)
Opens the Apply Reference Data to Plant Cables dialog box (on page 930), which allows you to
select plant cables for which the reference data has changed and to apply the new reference
data values to those plant cables.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1230

 Menu Commands

Cables > Assign Drums to Cables Command (Actions

Menu)
Opens the Assign Drums to Cables Wizard (see "Drum and Cable Options (Assign Drums to
Cables Wizard)" on page 931), which allows you to assign cables automatically to cable drums.

Cables > Predefined Routes Command (Actions

Menu)
Opens the Predefined Routes Dialog Box (on page 967), which enables you to organize
cableway segments in predefined routing paths.

Cables > Batch Cable Routing Command (Actions

Menu)
This menu option is available when you select a cable in the Electrical Index.
Opens the Batch Cable Routing Dialog Box, which enables you to effect cable routing in batch
mode.

Cables > Define Color Pattern Command (Actions

Menu)
Opens the Define Color Pattern dialog box (on page 972), which allows you to specify wire color
patterns that you can apply to cables.

Cables > Refresh Load Data for Power Cables

Command (Actions Menu)
After you modify parameters that affect cable sizing in one or more loads in the plant, this option
refreshes the sizing data parameters for all the cables attached to those loads.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1231

 Menu Commands

Cables > Associate Cables with Equipment Circuits

Command (Actions Menu)
Associates the 'From' side of all non-power cables for control stations or instruments with the
feeder circuit for the load.

Cables > Batch Cable Side and Gland Associations

Command (Actions Menu)
Opens the Batch Cable Side and Gland Associations Dialog Box (on page 933), which enables
you to batch associate cable sides with an item for non-power cables and to associate cable
sides with glands for cables of all categories.

Cables > Synchronize Gland Associations (Actions

Menu)
Opens the Synchronize Glad Associations dialog box that allows you to synchronize the
glands on plant cables with the glands on the reference cables.

Cables > Batch Cable Connection Command (Actions

Menu)
Opens the Batch Cable Connection dialog box (on page 1196), which allows you to connect
numerous plant cables in batch mode.

Cables > Batch Cable Dissociation from Drums

Command (Actions Menu)
This menu command is available when you select a number of drums in the Electrical Index.
Allows you to select a number of cable drums and dissociate them from the assigned cables in
batch mode.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1232

 Menu Commands

Cables > Insert Power Cable (Actions Menu)

This command is available when you select an equipment item in the Electrical Engineer.
This command opens the Insert Power Cable dialog box, where you select a power cable for
inserting between two items of equipment, under the item selected in the Electrical Engineer.
For example, you can insert a power cable between a transformer and a generator to create an
electrical connection.

Parallel Equipment Assistant Command (Actions

Menu)
Opens the Parallel Equipment Assistant that allows you to define parallel relations between
electrical items.

Fix Inconsistencies Command (Actions Menu)

Opens the Fix Inconsistencies dialog box, checks the selected items for inconsistencies against
the rules defined in the Rule Manager, fixes found inconsistencies, carries out copy rules, and
produces a summary detailing the number of inconsistencies found, the type of inconsistency,
and the number of items checked. You can also produce a more detailed log as an Excel sheet,
by clicking Show Log.

Copy Driver Power Absorbed (Actions Menu)

Opens the Copy Driver Power Absorbed dialog box (on page 1031), which allows you copy the
value of the Driver Power Absorbed of process equipment items to the Brake Power value of
the associated motors. This functionality exists for process equipment and motors that have
been retrieved from Smart P&ID.

Set Circuit Sequence Command (Actions Menu)

Allows you to change the sequence of circuits for a selected bus.

Register Report Command (Actions Menu)

Opens the Register Report Common Properties dialog box (see "Registered Report Common
Properties Dialog Box" on page 1094), which allows you to save a report based on a particular
template to the database for the purpose of assigning revisions.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1233

 Menu Commands

Gap Now Command (Tools Menu)

Performs gapping on the current drawing - that is, on the entire drawing. Gapping refers to the
condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically on the drawing but do not physically
intersect in the plant.

Optimize Overlapping Connectors

Repositions overlapping connectors so that they do not overlap on the drawing sheet.

Apply Options Command (Tools Menu)

Opens the Apply Options dialog box (on page 1004), which enables you to apply default profiles,
circuits, control stations, and lookup tables, all of which you define in the Reference Data
Explorer.

Drawing Options Command (Tools Menu)

This menu option is available after opening a single diagram drawing.
Opens the Single Line Diagram Options dialog box (on page 1164), which allows you to redefine
SLD generation settings and regenerate the drawing.

Update Select Lists (Tools Menu)

Opens the Update Select Lists dialog box (on page 928), which allows you to add or edit items
on Smart Electrical select lists.

Apply Naming Conventions (Tools Menu)

Applies the naming conventions as defined in the Options Manager, to the items in your plant.
Note that the command is available only if you have been given the appropriate access rights.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1234

 Menu Commands

ETAP Interface > Publish All (Tools Menu)

Publishes all the available electrical analysis SLDs to ETAP (full publishing).

ETAP Interface > Retrieve (Tools Menu)

Allows you to navigate to the ETAP project XML file from which you retrieve ETAP project data.

New Command (Reports Menu)

Opens the New Report Template dialog box that allows you to create plant-level and user-level
report templates.

Edit Command (Reports Menu)

Opens the Edit Report Template dialog box. This dialog box lists all the available report
templates. You can select a template and view its properties and edit it in Microsoft Excel.
You must have valid privileges to edit a report template.

Delete Command (Reports Menu)

Displays the Delete Report Template dialog box, which allows you to select and delete a report
template.
You must have valid privileges, granted in Smart Engineering Manager, to delete a
report template.

Options Command
Changes settings that control screen appearance, document location, user information, and so
forth. This command is available only on the Tools menu.
You can use the Options command to set options for importing MicroStation or
AutoCAD documents into the software.
See Also
Customize the Software with the Options Command (on page 1162)
Options Dialog Box (on page 1149)

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1235

 Menu Commands

Plant Reports Command (Reports Menu)

Allows you to choose a report and specify what items to report on.

My Reports Command (Reports Menu)

Allows you to choose one of your custom reports and to specify what items to report on.

New > Table Command (Window Menu)

Creates a table view, which allows you to view and edit item data in a tabular format. The
Table Properties dialog box appears so that you can define the items and properties for the
new table view.

New > Electrical Index Command (Window Menu)

Opens a new Electrical Index window.

New > Electrical Engineer Command (Window Menu)

Opens a new Electrical Engineer window.

New > Reference Data Explorer Command (Window

Menu)

Opens a new Reference Data Explorer window.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1236

 Menu Commands

New > Reference Electrical Engineer Command

(Window Menu)

Opens a new Reference Electrical Engineer window.

New > Project Management Command (Window

Menu)
Creates a table view, which allows you to perform various operations relating to
projects. Depending on whether you are in As-Built or a project, this command opens the
Project Management (As-Built) table (see "Project Management Table (As-Built)" on page 1104)
or the Project Management table (see "Project Management Table (Project)" on page 1108) (for
the project) respectively.

Smart Electrical Help Command (Help Menu)

Opens the Smart Electrical Online Guide.

Printable Guides Command (Help Menu)

Opens the Printable Guides Help page for accessing the printable guides as .pdf files.

Smart Electrical on the Web Command (Help Menu)

Activates your World Wide Web browser and opens the Smart Electrical World Wide Web page.
On this page, you can access registration and support information, learning tools, and other
items to help you use Smart Electrical more efficiently.

Smart Electrical Web Forum Command (Help Menu)

Allows you to access Intergraph's online community of Smart Electrical users. In addition to
facilitating communication between Intergraph personnel and other Smart Electrical users, the
forum also provides access to short, informative video clips that illustrate step-by-step guidelines
for performing sophisticated workflows. These clips may be viewed online, or they may be
downloaded to your local machine for later viewing.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1237

 Menu Commands

About Smart Electrical Command (Help Menu)

Opens the About Smart Electrical window.

Copy Command (Edit Menu - EDE)

Copies the value in the selected row, cell, or group of cells, to the Clipboard so that it can be
pasted somewhere else. This command does not remove the value from the table. Values
placed on the Clipboard remain there until newer values are copied over them.

Paste Command (Edit Menu - EDE)

Places the value or values on the Clipboard into the selected row, cell, or group of cells. Values
do not paste successfully if you have selected a cell for which the value is strictly generated by
validation or calculation, or is read-only. When pasting, you must select the same number of
rows as the number of rows that were copied to the Clipboard.

Uncorrelate Command (SmartPlant Menu)

Opens the Find dialog box where you can search, select, and uncorrelate plant items so that
they no longer maintain a relationship with items in other authoring tools.

Customize Command
Allows you to customize toolbars or menus to fit your workflow. This command is available only
on the Tools menu.

Catalog Explorer Window Command (View > Display

Menu)
Turns the display of the Catalog Explorer on or off.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1238

 Menu Commands

Select All Command (Edit Menu - EDE)

Selects all the cells in the active EDE view. You can use this command to create a select set
and view its properties in the Properties window, for instance.
You can access this command when you right-click an area within the EDE. On the
shortcut menu click Select All.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1239

SECTION 42

Using Help
Online user assistance makes command information available as you perform tasks. You can
access different kinds of information any time that you are running the software. This
information includes reference topics, narrative descriptions, or instructional material.
The software offers the following important user-assistance features:

Online Help
A structured table of contents, an index, and full-text search capabilities provide easy access to
Help topics. Press F1 any time you need online Help during a session. You can access the
table of contents by clicking Help > Smart Electrical Help, or by clicking the Help command
on the toolbar.

Learning Tools
You can click Help > About Smart Electrical to see your software version and license
information.

User Interface Features

ToolTips help you find toolbar command names. When you point to a command button on the
toolbar and pause over it, a label displays the name of the command.

Printable Guides
You can click Help > Printable Guides and choose to display the Help contents in portable
document format (.pdf). Then you can print the file if necessary.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1240

Glossary
active power
The quantity of electrical power (in W, kW, or MW) supplied to a consumer that is capable of
producing actual work. See also: rated active load, consumed active load.
actual length
A derived value that Smart Electrical uses for cable sizing, cable drum assignment, and so forth.
If a cable has a value for Estimated length, but no value for Design length, then the Estimated
length is also the Actual length. If there is a value for Design length only, then this is also used
as the value for Actual length.
annotations
Dimensions, notes, symbols, or reports that you place in a drawing to provide information or
comments.
ANSI
American National Standards Institute.
apparent power
The quantity of electrical power (in VA, kVA, or MVA) that represents the vector sum of the
active load and reactive load for a motor. This quantity is the actual power that the electricity
supply company needs to generate.
As-Built
The operational plant that is used as the source of data for your projects.
asynchronous speed
The maximum attainable rate of rotation of a motor shaft, in rpm. This quantity is always less
than the synchronous speed because of energy losses due to the magnetic field, pole
architecture, and so forth.
attribute
a. A property or characteristic of a component.
b. A characteristic that all members of a class possess. Each property has an associated
value that defines its current state. Most databases represent an attribute by a column in
a table.
average power
The average electrical power consumption for a consumer, used to calculate overall electrical
load requirements. The average load is calculated by multiplying the rated active load by the
operating factor.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1241

 Glossary

block
A block is the basic drawing unit of a schematic. Each block graphically represents the
functionality of an item or a related group of items. Each block must belong to a block type,
which you can use to classify the blocks according to the items they represent; for example, a
motor and its cables, or a circuit block with its bus, cell, and PDB. The block also specifies the
drawing file that contains the graphical information for the items.
block
A block is the basic drawing unit of a schematic. Each block graphically represents the
functionality of an item or a related group of items. Each block must belong to a block type,
which you can use to classify the blocks according to the items they represent; for example, a
motor and its cables, or a circuit block with its bus, cell, and PDB. The block also specifies the
drawing file that contains the graphical information for the items.
brake power
The minimum mechanical power required to make the motor shaft rotate and drive the pump or
process equipment attached to the motor.
bucket
See cell.
buffer
A temporary data store used for setting aside items before you decide whether to scope those
items.
bus riser, bus tier
See riser circuit.
busbars
Used in place of standard cables to interconnect electrical equipment requiring high current.
They consist of strips of copper, usually arranged in groups of three or four. Each set of busbars
operates at a specified rated voltage.
cell
A removable compartment in a power distribution board that contains circuitry.
claim
Selection of an item in a project so that it can be edited in that project.
claim mode
Indicates whether a claimed item is available for all available projects (shared claim) or only for
the selected project (exclusive claim).
coincidence factor
The fraction of the maximum possible utilization of the motor for a specified operating mode.
The software uses this factor when calculating the total load consumption of a power distribution
board or electrical system.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1242

 Glossary

compartment
A section of a power distribution board that contains the required circuitry.
consumed active load
The quantity of electrical power used by a consumer when operating at the brake power.
consumer
See load.
control station
A local or remote panel containing a low-voltage circuit, used to control the operation of a motor
via a control circuit.
converting equipment
Equipment used to convert one level or type of electric property to another. Converting
equipment includes transformers, battery chargers, UPS units, and variable-frequency drives
(VFDs).
coupler circuit
A circuit that connects two buses in a power distribution board for the purpose of creating a bus
tie. This circuit belongs to the bus that serves as the power source of the coupled bus in the
PDB.
cubicle
See cell.
data dictionary
The underlying data model of a plant, consisting of database entries and select lists. Smart
Data Dictionary Manager maintains this information.
data model
Application items that populate a project. Typical items in a data model are components, lines,
and labels.
demand factor
A quantity expressing the ratio of brake power to motor rated power. The demand factor can
have values between 0 and 1.
demand point
The point where the motor operates at its brake power.
disconnect electrical equipment
Equipment used to disconnect a load from the power supply. Disconnect electrical equipment
includes switches, starters, overload relays, fuses, circuit breakers, and protection relays.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1243

 Glossary

distribution board
A box divided into panels, used to distribute the power supply to the various loads, and to
transform the voltage as required. See also: power distribution board.
distribution equipment
Equipment used to distribute the power supply among several loads. Distribution equipment
includes power distribution boards (PDBs), motor control centers (MCCs), disconnect electrical
equipment, cables, and panels.
drawing file
A file in which you place items; also called a design file.
efficiency
A quantity expressing the ratio of useful power output to power input. Efficiency can have values
between 0 and 1.
electrical distribution network
The arrangement of buses, cables, and distribution boards used to bring electrical power to the
loads.
enclosure
The physical housing of a piece of electrical equipment used to protect the equipment from its
environment.
enclosure protection
The level of protection afforded to a motor from its environment. For example, the operational
environment of the motor may require that the enclosure is sealed or explosion-proof.
EPC
Engineering Procurement Contractor: a company that has responsibility to design and erect a
plant.
feeder
A circuit that distributes power from a distribution board downstream to other types of
equipment.
frame size
A US standard that defines the physical and mechanical properties and dimensions of a motor.
full load amperes (FLA), full load current (FLC)
The electrical current drawn by a motor when operating at maximum load. This quantity is
required for sizing cables that supply power to the motor.
full load current
See full load amperes.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1244

 Glossary

IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission, a European electrical standard.
incomer
A circuit that supplies power to a power distribution board.
item status in project
Describes the status of a particular item in the project. Possible statuses are: Scoped, Claimed,
Completed, or Merged.
load (consumer)
An electrical device, such as a motor or heater, that draws power from the electrical distribution
network.
load center
See power distribution board.
load factor
See demand factor.
locked rotor current (LRC)
The initial electrical current required to start rotation of a motor. Depending on the motor, this
quantity is typically 400 - 1000% larger than the full load current of the motor. Usually, the motor
nameplate specifies the LRC/FLA ratio, and this ratio is multiplied by the motor FLA to calculate
the LRC value.
macro
A string attached to a graphic block that represents the item type and one of its properties. You
can assign one or more macros to a block. When you generate a schematic drawing, the
software reads and resolves the macros so that it can retrieve the value of the property from the
database and display it in the drawing.
main item
A term used to describe almost any item added in As-Built that can be a focal item with related
items. Main items can include loads, converting equipment, power sources, free cables, PDBs,
and documents. You can only scope main items if they are included in a plant group that has
been scoped.
merge
The action of moving items whose data was modified in a project back to the As-Built schema.
minimum required power
Under the IEC Standard, the minimum mechanical power that the motor shaft is required to
supply when operational.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1245

 Glossary

miscellaneous drawings
Drawings that you create based on a template, to which you can add symbols. You can revise
miscellaneous drawings, as you can any other Smart Electrical document, and associate it with
any item in your plant.
motor control center (MCC)
A power distribution board providing the necessary electrical power for motor loads.
motor rated power (MRP)
The maximum mechanical power that a motor shaft is required to supply. This quantity is usually
marked on the motor nameplate and is used in calculating the electrical power requirements for
the motor.
motor speed
The rate of rotation of the motor shaft, in rpm. Motor speeds are characterized by two standard
quantities: the synchronous speed and the asynchronous speed.
naming convention
The naming convention is a means of ensuring a consistent structure and maintaining
uniqueness of tags for items of the same type. Once you define a naming convention for an item
type such as motors, the software tags any new items of that type using the mask and structure
of the naming convention. The naming convention is a combination of properties, text strings,
and separators that makes up the tag structure in the Electrical Index. You define naming
conventions in the Options Manager.
NEC
National Electric Code, a US electrical standard.
operating factor
A quantity expressing the ratio of the load power requirement at the operating point to the rated
power. The operating factor can have values between 0 and 1.
operating mode
A description of how the motor is used in practice in the plant. The operating mode can be:
continuous, intermittent, normal, standby, or spare, and a quantitative measure of the motor
behavior in each mode is provided by the coincidence factor.
operating point
The point where the motor operates under normal working conditions.
owner operator
A company that owns and operates a plant.
panel circuit
A circuit that can be created in a local panel or a junction box.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1246

 Glossary

particular power
Under the IEC Standard, the mechanical power that a motor shaft is required to supply when
operating under a specified set of conditions, for example, once a year.
plant
A group of facilities and equipment that performs one or more material processing functions
within a given geographical area. One company can have several plants located at different
geographical locations.
power distribution board (PDB)
A distribution board containing components of the electrical distribution network at the supply
level.
power factor (cos f)
The ratio between active load and apparent load. The power factor can have values between 0
and 1.
profile
A profile is an assembly of various typical items that you can use as a template for creating
project items. For example, you can create a motor profile that consists of the following
reference items: a motor, one or more cables, a control station, a circuit with protection devices,
and schematic.
project
A separate electrical schema within a plant used to claim items for updating when performing
routine maintenance or modernization (revamp) for that plant. To facilitate plant modernization,
you can create a number of projects within a single plant. Within a particular plant, the projects
and As-Built have a common reference schema and data dictionary.
project status
Describes the status the project as a whole. Possible statuses are: Active, Completed, Merged,
or Cancelled.
property
A unique characteristic of an object, item, symbol, or document.
The properties of an item can include display properties and properties stored with the item.
For example, the properties of a valve symbol can include display properties such as color, line
style, and width. Other properties stored with the valve symbol can include the manufacturer,
cost, or material. Properties stored with the valve symbol are displayed in the Properties
window when the valve symbol is selected.
rated active load
The maximum quantity of electrical power used by a consumer when operating at the rated
power.
rated power
The maximum output power that a load can produce. See also: motor rated power.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1247

 Glossary

rated voltage
The voltage at which a piece of equipment is designed to operate. This quantity is required to
ensure electrical compatibility between the electrical supply and the equipment.
reactive power
The component of the supplied electrical power (in VAR, kVAR, or MVAR) that the load uses to
provide reactive energy.
reference data
A collection of information containing facts relative to industry design codes, catalog data of
vendors, job specifications, commodity libraries, graphics symbology, label descriptions, report
formats, and other information of a similar theme.
reference plant group
A plant group containing reference data, options settings, naming conventions, and so forth, that
you can use as a source for copying. Usually, a reference plant group does not belong to your
current plant structure. You can access a reference plant group and view naming conventions
only from Options Manager.
related item
An item that has an electrical relationship to a main item and which the software scopes
automatically when the main item is scoped. Related items may include control stations,
associated cables, circuits, and signals. Some scoped items may belong to unscoped plant
groups.
relation rule
A rule in which consistency criteria apply to two specific components. Relation rules ensure that
correct relationships are created when you create a new relationship or modify properties or
values of related items in Smart Electrical.
report template
An online outline for a new report that you need to define. You can select a user-level or a
project-level template to create a new report template.
resistive load
A load that has resistive characteristics.
riser circuit
A circuit that connects two buses in a power distribution board for the purpose of creating a bus
tie. This circuit belongs to the bus that serves as the receiver of backup power from the feeder
bus in the PDB.
rotor
The rotating part of a motor or generator.
run-up rime
The time it takes a motor to reach its operating speed after switching on the power.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1248

 Glossary

schematic
A graphical representation of the wiring of a load, its feeder circuit and its controls, which
includes specific data for that particular load.
schematic file
Schematic drawing or diagram of a particular item in the plant.
scope
In Engineering Manager, the scope defines the extent of the items that you are able to view and
subsequently claim, based on plant group levels of the project. In Smart Electrical, any item that
you scope in As-Built becomes available for viewing in the project. When you select and scope
main items, the software includes certain related items in the scope.
search criteria
Set of values used to scan a database or object library.
segregation level
A term used to group cables that share a common electrical signal and can therefore be run
along the same routing path. You use segregation levels to distinguish between different groups
of cables that if routed together could produce electrical or magnetic interference. Examples of
such groups include high or low voltage cables, cables of different types or sources, or cables
associated with different applications or systems.
server
In network operations, the node that maintains common data or performs a common task that
clients need. All network operations between two or more nodes establish a client/server
relationship.
shaft
The part of a motor or generator that drives the attached equipment.
signal
An item type that is used for mediating between Smart Electrical and Smart Instrumentation.
You can associate a signal with a load, a control station, or a circuit for the purpose of publishing
data to Smart Instrumentation. You can perform wiring connections in Smart Instrumentation
and retrieve the host information back to Smart Electrical, where it appears as read-only
properties of the signal. Smart Electrical can then use the values of those properties to display
I/O assignment information in a schematic.
single component rule
A rule in which consistency criteria apply to one component only. Single component rules
validate consistency of the properties or property values of a specific item tag.
single line diagram (SLD)
A schematic one-line diagram representing the electrical distribution network.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1249

 Glossary

static load
Equipment that does not rotate; for example, heaters, lighting equipment, other machines are
static loads.
stator
The stationary part of a piece of rotating electrical equipment, such as a motor or generator.
strip
A termination item used for making wiring connections. A strip is always at the lowest level in
the hierarchy of distribution equipment.
switch board
See power distribution board.
switchgear
See power distribution board.
synchronous speed
The maximum theoretical rate of rotation of a machine shaft, in rpm, assuming no energy losses
due to the magnetic field, pole architecture, and so forth. See also: asynchronous speed.
Te stall time
The time it takes a motor to come to rest after switching off the power.
unit
Group of parts of the schematic and individual worlds of a plant that together perform a given
process function. The identifying number of the unit is unique within the project and within the
plant. Most companies, but not all, use the concept of unit.

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1250

Index
rules for changing statuses • 718
A rules for scoping items • 722
actions • 1194, 1195 running a test merge • 733
description • 1195 scoping items • 724
Log • 1195 scoping projects • 717
Options Manager settings • 1195 selecting projects • 721
Reject • 1195 setting display options • 739
rule priorities • 1194 understanding statuses • 717
Warn • 1195 assemblies • 80, 81
aligning • 455, 457, 458, 1203 copying • 81
Align command • 458 creating • 80
align ribbon • 1203 assigning
drawing objects • 457 batch cable-drum assignment • 193
overview • 455 cable routing • 199
alternative feeders • 133, 134, 135 control stations to motors • 1006
associating • 134 loads to typical schematics • 216
changing • 135 typical circuit data to circuits • 139
dissociating • 135 associating
annotations • 477, 482, 624, 625, 626, 627 a single load with a PDB • 247
deleting • 627 associating registered reports • 686
editing • 626 automatic creation of feeders • 233
in schematics • 477, 482 bus riser circuits with coupler circuits •
inserting • 625 234
inserting graphics • 626 changing existing associations • 228
overview • 624 circuits • 1114
applying • 1004, 1007 control station cables with equipment •
applying options 235
lookup tables to items • 1007 control stations with cables • 61, 150, 235
overview • 211 control stations with loads • 150
profiles • 1004 dissociating electrical equipment • 232
typical circuits • 1005 dissociating external documents • 636
typical I/O sets • 1008 dragging items to the Electrical Engineer
typical schematics • 1007 • 223
As-Built instrument cables with equipment • 236
claiming items overview • 726 items in KKS mode • 709
comparing with project documents • 732 loads • 1009
filtering the display • 738 loads with control stations • 234
generating a report • 739 loads with feeders • 231
merging into As-Built • 734 miscellaneous drawings • 638
merging into As-Built overview • 731 non-power cables with equipment • 238
modifying a project status • 719 power cables with equipment • 236
project management overview • 716 AutoCAD • 1213
Project Management Table (As-Built) • automatic drum - cable assignment • 931,
1104 932, 933
Project Management Window (Project) •
1108 B
Project Status dialog box • 1112, 1113
releasing claim • 728 batch item creation • 93
releasing items from merge • 730 batch operations • 1195

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1251

 Index

Options Manager settings • 1195 opening existing diagram • 528

Warn action • 1195 overview • 526
batch sizing cables • 184, 934 removing items • 540
compare documents • 1080 show related items • 323
battery banks • 90, 91, 114, 234, 1021, cable drums
1022, 1023 assigning cables to • 191, 193
associating with control stations • 234 automating splicing • 193
controls and signals • 1022 batch assigning cables • 193
creating • 114 calculations • 198
deleting • 91 creating • 190
duplicating • 90 editing • 191, 968
electrical data • 1022 properties • 968
general data • 1021 rules • 198
instrument data • 1023 selecting reference cables for • 191, 980
battery chargers • 90, 91 unassigning cables from • 198
deleting • 91 cable route • 967
duplicating • 90 properties • 967
blocks • 70, 470 cable routing • 199, 200, 201, 204, 207,
sequencing items • 470 210, 517, 518, 940, 961
brief properties • 48, 49 assign components to segments • 200
bulk properties • 48 assigning cables • 940
bus riser circuits • 137, 234 clearing • 204
associating with coupler circuits • 234 create cableway and segments • 199
creating • 137 defining • 201
bus ties • 234 edit cableway • 207
buses overview • 199
associating a single load • 247 segment fill • 207, 210
associating electrical equipment with segment validations • 517, 518, 961
feeders • 231 setting calculation criteria • 210
calculating load summaries • 311 setting validation method • 210
calculating load summaries overview • validation • 207, 210
253 cable sets • 555, 557, 971
calculating loads for all buses • 311 connecting • 555
changing bus symbols in SLDs • 490 disconnecting in wiring drawings • 557
creating • 120 properties • 971
creating stand-alone buses • 120 cables
deleting • 120 adding • 154
displaying associated loads • 250 adding parallel power cables to
displaying bus load data • 250 equipment • 237
enhanced load summary report • 312 adding reference cables • 152
SLD symbol creation guidelines • 519 applying reference data • 930
validating total loads • 250 associating bus riser circuits with coupler
circuits • 234
C associating glands • 160
associating non-power cables with
cabinets • 1095, 1096, 1097, 1099 equipment • 238
electrical data • 1096 associating power cables with equipment
feeder data • 1097, 1099 • 236
general data • 1095 associating with control stations • 61,
cable block diagrams 150, 235
creating diagram • 534 automatic assignment to drums • 931,
finding items in the EI or EE • 322 932, 933
hiding cables • 542 batch connection • 554

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1252

 Index

batch sizing • 184, 934 Catalog Manager • 485, 519, 523

cable set properties • 971 complete symbol file for schematic blocks
comparing reference data • 972 • 485
connection properties • 1134 placing connection points on symbols •
connections • 944 523
connections common tasks • 548 recommended workflow for schematic
continuous connection method • 552 blocks • 485
custom connection method • 550 recommended workflow for SLD symbols
deleting • 157 • 519
design data properties • 940, 1132 cells • 120, 130, 132, 133, 231, 1079
disconnecting in wiring drawings • 557 associating with loads • 231
display / hide multiple cables • 52 automating cell size • 133
dissociating cable sides and glands • 161 cell macros • 130
earth loop impedance • 952 creating • 132
editing reference cable properties • 153 deleting • 120
general properties • 935, 1129 properties • 132
overview • 152 changing • 228
parallel cables in SLDs • 490 changing naming conventions • 31
procurement • 954 existing electrical associations • 228
procurement properties • 1134 overview • 31
project • 935 circuit components • 63, 78, 79, 120, 137,
reference • 1129 138, 139
replacing • 165, 976 applying lookup tables • 78
replacing cable side associations • 168 associating lookup tables • 78
selecting for connection to a control automatating load based sizing • 79
station • 976 copying • 138
sizing data properties • 945 creating • 63, 139
cableway • 199, 207 deleting • 120
creating • 199 circuit mode • 136
editing • 207 associating with lookup tables • 137
calculated electric consumption • 247, 250 circuits • 62, 63, 120, 137, 138, 139, 140,
calculations 152, 231, 233, 1113, 1114, 1115
batch load assignment • 306 assigning typical circuit data • 139
bus load connectivity • 258 associated items • 1115
bus load summaries overview • 253 associating with loads • 231
bus loading • 264 associating with lookup tables • 137
bus properties • 307 automatic creation of feeders • 233
cable drum • 198 circuit breakers • 63, 138, 139
circuit properties • 307 creating • 137
compensated and uncompensated data • creating panel circuits • 152
253 creating reference circuits • 62
converting equipment properties • 307 deleting • 120
custom • 891 electrical data • 1114
electrical load data overview • 253 general data • 1114
electrical load for all buses • 311 moving • 140
electrical load for all PDBs • 311 claiming • 726, 727, 728
electrical load for selected buses • 311 claim modes • 727
electrical load for selected PDBs • 311 claiming items • 726
flow of activities • 306 reclaiming items • 728
preferences • 305 releasing claim • 728
capacitors • 90, 91 Clear Mark as Completed • 729
deleting • 91 closing • 1214
duplicating • 90 EDE • 1213

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1253

 Index

SmartPlant Electrical • 1214 copying • 29, 63, 81, 86, 138

common tasks circuit components • 63
external documents • 635 default data • 29
managing cable drums • 191, 193 default items • 86
managing PDBs • 119 internal equipment • 63, 138
managing power distribution boards • 137 items • 1215
compartments • 1079 power network structures • 81
compensated electrical data • 253 reference items • 86
conductors • 556, 557 coupler circuits • 137, 234
connecting • 556 associating with bus riser circuits • 234
disconnecting in wiring drawings • 557 creating • 137
conformity to standard • 945, 1035 custom folders
connecting • 920, 976 applying filters • 41
cables to control stations • 976 creating • 40
to databases • 920 deleting • 42
to plant structures • 920 overview • 40
connection points • 523 custom symbols
placing on symbols • 523 associate symbol • 1229
connections • 117, 549, 550, 552, 554, 555, custom validations and calculations • 891
556, 557, 558 customizing • 48, 49, 50, 1226
batch cable connection • 554 data display • 48, 49, 50
connecting cable sets • 555 toolbars • 1226
connecting single conductors • 556
continuous cable connection method • D
552
custom connection method • 550 daisy-chain connection pattern • 241
customizing jumper symbols • 558 Data Dictionary templates • 699
defining connection types • 549 data display • 52, 80
jumpering terminals • 557 Electrical Engineer • 52
transformers • 117 Reference Electrical Engineer • 80
consumed electrical power • 247, 250 data model • 884
contactors • 63, 138, 139 database connection • 920
control cable associations with equipment • DDT files • 699
238 default DDT file for KKS mode • 699
control stations • 61, 149, 150, 234, 235, default cables • 152, 153, 1129
1006, 1103 default control stations • 1134
assigning to motors • 1006 default data • 29
associating cables • 61, 150, 235 copying • 29
associating cables with equipment • 235 default items
associating loads • 234 adding • 56
project • 149, 150 copying • 86
reference • 61 default panels • 60, 62
conventions • 696 defining • 148
for KKS mode • 696 defining reference items • 56, 60, 70, 152
converting equipment • 90, 91, 234, 1025, blocks • 70
1028, 1029, 1031 brief properties • 49
associating with control stations • 234 cables • 152
controls and signals • 1027 panels • 60
deleting • 91 project panels • 148
duplicating • 90 report items • 690
electrical data • 1025 tables • 1236
feeder data • 1029, 1031 deleting • 91, 157
instrument data • 1028 cables • 157

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1254

 Index

items • 91, 1215 drawing templates • 313

designing PDB layouts • 130, 1079, 1080 drawings • 321, 323, 637, 638, 1213, 1214
zooming • 1080 creating miscellaneous drawings • 638
disconnect electrical equipment • 1032 manipulating • 321
disconnect switches • 63, 138, 139 miscellaneous • 637
display rules in Electrical Engineer • 52 properties • 1214
displaying • 45, 48, 52, 1226 saving • 1213, 1214
brief properties • 49 view associated • 322
data in Electrical Engineer • 52 viewing • 323
null data • 49, 50 zooming • 323
properties • 45, 48, 1226 drums • 931, 932, 933
tables • 1236 automatic cable assignment • 931, 932,
displays • 1224 933
filters • 1224 dual source power supplies • 133, 134, 135
dissociating • 232, 636, 637 associating alternative feeder • 134
batch dissociation of external documents dissociating • 135
• 637 duplicating • 90, 95
electrical equipment • 232 items • 90
external documents • 636 motors • 95
distribution equipment • 63, 138, 139
document properties • 1083, 1087 E
revisions • 1083, 1087
documents earth loop impedance • 952
associating registered reports • 686 editing • 61, 64, 70, 72, 75, 89, 150, 153,
compare • 1080 191, 686
compare in batch mode • 1080 cable drums • 191
comparing As-Built and project control stations • 150
documents • 732 item properties • 89
comparing documents • 632, 634 lookup tables • 75
defining external document references • profiles • 64
635 reference cables • 153
dissociating external documents • 636 reference control stations • 61
dissociating multiple items • 637 report templates • 686, 690
external documents common tasks • 635 typical control stations • 61
global revisions • 632 typical schematic blocks • 70
opening external documents • 637 typical schematics • 72
opening PDB layout for selected PDB • electrical analysis SLDs • 864, 1165
132 electrical associations
opening schematics • 484 automatic creation of feeders • 233
opening SLDs • 501 changing • 228
opening SLDs from Documents folder • creating • 223
503 daisy-chain connection • 241
opening SLDs from Electrical Engineer • dissociating • 232
501 finding parent items • 54
overview • 630 electrical cables • 935, 1129
revisions in single documents • 631 electrical consumption • 247, 250
drag-and-drop rules • 82, 224, 229 electrical distribution equipment • 63, 138,
from the Electrical Index to the Electrical 139
Engineer • 224 Electrical Engineer • 33, 43, 52, 54, 80, 82,
from the Reference Electrical Engineer to 223, 224, 229, 233, 241, 322, 493, 501,
the Electrical Engineer • 82 514
within the Electrical Engineer • 229 automatic creation of feeders • 233
drawing • 322 daisy-chain connection • 241

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1255

 Index

display rules • 52 F
drag-and-drop rules • 229
feeder circuit location • 140
dragging items from the Electrical Index •
feeders • 133, 134, 135, 137, 231, 233,
223, 224
1029, 1031, 1041, 1043, 1052, 1053,
dragging items from the Reference
1064, 1066, 1074, 1076, 1097, 1099
Electrical Engineer • 82
alternative • 133
finding items from cable block diagrams •
associating alternative feeder • 134
322
associating cabinets with feeders • 1097,
finding items from wiring drawings • 322
1099
finding items in SLD drawings • 514
associating converting equipment with
finding parent items • 54
feeders • 1029, 1031
generating single line diagrams • 493
associating instruments with feeders •
grouping related items • 43
1052, 1053
opening single line diagrams • 501
associating loads with feeders • 231
opening SLDs • 501
associating motors with feeders • 1041,
overview • 52
1043
PDB display preferences • 33
associating other electrical equipment
Reference Electrical Engineer • 80
with feeders • 1064, 1066
Electrical Index • 42, 43, 224, 322, 494, 514
associating static loads with feeders •
customizing sort sequence within folders
1074, 1076
• 42
automatic creation • 233
drag-and-drop rules • 224
changing alternative feeder • 135
finding items from cable block diagrams •
creating • 137
322
dissociating alternative feeder • 135
finding items from wiring drawings • 322
filtering • 1224
finding items in SLD drawings • 514
Design window • 1224
generating single line diagrams • 494
displays • 1224
grouping related items • 43
filters • 1224
electrical motors • 91, 95, 1035, 1037,
folders • 42
1039, 1040, 1041, 1043
customizing sort sequence within folders
controls and signals • 1039
• 42
deleting • 91
formats • 1213
duplicating • 95
fuses • 63, 138, 139
electrical data • 1037
feeder data • 1041, 1043
instrument data • 1040 G
load data • 1035 gapping • 455, 1234
electrical power calculations • 886 generators • 90, 91, 112, 234, 1044, 1045,
electrical relationship • 52 1046, 1047
Enhanced SmartLoop reports • 483 associating with control stations • 234
equipment profiles • 1004 controls and signals • 1046
error log files • 879, 880 creating • 112
exiting SmartPlant Electrical • 1214 deleting • 91
external documents • 630, 635, 636, 637 duplicating • 90
common tasks • 635 electrical data • 1045
defining document references • 635 general data • 1044
dissociating • 636 instrument data • 1047
dissociating multiple items • 637 glands
opening • 637 associating with cable sides • 160
overview • 630 creating • 160
global revisions • 632
grounding cable associations with
equipment • 238

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1256

 Index

H customizing symbols • 558

junction boxes • 62, 151
handles • 1217
creating • 151
harmonic filters • 90, 91
deleting • 91
duplicating • 90 K
heat traces • 90, 91 KKS • 715
deleting • 91 KKS mode • 696, 698, 699, 701, 702, 706,
duplicating • 90 708, 709, 713, 714
heaters • 90, 91 Classification dialog box • 715
deleting • 91 configuring for hard-coded tag
duplicating • 90 propagation • 702
Help • 1237 configuring for rules • 706
hierarchy of plant groups • 920 configuring SmartPlant Electrical • 698
hyperlinks • 917 default DDT file • 699
overview • 696
I propagation • 708, 709
renaming items • 714
incomers • 137
scope • 713
creating • 137
using default DDT file overview • 698
instrumentation cable associations with
using supplied DDT file • 701
equipment • 238
instruments • 236, 1048, 1049, 1050, 1051,
1052, 1053 L
associating cables with equipment • 236 layers • 1213
controls and signals • 1050 layouts • 1224
electrical data • 1049 legend • 525
feeder data • 1052, 1053 in SLDs • 525
general data • 1048 levels • 1213
instrument data • 1051 loads
interface to SmartPlant Instrumentation • assigning to typical schematics • 216
795, 854, 855, 856, 857 associating • 1009
mapping plant groups • 856 associating a single load with a PDB •
overview • 854 247
prerequisites • 855 associating with control stations • 150,
publish • 795 234
retrieve • 857 associating with feeders • 231
interfaces • 864 automatic creation of feeders • 233
ETAP • 864 calculating load summaries • 311
internal documents calculating load summaries for all buses •
adding revisions • 631 311
comparing documents • 632, 634 calculating load summaries overview •
global revisions • 632 253
overview • 630 controls and signals • 1063, 1073
internal equipment • 63 creating in batch mode • 93
internals • 138, 139 displaying loads associated with a bus •
copying • 138 250
creating • 139 electrical data • 1062, 1072
item tag • 1054 enhanced load summary report • 312
feeder data • 1064, 1066, 1074, 1076
J instrument data • 1040, 1064, 1074
load data • 1061, 1070
jumpers • 557, 558
populating data • 211
connecting • 557

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1257

 Index

properties • 1068 mirroring items • 1217

validating • 250 miscellaneous drawings • 637, 638
local panels • 62, 150 associating with electrical items • 638
log files • 33, 879, 880, 1213 creating • 638
generating • 879, 880 inserting symbols • 638
preferences • 33 overview • 637
viewing • 1213 motors • 91, 95, 211, 886, 1035, 1037,
logical expressions • 882, 1195 1039, 1041, 1043
associated actions • 1195 controls and signals • 1039
description • 1195 deleting • 91
examples • 882 duplicating • 95
operands • 1195 electrical data • 1037
operators • 882 electrical power calculations • 886
properties • 1195 feeder data • 1041, 1043
values • 1195 load data • 1035
lookup tables • 74, 75, 77, 78, 1007 populating data • 211
adding more regional standards • 77 moving • 44, 140, 919, 1216
applying to items • 1007 circuits • 140
circuit components • 78 feeder circuits • 140
defining • 74 items • 44, 919, 1216
editing • 75 multi-item schematics • 479, 1149
multiple cables • 52
M display / hide • 52
multi-sheet schematic macros • 318
macros • 130, 318, 467, 470, 479, 690 multi-sheet schematics • 73
cell macros • 130
definition guidelines • 467
multi-item schematics • 479 N
report macros • 690 naming conventions • 29, 85, 696, 1054
sequencing items in schematic block copying • 29
macros • 470 KKS • 696
title blocks • 318 using • 85
mapping • 856 new • 1213
mapping attributes • 690 drawing templates • 1213
plant groups • 856 null data • 49, 50
Mark as Completed • 728
measuring transformers • 124, 128 O
copying • 128
creating • 124 opening • 132, 315, 484, 501, 502, 503, 920
merging • 731, 733, 734 databases • 920
into As-Built • 734 drawing templates • 315
overview • 731 PDB layouts for selected PDBs • 132
running a test merge • 733 plant structures • 920
metering equipment schematic drawings • 484
copying • 128 single line diagrams for PDBs • 502
creating measuring transformers • 124 SLDs • 501
creating meters • 125 SLDs from Documents folder • 503
creating protection relays • 126 SLDs from Electrical Engineer • 501
creating relay functions • 127 options • 1004
meters • 125, 128 other electrical equipment • 1059, 1061,
copying • 128 1062, 1063, 1064, 1066
creating • 125 controls and signals • 1063
MicroStation • 1213 electrical data • 1062

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1258

 Index

feeder data • 1064, 1066 moving items to • 919

instrument data • 1064 plant reference data • 29
load data • 1061 plant structures • 920
overall SLDs • 1165 populating item data • 211
overload relays • 63, 138, 139 power cables • 236, 237
adding in parallel to equipment • 237
P associating with equipment • 236
power distribution boards • 33, 119, 120,
panel circuits • 152 129, 130, 132, 137, 247, 494, 502, 514,
creating • 152 1009
panels • 60, 62, 91, 148, 150 associating a single load with a PDB •
adding project panels • 148 247
adding reference panels • 60 associating loads • 1009
creating local panels • 150 common tasks • 119, 137
deleting • 91 creating • 119
junction boxes • 62 customizing border • 514
local panels • 62 deleting • 120
panning • 323 design overview • 129
parallel cables • 52 designing layouts • 130
parallel cables in SLDs • 490 designing physical structure • 129
display / hide • 52 generating single line diagrams • 494
parent items in the Electrical Engineer • 54 in Electrical Engineer • 33
pasting • 1215 opening PDB layout for selected PDB •
items • 1215 132
PDB layout design sheets • 1079, 1080 opening single line diagrams • 502
zooming • 1080 power network structures • 81, 82
PDBs preface • 1079
a single load with a PDB • 247 preferences
associating loads • 1009 deleting loads • 36, 37
associating with loads • 231 deleting main item • 36, 37
calculating load summaries • 311 log files • 33
calculating load summaries overview • overview • 33
253 PDB item tags • 33
calculating loads for all buses • 311 SLD generation • 34
common tasks • 119, 137 printing • 1214
creating • 119 product news • 1237
customizing border • 514 profiles
deleting • 120 applying • 1004
design overview • 129 creating • 64
designing layouts • 130 editing • 64
designing physical structure • 129 overview • 211
displaying in Electrical Engineer • 33 proirities • 1194
enhanced load summary report • 312 description • 1194
generating single line diagrams • 494 Reject action • 1194
opening PDB layout for selected PDB • Warn action • 1194
132 project cable properties • 935, 940, 944,
opening single line diagrams • 502 945, 952, 954
phase association • 247 connections • 944
associating single load with a PDB • 247 design data • 940
plant groups • 31, 856, 919, 920 earth loop impedance • 952
changing names • 31 general • 935
hierarchy • 920 procurement • 954
mapping • 856 sizing data • 945

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1259

 Index

project cables • 154, 157, 160, 161, 165, protection relays • 126, 127, 128, 138, 139
168, 184, 930, 934, 972, 976 copying • 128
adding • 154 creating • 126
applying reference data • 930 functions • 127
associating glands • 160 publish • 676
batch sizing • 184, 934 publish data • 795
comparing reference data • 972
deleting • 157 Q
dissociating cable sides and glands • 161
replacing • 165, 976 quitting SmartPlant Electrical • 1214
replacing cable side associations • 168
project control stations • 149, 150, 1103 R
project items • 90, 91 rated power • 247, 250
deleting • 91 reclaiming items • 728
duplicating • 90 redlining • 624, 627, 628, 629
project management deleting • 629
claiming items overview • 726 editing • 628
merging into As-Built overview • 731 inserting graphics • 628
overview • 716 inserting text • 627
project panels • 148 overview • 624
projects • 717, 718, 719, 721, 726, 727, reference cable properties • 1129
728, 729, 730, 732, 733, 734, 738, 739, reference cables • 152, 157, 980, 1129,
1112, 1113 1132, 1134
projects. scoping • 717 connection properties • 1134
projects. selecting in As-Built • 721 deleting • 157
claim modes • 727 design data properties • 1132
claiming items • 726 general properties • 1129
comparing documents with As-Built • 732 procurement properties • 1134
filtering the display • 738 selecting for cable drum • 980
generating a report • 739 reference control stations • 1134
marking items as completed • 728, 729 reference data • 29
merging items into As-Built • 734 Reference Data Explorer • 42, 50
modifying a status • 719 copying • 29
Project Status dialog box • 1112, 1113 customizing sort sequence within folders
releasing claim • 728 • 42
releasing items from merge • 730 overview • 50
rules for changing statuses • 718 Reference Electrical Engineer • 80, 81, 82
running a test merge • 733 copying power network structures • 81
setting display options • 739 drag-and-drop rules • 82
understanding statuses • 717 overview • 80
propagation • 708, 709 reference items
in KKS mode • 708, 709 adding • 56
properties • 48, 49, 917, 1214, 1223, 1226 battery banks • 114
Properties window • 49, 50 blocks • 70
brief • 48, 49 cables • 152, 153
bulk • 48 circuit components • 63
display • 48, 49 circuits • 62
displaying • 45 control stations • 61
drawings • 1214 copying • 86
null data • 50 creating project items • 211
table • 49 deleting • 91
table views • 1223 duplicating • 90
tables • 1236

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1260

 Index

generators • 112 actions • 1195

panels • 60, 62 consistency criteria • 1195
schematics • 71, 72 logical expressions • 1195
refreshing drawings • 1223 rule types • 1194
regional standards • 77 bi-directional rules • 1194
enabling addional standards • 77 relation rules • 1194
relation rules • 1195 single component rules • 1194
consistency criteria • 1195 rules • 198, 706, 880, 882, 1193, 1194,
logical expressions • 1195 1195
relays • 126, 127 cable drum • 198
functions • 127 consistency criteria • 1195
protection • 126 examples • 882
renaming items • 90, 714 general properties • 1194
in KKS mode • 714 KKS configuration • 706
replacing cables • 165, 976 proirities • 1194
report templates • 686 properties • 1193
common tasks • 686 troubleshooting inconsistencies • 880
defining items • 690
reports • 312, 676, 679, 686, 690, 1094 S
adding report macros • 690
All Feeder Load Summary (Enhanced) • saving • 1213
312 drawings • 1213, 1214
associating registered reports • 686 EDE • 1213
enhanced load summary report • 312 settings • 1224
registering • 676, 1094 templates • 1213
revisions in registered reports • 679 settings • 1224
resistors • 90, 91 schematic blocks • 70
deleting • 91 schematics • 71, 72, 73, 318, 321, 323, 464,
duplicating • 90 465, 466, 467, 470, 477, 479, 482, 483,
retrieve data • 857 484, 485, 486, 487, 624, 625, 626, 627,
revisions 628, 629, 631, 632, 634, 1135, 1149
global revisions • 632 adding revisions • 631
in documents claimed for projects • 732 annotations • 477, 482, 625, 626, 627
in miscellaneous drawings • 637 annotations and redlining • 624
in registered reports • 679 batch generation • 482
in single documents • 631 comparing documents • 632, 634
ribbons • 1216 complete symbol file in Catalog Manager
move • 1216 • 485
rotating items • 1216 entering revisions • 466
routing • 199, 204, 207, 517, 518, 940, 961 generating • 477, 483
routing cables • 199, 201 global revisions • 632
assigning cables • 940 in AutoCAD • 487
clearing • 204 in Catalog Manager • 485
create cableway and segments • 199 in MicroStation • 487
edit cableway • 207 in SmartSketch • 486
overview • 199 including Enhanced SmartLoop reports •
segment validations • 517, 518, 961 483
rule components • 1194 macros • 467
description • 1194 macros in multi-sheet schematics • 318
filters • 1194 manipulating • 321
item types • 1194 modifying • 466
order of components • 1194 multi-item • 479, 1149
rule properties • 1195 multiple sheets • 1135

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1261

 Index

multi-sheet • 73 global revisions • 632

opening • 484 inserting legend • 525
overview • 464 manipulating • 321
printing • 466 manual generation • 497
redlining • 627, 628, 629 modifying • 490
renaming • 466 object alignment overview • 455
saving annotations • 484 opening • 501
saving as an external file • 466 opening for a PDB • 502
saving as external document • 484 opening for Electrical Engineer items •
sequencing items • 470 501
typical • 71, 72 opening from Documents folder • 503
viewing • 323 options • 490
workflow • 465 overall SLDs • 1165
zooming • 323 overview • 488
scoping • 717, 722, 724 parallel cables • 490
items • 724 printing • 490
projects • 717 redlining • 627, 628, 629
rules for scoping items • 722 removing an item • 516
segments • 199 renaming • 490
creating • 199 reposition overlapping connectors • 991
segregation levels • 940 saving as an external file • 490, 504
sorting SmartText label attributes • 519
customizing sort sequence within folders symbol creation guidelines • 519
• 42 template • 497
select lists • 928, 1031 viewing • 323
selecting • 42 zooming • 323
tags • 42 sizing cables • 75, 184, 934, 945, 971
setting preferences • 33 batch mode • 184, 934
short circuit • 75 manual sizing • 971
lookup table data • 75 short circuit lookup table data • 75
shortcut menus sizing data • 945
brief properties • 49 SLDs
null data • 49 adding revisions • 631
single component rules • 1195 Align command • 458
consistency criteria • 1195 aligning drawing objects • 457
logical expressions • 1195 annotations • 625, 626, 627
single line diagrams annotations and redlining • 624
adding revisions • 631 based on bus rated voltage • 1165
Align command • 458 bus ties with internals • 498
aligning drawing objects • 457 comparing documents • 632, 634
annotations • 625, 626, 627 electrical analysis SLDs • 1165
annotations and redlining • 624 entering revisions • 490
based on bus rated voltage • 1165 finding items • 514
bus ties with internals • 498 generating • 498
comparing documents • 632, 634 generating from Electrical Engineer • 493
control station • 110, 504 generating from Electrical Index • 494
electrical analysis SLDs • 1165 generation preferences • 34
entering revisions • 490 global revisions • 632
finding items • 514 inserting legend • 525
generating • 498 manual generation • 497
generating from Electrical Engineer • 493 modifying • 490
generating from Electrical Index • 494 object alignment overview • 455
generation preferences • 34 opening • 501

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1262

 Index

opening for a PDB • 502 summaries • 1214

opening for Electrical Engineer items • support • 1237
501 symbol files • 485, 486, 523
opening from Documents folder • 503 complete symbol file for schematic blocks
options • 490 in Catalog Manager • 485
overall SLDs • 1165 in SmartSketch • 486
overview • 488 placing connection points • 523
parallel cables • 490 schematic blocks in Catalog Manager •
printing • 490 485
redlining • 627, 628, 629 symbols • 519, 638
removing an item • 516 inserting in miscellaneous drawings • 638
renaming • 490 SLD symbols in Catalog Manager • 519
reposition overlapping connectors • 991
saving as an external file • 490, 504 T
SmartText label attributes • 519
symbol creation guidelines • 519 table views • 1223
template • 497 tables • 1236, 1237
smart labels items • 1236
aligning • 463 project management • 1237
SmartPlant Electrical properties • 49, 1236
interface to SmartPlant Instrumentation • tag selection • 42
854 tapping • 118
SmartPlant Instrumentation interface • 795, templates • 313, 637, 686, 1213
854, 855, 856, 857 drawings • 313, 1213
mapping plant groups • 856 inserting external graphics • 637
overview • 854 reports • 686
prerequisites • 855 saving • 1213
publish • 795 terminal strip configuration • 546, 547
retrieve • 857 applying reference configuration • 546
SmartText labels • 519 defining configuration • 547
attributes for SLDs • 519 reference configurations • 546
sorting • 42 terminal strips • 545, 546, 547
splices • 193 applying reference terminal strip
automatic definition • 193 configuration • 546
starters • 63, 138, 139 creating in Electrical Index • 545
static loads • 1068, 1070, 1072, 1073, 1074, defining terminal strip configuration • 547
1076 reference terminal strip configuration •
controls and signals • 1073 546
electrical data • 1072 terminals • 545, 1201
feeder data • 1074, 1076 common properties • 1201
instrument data • 1074 creating in Electrical Index • 545
load data • 1070 general definitions • 1201
statistics • 1214 procurement • 1201
statuses • 717 title block macros • 318
statuses of items • 718, 727, 728, 729 to do list • 1109
claim modes • 727 toolbar • 1109
Clear Mark as Completed • 729 toolbars • 1226
Mark as Completed • 728 Properties window • 48
modifying a status • 719 tools • 1234
rules for changing statuses • 718 transfer switches • 136, 137
statuses of projects • 719, 1112, 1113 creating • 136
Project Status dialog box • 1112, 1113 generating SLD • 137
understanding • 717 overview • 136

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1263

 Index

transformers • 90, 91, 117 connecting cable sets • 555

defining connections • 117 connecting cables (continuous method) •
defining tapping • 118 552
deleting • 91 connecting cables (custom method) • 550
duplicating • 90 connecting single conductors • 556
troubleshooting rule inconsistencies • 880 continuous cable connection method •
typical circuits • 62, 1005, 1029, 1041, 552
1064, 1074, 1136 continuous connection method • 552
adding to equipment • 1029 custom connection method • 550
adding to loads • 1064, 1074 customizing jumper symbols • 558
adding to motors • 1041 defining connection types • 549
applying to items • 1005 disconnecting cable sets • 557
creating • 62 disconnecting cables • 557
typical control stations • 61 disconnecting conductors • 557
creating • 61 finding items in the EI or EE • 322
typical I/O sets • 1008 grouping related items • 43
applying to items • 1008 jumpering terminals • 557
typical schematics • 71, 216, 1007 notes on working with drawings • 558
applying to items • 1007 opening • 558
assigning loads • 216 opening wiring diagrams • 558
creating • 71 overview • 544
reference terminal strip configurations •
U 546
removing items • 540
uncompensated electrical data • 253 terminal strips in Electrical Index • 545
UPSs • 90, 91 terminals in Electrical Index • 545
deleting • 91 wiring project items common tasks • 548
duplicating • 90 World Wide Web • 917, 1237

V Z
validations • 891 zooming • 323, 1080
custom • 891 PDB layout design sheets • 1080
variable frequency drives • 90, 91
deleting • 91
duplicating • 90
properties • 45, 48, 49
tables • 1236
views • 48, 1223, 1226, 1236
drawings • 1224
refreshing • 1223
settings • 1224
tables • 1224

W
Web • 1237
address • 917
forum • 1237
wiring drawings • 322, 540, 550, 552, 555,
556, 557, 558
applying reference terminal strip
configurations • 546
batch cable connection • 554

Intergraph Smart Electrical User's Guide 1264